Light + Co - Illuminate & Radiance Owners Handover Manual 2016 PDF

ILLUMINATE & RADIANCE
LIGHT+CO.
OWNERS HANDOVER MANUAL OCTOBER 2016
Disclaimer: this Handover Manual and the information contained in it does not form part of any
contract and does not have any legal or binding effect. Whilst every care has been taken in the
preparation of this document, it is for guidance only. The information contained in the Manual is
accurate as at the time of issue and is subject to change without notice. The Land Owner/Seller and
Developer and their directors and officers and agents make no warranty as to the accuracy,
reliability, currency or completeness of the information contained in the document. The copyright in
this Manual remains the property of the Developer and the reproduction, reprinting or use of this
brochure or any part is strictly prohibited.
Disclaimer: This documents does not form part of any Contract and is to be used as a guide only.
Version 1 dated October 2016
CONTENTS
Owners Handover Manual
CONTENTS
CONTENTS............................................................................................................................................. 2
SECTION 1 ............................................................................................................................................. 5
GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................... 6
1.1.
General Project Information .......................................................................................... 6
1.2.
Development Application Number ................................................................................. 6
1.3.
Keys ............................................................................................................................... 7
1.4.
Access ........................................................................................................................... 8
1.5.
Mail .............................................................................................................................. 11
1.6.
Garbage ....................................................................................................................... 11
1.7.
Body Corporate/Structure ............................................................................................ 11
1.8.
Telephone System & Internet Access ......................................................................... 13
1.9.
Television System ....................................................................................................... 13
1.10. Air Conditioning ........................................................................................................... 13
1.11. Touch up kit ................................................................................................................. 13
1.12. Address ....................................................................................................................... 13
1.13. Pre Settlement Inspections ......................................................................................... 14
1.14. Defects ........................................................................................................................ 14
1.15. Resident Managers ..................................................................................................... 17
1.16. Depreciation Schedule ................................................................................................ 17
1.17. Pool, the Green and Multipurpose Room .................................................................... 17
1.18. Basement/Storage Cages ........................................................................................... 17
1.19. Site Plan ...................................................................................................................... 18
1.20. Pets ............................................................................................................................. 18
1.21. External Sun Shades (if applicable) ............................................................................ 18
1.22. Environmental Management Register ......................................................................... 18
SECTION 2 ........................................................................................................................................... 19
PROJECT TEAM .................................................................................................................................. 20
1.1.
Consultant and/or Project Team .................................................................................. 20
1.2.
Sub-Contractor and/or Supplier List ............................................................................ 21
SECTION 3 ........................................................................................................................................... 23
FINISHES SCHEDULE ......................................................................................................................... 24
3.1
Apartment Colour Schemes ........................................................................................ 24
3.2
Schedule of Interior Finishes ....................................................................................... 30
SECTION 4 ........................................................................................................................................... 56
MAINTENANCE .................................................................................................................................... 57
4.1
Services ....................................................................................................................... 57
4.2
Odours ......................................................................................................................... 58
4.3
Mould ........................................................................................................................... 58
4.4
Interior Walls Plaster ................................................................................................ 59
4.5
Joints and Nail Marks to Ceilings and Walls ............................................................... 59
4.6
Sticking Internal Swing Doors ..................................................................................... 59
4.7
Doors ........................................................................................................................... 59
4.8
Windows ...................................................................................................................... 59
4.9
Carpet .......................................................................................................................... 59
4.10
Additional Important Information ................................................................................. 61
4.11
Painted Surfaces ......................................................................................................... 61
4.12
External Paintwork....................................................................................................... 61
4.13
Laminated Plastics/Stone ............................................................................................ 62
4.14
Oven/Cook top............................................................................................................. 62
4.15
Shower Compartment ................................................................................................. 62
4.16
Water Hammer ............................................................................................................ 62

4.17
4.18
4.19
4.20
Heating or Air Conditioning ......................................................................................... 62

Electrical Circuit Breaker Board .................................................................................. 62
Telephone and Television Splitter Boxes .................................................................... 62
Emergencies (Category 1 Defects) ............................................................................. 62
SECTION 5 ........................................................................................................................................... 64
WARRANTIES, GUARANTEES, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS MENU ................... 65
5.1
General ........................................................................................................................ 65
5.2
Carpet .......................................................................................................................... 66
5.3
Tiling ............................................................................................................................ 66
5.4
Timber Flooring ........................................................................................................... 66
5.5
Balustrades/ Handrails ................................................................................................ 66
5.6
Glass Doors and Windows .......................................................................................... 66
5.7
Joinery ......................................................................................................................... 66
5.8
Painting and Coating Systems .................................................................................... 66
5.9
Shower Screens, Mirrors and Robe Doors ................................................................. 66
5.10
Framing, Ceilings & Partitions ..................................................................................... 66
5.11
Stone Bench Tops ....................................................................................................... 66
5.12
Sanitaryware ................................................................................................................ 66
5.13
Glass Splashbacks ...................................................................................................... 66
5.14
Electrical ...................................................................................................................... 66
5.15
Doors & Fire Doors ...................................................................................................... 66
5.16
Door Hardware ............................................................................................................ 66
5.17
Waterproofing .............................................................................................................. 66
5.18
Whitegoods .................................................................................................................. 66
5.19
Internal & External Blinds (If Applicable) ..................................................................... 67
5.20
Air Conditioning ........................................................................................................... 67
5.21
Exhaust Fan ................................................................................................................ 67
5.22
Letterboxes .................................................................................................................. 67
5.23
Storage Cages (If Applicable) ..................................................................................... 67
5.24
Purchaser Variations (If Applicable) ............................................................................ 67
APPENDIX 1 .......................................................................................................................................1165
DEFECTS PROFORMA LIST .............................................................................................................1166
APPENDIX 2 ...................................................................................................................................... 1168
NAPIER & BLAKELEY DEPRECIATION SCHEDULE LETTER ........................................................1169
APPENDIX 3 .......................................................................................................................................1173
SITE LAYOUT PLAN ..........................................................................................................................1174
APPENDIX 4 .......................................................................................................................................1175
NMI SCHEDULE .................................................................................................................................1176
APPENDIX 5 ...................................................................................................................................... 1179
NBN LETTER ..................................................................................................................................... 1180
APPENDIX 6 ...................................................................................................................................... 1204
FIRE ENGINEERING REPORT ......................................................................................................... 1205
APPENDIX 7 .......................................................................................................................................1421
COMMUNITY MANAGEMENT STATEMENT ................................................................................... 1422
APPENDIX 8 ...................................................................................................................................... 1514
ORIGIN NEW CONNECTION APPLICATION FORMS ..................................................................... 1515
CONTENTS

APPENDIX 9 ...................................................................................................................................... 1519
ENERGEX PEAKSMART INFORMATION ........................................................................................ 1520
APPENDIX 10 .................................................................................................................................... 1522
MYPORT WIRELESS INTERNET INFORMATION ........................................................................... 1523
APPENDIX 11 .................................................................................................................................... 1525
BUILDING MANAGEMENT STATEMENT ........................................................................................ 1526
APPENDIX 12 .................................................................................................................................... 1599
ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT REGISTER .............................................................................. 1600
CONTENTS
SECTION 1
GENERAL
CONTENTS
GENERAL
1.1.
(a)
General Project Information
The Light & Co development, of which your apartment forms part, is a Community Title
Scheme which is to be constructed in multiple stages. The registered Community Title Scheme
(CTS) name of the development is Light & Co Apartments City and the CTS number is
49129.
Your apartment has been constructed in Stage 1 of the development which consists of 229
apartments over 2 buildings. The name of the buildings in Stage 1 of the development are
Illuminate and Radiance. These are not registered CTS names. The common facilities
completed in Stage 1 include The Retail Plaza including The Collonade, The Arcade and
The Forecourt, The Pitch Lawn with feature gardens, The Arc Porte Cochere and entry
drop off area and the Multipurpose Residents Lounge. Also delivered with Stage 1 but residing
in future stages are The Reservoir resort pool with a poolside sun deck and pavilion, The
Fountain Room, a feature structure incorporating 2 BBQ areas.
Further stages of the development will form their own Community Titles Scheme. The names
of the buildings in these developments are Sunset and Sunrise. The common facilities to be
completed with future stages of the development include the second stage of The Arc Porte
Cochere and entry drop off area, The Spring leisure pool and a Gymnasium with attached
amenities. See the Site Plan in Appendix 3 for more information.
The body corporate work together and share services and facilities via a building management
statement (BMS) See the BMS in Appendix 11 for more information.
(b)
This handover manual provides you information about your apartment, how to use the
facilities, how to take care and maintain the fixtures and fittings within your apartment and also
contains the warranties, guarantees and operation manuals.
(c)
The content page provided in your handover pack is an index of the full manual contained on
this USB. The full manual has been provided in this format for your convenience and ease of
storage. This USB contains Operation Manuals, Warranties, Guidelines, Community
Management Statement and other pertinent information for your units running and upkeep. To
direct through the manual, please click on the link in the contents page, or use the bookmarks.
1.2.
(a)
Development Application Number
The latest Development Application approved by Council for this development is DA

No: A004361989 dated 12 August 2016, note development approval may be amended
from time to time as required or be subject to further application for future precincts.
Version 1 dated October 2016 CONTENTS

1.3.
Keys
At the time of settlement you will have been handed the following keys for access into the
building and entry to your apartment:(a)
Apartment Entry Door Key

(i)
The apartment Entry Door key will open the main unit entry door to your unit.
(ii)
For units 20002, 20003, 20004 & 20005 only, the apartment Entry Door key will
open main unit entry door, glass balcony sliding doors to living room and gates to
balcony.
(iii) The apartment entry door keys when inserted into your lock for the first time will
make the key used during construction redundant.
(iv) As the apartment entry door keys are part of a registered key system, if duplicate
keys are required to be cut, please contact the on-site manager. Keys are
produced by:ABLE SECURITY GROUP
Name:
Nigel Bennett
Mobile:
0411 100 692
Phone:
Office:
Fax:
1300 308 609

(07) 3177 3047
(07) 3393 9600
Address:
4/41 Paringa Road

Murarrie QLD 4172
(b)
Glazed Door or Window Keys (if applicable)

(i) If your unit contains lockable windows or sliding doors, these will be keyed the same
within the unit but are not on the main entry door key system with the exception of
units listed above in (ii).Please note these locks are only accessible from within the
unit. A balcony door cannot be locked externally excluding 20002, 20003, 20004 &
20005.
(c)
Security Fobs (x1) and Security Remotes (x1)

(i) The security fobs and remotes will allow you access to the common property
controlled by the electronic security system including
(I)
Access to Residents Community Facilities for all Stages (excludes MPR

located in Radiance, which needs to be booked through the resident
manager);
(II)
Relevant ground floor lobby entry (Illuminate or Radiance)
(III)
Basement/car parking entry/exit (via remote press on Beesley Street entry);
(IV)
Level access via lifts; and
(V)
External landscape common space from offsite.
(VI)
Units with 2 x carparks will receive a second security remote in lieu of the
security fob.
(VII) Units with 3 x bedrooms will receive an additional security fob.


(d)
Letterbox Keys (x2)

(i) For Illuminate apartments, your letterbox is located on the adjacent to the Building
Managers office on Montague Road.
(ii) For Radiance apartments, your letterbox is located at the unit entry adjacent to the
porte-cochere The Arc off Beesley Street.
(e)
Access Panel (x1) (if applicable)

(i) If your unit contains an access panel for services, an access panel key is provided.
1.4.
(a)
Access
Pedestrian Access
(i) There are lobby entry doors at each building on Ground Floor for pedestrian access
located in The Arcade between the retail spaces for Illuminate and off The Arc
located on Beesley Street for Radiance. The lobby is accessed via a security fob or
remote (provided in the Handover Pack). The proximity reader is located adjacent to
the doors.
(ii) There are entry gates adjacent the Porte Cochere off Beesley Street for units 20002,
20003, 20004 and 20005 only.
(iii) There is a gate and intercom entry to the landscaped podium from the customer/
visitor carpark adjacent the retail area.
(iv) Fire stair discharge doors are also located on Ground Floor and Level 1. However
access into the building is not permitted through the fire stairs.
(b)
Car Parking
(i)
Visitor Car Parks

(I)
(ii)
There are 57 car parks nominated for visitor car parking, 24 shared
retail/residential visitors located on Ground Floor, 22 allocated to Illuminate
residential visitors and 7 retail only car spaces in Basement. There is a
further 4 visitor spaces located underneath Radiance. The visitor car park
access point is from the Beesley Street driveway. To gain access to the
visitors carpark, visitors should use the door station on the bollard in the
basement driveway entry to dial the resident they are visiting. The resident
will then need to press the door release button to open the roller shutter from
their intercom handset.
Owner Car Parks

(I)
For buyers who purchased a car park in the building, their car park has been
allocated to the apartments by way of exclusive use of common property.
The particular car park allocated to an apartment is identified in the
Community Management Statement (CMS) which is registered with the
Department of Environment and Resource Management. The CMS contains
a schedule of the exclusive use allocations and plans show the location of
the car park allocated to a particular apartment. (A copy of the registered
CMS is contained in Appendix 7).
(II)
We suggest you familiarise yourself with the particular CMS bylaws

concerning visitor and basement car parks. The CMS bylaws explains your
obligations in using the visitor car park and exclusive use car park.
(III)
Car parks allocated to apartments are situated in the basement. Access to

your car park is via Beesley Street.
(c)
(IV)
There is a security roller shutter at the entrance to the basement carpark.

The security gate is operated by a security remote or security fob (provided
in the Handover Pack). You can use the security remote or fob by
swiping with the reader located to the centre of the basement car park
entrance or by pressing the button on the security remote as you approach
the security roller shutter.
(V)
Egress from the building is by induction loop and is activated by approaching

the roller shutter with a vehicle or remote control.
(VI)
The carpark is shared with future stages and access paths may adjust from
time to time. Refer to the BMS is Appendix 11 for access zones.
Access System
(i) Overview
(I)
The access control system is installed throughout the complex within the
basements, the ground floor lobbies, perimeter fencing and car park entry.
(ii) Devices
(I)
The devices installed to operate the access system are security remotes and
fobs, proximity readers, door locking devices, control panels, door stations
and operator workstation (utilised by the Resident Manager to program the
cards, monitor and record entries and exists as well as changing time
scheduling).
(iii) Security Remotes & Fobs

(I)
The security remotes and fobs are small plastic devices that have a unique
identification number programmed into them. They do not contain any
information that can be accessed by anyone to identify you in anyway. If in
the event that a device is lost or stolen you should contact the Resident
Manger immediately so that it can be deactivated from the system and not
used by anyone else. If at a future time the device is found or returned to
you then it can easily be reactivated into the system by the Resident
Manager. Should you require a replacement device, then the Resident
Manager is able to provide to you a replacement device at your cost.
(iv) Proximity Readers

(I)
The reader is a small black device, about the size of a match box, usually
mounted on the wall adjacent to the door to be opened or on a bollard in
basement driveway entry. On these readers there is a small LED light which
is normally red but upon a valid card being presented, the LED light will flash
green to indicate the door has been unlocked or tap card against reader and
hold for 15 seconds.
Alternatively the reader can be black with a blue led light, on presentation of
an acceptable card the led light will flash off unlocking the gate. Cards may be
required to touch the reader to be accepted.
(v) Operation
(I)
The term presenting a card to a reader means to place a fob, within 4cm of
the card reader for one (1) second to enable the system to read the fob. If the
fob is valid the LED light on the Proximity Reader will flash green and the door
controller will de-energise the locking device for 5 seconds.
(II)
For convenience, 1 x security fob is fitted with a remote radio frequency

controller that provides remote access to the basement carpark roller shutter
when pressed.
(III)
For example:Disclaimer: This documents does not form part of any Contract and is to be used as a guide only.
CONTENTS

(a)
(vi)
Intercom System
(I)
(vii)
Each Apartment in Illuminate & Radiance is fitted with an audio intercom.
Operation of the Intercom System

(I)
(viii)
A resident from level one presents their valid security fob to the reader
on the bollard at the entry to the car park, the car park roller door will
open and close again once the vehicle has passed the safety beam at
the door or the roller gate hold open time has timed-out.
When a visitor wants to contact one of the residents, they will need to:(a)
Key in the number for the apartment (or scroll through the list);
(b)
Press the bell button;
(c)
The associated audio unit in the relevant apartment will ring;
(d)
The resident must press the answer button on the audio unit;
(e)
A connection between the audio unit and the master unit has been
completed and conversation can take place.
(f)
If the resident wishes for the caller to gain entry into building the
resident will need to press the entry button on the audio unit and the
door adjacent to the calling station will be released enabling entry.
Numbering System
(I)
Gardens uses a numerical numbering system.

Illuminate Building is as follows:
The numbering within the
Level 1: Lots 10101 - 10118

Level 2: Lots 10201 - 10218
Level 3: Lots 10301 - 10318
Level 4: Lots 10401 - 10418
Level 5: Lots 10501 10518
(II)
The numbering within the Radiance Building is as follows:

Ground Floor: Lots 20001 - 20005
Level 1: Lots 20101 - 20112
Level 2: Lots 20201 - 20214
Level 3: Lots 20301 - 20314
Level 4: Lots 20401 - 20414
Level 5: Lots 20501 - 20514
Level 6: Lots 20601 - 20611
Level 7: Lots 20701 - 20711
Level 8: Lots 20801 - 20811
Level 9: Lots 20901 - 20911
Level 10: Lots 21001 - 21011
Level 11: Lots 21101 1111
CONTENTS

1.5.
Mail
(a)
Mail for Illuminate residents will be delivered to your letter box which is located on the ground
floor, adjacent to the Building Managers Office on Montague Road. Mail for Radiance residents
will be delivered to your letter box which is located on the ground floor, adjacent the porte
cochere The Arc area on Beesley Street.
(b)
The mailing address for the Gardens apartments will be:-
(c)
Illuminate
Unit No . / 321 Montague Road, West End QLD 4101
Radiance
Unit No . / 11 Beesley Street, West End QLD 4101
It is your responsibility to clear the mail from your own mail box. The Resident Manager and
the Body Corporate will not carry out this function.
1.6.
Garbage
(a)
General rubbish is to be deposited in the bulk waste bins via the rubbish chute located in the
corridor of each floor level of this apartment building. The disposal and retrieval of the bin for
collection will be managed by the Resident Manager.
(b)
Bottles and other recyclables will need to be taken to the central refuse room or separate
storage bins for the building located in Basement 1 adjacent to Lifts for Illuminate and
Radiance located in Basement 1 next to the lifts.
(c)
The rubbish removal policy is subject to approval and adjustment from time to time by
Brisbane City Council and/or the Body Corporate.
1.7.
Body Corporate/Structure
(a)
The building is subject to rules and regulations that are put in place and enforced by the Body
Corporate. The rules and regulations, otherwise known as By-Laws are incorporated in the
Community Management Statement which is registered with the Queensland Land Registry. A
copy of the registered Community Management Statement containing the By-Laws is
contained in Appendix 7.
(b)
Please familiarise yourself with these rules as they are put in place to ensure that all residents
enjoy the quality of lifestyle that the scheme offers in accordance with a Community Title
environment.
(c)
The Body Corporate by-laws were contained within the Contract documents signed by you.
Any amendments to the Community Management Statement have also been notified to your
Solicitor. Changes may be made to the Community Management Statement however any
requested change must be approved by the Body Corporate.
(d)
Copies of the registered Community Management Statements are also held with the Body
Corporate Manager.
(e)
The Body Corporate Managers are: Ernst Body Corporate Management

71 Davenport Street, Southport QLD 4215
120 Brunswick Street, Fortitude Valley QLD 4006
Telephone: 07 3620 0600
Facsimile: 07 3620 0610
Email address: brisbane@ebcm.com.au

If at any time you wish to write to the Body Corporate Managers, please address your
correspondence in the following manner:Body Corporate for Light & Co Apartments City CTS 49129
C/- Ernst Body Corporate Management
PO Box 786
FORTITUDE VALLEY QLD 4006
(f)
Body Corporate Structure

(i) Your Apartments is contained in a community titles scheme comprising a body
corporate by the name of Light & Co Apartments City CTS 49129. This body
corporate includes the buildings known as Illuminate and Radiance and common
property. The adjoining community titles scheme also comprises a body corporate by
the name of Light & Co Apartments River. This body corporate will include the
buildings known as Sunset and Sunrise and common property. The 2 bodies
corporate share certain common property such as infrastructure, basement car parks
and facilities for use by owners and occupiers. The sharing of those areas and
distribution of costs between the 2 Bodies Corporate is regulated by a Building
Management Statement which is a registered document.
*The Building Management Statement (BMS) provides for areas that the 2 Bodies
Corporate and Retail Lots share. These areas are referred to in the BMS as shared
areas and are contained in the registered BMS (Part B), a copy of which is contained
in Appendix 11. The table in Part B of the BMS sets out which of the bodies corporate
and retail lots share the facilities and the apportionment of costs. The shared facilities
comprise such things as; visitor parking, loading zone, pedestrian access ways &
lifts, signage, rubbish zones, vehicle access and porte cochere, pool area and
surroundings, multipurpose room & gym, landscape areas, fire services, hydraulic,
electrical and mechanical services.
(ii)
As an owner of an apartment in either the Illuminate or Radiance buildings you are a

member of the Body Corporate for Light & Co Apartments City CTS 49129.
(iii)
Please note that if the apartment has been purchased for investment purposes a
copy of the Bylaws must be provided to the tenant at the commencement of the
tenancy. Your letting agent should attend to this for you.

1.8.
Telephone System & Internet Access
(a)
The apartment has been wired ready for use of telephone handsets and internet access under
the NBN provision of services.
(b)
The connection of a telephone system or internet access relies on connection to a telephone

or internet service provider. This is a pay service. In order for you to receive this service you
will need to pay for it. It is not part of any monthly fees or outgoing etc.
(c)
Please note some carriers may take some time to make connections available so it is
recommended that telephone services be connected as soon as possible.
(d)
Routers will need to either be provided by the occupant or arranged through the internet
services provider.
(e)
Myport high speed internet is also available to all apartments in the complex, further details of
costs & services are available from your resident manager or call 1300 733 629.
1.9.
Television System
(a)
Each apartment in Illuminate & Radiance has been wired for high definition digital television
reception. The system has been pre-tuned to receive all commercial (free to air) television
stations however you will need to tune your television to receive these stations. Please consult
your television manual regarding the tuning in of your television.
(b)
Your Apartment has also been pre-wired to receive Foxtel pay television. In order to use this
service you will need to contact Foxtel to make arrangements for service connection. This is a
pay television service and in order to receive this service you will need to pay for it. This
service is not included in any Body Corporate fees or levies.
(c)
Foxtel Connection Services phone number is 131 999.

1.10.
Air Conditioning
(a)
Each Apartment has split day/night air conditioning installed. This system can be operated by
the remote control provided with the handover kit of which this manual forms part of.
(b)
For operating and maintenance instructions, please refer to your manual (Section 5.20 of the
accompanying USB).
1.11.
Touch up kit
(a)
Touch up paint has been left with the Resident Manager (Refer to clause 1.15 for details of the
Resident Manager).
(b)
Please refer to the Schedule of Finishes (Section 3) in the handover manual to determine what
colours are located in the area that requires touch-up and ask the Resident Manager to
provide the appropriate colours.
1.12.
(a)
Address
The physical registered address of Illuminate will be:

(I) 321 Montague Road, West End QLD 4101
(b)
The physical registered address of Radiance will be:

(I) 11 Beesley Street, West End QLD 4101

(c)
The mailing address for the Illuminate & Radiance apartments will be:Unit No . / 321 Montague Road, West End QLD 4101
Unit No . / 11 Beesley Street, West End QLD 4101
An example of an address for an apartment within your building is as follows:Apartment No
Building Name
Address
10001
Illuminate
10001/ 321 Montague Road

WEST END QLD 4101
20001
Radiance
20001/11 Beesley Street

WEST END QLD 4101
1.13.
Pre Settlement Inspections
(a)
In accordance with your sales contract, a pre settlement inspection should have been
undertaken by the apartment owner or a representative prior to settlement.
(b)
The purpose of the pre settlement inspection was to give the owner the opportunity to identify
any scratches, dents or marks within the apartment and to also identify any damaged or
missing finishes or specifications. The inspection also gives the owner the opportunity to
identify their car park and storage cage (if applicable) and verify any variations which may be
applicable.
(c)
At the pre settlement inspection, the owner would have also completed a Pre Settlement
Inspection Report identifying in writing such scratches, dents or marks or any missing finishes
or specifications located in the apartment. This is to avoid any disagreement as to when such
scratch, dent or mark was made.
(d)
At the pre settlement inspection, the owner was given the opportunity to undertake their final
defects inspection. If the owner chose to undertake this inspection they would have completed
a defects list as well as the Pre Settlement Inspection Report. If this was the case, the Defects
Manager will be in contact with the owner shortly to attend to those defects identified in both
the pre settlement inspection report and the Defects List as soon as possible. The Pre
Settlement Inspection Report is not a Defects List and if at the time of the Pre Settlement
Inspection the owner did not complete a Defects List, then the Developer will be contacting the
owner shortly to chase up the Defects List.
1.14.
(a)
Defects
Defects to the apartment will be attended to in accordance with the sales contract and is
outlined as follows:(i) You are entitled to deliver to the seller ONE list, in writing of any faults or defects
within the Lot due to faulty material or workmanship not being of the standard
commensurate with the Plans and Specifications. The defect list is not to include any
marks or scratches as those marks or scratches should have been identified at the
time you undertook your pre-settlement inspection.
(ii)
It is recommended that your defects list is forwarded as soon as possible. The builder
will be completing final common property works, therefore workman and subcontractors will still be on site. If your defect list is received whilst the workman and

sub-contractors are still on site, it is much easier and faster to have defects attended
to.
(iii)
Please refer to your Sales Contract for confirmation of the defects liability period.
(iv)
The defects list is to be submitted to: Attention:
Email:
Sales Contracts Administrator

PRADELLA DEVELOPMENTS PTY LTD
PO Box 3301
SOUTH BRISBANE QLD 4101
salesadmin@pradella.com.au
(v)
If you fail to provide a defects list prior to the expiry date of the defects liability period,
it is deemed that you are satisfied that there are no defects and you will have no claim
against the seller for any fault or defect of the Lot.
(vi)
For your assistance we have included a standard defects form (refer Appendix 1).
(vii)
Defects will be attended to as soon as practically possible. Please note that for
efficiencies defect rectifications are broken into trades and floors. However if any
defects are identified as Category 1 Defects, please notify the Emergency Team
(identified in sub-clause (ix) below) immediately.
(viii)
For your information the Queensland Building and Construction Commission

categorises defects as follows:(I) Category 1 Defects
(a) A defect, which may:
Allow water penetration into a building;
Adversely affect the health and or safety of the occupants;
Adversely affect the structural adequacy of the building;
Adversely affect the serviceability, performance or functional use of

the building or works.
(b) Examples of a Category 1 defect are:

Leaks in roof, showers, doors, windows or walls;
Faulty or inadequate flashing;
Footing movement subsidence or settlement;
Faulty or inadequate damp proof course;
Fretting or spalling masonry;
Inadequate strength mortar;
Extensive cracking or distortion of wall or ceiling lining beyond normal
frame settlement, shrinkage or thermal movement;
Extensive cracking or dislodgement of floor or wall tiles;

Defective, incomplete or inadequate termite protection methods;
Inadequate provision for discharge of roof water;
Incorrect or inadequate site drainage;
Paint large areas delaminating adhesive failure;
Use of materials not fit for the purpose.
(II) Category 2 Defect

(a)
A defect, which is not a defect of another category and which:

Results from failure of the contractor to meet reasonable standards of
construction and finish;
Is of a kind, which commonly occurs during the settling in period of a
new building.
(b)
Examples of Category 2 defects are:

Sticking doors or windows;
Cracked plasterboard joints, cornice joints;
Poor finishing detail.
(III)
We note that the Queensland Building Services Authority does not constitute
the following as being defects: (a) Is not readily noticeable to the eye;
(b) Requires minimal repair;
(c) Would require significant repair cost for minimal gain;
(d) The repair would unreasonably create additional defects;
(e) Does not relate to building work as defined;
(f) Is not caused by the contractor.
(ix)
Emergencies (Category 1 Defects)

(I) In case of emergencies (Category 1 defects) please contact the following:(a)
During Defect Period

Pradstruct Pty Ltd, Project Manager, Kristian Jensen
0423 920 176
Pradstruct Pty Ltd, Construction Manager, Jim Russ
0417 734 241
Resident Managers, Dave & Diane McAdam
0421 085 977
Applicable Sub Contractor, See Schedule 2 Project Team

Use whatever means necessary to mitigate loss i.e. Yellow Pages
etc.
(b)
Post Defect Period

Resident Managers, Dave & Diane McAdam
0421 085 977
Use whatever means necessary to mitigate loss i.e. Yellow Pages

etc.

1.15.
(a)
Resident Managers
Resident Managers have been appointed and their office is located on the ground floor at in
the retail area on Ground Floor of the Illuminate building off Montage Road. Their details are
as follows:Names:
Company:
Address:
Mobile Number:
Email address:
(b)
If you are an investor and require the Resident Manager to locate a tenant for your property on
your behalf, please do not hesitate to contact them at your convenience.
1.16.
(a)
Dave & Diane McAdam

Rent Central Light & Co
321 Montague Road, West End Qld 4101
0421 085 977
david.mcadam@rentcentralbrisbane.com.au
light.recept@rentcentralbrisbane.com.au
Depreciation Schedule
Should you require a Depreciation Schedule for your apartment, we recommend that you
contact a suitably qualified quantity surveyor. Napier & Blakeley have offered a fixed fee
service for the preparation of depreciation schedules for any Light + Co owner. You will find a
letter of introduction from Napier and Blakeley contained within Appendix 2 of this Handover
Manual.
1.17.
Pool, the Green and Multipurpose Room
(a)
The Reservoir resort pool, outdoor recreation areas The Pitch Lawn and The Fountain
Room, The Arc Porte Cochere and the Multipurpose Room located in Radiance have been
completed with Stage 1 of the development. Future Stages will complete delivery of The Arc
entry drop off, The Spring leisure pool and a Gymnasium.
(b)
The pools, gardens, gym and multiple purpose room will be maintained by the Resident
Manager.
(c)
The pool and adjacent community facilities are subject to rules and regulations as published by
the Body Corporate and as referred to in the registered Community Management Statement.
As such we refer you to the relevant signed rules on hours of operation and unacceptable
conduct.
1.18.
Basement/Storage Cages
(IMPORTANT PLEASE ENSURE THAT THIS ITEM IS COMPLIED WITH)

(a)
For buyers who purchased a storage cage with their apartment, the storage cage (as with the
car park) is allocated to the apartment by way of exclusive use of common property. The
particular storage cage allocated to an apartment is identified in the CMS. The exclusive use
allocations and plans which show the storage cage number and location are contained in the
CMS. (A photocopy of the registered CMS is contained in Appendix 7). The CMS bylaws
explain your obligations in relation to the use of a storage cage.
(b)
In accordance with the Building Code and Fire Rescue Service requirements, all items and/or
belongings stored in the storage cages must be stored at least 500mm below the fire sprinklers
and/or ceiling of the storage cage.
(c)
Because the basement is located below ground level and therefore may be susceptible to
dampness or water penetration it is recommended that any items or belongings stored in the

storage area located in the basement be raised from the floor and kept off the perimeter wall
so as to minimise the risk of damage to such items or belongings.
(d)
Owners and residents note that goods and items in basement level area storages are stored at
their own risk, on the understanding that they may not be fully protected from rising water
damage due to the site being located in a river flood event area.
1.19.
(a)
(a)
In order for you to familiarise yourself with the facilities, and layout of the Scheme we have
attached a Plan of the Site in Appendix 3 Site Plan. If you have any questions regarding the
Site Plan please refer those questions to the Resident Manager.
1.20.
Pets
An owner or an occupier may keep a pet in the apartment, but all pets must be approved by
the Body Corporate prior to the pet being allowed in the Scheme. All Body Corporate
approvals however are subject to conditions. For more information in this regard please
contact the Resident Manager.
1.21.
(a)
External Sun Shades (if applicable)
External mounted remote controlled sunshade blinds have been installed in the some units.
The installation of sunshade blinds is as per the contract of sale. Note: not all units have
sunshade blinds. The remotes and warranties are contained within the handover manual pack,
should your unit have sunshades installed in accordance with the contract of sale.
1.22.
(a)
Site Plan
Environmental Management Register
A copy of the Environmental Management Register and Site Management Plan is attached in
Appendix 12 for your information.
SECTION 2
PROJECT TEAM
PROJECT TEAM
2.1 Consultant and/or Project Team
(a)
The company and contact details of the Consultant and/or Project team are as follows:-
Consultant
Company
Contact
Phone Number
Developer
PD Light & Co Pty Ltd
Boyd Andrews
(07) 3115 0300
Architect/Interior
Designer
Rothelowman
Jeff Brown
(07) 3339 1330
Builder
Pradstruct Pty Ltd
Jim Russ
(07) 3115 0300
Structural/Civil Engineer
ADG
James Ware
(07) 3300 8828
Fire Engineer
Exova Warrington Fire
Peter Downer
(07) 3238 1700
Hydraulics Engineer
Thompson Kane
Mark Kane
(07) 3815 8010
Services Engineers (Fire

Services)
Medland
Malcolm Rae
(07) 3391 9800
Services Engineers
(Mechanical)
Medland
Malcolm Rae
(07) 3391 9800
Services Engineers
(Electrical)
Medland Engineering
Malcolm Rae
(07) 3391 9800
Building Certifier
Philip Chun & Associates
Michael Moran
(07) 3839 3499
Acoustics/Environmental
Max Winder & Associates
Paul King
(07) 3002 5500
Landscape
Lat 27
Damian Thompson
(07) 3236 1086
Town Planner
RPS Group
Julian Kemp
(07) 3237 8899
Lift Engineer
Lehr Consultants
Greg Smith
(07) 3831 3300
Energy Consultant
Abba Properties
Raymond Grant
(07) 3378 5201
Surveyor
RPS Group
Andrew Cridland
(07) 3237 8899
Body Corporate
Managers
Ernst Body Corporate

Management
Michael Lovell
(07) 3620 0600
Traffic Engineer
MRCagney
Gerard Reardon
(07) 3320 3600

2.2 Sub-Contractor and/or Supplier List
(b)
The company and contact details of the Sub-contractor and/or Supplier List team are as
follows:-
Item / Trade
Supplier
Contact
Phone Number
Aluminium Windows and Doors
G.James Glass & Aluminium
Jamie Warner
(07) 3877 2844
Balustrades & Handrails
Regency Balustrades
Mike Knepscheld
(07) 5493 5911
Bathroom Hardware Install
The Scooter Group
Nick Kelly
(07) 3266 4965
Bathroom Hardware Supply
Harvey Norman Commercial
David Kelly
(07) 3297 3799
Blockwork/Brickwork
Priest & Co
Keith Turkington
(07) 3841 4744
Concrete Place
Placecorp (Aust) Pty Ltd
Tom Voyce
(07) 3638 4200
Door Hardware
Able Locksmiths
Nigel Bennett
(07) 5493 1578
Electrical
Blue Star Pacific
Corey Oliver
(07) 3200 3100
Fire Doors & Frames
Australian Architectural Fire Doors
Stuart Howie
(07) 3888 5911
Fire Services Detection & Alarms
Microfire
Phil Westbury
(07) 3219 0210
Fire Services - Sprinklers
Profire
Patrick Dunstan
(07) 3722 4600
Flooring
Modern Commercial Floor

Coverings
Tony May
(07) 3245 7455
Garage Doors
Mirage Doors
Nev Gtiffiths
(07) 3713 3000
Garbage Chutes
Tacoma
David Powell
(07) 5479 1900
Hydraulics
Tacoma Plumbing
David Powell
(07) 5479 1900
Joinery
Octeros
Gavin McIvor
(07) 5493 3600
Landscaping
TLCC
Andrew Bottomley
(07) 3356 3412
Lift
Otis
Sabrina Bachmann
(07) 3722 4600
Louvres & Grilles
Regency Fabrication
Mike Knepscheld
(07) 5493 5911
Mailboxes
Mailsafe Mailboxes T/A Help

Industries
Jamie Buchanan
(07) 3268 5922
Mechanical
Venmist
Nick Harrington
(07) 3205 5733
Noel Allag
(07) 3341 3403
Painting
Leisuretex
Commercial Painting Pty Ltd
Partitions & Ceilings
The Scooter Group
Nick Kelly
(07) 3266 4965
Pools
Surfside Pools
Bryan Moore
(07) 5522 1337
Precast Concrete
Brisbane Precast Pty Ltd
Percy Dacruz
(07) 3204 7181
Noel Allag
(07) 3341 3403
Render
Leisuretex
Commercial Painting Pty Ltd
Roofing
Roode Roofing
Paul Tamplin
(07) 3315 4260
Roof Safety System
Rissafety Pty Ltd
Daniel Light
(07) 3216 6413
Showerscreens, Robe Doors &

Mirrors
Stegbar
Laurie Nipperess
(07) 5537 0888
Stone & Marble
GMG Stone
Mick Hogan
(07) 5503 1288
Storage Cages
Blake Engineering
Peter Blake
0418 150656
Structural Steel
Gay Construction
Jason Smith
(07) 3890 9655
Tiling Install
Tilecorp
Glen Kretschmer
(07) 3279 9009
Tile Supply
Parrella Tiles
John Parrella
(07) 0265 7377
Waterproofing
Gabba Waterproofing
Matthew Rollason
0438 303 257
Whitegoods Supply
Damien Cassidy
(07) 3297 3799
SECTION 3
FINISHES SCHEDULE
FINISHES SCHEDULE
3.1 Apartment Colour Schemes
Whilst every endeavour was made to ensure the reliability of this list, occupants should rely on their
own investigations to confirm colour schemes. This schedule does not take into account any
variations undertaken on behalf of the purchaser.
ILLUMINATE
Apartment Number
Colour Scheme
10101
Daylight
10102
Daylight
10103
Dawn
10104
Daylight
10105
Dawn
10106
Dawn
10107
Daylight
10108
Dawn
10109
Daylight
10110
Daylight
10111
Dawn
10112
Dawn
10113
Daylight
10114
Dawn
10115
Daylight
10116
Dawn
10117
Dawn
10118
Daylight
10201
Daylight
10202
Daylight
10203
Daylight
10204
Dawn
10205
Daylight
10206
Daylight
10207
Dawn
10208
Dawn
10209
Midnight
10210
Daylight
10211
Daylight
10212
Dawn
10213
Daylight
10214
Daylight
10215
Daylight
10216
Midnight
10217
Dawn
10218
Daylight
10301
Daylight
10302
Dawn
10303
Dawn
10304
Daylight
10305
Dawn
10306
Daylight
10307
Dawn
10308
Daylight
10309
Daylight
10310
Dawn
10311
Daylight
10312
Midnight
10313
Dawn
10314
Dawn
10315
Dawn
10316
Dawn
10317
Daylight
10318
Dawn
10401
Dawn
10402
Dawn
10403
Daylight
10404
Dawn
10405
Midnight
10406
Dawn
10407
Daylight
10408
Daylight
10409
Dawn
10410
Dawn
10411
Dawn
10412
Midnight
10413
Midnight
10414
Daylight
10415
Daylight
10416
Daylight
10417
Daylight
10418
Dawn
10501
Dawn
10502
Daylight
10503
Dawn
10504
Daylight
10505
Daylight
10506
Daylight
10507
Dawn
10508
Daylight
10509
Dawn
10510
Midnight
10511
Daylight
10512
Daylight
10513
Dawn
10514
Dawn
10515
Daylight
10516
Daylight
10517
Daylight
10518
Dawn
RADIANCE Apartment
Number
Colour Scheme
20001
Daylight
20002
Midnight
20003
Daylight
20004
Midnight
20005
Daylight
20101
Daylight
20102
Daylight
20103
Daylight
20104
Midnight
20105
Dawn
20106
Daylight
20107
Daylight
20108
Dawn
20109
Daylight
20110
Daylight
20111
Daylight
20112
Daylight
20201
Daylight
20202
Dawn
20203
Dawn
20204
Midnight
20205
Dawn
20206
Daylight
20207
Dawn
20208
Daylight
20209
Dawn
20210
Midnight
20211
Daylight
20212
Daylight
20213
Daylight
20214
Daylight
20301
Dawn
20302
Daylight
20303
Daylight
20304
Daylight
20305
Daylight
20306
Daylight
20307
Daylight
20308
Dawn
20309
Daylight
20310
Daylight
20311
Daylight
20312
Daylight
20313
Daylight
20314
Daylight
20401
Daylight
20402
Daylight
20403
Dawn
20404
Dawn
20405
Daylight
20406
Midnight
20407
Daylight
20408
Daylight
20409
Daylight
20410
Midnight
20411
Dawn
20412
Dawn
20413
Midnight
20414
Daylight
20501
Midnight
20502
Dawn
20503
Daylight
20504
Daylight
20505
Midnight
20506
Midnight
20507
Daylight
20508
Dawn
20509
Daylight
20510
Daylight
20511
Dawn
20512
Dawn
20513
Dawn
20514
Midnight
20601
Daylight
20602
Daylight
20603
Dawn
20604
Daylight
20605
Dawn
20606
Midnight
20607
Dawn
20608
Daylight
20609
Daylight
20610
Daylight
20611
Daylight
20701
Daylight
20702
Dawn
20703
Midnight
20704
Daylight
20705
Dawn
20706
Daylight
20707
Daylight
20708
Daylight
20709
Daylight
20710
Daylight
20711
Dawn
20801
Daylight
20802
Dawn
20803
Dawn
20804
Daylight
20805
Daylight
20806
Dawn
20807
Daylight
20808
Dawn
20809
Midnight
20810
Daylight
20811
Daylight
20901
Daylight
20902
Daylight
20903
Daylight
20904
Daylight
20905
Daylight
20906
Daylight
20907
Daylight
20908
Daylight
20909
Dawn
20910
Dawn
20911
Daylight
21001
Daylight
21002
Midnight
21003
Daylight
21004
Daylight
21005
Dawn
21006
Daylight
21007
Daylight
21008
Dawn
21009
Daylight
21010
Daylight
21011
Daylight
21101
Daylight
21102
Daylight
21103
Dawn
21104
Dawn
21105
Daylight
21106
Dawn
21107
Daylight
21108
Midnight
21109
Dawn
21110
Midnight
21111
Dawn
3.2 Schedule of Interior Finishes

(a)
(b)
(c)
The attached Schedule of Interior Finishes is provided below. This schedule will assist you to identify the finishes of your Apartment.
The schedule has been prepared by our Architect Rothelowman.
This schedule is the base schedule only and does not include any variations, exclusions or additions requested by the buyer.
INTERIOR APARTMENT FINISHES SCHEDULE

Project Name:
LIGHT & CO
Project Address:
321 MONTAGUE ROAD, WEST END, 4101
CODE
DESCRIPTION
LOCATION
SPECIFICATION
SUPPLIER
NOTES/
LEADTIME
IMAGE
REV
APARTMENT INTERIOR
CP00
Carpet
CP01
Carpet Scheme Standard

Daylight
Apartment - Living , dining ,

Bedroom
Manufacturer: Norman Ellison

Range: Toulon 30
Colour: June
Code:409/5230
Style: Cut Pile Twist
Composition : 80% Wool , 20% Nylon, 20%
Polypropylene
Weight: 30oz
Acoustic Underlay: Airstep - Stepezy
Cavalier
Bremworth

CONTENTS
CP01
Carpet Scheme Light

Dawn

Bedroom

Range: Toulon 30
Colour: Stony River
Code27/5230
Polypropylene
Weight: 30oz
Cavalier
Bremworth
CP01
Carpet Scheme Dark

Midnight

Bedroom

Range: Toulon 30
Colour: Maitake
Code:311/5230
Polypropylene
Weight: 30oz
Cavalier
Bremworth
Aluminum Tile-Carpet Trim

Bedroom where carpet finish
adjoins tile finish
Manufacturer: DTA Australia

Range: Transition Cover Trims
Colour: Stainless Steel
Finish: Brushed
Code: TBC
Size: TBC
Bathroom Feature mirror
Manufacturer: Pilkington Glass

Colour: Silver with backing
Finish: Polished Edges
Frame: Black powdercoat finish: Dulux, Matt Black
MR00
MR1
Mirror
Framed Glass Mirror
Stegbar
Frameless arrised mirror with

polished edge - conceal fix flush
with cupboard door

CONTENTS
MR
CODE
LA00
Glass Safety Mirror
DESCRIPTION
Robes
Manufacturer: Stegbar
Colour: Silver Safety Mirror
Finish: Polished Edges
LOCATION
SPECIFICATION
Stegbar
SUPPLIER
Laminate
LA01
General Laminate All

schemes
Joinery - Linen , Services

Cupboard ,
Manufacturer: Laminex
Colour: White
Finish: Natural
Code:200
Edging : Matching ABS edging
Laminex
LA02
General Kitchen Laminate

All Schemes
Joinery Kitchen cupboard

doors/drawers, overhead
cupboard doors to back
bench. Back panel to feature
pantry
Colour: White
Finish: Natural
Code:200
Laminex
LA03

All Schemes
Joinery Kitchen Feature

pantry gables
Manufacturer: Nikpol
Colour: Graphite [Egger]
Code: U961
Finish:Edging : Matching ABS edging
Nikpol
LA04

Scheme Standard Daylight
/ Dark Midnight
Joinery Kitchen Fixed

gables, panels, cupboard
doors/drawers
Code: U961
Nikpol
Unit Type AA, AH, AP, BG,

BG.1, BM, & BM.1
pantry/linen/store adjacent
to kitchen
NOTES/
LEADTIME
IMAGE
REV
Apply matching
ABS edge to all
exposed edges.
Special order
2600 height
panels refer to
drawings
Apply matching
ABS edge to all
exposed edges.
Special order
2600 height
panels refer to
drawings
Apply matching
ABS edge to all
exposed edges.
Special order
2600 height
panels refer to
drawings.
Apply matching
ABS edge to all
exposed edges.
Special order
2600 height
panels refer to
drawings.

CONTENTS
Unit Type BP Ensuite linen

cupboard
LA04

Scheme Light Dawn
LA05

Scheme Standard Daylight
/ Light Dawn
LA05

Scheme Dark Midnight
Joinery Kitchen Fixed

gables, panels, cupboard
doors/drawers
Unit Type AA, AH, AP, BG,
BG.1, BM, & BM.1
pantry/linen/store adjacent
to kitchen
Unit Type BP Ensuite linen
cupboard
Pantry cupboard doors.
Cupboard doors where
upgrade

Pantry cupboard doors.
Cupboard doors where
upgrade
Colour: White
Finish: Natural
Code:200
Laminex
Apply matching
ABS edge to all
exposed edges.
Special order
2600 height
panels refer to
drawings
Colour: White
Finish: Natural
Code:200
Laminex
Apply matching
ABS edge to all
exposed edges.
Special order
2600 height
panels refer to
drawings
Code: U961
Nikpol
Apply matching
ABS edge to all
exposed edges.
Special order
2600 height
panels refer to
drawings.

CONTENTS
LA06
Timber look laminate

'Daylight'
-Kitchen Island bench

door/drawer front, front and
side gables
-Vanity joinery
- Study Benchtop
LA06
Timber look laminate Light

Scheme Dawn

side gables
-Vanity joinery
- Study Benchtop
LA06
Timber look laminate Dark

Scheme Midnight

side gables
-Vanity joinery
- Study Benchtop
General Laminate
Kitchen - Kickboard
LA07
Type: 16mm MDF prefinished melamine
Colour: Arlington Oak
Finish: textured woodgrain finish
Code: H3303
Where horizontal surface- , to be HPL high
pressure laminate with HPL edging, not ABS
Manufacturer: Lamicolor
Colour: Chalet Oak Tabac
Code: R4283RU
Where horizontal surface, to be HPL high pressure
laminate with HPL edging, not ABS
Manufacturer: Lamicolor
Colour: Natural Lancelot Oak
Code: R4263RU
Where horizontal surface, to be HPL high pressure
laminate with HPL edging, not ABS
Manufacturer: Polytec
Colour: Black
Finish: Texture Finish
Code:
Nikpol
Apply matching
ABS edge to all
edges
Lamicolor
Apply matching
ABS edge to all
edges
Lamicolor
Apply matching
ABS edge to all
edges
Polytec

CONTENTS
LA08
LA09
General Laminate
Linen/Services cupboard
kick
Joinery Kickboard Living,

Dining, Corridor
Colour: Black
Code:
Polytec
Laminate Scheme
Standard
Kitchen & bathroom - fascia,

Fillet to ceiling. Entry
Feature - fillet
Colour: Black
Code:
Polytec
Apply matching
ABS edge to all
exposed edges
Kitchen - Cupboard Door,

fascia, Fillet to ceiling
CODE
DESCRIPTION
LOCATION
SPECIFICATION
SUPPLIER
MM00
MM
Melamine Finish internal

carcass
MDF with Melamine Finish
NOTES/
LEADTIME
Joinery Internal Surfaces
Colour: White
Laminex
Apply matching
ABS edge to all
exposed edges
MM-B
MDF with Melamine Finish
Bathroom/Ensuite Vanities Joinery Internal Surfaces &

recessed shadowline under
benchtop
Manufacturer : Laminex
Colour: Black
Laminex
Apply matching
abs edging to all
exposed edges.
Conceal edge of
mirror with ABS
edge strip
IMAGE
REV

CONTENTS
CODE
DESCRIPTION
MT00
Metal Finish
MT01
TE
LOCATION
SPECIFICATION
SUPPLIER
Feature Leg finish
Kitchen Island Bench Leg
Type: Mild Steel

Supplier: Joiner
Colour: Dulux, Monument Matt
Finish: Powdercoat Finish Black Matt
Size : 100 x 10mm
Refer to drawings
Tile Edge
Feature Tile edge to

bathroom
Type: Aluminum angle to edge

Supplier: BAT Trims
Range: L-angle AA type
Size:
Colour: White powdercoat
Refer to drawings
PT00
Paint
PT01
Paint
Generally:
Walls
Apartment Internal doors,
door frames & architraves
Manufacturer: Taubmans
Colour: Sparkling Wine
Finish: Refer to Paint Specification
Code: T12 1. B6
Finish:
- Walls: Satin - Low Sheen
- Doors, Architraves: Semi-Gloss Water based
Enamel
- Stippled Finish to Concrete slab: Matt
- Plasterboard Ceiling /Bulkhead: Matt
Taubmans
PT02
Feature Paint Scheme

Standard Daylight
& Dark Midnight
Fridge Recess
Taubmans
PT02
Feature Paint Scheme

Light Dawn
Fridge Recess
Colour: Casino
Finish: Refer to Paint Specification
Finish: Satin
Code: T12 8 .G12
As per PT01
NOTES/
LEADTIME
IMAGE
REV
Taubmans

CONTENTS
PT-C
General Paint to Ceilings
Ceilings throughout
Colour: Sparkling Wine
Finish: Flat
Taubmans
CODE
DESCRIPTION
LOCATION
SPECIFICATION
SUPPLIER
ST00
Stone
Kitchen Benchtop
Manufacturer: Quantum Quartz

Colour: White Swirl
Finish: Polished
Edge Profile : Minimal pencil round 2mm
Silicone : Ardex ST Neutral Cure Non Staining
Stone Silicone Ultra white to match benchtop
ST01 or similar approved by interior designer
Quantum Quartz
ST01
TL00
TLF1
Reconstituted stone
Scheme All
NOTES/
LEADTIME
IMAGE
REV
Tile
Floor tile - Scheme
Standard Daylight
Entry, Kitchen
Type: Ceramic Tile on underlay

Range: Concrete look
Size: 600 x 600mm
Code: 060768 600x600mm
Finish : Glazed
Floor Tile Underlay: 4.5mm Regupol Acoustic
Underlay #4515 on Regupol adhesive or
approved similar. To BCA requirements Refer
Acoustic Report.
Grout: Ardex FS-DD, Smoke Grey
Silicone: Ardex ST , Grey
Parrella Tiles

CONTENTS
CODE
DESCRIPTION
LOCATION
SPECIFICATION
SUPPLIER
NOTES/
LEADTIME
TLF1
Floor tile - Scheme Dark

Midnight
Entry, Kitchen
Parrella Tiles
Underlay not
required for tiles
to wall
TLF1
Floor Tile Scheme Light

Dawn
Entry, Kitchen
TLF2
Floor / Wall Tile

- Scheme Standard
Daylight
Bathroom, Laundry: Floor

& Skirting

Size: 600 x 600mm
Code: 060769 600x600mm
Finish : Glazed
Acoustic Report.
Grout: Ardex FS-DD, Platinum Grey
Silicone: Ardex ST , Slate Grey
Range: SC
Size: 600 x 600mm
Code: SC110M 600x600mm
Finish : M Matt finish
Acoustic Report.
Floor
Size: 300 x 300mm
Skirting Size: 100x300mm cut from 300 x
300mm tile, with cut edge to bottom
Code: 060768 300x300mm
Finish : Glazed-Matt
Floor Tile Underlay: To BCA requirements
Refer Acoustic Report.
IMAGE
REV
Parrella Tiles
Parrella Tiles

CONTENTS
Wall
Type: Ceramic Tile
Size: 300 x 300mm
Code: 060768 LAPATTO 300x300mm
Finish : LAPATTO
TLF2
TLF2
Floor / Wall Tile

- Scheme Dark Midnight
Floor / Wall Tile

Scheme Light Dawn

& Skirting

& Skirting

Floor
Size: 300 x 300mm
Code: 060769 300x300mm
Finish : Glazed
Wall
Type: Ceramic Tile
Size: 300 x 300mm
Code: 060769 LAPATTO 300x300mm
Finish : LAPATTO
Grout: Ardex FS-DD, Platinum Grey
Floor
Range: SC
Size: 300 x 300mm
Code: SC110M - 300x300mm
Parrella Tiles
Underlay not
required for tiles
to wall
Parrella Tiles

CONTENTS
Finish : M Matt finish

Wall
Type: Ceramic Tile
Range: SC
Size: 300 x 300mm
Code: SC110P (Polished) 300x300mm
Finish : Polished
TLF3
TLS1/TSL1
TLS1/TSL1
External Tile
Balcony
Tile To Splashback
Scheme Standard
Kitchen Splashback ,
bathroom feature zone
Tile To Splashback
Scheme Light Dawn

Type: Ceramic Tile
Range: BR
Size: 300 x 300mm
Code: BR04R T Textured - To achieve slip
resistance rating min R11.
Type: Glazed Textured Tile, non rectified
Range: To match Chicago Tile
Size: 100 x300mm
Finish: Matt
Colour: TERRANOVA COTTO (Red Brick
look)
Grout: Ardex FS-DD, Flexible Water Repellent &
Dirt Resistant Fine Tile, Graphite Grey
Type: Glazed Gloss Tile
Supplier: Parrella Tiles
Range: NC
Size: 100 x 200mm
Code: NC1200 - 100 x 200mm
Colour: White gloss
Parrella Tiles
Parrella Tiles
Butt joins Tiles

Grout 3mm
Parrella Tiles
Butt joins Tiles

minimal 1.5mm
grout

CONTENTS
Dirt Resistant Fine Tile, White G3

Silicone: Ardex ST , white
TLS1/TSL1
TLW1
Tile To Splashback
Scheme Dark Midnight
Tile To Splashback To
Kitchenette in Sales
Display
Kitchen Splashback
Wall Tile All Schemes
Bathroom , laundry ,
window
Type: Glazed Textured Tile, non rectified

Range: To match Chicago Tile
Size: 100 x300mm
Finish: Matt
Colour: TERRANOVA TORTORA (Brown Brick
look)
Dirt Resistant Fine Tile, Graphite Grey
Type: Glazed Gloss Tile
Range: NC
Size: 100 x 200mm
Code: NC6200 - 100 x 200mm
Colour: White gloss
Finish : Metallic
Dirt Resistant Fine Tile, 390 Ultrawhite
Silicone: Ardex ST , Ultrawhite
Type: Glazed Tile
Range: NC
Size: 300x 600mm
Colour: White
Code: NC6300
Finish: Gloss
Parrella Tiles
Butt joins Tiles

Grout 3mm
Parrella Tiles
Butt joins Tiles

minimal 1.5mm
grout
Parrella Tiles
Grout lines to
align with floor tile

CONTENTS
TLW2
Wall Tile All Schemes
Bathroom , laundry ,
window
TLW1 /
TLW2
Tile Edge
Kitchen Splash back ,

Bathroom generally where
edge of tile exposed
TLW3
Tile Edge
CODE
DESCRIPTION
TM00
Timber
TM01
TM01
Parella tiles
Type: Glazed Tile

Range: NC
Size: 100x 200mm
Colour: White
Code: NC1200 100x 200mm
Finish: Gloss
Type: Aluminum angle to edge
Supplier: BAT Trims
Range: L-angle AA type
Colour: White
Grout lines to
align with floor tile
Refer to drawings
Refer to TLW2
Refer to
drawings
LOCATION
SPECIFICATION
SUPPLIER
Solid Timber Prefinished

Floor Boards Scheme
Standard Daylight OR AS
PER PURCHASER
VARIATION
Optional Upgrade Only
Manufacturer: Embelton Flooring

Range: Precision Engineered click flooring Hardwood + G5
Species : Spotted Gum
Size: 134mm, 14mm overall thickness
Finish: Matt
Embelton Flooring

Floor Boards Scheme
Light OR AS PER
PURCHASER VARIATION

Species : Tasmanian Oak
Embelton Flooring
NOTES/
LEADTIME
IMAGE
REV

CONTENTS
Finish: Matt
01

Floor Boards Scheme Dark
Midnight OR AS PER
PURCHASER VARIATION
Aluminium Timber Trim

Bedroom where timber finish
adjoins tile/ carpet finish

Species : American Oak - Wenge
Finish: Matt
Embelton Flooring
CONTENTS
INTERIOR FITTING AND FIXTURES SCHEDULE

Project Name:
LIGHT & CO
Project Address:
321 MONTAGUE ROAD, WEST END, 4101
CODE
DESCRIPTION
LOCATION
SPECIFICATION
SUPPLIER
NOTES/ LEADTIME
IMAGE
REV
Appliances and Equipment

Whitegoods
CT
60cm 4 Burner Gas Cooktop

with Heavy Duty Trivets
Kitchen
Manufacturer: Ariston
Model: PK640RTGHAU
Finish: Stainless Steel
Size: 650W x 510D x 39H
Harvey Norman
OV
Multifunction Built-in Oven

with Clock
Kitchen
Model: FH837CIX
Size: 595H x 595Wx 545D
Harvey Norman
RH
52cm Under mount

Rangehood
Kitchen
Model: ARU52X
Size: 520W x520D x 254H
Harvey Norman
DW
Fully Integrated Dishwasher
Kitchen
Model: LFTM16A
Finish: Integrated Panel as per LA2
Size: 595W x 820H x 570D
Harvey Norman
Radiance Ground Floor

Apartments 20001-20005
Radiance Level 1
Apartments 20101- 20112

CONTENTS
DW
Fully Integrated Dishwasher
Kitchen
Model: LTB6M019
Finish: Integrated Panel as per LA2
Size: 595W x 820H x 570D
Harvey Norman
MW
Inbuilt Microwave With

Trim Kit
Optional Purchaser Upgrade

- Ariston Upgrade
Harvey Norman
MW
Inbuilt Microwave With

Trim Kit
Optional Purchaser Upgrade

- Miele Upgrade
Model: MWKA222X1
ARISTON MWKA 222 X1 with Integration kit
24L capacity, 3 cooking combinations, 6
Auto-cook functions. Automatic coo ldown
Size: 595W x 371H x 440D
Manufacturer: Miele
Model: Miele M6262TC with Integration kit
47L capacity, 23 cooking programmes, 7segment LCD display with dial control.
Size: 595W x 456H x 550D
DR
4kg Wall Hung Dryer
Laundry - All Apartments
Manufacturer: Omega
Model: OCD40WA
Finish: NA
Size: 603W x 672H x 400D
Harvey Norman
DESCRIPTION
LOCATION
SPECIFICATION
SUPPLIER
NOTES/ LEADTIME
Kitchen
Manufacturer: Paco Jaanson

Model: Sardina 1.5 DBL undermount sink
Code: D66U
Size: 628W x 459D x 203H
Harvey Norman
ENSURE THE BOWL

ORIENTATION IS AS PER
THE TYPICAL KITCHEN
NOTES AS DOCUMENTED
IN SHEETS
CODE
All Illuminate Apartments

Level 1 to Level 5 inclusive
Radiance Apartments Level
2 to Level 11 inclusive
Harvey Norman
IMAGE
REV
Sanitary Fixtures
SK
1.25 Bowl Under-mount Sink

CONTENTS
A_CA_WD_1705 A_CA_WD_1707
WC
Toilet Suite
Bathroom and Ensuite
Manufacturer: GWA
Brand : Stylus
Model: Banksia - K10001W, Banksia BTW
Toilet Suite Uni Trap 65-150mm Back Entry
WELS 4 Star 4.5/3Ltr w/-Soft Close Seat
Finish : White Vitreous China
Size: 670mm projection x388mm wide x
830ht
Harvey Norman
BN
Bench Mounted Vanity

Basin no taphole
Manufacturer: Kohler
Range: Chalice Round Vessel Basin with
overflow - Benchtop mounted
Model: 14800A-0
Finish : White Vitreous China
Size: 420mm Diam, 135mm ht
Harvey Norman
BT1
Acrylic Drop in Bath Tub

1800 Length

typically
Manufacturer: Novelli
Model: Mystery
Finish : Acrylic
Code: SR18MYB
Size: 1790 x 847 x 465
Harvey Norman
SL
Laundry tub & cabinet
All Units
Manufacturer: Clark
Model: Eureka 35l tub & Cabinet with By
pass - Compact
Code: F7111
Finish : Acrylic
Size: 380x606mm Sgl BP
Harvey Norman
AP
Access Panel - Hydraulic

Access Panel
Extent to be coordinated
with Hydraulic engineer
Type: 600x600mmCustomwood Access

Panels
Supplier: Trafalgar
Code:AP-C-WW-300, Wet Wall
Finish: Paint finish to match ceiling finish
ensure access panel is impervious to steam
and hot water from shower.
Trafalgar Fire
Level 5 only: Unit type BF,

BH.1 and BG.1 kitchens, Unit
Type BG.1 laundry, Unit
Type BF & BG.1 Ensuite

CONTENTS
(over shower)
CODE
DESCRIPTION
LOCATION
SPECIFICATION
SUPPLIER
NOTES/ LEADTIME
IMAGE
REV
Tapsets and Wastes

TCS
Cistern Tap
Manufacturer: Austworld
Model: Mini Cistern Cock
Finish: Polished Chrome
Size: 15mm
Harvey Norman
FW
Floor Waste
Manufacturer: ACS
Model: Smart tile Square
OR
Type: Tile Insert floor waste
Supplier: Bounty Brassware
Type: Square Bermuda Standard Floor
grate, 115mm x 100 - Square Tile Grate
Code: 11101.01, 115 x 100 Square CP
Finish: Satin Chrome, with tile insert,
Stainless Steel strainer
Tile: as per TF2
Size: 115 x 115 Square
Harvey Norman
FW
Floor Waste
Laundry
Manufacturer: Plastec
Finish: Chrome
Type: 100mm square chrome floor waste
Harvey Norman
Goose Neck Sink Mixer with

Pull down spray
Kitchen
Manufacturer: Abey
Model: Gareth Ashton - Lucia Gooseneck
Sink Mixer with pull out spray
Finish: Chrome plated
Code: SK5
Harvey Norman
MK

CONTENTS
Size: 360mmH x 220mmProjection, 195mm

bench to spout
WELS Rating: 5 Star Flow Rate 5L/min
TB1
Benchtop mounted Basin

Mixer
Manufacturer: Abey
Range: Custom - Gareth Ashton Park
Avenue mixer lever with Armando Vicario
Gooseneck spout
Model: SK4.1
Finish : Polished Chrome
Size: 190mm bench to spray, projection
240mm
WELS: 4 Star 7.5L/min
6 Star not recommended, 5 Star preferred
Harvey Norman
SR
Hand Held Shower on Rail

with integrated Soap shelf
Manufacturer: Abey
Range: Hammer Head Shower on Rail 5
Function, Novara Round Sliding Rail
Shower
Model: SRA01
WELS Rating: 3 Star 8.0L/min
Size: 100mm Head, 700mm Rail,
170x170mm Soap Dish
Harvey Norman
TS1
Shower mixer with back

plate

Shower only
Manufacturer: Abey
Range: Gareth Ashton Park Avenue
Shower Mixer
Model: 1SH-EXT & SH-INT
Size: Plate 80x80, in wall body 46-74mm,
handle 120mmH
Wels: 6 Star not recommended, 5 Star
preferred
Harvey Norman

CONTENTS
TS2
Shower / Bath Mixer Set with

Diverter for Bath with back
plate
Bathroom and Ensuite with

bath and shower combined
Manufacturer: Abey
Shower Mixer with Diverter
Model: 1SHD-EXT & SHD-INT
handle 120mmH
preferred
Harvey Norman
BS1
Bath spout
Bathroom and Ensuite with

bath and shower combined
Manufacturer: Abey
Straight Bath Spout 2 piece 210mm
Model: 1BTS-S
Size: 80x80mm plate, projection 220mm
preferred
Harvey Norman
BS2
Bath Spout
Where bath only (not

combined with shower)
Manufacturer: Abey
Range: Gareth Ashton Park Avenue Bath
Wall Plate Mixer Complete w/-Spout
Model: 1BT-WS
190mm spout, 115H handle
preferred
Harvey Norman
ML
Tub Mounted Goose Neck

Sink Mixer
Laundry
Manufacturer: Methven
Model: Minimalist Gooseneck Sink Mixer Wels 4 Star 7.5L/Min
Code: 01-2350
Size: 328H x 170P
Harvey Norman

CONTENTS
CODE
DESCRIPTION
LOCATION
SPECIFICATION
SUPPLIER
Stegbar
NOTES/ LEADTIME
IMAGE
REV
Fittings
RB1
Robe Doors
Apartment Bedrooms
Range: Frameless Sliding Doors
Finish: Silver Safety Mirror
Frame: Clear Anodised
HRR
Robe Hanging Rail
Apartment Bedrooms
Hanging Rail: Removable hollow metal rod

with chrome finish. Install with 75mm rail
support
Supplier: Hafele
Code: 801.52.253
Range: Ova
SSC
Shower Screen
Bathroom and Ensuite,

Screen to Bathtub
Type: Frameless fixed glass screen

Supplier: Stegbar
Size: 2100H
Glass: 6mm Clear toughened glass. Glass
to be siliconed in place - clear silicon
Frameless Glass Fixing
Manufacturer: Fethers
Range: FBF 2000 Series
Model: FBF2000
Finish : Satin Stainless Steel
Stegbar
Refer to drawings for

detailed plans and typical
elevations.
Glass to meet Australian
Standards.
SSD
Shower Screen and Door

Typically
Stegbar
Clear bump ons to be fitted

to all walls/toilets where
glazed doors may contact.
Allow for gap under door for
water to flow into shower
floor waste.
Glass to meet Australian
Standards.
Generally
Manufacturer: BoralCornice
Boral
Refer Unit Plans for extent
Cornice
Range: Grange Inline Semi Frameless

pivot door
Frame Finish: Clear Anodised
Glass: 6mm Clear Toughened glass
Size: 2100H
Door Size: 2100H x 710W
Handle : 25mmDia #718 back to back

CONTENTS
Type: Profiled plaster style cornice

Range: Linear
Size: 75mmH x 75mmD x 10mm Profile
To be mitred at all corners and termination
junctions.
CODE
HD1-A
HD1-B
HD2
DESCRIPTION
LOCATION
SPECIFICATION
SUPPLIER
Kitchen Cupboards
underbench and drawers/
Bathroom cupboards /
Laundry Joinery to unit
type xx
Manufacturer: Hafele
Hafele
Cupboard Door and

drawer fingerpull
handle profile
- lower drawers
Kitchen Cupboards
underbench and drawers/
Bathroom cupboards /
Laundry Joinery to unit
type xx
Furniture Handle
Kitchens Full Height

Pantry Doors
Type: Asymmetrical D-Pull handle, H_U_Z_H1380
Linen Doors
Model: 110.34.657
Size: 204mmL x 12mm x 32mmProjection
General Joinery
Fittings
Cupboard Door and
drawer fingerpull
handle profile
- top drawer & top of
cupboards, &
dishwasher
NOTES/ LEADTIME
IMAGE
REV
Model: Luxe Profile, P-L-A-05 (L-profile)

Code: 126.37.300
Finish: Black Matt
Size: Refer to Drawings
Hafele
Model: Luxe Profile, P-L-A-10 (C-profile)

Code: 126.3c.300
Finish: Black Matt
Size: Refer to Drawings
Hafele
Finish Generally: Brushed Nickel-plated

CONTENTS
CI
Plastic Cutlery Insert
Kitchen Top Drawer or as

indicated on drawings
Manufacturer : Hafele
Model: 556.62.729
Finish : White Plastic
Size: To suit drawer 450mm width
Hafele
BIN
Pull-Out Bin
Kitchen
Hafele
Pull Out System - To

island bench
Kitchen
Product: Hailo Tandem 30 2 x 15 litre capacity

Code: 502.70.252.
Size: 248W x 415H x 479D
Finish: Chrome
Pull Out System - To

back bench
Kitchen
POI
POB
HRK
Hanging Rail - Kitchen
Kitchen Splashback
To be located under kitchen

sink
Product: Project Comfort Set, Base cabinet Pullout

drawer, full extension with self-closing mechanism.
2 baskets
Code: 545.57.200 RH / 545.57.201 LH handing
depending on kitchen type. Extension arm to
partition side.
Size: 380W x 470D x height to suit full height.
Basket width 261mm
Finish: Chrome
Product: Base cabinet Pullout drawer, Dispensa
Junior - With Wire Basket Shelves . 2
baskets
Code: 545.55.301
Size: 300mmW x 720mmH x 500mmD. Basket
width 261mm
Finish: Chrome
Manufacturer :
Model:
Finish : Stainless Steel
Size: 19mm Diameter
To be mounted from underside of overhead
cupboard. Joinery to propose fixing system.
Joiner

CONTENTS
CG
Plastic Cable Grommet
Study Bench
Manufacturer : Hafele
Model: 631.11.702
Finish : White Plastic
Size: 60mm
DRW
Drawer Assembly
Kitchen Drawers Generally
Manufacturer : Hettich
Range: Innotech
Size: Refer to drawings
DRW
Drawer Assembly with

soft close Runners
PURCHASER UPGRADE :
Kitchen Drawers
Manufacturer : Hettich
Range: Innotech
Size: Refer to drawings
CODE
DESCRIPTION
Hafele
LOCATION
SPECIFICATION
SUPPLIER
NOTES/ LEADTIME
Manufacturer: Barben
Range: Project Round Robe Hook
Harvey Norman
Refer individual unit plans for

location of robe hook. Where
robe hooks are located to
the backs of doors, reinforce
door as required to accept
fitting and immanent load.
2 per wet area
Dual Fixings. Refer
individual unit plans for
location. Where towel rails
are located to the backs of
doors, reinforce door as
required to accept fitting and
immanent load.
IMAGE
REV
Bathroom Accessories
HK
Robe Hook
Model: PR-105
TR1
Single Towel Rail Where

on Partition
Range: Project Round Single Towel Rail
600mm wide - Custom Short Projection
Model: PR-0016
Size: 600wide with overall 65mm maximum
projection
Harvey Norman

CONTENTS
TR2

on shower screen
450mm wide with glass fixing and back to
back fixing - Custom Short Projection
Harvey Norman
1 per wet area

Dual Fixings.
Harvey Norman
1 per wet area

Dual Fixings.
Harvey Norman
Dual Fixings
Harvey Norman
Dual Fixings
Harvey Norman
Dual Fixings
Model: PR-0016with glass fixings

Size: 450mm wide with overall 65mm
maximum projection
TR3

on Laundry Door in
Bathroom
500mm wide with fixing for MDF - back to
back fixing - Custom Short Projection
Model: PR-0016with back fixing plate
Size: 500 wide with overall 65mm maximum
projection
HTR
Hand Towel Rail
Type: Asymmetrical D-Pull handle,
H_U_Z_H1380
Model: 110.34.657
Finish: Brushed Nickel-plated
Size: 204mmL x 12mm x 32mmProjection
TRH
Toilet Roll Holder with Dual

Fixings
Range: Project Round Toilet Roll Holder
Model: PR1309
Size:
SH
Shower Shelf
Range: Project Metal Shower Shelf Custom length - 200mm wide
Model: PR107SP2
Size: 200mm wide

CONTENTS
Door Hardware
Refer to separate door
hardware schedule
P3
Custom Pendant Light
Kitchen
Refer to Electrical consultant

drawing
Manufacturer:
Model:
Finish:
Size:
Light Switch to fridge gable
SUPPLIER
Hafele
Harvey Norman
Hettich
Nover
Stegbar
Kitchen
CONTACT
Manufacturer:
Model:
Finish: Where Scheme Standard Daylight
/ Dark Midnight Black plate and toggles
Finish: Where Scheme Light Dawn
White plate and toggles.
PHONE
07 3307 8900
07 3297 3700
07 3251 8600
1300 599 057
1800 681 168
Disclaimer:
Whilst Pradella make all endeavours to confirm the veracity of this list Pradella make no warranty implied or otherwise to its accuracy or
validity to suppliers information which is subject to period change or supply demand. This list is provided for maintenance purposes only.
CONTENTS
SECTION 4
MAINTENANCE
CONTENTS
MAINTENANCE
4.1 Services
(a)
Plumbing
(i)
Toilet Cistern:(I)
(ii)
(iii)
If a cistern overflows, the following steps are recommended:

(a)
Turn off the water to the cistern at the control tap at the back of the
cistern;
(b)
Empty the cistern by flushing;
(c)
Contact a licensed plumber. We recommend during the defects

liability period that the contact plumber should be Tacoma Plumbing
& Drainage. Refer to the attached subcontractor and supplier list in
Section 2 of this manual for their contact details.
(d)
NOTE: Depending on the issue, some items may not be a defect.
Blockages:(I)
All baths, basins and sinks have a grid over the waste outlet to stop solids,
which could block the trap or waste pipe below. However, small solids such
as tealeaves, hair and vegetable scraps can pass the grid and block the
sink. Do not empty tealeaves or oils into the sink and always run hot water
down the sink after washing fatty containers.
(II)
Never put disposable nappies, napkins or other objects down the toilet pan
as they cause blockages.
(III)
If a blockage does occur, it will be necessary to contact a licensed Plumber.
(IV)
For toilet pan blockages, call a licensed Plumber.
Leaks:(I) If a tap leak occurs, the following steps are recommended:

(a)
Turn off water to the tap at the isolation valve under the sink, basin
etc (if applicable) or turn off water to the apartments at the unit
control valves located in the service cupboard.
(b)
Contact a licensed plumber.
(b)
Hot Water Meters

(i)
The hot water meters are located in the service cupboard within each unit and are
remotely read by the provider in the basement of this building. In order for you as
an owner occupier or your tenant to be able to connect the hot water, please
complete and return to Origin the New Connection Application for Hot Water
contained in Appendix Seven of this manual. Your hot water account also
includes the gas cooktop charges.
(c)
Gas
(i)
Each floor has gas valves located next to the fire stairs to turn off supply to
individual units.
(d)
Electricity
(i)
The electrical distribution boards container circuit breakers are located in the
service cupboard within the apartments.
CONTENTS
(ii)
The electricity meters are located in the electrical switchboard cupboard next to
the fire stairs.
4.2 Odours
(a)
(b)
The most common causes of household odours are due to unmaintained floor wastes.
They should be cleaned regularly to remove acid build-up of body fats, which harbour
germs and bacteria.
If this occurs call a licensed Plumber for advice and or action.
4.3 Mould
Ventilation
(a)
Due to the somewhat airtight nature of todays construction methods, humidity can build
up in your apartment. A consequence of this humidity can be both condensation and
mould.
(b) Please ensure that all rooms are kept adequately ventilated to avoid these problems. It
is important to note that mould can damage your property and possibly your health and
therefore it is essential to manage and minimize.
What is Mould?
(c)
Mould is a type of fungi and belongs to a group of micro-organisms which includes

mushrooms and yeast. It needs dust, dirt or organic matter to grow. Mould can range in
colour being black, grey, green or white and may also smell.
(d) Mould can damage clothing, bedding, furnishings and carpet.
(e) Mould may also cause health problems such as asthma and respiratory and skin
allergic reactions.
What tenants must do
(f)
Mould needs humidity or moisture to grow. Good heating and extractor fans, regular
airing can minimise indoor humidity and condensation and therefore mould.
(g) If the mould is caused by you, the best way to get rid of it is by using a vinegar or
alcohol solution (1 part vinegar/alcohol to 4 parts water) on affected areas. If the mould
keeps coming back despite ventilation and your best efforts, it is your responsibility to
advise the Agent immediately.
(h) All Tenants have a duty of care to ensure that all measures are taken to prevent
permanent damage to the Apartment and furniture. Therefore:
(i)
Fans - use the fans installed in bathrooms, kitchen and laundry to remove excess
water vapour;
(ii)
Laundry hang wet clothes outside. If using a clothes dryer ensure you use the
extraction fan and adequately ventilate the apartment;
(iii)
Curtains and blinds - sunlight inhibits mould growth so leave curtains and blinds
open during the day;
(iv)
Maintain an even temperature it is better to maintain a moderate temperature

than to heat up the apartment occasionally. There is a wide range of heating
options. You should look into this so you use the appropriate type of heating in the
Apartment. Please note that the Apartment owner is not responsible for any
excessive heating bills;
(v)
Un-flued gas heaters or kerosene heaters are not permitted as they release
considerable amounts of moisture into a room;
(vi)
Dispose of any items damaged damp or mould immediately;
(vii)
Store dry items in sealed plastic containers; and
(viii)
You can also use moisture collector granules for use in wardrobes and cupboards.
These can be purchased from most super markets and hardware stores
CONTENTS
4.4 Interior Walls Plaster

(a)
(b)
Hairline and minor cracks can develop, and are beyond the control of any Builder.
Cracks can be caused by many different factors such as shrinkage of timber, expansion
of brickwork and contraction of plaster itself.
No attempt should be made to repair minor cracks for the first three months after the
Apartment is built as by that time the greatest amount of shrinkage has taken place.
Even though they may be annoying, they do not impair the structural soundness of your
home. These cracks are easily repaired by using purpose made plaster fillers such as
Spak-filler or paint able sealants and carefully filling the cracks, allowing drying and
light sanding back. Touch up with paint to match the original colour.
4.5 Joints and Nail Marks to Ceilings and Walls
(a)
(b)
It must be remembered that no building surface is perfectly flat. The aim in building is
to produce the appearance of flatness and with plaster surfaces the appearance of
flatness can always be destroyed by glancing or side light, termed in the industry as the
natural phenomena of glancing light. Some of the major examples of glancing light are
fluorescent lights or lights too close to the ceiling, uncurtained windows or wall lighting.
In decorating, roller blinds or curtains should be applied to windows and especially
narrow windows near walls should also be curtained. Where isolated lamps are used,
they are best placed well below the level of the ceiling, however proper care should be
taken in the selection of your light shades to produce downward light.
4.6 Sticking Internal Swing Doors
(a)
(b)
(c)
If sticking is minor, first apply either a paste wax, light coat of paraffin, or candle wax to
the binding surface. A sticking door is sometimes caused by movement of the door
frame. If this occurs, you should contact a carpenter.
To fix a squeaking door hinge, rub the knuckle of the hinge with a soft lead pencil or
lubricate with a graphite tube - oil is not satisfactory as it accumulates dust and grease
around the hinge.
The Builder will attend to any sticking doors at the expiration of your defects liability
period.
4.7 Doors
(a)
The aluminium window supplier serviced your windows prior to moving in; however
aluminium sliding doors should be lubricated regularly. You can purchase dry lube or
dry lube spray from any hardware store. The dry lube is applied to the rollers at the top
of the sliding door to ensure ease of operation and avoid sticking. Lack of attention can
cause costly repairs and difficult operation.
4.8 Windows
(a)
(b)
Aluminium sliding windows are easily cared for in the same way as described for sliding
doors. Simply apply a dry lube to the rollers at the bottom of the window. It is very
important to keep the track of sliding windows and doors clean from dirt and grime to
allow ease in operation and lasting life.
Should weep holes be found below the windows and around the exterior of your
Apartment, they should also be kept clear to ensure that no water build up occurs in the
cavity.
4.9 Carpet
(a)
The following is provided as a general guide only.

recommendations.
(i)
Hints for carpet care:-
Please refer to manufacturers
CONTENTS
(I)
Step 1 Reduce Dirt Build-Up Use mats at all entrances to keep dirt
outside. Relocate furniture periodically to allow for even distribution of traffic
wear.
(II)
Step 2 Vacuum regularly Dirt is like sandpaper. Nothing wears out

carpet quicker. Only regular vacuuming will remove it.
(III)
Step 3 Remove Spills Immediately All spills should be cleaned up

promptly. Almost anything will stain or discolour your carpet if left
unattended. Find the spill on our stain removal chart and apply the removal
method from the schedule referenced to the chart.
Stain
Removal
Method
No.
Stain
Removal
Method
No.
Stain
Removal
Method
No.
Asphalt
Beer
Berries
Blood
Butter
Candy
Cheese
Chewing Gum
Chocolate
Coffee
Cooking Oil
Crayon
Dye (green, blue,

black)
Dye (red)
Earth (dirt)
Egg
Excrement
Fish Slime
Foundation Make-up
Fruit Juice
Furniture Polish
Furniture Polish (with

stain)
Glue (hobby)
1 & 11
Glue (household )
11
Glue (white)
Grease (food & car)
Hair Oil
Hair Spray
Hand Lotion
Ice Cream
Ink (ballpoint & felttip)
Ink (fountain pen)
Ink (permanent)
Lacquer
Lard
Linseed Oil
Lipstick
Machine Oil
Mascara
Mayonnaise
Mercurochrome
Methylate
Milk
Mixed drinks,
liqueurs
Mud
Mustard
Nail Polish
11
Paint (latex)
Paint (oil based)
10
Pet Food
Rubber Cement
Rust
Shellac
10
Shoe Polish
(liquid)
Shoe Polish (paste)
Shortening
Solder (liquid)
Starch
Tar
Tea
Tomato Sauce
Toothpaste
Typewriter
Ribbons
Urine
Varnish
Vaseline
Vomit
Wax (candle)
Wax (paste)
Wine (red)
1&2
Wine (white)
CONTENTS
Removal Method
Removal
Number
Removal Method
Water / blot / detergent / blot / detergent / blot / water / blot.
Detergent / blot / ammonia / blot / detergent / blot / water / blot. For blood, ingredients must
be cold.
Dry cleaning solvent / detergent / blot / water / blot.
Detergent / blot / white vinegar / detergent / blot / water / blot. (If any stain remains, follow
Step 11).
Detergent / blot / ammonia / blot / white vinegar / blot / water / blot.
Detergent / blot / white vinegar / blot / ammonia / blot / water / blot.
Seek help of a professional carpet cleaner.
Freeze with ice cube / shatter with blunt object / vacuum up chips / apply dry cleaning
solvent / wait several minutes / blot / repeat if necessary.
Dry cleaning solvent / wait several minutes / blot / detergent / blot / water / blot.
10
Mentholated spirits / blot / repeat if necessary. (Pre-test as you would all solutions).
11
Apply nail polish remover (non-oily) with cotton bud and remove with plain paper towel / blot
/ repeat.
4.10
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Some stains may require professional cleaning after the removal method shown.
Wet vacuuming is recommended for large spills to speed up blotting. Remind
professional cleaners not to use water over 55OC.
How quickly a spot can be removed depends on the amount and type of spill, how soon
you attend to it, the carpet construction and proper cleaning procedure.
Some stubborn stains may need a liquid or dry powder spot remover or professional
cleaning. Do not apply fungicides, bactericides, biocides, anti-statics or other topical
finishes to carpet. Remind professional cleaners not to use water over 55OC.
4.11
(a)
Painted Surfaces
The paints used on the internal surfaces of your Apartment are of best quality products
available for each type of surface, but not designed to be washed daily as some might
believe. Washable simply means that accidental marks on walls may be cleaned off
with proper care. This is done with soapy water and cotton wool which is dabbed on the
marks until removed - wiping or rubbing will cause a shiny patch to develop.
4.12
(a)
Additional Important Information
External Paintwork
This should be washed down at least twice a year with a hose and soft brush, otherwise
the amount of dust and grime that gathers on the spouting, under eaves and on external
CONTENTS
(b)
doors etc can cause pitting of the paint and eventually peeling. The result is costly and
tedious repainting work long before it should have been needed.
When repainting, do not use dark colours on external doors as the added amount of
heat absorption can cause buckling.
4.13
(a)
(b)
Laminated plastics and stone products are normally used on bench tops, vanity tops,
bar tops, etc and have a high degree of heat resistance. However, care should be taken
not to place hot pans and pots directly onto them. Do not use them as an ironing or
cutting board. It is recommended that all cutting and chopping of food stuffs are on a
purpose made cutting board.
Keep the working surface clean with a good wash polish, not with abrasives, as they will
destroy the highly polished finish. A specialised stone cleaner is recommended.
4.14
(a)
(b)
(b)
(b)
Telephone and Television Splitter Boxes
The location of your telephone and television splitter box in the electrical switchboard
cupboard which is located next to the fire stairs. The telephone and television splitter
box should only be accessed by a qualified Technician.
4.20
(a)
Electrical Circuit Breaker Board
Please check the location of your electrical circuit breaker board and familiarise yourself
with its location and functions.
The board is located in the service cupboard within the apartment.
4.19
(a)
Heating or Air Conditioning
As air conditioning is installed in your apartment, you should also be aware that air
conditioning or heating of one room can cause uneven moisture levels in adjoining
rooms which in turn cause bowing of interconnecting room doors. Keep doors open as
much as possible to even the air temperatures and humidity. Refer to the manufacturers
written recommendations for operation and maintenance procedures.
Regularly clean filters as per the manufacturers requirements.
4.18
(a)
Water Hammer
Water hammer is the thumping of pipes where water is running - not the thump when
the tap is turned off. If the second occurs, check that the washing machine taps are
turned off and that you turn your taps off lightly.
4.17
(a)
Shower Compartment
Your shower compartment is composed of maintenance free safety glass. However, it is

important to ensure that hot water is not directed on to the glass, as the abrupt
expansion may cause cracking.
The pivot door frame should be kept clean and free of soap build-up.
4.16
(a)
Oven/Cook top
Refer to the manufacturers written recommendations for maintenance and cleaning

contained within Schedule 5 of this handover manual.
4.15
(a)
Laminated Plastics/Stone
Emergencies (Category 1 Defects)
In case of emergencies (Category 1 defects) please contact the following:Disclaimer: This documents does not form part of any Contract and is to be used as a guide only.
CONTENTS
(i)
(ii)
(b)
During Defect Period

(I)
Pradstruct Pty Ltd, Construction Manager, Jim Russ, 0417 734 241
(II)
Resident Managers, Dave & Diane McAdam, 0421 085 977
(III)
Applicable Sub Contractor, See Schedule 2 Project Team
(IV)
Use whatever means necessary to mitigate loss i.e. Yellow Pages etc.
Post Defect Period

(I)
Resident Managers, Dave & Diane McAdam, 0421 085 977
(II)
Use whatever means necessary to mitigate loss i.e. Yellow Pages etc.
Some examples of Category 1 defects are as follows:(i)

Plumbing
(I)
Burst pipes and joints Stop the water supply to the burst pipe by turning
off the house water supply valves.
(II)
Wrap bags or sacking around the burst pipe and place a bowl underneath to
catch any drip.
(III)
Turn off water inlet to hot water.
(IV)
Contact Builder or Plumber.
CONTENTS
SECTION 5
WARRANTIES, GUARANTEES, OPERATION AND

MAINTENANCE MANUALS
CONTENTS
WARRANTIES, GUARANTEES, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

5.1 General
Recommended Inspection Frequencies for Various Items
Following is a Table of recommended maintenance and inspections to ensure your apartment is kept
in its best possible condition.
ITEM
FREQUENCY
INSPECTION TYPE
Smoke Alarms
6 months
Audio Inspection/Test
Electrical, White goods & GPOs
12 months
Inspection of wiring
Circuit Boards/Breakers
12 months
Electricians inspection
Range Hood Filters
3 months
Remove and clean off any grease

buildup
Dishwasher Filters
Rinse 3 months
Clean 12 months
Rinse filter trap and run cleaning cycle
Gas Hobs (BBQ, if applicable)
12 months
Leak detection inspection
Air conditioning
6 months
Remove and clean filters (by a

Qualified Technician)
Air conditioning
12 months (as
required)
Inspect gas levels and condensers (by

a Qualified Technician)
CONTENTS
Manual Menu - Click below to open the manual

5.2
Carpet
5.3
Tiling
5.4
Timber Flooring
5.5
Balustrades/ Handrails
5.6
Glass Doors and Windows
5.7
Joinery
5.8
Painting and Coating Systems
5.9
Shower Screens, Mirrors and Robe Doors
5.10
Framing, Ceilings & Partitions
5.11
Stone Bench Tops
5.12
Sanitaryware
(a)
Fixtures & Fittings
5.13
Glass Splashbacks
5.14
Electrical
(a)
(b)
(c)
Security & Intercom

Smoke Detectors
Light Fittings
5.15
Doors & Fire Doors
5.16
Door Hardware
5.17
Waterproofing
5.18
Whitegoods
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
Dishwasher
(i)
Ariston LFTM16A (Radiance 20001 20112)
(ii)
Ariston LTB6M019 (Illuminate & Radiance Level 2 and Up)
(iii)
Miele G4481SCVI (Purchaser Upgrade)
Cooktop
(i)
Ariston PK750TGH & PC750TGH
(ii)
Miele KM 362-1 G (60cm) & KM2334G (75cm) (Purchaser Upgrade)
Oven
(i)
Ariston FH837CIX
(ii)
Miele H2260B (Purchaser Upgrade)
Rangehood Ariston ARU52X
Microwave (Purchaser Variation)
(i)
Ariston MWKA222X1
(ii)
Miele M6262TC
Clothes Dryer Omega OCD4W
CONTENTS
5.19
Internal & External Blinds (If Applicable)
5.20
Air Conditioning
(a)
(b)
(c)
Daikin Split FTXS20-46LVMA

Daikin Split FTXS50-70LVMA
Outdoor Unit - City Multi
5.21
Exhaust Fan
5.22
Letterboxes
5.23
Storage Cages (If Applicable)
5.24
Purchaser Variations (If Applicable)

(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Ceiling Fans
Refrigerator
Pyrolytic Oven
Toilet & Bidet
CONTENTS
Section 5.2
Carpet
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
Product Specification Sheet
TOULON 30 / 5230
Style
Pile Content
Width
Pile Thickness
Carpet Thickness
Grading
Construction
Environmental Accreditation
Yarn Specification
Insect Resistance
Gauge
Tuft Density
Primary Backing
Secondary Backing
Backing Adhesive
Bond Strength
Tuft Withdrawal
Pattern Repeat
Hardtwist Cut Pile

80% Wool/ 20% Synthetic
3.66m Broadloom
5.9 mm +- 10% AS/NZS 2111.5
8.9 mm +- 10%
Residential Heavy Duty + Stairs 4 Stars ACCS (10190)
Tufted
ACCS ECS: Level 4
80% Woollen Spun/ 10% Nylon/ 10% Polyester Single Ply
Treated with Insect Resist Agents
31.5 tufts/10cm (1/8)
31.5 tufts/10cm x 34.0 tufts/10cm +10%,-5% AS/NZS 2111.9
Woven Polypropylene
Woven Jute
Synthetic Latex
40N/50mm AS/NZS 2111.16
15N AS/NZS 2111.15
None
CAUTION Shading On Cut Pile Carpet: All cut pile carpets will in some circumstances
exhibit the condition known as Shading, Watermarking, or Pile Reversal. This condition is
characterised by random light and dark patches appearing some weeks after installation,
caused by the permanent reversal or bending of the carpet pile fibres with consequential
different light effects. It cannot be predicted or prevented and appears to be related to the
location of use rather than type of carpet construction or materials used. It does not affect
the wear or durability of the carpet and since it is beyond the control of the manufacturer, it is
not recognised as a manufacturing flaw or fault. You are urged to consider this characteristic
before purchasing. Your Sales Executive can provide further information.
Installation, Cleaning and Maintenance: This carpet must be installed in accordance with
AS/NZS 2455.1:2007 unless otherwise specified. Cleaning and maintenance must be done
in accordance with AS/NZS 3733:1995.
Colour Variation: Colour may vary from dye lot to dye lot.
Material Variation: Backing or other materials may change without notice depending on raw
material availability.
Production Variability: Variable weights and/or colours can be produced to meet individual
requirements. For further details contact your local Norman Ellison office.
New Zealand: www.normanellison.co.nz Ph 0800 222 473

Australia: www.normanellison.com.au Ph 1800 251 172
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
Nimbus
Product Nimbus
Colour 7276-005-000 Desert
Product Specifications
Installation Methods
Ashlar
Herringbone
All product specifications reflect

averages derived from product
sample testing, are subject to
normal manufacturing and
testing tolerances and inherent
pattern variances, and may be
changed without notice. For
more information about these
and other important attributes of
the product(s) described herein,
including recycled content and
product warranty information,
please see
www.interface.com/disclaimer.
Product Number
7276
Product Construction
Tufted Tip Sheared Loop
Yarn / Fibre
BCF Nylon Type 6 - 100% Recycled content
Yarn Manufacturer
Aquafil
Colour System
100% Solution Dyed
Soil/Stain Protection
Protekt
Preservative Protection
Intersept
Tufted Pile Weight
18 oz/yd 10%
Machine Gauge
12th Gauge
Stitches
32.3/10cm
Pile Thickness
2.8 mm 0.5mm
Total Thickness
6.4 mm 0.5mm
Pile Density
5,786 oz/yd 10%
Size Description
25cm X 1m
Backing Structure
GlasBac
610 g/m 10%
8.2/in
Performance Specifications
Area of Use
Commercial - Heavy Duty
ACCS
Commercial Extra Heavy Duty & Stairs
Stability - Delaminating
ASTM D3936 2.5lbs/in

ISO2551 0.1%
ISO/PAS 18984 <0.2%
Stability - Dimensional Stability
BS ISO 2551 0.2%

ISO/PAS 18984 < 0.2%
ISO 2551 0.1%
Stability - Tuft Bind
AS/NZS 2111.15 >30 Newtons

ASTM D1335 8.0lbs
ISO 4919 30 Newtons
Wear - Castor Chair
BS-EN 985 r 2.4

ISO 4918 r 2.4
Colour Fastness to Light
AATCC 16E 4
ISO 105-B02 4 - 5
AS2001 1.4.21 . 3
Colour Fastness to Rubbing and Crocking
AATCC 165 4
AS/NZS2111.19.1 >3
ISO 105-X12 4-5
Colour Fastness to Water
AATCC 107 4
ISO105-E01 4-5
AS2001.4.21 3
Flammability - Methanamine Pill
BS6307/ISO 6925 Radius 7.6
Flammability - Radiant Panel
ASTM E648 Class 1

ISO 9239-1 B1
Flammability - Smoke density
ASTM E662 Density < 450

ISO 9239-1 Density 750 %.min
Antistatic
BS ISO 6356 2.2Kv
Antimicrobial Treatment
AATCC 171 Washed

AATCC174 Parts 2 & 3 99% reduction. No mold 7 Days
ASTME-2471 Complete Inhibition
Page 1 of 2
CONTENTS
Nimbus
Generic Tests
Acoustic - Nylon
Absorption Coefficient - NRC 0.0 - 0.2
Dynamic Loading
AS/NZS 2111.2 < 12.5% loss

ISO 2094 85%
Green Carpet (VOC)
ISO 10580 Accredited

ASTM D5116 Accredited
Static Loading
AS/NZS2111.13 < 6% Loss

ISO 015/3415 Thickness after 60 mins recovery >85%
Thermal Resistance
ASTM C518 R Value 0.5
Environmental Specifications
Recycled Content %
55-70
Other Environmental Claims
View Environmental Accreditations
Ingredients and Life Cycle Impacts
View our Environmental Product Declarations
End of Life
Carpet to Carpet Recycling
Technical Information
Maintenance
View recommended Interface Maintenance guidelines online
Reclamation
View details on our ReEntry Program
Warranty
15 Year Standard Warranty
Page 2 of 2
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
AE310
Collection Aerial
Product AE310
Colour 7921-001-000 Mist
Product Specifications
Installation Methods
Non Directional
All product specifications reflect

averages derived from product
sample testing, are subject to
normal manufacturing and
testing tolerances and inherent
pattern variances, and may be
changed without notice. For
more information about these
and other important attributes of
the product(s) described herein,
including recycled content and
product warranty information,
please see
www.interface.com/disclaimer.
Product Number
7921
Product Construction
Tufted Textured Loop
Yarn / Fibre
BCF Nylon Type 6 - 100% Recycled content
Yarn Manufacturer
Aquafil
Colour System
100% Solution Dyed
Soil/Stain Protection
Protekt
Preservative Protection
Intersept
Tufted Pile Weight
16 oz/yd 10%
Machine Gauge
12th Gauge
Stitches
44/10cm
Size Description
50cm X 50cm
Backing Structure
GlasBac
543 g/m 10%
11.2/in
Performance Specifications
Area of Use
Commercial - Heavy Duty
Stability - Delaminating
ASTM D3936 2.5lbs/in

ISO2551 0.1%
ISO/PAS 18984 <0.2%
Stability - Dimensional Stability
BS ISO 2551 0.2%

ISO 2551 0.1%
ISO/PAS 18984 < 0.2%
Stability - Tuft Bind
ASTM D1335 8.0lbs

ISO 4919 30 Newtons
AS/NZS 2111.15 >30 Newtons
Wear - Castor Chair
BS-EN 985 r 2.4

ISO 4918 r 2.4
Wear - Vetterman Drum
ISO 10361 ? 3 - 4
Colour Fastness to Light
AATCC 16E 4
ISO 105-B02 4 - 5
AS2001 1.4.21 . 3
Colour Fastness to Rubbing and Crocking
AATCC 165 4
ISO 105-X12 4-5
AS/NZS2111.19.1 >3
Colour Fastness to Water
AATCC 107 4
ISO105-E01 4-5
AS2001.4.21 3
Flammability - Methanamine Pill
BS6307/ISO 6925 Radius ? 7.6cm
Flammability - Radiant Panel
ASTM E648 Class 1

ISO 9239-1 B1
Flammability - Smoke density
ASTM E662 Density < 450

ISO 9239-1 Density 750 %.min
Antistatic
BS ISO 6356 2.2Kv

AATCC 134 < 3000 Volts
Antimicrobial Treatment
AATCC 171 Washed

AATCC174 Parts 2 & 3 99% reduction. No mold 7 Days
ASTME-2471 Complete Inhibition
Page 1 of 2
CONTENTS
AE310
Generic Tests
Acoustic - Nylon
Absorption Coefficient - NRC 0.0 - 0.2
Dynamic Loading
AS/NZS 2111.2 < 12.5% loss

ISO 2094 85%
Green Carpet (VOC)
ASTM D5116 Accredited

ISO 10580 Accredited
Static Loading
ISO 015/3415 Thickness after 60 mins recovery >85%

AS/NZS2111.13 < 6% Loss
Thermal Resistance
ASTM C518 R Value 0.5
Environmental Specifications
Recycled Content %
55-70
Other Environmental Claims
View Environmental Accreditations
Ingredients and Life Cycle Impacts
View our Environmental Product Declarations
End of Life
Carpet to Carpet Recycling
Technical Information
Maintenance
View recommended Interface Maintenance guidelines online
Reclamation
View details on our ReEntry Program
Warranty
15 Year Standard Warranty
Page 2 of 2
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
NOVEMBER 2014
WARRANTY, PERFORMANCE
AND CARE GUIDE
CONTENTS
INDEX
2 Your warranties at law
3 Your Norman Ellison warranties
5 Wool carpet warranty
7 Synthetic carpet warranty
10 Performance guide
13 Caring for your carpet
16 Stain guide for wool and wool blend carpets
19 Stain guide for synthetic carpets
ii
CONTENTS
At Norman Ellison, we know carpet. Weve been

making it since 1975 and you can be assured that
by choosing a Norman Ellison carpet, you are not
compromising on quality, style or value.
Our Norman Ellison Warranty, Performance and Care guide outlines what you
can expect from a Norman Ellison Carpet and what you need to know to keep
it looking its best and to protect your coverage under our Norman Ellison
warranties. For information on the performance rating for a specific carpet,
please refer to the sample label on that carpet. The Performance Guide on
page 10 gives you an indication of what each of these rating areas cover.
YOUR WARRANTIES AT LAW

We happily acknowledge and respect the terms of the New Zealand Consumer
Guarantees Act 1993 and Australian Consumer Law 2012. Our carpets come with
guarantees provided by the Consumer Guarantees Act and Australian Consumer
Law 2012 that cannot be excluded. Under Australian Consumer Law you are
entitled to a replacement or refund for a major failure and for compensation for
any other foreseeable loss or damage. You are also entitled to have the goods
repaired or replaced if the goods fail to be of acceptable quality and the failure
does not amount to a major failure.
A summary of your rights and remedies under the New Zealand Consumer
Guarantees Act can be found at the Ministry of Consumer Affairs website at
www.consumeraffairs.govt.nz. Further detail on Australian Consumer Law can
be found at www.consumerlaw.gov.au.
Your rights under the New Zealand Consumer Guarantees Act or Australian
Consumer Law commence from the date of purchase and may run for the life
of your carpet.
YOUR NORMAN ELLISON WARRANTIES

Norman Ellison also provides a number of express warranties (which are set
out below) in relation to its carpets. These warranties do not limit or affect your
entitlements under New Zealand or Australian consumer laws, including the
Consumer Guarantees Act and Australian Consumer Law 2012. You may have
additional rights under these laws than are provided for in the warranties below.
Under your Norman Ellison warranties, should a problem arise and we accept
that you have a valid warranty claim under the warranties set out in the booklet,
at our discretion, we will either:
Repair the carpet

Replace the carpet in the affected area
Provide a refund for the carpet in the affected area. The refund will
be based on a new carpet of the same or comparable type made by
Norman Ellison Carpets.
In the event of a problem

If you have a concern about your Norman Ellison carpet and would like to
make a claim under your Norman Ellison warranties (e.g. rather than under the
Consumer Guarantees Act or Australian Consumer Law), you should contact the
retailer who sold and installed your carpet. They will make an inspection and if
unable to remedy the issue, they will lodge a formal request to our Consumer
Services team to take this further. A member of the Consumer Services team
will be in touch to discuss the issue and arrange an inspection if required.
New Zealand
Australia
Phone 0800 222 473

7 Grayson Ave, Papatoetoe
P O Box 97 040, Manukau
Auckland 2241
Phone 1800 251 172

165-169 Lower Gibbes St
Chatswood, NSW 2067
P O Box 845, Willoughby, NSW 2068
Norman Ellison strives to comply with all of its obligations at law and you
are free to contact Norman Ellison or the retailer who sold and installed your
carpet, should you wish to make a claim under the Consumer Guarantees Act
or Australian Consumer Law 2012 in relation to your carpet.
CONTENTS
Performance Guide and Care Guide

The Performance Guide and Care Guide featured in this document contain
important information about your carpet. We recommend reading this
information carefully and following the guidelines provided. Failure to properly
maintain your carpet in accordance with the care guidelines may affect your
coverage under the Norman Ellison warranties and in some cases could result in
all or part of these warranties being voided, at Norman Ellisons sole discretion.
NORMAN ELLISON WARRANTIES

Warranties are extended to the original purchaser of the carpet and are not
transferable. The warranty is solely for the use of carpet in a private residence.
There are two separate warranties issued by Norman Ellison Carpets one for
synthetic carpets and one for wool carpets. Warranty conditions vary depending
on whether the carpet carries a Heavy Duty or Extra Heavy Duty grade from
ACCS (the Australian Carpets Classification Scheme).
Please note that carpets carrying our manufacturers grade only do not have
a specific warranty and you should refer to the Performance Guide rating label
for an indication of its expected performance.
Please check the sample label on the back of the carpet for information on the
specific grade and performance rating that applies.
WOOL CARPET WARRANTY
Abrasive Wear
Heavy duty
Extra heavy duty
7 years
10 years
Your carpet is protected against fibre loss during normal domestic wear.
Fibre Loss from abrasive wear is defined as actual loss of fibre, due to abrasion,
from the surface pile of the carpet. We warrant that your Norman Ellison carpet
will not experience fibre loss from abrasion by more than 10% under normal
domestic wear conditions.
Abrasive wear does not mean crushing or flattening of the carpet pile
in any area.
Please note that in areas exposed to extreme sunlight such as doorways, and
areas with floor to ceiling glass, wool carpets are subject to photo-degradation
and fibre loss may occur over time.
Exclusions to this warranty include:
Changes in carpet appearance caused from staining, soiling, fading

or furniture pressure.
Damage from tears, pulls, cuts or burns.

Pilling or shedding
Damage caused by pets
Damage from chairs with roller castors, carts with wheels, or damage
due to abuse by any athletic equipment such as roller skates, ski boots
or golf shoes. Exercise equipment such as cross-trainers, cycles and
weights need to be used with protective mats underneath.
5
CONTENTS
SYNTHETIC CARPET WARRANTY

Insect resistance
Heavy duty
Extra heavy duty
5 years
5 years
Stain (food and
beverage) Resistance
All Norman Ellison wool carpets are treated to deter insect and moth infestation.
Should a problem be reported within five years of purchase, we will repair,
replace or treat the affected area, providing the carpet has been properly
maintained, as set out in our care guide, and used for residential purposes in a
private household.
It is important to note that the insect deterrent chemical is embedded in the
carpet fibre and needs to be ingested by the insect to have an effect and stop
further spreading this will mean some fibre loss can occur. This treatment does
not stop insects from entering your home. To protect your carpet and help retain
your coverage under this Norman Ellison warranty, you should follow the Care
Guide provided in this booklet. In particular, thorough and regular vacuuming
around the skirting boards and under infrequently moved furniture will help
prevent infestation.
Failure to properly maintain these areas may affect this Norman Ellison
warranty, which, as a result, could be reduced or voided at Norman Ellisons
sole discretion.
Heavy duty
Extra heavy duty
10 years
15 years
We warrant that your Norman Ellison synthetic carpet will resist most common
household food and beverage stains that occur during normal residential use,
so long as:
You attend to all spills and stains promptly as per the recommended care
and cleaning procedures at the end of this booklet. If the affected area
remains unsatisfactory after you have tried these cleaning procedures,
then you must have the affected area of your carpet professionally cleaned.
If the affected area still remains unsatisfactory after the professional
cleaning, and you can provide proof of that cleaning, then we will
replace the affected area.
Note: No carpet is fully stain proof. There are some stains that are excluded
from this warranty and these include:
Non-food and non-beverage stains caused by substances such as cosmetics,

bleaches, inks etc.
Stains caused by substances that change or destroy the colour of the

carpet such as stains caused by dyes (such as clothing or food colouring),
bleaches, acne medications, drain cleaners and plant food.
Human or other pet stains (such as vomit, blood and faeces).

Colour change due to fading
7
CONTENTS
Exclusions to this warranty include:
Fade Resistance
Heavy duty
Extra heavy duty
10 years
15 years
Changes in carpet appearance caused from staining, soiling, fading

or furniture pressure.
Damage from tears, pulls, cuts or burns.

Norman Ellison Carpets warrants that your synthetic carpet will not display
Pilling or shedding
significant fading due to light exposure. If we determine that noticeable colour
Damage caused by pets
change due to u/v exposure has occurred we will repair or replace

the carpet as per our warranty conditions.
There are some exclusions to this fade resistance warranty:

Damage from chairs with roller castors, carts with wheels, or damage
due to abuse by any athletic equipment such as roller skates, ski boots
or golf shoes.
Changes in carpet colour resulting from external causes, such as spills

of household chemicals or improper cleaning.
Fading from food or beverages excluded from the stain warranty or from
Insect Resistance
Heavy duty
Extra heavy duty
10 years
15 years
the build-up of dry soil from foot traffic.
Changes in carpet colour due to air purifiers, photo-copiers or other

electronic equipment that may emit ozone in noticeable quantity.
Gradual fading over time from pesticides or cleaning agents,
Abrasive Wear
Heavy duty
Extra heavy duty
10 years
15 years
Your carpet is protected against fibre loss during normal domestic wear.
Fibre Loss from abrasive wear is defined as actual loss of fibre, due to abrasion,
from the surface pile of the carpet. We warrant that your Norman Ellison carpet
Norman Ellison warrants that your synthetic carpet, used for residential
purposes in a private household, will not require any chemical treatment
or application to guard against infestation from insects that can damage
your carpet within the period specified above.
Anti-static
Heavy duty
Extra heavy duty
10 years
15 years
Norman Ellison warrants that your synthetic carpet will not generate static
greater than 5.0 kilovolts which is the accepted standard for residential carpets
within the period specified above.
will not experience fibre loss from abrasion by more than 10% under normal
domestic wear conditions.
Abrasive wear does not mean crushing or flattening of the carpet pile
in any area.
9
CONTENTS
PERFORMANCE GUIDE
For a specific rating on each of the following performance characteristics, please
refer to the rating label on the back of the carpet sample.
Colour fastness
Solution-dyed nylon carpets have the colour locked into the fibre, protecting it
from fading. You should see no significant colour change with a solution-dyed
nylon carpet as a result of exposure to UV light or atmospheric contaminants.
Polypropylene and polyester carpets also enjoy the same level of colour fastness
as solution-dyed nylon carpet but some non-solution dyed synthetic carpets
may exhibit fading over time.
Wool is a natural textile and will exhibit some fading over time in areas
consistently exposed to sunlight. We strongly recommend the use of UV window
protection along with curtains, blinds, shades and awnings to reduce the impact
in highly exposed areas.
Stain Resistance
No carpet is completely stain-proof but a solution-dyed nylon carpet should
provide a good level of protection against stains from common household spills
and stains.
The unique scaly structure of wool fibre gives it a natural stain resistance.
Provided you attend promptly to spills and stains, most common household
spills should be able to be removed.
Please refer to the stain guide at the back of this booklet for advice on how to
treat stains on both wool and synthetic carpets.
Durability
Most synthetic carpets dont wear out, but lose their looks due to crushing,
matting of fibres, staining and from harsh treatment. A reasonable durability and
wear lifespan for Norman Ellison synthetic carpets, for residential use in a private
household, would be seven years for a heavy duty grade carpet and 10 years for
an extra-heavy duty carpet.
Wool is a tough natural fibre and exhibits excellent durability. Under normal
residential use conditions in a private household, Norman Ellison heavy duty
carpets would have a durability and wear lifespan of seven years for a heavy
duty grade carpet and 10 years for extra-heavy duty carpet.
Comfort
Synthetic carpets dont hold moisture but this also means they dont have the
ability to breathe or regulate the indoor air environment. They can become cool
10
to touch in winter and hot under your feet in summer. They can feel damp if
there is high humidity.
Wool has a unique ability to breathe controlling the humidity levels within
a room and keeping the air temperature more constant. Wool carpet feels dry
and warm to the touch in winter and dry and cool in summer.
Softness
Softness is a function of the thickness and style of yarn used, as well as the
density and style of carpet. Plush pile carpets which use straight fibres will feel
softer than a hard-twist cut pile, and loop pile carpets will vary depending on
the type of construction.
IMPORTANT CARPET CHARACTERISTICS

Carpet is a textile that exhibits particular characteristics you need to be aware
of before buying. These characteristics are an inherent feature of the carpet
itself, and are not manufacturing defects.
Permanent shading on cut pile carpets. Cut pile carpets, particularly plush pile
carpets, will develop lighter or darker patches over time. Known as shading,
puddling or watermarking, it is caused by the permanent bending of the
carpet pile fibres which then reflect the light differently. The extent to which
shading occurs cannot be accurately predicted or prevented and is most often
related to the location of use. It does not affect the wear or performance of the
carpet and is not recognised by Norman Ellison Carpets as a manufacturing flaw
or defect.
Supplied product colour and/or texture may vary from dye-lot to dye-lot and
from the supplied sample.
Fading. For floor areas that are exposed to strong sunlight, UV window
protection along with the use of curtains, blinds, shades and awnings will assist
in fade reduction.
Pattern matching. While our carpets have been manufactured to exacting
standards to minimise pattern distortions, the extensible nature of textile
products means that some distortion is likely. Even with special care during
installation, some irregularities may be visible, especially when viewing across
multiple-width installations.
Repetitive or excessive wear, for example from chairs with castor wheels,
will cause wear and damage, unless adequate protection is provided (such
as a plastic mat).
11
CONTENTS
CARING FOR YOUR CARPET

12
CONTENTS
CARING FOR YOUR CARPET
Dealing with spills and stains
No carpet is completely stain-proof. However, if you follow our simple

maintenance recommendations and stain removal guidelines, then you
can help ensure your carpet keeps its good looks for longer.
When spills occur it is important that they are cleaned up immediately.

Even though some carpet fibres have inbuilt stain resistant properties,
no carpet is immune from staining if spills are left untreated.
Routine maintenance
BEFORE using any recommend stain treatment or remedy, please make sure
you have contained the stain firmly blotting up any excess liquid spills with
a wad of clean paper towels and scraping up any solids.
A regular maintenance programme helps to remove soil before it can build up

and potentially damage carpet fibre and dull its appearance. Vacuuming should
be carried out at least once a week and more often in high traffic areas such as
hallways and entranceways.
Professional cleaning should be carried out when your carpet still looks dirty
after vacuuming and every two years at a minimum. You should consult a
professional cleaner for the best method of cleaning. Do-it-yourself carpet
shampoo machines are not recommended as the associated detergent products
can often leave a sticky residue which attracts soil to the fibre
and makes it become dirty more quickly.
And please NEVER rub or scrub wet carpet as this can cause permanent
damage to the pile.
Once you have taken action to remove the worst of the stain, please refer to the
appropriate stain guides on the following pages and use the six-step procedure
outlined here. Make sure the stain is dry before proceeding to the next step in
the order of recommended treatment.
Step 1 Test the recommended cleaning solution on a hidden piece of carpet

or carpet mat.
Place walk-off mats at all entrances and use carpet protectors under heavy
furniture and furniture with castor wheels. Chairs with roller wheels should have
protector mats underneath.
Step 2 Apply a small amount of the selected cleaning solution to a clean white
cloth and work in gently. Work from the edges of the spill to the centre
to prevent the spill from spreading.
If you have wool carpet, then you must vacuum regularly using your vacuum
nozzle along skirtings, underneath doorways and behind curtains and furniture,
in order to prevent insect damage.
Step 3 Continue using the recommended stain treatment as long as there

is a transfer of the spill to the cloth. You dont need to use the second
or third treatment suggestions if this first one works.
Step 4 Dab (dont drown) the affected area thoroughly with cold water
and blot up using a wad of paper towels until all of the solution
has been removed.
Step 5 Apply a thick layer of white paper towels and weigh it down with
a flat heavy object. Continue to change the paper towels as needed
till as much moisture is gone from the carpet as possible.
Step 6 When the carpet is completely dry, vacuum to restore the
pile texture.
14
15
CONTENTS
STAIN GUIDE FOR WOOL AND WOOL-RICH CARPETS

Code Cleaning agents / methods
1
Lukewarm water
2 One teaspoon of wool detergent with one teaspoon of white vinegar

and one litre of warm water.
Type of treatment
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Wine, beer, spirits
Bleach
12
Clear household disinfectant.
avalier Bremworth Carpet Stain Remover for DRY stains.

C
Use only on dry carpet.
Blood
Butter
Chill with ice cubes in a plastic bag. Pick or scrape off gum.
Candle wax
Mix 1/3 cup of white vinegar with 2/3 cup of water.
Chewing gum
Nail polish remover (should not contain lanolin).
Chocolate
Surgical alcohol.
Coffee
Cola & soft drinks
Cooking oil
Cream
Egg
12
Faeces
12
Floor wax
Fruit juice
Furniture polish
Gravy & sauces
Ink - ballpoint
Ink felt-tip
Lipstick
Milk
9 Place absorbent paper over wax and apply hot iron to paper.
Wax will melt and be absorbed by the paper.
16
STAIN REMOVAL GUIDE WOOL CARPET
10
Vacuum clean.
11
Mineral turpentine.
12
Seek assistance from a professional carpet cleaner.
CONTENTS 17
STAIN GUIDE FOR SYNTHETIC CARPETS
STAIN REMOVAL GUIDE WOOL CARPET

Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
10
Mustard
Nail polish
Hot water extraction, performed by a trained, qualified carpet care professional,

is recommended every two years to remove ingrained dirt that can damage
your carpet pile. With this method, a detergent solution is sprayed on the carpet
and removed by extracting the dirt and solution with a powerful vacuum from a
portable unit. A professional has been trained to use the equipment properly so
that the carpet will not be damaged. Additionally, the equipment used is much
more powerful than rental units available to you.
Oil & grease
Code Cleaning agents / methods
Paint (oil based)
Paint (acrylic)
Rust
12
Salad dressing
Lukewarm tap water
Shoe polish
Vinegar solution one cup vinegar to two cups water
Soot
11
Tar
12
6 Ammonia solution two tbsps. household ammonia to

one cup water
Tea
Tomato sauce
Urine (fresh)
Urine (old stain)
12
Vomit
Wine
Type of treatment
Mud
Dry cleaning fluid
Nail polish remover
3 Detergent mix two tsps. mild liquid detergent mixed

with two cups water
Cavalier Bremworth Dry Stain Remover
Professional clean advised
See overleaf for synthetic stain removal guide.
Cigarette damage: to remedy damage to wool carpet, just brush off the charred
tips with your fingers or a coin.
18
19
CONTENTS
STAIN REMOVAL GUIDE SYNTHETIC CARPET

Stain
Method
Mustard
Nail polish
Acne medication
1,3,6,5,4,8
Oil
Alcoholic beverages
3,6,5,4,7,8
Paint
Bleach
3,4,8
Blood
6,3,4 (cold), 7, 8
Candle Wax
Charcoal
Chewing Gum (freeze with ice, then chip away)
Plant food
Rust
3,5,4,7,8
2
1,3,7,8
3,6,4,7,8
3,6,5,4,7,8
5,3,4,7,8
2,1,8
Shoe polish
2,1,3,6,4,7,8
9,3,7,8
Soft drinks
3,6,5,4,7,8
1,8
Tar
1,7,8
Chocolate
3,5,4,7,8
Toothpaste
3,5,6,4,8
Coffee/tea with milk/sugar
3,5,4,7,8
Urine wet
3,6,5,4,8
2,1,3,6,5,4,7,8
Urine dry
3,4,5,6,8
1,3,8
Vomit
3,6,5,7,8
3,6,4,8
Wine
4,3,5,7
Cosmetics
Crayon
Food
Fruit juice
3,6,5,4,7,8
Furniture polish (water based)
3,4,1,6,7,8
Furniture polish (solvent based)
2,1,3,6,5,4,7,8
Grass
2,1,3,6,5,4,7,8
Grease
Ink
Iodine
Lipstick
1,3,4,8
Note: some spills contain chemicals that may discolour or even damage the
carpet fibre or dyes. If you have doubts about what caused the stain, and how
to remove it, please contact a professional carpet cleaner.
While this advice is offered in good faith, no responsibility is accepted for claims
arising from the recommended treatments.
2,1,3,6,5,4,7,8
1,3,6,5,4,8
2,1,3,6,5,4,7,8
Milk
1,3,6,5,4,8
Mud
3,4,8
20
21
CONTENTS
www.normanellison.co.nz
Norman Ellison Carpets Ltd
7 Grayson Ave, Papatoetoe,
PO Box 97040, Manukau, Auckland 2241
www.normanellison.com.au
Norman Ellison Carpets Ltd
165-169 Lower Gibbes St,
Chatswood, NSW 2067
P O Box 845, Willoughby, NSW 2068
CONTENTS
Carpet
Care
Manual
January 2013 Edition
CONTENTS
Contents
01
Planning - Cleaning and Maintenance PG3
Appearance Maintenance
Soil Prevention and Maintenance Routines
First Aid for Carpet

a) Water Based Spillages
b) Oil Based Spillages
c) Gum Removal
Daily Removal of Spots and Spills
02
Planning a Maintenance Program PG5
Daily Maintenance
Interim Maintenance
Periodic Maintenance
03
Maintenance Method PG8
Vacuum Equipment
Interim and Periodic Maintenance
a) Dry Extraction (low moisture absorbent compound)
b) Bonnet Cleaning
c) Encapsulation/Crystalline Shampoo Application
d) Hot Water Injection Extraction
e) Chemicals
04
Key Points to Remember PG10
01
Spot Cleaning & Solution Guide PG11
Daily Removal of Spots and Spills
02
Heathcare & Aged Care Spot Cleaning PG14
Contents & Appendices
Carpet Care Manual
Appendices
03 Maintenance Equipment
Recommendations PG16
CONTENTS
Carpet Care Manual

Introduction
This guide explains how Interface

products perform against traffic
and soil.
It describes the steps in developing
an economical and effective
maintenance plan which will
enhance the appearance and
extend the life of Interface products.
CONTENTS
01 Planning Cleaning
and Maintenance
With any Interface product investment, a planned and implemented maintenance program
is the key to ensuring maximum life of these products. Waiting until the carpet is overly soiled
may affect appearance retention.
Appearance maintenance
There are two key factors that will affect the appearance of Interface products after installation:

a) Flattening, matting or shading of the carpet fibre.
b) Soiling, change in colour and general staining of the carpet.
Carpet Care Manual
Guided by this plan, maintenance can be concentrated in the high traffic areas and
any areas that rapidly re-soil, with periodic all-over cleaning to prolong the useful life
of Interface products.
Maintaining the appearance of Interface products requires that:

a) Products selected are appropriate for their intended area of use.
b) Regular cleaning is carried out to prevent soiling, which may cause carpet fibres to
mat and bind together.
Most soil is transferred to the carpet from foot traffic. The use of an effective dirt barrier
matting will greatly reduce the rate of soiling. Dirt barrier matting should be installed for the
first three metres (minimum) of all external entrances, goods lifts, loading and off-loading
docks and adjoining hard areas. For more information contact an Interface Account Manager.
It is very important that the dirt barrier matting is maintained and serviced on a daily basis.
Once the dirt barrier matting is full of soil, it ceases to be effective. For further information
please refer to AS/NZS 3733: 1995 paragraph 2.24.
All concrete areas adjoining Interface products should be sealed with an appropriate
permanent resinous sealer which will prevent particles of sand, gravel or cement being
tracked onto the carpet. An epoxy or urethane sealer is recommended.
01 Planning - Cleaning and Maintenance
Soil prevention and maintenance routines
These sealed areas should be thoroughly cleaned daily, removing any visible soil and stains
by mopping with a neutral pH level detergent.
The use of an anti-soiling spray on Interface products is not recommended.
3
CONTENTS
Dirt barrier tiles should be

installed for the first three
metres (minimum) of all
external entrances, goods lifts,
loading and off-loading docks
and adjoining hard areas.
Carpet Care Manual

01 Planning - Cleaning and Maintenance
4
Note: In some products/colours.

If a replacement tile from
stock is used then expect to
see a difference in colour from
old to new until the carpet is
walked in.
First Aid for carpet

Prompt action using the Interface Carpet Spot Cleaning Kit assists in easy, complete removal
of most spots and stains. The following initial procedures should be applied to treat all
spillages and stains on your Interface products.
If the spill is liquid, blot up as much of the spill as possible with a clean white cloth. If the spill
is semi-solid, scrape with a spoon or spatula and then blot with a damp sponge. Work from the
edge of the spot towards the centre. Never rub a wet spill; this will only spread the problem.
If the spill proves difficult to remove remember that the advantage of using Interface Modular
Carpet Tile is that the offending tile can be replaced with a tile from your shelf stock.
Water based spillages
After following the above procedure, promptly remove the remaining residue with a small
amount of Dry Absorbent Compound and a hand brush. Sprinkle the Compound over the
spot and use a hand brush to gently massage the Compound into the stain. Allow the area to
dry (15-30 minutes) and then brush the Compound again. If the Compound seems to stick
to the carpet, brush again, then vacuum. Repeat the application if necessary. Do not rub the
brush aggressively on the spot.
For difficult to remove coffee, tea, juice or soft drink stains use Mr No Marks in the
following manner:
For the removal of oily stains

such as paint, grease, tar,
asphalt, etc., a solvent based
spotter such as Fabrisolv,
is recommended.
1. Pre - Test a small inconspicuous area for possible discolouration prior to use.
2. Pre - Clean the area using a small amount of Mr No Marks and water.
3. Blot dry with an absorbent cloth or paper towel.
4. Repeat the procedure if necessary.
Oil based spillages

For the removal of oily stains such as paint, grease, tar, asphalt, etc., solvent based spotter
such as Fabrisolv, is recommended. Caution should always be taken when using any type of
penetrating spotter.
First check colourfastness. Test on the carpet in an inconspicuous area by applying the
solution on to a white cloth and gently pressing onto the carpet. Check the cloth, if there is
any evidence of dye transfer to the cloth, do not continue.
Apply solvent based spotter sparingly to a clean white cloth, then apply the cloth to the spot.
Again do not rub, it will only spread the problem. Wipe gently from the outer edge towards
the centre of the spot. Repeat procedure until the spot has been removed. Place a clean
white towel or absorbent tissue over the treated area until dry. Follow with an application of
Dry Absorbent Compound.
4
CONTENTS
To remove chewing gum, use the following steps:

1. Apply Fabrisolv directly to the chewing gum.
2. Leave for several minutes to allow Fabrisolv to soften chewing gum.
3. Remove as much gum as possible using a paint scraper or a knife.
4. Apply a small amount of Fabrisolv to a clean white cloth.
5. Working from outside in, remove any residue of the chewing gum.
6. Rinse well with clean water.
Daily removal of spots and spills

Ensure that the Interface Carpet Spot Cleaning Kit is available at all times to enable quick
treatment of all spillages. Any stain or spot not removed by an approved method, is to be noted
in a daily log, together with details of the methods used in the attempted removal for future
reference. If unattended, these stains become difficult to remove and will attract more soil.
For more information on removal of spots and spills, please see Appendices 1: Spot Cleaning
and Solution Guide on page 11 of this manual.
02 Planning a Maintenance Program

Carpet can only perform if it is maintained properly. Failure to do so will adversely affect the
life and appearance of Interface products.
After spot cleaning it is

recommended to remove any
residual detergent by rinsing
the area with clean water.
This will help prevent rapid
resoiling of the cleaned area.
Carpet Care Manual
Gum removal
A maintenance program is a comprehensive plan which maps out the future maintenance
schedules for the product. It provides a system which will maintain the appearance retention
for the life of the investment. The maintenance program is developed around the traffic
volume and soiling rates of the different areas throughout the installation. (See Diagram 1
and Table 1.
Frequencies need to be established in consultation with the Interface Accredited Maintenance
Network. Improper techniques and frequencies can risk voiding the end users warranty.
When developing a maintenance program each facility is different therefore all programs must
be customised accordingly. Interface offers a comprehensive maintenance planning service via
the Accredited Maintenance Network please contact your Interface Account Manager or the
24/7 Emergency Cleaning & Maintenance helpline: 1800 785 277 for details.
5
CONTENTS
Carpet can only perform if it is

maintained properly. Failure
to do so will adversely affect
the life and appearance of
Interface products.
Daily maintenance
Daily maintenance involves day to day vacuuming and carpet spotting utilising the
Interface Carpet Spot Cleaning Kit. Heavy traffic areas may require more regular cleaning.
Vacuuming should involve recommended equipment, using overlapping passes of the area
at a constant speed.
Interim maintenance
Carpet Care Manual

6
Interim maintenance is carried out on a weekly, monthly basis or on demand. It will

usually involve an interim cleaning method as required. The maintenance plan will
stipulate which areas need to be cleaned. Usually this would be the heavy and medium
traffic areas of your installation. The mix of interim and periodic cleaning will vary with
each maintenance program.
Periodic maintenance
An integral part of your maintenance program should be a Periodic Clean, which
encompasses the entire installation. It is important that on a quarterly, half yearly and/or an
annual basis your whole installation is cleaned utilising a Hot Water Injection and Extraction
method. This ensures that the appearance of your Interface products are kept uniform. For
more information, please call the Interface Customer support on 1800 008 101.
Diagram 1: Example of a graded traffic volume

plan for a maintenance program.
6
CONTENTS
Location
Domestic
Executive offices
Corridors and foyers,

ground floor shops,
hotel lounges,
kindergartens and
school classrooms
Light
Medium
Heavy
Very Heavy
Suggested Frequency
Minimum
Frequency
Full Vacuum
2 times per week
Weekly
Spot and stain removal
Daily ASAP
Daily ASAP
Interim clean
Every 6 months
Every 18 months
Periodic corrective or restorative clean
Yearly
Every 2 years
Full vacuum
2 times per week
Weekly
Daily ASAP
Daily ASAP
Interim clean
Every 9 months
Every 18 months
Every 18 months
Every 36 months
Full Vacuum
3 times per week
2 times per week
Daily ASAP
Daily ASAP
Interim clean
Every 6 months
Yearly
Yearly
Every 2 years
Full Vacuum
Daily
3 times per week
Daily ASAP
Daily ASAP
Interim clean
Every 3 months
Every 6 months
Every 6 months
Yearly
Full Vacuum
Daily
Daily
Daily ASAP
Daily ASAP
Interim clean
Monthly
Every 2 months
Every 3 months
Every 6 months
Carpet appearance level: Planned program

Planned maintenance program:

Traffic areas and spots receive the most attention.
Appearance will be good every day.

Carpet life is extended.
Restaurants, schools,
corridors and
hospital public areas
Light
Suggested
Maintenance Program
Carpet Care Manual
Clerical offices,
hospital wards,
and hotel bedrooms
Usual Traffic
Volume
Diagram 2: Carpet appearance level utilising an unplanned

maintenance program.
Carpet appearance level: Unplanned

Unplanned crisis cleaning:

Carpet is allowed to soil excessively before cleaning.
Appearance is often dingy.

It begins to ugly out before it wears out.
Diagram 3: Carpet appearance level utilising an unplanned

maintenance program.
7
CONTENTS
Carpet Care Manual
To be able to implement the

maintenance program,
access to the correct equipment
is essential.
03 Maintenance method
Note: Rotary bonnet and brush

methods are not recommended
for use on Interface products.
Cylindrical brush machinery
should only be used to agitate
dry powder and prespray.
Vacuum equipment
To be able to implement the maintenance program access to the correct equipment is

essential. Cleaning Interface products with incorrect, non-approved methods, equipment and
chemicals may result in damage to the product and invalidation of the warranties.
It is recommended that the following equipment be utilised when vacuuming Interface product:
03 Maintenance Method
Commercial canister-type vacuum with power head containing a rotating cylindrical

brush powered by an electric motor.
Commercial top loading upright vacuum with twin motor and rotating
cylindrical brush.
Both vacuums must have tools that can access edges and hidden areas. A requirement for
vacuum filtration systems according to Australian Standard AS/NZS 3733-1995 is that
vacuums must be capable of filtering 97.5% of dust to 0.5 microns. Vacuum bags should be
disposable. (See page 16 for more information on maintenance equipment recommendations.)
Note: SuperFlor S should be vacuumed with a suction only vacuum.
Interim and periodic maintenance method

The following cleaning procedures recommended for use on Interface products should be
carried out by trained accredited operators.
a) Dry extraction (Low Moisture Absorbent Compound) (Interim)
Dry extraction involves massaging a low moisture absorbent compound into the carpet
surface to remove soil and stains. Residual compound is then vacuumed from the carpet pile.
Method:
1. Thoroughly pile lift and vacuum carpet.
2. Spread the Dry Absorbent Compound as per manufacturers instructions.
3. Brush in the Compound as per manufacturers instructions.
4. Vacuum the Compound residue from the carpet.
5. Hot water extraction is recommended approximately once a year in conjunction with

this systemor as specified by your carpet maintenance plan.
8
CONTENTS
NOTE: Bonnet cleaning is NOT

recommended for either interim
or periodic maintenance.
b) Encapsulation / Crystalline Shampoo Application (Interim)

The encapsulation/crystalline shampoo method of maintenance is a low-moisture procedure
similar in some respects to the dry extraction method. Benefits include faster access to the
area than with hot water extraction and reduced drying times.
Preparation should always include vacuuming and pile lifting before applying the
Encapsulation/Crystalline Shampoo using an electric sprayer, a simple pump-up garden
type sprayer. The carpet pile is then gently brushed so the solution is applied to all the fibres
whilst dislodging and dispersing any accumulated soil.
Time should be allowed for the solution to dry and form the encapsulating crystalline
formations around the fibre which effectively trap any soils and other contaminants.
Drying time will vary according to several factors including humidity, air flow and ambient
temperature, but it can be expected to be anything from 60 minutes. Once it is dry the area
can be vacuum cleaned and pile lifted.
c) Bonnet Cleaning
NOTE: Bonnet cleaning is not recommended and may void all warranties.
Note: Rotary bonnet and brush
methods are not recommended
for use on Interface products.
Cylindrical brush machinery
should only be used to agitate
dry powder and prespray.
d) Hot water injection and extraction (Interim/Periodic)

Hot Water Injection and Extraction involves a pre-spraying of an approved chemical (such as,
Fabripower Plus) into the carpet and then extracting it with clean hot water utilising approved
equipment and methods. For corrective or restorative cleaning, it is recommended that a
trained and accredited Carpet Maintenance Technician perform this task. To reduce interior
noise levels during cleaning it is recommended that a truck mounted extraction unit be
utilised. Mechanical air movers should be used to aid the drying process.
Carpet Care Manual
Note: The recommended

equipment and methods used
must not leave more than 30
grams of residual moisture per
tile immediately after cleaning.
Method:
Pre-spray carpet with an approved Extraction Pre-Spray. Operate the floor wand or self
contained extractor by engaging the solution valve, applying clean hot water only. Pull
equipment towards the operator for 1m1.5m before releasing the solution valve.
In cases of highly soiled areas the prespray detergent may require mechanical agitation
with a cylindrical brush machine.
03 Maintenance Method
Cover the same area 23 times with the solution valve off to ensure as much moisture
as possible is removed from the carpet. Overlap approximately 50mm and proceed on
next section of untreated carpet. Place drying fans on wet areas during cleaning and
allow the carpet to completely dry before reintroducing foot traffic. Failure to do so will
result in rapid resoiling and damage to the carpet fibre.
9
CONTENTS
Technical specifications on
equipment and chemicals are
available from an Interface
Account Manager or the 24/7
Emergency Cleaning
& Maintenance helpline:
1800 785 277.
e) Chemicals
It is essential to realise that carpets are chemically sensitive fabrics which could be damaged
by non-recommended chemicals. Use only approved chemicals for pre-spray or spotting on
an as required basis. The Interface Carpet Spot Cleaning Kit is recommended for day to day
spot cleaning. For spotting and pre-spray the pH should be between 4.5 and 8.5.
Anti-static treatments, optical brighteners, carpet protection chemicals and overly aggressive
solvent based cleaners are not recommended for Interface products. Refer to AS/NZS
3733:1995 section 3. If in doubt, please call Interface Customer Support on 1800 008 101.
Technical specifications on equipment and chemicals are available from an Interface Account
Manager, or the 24/7 Emergency Cleaning & Maintenance helpline: 1800 785 277.
Carpet Care Manual
04 Key Points to Remember

Walk-Off Areas
One of the most effective preventative maintenance steps is a dirt barrier matting area at
entryways, exits and any areas adjacent to hard surfaces. Dirt barrier matting areas should be
vacuumed daily or as needed.
Vacuuming
Must be done slowly and methodically with a commercial upright, dual motor vacuum with a
cylindrical brush or as outlined in section 3.
Pile lifting
04 Key Points to Remember
Regular pile lifting with a motorised commercial pile lifter keeps the fibre standing upright
and separated. In addition to alleviating matting, this procedure will make the vacuuming
more effective. Soil is always easier to remove dry than wet.
Spotting
Addressing spots immediately can lower the frequency at which overall cleaning is needed.
Low moisture
When general cleaning becomes necessary, use as little water as possible.
Traffic
Carpet should be completely dry before reintroducing traffic. Failure to do so will result in
rapid re-soiling and damage to the carpet fibre.
10
10
CONTENTS
Appendices
Spot Problem
Mr No Marks
Carpet
Fabrisolve
Master
Fabrisan
Dry
Powder
01 Spot Cleaning and

Solution Guide
Ice Cream
For the following Spot Problems, please try solution 1 first, before trying
solution 2. If some staining remains, please try solution 3.
Latex Adhesive
Lollies
Lotion
Ink
Iodine
Jelly
Dry Powder may be used as a quick, dry, low odour alternative.
** For these spot problems, vacuum first and then follow the solutions suggested.
Adhesives
Fabrisan
Dry
Powder
Animal Stains
Asphalt
Berries
Blood
Use
Medizyme 1st
Butter
*
2
2
Candle Wax
Carbon Black **
1
1
Charcoal
Chewing Gum
1
Use Beta-Off
1
*
1
Lipstick
Make Up
Marker - Permanent
Mascara
Milk
Mud
Mustard
Nail Polish
Oil - Cooking
Oil - Motor
Paint - Latex
Paint - Oil
Peanut Butter
Perfume
Play-Doh
Potting Soil
*
2
Pudding
Coffee
Rust
Cola
Salad Dressing
Copier Toner **
Sauces
Cordial
Shampoo
Correction Fluid
Crayon
Shoe Polish
Shortening
*
*
Cream
Soap
Detergent
Soft Drinks
Dirt
Soya Sauce
Dishwashing Liquid
Spaghetti Sauce
Dye
Tar
Egg
Tea
Fat
Tobacco Juice
Tomato Juice
Tomato Sauce
Tooth Paste
Faeces
Food Stains - Greasy
Fruit & Fruit juice
Furniture Polish
Glue - Water Base
Glue - Solvent Base
Urine
Appendices 01 Spot Cleaning and Solution Guide
Cement **
Carpet Care Manual
Spot Problem
Mr No Marks
Carpet
Fabrisolve
Master
Vaseline
Vomit
Water Stains
*
*
Grape Juice
Grass Stain
Wine
Gravy
Yellowing
*
*
11
CONTENTS
Carpet Care Manual

Instructions for Whiteley spot cleaners:
Clean up all spills promptly before a spill becomes a permanent stain.
Remove excess soil or liquid from the carpet. For soil, gently scrape away surface spill with
a spatula or knife, and for liquid spills dab area with an absorbent colourfast cloth.
Where possible try to identify the type of stain; look, feel and smell.
Always pre-test the spotter in a small inconspicuous area before using. This is
to determine if the product is going to have any adverse effects on the surface.
Apply spotter with a clean white cloth and gently dab the stain working from the outside
towards the centre.
For deep stains apply spotter directly to the carpet. DO NOT over-wet the carpet.
Rinse the area with water after the stain has been removed.
Repeat steps for stubborn stains.
Restore the carpet pile to its original shape by combing the carpet.
Mr No Marks Carpet Master

1. R
emove loose dirt or lift off as much of the spilt material as possible. If a wet spill, blot
the affected area with a clean colourfast cloth or absorbent towel. Blot from the outer
edge of the stain towards the centre. Do not scrub.
2. S
pray affected area with a light foam. Wait a few moments and then gently
rub with a clean, colourfast damp cloth. Rinse cloth and repeat until mark
is removed from the carpet. (Do not overwet the carpet.)
3. Rinse well with clean water to remove detergent residue and allow to dry.
Fabrisolv
12
1. A
pply undiluted directly to the stain (use sparingly and avoid product penetrating to
carpet tile backing.)
2. U
sing a small soft brush or cloth lightly scrub the spot starting from the outside and
working towards the centre.
3. A
bsorb as much Fabrisolv as possible from the surface using an
absorbent cloth.
CONTENTS
12
1. Remove as much excess soil as possible.
2. Apply undiluted FABRISAN directly to the soiled area using a trigger spray.
3. Gently work FABRISAN into the carpet pile.
4. Remove excess with blotting cloth.
Carpet Care Manual
Fabrisan
Note:
The hot water extraction machine should use clean hot water of room temperature or no
more than 45C and the tiles should be left with no more than 30 grams of residual
moisture after cleaning.
For best results, use promptly after spot occurs. If unsuccessful, refer to relevant carpet care
and cleaning guide or call Whiteley free call number 1800 833 566.
Stubborn stains may require the services of a professional carpet cleaner. Please make sure to
use protective gear when encountering excess biological contamination and/or accumulation.
Avoid overuse or careless excess spray as irritation may occur.
Refer to Technical Bulletin/Material Safety Data Sheet at www.whiteley.com.au
Interface recommend utilising cleaning technicians accredited with the National Upholstery
and Carpet Cleaners Association. For your nearest technician call the Interface 24/7
Hot Line 1800 785 277.
For hot water extraction prespray use FABRIPOWER PLUS. This should be applied to
the carpet with a pressure spray unit then rinsed from the carpet with a hot water
extraction machine.
13
CONTENTS
02 Healthcare and Aged Care

Spot Cleaning
Health and Aged Care Facilities can impose additional demands upon cleaning and
maintenance of carpets. However high performance Interface carpets combined with an
appropriate spot cleaning response can ensure carpet remains attractive and functional.
Urine
Carpet Care Manual
For successful cleaning, urine needs to be cleaned up at the first possible moment and not
allowed to dry onto the carpet.
New Urine Spill

1. With a clean white towel mop up as much of the spill as possible.
2. Utilise a hot water extraction unit using clean warm water only.
3. Go over the spill by applying water on the backstroke of the wand and vacuum only on the
forward stroke.
4. Apply Fabrisan Carpet Deodorant & Sanitiser to the effected area.
5. When dry thoroughly vacuum the area with a twin motor upright vacuum.
Old Urine Spill

Appendices 02 Heathcare and Aged Care Spot Cleaning
14
1. Pre vacuum the area.

2. Tend to heavy spots with appropriate spot cleaner. (Refer to Spot Cleaning & Solution
guide on page 11.)
3. Apply pre-spray of Fabripower Plus and agitate into the carpet surface.
4. Utilise a hot water extraction unit using clean warm water only.
5. Go over the spill by applying water on the backstroke of the wand and vacuum only on the
forward stroke. (For heavy urine staining a truck mounted unit or portable with 100psi
pump is recommended.)
6. Apply Fabrisan Carpet Deodorant & Sanitiser to the effected area.
7. When dry thoroughly vacuum with a twin motor upright vacuum.
8. Heavily soiled areas may require repeat applications.
14
CONTENTS
Note: If the spill proves difficult

to remove remember that the
advantage of using Interface
modular carpet tile is that the
offending tile can be replaced
with a tile your shelf stock.
Yellowing
If the area is not rinsed clean while the spill is new there may be some penetration of
urine into the yarn. Once this has occurred, and the spill dries, there may be some residue
yellowing of the fibre that cannot be successfully removed.
Odour
Uric Acid Crystals and Enzymes should be cleaned from the carpet using Fabrisan.
Blood
1. With a clean white towel mop up as much of the spill as possible.
Carpet Care Manual
Note: In some products/colours.

If a replacement tile from
stock is used then expect to
see a difference in colour from
old to new until the carpet is
walked in.
Once urine has dried it forms Uric Acid Crystals and other salts which become the major
source of urine odour. Moisture is attracted to the crystals and salts which then gives support
to bacterial activity. It is the off gassing of bacteria and enzymes that create the odours that
are associated with urine spills.
2. Apply Whiteley Medizyme enzyme spotter to the spill using a clean white cloth.
3. Dab the stain working from the outside to the centre.
4. Rinse the area thoroughly with clean water and a small amount of Mr No Marks.
6. When complete, rinse the area with clean water.
Vomit and Faeces
2. Apply Whiteley Medizyme enzyme spotter to the spill using a clean white cloth.
4. Then apply Mr No Marks with a clean white cloth.
6. Rinse the area thoroughly with clean water.
Appendices 02 Heathcare and Aged Care Spot Cleaning
1. Using a spatula or flat knife scrape up as much of the spill as possible.
15
CONTENTS
Mercurochrome - Iodine
1. With a clean white cloth mop up as much of the spill as possible.
2. Apply Whiteley Beta-Off.
3. Dab the stain with a clean white cloth from the outside to the centre.
4. Rinse the area thoroughly with clean water and a small amount of Mr No Marks.
Medications
Carpet Care Manual
1. Use spotters in the following order until stain is removed

a) Mr No Marks
b) Medizyme
2. When stain is removed rinse the area thoroughly with clean water.
03 Maintenance Equipment
Recommendations
Appendices 03 Maintenance Equipment Recommendations
Using the right equipment is as important as using the right cleaning solutions and the best
techniques. The following guidelines provide the technical specifications for essential carpet
maintenance equipment.
Note: Top-loading dust

bag machines are strongly
recommended.
Note: Battery powered vacuum

cleaners are not recommended.
Note: For Healthcare

situations, use machines with a
65 or lower DBA rating.
Note: Back pack style vacuums

are not recommended.
16
Vacuum (for twin motor uprights)

Power
8 Amp
Filtration
Down to 0.3 microns or lower
Vacuum
60 water or better @ 90+ cfm
Brush
Toothed belt drive preferred
Brush speed 2,500 3,500 Rpm
Brush diameter 2H x 3H
Brush height adjustment essential;

self-adjusting design preferred
Working Width
14 18
Dust Bag Capacity
300 400 cubic inches
16
CONTENTS
Note: Battery operated

equipment is not recommended.
Pile Lifting Machines

Power Requirements
Drive Motor
1/2 Horsepower
Vacuum Motor
1 1/2 1 3/4 Horsepower
Brush Width Approximately 100mm; Spirals, total width 400mm

Vegetable Fill or Nylon
Brush Adjustment
Self Levelling
Power Requirements
10 15 Amps 220 240 Volts
Vacuum Motor
1500 Watt
Vacuum Type
3 Stage by-pass
Vacuum Shoe
300mm 500mm
Water Lift
2.5m 3.5m At 100 CFM
Fluid Delivery
2 Litres/Minute at 50 100 PSI
Solution Tanks
15 Litres Upwards for both solution & Recovery
Brush Motor
90 Watt 1/8 Horse Power
Brush Width
250mm 450mm with 4v-Shaped rows of Nylon Bristles
Power Requirements
2 8 Amps 220/240 Volts
Motor
200 Watt
2 Brush System
Contra Rotating
Brush Width
250mm 500mm
Brush Speed
400 Rpm
Crystalline Shampoo Systems Dry Extractor and Crystalline Applicator

Power
2 8 Amps
Width
12 22
Brushes
(2)10 20
Brush Speed
400 Rpm
Appendices 03 Maintenance Equipment Recommendations
Extraction Compound Application Machines
Carpet Care Manual
Hot Water Extraction Machines
17
CONTENTS
As part of Interfaces Mission Zero promise to eliminate any negative impact

on the environment by 2020, we always consider the environment impact
of every creative, manufacturing and building decision. This sample book is
printed on recycled paper and with soy based ink. Twenty four virgin trees
were saved from our use of 1725kg of recycled paper in the production of
5000 sample books. Energy intensity also decreased and greenhouse gases
were reduced. The other reductions came from waste water and solid waste.
Through our InterCircle sample reclamation program, we help keep sample
materials out of landfill by re-using them until it is time to recycle these
sample materials.
www.interface.com
South East Asia
Interface Asia
tel: 65-6478 1510
www.interface.com
Japan
Interface Japan
tel: 81-3-5733 5211
www.interface.com
Beijing Studio
Interface China
tel: 86-10-6590 7810
www.interface.com.cn
Hongkong Studio
Interface China
tel: 852-2802 0838
Shanghai Studio
Interface China
tel: 86-21-6340 3868
Australia
Interface Australia
local toll free: 1800 008 101
www.interface.com
01/2013
18
CONTENTS
FLOATING FLOORS MAINTENANCE GUIDE
Your Embelton Floating Floor is designed with low

maintenance in mind. Follow these simple steps to
achieve many years of enjoyment from your floor.
Preventative Care Tips

In areas of excessive traffic and wear, please make use of

runners or area rugs.
Use felt protectors under heavy pieces of furniture and chairs.
se protective mats at all exterior entrances. Do not use rubberU

based furniture or mats as the rubber may leach into the floor.
piked heels or shoes in need of repair can severely damage your

S
floor.
Keep animal nails trimmed to prevent excess scratching.
Repair
Damaged Boards
If part of your Embelton Floating Floor gets damaged, it can be
replaced. Flooring can be unclicked and re-laid with new boards
of the same colour and style (please note this is not possible with
floating floors which are stuck directly to surface below).
Repairing Scratches
Embelton recommends the following repair accessories:

For darker timbers, we recommend Gilly Stephensons Scratch

Cover for dark wood floors
For lighter timbers, we recommend Gilly Stephensons Orange

Oil for pale wood floors
rotect your floor by using a dolly for moving furniture

P
or appliances. Try not to slide or roll across the floor.
lternatively, consult your dealer for a colour matched crayonA

type filler stick, designed for use on UV-finished wood floors
aintain relative humidity levels between 30% and 70%

M
(particularly important for Bamboo Flooring, see additional note
below)
Lightly applied nail polish remover will also remove most stains.
All doorways and adjoining rooms should have expansion joints.
Regular Maintenance Tips
Please contact Embelton Flooring prior to any major rectification.
Bamboo Flooring - Maintaining Relative

Humidity in the Internal Environment:
Sweep or vacuum as often as necessary to remove any loose dirt

or grit before it can scratch the floor.
Use a slightly damp mop only avoid excessive amounts of

water. Steam mops must not be used.
To prevent shrinkage in bamboo floors during hot weather, which can

affect the floors visual appearance, consider the useful tips below to
help maintain relative humidity between 30-70%.
il soaps, wax, liquid or other household products may affect

O
your coating and should be avoided.
1.
Use an atomiser (mist spray) at regular intervals during the day.
2.
Fill a vase or sink with water when leaving your home for an
extended period of time.
3.
Keep blinds and curtains closed where possible.
Restoration Sanding and Re-coating

Some floating floors can be sanded and re-coated with a polyurethane
or water-based coating to restore the appearance of the floor. Please
consult your dealer or a flooring contractor for advice. Sanding and
re-coating of any Embelton Floating Floor should only ever be carried
out by a professional flooring contractor.
It is essential that Embelton Flooring is contacted prior to any sanding
or re-coating process.
Laminate
Laminate flooring is not a natural product, and cannot be sanded and
re-coated under any circumstances.
Bamboo
Bamboo can be re-coated after a number of years to restore
its original finish, although please note that re-sanding is not
encouraged.
Engineered Timber Veneer (<1mm veneer)

Not recommended for sanding and re-coating as the veneer is very
thin, however the product can withstand a very light sanding for recoating.
Engineered Timber (3-4mm veneer)

Engineered Timber can be sanded a re-coated a maximum of
2-3 times.
CONTENTS
EMBELTON FLOATING FLOORS
Warranty Provider
25 Year Residential Warranty

This warranty relates to Embeltons engineered timber, bamboo and laminate flooring ranges.
GP Embelton & Co Pty Ltd

147-149 Bakers Road (PO Box 207),
Coburg VIC 3058 Australia
T: +61 3 9353 4811
E: gpevic@embelton.com
About this warranty
Product thought to be defective by the installer should be returned to

your dealer for inspection and possible replacement prior to installation.
The benefits to the consumer under the warranty are in addition to other Installation implies acceptance of the appearance-related claims,
rights and remedies of the consumer under a law in relation to the goods relating to features visible at purchase, once the products are installed.
or services to which the warranty relates.
If a flooring product from Embelton should fail to meet the Terms of the
Our goods come with guarantees that cannot be excluded under the
Warranty, G P Embelton & Co. Pty Ltd and the manufacturer, at its option,
Australian Consumer Law. You are entitled to a replacement or refund
will either supply a replacement product from the current range, parts
for a major failure and for compensation for any other reasonably
to repair or replace the defective product, or refund the purchase price
foreseeable loss or damage. You are also entitled to have the goods
of the defective product prorated over the remaining life of this limited
repaired or replaced if the goods fail to be of acceptable quality and the warranty. A minimum of 10% of the total installed surface area must be
failure does not amount to major failure.
affected for the warranty to apply.
All expenses related to warranty claims are the responsibility of the
consumer making the warranty claim.
The original purchaser of Embelton flooring in Australia is offered the
following warranties, effective for purchases made after 1st June 2010.
This warranty is exclusive. It covers the repair or replacement of

defective materials only. It does not cover mouldings or accessories. It
does not cover labour costs. Installation of the replacement products
will be at the buyers expense. The above remedy is the customers only
and is an exclusive remedy for claims under this warranty.
Please note this product is warranted for indoor use only, and is not
transferrable in the event of a property sale. Embelton Floating Floors
installed in rental properties are covered under Embeltons 10 year
commercial warranty, not this 25 year residential warranty.
Conditions
25-Year limited surface warranty
The manufacturer warrants to the original purchaser that the top

surface layer will not wear through under normal conditions of wear and
tear, for a period of twenty-five years from the date of purchase.
The covered person must provide proof of date of purchase, original

purchase price and that he/she is the original purchaser. He/she
must also demonstrate the floor is at the original installation site
At all times between purchase and installation, the flooring must

be properly stored according to installation instructions.
This warranty applies to interior residential construction only.
The flooring must be installed in accordance with the

manufacturers installation instructions. Relative humidity in the
area of use must be maintained within a range of 30% to 70%.
Room temperature of 15-30 degrees Celsius is recommended.
Embelton Floating Floors must be maintained in accordance with

the manufacturers recommendations.
The manufacturer must receive written notice within 30 days

after discovery of any claimed defect or failure covered under this
warranty. The manufacturer must be given 60 days following notice
to inspect the product to confirm any failure. Written notice should
be sent to G P Embelton & Co. Pty Ltd. The manufacturer or its
representatives must be given the opportunity to inspect the floor
prior to any repair or alteration.
The warranty will be made void if unusual man-made or natural

disasters, including leaking or broken plumbing, fire, flood,
earthquake or standing water occur during or after installation.
Gloss reduction and scratches caused by regular traffic are not

considered wear through and are not covered by this warranty. The
warranty becomes effective on the date of purchase.
The manufacturer will honour claims under this warranty, only if all of
the following conditions are satisfied:
25-Year structural integrity warranty

The manufacturer warrants its product in its original manufactured
condition to be free from defects in material and workmanship,
including dimension, lamination and assembly (may not apply to special
or non-standard grade specifications, as advised at the time of sale).
Notes
Embelton Floating Floors must be laid indoors in suitable areas. While
they are tough and durable, they are not appropriate for outdoors or
humid spaces such as bathrooms and saunas. As such, this warranty
does not cover floors that are laid in unsuitable areas.
As a natural product, Embelton Floating Floors will continue to expand

and contract during normal seasonal temperatures and humidity

changes. The product, when properly installed, may experience slight
expansion, contraction and separation between boards, which is
normal. If minor separation does occur, it is not covered by this warranty.
Expansion gaps should be installed as required.

Minor Checking is a natural occurence in many timbers. If less than 5%
of boards are affected by checking, this is regarded as a natural process
and will not be covered in this warranty.
27/08/2014
Heavy objects and furniture such as bookcases, billiard tables or

kitchen units should not be situated on any floating installation.
This can lead to the floor failing to respond to contraction and
expansion, which can cause squeaking and possible failure.
Correctly installed expansion gaps. PLease see the note below
regarding Embelton expansion gaps.
CONTENTS

The Importance of Expansion Gaps

Expansion Gaps are essential as a floating floor must be allowed to
move as a raft. If the raft is too big for the space in which it is laid,
the floor has nowhere to move, and will potentially result in cupping,
peaking or gapping. Floors laid without an appropriate expansion gap
will not be covered under warranty.

Internal Expansions Gaps any installation exceeding 8 metres

(6 metres for bamboo) in width or length will require an internal
expansion gap using a Z-Profile or T-moulding. if the floor is bigger
than this, it will have too much weight and not be able to move as
designed.
Maintenance Guide
Your Embelton Floating Floor is designed with low maintenance in mind.
Follow these simple steps to achieve many years of enjoyment from your
floor.
Perimeter Expansion Gaps should be a minimum of 10-15mm

for laminate floors, and 12-15mm for timber and bamboo floors,
around the perimeter of the floating floor to allow it to move
naturally. Scotia and beading will adequately cover perimeter
expansion gaps.
Preventative Care Tips
Warranty exclusions
The manufacturers warranty does not cover the following:

with G P Embelton & Co. Pty Ltds General Terms and Conditions of Sale
(available upon request).
In areas of excessive traffic and wear, please make use of runners

or area rugs.
Use felt protectors under heavy pieces of furniture and chairs.
se protective mats at all exterior entrances. Do not use rubberU

based furniture or mats as the rubber may leach into the floor.
piked heels or shoes in need of repair can severely damage your

S
floor.
Keep animal nails trimmed to prevent excess scratching.

Indentations, scratches, damage caused by negligence or accident,
water ingress, insects, animals, high-heeled or spiked shoes, urine

and high traffic areas.
rotect your floor by using a dolly for moving furniture

P
or appliances. Try not to slide or roll across the floor.
aintain relative humidity levels between 30% and 70%
M
(particularly important for Bamboo Flooring, see additional note
below)
Failure to follow the manufacturers written floor installation

instructions, including protecting the floor from subfloor moisture.
Exposure to excessive heat, sunlight or improper humidity in the

environment.
Improper maintenance, insufficient protection or misuse.
Regular Maintenance Tips
Where subfloor heating is used.
Improper alterations to the original manufactured product.

Alterations or repairs to the manufacturers original product will
void any and all warranties.
Sweep or vacuum as often as necessary to remove any loose dirt or

grit before it can scratch the floor.
Use a slightly damp mop only avoid excessive amounts of water.

Steam mops must not be used.
il soaps, wax, liquid or other household products may affect your

O
coating and should be avoided.
Changes in colour or appearance due to full or partial exposure to

sunlight, weather, ageing or refinishing.
Failure due to structural changes in the subfloor, settling of the

building or an uneven subfloor that has not been adequately
levelled (+/- 3mm over 1000mm).
Warranty Exclusion for Bamboo Flooring:

Compared to other timber floors, moisture does not easily pass through
bamboo, instead it can remain trapped within the bamboo creating the
potential for minor peaking. Therefore bamboo must be floated over an
underlay, preventing direct contact with a concrete slab.
Restoration Sanding and Re-coating

Some floating floors can be sanded and re-coated with a polyurethane
or water-based coating to restore the appearance of the floor. Please
consult your dealer or a flooring contractor for advice. Sanding and recoating of any Embelton Floating Floor should only ever be carried out
by a professional flooring contractor.
It is essential that Embelton Flooring is contacted prior to any sanding
or re-coating process.
Laminate
Warranty disclaimers
The foregoing is in lieu of all other warranties expressed or implied,
including but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability
and fitness for a particular purpose, except as covered by Common
Law. The manufacturer shall not be liable for loss of use or any other
incidental or consequential costs, expenses or damages incurred by the
original purchaser.
Laminate flooring is not a natural product, and cannot be sanded and

re-coated under any circumstances.
Bamboo
Bamboo can be re-coated after a number of years to restore its original
finish, although please note that re-sanding is not encouraged.
Engineered Timber Veneer (<1mm veneer)
This warranty gives you specific rights and you may also have other
Not recommended for sanding and re-coating as the veneer is very thin,
rights that may vary from State to State. It should be read in conjunction however the product can withstand a very light sanding for re-coating.
04/09/2013
CONTENTS

Engineered Timber (3-4mm veneer)

Engineered Timber can be sanded a re-coated a maximum of
2-3 times.
Repair
Damaged Boards
If part of your Embelton Floating Floor gets damaged, it can be replaced.
Flooring can be unclicked and re-laid with new boards of the same
colour and style (please note this is not possible with floating floors
which are stuck directly to surface below).
Repairing Scratches
Embelton recommends the following repair accessories:

For darker timbers, we recommend Gilly Stephensons Scratch

Cover for dark wood floors
For lighter timbers, we recommend Gilly Stephensons Orange Oil

for pale wood floors
lternatively, consult your dealer for a colour matched crayon-type

A
filler stick, designed for use on UV-finished wood floors
Lightly applied nail polish remover will also remove most stains.
Please contact Embelton Flooring prior to any major rectification.
Bamboo Flooring - Maintaining Relative

Humidity in the Internal Environment:
To prevent shrinkage in bamboo floors during hot weather, which can
affect the floors visual appearance, consider the useful tips below to
help maintain relative humidity between 30-70%.
1.
Use an atomiser (mist spray) at regular intervals during the day.
2.
Fill a vase or sink with water when leaving your home for an
extended period of time.
3.
Keep blinds and curtains closed where possible.
04/09/2013
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
Section 5.3
Ti l i n g
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
Section 5.4
Ti m b e r F l o o r i n g
See Manual under 5.2
CONTENTS
Section 5.5
Balustrades/Handrails
CONTENTS
33 Production Avenue, Warana Qld 4575

TEL: 07 5493 5911 FAX: 07 5493 6911
PO BOX 537, Mooloolaba QLD 4557
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

For
PRADSTRUCT PTY LTD

Project
LIGHT AND CO
ILLUMINATE AND RADIANCE
321 MONTAGUE RD. AND
11 BEESLEY ST.
WEST END 4101
4TH OCTOBER 2016
CONTENTS

TEL: 07 5493 5911 FAX: 07 5493 6911
ABN: 25 165 461 898
1.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2.
DIRECTORY OF CONTACT NAMES
3.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION AND CAPACITIES OF INSTALLATION
4.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
5.
CERTIFICATES FROM AUTHORITIES AND FOR AUTHORITIES
6.
ALL GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES APPLICABLE
CONTENTS

TEL: 07 5493 5911 FAX: 07 5493 6911
ABN: 25 165 461 898

Section 2
Directory of Contact Names
Principal Subcontractor:
Regency Balustrade Pty Ltd
Director:
Michael Knepscheld
Telephone: 07 5493 5911
Facsimile: 07 5493 6911
Mobile:
0407 250 767
Production Manager:
Michael Knepscheld
Sales Representative:
James Hunt
Mobile:
0417 602 670
CONTENTS

TEL: 07 5493 5911 FAX: 07 5493 6911
ABN: 25 165 461 898

Section 3
General Description and Capacities of Installation
SCOPE OF WORKS LIGHT AND CO. ILLUMINATE AND RADIANCE WEST

END QLD. 4101
Regency Balustrade was contracted to supply all items as detailed in the Scope of
Work. Generally speaking, scope items include, but were not limited to Powder
coated Aluminium and Glass Balustrade, Powder coated Aluminium
Gates/Screens/Sunhoods and Powder coated Aluminium and Glass Pool Fencing.
In the supply and installation of all of the above references to the Australian
Standards (AS) and Building Code of Australia regulations are clearly defined in the
deemed to satisfy Certificate of Compliance as attached.
CONTENTS

TEL: 07 5493 5911 FAX: 07 5493 6911
ABN: 25 165 461 898

Section 4
Maintenance Procedures
OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE OF ALUMINIUM BALUSTRADE SYSTEMS

AND MAINTENANCE OF POWDERCOATED ALUMINIUM SURFACES
Regarding: Powder coated Aluminium installed at: Light and Co. Illuminate
and Radiance West End 4101
MAINTENANCE OF POWDERCOATED
ALUMINIUM SURFACES
Deterioration of Powder coated surfaces occurs mainly as a result of prolonged
exposure to ultra violet light, grime deposition and attack by contaminated moisture.
Coastal environments contain chlorides, and areas near industrial or urban
environments, chlorides and sulphur compounds are present in standard
atmospheric conditions. Deposited grime absorbs contaminated moisture like a
sponge damaging the coating, which cannot be restored without complete removal of
damaged powder coat.
Powder coated aluminium surfaces require a regular and comprehensive
maintenance program, particularly when located near to salt. Refer attached
Application Notes Dulux Australia.
Can of touch up paint to match the Powder coated surface of the aluminium
balustrades / handrails are available from Regency Fabrication.
Colours used for this project are:
Monument (Gates, Screens)

Eternity Silver (Balustrade, Pool Fencing, Screens)
CONTENTS
Dulux Australia
A Division of Orica Australia Pty Ltd
ACN 004 117 828
Application Notes
MAINTENANCE and REFURBISHMENT
of Polyester Powder Coatings
INTRODUCTION
In order to gain the maximum life from the coating, correct coating maintenance procedures
should be followed. The following guidelines provide recommendations for the maintenance
program, and suggestions for the refurbishment of the coating should it be required.
1. Maintenance
It is important that maintenance be done on a regular basis. Dirt, grime and airborne salt
deposits from the atmosphere are often capable of causing damage to the coating surface
and must be regularly removed. It is recommended that cleaning be done routinely at three
monthly intervals; six months should be considered the maximum interval. Particular
attention should be paid to the cleaning interval in marine or other corrosive environments
and in areas prone to atmospheric fallout.
In the cleaning process, the following should be noted:
a)
Cleaning should be done with a dilute solution of a mild liquid detergent in warm
water. Avoid excessively hot solutions.
b)
Use a soft bristle brush or similar to clean the surface. Do not use abrasive tools on
the coating.
c)
After cleaning, rinse the film thoroughly with fresh water.
d)
Do not use strong solvent type cleaners on the coating. Where it is necessary to
remove materials from the surface such as adhesives and a solvent is necessary, the
weakest possible solvent should be used. The only solvents recommended are
methylated spirits, white spirits or Isopropanol. Ensure the contact time for the
solvent is minimal, and that the solvent is thoroughly rinsed from the surface.
A small test area should be checked prior to solvent cleaning to ensure that no
damage to the film or colour change will occur.
e)
Where more aggressive cleaning is required, a very mild abrasive such as a high
quality automotive cream polish, used in accordance with the manufacturers
instructions, may be necessary. The use of strongly abrasive compounds such as
cutting compounds is not recommended.
CONTENTS
f)
The use of bore water for cleaning is not recommended due to its mineral content, as
it can bring about staining of the coating and may instigate long term coating failure.
2. Refurbishing
All organic finishes are prone to some degradation on outdoor exposure and after long
service; some change of colour and gloss or chaulking may be expected. Whilst the integrity
of the film will be maintained, it may prove necessary to refurbish the powder coating to
restore the original appearance.
In the case of a very old or severely degraded surface finish it is advisable to check the
integrity of the film to be certain it is suitable for standard refurbishing procedures.
A number of techniques are possible for the refurbishment of powder coatings, the technique
employed in a given instance will depend on the circumstances and the life expected of the
refurbishing. The approach taken may also vary between domestic installations, commercial
buildings or the nature of the product that was coated.
2.1 Polishing
In domestic situations, the use of a high quality automotive cream polish applied in
accordance with the manufacturers instructions will both clean the surface, and provide
decorative protection for some months.
Such an approach would not normally be considered in a commercial situation as the cost of
the work would almost certainly outweigh the benefits. It should be noted that such polishes
may contain silicones or waxes which may lead to difficulties on subsequent recoat unless
extreme care is taken in their removal.
2.2 Recoating
A complete recoat is the only technique which can be considered permanent, and given the
cost of refurbishing is probably the only viable option in commercial situations.
3. Damage Repair
At times during installation and service, there is the possibility that the powder coated metal
may suffer mechanical damage requiring repair for both aesthetic and protective reasons.
Where mechanical damage to the powder coating has occurred, and the substrate is
exposed, it is certain that the underlying pre-treatment film has been damaged. In order to
achieve the maximum corrosion resistance it is necessary to replace the pre-treatment.
In some cases it will be possible to apply a suitable pre-treatment on site, apply a suitable
primer and repaint the damaged area in accordance with the following recommendations:
a) The surface must be properly prepared prior to coating. The powder coating must be
well cleaned to remove all traces of dirt, chalk, deposits and previous cleaning
compounds.
Mechanical roughening of the powder coating film is recommended in order to
achieve optimum adhesion of the paint. Suitable roughening may be achieved by
either wet sanding with 360 or finer abrasive paper, alternatively the use of a
Scotchbrite (trademark of 3M Co.) pad and water gives a satisfactory result.
CONTENTS
Following the roughening, ensure all sanding debris is thoroughly flushed from the
surface with clean water.
3. Damage Repair (Cont.)
b) In the roughening process, great care should be taken on edges to ensure the
powder coating film is not cut through and the chromate layer damaged. Should
damage to the pre-treatment layer occur, the exposed metal should be primed with a
good quality etch primer in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
c) Application of a suitable touch up paint to match the powder coated surface.
MAINTENANCE OF GLASS
Glass Balustrade comprises 10mm clear toughened heat soaked glass and Pool
Fence Glass comprises 10mm clear toughened glass, which as for all standard glass
windows etc. will require occasional cleaning with hot, soapy water (this will assist
the glazing rubber also).
MAINTENANCE OF GATE HINGES

AND GATE MAGNA LATCH CLOSING SYSTEMS
A planned maintenance schedule to apply a light spray of Industrial grade Silicon
will assist greatly all hinges and gate latches.
CONTENTS

TEL: 07 5493 5911 FAX: 07 5493 6911
ABN: 25 165 461 898

Section 5
Certificates from Authorities and for Authorities
CONTENTS

TEL: 07 5493 5911 FAX: 07 5493 6911
ABN: 25 165 461 898

Section 6
All Guarantees and Warranties Applicable
GUARANTEE
Regency Balustrade has a guarantee of Ten ( 10 ) years from time of installation.
A guarantee of Ten ( 10 ) years on Powder coated surfaces on installation (Special
Note: guarantee cannot be offered to repairs of damaged Powder coated surfaces as
a result of damage by other trades after installation).
MAINTENANCE
Powder coated aluminium surfaces standing in the elements for any period of time,
will weather and wear, and in particular if not maintained correctly. The effects of
exposure to ultra violet lights, atmospheric pollution, general dirt, grime and airborne
salt deposits can accumulate and have to be removed at regular intervals. Powder
coated surfaces (not unlike the painted surface of a car, which needs to be washed
and polished on a regular basis) require a comprehensive maintenance program.
This company has no control over the way in which you will maintain your balustrade
system / handrails and the close proximity to the sea and elements only exacerbates
the concern of maintenance frequency.
Sales Manager
EMERGENCY CONTACT DETAILS

Private and Confidential
Mike Knepscheld
0407 250 767 (Mobile)
CONTENTS
Version 4 March 2013
Form 16Inspection Certificate/Aspect Certificate/QBCC Licensee Aspect

Certificate
This form is to be used for the purposes of section 10(c) and 239 of the Building Act 1975 and/or
sections 32, 35B, 43, 44 and 47 of the Building Regulation 2006.
NOTE
1. Indicate the type of certificate
Inspection Certificate for
The stages of assessable building work

are listed in section 24 of the Building
Regulation 2006 or as conditioned by the
building certifier.
Stage of building work (for single detached class 1a or class 10 building or structure)
(indicate the stage)
________________________________________
Aspect of building work
An aspect of building work is part of a

stage (e.g. waterproofing).
(indicate the aspect)
_Manufacture and Install Balustrade, Pool Fencing, Gates,

Screens and Sunhoods __
QBCC Licensee Aspect Certificate

Scope of the work
Scope of the work covered by the licence class under the Queensland Building and Construction
Commission Regulation 2003 for the aspect being certified, e.g. scope of work for a waterproofing licence
is installing waterproofing materials or systems for preventing moisture penetration. An aspect being
certified may include wet area sealing to showers.
2. Property description
The description must identify all land the
subject of the application.
The lot and plan details (e.g. SP/RP) are
shown on title documents or a rates notice.
If the plan is not registered by title, provide
previous lot and plan details.
Street address (include no., street, suburb/locality and postcode)

Light and Co (Building A and B) 321 Montague Road
West End Qld.
Postcode 4101
Lot and plan details (attach list if necessary)

Lot 2 on RP141824
In which local government area is the land situated?
Brisbane City Council
3. Building/structure description
Building/structure description
Class of building/structure
Building A
Residential, Retail and Carpark
Class 2,6 and 7a
Building B
Residential and Carpark
Class 2 and 7a
LOCAL GOVERNMENT USE ONLY

DATE RECEIVED
REFERENCE NUMBER/S
CONTENTS
4. Description of component/s certified

Clearly describe the extent of work covered by
this certificate, e.g. all structural aspects of the
steel roof beams.
To Supply and Install:

All Internal/External Standard Aluminium Handrail and Balustrade serving the Development
All Internal/External Glass and Aluminium Handrail and Balustrade serving the Development
**(Heat soaked glass has been used to areas where height exceeds 5m above adjacent ground
level)**
All Glass and Aluminium Pool Fence and Pool Gates serving the Development
All Internal/External Awnings, Hoods and Screens serving the Development
5. Basis of certification
Detail the basis for giving the certificate and the

extent to which tests, specifications, rules,
standards, codes of practice and other
publications, were relied upon.
Queensland Development Code MP3.4, The current edition of The Building Code of Australia and
all relevant Australian Standards
AS 1170.1 PERMANENT, IMPOSED AND OTHER ACTIONS
AS 1170.2 WIND ACTIONS
AS 1288 GLASS IN BUILDINGS
AS 2208:1996 SAFETY GLAZING MATERIAL IN BUILDINGS
AS 1926.1 SAFETY BARRIERS FOR SWIMMING POOLS
AS 2820 GATE UNITS FOR SWIMMING POOLS
AS 1428.1-2009 DESIGN FOR ACCESS AND MOBILITY
6. Reference documentation
Clearly identify any relevant documentation,

e.g. numbered structural engineering plans.
A_A_WD001 series: A_B_WD001 series: A_CA_WD001 series: L_WD_0000 series
7. Building certifier reference number

and development approval number
Building certifier reference number

14-203752
8. Building certifier, competent person

or QBCC licensee details
Name (in full)

Michael Knepscheld
A competent person must be assessed as

competent before carrying out the inspection.
The builder for the work cannot give a stage
certificate of inspection.
A competent person is assessed by the
building certifier for the work as competent to
practice in an aspect of the building and
specification design, because of the individuals
skill, experience and qualifications. The
competent person must be registered or
licensed under a law applying in the State to
practice the aspect.
If no relevant law requires the individual to be
licensed or registered, the certifier must assess
the individual as having appropriate
experience, qualifications or skills to be able to
give the help.
If the chief executive issues any guidelines for
assessing a competent person, the building
certifier must use the guidelines when
assessing the person
9. Signature of building certifier,

competent person or QBCC licensee
Note: A building certifier must sign this form for
temporary swimming pool fencing under
section 4 of Schedule 1 of QDC MP 3.4.
Company name if applicable

Coastal Investments (Qld) Pty Ltd Trading as
Regency Fabrication
Phone no. business hours
Mobile no.
07 5493 5911
0407 250 767
Development approval number
Contact person
Mike Knepscheld
Fax no.
07 5493 6911
Email address
regency@regencyfabrication.com.au
Postal address
P. O. Box 537
Mooloolaba Qld
Postcode 4557
Licence class
Licence number
Open / Structural Metal Fabrication and
QBCC 1067334 / QBCC 1067505
Erection
Date approval to inspect received from building certifier
Signature
Date
1/08/2016
CONTENTS
Section 5.6
Glass Doors and Window s
CONTENTS
Project Maintenance Manual

LIGHT & CO APARTMENTS,
ILLUMINIATE & RADIANCE
BUILDINGS, 321 MONTAGUE
RD & 11 BEESLEY ST, WEST
END
G.James Glass & Aluminium (Qld) Pty Ltd

ABN: 53010828056
Phone:(07) 3877 2844
Email: hilite@gjames.com.au
Issue Number: 0
Date: 12/10/2016
Address: 30 French Street

Eagle Farm QLD 4009
Web:
www.gjames.com
CONTENTS
Table of Contents
1. Statement of Intent of Maintenance Manual..............................................................3
2. Distribution List......................................................................................................... 4
3. Frequency of Cleaning and Maintenance...................................................................5
4. Permissible Materials for Replacement......................................................................6
5. Inspection Procedure................................................................................................. 7
6. Recording / Reporting of Maintenance and Inspections or Replacement...................8
6.1 Proforma Record Sheet........................................................................................ 9
7. Cleaning and Maintenance Procedures ...................................................................10
7.1 Glass Cleaning Instructions................................................................................10
7.2 Cleaning High Performance Coated Glass..........................................................12
7.3 Cleaning and Maintenance of Powdercoat Painted Surfaces..............................15
7.4 Maintenance of General Hardware....................................................................20
8. Removal and Reinstatement of Components ..........................................................21
8.1 Replacement of Glass in 265 Series Awning Windows.......................................22
8.2 Replacement of Glass Blades in 050 Series Louvre Framing..............................24
8.3 Replacement of Glass in 165, 245 Series Sliding Sashes...................................26
8.4 Replacement of Glass in 450, 650 Series Fixed Glazing.....................................28
8.5 Replacement of Glass in 475, 476 Series Hinged, Pivot & Sliding doors............30
9. Guarantees/Warranties............................................................................................ 32
9.1 Third Party Warranties....................................................................................... 33
Project Maintenance Manual: LIGHT & CO APARTMENTS,

ILLUMINIATE & RADIANCE BUILDINGS, 321 MONTAGUE
RD & 11 BEESLEY ST, WEST END
Issue: 0
Date: 12/10/2016
CONTENTS
1. Statement of Intent of Maintenance Manual

The purpose of this maintenance manual is basically threefold.
The first major aim is to supply to the building owner a concise document outlining all
pertinent areas of the products supplied by G.James for the specified project that may
require servicing or future maintenance.
Areas that require particular attention shall be detailed as far as monitoring and
cleaning & maintenance so as to ensure the components supplied and installed by
G.James provide a maximum and serviceable life.
Secondly to provide details and specification on G.James products and components
utilised on the specified project so as to enable easy maintenance of components.
Thirdly to inform the building owner of their responsibilities in ensuring the products
and components longevity under warranty conditions.

Issue: 0
Date: 12/10/2016
CONTENTS
2. Distribution List
Manual Number
Company Name
Issue Date
G.James Glass & Aluminium (Qld) Pty Ltd
12/10/2016
PRADSTRUCT PTY LTD
12/10/2016
12/10/2016
LIGHT & CO APARTMENTS, ILLUMINIATE &
RADIANCE BUILDINGS, 321 MONTAGUE RD & 11
BEESLEY ST, WEST END

Issue: 0
Date: 12/10/2016
CONTENTS
3. Frequency of Cleaning and Maintenance

In general, the frequency of cleaning is dependant on the severity of the building environment.
The frequency of maintenance shall be determined by the amount of use/wear (especially on
hardware items) that can be observed by regular inspection or frequency of repair/service work
on hardware or components in need of replacement or rectification. There is no specific time to
carry out maintenance, except as specified in subcontract maintenance recommendations.
The need for the window / facade cleaning is a result of two requirements:
1. Aesthetic need to ensure that both the building is perceived to look acceptably clean
and well maintained from the general publics point of view and for tenants or
occupants requirements.
2. For preventative maintenance

The frequency of cleaning for aesthetic reasons are determined by the building owner based on
the following:
1. Dependant on the severity of the environment

2. Previous experience for similar buildings
3. General public expectations
4. Cost implications
The preventative maintenance cleaning program should be based on the external environment
of the building facade, the subcontractors experience and suppliers recommendations.
In a rural atmosphere where grime deposition and pollution of the atmosphere are at a
minimum, cleaning may not be needed more frequently than every six months in order to
remove deposits and restore the appearance. In commercial, industrial and marine
environments more frequent cleaning, eg monthly, is necessary and the maximum period
between cleaning should never be more than three months. Under the worst conditions
involving heavy grime deposition and atmospheric pollution by both sulphur compounds and
chlorides, even more frequent cleaning is advisable if deterioration of the anodic and painted
finishes are to be prevented.
The following cleaning is recommended:
1. For coastal/commercial/industrial environments it is suggested that glass be cleaned

ideally every three months. If cleaned at greater intervals (maximum of six months)
then a visual inspection to be conducted in the intervening three month period (if
cleaned every six months) should be carried out to ensure there is no excessive build up
of foreign matter.
2. The powder coat painted finish should be cleaned with the same frequency to glass, to
remove the excessive dirt and grime build up. A planned periodic inspection should be
carried out to ensure no abnormal grime or dirt build-up is present.
3. Regular cleaning of anodised surfaces is desirable, the frequency again depending on

accessibility and the severity of the environment, in line with that of painted finishes.
Objective evidence of cleaning and any inspections by way of written records must be kept.
(Refer Section 6)

Issue: 0
Date: 12/10/2016
CONTENTS
4. Permissible Materials for Replacement

Materials suggested for the replacement of damaged products shall be verified by
G.James.
G.James should be contacted and consulted when replacement of materials is being
performed, to ensure that correct and compatible materials, suitable for the intended
purpose is being installed.

Issue: 0
Date: 12/10/2016
CONTENTS
5. Inspection Procedure
The condition and serviceability of the facade/window products depends upon the
frequency of inspections and tests and identification of any abnormalities that are
apparently reducing the effectiveness of the product.
It is recommended that the building facade/windows are inspected visually every six to
twelve months, in line with the maintenance /cleaning cycle, commencing upon
practical completion.
This random inspection should be completed on each individual component such as:1. Glass
2. Aluminium Coating Condition
3. Hardware Condition
4. Structural/Weather Seal
Random Inspection results should be recorded on the proforma sheet given in Section
6.1.
Notes of inspections details can be marked on the supplied As Built drawings for
future reference.
Should any abnormality be found with the product then it is recommended that the
defect should be inspected and/or tested in the presence of a representative of
G.James Glass & Aluminium Pty Ltd. and our opinion sought in the cause of the
abnormality and advise on further inspection requirements.
The cause and extent of the abnormality should be determined by the representative
of G.James Glass & Aluminium and relevant suppliers and recommendations on
possible remedial action given.

Issue: 0
Date: 12/10/2016
CONTENTS
6. Recording / Reporting of Maintenance and Inspections or

Replacement
Reporting of work carried out during cleaning/maintenance or removal and
reinstatement of window/facade components and results of inspection and testing
performed on the building facade shall be recorded for the purpose of providing
historical evidence.
A proforma record sheet is supplied in Section 6.1 of this manual, which may be copied
and utilised for recording.
This recorded information not only provides the building maintenance personnel with
an accurate history of maintenance carried out to aid in the scheduling and budgeting
of same, but can help in determining if a common pattern of maintenance issues will
emerge in the future.
Recording of this information should be performed by the Building Maintenance
Supervisor and kept on record. This information must remain available to G.James
Glass & Aluminium P/L during the warranty period for reference as required.
Failure to provide objective evidence of facade works and maintenance may void the
G.James warranty.

Issue: 0
Date: 12/10/2016
CONTENTS
6.1 Proforma Record Sheet
Maintenance Area
Description
Maintenance Manual
Reference Number
Date of
Maintenance /
Cleaning Work

Notes of any Follow up

Action
Issue: 0
Date: 12/10/2016
CONTENTS
7. Cleaning and Maintenance Procedures

7.1 Glass Cleaning Instructions
This information is provided as a general guide only. Specific advice on the cleaning of
glass should always be obtained from either the supplier or a professional window
cleaner.
1.
Special Products
The Solarplus, Optilight and Solect range of glass products have high performance
coatings applied to their surfaces, consequently these products require a more
specialised cleaning procedure. Mirrors also require a more specialised cleaning
procedure. Specific cleaning procedures are available from your G.James
representative or from the G.James website - http://gjames.com.
2.
Professional Cleaners
This cleaning information is offered as general advice only for professional cleaners to
consider as part of the development of their cleaning processes.
2.1.
DO
Protect the glass from knocks, abrasions and excessive pressure.
Follow the cleaning instructions.
2.2.
DO NOT
Clean the glass in direct sunlight or when hot to touch.
Allow the edges of the glass to sit in areas where water may pool.
Use metal scrapers, blades or steel wool on either surface of the glass.
Allow water, cleaning fluids or lubricants to remain in contact with the glass,
frame, sealants or gaskets.
10
Allow splashed materials to dry on the glass or its frame.
Use abrasive cleaning solution or materials.
Subject the glass to extreme changes in temperature.
Lean tools etc. against the glass surface.

Issue: 0
Date: 12/10/2016
CONTENTS
3.
Note to the Painter
Paint spots have traditionally been removed using a sharp razor blade. The use of a
blade can in some cases cause damaged to the glass. As an alternative investigate
solvents or graffiti removal materials, ensuring that they will not damage the glass. If a
blade or scraper is used then the risk of damage can be reduced by using a scraper
which has a clean edge held at an angle of 30 degrees to the glass.
4.
Routine Cleaning Instructions
Glass products must be properly cleaning during both construction activities and as
part of routine maintenance in order to maintain visual and aesthetic clarity. Improper
cleaning can permanently damage the surface of glazing products.
Cleaning of the glass should begin at the top of the structure and continue down
towards lower levels to minimise the probability of leaving cleaning residues on the
lower levels. Care should be taken to prevent wind blowing residues onto glass that
has already been cleaned.
The glass should only be cleaned when cool to touch and should never be cleaned
while in direct sunlight.
Completely drench the glass with clean water to loosen any residues, deposits
or dirt.
Spray one of the recommended cleaning products (mentioned below) onto the
glass surface.
Immediately remove the cleaning solution with a lint free cloth.
Any stubborn dirt should be lightly sponged off, being careful not to scratch the
glass. All traces of water and cleaning solution must be removed from the glass,
window frames and also from any sealant or gaskets present. Failure to remove
any residue may cause these components to deteriorate as a direct
consequence of the cleaning process.
5.
11
Recommended General Cleaning Products
A solution of 1 part vinegar to 10 parts clean water
A solution of 1 part isopropyl alcohol to 1 part clean water

Issue: 0
Date: 12/10/2016
CONTENTS
6.
Frequency of Cleaning
Cleaning required is dependant on the severity of the environment. The following time
periods represent a guide only.
Rural / Suburban Environments
The maximum period between cleaning should never be more than six (6) months.
Coastal / Pool / Industrial Environments
More frequent cleaning is necessary here with the maximum period between cleaning
being no more than three (3) months.
Extreme Conditions
Under the worst conditions involving heavy grime deposition and atmospheric
pollution (e.g. sulphur compounds or salts) monthly cleaning is advisable if
deterioration is to be prevented.
7.2 Cleaning High Performance Coated Glass

Solect, Optilight and Solarplus
G.James' range of high performance monolithic and laminated glass products are
characterised by their outstanding thermal insulation and solar control performance.
To achieve these qualities, a microscopically thin coating has been applied to the
interior surface of these products. While these coatings are extremely hard and
durable, they require modified handling, cleaning and maintenance compared to
traditional glazing products.
1.
This cleaning information is offered as general advice only for professional cleaners to
consider as part of the development of their cleaning processes.
1.1.
DO
Protect the glass from knocks, abrasions and excessive pressure.
Follow the cleaning instructions for both the exterior and interior surfaces.
If required to handle the glass do so manually or alternatively use clean, oil free
vacuum lifters on the exterior surface only.
12

Issue: 0
Date: 12/10/2016
CONTENTS
1.2.
DO NOT
Store unglazed product in direct sunlight or unventilated spaces.
Apply masking tape or stickers to the interior surface of the glass.
Use marking pens on the interior surface of the glass.
Use white shoe polish on the interior surface of the glass.
Apply protective films to the interior surface of the glass.
Install glass with damaged edges.
Clean the glass in direct sunlight or when hot to touch.
Allow the edges of the glass to sit in areas where water may pool.
Use metal scrapers, blades or steel wool on either surface of the glass.
Allow water, cleaning fluids or lubricants to remain in contact with the glass,
frame, sealants or gaskets.
Allow splashed materials to dry on the glass or its frame.
Use abrasive cleaning solution or materials.
Subject the glass to extreme changes in temperature.
Lean tools etc. against the glass surface.
2.
Cleaning Instructions General
Glass products must be properly cleaning during both construction activities and as
part of routine maintenance in order to maintain visual and aesthetic clarity. Improper
cleaning can permanently damage the surface of glazing products.
3.
Cleaning Instructions Exterior Surface
or dirt.
13

Issue: 0
Date: 12/10/2016
CONTENTS
glass surface.
4.
Recommended General Cleaning Products
A solution of 1 part vinegar to 10 parts clean water
A solution of 1 part isopropyl alcohol to 1 part clean water
5.
Cleaning Instructions Interior Surface
As the interior surface of these high performance products contains a microscopically

thin coating, a different cleaning procedure is necessary. While the recommended
cleaning solutions are the same as detailed above in the routine cleaning instruction,
G.James advises that the coated face be hand cleaned the use of squeegees is not
recommended.
or dirt.
glass surface.
14

Issue: 0
Date: 12/10/2016
CONTENTS
6.
Frequency of Cleaning
Cleaning required is dependant on the severity of the environment. The following time
periods represent a guide only.
Rural / Suburban Environments
The maximum period between cleaning should never be more than six (6) months.
Coastal / Pool / Industrial Environments
More frequent cleaning is necessary here with the maximum period between cleaning
being no more than three (3) months.
Extreme Conditions
Under the worst conditions involving heavy grime deposition and atmospheric
pollution (e.g. sulphur compounds or salts) monthly cleaning is advisable if
deterioration is to be prevented.
7.3 Cleaning and Maintenance of Powdercoat Painted Surfaces

Colours: Precious Silver Pearl
1.
Purpose
The following procedure is designed for the purpose of supplying the building
maintenance crew with guidelines and ideas on how to successfully clean the painted
aluminium surfaces on the project.
2.
Scope
Cleaning and maintenance procedures includes general descriptions of the paint type,
cleaning and solutions that are suggested for use. The procedures are intended for
application with painted aluminium extrusions such as window frames, door frames,
railing and trim as well as curtain wall panels, spandrels, mullions, louvres etc.
15

Issue: 0
Date: 12/10/2016
CONTENTS
3.
Paint Type
Dulux 955 & 958 are the Dulux trade name for their powdercoat paint. Touch-ups can
be performed using a brush or air spray applicator.
4.
Cleaning
Organic coating, such as "Dulux 955 or 958", on aluminium does not normally show an
appreciable amount of dirt collection. In many atmospheres dirt or soil would not
indicate a detrimental risk to the coating, but cleaning and surface care are desirable
for the sake of appearance, Cleaning may become desirable in areas where heavy
deposits have dulled the surface, or where cleaner run-down from other surfaces
should be removed. Local atmospheric condition quite naturally has an effect on
cleanliness. Very often, rainfall may be sufficient to keep exterior surfaces appearing
clean and bright. These factors coupled with owner attributes regarding surface
appearance probably would determine cleaning schedules.
Areas that are in direct sight at lower levels would more likely be cleaned. Less
obvious areas would be less frequently cleaned or in some instances, hardly at all.
Cleaning of painted aluminium may be schedules with other cleaning. For example,
glass and painted aluminium components can be cleaned at the same time. (Refer
Section 3 of this manual)
4.1.
Cleaning Procedures and Care
The exact procedure for cleaning will vary depending on the nature and degree of soil.
Try to restrict cleaning to mild weather. Cleaning should be done on the shaded side of
the building or ideally on a mild, cloudy day. Method of cleaning, type of cleaning, etc
of one component of the building must be used with consideration for other
components such as glass, sealants, painted surfaces, etc.
Removal of light surface soil may be accomplished in several ways. Some testing is
recommended to determine the degree of cleaning actually necessary to accomplish
the task. An initial step of forceful water rinse from the top down is recommended
prior to any cleaner application. Significant benefit is gained with come type of
surface agitation.
Low water volume with moderate pressure is much better than considerable volume
16

Issue: 0
Date: 12/10/2016
CONTENTS
with little pressure. Physical rubbing of the surface with soft, wet brushes, sponges or
cloth is also helpful.
As an initial step, apply a water rinse with moderate pressure to dislodge the soil. If
this does not remove the soil, then a concurrent water spray with brushing or
sponging. The washing should be done with uniform pressure, cleaning first with a
horizontal motion and then with a vertical motion.
Apply cleaners only to an area that can be conveniently cleaned without changing
position. The surface must be thoroughly rinsed with clean water. It may be
necessary to sponge the surface while rinsing, particularly if cleaner is permitted to
dry on the surface. The rinsed surface is permitted to air dry or is wiped dry with a
chamois, squeegee or lint free cloth.
Run down of cleaner (from any operation) to the lower portions of the building should
be minimised and these areas should be rinsed as soon as and as possible to lessen
streaking, etc from unavoidable wash down.
Do not allow cleaning chemicals to collect on surfaces or to "puddle" on horizontal
surfaces, crevices, etc. These should be flushed with water and dried. Always clean
coated surfaces down from top to bottom and follow with a thorough rinsing with clean
water.
4.2.
Recommended Cleaning Products
Detergent Solutions
Mild soaps or detergents ruled safe for bare hands are safe for coated aluminium.
Stronger detergents such as some dishwater detergents should be carefully spot
tested. Some of the latter would necessitate rubber gloves, long handled brushes, etc.
With any, the finish should be thoroughly rinsed with clean water and dried.
A non abrasive mild detergent solution (i.e. Cussons Morning Fresh) will not have any
deleterious effects. Use cloth, sponges or a soft bristle brush for application and rinse
well after use.
Cleaning should be done on the shaded side of the building or ideally,
on a mild, cloudy day.

We recommend the use of the following cleaning products.
17

Issue: 0
Date: 12/10/2016
CONTENTS
Cussons Morning Fresh
Kitten Glo-Wash
Turtle Wax Zip Wash
RE-PO Superwash
Polishes
Should the above products give less than the desired results, the following car
polishes can be used as per the manufactures instructions.
Turtle Wax Car Polish
RE-PO Car Cream Polish
4.3.
Summary of General Cleaning Tips
Over cleaning or excessive rubbing can do more harm than good. Strong solvents or
strong cleaner concentrations can cause damage to painted surfaces. Always test a
small area first. Avoid abrasive cleaners. Do not use household cleaners that contain
abrasives on painted surfaces. Abrasive material such as steel wool, abrasive brushes
etc can abrade, wear and harm finishes. Avoid drips and splashes. Remove run downs
as quickly as possible. Avoid temperature extremes. Heat accelerates chemical
reactions and may evaporate water from solution.
Cleaning under adverse conditions may result in streaking or staining. Ideally,
cleaning should be done in shade at moderate temperature. Do not substitute a
heavy duty cleaner for a frequently used mild cleaner. Do not scour painted surfaces.
Never use paint removers, aggressive alkaline, acid or abrasive cleaners. Do not use
trisodium phosphate or highly alkaline or highly acid cleaners. Always do a test
surface.
Follow manufacturers' recommendations for mixing and diluting cleaners. Never mix
cleaners. The mixing of cleaners may not only be ineffective but also very dangerous.
To prevent marring make sure cleaning sponges, cloths etc are grit free.
5.
Inspection and Precautions
Inspection
18

Issue: 0
Date: 12/10/2016
CONTENTS
It is suggested that the building owner provide a qualified inspector who will see that
the desired effect is being obtained with the use of sound procedures. Inspection
should commence early in the cleaning procedure.
Building Surrounding
Consideration must be given to possible effect of run down on shrubbery, personnel,
equipment etc. located below. These factors may require considerations toward
methods of timing.
19

Issue: 0
Date: 12/10/2016
CONTENTS
7.4 Maintenance of General Hardware

General periodic maintenance is required, proportional to wear, on all hardware
supplied such as locks, hinges, catches, rollers, door closers and the like.
For maintenance or service information/procedures on specific subcontract hardware
items (such as Auto Door Operators) refer to Section 7.6
The external finish of all hardware must be kept clean by removing any harmful
residue, especially salt spray, from the surface using a non-abrasive cleaning agent.
Internal workings of locks, catches etc, should be kept in good working order by
applying a light spray of lubricant similar to WD40 or RP7. Care should be taken to
ensure that any finished surfaces (e.g. paint etc.), in close proximity to the hardware
being maintained, are well protected to avoid damage to the finish.
20

Issue: 0
Date: 12/10/2016
CONTENTS
8. Removal and Reinstatement of Components

The procedures in the following section are written for the purpose of supplying a
general method of removal and reinstatement of components in G.James original
scope of work of the project.
Those persons contracted to perform maintenance work on the building facade should
be suitably qualified and have experience in the work required to be undertaken.
With regard to G.James original scope of work, this is to ensure that the G.James
warranty on the components is not void due to incorrect work/methods being
performed.
The proforma record sheets supplied in Section 6.1 of this maintenance manual shall
be completed during any removal and reinstatement of components inspection or
maintenance on the facade as a historical record or work completed (refer Section 6
on Reporting).
21

Issue: 0
Date: 12/10/2016
CONTENTS
8.1 Replacement of Glass in 265 Series Awning Windows

1.
Scope
Removal and replacement of glass in 265 Series awning windows.
2.
Method
During the warranty period, representatives of G. James Glass & Aluminium (Qld) Pty
Ltd shall be used to perform the works.
Before maintenance or repair work is carried out, it must be assessed as to whether or
not the work is to be carried out under G.James warranty or at the expense of the
building owner. A representative of G.James must be involved in the assessment of
the damaged window. Pending the outcome of this decision, the following replacement
method shall be adopted.
When working on damaged or broken glass, all care must be taken to ensure that
damage does not occur to surrounding property or that injury does not occur to any
personnel or people within the work area. When carrying out the works, all personnel
involved will use the correct PPE at all times.
All replacement glass will need to conform with the most current version of AS1288.
If the glass to be replaced is cracked, then the following method can be used to
replace it. Firstly, the area below the window shall be barricaded off to ensure any
falling glass does not create a hazard to any persons in the area.
2.1.
Removal
1. Position a barricade below/around the immediate areas of the window to be reglazed so as to avoid injury to any persons as a result of falling glass.
2. Remove glazing vinyl from perimeter of the glass and store in a safe place for
re-glazing if it is in an acceptable condition.
3. The glass will be held in by either silicon seal or double sided tape from the
outside. If the glass in retained internally by glazing vinyl and not aluminium
beads, small pieces of the vinyl should be located in centre points of the glass
on all four sides to prevent the glass from falling out when the external seal has
been cut. Cut the sealant around the external perimeter of glass from the
outside of the window.
22

Issue: 0
Date: 12/10/2016
CONTENTS
4. If glass is broken, place suckers on one of the broken pieces at the top and
attempt to pull it away from the tape or the sealant. If this cannot be done
safely or successfully then the glass may have to be smashed outwards to make
a safe opening to enable the glazier to cut away the weather seal from the
inside out.
5. Make note of glazing tape size. Clean out and remove any leftover glass ,
glazing tape and/or silicon, and dispose of.
2.2.
Cleaning Procedure
1. Clean the joint surfaces and the adjacent areas with A-Tork cleaning paper that
is saturated with an alcohol based cleaning solvent (eg methylated spirits).
2. Before the alcohol evaporates, wipe the surface with clean A-Tork paper. If the
solvent is allowed to dry then the dissolved contaminants will be left on the
surface as residue and will possibly cause bond failure.
3. Clean the glass surface to be bonded as above. Do not touch the cleaned area
with bare hands or other contaminated substances such as oils and dirt.
Residues left after this contact may cause adhesion failure.
23

Issue: 0
Date: 12/10/2016
CONTENTS
8.2 Replacement of Glass Blades in 050 Series Louvre Framing

1.
Scope
Removal and replacement of glass in 050 series louvre windows.
2.
Method
1. During the warranty period, representatives of G. James Glass & Aluminium
(Qld) Pty Ltd shall be used to perform the works.
2. Before maintenance or repair work is carried out, it must be assessed as to
whether or not the work is to be carried out under G.James warranty or at the
expense of the building owner. A representative of G.James must be involved in
the assessment of the damaged window. Pending the outcome of this decision,
the following replacement method shall be adopted.
3. When working on damaged or broken glass, all care must be taken to ensure
that damage
4. does not occur to surrounding property or that injury does not occur to any
personnel or people
5. within the work area. When carrying out the works, all personnel involved will
use the correct PPE at all times.
6. All replacement glass will need to conform with the most current version of
AS1288.
7. The 050 Series has moulded plastic clips that carry the louvre blades. The deglazing and re-glazing method to be used for this system requires one (1) glazier
on the inside.
8. The glazier inside the window shall remove the broken glass by sliding it out of
the plastic clips.
9. Once the glass is removed check the plastic clip and the operating mechanism
to ensure there is no damage.
10.Note: Glass of the same size and thickness only shall be used as replacement
glass unless the current requirements of AS1288 are not met.
11.Install the new blade from the inside, with the blade entering the top end of the
24

Issue: 0
Date: 12/10/2016
CONTENTS
plastic clip. The very end of the clip is deflected down slightly to allow the
blade/s to be inserted.
Once installed check that the louvre window is operating correctly.
25

Issue: 0
Date: 12/10/2016
CONTENTS
8.3 Replacement of Glass in 165, 245 Series Sliding Sashes

1.
Scope
Removal and replacement of glass in 165, 245 Series windows/doors.
2.
Method
2.1.
Removal
1. Remove the sash by opening the sash and then lifting it up into the head until
disengaged from the sill, then lower the sash down towards the side from which
you are standing, until free from the window perimeter frame. To remove fixed
panels and in some cases sliding sashes, thresholds and retaining blocks where
installed will first need to be removed.
2. With sash on a suitable work bench, code the sash frame sections at each
corner of the s ie A.A., B.B., C.C., D.D. Unscrew corners and knock the
aluminium sections off the glass using a nylon hammer and a block of wood to
spread the impact on the aluminium framing and avoid damage.
26

Issue: 0
Date: 12/10/2016
CONTENTS
2.2.
Cleaning Procedure
As there are no bonding areas, the frame only needs to be cleaned of dirt and grit.
This can be achieved by using A-tork cleaning paper saturated in alcohol based
cleaning solvent. (eg methylated spirits). Before the solvent evaporates, wipe the
surface with clean A-tork paper.
2.3.
Installation of Glazing Materials and Glass
1. Clean all sections and P.V.C. Glazing Channel to ensure no glass fragments
remain.
2. Note: Glass of the same size and thickness only shall be used as replacement
glass unless the current requirements of AS1288 are not met.
3. Wrap the P.V.C. Glazing Channel around the new glass, ensuring that the PVC
channel is joined at the top of the sash, and knock the aluminium sections onto
the glass ensuring the joint codes from removal process are mating correctly.
4. Screw all corners together taking care to not to over tighten. Sash shall now be
lifted back into opening in the reverse order to the removal process.
5. Adjust rollers if necessary to ensure sash is parallel to adjacent panel and jamb.
6. Check latch for correct operation and test to ensure that it is operating properly.
27

Issue: 0
Date: 12/10/2016
CONTENTS
8.4 Replacement of Glass in 450, 650 Series Fixed Glazing

1.
Scope
Removal and replacement of glass in 450, 650 Series windows.
2.
Method
2.1.
Removal
1. Position a barricade below/around the immediate areas of the window to be reglazed so as to avoid injury to any persons as a result of falling glass. Position
trestles and planks if required, inside and outside the building so that glaziers
can access the pane of glass from inside and outside the building.
2. Inspect the broken piece of glass to be replaced and ensure that glass suckers
are placed in the appropriate position so that any broken glass does no splinter
or break into pieces and cause injury to any person.
3. Remove the pane that is to be replaced by firstly removing the glazing vinyl
both inside and outside the frame. Put this aside in an area that is clean so that
it can be used when reinstalling the glass.
28

Issue: 0
Date: 12/10/2016
CONTENTS
4. Remove glazing bead from sill of frame and place in a clean area so that it can
be reused.
5. Lift glass out of frame and dispose of it in a safe manner.
6. Clean frame down with methylated spirits to remove any dirt or grit that could
damage the new pane of glass.
2.2.
1. Inspect the replacement piece of glass for any defects or damage. Any damage
to the edge of the glass will reduce its mechanical stress resistance so particular
care should be taken to ensure that there is no impact, damage or unacceptable
edge conditions.
2. Pick up new pane of glass with glass suckers and place it into the opening,
resting it on the setting blocks
3. Glass is to be centred in frame by ensuring that the gap between the edge of
the glass and the frame is even.
4. The original glazing bead shall be installed back into place and glazing vinyl
worked in around the glass taking care not to stretch the vinyl during
installation.
5. Glass shall be trade cleaned with methylated spirits and frame cleaned with
white spirits.
Work area shall be left clean and tidy and all unwanted rubbish disposed of.
29

Issue: 0
Date: 12/10/2016
CONTENTS
8.5 Replacement of Glass in 475, 476 Series Hinged, Pivot &

Sliding doors
1.
Scope
Removal and replacement of glass in 475, 476 Series hinged, pivot & sliding doors.
2.
Method
2.1.
Removal
1. Position a barricade below/around the immediate areas of the window to be reglazed so as to avoid injury to any persons as a result of falling glass. Position
trestles and planks if required, inside and outside the building so that glaziers
can access the pane of glass from inside and outside the building.
2. Inspect the broken piece of glass to be replaced and ensure that glass suckers
are placed in the appropriate position so that any broken glass does no splinter
or break into pieces and cause injury to any person.
3. Remove the glazing vinyl both inside and outside the frame. Put this aside in an
area that is clean so that it can be used when reinstalling the glass.
30

Issue: 0
Date: 12/10/2016
CONTENTS
4. Remove glazing beads from the rails of the door and place in a clean area so
that they can be reused.
5. For hinged or pivot doors, if blocking kits or heel & toes blocking rubber have
been installed, they must first be unscrewed or removed to allow the glass to be
removed.
6. Lift glass out of the door sash and dispose of it in a safe manner.
7. Clean frame down with methylated spirits to remove any dirt or grit that could
damage the new pane of glass.
2.2.
1. Inspect the replacement piece of glass for any defects or damage. Any damage
to the edge of the glass will reduce its mechanical stress resistance so particular
care should be taken to ensure that there is no impact, damage or unacceptable
edge conditions.
2. Pick up new pane of glass with glass suckers and place it into the opening,
resting it on the setting blocks
3. Glass is to be centred in frame by ensuring that the gap between the edge of
the glass and the frame is even.
4. For hinged or pivot doors, adjust the blocking kit or reinstall hell & toe rubber to
prevent the door from sagging.
5. The original glazing bead shall be installed back into place and glazing vinyl
worked in around the glass taking care not to stretch the vinyl during
installation.
6. Glass shall be trade cleaned with methylated spirits and frame cleaned with
white spirits.
7. Work area shall be left clean and tidy and all unwanted rubbish disposed of.
31

Issue: 0
Date: 12/10/2016
CONTENTS
9. Guarantees/Warranties
12/10/2016
Our Ref: 003/001302/000
G.James Warranty
PRADSTRUCT PTY LTD
LIGHT & CO APARTMENTS, ILLUMINIATE & RADIANCE

BUILDINGS, 321 MONTAGUE RD & 11 BEESLEY ST, WEST END
G.James will rectify at its own expense any defects in material supplied or faults in
workmanship of the company appearing in any part of the works supplied and installed
by this company within 10 years of date of practical completion. This warranty also
includes any supply only items and warrants same against defective materials or
factory workmanship of the product, except where any materials, components or
processes comprised in the works are covered by a guarantee or warranty of a third
party which will supersede the warranty of the company given above. Any defects
appearing in the works caused as a result of the misuse by the buyer or any third
party, or faulty construction material and/or construction methods attributable to
other trades, structural load, vandalism or maltreatment or normal wear and tear is
expressly excluded from the provisions of the companys warranty. This warranty is
conditional and subject to the proprietor or its successors satisfactorily servicing and
maintaining in all respects the products supplied by the warrantor in accordance with
warrantors maintenance manual and/or any third party supplier of products covered
under this warranty.
Yours faithfully,
G. James Glass & Aluminium (Qld) Pty Ltd
DOMINIC ROBERTSON
Manager - Hilite
32

Issue: 0
Date: 12/10/2016
CONTENTS
9.1 Third Party Warranties

Manufacturer Warranty Details
33
Additional Care Instructions
Auto_Ingress
http://www.autoingress.com.au/services/
services-and-warranties/
Doric
http://www.doric.com.au/media/Doric
%20Garauntee.pdf
Breezeway
http://www.breezway.com.au/downloads
/Warranty_2012.pdf
Lockwood
http://www.lockweb.com.au/en/site/lock http://www.lockweb.com.au/e
web/about-us/Lockwood-Guarantee/
n/site/lockweb/training-andsupport/Product-Care/

Issue: 0
Date: 12/10/2016
CONTENTS
General Glass Cleaning Procedure

Cleaning Of Glass
This information is provided as a general guide only. Specific advice on the
cleaning of glass should always be obtained from either the supplier or a
professional window cleaner.
Special Products
The Solarplus, Optilight and Solect range of products are contain high
performance coatings. These products require a more specialised cleaning
procedure. Specific cleaning advice is available to cover these product
ranges.
Professional glass cleaners have significant experience in the cleaning of
glass and glazing products and as such are acknowledges experts in the field.
This cleaning information is offered as general advice only for professional
cleaners to consider as part of the development of their cleaning processes.
DO
Protect the glass from knocks, abrasions and excessive pressure

Follow the cleaning instructions
DO NOT
Clean the glass in direct sunlight or when hot to touch

Allow the edges of the glass to sit in areas where water may pool
Use metal scrapers, blades or steel wool on either surface of the glass
Allow water or cleaning fluids to remain in contact with the glass,
frame, sealants or gaskets
Allow splashed materials to dry on the glass or its frame
Use abrasive cleaning solutions or materials
Subject the glass to extreme changes in temperature
Lean tools etc against the glass surface
CONTENTS
Note To the Painter!

Paint spots have traditionally been removed using a sharp razor blade. The
use of a blade can in some cases cause damage to the glass. As an
alternative investigate solvents or graffiti removal materials, ensuring that they
will not damage the glass. If a blade or scraper is used then the risk of
damage can be reduced by using a scraper which has a clean edge held at
an angle of 30 degrees to the glass. Consult the supplier of the blade or
scraper as to how it is best used to clean glass. However, coated and tinted
glass requires special care. Seek cleaning advice from your local glass
merchant.
Routine Cleaning Instructions

Glass products must be properly cleaned during both construction activities
and as part of routine maintenance in order to maintain visual and aesthetic
clarity. Improper cleaning can permanently damage the surface of glazing
products.
Cleaning of the glass should begin at the top of the structure and continue
down towards lower levels to minimize the probability of leaving cleaning
residues on the lower levels. Care should be taken to prevent wind blowing
residues onto glass that has already been cleaned.
The glass should only be cleaned when cool to touch and should never be
cleaned while in direct sunlight.
The first step in the cleaning procedure is to completely flood the glass with
clean water to loosen any residues present. The cleaning solution should then
be applied to the glass surface (The G.James cleaning solution
recommendations are listed below). The solution can be either applied by
hand or by a non-abrasive applicator. Immediately following the application,
the cleaning solution should be removed with either a squeegee or a lint free
cloth. All traces of water and cleaning solution must be removed from the
glass, window frames as well as any sealant or gaskets present. Failure to
remove these residues may result in deterioration of these components as a
direct consequence of the cleaning process.
CONTENTS
Recommended General Cleaning products

G.James does not recommend the use of abrasive cleaning products.
a solution of 1 part vinegar to 10 parts clean water

A solution of water and mild soap or liquid dish washing detergent (10
drops per 10 liters of water)
Windex Glass and Surface manufactured by SC Johnson and Son
Pty Ltd. (Clear Windex must only be used NOT the blue coloured
product).
Spot Cleaning
From time to time it may be necessary to remove stubborn dirt and other
residues such as: oil, grease, tape residues, crayon and the like from the
coated surface.
Spot cleaning of these resides is relatively simple procedure. The method is a
simple two-cloth procedure where one cloth is used to break up the residues
and a second cloth is used to remove the residue from the surface. The basic
steps are:
Applying a small amount of acetone to a clean, slightly damp cloth
Rub this cloth onto the affected area
A second lint free cloth can now be used to remove the residues from
the surface.
The entire surface should now be cleaned as per the procedure above
to eliminate streaking.
# It is important that the frames, sealants and gaskets are protected during
spot cleaning. The spot cleaning solvents can cause irreversible degradation
of these components.
Recommended Spot Cleaning Solvent
Acetone (acetone is available from most hardware stores. It is

important the manufactures safety and handing recommendations are
followed when using this product)
This information is provided as a general guide only. It does not constitute a warranty. G.James disclaims any
responsibility for any specific results relating to the use of this guide or any liability for loss damage or injury resulting
from the use of this guide.
CONTENTS
Product: Optilight
Handling and Cleaning Instructions
1. Introduction
The Optilight range of high performance, Low E coated laminated glass products are
characterised by their outstanding thermal insulation and solar control performance. To achieve
these qualities, the interior surface of this product has been applied with an extremely hard,
durable metallic coating and as such requires special handling and cleaning procedures.
2. Note for Professional Cleaners

This cleaning information is offered as general advice for the professional cleaners to consider
as part of the development of their cleaning methods.
DO
Protect the glass from knocks, abrasions and excessive pressure

Follow the cleaning instructions for both the exterior and interior surfaces
If required to handle the glass do so manually or alternatively use clean, oil free vacuum
lifters applying them to the exterior surface only
DO NOT
Store unglazed product in direct sunlight or unventilated spaced

Apply masking tape or stickers to the interior surface of the glass
Use marking pens on the interior surface of the glass
Use white shoe polish on the interior surface of the glass
Apply protective films to the interior surface of the glass
Install glass with damaged edges
Allow the edges of the glass to sit in areas where water may pool
Use metal scrapers, blades or steel wool on either surface of the glass
Allow water or cleaning fluids to remain in contact with the glass, frame, sealants or
gaskets
Allow splashed materials to dry on the glass or its frame
Use abrasive cleaning solutions or materials
Lean tools etc against the glass surface
Subject the glass to extreme changes in temperature
Use Calc- off on the coated surface
3. Cleaning Instructions - General
Glass products must be properly cleaned during both construction activities and as part of
routine maintenance in order to maintain visual and aesthetic clarity. Improper cleaning can
permanently damage the surface of glazing products.
Cleaning of the glass should begin at the top of the structure and continue down towards lower
levels to minimise the probability of leaving cleaning residues on the lower levels.
1
CONTENTS
4. Cleaning Instructions - Exterior Surface

Glass should only be cleaned when cool to touch and should never be cleaned while in direct
sunlight.
The first step in the cleaning procedure is to completely drench the glass with clean water to
loosen any residues present. Next spray the cleaning solution onto the glass surface (the
recommended cleaning solutions for this product are listed below). Immediately remove the
cleaning solution with either a squeegee or a lint free cloth. All traces of water and cleaning
solution must be removed from the glass, window frames as well as any sealant or gaskets
present. Failure to remove any residue may cause these components to deteriorate as a direct
5. Recommended Cleaning Solutions

a solution of 1 part vinegar to 10 parts clean water
Clear Windex Glass and Surface (manufactured by SC Johnson and Son Pty Ltd). Note:
DO NOT use the blue coloured Windex product.

G. James does not recommend the use of abrasive cleaning products.
6. Cleaning Instructions - Interior Surface

As the interior surface of your Optilight Laminate contains a fine metallic coating, a
different cleaning procedure is necessary. While the recommended cleaning solutions are as
detailed in point 5, the procedure requires the coated face be hand cleaned - the use of squeegees
is NOT recommended.
Glass should only be cleaned when cool to touch and should never be cleaned while in direct
sunlight.
Using a spray bottle drench the glass surface with clean water, then apply the cleaning solution to
the glass surface by either spraying the cleaning solution onto the glass or by liberally applying the
cleaning fluid with a clean cloth. To loosen any minor residues, gently scrub the wet surface with a
moistened, clean, lint free cloth. The glass should then be dried immediately by wiping with a
second, dry, lint free cloth. It is important to stop wiping the glass just before the surface begins to
dry. This will allow the cleaning solvent to evaporate in a uniform manner, preventing streaking of
the glass.
Once again it is important to also remove all traces of the cleaning solution from the frame, gasket
or sealants present.
CONTENTS
7. Spot Cleaning
From time to time it may be necessary to remove stubborn dirt and other residues such as: oil,
grease, tape residues, crayon and the like from the coated, interior surface.
Spot cleaning of these resides is a relatively simple procedure. The method is a simple twocloth procedure where one cloth is used to break up the residues and a second cloth used to
remove the residue from the surface.
The basic steps are:

Apply a small amount of acetone to a clean, slightly damp cloth
Rub this cloth onto the affected area
A second lint free cloth can now be used to remove the residues from the surface.
The entire surface should now be cleaned as per the general cleaning procedure for the
internal face to eliminate streaking.
N.B. It is important that the frames, sealants and gaskets are protected during spot cleaning.
The spot cleaning solvents can cause irreversible degradation of these components.
8. Recommended Spot Cleaning Solvent

Acetone (acetone is available from most hardware stores. It is important the manufactures
safety and handing recommendations are followed when using this product)
Should the spot cleaning not remove the residue. It is possible to apply a mild solution of
hydrochloric acid (1% solution is recommended) to a clean cloth or to the tip of a cotton bud.
This solution should be gently applied in a circular manner to the affected area. The solution
should then be rinsed off with an excess of water and then the entire window should be recleaned as per the general cleaning procedure for the internal or coated face.
It is extremely important that the manufacturers recommendations be followed while using the
hydrochloric acid including the use of appropriate safety equipment.
This information is provided as a general guide only. It does not constitute a warranty. G.James disclaims any responsibility for any
specific results relating to the use of this guide or any liability for loss damage or injury resulting from the use of this guide.
3
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
SCHLEGEL PTY LIMITED

A. B. N. 27 000 419 876
Queensland Office:
Unit 2/17 Lawrence Drive,
Nerang, QLD 4211
Postal Address:
P O Box 3356,
Nerang BC, QLD 4211
Telephone: (07) 5527 3999

Facsimile: (07) 5527 3393
FITTING AND
MAINTENANCE OF FRICTION HINGES
These friction hinges are manufactured to the highest quality standards.
At the time of installation, and to maintain optimum performance, it is recommended
that:-
1. On installation ensure that any dust or debris is removed from the track, sliding shoe
and end point location area. Failure to do so could adversely affect product
performance.
2. Lubricate all pivot points with light machine oil (eg. 3 in 1 oil)
3. The end user needs to be aware that, at least every five years, the hinges should be
cleaned and relubricated. Also the tightness of all fixing screws or rivets checked.
For further technical information, please contact your supplier.
FRICTION HINGE FITTING INSTRUCTIONS
1. The friction hinge must be fitted between two flat, parallel faces to the correct cavity
size, and all fixing holes must be used.
2. The hinge must be fitted so that, in the closed position, the centre of the vent arm lies
parallel with the centre of the track.
3. The hinge should be fitted so that the end cap butts into the corner of the frame.
Note: This is particularly important for Egress and High Security products. Ensure
that the corner of the vent or weld sprue does not foul the end cap of the hinge.
4.
5.
6.
7.
The size and weight limitations must be strictly observed if in doubt please
consult your supplier.
The friction device should be adjusted to give the required degree of resistance.
Lubricate all pivot points with light machine oil (e.g. CRC)
Drill jigs may be obtained from your supplier to aid correct positioning of hinges.
It is the responsibility of the window manufacturer to ensure the finished window meets the
required performance and safety specifications.
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
20.5
Alert Regarding Inclement Weather Conditions

To all occupiers and residents and guests
Due to the onset of Inclement weather it is imperative to follow the procedures as outlined
in the Operations and Maintenance manual.
All operable sashes to windows and doors must be closed, locked or fully latched PRIOR to the
onset of inclement weather. All operable faade products are designed to resist forces found
during inclement weather ONLY in the closed and locked position.
This procedure must be performed to prevent the following occurrences:
The ingress of water.
Prevent wind gusts from dislodging sashes or breaking operable hardware due to tearing
actions between the operable sashes and the aluminium framing
Both of these possibilities have the capacity to become potentially life threatening scenarios.
Water ingress can result in lack of traction on smooth floor surfaces and can create electrical
hazards. Complete separation of operable sashes or hardware from faade framing can create
flying debris which can cause injury or death.
Due to the above risks it is imperative that all operable sashes in unoccupied or untenanted zones
must be kept closed, locked and fully latched at all times.
Operable sashes with more than one handle installed must be engaged in the closed position
using all of the handles provided.
Bi-fold doors must be checked that all handles and throw bolts are correctly engaged in the closed
position.
Where external balcony spaces are provided with both an external and internal window system,
the outermost window system must be closed as it performs a function as the primary weather
barrier.
Sign off for occupiers, residents, tenants and guests:
This section has been read and understood:
(Name, Signature and date)
Body Corporate sign off:
Project Maintenance Manual: Gardens View & Rise, West End
Issue: Final
Date: 12/11/2015
CONTENTS
Section 5.7
Joinery
CONTENTS
GENERAL CARE AND

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Project: Light & Co
Address: Illuminate Tower 321 Montague Rd, West End

Radiance Tower 11 Beesley St, West End
Maintenance Manuals
11 October 2016
CONTENTS
Index.
1. Scope of Works
2. Guarantee / Warranty
3. General Care and Maintenance.
4. Supplier Warranty
SCOPE OF WORKS
Supply & Installation of the following Joinery items:
Kitchens
Vanity & Shaver cabinets
Laundries
Linens
Robe Internals
Service cabinets
Studies
Multi-Purpose Room
CONTENTS
Illuminate & Radiance Towers Colour Schemes
Dawn
Daylight
Midnight
Code
Item
LA01
General Laminate
LA02
LA03
General Laminate
General Laminate
LA05
LA06
LA07
General Laminate
General Laminate
General Laminate
General Laminate
DAYLIGHT SCHEME
MIDNIGHT SCHEME
Supplier:
Laminex
Laminex
Laminex
Colour:
White
White
White
Code:
200
200
200
Finish:
Natural
Natural
Natural
Supplier:
Laminex
Laminex
Laminex
Colour:
White
White
White
Code:
200
200
200
Finish:
Natural
Natural
Natural
Supplier:
Nikpol
Nikpol
Nikpol
Colour:
Graphite [Egger]
Graphite [Egger]
Graphite [Egger]
Code:
U961
_
U961
_
U961
_
Supplier:
Laminex
Nikpol
Nikpol
Colour:
White
Graphite [Egger]
Graphite [Egger]
Code:
200
Finish:
Natural
U961
_
U961
_
Supplier:
Laminex
Laminex
Nikpol
Colour:
White
White
Graphite [Egger]
Code:
200
200
Finish:
Natural
Natural
U961
_
Supplier:
Lamicolor
Nikpol
Lamicolor
Colour:
Chalat Oak Tabac
Arlington Oak [Egger]
Lancelot Oak
Code:
Finish:
R4283RU
_
H3303
_
R4263RU
_
Supplier:
Polytec
Polytec
Polytec
Colour:
Code:
Black
_
Black
_
Black
_
Finish:
Texture
Texture
Texture
Finish:
LA04
DAWN SCHEME
CONTENTS
Illuminate & Radiance Towers Hardware
Code
HD1-A
HD1-B
Item
POI
POB
DAYLIGHT SCHEME
MIDNIGHT SCHEME
Cupboard Door and
Supplier:
Hafele
Hafele
Hafele
Drawer Fingerpull
Colour:
Matt Black
Matt Black
Matt Black
Code:
126.37.300
126.37.300
126.37.300
Model:
Luxe Profile P-L-A 05
Supplier:
Hafele
Hafele
Hafele
Cupboard Door and

Drawer Fingerpull
HD2
DAWN SCHEME
Furniture Handle
Pull Out System
Pull Out System
HINGES
DRAWER RUNNERS
Colour:
Matt Black
Matt Black
Matt Black
Code:
126.3c.300
126.3c.300
126.3c.300
Model:
Supplier:
Hafele
Hafele
Hafele
Colour:
Brushed Nickel
Brushed Nickel
Brushed Nickel
Code:
110.34.657
110.34.657
110.34.657
Model:
D-Pull
D-Pull
D-Pull
Supplier:
Hafele
Hafele
Hafele
Colour:
Chrome
Chrome
Chrome
Code:
545.57.200/201
545.57.200/201
545.57.200/201
Supplier:
Hafele
Hafele
Hafele
Colour:
Chrome
Chrome
Chrome
Code:
545.55.301
545.55.301
545.55.301
Supplier:
Sentry Trading
Sentry Trading
Sentry Trading
Manufacturer:
Blum
Blum
Blum
Code:
110/155 Deg
110/155 Deg
110/155 Deg
Supplier:
Hafele
Hafele
Hafele
Model:
Innotech
Innotech
Innotech
Code:
500 x 86/118/150
500 x 86/118/150
500 x 86/118/150
Colour:
White
White
White
CONTENTS
2. GUARANTEE / WARRANTY
Dear Sir
Light & Co
We, Octeros Cabinets, being the subcontractor who supplied and installed the Joinery items at the above
project, hereby guarantee that the installation has been carried out in accordance with the relevant
Australian standards and manufacturers recommendations
The said guarantee is current as per the following information
A warranty period of 1 year is applicable on all of our manufactured joinery items from Practical
Completion, unless stated otherwise in the contract and/or our Terms of Trade.
This warranty excludes fair wear tear and is only applicable to faulty workmanship.
Our suppliers carry their own warranty against faulty product or materials. Please check each
manufacturers website to obtain further information with regards to their specific warranties.
Only defect notices in writing will be accepted for further investigation.
DISCLAIMER:
Veneer and solid timber is a natural product and hence may vary in colour and grain. Furthermore, a
sample does not properly represent the appearance of a full size polished panel. In saying this,
Octeros Cabinets does not accept responsibility and will not warrant these items in terms of the client
disliking the larger panel, changes or colours of the grain and including but not limited to any
changes/difference in colour at time of installation or in the future
Octeros Cabinets hereby guarantees all works as per the scope of works document have
been undertaken in accordance with relevant Australian standards and manufacturers
recommendations.
Yours
faithfully
Scott
Dwan
CONTENTS
05/10/2016
Pradella Pty Ltd
Level 10, 154 Melbourne St
South Brisbane 4101
Dear Sir
Light & Co
We, Octeros Cabinets, being the subcontractor who supplied and installed the Joinery items at
the above project, hereby guarantee that the installation has been carried out in accordance with
the relevant Australian standards and manufacturers recommendations
The said guarantee is current as per the following information
Joinery Items
Manufacturers Warranty 12 Months from Practical

Completion
Octeros Cabinets hereby guarantees all works as per the scope of works document
have been undertaken in accordance with relevant Australian standards and
manufacturers recommendations.
Yours faithfully
Scott Dwan
CONTENTS
3. General Care and Maintenance.

We advise that the following is a general overview and takes no responsibility for any misuse of items
supplied and/or installed.
Each manufacturer has their own warranty and care instructions. Octeros Cabinets advises that you
should investigate further for specific instructions on particular items.
Maintenance details.
Most items in this installation are maintenance free and carry their manufacturers warranties for the
periods as identified in the contract. We suggest that each user, after the initial installation and loading
of shelves and the like, inform the maintenance person of any settling of the product as this will cause
the doors and drawers to move slightly. This settling is normal. Minor adjustments may be required at
the initial stage.
We recommend the following maintenance / cleaning procedures to be followed over the entire joinery
installation and thereafter.
CONTENTS
3.1. Laminate Surfaces

General Care and Maintenance of Laminate Joinery
1.1.
Introduction
Laminate surfaces are hard-wearing materials, but like all materials can be damaged if
used without some care and maintenance.
The following information should help in assisting you to maintain the surface of your
laminate.
1.2.
Cleaning
A wipe over with a clean soft damp cloth should be sufficient to keep surfaces clean.
Soiled surfaces or light stains are removed with warm soapy water or with a common
household detergent containing no abrasives or strongly acidic or alkaline ingredients.
It may be necessary to use a brush similar to a tooth or nail brush as well, where the
surface is of a texture or embossed finish. Wax or other polishes are unnecessary and
should not be used on decorative surfaces.
1.3.
Stains
Spills of any nature should be wiped up as soon as they occur. Laminate surfaces are
resistant to most household products, but not absolutely stain-proof. They are unaffected
by normal household reagents such as detergents, non-bleach washing powders, nail
polish remover, petrol, methylated spirits, mineral turpentine, fly spray, grease and shoe
polish.
The following will cause stains (but not limited to) if not removed immediately:
-
Tea
Beetroot Juice
Red Wine
Fruit Juices
Hypochlorite Bleach
Hydrogen Peroxide solution in any concentrate
Mineral Acids
Caustic solution
Sodium Bisulphite
CONTENTS
Potassium Permanganate in any concentrate

Berry Juices
Silver Nitrate or Silver Fluoride solutions
Gentian Violet in any concentrate
Mild Silver Protein
Laundry Blue
Dye or Iodine solution (alcohol containing 1% iodine)
If stain damage does occur, endeavour to remove by using either normal cleaning method
or appropriate solvents. If the stain persists, apply a mild abrasive such as white
toothpaste applied with a soft toothbrush or cloth.
Never use a harsh abrasive or steel wool. Stains such as residual lacquer and paints or
adhesives can generally be cleaned without difficulty, particularly if the material has not
been allowed to harden for weeks. Some special types of adhesives and paints however,
harden chemically and become insoluble and infusible quite rapidly.
These are the Cyanoacrylates, Two Pot epoxy resins, acid hardened urea and Resorcinol
glues. These must be removed before setting takes place, as they cannot be dissolved
without affecting the laminate surface.
1.4.
Care & Maintenance

Laminated joinery will only need a wipe over with warm soapy water to keep them clean.
Soiled surfaces or light stains may be removed with warm soapy water or with common
household detergent containing no abrasive or strongly acidic or alkaline ingredients.
1.5.
Resistance to Stains
Laminate joinery is unaffected by normal household reagents, ie petrol, fly spray, soaps,
non-bleach washing powders and detergents, coffee, wax, crayon and shoe polish.
Laminate joinery should not remain in contact with hypochlorite bleach, caustic
solutions, hydrogen peroxide solution in any concentrate, mineral acid, sodium
bisulphate, potassium permanganate in any concentrate, berry juices, silver nitrate (1%
concentration), gentian violet in any concentrate, mild silver protein, laundry blue dye or
iodine solution (alcohol contains 1% iodine).
CONTENTS
1.6.
Direct Sunlight Exposure

Under normal conditions of interior use, colour retention is assured. However, constant
exposure to sunlight and moisture will cause it, like most fabrics and paints to change
colour. For this reason Laminex Decorated Boards are not recommended for exterior use.
1.7.
Surface Resistance to Dry Heat

180oC slight dulling or surface disturbance may sometimes occur.
1.8.
Surface Resistance to Steam

No noticeable effect after 1 hour.
1.9.
Removal of Common Adhesives and Paints

These can be removed with the following materials:
Group 1. Alcohols (methylated spirits, methanol)
Group 2. Aromatics (xylene, petrol)
Group 3. Aliphatic's (mineral turpentine, kerosene)
Group 4. Oils (mineral oil, vegetable oil)
Group 5. Ketones (acetone, nail polish remover)
Group 6. Ether Alcohols (cellasolves, carbitoles)
Group 7. Paint Thinners (being a mixture of above)
Group 8. Lacquer Thinners (without the addition of acid)
Please Note:
Acidic based paint strippers must not be used.
Danger:
Some of the above listed solvents are extremely flammable and vapours harmful. Keep
away from heat, sparks and open flame. Keep containers closed. Avoid prolonged
breathing of vapour. Avoid prolonged or repeated contact with skin. Use adequate
ventilation.
Oil paints if reasonably fresh can normally be removed by groups 1, 2, 3, 4 and 7. If aged,
can generally be removed by more aggressive solvents such as 5, 6 and 8.
CONTENTS
Enamels generally require solvents from groups 2, 5 and 8.
Contact adhesives, if not too old and cured, can be removed by 2, 4, 5 and 8.
PVA adhesive types can generally be removed with soap and water and solvent groups
1 and 3.
Paraffin wax residue from candles should be scraped off, taking care not to scratch
the surface in the process. Any residue still present can be ironed out through blotting
paper.
1.10. Scratches and Cuts
Laminate surfaces can be damaged by chopping and cutting directly onto the surface and to
prevent this happening, a cutting board or chopping board should always be used.
Sliding of heavy metallic or earthenware objects can cause scuffing of the surface. Fine
scratches or scuffmarks can often be removed by the application of a good quality car
polish.
Severe cuts and scratches can be repaired with Laminex Colorfill specially formulated
colour match kit for sealing joins and repairing damaged decorative surfaces.
1.11. Burns
Laminates will withstand boiling water and temperatures up to 155oC (310oF). However,
we again recommend the use of a protective mat to prevent the surface being scorched
when a hot iron is being or has been used.
The same applies when pans or dishes are taken from the oven or hot plates as their
temperature in most instances would be in excess of 155oC (310oF).
Some makes of electric frypans can also generate sufficient heat to damage Laminex
laminate surfaces.
If by accident a slight scorch mark appears, it may be possible to remove using the method
detailed under the heading stains, applying a mild abrasive such as toothpaste with a soft
toothbrush or cloth.
CONTENTS
Should damage be severe, replacement of the area would be the only satisfactory solution.
3.2. Planned Maintenance Schedule

Kitchens cupboards / doors
At least once a week
Vanities

Any spills to be cleaned immediately
Any excess water / spillage must be cleaned
immediately
Benchtops

immediately
Handles
Cutlery tray
All hardware to be cleaned as part of

general housekeeping
Drawer
Storage - cupboards

immediately
Storage doors
Wipe over when attending to cupboards
Stone benchtop (by OTHERS)
Refer to stone supplier
Handles
Wipe over when attending to cupboards
CONTENTS
3.3. Aluminium
Cleaning Instructions
Aluminium anodised finish Wash with warm water and a non-abrasive kitchen detergent
using a soft cloth or soft bristle brush. To prevent any shiny spots, do not press too hard and to
prevent streaking, wash from the bottom up. Rinse with clean water to remove all traces of
detergent. If this does not remove all dirt build up, a solvent cleaner such as kerosene, turps or
white spirits may have to be used. Thoroughly rinse and wipe dry with a soft cloth after cleaning.
A coat of liquid wax may be used to enhance the gloss finish.
Avoid scouring or excessive use of an abrasive, as this will impair the surface.
Any damage to these finishes will be difficult to repair and will most likely require the
replacement of that component.
Please contact Octeros for the recommended course of action.
CONTENTS
3.4. Stainless Steel

Cleaning Instructions
Clean with a damp cloth, mix 50 / 50 water and methylated spirits, or Windex and then polish
with a soft dry cloth. Abrasive cleaners will scratch the surface. The stainless steel should be
washed down regularly to maintain appearances a minimum of every six months.
Avoid scouring or excessive use of an abrasive, as this will impair the surface.
Any damage to these components will be difficult to repair and will most likely require the
replacement of that component.
Please contact Octeros for the recommended course of action.
CONTENTS
3.5. Hardware
Generally hardware should not be oiled or greased. Dust and grit should not be allowed to build
up on hardware and should this not be possible the hardware should be cleaned of dust and grit
regularly by vacuuming or brushing.
Should any item of hardware not function properly, discontinue its use and advise your
maintenance staff which in most case will only require minor adjustment. Should the problem be
more severe contact Octeros who will recommend a cause of action.
Hardware has generally been supplied by
Blum Australia Pty Ltd

Unit 6, 39-45 Compton Road (Cnr Ewing St)
UNDERWOOD QLD 4119
AUSTRALIA
Telephone: +61 7 3135 - 9490
Fax: +61 7 3290 - 0453
CONTENTS
3.6. Operational Damage

In the event of a piece of furniture failing to operate normally, discontinue its use immediately
and contact the maintenance staff.
Should your maintenance staff be unable to rectify the problem, contact Octeros who will
arrange for personnel to address the problem and recommend a course of action. To assist in
identifying the furniture concerned, we require the room area number and joinery description.
3.7. Water Damage

Water left lying on any joinery will cause damage if not wiped up immediately.
If water spill occurs, dry up the area thoroughly and immediately.
If plumbing leaks occur, dry the area thoroughly and immediately.
Please note that water damage is not covered by any joinery warranty.
CONTENTS
3.8. How to Contact Octeros
Our offices and manufacturing centres are located in:

Brisbane Office
2/10 Depot Street
Banyo Qld 4014
P: 07 3266 4965
E: info@thescootergroup.com
Sunshine Coast Office & Manufacturing
1/23 Production Ave
Warana Qld 4575
P: 07 5493 3000
E: info@octeros.com
CONTENTS
LAMINEX
FACTSHEET CARE & MAINTENANCE
For general care and maintenance, simply wipe away most spills
(1 part bleach to 8 parts water); leave for 3 minutes then wash off
or marks with a damp cloth, or use an all purpose cleaner such as
with water and dry. Finish off with Extra Strength Windex. Only as
Windex spray cleaner or Ajax Spray n Wipe. Rubbing gently with
a last resort if a stain persists try 2 or 3 rubs with a crme cleanser
a clean, dry cloth brings back the brightness of laminates. With a
or white toothpaste, wash and dry. Please note that bleach or these
few sensible precautions, your Laminex laminate surface will enjoy
abrasive cleaners may irreversibly damage the laminate surface.
a long lifespan.
GENERAL CARE SCRATCHES
GENERAL CARE INFORMATION
Laminex laminate surfaces will withstand normal wear and tear, but
Avoid scourers and abrasives as they will damage the surface.
can be damaged by scratching or cutting with utensils, knives and
Dont place hot objects, electrical appliances or pots straight
unglazed pottery. Darker colours will show scratches more readily
from the oven or cooker onto your Laminex laminate surface.
than lighter colours. In general, dark colours and high gloss surfaces
Dont cut on the Laminex laminate surface.
require more care and maintenance than lighter colours or lower
Keep waxes and polishes well away as they dull the
gloss colours. To minimise scratching, always place and lift objects
natural shine.
Do not use strongly acidic, alkaline cleaners or bleach for
normal cleaning as these might etch the surface.
GENERAL CARE STREAKS

Streaky marks sometimes show on dark colours after cleaning.
An all-purpose cleaner such as Windex spray cleaner or Ajax
Spray n Wipe usually removes them.
from the surface never drag or slide them across the surface.
SPECIFIC CARE LAMINEX LAMINATES

(This applies to Squareform Benchtops, Fire Retardant Laminates,
Chemical Resistant Laminates, Aquapanel Wet Area Panelling,
Vizage Wall Lining, Fusion Laminates and Compact Laminate).
A damp cloth will remove spills and greasy spots. Rub with a clean
dry cloth to bring back brightness. Occasionally clean with mild
GENERAL CARE GREASE
dishwashing detergent. To remove heavy build-up of dirt use
Using a mild dishwashing detergent in water will remove greasy
cleaners such as Mr Muscle, Windex or Ajax Spray n Wipe
marks. Dab, wait and wipe away. Finish with an all-purpose cleaner
spray cleaners.
such as Windex spray cleaner or Ajax Spray n Wipe.
GENERAL CARE SPILLS
SPECIFIC CARE LAMINEX

DIAMONDGLOSS LAMINATES
Laminex laminate surfaces resist staining from most household
Wipe off spills or marks promptly with gentle rubbing using a soft
chemicals. With some accidental spills however, prompt action
cloth and mild dishwashing detergent. Dry with a soft, dry cloth.
is essential. Wipe off beetroot, grape and berry juices, first aid
For more persistent marks, use a glass window cleaner. Never use
preparations, concentrated bleach, oven cleaners, dishwasher
abrasive cleaners even those in liquid form as they will mark
detergents, artificial dyes, hair colouring and solvent based pen
the high gloss surface.
ink immediately. Specialty glues such as Super Glue must also be

removed straight away with acetone (nail polish remover).
If used as a whiteboard surface, whiteboard markers or liquid

chalk marker pens only should be used. The use of permanent
GENERAL CARE STAINS
markers is not recommended, as while it is possible to clean them
If the stain wont budge with Extra Strength Windex, try
off, they may leave ghosting or non-removable marks over time.
methylated spirits or dab the stain with a diluted bleach mixture
A soft cloth (no wetting) should remove whiteboard/liquid chalk
CONTENTS
LAMINEX
FACTSHEET CARE & MAINTENANCE
marker pens. If necessary, a soft cloth made damp with water can
abrasive cleaners, powders, scouring pads, steel wool, sandpaper,
also be used. As with all whiteboard surfaces, general wear and
etc. These can damage the finish and make the surface susceptible
tear such as scratches or scuff marks will occur over time which
to staining. Silicone based cleaning products must be avoided.
will make cleaning more difficult. When marker pen cannot be

removed with a damp cloth, consideration should be given to
replacing the whiteboard surface.
SPECIFIC CARE LAMINEX PANELS (GLOSS)

A wipe over with a clean, soft damp cloth should be sufficient to
keep the decorative surface clean. Soiled surfaces or light stains
SPECIFIC CARE LAMINEX METALLIC

LAMINATES (INNOVATIONS)
are removed with warm soapy water or with common detergent
Wipe off spills or marks promptly with a soft cloth and mild
or bathroom cleaner, Flash liquid, or Bathroom Plus, containing no
dishwashing detergent. Dry with a soft, dry cloth. For more
abrasive or strongly acidic or alkaline ingredients. If wipe marks are
persistent marks, use a glass window cleaner. Never use abrasive
noticeable on the gloss surface, it is generally due to greasy residue
cleaners even those in liquid form as they will mark the surface.
being moved around as a result of the cleaning process. To remove,
Also never use solvents, acids or alkalis on metallic laminates.
Methylated spirits may be used or Windex glass cleaner. It is
SPECIFIC CARE LAMINEX STAINLESS

STEEL LAMINATES (INNOVATIONS)
such as Windex Glass cleaner, Mr Muscle, Dissol, Nifty Solvent
recommended to do a final wash down with soapy water and a

dry, clean cloth to remove any residue and restore the appearance.
Wipe off spills or marks promptly with a soft cloth and mild
SPECIFIC CARE METALINE SPLASHBACKS
dishwashing detergent. Dry with a soft, dry cloth. For more
When cleaning your Metaline surface use only mild detergent and
persistent marks, use a glass window cleaner or methylated spirits.
a soft, abrasion-free cloth to clean the decorated surface.
Never use abrasive cleaners even those in liquid form as they
DO NOT use abrasive cleaners, cleaning pads or scouring pads
will mark the surface. Specialty stainless steel cleaner can also be
used if necessary.
SPECIFIC CARE LAMINEX PANELS

A damp cloth will remove spills and greasy spots. Rub with a clean,
dry cloth to bring back brightness. Occasionally clean with mild
dishwashing detergent. To remove heavy build-up of dirt use cleaners
such as Mr Muscle, Windex or Ajax Spray n Wipe spray cleaners.
SPECIFIC CARE FINISHED DESIGNED

TIMBER VENEER PANELS
on the surface.
DO NOT allow food residue to build up on the surface.
DO NOT use cleaning solutions that are highly acidic or caustic.
DO clean regularly.
DO NOT clean the surface if it is hot.
SPECIFIC CARE - LAMINEX LEATHER

TOUCH LAMINATES (INNOVATIONS)
These should be cleaned with standard artificial leather care
products. Ensure the manufacturer's instructions are followed.
Laminex Finished Designed Timber Veneer Panels are easy

to clean using a damp cloth and non-abrasive cleaning products.
To remove more stubborn stains, the use of alcohol, ammonia
or other light solvents is recommended. Never use acetone or
trichloroethylene on the polyurethane surfaces. Do not use
For a free sample chip call 1800 002 204. For more information visit laminex.com.au or call 132 136.
Laminex laminate is manufactured, marketed and distributed by Laminex ABN 98 004 093 092. Laminex, DiamondGloss, Innovations, Metaline.
CONTENTS
SI
HVDOHV#SRO\WHFFRPDX

ZZZZSRO\WHFFRPDX
/$0,1$7( & bench tops

7KHVXUIDFHRISRO\WHFV/$0,1$7( EHQFKWRSVLVPDGHIURPDVWDLQUHVLVWDQWPHODPLQHEDVHGUHVLQ
7KHWRXJKQHVVDQGKLJKLPSHUPHDELOLW\RIWKLVVXUIDFHPHDQVWKDWSRO\WHFV/$0,1$7( EHQFKWRSV
VKRXOGUHTXLUHQRPRUHWKDQZLSLQJZLWKDVRIWFORWKGDPSHQHGZLWKSODLQZDWHURUDKRXVHKROGGHWHUJHQW
PL[WRUHPRYHDOOFRPPRQKRXVHKROGVSLOOV
SRO\WHFV/$0,1$7( EHQFKWRSVVKRXOGEHFOHDQHGDVIROORZV
6WDLQV
8VLQJ D PLOG KRXVHKROG VSUD\ ZLSH GRZQ WKH EHQFKWRS ZLWK D
VRIWFORWKWDNLQJFDUHQRWWRUXEWRRKDUG'U\XVLQJDVRIWFORWK
VRDVQRWWROHDYHDQ\VROYHQWRQWKHEHQFKWRS
<RX PD\ DOVR XVH 0HWK\ODWHG 6SLULW RQ D VRIW FORWK XVLQJ D
FLUFXODU FOHDQLQJ PRWLRQ 7KRURXJKO\ FOHDQ RYHU WKH ZLGHU DUHD
ZLWKZDWHUDQGGHWHUJHQWRQDGDPSFORWKDIWHUZDUGVWRUHPRYH
DQ\UHVLGXDO0HWK\ODWHG6SLULW
$OZD\VHQVXUHWKDW\RXUHIHUWRWKHUHFRPPHQGDWLRQVSURYLGHG
E\WKHFOHDQLQJSURGXFWPDQXIDFWXUHUEHIRUHXVH
7RHQVXUHWKDW\RXU:DUUDQW\ZLOOQRWEHYRLG'2127XVHDQ\RIWKHIROORZLQJRQSRO\WHFV
/$0,1$7( EHQFKWRSV
&RPPHUFLDO&OHDQLQJ3URGXFWV$EUDVLYH&OHDQHUV6FRXULQJ3DGV
RU $EUDVLYH 3DSHUV 6ROYHQWV 7KLQQHUV 7XUSHQWLQH 7XUSV
$PPRQLD %OHDFK $FHWRQH 0(. DQG DQ\ RWKHU FOHDQLQJ DJHQWV
FRQWDLQLQJ2UJDQLF6ROYHQWVRUWKHDERYHPHQWLRQHGSURGXFWV
3OH3OHDVHQRWH

1RWH
SRO\WHF SURYLGHV D OLPLWHG VHYHQ \HDU ZDUUDQW\ RQ DOO

ODPLQDWHDQGEHQFKWRSSURGXFWV7KHOLPLWHGZDUUDQW\FRYHUV
ZRUNPDQVKLS PDQXIDFWXULQJ GHIHFWV ,I \RX GHWHFW DQ\
SUREOHPVZLWK\RXUODPLQDWHRUEHQFKWRS\RXQHHGWRFRQWDFW
3RO\WHFZLWKLQ\HDUVIURPWKHSXUFKDVHGDWH

)DLOXUH WR IROORZ WKH DERYH FDUH LQVWUXFWLRQV ZLOO UHVXOW LQ
GDPDJHWRWKHODPLQDWHDQGYRLG\RXUZDUUDQW\

SRO\WHFVZDUUDQW\GRHVQRWFRYHUJHQHUDOZHDUDQGWHDU
)DLOXUHWRIROORZDQ\LQVWUXFWLRQVDERYHZLOOYRLGWKH:DUUDQW\
Updated 1 Aug, 2010

CONTENTS
p 1300 300 547

f 1300 320 547
e sales@polytec.com.au
w www.polytec.com.au
THERMOLAMINATED
vinyl door & panel care
Your THERMOLAMINATED vinyl doors and panels are manufactured from the highest quality materials and
designed to provide years of trouble free service.
Whilst your doors are made from a Moisture Resistant Medium Density Fibreboard (MR MDF) and as with any
wood based panel cannot be made totally waterproof, care should be taken to wipe up spills immediately,
ensuring the doors are not exposed to high or continuous levels of moisture, steam and humidity.
THERMOLAMINATED vinyl doors and panels should be cleaned as follows:
Stains
Wipe down using a damp soft cloth containing
warm soapy water.
For more stubborn stains use a mild household
cleaning spray as per the manufacturers
recommendation.
Always ensure that you refer to the
recommendations provided by the cleaning
product manufacturer before use.
To ensure that your polytec Guarantee will not be void, DO NOT use any of the following on
THERMOLAMINATED vinyl doors and panels:
Commercial Cleaning Products, Abrasive Cleaners,
Scouring Pads or Abrasive Papers, Acids and Alkalis,
Solvents, Thinners, Turpentine (Turps), Ammonia,
Bleach, Methylated Spirits, Acetone, M.E.K. and any
other cleaning agents containing Organic Solvents
or the above mentioned products.
Please note: polytec provide a limited seven (7) year warranty on all door products which insures against
design, workmanship & manufacturing defects. If you detect any problems with your doors polytec must be
notified within seven (7) years from the date your doors were manufactured. Failure to follow the above care
instructions could result in damage to your door and void your entitlement to the warranty.
CONTENTS
04.0 Supplier
Warrantys
Light & Co
Maintenance Manuals
6 October 2016
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
1LNSRO'HFRUDWLYH3URGXFWV
6XEMHFWWRWKHFRQGLWLRQVDQGOLPLWDWLRQVVHWRXWLQWKH
ZDUUDQW\1LNSROSURYLGHVWKHRULJLQDOSXUFKDVHURIDQ\
SURGXFWVIRUERWKWKHUHVLGHQWLDODQGRUFRPPHUFLDO
LQWHULRUDSSOLFDWLRQV1LNSRODWLWVRZQGLVFUHWLRQZLOO
UHSDLURUUHSODFHDQ\SURGXFWVZLWKRXWFKDUJHLILWLV
GHIHFWLYHGLUHFWO\DVDUHVXOWRIPDQXIDFWXUHGXULQJWKH
ILUVW\HDUVDIWHULQLWLDOSXUFKDVHSURRIRISXUFKDVHLV
UHTXLUHG
7KLVZDUUDQW\GRHVQRWFRYHU
D
$Q\DFWRI*RGDQ\QDWXUDORFFXUUHQFHRU
DQ\RWKHUFLUFXPVWDQFHEH\RQG1LNSROV
FRQWURORU
E
)DLOXUH
WR
IROORZ
DQ\
SURFHGXUHV
UHFRPPHQGHG E\ 1LNSRO GXULQJ WKH WLPH RI
IDEULFDWLRQDQGLQVWDOODWLRQRU
F
3K\VLFDODEXVHPLVXVHDFFLGHQWVH[SRVXUH
WRH[FHVVLYHPRLVWXUHWKHXVHRIVROYHQWVRU
LQDSSURSULDWHFOHDQLQJSURGXFWVPDWHULDOV
LPSURSHUPDLQWHQDQFHQRUPDOZHDUDQG
WHDUVFUDWFKHVVFXIIVEXUQVVWDLQVZLSH
PDUNVRQGDUNHUGpFRUVXUIDFHVH[SRVXUHWR
FKHPLFDOSURGXFWVRU
7KLVZDUUDQW\DSSOLHVRQO\WR1LNSROSURGXFWV
D
3XUFKDVHGIRUWKHSXUSRVHRILQWHULRUXVHLQD
UHVLGHQWLDORUFRPPHUFLDODSSOLFDWLRQ
E
+DVUHPDLQHGLQVWDOOHGDWWKHORFDWLRQRILWV
RULJLQDOLQVWDOODWLRQ
F
+DVEHHQLQVWDOOHGPDLQWDLQHGXVHGDQG
SURWHFWHGLQWKHPDQQHUUHFRPPHQGHGLQWKH
OLWHUDWXUHDWWKHUHOHYDQWWLPHRIPDWWHUVVXFK
DVLQVWDOODWLRQPDLQWHQDQFHXVHRUSURWHFWLRQ
G
7KDW1LNSROKDVEHHQQRWLILHGZLWKLQVHYHQ
GD\VRIWKHILUVWSHUVRQWREHFRPHDZDUHRILW
5HSODFHPHQWSURGXFWVPD\QRWEHUHDVRQDEO\DYDLODEOH
IURP1LNSROLQWKHVDPHVKDSHW\SHRUFRORXUDVWKH
RULJLQDOSURGXFWFRYHUHG1LNSROUHVHUYHVWKHULJKWWR
UHSODFHWKHSURGXFWDVFORVHWRUHDVRQDEO\SRVVLEOHXQGHU
WKHVDWLVIDFWLRQRIWKLVZDUUDQW\
7KLVZDUUDQW\GRHVQRWFRYHUORVVRUGDPDJHVRQDQ\
RWKHUSURGXFWXVHGRULQVWDOOHGLQFRQQHFWLRQZLWKD
1LNSROSURGXFW
G
*HQHUDOIDGLQJDQGGLVFRORXUDWLRQH[SRVXUH
WRVXQOLJKWVKRXOGEHDYRLGHGRU
7KLVZDUUDQW\LVQRWWUDQVIHUUDEOHRUDVVLJQDEOH
H
3URGXFWV EHLQJ LQ DSSOLFDWLRQ WKDW DUH QRW

UHFRPPHQGHG E\ WKH PDQXIDFWXUHU LQ DOO
SXEOLVKHGSURGXFWOLWHUDWXUHRU
I
J
)DXOW\ZRUNPDQVKLSE\DQ\SHUVRQRU
9DULDWLRQLQFRORXUSDWWHUQVKDGHRIWKH
PDWHULDODJDLQVWWKHVDPSOHPDWHULDOGLVSOD\V
DQGRUSULQWHGLOOXVWUDWLRQV
3OHDVHIRUZDUGDOOZDUUDQW\RULQTXLULHVWR1LNSROLQ
ZULWLQJWR
1LNSRO3W\/WG
)DLUFKLOG6WUHHW
+HDWKHUWRQ9LFWRULD$8675$/,$
7KLVZDUUDQW\DOVRGRHVQRWLQFOXGH
K $Q\WKLQJWKDWKDVEHHQGLVFORVHGDVDIHDWXUH
OLPLWDWLRQRI1LNSROSURGXFWVLQOLWHUDWXUH
SXEOLVKHGRUGLVWULEXWHGRU
2XWGRRUDSSOLFDWLRQVRU
:KHUHWKHGHIHFWLVWULYLDORULQVXEVWDQWLDORU
N :KHUHDVDWWKHGDWHRIQRWLILFDWLRQRIWKHGHIHFW
WRWKHW\SHRUGpFRUFRORXURIWKHDOOHJHG
GHIHFWLYHSURGXFWQRORQJHUIRUPVSDUWRIWKH
VWRFNVWDQGDUGUDQJH7KHSHUVRQPDNLQJWKH
FRPSODLQWRIWKHGHIHFWGRHVQRWDJUHHWRWKH
VXSSO\RIDUHSODFHPHQWZKLFKLVDVFORVHWRW\SH
DQGGpFRUFRORXUPDWFKDVSRVVLEOHIURPWKH
FXUUHQWDYDLODEOHVWRFNUDQJH
L
M
CONTENTS
LAMINEX LAMINATES
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
In this warranty, Laminex Laminates Product means Laminex Redback, Laminex

DiamondGloss, Laminex 180fx, Laminex Squareform, Laminex Impressions Spark finish ,
Laminex Impressions Nuance Finish, Laminex Innovations and Laminex Chemical Resistant
Redback.
Subject to the conditions and limitations set out in this warranty below, Laminex Group
Limited ABN 98 004 093 092 trading as Laminex warrants to the original purchaser
of any Laminex Laminates Product for interior residential or commercial use who is a
consumer as defined in section 3 of the Australian Consumer Law that Laminex will
at its option, repair or replace any Laminex Laminates Product without charge if it is
defective directly as a result of its manufacture or supply by Laminex or the materials
used in its manufacture by Laminex during the first 7 years after initial purchase (proof
of purchase will be required). Subject to paragraph 8, this obligation terminates at the
expiration of 7 years from the date of purchase of the product concerned from Laminex.
This warranty does not cover any defect caused by:
a) any natural occurrence, or any other act or circumstance beyond Laminexs control;
or
b) failure to follow any procedures recommended by Laminex, at the time of fabrication
and installation, for the fabrication and installation of a Laminex Laminates Product; or
c) physical abuse, misuse, accidents, exposure to excessive heat, exposure t excessive
moisture, the use of solvents or inappropriate cleaning products/materials, exposure
to chemical products, improper maintenance, normal wear and tear, scratches, scuffs,
burns, stains, wipe marks on darker colour surfaces; or
d) general fading or discolouration or damage due to direct and indirect light (exposure
to direct sunlight should be avoided); or
e) the product being used in applications that are not recommended by Laminex; or
f) faulty workmanship by any person other than Laminex; or
g) variation in colour, pattern, shade of material against the sample material, display/s and/or
printed illustrations. This warranty also does not cover:
h) where the defect is trivial or insubstantial; or
i)
where, as at the date of notification of the defect to Laminex, the type or colour of the
alleged defective product no longer forms part of Laminexs standard stock range and
the person complaining of the defect does not agree to the supply of a replacement
which is a close a type or colour match as is possible from Laminexs then prevailing
stock range; or
j)
where the defect has been disclosed as a feature or limitation of the Laminex
Laminates product in any literature published by Laminex; or
k) outdoor application.
This warranty applies only to Laminex Laminates Products:
a) Purchased from Laminex after 1 July 1994 for interior residential or commercial use in
Australia;
b) That has remained installed at the location at which it was first installed after its sale by
Laminex;
c) Which has been installed, maintained, used and protected in the manner
recommended by Laminex, as at the relevant time of such installation, maintenance,
use or protection, in its literature published from time to time concerning the Laminex
Laminates Product, a copy of which may be obtained, free of charge, at the point of
purchase or by writing directly to Laminex at the address given below;
d) Where Laminex has been notified of the defect within seven days of the first person
to become aware of it.
Costs of claiming:
a) Laminex will bear the expense of the reasonable labour charges which are necessary for
the repair or replacement of the Laminex Laminates Product covered by this warranty.
When submitting a claim, please provide details of the quantum of the labour charges
necessary for the repair or replacement of the Laminex Laminates Product (including any
quotes you have obtained verifying the labour charges).
b) If Laminex considers that you have incurred or will incur reasonable labour charges
which are necessary for the repair or replacement of the Laminex Laminates Product
covered by this warranty, it will pay you the amount of those charges or pay those
charges directly to a third party to undertake the necessary repair or replacement works.
c) Subject to a), the person claiming the warranty will bear all other expenses of claiming
the warranty.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
A replacement product may not be reasonably available from Laminex in the same shape,
type or colour as the original Laminex Laminates Product covered by this warranty. If a
replacement product of the same shape, type or colour is not reasonably available, Laminex
reserves the right to provide a replacement product of as close a shape, type and colour
match as is reasonably possible from Laminexs then prevailing product range in satisfaction
of its obligations under this warranty.
Except as expressly provided in paragraphs 9 and 10, all terms, conditions, warranties,
undertakings, inducements and representations, whether express or implied, statutory or
otherwise relating in any way to Laminex Laminates Product are excluded. Without limiting
the generality of the preceding sentence, Laminex will not be under any other liability in
respect of any loss or damage (including consequential loss or damage) however caused
(whether by negligence or otherwise) which may be suffered or incurred or which may
arise directly or indirectly in respect of the Laminex Laminates Product.
Where any applicable legislation implies any term, condition or warranty into the contract
of sale between Laminex and a person, or Laminexs relationship with a person, which
has acquired a Laminex Laminates Product, or otherwise gives that person a particular
remedy against Laminex, and that legislation or any legislation voids or prohibits any
provision excluding, or modifying the application of, or exercise of, any liability under such
term, condition, warranty or remedy, then that term, condition warranty or remedy shall
be deemed to be included in or, as the case may be, apply to that contract or relationship.
However, Laminexs liability for any breach of such term, condition or warranty or under such
remedy, shall be limited, at Laminexs option, in any one or more of the ways permitted by
that legislation including, where so permitted:
a) If the breach related to a Laminex Laminates Product:
i. The replacement of the Laminex Laminates Product or the supply of equivalent
product;
ii. The repair of the Laminex Laminates Product;
iii. The payment of the cost of replacing the Laminex Laminates Product or acquiring
equivalent product; or
iv. The payment of the cost of having the Laminex Laminates Product
repaired; and
b) If the breach relates to services:
i. The supplying of the services again; or
ii. The payment of the cost of having the services supplied again.
Please note that the benefits given by this warranty are in addition to other rights and
remedies of the person under a law in relation to the goods or services to which this
warranty relates. This warranty should not therefore be read as an exclusive statement of the
rights of the original purchaser or any other person.
Our goods come with guarantees that cannot be excluded under the Australian Consumer
Law. You are entitled to a replacement or refund for a major failure and compensation for
any other reasonably foreseeable loss or damage. You are also entitled to have the goods
repaired or replaced if the goods fail to be of acceptable quality and the failure does not
amount to a major failure.
This warranty does not cover any other product used or installed in connection with the
Laminex Laminates Product.
This warranty is not transferable or assignable.
Any inquiries regarding this warranty should be sent to Laminex Laminates Warranties,
Laminex, P.O. Box 407, Doncaster, VIC 3108. Inquiries can also be made by calling 132 136 or
emailing enquiries@laminex.com.au.
To claim this warranty, please send the following written details to the address set out above:
s 9
OURNAMEADDRESSANDTELEPHONENUMBER
s 0LACEWHERETHE,AMINEX,AMINATES0RODUCTWASPURCHASEDANDAMOUNTYOUPAIDFORIT
Please also provide a copy of your proof of purchase
s )FTHE,AMINEX,AMINATES0RODUCTHASBEENINSTALLED THEADDRESSATWHICHITWAS
installed, the date of installation, the name of the person and company that installed
it, the quantum of the labour charges necessary for the repair or replacement of the
Laminex Laminates Product (including any quotes you have obtained verifying the labour
charges)
s $ESCRIPTIONOFHOWTHE,AMINEX,AMINATES0RODUCTISDEFECTIVEANDWHENYOUFOUNDOUT
that it was defective. Please also provide any photographs taken of the defect(s)
After we receive your written claim, we will contact you to discuss. In some circumstances
Laminex may need to remove a sample of the installed Laminex Laminates Product for testing.
Laminex Laminates are marketed, distributed and manufactured by Laminex,

a division of Laminex Group Pty Limited A.B.N. 98 004 093 092.
Laminex, Redback, DiamondGloss, 180fx, Squareform, Impressions, Innovations
Return this original warranty form to Laminex Laminates Warranties, Laminex, P.O. Box 407,
Doncaster VIC 3108 to ensure your warranty is registered. Remember to retain your proof of purchase.
9/13
Name: ___________________________________________________________________________________________________
Place where Laminex Laminates were purchased: _________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Address where Laminex Laminates are installed: __________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Date installed: ___________________________________________________________________________________________
Installed by: _____________________________________________________________________________________________
Date: _____________________________ Signed: ______________________________________________________________
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
warranty terms & conditions
polytec Products Limited Warranty Terms & Conditions

Definitions
(c)
Heavy weight or impact Placing heavy objects on

the product; applying substantial weight to the product,
polytec Borg Manufacturing PTY LTD trading as Polytec PTY LTD.
including by standing, sitting or lying on the product; or
Commercial Any application installed in a non residential premises
applying excessive impact to or mishandling the product,
e.g.- high traffic area such as, but not limited to a office, restaurant,
including the impact caused by objects scraped along,
bar, religious buildings, educational, private business or retail outlet.
thrown or dropped on the products surface; or
Warranty The products supplied to you will, under normal use be
(d)
Acidic food products Exposing the product to acidic
free from defects arising from manufacture of the product. Subject to
food products such as salt, vinegar, tea and citric fruit
clause 1, the warranty period for the products supplied by polytec is
juice; or Chemical damage - Exposing the product to
set out in the table below.
acidic or corrosive materials, cosmetics and chemicals
Product
Warranty Term
EVOLUTION and MELAMINE doors,

panels, and board.
Seven (7) years.
THERMOLAMINATED doors and

panels
Seven (7) years.
Roller Shutters
Five (5) years.
ALUMINIUM framed doors
Seven (7) years.
BENCHTOPS
Seven (7) years on

benchtops made by polytec.
LAMINATE
Seven (7) years.
COMPACT laminate
Seven (7) years.
COMPACT laminate Table Tops
One (1) Year.
imi-beton, Holz-in-Form, Valchromat
One (1) year.
such as dyes, solvents, bleach, inks, acetone, denture

cleaner and photo developing fluid; or
(e)
Using inappropriate household cleaning products DO

NOT USE abrasive cream or powder cleansers, furniture
polish/wax/powder; oven cleaner, drain cleaners, sugar
soap and strongly alkaline or acidic cleaners; or
(f)
Failure to clean as recommended You must follow

cleaning instructions set out in our Care & Maintenance
guides found at www.polytec.com.au; or
(g)
Structural or support changes Changes affecting the

building or application where the product has been
installed, causing twisting, warping, bowing, cupping
or shrinkage of the Product, including movements caused
by hydrostatic pressure resulting in the expansion or
contraction of the cabinetry or other structure on which the
product is installed; or
(h)
1.
Incorrect installation All polytec products must be
Commercial use If any of the above polytec products are used
installed meeting the Australian/New Zealand Domestic
in a commercial application the warranty term is for 12 months
kitchen standards (AS/NZS 4386:2 1996); failure to
(1 year) from date of purchase.
install correctly, including; not following the recommended

fabrication and installation instructions and use of the
2.
3.
polytec only This Warranty applies only to products sold by
Product with inappropriate cabinetry or other structures;
polytec or any of its approved suppliers and that have paid for
and extending to delamination, swelling and surface
in full for the product.
bubbling where you or your supplier have applied your
What polytec will do In the event that a claim is made
own adhesive; or
and it is established to polytecs satisfaction that there is a
(i)
Unauthorised modifications Any modifications or work
manufacturing defect in the product in breach of the warranty,
to the Product by any person other than polytec approved
then polytec will, at its option, either repair the product
suppliers; or
at polytecs premises or on site (as elected by polytec) or

provide replacement product (in a manner polytec considers
(j)
Inappropriate use Including use of the Product outdoors

or in any way which exposes the Product to UV (exposure
reasonable).
to direct sunlight) or consistent environmental forces that

4.
What the warranty does not cover This warranty does not
could effect the product; or
extend to fair wear and tear, delamination or any damage,

defects or failures within the product which (in polytecs opinion)
(k)
Inadequate maintenance Including failure to
directly or indirectly arise from or are due to, but are not limited
follow procedures set out in the manufacturers; or
to:
recommendations and Care and Maintenance Guides; or
(a)
Water damage Including damage from steam,

excessive moisture; or
(b)
(l)
Other specified causes Any other causes specified in the

Product information as being excluded from this warranty
Heat damage Placing hot pans, pots or similar hot

objects directly on the surface of the product, including
damage consisting of cracks in and scorching of the
product; or
www.polytec.com.au
p 1300 300 547
CONTENTS
warranty terms & conditions
In addition, this warranty does not cover;

(m)
7.
excluded under the Australian Consumer Law. You are entitled to
Colour and gloss variations Any variations with
a replacement or refund for a major failure and compensation
the colour or gloss within the Product including any
for any other reasonably foreseeable loss or damage. You
replacement Product, or any ageing or fading of colour,
are also entitled to have the goods repaired or replaced if the
shine or gloss level over time; or

(n)
Limitations Our goods come with guarantees that cannot be
goods fail to be of acceptable quality and the failure does not
Imperfections Any visual imperfections or blemishes
amount to a major failure. The obligations of polytec under
in the surface and edges of the product in excess of
this warranty are limited to those set out and this warranty is
accepted industry standards, including pimples, dimples,
expressly instead of all other warranties, expressed or implied,
dents, creases, cracks, cuts, marks, chips, scratches
including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a
and surface irregularities which are not brought to your
particular purpose and not withstanding any course of dealing
suppliers attention at the time you inspected the Product
between the parties or custom and usage in the trade to the
or at any other time before the product is cut or modified
contrary.
in any way.
8.
Inquiries Any inquiries into this warranty should be sent to:
Further, polytec will not be liable for consequential loss
polytec Warranty Department
or damage whatsoever and however arising out of or in
4 Arizona Road
connection with the supply, performance or removal of
or emailed to: warranty@borgs.com.au;
consequential loss (including, without limitation, loss of profit,
or by phone: (02) 4393 8959.
loss of revenue, loss of contract, loss of goodwill or increased

cost of workings) even if due to the negligence of polytec or any
of its approved suppliers, employees or agents.
5.
CHAMRMHAVEN N.S.W 2263;
the Product, including (but not limited to) any indirect or
Validity This warranty becomes valid only when polytec

has been paid in full for all products used. Warranty is valid
9.
Claims To claim your warranty please send the following to

one of the contacts above:
Your name, address and phone number.
The installers business name, proof of purchase including

sales order numbers and dates of purchase.
from the date of payment in full, warranty period does not
6.
recommence if a warranty claim is made. In this case the
The address where polytec products have been installed.
original warranty commencement date remains and the warranty
Colour and style of products installed.
period is determined from this date.
Description of how the product is defective. Please also
Statutory warranties This warranty certificate and other
accompany this form with photographs of any defects
statements contained in this document or other documents given
found in product.
to you do not exclude, restrict or modify the application of any
After polytec receives your claim, we will contact you to discuss
term implied into this warranty by statute, provided that (to the
the claim.
extent any statutory provision permits polytec to limit its liability

for a breach of an implied condition or warranty) polytecs
liability for such breach is limited to the payment of the cost of
replacing the product or acquiring an equivalent Product or
repairing the product.
Registration of purchase
Once your polytec Product is Installed please complete the following form and mail to the below address for registration of warranty period NAME:
DATE OF INSTALLATION/PURCHASE:
ADDRESS WHERE PRODUCT WAS INSTALLED:
PHONE NUMBER:
MOBILE:
EMAIL ADDRESS:
COLOUR OF PRODUCT:
PRODUCT TYPE:
ORIGINAL SALES ORDER NUMBER (SON):
NAME OF CABINETMAKER
To register your warranty, return this original warranty form to:

Postal address: polytec warranties
Borg Manufacturing
4 Arizona Road
CHARMHAVEN N.S.W 2263
or Email: warranty@borgs.com.au
Remember to retain proof of purchase or manufacturing sticker off the back of your polytec product.
www.polytec.com.au
p 1300 300 547
CONTENTS
&
&
<
>
>
<
<
>
<
<
<
'
&
>
<
<
>
>
<
>
>
<
<
<
>
<
<
>
`
I
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
"
q
w
q
3
'
CONTENTS
>
>
<
<
<
>
<
>
<
>
>
<
>
<
<
X
G
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
Section 5.8
Painting & Coating Systems
CONTENTS
PPG / TAUBMANS MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PREPARED
FOR:
Paul Phillips
PROJECT:
LIGHT & CO
APPLICATOR:
Leisuretex Painting Contractors
BUILDER:
Pradella
LEISURETEX PAINTING CONTRACTORS

PO box 1751, Sunnybank Hills 4109
P 07 3341 3403 F 07 3341 3402
W leisuretexpainting.com.au
ABN 51 145 081 956 QBCC 1252883
BACKGROUND
Site Address
321 Montague Rd and 11 Beesley st, West End
Principals Details
PD Light & Co Pty Ltd
Builder Details
Pradstruct Pty Ltd

Level 10, 154 Melbourne Street, South Brisbane
Queensland, 4101
Purchase Order: LIB-03690
Painting Contractors
Leisuretex Commercial Painting

1/3293 Logan Rd, Underwood
Queensland, 4119
(07) 3341 3403
CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS .......................................................................................................................... 4
SPECIFICATION ASSISTANCE .............................................................................................................. 5
TECHNICAL AND MAJOR PROJECT SPECIFICATION ..................................................................... 5
1
INTERIOR FINISHES ............................................................................................................................... 6

1.1
PERIODICAL INSPECTION ............................................................................................................. 6
1.2
INTERIOR SURFACE CLEANING .................................................................................................. 6
1.3
REPAIRS ............................................................................................................................................ 6
1.4
REPAIR PROCESS ............................................................................................................................ 7
EXTERIOR FINISHES .............................................................................................................................. 8

2.1
PERIODICAL INSPECTION ............................................................................................................. 8
2.2
SURFACE CLEANING ..................................................................................................................... 8
2.3
REPAIRS MINOR DAMAGE......................................................................................................... 8
2.4
REPAIRS MAJOR DAMAGE ........................................................................................................ 8
2.5
RECOATING ...................................................................................................................................... 8
MAINTENANCE OF PAINTED SURFACES .......................................................................................... 8

3.1
CRITERIA FOR ASSESSING WHEN TO REPAINT ...................................................................... 9
3.2
PRE-TREATMENT BEFORE PAINTING ........................................................................................ 9
3.3
TREATMENT OF SURFACES AFFECTED BY MOULD ............................................................ 10
3.4
TREATMENT AND PROCEDURE FOR REMOVAL OF SURACES AFFECTED BY MOSS AND

LICHEN ........................................................................................................................................................ 10
GAP FILLING .......................................................................................................................................... 12

4.1
TIMBER ............................................................................................................................................ 12
4.2
PLASTER.......................................................................................................................................... 12
4.3
HARDBOARD.................................................................................................................................. 12
4.4
EXTERIOR SURFACE OR SURFACES IN AREAS SUBJECT TO WETTING ......................... 12
PAINTED SURFACES IN GOOD CONDITION ALL SUBSTRATES ............................................... 13
SURFACES IN POOR CONDITION PAINT REMOVAL TECHNIQUES .......................................... 13

6.1
HEATING ......................................................................................................................................... 13
6.2
ABRASIVE GRIT OR WATER BLASTING .................................................................................. 14
6.3
GRINDING AND SANDING .......................................................................................................... 14
6.4
CHEMICAL STRIPPING ................................................................................................................. 15
6.5
SCRAPING ....................................................................................................................................... 15
6.6
HAMMER GUN ............................................................................................................................... 15
CONTENTS
REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE OF TIMBER AND HARDBOARD SURFACES ............................ 16
REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE OF PLASTER AND PAPER COVERED PLASTER BOARD ...... 16
REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE OF MASONRY AND CONCRETE SURFACES ........................... 17
10 REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE OF METALWORK IN POOR CONDITION ................................... 17

11 REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE OF PLASTICS ................................................................................... 17
12 PROCEDURES FOR THE REMOVAL OF DISCOLOURATION/STAINING OF PAINT FILMS .... 18
12.1
EFFLORESCENCE....................................................................................................................... 18
12.2
DUST ............................................................................................................................................. 18
12.3
SULPHIDE STAINS ..................................................................................................................... 18
12.4
IRON STAINS .............................................................................................................................. 19
12.5
TANNIN STAINS ......................................................................................................................... 19
12.6
GREASE........................................................................................................................................ 19
13 DISCOLOURATION / YELLOWING .................................................................................................... 19

13.1
ENAMEL PAINTS........................................................................................................................ 19
13.2
ALKYD ENAMEL PAINT ........................................................................................................... 19
13.3
POLYURETHANE ....................................................................................................................... 20
13.4
VARNISHED TIMBER ................................................................................................................ 20
13.5
EPOXY AND POLYURETHANE COATINGS .......................................................................... 20
14 VANADIUM STAINING ........................................................................................................................ 20
CONTENTS
PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS
INTERNAL
PRODUCT
COLOUR
SHEEN
CEILINGS & CORNICE
PURE PERFORMANCE CEILING

PAINT WITH MICROBAN
SPARKLNG WINE
FLAT
APARTMENT WALLS
GENERALLY
PURE PERFORMANCE LOW

SHEEN WITH MICROBAN
SPARKLING WINE
LOW SHEEN
INTERNAL APARTMENT
DOORS & FRAMES
PURE PERFORMANCE TRIM

GLOSS WATER BASED ENAMEL
WITH MICROBAN
SPARKLING WINE
SEMI GLOSS
FEATURE PAINT FRIDGE

RECESS

SHEEN WITH MICROBAN
SPARKLING WINE (LIGHT)

CASINO (DARK)

SHEEN WITH MICROBAN
LOW SHEEN
LOW SHEEN
APARTMENT ENTRY DOORS PURE PERFORMANCE TRIM

& ARCHITRAVES
GLOSS WATER BASED ENAMEL
WITH MICROBAN
MONUMENT
SEMI GLOSS
CORRIDOR CEILINGS
ALL WEATHER
MONUMENT
Matt
CORRIDOR WALLS

SHEEN WITH MICROBAN
FLINT SMOKE
LOW SHEEN
CORRIDOR DOORS AND

FRAMES

SHEEN ACRYLIC WITH
MICROBAN
MONUMENT
SEMI GLOSS
CORRIDOR FATURE WALLS PURE PERFORMANCE LOW

SHEEN ACRYLIC WITH
MICROBAN
FIZZY LIME
LOW SHEEN
EXTERNAL
PRODUCT
COLOUR
SHEEN
CFC WALLS
ARMAWALL ARMASHIELD
ALL WEATHER LOW SHEEN
MONUMENT
NOBLE REIN
OIL SHALE
SPARKLING WINE
FAWN BEIGE
SPANISH EYES
CAMPESTRE
LOW SHEEN
PRECAST PANEL
ARMAWALL ARMASHIELD
MONUMENT
NOBLE REIN
OIL SHALE
SPARKLING WINE
FAWN BEIGE
SPANISH EYES
CAMPESTRE
LOW SHEEN
ALL WEATHER MATT
SOFFITS
ARMAWALL SATIN
MATT
SATIN
SPARKLING WINE
DOORS & FRAMES
ULTRA ENAMEL GLOSS
NOBLE REIN
GLOSS
LAND SCAPE WALLS
ARMAWALL ARMASHIELD
ALL WEATHER LOW SHEEN
SPARKLING WINE
LOW SHEEN
CONTENTS
SPECIFICATION ASSISTANCE
REQUIREMENT
WHO TO CONTACT
PHONE
FAX
Specific Colour Tools, Colour Samples,

etc.
(07) 3341 3403
(07) 3341 3402
Colour Samples
(07) 3341 3403
(07) 3341 3402
Product inquiries, data sheets, MSDS
(07) 3341 3403
(07) 3341 3402
Timber finishes inquiries
(07) 3341 3403
(07) 3341 3402
TECHNICAL AND MAJOR PROJECT SPECIFICATION

CONTACT
NAME
PHONE
EMAIL
Project Supervisor
Scott Clements
0409 817 256
sclements@leisuretexpainting.com.au
Operations Manager
Chris Tegan
0413 668 070
chris@leisuretexpainting.com.au
Business Development Manager
Jaison Guljas
0413 661 519
jaison@leisuretexpainting.com.au
Administration & Accounts
Eve Guljas
07 3341 3403
admin@leisuretexpainting.com.au
CONTENTS
1 INTERIOR FINISHES
The intent for this manual is to provide the basis for periodic inspection, cleaning and repair of the coated areas
relating to interior finishes on walls and ceilings and floors. This guide may be useful in specifying maintenance and
remedial coating works describing methods of inspection, cleaning and removal of surface contaminants.
1.1
PERIODICAL INSPECTION
Yearly visual inspection is recommended for all coated areas. High traffic areas such as floors and walls as well as
areas subject to contact should undergo a more regular inspection based on the volume of traffic.
A rating system is useful in determining the severity of wear and tear:
(i) Clean
(ii) Dusty / loose surface dirt
(iii) Soiled / stained / ingrained dirt
(iv) Minor damage such as cracking, flaking or erosion
(v) Major damage such as film failure over large areas
1.2
INTERIOR SURFACE CLEANING
Dusty areas or areas covered in loose surface dirt should be swept, dusted or vacuumed to maintain optimum
appearance. Daily treatment is recommended for floors and eye level surfaces. This can be achieved using a soft cloth
or soft bristled brushed where possible. Test your preferred cleaning methods to ensure they do not damage the finish.
Areas nominated as soiled, stained, or ingrained with dirt should be washed with mild detergent using a soft cloth or
soft bristled brush. Rinse with clean water once wash and allow to fully dry. Repeat the process to remove residual
marks. When attempting to remove stains avoid excess rubbing as this may cause glossy patches. Those stains that
resist mild detergent should be treated with domestic solvent cleaners such as Spray and Wipe. Spray directly on the
stained coating and allow penetration for the recommended time. Rub clean with a soft cloth. Avoid burnishing caused
by excessive rubbing. Stains are easier to remove as soon after soiling as possible to minimise penetration and setting
in the coating. The longer the stain is left on the coating the harder it is to remove and damage to surface may be
more prevalent. High visibility stains should be treated immediately.
These cleaning methods will not remove stubborn stains such as spray paint or marker pen graffiti. Stains such as these
should be sealed with the appropriate impervious sealer and over coated as per the original finish.
1.3
REPAIRS
Areas with damage should be assessed for the cause of film fracture to identify underlying weakness or design faults.
Early identification and elimination of design faults will prevent further damage and minimise the cost of repairs.
CONTENTS
1.4
REPAIR PROCESS
1. Having eliminated any design fault, proceed with spot repairs to areas showing minor damage. Ensure the
2.
3.
4.
5.
surface around the damaged area is sound and clean. Where appropriate feather the edge of the existing
coating. Use warm water, with a little household detergent added.
Spot Prime with the primer or sealer used in the original system overlapping onto the existing coating.
Apply top coats as specified in the original paint system. For best results, use retained samples of the original top
coats supplied by PPG Architectural Coatings. Apply this coat using the same application method and
equipment to reproduce the original surface texture. Where original samples are no longer available confirm the
colour match on a sample board before proceeding with repair.
Areas showing major damage should be cleaned, prepared and repainted using the original painting system over the
entire area to the nearest architectural breaks such as corners, floors, ceiling, windows or doors.
Confirm the colour match on a sample board against neighbouring areas bearing in mind the tolerances are slightly
larger in areas which are not viewed in the same plane.
CONTENTS
2 EXTERIOR FINISHES
2.1
PERIODICAL INSPECTION
Yearly visual inspections allow for the opportunity to address potential problems with usually a simple touch up.
Areas requiring specific attention include:
Parapets
Window Sills
Areas of Effloresce
Vertical / Horizontal Abutments
Rust Stains
Foundation Lines External Corners Substrate Creacks
External Soffits
Hydrostatic Pressure
2.2
SURFACE CLEANING
All exterior coatings will respond to periodical cleaning with mild household detergent (bio-degradable) and rinsing with
clean water or low-pressure wash. Stubborn areas may require multiple applications or the use of a lightly abrasive
cleaner. Care must be exercised when aggressive cleaning mediums are used. Surface cleaning is recommended on a
yearly basis.
2.3
REPAIRS MINOR DAMAGE
Make sure the surface around the damaged area is sound and clean, spot prime with the appropriate coating system
primer (refer to application data manual) followed by topcoat application. Endeavour to identify original colour and
batch number for best results. Some material should be made available or a reference colour sample for subsequent
repair work to maintain colour uniformity.
2.4
REPAIRS MAJOR DAMAGE
Make sure the surface around the damaged area is sound and clean. Where areas larger than one square meter are
involved, it is best to recoat the entire section up to natural breaks in the surface e.g. corner or joints. For these larger
areas it is best to contact Leisuretex Painting Contractors.
2.5
RECOATING
Yearly long term aesthetic integrity and protection of the substrate can be enhanced by the repair methodology
discussed above. Eventually a complete over coating will be required to rejuvenate the appearance and protective
properties of the coating. This can be achieved with the application of a PREMIUM QUALITY EXTERIOR COATING
in one or two coats relative to the coating environment. Surfaces must be clean and generally no priming is required.
Consultation with your local PPG Architectural Coatings representative will establish the most appropriate specification.
3 MAINTENANCE OF PAINTED SURFACES
CONTENTS
In most situations, the service life of a paint coating is much shorter than the specified life of the building to which it is
applied. Good quality paints have a relatively long life on interior surfaces and repainting is normally undertaken only
when soiling has occurred or when there is a desire for a colour change. However, in external conditions of service,
paint life varies with the environment, the nature of the material painted, the degree of surface penetration, the quality
of the paint and the number of coats applied.
To assess the effectiveness of a painting system, it is necessary to inspect the painted surface at regular intervals e.g.
annually. Occasional washing of exterior painted surfaces to remove accumulated dust, dirt or coastal salts (particularly
metal substrates) will assist to maintain paint serviceability. Removal of surface chalking can often restore the
decorative value of exterior paintwork.
The build-up of excessively thick coats of paint on some surfaces particularly timber, is undesirable. Repainting too
frequently may be harmful and give rise to flaking and blistering particularly where temperatures are high and moisture
is present. The minimum thickness of paint that will adequately protect the surface should be maintained. For
preference, the application of new paint should balance that lost by weathering; however, this balance is difficult to
achieve in practice. Following a number of successive repainting, it may be necessary to remove the existing paint
system before repainting the surface, as in the case of new work.
The existence of lead paint on old buildings (typically pre-1970) can cause public health and environmental hazards and
management procedures should be in accordance with AS 4361.2 in Australia.
3.1
CRITERIA FOR ASSESSING WHEN TO REPAINT
The reason for repainting may be a requirement for a colour change or gloss level, to suit climatic conditions, to
freshen up generally the appearance of a building and to prevent deterioration of the substrate where coatings have
blistered and are flaking. The most important factor to be considered is the need to repaint before substrates start to
deteriorate. This is particularly critical for timber surfaces.
Maintenance should be undertaken prior to the commencement of coating failure. This point is not easy to detect, but
heavy chalking or paint defects are indications that maintenance is necessary. In any case, it is always preferable to
repaint before existing paintwork starts to disintegrate, i.e. while a sound continuous coating persists. Washing so as to
avoid the need to repaint may possibly reinstate the decorative appearance of a chalked finish.
A paint film that has weathered to the stage of cracking and flaking or shows poor adhesion is not a satisfactory base
on which to apply fresh coats of paint. When repainting metallic surfaces for the purpose of long term protection,
guidance on assessment criteria is given in AS/NZS 2312.
3.2
PRE-TREATMENT BEFORE PAINTING
Where maintenance is undertaken at regular intervals, it is seldom necessary to strip of the old paint before painting,
but thorough surface preparation is most important. The criteria for removal of the paint system are largely dictated by
the soundness of the existing coating and the type of substrate.
The testing of paints for adhesion is by no means a simple task because the selection of the most appropriate type of
test will depend on the generic paint type, substrate and service conditions. AS1580 has four different methods
covered by Methods 408.2, 408.4, 408.5. Method 408.5 allows the qualification of coating adhesion by determining
the tensile force, (perpendicular to the coating surface) necessary to dispatch the film. It is appropriate for coating on
very cohesive, rigid surfaces such as metal, concrete and masonry. It is however, time consuming and usually only
used in verification of other semi quantitative procedures.
Method 408.4 (Adhesion Cross Cut) describes a semi quantitative test, which involves making a series of parallel cuts
through the coating and a further similar series of right angles so as to form a grid pattern. On applying, then
removing, pressure sensitive adhesive tape the extent of detachment of the coating measure. This method is not
suitable for friable substrates such as plaster, where the cutting action may impair the substrate. Results also vary
between coating types because of the variation in the shear force necessary to cut through film. Thus a hard cohesive
coating will tend to be judged more severely than a soft friable coating.
CONTENTS
Method 408.2 provides two simplified variations of the cross cut test; Method A is a pass/fail test with just two parallel
cuts while Method B allows a diversity of thicknesses and coating types to be tested. As with the cross cut test, the
value obtained will vary greatly with coating type. Another approach, usually suitable for conventional decorative
finishes on interior broad wall areas is the application of an agreed quality pressure sensitive tape (refer Method 408.4)
applying it to the wall for 30 seconds and quickly pulling the taps off at right angles to the surface. A variation of this is
to apply tape over an area where the paint has been cut through to the substrate.
For all adhesion tests involving pressure sensitive tapes it is important that the surface be free of dirt, grease and
chalking prior to adhering the tape.
For all these tests and any particular painted surface, the acceptability or otherwise of adhesion must be gauged in the
context of what is reasonably achievable for the specific coating on the specific substrate.
Practices for the repairing of different substrates are set out below. These Clauses cover the repainting of surfaces in
both good and poor conditions.
3.3
TREATMENT OF SURFACES AFFECTED BY MOULD
After verification that mould is present it is necessary to sterilise and remove surface mould before painting. The
following procedure is recommended:
1. Wash the entire area with detergent to remove grease and dirt and all surface contaminants.
2. Wash or sponge the entire surface with freshly diluted solution of sodium hypochlorite household bleach and
final hypochlorite concentration of 1 to 1%. Sponges and cloths should be regularly washed with clean water to
prevent recontamination and the spread of mould spores.
3. Allow bleach to remain moist until the stain is decolourised, typical 15-30 minutes. 4. Reapplication may be
required for dry conditions or persistent stains.
4. Rinse the surface with copious quantified of clean water. Where one application of bleach fails to remove the
mould, a repeat application may be necessary.
5. Severely infested surfaces should be treated with an anti-mould solution as directed by the manufacturer.
To prevent the occurrence of mould, improve ventilation if possible and paint surfaces with high mould resistant
products.
NOTES
Mould treatments do not remove rust stains.
If infestation is heavy or recurrent, a critical examination of the area should be carried out with a view to reducing any
structural or environment moisture. If the ground under the building is excessively damp the sub floor ventilation should
be improved, refer to building regulations for guidance. Improving ventilation can reduce environmental moisture. In
severe situations mechanical ventilation may be required.
3.4
TREATMENT AND PROCEDURE FOR REMOVAL OF SURACES

AFFECTED BY
MOSS AND LICHEN
Remove all loose and powdery growth in moss affected areas & treat the affected surface with the following solutions:
1. Copper Sulphate (hydrated) 20g
2. Benzalkonium Chloride Solution
3. Other equivalent proprietary solution
NOTE
The solution containing copper sulphate should not be applied to zinc coated or aluminium surfaces because of
discolouration and corrosion. No run off should impinge on such surfaces. Copper sulphate, Benzalkonium chloride
and some proprietary solutions are poisonous and should not be applied into drinking water or storm water drains.
PROCEDURE
10
CONTENTS
1. Apply the solution to the affected area and leave until the moss and lichen turn brown and become loose. This
usually occurs within 3-6 days.
2. Scrub down with a hard bristle brush, hose liberally with water and allow to fully dry.
3. Swab the treated areas using a solution of one volume of household bleach diluted with two volumes of water.
Allow to dry for 30 minutes.
4. Treat the surface with algaecide solution following the Manufacturers instructions.
5. Wash down with clean water and ensure surface is fully dry before painting.
6. After treatment to remove moss and lichen surfaces may be discoloured. Protect surrounding surfaces to avoid
unnecessary staining.
11
CONTENTS
4 GAP FILLING
All cracks, holes, indentations and damaged surfaces should be made good as far as practicable with such preparations
as linseed oil putty, plaster filler, wood filler, and plastic wood and flexible paintable sealants, as appropriate. All such
fillers should be used in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and allowed to dry or set before being sanded
back level with the surface. Flexible paint able sealants (e.g. acrylic latex types) need to either be well cured (typically
48 hours) or cracking of the finish coat may occur.
4.1
TIMBER
To prevent oil-based putty from shrinking and falling away owing to absorption of oil by the timber, all timbers should
be prime-coated before being filled with putty. This is especially important with timber, which has deteriorated through
exposure.
4.2
PLASTER
To assist the adhesion of plaster filler, all plasters should be dampened and cracks dovetailed before application of the
filler. Large gaps should be undercut before filling. For deep cracks, several applications may be necessary because of
shrinkage. Where cracks extend into the structure behind the plaster, these will need to be repaired first.
4.3
HARDBOARD
The stopping or filling of large holes in hardboard is not recommended. However, nail holes and small indentations can
be filled with putty, plastic wood or multi-purpose filler. All damaged sections should be replaced.
4.4
EXTERIOR SURFACE OR SURFACES IN AREAS SUBJECT TO

WETTING
For exterior surface or surfaces in areas subject to wetting, only Portland cement based or water insoluble organic
based gap fillers should be used. Rigid rapid fillers are not suitable where there is excessive timber moisture content.
These should only be applied to the bare dry surface.
12
CONTENTS
5 PAINTED SURFACES IN GOOD CONDITION

ALL SUBSTRATES
Paintwork in good condition first requires cleaning to remove surface contaminants. Next a thorough sanding or
equivalent to achieve a dull or flat finish should be undertaken to ensure good adhesion of succeeding coats/ For epoxy,
polyurethane and other thermosetting coatings, the surface needs to be heavily sanded or lightly whip blasted to
provide a key for subsequent coats.
Most surfaces can be adequately washed down with warm water or ordinary household detergent (5ml/L to 10ml/L) or
with a solution of commercial sugar soap. Soap powders leave a residual deposit and are hence not recommended. To
be effective, washing down requires frequent changes of water and a second wipe over with clean absorbent rags to
prevent surface smears.
Heavy smoke and grease deposits sometimes found in kitchens may not respond to washing with water. These can
often be removed with mineral turpentine and then wiped over with clean absorbent rags. Heavy smoke deposits may
be cleaned with ammonia based detergent solution or with a sugar soap solution, followed by rinsing.
6 SURFACES IN POOR CONDITION

PAINT REMOVAL TECHNIQUES
Paint, which is blistering, flaking or cracking, should be completely removed. This may be an indication of a wider
adhesion problem and adhesion checks of the entire paint film should be undertaken. In the case of a breakdown of
solvent borne paint systems on only a part of the area, some of the paintwork may appear sound and resist removal by
scaping and sanding. It is possible; however, that this paintwork will also fail and repainting may hasten such failure.
Adhesion checks to determine the integrity of the existing layers should be undertaken. In cases where poor adhesion
is observed, the removal of the existing coating may be necessary to give maximum life to new coatings. Similarly,
surfaces exhibiting excessive chalking should be washed to give a sound base for further painting.
Selection of paint removal system is based on a number of concerns including the substrate, pertinent environmental
considerations and the cost of labour materials. In particular the mechanical method of paint removal on different
substrates is restricted to those materials that leave a uniform surface suitable for painting if so desired. The desired
outcome will depend on the integrity of the surface and the system of paint removal used.
Paint removal may be achieved by one of the following methods:
6.1
HEATING
Apply heat using a flame from a LPG torch or hot air gun to painted surface. The paint softens and swells. Paint is then
scraped off. This method is effective on surfaces which are not affected by heat for both interior and exterior use and is
the most effective method of removing old solvent based borne paint.
Gum exudation problems are well treated with heat.

Scarring the substrate should be avoided.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR THE USE OF HEAT TO REMOVE PAINT:

Heat removal may be dangerous and requires care. Paint scrapings may ignite and set alight grass and surrounding
materials.
(i)
Wetting nearby shrubs and grass should occur prior to starting.
13
CONTENTS
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
(viii)
Fire equipment, such as a hose, fire blanket and fire extinguisher should be readily available
Removal of any flammable materials such as leaves, birds nests or straw is necessary prior to starting.
If definite fire hazards exist an alternative paint removal system should be employed.
Some regulations may require the fire brigade to be notified prior to work commencing.
This process should not be carried out in windy weather.
To avoid the risk of delayed fire, paint removal should be stopped at least 90 minutes before ceasing all
operations of the operative working day. This allows for smouldering embers in cracks or crevices to be
detected early avoiding the possible danger of fire after the building or site has been evacuated.
Any charred material should be removed at the close of daily operations.
WARNING: The fumes from paints and paint scrapings may be toxic to your health. Operators should
avoid inhalation and use the appropriate protective equipment.
6.2
ABRASIVE GRIT OR WATER BLASTING
Blasting involves projecting a substance at high pressure onto a surface removing the paint film by grinding away and
lifting the surface. This process can be carried out in wet or dry conditions. Environmental considerations need to be
considered. Blasting is typically used on surfaces such as concrete, masonry, metals, paving and in areas where residue
can be contained. (See AS1627.4)
NOTE
Grit blasting may be prohibited in some jurisdictions and containment requirement render this option impractical in
many situations.
Water blasting is a common preparatory technique water use authorisations may be required before using this
technique. Consult your local council for water use permits. Additional sanding or scaping may be necessary following
this use of this technique to ensure complete paint removal.
6.3
GRINDING AND SANDING
Grinding and sanding involves the use of abrasive materials to wear the paint film. This may be achieved manually
using the following materials on smaller areas:
Abrasive garnet paper
Carborundum paper
Glass paper
The process may also be performed mechanically using the following equipment and are generally used on larger areas:
Disc sander for preparing the areas
Orbital or belt sander used for finishing the areas
Abrasive wheel
14
CONTENTS
NOTE
Use of such equipment can be dangerous and proper safety precautions and equipment should be used at all times. This
process can be used on both interior and exterior surfaces. The use of organic vapour/particulate respirator complying
with AS1716 is recommended.
WARNING: Airborne dust from sanding can be hazardous to your health. Appropriate protective
equipment should be used at all times.
6.4
CHEMICAL STRIPPING
Chemical stripping involves the use of a chemical means of removing paint and is broken down into three general
classes. Not all methods will work on all paint film types and the effectiveness should be established by trial with a test
area or reference to the manufacturer's recommendations. Chemicals may be variously applied as thixotropic gel, a
poultice or tape to prolong the stripping action and provide greater effectiveness of removal.
Fast acting solvent stripping:
Effective for removal of single layers.
Old paint films fry and are easily removed by scraping.
Methylene chloride based strippers are commonly used on solvent borne paints.
NOTE
This solvent is highly toxic, appropriate safety precautions are to be followed at all times. See Manufacturers Guidelines
for use.
6.5
SCRAPING
The removal of old paint by scraping with a sharp edge.

This technique is usually followed by sanding to achieve the desired finish and can be used on both internal and
external surfaces.
6.6
HAMMER GUN
The process of using mechanical devices including needle gunning and power wire brushes to remove paint.
This technique is typically useful on metal, concrete and other robust surfaces.
NOTE
Hearing protection is necessary with the use of this equipment as well as other safety equipment and precautions.
WARNING: Airborne dust from sanding can be hazardous to your health. Appropriate protective
equipment should be used at all times. In particular appropriate ear and eye protection should always
be used in conjunction with other safety equipment when using mechanical devices.
15
CONTENTS
7 REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE OF

TIMBER AND HARDBOARD SURFACES
Holes or depressions in timber due to mechanical damage or natural defects such as resin or gum pockets, knot holes
and surface splits should be scraped clean of any loose or soft material and after priming, should be filled with fillers
compatibly with the proposed paint system. Timber is particularly resinous and many need to be heated using a hot air
gun to allow subsurface resin to diffuse to the surface for subsequent mechanical removal prior to painting.
Some timbers including radiata pine are susceptible to resin bleed. Where solvent borne preservative treatments are
used e.g. light organic solvent preservative, resin bleed is more common. Resin exuding on the surface of timber or
through paint, should be scrapped off before painting. Where resin is still soft, wiping with mineral turps will help
remove residues.
Heating with a hot air gun will bring resin to the surface. Heavy resin bleed is likely to re-occur over summer moths
and the only completely successful treatment for badly affected timber is replacement.
Where the appearance of timber has discoloured or otherwise deteriorated due to weathering, it should be sanded,
exposure of timber substrates for even a few weeks of weathering will have a detrimental effect on the adhesion of
paint coats.
Where timber has decayed, the source of moisture causing the decay should be eliminated. Leaking spouts or pipes;
floor flashing and improperly sealed butt joints are frequent causes. Areas of damaged or decayed timber should be
scraped out, or where areas are extensive, cut out and neatly replaced.
Corroded nails, which have sprung or become loose should be withdrawn and corrosion resistant nails placed in a new
position. Provided that adequate fixing is achieved, it may be preferably in some conditions to re-punch loose or sprung
nails. After punching, all nail holes should be primed and filled.

PLASTER AND PAPER COVERED PLASTER BOARD
Paint flaking from loose, powdery or otherwise unsatisfactory surfaces should be completely removed and the surface
treated as specified for plaster.
Paint applied to interior walls should first be scrapped and then sanded. If the remaining paint is considered unsound,
it should be removed with appropriate chemicals or solvent stripper. (Chemicals or solvent strippers should not be used
on paper faced plasterboard)
Bare surfaces should then be treated as for new work. All surface cracks, pores and irregularities should be filled with
appropriate filler; trowelled smooth and allowed to dry. When dry, the treated areas should be lightly sanded to a
smooth finish.
16
CONTENTS

MASONRY AND CONCRETE SURFACES
Because of the absorbent nature of masonry and the consequent penetration of paint into the surface, the use of
abrasive grit blasting is the most efficient method of cleaning. This is only satisfactory on exterior surface, whereas
solvent or chemical strippers are satisfactory on interior surfaces.
The following faults in surfaces of concrete, cement render or brick masonry should be treated as indicated before
painting:
CRUMBLING MORTAR
Locate and remove the source of moisture
Dry out all moisture before painting
Use a moisture meter to establish if surface is ready for painting
CORRODED BRICK
Replace isolated soft or under fired brickwork before painting
Alternatively the consolidation of corroded bricks may be an option
FILLING CRACKS AND CREVICES
Remove all loose matter and fill with an appropriate compound
Clean out deep holes in masonry
Wet with water and fill with mortar no stronger than the existing substrate
Allow to dry

METALWORK IN POOR CONDITION
Most stripping systems are satisfactory for metal surfaces. Interior and Exterior limitations should be considered. In
severe environmental conditions, repainting should be in accordance with AS 2412. In mild environments,
reinstatement may be deferred to suit the maintenance program owing to significant reduced steel corrosion rates. It
will be necessary for corroded areas to be appropriately cleaned and spot primed before application of the
recommended system. Recommended systems for metal work exposed to the elements are listed in AS 2312.
11 REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE OF PLASTICS

Plastic surfaces are not generally resistant to abrasives or solvents; however the use of chemical strippers and mild
abrasives offer the most suitable methods for stripping painted surfaces.
17
CONTENTS
12 PROCEDURES FOR THE REMOVAL OF

DISCOLOURATION/STAINING OF PAINT FILMS
Staining of paint films is comparatively rare but cases which are unsightly and difficult to remove do occur. Further
difficulty may be experienced in identifying a stain.
12.1
EFFLORESCENCE
Efflorescence is caused by the migration of moisture from certain substrates, bringing salts to the surface.
Efflorescence will continue unless the source of the moisture is determined and eliminated.
White efflorescence from plaster, concrete and masonry consists mainly of calcium carbonate.
These alkaline salts can be removed by brushing with a stiff bristled brush and wiping down with mild acid solution
such as 5% acetic acid (white vinegar)
The whole area should then be wiped down with a damp cloth and allowed to dry thoroughly.
When dry apply a solvent-based sealer.
12.2
DUST
Dust provides a nutrient source for mould and needs to be eliminated to prevent contamination.
Vacuum cleaning or brushing the affected area with a clean dry brush is sometimes sufficient to restore the
appearance. However surfaces affected by the deposition of dust may also be susceptible to occasionally
condensation which leads to adhesion of the dust particles resulting in a stain that cannot be completely brushed
away.
Smokey atmospheres aggravate this condition. In such cases, the surface should be washed with a diluted
detergent solution.
Smoke stains often occur on acoustic tiles, especially if the backing is faulty. If this occurs, an attempt should be
made to reseal the back of the tile, as the stain will probably reoccur if air continues to find a passage through the
tile.
12.3
SULPHIDE STAINS
This type of stain is caused by lead or mercury compounds in old style paint which form sulphides with contaminants in
the air. These stains are dark, ranging in colour from brownish or purplish hues to grey and are usually easy to
diagnose. Once a surface has been contaminated with lead compounds, some difficulty may be experienced in
eliminating their effect. Repainting hides the stain for a while but the lead usually succeeds in penetrating the covering
paint film.
Lead sulphide stains are usually easy to remove by treatment with hydrogen peroxide which can be applied
either by spraying or with a cloth soaked in the agent.
Mercury sulphide stains are removed by sodium hypochlorite however this treatment may not be permanent.
Permanent treatment may be achieved by sealing prior to repainting with an appropriate sealer specified by the
manufacturer. Improved ventilation to reduce humidity may prevent reoccurrence.
WARNING: Direct contact of undiluted hydrogen peroxide with the skin should be avoided. Refer to
Manufacturers Instruction for use of this product
18
CONTENTS
12.4
IRON STAINS
Iron stains variously show up as spots arising from contamination of surfaces with metallic iron or more generally from
contamination by iron compounds in the substrate.
These stains are removed by treatment of a solution of 7g oxalic acid in 100ml water. Unless the iron
contaminant is gouged out, staining will reappear.
To prevent the stain from reappearing after treatment the area should be coated with a solvent borne sealer.
For more persistent staining the addition of 2g of sodium fluoride to the solution is recommended. Following
stain removal; remove any residual acid from the surface with 5g/100ml of sodium bicarbonate solution.
Clean rust from surfaces
Use inhibitive metal primer (refer to AS 2312 for details)
Surfaces which are inaccessible for painting such as lintel and other gaps which allow moisture ingress should be
sealed where possible.
WARNING: Oxalic acid can be harmful to your health. Appropriate safety precautions and equipment
should be used at all time.
12.5
Tannin stains are derived from various timbers and can be avoided by priming the timber before painting.
Timbers with excessive tannin migration e.g. cedar, merbau and similar, a solent borne primer is necessary.
12.6
TANNIN STAINS
GREASE
Wash surface with warm water and sugar soap preparation (1:4) or household detergent which has been
dissolved.
Repeat until the grease is removed
Rinse area with water
Allow to dry thoroughly
13 DISCOLOURATION / YELLOWING
13.1
ENAMEL PAINTS
Enamel paints on interior trim areas often dry to a yellowish "off colour" due to application of the enamel while fumes
from latex based oil and ceiling paints or undercoats are still present in the room. This discolouration is permanent and
can only be avoided by providing ample ventilation to ensure that all fumes have been eliminated prior to
application of enamel trim paints.
13.2
ALKYD ENAMEL PAINT
19
CONTENTS
Alkyd enamel paints discolour to a cream/yellow colour in rooms or areas where there is little or no sunlight such as
passageways, behind doors and inside cupboards. This discolouration is reversible and allowing sunlight into the
area for a few days will usually restore the colour to its original shade.
13.3
POLYURETHANE
Polyurethane based enamels and varnished discolour permanently when exposed to strong sunlight for extended
periods.
13.4
VARNISHED TIMBER
Varnished timber may discolour over time by prolonged exposure to sunlight e.g. pinus radiata. Other species may fade
and thereby mask the colour change of the varnish e.g. cedar and redwood.
13.5
EPOXY AND POLYURETHANE COATINGS
Epoxy and polyurethane coatings discolour under the influence of sunlight. Care is needed to specify non-yellowing resin
combinations for these materials if colour retention is a critical property.
14 VANADIUM STAINING
Vanadium stains consist of yellow, green or reddish brown discolouration of paint applied over light coloured bricks.
They can be chemically treated as follows.
Caustic soda or caustic potash applied as a 10% by weight aqueous solution or
Hypochlorite bleach applied as a 10% solution of liquid pool chlorine.
Both these treatments should be rinsed thoroughly with copious amounts of clean water after the stain has
disappeared. Hypochloric acid which is often applied to brick work to remove mortar stains and residues should be
avoided where vanadium stains are present as the vanadium darkens in the presence of this chemical and becomes
more difficult to remove.
WARNING: Caustic Soda, caustic potash, hypochlorite bleach and liquid pool chlorine require care when
handling. Appropriate safety precautions and equipment should be used when handling these substances.
Observe all safety precautions set out by the Manufacturer before use.
20
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
Section 5.9
Show erscreens, Mirrors & Robe Doors
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
Section 5.10
Framing, Ceiling & Partitions
CONTENTS
ABN: 95 113 288 449

P: (07) 3266 4965
F: (07) 3266 9452
Unit 2/10 Depot Street
Banyo Qld 4014
E: info@thescootergroup.com
W: www.thescootergroup.com
27/07/2015
Pradstruct Pty Ltd

PO Box 3301
South Brisbane
Q 4101
DearSir
Re:GardensCandD
We, Scooter Commercial, being thesubcontractor who supplied and installed thepartitions and
suspendedceilingsattheaboveproject,herebyguaranteethattheinstallationhasbeencarried
outinaccordancewiththerelevantAustralianstandardsandmanufacturersrecommendations
Thesaidguaranteeiscurrentasperthefollowinginformation
Partitions
1yearfromPracticalCompletion
Ceilings
SuspendedCeilings
Manufactures Warranty 1 year from
PracticalCompletion
InternalStaircase
Yoursfaithfully
ScottDwan
CONTENTS
S e c t i o n 5 . 11
St o n e B e n c h t o ps
CONTENTS
GMG Stone
Maintenance & Warranty Manual

Light & Co
Radiance and Illuminate
321 Montague Rd & 11 Beesley
Street
West End, QLD 4101
CONTENTS
Table of Contents
1. Contacts
2. Scope of Works
3. Products & Schedules
4. Maintenance Procedures
5. Warranties
a) Manufacturers Warranties
b) Installation Warranty
c) Form 16
CONTENTS
1. CONTACTS
Name:
Contact Person
Phone:
Address:
GMG Stone
Mathew Galea
07 55031288
188 Nerang St
Southport 4215 Gold
Coast QLD
2. SCOPE OF WORKS
Stone benchtops to area which include :
Kitchens Benchtops
Common Areas : MPR Kitchen Benchtop , BBQ Benchtops
CONTENTS
3. PRODUCTS & SCHEDULES
Area of Use
Product Brand
Product Model
Colour/Detail
Number
1)
Residential units
Quantum Quartz
20mm
White Swirl
3000m x 800
1500 2000mm x 600
2)
MPR Kitchen
Benchtop
Cesarstone
20mm
Oyster
2400mm x 700
3)
BBQ Benchtops
Natural Granite
30mm
Bianco Romano
CONTENTS
4. MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
Quantum Quartz
CONTENTS
10. CARE & MAINTENANCE
Hygiene: Quantum Quartz is the ideal surface that is used in food courts, restaurants
and even hospitals where hygiene is paramount. Quantum Quartz does not promote
the growth of bacteria as it has 0.005 water absorption.
Cleaning: Quantum Quartz is extremely low maintenance. Wiping the surface with
warm water and stone cleaner or mild neutral detergent & a damp cloth is all that is
needed to remove everyday marks left on the benchtop. The use of scourers may dull
the surface of your countertop & it is not covered under Warranty.
Heat Resistance: Quantum Quartz solid surfaces can handle exposure to moderate
temperature. However it is not recommended that hot pots and trays be taken out of the
oven and placed directly onto the surface. This practise can cause thermal shock to the
product or burning to surface. The use of hot pads or trivets for these hot items is
thoroughly recommended.
General: Quantum Quartz does not require sealing due to its almost impervious
nature. As with most surfaces, exposure to chemicals containing trichlorethane or
methylene chlorides which are present in paint strippers, even cleaners which have high
alkaline levels will etch or deteriorate the surface. Avoiding these chemicals will ensure
your countertops physical properties will never be undermined. Use a Neutral Ph (PH7)
as cleaner. To avoid damage to the Quantum Quartz surface when preparing food we
recommend the use of a cutting board.
Colour Consistency: A slight colour variation may occur from batch to batch due to
the location from which the natural material is quarried. Also, due to the natural quartz
composition of Engineered Stone, irregularities such as spots or colour particles in the
slab may occur. The sample you have selected for your countertop may vary to the
installed product due to natural differences in the raw material.
Pearly Shores: Any accidental spillage of vinegar, citrus fruit juices on the surface of
Pearly Shores should be immediately wiped off with clean water to avoid any reactions.
30
CONTENTS
5. WARRANTY
a. Manufacturers Warranties
Quantum Quartz
b. Installation Warranty
GMG Stone
c. Form 16
CONTENTS
10YEARLIMITEDWARRANTY
WARRANTYTERMS&CONDITIONS
Congratulations on your recent purchase of Quantum Quartz...thank you for choosing us for your
project!
QuantumQuartzsuppliesmaterialtoyourstonemasoninslabformat.Yourstonemasonofchoicewill
cut,polishandinstallyourbenchtop.AllQuantumQuartzmaterialgetscheckedwhenitarrivesinour
warehouse & before it leaves. After it leaves our warehouse, Quantum Quartz has no control with
transportation,manufacturingorinstallation.
Please take the time to read our care and maintenance recommendations. By following the proper
installation,careandmaintenanceofQuantumQuartzyoushouldhavemanyyearsofenjoymentfrom
ourProduct.
ListedbelowarethetermsandconditionsapplicabletoQuantumQuartzengineeredstone.
Whatisincludedinthewarranty:
1.
2.
Quantum Quartz offersa 10yearlimitedwarrantytotheoriginalcustomerforaperiod of

10yearsfromthedateofinstallation.
The warranty covers any defects arising from the manufacture of the slab. Subsequent
fabricationandinstallationarenotcoveredinthiswarranty.
Whatisnotincludedinthewarranty:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
AnydefectordamagetotheProductarisingfromworkdonebyanyoneotherthanQuantum
Quartz.
ThefabricationandinstallationoftheProductbyotherparties.
TheuseoftheProductasflooringoroutdoorsorinareasnearswimmingpools.
ThediscolourationoftheProductifitisexposedtodirectsunlightoveraprolongedperiod.
AnymodificationoralterationtothesurfaceofQuantumQuartz.
DamagetotheProductduetoprolongedexposuretochemicalsorsolvents.
Damageby:
a.
Placinghotpots/pansonthesurface
b. Applyingexcessiveweighttothesurface
ThePearlyShoresProducthasseashellsembeddedonthesurfaceoftheProduct.These
shellsaresusceptibletostainingandreacttovinegar,citricacid,fruitjuicesandothermild
acids.Theshellscanbeabradedorscratchediftheycomeintocontactwithhardermaterials
orsharptools.Noclaimswillbeacceptedifsuchdefectsappearafterinstallation.
Anydefectordamageasa result oftheProductnotbeingcleanedinaccordancewith the
QuantumQuartzCareandMaintenanceGuide.
Variationsincolour,patternorshadeofthematerialagainstsamplematerial,displayedor
illustratedmaterial.
Failure of adhesives, caulking materials, damage resulting due to the accessories installed,
failureduetoinadequatesupporttojointsandseams.
Failure to follow any procedures, instructions and recommendations given in the Product
Manualprovidedtothefabricatorsand/orCustomers.
Damageasaresultofsitting,climbingorstandingontheProduct.
Anydefectordamageasaresultofmishandlingorabuse.
Bowinglessthan1.5mmonjointsgreaterthan600mm.
Cracksarenotamaterialfault.Theyarenotcoveredinthewarrantyandareusuallyaresult
of:
a.
Mechanicalstressonthematerialafterinstallation
b. Settlementormovementinjoineryorhouseasawhole
c.
Sitting,standingorclimbingonyourbenchtop
d. Excessiveheat
e.
Sinkorcooktopcutout(notcovered)
f.
Lshapedcutout/improperinstallation
Chippingisnotamaterialfault;itisnormallyadirectresultduetoimpacttotheedgeofthe
surface.Chipsarenotcoveredbythiswarranty.
Fireplacesarenotcoveredasaresultofvariationsindesignandheatoutput.
The warranty only applies if the Product was installed by a qualified and licensed
stonemason.
VeryinfrequentgreyishorreddishdotsintheGalaxycoloursarenormal.Thesedotsare
thereversesideofamirrorandareanexpectedresultofthemanufacturingprocess
OnNaturalQuartzCollectioncolours,someblack/greyishdotsmayappearbothlargeor
small.Theremayalsobeinconsistenciesinthepatternorbackground.
Thisisnotadefect,theinconsistenciesaredesignedtomirrorthelookofnaturalstone.
CONTENTS
StatutoryRights
ThelimitationsontheWarrantysetoutinthisdocumentdonotexcludeorlimittheapplicationofthe
mandatoryconditionsorwarrantiesimpliedbytheTradePracticesAct1974oranyotherequivalentor
correspondinglegislation.
RegisteringyourWarranty
Please register your warranty online at www.wk.com.au. This will enable us to offer you better
customerservice.
Makingaclaim
Pleaseaddressanyclaiminwritingwithin28daysoftheoccurrenceto:
WKMarble&GranitePtyLtd
TradingasQuantumQuartz
129FairfordRoad
PadstowNSW2211
Tel:+61297729888
Fax:+61297729889
Email:marketing@wk.com.au
QuantumQuartzCareandMaintenanceGuide
QuantumQuartzisanextremelystrongmaterialbutyoushouldavoid:
Sitting,standingorclimbingonyourbenchtop
Directexposuretohotpots,pansorotherhotitems
Cuttingfooddirectlyonthesurface
Knocking,droppingorbumpingtheProductwithheavyitems
Exposuretostrongchemicalsandsolvents
QuantumQuartzisextremelylowmaintenance.
ForeverydaycleaninguseaPHneutral,noncitruscleaner
andwipewithasoftclothorsponge.Ensureyouremoveall
cleanerresiduewithdampclothorsponge
ForstubbornstainsuseQuantumQuartzCreamCleanser*
QuantumQuartzisvirtuallynonporousanddoesnotrequire
sealingorpolishingtomaintainitssemigloss,smoothfinish
NOTE:WhencleaningwiththeQuantumQuartzCreamCleanser,pleasedilutewithwaterfirst,then
applywithanonscratchscourerorsoftcloth.Whenunsuretestcleanseronasmallpieceofyourbench
thatisoutofview.
QuantumQuartzisnotafullglossfinish,itisasemigloss.Ifyourbenchtoplookstooshinyorblotchy
pleasereviewyourcleaningmethods.
your kitchen deserves the best
*QuantumQuartzCreamCleanserisavailableatselectkitchencompaniesandfabricatorsaswellasonline.
TOVIEWTHEQUANTUMQUARTZCARE&MAINTENANCEVIDEOVISIT:
www.wk.com.au
CONTENTS
9. 10 YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY

9.1
WARRANTY TERMS & CONDITIONS
These are the entire Warranty Terms and Conditions of all reconstituted quartz based slabs (the Products) supplied by QUANTUM QUARTZ PTY LTD.
(ABN 191 022 34346) and WK MARBLE & GRANITE PTY. LTD. (ABN 29 074 331 981) its associated and subsidiary companies (all of which are referred to as
Quantum Quartz) to any person, firm or company placing an order with Quantum Quartz for the purchase of any Products (the Customer) and except
as otherwise expressly agreed upon in writing between a duly authorised officer of Quantum Quartz and the Customer, these Warranty Terms and
Conditions shall apply notwithstanding any provisions to the contrary which may appear on any Order Form or other document issued by any Customer.
9.2
GENERAL
1. Quantum Quartz offers a limited warranty to the original Customer of the Products for a period of ten (10) years from the date of installation free from
defects arising in the manufacture of the Products PROVIDED THAT the Products are fabricated and installed by a fabricator(s) and/or installer(s)
according to The Product Manual (the Manual). It is the responsibility of the fabricator and/or installer to obtain a copy of the latest version of the
Manual or its electronic version from Quantum Quartz and to install the Products in accordance with the Manual.
2. Quantum Quartz warrants that the Products are safe for use in interior applications only including but not limited to such applications as counter
tops, vanity tops, wall cladding and laminating.
9.3
CLAIMS
This Limited Warranty does not cover:

3. Any defect or damage to the Product arising from work done by anyone other than Quantum Quartz
4. The fabrication and installation of the Product by other parties
5. The use of the Product as flooring or outdoors or in areas near swimming pools
6. The discolouration of the Product if it is exposed to direct sunlight over a prolonged period
7. Any modification or alteration to the surface of Quantum Quartz
8. Damage to the Product due to prolonged exposure to chemicals or solvents
9. Damage by:
Placing hot pots / pans on the surface
Applying excessive weight to the surface
10. The Pearly Shores Product has sea shells embedded on the surface of the Product. These shells are susceptible to staining and react to vinegar,
citric acid, fruit juices and other mild acids. The shells can be abraded or scratched if they come into contact with harder materials or sharp tools. No
claims will be accepted if such defects appear after installation
11. Any defect or damage as a result of the Product not being cleaned in accordance with the Quantum Quartz Care and Maintenance Guide
12. Variations in colour, pattern or shade of the material against sample material, displayed or illustrated material
13. Failure of adhesives, caulking materials, damage resulting due to the accessories installed, failure due to inadequate support to joints and seams
14. Failure to follow any procedures, instructions and recommendations given in the Product Manual provided to the fabricators and/or Customers
15. Damage as a result of sitting, climbing or standing on the Product
16. Any defect or damage as a result of mishandling or abuse
17. Bowing less than 1.5mm on joints greater than 600mm
18. Cracks are not a material fault. They are not covered in the warranty and are usually a result of:
a. Mechanical stress on the material after installation
b. Settlement or movement in joinery or house as a whole
c. Sitting, standing or climbing on your bench top
d. Excessive heat
e. Sink or cook top cut out (not covered)
f. L shaped cut out / improper installation
19. Chipping is not a material fault; it is normally a direct result due to impact to the edge of the surface. Chips are not covered by this warranty
20. Fireplaces are not covered as a result of variations in design and heat output
21. The warranty only applies if the Product was installed by a qualified and licensed stonemason
22. Very infrequent greyish or reddish dots on the Galaxy colours are normal. These dots are the reverse side of a mirror and are an expected result
of the manufacturing process
23. On Natural Quartz Collection colours, some black/greyish dots may appear both large or small. There may also be inconsistencies in the pattern or
background. This is not a defect, the inconsistencies are designed to mirror the look of natural stone.
9.4
MANUFACTURING DEFECTS
24. Quantum Quartz warrant that the Products are free from manufacturing defects, however, this does not apply to colour variances, thermal shock,
chemical abuse or defects caused by misuse or wrongful installation, negligence, vandalism and misuse . Quantum Quartz reserve the right in its sole
discretion to determine whether there are any such defects and whether there has been any misuse or wrongful installation and further claims for
visible defects of the Products must be made before any fabrication or installation of the Products.
The Customer acknowledges that any claim must be notified in writing to Quantum Quartz within twenty-eight (28) days after becoming aware of any
possible defect and further that if notification does not take place then the Customers rights to claim shall lapse.
28
CONTENTS
9.5
IMPLIED WARRANTIES
25. These Warranty Terms and Conditions do not exclude, restrict or modify the application of any provision of any Commonwealth, State or Territorial
Law which by law cannot be excluded, restricted or modified.
9.6
SALES TO NON-CONSUMERS
26. In the case of Products supplied by Quantum Quartz to a Customer who is not a consumer (as defined in the Trade Practices Act, 1974 as
amended from time to time) (the Act), if the Products do not correspond with the description of them on the invoice or are defective then provided
that the Products are preserved intact and made available for inspection by a representative of Quantum Quartz and are returned to Quantum Quartz
in the same order and condition as that in which they were delivered, Quantum Quartz shall at its option replace those Products or reimburse the
Customer for the amount of the purchase price paid for them but any claim in this respect must be made in writing within seven (7) days of the date of
delivery of those Products
27. Should the Customer seek indemnity from Quantum Quartz in respect of any claim by a consumer on the Customer as a result of a breach of
condition or warranty implied by the Act in a contract for the supply of Products by the Customer to that consumer, clause 15 will not apply and in
respect of Products that are of a kind ordinarily acquired for personal, domestic or household use or consumption, Quantum Quartzs liability is limited
to indemnifying the Customer in accordance with the Act,
Limited to a liability to pay to the Customer an amount equal to the cost of replacing the Products or the cost of obtaining equivalent Products or the
cost of having the Products repaired, whichever is the lesser amount
28. Quantum Quartz may determine that a replacement Product may not be reasonably available in the same colour or shape as the original Quantum
Quartz Product covered by this limited warranty. Quantum Quartz reserves the right to provide a replacement Product of as close a shape and colour
match as is reasonably possible from Quantum Quartz current Product range, if replacement Product of the same colour or shape is not reasonably
available.
29. This limited warranty is applicable only for the manufacturing defects, if the material develops defects after the Products is installed and if
Quantum Quartz feel the defects are not due to manufacturing defects, then the Customer may approach any approved testing authority to evaluate
the causes for the defects at their own cost.
9.7
SALES TO CONSUMERS
30. In the case of Products supplied by Quantum Quartz to a Customer who is a consumer, to the extent that the Products are not consumer Products,
the liability of Quantum Quartz to the Customer for breach of any warranty or condition (other than a warranty or condition implied by section 69 of
the Act) or for breach of any duty of care shall in all cases be limited, at the option of Quantum Quartz, to any one or more of the replacement of the
Products or the supply of equivalent Products, the repair of the Products or acquiring equivalent Products or the payment of the cost of having the
Products repaired.
9.8
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
31. Except for those conditions and warranties implied by the Act or other sale of goods or consumer protection legislation which may not be excluded,
the Customer agrees that:
a) It has not relied on any inducement, representation or statement made by or on behalf of Quantum Quartz in purchasing the Products and there are
no implied conditions or warranties herein and no collateral contracts in connection herewith (except such as may be in writing and signed by a duly
authorised representative of Quantum Quartz); and
b) Clauses 19 - 25 set out the entire liability of Quantum Quartz in respect of its liability under the Act or otherwise in respect of liabilities for a breach
of a condition or warranty with respect to the sale of goods or Products. In no circumstances will Quantum Quartz incur any liability in respect of or
arising out of or in connection with any special, consequential, direct or indirect loss, damage, harm or injury suffered or incurred by the Customer.
9.9
GOVERNING LAW
32. The Customer agrees that these Warranty Terms and Conditions shall be construed according to the laws of the State or Territory as Quantum
Quartz may in its sole discretion determine. Proceedings by either Quantum Quartz or the Customer may be instituted and/or continued in such State
or Territory as Quantum Quartz may in its sole discretion determine. Failing such determination the Customer consents to any proceedings being
instituted and heard by any appropriate Court sitting in the State of New South Wales applying.
29
CONTENTS
GMG STONE
The Solution
Galea Marble & Granite Industries Pty Ltd - ABN: 57 732 769 909
188 Nerang Road, Southport. Qld. 4215
Ph: (07) 5503 1288 Fax: (07) 5503 1366 Website: www.stonetops.com.au
WARRANTY DOCUMENT
Galea Marble & Granite Industries Pty Ltd, trading as GMG Stone the manufacturer of the
bench tops, splash backs, furniture items and wall cladding, identified as the Goods
guarantees the product has been manufactured and supplied, free from material and
manufacturing defects; GMG Stone offers warranty for 1) the goods and 2) the Service,
being any skill required to complete installation of stone items on site or work area.
For the nominated warranty period for the goods as supplied by the following product
manufacturers, such as Caesarstone, Quantum Quartz and Essa Stones quartz based
engineered product ranges please refer to the individual warranties as offered by these
manufacturers (these warranties can be found attached to the document).
In the case of materials such as marble, granite, limestone and onyx, are deemed a natural
product and as a result natural variations to colour and veining should be expected and
clients are asked to inspect all materials of these products prior to manufacture. Galea Marble
& Granite Industries Pty Ltd, trading as GMG Stone guarantees the product as installed;
1) Is fit for the purpose it has been designed for and subject to the following warrants the
stone for a period of 5 years from practical completion;
2) Excluding Force Majeure / Act of God or normal weathering providing the product is
maintained according to the care & maintenance information supplied should not
display evidence of cracking, flaking or fissuring for a period of 5 years from practical
completion.
For the warranty period for the service Galea Marble & Granite Industries Pty Ltd, trading as
GMG Stone offers an express warranty of no more then 5 years from the date of practical
completion for;
1) All aspects of installation including pins and fixings for all wall cladding for no more
then 5 years from practical completion;
2) All aspects of installation of all furniture and bench tops items for no more then 5
years from practical completion;
Providing any claim made under this express warranty falls under the said process for claims
and upon an investigation undertaken by GMG Stone fails to meet any of the following
criteria;
Claims are subject to notification, informing GMG Stone in writing, with all the relevant details
of the reported defect. If the reported defect is outside these guidelines Galea Marble &
Granite Industries Pty Ltd, trading as GMG Stone has every right to reject the claims.
In any case, all such reported defects are subject to inspection by GMG Stone to determine
cause for claim. If it is discovered that the issue is related to other matters beyond Galea
Marble & Granite Industries Pty Ltd, trading as GMG Stones control, we have the right to
invoice for the associated time of costs applicable to the investigation.
Such inspections shall not be deemed in any way an admission of liability of GMG Stone.
Page 1 of 2
CONTENTS
GMG STONE
The Solution
Galea Marble & Granite Industries Pty Ltd - ABN: 57 732 769 909
188 Nerang Road, Southport. Qld. 4215
Ph: (07) 5503 1288 Fax: (07) 5503 1366 Website: www.stonetops.com.au
The warranty does not apply to the following:

1. Accidental damage, abuse, misuse, maltreatment, abnormal stress or strain, abrasion,
harsh or adverse weather conditions over temperature, neglect or failure to maintain
as directed the bench top, furniture item or wall cladding area in question.
2. Appliances and any other materials included in or adjacent to the relevant area, which
are not manufactured by GMG Stone.
3. Variations to, patterns, colours, beyond GMG Stones control, are not considered to be
a manufacturing warranty.
4. Structural movement of the building / substrate beyond the certified design criteria.
In addition to this warranty and replacement guarantee, certain legislation (including the Trade Practices
Act 1974 and consumer protection legislation of the States and Territories) gives the owner certain
rights, which cannot be excluded, restricted or modified. Nothing in this warranty has the effect of
excluding, restricting or modifying those rights.
All enquiries or claims to be directed in writing to the:
Managing Director
GMG Stone Pty Ltd
188 Nerang St
Southport, QLD, 4215
Yours Sincerely,
Pane Galea
Managing Director
Page 2 of 2
CONTENTS
Section 5.12
S a n i ta r yw a r e
CONTENTS
Tacoma Plumbing & Drainage Pty Ltd

3 / 13 Main Dr , Warana Q. 4575. Telephone (07) 5493 1500 Fax (07) 5493 7290
A.B.N. 22 076 717 416 QBCC Lic. 45786
OPERATING
AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HYDRAULIC SERVICES
LIGHT & CO STAGE I

BUILDINGS
PRADSTRUCT PTY LTD
COVERING QUEENSLANDS PLUMBING

CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO STAGE I

BUILDINGS
TACOMA PLUMBING &

DRAINAGE PTY LTD
QBCC Lic. No. 45786
REV: A
DATE:
15 / 08 / 16
JOB No. 466
HYDRAULIC SERVICES
MAINTENANCE & OPERATION MANUAL
SUMMARY INDEX
SECTION
DESCRIPTION
___________________________________________________________________________
1
GENERAL INFORMATION
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF HYDRAULIC SERVICES
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
EQUIPMENT INFORMATION
MAINTENANCE (Required Pump Maintenance page 14)
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
AS CONSTRUCTED DRAWING REGISTER
SANITARY FIXTURES TECHICAL DATA
SOUTHLAND LINERS MANUAL
10
ALINE DOMESTIC PUMP MANUAL
11
ALINE FIRE PUMP MANUAL
12
ALINE STORM WATER PUMP MANUAL
13
ALINE SEWER PUMP MANUAL
14
ALINE HOT WATER PUMP MANUAL
File Name:
Page 1
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO STAGE I

BUILDINGS
TACOMA PLUMBING &

DRAINAGE PTY LTD
QBCC Lic. No. 45786
REV: A
DATE:
15 / 08 / 16
JOB No. 466
HYDRAULIC SERVICES
SECTION 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION

Architect
Rothe Lowman
Level 2, 56 Boundary St
South Brisbane Q 4101
Telephone: 3339 1330
Hydraulic Consultant:
Thomson Kane
5/211 Logan Rd
Wooloongabba Q 4012
Contractor
Pradstruct Pty Ltd

Level 10
154 Melbourne St
South Brisbane Q 4101
Hydraulic Subcontractor: Tacoma Plumbing & Drainage Pty Ltd

3/13 Main Drive
Warana Qld 4575
Telephone:
Local Authority:

Telephone:
File Name:
07 5493 1500
07 3403 8888
Page 2
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO STAGE I

BUILDINGS
TACOMA PLUMBING &

DRAINAGE PTY LTD
QBCC Lic. No. 45786
REV: A
DATE:
15 / 08 / 16
JOB No. 466
HYDRAULIC SERVICES
1.2
Location
321 Monatgue Road & 11 Beesley Street, West End, QLD, 4101
1.3
Services Overview
The services provided and installed by Tacoma Plumbing and Drainage Pty. Ltd.
under the Hydraulic Services Contract included the following:
- Sanitary Drainage
- Sanitary Plumbing
- Domestic Cold Water Service
- Hot Water Service
- Automatic Meter Reading System (AMR) for cold water sub meters
- Fire Service
- Stormwater
- Natural Gas Service
1.4
Ongoing Responsibility
This manual provides sufficient information to guide maintenance personnel who are
either familiar or unfamiliar with hydraulic services. The manual is documented by
Tacoma Plumbing & Drainage Pty. Ltd. to assist in the assessment and maintenance
of hydraulic services only. It does not incorporate information pertaining to the
replacement, installation or repair of major hydraulic components, as this should only
be carried out by licensed qualified personnel who are experienced to carry out these
works.
It is the responsibility of the owner to do routine maintenance inspections and keep
records relating to the services performance to ensure the systems operate at the same
level in which they were accepted by the relevant authorities at time of handover.
(Refer to Section 5 for recommended maintenance intervals).
File Name:
Page 3
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO STAGE I

BUILDINGS
TACOMA PLUMBING &

DRAINAGE PTY LTD
QBCC Lic. No. 45786
REV: A
DATE:
15 / 08 / 16
JOB No. 466
HYDRAULIC SERVICES
SECTION 2 - BRIEF DESCRIPTION-HYDRAULIC SERVICES
2.1
Sanitary Drainage System
The sanitary drainage system enters the Urban Utilities main via a 225mm connection brought
into the B1 basement (shown As Constructed H-CA-111) from the civil sewer (installed by
others) main located in Beesley Street. It divides into two sections from the connection point
A 150mm line runs through B2 basement Southward parallel with Beesley street to pick up
the entire Radiance Buildings sanitary plumbing (as also shown on As Constructed H-B0100) And a 150mm line runs Westward to pick up the sanitary plumbing from the Radiance
Building (as shown on As Constructed H-B-100).
2.2
Sanitary Plumbing System
The Sanitary Plumbing stacks start on Radiance & Illuminates ground floor. The sanitary
plumbing stacks are located in each apartment within their allocated ducts as they rise through
the buildings floor by floor, picking up the sanitary plumbing waste pipes of the individual
apartments until they reach the roof where they terminate as vents. There are numerous air
admittance valves (AAVs) used throughout the Illuminate & Arbor buildings (as shown on
the hydraulic as constructed drainage schematic plans). All elevated sanitary plumbing
pipework installed in the apartments is acoustic lagged.
2.3
Domestic Cold Water System
The domestic cold water for both buildings is supplied from the council main in Montague
Road. A 150mm main enters the B1 basement, (As shown on H-CA-116), it then spilts to
feed the fire hydrant service and the domestic water via the 150mm QUU owned water meter
before continuing to the domestic cold water pump set, which are both located in B1basement
(NE corner) under the Illuminate building (as also shown on H-CA-109). From the domestic
pump set the domestic water splits to feed both buildings. Both Radiance & Illuminate have
two (2) cold water rising mains, at the either end the buildings. All four rising mains have an
isolation valve installed on the soffit of B1, before they rise into the building in the designated
Fire Hose Reel / sub water meter cupboards.
Each apartment has its own individual cold water sub meter & 500kpa pressure limiting
valve, which are marked with apartment number ID tags in the fire hose reel / sub water meter
cupboards, which are located in the hallways on each level. From the individual sub water
meters the cold water supply heads to each apartments Unit Control Valve (UCV) assembly,
which is located under the laundry tubs. There is a cold water (and a hot water) shut off valve
for the apartments water supply at this location. Each apartments cold water service from
the sub water meters has been installed using the Rautitan 311 plumbing system.
Please Note: The domestic water booster pump set requires a 6 monthly operational check
and maintenance service.
File Name:
Page 4
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO STAGE I

BUILDINGS
TACOMA PLUMBING &

DRAINAGE PTY LTD
QBCC Lic. No. 45786
REV: A
DATE:
15 / 08 / 16
JOB No. 466
HYDRAULIC SERVICES
There is also two (2) 50mm Retail water services brought in from the councils water main in
Montague Road (as shown on H-CA-116) to the B1 basement via two 50mm QUU owner
water meters, which are located under the AMR display panels (adjacent the letterboxes.
Ground floor NE corner of the property) There is eight (8) Retail 25mm sub meters (four on
each 50mm water meter) that provide a cold water service for the Retail communial area,
managers office and six retail tenancies. Their 25mm Sub water meters are located on
Iluminate Ground/Podium level adjacent to the managers back entry door (as shown on HCA-116).
2.4
Hot Water Service
The hot water for Radiance & Illuminate is supplied by either own commercial continuous
flow units (installed and maintained by Origin) located on the roof of each building. The
main hot water feed lines are located within the apartments ducts as per the as constructed
drawings. Each individual apartment has its own hot water meter (supplied by Origin) as well
as a hot water shut off valve: located at the Unit Control Valve (UCV) assembly, under the
laundry tubs.
Hot water delivery in the apartments is direct hot water at 58 degrees to the kitchen sinks and
laundries. But the bathrooms have a controlled reduced temperature of 49 degrees, which is
controlled by the tempering valve at the UCV assembly. The hot water service from the
UCVs has been installed using the Rautitan 311 plumbing system. The hot water circulating
pumps (supplied and commissioned by Aline) are installed next to the hot water plant on the
roof of both buildings. The apartments hot water meters are connected to a remote reading
system (supplied and installed by others)
Please Note: The Hot Water circulating pumps require a 12 monthly operational check and
maintenance service.
2.5
Automatic Meter Reading System (A.M.R.)
Each apartments sub water meter & main hot water meter, (located adjacent to the hot water
plant on each buildings roof) is connected wirelessly to an AMR system. The AMR display
panels is located outside the Fire Pump Room (adjacent to the letter boxes) on the ground
floor of the Illuminate building, as shown on as constructed drawing H-CA-0116.
2.7
Fire Service
Radiance & Illuminate buildings fire hydrant & hose reel (fire sprinkler service is installed
by others) service is drawn off after the 150mm QUU owned water meter and 150mm testable
single check valve, located in the north Western corner of B1, under the Illuminate building,
(as shown on As Constructed drawing H_CA_0116). From this location it continues to the
fire hydrant booster cabinet H pattern and then to the fire hydrant Diesel pump set. The fire
hydrant & hose Reel service diesel pumps (supplied and commissioned by Aline) are located
File Name:
Page 5
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO STAGE I

BUILDINGS
TACOMA PLUMBING &

DRAINAGE PTY LTD
QBCC Lic. No. 45786
REV: A
DATE:
15 / 08 / 16
JOB No. 466
HYDRAULIC SERVICES
in the Fire Pump Room on the ground floor of Illuminate. A fire hydrant riser with a hydrant
valve on each level, is located in each of the two stair wells in each building. There is also a
third fire hydrant riser with a hydrant valve on levels 1 5 in the hallway of Illumiante. There
is a series of Fire Hose Reels located on Illuminates ground/podium level and in both B1 &
B2 basement, as well as two (2) fire hose reels on each level of both apartment buildings.
Please Note: The Fire Hose Reels and Fire Hydrant Valves must have their operation
checked and tagged by a licensed person at intervals no less than what is stated in AS 1851.
There is 2 x 50,000 litre Tanks located adjacent to the fire pump room which have 2 x
automatic tank top up valves connected to keep the tanks filled from the water supply. There
is a tank suction point connected to these tanks which is taken to the fire hydrant booster
cabinet for the sole use of the fire brigade, in the event of a fire, if they deem necessary.
There is also a feed from these tanks to the fire hydrant and fire sprinkler pumps.
Please Note: The 2 x 50,000 litre Fire Tanks are lined with a butynol liner to keep them water
tight. These tanks do required an annual 12 monthly inspection, by an experienced person.
Please see section 7 of the Southland Liners O & M Manual.
2.8 Stormwater Service
Light & Cos Illuminate & Radiance, stormwater system is a connected to a civil stormwater
connection (installed by others) to the council stormwater main in Beesley street. (As shown
on as constructed drawings H-CA-111). Both the Radiance & Illuminate Buildings roof
stormwater as well as the podium stormwater grates enters a SW360 filtration (supplied and
installed by others) before it enters the council main. The stormwater system also picks up all
of the apartments air conditioning condensate drains, balcony outlets, planter drains, down
pipes and roof RWO drains.
2.9
Natural Gas Service
Radiance & Illuminates gas service are both feed from the main gas meter assembly
(supplied and installed by Origin /APA) which is situated, in the Gas Meter Enclosure next to
the Fire Booster Cabinets off Monatgue Road. Each building has a gas riser which feeds each
individual apartments cooktop and the hot water plant located on the roof. Each Gas riser has
an isolation control valve installed on the underside of the ground floor at high level in the
basement before they rise up into the Building. The gas risers are located within the
designated hallway gas cupboards on each level. Each apartment has its own gas control valve
in this hallway Gas cupboard, which is tagged for identifying which apartment it feeds. There
is also a gas cooktop isolation valve and cooktops appliance regulator located in the joinery
cupboard under and adjacent each cooktop.
File Name:
Page 6
CONTENTS
TACOMA PLUMBING &

DRAINAGE PTY LTD
LIGHT & CO STAGE I

BUILDINGS
QBCC Lic. No. 45786

REV: A
DATE:
15 / 08 / 16
JOB No. 466
HYDRAULIC SERVICES
SECTION 3 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
In the event of an emergency relating to a burst water pipe or burst gas pipe, blocked drain, or
similar occurrence, we recommend the following:
PROBLEM
Burst or broken water pipe
1.
2.
3.
PROCEDURE
Identify the source of the problem.
Isolate the water supply by closing the nearest
control valve on the upstream side of the
problem. If valve is not visible or position not
known, refer to 'as constructed' drawings for
the particular building.
Once the problem is isolated, contact a
qualified trades person to rectify/repair the
problem.
Blocked Drain
1.
2.
3.
Identify the area or location of the blockage.

Isolate area concerned.
Contact a qualified trades person to rectify
the problem.
Blocked Floor Waste
1.
2.
3.
Remove Floor Waste Grate

Remove any hair, soap, body fats from drain.
Try to dislodge blockage by charging floor
waste with a large volume of water.
If unsuccessful with step 3, contact a qualified
trades person to rectify the problem.
4.
Leaking Hot Water Plant
Gas Leak
File Name:
1.
Shut down Plant by turning off:

a. Cold water inlet valve to the HW plant
b. Gas supply valve adjacent to Plant.
c. Electrical power supply to Plant
d. Turn off control valves each side
of circulating pumps and power source
to circulating pumps.
e. Contact Origin to rectify/repair problem
If a large volume of gas can be smelt or if a
gas leak can be seen or heard within an
apartment
Page 7
CONTENTS
TACOMA PLUMBING &

DRAINAGE PTY LTD
LIGHT & CO STAGE I

BUILDINGS
QBCC Lic. No. 45786

REV: A
DATE:
15 / 08 / 16
JOB No. 466
HYDRAULIC SERVICES
1.
2.
3.
Turn off the cooktop control valve, located

beneath the appliance in either the left or right
hand side cupboard.
Turn off the apartments gas control valve
located at each floor in the hallways.
Contact a qualified trades person to rectify
the problem.
SECTION 4 - EQUIPMENT INFORMATION

4.1
Equipment Suppliers
Supplier
Tradelink Plumbing Supplies Pty Ltd
Reece Plumbing Supplies
Samios Plumbing Supplies
Aline Pumps
Fyreguard
Universal Supplies Australia Pty Ltd
CPIS
GW Fasteners Clipping Systems
Origin
File Name:
Address
101 Burnside Rd,
Stapylton QLD 4207
74 Montpelier Rd
Bowen Hills Qld 4006
22 Buchanan St
West End Qld 4101
9 Textile Ave
Warana QLD 4175
Unit 2, 43 Proprietary St
Tingalpa QLD 4173
7 Flanders St,
Salisbury Qld 4107
710 Curtin Ave,
Pinkenba QLD 4008
495 Beaudesert Rd,
Moorooka OLD 4105
10 Prosperity Place,
Geebung Qld 4034
Level 1, 52 Douglas St,
Milton Qld 4064
Telephone No.
07 3297 3700
07 3252 1811
07 3255 0277
07 5493 4105
07 3917 5999
07 3277 6800
07 3260 2880
07 3277 1600
07 3216 5477
07 3867 0523
Page 8
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO STAGE I

BUILDINGS
TACOMA PLUMBING &

DRAINAGE PTY LTD
QBCC Lic. No. 45786
REV: A
DATE:
15 / 08 / 16
JOB No. 466
HYDRAULIC SERVICES
4.2
Fixtures, Fittings and Faucets Schedule
TAPWARE
Basin Mixer
Sink Mixer
Shower Mixer
Shower Rose
Bath Mixer
Bath Spout
Laundry Mixer
APARTMENTS
Abey Gareth Ashton Maddison Ave
Goosneck Basin Mixer
Abey Lucia Gooseneck Sink Mixer with
pull out Spray
Abey Gareth Ashton Maddison Ave SHR
Mixer
Abey Novara Round Hammer Head Shower
on Rail
Abey Gareth Ashton Maddison Ave
SHR/Bath Diverter Mixer
Abey Gareth Ashton Maddison Ave Bath
Spout
Methvan Minimalist Laundry Sink Mixer
Washing Machine
Cocks
Austworld turn Dual washing machine

cocks
SANITARY FIXTURES
APARTMENTS
Item
Model No./Type
Sink
Paco Jaanson 1 bowl Undermount Sink
Water closet suites
Stylus Banksia Wall Faced Toilet Suite
Basin
Kohler Chalice Counter Top Basin
Bath
Novelli Mystery 1800mm Shower/Bath
Laundry
Clark Eureka 35 L Compact Flushline Tub
Floor Grate (Bathrooms)
Collis Beruda 100mm Tile Insert Square

Floor Grate
Plastec 100mm Chrome Square Floor Grate
Floor Grate (Luandry)
TAPWARE
PWD Basin Mixer
Radiance MPR
Kitchen
File Name:
PUBLIC SPACES
Irwell Pin Lever Disable Basin Mixer
Hansa Medica Prado Neu Sink Mixer
Harvey Norman
Commercial
Harvey Norman
Commercial
Harvey Norman
Commercial
Harvey Norman
Commercial
Harvey Norman
Commercial
Harvey Norman
Commercial
Harvey Norman
Commercial
Harvey Norman
Commercial
Supplier
Harvey Norman
Commercial
Harvey Norman
Commercial
Harvey Norman
Commercial
Harvey Norman
Commercial
Harvey Norman
Commercial
Harvey Norman
Commercial
Samios Plumbing
Supplies
Harvey Norman
Commercial
Harvey Norman
Commercial
Page 9
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO STAGE I

BUILDINGS
TACOMA PLUMBING &

DRAINAGE PTY LTD
QBCC Lic. No. 45786
REV: A
DATE:
15 / 08 / 16
JOB No. 466
HYDRAULIC SERVICES
Radiance Uni Sex
Caroma Quarto Basin Mixer
Retail
Caroma Titam Wall Basin Mixer
Harvey Norman
Commercial
Harvey Norman
Commercial
SANITARY FIXTURES
Item
PWD Basin
PUBLIC SPACES
Model No./Type
Caroma Opal 510 Wall Basin
PWD Water closet

suite
Ambulant Toliet Suite
Caroma Care 800 Wall Disable Toilet Suite
Radiance MPR
Kitchen
Radiance Uni Sex
Clark Candice Single Bowl Sink
Retail
Kohler Chalice Counter Top Basin
Retail Male
Caroma Cube Electronic Urinal
Caroma Caravelle Easy Height Suite
Caroma Nexus Wall Basin
Supplier
Harvey Norman
Commercial
Harvey Norman
Commercial
Harvey Norman
Commercial
Harvey Norman
Commercial
Harvey Norman
Commercial
Harvey Norman
Commercial
Harvey Norman
Commercial
PUMPS
Domestic Water
Booster Pump Set
Hot Water Circulating
Pump
Fire Hydrant Pump
Set
Sewer Pump Station
Davey 2 x VM32-3
Davey 1 x VM5-7
Grundfos 2 x UPS20-60N
Aline
2 x Aline diesel ISO model 150x65-250
Aline
2 x Davey DT08G
Aline
Storm Water Pump Pit

1.
Storm Water Pump Pit
2.
2 x Davey DT37S
Aline
2 x Davey DT37S
Aline
Main Cold Water
150mm Mag Meter
Q.U.U.
Cold Water Sub Meter
20mm Elster Bullet Meter
CPIS
Hot Water Sub Meter
15mm Elster S100 Meter
Origin
Aline
METERS
File Name:
Page 10
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO STAGE I

BUILDINGS
TACOMA PLUMBING &

DRAINAGE PTY LTD
QBCC Lic. No. 45786
REV: A
DATE:
15 / 08 / 16
JOB No. 466
HYDRAULIC SERVICES
Retail Main Water
Meters
Retail Sub Meter
Elster 50mm Meter
Reece
20mm Elster Bullet Meter
CPIS
Main Gas Meter
Romet 5000 Gas Meter
Origin / APA
VALVES
20mm Valve
Zurn RPZV
CPIS
Tempering Valve
RYE HP 15 Tempshield
Samios
20mm 500Kpa
LWG Gemmell NR3 20mm PRV
Pressure Reduction
Valve
H.W. PLANT
Both Illuminate & Radinace
Hot Water Continuous Rheem 872027 Nat Gas External
Flow
Continuous Flow Water Heater
Samios
Hot Water Storage
Origin
Rheem Storage Hot Water Unit 610 430
Origin
SECTION 5 - MAINTENANCE
5.1
Maintenance Procedures
Maintenance procedures are to be carried out by experienced trades personnel only.
The procedures provided in this Section are a basis to assist with maintenance issues
and does not have precedence over the authorities or manufacturers requirements.
These do not include information relating to rectification of services due to a
blockage, repair or replacement as this should only be carried out by a qualified trades
person.
Important note* The TPR (temperature pressure relief) Valves located on the storage
hot water units associated with Origins hot water plant should have their operation
checked every six (6) months. This can be done by pulling the lever (for about 5
seconds) on the side of the valve to release an amount of water. If the lever does not
release any water or if water is dripping or continuously running out of the TPR valve,
then the valve will need to be replaced (by Origin)
File Name:
Page 11
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO STAGE I

BUILDINGS
TACOMA PLUMBING &

DRAINAGE PTY LTD
QBCC Lic. No. 45786
REV: A
DATE:
15 / 08 / 16
JOB No. 466
HYDRAULIC SERVICES
5.2
Basic Fault Finding Methods

The following information is a guide to basic methods of locating and/or rectifying
minor problems with hydraulic services. Should this information not solve the
problem, then a qualified trades person will need to be contacted.
Problem
i) Water closet cistern
runs continuously:
File Name:
Source
To Rectify
- Push button
jammed
Remove cover on cistern to check for

any objects obstructing button
operation.
Check if the internal flushing
mechanism is damaged, loose or
broken.
- Water float faulty
Remove cistern lid and check if

water float is obstructed. If so,
remove obstruction or adjust to a
position clear of obstruction. Check
connection between float arm and
flushing mechanism is not loose
Page 12
CONTENTS
TACOMA PLUMBING &

DRAINAGE PTY LTD
LIGHT & CO STAGE I

BUILDINGS
QBCC Lic. No. 45786

REV: A
DATE:
15 / 08 / 16
JOB No. 466
HYDRAULIC SERVICES
- Flushing
mechanism washer
split
ii) Leaking Tapware:
Contact a qualified trades person
Contact a qualified trades person
iii) Reduced water flow:
- Control/Isolating
valve partly closed
- Mixer Spout
aerator blocked
iv) Lack of or no hot

water:
- No hot water
Check UCV (under laundry) if valves

are fully opened. Check valves at Sub
Water Meter (hallyway) if valves are
fully open.
Remove aerator and check for debris
causing restriction
If undetectable, contact qualified
trades person to locate and repair the
problem.
Check if hot water heating source
(Origin Hot Water Plant) is operating
correctly. Check if valves at the UCV
are in their correct operating position.
If there is still a lack of Hot water or
no water, contact a qualified trades
person to check and rectify problem.
Note: The above information are basic methods to assist unqualified personnel to
remedy common minor problems. If information you are seeking is not mentioned
above, then it is recommended a qualified professional trades person rectify the
problem.
TABLE OF REQUIRED MAINTENANCE AND TESTING PROCEDURES
Item
Hot Water Plant
Storage
TPR
Valves
Testable Backflow
Devices
Fire Hose Reels
File Name:
6 months
Yes
Yes
12 months
Yes
Note
Operate valve as per note in section
five (5) of this manual, every 6
months
Devices must be tested by a licensed
person and test results given to owner
and local authority, every 12 months
Must have operation checked and
tagged by a licensed person, at
intervals no less than what is stated
in AS1851
Page 13
CONTENTS
TACOMA PLUMBING &

DRAINAGE PTY LTD
LIGHT & CO STAGE I

BUILDINGS
QBCC Lic. No. 45786

REV: A
DATE:
15 / 08 / 16
JOB No. 466
HYDRAULIC SERVICES
Hydrants
Fire Tank Liners
Yes
Monthly inspections
Yes
+ 6 month service
& 12 month service
Apartment
Tempering Valves
N/A
N/A
PWD bathrooms
Thermostaic
Mixing Valves
N/A
Yes
Must a flow test performed and

tagged by a licensed person, at
intervals no less than what is stated
in AS1851
Must have monthly inspections, & 6
monthly & 12 monthly servicing as
per AS1851. Plus Tanks must be
drained and inspected every 3 years.
Should not require any servicing
Recommended to be replaced every 5
years
Should have their operation checked
every 12 months.
Recommended to be replaced every 5
years
The below mentioned pumping systems MUST be serviced and have their operation checked
by competent tradespersons at intervals no greater than what is stated below, otherwise the
manufactures warranty will be void. For further information please see The Aline Pump
manuals.
PUMPS
MODEL
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
DUE EVERY
Domestic Water Booster

Pump Set
Hot Water Circulating
Pump
Dual Fire Hydrant
Pumps
Sewer Pump Station
Davey 2 x VM32-3
Davey 1 x VM5-7
Minimum 6 monthly
service/operational check
Minimum 12 monthly
Monthly as per AS 1851
Storm Water Pumps 1.
2 x Davey DT55
Storm Water Pumps 2.
2 x Davey DT37S
File Name:
Grundfos 2 x UPS20-60N
1 x Aline diesel ISO model 150x65-250
1 x Aline electric ISO model 80x50-315
2 x Davey DT08G
Minimum 12 monthly
Minimum 12 monthly
Minimum 12 monthly
Page 14
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO STAGE I

BUILDINGS
TACOMA PLUMBING &

DRAINAGE PTY LTD
QBCC Lic. No. 45786
REV: A
DATE:
15 / 08 / 16
JOB No. 466
HYDRAULIC SERVICES
SECTION 6 - TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
6.1
Commissioning
All services, plant and equipment have been installed in compliance with the contract
specification, AS3500, B.C.C. authority, the Superintendent and the Manufacturers
requirements. The commissioning of all services was carried out by Tacoma Plumbing &
Drainage Pty. Ltd. prior to hand over. Any certificates of performance and/or other
requirements which were provided during the commissioning are listed in Section 6.2.2.
6.2
Set Points for Hot Water Services

Hot water delivery temperatures:
- Kitchen Sink & Laundry Tub - direct hot water - 58c
- All other fixtures run through a tempering valve at UCV - 49c
6.3
Testing
6.3.1
Generally
All work has been tested in accordance with the Queensland Sewerage and Water Supply Act
1949-1982, The Building Code of Australia, The Hydraulic Specification, the Local
Authorities and all relevant Australian Standards.
6.3.2
Certifications
The certifications provided in this section are those which have been provided by the
Superintendent, Manufacturer or the relevant Authority to verify that on completion of the
works performed all had been installed in compliance with their requirements. The following
is a list of the certificates we have been issued and attached for your information.
Council Plumbing Inspectors Final Completion Certificate
AMR compliance Certificate
Backflow Prevention Test Certificates
Gas compliance Certificate
Hot Water Service Installation Form 16
Storm Water Service Installation Form 16
Fire Hydrant & Hose Reel Installation Form 16
Hydraulic Fire Collars, Penetrations & Joint Sealing Form 16
File Name:
Page 15
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO STAGE I

BUILDINGS
TACOMA PLUMBING &

DRAINAGE PTY LTD
QBCC Lic. No. 45786
REV: A
DATE:
15 / 08 / 16
JOB No. 466
HYDRAULIC SERVICES
SECTION 7 - DRAWINGS ' AS CONSTRUCTED'
7.1
As Constructed Drawings
A set of 'As Constructed' Hydraulic Drawings have been compiled by our company for all
hydraulic services associated with this project. The drawings indicate the general location of
new and existing in ground systems, also the layout of hot and cold water services, waste
pipes, vent pipes, valve locations and system controls.
As Constructed Drawings Schedule
Drawing No. Drawing Title

Basement series
H_CA_000
H_CA_100
H_CA_101
H_CA_102
H_CA_103
H_CA_104
H_CA_105
H_CA_106
H_CA_107
H_CA_108
H_CA_109
H_CA_110
H_CA_111
H_CA_112
H_CA_113
H_CA_114
H_CA_115
H_CA_116
H_CA_117
H_CA_1000
H_CA_1001
H_CA_1002
Illuminate series
H_A_101
H_A_102
H_A_103
H_A_104
H_A_105
File Name:
Cover Sheet
Basement 2 Part A inground services
Basement 2 Part B inground services
Basement 2 Part C inground services
Basement 2 Part D inground services
Basement 2 Part A above ground services
Basement 2 Part B above ground services
Basement 2 Part C above ground services
Basement 2 Part D above ground services
Basement 1 Part A hydraulic services
Basement 1 Part B hydraulic services
Basement 1 Part C hydraulic services
Basement 1 Part D hydraulic services
Podium & Ground Part A hydraulic services
Podium & Ground Part B hydraulic services
Podium & Ground Part C hydraulic services
Podium & Ground Part A water services
Podium & Ground Part B water services
Podium & Ground Part C water services
Fire Diagram
Gas Diagram
Details
Bld A Level 1 Drainage & Water Services
Bld A Typical level 2-5 Drainage & Water Services
Bld A Roof Plan
Bld A Typical Water & Gas Layouts
Bld A Typical Units Layouts
Page 16
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO STAGE I

BUILDINGS
TACOMA PLUMBING &

DRAINAGE PTY LTD
QBCC Lic. No. 45786
REV: A
DATE:
15 / 08 / 16
JOB No. 466
HYDRAULIC SERVICES
H_A_106
H_A_1000
H_A_1001
H_A_1002
H_A_1003
H_A_1004
Radiance series
H_B_100
H_B_101
H_B_102
H_B_103
H_B_104
H_B_105
H_B_106
H_B_107
H_B_108
H_B_109
H_B_110
H_B_1000
H_B_1001
H_B_1002
H_B_1003
H_B_1004
H_B_1005
File Name:
Bld A
Bld A
Bld A
Bld A
Bld A
Bld A
Typical Units Layouts

Sanitary Diagram Sheet 1
Water Diagram
Details
Bld B Ground Drainage & Water Services

Bld B Level 1 Drainage & Water Services
Bld B Typical 2-5 Drainage & Water Services
Bld B Level 6 Drainage & Water Services
Bld B Typical 7-11 Drainage & Water Services
Bld B Roof Plan
Bld B Level 1 Water Services
Bld B Typical Water Layouts
Bld B Typical Gas Layouts
Bld B Typical Units Layouts
Bld B Typical Units Layouts
Bld B Sanitary Diagram Sheet 1
Bld B Sanitary Diagram Sheet 2
Bld B Water Diagram
Bld B Details
Bld B Fire Diagram
Bld B Gas Diagram
Page 17
CONTENTS
A Fixtures & Fittings
CONTENTS
D AVID K ELLY
Project Accounts Manager

Mobile: 0402 594 227
Office: 07 3297 3700
Fax: 07 3297 3799
PRODUCT SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT FOR
LIGHT & CO
TA C OM A PL UMBING
NOVEMBER 2015
Why Harvey Norman Commercial?
A dedicated internal Co-ordinator for your project

Personalised one-on-one service
Specialised staff to help you get the project outcome youre looking for
Competitive pricing
The most comprehensive range of products from any one supplier
Unequalled service and support
Unparalleled infrastructure
We provide a seamless, integrated process - from selection to delivery
CONTENTS
WARNING
The following specifications and illustrations are intended as a guide only and are supplied by the manufacturer
for general reference only. We do not therefore recommend their use for the manufacture or cutting of
cabinetry. Always use actual product when cutting cabinets or benches to avoid costly errors.
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO
KITCHEN
PACO JAANSON SK1 - SARDINIA 1.25 DOUBLE BOWL

UNDERMOUNT SINK
AUSTWORLD MINI DISHWASHER TAP
GARETH ASHTON MK - LUCIA SINK MIXER - GOOSENECK
W/- PULL OUT SPRAY - WELS Rating: 5 Star Flow Rate 6L/
min
TACOMA PLUMBING
DAVID KELLY 0402 594 227
NOV 2015
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO
B AT H R O O M
KOHLER BA - CHALICE COUNTER TOP BAISN - NO

TAPHOLE W/ OVERFLOW
AUSTWORLD 32MM OVERFLOW W/ CHROME PLUG &
WASTE
GARETH ASHTON TB1 - PARK AVENUE MIXER LEVER WITH
ARMANDO VICARIO GOOSENECK SPOUT - WELS Rating: 4
Star Flow Rate 7.5L/min
Chalice Basin
BASINS / COUNTERTOP
AU Code
123114
Product
Chalice countertop basin
NZ Code
AU only
1.2
Kohler Code
14800-0
Included Components
Bench top cutting template
Chrome overflow cover
Features
Bench top installation
Overflow outlet
Vitreous china
Optional Accessories
Tapware (page 6.0.1)
General basin accessories (section 1.8)
Technical Details
Top View
Front View
Side View
Installation Notes:
Allow a minimum of 50mm from the wall for easy cleaning.
A hole for the basin needs to be made in the bench top (please refer to cutting template).
The basin is fixed to the bench top using the appropriate silicone sealant (not supplied).
Australia
www.kohler.com au.
TACOMA PLUMBING
New Zealand
www.kohler.co.nz
Sizes are approximate.

All measurements shown are in millimetres.
Mar 2012
1194862-A04-A
DAVID
KELLY 0402 594 227
NOV 2015
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO
B AT H R O O M
COLLIS BERMUDA 100MM SQUARE TILE GRATE W/ PUDDLE
FLANGE
TACOMA PLUMBING
NOV 2015
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO
B AT H R O O M
STYLUS WC - BANKSIA BTW TOILET SUITE

AUSTWORLD 15MM MINI CISTERN COCK
Vitreous China 4.5/3 litre Dual Flush

Wall Faced Close-Coupled Box Rim Toilet Suite
Banksia
A versatile wall faced close-coupled toilet suite featuring a 4.5/3 litre dual flush cistern with low profile
chrome plated push buttons and a universal connection system for varying pan setouts. Designed
to provide low cost maintenance by incorporating easy to clean rounded surfaces combined with
smooth sides. The Pan connector system allows for a adjustable setout from 60mm to 175mm with
a recommended setout of 140mm providing installation versatility for both new build and renovation
applications. The cistern is fitted with a quiet fast fill inlet valve as standard. The Banksia suite is supplied
with a soft close seat.
Pan:
Traps:
Cisterns:
Fixing:
Seats:
Colour:
Installation:
Dimensions:
Banksia 4.5 litre full flush washdown pan with box flushing rim.
Universal trap for S or P-trap installations.
Banksia Cistern has a free fitting lid and is suitable for domestic and light
commercial applications. Available in bottom inlet and back entry versions.
Back entry cistern inlet is concealed within the cistern.
Important: Working pressure minimum 30kPa to maximum 1000kPa flow
pressure. Rain water tank compliant. Accurate wall setout for B.S.P. 1/2" Nipple
water inlet connection is essential.
The cistern is fixed directly to the pan with a robust concealed base fixing system
without the need for wall fixing.
The Banksia suite is provided with a Banksia Soft Close seat.
White only.
The installation of the toilet suite shall be in accordance with the normal minimum
drainline grade requirements in AS/NZS 3500.2.
All dimensions are in millimetres and are subject to normal manufacturing variations.
Caroma pursues a policy of continuing improvement in design and performance of its
products. The right is therefore reserved to vary specifications without notice.
Banksia Toilet Suite

with Seat:
388
Optional Offset
Fixed installation
Connector
dimension for all setouts
(Bedding only)
260
Rubber Seal
K1000W
4.5/3 litre Back entry - Internal overflow

with Banksia soft close seat - blind fixing
K1001W
185
Pan foot level
Spare Parts:
15 max.
670
Important
Pan foot
level
Code No.
4.5/3 litre Bottom inlet- Internal overflow

with Banksia soft close seat - blind fixing
Setout range
190 210mm
(with bedding mix only)
360
Dual flush push button
WD05504S
Cistern pan foam seal
687215
RH inlet valve
WD003300
BE inlet valve
WD003200
Outlet valve
WD04910TLG
Cistern stop plug
405123
Blind fixing kit
405144
Offset connector
672005
Soft-close seat
K00003W
Soft-close seat hinge
K00011
(Suitable to increase the setout from 190 to 210mm)
82
Note: All height dimensions to underside of

pan, make allowance for bedding.
Bedding: The pan should be fixed to the floor
with a sand cement mixture of 3:1 to a depth of
60mm. Do not use lime or fast drying cement
in the bedding mixture. When bedded the back
of the foot of the pan should be approximately
10mm above the finished floor.
Bracket fixing: The pan should be bedded
with an acetic cured silicone sealant and fixed
with the bracket supplied.
180
395
750
830
158 inlet
or overflow
140 recommended
range 60 - 175mm
670
ABN 35 000 189 499
TACOMA PLUMBING
215
Issue No. 6
Date of issue: 20.08.13
Sales Offices in all States.
NOV 2015
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO
B AT H R O O M
GARETH ASHTON TS1 - PARK AVENUE SHOWER MIXER

COLLIS BERMUDA 100MM SQUARE TILE GRATE W/ PUDDLE
FLANGE
ABEY SR - NOVARA ROUND HAMMER HEAD SHOWER ON
RAIL 5 FUNCTION WITH SOAP DISH - WELS Rating: 3 Star
8.0L/min
TACOMA PLUMBING
NOV 2015
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO
B AT H R O O M
NOVELLI MYSTERY SHOWER BATH 1800MM
TACOMA PLUMBING
NOV 2015
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO
B AT H R O O M
GARETH ASHTON TS2 - PARK AVENUE SHOWER DIVERTER

MIXER
GARETH ASHTON BS1 - PARK AVENUE BATH SPOUT
TACOMA PLUMBING
NOV 2015
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO
LAUNDRY
CLARK SL - COMPACT LAUNDRY TUB & CABINET 35LTR

SGL BP
METHVEN MINIMALIST GOOSENECK SINK MIXER
AUSTWORLD Q/TURN DUAL ISOLATION WM TAPS
PLASTEC FW - 100MM SQUARE FLOOR GRATE CHROME
TACOMA PLUMBING
NOV 2015
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO
RADIANCE
MPR KITCHENETTE
CLARK CANDICE SINGLE END BOWL SINK

HANSA MEDICA PRADO NEU GREEN SINK MIXER - WELS
4-Star (7.5 l/min)
TACOMA PLUMBING
NOV 2015
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO
RADIANCE
M P R U N I S E X B AT H R O O M
CAROMA AMBULANT CARAVELLE EASY HEIGHT BACK
ENTRY SUITE
Date
Caravelle
Easy Height
1.10
July 2010

Close-Coupled Toilet Suite
The Caravelle Easy Height offers a pan height up to 40mm higher than standard pans making it easier to
raise or lower yourself to the seat. Therefore this suite is ideal for the elderly, those with restricted movement
or taller people. The Caravelle Easy Height close-coupled vitreous china toilet suite delivers a 4.5/3 litre
dual flush. The Caravelle 2000 cistern is an integrated system comprising of cistern with high performance
outlet valve, fitted with low profile push buttons and is available in a 12" B.S.P. back inlet option which
completely conceals the inlet stop valve and connections for optimum installation appearance. For more
infomation refer to www.caroma.com.au
The more
stars the more
water efficient
WATER
RATING
A joint government and industry program
Licence No. 0001
litres per full flush

litres per half flush
3.5 litres per average flush
Caravelle Easy Height Smartflush 4.5 litre full flush washdown pan with open
flushing rim. 50mm Variable Offset Connector supplied offering a range of set-outs.
Traps:
S trap unvented.
Cisterns:
Caravelle 2000 Smartflush Cistern has a free fitting lid and is suitable for domestic
and light commercial applications.
Vandal Resistant Conversion Kit A simple to install conversion is available for the
standard mechanism to lock lid onto the cistern, recommended for use in heavy duty
commercial areas. Code No.750109.
Inlet Valve and

Overflow:
Standard Bottom Entry Cistern available as right hand inlet which is

interchangeable and incorporates new Quietflow 2 inlet valve. Internal overflow only.
Optional Back Entry Cistern is fitted with a Unifil inlet valve as standard. Available
in internal and septic external overflow versions.
pressure. Rain water tank compliant. Accurate wall setout for B.S.P. 1/2"
Nipple water inlet connection is essential.
Fixing:
The cistern is fixed directly to the pan with a robust base fixing system without the
need for wall fixing.
Seats:
Caravelle double flap seat option supplied. Other compatible seats, Pedigree II.
See section 3 SEATS for further details.
Colour:
White only
Installation:
Dimensions:
When tested in accordance with Standard AS/NZS 6400
For more information and to compare

products, refer to:
www.waterrating.gov.au
364
Installation for S trap
168
Relieve bed
around
pan connector
Offset
connector
Finished
Wall
360
Bottom Inlet
S trap 989300
50mm
Bedding height
60mm
Important
22mm approx.
projection
from wall
100
1/2"
Waste
outlet
430
Inlet 55
Note: The projection requirements for

people with ambulant disabilities is 610
to 660mm.
890 approx.
196 Inlet
or overflow
Offset connector
can be positioned
anywhere in
shaded area in
a 50mm arc
Pan seal
B.S.P.
Nipple
Finished
wall
All height dimensions to underside of pan,

make allowance for mortar bedding.
140
435
800 approx.
Centre water inlet optional
back connection
Seat colour:
S trap 989200
130
660
425
Pan
foot
level
90 - 190
Set-out range
90
90min - 190 max
TACOMA PLUMBING
Code No.
Back Entry
140
156
Setout position for

1/2" B.S.P. Nipple
back inlet
Caravelle Easy Height

Toilet Suites:
with Caravelle 2000 Seat
Bottom inlet 425
4.5
3
Pan:
Mortar bedding: The pan should be fixed to

the floor with a sand cement mixture of 3:1 to
a depth of 60mm. When bedded the back of
the foot of the pan should be approximately
Screw fixing: The pan should be bedded
with corrosion resistant screws and pan guard
washers. Use Caroma pan fixing kit. Code
No.601150.
NOV 2015
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO
RADIANCE
M P R U N I S E X B AT H R O O M
CAROMA NEXUS WALL BASIN 1TH

AUSTWORLD 40MM PLUG & WASTE W/- OVERFLOW
STREAMLINE 40MM BOTTLE TRAP
CAROMA QUATRO SOLID BASIN MIXER - WELS Star Rating
6
PLASTEC 100MM SQUARE FLOOR GRATE CHROME
TACOMA PLUMBING
NOV 2015
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO
RADIANCE
MPR PWD
CAROMA CARE 800 WALL FACED SUITE
Date
Care 800
13.04
July 2011
Sanitary Facilities - Access and Mobility

4.5/3 litre Vitreous China Wall Faced Close Coupled
Toilet Suite
The 4.5/3 dual flush Care 800 Smartflush Wall Faced close coupled toilet suite uses Caroma Smartflush
technology to deliver the latest water-saving technology in sanitaryware products and is designed to
provide a raised seat height of between 460-480mm for persons with disabilities. With a pan projection of
800mm 10mm, the suite can be easily installed flush against the wall. This eliminates the need to build a
hob behind the suite to meet compliance requirements to AS 1428.1-2009 Amd. 1 for wheelchair access.
The Uni-connector pan connection system allows for setout adjustments from 85mm to 285mm providing
installation versatility for both new and renovation applications. The cistern is back inlet with " B.S.P. inlet
stop valve and inlet connection concealed within the cistern. Supplied with raised button option and the
Unifill inlet valve for ultra quiet fast fill as standard.
Important :
Pan:
Traps:
Cisterns:
Buttons:
Seats:
The more
stars the more
water efficient
WATER
RATING
Installation:
Licence No. 0001

Dimensions:

products, refer to:
Colour:
335
Pan foot
level
Code No.
Seat colour:
Pedigree II Care Single Flap
901800
W, SB or MG
Pedigree II Care Single Flap,

Backrest Curved Arm Included
901800B
W, SB or MG
Colani Single Flap
901810
W, SB or MG
Colani Single Flap,

901810B
W, SB or MG
Offset Connector
672005
Optional Offset Connector

Setout Range
286mm 330mm
(For Bedding only)
185
420
160
800 10mm
For wheelchair access
155
Long Uniconnector
Setout Range
85mm 285mm
Care 800 Toilet Suite

with Seat:
190 Recommended
range 85 285mm
D.80 Concealed
Bracket Fixing Centre
320
Pan outlet
375
packing
piece
required
360
Pan foot
level
113
286mm - 330mm with

* Reference must be made to the

AS 1428.1-2009 Amd 1 to confirm
installation requirements.
Important
22mm approx.
projection
from wall
440
Backrest
(refer to page 13.02)
1/2"
B.S.P.
Nipple
885
185
Pan foot
level
320
10mm bedding
5mm max. silicone
460 - 480 with seat
Finished
wall
430
820
Centre water back inlet connection
Setout position for

" B.S.P. Nipple
185
4.5
3
Reference must be made to AS 1428.1-2009 with current amendments to

determine circulation space, grab rail and installation requirements.
The dimensions in this sheet may change with amendments to the standard.
Care 800 Close Coupled 4.5 litre full flush wash down box rim type.
Universal trap.
Geo Smartflush Cistern has a free fitting lid and is suitable for domestic and light
commercial applications. Available as internal overflow. Standard back inlet.
standard mechanism to lock lid onto the cistern, recommended for use in heavy use
commercial areas. Code No.750109. Cistern inlet stop valve and inlet connection is
concealed within the cistern and is included.
Round Care Button - Metal (supplied). Other button options sold separately. See
section 16.01 for further details
Pedigree II Care or Colani disabled seat supplied, available in Caroma white (W),
sorrento blue (SB) and majestic grey (MG - available late 2011). See Section 15 SEATS for further details. Reference to AS1428.1-2009 must be made in regards to
luminance contrast when selecting the seat colour.
White only.

with the D.80 bracket supplied.
Suitable for installation to comply to Australian Standard AS 1428.1-2009 Amendment No.1 Design for access and mobility
TACOMA PLUMBING
NOV 2015
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO
RADIANCE
MPR PWD
CAROMA OPAL 510 WALL BASIN 1TH

IRWELL PIN LEVER BASIN MIXER W/- CARE LEVER - 4 Star
WELS
TACOMA PLUMBING
NOV 2015
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO
RADIANCE CLEANERS
3MONKEEZ CLEANERS SINK WITH GRATE & ADJ LEGS INC

P&W
MONOPOLY WHITEHALL E/C MALE BIB COCK
TACOMA PLUMBING
NOV 2015
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO
I L L U M I N AT E
R E TA I L M A L E B AT H R O O M
ENTRY SUITE
Date
Caravelle
Easy Height
1.10
July 2010

The more
stars the more
water efficient
WATER
RATING
Licence No. 0001

Traps:
S trap unvented.
Cisterns:
Inlet Valve and

Overflow:

Fixing:
Seats:
Colour:
White only
Installation:
Dimensions:

products, refer to:
364
168
Relieve bed
around
pan connector
Offset
connector
Finished
Wall
360
Bottom Inlet
S trap 989300
50mm
Bedding height
60mm
Important
22mm approx.
projection
from wall
100
1/2"
Waste
outlet
430
Inlet 55

to 660mm.
890 approx.
196 Inlet
or overflow
Offset connector
can be positioned
anywhere in
shaded area in
a 50mm arc
Pan seal
B.S.P.
Nipple
Finished
wall

140
435
800 approx.
back connection
Seat colour:
S trap 989200
130
660
425
Pan
foot
level
90 - 190
Set-out range
90
90min - 190 max
TACOMA PLUMBING
Code No.
Back Entry
140
156
Setout position for

1/2" B.S.P. Nipple
back inlet

Toilet Suites:
Bottom inlet 425
4.5
3
Pan:

No.601150.
NOV 2015
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO
I L L U M I N AT E
CAROMA METRO WALL FACED TOILET SUITE
TACOMA PLUMBING
NOV 2015
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO
I L L U M I N AT E
TAPHOLE W/ OVERFLOW
WASTE
CAROMA TITAN WALL VANITY BASIN MIXER W/- 180MM
SPOUT - WELS Star Rating 5
Chalice Basin
BASINS / COUNTERTOP
AU Code
123114
Product
NZ Code
AU only
1.2
Kohler Code
14800-0
Included Components
Features
Overflow outlet
Vitreous china
Technical Details
Top View
Front View
Side View
Installation Notes:
Australia
www.kohler.com au.
TACOMA PLUMBING
New Zealand
www.kohler.co.nz

Mar 2012
1194862-A04-A
NOV 2015
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO
I L L U M I N AT E
CAROMA CUBE URINAL ELECTRONIC 0.8LTR - ROUGH IN
KIT
CAROMA CUBE URINAL ELECTRONIC 0.8LTR - FIT OUT
TACOMA PLUMBING
NOV 2015
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO
I L L U M I N AT E
R E TA I L F E M A L E B AT H R O O M
ENTRY SUITE
Date
Caravelle
Easy Height
1.10
July 2010

The more
stars the more
water efficient
WATER
RATING
Licence No. 0001

Traps:
S trap unvented.
Cisterns:
Inlet Valve and

Overflow:

Fixing:
Seats:
Colour:
White only
Installation:
Dimensions:

products, refer to:
364
168
Relieve bed
around
pan connector
Offset
connector
Finished
Wall
360
Bottom Inlet
S trap 989300
50mm
Bedding height
60mm
Important
22mm approx.
projection
from wall
100
1/2"
Waste
outlet
430
Inlet 55

to 660mm.
890 approx.
196 Inlet
or overflow
Offset connector
can be positioned
anywhere in
shaded area in
a 50mm arc
Pan seal
B.S.P.
Nipple
Finished
wall

140
435
800 approx.
back connection
Seat colour:
S trap 989200
130
660
425
Pan
foot
level
90 - 190
Set-out range
90
90min - 190 max
TACOMA PLUMBING
Code No.
Back Entry
140
156
Setout position for

1/2" B.S.P. Nipple
back inlet

Toilet Suites:
Bottom inlet 425
4.5
3
Pan:

No.601150.
NOV 2015
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO
I L L U M I N AT E
CAROMA METRO WALL FACED TOILET SUITE
TACOMA PLUMBING
NOV 2015
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO
I L L U M I N AT E
TAPHOLE W/ OVERFLOW
WASTE
CAROMA TITAN WALL VANITY BASIN MIXER W/- 180MM
SPOUT - WELS Star Rating 5
Chalice Basin
BASINS / COUNTERTOP
AU Code
123114
Product
NZ Code
AU only
1.2
Kohler Code
14800-0
Included Components
Features
Overflow outlet
Vitreous china
Technical Details
Top View
Front View
Side View
Installation Notes:
Australia
www.kohler.com au.
TACOMA PLUMBING
New Zealand
www.kohler.co.nz

Mar 2012
1194862-A04-A
NOV 2015
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO
I L L U M I N AT E
R E TA I L P W D
CAROMA CARE 800 WALL FACED SUITE
Date
Care 800
13.04
July 2011
Sanitary Facilities - Access and Mobility

4.5/3 litre Vitreous China Wall Faced Close Coupled
Toilet Suite
The 4.5/3 dual flush Care 800 Smartflush Wall Faced close coupled toilet suite uses Caroma Smartflush
technology to deliver the latest water-saving technology in sanitaryware products and is designed to
provide a raised seat height of between 460-480mm for persons with disabilities. With a pan projection of
800mm 10mm, the suite can be easily installed flush against the wall. This eliminates the need to build a
hob behind the suite to meet compliance requirements to AS 1428.1-2009 Amd. 1 for wheelchair access.
The Uni-connector pan connection system allows for setout adjustments from 85mm to 285mm providing
installation versatility for both new and renovation applications. The cistern is back inlet with " B.S.P. inlet
stop valve and inlet connection concealed within the cistern. Supplied with raised button option and the
Unifill inlet valve for ultra quiet fast fill as standard.
Important :
Pan:
Traps:
Cisterns:
Buttons:
Seats:
The more
stars the more
water efficient
WATER
RATING
Installation:
Licence No. 0001

Dimensions:

products, refer to:
Colour:
335
Pan foot
level
Code No.
Seat colour:
Pedigree II Care Single Flap
901800
W, SB or MG
Pedigree II Care Single Flap,

901800B
W, SB or MG
Colani Single Flap
901810
W, SB or MG
Colani Single Flap,

901810B
W, SB or MG
Offset Connector
672005

Setout Range
286mm 330mm
(For Bedding only)
185
420
160
800 10mm
For wheelchair access
155
Long Uniconnector
Setout Range
85mm 285mm
Care 800 Toilet Suite

with Seat:
190 Recommended
range 85 285mm
D.80 Concealed
Bracket Fixing Centre
320
Pan outlet
375
packing
piece
required
360
Pan foot
level
113
286mm - 330mm with

* Reference must be made to the

AS 1428.1-2009 Amd 1 to confirm
Important
22mm approx.
projection
from wall
440
Backrest
(refer to page 13.02)
1/2"
B.S.P.
Nipple
885
185
Pan foot
level
320
10mm bedding
5mm max. silicone
460 - 480 with seat
Finished
wall
430
820
Centre water back inlet connection
Setout position for

" B.S.P. Nipple
185
4.5
3
Reference must be made to AS 1428.1-2009 with current amendments to

determine circulation space, grab rail and installation requirements.
The dimensions in this sheet may change with amendments to the standard.
Care 800 Close Coupled 4.5 litre full flush wash down box rim type.
Universal trap.
Geo Smartflush Cistern has a free fitting lid and is suitable for domestic and light
commercial applications. Available as internal overflow. Standard back inlet.
standard mechanism to lock lid onto the cistern, recommended for use in heavy use
commercial areas. Code No.750109. Cistern inlet stop valve and inlet connection is
concealed within the cistern and is included.
Round Care Button - Metal (supplied). Other button options sold separately. See
section 16.01 for further details
Pedigree II Care or Colani disabled seat supplied, available in Caroma white (W),
sorrento blue (SB) and majestic grey (MG - available late 2011). See Section 15 SEATS for further details. Reference to AS1428.1-2009 must be made in regards to
luminance contrast when selecting the seat colour.
White only.

with the D.80 bracket supplied.
Suitable for installation to comply to Australian Standard AS 1428.1-2009 Amendment No.1 Design for access and mobility
TACOMA PLUMBING
NOV 2015
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO
I L L U M I N AT E
R E TA I L P W D
CAROMA OPAL 510 WALL BASIN 1TH

CAROMA SHROUD TO SUIT
IRWELL PIN LEVER BASIN MIXER W/- CARE LEVER - 4 Star
WELS
TACOMA PLUMBING
NOV 2015
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO
TACOMA PLUMBING
NOV 2015
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO
TACOMA PLUMBING
NOV 2015
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO
TACOMA PLUMBING
NOV 2015
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO
TACOMA PLUMBING
NOV 2015
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO
TACOMA PLUMBING
NOV 2015
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO
TACOMA PLUMBING
NOV 2015
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO
TACOMA PLUMBING
NOV 2015
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO
TACOMA PLUMBING
NOV 2015
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO
TACOMA PLUMBING
NOV 2015
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO
TACOMA PLUMBING
NOV 2015
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO
TACOMA PLUMBING
NOV 2015
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO
TACOMA PLUMBING
NOV 2015
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO
TACOMA PLUMBING
NOV 2015
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO
TACOMA PLUMBING
NOV 2015
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO
TACOMA PLUMBING
NOV 2015
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO
TACOMA PLUMBING
NOV 2015
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO
TACOMA PLUMBING
NOV 2015
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO
TACOMA PLUMBING
NOV 2015
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO
TACOMA PLUMBING
NOV 2015
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO
TACOMA PLUMBING
NOV 2015
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO
TACOMA PLUMBING
NOV 2015
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO
TACOMA PLUMBING
NOV 2015
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO
TACOMA PLUMBING
NOV 2015
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO
TACOMA PLUMBING
NOV 2015
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO
TACOMA PLUMBING
NOV 2015
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO
TACOMA PLUMBING
NOV 2015
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO
TACOMA PLUMBING
NOV 2015
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO
TACOMA PLUMBING
NOV 2015
CONTENTS
LIGHT & CO
TACOMA PLUMBING
NOV 2015
CONTENTS
Section 5.13
G l a s s Sp l a s h b a c k
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
Section 5.14
Electrical
CONTENTS
BRISBANE
360 Lytton Road
Morningside QLD 4170
PO Box 10 Cannon Hill QLD 4170
T 07 3200 3100
F 07 3200 3111
28th July 2016

Pradella Construction (QLD) Pty Ltd
Level 10, 154 Melbourne Street
PO Box 3301 South Brisbane
QLD 4101
Attention: Scott Fyfe
Gardens C & D Project
40 & 50 Duncan street West End, Brisbane QLD 4101
Subject: Warranty
All equipment, materials and workmanship are guaranteed against defects for a maximum defect liability period of 12 months
from date of practical completion for the following aspects of the installation
Light Fittings
Emergency Lighting System
Electrical Outlets & Accessories
Switchboards
Communication Voice, Data cabling and Data Outlets
MATV
Lightning Protection
Cable Support
Security
Fire Rating of Electrical Penetrations
Submains and Sub-circuit Cabling
Please note the following

Consumables are excluded from this warranty
Any repairs, repainting, reworks, etc that may be required by other trades and services is excluded
Any alterations, changes or additions to this installation will void this warranty
Please contact Blue Star Pacific for any defects during the above stated defect liability period.
Regards,
Corey Oliver
Project Manager
Brisbane: 360 Lytton Road, Morningside, QLD, 4170

Website: www.bluestarpacific.com Email: admin@bluestarpacific.com
ABN 93 107 581 564
REV MAY 2011
CONTENTS
BRISBANE
PO Box 10, Cannon Hill, 4170
Tel: 07 3200 3100 Fax: 07 3200 3111
Electro Technology Contractors and Engineers
INSTALLERS STATEMENT
11th July 2016

QLD 4101
Gardens C&D Project
Electrical Services Installers Statement
We herein certify that the electrical installation works as per the Specification for the above Project have been installed and tested in
accordance with the prescribed procedures and that such work complies with the requirements of AS/NZS 3000 and has been
connected to the supply under our Contractors License No. 70411.
Should you require any further information, please do not hesitate to contact the undersigned.
Corey Oliver
Project Manager
For Blue Star Pacific Pty Ltd

ABN 93 107 581 564
RevDec10
CONTENTS
A Intercom & Security
CONTENTS
Manuale Utente
Users manual
Benutzerhandbuch
Manuel Utilisateur
Manual del usuario
Manual Usurio
PEC/01
QUESTE ISTRUZIONI DEVONO ESSERE ALLEGATE ALLAPPARECCHIO
CETTES INSTRUCTIONS DOIVENT ACCOMPAGNER LAPPAREIL
THESE INSTRUCTIONS SHOULD BE ATTACHED TO THE APPARATUS
ESTAS INSTRUCCIONES SE DEBEN ANEXAR AL APARATO
DIESE ANLEITUNGEN MEN JEDE GERT BEGLEITEN
ESTAS INSTRUES DEVEM ACOMPANHAR O APARELHO
08-02-12/24803721
CONTENTS
IT
Regolazione suoneria
(alto-medio-esclusione)
(LED rosso)
1
2
EN
DE
FR
Lutwerkeinstellung
Rglage sonnerie
Adjusting the ring
(high-medium-disabling) (laut-mittel-deaktivieren) (haut-moye-exclusion)
(red LED)
(LED rot)
(LED rouge)
ES
Regulacin del timbre

(alto-mediodeshabilitacin)
(LED rojo)
PT
Regulao dos sons

(alto-mdio-excluso)
(LED vermelho)
Attivazione/Disattivazione Activating/De-activating Aktivierung/Abschaltung Activation/Dsactivation Activacin/Desactivacin

comunicazione (LED blu) communication (blue LED) der Sprechstelle (LED blau) communication (LED bleu) comunicacin (LED azul)
Activao/Desactivao
comunicao (LED azul)
Apriporta 1 (LED blu)
Door lock release 1

(blue LED)
Trffner 1 (LED blau)
Ouvre-porte 1 (LED bleu)
Abrepuerta 1 (LED azul)
Abertura da porta 1
(LED azul)
Intercom 1/3 (LED blu)
Intercom 1/3 (blue LED)
Intercom 1/3 (LED blau)
Intercom 1/3 (LED bleu)
Intercom 1/3 (LED azul)
Intercom 2/4 (LED blu)
Intercom 2/4 (blue LED)
Intercom 2/4 (LED blau)
Intercom 2/4 (LED bleu)
Ausiliario 1 (LED blu)
Auxiliary 1 (blue LED)
Zusatz 1 (LED blau)
Auxiliaire 1 (LED bleu)
Auxiliar 1 (LED azul)
Auxiliare 1 (LED azul)
Ausiliario 2/Chiamata
portiere (LED blu) 2
Auxiliary 2/Porter call

(blue LED) 2
Zusatz 2/Pfrtnerruf (LED

blau) 2
Auxiliaire 2/Appel
concierge (LED bleu) 2
Auxiliar 2/Llamada
conserje (LED azul) 2
Auxiliare 2/Chamada
porteiro (LED azul) 2
IT
1 In impianti predisposti per questa segnalazione,

durante una chiamata da posto esterno, il LED
accesso fisso indica che la porta aperta.
2 La funzione pu essere disponibile anche quando
la comunicazione non attiva se il sistema lo
permette.
FR
1 Sur
les installations prvues pour cette signalisa

tion, durant un appel depuis poste externe, la LED
allume de manire fixe indique que la porte est
ouverte.
2 La fonction peut galement tre disponible lor
sque la communication nest pas active si le
systme le permet.
EN
1 In systems designed to accommodate this signal,

during a call from an entry panel, the LED lit
permanently indicates that the door is open.
2 The function may also be available with com
munication is not activated, where the system
permits it.
ES
1 En instalaciones preparadas para esta indicacin,

durante una llamada desde placa exterior, el LED
encendido fijo indica que la puerta est abierta.
2 La funcin tambin puede estar disponible cuan
do la comunicacin no est activa si el sistema lo
permite.
DE
1 Wenn die LED-Anzeige bei Anlagen, die ber diese

Anzeige verfgen, whrend eines Anrufs von einer
Auenstation, bedeutet dies, dass die Tr offen ist.
2 Die Funktion kann auch dann zur Verfgung
stehen, wenn die Kommunikation nicht aktiviert
ist und das System es ermglicht.
PT
1 Em sistemas preparados para esta sinalizao,

durante uma chamada da placa botoneira, o LED
acesso fixo indica que a porta est aberta.
2 A funo pode estar disponvel mesmo quando
a comunicao no est ativa, se o sistema o
permitir.
CONTENTS
IT Funzioni base - EN Standard functions bsicas - PT Funes base

IT Rispondere ad una chiamata- EN Answer a callllamada- PT Atender uma chamada
DE
Freisprechbetrieb -
FR
Fonctions de base -
ES
Auf einen Anruf antworten -
FR
Rpondre un appel-
Responder a una
DE
ES
Funciones
IT
Rispondere ad una chiamata
EN
Answer a call
DE
Auf einen Anruf antworten
FR
Rpondre un appel
ES
Responder a una llamada
PT
Atender uma chamada
IT
Comunicazione attiva
EN
Communication active
DE
Aktive Kommunikation
FR
Communication active
ES
Comunicacin activa
PT
Comunicao activa
IT
Apriporta del posto esterno
EN
Entry panel door release
DE
Trffner der Auenstation
FR
Ouvreporte du poste extrieur
ES
Abrepuerta de la placa exterior
PT
Abertura da porta da placa externa
IT
Chiudere la comunicazione
EN
Ending communication
DE
Abstellen der prechverbindung
FR
Couper la communication
ES
Cortar la comunicacin
PT
Fechar a comunicao
CONTENTS
IT Funzioni disponibili durante una chiamata - EN Functions available during a call - DE Funktionen, die whrend eines Anrufs - FR
Fonctions disponibles durant un appel - ES Funciones disponibles durante una llamada - PT Funes disponveis durante uma chamada
IT Attivazione comunicazione , apertura della porta del posto esterno selezionato ,

e attivazione dei comandi ausiliari . In impianti predisposti per questa segnalazione, il
LED accesso fisso indica che la porta aperta .
EN Activation communication , opening of the door of the selected entry panel , and
activation of the auxiliary controls . In systems designed to accommodate this signal,
the LED lit permanently indicates that the door is open .
DE Aktivierung Kommunikation , ffnen der Tr von der ausgewhlten Auenstation

, und Aktivierung der Zusatzsteuerungen . Wenn die LEDAnzeige bei Anlagen, die
ber diese Anzeige verfgen, aufleuchtet, bedeutet dies, dass die Tr offen ist .
FR Activation de la communication , ouverture de la porte du poste externe slectionn

et activation des commandes auxiliaires . ur les installations prvues pour cette
signalisation, la LED allume de manire fixe indique que la porte est ouverte .
ES Activacin de la comunicacin , apertura de la puerta de la placa exterior seleccio

nada , y activacin e los mandos auxiliares . En instalaciones preparadas para esta
indicacin, el LED encendido fijo indica que la puerta est abierta .
PT Ativao da comunicao , abertura da porta da placa botoneira selecionada , e

ativao dos comandos auxiliares . Em sistemas preparados para esta sinalizao, o
LED acesso fixo indica que a porta est aberta .
IT Esclusione Suoneria - EN Disabling the ring Timbre - PT Excluso Campainha
DE
Lutwerkabschaltung -
FR
Exclusion de la Sonnerie
ES
Deshabilitacin del
IT Per escludere la suoneria premere il pulsante

fi nch il LED si accende. La suoneria sar esclusa per qualsiasi tipo di
chiamata. Premere il pulsante per regolare nuovamente il volume della suoneria.
EN
To disable the ring, press the button

to adjust again the ring volume.
until the LED turns on. The ring will be disabled for all call types. Press the button
DE Um das Lutwerk abzuschalten, die Taste

drcken, bis die LED aufleuchtet. Das Lutwerk ist fr jede Art von Anruf
deaktiviert. Die Taste erneut drcken, um das Lutwerk wieder zu aktivieren.
FR Pour exclure la sonnerie, appuyer sur le bouton
jusqu ce que la LED sallume. La sonnerie sera exclue pour tout type
dappel. Appuyer de nouveau sur le bouton pour ractiver la sonnerie.
ES Para deshabilitar el timbre pulse el botn
hasta che se encienda el LED. El timbre quedar deshabilitado para todo tipo de llamada; as pues, la recepcin de
una llamada. Vuelva a pulsar el botn para reactivar el timbre.
PT Para inibir a campainha prima o boto
para reativar a campainha.
at o LED seacender. A campainha fica desabilitada para qualquer tipo de chamada. Prima novamente o boto
CONTENTS
IT
ES
IT
PT
Intercomunicazione - EN Intercommunication Intercomunicacin - PT Intercomunicao

Chiamata agli interni Chamar os internos
EN
Call extensions -
DE
DE
Intercom-Funktion -
Innensprechstellen -
INTERCOM 1/3
FR
FR
Intercommunication -
Appeler les postes intrieurs -
ES
Llamar a los internos
IT
Per chiamare gli interni 1 e 2 (3 o 4) premere i pulsanti relativi.
EN
Press the relative buttons to call extensions 1 to 2 (3 or 4).
Um die Innensprechstellen 1 bis 2 anzurufen (3 oder 4), die entsprechenden

Tasten drcken.
DE
FR Pour appeler les postes intrieurs de 1 2 (3 ou 4), appuyer sur les boutons
correspondants.
ES
Para llamar a los internos del 1 al 2 (3 o 4) pulse los botones correspondientes.
PT
Para chamar os internos de 1 a 2 (3 ou 4) carregar os relativos botes.
INTERCOM 2/4
IT Dopo aver selezionato linterno desiderato il derivato chiamante emetter un tono

di linea libera, mentre il derivato chiamato squiller con il tono scelto. Per attivare la
comunicazione audio necessario premere il tasto del derivato chiamato.
PERLA 1
PERLA 2
EN After selecting the desired receiver, the caller will emit a line free tone, while the
receiver called will ring with the chosen tone. To activate audio communication, press
the key on the receiver.
DE Nachdem die gewnschte Innensprechstelle ausgewhlt ist, ertnt an der
anrufenden prechstelle ein Freiton, whrend an der angerufenen prechstelle der
ausgewhlte Klingelton ertnt. Um die AudioKommunikation zu aktivieren, muss die
Taste der angerufenen prechstelle gedrckt werden.
PERLA 1
PERLA 2
FR Aprs avoir slectionn linterne souhait, le driv appelant mettra une tonalit
de ligne libre, tandis que le driv appel sonnera avec la tonalit choisie. Pour activer
la communication audio, il est ncessaire dappuyer sur la touche du driv appel.
ES Tras seleccionar el interno deseado, el derivado llamante emitir un tono de lnea
libre, mientras que el derivado llamado sonar con el tono elegido. Para activar la
comunicacin audio se debe pulsar el botn del derivado llamado.
PT Depois de selecionar o interno desejado, o derivado que chama emite um tom
de linha livre, enquanto o derivado chamado toca com o tom escolhido. Para ativar a
comunicao udio necessrio premir a tecla do derivado chamado.
PERLA 1
PERLA 2
IT
Durante una conversazione fra interni una chiamata da posto esterno viene segnalata ai derivati da un beep ripetuto ogni 5.
EN
During a conversation between receivers, a call from an entry panel is signalled to the receivers by a beep, which is repeated every 5.
Ein whrend eines Gesprchs zwischen den Innensprechstellen eingehender Anruf von einer Auenstation wird an den Innensprechstellen mit einem wiederholten
Piepton von je 5 ek. signalisiert.
DE
FR
Durant une conversation entre internes, un appel depuis poste externe est signal aux drivs par un bip rpt toutes les 5.
ES
Durante una conversacin entre internos, si se produce una llamada desde placa exterior, se indica a los derivados mediante un pitido repetido cada 5 segundos.
PT
Durante uma conversa entre internos uma chamada proveniente da placa botoneira sinalizada aos derivados por um bip repetido a cada 5.
IT
3 beep successivi indicano che non possibile effettuare chiamate perch la linea occupata.
EN
3 beeps in sequence indicate that calls cannot be made because the line is busy.
DE
3 Mal hintereinander ertnt, zeigen an, dass kein Gesprch gefhrt werden kann, da die Leitung besetzt ist.
FR
3 bips successifs indiquent quil est impossible deffectuer des appels car la ligne est occupe.
ES
3 pitidos consecutivos indican que no se pueden realizar llamadas porque la lnea est ocupada.
PT
3 bips sucessivos indicam que no possvel realizar chamadas, porque a linha est ocupada.
5
CONTENTS
IT Trasferimento di chiamata Transferncia de chamada
EN
Call transfer -
DE
Anrufumleitung -
FR
Transfert dappel -
ES
Transferencia de llamada -
PT
IT Con una comunicazione attiva, selezionare linterno al quale

si vuole trasferire la chiamata (il derivato chiamante emetter un
tono di linea libera, mentre il derivato chiamato squiller con il tono
scelto). Per attivare la comunicazione audio necessario premere il
tasto del derivato chiamato.
PERLA 1
PERLA 2
PERLA 1
Una volta stabilita la connessione audio con linterno desiderato,

premere per trasferire la chiamata. Linterno che riceve la
chiamata potr ritrasferirla.
EN With an active communication, select the receiver you wish
to transfer the call to (the caller will emit a line free tone, while the
receiver called will ring with the chosen tone). To activate audio
communication, press the key on the receiver.
PERLA 1
PERLA 1
PERLA 1
PERLA 2
PERLA 2
PERLA 2
PERLA 2
PERLA 1
Once the audio connection is established with the desired receiver,

press to transfer the call. The receiver of the call can transfer
it back.
DE Whrend das Gesprch aktiv bleibt, die Innensprechstelle
auswhlen, an die der Anruf transferiert werden soll (an der anru
fenden prechstelle ertnt ein Freiton, whrend an der angerufenen
prechstelle der ausgewhlte Klingelton ertnt). Um die Audio
Kommunikation zu aktivieren, muss die Taste der angerufenen
prechstelle gedrckt werden.
Nach Herstellung der AudioVerbindung mit der gewnschten

Innensprechstelle, die Taste drcken, um das Gesprch zu
transferieren. Das Gesprch kann dann auch von der angewhlten
Innensprechstelle transferiert werden.
FR Avec une communication active, slectionner linterne auquel
on souhaite transfrer lappel (le driv appelant mettra une
tonalit de ligne libre, tandis que le driv appel sonnera avec
la tonalit choisie). Pour activer la communication audio, il est
ncessaire dappuyer sur la touche du driv appel.
Une fois tablie la connexion audio avec linterne souhait, appuyer

sur pour transfrer lappel. Linterne qui reoit lappel pourra
la retransfrer.
ES Con una comunicacin activa, seleccione el interno al que desea transferir la llamada (el derivado llamante emitir un tono de lnea libre, mientras que el derivado
llamado sonar con el tono elegido). Para activar la comunicacin audio se debe pulsar el botn del derivado llamado.
Una vez establecida la conexin audio con el interno deseado, pulse para transferir la llamada. El interno que recibe la llamada podr volver a transferirla.
PT Com uma comunicao ativa, selecione o interno ao qual deseja transferir a chamada (o derivado que chama emite um tom de linha livre, enquanto o derivado
chamado toca com o tom escolhido). Para ativar a comunicao udio necessrio premir a tecla do derivado chamado.
Aps ter estabelecido a conexo udio com o interno desejado, prima para transferir a chamada. O interno que recebe a chamada pode voltar a transferila.
CONTENTS
IT Funzioni di Portineria- EN Porter Functions - DE Funktionen der Pfrtnerzentrale Conciergerie - ES Funciones de Conserjera - PT Funes de Portaria
FR
Fonctions de
w
IT
Le funzioni descritte nel presente paragrafo sono disponibili solo in impianti dotati di postazione di portineria.
EN
The functions described in this paragraph are only available in systems featuring a porter station.
DE
Die in diesem Abschnitt beschriebenen Funktionen stehen nur bei Anlagen mit Pfrtnerzentrale zur Verfgung.
FR
Les fonctions dcrites dans le prsent paragraphe ne sont disponibles que sur les installations quipes de poste de conciergerie.
ES
Las funciones descritas en este apartado solo estn disponibles en instalaciones que incluyan puesto de conserjera.
PT
As funes descritas neste pargrafo esto disponveis apenas em sistemas equipados com servio de portaria.
IT Chiamata dal portiere call

n2
porteiro
EN
Porter call -
DE
Pfrtnerruf-
FR
call n2
Appel du concierge -
ES
Llamada del conserje-
IT
Premere il pulsante
EN
Press the button
DE
Zum Antworten die Taste
FR
Appuyer sur le bouton
ES
Pulse el botn
para responder.
PT
Prima o boto
para atender.
PT
Chamada do
per rispondere.
to answer.
drcken.
pour rpondre.
IT Notifica di chiamata da portiere - EN Porter call notification - DE Rufmitteilung von der Pfrtnerzentrale concierge - ES Aviso de llamada del conserje - PT Aviso de chamada do porteiro
FR
Avis dappel du
CALL ME
IT La notifica viene segnalata dallaccensione del LED Aux2 . Il led si

spegne quando si entra in comunicazione con il portiere.
CALL ME
EN The notification is signalled by the Aux2 LED lighting up . The LED is

turned off when communication with the porter is established.
DE Die Mitteilung wird durch das Aufleuchten der LED Aux2 signali
siert. Die LED erlischt, sobald eine Verbindung zum Pfrtner hergestellt ist.
FR Lavis est signal par lallumage de la LED Aux2 . La led steint
lorsque lon entre en communication avec le concierge.
ES El aviso se indica con el encendido del LED Aux2 . El led se apaga
cuando se establece la comunicacin con el conserje.
PT O aviso sinalizado pelo acendimento do LED Aux2 . O led apagase
quando inicia a comunicao com o porteiro.
IT Richiesta di chiamata al portiere - EN Porter call request llamada al conserje- PT Pedido de chamada ao porteiro
DE
Pfrtnerruf IT
call n2
FR
Demande dappel au concierge -
ES
Solicitud de
Richiesta di chiamata al portiere
EN
Porter call request
DE
Pfrtnerruf
FR
Demande dappel au concierge
ES
olicitud de llamada al conserje
PT
Pedido de chamada ao porteiro

7
CONTENTS
w
Per la pulizia utilizzare solo panni morbidi ed asciutti oppure leggermente inumiditi con acqua; non utilizzare alcun tipo di prodotto chimico.
Only use soft, dry or slightly damp cloths to clean the terminal; do not use any chemical products.
Fr die Pflege nur weiche und trockene oder mit wenig Wasser angefeuchtete Tcher verwenden, keine chemischen Produkte benutzen.
Pour le nettoyage, nutiliser que des chiffons doux et secs ou lgrement imbibs deau; nutiliser aucun type de produit chimique.
Para la limpieza utilice solo paos suaves y secos, o ligeramente humedecidos en agua; no utilice ningn tipo de producto qumico.
Para a limpeza utilize apenas panos macios e secos ou ligeiramente humedecidos com gua; no utilize qualquer tipo de produto qumico.
This device complies with the Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
SMALTIMENTO
Assicurarsi che il materiale dimballaggio non venga
disperso nellambiente, ma smaltito seguendo le
norme vigenti nel paese di utilizzo del prodotto.
Alla fine del ciclo di vita dellapparecchio evitare che
lo stesso venga disperso nellambiente.
Lo smaltimento dellapparecchiatura deve essere
effettuato rispettando le norme vigenti e privile
giando il riciclaggio delle sue parti costituenti.
Sui componenti, per cui previsto lo smaltimento
con riciclaggio, sono riportati il simbolo e la sigla
del materiale.
DISPOSAL
Do not litter the environment with packing
material: make sure it is disposed of according to
the regulations in force in the country where the
product is used.
When the equipment reaches the end of its life
cycle, take measures to ensure it is not discarded in
the environment.
The equipment must be disposed of in compliance
with the regulations in force, recycling its compo
nent parts wherever possible.
Components that qualify as recyclable waste feature
the relevant symbol and the materials abbreviation.
ENTSORGUNG
Vergewissern Sie sich, dass das
Verpackungsmaterial gem den Vorschriften des
Bestimmungslandes ordnungsgem und umwelt
gerecht entsorgt wird.
Das nicht mehr benutzbare Gert ist umweltgerecht
zu entsorgen.
Die Entsorgung hat den geltenden Vorschriften zu
entsprechen und vorzugsweise das Recycling der
Gerteteile vorzusehen. Die wiederverwertbaren
Gerteteile sind mit einem Materials.
ELIMINATION
Sassurer que le matriel demballage nest pas
abandonn dans la nature et quil est limin
conformment aux normes en vigueur dans le pays
dutilisation du produit.
la fin du cycle de vie de lappareil, faire en sorte
quil ne soit pas abandonn dans la nature.
Lappareil doit tre limin conformment aux
normes en vigueur et en privilgiant le recyclage
de ses pices.
Le symbole et le sigle du matriau sont indiqus sur
les pices pour lesquelles le recyclage est prvu.
ELIMINACION
Comprobar que no se tire al medioambiente el
material de embalaje, sino que sea eliminado
conforme a las normas vigentes en el pas donde se
utilice el producto.
Al final del ciclo de vida del aparato evtese que
ste sea tirado al medioambiente.
La eliminacin del aparato debe efectuarse confor
me a las normas vigentes y privilegiando el reciclaje
de sus partes componentes.
En los componentes, para los cuales est prevista la
eliminacin con reciclaje, se indican el smbolo y la
sigla del material.
ELIMINAO
Assegurar-se que o material da embalagem
no seja disperso no ambiente, mas eliminado
seguindo as normas vigentes no pas de utilizao
do produto.
Ao fim do ciclo de vida do aparelho evitar que o
mesmo seja disperso no ambiente.
A eliminao da aparelhagem deve ser efectuada
respeitando as normas vigentes e privilegiando a
reciclagem das suas partes constituintes.
Sobre os componentes, para os quais previsto o
escoamento com reciclagem, esto reproduzidos o
smbolo e a sigla do material.
BPTS.p.A.
Via Cornia, 1
33079 Sesto al Reghena-PN-Italy
www.bpt.it-info@bpt.it
8
CONTENTS
User's Manual
IT
EN
DE
FR
ES
PT
18
CONTENTS
User's Manual
INDICE
MAIN SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pag.
Call in progress. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Door lock release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conversation in progress. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System busy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entry panel activation from internal extension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
13
13
13
13
13
CODED CALL TO INTERNAL EXTENSION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pag. 14

CALL WITH NAME SEARCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pag.
Alphabetical search (from A to Z). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reverse alphabetical search (from Z to A). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Free Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15
15
15
15
PORTER CALL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pag. 16

DOOR LOCK RELEASE WITH CODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pag. 17
DOOR LOCK RELEASE WITH PROXIMITY KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pag. 17
IT
EN
DE
FR
ES
PT
11
CONTENTS
User's Manual
Camera Lens
Loudspeaker
IT
EN
Signalling LEDs
DIGITHA
DE
Display
WELCOME
FR
A Z ABC A Z
Function Keys
ES
PT
Keypad
RFID Tag Reader
Microphone
12
CONTENTS
User's Manual-Main Signals
MAIN SIGNALS
Call in progress
CALL
Call
forwarded
ESC
Program. impianto
Door
Lingua lock release
Attendere
Program. impianto
DOOR OPEN
Lingua
ESC
IT
Attendere
Door
Open
EN
ESC
ESC
Program. impianto
Lingua
DEF
ABC
Conversation
in progress
DE
Attendere
GHI
JKL
PQRS
TUV
MNO
Program.
impianto
CONVERSATION
CONVERSATION
Lingua
WXYZ
ESC
FR
Attendere
DEF
ABC
ESC
Program. impianto
System busy
Lingua
ABC
DEF
Attendere
GHI
JKL
PQRS
TUV
ESC
GHI
JKL
PQRS
TUV
ES
MNO
ESC
WXYZ
PT
MNO
WXYZ
ESC
System
Busy
Program. impianto
GHI
ABC
DEF
JKL
MNO
Lingua panel activation from internal extension

Entry
DEF
ABC
Attendere
GHI
JKL
MNO
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
ESC
Program. impianto
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
Lingua
Attendere
ESC
ESC
GHI
ABC
DEF
JKL
MNO
13
CONTENTS
User's Manual-Coded Call to Internal Extension
CODED CALL TO INTERNAL

EXTENSION
A Z ABC Z A
To.call.an.internal.extension,.you.must.enter.the.corresponding.call.
code.and.press.the.key. .(fi.gure.b,.c,.d) .
The. call. codes. can. be. composed. of. 2. to. 9. digits,. so. to. form. the.
codes.1.to.9.you.must.place.a.0.(zero).before.the.number .
15
DIGITHA
WELCOME
ESC
A Z ABC Z A
ERROR
15
IT
ESC
EN
CALL
DE
ESC
FR
CONVERSATION
DEF
ABC
ES
GHI
JKL
PQRS
PT
TUV
MNO
WXYZ
ESC
The. appearance. of. the.

CALL. symbol. on. the.
display.(fi.gure.f).and.the.
lighting.of.the.respective.
ABSENT
PRIVACY ABC
BUSY
DEF
LED.( ).signals.that.the.
MNO
GHI
JKL
conversation.request.has.
been.sent.to.the.selected.
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
internal. extension .. If. set.
ESC
ESC i
ESC h
g
up. accordingly,. the. entry.
panel. will. also. emit. the.
dedicated.voice.message .
If.the.called.user.is.busy.in.another.conversation.(fi.gure.g),.does.not.wish.to.be.disturbed.(fi.gure.
h).or.is.absent.(fi
.gure.i),.the.appropriate.signals.will.appear.on.the.display.and.then.the.disDEF
ABC
DEF
ABC
DEF
ABC
play.will.return.to.the.initial.screen.(fi.gure.a) .
GHI
JKL
MNO
GHI
JKL
MNO
GHI
JKL
MNO
The.appearance.of.the.CONVERSATION.symbol.on.the.display.(fi
.gure.j).and.the.lighting.of.
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
the.respective.LED.( ).signals.that.the.called.user.has.answered.and.is.in.conversation .
ESC
DOORABCOPEN DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
At.this.point,.if.the.called.user.activates.the.solenoid.door.lock,.the.DOOR OPEN symbol.will.

appear.on.the.display.(fi.gure.).with.the.lighting.of.the.respective.LED.( ) .
If.the.entry.panel.has.been.set.up.appropriately,.the.opening.of.the.door.is.accompanied.by.a.
ESC
DIGITHA
ABC
GHI
PQRS
If.an.incorrect.or.non-existent.code.is.entered,.the.respective.error.window.will.appear.on.the.display.(fi.gure.e) .
DEF
JKL
MNO
WELCOME
TUV
WXYZ
At.the.end.of.the.conversation,.the.initial.window.will.be.displayed.again.(fi.gure.) .
The.ESC.symbol.appears.in.each.screen;.by.pressing.the.respective.key,.you.can.interrupt.the.
operation.in.progress.and.return.to.the.initial.window ..
A Z ABC Z A
14
CONTENTS
User's Manual-Call with Name Search
CALL WITH NAME SEARCH

If you do not know the name of the user, you can use the main
screen (figure a) or press the function key marked with the symbol (figure b) to perform an alphabetical search:
- in alphabetical order (from A to Z), by pressing the key A Z,
- in reverse order (from Z to A), by pressing the key Z A,
- free, by pressing the key ABC.
DIGITHA
DIGITHA
WELCOME
WELCOME
A Z ABC Z A
A Z ABC Z A
USER SEARCH
ANGELINI
BIANCHI
COMASCHI
DAMICO
FORTEBRACCIO
AZ Search from A to Z
ABC Free search
ZA Search from Z to A
A Z ABC Z A ESC
Alphabetical search (from A to Z)
Select call
ESC
From the USER SEARCH screen, press the A Z key (figure c) to

enter the screen displaying the names in alphabetical order. Once
you have selected the user (highlighted in negative) using the arrows , press the key
to make the call (figure d).
To exit without making any call, press ESC.
d
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
PQRS
TUV
EN
GHI
USER SEARCH
ABC
DEF
JKL
MNO
TUV
WXYZ
Select call
ROSSI
PQRS
SASSI
TONI
VERDI
ZAVAN
WXYZ
AZ Search from A to
Z
ABC Free search
A Z ABC Z A ESC
IT
ESC
Reverse alphabetical search (from Z to A)
From the USER SEARCH screen, press the A Z key (figure e)

to enter the screen displaying the names in reverse alphabetical
order. Once you have selected the user (highlighted in negative)
15
using the arrows , press the key
to make the call.
To exit without making any call, press ESC.
DE
FR
f
ESC
Free Search
ABC
DEF
GHI
USER SEARCH
JKL
MNO
GHI
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
PQRS
AZ Search from A to Z
ABC Free search
A Z ABC Z A ESC
ABC
DEF
DIGITHA
JKL
MNO
TUV
Enter
the desired
user
name
WXYZ
ES
B_
BIANCHI
COMASCHI
DAMICO
FORTEBRACCIO
GIACOMETTI
ESC
PT
ESC
DEF
From the USER
SEARCH
screen, pressABCthe ABC
key (figure g) to enter
the
user selection screen. Enter the initial letters
DEF
ABC
DEF
ABC
of the desired name in sequence (figures h,i) and the list will appear on the screen starting from the closest reference.
MNO
GHI
JKL
MNO
GHI
MNO
GHI
JKL
JKL
You can delete one or more characters, starting from the last character, by pressing the key. To exit without making any
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
call, press
ESC.
PQRS
TUV
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
WXYZ
Once you have selected the desired user (highlighted in negative), press the key
to make the call (figure j).
Now you can proceed as described on the previous page.
y The search functions can be used only if the entry panel has been programmed to display the names of the users.
15
CONTENTS
User's Manual-Porter Call
PORTER CALL
To.call.the.porter.service,.where.available,..press.the.function.key.
marked.with.the. .symbol.(fi.gure.b) ..
A Z ABC A Z
DIGITHA
WELCOME
A Z ABC A Z
IT
ESC
EN
CONVERSATION
DEF
ABC
DE
ABSENT
BUSY
CALL
ESC
The.appearance.of.the.CONVERSATION.symbol.on.the.display.(fi
.gure.f).and.the.lighting.of.
DEF
ABC
DEF
ABC
the.respective.LED.( ).signals.that.the.porter.has.answered.and.is.in.conversation .
GHI
JKL
MNO
GHI
JKL
MNO
GHI
JKL
MNO
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
ESC
FR
HOLDING
ABC
ES
PT
JKL
MNO
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
ESC
DOORABCOPEN DEF
GHI
JKL
PQRS
TUV
MNO
WXYZ
ESC
DIGITHA
ABC
GHI
PQRS
CONVERSATION
DEF
GHI
ESC
The.appearance.of.the.CALL.symbol.on.the.display.(fi.gure.c).and.the.lighting.of.the.respective.
LED. ( ). signals. that. the. conversation. request.
has. been. sent .. If. set. up. accordingly,. the. entry.
panel.will.also.emit.the.dedicated.voice.message .
If. the. porter. is. busy. in. another. conversation.
(fi.gure. d). or. is. absent. (fi.gure. e),. the. appropriate. signals. will. appear. on. the. display. and.
then.the.display.will.return.to.the.initial.screen.
(fi.gure.a) .
DEF
JKL
MNO
WELCOME
TUV
WXYZ
If.you.request.communication.with.one.of.the.internal.extensions,.
the.porter.will.check.the.availability.of.the.desired.user.(fi.gure. g).
and,.if.available,.place.the.internal.extension.in.direct.conversation.
with.the.entry.panel.(fi.gure.h) .
ESC
ABC
The. solenoid.
door.DEF lock. can. be. activated. by. both. the. porter. and. the. user. from. the. internal.
extension .
.In.this.case,.the.DOOR
OPEN.symbol.will.appear.on.the.display.(fi.gure.i).with.the.
MNO
GHI
JKL
lighting.of.the.respective.LED.( ) .
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
If.the.entry.panel.has.been.set.up.appropriately,.the.opening.of.the.door.is.accompanied.by.a.
At.the.end.of.the.conversation,.the.initial.window.will.be.displayed.again.(fi.gure.j) .
The.ESC.symbol.appears.in.each.screen;.by.pressing.the.respective.key,.you.can.interrupt.the.
operation.in.progress.and.return.to.the.initial.window ..
A Z ABC Z A
16
CONTENTS
User's Manual-Door Lock Release with Code or Proximity Key

ESC
DOOR LOCK RELEASE WITH CODE

To. open. the. door,. press. the. key. . (fi.gure. a),. enter. the. access.
code.(fi.gure.b).(4-8.digits).and.press.the.key. .again .
***
ESC
***
DOOR OPEN
ESC
ABC
ESC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
ESC
If.the.code.is.valid,.the.DOOR OPEN.symbol.will.appear.on.the.
display.(fi.gure. c),.the.respective.LED.( ).will.come.on,.a.confi.rmation.tone.will.sound.and.you.will.be.able.enter .
If.the.entry.panel.has.been.set.up.appropriately,.the.opening.of.the.
door.is.accompanied.by.a.dedicated.voice.message .
If.an.invalid.code.has.been.entered,.3.short.beeps.will.signal.the.
error.condition.(fi.gure.d) .
DOOR LOCK RELEASE WITH PROXIMITY KEY

ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
IT
EN
To.open.the.door,.move.the.proximity.key.near.the.reader.(fi.gure.
a) .
DE
FR
DOOR OPEN
ESC
GHI
PQRS
ESC
ABC
ES
PT
DEF
ABC
DEF
JKL
MNO
GHI
JKL
MNO
WXYZ
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
TUV
If.the.code.is.valid,.the.DOOR OPEN.symbol.will.appear.on.the.
display.(fi.gure. b),.the.respective.LED.( ).will.come.on,.a.confi.rmation.tone.will.sound.and.you.will.be.able.enter .
If.the.entry.panel.has.been.set.up.appropriately,.the.opening.of.the.
door.is.accompanied.by.a.dedicated.voice.message .
If.the.code.is.invalid,.3.short.beeps.will.signal.the.error.condition.
(fi.gure.c) .
17
CONTENTS
[Type text]
Warranty Certificate
When installed and commissioned by SPL industry trained technicians,

warranty on the installed product is 12 months.
SPL also warrants the installation of the installed product against

faulty workmanship for a period of 12 months.
Any warranty rectification work is restricted to normal working hours

i.e. 8.00am to 5.00 pm Monday to Friday, excluding Public Holidays.
Vince Todarello
Sales Director
CONTENTS
LONG RANGE SOLUTION

THAT OPENS IT ALL
Void and Validate i-Key 4 in your access control system JUST LIKE A PROX / SMART CARD !
Connects to an access control system JUST LIKE A PROX / SMART CARD READER !
Just one product and with the touch of a button, the i-Key 4 is the
smart and simple way to control access to your secure areas such as
boom gates, rising barriers, roller shutters and doors. Cutting
edge technology allows the i-Key 4 to enter multiple facilities with
just one key. Use the i-Key 4 and your secure access couldnt be
simpler!
Enhanced Flexibility
Combine the convenience of long range access control with the simplicity of close range
proximity readers with i-Key 4 pendants. i-Key 4 supports technologies such as HID, Indala, EM,
Farpointe Data / Keri Systems proximity along with iCLASS, Mifare and Tecom / GE
smartcard technologies to work just like a prox / smart card.
Applications
Car Parks
Apartment / Condos
Housing Estates / Gated Communities
Commercial Premises
Hospitals
Airports
DDA (Disability Discrimination Act)
Features
Multiple frequencies available - 315MHz, 433MHz,
868MHz, and 915MHz
Easily Interfaced
Long Range
4 Wiegand outputs
Flexible
High Security
CE, FCC and C-Tick approvals
TM
CONTENTS
Specifications
i-Key 4 Pendant
Frequency
Buttons
Status
Battery
Proximity
Compatibility
Smartcard
Compatibility
Casing
Colour
Weight
Dimensions
315MHz, 433MHz, 868MHz or 915MHz

4 (1 for each channel)
Red LED on button press
3 Volt CR3032
HID, Indala, Farpointe Data / Keri Systems
and EM.
iCLASS, Mifare and Tecom / GE
ABS
Black
20g (0.7oz)
56mm x 35.6mm x 16.4mm (2.2 x 1.4 x 0.65)
i-Key 4 Receiver
Frequency
Voltage Input
Current
Range
Wiegand Output
Wiegand Formats
Casing
IP Rating
Dimensions
Operating Temp
315MHz, 433MHz, 868MHz or 915MHz

9~12 Volts DC
100mA (Typical)
Up to 25 Meters (82 feet) Also, field configurable
to only read up to 3 Meters (10 feet)
4 Outputs (1 for each channel)
26Bit Wiegand, other formats available
ABS
IP65
124mm x 111mm x 32mm (4.88 x 4.37 x 1.26)
-100C ~+ 700C
i-Key 4 6PIN Module

Designed to connect to standard boom gate and roller shutter motor drive control.
Comes complete with fly leads should you not have a 6 PIN connection.
Frequency
315Mhz, 433MHz, 868MHz or 915MHz
Voltage Input
7.5 ~28VDC
Output
Open Collector 100mA/40VDC
Users
Up to 200 users
Software
Windows based software for database management
Memory
Non Volatile
Options
External antenna, 12/24 Volt Relay board
Part Numbers :
i-Key 4 TX i-Key 4 Pendant
i-Key 4 TX/M i-Key 4 Pendant Mifare
i-Key 4 TX/H i-Key 4 Pendant HID
i-Key 4 TX/I-C i-Key 4 Pendant iCLASS
i-Key 4 TX/I i-Key 4 Pendant Indala
i-Key 4 TX/T i-Key 4 Pendant Tecom / GE
i-Key 4 TX/EM i-Key 4 Pendant EM
i-Key 4 TX/K i-Key 4 Pendant Keri / Farpointe Data
i-Key 4 RX - i-Key 4 Wiegand Receiver
i-Key 4 Ant - Antenna for extending range of Receiver
i-Key 4 6PIN - i-Key 4 6PIN Module
i-Key 4 Ext - Relay board for 6PIN
i-Key 4 Ant - Antenna for extending range of 6PIN
www.itrakglobal.com
14/2962 Logan Road, Underwood, QLD 4119, Australia P +61 7 3423 0007 F +61 7 3423 0911 E sales@itrakglobal.com
Specifications subject to change without notice. All rights reserved. HID, the HID logo, and iCLASS are trademarks or registered trademarks of HID Corporation, Tecom and GE is a registered trademark of General Electric Corporation, Mifare is a registered trademark of
Phillips Electronics, Keri is a registered trademark of Keri Systems Inc, Farpointe Data is a registered trademark of Farpointe Data Inc, All other trademarks, servicemarks and product or service names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
CONTENTS
Data Sheet
TEAR SHAPE
Q5
Chip type:
Q5 R/W 264 bits
Physical:
Width:
Length:
Thickness:
Material:
Color:
31 mm 0.3 mm
40 mm 0.3 mm
4.8 mm 0.3 mm
Polycarbonate
Black, red, blue
Electrical:
Operating frequency:
125 kHz 6 kHz
* At room temperature
Chemical:
Water immersion IP67
Thermal:
Storage:
Operating:
-25oC to +80 oC
-25oC to +50 oC
* 1x 1000h
Part number:
SPL-FOB-MF
SPL-FOB-EM
SPL-FOB-HID
* Test conditions and remarks
CONTENTS
BRISBANE
360 Lytton Road
Morningside QLD 4170
PO Box 10 Cannon Hill QLD 4170
T 07 3200 3100
F 07 3200 3111
28th July 2016

QLD 4101
Gardens C & D Project
Subject: Warranty
All equipment, materials and workmanship are guaranteed against defects for a maximum defect liability period of 12 months
from date of practical completion for the following aspects of the installation
Light Fittings
Emergency Lighting System
Electrical Outlets & Accessories
Switchboards
Communication Voice, Data cabling and Data Outlets
MATV
Lightning Protection
Cable Support
Security
Fire Rating of Electrical Penetrations
Submains and Sub-circuit Cabling
Please note the following

Consumables are excluded from this warranty
Any repairs, repainting, reworks, etc that may be required by other trades and services is excluded
Any alterations, changes or additions to this installation will void this warranty
Please contact Blue Star Pacific for any defects during the above stated defect liability period.
Regards,
Corey Oliver
Project Manager
ABN 93 107 581 564
REV MAY 2011
CONTENTS
BRISBANE
Tel: 07 3200 3100 Fax: 07 3200 3111
11th July 2016

QLD 4101
Gardens C&D Project
Electrical Services Installers Statement
We herein certify that the electrical installation works as per the Specification for the above Project have been installed and tested in
accordance with the prescribed procedures and that such work complies with the requirements of AS/NZS 3000 and has been
connected to the supply under our Contractors License No. 70411.
Corey Oliver
Project Manager

ABN 93 107 581 564
RevDec10
CONTENTS
B - Smoke Detectors
CONTENTS
Data Sheet
Professional Photoelectric Smoke Alarm, 240V
CAT NO.
643085
Cat No
643085
Colour
White
Type
Photoelectric
Diameter
147mm
Depth
49mm
Mounting centre
84mm
Siren sound level
85db at 3m
Supply voltage
230-240V a.c. 50Hz
CONTENTS
Data Sheet
Professional Photoelectric Smoke Alarm, 240V
CAT NO.
643085
Product specifications
Cat No
643085
Quantity
Single Barcode
9321001433958
Inner Barcode
9321001433965
Outer Barcode
9321001433972
24
Photoelectric
Photoelectric smoke alarms see the smoke. They detect visible particles
of combustion, eg smouldering cigarette smoke. They respond to a wide
range of fires, but they are particularly responsive to smouldering fires and
the dense smoke given off by foam filled furnishings or overheated PVC
wiring. This is the technology recommended by fire authorities for residential
applications.
Advantages
Good for smouldering fire and dense smoke
N
ot as prone to cooking nuisance alarms as ionisation alarms
C
ontain no radioactive material
S
uitable for general use
I nterconnectable up to 20 units
S
urface mounting for easy fit-off
P
ower and alarm indicator
E
asy access for wiring
H
ush/Test button
9
V battery back-up included
L
ow battery indication (audio and visual)
D
uct cover to protect the device during installation
S
moke detector interface (643086) available separately to interconnect
with other appliances, circuits and systems e.g. lighting and exhaust fans
HPM Legrand - AUS

1300 369 777
www.legrand.com.au
ABN 31 000 102 661
HPM Legrand - NZ
0800 476 009
www.legrand.co.nz
Refer to your group buying office, HPM Legrand Sales Representative or

HPM Legrand Sales Office for pricing.
* Specifications may change without notice
10/15 HPML0425
CONTENTS
BRISBANE
Tel: 07 3200 3100 Fax: 07 3200 3111
3rd October 2016

QLD 4101
Light & Co Project
321 Montague Road West End, Brisbane QLD 4101
Smoke Detectors Installers Statement
We herein certify that Smoke Detectors as per the Specification for the above Project have been installed and tested in accordance
with the prescribed procedures and that such work complies with the requirements of AS/NZS 3786 Self Contained Smoke Alarms.
Please note that this certification only covers works as listed above.
Corey Oliver
Project Manager

ABN 93 107 581 564
RevDec10
CONTENTS
C - Light Fittings
CONTENTS
DA235 - 13 W
Domestic
Kitchens
Bathrooms
Laundries
Undercover areas
Soffits, under eaves
DIMENSIONS
Commercial
Storage areas
Toilets
Shops, malls
49
Industrial
Task lighting
Amenities
90
52
110
MODELS
3000 K
LIGHT & CO - TYPE C1, L2, L3, L6
APPLICATION
Operational voltage 176 to 264 VAC

Overload / short circuit protection
High power factor > 0.95
1.5 m supply flex and 2-pin plug
Quick connect LED head
Ceiling penetration of 49 mm
Lumen output: 835 lm (3000 K)
909 lm (4000 K)
business
IP54 protection from below ceiling, IP20 from above

Enhanced performance
Suits GreenStar, IPART and BCA compliant designs
Die-cast aluminium heatsink
Aust. approved LED dimmable driver 5 - 100%
(for details refer to Control / Dimmer data sheet)
13 W 5% maximum system watts
High performance LEDs, up to 50,000 hr
EMC compliant to 300 MHz
depends
FEATURES
When your
on light.
The DA235 series white trim downlight is built robust with an aluminium die-cast body and is available with a beam
angle of 90 degrees. The unit provides a soft, tender light and its simple and elegant appearance will blend seamlessly
with any dcor.
4000K
DA235-3KD-01
W = Matt White
DA235-4KD-01
W = Matt White
DA235-3KD-02
S = Satin Silver
DA235-4KD-02
S = Satin Silver
DA235-3KD-03
B = Satin Black
DA235-4KD-03
B = Satin Black
DA235CO-10D3KD
D = Satin Chrome
DA235CO-10D4KD
D = Satin Chrome
DA235CO-10E3KD
E = Brushed Chrome
DA235CO-10E4KD
E = Brushed Chrome
ECOSmart
IP
5-100%
54
IP
20
INDOOR
DA235 - 171215
Rev 3.4
Manufactured under ISO 9001:2008 to standards AS/NZS60598.1

AS/NZS60598.2.1
AS/NZS60598.2.2
AS/NZS CISPR 15
CONTENTS
LIGHTING DATA
DA235-3KD
DA235-4KD
Light Distribution Curve (LDC)
Light Distribution Curve (LDC)

C90
C90
90
90
C0
C0
C0-C180
60
200
C0-C180
C90-C270
60
200
300
300
LIGHT & CO - TYPE C1, L2, L3, L6
45
45
400
400
l (cd/klm)
Utilisation Table (TM5)
l (cd/klm)
DA235-3KD.IES
Reflectances
Utilisation Table (TM5)
Room Index
0.75 1.0 1.25 1.5
DA235-4KD.IES
Reflectances
Room Index
2.0
2.5
3.0
4.0
5.0
2.0
2.5
3.0
4.0
5.0
70
50
20
59
67
73
77
83
87
89
93
95
70
50
20
61
70
76
80
85
89
93
95
97
70
30
20
53
62
68
72
78
83
86
90
92
70
30
20
55
64
70
74
81
85
88
92
95
70
10
20
49
57
64
68
75
79
82
87
90
70
10
20
50
59
66
70
77
82
85
89
92
50
50
20
58
66
71
75
80
84
86
89
91
50
50
20
59
68
73
77
83
86
89
92
94
50
30
20
52
61
66
71
76
80
83
87
89
50
30
20
54
63
69
73
79
83
85
89
91
50
10
20
48
57
63
67
73
77
80
84
87
50
10
20
50
59
65
69
75
80
83
87
90
30
50
20
56
64
69
73
78
81
83
86
88
30
50
20
58
66
71
75
80
83
86
88
90
30
30
20
52
60
65
69
75
78
81
84
86
30
30
20
53
62
67
71
77
81
83
86
88
30
10
20
48
56
62
66
72
76
78
82
84
30
10
20
49
58
64
68
75
78
81
85
87
46
54
60
64
69
72
75
78
80
48
56
62
66
71
75
77
81
83
BZ-class
SHRnom : 1.25
C90-C270
BZ-class
SHRmax : 1.430
0.75 1.0 1.25 1.5
SHRnom : 1.25
Beam width: 1.882m
SHRmax : 1.406
Beam width: 1.868m
444 lux in centre
1.0m
Beam width: 3.765m
460 lux in centre
1.0m
Beam width: 3.736m
111 lux in centre
2.0m
Beam width: 5.647m
115 lux in centre
2.0m
Beam width: 5.604m
49 lux in centre
3.0m
Beam width: 7.530m
51 lux in centre
3.0m
Beam width: 7.472m
28 lux in centre
4.0m
Beam width: 9.412m
29 lux in centre
4.0m
Beam width: 9.341m
18 lux in centre
5.0m
Beam width: 11.295m
18 lux in centre
5.0m
Beam width: 11.209m
12 lux in centre
6.0m
Beam width: 13.177m
13 lux in centre
6.0m
Beam width: 13.077m
9 lux in centre
7.0m
Beam width: 15.059m
9 lux in centre
7.0m
Beam width: 14.945m
7 lux in centre
8.0m
Average Beam Half - Angle = 43
7 lux in centre
8.0m
Average Beam Half - Angle = 43
Characteristics and specifications may change without notice. All electrical installations / connections should be carried out by a competent person at
all times. Application images are indicative only and may not contain actual Davis product. The information contained in this publication is typical and
must not be interpreted as a guarantee of individual product performance.
AUSTRALIA
HEAD OFFICE: Tel: +61 (7) 3712 8988 Fax: +61 (7) 3272 8988
SALES OFFICES (all states): 1300 851 001
E-mail: australia@davislighting.com
Website: www.davislighting.com
CONTENTS
When your
business
depends
on light.
AL28-40W
DESCRIPTION:
Surface mount CFL oyster for
domestic and commercial
applications. Provides a soft,
tender light without black spots or
dark areas.
Model
Operating Voltage
Power
Light Source
AL28-40W
200 240 VAC, 50 / 60 Hz
40 W
2 x 20 W CFL
LIGHT & CO TYPE L1, L4, L5
SPECIFICATIONS:
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
LC10823W3K
DESCRIPTION:
Surface mount LED downlight for
dark areas.
FEATURES:
Colour temperature 3000 K
35,000 hr LEDs
Dimmable and non-dimmable models
White or black finish
Integral electronic control gear
Quick and easy installation
IP54 rating available
CONTENTS
SPECIFICATIONS:
LC10823W3K
Model
Operating Voltage
200 240 VAC, 50 / 60 Hz
LED Power
23 W
Lumen Output
1890 lm
Efficacy
82 lm / W
Colour Temperature
3000 K
CRI
>80
MODELS:
Colour
IP Rating
LC10823W3K01
White
IP20
LC10823W3K03IP54
Black
IP54
CONTENTS
CYS12W3K03
DESCRIPTION:
Surface mount led bulkead for
dark areas.
Model
Operating Voltage
CYS12W3K03
200 240 VAC, 50 / 60 Hz
Power
12 W
Light Source
LED
Rating
IP54
LIGHT & CO TYPE L5
SPECIFICATIONS:
CONTENTS
C239120WCFL
DESCRIPTION:
Surface mount CFL oyster for
dark areas.
Model
Operating Voltage
Power
Light Source
Rating
C239120WCFL
200 240 VAC, 50 / 60 Hz
20W
1 x 20 W CFL
IP65
LIGHT & CO L5
SPECIFICATIONS:
CONTENTS
Energy Management & Auditing
LED Lighting
Bulk Metering
Power Factor Correction
Wind Turbines
eCO-Pendant - Black - Light&Co
black enamel finish

and white inside,
small brass cap and
1.5m fabic cable
(with ceiling rose)
360mmX170mm
eCO2 Solutions Pty Ltd

www.eco2solutions.com.au
info@eco2solutions.com.au
472 Newman Road, Geebung QLD 4034
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
Section 5.15
Doors & Fire Doors
CONTENTS
OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

For
SUPPLY OF STEEL DOOR FRAMES
SUPPLY AND INSTALL OF FIRE RATED DOORS
SUPPLY AND INSTALL OF NON RATED DOORS
AT
Light and Co
321 Montague Rd & 11 Beesley St West End
Prepared By: Australian Architectural Fire Doors Pty Ltd
1 of 15
CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
Introduction
2.0
System and Plant Description

2.1 Fire Rated Door Sets
2.2 Door Hardware
3.0
Detail System Operation Description
4.0
Equipment Schedules
4.1 Door Schedule
5.0
Equipment Suppliers & Subcontractors

5.1 Frame Suppliers
5.2 Door Suppliers
6.0
General Maintenance Procedures

6.1 Door Maintenance
6.2 Hardware Maintenance
7.0
Maintenance Schedule
8.0
Fire Door Log Book
9.0
Manufacturers Literature
9.1 Fire Doors and Non Rated Doors
10.0
Commissioning/Test Data
11.0
Warranties and Guarantees
2 of 15
CONTENTS
1.0
Introduction
Scope of works
Supply only of pressed metal door frames.

Supply and Install of fire rated timber doors.
Supply and Install of non-rated common area timber doors.
Certification of fire rated doors.
Client:
Pradstruct
Project Name:
Light & Co
Project Location:
321 Montague Rd & 11 Beesley St West End
Contractor:
Australian Architectural Fire Doors Pty Ltd

29 Andrew Campbell Drive Narangba
Telephone: (07) 3888 5911
Facsimile: (07) 3888 4619
Email Address: info @aafd.com.au
Key Personnel:
Alan Theodore
Architect:
Rothelowman
3 of 15
CONTENTS
2.0
System and Plant Description
2.1
Fire Rated Door Sets

Fire rated doors are located in fire separation walls enclosing most of the plant
rooms and fire separation walls between fire stairs/escape passages and public
occupied areas
Fire doors and other doors can be identified by the door number allocated to each
door on the floor plan drawings and cross reference to same number in the door
schedule and hardware schedule.
A fire door is installed across an opening in a firewall to maintain the fire
resistance rating of that firewall. Fire rated door must be self closing or close
automatically on the operation of an approved sensing device or on the loss of
power supply. Once released the fire door must close cleanly and fully, and be
unimpaired in its operation. Each fire door must have a metal tag attached as
required by AS 1905.1
2.2
Door Hardware
As part of a fire rated door assembly door hardware and closers have to comply
with the statutory testing requirements. Fire resistance rating applies to the
complete fire door assembly. As such, door hardware must provide safe and
secure latching of fire doors when closed by the door closer.
Following are brief functional description of different types of locks:
Passage set locks operated by lever handles from both sides of the door, not
lockable. Usually used in passageways and high traffic areas.
Storeroom set locks operated with lever and/or cylinder from external side and
handle from internal side of the door. Usually used on rooms with restricted
access, as well on the fire stairs to prevent unauthorised access from the fire
stairwells to premises.
Rim night latch locks for fire rated riser compartments operated by keyed
cylinder from external side of the compartment and turn on the internal side.
4 of 15
CONTENTS
3.0
Detail System Operation & Description

Purpose
A fire door is installed across an opening in a fire wall to maintain the fire
resistance rating of that wall.
Requirements
An approved fire resistant door set is one that is identical in assembly,
construction and installation to a prototype of this door that has been submitted to
the standard fire resistance test, and has fulfilled all the relevant test
requirements.
A fire door must be self-closing or close automatically on the operation of an
approved sensing device or on the loss of power supply.
In addition of above operation requirements, to comply with fire regulations fire
door has to comply with following maximum clearances:
top and both sides maximum 3mm gap between the door leaf and the
frame.
Clearance to floor with a combustible covering max 25mm to non
combustible sill.
Clearance to floor without a combustible covering max 10mm.
Method of Operation
Once released the fire door must close cleanly, and be un-impaired in its
operation. It is essential that no unauthorised means is used to hold open a fire
door.
Identification Tagging of Fire Doors
Every fire door assembly should be clearly marked with frame and door
certification tags. Tags are placed on the hinge side of the frame and door.
Frame tags contain the following information:
Name of the certifier.

Name of the manufacturer.
Fire resistance level of the door frame in minutes
5 of 15
CONTENTS
Door leaf tag contain following information:
Number of the standard.

Fire resistance level in minutes (FRL).
Name of the manufacture.
Name of the sponsor.
Name of the certifier.
Year of manufacture
Serial Number
Serial number is used for allocation and identification of the door, and is also
transferred into the fire door logbook, which is part of the Fire Certificate for the
fire doors on every building. After the inspection performed by authorised
company this fire certificate is to be reissued yearly containing this number (refer
to Section 8.0).
4.0
Door Schedule
See Resident Manager for detailed Door Schedule
5.0
Equipment Suppliers and Subcontractors
5.1
Non Rated and Fire Rated Door Frames

Contact: Alan Theodore
Phone: 0419 190 076
5.2
Non Rated and Fire Rated timber doors

Contact: Alan Theodore
Phone: 0419 190 076
6 of 15
CONTENTS
6.0
General Maintenance Procedures
6.1
Doors
Doors in general do not require special maintenance if the following guidelines
are followed:
It is essential that no unauthorised means is used to hold open a fire

door.
External doors and doors in wet areas are sealed/painted on top and
bottom every three years.
There is no excessive movement in the building structure or dry walls
where doors are installed.
Doors and door hardware sets are not dismantled or disassembled,
and non-original parts are used for replacement. Door closer arms are
not disconnected, locks and handles are not forced or tampered.
Doors are not abused or misused and are not kept open by
unauthorised means.
Door hardware (hinges, handles lock tongues) sets are properly
maintained and lubricated occasionally to provide smooth action.
All hardware is installed and maintained as per the hardware
maintenance manual in the following section.
Regular monthly and yearly maintenance/inspection checks are required for fire
doors as per AS 1851.7
To ensure a proper history of each fire door is retained, the following records
must be available and maintained.
Log book identifying each fire rated doors set, and showing its
identification number, type of door, size and fire resistance level (refer
to Section 8.0 for information).
A numbered Certificate of Compliance giving written evidence that door

set complies with AS 1905.1 (refer to Section 8.0 for information).
7 of 15
CONTENTS
6.2
Hardware
Cleaning Technique: Door Furniture
Initially, wash down the surface using soapy water or a mild water or a mild
detergent. Always thoroughly rinse the cleaning agent away with clean water. To
complete the cleaning procedure dry/polish the item with a soft, dry cloth.
Cylinders
During cleaning care should be taken to prevent cleaning solution from entering
the cylinder keyway. Never use oil, grease or graphite to lubricate the cylinder;
this may result in a malfunction of the mechanism.
Hinges
All hinges should be checked for tightness and lubricated on a regular basis.
Where hinges are fixed on the exterior of a building it may be necessary to
lubricate more often.
Pull Handles
Templates are provided to give accurate fixing positions for all standard pull
handles. It is important that boltholes of the correct size, at right angles to the
door face and the necessary centres, are drilled accurately.
Each fixing should be tightened to ensure the pull handle is firm and stable and
use the fixings supplied including washers and nylon liner sleaves when fitted to
glass doors.
Pull handles should be inspected to ensure that the fixings are appropriate with
grub screws, where used, firmly in position. Any movement of the handle will
damage the door surface and cause the handle to become unstable and fail when
used
Door Closers
After filling in accordance with the fixing instruction and template, the door closer
must be adjusted to provide a smooth closing action so that the door closes
correctly. Occasional lubrication of the latch bolt, using an aerosol spray, will
ensure a smooth action.
Each door closer should be inspected for oil leakage, tightness of fixings and
correct operation.
8 of 15
CONTENTS
Locks, Latches & Panic Equipment

Each item should be fitted in accordance with the fixing instruction using the
fixings provided.
All locks and latches should be inspected to ensure that they are operating
correctly, with the strike plate correctly bent to ensure smooth action of the latch
bolt so that the door closes correctly. Occasional lubrication of the latch bolt,
using an aerosol spray, will ensure a smooth action.
Lever and Knob Handles
On installation, where the correct procedure, as per the instructions, has been
carried out, the lever and knob handles will not require adjustment. However, all
fixings should be checked for tightness at the annual control. Any loose fixings
should be adjusted. Badly fitted furniture can cause interference with the
operation of the lock and, at the same time, damage the bearing surface of the
furniture.
Todays environment exerts immense pressures on product material
requirements. Products must withstand a diversification of atmospheric
conditions, such as high pollution, marine locations, high humidity climates.
Additionally, products must be protected against cleaning agents/solutions and
ideally the product should offer hypo-allergenic properties
Stainless Steel
Stainless steel is renowned for the following tow properties; resistance to
corrosion and low maintenance requirements.
Performance Characteristics of Stainless Steel
Todays environment exerts immense pressures on product material
requirements. Products must withstand a diversification of atmospheric
conditions, such as, high pollution, marine locations, high humidity climates.
Additionally, one must protect the product against cleaning agents/solutions and
ideally the product should offer hypo-allergenic properties.
Stainless steel is a general description for a group of steel products that consist
of a minimum of 12% chrome in conjunction with varying quantities of nickel,
molybdenum, titanium and carbon
Stainless steel is renowned for the following two properties; resistance to
corrosion and low maintenance requirements.
9 of 15
CONTENTS
Stainless steel corrosion resistance is attributable to the presence of a thin,

durable film of passive, but stable, chromium oxide. Being inert, invisible,
extremely adherent and self-repairing, this film provides an unrivalled protection
for the steel; should the film be damage or removed it will reform independently,
provided that oxygen is present to allow the reaction to occur with the chromium
content of the steel. Thus the necessity to ensure regular cleaning maintenance.
There are several types of stainless steel, all of which are corrosion resistant to
differing degrees. The most common and important type within the stainless steel
family is known as austenitic and contains nominally 18% chromium and *%
nickel, 18/8, resulting in improved corrosion resistance. The advantages of this
particular type are twofold: temperatures of 160 deg. C up to melting point of
the steel (approximately 1450deg. C) can be withstood and offering the best
protection corrosion-wise.
Within the austerity group two particular grades are of particular interest, known
as AISI:304, possesses the property of corrosion resistance in natural
atmospheric environments, however, only non-acid based cleaning solutions can
be used. 316 (an addition of an extra 2 3% molybdenum and nickel), has
enhanced corrosion resistance suitable for more aggressive atmospheric
environments, of low maintenance and suitable for all cleaning solutions including
acid based (except hydrochloric acid), as long as thoroughly rinsed with clean
water afterwards.
Aggressive environmental conditions can cause the following effects on stainless
steel; rusting, unsightly staining and, in some cases, permanent damage
However, the degree of damage has been proven to be reduced by using higher
grade stainless steels
10 of 15
CONTENTS
7.0
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Checks
It is recommended that a fire door and hardware be inspected monthly by the
owner. The owner may delegate this function to another person or body where
necessary or appropriate.
Under AS 1851.7 Two Levels of Inspections are required:
Monthly Type 1 Inspection
A visual and physical inspection of the door and its function. This inspection must
be carried out by the owner or occupier or by a suitably qualified representative
(i.e. maintenance manager).
Yearly Type 2 Inspections
The routine required for the monthly inspections.
Comparison of each fire door set with the appropriate specification in the
installation log book supplied with the door.
The inspection items specified in Appendix A of AS 1851.7 pages 6-8. This
inspection shall be carried out or supervised by a person acceptable to the
regulatory authority (building surveyor) as being competent and experienced in
the field of fire doors.
It is recommenced that where any corrective action involves repairs to the door
leaf, such repairs should be carried out by the original manufacturer.
It is essential all fire doors are maintained in operational condition at all times
8.0
Fire Door Log Book

Fire door log book is provided by the fire door supplier showing:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Identification of your building and its owner.

The supplier of the door sets.
The date of commissioning of the fire door sets in your building.
Identification number of each door set.
Type of door, dimensions and fire resistance level
11 of 15
CONTENTS
9.0
Manufacturers Literature
As Per Attached
10.0
Commissioning/Test Data
Fire Doors Commissioning/Certificate
11.0
See Resident Managers for Commissioning & Test Data
Warranties and Guarantees
12 of 15
CONTENTS
WARRANTY
To be included as part of terms and conditions in this contract.
METAL DOOR FRAME WARRANTY
All frames supplied by AAFD, shall be supplied upon the following terms and conditions that are to be read in conjunction with AAFDS standard
terms and conditions. No subsequent order, contract, correspondence or communication will vary these Terms & Conditions unless such variations
are acknowledged in writing by Australian Architectural Fire Doors.
Australian Architectural Fire Doors Warrants:
Those goods specified in the Schedule, for a period of one (1) year as from the date of transfer of risk, to be free from defects in material and
1.0 workmanship which would render them unserviceable or unfit for normal use or for any use specified by the purchaser as a condition of its
order prior to manufacture.
To the extent permitted by the law or the express provision of any statute or otherwise hereby expressly excluded and in respect warranties
2.0 that cannot be so excluded, these terms and conditions shall be read such that those statutory warranties are read as being in additional to
the warranties hereby given.
3.0 Subject to Clause 2, the warranty in Clause 1 shall be read subject to the following matters being excluded as defects:
3.1 frames not accorded reasonable treatment by the customer.
damage or defects arising out of, or in connection with, shipment or storage after frames leave the control of Australian Architectural Fire
3.2 Doors (i.e. delivered to site or handed over to a carrier). Frames must be inspected by the customer for visible defects immediately upon
delivery.
Claims for non conforming deliveries (incomplete defective or incorrectly supplied) will only be considered if made within 3 working days of
3.3 receipt or delivery of frames. All delivery checks are the responsibility of the customer
3.4 Under NO Circumstance will AAFD be liable if frames are installed before checking that they are supplied correctly and free from defects.
Factory priming is only to protect frames in transport and general handling it is the responsibility of the customer to immediately on delivery of
3.5 all frames apply 2 coats of compatible sealing priming to ensure corrosion or the like does not occur.
It is the responsibility of the builder to ensure that the frames are installed plumb and square and suitably anchored using fixing plates or
3.6 fixing clips where provided.

3.7 The storage and security of frames either in a storage area or storage facility is the responsibility of the customer/Builder.
DOOR WARRANTY
All Doors supplied by Australian Architectural Fire Doors , shall be supplied upon the following terms and conditions that are to be read in
conjunction with AAFD's standard terms and conditions. No subsequent order, contract, correspondence or communication will vary these Terms &
Conditions unless such variations are acknowledged in writing by AAFD.
Those goods specified in the Schedule, for a period of one (1) year as from the date of transfer of risk, to be free from defects in material and workmanship
that cannot be so excluded, these terms and conditions shall be read such that those statutory warranties are read as being in additional to
Subject to Clause 2, the warranty in Clause 1 shall be read subject to the following matters being Excluded as Defects:
3.1 Variations in geometry of doors, unless not in accordance with AS2688-1984 for squareness and flatness.
3.2 Natural variations in the colour and texture of timber.
3.3 Variations in veneered plywood finishes, unless not in accordance with AS2270-1979 or AS2271-1979
Normal show through of internal and core components (Note: it is not recommended to use high gloss finishes on doors where reflected light
3.4 may exaggerate show through.)
Doors not accorded reasonable treatment by the customer including failure by customer to store flat or hang in dry buildings including moist
3.5 or freshly plastered areas where the moisture content of the door skins and door components may increase abnormally and cause warping.
3.6 Failure by the customer to ensure that the doors:
A
Immediately after fitting and prior to hanging (including top and bottom edges) have received two (2) coats of paint, varnish or sealer so as to
prevent absorption of moisture and damage to doors. If staining or varnishing an exterior grade product must be used and its application to
be equivalent to paint finish, to prevent absorption of moisture.
13 of 15
CONTENTS
B
C
D
E
F
G
3.7
Have been painted with a preparation suitable to eliminate damage caused by exposure to natural or induced elements.
To ensure the door has received proper exterior finishes for exterior doors and depending on the degree of exposure and additional
protection by flashing and weather-stripping on the top and bottom edges.
Where doors are exposed to direct sunlight the door surface has been finished with light reflective colours.
receipt or delivery of doors. All delivery checks are the responsibility of the customer
Under NO Circumstance will AAFD be liable if doors are installed before checking that doors are supplied correctly and free from defects.
Failure to either immediately prime or fit hardware once penetrations into door are made will void warranty.
Experience has demonstrated that when warp occurs after delivery, it is usually due to improper storage or adverse moisture conditions prior
to or after hanging, not due to faulty manufacture.
AAFD will accept no responsibility for the development of warp if:
The content of the door falls below 12% or exceeds 18%
Doors with face veneers of differing materials or timber species
Doors that are improperly installed or which do not swing freely
External doors painted with dark colours
Doors installed in air conditioned areas or with abnormal temperature differentials from one face to the other
Doors that have been leant against walls prior to hanging
Doors that are fitted with bolection mouldings that have been installed by others or differ from the tested prototype
Doors installed in frame out of square or untrue
Doors are wedged
3.8
AAFD does not extend any guarantee against warping for 35 & 40mm thick doors which are greater in height than 2100mm or wider than
900mm.
3.9
Due to moisture characteristics of M.D.F. it is recommended that the additional care be taken in the storage and handling of these doors to
prevent moisture damage to the face of the M.D.F., or warping. The doors should be stored flat on at least three timbers in a dry room.
4.0
Whilst our price may include external edge strips, this type of door construction has inherent issues beyond the control of the manufacturer
i.e. cracking or raised edge strip. For this reason, should cracking occur AAFD will not be held responsible.
4.1
Damage or defects arising out of or in connection with the shipment or storage, after doors leave the control of AAFD P/L (i.e. delivered to site or handed ov
4.2
Fire doors must be installed in accordance with AS1905.1-2005., and maintained in accordance with AS1851.7- 2005.
4.3
Unless otherwise indicated all fire doors are supplied un-primed. No allowance made for signage with the BSA Page D-27 Amendment D2.23
for fire doors.
4.4
AAFD does not accept responsibility for the protection of doors nor will AAFD be responsible for the protection of doors once installed into
frames.
4.5
Door installations are to be signed of using the AAFD QA door installation sign off sheet as completed and accepted. Returning to an
installation will constitute a variation.
4.6
AAFD will not be held responsible for additional charges of hanging, painting or other charges arising from the replacement of doors.
4.7
Doors fitted with Electromagnetic Hold Open Devices and Parallel arm closers are not warranted for bowing or twisting.
GENERAL PRODUCTS WARRANTY

All Products supplied by AAFD, shall be supplied upon the following terms and conditions that are to be read in conjunction with AAFD's standard
terms and conditions. No subsequent order, contract, correspondence or communication will vary these Terms & Conditions unless such variations
are acknowledged in writing by AAFD,
1.0 that cannot be so excluded, these terms and conditions shall be read such that those statutory warranties are read as being in additional to
2.0 Subject to Clause 2, the warranty in Clause 1 shall be read subject to the following matters being excluded as defects:
Products not accorded reasonable treatment by the customer.
Damage or defects arising out of, or in connection with, shipment or storage after frames leave the control of AAFD. (i.e. delivered to site or
handed over to a carrier). Goods must be inspected by the customer for visible defects immediately upon delivery.
receipt or delivery of frames. All delivery checks are the responsibility of the customer
Under NO Circumstance will AAFD be liable if goods are installed before checking that they are supplied correctly and free from defects.
The storage and security of goods either in a storage area or storage facility is the responsibility of the customer/Builder.
Failure to reply to order confirmation/ shop drawings within 3 days will be taken as approval of order confirmation/ shop drawings.
14 of 15
CONTENTS
15 of 15
CONTENTS
THE E-CORE FIRE DOOR HANDBOOK

E-Core Commercial Fire Doors
Doors That Lock

Single Leaf Doors (Steel Door Frames)
Nominal finished thickness of 45mm

Available with 1, 2, 3 and 4 hour fire ratings
Suitable for use in areas where the room has to be secured
For details on the minimum number of hinges required, refer to the Hinge Chart on
the next page.
Wide range of hardware, supplementary hardware and Panic Exit Devices can be
fitted (important to specify what brand, type and model number when ordering to
ensure correct placement of reinforcing plates during manufacture)
Available in a wide range of finishes
Minimum Hardware Configurations

FIRE RATED
DOOR CLOSER
FOR E-CORE DOOR
FIRE RATED LOCKSET

FOR E-CORE DOOR
Maximum Sizes and FRL Chart

Maximum Door Leaf
Sizes (HxW) in mm
Up to 3500 x 1200
Up to 3350 x 1340
Up to 3000 x 1500
(maximum leaf size must be <
3350 in height or 1500 in width
or <4.5m2 in surface area)
Up to 3000 x 1200
Up to 2400 x 1500
Approved Wall Types
Maximum Fire
Resistance Level (Fire
Rating)
Test Reference
Number(s)
Masonry
NA/240/30
(4 hour)
SI2271
FCO1794
FCO1623
FCO2685
Plasterboard Only
NA/180/30
(3 hour)
TE7299A
FCO1624
www.e-core.com.au
2010. This document is the property of e+ Building Products Pty Ltd and may not be copied, used or disclosed in whole or in part except with the written permission of e+
Building Products Pty Ltd. The copyright and foregoing restriction on copying, use and disclosure extend to all media in which this information may be contained or used. No
liability is accepted for errors or omissions in this document.
CONTENTS

Typical Hinge Requirements for Single Doorsets
HEIGHT (MM)
HINGE CHART - for single leaf E-Core fire doors in masonry walls.
3500
3000
300mm then 1260mm

from top & bottom of door
(Lockset at min. 1200 from
bottom of door).
2700
300mm then 600mm from

top & bottom of door
2400
Either of the above
920
1200
1500
WIDTH (MM)
HEIGHT (MM)
HINGE CHART - for single leaf E-Core fire doors in plasterboard partitions
3000
2400

bottom of door).
2100

Either of the above
920
1080
1200
1500
WIDTH (MM)
www.e-core.com.au
CONTENTS

Doors That Lock

Double Leaf (Pair) Doors (Steel Door Frames)
Nominal finished thickness of 45mm

Available with 1, 2, 3 and 4 hour fire ratings
For details on the minimum number of hinges required, refer to the Hinge Chart on
the next page.
Wide range of hardware, supplementary hardware and Panic Exit Devices can be
fitted (important to specify what brand, type and model number when ordering to
ensure
Minimum Hardware Configuration

FIRE RATED
DOOR CLOSURE
FRL
Meeting Stile Detail
SEQUENCE SELECTOR
Single T-Bar
up to
NA/240/30
PADDE NE STRIKE &

LOCKWOOD 8530 HEAD
LATCH,OR
BOYD ROLLER BOLT WITH
STAINLESS STEEL ROLLER, OR
Double T-Bar
up to
NA/240/30
LOCKWOOD 8530 305 DOUBLE

BEVEL LATCH WITH LOCKWOOD
8530 353 SINGLE BEVEL
STRIKER
INACTIVE LEAF
ACTIVE LEAF
T BAR MEETING STILES

FIRE RATED LOCKSET
Maximum Sizes and FRL Chart

Maximum Door Leaf
Sizes (HxW) in mm
Up to 3500 x 2400
Up to 3000 x 3000
Up to 3350 x 2680
Up to 3000 x 2400
Up to 2400 x 3000
Approved Wall Types
Maximum Fire
Resistance Level (Fire
Rating)
Test Reference
Number(s)
Masonry
NA/240/30
(4 hour)
SI2271
FCO1794
FCO2685
Plasterboard Only
NA/180/30
(3 hour)
TE7299A
FCO1624
www.e-core.com.au
CONTENTS

Typical Hinge Requirements for Double Leaf (Pair) Doors

HINGE CHART - for single leaf E-Core fire doors in masonry walls
HEIGHT (MM)
3500
3000
300mm then 1260mm

from top & bottom of door
bottom of door).
2710

2400
3000
Either of the above
WIDTH (MM)
HINGE CHART - for single leaf E-Core fire doors in plasterboard partitions
4
2400
2 or 3
HEIGHT (MM)
3000
4
4
2400
3000
WIDTH (MM)
www.e-core.com.au
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
Section 5.16
Door Hardware
CONTENTS
Maintenance & Warranty Manual

Light + Co Apartments
Illuminate & Radiance
321 Montague Road &
11 Beesley Street
West End QLD
Date: 01/10/2016
CONTENTS
Table of Contents
1. Contacts
2. Scope of Works
3. Products & Schedules
4. Maintenance Procedures
5. Warranties
a) Manufacturers Warranties
CONTENTS
1. CONTACTS
Name:
Address:
Phone:
Address:
Able Security
Group
Nigel Bennet
0411 100 692
4/41 Paringa Road,
1300 308 692
Murrarie QLD 4172
2. SCOPE OF WORKS
Supply and install all door hardware to units, external
and common areas of the building.
Maintain the master key system
3. PRODUCTS & SCHEDULES

See on site managers for a full door equipment
schedule
4. MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
CONTENTS
Care and Maintenance Recommendations

In order to gain the maximum life from your Lockwood product, correct maintenance procedures should be followed.
The following guidelines provide recommendations for your maintenance program. It is important that maintenance be done
on a regular basis. It is recommended that inspections and cleaning be done routinely at least annually.
A shorter interval should be used in marine or other corrosive environments and in areas prone to atmospheric fallout.
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
The complete window or door should be inspected regularly to ensure that it is still in good working order. Such things as
the faulty hinges, warped windows and doors, and or distorted frames can put excessive load on other components reducing
their operating life.
Dirt, grime and airborne salt deposits are often capable of causing damage to the products surfaces and mechanism,
including the cylinder barrel, and must be regularly removed.
The following cleaning process is recommended:
Cleaning should be done with a dilute solution of a mild liquid detergent in warm water. Avoid excessively hot solutions.
Use a soft bristle brush or similar to clean the surface. Do not use abrasive tools.
After cleaning, rinse surfaces thoroughly with fresh water.
Do not use strong solvent type cleaners on surfaces. Where it is necessary to remove materials from the surface (such as
adhesives and a solvent is necessary) the weakest possible solvent should be used. The only solvents recommended are
methylated spirits, white spirits or Isopropanol. Ensure the contact time for the solvent is kept to a minimum and that the
solvent is thoroughly rinsed from the surface. A small test area should be checked prior to solvent cleaning to ensure that no
damage to the film or colour change will occur.
Where more aggressive cleaning is required, a very mild abrasive such as a high quality automotive cream polish, used in
accordance with the manufacturers instructions, may be necessary. The use of strongly abrasive compounds such as cutting
compounds is not recommended.
The use of bore water for cleaning is not recommended due to its mineral content, as it can bring about staining of the
coating and may instigate long term coating failure.
Ensure cleaning fluids do not penetrate into the lock or cylinder.
The use of products with soft finishes; such as gold plate, lacquered brass or chrome plate, need special care. Dirt or other
contaminants must not be allowed to build up on the surface, as these will readily discolour and impair the surface.
Some change in colour, gloss or chalking may be expected dependant on exposure.
Key cylinders should be lubricated at least once a year or when there are signs of roughness when inserting or retracting the
key. Remove any dirt, grime and salt deposits on and around the end of the cylinder barrel, and apply a small amount of
powdered graphite to the keyblade and insert the key into the lock barrel to maintain a smooth action. Lockwood Twin
cylinder should only be lubricated with Rivolta lubricant which is available from your local Lockwood Twin Dealer
network locksmith.
Exposed mechanisms and parts should be cleaned with a non-metallic brush. Apply a small amount of preferably Teflon
based lubricant or alternatively light sewing machine 5W mineral oil to lubricate moving parts and prevent corrosion of
exposed metal surfaces. Be careful not to apply an excessive amount of lubricate as this will have a detrimental effect of
adhering dust to these surfaces,potentially reducing their life.
With the proper care & maintenance your Lockwood product will provide you a lifetime of service, making it your future
number one choice in locking solutions.
CONTENTS
Product information & Safety Instructions

1. For controlled door closing devices with hydraulic damping (door closers)
mortice locks, door furniture, panic exit devices with horizontal actuating bar
and general product information
The following product information and safety instructions are directed to product
fabricators and also the operators of swing doors that are equipped with door
closers and/or panic exit devices with a horizontal actuating bar. The product
information and safety instructions must be carefully read and observed. They
contain important advice and recommendations relating to the proper and thus safe
fixing and installation of door closers and/or panic locks and also their proper and
safe operation, including their maintenance and refurbishment.
2. Controlled door closing devices with hydraulic damping (door closers)
2.1 Designated use
Door closers perform the task of re-closing swing doors (outwardly or inwardly
opening doors) after the manual opening operation. The closing cycle is
hydraulically damped, and the degree of damping is adjustable. Door closers are
used on swing doors of metal, timber, plastics or glass and also combinations of
these materials.
2.2 Functional requirements
The fault-free functioning of such systems requires that the doors be installed so
that they are vertically plumb and unimpeded in their swing operation, and also that
the door closer be properly installed.
Consequently, installation of the device and also adjustment and setting of the
various functions must be performed by specialist companies taking into account
the manufacturer's instructions relating to the specific product and in line with
prevailing local structural conditions.
2.3 Use and function in special areas of application
Special areas of application may give rise to additional functional prerequisites.
Particular aspects requiring attention include the following:
- In the case of fire and smoke check doors, the door closers must satisfy the
appropriate requirements of AS1905.1 and the BCA regulations.
- A fixed open position of swing doors shall only be achieved with additional special
fittings or with integrated constructional elements, and for fire and smoke check
doors these special fittings must be approved.
- In the case of particularly unfavorable local conditions (wind influence), door
closers of a higher spring strength value (higher closing torque) must be installed.
Particularly in the case of outward opening swing doors exposed to the wind, door
closers with a backcheck function must be installed.
- Door closers on swing doors for wet rooms (damp areas), for unprotected
external installation and for use in environments with aggressive, corrosion
promoting air pollutants, and also door closers exposed to extremely high or low
temperatures, require special designs.
DORMA Australia Pty Ltd
ABN 14 067 969 466
ACN 067 969 466
46-52 Abbott Road
Hallam, Victoria 3803
T: 1800 675 411

F: (03) 8795 0250
info.au@dorma.com.au
www.dorma.com.au
CONTENTS
- Installation boxes (cement boxes) for floor springs must be protected against
contamination after installation. If floor springs are exposed to water penetration,
e.g. in the case of wet rooms or external doors without rain or splash protection,
the area between the cement box and the floor spring body must be filled with the
DORMA 2300 sealing compound. Failure to install 2300 sealing compound will
result in a void warranty.
2.4 Misuse
The product is deemed to have been misused if it is used in a manner contravening
its designated use.
The manufacturer particularly regards the following cases as cases of misuse:
- Use for purposes other than for closing doors
- Use of door closers, the size (spring strength) of which does not comply with the
recommendations of the manufacturer in relation to the application concerned
- Use in spite of incorrect or improper installation and/or adjustment.
- Use on doors in which the closing range is blocked by obstructions or where the
closing cycle is inhibited, e.g. sticking of the seals (seal pressure), rubbing on the
floor, non-aligned hinges or pivot mechanisms.
- Non-compliance with the functional prerequisites for operation and use in special
areas of application as mentioned under sections 2 and 4.
Consequences of misuse:
- Functional impairment (door will not close or becomes difficult to open)
- Destruction of the door closer (e.g. bursting of the door closer body with oil
egress)
- Damage to the door construction (e.g. hinge breakage)
- Warning: Misuse can also give rise to danger of injury, particularly from
doors slamming shut without any damping or delayed action
(personal or property hazard)
3. Mortice locks and Door Furniture
It is important to note the following information relating to locks. Non-compliance
with the advice and instructions indicated hereunder will release us from any
liability, including manufacturers liability.
3.1. Product information and designated use
A lock usually performs the task of keeping a door secure and locked in its closed
position. The term latching means keeping a door closed such that it cannot be
opened through the application of pull or push forces while at the same time
offering ease of opening through the operation of, for example, a lever handle.
Locking is understood to mean the retention of the door in its closed position by
means of a locked latch bolt or deadbolt and engages in a corresponding recess in
the frame or in the strike aperture. The latch bolt or deadbolt must be held in its
end position, and the opening of the door without a suitable key must be effectively
inhibited. Cylinder fixing screws must be adapted to the backset length. A mortice
lock is a lock which is inserted and fixed in a preformed or existing recess, and is
used predominantly on swing doors. In order to facilitate correct usage, it is
necessary also to ensure the correct combination with permissible fittings and
locking devices (e.g. keys, cylinders, strike plates) plus accessories (e.g. lever
ABN 14 067 969 466
ACN 067 969 466
46-52 Abbott Road
T: 1800 675 411

F: (03) 8795 0250
www.dorma.com.au
CONTENTS
handles, turns or escutcheons). Installation of locks, levers and accessory

hardware must be performed in accordance with the relevant fixing instructions and
in line - where appropriate - with local and national law requirements or standards.
Essentially, cylinders should be installed with the locking cam in the correct
position and handing if applicable according to our instructions to achieve the
desired function. In all other cases, the manufacturer, dealer, installer or user of
such cylinders must be certain that the lock cylinder selected by him is suitable for
the installation situation and for the envisaged application.
3.2. Misuse
The misuse - i.e. employment of the product for a purpose other than its
designated use - of locks can be said to have occurred if, for example, - foreign
objects and/ or items not compliant with the designated use are inserted into the
lock, or the strike plate, so preventing effective and functionally correct usage, - the
lock or strike plate are modified, or force is applied to them, so changing their
construction, method of operation or function,
- the latch bolt is used contrary to its designated use in order to hold open the door.
- the lock elements are fitted or subsequently treated - e.g. by painting - such that
their function is hindered,
- loads are applied to the lever handle connection that go beyond the designated
use and beyond normal manual force,
- non-appurtenant - e.g. dimensionally deviant or incorrectly adjusted locking
means are used,
- an extension or reduction occurs in the required door gap due to adjustment of
the hinges or lowering of the door,
- a double door is opened via the inactive leaf where such manipulation has not
been approved,
- body parts are placed between the door leaf and frame when doors are closed,
- drilling in the lock case area has occurred after the lock has been installed
- the lever spindle has been forced or hammered into the follower
- carrying a door by the lever handles
- locks and levers not installed in accordance with the installation instructions
- non matching spindle to follower-hub dimensions of lock to lever or vice versa
3.3. Product performance
Where product performance data are not specifically indicated in our catalogues,
brochures, performance descriptions, etc., the requirements for the individual locks
must be agreed upon with us.
The fitness for purpose of locks is dependent, entirely, on frequency of use,
methods of operation, environmental influences and the level of care and
maintenance applied. Notwithstanding correct lubrication, lock cylinders and keys
must be replaced as soon as malfunctions begin to occur on insertion and removal
of the key.

ABN 14 067 969 466
ACN 067 969 466
46-52 Abbott Road
T: 1800 675 411

F: (03) 8795 0250
www.dorma.com.au
CONTENTS
3.4. Product maintenance

Key cylinders must be lubricated at least once a year or depending on frequency
of use - more often - employing a recommended lubricant by the cylinder
manufacturer or agent. The correct operation and fit of, for example, cylinders, door
furniture and other hardware should also be checked and ensured as part of the
maintenance routine and any loose screws tightened. As soon as an indication that
excessive force or vandalism has been applied to the lock or lever furniture replace
these items.
3.5. Duty to inform and instruct
In order to fulfill our duties to inform and instruct we urge specialist dealers,
locksmiths, architects, specifiers, installers, fabricators and users to avail
themselves of the following documents and services, all of which are available on
application:
- catalogues, brochures
- installation, operating and maintenance instructions
- advice from us, our agents and representatives and our field service personnel.
For the selection of locks and their installation, operation and maintenance,
- architects and specifiers are required to request from us all the necessary product
information and to comply with its content,
- specialist dealers are required to observe the requirements indicated in the
product information documents and advisory notes in the price lists, and
particularly to request from us all the necessary instruction sheets/manuals and
pass these on to fabricators, installers and users, - fabricators and installers are
required to observe the requirements indicated in all items of product information,
and in particular to request from us operating and maintenance instructions, and to
pass these on to their clients and users.
4. Panic exit devices with horizontal actuating bar (panic exit devices)
4.1 Designated use
- Experience gathered in relation to the means of effecting an emergency escape
from buildings and general safety considerations make it appear desirable that
swing doors installed at exits in buildings and other localities frequented by the
public such as theaters, concert halls and other types of buildings that hold a large
number of people etc. be equipped with panic exit device that include a horizontal
actuating bar. Panic exit devices with a horizontal actuating bar are primarily used
on swing doors in emergency escape routes in which there is a likelihood of panic
situations arising. Although panic exit devices offer adequate security against
intrusion from the outside, their main task nevertheless lies in ensuring that the
door can be opened at any time by hand or body pressure from the inside via the
panic release device (horizontal bar) without the need for a key or any other aid.
Notwithstanding any additionally installed locking devices, operation of the
actuation bar from the inside must therefore immediately release the door. The
intrusion protection offered by such locks is subordinate to the protection they
afford to personal safety.

ABN 14 067 969 466
ACN 067 969 466
46-52 Abbott Road
T: 1800 675 411

F: (03) 8795 0250
www.dorma.com.au
CONTENTS
4.2 Functional prerequisites

Fault-free function requires that the doors be installed so that they are vertically
plumb and easy to operate, and that the panic lock, including the fittings
incorporated in the locking system, is properly installed.
Consequently, installation and commissioning must be performed by specialist
companies taking into account the manufacturer's instructions relating to the
specific product and in line with prevailing local structural conditions. In particular,
the requirements of local and national regulations governing the use and
installation of panic exit devices.
4.3 Use and function in special areas of application
Special areas of application may give rise to additional functional prerequisites. It is
possible for additional products to be included with the device such as external
locking trims or electric strikes made by DORMA without effecting the internal
escape function when mounted in accordance with the installation instructions.
- Panic locks on swing doors for wet rooms and damp areas and for use in
environments with aggressive, corrosion-promoting air pollutants, and panic locks
exposed to extremely high or low temperatures must be discussed with DORMA
prior to any installation occurring.
4.4 Misuse
The product is deemed to have been misused if it is used in a manner contravening
its designated use.
The manufacturer particularly regards the following cases as cases of misuse:
- Use for purposes other than those described under section 4.1.
- Use of panic exit devices, the specifications of which do not match the area of
application concerned and thus contravene the recommendations of the
manufacturer concerning application of the panic exit device in line with its
designated use.
- Manipulation of the actuation bar, safety override elements or locking rods
- Use in spite of incorrect or improper installation and/or adjustment. With the
exception of the modifications described and allowed in the manual, no further
changes are permissible
- Use of panic exit devices on doors in emergency escape routes or on fire and
smoke check doors which have not been tested and certified according to
AS1905.1.
- Use on doors, the swing range (closing, opening) of which is obstructed or
inhibited by e.g. sticking of the seals (seal pressure), rubbing on the floor, nonaligned hinges.
- Non-compliance with the functional prerequisites cited in sections 4.2 and 4.3 in
relation to normal operations and also use in special areas of application.
Consequences of misuse:
- In a panic situation, the panic exit device may either be inoperable or
require excessive force on the part of the escapees.
- The panic lock will not engage properly so that the fire resistance of the fire
or smoke check doors (barriers) is adversely affected.
- Damage to the door construction
- Warning: Misuse can also be dangerous (accident hazards).
ABN 14 067 969 466
ACN 067 969 466
46-52 Abbott Road
T: 1800 675 411

F: (03) 8795 0250
www.dorma.com.au
CONTENTS
5. General hazards in the area of operation of swing doors

In the case of swing doors, a general injury hazard exists due to the possibility of
fingers or other parts of the body being crushed between the frame/architrave and
door leaf as the door closes. The controlled closing of swing doors as a designated
task of the door closer does not mean that this hazard is eliminated.
6. Product properties
The performance requirements and certificates of conformity for the various
products/systems are available from our DORMA sales office at any time.
7. Product maintenance
Regular inspection and maintenance forms part of the designated use criterion.
The manufacturer considers the following to be necessary:
- Regular inspection of safety-relevant components of the products for correct
fitting, firm seating and excess wear
- Examination of the settings relating to, for example, closing speeds, automatic
closing functions, release of the locked door panic exit device or mortice lock and
lever handle and turn snib functions.
- Greasing of all moving parts
- Checking of the ease of movement of the door
- Inspection of the fixing screws to ensure that they are tight
- Compliance with statutory inspection, monitoring and maintenance procedures
relating to products with special functions (e.g. hold-open devices, hold-open
systems)
- In the case of panic exit devices or vestibule mortice locks it is particularly
important to check that the safety override elements have not jammed.
- In the case of hinges, routine inspection of the working surfaces (hinge knuckles)
should be performed to ensure no deterioration of performance which may affect
door and hardware operation. Any excess lubrication material that may seep from
the bearing surfaces of the hinge should be removed during routine maintenance.
- The scope and frequency of maintenance work shall be aligned to the type and
usage of the swing doors concerned. Under average usage/average duty
conditions, the manufacturer regards an annual maintenance event as the
minimum necessary.
- Notwithstanding the above point, certain products may require by the National
Construction Code or Australian Standards, more regular inspection and/or
maintenance in shorter intervals.
Warning!
A lack of product maintenance may result in potential or already existing functional
impairments not being identified in good time. The consequences and hazards that
can arise are similar to those that may occur in the event of misuse (see sections
2.4, 3.2 and 4.4).

ABN 14 067 969 466
ACN 067 969 466
46-52 Abbott Road
T: 1800 675 411

F: (03) 8795 0250
www.dorma.com.au
CONTENTS
Important!
Defective products and/or components must be replaced as soon as their proper
function can no longer be assured.
Where impairment is suspected, an appropriate specialist company must be
engaged for the purpose of inspection and, where appropriate, refurbishment or
replacement of the products and/or components. Otherwise, the consequences
and hazards that can arise are similar to those that may occur in the event of
misuse (see sections 2.4, 3.2 and 4.4)
In maintenance work, only those cleaning agents may be used which contain no
corrosion-promoting or otherwise deleterious constituents so as to avoid the
danger arises of functional impairment and premature failure of products.
8. Care of finishes
It is recommended that cleaning be done routinely at the minimum once a year and
after completion of the initial installation. Products installed in corrosive
environments such as marine environments, pool areas and kitchen areas to name
a few should be cleaned more regularly. Only those cleaning agents should be
used which contain no corrosion-promoting or damaging constituents. In order to
clean external surfaces a soft clean cloth should be used and no abrasive chemical
cleaners, metal polishes, abrasive scourers or brushes are to be used at any time.
If a liquid cleaner is required only fresh water on its own or at the most a very cool
to warm mild detergent mix can be used, salt or bore water are not be used at any
time.
Some product surfaces are classified as soft finishes such as Polished or Satin
Brass, Florentine Bronze, Black Chrome Plate, Polyester Powder Coated and
painted surfaces. These finishes should not be allowed to have dust or other
contaminants build up on the surfaces as this will result in discoloration and
deterioration of the finish and product. If products are required to be lubricated
avoid excess running on to finished surfaces as this will cause surface deterioration
and further more allow dust particles to adhere. Soft finishes in particular are
subject to deterioration under some environmental conditions and through general
use such as damage by jewellery on hands and fingers, keys, rough handling
during installation and the like. The warranty does not extend to misuse of the
finish or fair wear and tear.
9. Supplementary product information available to the user
There is a range of supplementary information available for the user to ensure that
the requirements of designated use are not contravened.
Such items of information include:
- Catalogues and brochures
- Specification texts, tender/quotation/offer documents, installation drawings,
installation manuals or operating manuals.
- Supplementary product information can also be requested at any time from
DORMA Customer Service. Further information such as Australian Standards and
Building Codes of Australia can be obtained from these organizations.

ABN 14 067 969 466
ACN 067 969 466
46-52 Abbott Road
T: 1800 675 411

F: (03) 8795 0250
www.dorma.com.au
CONTENTS
5. WARRANTY
a. Manufacturers Warranties
CONTENTS
PRODUCT WARRANTY
Kilargo Pty Ltd does its utmost to ensure that all technical information and recommendations are
based on factual research, backed up by a wealth of practical experience. Published data is
given in good faith but we urge users to determine for themselves the suitability of the products
offered, for their own particular application.
For this project, all Kilargo products are guaranteed for two years from the date of sale, against
any defects in materials or workmanship and will be replaced without charge in any such case,
provided our recommendations have been followed and the seals have been fitted in accordance
with the relevant published instructions.
Since the actual fitting of the seals and the conditions of service are beyond our control, no
liability can be accepted beyond the above commitment to replace defective goods.
Kilargo Pty Ltd
CONTENTS
LOCKWOOD GUARANTEED/AUSTRALIAN CONSUMER LAW GUARANTEES/WARRANTY

LOCKWOOD GUARANTEED
By purchasing an ASSA ABLOY Australia Pty. Limited (ASSA ABLOY) Lockwood branded product,
you can be confident that the product has been designed and manufactured to the high standards of
quality and reliability for which Lockwood branded products are renowned.
AUSTRALIAN CONSUMER LAW GUARANTEES

ASSA ABLOY guarantees all of its Lockwood branded products in accordance with the Australian
Consumer Law.
WARRANTY
own option and cost (or authorise the retailer or other reseller from whom you originally purchased the product to):
(I) provide you with the same or (if the same product is no longer available) the closest similar ASSA ABLOY Lockwood
branded product; (ii) repair the product and return it to you; or (iii) refund the price you paid for the product.
This is the only obligation of ASSA ABLOY under the Warranty. ASSA ABLOY will bear its own expenses of doing those things,
and you must bear any other expenses of claiming on the Warranty.
(c) If products are returned to ASSA ABLOY for which, in ASSA ABLOY's reasonable opinion, the Warranty does not apply, the
products will be returned to you freight collect.
4. Exclusions
The Warranty does not apply to: (a) ASSA ABLOY's Lockwood branded products which have been improperly installed or fitted
or for which the ASSA ABLOY's installation and fitting instructions have not been followed; (b) ASSA ABLOY's Lockwood
branded products which have not been properly maintained in accordance with ASSA ABLOY's care and maintenance
recommendations; (ASSA ABLOY's care and maintenance recommendations can be found at www.lockweb.com.au.); (c) ASSA
ABLOY's Lockwood branded products with which batteries other than those specified by ASSA ABLOY have been used; (d)
ASSA ABLOY's Lockwood branded products which have been used in a way or manner not within the scope and limitations of
the technical and other specifications for the products published from time to time by ASSA ABLOY; (e) ASSA ABLOY's
Lockwood branded products which are made using components or specifications provided or requested by someone other
than ASSA ABLOY; (f) fair wear and tear; (g) ASSA ABLOY's Lockwood branded products which have been modified or repaired
without the written authorisation of ASSA ABLOY; (h) ASSA ABLOY's Lockwood branded products with which substitute or
replacement parts or cylinders, other than genuine ASSA ABLOY parts or cylinders, have been used; (I) ASSA ABLOY's
Lockwood branded products which have been subject to accident, abuse, misuse, neglect or damage; (j) defects or
deterioration caused to ASSA ABLOY's Lockwood branded products from being exposed to corrosives, including (without
limitation) vapours, chemicals, abrasive compounds, contamination, pollution, coastal air, salt spray, high humidity; (k) ASSA
ABLOY's Lockwood branded products which are not new when purchased by the original purchaser; (l) anyone other than
original purchasers of new ASSA ABLOY's Lockwood branded products; (m) ASSA ABLOY's Lockwood branded products which
are sold by ASSA ABLOY or a retailer of other reseller of ASSA ABLOY as B class or seconds; (n) ASSA ABLOY's Lockwood
branded products which were not originally sold in Australia by ASSA ABLOY; (o) ASSA ABLOY's Lockwood branded products
which have had any of the brands, marks, patented plates, numbers or other information of ASSA ABLOY on the products
defaced or removed; (p) the removal, refitment or replacement of ASSA ABLOY's Lockwood branded products or associated
charges; or (q) personal injury, property damage, consequential or economic loss, howsoever caused.
5. Australian Consumer Law Requirements
The Australian Consumer Law also requires ASSA ABLOY to state in relation to the Warranty that:
(a) ASSA ABLOY gives the Warranty and the name, address, telephone number and email address of ASSA ABLOY are:
1. Warranty - ASSA ABLOY also warrants that each of its Lockwood branded products will be free of defects in material and
workmanship (including mechanical parts) for a period of 25 years from the date of purchase of the product with which this
document is given, subject to the limitations and exclusions set out below (Warranty).
2. Limitations - Unless other expressly provided for in writing and subject to the exclusions set out in this Warranty:
(a) Electrical and Electronic Components - Electrical and electronic components used in ASSA ABLOY's Lockwood branded
products (excluding batteries) are warranted will be free of defects in material and workmanship for a period of 12 months
from the date of purchase. Batteries are not covered by the Warranty. (b) Keys - Keys used in ASSA ABLOY's Lockwood branded
products are warranted will be free of defects in material and workmanship for a period of 12 months from the date of
purchase. (c) Finish - Everbrass Finish- ASSA ABLOY's Lockwood branded Everbrass finished products are coated both on the
exterior and interior with an anti-tarnish finish, which is warranted to be free of defects in material and workmanship against
corrosion, tarnishing and discolouration for a period of 25 years from the date of purchase of the product. Symmetry Range ASSA ABLOY'S Lockwood branded Symmetry range of products are warranted for their finish, which will be free of defects in
material and workmanship against corrosion, tarnishing and discolouration for a period of 5 years from the date of purchase of
the product. The Warranty does not apply to other finishes of Lockwood branded products nor to cosmetic or appearance
damage. (d) Stainless Steel - Stainless Steel is not stain free but stains less, compared to ordinary carbon steel. Tea staining is a
natural process that may happen to stainless steel products if not cleaned regularly and pursuant to ASSA ABLOY instructions.
The Warranty therefore does not cover tea staining of Stainless Steel products.
3. Claiming on the Warranty
(a) (I) If you purchased a Lockwood branded product from a retailer or other reseller (as opposed to direct from ASSA
ABLOY) and wish to claim on the Warranty to the retailer or other reseller, you must, at your own expense:
(A) return the product securely packed to protect against damage to the product; and
(B) provide details of: (I) the claim on the Warranty; (II) proof of original purchase; and (III) your name,
address, email address (if you have one) and telephone number;
to the retailer or other reseller from whom you originally purchased the product, within the respective warranty
period referred to above.
(ii) (A) If you purchased a Lockwood branded product direct from ASSA ABLOY or otherwise wish to claim on
the Warranty direct to ASSA ABLOY, you must, at your own expense: (I) first contact the ASSA ABLOY
Customer Service Department at the contact details below to: (a) provide ASSA ABLOY with details of
the claim on the Warranty; (b) organise to provide ASSA ABLOY with proof of original purchase; and
(c) obtain a Case Number, (II) securely pack the product to protect against damage to the product;
(III) include a copy of the original proof of purchase in the packaging; (IV) clearly mark the Case Number on
the outside of the packaging;
and then return the product direct to ASSA ABLOY at the address below, within the respective warranty period
referred to above.
(B) Products returned direct to ASSA ABLOY without a Case Number may not be accepted by ASSA ABLOY.
(C) The issue of a Case Number and acceptance of returned products by ASSA ABLOY's staff does not
constitute acceptance by ASSA ABLOY of the claim on the Warranty.
(b) ASSA ABLOY will (or authorise the retailer or other reseller from whom you originally purchased the product to) assess any
claim you may make on the Warranty and if, in ASSA ABLOY's reasonable opinion, the Warranty applies, ASSA ABLOY will at its
ASSA ABLOY Australia Pty. Ltd. , 235 Huntingdale Road, Oakleigh, Victoria 3166, ACN 086 451 907
1300warranty@assaabloy.com, tel: 1300WARRANTY
(b) The Warranty is in addition to other rights and remedies you may have under a law in relation to the goods to which
the Warranty relates. (c) Our goods come with guarantees that cannot be excluded under the Australian Consumer
Law. You are entitled to a replacement or refund for a major failure and for compensation for any other reasonably
foreseeable loss or damage. You are also entitled to have the goods repaired or replaced if the goods fail to be of
acceptable quality and the failure does not amount to a major failure.
ASSA ABLOY Australia Pty Limited, 235 Huntingdale Rd, Oakleigh, VIC 3166 ACN 086 451 907 2012
The global leader in door opening solutions
CONTENTS
Lockwood Guaranteed/Australian Consumer

Law Guarantees/Warranty
LOCKWOOD GUARANTEED
By purchasing an ASSA ABLOY Australia Pty. Limited (ASSA ABLOY) Lockwood branded product, you can be confident
that the product has been designed and manufactured to the high standards of quality and reliability for which Lockwood
branded products are renowned.
AUSTRALIAN CONSUMER LAW GUARANTEES
ASSA ABLOY guarantees all of its Lockwood branded products in accordance with the Australian Consumer Law.
WARRANTY
1. Warranty - ASSA ABLOY also warrants that each of its
Lockwood branded products will be free of defects in
material and workmanship including mechanical parts)
for a period of 25 years from the date of purchase of the
product with which this document is given, subject to the
limitations and exclusions set out below (Warranty).
2. L imitations - Unless other expressly provided for in writing
and subject to the exclusions set out in this Warranty:(a)
Electrical and Electronic Components - Electrical and
electronic components used in ASSA ABLOYs Lockwood
branded products (excluding batteries) are warranted will
be free of defects in material and workmanship for a period
of 12 months from the date of purchase. Batteries are not
covered by the Warranty.
(b) Keys - Keys used in ASSA ABLOYs Lockwood branded
products are warranted will be free of defects in material
and workmanship for a period of 12 months from the date
of purchase.
(c) Finish
Everbrass Finish- ASSA ABLOYs Lockwood branded
Everbrass finished products are coated both on the exterior
and interior with an anti-tarnish finish, which is warranted
to be free of defects in material and workmanship against
corrosion, tarnishing and discolouration for a period
of 25 years from the date of purchase of the product.
Symmetry Range - ASSA ABLOYS Lockwood branded
Symmetry range of products are warranted for their finish,
which will be free of defects in material and workmanship
against corrosion, tarnishing and discolouration for a
period of 5 years from the date of purchase of the product.
The Warranty does not apply to other finishes of Lockwood
branded products nor to cosmetic or appearance damage.
(d) Stainless Steel - Stainless Steel is not stain free

but stains less, compared to ordinary carbon steel. Tea
staining is a natural process that may happen to stainless
steel products if not cleaned regularly and pursuant to
ASSA ABLOY instructions. The Warranty therefore does not
cover tea staining of Stainless Steel products.
3. Claiming on the Warranty
(a)

(i) If you purchased a Lockwood branded product
from a retailer or other reseller (as opposed
to direct from ASSA ABLOY) and wish to
claim on the Warranty to the retailer or other
reseller, you must, at your own expense:
(A) return the product securely packed to
protect against damage to the product; and
(B) provide details of:
(I) the claim on the Warranty;
(II) proof of original purchase; and
(III) your name, address, email address (if you have
one) and telephone number; to the retailer
or other reseller from whom you originally
purchased the product, within the respective
warranty period referred to above.
(ii)
(A) If you purchased a Lockwood branded product
direct from ASSA ABLOY or otherwise wish to claim
on the Warranty direct to ASSA ABLOY, you must,
at your own expense:
I.
First contact the ASSA ABLOY Customer Service
Department at the contact details below to:
lockweb.com.au
1300 LOCK UP (1300 562 587)
CONTENTS
MC00785_ASSA ABLOY Australia Pty Limited ABN 90 086 451 907 2012

(a) provide ASSA ABLOY with details of the claim on the
Warranty;
(b) organise to provide ASSA ABLOY with proof of original
purchase; and
(c) obtain a Case Number
II.
securely pack the product to protect against
damage to the product;
III. include a copy of the original proof of purchase in
the packaging;
IV. clearly mark the Case Number on the outside of
the packaging; and then return the product direct
to ASSA ABLOY at the address below, within the
respective warranty period referred to above.

(B)
Products returned direct to ASSA ABLOY
without a Case Number may not be accepted
by ASSA ABLOY.

(C) The issue of a Case Number and acceptance of
returned products by ASSA ABLOYs staff does
not constitute acceptance by ASSA ABLOY of
the claim on the Warranty.
(b) ASSA ABLOY will (or authorise the retailer or other
reseller from whom you originally purchased the product
to) assess any claim you may make on the Warranty and if,
in ASSA ABLOYs reasonable opinion, the Warranty applies,
ASSA ABLOY will at its own option and cost (or authorise
the retailer or other reseller from whom you originally
purchased WARRANTY the product to):
I. provide you with the same or (if the same product is
no longer available) the closest similar ASSA ABLOY
Lockwood branded product;
II. repair the product and return it to you; or
III.
refund the price you paid for the product.
This is the only obligation of ASSA ABLOY under the
Warranty. ASSA ABLOY will bear its own expenses
of doing those things, and you must bear any other
expenses of claiming on the Warranty.
(c) If products are returned to ASSA ABLOY for which, in
ASSA ABLOYs reasonable opinion, the Warranty does not
apply, the products will be returned to you freight collect.
4. Exclusions
The Warranty does not apply to:
(a) ASSA ABLOYs Lockwood branded products which
have been improperly installed or fitted or for which the
ASSA ABLOYs installation and fitting instructions have not
been followed;
(b) ASSA ABLOYs Lockwood branded products which

have not been properly maintained in accordance with
ASSA ABLOYs care and maintenance recommendations;
(ASSA ABLOYs care and maintenance recommendations
can be found at www.lockweb.com.au.);
(c) ASSA ABLOYs Lockwood branded products with which
batteries other than those specified by ASSA ABLOY have
been used;
(d) ASSA ABLOYs Lockwood branded products which have
been used in a way or manner not within the scope and
limitations of the technical and other specifications for the
products published from time to time by ASSA ABLOY;
(e) ASSA ABLOYs Lockwood branded products which are
made using components or specifications provided or
requested by someone other than ASSA ABLOY;
(f) fair wear and tear;
(g) ASSA ABLOYs Lockwood branded products which
have been modified or repaired without the written
authorisation of ASSA ABLOY;
(h) ASSA ABLOYs Lockwood branded products with which
substitute or replacement parts or cylinders, other than
genuine ASSA ABLOY parts or cylinders, have been used;
(i) ASSA ABLOYs Lockwood branded products which
have been subject to accident, abuse, misuse, neglect or
damage;
(j) defects or deterioration caused to ASSA ABLOYs
Lockwood branded products from being exposed to
corrosives, including (without limitation) vapours,
chemicals, abrasive compounds, contamination, pollution,
coastal air, salt spray, high humidity;
(k) ASSA ABLOYs Lockwood branded products which are
not new when purchased by the original purchaser;
(l) anyone other than original purchasers of new
ASSA ABLOYs Lockwood branded products;
(m) ASSA ABLOYs Lockwood branded products which
are sold by ASSA ABLOY or a retailer of other reseller of
ASSA ABLOY as B class or seconds;
(n) ASSA ABLOYs Lockwood branded products which were
not originally sold in Australia by ASSA ABLOY;
(o) ASSA ABLOYs Lockwood branded products which have
had any of the brands, marks, patented plates, numbers or
other information of ASSA ABLOY on the products defaced
or removed;
lockweb.com.au
1300 LOCK UP (1300 562 587)
CONTENTS

(p) the removal, refitment or replacement of ASSA ABLOYs
Lockwood branded products or associated charges; or
(q) personal injury, property damage, consequential or
economic loss, howsoever caused.
5. Australian Consumer Law Requirements
The Australian Consumer Law also requires ASSA ABLOY to
state in relation to the Warranty that:
(a) ASSA ABLOY gives the Warranty and the name, address,
telephone number and email address of ASSA ABLOY
are:
ASSA ABLOY Australia Pty. Ltd. ,
235 Huntingdale Road, Oakleigh, Victoria 3166.
ACN 086 451 907
1300warranty@assaabloy.com,
tel: 1300WARRANTY
(b) The Warranty is in addition to other rights and remedies
you may have under a law in relation to the goods to which
the Warranty relates.
(c) Our goods come with guarantees that cannot be
excluded under the Australian Consumer Law. You are
entitled to a replacement or refund for a major failure and
for compensation for any other reasonably foreseeable
loss or damage. You are also entitled to have the goods
repaired or replaced if the goods fail to be of acceptable
quality and the failure does not amount to a major failure.
lockweb.com.au
1300 LOCK UP (1300 562 587)
CONTENTS
DORMA Australia Pty Ltd Warranty
1.
Warranty Excluding Automatic Sliding and Swing Door Operators DORMA Australia Pty Ltd (DORMA) warrants that its products and
workmanship will be of merchantable quality and fit for the purpose for
which they have been manufactured and free from defects for a period of
2 years from the date of purchase of the product with which this
document is given, subject to the limitations and exclusions set out
below.
We will further replace free of charge for the first 2 years of the product
warranty, any defective products, subject to the following conditions at
point 3 and beyond:
2.
Warranty Automatic Sliding and Swing Door Operators - DORMA

Australia Pty Ltd (DORMA) warrants that its products and workmanship
will be of merchantable quality and fit for the purpose for which they have
been manufactured and free from defects for a period of 2 years from the
date of purchase of the product with which this document is given.
A 12 month labour warranty from the date of commissioning by DORMA
or our authorised agent also exists except in the case of misuse, abuse
or vandalism. Any labour provided under this warranty will be provided
during standard DORMA business hours.
3.
Limitations - Unless provided in writing and subject to the exclusions set

out in this warranty:
a. Electrical and Electronic Components Electrical and electronic
components used in DORMA products will be of merchantable
quality and fit for the purpose for which they have been
manufactured and free from defects for a period of 2 years.
Installation of electrical products by DORMA Australia Pty Ltd are
covered by a 12 months installation warranty effective from the date
of commissioning by DORMA Australia Pty Ltd. Purchase of
electrical products and or installation with which this document is
given, subject to the limitations and exclusions set out below.
b. Finishes DORMA finishes will be supplied to the purchaser free
from defects and workmanship. Finishes are subject to deterioration
under some environmental conditions and through general use
such as damage by jewellery on hands and fingers, keys, rough
handling during installation and the like. Therefore warranty does
not extend to misuse of the finish or fair wear and tear.
ABN 14 067 969 466
ACN 067 969 466
46-52 Abbott Road
T: 1800 675 411

F: (03) 8795 0250
www.dorma.com.au
CONTENTS
4.
Exclusions The warranty does not apply to:

a. Ordinary wear and tear
b. Any failure or defect of the structures upon which DORMA products
have been applied
c. Damage due to an Act of God or other cause beyond the direct
control of DORMA.
d. Products that have been subject to abuse, vandalism, misuse,
neglect or damage
e. Products that have been modified, built on or repaired
f. DORMA branded products with which substitute or replacement
parts other than genuine DORMA parts have been used.
g. Products that have not been maintained as recommended by
DORMA in accordance with DORMAs Product Information and
Safety Instructions and installation manuals
h. Products were installed other than in accordance with the
installation instructions of DORMA
i. Replacement or repair works undertaken prior to the approval of
DORMA of any warranty claim
j. Failures due to deterioration caused to products from being
exposed to corrosives and corrosive environments such as but not
limited to chemicals, salt air and spray, chlorine vapors and spray or
high humidity.
k. DORMA products that have been used outside of the scope and
limitations of our products technical capabilities and specifications.
l. DORMA branded products which were not originally sold in
Australia by DORMA Australia Pty Ltd
m. DORMA products that were not new when purchased by the
original purchaser.
n. Products which have had any of the brands logos, trademarks,
compliance marks or other information of DORMA defaced or
removed.
o. Failure to install DORMA 2300 sealing compound to protect any
DORMA floor spring exposed to (without limitation) moisture, water
penetration, corrosive chemicals, food deposits, detergents and
other liquids.
p. Defects caused by the installation of DORMA products.
5.
Liability
a. DORMA shall have no liability for any indirect or consequential
losses or expenses suffered by the Customer, however caused.
b. Nothing in these conditions shall be interpreted as excluding or
restricting any legal liability of DORMA for loss or damage resulting
from the negligence of DORMA, its employees, agents, or
subcontractors and shall be read subject to the provisions of the
Competition and Consumer Act 2010 (as amended) ("the Act") and
any other similar state or territorial legislation which cannot be
lawfully excluded. These conditions shall have the maximum effect
permitted by law.
ABN 14 067 969 466
ACN 067 969 466
46-52 Abbott Road
T: 1800 675 411

F: (03) 8795 0250
www.dorma.com.au
CONTENTS
6. Product Specifications
a. DORMA reserves the right to alter product specifications and
introduce improvements at any time.
7. Warranty Claims a. The purchaser acknowledges that the products are not
indestructible, and that some care in installation and maintenance is
necessary.
b. Any claim for warranty must be made at the earliest stage that the
defect becomes obvious to enable prompt action and to avoid
further damage, and must be made no later than 3 months of the
defect becoming obvious.
c. Any claim for warranty must be accompanied by appropriate
documentation which stipulates the date of the installation, the
invoice number, the Customer name and address, and the alleged
defect.
d. DORMAs contact details for warranty claims:
46 52 Abbott Road
Hallam Victoria 3803
Phone 1800 675 411
info.au@dorma.com

ABN 14 067 969 466
ACN 067 969 466
46-52 Abbott Road
T: 1800 675 411

F: (03) 8795 0250
www.dorma.com.au
CONTENTS
Section 5.17
Wa t e r p r o o f i n g
CONTENTS
Gabba Waterproofing Pty Ltd

ABN: 29 164 776 603
4/78 Logan Road

Woolloongabba, QLD 4102
Tel:
0438 303 257
Fax: 1300 760 515

Email: matt@gabbawaterproofing.com.au
Manual and Warranty

Information
for
Waterproofing and Tanking

At
Light and Co Illuminate and

Radiance
321 Montague Rd and 11 Beesley St
West End
Page 1 of 4
CONTENTS

ABN: 29 164 776 603
4/78 Logan Road

Tel:
0438 303 257
Fax: 1300 760 515

Table of Contents
Section 1.....................Contact Information

Section 2Membrane System and Datasheets
Section 3Maintenance Information
Section 4Warranties
Section 5Compliance Certification
Page 2 of 4
CONTENTS

ABN: 29 164 776 603
4/78 Logan Road

Tel:
0438 303 257
Fax: 1300 760 515

Section 1
Contact Details:
Supplier:
GCPAT Pty Ltd (Grace Construction Products)
74 Annie Street Rocklea, QLD 4106
Tel (07) 3255 5755
Applicator:
4/78 Logan Road, Woolloongabba, Qld 4102
Tel (07) 3393 1100
QBCC Licence 126 2495, Class - Waterproofing
Page 3 of 4
CONTENTS

ABN: 29 164 776 603
4/78 Logan Road

Tel:
0438 303 257
Fax: 1300 760 515

Section 2.
Light & Co- Illuminate and Radiance , 321 Montague Rd and 11

Beesley St, West End Waterproofing Membranes:
Location
Planter Boxes, Podium,
Wet Areas
Retaining Walls and Lift Pits
Window reveals and rebates
Balconies
Roof Area
Product
Aquagard M 40R
Newflex WAM Fibre
Aquagard M 40 R
Newflex WAM Fibre
Newflex WAM Fibre
Aquagard M UVR
Page 4 of 4
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS

ABN: 29 164 776 603
4/78 Logan Road

Tel:
0438 303 257
Fax: 1300 760 515

Section 3.
Maintenance Information:
Page 1 of 1
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS

ABN: 29 164 776 603
4/78 Logan Road

Tel:
0438 303 257
Fax: 1300 760 515

Section 4.
Warranties:
Gabba Waterproofing
GCPAT Pty Ltd
Page 1 of 1
CONTENTS
Certificate of
Warranty
Tel
ABN 29 164 776 603 - QBCC 126 2495

4/78 Logan Road
0438 303 257
Attention:
Date:
12/9/16
Company/Project: Pradstruct Light & Co
Pages:
Fax / Email:
Phone:
Inc this page
Certificate of Warranty
Waterproofing
Date Issued:
12/9/16
Builder:
Pradstruct
Project / Site Address:
Light & Co Illuminate and Radiance, 341 Montague Rd and 11

Beesley St, West End
All wet areas, balconys over habitable space, Concrete roofs,

planter areas, retaining walls and podium deck, corridor and
general balcony upturns.
Areas
Treated:
This is to certify that the work performed at the site and areas stated above meet the standards
as required in the relevant building codes and specifically;
Section 3.8.1.2. of the Building Code of Australia, and
Australian Standard AS 3740-2004 Waterproofing of Wet Areas within

Residential Buildings.
All products have been installed as per manufacturer specifications and in a proper tradesman
like manner.
Gabba Waterproofing Pty Ltd warrants that the products are fit for purpose and will honour
defects associated with our workmanship for 10 years from the date of Practical Completion.
Inspected by:
Matt Rollason
Managing Director
Waterproofing Injection Technologies Industrial Floor Finishes Concrete Remediation
CONTENTS
74 Annie Street
Rocklea, Queensland 4106
+617 3275 7800 Office
+617 3275 7801 Facsimile
GCPat.com
EXPOSED WATERPROOF MEMBRANE WARRANTY DETAILS

Date:
6th September 2016
Project Name:
Light + Co Illuminate & Radiance
Project Address:
321 Montague Road & 11 Beesley Street, West End, QLD 4101
Project Owner:
Pradella Developments
Builder:
Pradstruct
Date of Practical Completion:
7th November 2016
Applicator:

Exposed /
Non-Exposed
Area (m)
Warranty
Period
Roofs
Exposed
2980
10 Years
Roofs
Exposed
2980
10 Years
GCP Product Installed
Installed Location on Project
Aquagard M UVR membrane

Aquagard M Nonslip Topcoat
Warranty Serial Number
651188
GCP Applied Technologies. ("GCP") hereby warrantees that its product known as (the "Product") shall be free
from defect in manufacture for a period noted above commencing from the date of completion (also noted
above).
This Warranty is effective only under the following conditions:
1. the Product was installed by a GCP recognised applicator (the Applicator) in strict conformance with
GCPs printed instructions in effect at the time;
2. that a workmanship warranty covering the entire Warranty Period is provided by the Applicator;
3. that the exposed membrane area is initially coated with the appropriate Product system UV colour-stable
topcoat;
4. the Product is maintained and provided with regular upkeep in accordance with the Products
maintenance manual; and
5. the Product topcoat is re-applied after a maximum period of five (5) years, in accordance with the Product
maintenance manual.
The liability of GCP shall be limited in its discretion (provided that such limitation shall not restrict the rights
conferred upon the Purchaser of the obligations imposed upon GCP by statute) to one or more of the
following:
a)
the replacement of the Product or the supply of equivalent Product;
b)
the repair of the Product;
c)
the payment of the cost of replacing the Product or acquiring equivalent Product;
COM Q7.5.878-1
10 May 2016
CONTENTS
d)
the payment of the cost of having the Product repaired
In the event of this Warranty being relied upon by the Purchaser, the Purchaser shall be responsible for the
cost of removal of all plant and equipment and other obstructions in order that GCP may obtain free and
complete access to the Product.
All other warranties and conditions in relation to the Product whether express or implied by statute, common
law or trade custom or usage or otherwise are expressly excluded and further GCP shall not be liable in the
Purchaser, its servants, agents or contractors for any direct, indirect or consequential damages or loss of any
nature whatsoever whether based on negligence or other tort or contract or otherwise.
This Warranty may not be relied upon and GCP shall be exempt from liability in the event of:
a)
the Purchaser failing to notify GCP in writing within 30 days of discovery of any alleged defect in
manufacture of the Product;
b)
the Product not being applied in accordance with the written installation instructions specified by GCP;
c)
damage being caused to the Product membrane consequent upon overlays being placed on the
Product;
d)
the Purchaser altering the design and specifications of which the Product was to be used at the time of
entering into the contract for the purchase of the Product;
e)
damage or repairs to the Product occasioned through third parties not authorized by GCP;
f)
damage caused to the Product by act of God, war, earthquake, cyclone, fire, discoloration, undue wear
and tear or other such risk.
SIGNED for and on behalf of

GCP Applied Technologies
Eric Austraw
Area General Manager Australia & New Zealand
2
COM Q7.5.878-1
10 May 2016
CONTENTS
74 Annie Street
Rocklea, Queensland 4106
+617 3275 7800 Office
+617 3275 7801 Facsimile
GCPat.com
NON EXPOSED WATERPROOF MEMBRANE WARRANTY DETAILS

Date:
6th September 2016
Project Name:
Light + Co Illuminate & Radiance
Project Address:
321 Montague Road & 11 Beesley Street, West End, QLD 4101
Project Owner:
Pradella Developments
Builder:
Pradstruct
Date of Practical Completion:
7th November 2016
Applicator:

Exposed /
Non-Exposed
Installed Location on Project
Newflex Wam Fibre
Wet Areas
Non-Exposed
4095
10 Years
Newflex Wam Fibre
Balconies
Non-Exposed
1242
10 Years
Newflex Wam Fibre
Window sills, reveals and heads
Non-Exposed
6752
10 Years
Aquagard M40R
Retaining walls and lift pits
Non-Exposed
1336
10 Years
Aquagard M40R
Podiums and Planters
Non-Exposed
3637
10 Years
Warranty Serial Number
Area (m)
Warranty
Period
GCP Product Installed
651189
GCP Applied Technologies. ("GCP") hereby guarantees that its product known as ("Product") shall be free
from defect in manufacture for a period noted above commencing from the date of completion (also noted
above).
The liability of GCP shall be limited in its discretion (provided that such limitation shall not restrict the rights
conferred upon the Purchaser of the obligations imposed upon GCP by statute) to one or more of the
following:
a) the replacement of the Product or the supply of equivalent Product;
b) the repair of the Product;
c) the payment of the cost of replacing the Product or acquiring equivalent Product;
d) the payment of the cost of having the Product repaired
In the event of this Guarantee being relied upon by the Purchaser, the Purchaser shall be responsible for the
cost of removal of all plant and equipment and other obstructions in order that GCP may obtain free and
complete access to the Product.
COM Q7.5.879-0
18 March 2016
CONTENTS
All other warranties and conditions in relation to the Product whether express or implied by statute, common
law or trade custom or usage or otherwise are expressly excluded and further GCP shall not be liable in the
Purchaser, its servants, agents or contractors for any direct, indirect or consequential damages or loss of any
nature whatsoever whether based on negligence or other tort or contract or otherwise.
This Guarantee may not be relied upon and GCP shall be exempt from liability in the event of:
a) the Purchaser failing to notify GCP in writing within 30 days of discovery of any alleged defect in
manufacture of the Product;
b) the Product not being applied in accordance with the written installation instructions specified by GCP;
c) damage being caused to the Product membrane consequent upon overlays being placed on the Product;
d) the Purchaser altering the design and specifications of which the Product was to be used at the time of
entering into the contract for the purchase of the Product;
e) damage or repairs to the Product occasioned through third parties not authorized by GCP;
f)
damage caused to the Product by act of God, war, earthquake, cyclone, fire or other such risk
SIGNED for and on behalf of

Eric Austraw
Area General Manager Australia & New Zealand
2
COM Q7.5.879-0
18 March 2016
CONTENTS

ABN: 29 164 776 603
4/78 Logan Road

Tel:
0438 303 257
Fax: 1300 760 515

Section 5.
Compliance Certification:
Page 1 of 1
CONTENTS
Version 4 March 2013
Form 16Inspection Certificate/Aspect Certificate/QBCC Licensee Aspect

Certificate
NOTE
This form is to be used for the purposes of section 10(c) and 239 of the Building Act 1975 and/or
sections 32, 35B, 43, 44 and 47 of the Building Regulation 2006.
1. Indicate the type of certificate
Inspection Certificate for
The stages of assessable building work

are listed in section 24 of the Building
Regulation 2006 or as conditioned by the
building certifier.
An aspect of building work is part of a
stage (e.g. waterproofing).
Stage of building work (for single detached class 1a or class 10 building or structure)
(indicate the stage)
________________________________________
Aspect of building work

(indicate the aspect)
______Waterproofing_____________
QBCC Licensee Aspect Certificate

Scope of the work
Scope of the work covered by the licence class under the Queensland Building and Construction
Commission Regulation 2003 for the aspect being certified, e.g. scope of work for a waterproofing licence
is installing waterproofing materials or systems for preventing moisture penetration. An aspect being
certified may include wet area sealing to showers.
Instillation of Waterproofing Materials to prevent moisture penetration
2. Property description
The description must identify all land the
subject of the application.
The lot and plan details (e.g. SP/RP) are
shown on title documents or a rates notice.
If the plan is not registered by title, provide
previous lot and plan details.
Street address (include no., street, suburb/locality and postcode)

Light & Co ( Building A and B), 321 Montague Road
West End QLD
Postcode 4101
Lot and plan details (attach list if necessary)

Lot 2 on RP141824
In which local government area is the land situated?
3. Building/structure description
Building/structure description
Class of building/structure
Building A
Calss 2, 6 and 7a
Building B
Class 2 and 7a
LOCAL GOVERNMENT USE ONLY

DATE RECEIVED
REFERENCE NUMBER/S
CONTENTS
4. Description of component/s certified

Clearly describe the extent of work covered by
this certificate, e.g. all structural aspects of the
steel roof beams.
5. Basis of certification
Detail the basis for giving the certificate and the
extent to which tests, specifications, rules,
standards, codes of practice and other
publications, were relied upon.
6. Reference documentation
Clearly identify any relevant documentation,
e.g. numbered structural engineering plans.
Waterproofing wet areas, balconies, windows, retaining walls, lift pit, podium, planters and roof
All waterproofing to AS3740 , AS4654.2 and Building Code of Australia 2013 part F1.7
As per Architectural drawing Set
7. Building certifier reference number

and development approval number
Building certifier reference number

14-203752
8. Building certifier, competent person

or QBCC licensee details
Name (in full)

Matthew Rollason
A competent person must be assessed as

competent before carrying out the inspection.
The builder for the work cannot give a stage
certificate of inspection.
A competent person is assessed by the
building certifier for the work as competent to
practice in an aspect of the building and
specification design, because of the individuals
skill, experience and qualifications. The
competent person must be registered or
licensed under a law applying in the State to
practice the aspect.
If no relevant law requires the individual to be
licensed or registered, the certifier must assess
the individual as having appropriate
experience, qualifications or skills to be able to
give the help.
If the chief executive issues any guidelines for
assessing a competent person, the building
certifier must use the guidelines when
assessing the person
9. Signature of building certifier,

competent person or QBCC licensee
Note: A building certifier must sign this form for
temporary swimming pool fencing under
section 4 of Schedule 1 of QDC MP 3.4.
Development approval number
Company name if applicable

Phone no. business hours
0438 303 257
Contact person
Matt Rollason
Mobile no.
0438 303 257
Fax no.
Na
Email address
matt@gabbawaterproofing.com.au
Postal address
Unit 4 / 78 Logan Road Woolloongabba
Postcode 4102
Licence class
Waterproofing
Licence number
126 2495
Date approval to inspect received from building certifier
Signature
Date
8/9/16
CONTENTS
Section 5.18
Whitegoods
CONTENTS
A D i s hw as h e r
CONTENTS
( i ) Ar i s t o n L F T M 1 6 A
( R a d i a n c e 2 0 0 0 1 2 0 11 2 )
CONTENTS
LFTM 16 A AUS
Integrated Dishwasher
Features and Benefits:
6 Wash Programs:
Delicates, Eco, Intensive, Normal, Rapid 35, Soak
14 Place Settings
More capacity means less wash loads saving water and energy
Overflow Detection device
New Aquastop to ensure you never have a problem with water overflowing
Concealed Heating Element
Less chance of damaging the element or burning plastics if accidently dropped into
the base of the dishwasher.
Technical Specifications:
6
No: of Programs
Water Supply
Hot or Cold
Place settings
14
LED interface
Display
Yes
Graphite
Color
Fold down
Removable Top
No Top
Noise level
51db
Energy Star
2.5
Water Star Rating

Dimensions (W) x (H) x (D)
4.5
59.5 x 82 x 57
Yes, lower rack
Distributed by Arisit Pty Ltd

40-44 Mark Anthony Drive, Dandenong South VIC 3175
Ph: 1300 762 219
Fax: 03 9768 0838
1A Howe Street, Newton, Auckland NZ 1145
Ph:(09) 306 1020
Fax: (09) 302 0077
Website: www.arisit.com
CONTENTS
Operating instructions
DISHWASHER
EN
English,1
Contents
EN
Precautions and advice, 2-3
General safety
Disposal
Saving energy and respecting the environment
Installation, 4-5
Positioning and levelling

Connecting the water and electricity supplies
Advice regarding the first wash cycle
Technical data
Description of the appliance, 6

Overall view
Control panel
Loading the racks, 7-8
LFT M16
Lower rack
Cutlery basket
Upper rack
Adjusting upper rack
Start-up and use, 9
Starting the dishwasher

Measuring out the detergent
Wash cycles, 10
Table of wash cycles
Rinse aid and refined salt, 11

Measuring out the rinse aid
Measuring out the refined salt
Care and maintenance, 12
Shutting off the water and electricity supplies

Cleaning the dishwasher
Preventing unpleasant odours
Cleaning the sprayer arms
Cleaning the water inlet filter
Cleaning the filters
Leaving the machine unused for extended periods
Troubleshooting, 13
Assistance, 14
1
CONTENTS
Precautions and advice

EN
This appliance was designed and

manufactured in compliance with international
safety standards The following information has
been provided for safety reasons and should
therefore be read carefully.
Keep this instruction manual in a safe place for
future reference. If the appliance is sold, given
away or moved, please ensure the manual is kept
with the machine.
Please read these instructions carefully: they
contain important information on installation, use
and safety.
This appliance is designed for domestic use or
similar applications, for example:
- staff kitchen areas in shops, offices and other
work environments;
- farmhouses;
- use by guests in hotels, motels and other
residential settings;
- bed & breakfasts.
General safety
The appliance should not be operated by

people (including children) with reduced
physical, sensory or mental capacities, or by
inexperienced people who are not familiar with
the product, unless supervision or instructions
on how to use it are provided by someone who
assumes responsibility for their safety.
An adult must supervise children at all times to
prevent them from playing with the appliance.
The appliance was designed for domestic
use inside the home and is not intended for
commercial or industrial use.
The appliance must be used by adults only to
wash domestic crockery in accordance with
the instructions in this manual.
The appliance must not be installed outdoors,
even in covered areas. It is extremely dangerous
to leave the machine exposed to rain and
storms.
Do not touch the appliance when barefoot.
When unplugging the appliance always pull the
plug from the mains socket. Do not pull on the
cable.
The water supply tap must be shut off and the
plug should be removed from the electrical
socket before cleaning or maintaining the
appliance.
If the appliance breaks down, do not under any
circumstances touch the internal parts in an
attempt to perform the repair work yourself.
Do not lean or sit on the open door of the
appliance: this may cause the appliance to
overturn.
The door should not be left open as it may create
a dangerous obstacle.
Keep detergent and rinse aid out of reach of
children.
The packaging material should not be used as
a toy for children.
Disposal
Disposal of packaging material: observe local

legislation so that the packaging may be
reused.
The European Directive 2012/19/EU relating
to Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment
(WEEE) states that household appliances
should not be disposed of using the normal
solid urban waste cycle. Exhausted appliances
should be collected separately in order to
optimise the re-using and recycling rate of the
materials inside the machine, while preventing
potential damage to the environment and public
health. The crossed-out dustbin symbol is
marked on all products to remind the owners
of their obligations regarding separated waste
collection.
For further information relating to the correct
disposal of household appliances, owners may
contact the relevant public authority or the local
appliance dealer.
Saving energy and respecting the

environment
Saving water and energy
Only begin a wash cycle when the dishwasher
is full. While waiting for the dishwasher to be
filled, prevent unpleasant odours using the Soak
cycle (see Wash cycles).
Select a wash cycle that is suited to the type
of crockery and to the soil level of the crockery
using the Table of wash cycles:
- for dishes with a normal soil level use the Eco
wash cycle, which ensures low energy/water
consumption levels.
- If the load is smaller than usual activate the
Half Load option* (see Start-up and use).
If your electricity supply contract gives details of
electricity-saving time bands, run wash cycles
when electricity prices are lower. The Delayed
Start button * (see Start-up and use) helps you
organise the wash cycles accordingly.
* Only available in selected models.
CONTENTS
Phosphate-free and chlorine-free detergents

containing enzymes
We strongly recommend that you use detergents
that do not contain phosphates or chlorine, as
these products are harmful to the environment.
Enzymes provide a particularly effective action
at temperatures around 50C. As a result
detergents containing enzymes can be used in
conjunction with low-temperature wash cycles
in order to achieve the same results as a normal
65C wash cycle.
To avoid wasting detergent, use the product
in appropriate quantities based on the
manufacturers recommendations, the hardness
of the water, the soil level and the quantity
of crockery to be washed. Even if they are
biodegradable, detergents contain substances
which may alter the balance of nature.
EN
3
CONTENTS
Installation
EN
If the appliance must be moved at any time, keep it in an

upright position; if absolutely necessary, it may be tilted onto its
back.

1. Remove the appliance from all packaging and check that
it has not been damaged during transportation. If it has been
damaged, contact the retailer and do not proceed any further
with the installation process.
The hose should not be bent or compressed.
Connecting the water outlet hose

Connect the outlet hose (without bending it) to a drain duct with
a minimum diameter of 4 cm.
The outlet hose must be at a height ranging from 40 to 80 cm
from the floor / surface where the dishwasher rests (A).
2. Arrange the dishwasher so that its sides or back panel are in

contact with the adjacent cabinets or the wall. This appliance
can also be recessed under a single worktop* (see the Assembly
Instruction sheet.)
3. Position the dishwasher on a level sturdy floor. If the floor
is uneven, the front feet of the appliance should be adjusted
until it reaches a horizontal position. If the appliance is levelled
correctly, it will be more stable and much less likely to move or
cause vibrations and noise while it is operating.
4*. To adjust the height of the rear foot, turn the red hexagonal
bushing on the lower central part at the front of the dishwasher
using a hexagonal spanner with an opening of 8 mm. Turn the
spanner in a clockwise direction to increase the height and in an
anticlockwise direction to decrease it (see Building-in Instruction
sheet attached to the documentation.)
Connecting the water and electricity supplies

Connection to the water and electricity supplies should only
be performed by a qualified technician.
The dishwasher should not stand on the water hoses or
electricity supply cable.
The appliance must be connected to the water supply
network using new hoses.
Never use old or second hand hose sets. Do not reuse hose
sets from any previously installed dishwasher.
The water inlet and outlet hoses and the electricity supply cable
may be positioned towards the right or the left in order to achieve
the best possible installation.
Connecting the water inlet hose

To a suitable cold water connection point: before attaching
the hose, run the water until it is perfectly clear so that any
impurities that may be present in the water do not clog the
appliance; after performing this operation, screw the inlet
hose tightly onto a tap with a gas threaded connection.
To a suitable hot water connection point: your dishwasher
may be supplied with hot water from the mains supply (if you
have a central heating system with radiators) provided that it
does not exceed a temperature of 60C.
Screw the hose to the tap as described for connection to a
cold water supply.
If the inlet hose is not long enough, contact a specialist store
or an authorised technician (see Assistance.)
The water pressure must be within the values indicated in
the Technical Data table (see adjacent information.)
Before connecting the water outlet hose to the sink drain, remove
the plastic plug (B).
Anti-flooding protection
To ensure floods do not occur, the dishwasher:
- is provided with a special system which blocks the water supply
in the event of anomalies or leaks from inside the appliance.
Some models are also equipped with the supplementary safety
device New Acqua Stop*, which guarantees anti-flooding
protection even in the event of a supply hose rupture.
WARNING: HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE!

Under no circumstances should the water inlet hose be cut, as
it contains live electrical parts.
Electrical connection
Before inserting the plug into the electrical socket, make sure
that:
The socket is earthed and complies with current regulations.
the socket can withstand the maximum load of the appliance,
which is indicated on the data plate located on the inside of
the door
(see Description of the appliance);
The power supply voltage falls within the values indicated on
the data plate on the inside of the door.
The socket is compatible with the plug of the appliance. If
this is not the case, ask an authorised technician to replace
the plug (see Assistance); do not use extension cables or
multiple sockets.
Once the appliance has been installed, the power supply
cable and the electrical socket should be easily accessible.
The cable should not be bent or compressed.
If the power supply cable is damaged, it must be replaced
by the manufacturer or its Technical Assistance Service in order
to prevent all potential hazards (see Assistance.)
CONTENTS
Anti-condensation strip*
After installing the dishwasher, open the door and stick the
adhesive transparent strip under the wooden shelf in order
to protect it from any condensation which may form.
After the appliance has been installed, immediately before

running the first wash cycle, completely fill the salt dispenser
with water and add only then approximately 1 kg of salt
(see chapter entitled Rinse aid and refined salt). The water
may overflow: this is normal and is not a cause for concern.
Select the water hardness value (see chapter entitled Rinse
aid and refined salt). - After the salt has been poured into
the machine, the LOW SALT indicator light* switches off.
If the salt container is not filled, the water softener and
the heating element may be damaged as a result.
The machine has a buzzer/set of tones (depending on the

dishwasher model) to inform the user that a command has
EN
been implemented: power on, cycle end etc.

The symbols/indicator lights/LEDs on the control panel/
display may vary in colour and may have a flashing or fixed
light (depending on the dishwasher model).
Technical data
Dimensions
width 59.5 cm
height 82 cm
depth 57 cm
Capacity
14 standard place-settings
Water supply pressure
0,05 1MPa (0.5 10 bar)

7,25 145 psi
Power supply voltage
See appliance data plate
Total absorbed power
Fuse

This dishwasher conforms
to the following European
Community Directives:
-2006/95/EC (Low Voltage)
-2004/108/EC (Electromagnetic
Compatibility)
-2009/125/EC (Comm. Reg.
1016/2010) (Ecodesign)
-97/17/EC (Labelling)
-2012/19/EC (WEEE)

5
CONTENTS
Description of the
appliance
EN
Overall view
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Upper rack
Upper sprayer arm
Tip-up dispensers
Rack height adjuster
Lower rack
Lower sprayer arm
Cutlery basket
Washing filter
Salt dispenser
Detergent and rinse-aid dispensers
Data plate
Control panel****
Control panel
Select wash cycle button
Salt indicator light
ON-OFF/Reset button
and indicator light
Wash cycle indicator light
Rinse aid indicator light
***Only in completely built-in models.

The number and type of wash cycles and options may vary depending on the dishwasher model.
CONTENTS
Loading the racks

Tips
Before loading the racks, remove all food residues from the
crockery and empty liquids from glasses and containers. No
preventive rinsing is needed under running water.
Arrange the crockery so that it is held in place firmly and does
not tip over; and arrange the containers with the openings facing
downwards and the concave/convex parts placed obliquely,
thus allowing the water to reach every surface and flow freely.
Make sure that the lids, handles, trays and frying pans do not
prevent the sprayer arms from rotating. Place any small items
in the cutlery basket.
Since plastic dishes and non-stick frying pans usually retain more
water drops, their drying will be not so good as that of ceramic
or stainless-steel dishes.
Lightweight items such as plastic containers should be placed
in the upper rack and arranged so that they cannot move.
After loading the appliance, make sure that the sprayer arms
can rotate freely.
Several dishwasher models are fitted with tip-up sectors*.

They can be used in a vertical position when arranging dishes
or in a horizontal position (lower) to load pans and salad bowls
easily.
EN
Cutlery basket
It is equipped with top grilles for improved cutlery arrangement.
The cutlery basket must only be positioned at the front of

the lower rack.
Lower rack
The lower rack can hold pans, lids, dishes, salad bowls, cutlery
etc. Large plates and lids should ideally be placed at the sides.
Knives and other utensils with sharp edges must be placed

in the cutlery basket with the points facing downwards or they
must be positioned horizontally in the tip-up compartments on
the upper rack
Upper rack
Load this rack with delicate and lightweight crockery such as
glasses, cups, saucers and shallow salad bowls.
Very soiled dishes and pans should be placed in the lower rack
because in this sector the water sprays are stronger and allow
a higher washing performance.
*Only available in selected models with different numbers and

positions.
7
CONTENTS
EN
Adjustable position tip-up compartments
Unsuitable crockery
The tip-up compartments can be positioned at different heights, to

optimise the arrangement of crockery throughout the rack. Wine
glasses can be placed safely in the tip-up compartments, by
inserting the stem of each glass into the corresponding slots.
Wooden crockery and cutlery.

Delicate decorated glasses, artistic handicraft and antique
crockery. Their decorations are not resistant.
Parts in synthetic material which do not withstand high
temperatures.
Copper and tin crockery.
Crockery soiled with ash, wax, lubricating grease or ink.
The colours of glass decorations and aluminium/silver pieces can
change and fade during the washing process. Some types of
glass (e.g. crystal objects) can become opaque after a number
of wash cycles too.
Damage to glass and crockery

Caused by:
Adjusting the height of the upper rack
In order to make it easier to arrange the crockery, the upper rack
may be moved to a higher or lower level.
The height of the upper rack should ideally be adjusted
WHEN THE RACK IS EMPTY.
NEVER raise or lower the rack on one side only.
Open the left and right guide rail
stops and pull out the rack; position
it higher or lower as required, slide
it along the guide rails until the front
wheels are in place and close the
stops (see figure).
Type of glass and glass production process.

Chemical composition of detergent.
Water temperature of rinse cycle.
Tips:
Only use glasses and porcelain guaranteed by the
manufacturer as dishwasher safe.
Use a delicate detergent suitable for crockery.
Collect glasses and cutlery from the dishwasher as soon as
the wash cycle is over.
If the rack is fitted with Dual Space

handles* (see figure), pull out the
upper rack until it reaches its stop
point, grip the handles at the sides
of the rack and move it upwards or
downwards, then slowly let it fall
back into place.

8
CONTENTS
Start-up and use

1. Turn the water tap on.

2. Open the door and press the ON/OFF button.
3. Measure out the detergent. (see adjacent information).
4. Load the racks (see Loading the racks).
5. Select the wash cycle in accordance with the type of crockery
and its soil level (see Table of wash cycles) by pressing the P
button.
6. Start the wash cycle by shutting the door.
7. The end of the wash cycle is indicated by beeps and by the
flashing of the indicator light of the selected wash cycle. Open
the door, switch off the appliance by pressing the ON/OFF
button, shut off the water tap and unplug the appliance from
the electricity socket.
8. Wait a few minutes before removing the crockery in order to
avoid burns. Unload the racks, beginning with the lower level.
- The machine will switch off automatically during

long periods of inactivity in order to minimise
electricity consumption.
If the crockery is only lightly soiled or if it has been rinsed
with water before being placed in the dishwasher, reduce the
amount of detergent used accordingly.
Changing a wash cycle in progress

If a mistake was made in the wash cycle selection process, it
is possible to change the cycle provided that it has only just
begun: open the door, taking care to avoid the escaping steam,
and press and hold the ON/OFF button; the machine will switch
off. Switch the machine back on using the ON/OFF button and
select the new wash cycle and any options desired; start the
cycle by closing the door.
A good wash result also depends on the correct amount of

detergent being used. Exceeding the stated amount does not
result in a more effective wash and increases environmental
pollution.
Based on how soiled the items are, the amount can be
adjusted to individual cases using powder or liquid
detergent.
In the case of normally soiled items, use approximately
either 35 gr (powder detergent) or 35 ml (liquid detergent).
If tablets are used, one tablet will be enough.
with water before being placed in the dishwasher, reduce
the amount of detergent used accordingly.
For good washing results also follow the instructions shown
on the detergent box.
For further questions please ask the detergent producers'
Advice Offices.
Compartment A: Washing detergent

Compartment B: Pre-wash detergent
D
Adding extra crockery

Without switching off the machine, open the door, taking care
to avoid the escaping steam, and place the crockery inside the
dishwasher. Close the door: the cycle starts from the point at
which it was interrupted.
Accidental interruptions
If the door is opened during the wash cycle or there is a power
cut, the cycle stops. It starts again from the point at which it
was interrupted once the door has been shut or the electricity
supply restored.
EN
Dishwasher detergents are strongly alkaline. They can be

extremely dangerous if swallowed. Avoid contact with the
skin and eyes and keep children away from the dishwasher
when the door is open. Check that the detergent receptacle
is empty after completion of the wash cycle.
1. Open cover C by pressing

button D.
2. Pour in the detergent after
consulting the Table of wash
cycles:
For powder detergent use
compartments A and B.
For detergent in tablet form:
when the cycle requires 1 tablet,
place it in compartment A and
close the cover; when it requires
2, place the second tablet at the
bottom of the appliance.

3. Remove detergent residues from the edges of the dispenser
and close the cover until it clicks.
Close the lid of the detergent dispenser by pulling it up until the
closing device is secured in place.
The detergent dispenser automatically opens up at the right time
according to the wash cycle.
If all-in-one detergents are used, we recommend using the TABS
option, because it adjusts the cycle so that the best washing
and drying results are always achieved.
Only use detergent which has been specifically designed
for dishwashers.
DO NOT USE washing-up liquid.
Using excessive detergent may result in foam residue
remaining in the machine after the cycle has ended.
The use of tablets is only recommended for models which
offer the MULTI-FUNCTIONAL TABLETS option.
To achieve the best results from each washing and drying

cycle, powder detergent, liquid rinse aid and salt should
be used.
9
CONTENTS
Wash cycles
EN
Instructions on wash-cycle selection and

detergent dosage
Heavily soiled dishes and pans (not to be used for
delicate items).
35 gr/ml 1 Tab
Wash cycle
Wash cycles
which include
drying
Options
Approximate
duration of
wash cycles
Yes
No
2:25
Yes
No
1:50
No
No
0:08
Yes
No
2:55
No
No
0:35
Yes
No
1:30
Intensive
For dirty pans and dishes.

29 gr/ml + 6 gr/ml** 1 Tab
Daily Wash
Pre-wash while awaiting completion of the load with
the dishes from the next meal.
No detergent
Environmentally-friendly wash cycle with low energy
consumption levels. Normal standard cycle for dirty
pans and dishes.
29 gr/ml + 6 gr/ml** 1 Tab
Economical and fast wash to be used for lightly soiled
dishes - run immediately after use (2 dishes + 2
glasses + 4 pieces of cutlery + 1 saucepan + 1 small
frying pan).
25 gr/ml 1 Tab
Economical and fast wash for delicate items which are
sensitive to high temperatures - run immediately after
use (glassware in the upper rack + fragile dishes in the
lower rack).
35 gr/ml 1 Tab
Soak
Eco*
Rapid
Delicates
** Quantity of pre-washing detergent.
Notes:
Optimum performance levels when using the Rapid cycle can be achieved by respecting the specified number of place settings.
* The Eco wash cycle complies with regulation AS/NZS 2007. Although it has a longer duration than other wash cycles, it uses less
energy and is less harmful to the environment.
Note for Test Laboratories: for information on comparative EN testing conditions, please send an email to the following address:
ASSISTENZA_EN_LVS@indesitcompany.com

10
CONTENTS
Rinse aid and refined salt

Only use products which have been specifically designed
for dishwashers.
Do not use table/industrial salt or washing-up liquid.
Follow the instructions given on the packaging.
If using a multi-functional product it is not necessary to add
any rinse aid. However, we recommend that you add salt,
especially if you live in an area where the water is hard or
very hard. (Follow the instructions given on the packaging).
If you do not add salt or rinse aid, the LOW SALT* and
LOW RINSE AID indicator lights will stay lit.
Rinse aid makes it easier for the crockery to dry, as water runs
off surfaces more readily and therefore does not leave streaks
or marks.
The rinse aid dispenser should be filled:
When the LOW RINSE AID* indicator light on the control
panel is illuminated;
1. Open the dispenser by turning
the lid (G) in an anticlockwise
direction.
2. Pour in the rinse aid, making
sure it does not overflow from the
F
dispenser. If this happens, clean
the spill immediately with a dry
G
cloth.
3. Screw the lid back on.
NEVER pour the rinse aid directly into the appliance tub.
Adjusting the amount of rinse aid

If you are not completely satisfied with the drying results, you
may adjust the quantity of rinse aid used. Use a screwdriver to
turn the dosage adjuster (F) to one of the 6 pre-set positions
(the default position is set to 4):
If there are streaks on the crockery, set the adjustment device
to a lower number (1-3).
If drops of water remain on the crockery or if there are limescale
marks present after the cycle has finished, set the adjuster to
a higher number (4-6).
Setting the water hardness

Every dishwasher is equipped with a water softener which, by
using refined salt designed especially for this type of appliance,
supplies water without limescale which is then used to wash
the crockery.
This dishwasher offers a setting which helps to reduce pollution
and optimises washing performance in accordance with the
water hardness level in your area. This information can be obtained from the organisation which supplies your household with
water.- Open the door and switch on the machine by pressing
the ON/OFF button.
- Press the P button and hold for approximately 5 seconds; two
short beeps will sound and the indicator light corresponding to
the set degree of hardness will flash slowly on the control panel
(the water softening system is set to number 1).
- Press the P button repeatedly until the desired hardness level
has been reached (1-2-3-4-5* see Water hardness table). E.g.
hardness 1 (indicator light 1 flashing)
hardness 2 (indicator light 1 illuminated, indicator light 2

flashing).
hardness 3 (indicator lights 1 and 2 illuminated, indicator light
3 flashing and so on).
To exit the function, wait a few seconds or press one of the option
buttons*, or switch off the machine using the ON/OFF button.
EN
Even if using multi-functional tablets, the salt dispenser should

still be filled.
Water Hardness Table
level
1
2
3
4
5*
dH
0-6
6 - 11
12 - 17
17 - 34
34 - 50
fH
0 - 10
11 - 20
21 - 30
31 - 60
61 - 90
mmol/l
0-1
1,1 - 2
2,1 - 3
3,1 - 6
6,1 - 9
Average salt dispenser

capacity duration**
months
7 months
5 months
3 months
2 months
2/3 weeks
For values between 0f and 10f, we do not recommend the use of salt.
* a setting of 5 may increase cycle duration.
** 1 wash cycle per day.
(dH = hardness measured in German degrees - f = hardness

measured in French degrees mmol/l = millimoles per litre)
In order to obtain the best possible results from a wash cycle,

make sure that the salt dispenser is never empty.
Refined salt removes limescale from the water, thus avoiding
the formation of deposits on crockery.
The salt dispenser is located in the lower part of the dishwasher
(see Description) and should be filled:
When the green float* cannot be seen by simply looking at
the cap of the salt dispenser;
When the LOW RINSE AID indicator light on the control panel
is illuminated *;
1. Remove the lower rack and unscrew
the cap (anticlockwise).
2. The first time you do this: fill the water
tank right up to its edge.
3. Position the funnel* (see figure) and
fill the salt dispenser up to the edge
(approximately 1 kg). It is normal for a
little water to leak out.
4. Remove the funnel* and wipe any salt residues away from
the opening; rinse the cap under running water and then screw
it on, the head facing downwards so as to let the water flow out
of the four slots (star-shaped arrangement) in the lower part of
the cap (cap with green float*).
It is advisable to perform this procedure every time you add
salt to the dispenser.
Make sure the cap is screwed on tightly so that no detergent can
get into the container during the wash cycle (this could damage
the water softener beyond repair).
When necessary, measure out the salt before a wash cycle
so that any saline solution which has leaked out of the salt
dispenser is removed.

11
CONTENTS
Care and maintenance

EN
Shutting off the water and electricity

supplies
Turn off the water tap after every wash cycle to avoid leaks.
Always unplug the appliance when cleaning it and when
performing maintenance work.
The external surfaces of the machine and the control panel

can be cleaned using a non-abrasive cloth which has been
dampened with water. Do not use solvents or abrasive
products.
Any marks on the inside of the appliance may be removed
using a cloth dampened with water and a little vinegar.
Always keep the door of the appliance ajar in order to avoid

moisture from forming and being trapped inside the machine.
Clean the seals around the door and detergent dispensers
regularly using a damp sponge. This will avoid food becoming
trapped in the seals, which is the main cause behind the
formation of unpleasant odours.
The filter assembly consists of three filters which remove food

residues from the washing water and then recirculate the water.
They should be cleaned if you wish to achieve the best results
in every wash.
Clean the filters regularly.
The dishwasher should not be used without filters or if the
filter is loose.
After several washes, check the filter assembly and if necessary
clean it thoroughly under running water, using a non-metallic
brush and following the instructions below:
1. Turn the cylindrical filter C in an anti-clockwise direction and
pull it out (fig. 1).
2. Remove the cup filter B by exerting a slight pressure on the
side flaps (fig. 2);
3. Slide out the stainless-steel plate filter A. (fig. 3).
4. Inspect the trap and remove any food residues. NEVER
REMOVE the wash-cycle pump protection (black detail) (fig.4).
Cleaning the sprayer arms
Food residue may become encrusted onto the sprayer arms

and block the holes used to spray the water. It is therefore
recommended that you check the arms from time to time and
clean them with a small non-metallic brush.
The two sprayer arms may both be removed.
To remove the upper sprayer arm,
turn the plastic locking ring in an
anti-clockwise direction. The upper
sprayer arm should be replaced
so that the side with the greater
number of holes is facing upwards.
The lower sprayer arm can be

removed by pressing on the side
tabs and pulling it upwards.
After cleaning the filters, re-place the filter assembly and fix it in
position correctly; this is essential for maintaining the efficient
operation of the dishwasher.
Leaving the machine unused for extended

periods
Cleaning the water inlet filter*
If the water hoses are new or have not been used for an extended
period of time, let the water run to make sure it is clear and free
of impurities before performing the necessary connections. If this
precaution is not taken, the water inlet could become blocked
and damage the dishwasher.
Clean the water inlet filter at the tap outlet regularly.
- Turn off the water tap.
- Unscrew the end of the water inlet hose, remove the filter and
clean it carefully under running water.
- Re-place the filter and screw the water hose back into position.
12
Disconnect the appliance from the electricity supply and shut

off the water tap.
Leave the door of the appliance ajar.
When you return, run a wash cycle when the dishwasher is
empty.
CONTENTS
Troubleshooting
Whenever the appliance fails to work, check for a solution from the following list before calling for Assistance.
Problem:
Possible causes / Solutions:
The dishwasher does not start or

cannot be controlled
Switch off the appliance by pressing the ON/OFF button, switch it back on after
approximately one minute and reset the program.
The appliance has not been plugged in properly.
The dishwasher door has not been shut properly.
The door wont close
The lock was released. Strongly push the door until a clacking noise is heard.
No water drains out from the

dishwasher.
The dishwasher makes excessive

noise.
The dishes are rattling against each other or against the sprayer arms.
An excessive amount of foam has been produced: the detergent has not been
measured out correctly or it is not suitable for use in dishwashers (see Start-up
and use).
The dishes and glasses are covered in

a white film or limescale deposits.
The level of the refined salt is low or the dosage setting is not suited to the
hardness of the water (see Rinse aid and salt).
The lid on the salt dispenser is not closed properly.
The rinse aid has been used up or the dosage is too low.
The dishes and glasses are streaked or

have a bluish tinge.
The rinse aid dosage is too high.
The crockery has not been dried

properly.
The dishes are not clean.
The dishwasher does not take any

water in - Tap shut-off alarm
(several short beeps* are emitted)
(the 2 (Normal) and 3 (Soak) WASH
CYCLES indicator lights flash).
EN
The dishwasher cycle has not yet finished.

The water inlet hose is bent (see Installation).
The drain duct is blocked.
The filter is clogged up with food residues.
A wash cycle without a drying program has been selected.

The rinse aid has been used up or the dosage is too low (see Rinse aid and salt).
The rinse aid dispenser setting is not suitable.
The crockery is made from non-stick material or plastic.
The racks are overloaded (see Loading the racks).

The crockery has not been arranged well.
The sprayer arms cannot move freely.
The wash cycle is too gentle (see Wash cycles).
An excessive amount of foam has been produced: the detergent has not been
measured out correctly or it is not suitable for use in dishwashers (see Start-up
and use).
The lid on the rinse aid compartment has not been shut correctly.
The filter is dirty or blocked (see Care and maintenance).
The refined salt level is low (see Rinse aid and salt).
There is no water in the mains supply.
Turn on the tap and the appliance will start after a few minutes.
The appliance lock has been activated because no action was taken when the
beeps* sounded.
Switch off the appliance using the ON/OFF button, turn on the tap and switch the
appliance back on after 20 seconds by pressing the same button. Re-program
the appliance and restart the wash cycle.
Water inlet hose alarm / Water inlet filter Switch off the appliance by pressing the ON/OFF button. Shut off the water tap to
blocked
eliminate the risk of flooding and remove the plug from the electrical socket.
(the 1 (Intensive), the 2 (Normal) and the Make sure the water inlet filter has not become blocked by impurities (see Care
3 (Soak) WASH CYCLES indicator lights
and maintenance chapter).
flash).

13
CONTENTS
Assistance
EN
Assistance
Before contacting Assistance:
Check whether the problem can be resolved using the Troubleshooting guide (see Troubleshooting).
Restart the programme to check whether the problem has ceased to exist.
If the problem persists, contact the Authorised Technical Assistance Service.
Never use the services of unauthorised technicians.
Please have the following information to hand:
The type of malfunction.
The appliance model (Mod.).
The serial number (S/N).
This information can be found on the appliance data plate (see Description of the appliance).
ARISTON
PRIORITY SERVICE
If you are not completely satisfied
with your appliance or require
service call:
Australia
Phone: 1300 815 589
New Zealand
Phone: (09) 306 1020
AUSTRALIA
ARISIT PTY LIMITED
40-44 Mark Anthony Drive, Dandenong South,
VIC 3175, Australia
Fax: Service & Sales (03) 9768 0838
Email: consumer.care@arisit.com
14
GENUINE ACCESSORIES
& SPARE PARTS
A wide range of genuine
accessories are available for
your appliance call:
Australia
Phone: 03 9768 0888
New Zealand
Phone: (09) 306 1020
NEW ZEALAND
ARISIT PTY LIMITED
PO Box 68-140 Newton, Auckland
1145, New Zealand
Fax: (09) 302 0077 Email: sales@aristonappliances.co.nz
CONTENTS
( i i ) Ar i s t o n LT B 6 M 0 1 9
I l l u m i n a t e & R a d i a n c e L e ve l 2 a n d U p
CONTENTS
LTB 6M019 AUS

6 Wash Programs:
Daily, Express 40, Half load, Intensive, Normal & Soak
14 Place Settings
More capacity means less wash loads saving water and energy
Overflow Detection device
New Aquastop to ensure you never have a problem with water overflowing
Less chance of damaging the element or burning plastics if accidently dropped into
the base of the dishwasher.
6
No: of Programs
Water Supply
Cold
Place settings
14
LED interface
Display
Yes
Graphite
Color
Yes, lower rack
Fold down
Removable Top
Noise level
Energy Star
Water Star Rating
No Top
49db
3
4.5
59.5 x 82 x 57
WARNING: technical specifications and product sizes can be varied by the manufacturer, without notice. Cut outs for appliances should only be by physical product measurements. The
above information is indicative only.

Ph: 1300 762 219
Fax: 03 9768 0838
Ph:(09) 306 1020
Fax: (09) 302 0077
CONTENTS
LTB 6M019
EN
English
DISHWASHER - Contents
Operating instructions,1
Precautions and advice, 2-3
Product Data, 4
Installation, 5-6
Refined salt and rinse aid, 8
Loading the racks, 9-10
Detergent and dishwasher use, 11
Wash cycles, 12
Care and maintenance, 13
Troubleshooting, 14
Assistance, 15
1
CONTENTS

This appliance was designed and
manufactured in compliance with international
safety standards. The following information
has been provided for safety reasons and
should be read carefully.
Keep this instruction manual in a safe place
for future reference. If the appliance is sold,
given away or moved, make sure the manual
is kept with the machine.
Read the instructions carefully, as they
include important information on safe
installation, use and maintenance.
This appliance was designed for domestic
use or similar applications, for example:
- farmhouses;
- use by guests in hotels, motels and other
residential settings;
- bed & breakfasts.
Remove the appliance from all packaging
and make sure it was not damaged during
transportation. If it was damaged, contact the
retailer and do not proceed any further with
the installation process.
General safety
This appliance should not be operated

by children younger than 8 years, people
with reduced physical, sensory or mental
capacities, or inexperienced people who
are not familiar with the product, unless they
are given close supervision or instructions
on how to use it safely and are made aware
by a responsible person of the dangers its
use might entail.
Children must not play with the appliance.
It is the user's responsibility to clean and
maintain the appliance. Children should
never clean or maintain it unless they are
given supervision.
The appliance was designed for domestic
use inside the home and is not intended for
The appliance must be used to wash
domestic crockery in accordance with the
instructions in this manual.
The appliance must not be installed
outdoors, even in covered areas. It is
extremely dangerous to leave the machine
exposed to rain and storms.
Do not touch the appliance when barefoot.
When unplugging the appliance always
pull the plug from the mains socket. Do not
pull on the cable.
2
The water supply tap must be shut off

and the plug should be removed from
the electrical socket at the end of every
cycle and before cleaning the appliance
or carrying out any maintenance work.
The maximum number of place settings is
shown in the product sheet.
If the appliance breaks down, do not under
any circumstances touch the internal parts
in an attempt to perform the repair work
yourself.
Do not lean or sit on the open door: this
may cause the appliance to overturn.
The door should not be left open as it may
create a dangerous obstacle.
WARNING: Some dishwasher detergents
are strongly alkaline. They can be extremely
dangerous if swallowed. Avoid contact with
the skin and eyes and keep children away
from the dishwasher when the door is open.
Check that the detergent receptacle is
empty after completion of the wash cycle.
The packaging material should not be used
as a toy.
Knives and other utensils with sharp
edges must be placed either with the
points/blades facing downwards in the
cutlery basket or horizontally on the tip-up
compartments or in the tray/third basket,
if available.
Disposal
To dispose of any packaging materials,

follow local legislation so that the
packagings may be reused.
The European Directive 2012/19/EU
relating to Waste Electrical and Electronic
Equipment (WEEE) states that household
appliances should not be disposed of
using the normal solid urban waste cycle.
Exhausted appliances should be collected
separately in order to optimise the cost of
reusing and recycling the materials inside
the machine, while preventing potential
damage to the atmosphere and public
health. The crossed-out dustbin symbol
shown on all products reminds the owners
of their obligations regarding separated
waste collection.
For further information relating to the correct
disposal of household appliances, owners
may contact the relevant public authority or
the local appliance dealer.
CONTENTS
Saving energy and respecting the

environment
Saving water and energy
Only begin a wash cycle when the

dishwasher is full. While waiting for the
dishwasher to be filled, prevent unpleasant
odours with the Soak cycle (if available, see
Wash Cycles).
Select a wash cycle that is suited to the type

of crockery and to the soil level using the
Table of Wash Cycles:
- For dishes with a normal soil level, use
the Eco wash cycle, which guarantees low
energy and water consumption levels.
- If the load is smaller than usual activate
the Half Load option (see Special wash cycles
and options, if available).
If your electricity supply contract gives

details of electricity-saving time bands, run
the wash cycles when electricity prices are
lower. The Delayed Start option can help
you organise the wash cycles accordingly
(see Special wash cycles and options, if available).
3
CONTENTS
Product Data (product fiche)

Product Fiche
Brand
ARISTON
Model
LTB 6M019
Rated capacity in standard place settings (1)
14
Energy Star Rating
Comparative Energy Consumption (kWh/year), CEC
325
Energy Total (kWh), Et
0.860
Average measured Standby Power (W), Ps
1,39
Primary Total Water Volume (L)
12.0
Water Star Rating
4.5
Noise in dB(A) Re 1pW
49
Built-in model
Yes
NOTES
1) The information on the label and fiche relates to the standard cleaning cycle, this programme is suitable to clean normally soiled
tableware and it is the most efficient programme in terms of combined energy and water consumption. The standard cleaning cycle
corresponds to the Normal cycle.
CONTENTS
Installation
If the appliance must be moved at any time, keep it in an
upright position; if absolutely necessary, it may be tilted onto
its back.
Under no circumstances should the water inlet hose be cut

as it contains live electrical parts.
Connecting the water supply
Before inserting the plug into the electrical socket, make

sure that:
The socket is earthed and complies with current
regulations;
the socket can withstand the maximum load of the
appliance as shown on the data plate located on the inside
of the door
(see chapter Description of the appliance);
The power supply voltage falls within the values indicated
on the data plate on the inside of the door.
The socket is compatible with the plug of the appliance. If
this is not the case, ask an authorised technician to replace
the plug (see Assistance). Do not use extension cables or
multiple sockets.
Adaptation of the water supply for installation should only

be performed by a qualified technician.
The water inlet and outlet hoses may be positioned towards
the right or the left in order to achieve the best possible
installation.
Make sure the dishwasher does not bend or squash the hoses.
Connecting the water inlet hose
To a 3/4 gas cold or hot water connection point (max.

60C).
Run the water until it is perfectly clear.
Screw the inlet hose tightly into position and turn off the
tap.
If the inlet hose is not long enough, contact a specialist
store or an authorised technician (see Assistance).
The water pressure must be within the values indicated
in the Technical Data table - otherwise the dishwasher may
be function properly.
Make sure the hose is not bent or compressed.
Connecting the water outlet hose
Connect the outlet hose to a drain duct with a minimum

diameter of 2 cm. (A)
The outlet hose connection must be at a height ranging from
40 to 80 cm from the floor or surface where the dishwasher
rests.
MAX 80 cm
MIN 40 cm
Before connecting the water outlet hose to the sink drain,

remove the plastic plug (B).
Anti-flooding protection
To ensure floods do not occur, the dishwasher:

- is provided with a special system which blocks the water
supply in the event of anomalies or leaks from inside the
appliance.
Some models are also equipped with the supplementary
safety device New Acqua Stop*, which guarantees antiflooding protection even in the event of a supply hose rupture.
EN
Once the appliance has been installed, the power supply

cable and the electrical socket should be easily accessible.
The cable should not be bent or compressed.
If the power supply cable is damaged, have it replaced
by the manufacturer or its authorised Technical Assistance
Service in order to prevent all potential hazards. (See
Assistance)
The Company shall not be held responsible for any
incidents, if these regulations are not observed.
1. Position the dishwasher on a level sturdy floor. If the floor is

uneven, the front feet of the appliance may be adjusted until
it reaches a horizontal position. If the appliance is levelled
correctly, it will be more stable and much less likely to move
or cause vibrations and noise while it is operating.
2. Before recessing the dishwasher, stick the adhesive
transparent strip* under the wooden shelf in order to protect
it from any condensation which may form.
3. Place the dishwasher so that its sides or back panel are in
contact with the adjacent cabinets or the wall. This appliance
can also be recessed under a single worktop* (see the
Assembly instruction sheet).
4*. To adjust the height of the rear foot, turn the red hexagonal
bushing on the lower central part at the front of the dishwasher
using a hexagonal spanner with an opening of 8 mm. Turn the
spanner in a clockwise direction to increase the height and
in an anticlockwise direction to decrease it. (see Building-in
instruction sheet attached to the documentation)
WARNING: HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE!

5
CONTENTS
EN

After the installation, remove the stoppers from the racks and
the retaining elastic elements from the upper rack (if any).
Water softener settings

Before starting the first wash cycle, set the hardness level of the water from the mains supply. (see chapter Rinse
aid and refined salt).
First load the softener tank with water, then introduce about
1 kg of salt. It is perfectly normal for water to flow out.
As soon as this procedure is complete, run a wash cycle.
Only use salt that has been specifically designed for dishwashers.
After the salt has been poured into the machine, the LOW
The machine has a buzzer/set of tones (depending on the

dishwasher model) to inform the user that a command has
been implemented: power on, cycle end etc.
The symbols/indicator lights/LEDs on the control panel/
display may vary in colour and may have a flashing or fixed
light (depending on the dishwasher model).
The display* provides useful information concerning the
type of wash cycle, drying/wash-cycle phase, remaining time,
temperature etc etc.
SALT indicator light* switches off.

If the salt container is not filled, the water softener and the
heating element may be damaged as a result.
Technical data
Dimensions
width 59,5 cm
height 82 cm
depth 57 cm
Capacity
14 standard place-settings
Water supply pressure
0,05 1MPa (0.5 10 bar)

7,25 145 psi
Power supply voltage
Total absorbed power
Fuse

This dishwasher conforms to the
following European Community
Directives:
-2006/95/EC (Low Voltage)
-2004/108/EC (Electromagnetic
Compatibility)
-2009/125/EC (Comm. Reg.
1016/2010) (Ecodesign)
-97/17/EC (Labelling)
-2012/19/EU Waste Electrical
and Electronic Equipment
(WEEE)

6
CONTENTS
Description of the
appliance
Overall view
EN
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Upper rack
Upper spray arm
Tip-up dispensers
Rack height adjuster
Lower rack
Lower spray arm
Washing filter
Salt dispenser
Detergent and rinse-aid dispensers
Data plate
Control panel****
Control panel
Select wash cycle button
Low Salt indicator light
ON-OFF/Reset button
and indicator light
Wash cycle indicator lights
Low Rinse Aid

indicator light
***Only in completely built-in models.

7
CONTENTS
Refined Salt and Rinse Aid

EN
Only use products which have been specifically designed

for dishwashers. Do not use table salt or industrial salt.
Follow the instructions given on the packaging.
If you are using a multi-function product, we recommend
that you add salt in any case, especially if the water is hard or
very hard. (Follow the instructions given on the packaging.)
If you do not add salt or rinse aid, the LOW SALT* and
LOW RINSE AID* indicator lights will remain lit.
The use of salt prevents the formation of LIMESCALE on the dishes

and on the machines functional components.
It is important that the salt dispenser be never empty.
It is important to set the water hardness.
The salt dispenser is located in the lower part of the dishwasher
(see Description) and should be filled:
When the LOW RINSE AID indicator light in the control panel
is lit *;
When the green float* on the cap of the salt dispenser is no
longer visible.
See autonomy in the water hardness table.
1. Remove the lower rack and unscrew the
container cap (anticlockwise).
2. Only the first time you do this: fill the water
dispenser up to the edge.
3. Position the funnel (see figure) and
fill the salt container right up to its edge
(approximately 1 kg); it is not unusual for a
little water to leak out.
4. Remove the funnel and wipe any salt residue away from the
opening; rinse the cap under running water and then screw it on.
It is advisable to perform this procedure every time you add salt
to the container.
Make sure the cap is screwed on tightly, so that no detergent can
get into the container during the wash cycle (this could damage
the water softener beyond repair).
Whenever you need to add salt, we recommend carrying out
the procedure before the washing cycle is started.
Setting the water hardness

For perfect water softener operation, it is essential that the
adjustment be based on the water hardness in your house. Ask
your local water supplier for this information. The factory setting
is for medium water hardness.
Switch the dishwasher on using the On/Off button.
Switch it off using the On/Off button
Hold down button P for 5 seconds until you hear a beep.
Switch it on using the On/Off button
The current selection level number and salt indicator light flash
(flashing indicator only).
Press button P to select the desired hardness level (see
hardness table).
Setting is complete!
Even if using multi-functional tablets, the salt dispenser should
still be filled.

8
Water Hardness Table

level
1
2
3
4
5*
dH
0-6
6 - 11
12 - 17
17 - 34
34 - 50
fH
0 - 10
11 - 20
21 - 30
31 - 60
61 - 90
mmol/l
0-1
1,1 - 2
2,1 - 3
3,1 - 6
6,1 - 9
Average salt dispenser

capacity duration**
months
7 months
5 months
3 months
2 months
2/3 weeks
For values between 0f and 10f, we do not recommend the use of salt.
* a setting of 5 may increase cycle duration.
** 1 wash cycle per day.
(dH = hardness measured in German degrees - f = hardness
measured in French degrees mmol/l = millimoles per litre)
Rinse aid makes dish DRYING easier. The rinse aid dispenser
should be filled:
When the LOW RINSE AID indicator light on the panel/display
is lit *;
When the dark optical indicator* on the dispenser door D
becomes transparent.
MA X
1. Open the dispenser D by pressing and pulling up the tab

on the lid;
2. Carefully introduce the rinse aid as far as the maximum reference
notch of the filling space - avoid spilling it. If this happens, clean
the spill immediately with a dry cloth.
3. Press the lid down until you hear a click to close it.
NEVER pour the rinse aid directly into the appliance tub.
Rinse-aid dispenser setting

If you are not completely satisfied with the drying results, you
can adjust the quantity of rinse aid used.
Switch the dishwasher on using the On/Off button.
Press button P three times - a beep will be heard.
Switch it on using the On/Off button
The current selection level number and rinse aid indicator light
flash (flashing indicator only).
Press button P to select the level of rinse aid quantity to be
supplied.
Setting is complete!
If the rinse aid level is set to ZERO (ECO), no rinse aid will be
supplied. The LOW RINSE AID indicator light will not be lit if you
run out of rinse aid.
A maximum of 4 levels can be set according to the dishwasher
model. The factory setting is for a medium level.
If you see bluish streaks on the dishes, set a low number (1-2).
If there are drops of water or limescale marks on the dishes,
set a high number (3-4).
CONTENTS
Loading the racks

Tips
Before loading the racks, remove all food residues from the
crockery and empty liquids from glasses and containers. No
preventive rinsing is needed under running water.
Arrange the crockery so that it is held in place firmly and does
not tip over; and arrange the containers with the openings facing
downwards and the concave/convex parts placed obliquely,
thus allowing the water to reach every surface and flow freely.
Make sure that the lids, handles, trays and frying pans do not
prevent the spray arms from rotating. Place any small items in
the cutlery basket.
Since plastic dishes and non-stick frying pans usually retain more
water drops, their drying will be not so good as that of ceramic
or stainless-steel dishes.
Lightweight items such as plastic containers should be placed in
the upper rack and arranged so that they cannot move.
After loading the appliance, make sure that the spray arms can
rotate freely.
Lower rack

They can be used in a vertical position when arranging dishes
or in a horizontal position (lower) to load pans and salad bowls
easily.
EN
Cutlery basket
The basket is equipped with top grilles for improved cutlery arrangement. The cutlery basket should be positioned only at the
front of the lower rack.
The lower rack can hold pans, lids, dishes, salad bowls, cutlery
etc. Large plates and lids should ideally be placed at the sides.
Upper rack
Load this rack with delicate and lightweight crockery such as
glasses, cups, saucers and shallow salad bowls.
Very soiled dishes and pans should be placed in the lower rack
because in this sector the water sprays are stronger and allow
a higher washing performance.

They can be used in a vertical position when arranging tea/
dessert saucers or in a lower position to load bowls and food
containers.

9
CONTENTS
EN
Tip-up compartments with adjustable position*

The side tip-up compartments can be positioned at three different
heights to optimize the arrangement of crockery inside the rack.
Wine glasses can be placed safely
in the tip-up compartments by
inserting the stem of each glass
into the corresponding slots. For
optimum drying results incline the tipup compartments more. To change
the inclination, pull up the tip-up
compartment, slide it slightly and
position it as you wish.
The upper rack can be adjusted for height based on requirements:

high position to place bulky crockery in the lower rack and low
position to make the most of the tip-up compartments/sectors
by creating more space upwards.
Adjusting the height of the upper rack

In order to make it easier to arrange the crockery, the upper rack
may be moved to a higher or lower position.
The height of the upper rack should be adjusted WHEN THE
RACK IS EMPTY.
NEVER raise or lower the rack on one side only.
Cutlery tray*
Some dishwasher models are fitted with a sliding tray which
can be used to hold serving utensils or small cups. For
optimum washing performance, avoid positioning bulky
crockery directly below the tray.
The cutlery tray can be removed (see Figure).
If the rack is equipped with a Lift-Up device* (see figure), lift

it up by holding its sides. To restore the lower position, press
the levers (A) at the sides of the rack and follow the rack down.
Unsuitable crockery
Wooden crockery and cutlery.
Delicate decorated glasses, artistic handicraft and antique
crockery. Their decorations are not resistant.
Parts in synthetic material which do not withstand high
temperatures.
Copper and tin crockery.
Crockery soiled with ash, wax, lubricating grease or ink.
The colours of glass decorations and aluminium/silver pieces
can change and fade during the washing process. Some types
of glass (e.g. crystal objects) can become opaque after a number
of wash cycles too.
Damage to glass and crockery

Caused by:
Type of glass and glass production process.
Chemical composition of detergent.
Water temperature of rinse cycle.
Tips:
Only use glasses and porcelain guaranteed by the
manufacturer as dishwasher safe.
Use a delicate detergent suitable for crockery.
Collect glasses and cutlery from the dishwasher as soon as
the wash cycle is over.
*Only available in selected models with different numbers and

positions.
10
CONTENTS
Detergent and
dishwasher use
Good washing results also depend on the correct amount of
detergent being used. Exceeding the stated amount does not
result in a more effective wash and increases environmental
pollution.
The amount can be adjusted to the soil level.
In the case of normally soiled items, use approximately either
35g (powder detergent) or 35ml (liquid detergent). If tablets
are used, one tablet will be enough.
For good washing results also follow the instructions shown
on the detergent box.
EN
1. Open the door and press the ON/OFF button.

2. Measure out the detergent. (see measuring detergent).
3. Load the racks (see Loading the racks).
4. Select the wash cycle in accordance with the type of crockery
and its soil level (see Table of wash cycles) by pressing the P
button.
5. Select the wash options*. (see Special wash cycles and
Options).
6. Start the wash cycle by shutting the door.
7. The end of the wash cycle is indicated by beeps and by the
flashing of the indicator light of the selected wash cycle. Open
the door, switch off the appliance by pressing the ON/OFF button.
8. Wait a few minutes before removing the crockery in order to
avoid burns. Unload the racks, beginning with the lower level.
For further questions please ask the detergent producers.

To open the detergent dispenser use the opening device A.
The machine will switch off automatically during long

periods of inactivity in order to minimise electricity
consumption.
Changing a wash cycle in progress

Introduce the detergent into the dry dispenser B only.
Place the amount of detergent for pre-washing directly inside
the tub.
1. When measuring out the detergent refer to the Table of wash
cycles to add the proper quantity. Compartment B comprises a
level showing the maximum quantity of liquid or powder detergent
that can be added to each cycle.
2. Remove detergent residues from the edges of the dispenser
and close the cover until it clicks.
3. Close the lid of the detergent dispenser by pulling it up until
the closing device is secured in place.
The detergent dispenser automatically opens up at the right time
according to the wash cycle.
If all-in-one detergents are used, we recommend using the TABS
option, because it adjusts the cycle so that the best washing and
drying results are always achieved.
If a mistake was made in the wash cycle selection process, it

is possible to change the cycle provided that it has only just
begun: open the door, taking care to avoid the escaping steam,
and press and hold the ON/OFF button; the machine will switch
off. Switch the machine back on using the ON/OFF button and
select the new wash cycle and any options desired; start the
cycle by closing the door.
Adding extra crockery

Without switching off the machine, open the door, taking care
to avoid the escaping steam, and place the crockery inside the
dishwasher. Close the door: the cycle starts from the point at
which it was interrupted.
Accidental interruptions
If the door is opened during the wash cycle or there is a power
cut, the cycle stops. It starts again from the point at which it
was interrupted once the door has been shut or the electricity
supply restored.
Only use detergent which has been specifically designed

for dishwashers.
DO NOT USE washing up liquid.
Using excessive detergent may result in foam residues
remaining in the machine after the cycle has ended.
To achieve the best washing and drying results, the combined
use of detergent, rinse aid liquid and refined salt is required.
We recommend using detergents that do not contain
phosphates or chlorine, as these products are harmful
to the environment.

11
CONTENTS
Wash cycles
EN
Wash-cycle data is measured under laboratory conditions according to European Standard EN 50242.
Based on the different conditions of use, the wash-cycle duration and data can change.
Wash cycle
which include
drying
Options
Approximate
duration of wash
cycles
Water
consumption
(l/cycle)
Energy
consumption
(kWh/cycle)
1. Normal *
Yes
No
02:40
12
0,86
2. Intensive
Yes
No
02:30
16,5
1,7
3. Daily
No
No
01:00
11,5
1,15
4. Express 40
No
No
00:40
8,5
0,5
5. Soak
No
No
00:10
0,01
6. Half Load
Yes
No
01:20
12
1,1
Wash cycle
Instructions on wash-cycle selection and detergent dosage

1. The NORMAL wash cycle is the standard cycle to which the energy label data refers. It can be used to wash crockery with a
normal soil level and is the most efficient cycle in terms of energy and water consumption for this type of crockery.
Open the door at end of programme by 50mm to assist in drying. Add detergent amounts for cycle: 29 gr/ml + 6 gr/ml** 1 Tab
(**Quantity of pre-washing detergent)
2. Heavily soiled dishes and pans (not to be used for delicate items). 35 gr/ml 1 Tab
3. Limited quantity of daily soiling (ideal for 4 place settings) 25 gr/ml 1 Tab
4. Fast cycle to be used for slightly dirty dishes (ideal for 2 place settings) 25 gr/ml 1 Tab
5. Pre-wash while awaiting completion of the load with the dishes from the next meal. No detergent.
6. Ideal cycle for small loads of crockery with a normal soil level. 25 gr/ml 1 Tab
Notes: Optimum performance levels when using the Daily" and "Express 40 cycles can be achieved by respecting the specified
number of place settings.
To reduce consumption even further, only run the dishwasher when it is full.
* The Normal wash cycle adheres to the regulation standard AS/NZS 2007. Although it has a longer duration than other wash cycles
it uses less energy and is less harmful to the environment.
Note for Test Laboratories: for information on comparative EN testing conditions, please send an email to the following address:
ASSISTENZA_EN_LVS@indesitcompany.com
12
CONTENTS
Care and maintenance

Shutting off the water and electricity
supplies
Turn off the water tap after every wash cycle to avoid leaks.
Always unplug the appliance when cleaning it and when
performing maintenance work.
The external surfaces of the machine and the control panel

can be cleaned using a non-abrasive cloth which has been
dampened with water. Do not use solvents or abrasive
products.
Any marks on the inside of the appliance may be removed
using a cloth dampened with water and a little vinegar.
Always keep the door of the appliance ajar in order to avoid

moisture from forming and being trapped inside the machine.
Clean the seals around the door and detergent dispensers
regularly using a damp sponge. This will avoid food becoming
trapped in the seals, which is the main cause behind the
formation of unpleasant odours.
The filter assembly consists of three filters which remove food

residues from the washing water and then recirculate the water.
They must be cleaned if you wish to achieve the best results in
every wash.
EN
Clean the filters regularly.

The dishwasher must not be used without filters or if the filter
is loose.
After several washes, check the filter assembly and if necessary
clean it thoroughly under running water, using a non-metallic
brush and following the instructions below:
1. Turn the cylindrical filter C in an anti-clockwise direction and
pull it out (fig. 1).
2. Remove the cup filter B by exerting a slight pressure on the
side flaps (fig. 2);
3. Slide out the stainless-steel plate filter A. (fig. 3).
4. Inspect the trap and remove any food residues. NEVER
REMOVE the wash-cycle pump protection (black detail) (fig.4).
Cleaning the spray arms
Food residue may become encrusted onto the spray arms

and block the holes used to spray the water. It is therefore
recommended that you check the arms from time to time and
clean them with a small non-metallic brush.
The two spray arms may both be removed.
To remove the upper spray arm,
turn the plastic locking ring in an
anti-clockwise direction. The upper
spray arm should be replaced so
that the side with the greater number
of holes is facing upwards.
The lower spray arm can be

removed by pressing on the side
tabs and pulling it upwards.
After cleaning the filters, re-place the filter assembly and fix it
in position correctly; this is essential for maintaining the efficient
operation of the dishwasher.
Leaving the machine unused for extended

periods
Cleaning the water inlet hose*
If the water hoses are new or have not been used for an extended
period of time, let the water run to make sure it is clear and free
of impurities before performing the necessary connections. If this
precaution is not taken, the water inlet could become blocked
and damage the dishwasher.
Clean the water inlet filter at the tap outlet regularly.
- Turn off the water tap.
- Unscrew the end of the water inlet hose, remove the filter and
clean it carefully under running water.
- Re-place the filter and screw the water hose back into position.
Disconnect the appliance from the electricity supply and shut

off the water tap.
Leave the door of the appliance ajar.
When you return, run a wash cycle when the dishwasher is
empty.

13
CONTENTS
Troubleshooting
EN
Whenever the appliance fails to work, check for a solution from the following list before calling for Assistance.
Problem:
Possible causes / Solutions:
The dishwasher does not start The water supply tap is not turned on.
or cannot be controlled.
Switch off the appliance by pressing the ON/OFF button, switch it back on after approximately
one minute and reset the wash cycle.
The appliance has not been plugged in properly or another electricity socket should be used.
The dishwasher door has not been closed properly.
The door wont close.
Make sure that the racks were inserted all the way.
The lock was released. Strongly push the door until a clacking noise is heard.
No water drain out of the

dishwasher.
The wash cycle has not finished yet.

The water drain hose is bent (see Installation).
The drain duct is clogged up.
The filter is clogged up with food residues.
Check the height of the drain hose.
The dishwasher makes

excessive noise.
The dishes are rattling against each other or against the spray arms. Place the dishes
properly and make sure the spray arms can rotate freely.
Too much foam: the detergent has not been measured out correctly or it is not suitable for use
in dishwashers. (See Detergent and dishwasher use.) Do not prewash the dishes by hand.
The dishes and glasses are

covered in a white film or
limescale deposits.
No refined salt.
Water hardness adjustment is not suitable: increase the relevant values. (See Refined Salt
and Rinse Aid.)
The salt and rinse-aid dispenser cap has not been closed properly.
The rinse aid has been used up or the dosage is too low.
The dishes and glasses are

streaked or have a bluish
tinge.
The rinse aid dosage is too high.
The crockery has not been

dried properly.
A wash cycle without a drying programme has been selected.

The rinse aid has been used up. (See Refined Salt and Rinse Aid.)
The rinse aid dispenser setting is not suitable.
The crockery is made from non-stick material or plastic; the presence of water drops is
normal.
The dishes are not clean.
The crockery has not been arranged properly.

The spray arms cannot rotate freely, being hindered by the dishes.
The wash cycle is too gentle (see Wash Cycles).
Too much foam: the detergent has not been measured out correctly or it is not suitable for use
in dishwashers. (See Detergent and dishwasher use.)
The lid on the rinse aid compartment has not been closed correctly.
The filter is dirty or clogged up (see Care and maintenance.)
The refined salt level is low (See Refined Salt and Rinse Aid.)
Make sure that the height of the dishes is compatible with the rack adjustment.
The holes in the spray arms are clogged up. (See Care and maintenance.)
The dishwasher wont load

any water.
There is no water in the mains supply or the tap is shut off.

The filters are clogged up: they need cleaning. (See Care and maintenance.)
The drain duct is clogged up: it needs cleaning.
After checking and cleaning, switch the dishwasher on and off and start a new wash cycle.
If the problem persists, turn off the water tap, remove the plug and call the Service Centre.
It is blocked with flashing lights.

14
CONTENTS
Assistances
Assistance
EN
Before contacting Assistance:

Check whether the problem can be resolved using the Troubleshooting guide (see Troubleshooting).
Restart the programme to check whether the problem has ceased to exist.
If the problem persists, contact the Authorised Technical Assistance Service.
Never use the services of unauthorised technicians.
The type of malfunction.
This information can be found on the appliance data plate (see Description of the appliance).
Indesit Priority Service
Genuine Accessories & Spare Parts
Australia Phone: 1300 055 518
Australia Phone: 02 97143434
Australia Email:servicesupport@indesit.net.au
Australia Email:spareparts@indesit.net.au
New Zeland Phone: 0800 367 835
New Zeland Phone: 09 307 42 05 / 0800 367 835
New Zeland Email:parts@eurotechdesign.co.nz
New Zeland Email:parts@eurotechdesign.co.nz
AUSTRALIA
NEW ZELAND
BUSH AUSTRALIA PTY LIMITED
EUROTECH DESIGN LIMITED
46 Buffalo Road, Gladesville
604 Rosebank Road, Avondale,
NSW 2111, Australia
Auckland, New Zeland
Email: salesinfo@indesit.net.au
Email: parts@eurotechdesign.co.nz
15
CONTENTS
(iii)
Miele G4481SCVI
(Purchaser Upgrade)
CONTENTS
for dishwashers
To avoid the risk of accidents or

damage to the appliance, it is
essential to read these instructions
as well as the installation plan before
it is installed and used for the
first time.
en - AU, NZ
M.-Nr. 09 585 880
CONTENTS
Contents
Description of the appliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Appliance overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Warning and Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Caring for the environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Disposal of the packing material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Disposing of your old appliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Energy saving dishwashing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Before using for the first time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
To open the door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
To close the door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Water softener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Programming the water hardness level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Before using the appliance for the first time, you require:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Filling the salt reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Salt indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Switching off the refill indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Rinse aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Adding rinse aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Rinse aid indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Setting the rinse aid dosage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Loading the dishwasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Items not suitable for dishwashers: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Upper basket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Cup rack (depending on model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Adjusting the upper basket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Lower basket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Cutlery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Cutlery tray (depending on model). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Cutlery basket (depending on model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
CONTENTS
Contents
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Detergent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Adding detergent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Selecting a programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Starting the programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Time display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
At the end of a programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Unloading the dishwasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Interrupting a programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Changing a programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Additional options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Turbo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Delay start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Adjusting Sensor wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Optimise standby. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Factory default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Cleaning and care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Cleaning the wash cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Cleaning the door and the door seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Cleaning the control panel and door front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Cleaning the filters in the wash cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Cleaning the spray arms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Problem solving guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Technical problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
The dishwasher does not fill/drain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
General problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Noises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Unsatisfactory washing result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Cleaning the water inlet filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Cleaning the drain pump and non-return valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
CONTENTS
Contents
After sales service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Future updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Comparison tests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Programme chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Optional accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Water connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
The Miele Waterproof system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Connection to the water supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Connection to the drainage system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
CONTENTS
Description of the appliance

Appliance overview
a Upper spray arm (not visible)
g Filter combination
b Cutlery tray (depending on model)
h Data plate
c Upper basket
i Rinse aid reservoir
d Middle spray arm
j Dual compartment detergent

dispenser
e Air inlet for drying

(depending on model)
k Salt reservoir
f Lower spray arm
CONTENTS

Control panel
a Check/Refill indicators
e Programme selection
b Time display
f Programme button
c Delay start button ,

with indicator light
g On/Off button K with indicator light
d Turbo button with indicator light
These Operating instructions apply to several different dishwasher models with

different heights.
The specific dishwasher models below are referred to as follows:
Standard = 80.5 cm high dishwashers (integrated)
and 84.5 cm high dishwashers (freestanding)
XXL
= 84.5 cm high dishwashers
CONTENTS
Warning and Safety instructions

This appliance complies with all relevant statutory safety
requirements. Improper use of the appliance can, however,
present a risk of both personal injury and material damage.
To avoid the risk of accidents and damage to the appliance,
please read these instructions carefully before installing and
using it for the first time. They contain important information on its
safety, use and maintenance.
Keep these instructions in a safe place and pass them on to any
future owner.
Correct application
~ This appliance is designed for domestic use and for use in similar
environments by guests in hotel or motel rooms, bed & breakfasts
and other typical living quarters. This does not include
common/shared facilities or commercial facilities within hotels,
motels or bed & breakfasts.
~ The appliance is not suitable for outdoor use.

~ The dishwasher is designed exclusively for cleaning domestic
crockery and cutlery.

Any other usage is at the owner's risk. Miele cannot be held liable
for damage resulting from incorrect or improper use or operation.
~ This appliance is not intended for use by persons (including
children) with reduced physical, sensory or mental capabilities, or

lack of experience and knowledge, unless they have been given
supervision or instruction concerning use of the appliance by a
person responsible for their safety.
CONTENTS

Safety with children
~ Young children must not be allowed to use this appliance.

~ Older children may only use the appliance when its operation has
been clearly explained to them and they are able to use it safely,
recognising the dangers of misuse.
~ Cleaning may only be carried out by older children under the

supervision of an adult.
~ Children should be supervised to ensure that they do not play
with the appliance. Keep small children away from the appliance at
all times to avoid the risk of injury. There is the risk that children may
lock themselves in the dishwasher.
~ Keep detergent and other household agents out of the reach of
children at all times. Dishwasher detergents contain irritants and

corrosive ingredients which can cause burning in the mouth, nose
and throat if swallowed, or inhibit breathing. Keep children away
from the dishwasher when the door is open. There could still be
detergent residues in the cabinet.
Consult a doctor immediately if your child has swallowed or inhaled
detergent.
CONTENTS

Technical safety
~ Before installation, check the dishwasher for visible signs of

damage. Under no circumstances should you use a damaged
dishwasher. A damaged dishwasher could be dangerous.
~ The dishwasher must only be plugged into the electricity supply
via a suitable switched socket. The electrical socket must be easily

accessible after the dishwasher has been installed so that it can be
disconnected from the electricity supply at any time (See "Electrical
connection").
~ There must be no electrical sockets behind the dishwasher.
Danger of overheating and fire risk if the dishwasher were to be

pushed up against a plug.
~ The dishwasher must not be installed under a cooktop. The high
radiant temperatures which are sometimes generated by a cooktop

could damage the dishwasher. For the same reason, it should not
be installed next to open fires or other appliances which give off
heat, such as heaters etc.
~ Do not connect the dishwasher to the mains supply until it has

been fully installed, including the adjustment of the door springs.
CONTENTS
~ Before connecting the appliance, check that the connection data

on the data plate (voltage and rated load) match the mains
electricity supply. If in any doubt, consult a qualified electrician.
~ The electrical safety of this appliance can only be guaranteed
when continuity is complete between it and an effective earthing

system. It is most important that this basic safety requirement is
present and regularly tested and, where there is any doubt, the
household wiring system should be inspected by a qualified
electrician.
The manufacturer cannot be held liable for the consequences of an
inadequate earthing system (e.g. electric shock).
~ Do not connect the appliance to the mains electricity supply via a

multi-socket unit or an extension lead. These do not guarantee the
required safety of the appliance (e.g. danger of overheating).
~ This appliance must not be installed and operated in mobile

installations (e.g. on a ship).
~ Do not install the dishwasher in a room where there is a risk of
frost occuring. Frozen hoses may burst or split, and the reliability of
the electronic unit may be impaired at temperatures below freezing
point.
10
CONTENTS
~ The plastic housing of the water connection contains an electrical

valve. The housing must not be dipped in water.
~ There are live wires in the water inlet hose. Never cut the water
inlet hose, even if it is too long.
~ The integrated Waterproof System offers protection from water

damage, provided the following conditions are met:
The dishwasher is correctly installed and plumbed in.
The appliance is properly maintained and parts are replaced

where it can be seen that this is necessary.
The tap has been turned off when the appliance is not used for a
longer period of time (e.g. during holidays).
The Waterproof system will work even if the appliance is switched
off. However, the appliance must remain connected to the electricity
supply.
~ A damaged dishwasher could be dangerous. If the dishwasher
gets damaged, switch it off at the mains immediately and call Miele.
11
CONTENTS
~ Unauthorised repairs could result in unforeseen dangers for the
user, for which Miele cannot accept liability. Repairs should only be
undertaken by a Miele approved service technician.
~ Faulty components must only be replaced by genuine Miele
original spare parts. The manufacturer can only guarantee the safety
of the appliance when Miele replacement parts are used.
~ Always disconnect the dishwasher from the electrical supply for

maintenance work (switch off at the wall socket and remove the
plug).
~ If the connection cable is damaged, it must be replaced by a
Miele approved service technician only in order to protect the user

from danger.
~ In areas which may be subject to infestation by cockroaches or
other vermin, pay particular attention to keeping the appliance and

its surroundings in a clean condition at all times. Any damage which
may be caused by cockroaches or other vermin will not be covered
by the warranty.
12
CONTENTS

Correct installation
~ The dishwasher must be installed and connected in compliance

with the installation instructions.
~ Be careful when installing the dishwasher. Wear
protective gloves to avoid injury on any sharp metal

components.
~ The dishwasher must be correctly aligned to ensure problem-free

operation.
~ In order to ensure stability, built-under and integrated
dishwashers must only be installed under a continuous worktop

which is secured to adjacent cabinetry.
~ If you want to convert your freestanding dishwasher to a
built-under ("U") model, you will need to order the appropriate

conversion kit. If you remove the existing plinth, you must replace it
with a U-model plinth. This is necessary to avoid the risk of injury
caused by protruding metal parts.
~ The door springs on either side need to be evenly adjusted. They
are correctly adjusted if the half-opened door (approx. 45 door

opening angle) remains in this position when it is released. The door
must not fall down under its own weight.
13
CONTENTS

Correct use
~ Do not use solvents in the dishwasher. Danger of explosion!

~ Avoid inhalation of powder detergents. Dishwasher detergents
contain irritant or corrosive ingredients which can cause burning in

the nose, mouth and throat if swallowed, or inhibit breathing. Consult
a doctor immediately if detergent has been swallowed or inhaled.
~ Avoid leaving the door open unnecessarily as you could trip over
it.
~ Dishes can be very hot at the end of a programme.
Allow the dishes to cool until they are comfortable enough to handle
before unloading them.
~ Do not sit or lean on the opened door. This could cause the
dishwasher to tip and be damaged, and you could get injured.
~ Only use detergent and rinse aid formulated for domestic

dishwashers. Do not use washing-up liquid.
~ Do not use commercial or industrial detergents as these may

cause damage, and there is a risk of severe chemical reaction.
14
CONTENTS
~ Do not fill the rinse aid reservoir with powder or liquid detergent.
This will cause serious damage to the reservoir.
~ Inadvertently filling the salt reservoir with powder or liquid

dishwasher detergent will damage the water softener.
~ Miele recommends using specially designed dishwasher salt to
maximize the performance of your dishwasher and to prevent a

build-up of calcium and limescale in the dishwasher cabinet,
especially if you live in a hard water area. Dishwasher salt can be
purchased online at www.miele-shop.com (depending on country)
or directly from Miele.
Do not use other salts such as cooking salt, agricultural grade or
gritting salt. These may contain insoluble additives which can impair
the functioning of the water softener.
~ In an appliance with a cutlery basket (depending on model)
cutlery is cleaned and dried more efficiently if placed in the basket

with the handles downwards. However, to avoid the risk of injury,
place knives, forks and other utensils with sharp points with the
handles upwards.
~ Plastic items which cannot withstand being washed in hot water,

such as disposable plastic containers, or plastic cutlery and
crockery, should not be cleaned in the dishwasher. The high
temperatures in the dishwasher may cause them to melt or lose
shape.
~ On models with "Delay start", make sure that the dispenser is dry
before adding detergent. Wipe dry if necessary. Detergent will clog
if poured into a damp dispenser and may not be thoroughly
dispensed.
15
CONTENTS

Accessories
~ Only use genuine Miele spare parts and accessories with this
dishwasher. If spare parts or accessories from other manufacturers

are used, this will invalidate the warranty, and Miele cannot accept
liability.
Disposal of your old dishwasher
~ Make the door lock inoperative so that children cannot
accidentally shut themselves in. Remove or destroy the locking

bracket of the door lock.
The manufacturer cannot be held liable for damage caused by
non-compliance with these Warning and Safety instructions.
16
CONTENTS
Caring for the environment

Disposal of the packing
material
Disposing of your old

appliance
The packing material protects the dryer

from transport damage. The transport
and protective packing has been
selected from materials which are
environmentally friendly for disposal
and can normally be recycled.
Electrical and electronic appliances

often contain materials which, if
handled or disposed of incorrectly,
could be potentially hazardous to
human health and to the environment.
They are, however, essential for the
correct functioning of your appliance.
Please do not dispose of your old
appliance with your household waste.
The packaging consists of the following

materials:
Outer packaging:
Corrugated cardboard made from up
to 100% recyclable material:
or: Polyethylene (PE) protective wrap
Polyproplylene (PP) strapping
Inner packaging:
Chlorine and fluorine free expanded
polystyrene (EPS)
Base, lid frame and support battens
made from untreated natural wood
from renewable forests
Polyethylene (PE) protective wrap
Rather than just throwing these
materials away, please ensure they are
recycled.
Please dispose of it at your local

community waste collection / recycling
centre. You can also contact your
Chartered Agent for advice.
Ensure that your old appliance presents
no danger to children while being
stored for disposal.
To enable sorting by type of plastic for
recycling, all plastic parts of the
appliance are labelled with international
standard symbols.
17
CONTENTS

Energy saving dishwashing
This dishwasher is exceptionally
economical in its use of water and
electricity.
You can make the most of your
appliance by following these tips:
^ If your household water system is
suitable, this dishwasher can be
connected to a hot water supply for
further economies. If the water is
heated by for example, solar panels,
this would be energy efficient.
However, if your water is heated by
electricity, we would recommend
connection to cold water.
^ For most economical dishwashing,
make full use of the baskets without
overloading the dishwasher.
^ Choose the programme to suit the
type of crockery being washed and
the degree of soiling.
^ Select the "Energy save" programme
for energy-saving dishwashing.
This programme is the most efficient
in terms of energy and water
consumption for cleaning normally
soiled crockery.
^ Follow the detergent manufacturer's
recommendations on detergent
dosage.
^ When using powder or liquid
detergent you can use 1/3 less
detergent if baskets are only half full.
18
CONTENTS
Before using for the first time

To open the door
To close the door

^ Push the baskets right in.
^ Then lift the door upwards and push
until it clicks into position.
^ Pull the handle.

If the door is opened during operation,
all functions are automatically
interrupted.
19
CONTENTS

Water softener
In order to achieve good cleaning
results, the dishwasher needs to
operate with soft water. Hard water
results in the build-up of calcium
deposits on crockery and in the
dishwasher.
Mains water with a hardness level
higher than 0.7 mmol/l (4 d German
scale) needs to be softened. This takes
place automatically in the integrated
softener unit. The softener unit is
suitable for a water hardness level of up
to 12.6 mmol/l (70 d).
The dishwasher is set at the factory

for a hardness level of 0.2 mmol/l
(1 d).
If this setting corresponds to the
hardness of your water, you do not
need to do anything more.
If your water is harder, you will need to
programme the water hardness level.
See following section.
The water softener requires

reactivation salt.
Depending on the water hardness
level ( 21 d), dishwasher salt is not
required if combination tablets are
being used (see "Detergent").
The dishwasher must be
programmed for the water hardness
in your area.
Your local water authority will be able
to advise you of the water hardness
level in your area.
Where the water hardness fluctuates
e.g. between 1.4 - 3.1 mmol/l (8 - 17 d
German scale), always programme the
dishwasher to the higher value
(3.1 mmol/l in this example).
In the event of a fault, it will help the
service technician if you know the
hardness of your local water supply.
^ Enter the water hardness:
mmol/l or d
20
CONTENTS

Programming the water hardness
level
^ Switch the dishwasher off with the
On/Off button K, if it is switched on.
^ Press and hold the Programme
selector button in.
^ Switch the dishwasher on using the
On/Off button K, and hold the
Programme selector button in for at
least another 4 seconds until the
lower right-hand programme
indicator lights up.
If this does not happen, start the
procedure from the beginning again.
^ Press the Turbo button twice.
The "Inlet/Drain" indicator light will flash
briefly 2 times at intervals.
The characters "p 1" will flash one after
the other in the display.
This means that the water hardness
level has been set at 1 d (0.2 mmol/l)
(factory setting).
^ Use the Programme selector button
to select the value which
corresponds to your water hardness
level.
Each press on the button moves you up
a level. When the highest water
hardness level is reached, the setting
starts from the beginning again.
On/Off button K.
d
(German
scale)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37-50
51-60
61-70
mmol/l
2
0.2
4
0.4
5
0.5
7
0.7
9
0.9
11
1.1
13
1.3
14
1.4
16
1.6
18
1.8
20
2.0
22
2.2
23
2.3
25
2.5
27
2.7
29
2.9
31
3.1
32
3.2
34
3.4
36
3.6
38
3.8
40
4.0
41
4.1
43
4.3
45
4.5
47
4.7
49
4.9
50
5.0
52
5.2
54
5.4
56
5.6
58
5.8
59
5.9
61
6.1
63
6.3
65
6.5
67-89
6.7-9.0
9.2-10.8 91-108
11.0-12.6 110-126
Value
displayed
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
50
60
70
21
CONTENTS

Before using the appliance for
the first time, you require:
approx. 2 litres of water,
approx. 2 kg of dishwasher salt,
,Inadvertently filling the salt

reservoir with powder or liquid
dishwasher detergent will damage
the water softener.
domestic dishwasher detergent,

rinse aid formulated for domestic
dishwashers.
Every dishwasher is tested at the
factory.
There will be residual water in the
appliance from this test. It is not an
indication that it has been used
previously.
Filling the salt reservoir

If the water in your area is very soft
and constantly lower than
0.7 mmol/l (4 d), you do not need
to add salt.
The water softener must, however,
still be programmed to correspond
to the water hardness level in your
area. Salt should only be
replenished when the salt indicator
light comes on. In areas with very
soft water this could be after a long
period of time.
,Miele recommends using

specially designed dishwasher salt
to maximize the performance of your
dishwasher and to prevent a
build-up of calcium and limescale in
the dishwasher cabinet, especially if
you live in a hard water area.
Dishwasher salt can be purchased
online at www.miele-shop.com or
directly from Miele. Do not use other
salts such as cooking salt,
agricultural grade or gritting salt.
These may contain insoluble
additives which can impair the
functioning of the water softener.
Important! Before filling the salt

reservoir with dishwasher salt for the
first time, you must fill it with
approx. 2 litres of water to enable
the salt to dissolve. Once the
dishwasher has been used, there is
always sufficient water in the
reservoir.
22
CONTENTS

^ Remove the lower basket and
unscrew the salt reservoir cap.
Water or saline solution will run out
of the reservoir when the cap is
removed. It should therefore only be
removed in order to refill the salt
reservoir.
^ Fill the reservoir with approx. 2 litres
of water (first use only).
Salt indicator
^ Fill the salt reservoir with dishwasher
salt when the salt indicator light
comes on. (If it comes on during a
programme, wait until the end of the
programme).
After the reservoir has been filled, the
water softener is automatically
reactivated the next time the
dishwasher is run. The salt indicator
light may still be illuminated during this
process. It will go out once the salt
concentration has reached the correct
level.
The salt indicator is deactivated when
the dishwasher has been programmed
to a water hardness level below
0.7 mmol/l (4 d).
,Run the "Gentle 45 C"
^ Place the funnel provided over the

salt reservoir and carefully fill with
salt until the reservoir is full. The salt
reservoir holds approx. 2 kg of salt.
programme with the "Turbo" function

immediately (without any crockery in
the dishwasher) to remove any
traces of salt from the cabinet.
^ Clean any excess salt from around

the reservoir opening and then screw
the cap on again firmly.
^ Run the "Gentle 45 C" programme
with the "Turbo" function immediately
(without any crockery in the
dishwasher) to remove any traces of
salt from the cabinet.
23
CONTENTS

Switching off the refill indicators
If you use combination products and do
not want the refill indicators for salt and
detergent to be displayed, you can
switch off both indicators together.
The characters flashing in the display

will show whether the refill indicators
are switched on or off.
"p 1": The refill indicators are
switched on.

On/Off button K.
"p 0": The refill indicators are

switched off.
^ Press the programme selector button

in and, whilst holding it in, switch
the dishwasher on using the On/Off
button K.
Keep the programme selector button
pressed in for at least four seconds
until the lower right-hand programme
indicator comes on.
^ To change the setting, press the

Programme selector button.

^ Press the Turbo button nine times.
The Delay start indicator will flash
The setting is now stored in memory.

On/Off button K.
If you switch to using detergent that
does not contain salt or rinse aid, it
is important to remember to
replenish the salt and rinse aid and
to switch the refill indicators back
on.
24
CONTENTS

Rinse aid
Adding rinse aid
Rinse aid is necessary to ensure water

does not cling and leave marks on
crockery during the drying phase and
helps crockery dry faster after it has
been washed.
Rinse aid is poured into the storage
reservoir and the amount set is
dispensed automatically.
,Inadvertently filling the rinse aid

reservoir with powder or liquid
detergent will damage the reservoir.
Only pour rinse aid formulated for
domestic dishwashers into the
reservoir.
Alternatively, it is possible to use
^ Press the button on the lid of the

rinse aid reservoir in the direction of
the arrow until the flap springs open.
household vinegar with a max. 5%

acid content
or
liquid citric acid up to 10% acid
content.
The resulting rinsing and drying quality
will not, however, be as good as when
rinse aid is used.
,Do not use vinegar with a higher

acid content (e.g. vinegar essence
25% acid). This would damage the
dishwasher.
If you only ever use combination
products containing rinse aid in your
dishwasher, you do not need to add
rinse aid.
25
CONTENTS

Rinse aid indicator
When the light comes on, the reservoir
contains sufficient rinse aid for 2 - 3
programmes only.
^ Add rinse aid in plenty of time.
If you use combination products and
do not want the refill indicators for
salt and detergent to be displayed,
you can switch off both indicators
together (see "Before using for the
first time - Switching off the refill
indicators").
^ Add rinse aid only until it is visible in
the opening.
The rinse aid reservoir holds approx.
110 ml.
Ensure that you refill salt and rinse

aid and switch on the refill indicators
again if you are not using
combination products.
^ Close the flap firmly so that it clicks

into place. Otherwise water can enter
the rinse aid reservoir during a
programme.
^ Wipe up any spilled rinse aid. This
prevents over-foaming occurring
during the next programme.
26
CONTENTS

Setting the rinse aid dosage
The rinse aid dosage can be set from
approx. 0-6 ml. It is set to a
recommended setting of approx. 3 ml
at the factory.
The dosage can turn out to be higher
than the set value due to the automatic
adjustment of the "Sensor wash"
programme.
If spots appear on crockery and
glassware:
^ Increase the rinse aid dosage.
If clouding or smearing appears on
crockery and glassware:
^ Decrease the rinse aid dosage.

On/Off button K.
^ Press the programme selector button
button K.
Keep the programme selector button
until the lower right-hand programme
indicator comes on.
^ Press the Turbo button three times.
The Delay start indicator will flash
p 3 will flash in the display.
This means that the rinse aid dosage
has been set to 3 ml at the factory.
The dosage set will appear in the
display after the p.
^ Use the programme selector button
to select the rinse aid dosage you
want.
The dosage amount alters each time
you press the button.
The programmed rinse aid dosage is
now stored in memory.
On/Off button K.
27
CONTENTS
Loading the dishwasher

Note
Remove coarse food residues from
crockery.
There is no need to rinse items under
running water.
,Do not wash items soiled with

ash, sand, wax, lubricating grease
or paint in the dishwasher.
These materials will cause damage
to the dishwasher.
Crockery can be loaded anywhere in
the baskets, but the following notes
should be observed:
Do not place crockery and cutlery
inside other pieces where they may
be concealed.
Load the crockery so that water can
access all surfaces. This ensures
that they get properly cleaned.
Make sure that all items are securely
positioned.
Wide based items should be placed

at an angle so that water can run off
them freely.
The spray arms must not be blocked
by items which are too tall or hang
through the baskets.
If in doubt, test for free movement by
manually rotating the spray arms.
Make sure that small items cannot
fall through the holders in the
baskets.
Small items, e.g. lids, should
therefore be placed in the cutlery
tray or cutlery basket (depending on
model).
Some foodstuffs may contain natural
dyes, e.g. carrots, tomatoes or
tomato sauce. Plastic items in the
dishwasher may discolour if large
quantities of these foodstuffs find
their way into the appliance on the
crockery. The stability of plastic
items is not affected by this
discolouration.
Hollow items such as cups, glasses,

pans, etc. must be inverted in the
basket.
Tall, narrow, hollow items, e.g.
champagne glasses, should be
placed in the centre of the basket to
ensure better water coverage.
28
CONTENTS

Items not suitable for
dishwashers:
Wooden cutlery and crockery or
items with wooden parts: these may
discolour and fade. The glue used in
these items is not dishwasher-proof
and wooden handles may come
loose after being washed in a
dishwasher.
Craft items, antiques, valuable vases
and decorative glassware are also
not suitable for dishwashers.
Plastic items which are not heat
resistant can melt or lose shape.
Copper, brass, tin and aluminium
items may discolour or become matt.
Colours painted over a glaze
may fade after a number of washes.
Clouding may occur on glasses after
frequent washing. Do not wash
delicate glassware, or glassware
containing lead crystal in a
dishwasher.
We recommend:
When purchasing new crockery and
cutlery, make sure they are
dishwasher-proof.
If delicate glassware is washed in the
dishwasher, ensure that only very low
temperatures are used (see
Programme chart), or a special
glass-care programme is used
(depending on model). This will
reduce the risk of clouding.
Wash particularly delicate glassware
by hand.
Please note
Silverware previously cleaned with a
silver polish may still be damp or
spotted at the end of a programme,
where water has not run off smoothly. It
may need to be rubbed dry with a soft
cloth.
Silver which has been in contact with
foods containing sulphur can discolour.
These include egg yolk, onions,
mayonnaise, mustard, pulses, fish, fish
brine and marinades.
,Aluminium components (e.g.

grease filters) must not be cleaned
with caustic alkaline commercial or
industrial cleaning agents. These
may damage the material, or in
extreme cases, cause a severe
chemical reaction. See section
"Adding detergent" for information
on suitable detergents.
29
CONTENTS

Upper basket
,For safety reasons, do not

operate the dishwasher without the
upper and lower baskets in place.
Cup rack (depending on model)

^ To make room for tall items, raise the
rack upwards.
Glasses can be arranged along the
positioning rail of the cup rack to give
them some support during the
programme.
^ Lower the cup rack and lean the
glasses against it.
^ Use the upper basket for small,

lightweight and delicate items such
as cups, saucers, glasses, dessert
bowls, etc. Shallow pans or casserole
dishes can also be placed in the
upper basket.
^ Long items such as soup ladles,
mixing spoons and long knives
should be placed lying down across
the front of the upper basket.
30
CONTENTS

Adjusting the upper basket
In order to gain more space for taller
pieces of crockery in the bottom or
upper basket, the upper basket can be
adjusted on three levels with 2 cm
between each level.
The upper basket can also be set at an
angle with one side high and the other
side low. This can be useful to help
prevent water being left in deep dishes
etc. Ensure, however, that the basket
can be inserted smoothly into the
cabinet. It is better to adjust the basket
before loading it.
Depending on the setting of the upper

basket, the following plate dimensions
can be accommodated.
Dishwasher with cutlery tray
(see data plate for model number)
Upper
basket
level
Plate C in cm
Upper basket
Lower
basket
Normal
XXL
Top
15
19
31
Middle
17
21
29
Bottom
19
23
27
^ Pull out the upper basket.

Dishwasher with cutlery basket
(see data plate for model number)
Upper
basket
level
Plate C in cm
Upper basket
Lower
basket
Normal
XXL
Top
20
24
31
Middle
22
26
29
Bottom
24
28
27
To raise the upper basket:

^ Pull the basket up until it clicks into
place.
To lower the upper basket:
^ Pull upwards on the levers at either
side of the upper basket.
^ Adjust the basket to the desired
height and then push the levers
securely back down into position.
31
CONTENTS

Lower basket
^ For larger and heavier items such as
plates, serving platters, saucepans,
bowls, etc.
You can also place glasses, cups,
small plates and saucers in the lower
basket.
Do not place thin, delicate glassware
in the lower basket.
Heavily soiled items
Dishwashers with cutlery tray
^ Place large platters and dishes in the

centre of the lower basket.
When tilted, plates up to 35 cm in
diameter can be accommodated.
Dishwashers with cutlery basket
32
CONTENTS

Cutlery
Cutlery tray (depending on model)
If spoon handles do not fit between the

holders, lay them the other way round.
^ Arrange the cutlery in the tray as
shown.
To make unloading much easier,
cutlery should be grouped in zones,
one for knives, one for forks, one for
spoons, etc.
Spoon heads should be placed in
contact with at least one of the serrated
retainers on the base of the cutlery tray
to ensure that water runs off them
freely.
The upper spray arm must not be
blocked by items which are too big
(e.g. cake slices).
33
CONTENTS

Cutlery basket (depending on model)
The cutlery basket can be placed

anywhere on the front rows of spikes in
the lower basket.
^ Fit it onto the cutlery basket if

required.
^ In an appliance with a cutlery basket

(depending on model) cutlery is
cleaned and dried more efficiently if
placed in the basket with the handles
downwards.
However, to avoid the risk of injury,
knives, forks and other utensils with
sharp points must be placed with the
handles upwards.
^ Place small items of cultlery in the
individual slots on three sides of the
cutlery basket.
Cutlery insert for the cutlery basket
^ Insert cutlery with the handles facing

downwards, and distribute them
evenly along the insert.
Use the insert supplied for heavily

soiled spoons.
The insert separates the items so that
they can be more easily accessed by
water.
34
CONTENTS
Operation
Detergent
,Only use detergents formulated

for domestic dishwashers. Do not
use washing-up liquid.
Active ingredients
Modern detergents contain various
active ingredients, the most important
of which are:
Phosphates to prevent calcification.
Alkalis to aid removal of dried on
soiling.
Enzymes to break down starch and
loosen protein.
Oxygen based bleaching agents to
remove coloured stains (e.g. tea,
coffee, tomato sauce).
Most dishwasher detergents contain
phosphate and are mildly alkaline with
enzymes and oxygen based bleaching
agents. Phosphate free products are
rare.
Types of detergent:
Powder and liquid gel detergents.
These detergents allow you to adjust
the amount dispensed according to
the amount of load and level of
soiling.
Tab detergents. These are suitable
for most levels of soiling.
You can also buy combination

products.
In addition to detergent, these products
contain rinse aid and salt substitutes.
They are available as "3 in 1" or, when
they also contain other components
such as glass and stainless steel
protective additives and enhanced
cleaning power, as "5 in 1", "7 in 1",
"All in 1", etc.
Refer to the manufacturer's packaging
as to whether combination products are
suitable for the water hardness level in
your area.
Please note that the cleaning and
drying results of combination
detergents can vary greatly.
For optimum cleaning and drying
results, use Miele dishwasher
detergent and add Miele salt and
Miele rinse aid separately.
Under certain circumstances
unsatisfactory washing and drying
results might be noticed when using
combination dishwasher detergents.
These products contain a combination
of detergent and rinse aid or detergent
and salt (2 in 1) or detergent, rinse aid
and salt (3 in 1). Drying results might
not be as good as expected or
residues or flecks might be left on
crockery. If results are still
unsatisfactory, even after seeking
advice from the detergent
manufacturer, we suggest that you
change to a different product or use a
traditional dishwasher detergent.
35
CONTENTS
Operation
Dispensing
^ Follow the dosage recommended by
the manufacturer on the packaging.
^ Unless directed otherwise, use one
detergent tab or add 20 to 30 ml to
compartment II, depending on the
level of soiling.
With very heavy soiling you can also
add a small amount of detergent to
compartment l (see "Programme
chart").
^ Tabs may not dissolve completely
when the Quick wash 40 C
programme (depending on model) is
used.
Failure to dispense the
recommended amount of detergent
may impair cleaning results.
,Avoid inhalation of powder

detergents. Dishwasher detergents
contain irritant or corrosive
ingredients which can cause
burning in the nose, mouth and
throat if swallowed, or inhibit
breathing. Consult a doctor immediately if detergent has been
swallowed or inhaled.
Keep detergent and other
household agents out of the reach of
children at all times. Keep children
away from the dishwasher when the
door is open. There could still be
detergent residues in the cabinet. To
avoid the danger of children coming
into contact with the dishwasher
detergent, only add detergent just
before starting the programme and
close the door, activating the child
safety lock (if your dishwasher is
fitted with one).
36
CONTENTS
Operation
Adding detergent
For information
Compartment I holds max. 10 ml,
Compartment II holds max. 50 ml.
There are markings in compartment II
to assist with dispensing: 20, 30. The
marks indicate a level of approx. 20 or
30 ml when the door is open in a
horizontal position.
^ Press the opening catch on the

detergent dispenser. The flap will
spring open.
The flap is always open at the end of a
programme.
^ Add the required amount of

detergent and close the flap.
^ Make sure that the detergent
packaging is properly closed after
use to avoid it getting damp and
becoming lumpy.
37
CONTENTS
Operation
Switching on
Starting the programme
^ Turn on the tap if it is turned off.
^ Start the programme by closing the

door.
^ Open the door.

^ Make sure the spray arms are not
obstructed.
^ Switch the dishwasher on with the
On/Off button K.
The On/Off indicator K and the
indicator for the last used programme
will light up.
A programme can only be cancelled

in the first few minutes. Otherwise
the programme must continue to the
end so that important programme
stages (e.g. reactivating the water
softener) are not omitted.
Selecting a programme
Choose your programme according to
the type of load and how dirty it is.
The different programmes and their
uses are described in the Programme
chart later on in this booklet.
^ Select the programme required with
the Programme selector button.
The indicator light for the programme
selected comes on.
The programme duration will appear in
hours and minutes in the time display.
You can now select additional
functions (see "Additional functions").
If any additional functions have been
selected, the relevant indicator light(s)
will also come on.
38
CONTENTS
Operation
Time display
Standby
The duration of the programme

selected appears in hours and minutes
in the display before the programme
begins. During the programme, the
time left until the end of the programme
is displayed.
To save energy, the dishwasher will

switch to Standby mode a few minutes
after the last time a button has been
pressed or at the end of the
programme. The indicator lights and
the time display will go out, and only
the K indicator will flash slowly.
The time displayed may vary with the

same programme. This is partly
because of the water temperature at
each intake, the reactivation cycle, the
type of detergent and partly because of
the amount of crockery and how dirty it
is.
When a programme is selected for the
first time, the display shows an average
time for a cold water intake.
The times shown in the Programme
chart refer to standard test loads and
temperatures.
Each time a programme is run, the
electronic unit takes the new conditions
into account, and calculates the time
required.
^ To switch the lights and display back

on, press the K button.
If the dishwasher is not switched off at
the end of the programme, it will switch
off completely after a few minutes in
Standby mode (see "Additional
functions - Optimise standby").
The dishwasher will not switch to
Standby mode whilst a programme
is running, if salt or rinse aid needs
to be refilled, or if there is a fault.
The refill indicators can be switched

off if you use combination products
and the dishwasher is supposed to
go into Standby mode (see "Before
using for the first time").
However, a fault message cannot be
switched off.
39
CONTENTS
Operation
At the end of a programme
Switching off
^ Open the door slightly to check that

the programme has finished.
At the end of a programme:
0 appears in the time display.

If the programme indicator light is
still on, the programme has not yet
finished. Close the door again to
allow the programme to finish.
You can now unload the dishwasher
(see "Unloading the dishwasher").
,To prevent the risk of steam

damage to the worktop edging
above the dishwasher, it is
advisable to leave the door closed
until you are ready to unload the
crockery. Alternatively, you can
open the door fully until the crockery
is cool enough to unload. Do not
leave the door only partially open.
^ Open the door.

On/Off button K.
The dishwasher will continue to use
electricity until it is switched off with
the K button.
If the dishwasher is not going to be
used for a longer period of time, e. g.
whilst on holiday, the tap should be
turned off.
Unloading the dishwasher

Dishes tend to break and chip more
easily when they are hot.
Allow the dishes to cool until they are
comfortable enough to handle before
unloading them.
If you open the door fully after switching
off, the dishes will cool much faster.
First unload the lower basket, then the
upper basket and finally the cutlery tray
(depending on model).
This will prevent water drops from the
upper basket and cutlery tray from
falling onto the dishes in the lower
basket.
40
CONTENTS
Operation
Interrupting a programme
Operation is interrupted as soon as the
door is opened.
If the door is closed again, the
programme will continue from the point
it was at before the door was opened.
,Water in the dishwasher may be

hot. Danger of scalding!
Only open the door if absolutely
necessary and exercise extreme
caution when doing so. Before
closing the door again, leave it ajar
for approx. 20 seconds. This will
enable the temperature in the wash
cabinet to settle. Then raise the
door upwards until the catch
engages.
Changing a programme
If the detergent dispenser flap has
already opened, do not change the
programme.
If a programme has already started and
you wish to change it, proceed as
follows:
^ Open the door.
On/Off button K.
^ Switch the dishwasher on again with
the On/Off sensor K.
door.
41
CONTENTS
Additional options
Turbo
Delay start
The "Turbo" function is used to reduce

the duration of programmes in which
this function is available.
The start time of a programme can be

delayed, e.g. to benefit from economy
rates of electricity. A Delay start time of
between 30 minutes and 24 hours can
be selected.
In order to achieve optimum cleaning

results, consumption rates are
increased with this option.
^ Open the door.
^ Switch the dishwasher on with the
On/Off button K.
The K indicator light comes on.
^ Select a programme.
^ Press the Turbo button.
The Turbo indicator light will come on.
^ The programme can now be started.
The option selected is active on all
programmes until the setting is
changed.
With a Delay start time of between 30

minutes and 9 hours 30 minutes, the
delay is set in 30-minute stages. For 10
hours or more, it is set in one-hour
increments.
When using the Delay start function,
make sure that the detergent
compartment is dry before adding
detergent. Wipe dry with a cloth if
necessary. If the compartment is
wet, powder detergent can become
lumpy and stick to the dispenser,
with the result that it is not fully
dispensed. Do not use liquid
detergent when selecting Delay
start, as it can run into the
dishwasher before it is required.
42
CONTENTS
Additional options
^ Open the door.
^ Switch the dishwasher on using the
K button.
The K indicator light comes on.
^ Press the , button.
The last Delay start time used will
appear in the time display. The ,
indicator light comes on.
^ Set the required Delay start time
using the , button.
If the , button is kept pressed in, the
time will increase automatically up to
24^. To start again with 30 minutes,
press the , button twice.
^ Close the door.
The time starts counting down until the
programme start time: in one-hour
steps for Delay start periods of over 10
hours, and in minutes for Delay start
periods of under 10 hours.
When the set time is reached, the
programme selected will begin
automatically. The time left for a
programme to run then appears in the
display, the , indicator light goes out
and the indicator light for the selected
programme comes on.
How the Delay start time appears in

the display:
up to 59 minutes:
e.g. 30 minutes = 30
1 hour up to 9 hours 30 minutes:
e.g. 5 hours = 5.00
10 hours or more:
e.g. 15 hours = 15^
Starting a programme before the
Delay start period has elapsed
A programme can be started before the
Delay start period has elapsed.
Proceed as follows:
^ Open the door.
^ Switch the dishwasher off with the K
button.
^ Switch the dishwasher on again with
the On/Off button K.
door.
43
CONTENTS
Additional options
Buzzer
^ Press the Turbo button four times.
A buzzer sounds at the end of the

programme or if there is a fault.
The Turbo indicator light will flash

It will sound four times at intervals at the

end of a programme with a short pause
in between.
The flashing sequence in the time

display shows whether the buzzer at
the end of the programme is activated
or deactivated:
In the event of a fault, the buzzer will

sound four times in one interval without
a pause.
The buzzer is activated as standard at
the factory.
You can deactivate the buzzer at the
end of a programme if you wish. The
buzzer will still sound if there is a fault,
even if it has been deactivated.
"p 1": The buzzer is activated

"p 0": The buzzer is deactivated
button.
^ Open the door.

button.
^ Press the Programme selector button
button K.
Keep the Programme selector button
until the lower right-hand indicator
light comes on.
44
CONTENTS
Additional options
Adjusting Sensor wash
You can adjust the Sensor wash
programme so that it will remove
stubborn soiling in a lightly soiled load.
^ Open the door.
button.
button K.
light comes on.

display shows whether the "Adjust
Sensor wash" function is activated or
deactivated.
"p 1": The "Adjust Sensor wash"
function is activated.
"p 0": The "Adjust Sensor wash"
function is deactivated.
button.

^ Press the Turbo button five times.
45
CONTENTS
Additional options
Optimise standby
^ Open the door.
To save energy, the dishwasher will

switch to Standby mode a few minutes
after the last time a button has been
pressed or at the end of the
programme. The indicator lights and
the time display will go out, and only
the K indicator light will flash slowly.

button.
If the dishwasher is not switched off at

the end of the programme or the door is
not opened, it will switch off completely
after a few minutes in Standby mode.
The Optimise standby function can be
deactivated if wished. The display and
the indicator lights will not go out, and
the time lapse before the dishwasher
switches off will increase to approx. 6
hours, resulting in higher energy
consumption.
The dishwasher will not switch to
Standby mode whilst a programme
is running, if salt or rinse aid needs
to be refilled, or if there is a fault.

button K.
light comes on.
^ Press the Turbo button eight times.
display shows whether the "Optimise
standby" function is activated or
deactivated.
"p 1": "Optimise standby" is activated.
"p 0": "Optimise standby" is
deactivated.
button.
46
CONTENTS
Additional options
Factory default
If you have altered any settings from
the factory default, you can reset them
back to the factory default settings as
follows:
^ Open the door.
button.
button K.
light comes on.

display shows whether a setting other
than the factory default setting has
been set.
"p 1": All settings are set to factory
default settings.
"p 0": At least one setting has been
changed.
^ To reset to the factory default
settings, press the Programme
selector button.
button.

^ Press the Turbo button 12 times.
The Turbo indicator light will give one
long flash and two brief flashes at
intervals.
47
CONTENTS
Cleaning and care

Check the condition of your
dishwasher regularly (approx. every
4 - 6 months). This way faults and
problems can be avoided.
,The outer surfaces of the

dishwasher are susceptible to
scratching.
Contact with unsuitable cleaning
agents can alter or discolour the
outer surfaces.
Cleaning the wash cabinet
Cleaning the door and the door

seal
^ Wipe the door seal regularly with a
damp cloth to remove food deposits.
^ When the dishwasher is being
loaded, food and drink residues may
drip onto the sides of the dishwasher
door.
These surfaces are outside the wash
cabinet and are not accessed by water
from the spray arms. Any soiling should
be wiped off these surfaces before the
door is closed to avoid the formation of
mould inside the wash cabinet.
The wash cabinet is largely

self-cleaning, provided that the correct
amount of detergent is always used.
If, however, there are limescale or
grease deposits in the cabinet, these
can be removed with the Original Miele
dishwasher conditioning agent
(available from Miele or at
www.miele-shop.com, depending on
country). Follow the dosage
recommended by the manufacturer on
the packaging.
If you only wash at low temperatures (<
50 C) over a long period of time,
organic deposits and unpleasant
odours can form in the machine. To
clean the wash cabinet and prevent the
formation of unpleasant odours, the
"Pots & pans 75 C" programme should
be run at least once a month.
You should also clean the filters in the
wash cabinet on a regular basis.
48
CONTENTS
Cleaning and care

Cleaning the control panel and
door front
,Remove any soiling immediately.

If not, it might become impossible to
remove and could cause the outer
surface to alter or discolour.
^ The control panel should only be
wiped with a damp cloth.
^ Clean the front using a sponge, a
solution of warm water and a little
washing-up liquid. Wipe dry using a
soft cloth.
For cleaning, you can also use a
clean, damp microfibre cloth without
any cleaning agent.
To avoid damaging the outer surface,

do not use:
cleaning agents containing soda,
ammonia, acids or chlorides,
cleaning agents containing
descaling agents,
abrasive cleaning agents, e.g.
powder cleaners and cream
cleaners,
solvent-based cleaning agents,
stainless steel cleaners,
dishwasher cleaner,
oven sprays,
glass cleaning agents,
hard, abrasive sponges and
brushes, e.g. pot scourers,
dirt erasers,
sharp metal scrapers,
steam cleaners.
49
CONTENTS
Cleaning and care

Cleaning the filters in the wash
cabinet
The filter combination in the base of the
wash cabinet retains coarse soil from
the suds solution, preventing it
accessing the circulation system and
re-entering the cabinet through the
spray arms.
,This dishwasher must not be

used without all the filters in place.
Collection of coarse soil may cause the
filters to clog. The level of soiling and
time it takes before the filters need
cleaning will vary depending on use.
Check the condition of the filters
regularly and clean them if necessary.
^ Switch the dishwasher off.
^ Turn the handle anti-clockwise to

release the filter combination a.
^ Take the filter combination out b,
remove any coarse particles and
rinse the filter well under running
water. Use a nylon brush if
necessary.
,Ensure that coarse soil doesn't

get into the circulation system and
cause a blockage.
50
CONTENTS
Cleaning and care
To clean the inside of the filter, the flap

must be opened:
^ Press catches a together in the
direction of the arrows as shown, and
open the filter b.
^ Rinse all the filters under running
water.
^ Then close the flap so that the catch
engages.
^ Replace the filter combination so that

it lies flat in the base of the wash
cabinet.
^ Then turn the handle clockwise until
both arrows point towards each
other. The filter combination is locked
in place.
,Take care when you are fitting

the filter combination that it is
secured in position correctly.
Otherwise coarse soil could get into
the circulation system and cause a
blockage.
51
CONTENTS
Cleaning and care

Cleaning the spray arms
^ Remove the lower basket.
Particles of food can get stuck in the

spray arm jets and bearings. The spray
arms should therefore be inspected
and cleaned regularly (approx. every 4
- 6 months).
^ Switch the dishwasher off.
Remove the spray arms as follows:
^ Take out the cutlery tray (if your
dishwasher is fitted with one).
^ Push the top spray arm upwards to
engage the inner ratchet. Then
unscrew the spray arm.
^ Push the middle spray arms upwards

a to engage the ratchet. Then
unscrew the spray arm b.
^ Pull the lower spray arm firmly

upwards to remove it.
^ Use a pointed object to push food

particles into the spray arm jets.
^ Rinse thoroughly under running
water.
^ Replace the spray arms and check
that they rotate freely.
52
CONTENTS
Problem solving guide

With the aid of the following guide, minor problems can be easily corrected
without contacting Miele. This will save time and money.
Please note that a call-out fee will be applied for unnecessary service visits where
the problem could have been rectified as described in these Operating
instructions.
,Installation work and repairs to electrical appliances must only be carried

out by a suitably qualified and competent person in strict accordance with
current local and national safety regulations. The manufacturer cannot be held
liable for unauthorised work.
Technical problems
Problem
Possible cause
The dishwasher does The door is not properly
not start.
closed.
The appliance is not
plugged in.
The fuse is defective or
has tripped.
The dishwasher
stops during a
programme.
The appliance is not

switched on.
The fuse is defective or
has tripped.
Remedy
Push the door firmly shut.
Insert the plug and switch on
at the socket.
Reset or replace the fuse.
(Minimum fuse rating - see
data plate).
Press the On/Off button K
and select a programme.
Reset or replace the fuse
(Minimum fuse rating - see
data plate).
If the same mains fuse
trips again, call Miele.
53
CONTENTS

Problem
Possible cause
The buzzer is sounding. There may be a

All the Programme
technical fault.
indicators flash when
the door is open.
Fault code FXX appears
in the display.
The drain pump works

even when the door is
open.
Fault F70:
The Waterproof system
has reacted.
Remedy
Switch the dishwasher off
with the On/Off button K.
After a few seconds:
Switch the dishwasher on.
Select the programme
required with the
Programme selector
button.
Close the door.
If the indicator lights flash
again, there is a technical
fault.
Call Miele.
Turn off the tap.
Call Miele.
54
CONTENTS

The dishwasher does not fill/drain.
Problem
Possible cause
Remedy
The dishwasher
stops working
shortly after the
start of the
programme.
The buzzer sounds.
The Inlet/Drain
indicator flashes
when the door is
opened.
The dishwasher
stops during a
programme.
The buzzer sounds.
The Inlet/Drain
indicator flashes
when the door is
opened.
Fault code FXX
appears in the
display.
The tap is turned

off.
Turn on the tap fully.
Fault F12/F13:
Water intake is
restricted.
Fault F11:
Water outlet is
restricted, water
remains in the
wash cabinet at
the end of a
programme.
Before rectifying the problem, you

must:
Switch the dishwasher off with the
On/Off button K.
Turn on the tap fully.
Clean the water inlet filter (see
"Maintenance").
The water pressure at the intake is
lower than 30 kPa (0.3 bar).
Seek professional advice.
Clean the filter combination. See
"Cleaning and care".
Clean the drain pump. See
"Maintenance".
Clean the non-return valve. See
"Maintenance".
Remove any kink in the drain hose.
After this, switch the dishwasher
back on with the On/Off button K.
55
CONTENTS

General problems
Problem
The indicator lights
and the time display
are dark. Only the K
indicator is flashing
slowly.
Detergent residue is
left in the dispenser at
the end of a
programme.
The detergent
dispenser lid cannot
be closed properly.
At the end of a
programme there is a
film of moisture on
the inside of the door
and the interior walls.
Water remains in the
wash cabinet at the
end of a programme.
Possible cause
The indicator lights and
the time display have
switched off automatically
to save energy (Standby
mode).
Remedy
Press the On/Off button K.
Standby will be cancelled.
The dispenser was still

Make sure the dispenser is
damp when detergent was dry before adding
added.
detergent.
Clogged detergent residue Clean the detergent from
is blocking the catch.
the catch.
This is caused by the
drying system and does
not indicate a fault.
The filter combination in

the wash cabinet is
clogged.
The drain pump or
non-return valve may be
blocked.
The drain hose is kinked.
The moisture will dissipate

after a short while.
Before rectifying the

problem, you must:
Switch the dishwasher off
with the On/Off button K.
Clean the filter combination.
See "Cleaning and care".
Clean the drain pump or the
non-return valve. See
"Maintenance".
Remove any kink from the
drain hose.
56
CONTENTS

Noises
Problem
Knocking noise in the
wash cabinet.
Possible cause
A spray arm is knocking
against an item in a
basket.
Rattling noise in the

wash cabinet.
Items of crockery are

insecure in the wash
cabinet.
A foreign object (e.g. a
cherry stone) has
becomed lodged in the
drain pump.
Knocking noise in the

water pipes.
This may be caused by

the on-site installation or
the cross-section of the
piping.
Remedy
Interrupt the programme,
and rearrange the items
which are obstructing the
spray arm.
Interrupt the programme,
and rearrange the items of
crockery.
Remove the foreign object
from the drain pump (see
"Maintenance - Cleaning
the drain pump and
non-return valve").
This has no influence on
dishwasher function. If in
doubt, contact a suitably
qualified plumber.
57
CONTENTS

Unsatisfactory washing result
Problem
Possible cause
The dishes are not The dishes were not loaded
clean.
correctly.
The programme was not
powerful enough.
There is some stubborn
soiling although most of the
crockery is only lightly soiled
(e.g. with tea stains).
Not enough detergent was
used.
Items are blocking the path
of the spray arms.
The filter combination in the
base of the wash cabinet is
not clean or is not correctly
fitted.
This may cause the spray
arm jets to become blocked.
The non-return valve is
blocked in the open position.
Dirty water has flowed back
into the wash cabinet.
Smearing appears The rinse aid dosage is set
on glassware and too high.
cutlery, there is a
bluish sheen on
the surface of
glassware; film
can be wiped off.
Remedy
See notes in "Loading the
dishwasher".
Select a more intensive
programme (see
"Programme chart").
Use the "Adjust Sensor
wash" function (see
"Additional functions").
Use more detergent, or
change your detergent.
Rearrange the items so that
the spray arms can rotate
freely.
Clean and/or fit the filter
combination correctly.
Clean the spray arm jets
(see "Cleaning and care").
Clean the drain pump and

the non-return valve (see
"Maintenance").
Reduce the dosage (see
"Before using for the first
time - Rinse aid").
58
CONTENTS

Problem
Possible cause
Remedy
Dishes, cutlery and The amount of rinse aid may Replenish the reservoir,
glasses are not dry be insufficient, or the rinse
increase the dosage or
or are flecked.
aid reservoir is empty.
change the brand of rinse
aid (see "Before using for the
first time - Rinse aid").
Items were taken out of the Leave them in for longer (see
cabinet too soon.
"Operation").
Combination products have Change your detergent, or
been used which have
replenish the rinse aid (see
impaired drying
"Rinse aid").
performance.
White residue is
Not enough rinse aid was
Increase the dosage (see
visible on cutlery used.
and crockery,
time - Setting the rinse aid
clouding occurs
dosage").
on glassware; film There is no salt in the salt
Fill the salt reservoir (see
can be wiped off.
reservoir.
time - Filling the salt
reservoir").
The salt reservoir cap has
Replace it, making sure that
not been screwed on
it screws back on correctly.
correctly.
An unsuitable combination
Change your detergent. Use
detergent has been used.
standard tablets or powder
detergent.
The water softener is
Select a higher water
programmed to a setting
softener setting (see "Water
which is too low.
softener").
59
CONTENTS

Problem
Possible cause
Remedy
Glassware has a
This may be caused by the
brown or blue tinge, detergent.
and film cannot be
wiped off.
Change your detergent.
Glassware is dull
The glassware is not
and discoloured;
dishwasher-proof. The
film cannot be wiped surfaces are affected.
off.
There is no remedy.
Purchase glassware which
is dishwasher-proof.
Tea or lipstick stains The wash temperature of

have not been
the selected programme
completely removed. was too low.
The bleaching effect of the
detergent used is too low.
Plastic items are
Natural dyes e.g. from
discoloured.
carrots, tomatoes or
ketchup may be the cause.
The amount of detergent
used or its bleaching effect
was not sufficient to deal
with natural dyes.
There are rust stains The affected items are not
on cutlery.
corrosion resistant.
Select a programme with a

higher wash temperature.
A programme was not run

after dishwasher salt was
added. Traces of salt have
got into the wash cycle.
The salt reservoir cap has

not been screwed on
correctly.
Change your detergent.

Use more detergent (see
"Operation - Detergent").
Discolouration is irreversible.
There is no remedy.
Purchase cutlery which is
dishwasher safe.
Always run the "Gentle 45
C" programme with the
"Turbo" function, without any
crockery in the dishwasher,
after adding dishwasher
salt.
Replace it, making sure that
it screws back on correctly.
60
CONTENTS
Maintenance
Cleaning the water inlet filter
A filter is incorporated in the screw
connection of the valve on the water
inlet hose. The filter must be cleaned
when dirty, otherwise insufficient water
will flow into the wash cabinet.
,The plastic housing of the water

connection contains an electrical
component. It must not be dipped in
water.
Recommendation
If the mains water contains a large
amount of insoluble substances, we
recommend fitting a large-area filter in
the connection between the tap and the
water inlet hose threaded union. This
filter is available from Miele.
Cleaning the filter:
^ Disconnect the dishwasher from the
mains supply. Switch off at the mains
socket and withdraw the plug.
^ Close the tap.
^ Unscrew the inlet hose.
^ Carefully remove the seal.

^ Withdraw the filter using pointed
pliers and rinse clean under running
water.
^ Replace the filter and seal, making
sure they are sitting correctly.
^ Reconnect the inlet hose to the tap,
making sure it goes on correctly and
is not cross-threaded.
^ Turn on the tap gradually to test for
leaks. If there is a leak, the inlet hose
might not be on securely, or it may
have been screwed on at an angle.
Unscrew and reconnect the water
inlet valve correctly.
61
CONTENTS
Maintenance
Cleaning the drain pump and
non-return valve
If the water has not been pumped away
at the end of a programme, the drain
pump or the non-return valve might be
blocked. They are, however, easy to
clean.
^ Disconnect the dishwasher from the
mains supply. Switch off at the mains
socket and withdraw the plug.
^ Take the filter combination out of the
wash cabinet (see "Cleaning and
care - Cleaning the filters in the wash
cabinet").
^ Scoop the water out of the cabinet
using a suitable container or utensil.
The drain pump is situated under the

non-return valve (see arrow).
^ Remove all foreign objects from the
drain pump (watch out for glass or
bone splinters which are particularly
difficult to detect and could cause
injury). Turn the drain pump impeller
by hand to check that there are no
more obstructions. You will feel a little
resistance when you turn the
impeller.
^ Carefully replace the non-return valve
and secure it with the catch.
,Ensure that the catch engages

correctly.
^ Press the catch for the non-return
valve inwards a.
^ Lift out the non-return valve b, and
rinse well under running water.
Be careful not to damage any

delicate components when cleaning
the drain pump and the non-return
valve.
^ Remove all foreign objects from the

non-return valve.
62
CONTENTS
After sales service

Repairs
Future updates
In the event of any faults that you

cannot remedy yourself, please
contact:
The programme update function is

designed to enable a service
technician to update your appliance's
electronics in keeping with advances in
technology.
Miele
You will find the telephone number
and address of Miele on the back
cover of the manual.
Information regarding programme

updates will be made known by Miele
as and when such developments
become available.
^ When contacting Miele, please quote

the model type and serial number of
your appliance, both of which are
shown on the data plate on the
right-hand side of the door.
63
CONTENTS
Comparison tests
Test standard:
AS/NZS 2007.1:2005, AS/NZS 2007.2:2005;

AS/NZS 6400:2005
Standard programme for

energy label comparison tests:
Energy Save
Capacity:
14 place settings
Amount of detergent:
5.0 g in compartment I,
27.5 g in compartment II
Rinse aid dispensing:
Setting 5 (approx. 5 ml)
Drying measurements:
Door ajar using a block of approximately

50 mm upon completion of dry test.
Upper basket level:

Position:
Bottom
Loading examples
Pictures illustrating how to load the dishwasher are shown on the following pages.
Do not collapse or remove inserts.
Press the bottle holder inwards and remove it from the bottom basket.
64
CONTENTS
Comparison tests
Upper basket
Lower basket
Cutlery tray
65
CONTENTS
Programme chart
Crockery
Mixed,
everyday crockery,
including pots and pans
Glasses and plastic

containers, sensitive to
high temperatures
Soiling
Fresh to dried-on soiling
Programme
Variable,
sensor controlled wash
Shortened cycle
Fresh,
easily removed
food deposits
Low temperature for a

gentle wash
Mixed crockery
Standard programme
values
Normal,
lightly dried-on
soiling
Shortened cycle
Water and
energy-saving cycle
Pots
pans,
everyday
porecelain and
cutlery
Stubborn,
dried-on food
deposits containing starch
or protein1)
Maximum wash power
Shortened cycle
1)
Food such as potatoes, rice, pasta, stews or bakes can leave starchy deposits on crockery.
Deposits containing protein can be left by food such as meat, fish, eggs or casseroles.
66
CONTENTS
Programme chart
Programme
Detergent
Compartment I 2)
Compartment II 2)
25 ml
or
1 Tab
20 ml
or
1 Tab
25 ml
or
1 Tab 3)
25 ml
or
1 Tab
10 ml
25 ml
or
1 Tab
Sensor wash
+ Turbo
Gentle 45 C
Light soiling 50 C
+ Turbo
Energy save
Pot & pans 75 C
+ Turbo
2)
3)
see "Detergent"
In some cases, tabs may not dissolve completely.
67
CONTENTS
Programme chart
Programme
Programme sequence
Pre-wash
Sensor wash
Main wash
C
Final rinse
C
Drying
Variable programme sequence,

sensor controlled adjustment to amount of crockery and soiling
If required
45-65
Gentle 45 C !
45
1)
45
Energy save
Interim rinse
Light soiling 50 C
Pots & pans 75 C
If required
X
68
55
45
50
68
75
68
1) Standard programme for energy labelling.
68
CONTENTS
Programme chart
Consumption
Energy
Duration
Water
Cold water
connection
15 C
kWh 2)
Hot water
connection
55 C
kWh 2)
Litres
Cold water connection

15 C
h:min
Hot water connection

55 C
h:min
0.95-1.35
0.70-1.00
10.0-17.0
1:36-2:38
1:23-2:21
0.85
0.45
13.0
1:40
1:30
0.72
0.32
12.7
2:35
2:25
1.20
0.90
10.0
1:42
1:33
1.55
1.15
13.0
2:40
2:29
2) The electrical energy used by the appliance.

Note: The electrical energy stated does not take into consideration the hot water supply energy from
an external source.
The durations given can vary depending on individual circumstances.
Selecting the "Turbo" function (depending on model) can reduce the programme duration by up to 50
minutes with an increase in electricity consumption of up to 0.2 kWh.
69
CONTENTS
Optional accessories
To make the most of your dishwasher
Optional accessories for particular purposes are available from your Miele
Chartered Agent or from Miele (some may be supplied as standard, depending on
model).
If you would like to
you will need to order
... wash a Miele Cappuccinatore
a Cappuccinatore insert for the

upper basket
... wash additional items of cutlery
a cutlery basket for the lower

basket
... wash long-stemmed glassware
a glass rack for the lower basket
70
CONTENTS
This dishwasher is supplied with a
mains cable and moulded plug ready
for connection to an AC single phase
supply, (230 V 50 Hz for NZ and
Australia) via a fused plug and suitable
switched socket.
,The electrical socket must be

easily accessible after the
dishwasher has been installed.
Do not connect the washing
machine to the mains electricity
supply by an extension lead.
Extension leads do not guarantee
the required safety of the appliance
(e.g. danger of overheating).
,Before connecting the

dishwasher, check that the
connection data on the data plate
(voltage and rated load) matches
the mains electricity supply. If in any
doubt, consult a qualified
electrician.
Technical data can be found on the
data plate on the right-hand side of the
door.
If the connection cable is damaged, it

must be replaced by a Miele approved
service technician only in order to
protect the user from danger.
Connection should be made via a
suitable switched socket which is easily
accessible. For extra safety, it is
advisable to install a suitable residual
current device (RCD).
The appliance must not be connected
to an isolated inverter which is
connected to a self-sufficient power
supply, e.g. solar power supply.
Voltage peaks when the appliance is
switched on can cause a safety
switch-off and the electronics may also
be damaged. The appliance must not
be operated in conjunction with
energy-saving plugs either as the
energy intake of the appliance is
reduced and it will overheat.
71
CONTENTS
Water connection
The Miele Waterproof system
Provided that your dishwasher has
been installed correctly, the Miele
waterproof anti-leak system will protect
you from water damage throughout its
lifetime.
Connection to the water

supply
,Water in the dishwasher must

not be used as drinking water.
The dishwasher may be connected
to a cold or hot water supply, max.
60 C.
We would only recommend
connection to a hot water supply if it
is economical. When connected to a
hot water supply, all programme
stages which would otherwise be
carried out with cold water will be
carried out with hot water, thus
increasing time and energy costs.
The water pressure (flow pressure at

the take-off point) must be between
30 and 1000 kPa (0.3 and 10 bar). If
the water pressure is too high, a
pressure reducer valve must be
fitted.
After commissioning the appliance,
ensure that the water inlet does not
leak.
,To avoid any damage to the

appliance, the dishwasher must only
be connected to a fully vented
plumbing system.
The inlet hose is approx. 1.5 m long.

A 1.5 m long flexible metal extension
hose, pressure tested to 14000 kPa/
140 bar, is available as an optional
accessory if required.
A 3/4 " male thread must be provided
on site.
The dishwasher is constructed to
comply with Australian regulations,
and may be connected to a suitable
supply without an extra non-return
valve if national regulations allow
this.
The inlet hose must not be

shortened or damaged in any way
as it contains electrical components
(see illustration).
New hose sets supplied with the

appliance are to be used. Old hose
sets should not be reused.
72
CONTENTS
Water connection
Connection to the drainage
system
The appliance drainage system is
fitted with a non-return valve, which
prevents dirty water from flowing
back into the dishwasher via the
drain hose.
The dishwasher is supplied with
approx. 1.5 m of flexible drain hose
with an internal diameter of 22 mm.
The drain hose can be extended
using a connection piece to attach a
further length of hose.
The drainage length must not be
longer than 4 m, and the delivery
head must not exceed 1 m.
After commissioning the appliance,

ensure that the water outlet does not
leak.
Venting the drainage system
If the on-site drain connection is
situated lower than the guide path for
the bottom basket rollers in the open
door, the drainage system must be
vented. Otherwise a siphoning effect
during a programme can cause the
appliance to empty itself of water.
To vent it:
^ Open the dishwasher door fully.
If the hose is to be directly fitted to

the drainage outlet on site, use the
hose clip supplied (see installation
diagram).
The hose can be directed to the left
or the right of the appliance.
The on-site connector for the drain
hose can be adapted to different
widths of hose. If the connector
protrudes too far into the drain hose,
it will need to be shortened.
Otherwise the drain hose may
become blocked.
The drain hose must not be
shortened.
^ Pull the lower spray arm firmly

upwards to remove it.
^ Cut off the top of the vent valve in the
wash cabinet.
,Make sure that there are no

kinks in the hose, and that it is not
squashed or stretched.
73
CONTENTS
Technical data
Dishwasher model
Standard
XXL
Height
80.5 cm
(adjustable + 6.5 cm)
84.5 cm
(adjustable + 6.5 cm)
Height of building-in recess Min. 80.5 cm (+ 6.5 cm)
Min. 84.5 cm (+ 6.5 cm)
Width
59.8 cm
59.8 cm
Width of building-in recess
60 cm
60 cm
Depth
57 cm
57 cm
Weight
Max. 56 kg
Max. 62 kg
Voltage
230 V
230 V
Rated load
2200 W
2200 W
Fuse rating
10 A
10 A
Test certificates awarded
Electrical Safety,
WaterMark, RCM Mark
Electrical Safety,
WaterMark, RCM Mark
Water pressure (flow rate)
30 - 1000 kPa
(0.3 - 10 bar)
30 - 1000 kPa
(0.3 - 10 bar)
Hot water connection
Up to max. 60 C
Up to max. 60 C
Delivery head
Max. 1 m
Max. 1 m
Drainage length
Max. 4 m
Max. 4 m
Mains cable
approx. 1.7 m
approx. 1.7 m
Capacity
14 place settings
15 place settings
74
CONTENTS
75
CONTENTS
Alteration rights reserved/

G4481/G4486 / 0713
M.-Nr. 09 585 880 / 00
CONTENTS
EXP
Guarantee
MX
Pliza de Garanta
AU, NZ Warranty
US
Limited Warranty
CA
Limited Warranty
Garantie Limite
M-Nr. 05 745 317

CONTENTS
Warranty Card
Australia / New Zealand
Please review the enclosed document carefully as it governs your purchase with Miele Australia Pty Ltd (ACN 005
635 398 ABN 96 005 635 398 of 1 Gilbert Park Drive Knoxfield VIC 3180) and Miele New Zealand Limited (IRD 98 463
631of Unit L, 10-20 Sylvia Park Road Mt Wellington 1060 Auckland), jointly referred to as Miele. It sets out your rights
and obligations with respect to your purchases, including important limitations and exclusions.
WARRANTY
Miele Products are subjected to rigorous testing and assessment as to their quality and fitness.
Our goods come with guarantees that cannot be excluded under the Australian Consumer Law. You are entitled to a
replacement or refund for a major failure and for compensation for any other reasonably foreseeable loss or damage.
You are also entitled to have the goods repaired or replaced if the goods fail to be of acceptable quality and the failure
Warranties and conditions as to the merchantability and fitness for purpose of Miele Domestic Products are implied
under consumer protection legislation in Australia and New Zealand. The Warranty in this clause is independent of,
and does not exclude or limit, any non-excludable statutory warranties and conditions implied by such legislation.
In the case of Domestic Products Miele warrants that the product/s will be free from defects in materials and
workmanship for a period of 24 months from:
i. the date of delivery, or
ii. where applicable, settlement of the development (evidentiary documentation required), or
iii. where applicable, six months following the practical completion of any development.
In the case of Professional Products Miele warrants that the product/s will be free from defects in materials and
Miele does not make any further representation or warranties as to the merchantability of its Product range.
Miele reserves the right to inspect and test the Products for the purpose of determining the extent of any defect and
the validity of any claim made under this Warranty. All defective Parts and Products replaced by Miele under this
Warranty will be deemed to be the property of Miele.
This Miele Warranty will not apply if the Product is rendered faulty by a factor other than a defect in materials and
workmanship. Such factors include but are not limited to:
i. damage through misuse / neglect (including failure to maintain, service or use with proper care);
ii. use for a purpose for which the product was not sold or designed;
iii. in the case of domestic appliances and vacuum cleaners, commercial use;
iv. use or installation (where applicable) which is not in accordance with any specified instructions for use or
installation;
v. use or operation after a defect has occurred or been discovered;
vi. damage through freight, transportation or handling in transit (other than when Miele is responsible);
vii. damage through exposure to chemicals, dusts, residues, excessive voltage, heat, atmospheric conditions or other
forces or environmental factors (i.e. vermin damage) howsoever outside Miele's control;
viii. repair, modification or tampering with by the purchaser or any person other than Miele or an authorised Miele
Service Agent; or
ix. use of parts, components or accessories which have not been supplied by or specifically approved by Miele
(including use of a dust bag other than genuine high performance Miele dust bag).
This Warranty does not apply to consumables such as batteries, filters or globes.
The Miele Warranty provided under this clause is a transferable right. Customer must retain proof of purchase (receipt)
in order to be eligible to make a Warranty Claim.
6
CONTENTS
Warranty Card
HOW TO MAKE A WARRANTY CLAIM

Conduct a basic check of the product i.e. to establish if it is appropriately connected. It is also a good idea to check
the Miele user manual. If the problem persists follow our simple claims process:
1. Notify Miele who will arrange Warranty Repair or Service, call 1300 731 822
(Australian residents) / (06) 350 1350 (New Zealand Residents) or e-mail:
Service.vic@miele.com.au
(Tasmanian residents should utilise this address)
Service.qld@miele.com.au
Service.nsw@miele.com.au
Service.wa@miele.com.au
Service.sa@miele.com.au
(Northern Territory residents should utilise this address)
service.nz@miele.co.nz
(New Zealand residents)
2. Provide and make available the Warranty card or a copy of the purchase receipt to show that the Warranty
applies to the product at the date of the claim.
In the case of floor care Products i.e. Vacuum Cleaners, please return the product to Miele or its nearest Chartered
Agent or authorised Service Agent.
Please note that Miele may engage other persons or parties to assist it in fulfilling its obligations under this contract.
We always try to complete Repairs in the shortest amount of time possible.
SERVICE & SPARE PARTS
While Miele will use reasonable commercial endeavors to have all necessary Spare Parts available for the purpose
of Repair or Service, Miele is not liable for delays due to sourcing of unusual Parts which are required, or due to
circumstances beyond the control of Miele.
Miele has a policy of assuring the availability of Spare Parts and Service for all Miele Products for a period of not
less than five (5) years following the cessation of production of the applicable Product. After this period, availability
of Spare Parts and Service will depend upon the particular Miele Product. Please contact Miele for more details in
relation to availability of Spare Parts and Service.
If a Product is located outside of Mieles service region, additional fees such as travel and transportation charges may
be applicable in respect of the Service or Repair, details of which will be provided by Miele prior to any agreement
being made in respect of a Service or Repair.
COMPLAINTS / CUSTOMER CARE
We take our customer service seriously and want to hear about any problems that you may have had or the level of
service you have been provided.
To notify us of these issues, please collect all the relevant information on your query and direct it to:

The Complaints Manager

Miele Australia Pty. Ltd.

1 Gilbert Park Drive

Knoxfield VIC 3180

Or e-mail: contact@miele.com.au


Miele New Zealand Limited

Unit L, 10-20 Sylvia Park Rd

Mt Wellington Auckland 1060
PRIVACY
Miele will collect and deal with the customer's personal information (including name, address, telephone contact or
personal details) only in accordance with Miele's Privacy Charter. A copy of the Privacy Charter is available from Miele
or www.miele.com.au and www.miele.co.nz
Miele may disclose personal information to its related companies and to organisations which provide services
(including delivery services) to Miele or which assist Miele in providing services (including Repair / Warranty services)
to its customers.
GOVERNING LAW
This agreement is subject to the laws of the State of Victoria, Australia or to the laws of New Zealand, the parties
submit to the exclusive jurisdictions of the Courts of these regions.
7
CONTENTS
Warranty Card
IMPORTANT
DO NOT RETURN THIS PAGE TO MIELE
For your reference, please enter the particulars of your purchase below and retain,
with your purchase documentation.
Model no.
Serial no.
Date of purchase
Store details
Installed by
CONTENTS
Warranty Registration
Please return this card to Miele
or register online at
www.miele.com.au or
www.miele.co.nz.
AU NZ
Title
First name
Model no.
Surname
Serial no. of machine
Street address
Suburb / Town
Please tick this box if you
do not wish Miele to advise
you of further products,
services and special offers.
Postcode
Date of purchase
Store details
Email
CONTENTS
Info - Coupon
Please send me the following information free of
charge and without obligation.
(Tick the items you are interested in):
Miele laundry care
Miele dishwashers
Miele vacuum cleaners
Miele cooking appliances (ovens, microwave ovens,
cooktops, rangehoods, warming drawers, coffee
machines)
Miele refrigeration (fridges, freezers,
wine conditioners)
Miele-Professional for commercial use:
Washing, drying and ironing in commercial laundries
Dishwashing in hotels, restaurants and other catering
establishments

REPLY PAID 381
FERNTREE GULLY VIC 3156
Australia
Disinfecting and cleaning in hospitals, clinics,

laboratories and surgeries
CONTENTS
USA
Miele, Inc.
9 Independence Way
Princeton, NJ 08540
Phone: 800-843-7231
609-419-9898
Fax:
609-419-4298
Technical Service: 800-999-1360
www.mieleusa.com
Canada
Miele Limited
161 Four Valley Drive
Vaughan, ON L4K 4V8
Phone: 800-643-5381
905-660-9936
Fax:
905-532-2290
customercare@miele.ca
www.miele.ca
Mxico
Miele, S.A. de C.V.
Miele Center
Arqumedes # 43
Col. Polanco Chapultepec
Delg. Miguel Hidalgo
C.P. 11560 Mxico, D.F.
Servicio post venta:
Tel.:
01 800 MIELE 00
(01 800 64353 00)
Correo electrnico:
servicio@miele.com.mx
www.miele.com.mx
Australia
REPLY PAID 381
Telephone 1300 464 353
Fax
(03) 9764 7149
www.miele.com.au
New Zealand
8 College Hill
Freemans Bay
Auckland 1011
New Zealand
Telephone: 0800 464 353
Fax:
+64 9378 0146
www.miele.co.nz
Germany
Miele & Cie. KG
Carl-Miele-Strae 29
33332 Gtersloh
Tel:
+49 5241 89-0
Fax:
+49 5241 89-2090
www.miele.de
CONTENTS
1115
M-Nr. 05 745 317 / 04
B - Cooktop
CONTENTS
( i ) Ar i s t o n
CONTENTS
PK 750 RT GH AUS
PK 640 R GH AUS
Espaol
Manual de instrucciones
ENCIMERA
Sumario
Manual de instrucciones,1
Advertencias,3
Asistencia,4
Descripcin del aparato,6
Instalacin,24
Puesta en funcionamiento y uso,30
Precauciones y consejos,31
Mantenimiento y cuidados,31
Anomalas y soluciones,32
English
Operating Instructions
HOB
Contents
Operating Instructions,1
Warnings,2
Assistance,4
Description of the appliance,5
Installation,7
Start-up and use,12
Precautions and tips,13
Maintenance and care,13
Troubleshooting,14
Franais
Mode demploi
TABLE DE CUISSON
Sommaire
Mode demploi,1
Avertissements,2
Assistance,4
Description de lappareil,5
Installation,15
Mise en marche et utilisation,21
Prcautions et conseils,22
Nettoyage et entretien,23
Anomalies et remdes,23
CONTENTS
Warnings
Avertissements
WARNING: The appliance and its

accessible parts become hot during use.
Care should be taken to avoid touching
heating elements. Children less than 8
years of age shall be kept away unless
continuously supervised. This appliance
can be used by children aged from 8 years
and above and persons with reduced
physical, sensory or mental capabilities
or lack of experience and knowledge
if they have been given supervision
or instruction concerning use of the
appliance in a safe way and understand
the hazards involved. Children shall not
play with the appliance. Cleaning and
user maintenance shall not be made by
children without supervision.
ATTENTION : Cet appareil ainsi que ses

parties accessibles deviennent trs chauds
pendant leur fonctionnement. Il faut faire
attention ne pas toucher les lments
chauffants. Ne pas faire approcher les
enfants de moins de 8 ans moins quils
ne soient sous surveillance constante.
Le prsent appareil peut tre utilis par
des enfants de plus de 8 ans et par des
personnes prsentant des capacits
physiques, sensorielles ou mentales
rduites ou nayant pas lexprience ou les
connaissances indispensables, condition
quils soient sous bonne surveillance ou
quils aient reu les instructions ncessaires
pour une utilisation de lappareil en toute
scurit et condition quils se rendent
compte des dangers encourus. Les enfants
ne doivent pas jouer avec lappareil. Les
oprations de nettoyage et dentretien ne
doivent pas tre effectues par des enfants
non surveills.
WARNING: Unattended cooking on a hob

with fat or oil can be dangerous and may
result in fire. NEVER try to extinguish a
fire with water, but switch off the appliance
and then cover flame e.g. with a lid or a
fire blanket.
WARNING: Danger of fire: do not store
items on the cooking surfaces.
Never use steam cleaners or pressure
cleaners on the appliance.
Remove any liquid from the lid before
opening it. Do not close the glass cover (if
present) when the gas burners or electric
hotplates are still hot.
The appliance is not intended to be
operated by means of an external timer
or separate remote control system.
CAUTION: the use of inappropriate hob
guards can cause accidents.
2
ATTENTION : Laisser un rcipient de

cuisson avec de lhuile ou de la graisse sur
un foyer est dangereux et risque dentraner
un incendie. Il ne faut JAMAIS essayer
dteindre une flamme ou un incendie avec
de leau ! Il faut teindre lappareil et couvrir
la flamme avec un couvercle, par exemple,
ou avec une couverture anti-feu.
ATTENTION : Risque dincendie : ne
pas laisser dobjets sur les surfaces de
cuisson.
Ne jamais nettoyer lappareil avec des
nettoyeurs vapeur ou haute pression.
Essuyer tout liquide pouvant se trouver
sur le couvercle avant de louvrir. Ne pas
abaisser le couvercle en verre (sil y en a
CONTENTS
un) tant que les brleurs gaz ou la plaque

lectrique sont chauds.
No utilice nunca limpiadores a vapor o de

alta presin para la limpieza del aparato.
Cet appareil ne peut pas tre allum au

moyen dun temporisateur extrieur ou
dun systme de commande distance
spar.
Elimine eventuales lquidos presentes

sobre la tapa antes de abrirla. No cierre
la tapa de vidrio (si existe) cuando los
quemadores o la placa elctrica todava
estn calientes.
ATTENTION: lutilisation de protections

de table inappropries peut causer des
incendies.
Advertencias
ATENCIN: Este aparato y sus partes
accesibles se vuelven muy calientes
durante el uso. Por lo tanto, es importante
evitar tocar los elementos calentadores.
Mantenga alejados a los nios menores
de 8 aos si no son continuamente
vigilados. El presente aparato puede ser
utilizado por nios mayores de 8 aos y
por personas con capacidades fsicas,
sensoriales o mentales disminuidas o
sin experiencia ni conocimientos, si se
encuentran bajo una adecuada vigilancia
o si han sido instruidos sobre el uso del
aparato de modo seguro y comprenden
los peligros relacionados con el mismo.
Los nios no deben jugar con el aparato.
Las operaciones de limpieza y de
mantenimiento no deben ser realizadas
por nios sin vigilancia.
El aparato no se debe poner en

funcionamiento a travs de un
temporizador externo o de un sistema
de mando a distancia.
ATENCIN: el uso de protecciones
inapropiadas de la placa de coccin
puede provocar accidentes.
ATENCIN: Dejar un quemador con

grasas o aceites sin vigilancia puede ser
peligroso y provocar un incendio. NUNCA
intente apagar una llama/incendio con
agua, se debe apagar el aparato y cubrir
la llama, por ejemplo, con una tapa o con
una manta ignfuga.
ATENCIN: Riesgo de incendio: no deje
objetos sobre las superficies de coccin.
3
CONTENTS
Assistance
Communicating:
appliance model (Mod.)
serial number (S/N)
This information is found on the data plate located on the
appliance and/or on the packaging.
! Never use unauthorised technicians and never accept
replacement parts which are not original.
Asistencia
Comunique:
el modelo de la mquina (Mod.)
el nmero de serie (S/N)
Esta informacin se encuentra en la placa de caractersticas
ubicada en el aparato y/o en el embalaje.
! No recurra nunca a tcnicos no autorizados y rechace
siempre la instalacin de repuestos no originales.
La siguiente informacin es vlida solo para Espaa.
Para otros pases de habla hispana consulte a su
vendedor.
Assistance
Indiquez-lui :
le modle de votre appareil (Mod.)
son numro de srie (S/N)
Ces informations figurent sur la plaquette signaltique
appose sur votre appareil et/ou sur son emballage.
! Ne faites jamais appel des techniciens non agrs et
refusez toujours linstallation de pices dtaches non
originales.
Ampliacin de garanta
Llame al 902.363.539 y le informaremos sobre el fantstico
plan de ampliacin de garanta hasta 5 aos.
Consiga una cobertura total adicional de
Piezas y componentes
Mano de obra de los tcnicos
Desplazamiento a su domicilio de los tcnicos
Y NO PAGUE AVERIAS NUNCA MAS
Servicio de asistencia tcnica (SAT)
Llame al 902.133.133 y nuestros tcnicos intervendrn con
rapidez y eficacia, devolviendo el electrodomstico a sus
condiciones ptimas de funcionamiento.
En el SAT encontrar recambios, accesorios y productos
especficos para la limpieza y mantenimiento de su
electrodomstico a precios competitivos.
ESTAMOS A SU SERVICIO
ARISTON
PRIORITY SERVICE
If you are not completely satisfied with your appliance or
require service call:
Australia
Phone: 1300 815 589
New Zealand
Phone: (09) 306 1020
GENUINE ACCESSORIES
& SPARE PARTS
accessories are available for your appliance call:
Australia
Phone: 03 9768 0888
New Zealand
Phone: (09) 306 1020
AUSTRALIA
ARISIT PTY LIMITED
VIC 3175, Australia
NEW ZEALAND
ARISIT PTY LIMITED
1145, New Zealand
Fax: (09) 302 0077
Email: sales@aristonappliances.co.nz
CONTENTS
Description of the appliance Description de lappareil

Overall view
Vue densemble
1. Support Grid for COOKWARE

2. GAS BURNERS
3. Control Knobs for GAS BURNERS
4. Ignition for GAS BURNERS*
5. SAFETY DEVICES*
1. Grilles support de CASSEROLES

2. BRLEURS GAZ
3. Manettes de commande des BRLEURS GAZ
4. Bougie dallumage des BRLEURS GAZ*
5. DISPOSITIF DE SCURIT*
GAS BURNERS differ in size and power. Use the

diameter of the cookware to choose the most appropriate
burner to cook with.
BRLEURS GAZ ils ont plusieurs dimensions et

puissances. Choisissez celui qui correspond le mieux
au diamtre de votre casserole.
Control Knobs for GAS BURNERS adjust the size of the

flame.
Manettes de commande des BRLEURS GAZ pour le

rglage de la flamme.
GAS BURNER IGNITION* enables a specific burner to

be lit automatically.
La bougie dallumage des BRLEURS GAZ* permet

lallumage automatique du brleur slectionn.
SAFETY DEVICE* stops the gas flow if the flame is

accidentally extinguished.
DISPOSITIF DE SCURIT* en cas dextinction accidentelle

de la flamme, coupez immdiatement larrive du gaz.
* Only available on certain models.
* Nexiste que sur certains modles.
CONTENTS
Descripcin del aparato

Vista en conjunto
1. Parrillas de apoyo para RECIPIENTES DE COCCIN
2. QUEMADORES A GAS
3. Mandos de los QUEMADORES A GAS
4. Buja de encendido de los QUEMADORES A GAS*
5. DISPOSITIVO DE SEGURIDAD*
QUEMADORES A GAS: son de distintas dimensiones
y potencias. Elija siempre el ms adecuado para el
dimetro del recipiente que va a utilizar.
Mandos de los QUEMADORES A GAS para la regulacin
de la llama.
Buja de encendido de los QUEMADORES A GAS:*
permite el encendido automtico del quemador.
DISPOSITIVO DE SEGURIDAD:* si se apaga
accidentalmente la llama, interrumpe la salida de gas.
* Presente slo en algunos modelos.
CONTENTS
Installation
! Before operating your new appliance please read this
instruction booklet carefully. It contains important information
for safe use, installation and care of the appliance.
! Please keep these operating instructions for future
reference. Pass them on to possible new owners of the
appliance.
Compliance with standards
This cooktop must be installed by an authorised person in
accordance with the requirements of local gas and electrical
authorities, as well as the latest published versions of the
following standards:
AS/NZS 5601 Gas installation and pipe sizing
SAA Wiring Rules.
Positioning
! Keep packaging material out of the reach of children. It can

become a choking or suffocation hazard (see Precautions
and tips).
! The appliance must be installed by a qualified and
authorised professional according to the instructions
provided. Incorrect installation may cause harm to people
and animals or may damage property.
Kitchen Ventilation
Where the total input of all appliances exceeds 3 MJ/h for
each cubic metre of the room or enclosure volume, the
space shall be ventilated by one of the methods detailed
below. For the purpose of assessing the adequacy of
ventilation, the space that cannot be isolated by doors is
the volume of a room.
Natural ventilation direct from outside
Two permanent openings shall be provided directly to
outside. The openings shall be located to ensure the
distance between the top of the upper opening and the
ceiling of the room or enclosure, and the distance between
the bottom of the lower opening and the floor of the room
or enclosure does not exceed 5% of the height of the room
or enclosure. The minimum free ventilation area provided
by each opening shall be calculated using the following
formula:
A=3T
where
A = the minimum free ventilation area (cm2)
T = the total gas consumption of all appliances (MJ/h)
The minimum vertical dimension of any free ventilation
opening shall be 6 mm.
NOTE 1 When used in this Clause, the term directly to
outside means any one of the following options, provided
that the ventilation path is unobstructed by building material
or insulation:
(a) Directly through an outside wall (preferred option).
(b) Through to an outside wall but offset.
(c) Into a cavity ventilated to outside.
(d) Into an under floor space ventilated to outside.
(e) Into a roof space ventilated to outside.
NOTE 2 The two openings may be combined provided that

the top and bottom of the opening reach the limits set by
this Clause.
AUS
Natural ventilation via adjacent room

Two permanent openings shall be provided in the room
or enclosure. The openings shall be located to ensure the
distance between the top of the upper opening and the
ceiling of the room or enclosure, and the distance between
the bottom of the lower opening and the floor of the room
or enclosure does not exceed 5% of the height of the room
or enclosure.
The minimum free ventilation area provided by each opening
shall be calculated using the following formula:
A=6T
where
A = the minimum free ventilation area (cm2)
T = the total gas consumption of all appliances (MJ/h)
These requirements shall apply to all subsequent rooms
until a room is ventilated to outside, in accordance with the
previous section, or the total input of the appliances does
not exceed 3 MJ/h for each cubic metre of the total volume
of the enclosure and rooms.
The minimum vertical dimension of any free ventilation
opening shall be 6 mm.
NOTE: The two openings may be combined provided that
the top and bottom of the opening reach the limits set by
this Clause.
Liquid petroleum gas sinks to the floor as it is heavier
than air. Therefore, rooms containing LPG cylinders must
also be equipped with vents to allow gas to escape in
the event of a leak. As a result LPG cylinders, whether
partially or completely full, must not be installed or stored
in rooms or storage areas that are below ground level
(cellars, etc.). It is advisable to keep only the cylinder
being used in the room, positioned so that it is not subject
to heat produced by external sources (ovens, fireplaces,
stoves, etc. ) which could raise the temperature of the
cylinder above 50C.
Adjacent cabinetry
The location of connection points is given in the table on
page 5 . For trouble-free operation of appliances installed in
housing units, the minimum distances shown in fig.4 should
be observed. It is recommended that the adjacent kitchen
surfaces should be capable of withstanding temperatures
of 65C. Also, the following must be observed:
The appliance should be installed next to cabinetry which
is no taller than the top of the cooker hob.
The wall in direct contact with the back panel of the
cooker must be made of non-flammable material.
During operation of the cooker, the back panel of the
cooker could reach a temperature of 50C above room
temperature.
Kitchen cabinets installed next to the cooker that are
higher than the top of the hob, must be at least 600 mm
from the edge of the hob itself.
If the hood is installed below a wall cabinet, the latter
must be at least 700 mm (millimetres) above the surface
of the hob.
CONTENTS
Range hoods
Range hoods and overhead exhaust fans must be installed
according to manufacturers instructions but in no case shall
clearance from hob burners be less than 650 mm for range
hoods and 750 mm for overhead exhaust fans.
If the hood is installed below a wall cabinet, the latter
must be at least 700 mm (millimetres) above the surface
of the hob.
Fitting the cooktop above an oven

When installing the cooktop above an oven, both the
electricity supply cable and the gas pipe or flexible hose
must not touch hot parts of the oven housing.
When installing above a built-under oven without forced
cooling ventilation, suitable air vents should be provided for
(inlet at least 200 cm from the bottom, outlet at least 120
cm from the top part) to allow adequate ventilation inside
the housing unit.
Also a wooden panel should be installed beneath the hob
as insulation, positioning it at a minimum distance of 15 mm
from the hob housing.
Before the installation remove the grids and burners from
the hob and turn it upside down, making sure you dont
damage the thermocouples and spark plugs.
30
20
The following minimum clearances

to combustible materials must be
observed:
Minimum clearance from edge
of burner to side wall must be 200
mm.
Minimum clearance from edge of
burner to rear wall must be 55 mm.
Hook fastening diagram
Hooking position
for top H=20mm
Hooking position
for top H=30mm
Front
40
600mm min.
420mm min.
Cabinets installed adjacent to the hood must be at least

420 mm above the hob,
650mm min.
Hooking position
for top H=40mm
Back
! Use the hooks contained in the accessory pack.

Where the hob is not installed over a built-in oven, a
wooden panel must be installed as insulation. This must
be placed at a minimum distance of 20 mm from the lower
part of the hob.
Ventilation
To ensure adequate ventilation, the back panel of the cabinet
must be removed. It is advisable to install the oven so that it
rests on two strips of wood, or on a completely flat surface
with an opening of at least 45 x 560 mm (see diagrams).
Apply the seals that come with

the appliance along the outer
edges of the hob to prevent any
passage of air, humidity and
water (see Figure).
560
mm
45 m
m.

For proper application make sure the surfaces to be sealed
are clean, dry and free of any grease/oil.
The installation cavity should have the dimensions
indicated in the figure. Fastening hooks are provided,
allowing you to fasten the hob to tops that are between 20
and 40 mm thick. To ensure the hob is securely fastened
to the top, we recommend you use all the hooks provided.
555 mm
m
mm
55
475
AUS
Hobs equipped with a three-pole power supply cable are

designed to operate with alternating current at the voltage and
frequency indicated on the data plate (this is located on the
lower part of the appliance). The earth wire in the cable has a
green and yellow cover. If the appliance is to be installed above
a built-in electric oven, the electrical connection of the hob and
the oven must be carried out separately, both for electrical
safety purposes and to make extracting the oven easier.
Connecting the supply cable to the mains
Install a standardised plug corresponding to the load
indicated on the data plate.
The appliance must be directly connected to the mains
using an omnipolar circuit-breaker with a minimum contact
opening of 3 mm installed between the appliance and the
mains. The circuit-breaker must be suitable for the charge
CONTENTS
indicated and must comply with current electrical regulations

(the earthing wire must not be interrupted by the circuitbreaker). The supply cable must not come into contact with
surfaces with temperatures higher than 50C.
! The installer must ensure that the correct electrical
connection has been made and that it is compliant with
safety regulations.
Before connecting to the power supply, make sure that:
The appliance is earthed and the plug is compliant with
the law.
The socket can withstand the maximum power of the
appliance, which is indicated on the data plate.
The voltage is in the range between the values indicated
on the data plate.
The socket is compatible with the plug of the appliance.
If the socket is incompatible with the plug, ask an
authorised technician to replace it. Do not use extension
cords or multiple sockets.
! Once the appliance has been installed, the power supply
cable and the electrical socket must be easily accessible.
! The cable must not be bent or compressed.
! The cable must be checked regularly and replaced by
authorised technicians only (see Assistance).
! The manufacturer declines any liability should these safety
measures not be observed.
Gas connection
Check The Gas Type

! Before installation, check that the gas type (natural gas
or Universal LPG) of the cooker is suitable for the gas type
available to the installation. It is extremely dangerous to use
the wrong gas type with any appliance, as fire or serious
injury can result.
This cooker is supplied from the factory already set for
Natural Gas. To convert the cooker to LPG (or back to
Natural Gas from LPG), follow the directions later in this
section.
Fit regulator supplied for Natural Gas (if applicable) at rear
of appliance, and as close as practicable to the appliance.
It is recommended that an isolating valve and union be
fitted, to enable simple disconnection for servicing. These
are to be in an accessible location.
! Check that the pressure of the gas supply is consistent
with the values indicated in Table 1 (Burner and nozzle
specifications). This will ensure the safe operation and
longevity of your appliance while maintaining efficient
energy consumption.
Pipe or Hose Connection
This appliance is suitable for use with either a flexible
connection or rigid copper connection.
Either a rigid metal pipe with fittings in compliance with the
standards in force must be used for connecting to the nipple
union (threaded G male fitting) situated at the rear of the
appliance to the right (fig.8), or an approved flexible hose
of class B or D.
Should it be necessary to turn the fitting, the gasket

(supplied with the appliance) must be replaced.
If a flexible hose is used, it should be as short as possible
with a maximum length of 1.2 metres;
The flexible connection must be approved to class B or
D of AS/NZS1869 as a minimum.
it should not be bent, kinked or compressed;
it should not be in contact with the rear wall of the
appliance or in any case with parts which may reach a
temperature of 50C;
it should not come into contact with pointed parts or sharp
corners;
it should not be subject to any pulling or twisting forces;
it should be easy to inspect along its entire length in order
to be able to check its condition.
The supply connection point must be accessible with the
appliance installed.
The inner diameters of the pipe are as follows:
8 mm for LPG;
13 mm for Natural Gas.
AUS
Checking the tightness of the connection

Upon completion of installation, check the gas circuit, the
internal connections and the taps for leaks using a soapy
solution (never a flame). Also check that the connecting pipe
cannot come into contact with moving parts which could
damage or crush it. Make sure that the natural gas pipe is
adequate for a sufficient supply to the appliance when all
the burners are lit
Duplicate Data Plate
Where the data plate is obscured by cabinetry when the
cooker is in the installed position, place a duplicate data
plate on a surface of the cabinetry adjacent to the cooker.
Adapting to different types of gas
To adapt the hob to a different type of gas other than default
type (indicated on the rating plate at the base of the hob or
on the packaging), the burner nozzles should be replaced
as follows:
1. Remove the hob grids and slide the burners off their
seats.
2. Unscrew the nozzles using a 7 mm socket spanner, and
replace them with nozzles for the new type of gas (see
table 1 Burner and nozzle characteristics).
3. Reassemble the parts following the above procedure in
the reverse order.
4. Once this procedure is finished, replace the old rating
sticker with one indicating the new type of gas used.
Sticker are available from any of our Service Centres.
Replacing the nozzles on separate double flame
burners
1. Remove the grids and slide the burners from their
housings. The burner consists of 2 separate parts (see
figure);
2. Unscrew the burers with a 7 mm wrench spanner. The
internal burner has a nozzle, the external burner has
two (of the same size). Replace the nozzle with models
suited to the new type of gas (see table 1).
3. Replace all the components by repeating the steps in
reverse order.
9
CONTENTS
! If the appliance is connected to liquid gas, the regulation

screw must be fastened as tightly as possible.
AUS
! Once this procedure is finished, replace the old rating

sticker with one indicating the new type of gas used. Stickers
are available from any of our Service Centres.

Replacing the Triple ring burner nozzles
1. Remove the pan supports and lift the burners out of their
housing. The burner consists of two separate parts (see
pictures).
2. Unscrew the nozzles using a 7 mm socket spanner.
Replace the nozzles with models that are configured
for use with the new type of gas (see Table 1). The two
nozzles have the same hole diameter.
3. Replace all the components by completing the above
operations in reverse order.
Adjusting the burners primary air :

Does not require adjusting.
Setting the burners to minimum:
1. Turn the tap to the low flame position;
2. Remove the knob and adjust the adjustment screw, which
is positioned in or next to the tap pin, until the flame is
small but steady.
! In the event of single-control DRDA (DCDR) burners,
adjustment can be performed by intervening on the 2 screws
located near the tap pin (see picture).
Total DRDA
(DCDR) burner
adjustment
Inner DRDA (DCDR)

burner adjustment

3. Having adjusted the flame to the required low setting,
while the burner is alight, quickly change the position
of the knob from minimum to maximum and vice versa
several times, checking that the flame does not go out.
4. Some appliances have a safety device (thermocouple)
fitted. If the device fails to work when the burners are set
to the low flame setting, increase this low flame setting
using the adjusting screw.
5. Once the adjustment has been made, replace the
seals on the by-passes using sealing wax or a similar
substance.
10
! Should the gas pressure used be different (or vary slightly)

from the recommended pressure, a suitable pressure
regulator must be fitted to the inlet pipe (in order to comply
with current national regulations).
Post Installation Checks
Perform post installation checks and ensure proper and

safe operation before leaving. Test all burners individually
and in combination.
Leak Check
Ensure all gas control knobs are in the Off position.
Ensure the gas supply is switched on.
Spray a solution of soapy water onto all gas joints
as well as the full length of any flexible hoses.
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES USE A NAKED FLAME
IN CHECKING FOR LEAKS.
If bubbles appear anywhere, turn the gas supply off, check
all connections and retest. If satisfactory operation cannot
be achieved, contact place of purchase or their appointed
agent for service.
Flame check
Turn each burner on, and ensure that the flame is blue with
minimal yellow tipping. If there is significant yellow tipping,
flame lift off or excessive noise, check pressure and adjust
at the regulator if necessary.
If satisfactory operation cannot be achieved, contact place
of purchase or their appointed agent for service.
Igniter operation
Check that the igniter for each burner successfully ignites
the gas.
If an igniter fails to work, first remove the plug from the
electrical power outlet, and then check that all the electrical
connections are in place.
If satisfactory operation cannot be achieved, contact place
of purchase or their appointed agent for service.
Low flame setting
Check the low flame setting for each hob burner to ensure
that the minimum flame will not be extinguished by air
draughts.
Light the burner.
Turn the control until it engages in the minimum position.
Ensure the flame is stable and will not be extinguished
by air draughts.
To adjust the minimum flame:
Follow the procedure described in the gas conversion
instruction.
DO NOT MODIFY THIS APPLIANCE IN ANY WAY, OTHER
THAN AS DESCRIBED IN THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
CONTENTS
Burner and nozzle specifications
AUS
ULPG (2.75 kPa)
Natural Gas (1.0 kPa)

Injector (mm)
GC (MJ/hr)
Injector (mm)
GC (MJ/hr)
Auxiliary Burner
0.85
3.6
0.50
3.3
Semi Rapid Burner
1.10
6.0
0.64
5.5
Rapid Burner
1.24
7.8
0.80
9.0
0.80 + 1.19 + 1.19
17.0
0.50 + 0.70 + 0.70
16.5
Dual Control Wok Burner
Total
34.4
34.3
Gas Connection
Gas Inlet fitting
1/2 BSP (male) thread
Location of gas inlet
40 mm from rear edge

40 mm from right hand edge
A
R
DC
S
PK 640 R GH AUS
Burner and nozzle specifications

ULPG (2.75 kPa)
Natural Gas (1.0 kPa)

Injector (mm)
GC (MJ/hr)
Injector (mm)
GC (MJ/hr)
Auxiliary Burner
0.85
3.6
0.50
3.3
Semi Rapid Burner
1.10
6.0
0.64
5.5
1.19 (x2)
13.5
0.70 (x2)
13.0
0.80 + 1.19 + 1.19
17.0
0.50 + 0.70 + 0.70
16.5
Wok Burner
Dual Control Wok Burner
Total
40.1
38.3
Gas Connection
Gas Inlet fitting
1/2 BSP (male) thread
Location of gas inlet
40 mm from rear edge

40 mm from right hand edge
S
DC
TC
A
PK 750 RT GH AUS
! The product was tested in accordance with AS4551 standard
11
CONTENTS
AUS
Start-up and use

! The position of the corresponding gas burner or electric
hotplate* is shown on every knob.
Gas cooker hobs are equipped with discrete power
adjustment that allows for accurately adjusting the flame to 5
different power levels. Thanks to this system, gas hobs are
also capable of guaranteeing the same cooking results for
each recipe, as the optimal power level for the desired type
of cooking can be identified in an easier, more accurate way.
Gas burners
Each burner can be adjusted to one of the following settings
using the corresponding control knob:

Off
To activate any one of the two rings, press the corresponding

knob and turn it anti-clockwise to the maximum power
.
setting
In order to use the double-flame burner to its full
potential, avoid simultaneously setting the inner ring to
minimum power and the outer ring to maximum power.
Single control:
The rings comprising the burner are activated through a
single control knob.
To simultaneously turn on both rings, position the knob on
(max) the symbol
knob anti-clockwise.
Maximum
Minimum
(min) then press and turn the
To turn on the inner ring only, position the knob on the symbol
To light one of the burners, hold a lit match or lighter near

the burner and, at the same time, press down and turn the
corresponding knob anti-clockwise to the maximum setting.
Since the burner is fitted with a safety device, the knob
should be pressed for approximately 2-3 seconds to allow
the automatic device keeping the flame alight to heat up.
When using models with an ignition button, light the desired
burner pressing down the corresponding knob as far as possible
and turning it anticlockwise towards the maximum setting.
! If a flame is accidentally extinguished, turn off the control
knob and wait for at least 1 minute before trying to relight it.
To switch off the burner, turn the knob in a clockwise
direction until it stops (when reaches the position).
Discrete flame adjustment
The selected burner can be adjusted - by means of the knob
- to 5 different power levels. To shift between levels, simply
turn the knob towards the desired power level.
A click signals the passage from one power level to the other.
The selected power level is
indicated by the corresponding
) and,
symbol (symbols
on hobs equipped with a display,
by the LEDs that turn on (5 =
max. power; 1 = min. power). The
system guarantees accurate flame
adjustment and uniform cooking
results by facilitating selection of the desired power level.
The double-flame burner
This gas burner consists of two concentric flame rings that can
operate jointly or independently (in case of dual-control only).
As the burner is fitted with a safety device, the knob
should be pressed down for approximately 2-3 seconds until
the device keeping the flame automatically alight heats up.
12
Dual control:
Each ring comprising the burner has its own control knob:
The knob marked with the symbol controls the outer ring.
The knob marked with the symbol controls the inner ring.
(max ) - (min) then press and turn the knob clockwise.

(to switch modes, it is necessary to switch off the burner).
To switch off the burner, press and turn the knob clockwise
until it stops (when it reaches the position).
Practical advice on using the burners
To ensure the burners operate efficiently:

Use appropriate cookware for each burner (see table)
so that the flames do not extend beyond the bottom of
the cookware.
Always use cookware with a flat base and a cover.
When the contents of the pan reach boiling point, turn
the knob to minimum.
Burner
Cookware Diameter (cm)
Rapid (R)
24 - 26
Semi-Rapid (S)
16 - 20
Auxiliary (A)
10 - 14
Double Flame (DCDR internal)
10 - 14
Double Flame (DCDR external)
24 - 26
Pans to be used on 60 cm hobs

Burner
Cookware Diameter (cm)
Semi-Rapid (S)
16 - 20
Auxiliary (A)
10 - 14
Triple Crown (TC)
24 - 26
Double Flame (DCDR internal)
10 - 14
Double Flame (DCDR external)
26 - 28
Pans to be used on 75 cm hobs
! On the models supplied with a reducer shelf, remember

that this should be used only for the Double flame internal
CONTENTS
(DCDR internal) burner when you use casserole dishes with

a diameter under 12 cm.
To identify the type of burner, refer to the designs in the
section entitled, Burner and Nozzle Specifications.
Precautions and tips

! This appliance has been designed and manufactured
in compliance with international safety standards. The
following warnings are provided for safety reasons and
must be read carefully.
General safety
This is a class 3 built-in appliance.

Gas appliances require regular air exchange to
maintain efficient operation. When installing the hob,
follow the instructions provided in the paragraph on
Positioning the appliance.
These instructions are only valid for the countries
whose symbols appear in the manual and on the
serial number plate.
The appliance was designed for domestic use inside the
home and is not intended for commercial or industrial use.
The appliance must not be installed outdoors, even in
covered areas. It is extremely dangerous to leave the
appliance exposed to rain and storms.
Do not touch the appliance with bare feet or with wet or
damp hands and feet.
The appliance must be used by adults only for the
preparation of food, in accordance with the instructions
outlined in this booklet. Any other use of the appliance
(e.g. for heating the room) constitutes improper use and
is dangerous. The manufacturer may not be held liable
for any damage resulting from improper, incorrect and
unreasonable use of the appliance.
The openings used for ventilation and dispersion of heat
must never be covered.
Always make sure the knobs are in the / position
when the appliance is not in use.
When unplugging the appliance always pull the plug from
the mains socket, do not pull on the cable.
Never carry out any cleaning or maintenance work
without having detached the plug from the mains.
In case of malfunction, under no circumstances should
you attempt to repair the appliance yourself. Repairs
carried out by inexperienced persons may cause injury
or further malfunctioning of the appliance. Contact a
Service Centre (see Assistance).
Always make sure that pan handles are turned towards
the centre of the hob in order to avoid accidental burns.
Do not close the glass cover (if present) when the gas
burners or electric hotplates are still hot.
Do not leave the electric hotplate switched on without a
pan placed on it.
Do not use unstable or deformed pans.
The appliance should not be operated by people
(including children) with reduced physical, sensory or
mental capacities, by inexperienced individuals or by
anyone who is not familiar with the product. These
individuals should, at the very least, be supervised by
someone who assumes responsibility for their safety or
receive preliminary instructions relating to the operation

of the appliance.
Do not let children play with the appliance.
The appliance is not intended to be operated by
means of an external timer or separate remotecontrol system.
AUS
Safety warnings:
Do not use or store flammable materials near this
appliance.
Do not spray aerosols in the vicinity of this appliance
while it is in operation.
Do not modify this appliance.
Not siutable for operation with aftermarket lids or cover
fitted.
Where this appliance is installed in marine craft or in
caravans it shall not be used as a space heater.
Disposal
When disposing of packaging material: observe local

legislation so that the packaging may be reused.
The European Directive 2002/96/EC on Waste
Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE), requires
that old household electrical appliances must not
be disposed of in the normal unsorted municipal
waste stream. Old appliances must be collected
separately in order to optimise the recovery and
recycling of the materials they contain and reduce
the impact on human health and the environment.
The crossed out wheeled bin symbol on the product
reminds you of your obligation, that when you dispose
of the appliance it must be separately collected.
Consumers should contact their local authority or retailer
for information concerning the correct disposal of their
old appliance.
Maintenance and care

Switching the appliance off
Disconnect your appliance from the electricity supply before

carrying out any work on it.
Cleaning the appliance
! Do not use abrasive or corrosive detergents such as stain

removers, anti-rust products, powder detergents or sponges with
abrasive surfaces: these may scratch the surface beyond repair.
! Never use steam cleaners or pressure cleaners on the
appliance.
It is usually enough to wash the hob with a damp sponge
and dry it with absorbent kitchen roll.
The removable parts of the burners should be washed
frequently with warm water and soap and any burnt-on
substances removed.
For hobs which ligth automatically, the terminal part of
the electronic instant lighting devices should be cleaned
frequently and the gas outlet holes should be checked
for blockages.
Stainless steel can be marked by hard water that has
been left on the surface for a long time, or by aggressive
13
CONTENTS
detergents containing phosphorus. After cleaning, rinse

and dry any remaining drops of water.
AUS
! It is not necessary to remove the pan supports in order to

clean the hob surface. Thanks to the support system, simply
lift and hold the pan supports or rotate them until they rest
against a rear support.
The cookware is unstable.

Check to make sure that:
The bottom of the cookware is perfectly flat.
The cookware is positioned correctly at the centre of the
burner.
The pan support grids have been positioned correctly.
Do not place the hot grids on top of the glass cover (if
applicable), otherwise the rubber plugs on the glass
may be damaged.
Gas tap maintenance
Over time, the taps may become jammed or difficult to turn.

If this happens, the tap must be replaced.
! This procedure must be performed by a qualified
technician authorised by the manufacturer.
Troubleshooting
It may happen that the appliance does not function properly
or at all. Before calling the service centre for assistance,
check if anything can be done. First, check to see that there
are no interruptions in the gas and electrical supplies, and,
in particular, that the gas valves for the mains are open.
The burner does not light or the flame is not even
around the burner.
Check whether:
The gas holes on the burner are clogged.
All the movable parts that make up the burner are
mounted correctly.
There are draughts near the appliance.
The flame dies in models with a safety device.
You pressed the knob all the way in.
You keep the knob pressed in long enough to activate
the safety device.
The gas holes are not blocked in the area corresponding
to the safety device.
The burner does not remain lit when set to minimum.
The gas holes are not blocked.
There are no draughts near the appliance.
The minimum setting has been adjusted properly.
14
CONTENTS
Installation
! Avant dutiliser votre nouvel appareil, veuillez lire cette
notice avec la plus grande attention. Elle contient des
informations importantes destines assurer votre scurit
lors de lutilisation, linstallation et lentretien de lappareil.
! Veuillez conserver cette notice afin de pouvoir la consulter
ultrieurement. En cas de cession de lappareil un tiers,
veuillez galement lui transmettre cette notice.
Conformit aux normes en vigueur
Cette table de cuisson doit tre installe conformment aux
rgles dfinies par les autorits locales de gaz et dlectricit
et aux dernires versions publies des normes suivantes :
AS/NZS 5601 Code relatif linstallation dappareils
gaz
Rgles de cblage de la SAA
Positionnement
! Conservez les matriaux demballage hors de porte des

enfants. Ils peuvent reprsenter un danger dtouffement
(voir Prcautions et conseils).
! Lappareil doit tre install par un professionnel qualifi
conformment aux instructions fournies. Une installation
incorrecte peut tre lorigine de blessures pour les
personnes et les animaux ou de dommages matriels.
Ventilation de la cuisine
Si la consommation totale de tous les appareils dpasse
les 3 MJ/h par mtre cube de la pice ou du volume de
lenceinte, lespace doit tre ventil par lune des mthodes
dcrites en dtails ci-dessous. Le critre volume de la
pice pris en compte pour dterminer si la ventilation est
adquate ou non correspond lespace ne pouvant pas
tre isol par des portes.
Ventilation naturelle directe venant de lextrieur
Deux ouvertures permanentes vers lextrieur doivent tre
mnages. Les ouvertures doivent tre places de manire
assurer que la distance entre le haut de louverture
suprieur et le plafond de la pice ou de lenceinte, et la
distance entre le bas de louverture infrieure et le sol de la
pice ou de lenceinte ne dpassent pas 5 % de la hauteur
de la pice ou de lenceinte. La surface de ventilation libre
minimale fournie par chaque ouverture sera calcule en
utilisant la formule suivante :
A=3T
o
A = la surface de ventilation libre minimale (cm2)
T = la consommation totale de gaz de tous les appareils
(MJ/h)
La dimension verticale minimale de toute ouverture de
ventilation libre doit tre de 6 mm.
NOTE 1 Lorsquelle est utilise ici, lexpression directement
vers lextrieur signifie lune des options ci-dessous,
condition que le chemin de ventilation ne soit pas obstru
par des matriaux de construction ou disolation :
(a) Directement travers un mur extrieur (option
prfre).
(b) travers un mur extrieur mais avec un dcalage.
(c) Dans une cavit ventile vers lextrieur.
(d) Dans un espace situ sous le sol et ventil vers

lextrieur.
(e) Dans un espace en toiture ventil vers lextrieur.
FR
NOTE 2 Les deux ouvertures peuvent tre combines

condition que le haut et le bas de louverture atteignent les
limites fixes dans cette notice.
Ventilation naturelle par le biais dune pice adjacente
Deux ouvertures permanentes doivent tre mnages
dans la pice ou lenceinte. Les ouvertures doivent tre
places de manire assurer que la distance entre le
haut de louverture suprieur et le plafond de la pice ou
de lenceinte, et la distance entre le bas de louverture
infrieure et le sol de la pice ou de lenceinte ne dpassent
pas 5 % de la hauteur de la pice ou de lenceinte.
La surface de ventilation libre minimale fournie par chaque
ouverture sera calcule en utilisant la formule suivante :
A=6T
o
A = la surface de ventilation libre minimale (cm2)
T = la consommation totale de gaz de tous les appareils
(MJ/h)
Ces exigences sappliquent toutes les pices suivantes,
jusqu ce quune pice soit ventile vers lextrieur,
conformment la section prcdente, ou si la consommation
totale de tous les appareils ne dpasse pas les 3 MJ/h par
mtre cube du volume total de lenceinte ou des pices.
La dimension verticale minimale de toute ouverture de
ventilation libre doit tre de 6 mm.
REMARQUE : Les deux ouvertures peuvent tre combines
condition que le haut et le bas de louverture atteignent
les limites fixes dans cette notice.
Les gaz de ptrole liqufis, plus lourds que lair, se
dposent et stagnent au niveau du sol. Par consquent,
les pices contenant des bouteilles de gaz liqufi
doivent aussi disposer douvertures vers lextrieur
afin de permettre lvacuation des ventuelles fuites
de gaz. Cest pourquoi les bouteilles de gaz liqufi,
quelles soient partiellement ou compltement pleines,
ne doivent pas tre installes dans des pices ou des
espaces de stockage se situant en-dessous du niveau du
sol (par exemple, dans des caves, etc.). Il est conseille
de ne conserver dans la pice que la bouteille en cours
dutilisation et de la placer de telle sorte quelle ne
puisse pas tre expose la chaleur produite par des
sources extrieures (fours, chemines, poles, etc.) qui
pourraient faire grimper la temprature de la bouteille
au-dessus de 50 C.
Mobilier adjacent
Lemplacement des points de raccordement est indiqu
au tableau situ la page 5. Pour viter les problmes
de fonctionnement des appareils encastrs dans des
meubles, il convient de respecter les distances minimales
reprsentes sur la figure 4. Il est recommand que
les surfaces adjacentes de la cuisine soient capables
de rsister des tempratures de 65C. Les conditions
suivantes doivent galement tre respectes :
Lappareil doit tre install proximit de mobilier dont
la hauteur ne dpasse pas le dessus de la plaque de
cuisson.
15
CONTENTS
600mm min.
420mm min.
Hottes
Les hottes et les systmes de ventilation de plafond
doivent tre installs selon les instructions du fabricant
mais lespacement par rapport aux brleurs de la plaque
de cuisson ne doit en aucun cas tre infrieur 650 mm
pour les hottes et 750 mm pour les systmes de ventilation.
Si la hotte est installe en-dessous dun lment mural,
ce dernier doit tre situ au moins 700 mm (millimtres)
au-dessus de la surface de la plaque.
Installation de la table de cuisson au-dessus dun four
En cas dinstallation de la table de cuisson au-dessus dun
four, il est impratif que ni le cble dalimentation lectrique
ni le tuyau de gaz (flexible ou non) ne soient en contact
avec les parties chaudes du four.
En cas dinstallation au-dessus four encastr ne disposant
pas de ventilation force pour assurer son refroidissement,
il faut crer des ouvertures daration afin de permettre
une ventilation adquate lintrieur du meuble (au moins
200 cm en bas pour larrive dair et au moins 120 cm en
haut pour la sortie).
Il faut en outre installer une planche de bois sous la plaque
de cuisson en guise disolation, une distance minimale
de 15 mm du meuble.
Le trou ralis pour y installer la plaque de cuisson doit

avoir les dimensions reprsentes sur la figure. Des
crochets de fixation sont fournis, destins fixer la
plaque de cuisson sur des plans de travail de 20 40
mm dpaisseur. Pour assurer la bonne fixation de la
plaque sur le plan de travail, nous vous recommandons
dutiliser tous les crochets fournis.
555 mm
55
mm
Il faut respecter les espacements

minimum suivants par rapport aux
matriaux combustibles :
Lespacement minimum entre le
bord du brleur et le mur latral doit
tre de 200 mm.
Lespacement minimum entre le
bord du brleur et le mur arrire
doit tre de 55 mm.
Pour une application correcte, sassurer que les surfaces

sceller sont propres, sches et sans traces de graisses/
huiles.
475
Le mur en contact direct avec le panneau arrire de

la cuisinire doit tre compos dun matriau non
inflammable. Pendant le fonctionnement de la cuisinire,
le panneau arrire de cette dernire peut atteindre une
temprature de 50 C suprieure la temprature de la
pice.
Les meubles de cuisine installs ct de la cuisinire
et qui sont plus hauts que le dessus de la plaque de
cuisson doivent tre situs au moins 600 mm du bord
de la plaque elle-mme.
Si la hotte est installe en-dessous dun lment mural,
ce dernier doit tre situ au moins 700 mm (millimtres)
au-dessus de la surface de la plaque.
Les meubles installs ct de la hotte doit tre situ
au moins 420 mm au-dessus de la plaque de cuisson.
650mm min.
FR
Schma de fixation des crochets
Position du crochet
pour top H=20mm
Devant
Position du crochet
pour top H=40mm
Position du crochet
pour top H=30mm
Derrire
! Utilisez tous les crochets compris dans le sachet

accessoires
Avant de procder linstallation, enlever les grilles et les

brleurs du plan de cuisson et renverser celui-ci en veillant
ce que les thermocouples et les bougies ne soient pas
endommags.
Si la table nest pas installe au-dessus dun four

encastrer, il faut monter un panneau disolation en bois.
Il faut le monter au moins 20 mm de distance du bord
infrieur de la table.
Appliquer les joints fournis

avec lappareil sur les bords
extrieurs du plan de cuisson
pour empcher le passage de
lair, de lhumidit et de leau
(voir figure).
Aration
Pour garantir une bonne aration, la cavit dencastrement
doit tre dpourvue de paroi arrire. Il est conseill
dinstaller le four de manire ce quil repose sur deux
cales en bois ou bien sur un plan dappui continu qui ait une
dcoupe dau moins 45 x 560 mm (voir figures).
16
CONTENTS
560
.
mm
45 m
m.
Raccordement lectrique
Les tables munies dun cordon dalimentation tripolaire,

sont prvues pour un fonctionnement courant alternatif
la tension et la frquence dalimentation indiques sur
la plaquette des caractristiques (place sous la table de
cuisson). Le conducteur de terre du cble est jaune/vert. En
cas dinstallation au-dessus dun four encastrer, la connexion
lectrique de la table et celle du four doivent tre effectues
sparment, pour des questions de scurit lectrique mais
aussi pour simplifier, au besoin, lextraction du four.
Branchement du cble dalimentation au rseau lectrique
Montez sur le cble une prise normalise adapte la
charge indique sur ltiquette des caractristiques.
En cas de raccordement direct au rseau, il faut intercaler entre
lappareil et le rseau un interrupteur coupure omnipolaire
ayant au moins 3 mm dcartement entre les contacts,
dimensionn la charge et conforme aux normes en vigueur
(le fil de terre ne doit pas tre interrompu par linterrupteur).
Le cble dalimentation ne doit atteindre, en aucun point, des
tempratures dpassant de 50C la temprature ambiante.
! Linstallateur est responsable du bon raccordement
lectrique de lappareil et du respect des normes de scurit.
Avant de procder au branchement, assurez-vous que :
Lappareil est mis la terre et la fiche est conforme aux
exigences lgales;
La prise de courant peut supporter la puissance maximale
de lappareil qui est indique sur la plaque signaltique;
La tension est situe dans la plage de valeurs indique
sur la plaque signaltique;
La prise de courant est compatible avec la fiche de
lappareil. Si la prise de courant nest pas compatible
avec la fiche, demandez un technicien agr de
la remplacer. Nutilisez pas de rallonges ni de prises
multiples.
! Aprs installation de lappareil, le cble lectrique et la
prise de courant doivent tre facilement accessibles.
! Le cble ne doit tre ni pli ni excessivement cras.
! Il doit tre contrl priodiquement et ne peut tre
remplac que par un technicien agr (voir Assistance).
! Nous dclinons toute responsabilit en cas de non respect
des normes numres ci-dessus.
Raccordement gaz
Vrifiez le type de gaz

! Avant linstallation, vrifiez que le type de gaz (gaz naturel
ou universel GPL) de la cuisinire est adapt au gaz
disponible dans le lieu dinstallation. Il est extrmement
dangereux dutiliser le mauvais type de gaz avec quelque
appareil que ce soit. Cela peut entraner un incendie ou de

blessures graves.
sa sortie dusine, cette cuisinire est configure pour
fonctionner au gaz naturel. Pour utiliser la cuisinire
avec du gaz liqufi (ou au gaz naturel aprs lavoir
utilise prcdemment au gaz liqufi), veuillez suivre les
indications reportes plus loin dans cette section.
Installez le rgulateur fourni pour le gaz naturel (le cas
chant) larrire de lappareil et le plus prs possible
de lappareil.
Il est recommand dinstaller un robinet et un raccord
disolement afin de faciliter la dconnexion pour les
interventions dentretien. Ces derniers doivent tre situs
un endroit accessible.
! Vrifiez que la pression de lalimentation en gaz
correspond aux valeurs indiques dans le Tableau 1 (
Caractristiques des brleurs et des injecteurs ). Cela
garantira le fonctionnement en toute scurit et la longvit
de votre appareil tout en conservant une bonne efficacit
nergtique.
FR
Raccordement du tuyau ou flexible

Cet appareil est adapt pour tre utilis soit avec un raccord
flexible soit avec un raccord rigide en cuivre.
Pour effectuer la connexion au raccord mamelon (raccord
mle G filet de ) situ larrire de lappareil sur la droite
(figure 8), il faut utiliser soit un tuyau rigide en mtal dot de
raccords conformes aux normes en vigueur soit un tuyau
flexible de classe B ou D.
Au cas o il serait ncessaire de tourner le raccord, il faudra
remplacer le joint dtanchit (fourni avec lappareil).
Si un tuyau flexible est utilis, il devra tre le plus court
possible, avec une longueur maximale de 1,5 mtres ;
le raccord du flexible doit tre conforme au minimum
la classe B ou D de la rglementation AS/NZS1869.
il ne doit tre ni pli, ni entortill ni comprim ;
il ne doit pas tre en contact avec la paroi arrire de
lappareil ou, dans tous les cas, avec des pices pouvant
atteindre une temprature de 50 C ;
il ne doit pas entrer en contact avec des lments pointus
ou des angles tranchants ;
il ne doit pas tre soumis des forces de traction ou de
torsion ;
il doit tre facile inspecter sur toute sa longueur afin
de pouvoir contrler son tat.
Le point de connexion lalimentation doit tre accessible
une fois lappareil install.
Le diamtre intrieur du tuyau doit respecter les
conditions suivantes :
8 mm pour le gaz liqufi ;
13 mm pour le gaz naturel.
Vrification de ltanchit du raccord
Une fois linstallation termine, vrifiez le circuit de gaz, les
connexions internes et les robinets en utilisant une solution
savonneuse (jamais une flamme). Vrifiez galement que
le tuyau de raccordement ne peut pas entrer en contact
avec des parties mobiles qui pourraient lendommager ou
lcraser. Assurez-vous que le tuyau de gaz naturel est
adapt pour une alimentation en gaz suffisante lorsque
tous les brleurs sont allums.
17
CONTENTS
FR
Copie de la plaque signaltique

Si la plaque signaltique se trouve cache par le mobilier
lorsque la cuisinire est en place, placez une copie de la
plaque signaltique sur une surface du mobilier situ ct
de la cuisinire.
Adaptation aux diffrents types de gaz
Pour adapter lappareil un type de gaz autre que le gaz par
dfaut (indiqu sur la plaque signaltique situe la base
de la plaque de cuisson ou sur lemballage), remplacez les
injecteurs de tous les brleurs en procdant comme suit :
1. Enlevez les grilles du plan de cuisson et sortez les
brleurs de leur logement.
2. Dvissez les injecteurs laide dune cl douille de
7 mm et remplacez-les par les injecteurs adapts au
nouveau type de gaz (voir tableau 1 Caractristiques
des brleurs et des injecteurs ).
3. Remontez les diffrentes parties en effectuant la
procdure ci-dessus en sens inverse.
4. Une fois cette procdure termine, remplacez lancienne
tiquette par une tiquette indiquant le nouveau gaz
utilis. Vous pouvez vous procurer cette tiquette auprs
de nimporte lequel de nos Services dassistance.
Remplacement des injecteurs sur le brleur deux
flammes indpendantes
1. Enlevez les grilles du plan de cuisson et sortez les
brleurs de leur logement ; Le brleur est form de deux
parties distinctes (voir figure) ;
2. Dvissez les injecteurs laide dune clef en tube de
7 mm. Le brleur intrieur a un injecteur, le brleur
extrieur en a deux (de mme dimension). Remplacez
les injecteurs par dautres appropris au nouveau type
de gaz (voir tableau 1).
3. Remontez les diffrentes parties en effectuant les
oprations dans le sens inverse.

Remplacement des injecteurs du brleur triple
couronne
1. Retirez les supports pour casseroles et soulevez les
brleurs hors de leur logement. Le brleur est compos
de deux parties distinctes (voir figures).
2. Dvissez les injecteurs laide dune cl douille
de 7 mm. Remplacez les injecteurs par des modles
dinjecteurs adapts pour le nouveau type de gaz (voir
Tableau 1). Les deux injecteurs ont le mme diamtre
dorifice.
3. Remettez tous les composants en place en rptant les
oprations ci-dessus dans le sens inverse.
18
Rglage de lair primaire des brleurs :

Ne ncessite pas de rglage.
Rglage des brleurs au minimum :
1. Tournez le robinet dans la position de minimum.
2. Retirez le bouton et ajustez la vis de rglage qui se situe
dans ou ct de la tige du robinet, jusqu ce que la
flamme soit petite mais rgulire.
! Dans le cas du brleur DCDR mono commande, effectuer
le rglage au moyen des 2 vis situes ct de la tige du
robinet (voir figure).
Rglage
DCDR total
Rglage
DCDR intrieur
3. Une fois obtenu le dbit minimal souhait, allumez le

brleur et tournez brusquement le bouton de la position
de minimum la position de maximum et vice versa
plusieurs reprises, en vrifiant que la flamme ne steint
pas.
4. Certains appareils sont quips dun systme de scurit
(thermocouple). Si lappareil ne fonctionne pas lorsque
les brleurs sont rgls sur la position de minimum,
augmentez le rglage du minimum laide de la vis de
rglage.
5. Aprs avoir procd ce rglage, reposez les scells
sur les by-pass en utilisant de la cire ou une substance
quivalente.
! Si lappareil est raccord une bouteille de gaz liquide,
la vis de rglage doit tre serre au maximum.
! Une fois cette procdure termine, remplacez lancienne
tiquette par une tiquette indiquant le nouveau gaz utilis.
Vous pouvez vous procurer cette tiquette auprs de
nimporte lequel de nos Services dassistance.
! Au cas o la pression de gaz utilise serait diffrente
(ou seulement lgrement diffrente) de la pression
recommande, il faut installer un rgulateur de pression
adapt sur le tuyau darrive de gaz (afin dtre en
conformit avec les rglementations nationales en vigueur).
CONTENTS
Vrifications aprs installation
FR
Effectuez des vrifications aprs installation et assurezvous que lappareil fonctionne correctement et en toute
scurit avant de vous en loigner. Testez tous les brleurs
individuellement et lun aprs lautre.
Vrification de la prsente de fuite
Veillez ce que tous les boutons de commande de gaz
soient dans la position teinte.
Veillez ce que lalimentation en gaz soit ouverte.
Vaporisez une solution deau savonneuse sur
tous les raccords de lalimentation en gaz ainsi
que sur toute la longueur des tuyaux flexibles.
VOUS NE DEVEZ EN AUCUN CAS UTILISER UNE
FLAMME NUE AFIN DE DTECTER LVENTUELLE
PRSENCE DE FUITES DE GAZ.
Si des bulles apparaissent un endroit ou un autre, coupez
lalimentation en gaz, vrifiez tous les raccords et refaites
un test. Si vous ne parvenez pas un fonctionnement
satisfaisant, contactez votre lieu dachat ou leur technicien
dentretien agr.
Vrification de la flamme
Allumez chaque brleur et vrifiez que la flamme est bleue
avec le moins de jaune possible. Sil y a beaucoup de
jaune, si la flamme steint ou bien si la combustion est
excessivement bruyante, vrifiez la pression et ajustez-la
au niveau du rgulateur si cela savre ncessaire.
Si vous ne parvenez pas un fonctionnement satisfaisant,
contactez votre lieu dachat ou leur technicien dentretien
agr.
Fonctionnement de lallumeur
Vrifiez que lallumeur de chaque brleur parvient
enflammer correctement le gaz.
Si un allumeur ne fonctionne pas, dbranchez dabord la
fiche de la prise de courant puis vrifiez que toutes les
connexions lectriques sont correctes.
Si vous ne parvenez pas un fonctionnement satisfaisant,
contactez votre lieu dachat ou leur technicien dentretien
agr.
Rglage du minimum
Vrifiez le rglage du minimum pour chaque brleur de
la plaque de cuisson afin de vous assurer que la flamme
minimale ne risque pas dtre teinte par les courants dair.
Allumez le brleur.
Tournez le bouton jusqu la position de minimum.
Assurez-vous que la flamme est stable et ne steindra
pas au moindre courant dair.
Pour ajuster la flamme minimale :
Suivez la procdure dcrite dans les instructions relatives
au changement de gaz utilis.
NE MODIFIEZ EN AUCUN CAS CET APPAREIL SI CE
NEST TEL QUE DCRIT DANS CETTE NOTICE.
19
CONTENTS
FR
Caractristiques des brleurs et des injecteurs

Gaz naturel (1,0 kPa)
Gaz liqufi (2,75 kPa)
Diamtre des
injecteurs (mm)
Consommation de gaz
(MJ/hr)
Diamtre des
injecteurs (mm)
Consommation de gaz
(MJ/hr)
Brleur auxiliaire
0.85
3.6
0.50
3.3
Brleur semi-rapide
1.10
6.0
0.64
5.5
Brleur rapide
1.24
7.8
0.80
9.0
Double flamme
0.80 + 1.19 + 1.19
17.0
0.50 + 0.70 + 0.70
16.5
Total
34.4
34.3
Raccordement gaz
Raccord d'arrive de gaz
Filetage (mle) BSP de 1/2
Emplacement de
l'arrive de gaz
40 mm du bord arrire
40 mm du bord latral
A
R
DC
S
PK 640 R GH AUS
Caractristiques des brleurs et des injecteurs

Gaz naturel (1,0 kPa)
Diamtre des
injecteurs (mm)
Gaz liqufi (2,75 kPa)
Consommation de gaz
(MJ/hr)
Diamtre des
injecteurs (mm)
Consommation de gaz
(MJ/hr)
Brleur auxiliaire
0.85
3.6
0.50
3.3
Brleur semi-rapide
1.10
6.0
0.64
5.5
1.19 (x2)
13.5
0.70 (x2)
13.0
0.80 + 1.19 + 1.19
17.0
0.50 + 0.70 + 0.70
16.5
Brleur wok triple couronne

Double flamme
Total
40.1
38.3
Raccordement gaz
Raccord d'arrive de gaz
Filetage (mle) BSP de 1/2
Emplacement de
l'arrive de gaz
40 mm du bord arrire
40 mm du bord latral
S
DC
TC
A
PK 750 RT GH AUS
! Le produit a t test conforme la norme AS4551
20
CONTENTS
Mise en marche et utilisation

! La position du brleur gaz ou de la plaque lectrique*
correspondante est indique sur chaque manette.
Les tables de cuisson sont quipes de rglage de
puissance discret permettant de rgler avec prcision la
flamme jusqu 5 niveaux diffrents. Grce ce systme,
les tables gaz permettent de toujours obtenir les mmes
rsultats pour chaque recette car il est plus simple de
reprer avec prcision le niveau de puissance optimal pour
le type de cuisson choisi.
Brleurs gaz
Chaque manette permet de rgler le brleur slectionn
comme suit:

Le brleur deux flammes

Ce brleur gaz est form de deux anneaux de flamme
concentriques pouvant fonctionner ensemble ou sparment
(uniquement dans le cas de double commande).
FR
Le brleur tant quip dun dispositif de scurit de

flamme, appuyer pendant au moins 2-3 secondes de suite
sur la manette pour permettre au dispositif de se rchauffer.
Double commande :
Chaque couronne composant le brleur a sa propre manette
de commande :
la manette caractrise par le symbole contrle lanneau
extrieur ;
la manette caractrise par le symbole
contrle lanneau
intrieur ;
Pour allumer la couronne souhaite, appuyer sur la manette
correspondante en tournant dans le sens inverse des
aiguilles dune montre jusqu la position de puissance
Eteint
Maximum
Minimum
Pour allumer un brleur, approchez une flamme ou

un allume-gaz, appuyez fond et tournez la manette
correspondante dans le sens inverse des aiguilles dune
montre pour slectionner la position de puissance maximale.
Sur les modles quips dun dispositif de scurit gaz,
appuyez pendant au moins 2-3 secondes de suite sur la
manette pour permettre au dispositif de se rchauffer.
Pour allumer un brleur sur les modles quips de
bougie dallumage, appuyez ensuite fond sur la manette
correspondante et tournez-la dans le sens inverse des aiguilles
dune montre jusqu sa position de puissance maximale.
! En cas dextinction accidentelle des flammes du brleur,
tournez la manette jusqu larrt et attendez au moins 1
minute avant de tenter de rallumer.
Pour teindre le brleur tournez la manette dans le sens des
aiguilles dune montre pour la ramener en face du symbole .
Rglage discret de la flamme
Il est possible de rgler laide de la manette 5 niveaux de
puissance pour le brleur choisi.
Pour passer dun niveau lautre,
il suffit de tourner la manette vers
le niveau choisi.
Un dclic /clic signale le passage
dun niveau lautre.
Le niveau slectionn est signal
par le symbole correspondant
(symboles
) et, sur
les tables quipes dafficheur, par allumage des LED (5 =
puissance max. ; 1= puissance min.). Ce systme assure un
rglage parfait de la flamme et permet de toujours obtenir
le mme rsultat de cuisson car il est plus facile de rgler
le niveau de puissance dsir.
.
maximale
Pour une utilisation optimale du foyer double flamme,
ne jamais rgler, simultanment, lanneau du centre
sur sa position minimale et lanneau extrieur sur sa
position maximale.
Mono Commande :
Les couronnes qui composent le brleur ont une manette
de commande.
Pour allumer les deux anneaux en mme temps, appuyer
sur la manette en tournant dans le sens inverse des aiguilles
dune montre jusquau symbole
(max) -
(min).
Pour passer lallumage de lanneau du centre uniquement,

appuyer sur la manette en tournant dans le sens des aiguilles
(max ) - (min).
dune montre jusquau symbole
(pour passer dun mode lautre, il faut teindre le brleur).
Pour teindre le brleur, appuyer sur la manette en tournant
dans le sens des aiguilles dune montre pour la ramener en
face du symbole ).
Conseils pratiques pour lutilisation des

brleurs
Pour obtenir un meilleur rendement, noubliez pas :
dutiliser des rcipients appropris chaque brleur (voir
tableau) pour viter que les flammes ne dpassent de
sous les casseroles.
de toujours utiliser des casseroles fond plat et avec
couvercle.
de tourner la manette dans la position minimum au
moment de lbullition.
21
CONTENTS
FR
Brleurs
Rcipients (cm)
Rapide (R)
24 - 26
Semi Rapide (S)
16 - 20
Auxiliaire (A)
10 - 14
Deux Flammes (DCDR intrieur)
10 - 14
Deux Flammes (DCDR extrieur)
24 - 26
Casseroles utiliser sur les tables de cuisson de 60 cm

Brleurs
Rcipients (cm)
Semi Rapide (S)
16 - 20
Auxiliaire (A)
10 - 14
Triple Couronne (TC)
24 - 26
Deux Flammes (DCDR intrieur)
10 - 14
Deux Flammes (DCDR extrieur)
26 - 28
Casseroles utiliser sur les tables de cuisson de 75 cm
! Sur les modles munis de grille de rduction, cette dernire

ne doit tre utilise que sur le brleur Deux flammes
intrieur (DCDR intrieur), lorsque lon utilise des rcipients
de diamtre infrieur 12cm.
Pour distinguer le type de brleur reportez-vous aux dessins
figurant dans le paragraphe Caractristiques des brleurs
et des injecteurs
Prcautions et conseils
! Cet appareil a t conu et fabriqu conformment aux
normes internationales de scurit. Ces conseils sont fournis
pour des raisons de scurit et doivent tre lus attentivement.
Scurit gnrale
Ce mode demploi concerne un appareil encastrer

classe 3.
Pour bien fonctionner, les appareils gaz ont besoin
dun apport dair rgulier. Il est important de vrifier
lors de leur installation, que tous les points indiqus
dans le paragraphe relatif leur Positionnement
soient respects.
Les instructions fournies ne sont applicables quaux
pays dont les symboles sont reports dans la notice
et sur la plaquette dimmatriculation.
Cet appareil a t conu pour un usage familial, de
type non professionnel.
Cet appareil ne doit pas tre install en extrieur, mme
dans un endroit abrit, il est en effet trs dangereux de
le laisser expos la pluie et aux orages.
Ne touchez pas lappareil si vous tes pieds nus ou si
vous avez les mains ou les pieds mouills ou humides.
Cet appareil qui sert cuire des aliments ne doit
tre utilis que par des adultes conformment aux
instructions du mode demploi. Toute autre utilisation
(comme par exemple le chauffage dune pice) est
22
impropre et donc dangereux. Le fabricant dcline

toute responsabilit en cas de dommages provoqus
par un usage impropre ou erron.
Evitez que le cordon dalimentation dautres petits
lectromnagers touche des parties chaudes du four.
Les orifices ou les fentes daration ou dvacuation de
la chaleur ne doivent pas tre bouchs
Contrlez toujours que les manettes sont bien dans la
position / quand lappareil nest pas utilis.
Ne tirez surtout pas sur le cble pour dbrancher la fiche
de la prise de courant.
Neffectuez aucune opration de nettoyage ou dentretien
sans avoir auparavant dbranch la fiche de la prise de
courant.
En cas de panne, nessayez en aucun cas daccder aux
mcanismes internes pour tenter de rparer lappareil.
Contactez le service dAssistance (voir Assistance).
Faites attention ce que les manches des casseroles
soient toujours tourns vers lintrieur de la table de
cuisson pour viter tout risque daccident.
Nabaissez pas le couvercle en verre (sil y en a un) tant
que les brleurs gaz ou la plaque lectrique sont chauds.
Ne laissez pas la plaque lectrique allume sans
casserole dessus.
Nutilisez pas de casseroles instables ou dformes.
Cet appareil nest pas prvu pour tre utilis par des
personnes (y compris les enfants) dont les capacits
physiques, sensorielles ou mentales sont rduites,
ou des personnes dnues dexprience ou de
connaissance, sauf si elles ont pu bnficier, par
lintermdiaire dune personne responsable de leur
scurit, dune surveillance ou dinstructions pralables
concernant dutilisation de lappareil.
Sassurer que les enfants ne jouent pas avec lappareil.
Le dispositif nest pas destin tre mis en uvre
par une minuterie externe ou un systme de
tlcommande spare.
Mise au rebut
Mise au rebut du matriel demballage : conformez-vous

aux rglementations locales, les emballages pourront
ainsi tre recycls.
La Directive Europenne 2002/96/CEE sur les Dchets
des Equipements Electriques et Electroniques (DEEE),
exige que les appareils mnagers usags ne soient pas
jets dans le flux normal des dchets municipaux. Les
appareils usags doivent tre collects sparment afin
doptimiser le taux de rcupration et le recyclage des
matriaux qui les composent et rduire limpact sur la
sant humaine et lenvironnement. Le symbole de la
poubelle barre est appose sur tous les produits pour
rappeler les obligations de collecte spare.
Les consommateurs pourront confier leur appareil usag
au service de collecte des collectivits locales ou de leurs
groupements, ou si la lgislation nationale le permet, le
rendre au revendeur lors de lachat dun nouvel appareil
similaire.
Tous les principaux fabricants dappareils mnagers
travaillent activement dans la cration et la gestion de
systmes de collecte et denlvement des appareils
usags.
CONTENTS
Nettoyage et entretien
Anomalies et remdes
Mise hors tension
Il peut arriver que lappareil ne fonctionne pas ou ne

fonctionne pas trs bien. Avant dappeler le service aprsvente, voyons ensemble que faire. Vrifiez avant tout sil ny
a pas de coupure de gaz ou de courant, et si les robinets
du gaz en amont de lappareil sont bien ouverts.
Avant toute opration de nettoyage ou dentretien coupez

lalimentation lectrique de lappareil.
Nettoyage de lappareil
! Nutilisez pas de dtergents abrasifs ou corrosifs, tels que

dtacheurs et drouilleurs, poudres rcurer et ponges
surface abrasive : ils risquent de rayer irrmdiablement
la surface.
! Ne nettoyez jamais lappareil avec des nettoyeurs vapeur
ou haute pression.
Pour un entretien courant, passez une ponge humide
sur la surface et schez avec du papier essuie-tout.
Les parties dmontables des brleurs doivent tre
laves frquemment leau chaude avec du dtergent
en liminant soigneusement toute incrustation.
Dans le cas de tables quipes dallumage automatique,
nettoyez frquemment et soigneusement lextrmit des
dispositifs dallumage lectronique instantan et vrifiez
que les orifices de sortie du gaz ne sont pas bouchs.
Des taches peuvent se former sur lacier inox si ce dernier
reste trop longtemps au contact dune eau trs calcaire
ou de dtergents agressifs (contenant du phosphore).
Il est conseill de rincer abondamment et dessuyer
aprs le nettoyage. Mieux vaut essuyer aussitt tout
dbordement deau.
! Pas besoin de retirer les grilles pour nettoyer la surface du
plan de cuisson. Grce leur systme de support, il suffit de
soulever les grilles et de les garder dans cette position ou
des les faire pivoter pour les poser sur un support arrire.
Attention ne pas poser les grilles chaudes sur
lventuel couvercle en verre pour viter que les
caoutchoucs sur le verre sabment.
FR
Le brleur ne sallume pas ou la flamme nest pas

uniforme.
Avez-vous contrl si :
les orifices de sortie du gaz ne sont pas par hasard
bouchs.
les pices amovibles composant le brleur sont bien
montes correctement.
il y a des courants dair dans les environs du plan de
cuisson
La flamme steint dans les versions quipes de
scurit de flamme.
vous avez bien appuy fond sur la manette.
vous avez bien appuy fond sur la manette pendant
un laps de temps suffisant pour permettre lactivation du
dispositif de scurit.
les orifices de sortie du gaz situs en face du dispositif
de scurit ne sont pas par hasard bouchs.
Le brleur steint quand il est rgl sur la position de
minimum.
les orifices de sortie du gaz ne sont pas par hasard bouchs
il y a des courants dair dans les environs du plan de cuisson
les minima nont pas bien t rgls.
Les casseroles sont instables.
le fond de la casserole est parfaitement plat
la casserole est bien place au centre du brleur
la position des grilles na pas par hasard t inverse.
Entretien robinets gaz
Il peut arriver quau bout dun certain temps, un robinet se

bloque ou tourne difficilement. Il faut alors le remplacer.
! Cette opration doit tre effectue par un technicien
agr par le fabricant.
23
CONTENTS
ES
Instalacin
! Antes de desembalar el aparato, se ruega leer este
manual de instrucciones detenidamente. El manual
contiene informacin importante sobre la seguridad para la
instalacin, el uso y el mantenimiento del aparato.
! Conserve estas instrucciones de uso para consultas
futuras. Entrguelas al futuro dueo en caso de cambio de
propiedad del aparato.
Conformidad con las normas
Esta placa de coccin se debe instalar segn los requisitos
de las autoridades de gas y electricidad locales y de
conformidad con la versin ms reciente de las siguientes
normas:
Cdigo de instalaciones de gas AS/NZS 5601
Reglas de cableado SAA.
Emplazamiento
! Mantener el material de embalaje fuera del alcance de los

nios. El material de embalaje implica riesgos de ahogo o
sofocacin (ver Precauciones y consejos).
! El aparato debe ser instalado por un profesional calificado
segn las instrucciones suministradas. Una instalacin
incorrecta puede causar daos a personas, animales y
bienes.
Ventilacin de la cocina
Si el consumo total de todos los aparatos es superior a
3 MJ/h por cada metro cbico del ambiente o recinto, se
deber implementar uno de los sistemas de ventilacin
enumerados a continuacin. Para evaluar si la ventilacin
es adecuada, debe entenderse como ambiente el volumen
de la habitacin no aislable mediante el cierre de puertas.
Ventilacin exterior natural directa
Debe haber dos aberturas permanentes directas al exterior.
La distancia entre el borde superior de la abertura superior
y el techo de la habitacin o recinto y la distancia entre el
borde inferior de la abertura inferior y el piso de la habitacin
o recinto no deben ser superiores al 5% de la altura de la
habitacin o recinto. El rea mnima de ventilacin de cada
abertura se calcula con la siguiente frmula:
A=3T
donde
A = rea de ventilacin mnima (cm2)
T = consumo de gas total de todos los aparatos (MJ/h)
Cada abertura de ventilacin debe medir como mnimo 6
mm de alto.
NOTA 1 En esta clusula, el trmino directo al exterior
alude a cualquiera de las siguientes opciones, siempre que
el paso de la ventilacin no est obstruido por material de
construccin o aislamiento:
(a) Directamente a travs de una pared externa (opcin
preferida).
(b) A travs de una pared externa pero desfasada.
(c) A una cavidad ventilada hacia el exterior.
(d) A un espacio subterrneo ventilado hacia el exterior.
(e) A un altillo ventilado hacia el exterior.
24
NOTA 2 Es posible combinar dos aberturas siempre que

el borde superior e inferior de las aberturas respeten los
lmites establecidos por esta clusula.
Ventilacin natural a travs de una habitacin adyacente
Debe haber dos aberturas permanentes en la habitacin o
recinto. La distancia entre el borde superior de la abertura
superior y el techo de la habitacin o recinto y la distancia
entre el borde inferior de la abertura inferior y el piso de la
habitacin o recinto no deben ser superiores al 5% de la
altura de la habitacin o recinto.
El rea mnima de ventilacin de cada abertura se calcula
con la siguiente frmula:
A=6T
donde
A = rea de ventilacin mnima (cm2)
T = consumo de gas total de todos los aparatos (MJ/h)
Estos requisitos se aplican a todas las habitaciones
subsiguientes hasta que haya una habitacin con
ventilacin al exterior, conforme a la seccin anterior, o que
el consumo total de los aparatos no sea superior a 3 MJ/h
por cada metro cbico del volumen total de la habitacin
o recinto.
Cada abertura de ventilacin debe medir como mnimo 6
mm de alto.
NOTA: Es posible combinar dos aberturas siempre que
el borde superior e inferior de las aberturas respeten los
lmites establecidos por esta clusula.
El GLP tiende a bajar hacia el suelo, ya que es ms
pesado que el aire. En consecuencia, las habitaciones
que contengan bombonas de GLP debern estar
equipadas con ventiladores para que, en caso de
fugas, el gas se pueda evacuar. Por este motivo, no hay
que instalar o almacenar bombonas de GLP parcial o
totalmente llenas en habitaciones o reas de almacenaje
subterrneas (stanos, etc.). Se recomienda conservar
en la habitacin slo la bombona en uso, en una posicin
no expuesta a calor proveniente de fuentes externas
(hornos, hogares, calentadores, etc.)que podran
aumentar la temperatura de la bombona a ms de 50C.
Armarios adyacentes
La ubicacin de los puntos de conexin se indica en la tabla
de la pgina 5. Para utilizar los aparatos en la vivienda
sin problemas, hay que respetar las distancias mnimas
indicadas en la figura 4. Las superficies de la cocina
adyacentes deberan poder soportar una temperatura
de 65C. Adems, se debern cumplir las siguientes
condiciones:
El aparato debera instalarse al lado de los armarios,
cuya altura no debera superar la altura del borde
superior de la placa de coccin.
La pared en contacto directo con el panel posterior de
la placa de coccin debe ser de material no inflamable.
Durante el uso de la placa de coccin, el panel posterior
podra alcanzar una temperatura 50C superior a la
temperatura ambiente.
Los armarios de cocina instalados al lado de la placa de
coccin que superen la altura de la placa debern estar
al menos a 600 mm de distancia del borde de la placa.
CONTENTS
600mm min.
420mm min.
650mm min.
Si la campana est instalada debajo de un armario de

pared, ste debe estar al menos 700 mm por encima de
la superficie de la placa.
Los armarios adyacentes a la campana deben estar al
menos 420 mm por encima de la placa.
Campanas de extraccin
Las campanas de extraccin y los ventiladores de escape
superiores se deben instalar siguiendo las instrucciones del
fabricante. De todas maneras, deben quedar al menos 650
mm de distancia entre los hornillos de la placa y la campana
y al menos 750 mm de distancia entre los hornillos y los
ventiladores de escape superiores.
Si la campana est instalada debajo de un armario de
pared, ste debe estar al menos 700 mm por encima de
la superficie de la placa.
Instalacin de la placa de coccin sobre un horno
Si la placa se instala sobre un horno, ni el cable elctrico ni
el tubo o la manguera de gas deberan entrar en contacto
con partes calientes del alojamiento del horno.
En caso de instalacin sobre un horno empotrado sin
ventilacin forzada, deberan proveerse ventiladores
adecuados (entrada de al menos 200 cm en la base y
salida de al menos 120 cm en la parte superior) para
permitir una ventilacin adecuada dentro del alojamiento.
Debajo de la placa de coccin, al menos a 15 mm del
alojamiento de la placa, debera instalarse un panel de
madera aislante.
Antes de realizar la instalacin, quite las rejillas y los
quemadores de la encimera e invirtala teniendo cuidado
de no daar los termopares y las bujas.
Coloque las juntas suministradas
con el aparato en los bordes
externos de la encimera para
impedir el paso de aire, humedad
y agua (ver la figura).
mm
55
Esquema de fijacin de los ganchos

Posicin del gancho para Posicin del gancho para
superficies H=20mm
superficies H=30mm

Adelante

Posicin del gancho para
superficies H=40mm
Atrs
! Use los ganchos contenidos en el paquete de accesorios

Cuando la encimera no se instale sobre un horno empotrado,
es necesario introducir un panel de madera como
aislamiento. El mismo deber colocarse a una distancia
mnima de 20 mm. de la pared inferior de la encimera.
Aireacin
Para garantizar una buena aireacin es necesario eliminar
la pared posterior del hueco para el horno. Es preferible
instalar el horno apoyado sobre dos listeles de madera o
sobre una superficie continua que tenga una abertura de
45 x 560 mm. como mnimo (ver las figuras).
Para que la aplicacin sea correcta, controle que las

superficies que se deben sellar estn limpias, secas y sin
grasa o aceites.
El hueco de instalacin debera ser de las medidas
indicadas en la figura. Se suministran ganchos de fijacin
para fijar la placa a encimeras de 20 a 40 mm de grosor.
Para asegurarse de que la placa quede firmemente fijada
a la encimera se recomienda utilizar todos los ganchos
suministrados.
ES
m
475
Respetar las siguientes distancias

mnimas a los materiales
combustibles:
Distancia mnima del borde del
hornillo a la pared lateral: 200 mm.
Distancia mnima del borde del
hornillo a la pared posterior: 55
mm.
555 mm
560
mm
45 m
m.
Conexin elctrica
Las encimeras que poseen cable de alimentacin tripolar,

se fabrican para funcionar con corriente alterna, a la tensin
y frecuencia de alimentacin indicadas en la placa de
caractersticas (ubicada en la parte inferior de la encimera).
25
CONTENTS
ES
El conductor de puesta a tierra del cable se distingue por

los colores amarillo-verde. Cuando se realiza la instalacin
sobre un horno empotrado, la conexin elctrica de la
encimera y la del horno se deben realizar por separado, ya
sea por razones de seguridad elctrica, como para facilitar
la eventual extraccin del horno.
Conexin del cable de alimentacin elctrica a la red
Instale en el cable un enchufe normalizado para la carga
indicada en la placa de caractersticas.
En el caso de conexin directa a la red, es necesario
interponer entre el aparato y la red, un interruptor omnipolar
con una distancia mnima entre los contactos de 3 mm.,
dimensionado para esa carga y que responda a las normas
vigentes (el conductor de tierra no debe ser interrumpido por
el interruptor). El cable de alimentacin elctrica se debe
colocar de modo tal que no alcance en ningn punto una
temperatura que supere en 50C la temperatura ambiente.
! El instalador es responsable de la correcta conexin
elctrica y del cumplimiento de las normas de seguridad.
Antes de efectuar la conexin verifique que:
El aparato est conectado a tierra y la clavija sea
conforme a la ley;
La toma pueda soportar la potencia mxima del aparato,
indicada en la placa de datos;
La tensin est dentro de los valores indicados en la placa
de datos;
La toma sea compatible con la clavija del aparato. Si la
toma es incompatible con la clavija, hacerla sustituir por
un tcnico autorizado. No utilizar prolongadores ni tomas
mltiples.
! Una vez instalado el aparato, el cable elctrico y la toma
de corriente deben ser fcilmente accesibles.
! El cable no debe sufrir pliegues ni compresiones.
! El cable debe ser revisado peridicamente y sustituido
slo por tcnicos autorizados (ver Asistencia).
! La empresa declina toda responsabilidad cuando estas
normas no sean respetadas.
Conexin de gas
Comprobacin del tipo de gas

! Antes de la instalacin, comprobar que el tipo de
gas (natural o GLP universal) de la placa de coccin
coindica con el tipo de gas disponible en la instalacin.
Es extremadamente peligroso utilizar un tipo de gas no
adecuado para el aparato: podran producirse incendios
y lesiones graves.
Esta placa de coccin se suministra ajustada de fbrica
para gas natural. Para convertirla a GLP (o de GLP a gas
natural nuevamente) seguir las instrucciones ms adelante
en esta seccin.
Instalar el regulador suministrado para gas natural (si
corresponde) en la parte posterior del aparato, lo ms cerca
posible del aparato.
Se recomienda instalar una vlvula aislante y una unin
para facilitar la desconexin en caso de reparaciones. Estos
componentes deberan quedar en una posicin accesible.
26
! Comprobar que la presin del suministro de gas

corresponda a los valores indicados en la Tabla 1
(Especificaciones del hornillo y la boquilla). Esto
garantizar el uso seguro y la longevidad del aparato
manteniendo eficiente el consumo de energa.
Conexin del tubo o la manguera
Este aparato es adecuado para el uso con mangueras
flexibles o con tubos rgidos.
Utilizar un tubo metlico rgido con empalmes conformes a
las normas vigentes o una manguera flexible aprobada de
clase B o D para la conexin al niple (rosca G macho)
situado en la parte posterior del aparato a la derecha
(figura 8).
Si es necesario girar el empalme, sustituir la junta
(suministrada con el aparato).
Si se utiliza una manguera, sta debera ser lo ms corta
posible (longitud mxima 1,5 metros);
La conexin flexible debe ser como mnimo de clase B
o D segn la norma AS/NZS1869;
No se debera plegar, enroscar ni comprimir;
No debera entrar en contacto con la pared posterior
del aparato ni con partes que puedan alcanzar una
temperatura de 50C;
No debera entrar en contacto con partes puntiagudas
o aristas filosas;
No debera estar sujeta a tirones o torceduras;
Debera resultar fcil de inspeccionar en toda su longitud.
El punto de conexin de la alimentacin debe estar
accesible con el aparato instalado.
El dimetro interno del tubo debera ser de:
8 mm para GLP;
13 mm para gas natural.
Comprobacin del apriete de la conexin
Terminada la instalacin, comprobar que no haya fugas
en el circuito del gas, en las conexiones internas y en las
llaves, utilizando una solucin jabonosa (nunca una llama).
Comprobar tambin que el tubo de conexin no pueda
entrar en contacto con partes mviles que puedan daarlo
o aplastarlo. Asegurarse de que el tubo de gas natural sea
adecuado para un suministro suficiente al aparato cuando
se enciendan los hornillos.
Duplicado de la placa de datos
Una vez instalada la placa de coccin, si la placa de datos
queda ocultada por los armarios, poner un duplicado sobre
una superficie del armario adyacente a la placa de coccin.
Adaptacin a otro tipo de gas
Para adaptar la placa de coccin a un tipo de gas diferente
del tipo que viene ajustado de fbrica (indicado en la
placa de datos en la base de la placa o en el embalaje),
es necesario sustituir las boquillas de los hornillos de la
siguiente manera:
1. Retirar las rejillas de la placa y desplazar los hornillos
de sus alojamientos.
2. Desenroscar las boquillas utilizando una llave de tubo
de 7 mm y sustituirlas con boquillas adecuadas para
el nuevo tipo de gas (ver la tabla 1 Caractersticas del
hornillo y la boquilla).
CONTENTS
3. Reensamblar las partes siguiendo la secuencia contraria

al procedimiento anterior.
4. Una vez terminado el procedimiento, sustituir la etiqueta
adhesiva anterior con una que indique el nuevo tipo de
gas. Hay etiquetas disponibles en nuestros Centros de
Asistencia.
Sustitucin de los picossen el quemador doble llama
independente
1. Sacar las rejillas y quitar los quemadores de sus sedes.
El quemador est compuesto de 2 partes separados
(ver Fig. E y Fig. F)
2. Destornillar los picos, sirvindose de una llave de tubo de
7 mm. El quemador interno tiene un pico, el quemador
externo tiene dos (del mismo tamao). Reemplazar los
picos por los que se adapten al nuevo tipo de gas (ver
tabla 1).
3. Volver a colocar todos los componentes en sus
respectivas posiciones, efectuando las operaciones
inversas, respecto a la secuencia arriba indicada.
! En el caso del quemador DCDR monomando, la regulacin

se debe realizar con los 2 tornillos ubicados al costado de
la varilla del grifo (ver la figura).
ES
Regulacin
DCDR total
Regulacin
DCDR interno
3. Una vez ajustada la llama baja, con el hornillo encendido,

cambiar rpidamente la posicin del pomo varias veces,
del mnimo al mximo y viceversa, asegurndose de que
la llama no se apague.
4. Algunos aparatos tienen incorporado un dispositivo
de seguridad (termopar). Si el dispositivo no funciona
cuando los hornillos estn regulados en la llama baja,
aumentar el ajuste de la llama baja utilizando el tornillo
de ajuste.
5. Una vez realizado el ajuste, sellar los by-pass con cera
selladora o un producto similar.
! Si el aparato est conectado a gas lquido, el tornillo de
ajuste se debe apretar al mximo.

Sustitucin de las boquillas de los hornillos de triple
llama
1. Retirar los soportes para las ollas y levantar los hornillos
de sus alojamientos. El hornillo consiste en dos partes
separadas (ver las figuras).
2. Desenroscar las boquillas con una llave de tubo de 7 mm.
Sustituir las boquillas con modelos adecuados para el
nuevo tipo de gas (ver la tabla 1). El dimetro del agujero
de ambas boquillas es el mismo.
3. Sustituir todos los componentes siguiendo la secuencia
contraria al procedimiento anterior.
Ajuste del aire primario de los hornillos:

No requiere ajustes.
Ajuste de los hornillos al mnimo:
1. Girar la llave a la posicin de llama baja.
2. Sacar el pomo y regular el tornillo de ajuste, situado
dentro o al lado del perno de la llave, hasta que la llama
sea pequea pero constante.
! Una vez terminado el procedimiento, sustituir la etiqueta

adhesiva anterior con una que indique el nuevo tipo de
gas. Hay etiquetas disponibles en nuestros Centros de
Asistencia.
! Si la presin del gas es diferente (o vara ligeramente)
respecto de aquella recomendada, instalar un regulador de
presin adecuado en el tubo de entrada (conforme a las
normas nacionales vigentes).
Controles despus de la instalacin
Controlar la instalacin y asegurarse de que el

funcionamiento sea correcto y seguro. Probar todos los
hornillos individual y conjuntamente.
Control de fugas
Asegurarse de que todos los selectores del gas estn
en Off.
Asegurarse de que el suministro de gas est activado.
Pulverizar una solucin de agua jabonosa sobre
todas las articulaciones y en toda la longitud de las
mangueras. NO UTILIZAR NUNCA LLAMAS LIBRES
PARA COMPROBAR LA AUSENCIA DE FUGAS.
Si aparecen burbujas, desactivar el suministro de gas,
controlar todas las conexiones y volver a probar. Si el
resultado no es satisfactorio, contactar con el vendedor y
con el agente para pedir asistencia.
Control de la llama
Encender cada uno de los hornillos y asegurarse de que
la llama sea azul con una leve punta amarilla. Si la llama
est muy amarilla, se levanta demasiado o hace demasiado
27
CONTENTS
ES
ruido, verificar la presin y ajustar el regulador.

Si el resultado no es satisfactorio, contactar con el vendedor
y con el agente para pedir asistencia.
Encendido
Comprobar que el encendedor de cada hornillo efectivamente
encienda el gas.
Si un encendedor no funciona, desconectar la clavija de la
toma de alimentacin elctrica y comprobar que todas las
conexiones elctricas sean correctas.
Si el resultado no es satisfactorio, contactar con el vendedor
y con el agente para pedir asistencia.
Ajuste de llama baja
Controlar el ajuste de la llama baja de cada hornillo para
asegurarse de que el fuego al mnimo no pueda ser
apagado por corrientes de aire.
Encender el hornillo.
Girar el mando hasta la posicin mnima.
Asegurarse de que la llama sea estable y no se apague
por corrientes de aire.
Para ajustar la llama al mnimo:
Seguir el procedimiento descrito en las instrucciones de
conversin a otro tipo de gas.
NO MODIFICAR ESTE APARATO DE UNA MANERA
QUE NO EST INDICADA EN ESTAS INSTRUCCIONES.
28
CONTENTS
Caractersticas de los quemadores e inyectores
ES
GLP (2.75 kPa)
Gas natural (1.0 kPa)

Dimetro del inyector
(mm)
Entrada de gas
(MJ/hr)

(mm)
Entrada de gas
(MJ/hr)
Quemador auxiliar
0.85
3.6
0.50
3.3
Quemador semi-rpido
1.10
6.0
0.64
5.5
Quemador rpido
1.24
7.8
0.80
9.0
0.80 + 1.19 + 1.19
17.0
0.50 + 0.70 + 0.70
16.5
Quemador Doble llama
34.4
Total
34.3
Conexin del gas

Empalme de entrada del gas Rosca 1/2 BSP (macho)
Ubicacin de laentrada
de gas
40 mm desde el borde posterior

40 mm desde el borde lateral
A
R
DC
S
PK 640 R GH AUS
Caractersticas de los quemadores e inyectores

GLP (2.75 kPa)
Gas natural (1.0 kPa)

(mm)
Entrada de gas
(MJ/hr)

(mm)
Entrada de gas
(MJ/hr)
Quemador auxiliar
0.85
3.6
0.50
3.3
Quemador semirpido
1.10
6.0
0.64
5.5
1.19 (x2)
13.5
0.70 (x2)
13.0
0.80 + 1.19 + 1.19
17.0
0.50 + 0.70 + 0.70
16.5
Quemador wok de triple llama

Quemador Doble llama
Total
40.1
38.3
Conexin del gas

Empalme de entrada del gas Rosca 1/2 BSP (macho)
Ubicacin de la
entrada de gas
40 mm desde el borde posterior

40 mm desde el borde lateral
S
DC
TC
A
PK 750 RT GH AUS
! El producto ha sido probado segn la norma AS4551
29
CONTENTS
ES
Puesta en funcionamiento y
uso
! En cada mando est indicada la posicin del quemador
a gas o de la placa elctrica* correspondiente.
Las encimeras a gas poseen regulacin discreta de la
potencia lo que permitir regular con precisin la llama en
5 niveles diferentes. Gracias a este sistema ser posible
obtener siempre los mismos resultados para cada receta,
ya que ser ms simple y precisa la individualizacin del
nivel de potencia ptimo para el tipo de coccin elegido,
incluso para las encimeras a gas.
Quemadores a gas
El quemador elegido se puede regular con el mando
correspondiente de la siguiente manera:

Apagado
individualizando ms fcilmente el nivel de potencia

deseado.
El quemador de dos llamas
Este quemador a gas est formado por dos fuegos
concntricos que pueden funcionar juntos o de manera
independiente (slo en el caso del doble mando).
Debido a que el quemador est dotado de un dispositivo
de seguridad, es necesario mantener presionada la perilla
durante 2 o 3 segundos hasta que se caliente el dispositivo
que mantiene la llama encendida automticamente.
Doble mando:
Cada corona que compone el quemador tiene su mando:
el mando identificado con el smbolo
controla la corona
externa;
el mando identificado con el smbolo
controla la corona
interna.
Para encender la corona deseada, presione y gire el mando
correspondiente en sentido antihorario hasta llegar a la
Mximo
Mnimo
Para encender uno de los quemadores, acerque al mismo
una llama o un encendedor, pulse a fondo y gire el mando
correspondiente en sentido antihorario hasta la posicin
de mxima potencia.
En los modelos que poseen dispositivo de seguridad es
necesario mantener presionado el mando durante 2-3
segundos aproximadamente hasta que se caliente el
dispositivo que mantiene automticamente encendida la llama.
En los modelos que poseen buja de encendido, para
encender el quemador elegido, pulse a fondo y gire el
mando correspondiente en sentido antihorario hasta la
posicin de mxima potencia.
! Si se apagara accidentalmente la llama del quemador,
cierre el mando y vuelva a intentar encenderlo despus de
1 minuto, como mnimo.
Para apagar el quemador es necesario girar el mando
en sentido horario hasta el apagado (correspondiente al
smbolo ).
Regulacin discreta de la llama
El quemador elegido se puede regular en 5 niveles distintos
de potencia, utilizando el mando correspondiente.
Para pasar de un nivel a otro
basta girar el mando hacia el nivel
elegido. Un disparo/clic advierte el
paso de un nivel a otro.
La visualizacin del nivel
seleccionado se produce a travs
del smbolo correspondiente
.
posicin de mxima potencia
Para utilizar en forma ptima el quemador de llama
doble, no regule nunca simultneamente la corona
interna al mnimo y la externa al mximo.
Mono Mando:
Las coronas que componen el quemador poseen un mando.
Para encender ambas coronas simultneamente presione
y gire el mando en sentido antihorario hasta el smbolo
(mx) - (mn) .
Para pasar a la corona interna solamente presione y gire el
(mx ) mando en sentido horario hasta el smbolo
(mn).
(para pasar de una modalidad a otra, se debe apagar el
quemador).
Para apagar el quemador es necesario presionar y girar el
mando en sentido horario hasta el tope.
Consejos prcticos para el uso de los

quemadores
Si desea obtener el mximo rendimiento, es til recordar

lo siguiente:
utilice recipientes adecuados para cada quemador (ver
la tabla) con el fin de evitar que las llamas sobresalgan
por el fondo de los recipientes.
utilice siempre recipientes con el fondo plano y con tapa.
cuando se produce la ebullicin, gire el mando hasta la
posicin de mnimo.
(smbolos
) y, en
las encimeras que poseen pantalla, a travs del encendido
de los LED (5 = mx. potencia, 1 = mn. potencia).
El sistema garantiza una perfecta regulacin de la
llama y permite obtener el mismo resultado de coccin,
30
CONTENTS
Quemador
Dimetro Recipientes (cm)
Rpido (R)
24 - 26
Semi Rpido (S)
16 - 20
Auxiliar (A)
10 - 14
Doble llama (DCDR Interno)
10 - 14
Doble llama (DCDR Externo)
24 - 26
Ollas que deben utilizarse en placas de 60 cm

Quemador
Dimetro Recipientes (cm)
Semi Rpido (S)
16 - 20
Auxiliar (A)
16 - 20
Corona Triple (TC)
24 - 26
Doble llama (DCDR Interno)
10 - 14
Doble llama (DCDR Externo)
26 - 28
Ollas que deben utilizarse en placas de 75 cm
! En los modelos dotados de rejilla de reduccin, esta ltima

deber ser usada nicamente para el quemador Doble
llama interno (DCDR Interno), cuando se usan recipientes
de dimetro inferior a 12 cm.
Para identificar el tipo de quemador ver los diseos
presentes en el prrafo Caractersticas de los quemadores
y boquillas.
Precauciones y consejos
! El aparato ha sido proyectado y fabricado en conformidad
con las normas internacionales de seguridad.
Estas advertencias se suministran por razones de seguridad
y deben ser ledas atentamente.
Seguridad general
Este aparato se refiere a un aparato empotrable de

clase 3.
Para su correcto funcionamiento, los aparatos a gas
necesitan un regular cambio de aire. Verifique que en
su instalacin se respeten los requisitos contenidos
en el prrafo correspondiente a la Colocacin.
Las instrucciones son vlidas slo para los pases
de destino, cuyos smbolos figuran en el manual y
en la placa de caractersticas.
El aparato ha sido fabricado para un uso de tipo no
profesional en el interior de una vivienda.
El aparato no se debe instalar al aire libre, tampoco si el
espacio est protegido porque es muy peligroso dejarlo
expuesto a la lluvia y a las tormentas.
No toque la mquina descalzo o con las manos y pies
mojados o hmedos.
El aparato debe ser utilizado para cocinar
alimentos, slo por personas adultas y siguiendo
las instrucciones contenidas en este manual.
Cualquier otro uso (como por ejemplo: calefaccin
de ambientes) se debe considerar impropio y,
por lo tanto, peligroso. El fabricante no puede ser

considerado responsable por los daos derivados
de usos impropios, errneos e irracionales.
Evite que el cable de alimentacin elctrica de otros
electrodomsticos entre en contacto con partes calientes
del horno.
No obstruya las aberturas de ventilacin y de eliminacin
del calor.
Controle siempre que los mandos estn en la posicin
/ cuando no se utiliza el aparato.
No desconecte el aparato de la toma de corriente tirando
del cable sino sujetando el enchufe.
No realice la limpieza o el mantenimiento sin haber
desconectado primero el aparato de la red elctrica.
En caso de avera, no acceda nunca a los mecanismos
internos para intentar una reparacin. Llame al Servicio
de Asistencia Tcnica (ver Asistencia).
Verifique que los mangos de las ollas estn siempre
dirigidos hacia dentro de la encimera para evitar que
sean chocados accidentalmente.
No cierre la tapa de vidrio (si existe) cuando los
quemadores o la placa elctrica todava estn calientes.
No deje encendida la placa elctrica sin ollas.
No utilice ollas inestables o deformadas.
No est previsto que el aparato sea utilizado por
personas (nios incluidos) con reducidas capacidades
fsicas, sensoriales o mentales, por personas inexpertas
o que no tengan familiaridad con el producto, a menos
que no sean vigiladas por una persona responsable
de su seguridad o que no hayan recibido instrucciones
preliminares sobre el uso del aparato.
Evitar que los nios jueguen con el aparato.
El aparato no se debe poner en funcionamiento a
travs de un temporizador externo o de un sistema
de mando a distancia.
ES
Eliminacin
Eliminacin del material de embalaje: respete las normas

locales, de esta manera los embalajes podrn ser
reutilizados.
En base a la Norma europea 2002/96/CE de Residuos
de aparatos Elctricos y Electrnicos (RAEE), los
electrodomsticos viejos no pueden ser arrojados en
los contenedores municipales habituales; tienen que ser
recogidos selectivamente para optimizar la recuperacin
y reciclado de los componentes y materiales que los
constituyen, y reducir el impacto en la salud humana y el
medioambiente. El smbolo del cubo de basura tachado
se marca sobre todos los productos para recordar al
consumidor la obligacin de separarlos para la recogida
selectiva.
El consumidor debe contactar con la autoridad local o
con el vendedor para informarse en relacin a la correcta
eleminacin de su electrodomstico viejo.
Mantenimiento y cuidados
Cortar la corriente elctrica
Antes de realizar cualquier operacin, desconecte el

aparato de la red de alimentacin elctrica.
31
CONTENTS
195097698.02
06/2013 - XEROX FABRIANO
ES
Limpiar el aparato
! Evite el uso de detergentes abrasivos o corrosivos como

los quitamanchas y productos anticorrosivos, jabones en
polvo y esponjas con superficie abrasiva: pueden rayar
irremediablemente la superficie.
! No utilice nunca limpiadores a vapor o de alta presin
para la limpieza del aparato.
Para un mantenimiento ordinario, es suficiente lavar la
encimera con una esponja hmeda, secndola luego con
un papel absorbente para cocina.
Los elementos mviles de los quemadores se lavan
frecuentemente con agua caliente y detergente tratando
siempre de eliminar las incrustaciones.
En las encimeras que poseen encendido automtico, es
necesario realizar frecuentemente una cuidadosa limpieza
de la parte terminal de los dispositivos de encendido
instantneo electrnico y verificar que los orificios de salida
del gas no estn obstruidos.
El acero inoxidable puede quedar manchado si permanece
en contacto por largo tiempo con agua fuertemente
calcrea o con detergentes agresivos (que contengan
fsforo). Se aconseja enjuagar abundantemente y secar
despus de la limpieza. Es adems importante secar los
posibles derrames de agua.
! Para limpiar la superficie de la encimera no es necesario
extraer las rejillas. Gracias al sistema de soporte, basta
levantar las rejillas y sostenerlas o girarlas hasta apoyarlas
en un soporte posterior.
Tenga cuidado de no apoyar las rejillas calientes sobre
la tapa de vidrio (si existe) para evitar que se daen los
tapones de goma del vidrio.
Anomalas y soluciones
Puede suceder que la encimera no funcione o no funcione
bien. Antes de llamar al servicio de asistencia tcnica,
veamos qu se puede hacer. Antes que nada verifique que
no hayan interrupciones en las redes de alimentacin de
gas y elctrica, y en particular, que las llaves de gas, aguas
arriba del aparato, estn abiertas.
El quemador no se enciende o la llama no es uniforme.
Controle si:
Los orificios de salida de gas del quemador estn
obstruidos.
Se han colocado correctamente todas las partes mviles
que componen el quemador.
Hay corriente de aire en las cercanas de la encimera.
La llama no permanece encendida en los modelos
con seguridad.
Controle si:
No ha presionado a fondo el mando.
No ha mantenido presionado a fondo el mando por un
tiempo suficiente como para activar el dispositivo de
seguridad.
Estn obstruidos los orificios de salida del gas a la altura
del dispositivo de seguridad.
El quemador en posicin de mnimo no permanece
encendido.
Controle si:
Estn obstruidos los orificios de salida del gas.
Hay corriente de aire en las cercanas de la encimera.
La regulacin del mnimo es correcta.
Los recipientes no permanecen estables.
Controle si:
El fondo del recipiente es perfectamente plano.
El recipiente est centrado en el quemador o en la placa
elctrica.
Las parrillas fueron invertidas.
Mantenimiento de las llaves de gas
Con el tiempo puede suceder que una llave se bloquee o

presente dificultad para girar, en esos casos ser necesario
proceder a la sustitucin de dicha llave.
! Esta operacin la debe efectuar un tcnico
autorizado por el fabricante.
32
CONTENTS
(ii)
Miele
(Purchaser Upgrade)
CONTENTS
Gas cooktops
To avoid the risk of accidents or damage to the appliance, it is essential

to read these operating instructions before it is installed or used for the
first time.
en - AU, NZ
M.-Nr. 05 827 401

CONTENTS
Contents
Appliance models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Burner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Cleaning and heating up for the first time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Using the gas cooktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Switching on, controlling, switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Suitable pans for gas burners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Safety cut-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Use during a power cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Pan support, Control knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Cooktop surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Burners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Gas connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
After Sales Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
CONTENTS

Appliance models
KM 362 / KM 362-1
a Wok ring
Control knob for cooking zone
b Wok burner
h Front right
c Auxiliary burner
i Rear right
d Normal burner
j Rear left
e Pan support (2 parts)
k Front left
f Cooking zone symbols

g Mains connection cable
Depending on country of destination,
the appliance may be supplied with
or without a plug. The plug shown is
for illustration only.
3
CONTENTS

KM 370 / KM 370-1
a Fast burner
b Auxiliary burner
i Front right
c Wok ring
j Rear right
d Wok burner
k Rear middle
e Normal burner
l Rear left
f Pan support (3 parts)
m Front left
g Cooking zone symbols

h Mains connection cable
CONTENTS

KM 371
a Fast burner
b Auxiliary burner
i Front right
c Wok ring
j Rear right
d Wok burner
k Middle
e Normal burner
l Rear left
f Pan support (separate for each

burner)
m Front left
g Cooking zone symbols

h Mains connection cable
5
CONTENTS

Burner
Wok burner
Auxiliary, normal and fast burner
n Burner cap
o Burner ring
p Burner head
q Burner base
r Ignitor
s Ignition safety device
CONTENTS

This appliance complies with all
relevant legal safety requirements.
Improper use of the appliance can,
however, present a risk of both
personal injury and material
damage.
To avoid the risk of accidents and
damage to the appliance, read
these instructions carefully before
using it for the first time. They
contain important notes on the
installation, safety, operation and
care of the appliance.
Supervise elderly or infirm when
using the appliance.
Keep these instructions in a safe
place for reference and pass them
on to any future user.
Building in and connection
~ The connection to the gas supply
must be carried out by a suitably

qualified and competent person in
accordance with local and national
safety regulations, e.g. a registered gas
fitter. If the appliance is supplied
without a plug, or if the plug is removed
the appliance must additionally be
installed and connected by a suitably
qualified and competent electrician in
strict accordance with national and
local regulations. The manufacturer
cannot be held responsible for damage
caused by incorrect installation or
connection.
~ The electrical safety of this
appliance can only be guaranteed

when continuity is complete between it
and an effective earthing system which
complies with local and national safety
regulations. It is most important that this
basic safety requirement is present and
tested regularly, and where there is any
doubt, the household wiring system
should be inspected by a qualified
electrician. The manufacturer cannot be
held liable for the consequences of an
inadequate earthing system (e.g.
electric shock).
~ Ensure that the gas pipe and
electrical cable are installed in such a

way that they do not touch any parts of
the appliance which become hot. This
could cause damage.
~ Do not connect the appliance to the
mains electricity supply by an extension

lead. Extension leads do not guarantee
the required safety of the appliance.
~ This appliance must not be installed

and used in mobile installations (e.g.
ships, caravans etc.).
~ Do not modify this appliance.
7
CONTENTS

Correct usage
~ For safety reasons the appliance
must only be operated after it has been

built in. This is necessary to ensure that
all electric components are shielded.
~ This appliance is for domestic use

only, and is not intended for
commercial use.
~ Use this appliance for the
preparation of food only. Any other

usage is at the owner's risk and could
be dangerous. The manufacturer
cannot be held liable for damage
caused by incorrect or improper use of
the appliance.
~ Make sure all the components of the

gas burners have been correctly
assembled before switching on.
~ When using a rangehood over the
gas cooktop, ensure that any burners in

use are always covered with a pan.
Otherwise flames could be drawn up by
the suction of the rangehood, parts of
which could then be damaged or even
set on fire.
~ Pans must be the correct size for the
the room. The high temperature could

cause inflammable objects nearby to
catch fire.
burner they are used on (see "Suitable

pans"). A pan which is too small will be
unstable on the pan support. If the pan
diameter is too large flames can spread
out to the sides and damage or burn
the worktop, wall claddings or
surrounding units and also parts of the
cooktop. The manufacturer cannot be
held liable for this type of damage.
~ Using the gas cooktop can cause
~ Do not use or store flammable
~ Do not use the appliance to heat up
heat and moisture to build up in the

kitchen. Ensure that the room is well
ventilated; open a door or window or
provide a mechanical means of
ventilation, by installing a rangehood,
for example.
materials in the appliance storage

drawer or near this appliance.
~ If the cooktop is used for very long
periods of time additional ventilation of

the room may be necessary, e.g. by
opening windows or doors, or running
the rangehood on the highest setting.
~ This appliance must not be set up or

operated in the open air.
CONTENTS

~ The appliance is only intended for

use by adults who have read these
operating instructions.
~ This appliance is not a toy! To avoid
the risk of injury keep children well

away and do not let them play with it or
use the controls. They will not
understand the potential dangers
posed by it. They should be supervised
whenever you are working in the
kitchen.
~ Older children may use the
appliance only when its operation has

been clearly explained to them, and
they are able to use it safely,
~ The appliance gets hot when in use

and remains hot for quite a while after
being switched off. To safeguard
against burning, keep children well
away from the appliance at all times.
~ Keep all pans out of reach of
children. Turn pan handles inwards

away from the edge of the cooktop.
Danger of burning or scalding.
~ Packaging (e.g. cling film,
polystyrene) and plastic wrappings

must be kept out of the reach of babies
and young children. Danger of
suffocation. Dispose of all packaging
safely as soon as possible.
~ Before disposing of an old
appliance, ensure that disconnection

from the gas supply is made by a
suitably qualified and competent
person. Switch off at the mains
electricity supply. Cut off and render
any plug useless. Cut off the cable
directly behind the appliance to prevent
misuse. This should be done by a
competent person. Ensure that the
appliance presents no danger to
children while being stored for
disposal.
~ Do not store anything which might
arouse a child's interest in storage

areas above or next to the appliance.
Otherwise they could be tempted into
climbing onto the appliance with the
risk of burning themselves.
9
CONTENTS

Protecting the appliance from
damage
Stainless steel surfaces:
~ Do not use a steam cleaner to clean

this appliance. The steam could reach
electrical components and cause a
short circuit. Pressurised steam could
also cause permanent damage to the
surface and to other components, for
which the manufacturer cannot accept
liability.
containing salt to spill onto a stainless

steel cooktop or trim. If salty foods or
liquids do get on the cooktop, they
should be removed as soon as possible
to avoid the risk of corrosion.
~ Avoid allowing liquids or foods
~ Replace the pan supports carefully

to avoid scratching the surface.
~ Unless the pan manufacturer states

that you can do so, you should never
use pans with thin bases on this
cooktop and you should never heat up
an empty pan. Otherwise the cooktop
could get damaged.
~ In countries where there are areas
which may be subject to infestation by

cockroaches or other vermin, pay
particular attention to keeping the
appliance and its surroundings in a
clean condition at all times. Any
damage which may be caused by
cockroaches or other vermin will not be
covered by the appliance guarantee.
Appliances with a ceramic surface:
~ Do not drop anything on the ceramic

surface. Even a light object could
cause damage in certain
circumstances.
10
CONTENTS

Protection from burning and
scalding
~ The surface of the appliance gets
hot when in use, and remains hot for

quite a while after being switched off.
Do not touch it whilst it is still hot.
~ Use heat-resistant pot holders or
gloves when handling hot pots and

pans. Ensure that they do not come into
contact with the flames. Do not use
large cloths, tea towels or similar as the
ends could touch the flames and catch
fire. Take care not to let pot holders or
gloves get damp or wet, as this causes
heat to transfer through the material
quicker with the risk of burning yourself.
~ Do not heat up unopened tins of
food on the cooktop as pressure will

build up in the tin and it can explode.
This could result in injury or damage.
~ Do not use the cooktop as a resting

place for anything else. If the cooktop
was switched on inadvertently, or if it
was still hot the article could begin to
melt or catch fire.
~ Remove splashes of fat and other
food debris from the surface as soon as

possible. These are a fire hazard.
~ Never leave the appliance
unattended when cooking with oil or fat

as these are fire hazards if overheated.
Very hot oil can catch fire and could
even set a rangehood above on fire.
Always heat fat slowly, watching as it
heats.
~ If, despite this, oil or fat does catch
fire, do not attempt to put out the flames

with water. Use a suitable fire blanket,
saucepan lid, damp towel or similar to
smother the flames.
~ Do not flamb under a rangehood.
The flames could set the rangehood on

fire.
~ Ensure that the flames from the
burner do not spread out beyond the

base and up the sides of the pan.
~ Do not spray aerosols in the vicinity
of this appliance while it is in operation.
~ Do not cover the cooktop with a
cloth, household foils or other similar

objects. This could lead to danger of
the article catching fire, if the cooktop
were to be switched on inadvertently.
11
CONTENTS

With a damaged appliance
Further safety notes
~ In the event of damage or a defect,
~ When using an electrical appliance,
switch off the appliance immediately.

Turn off the gas supply tap, and
disconnect completely from the
electricity supply. Contact Miele.
Ensure that the appliance is
disconnected from the electricity
supply before any servicing or repair
work.
~ Ceramic cooktops:
Any breakages or cracks in the ceramic

surface of the cooktop are defects and
must be treated as such.
~ Repairs to the gas and electrical
components of this appliance must only

be carried out by a suitably qualified
person. Repairs by unauthorised
personnel could be dangerous. On no
account open the outer casing of the
appliance.
~ While the appliance is under
guarantee repairs should only be

undertaken by a service engineer
authorised by the manufacturer.
Otherwise the guarantee is invalidated.
e.g. a hand-held mixer, near the gas

cooktop, ensure that the connection
cable doesn't come into contact with
the hot cooktop. The insulation on the
cable could become damaged, giving
rise to an electric shock hazard.
~ Always ensure that food is
sufficiently cooked or reheated. Many

factors will affect the overall cooking
time, including the size and amount of
food and its temperature. Some foods
may contain micro-organisms which are
only destroyed by thorough cooking;
therefore when cooking or reheating
foods such as poultry, it is particularly
important that the food is completely
cooked through. If in doubt, select a
longer cooking or reheating time.
~ Do not use plastic or aluminium foil

containers. These melt at high
temperatures and could damage the
ceramic surface. Fire hazard.
~ If the appliance has not been used
for a longer period of time it should be

thoroughly cleaned before it is used
again. It is also advisable to have the
appliance tested for safety. This should
be done at regular intervals.
The manufacturer cannot be held
liable for damage caused by
non-compliance with these safety
instructions.
12
CONTENTS

Disposal of the packaging
material
Disposal of your old appliance

or machine
The transport and protective packing

has been selected from materials which
are environmentally friendly for disposal
Electrical and electronic appliances /

machines often contain materials
which, if handled or disposed of
incorrectly, could be potentially
hazardous to human health and to the
environment. They are, however,
essential for the correct functioning of
your appliance or machine. Please do
not therefore dispose of your old
machine or appliance with your
household waste.
Packaging (e.g. cling film, polystyrene)

and plastic wrappings must be kept out
of the reach of babies and young
children. Danger of suffocation.
Dispose of or recycle all packaging
materials as soon as possible.

centre and ensure that it presents no
danger to children while being stored
for disposal.
It should be unplugged or
disconnected from the mains electricity
supply by a competent person. The
plug must be rendered useless and the
cable cut off directly behind it to
prevent misuse.
13
CONTENTS

General notes
A data plate for your appliance is
supplied with this documentation. It
should be stuck into the space
provided at the end of the instruction
book. The address of your nearest
Miele office is given on the back page.
Cleaning and heating up for

the first time
Before using for the first time clean the
cooktop and all removable parts as
follows:
^ The removable parts of the gas
burner assembly can be washed in a
mild solution of water and
washing-up liquid. Wipe dry and
reassemble in the correct order (see
"Cleaning and care").
^ Clean the cooktop with a damp cloth
only, and then wipe dry.
Do not use washing up liquid to
clean the ceramic surface as it can
leave a blue sheen which may be
difficult to remove.
Metal components have a protective
coating which may give off a slight
smell when the cooktop is heated up for
the first time. The smell and any
vapours will dissipate after a short time
and do not indicate a faulty connection
or appliance.
14
CONTENTS
Using the gas cooktop

Switching on, controlling,
switching off
The control knobs are used to switch on
the burner and regulate the strength of
the flame.
The burners can only be switched

on by pressing in the appropriate
control and turning it anti-clockwise,
and switched off by turning the
control clockwise.
The following can damage
components in the appliance:
- Trying to switch on a burner
without pressing in the control.
- Switching on a burner by
turning it clockwise.
- Switching off a burner by
turning it anti-clockwise,
The manufacturer cannot be held
liable for this type of damage.
the gas supply is turned off

& strong flame
/ weak flame
Switching on:
^ The control knob for the burner
required must be pressed in and
turned anti-clockwise to the large
flame symbol to switch on.
^ When the flame ignites, keep the
control pressed in for 8-10 seconds,
and then let it go.
If the flame goes out, repeat the
procedure, keeping the control knob
pressed in for a few extra seconds.
15
CONTENTS

Controling:
Switching off:
^ When the flame burns steady after

releasing the knob, select a setting
between the large and the small
flame symbol. The flame gets
smaller, when you turn the control
knob anti-clockwise and bigger when
turning clockwise. You dont need to
press the knob.
^ Turn the knob clockwise until the

position is reached.
This stops the flow of gas and the flame
goes out.
^ Control the flame so that it does not

spread out beyond the sides of the
pan. As the outer part of the flame is
much hotter than the centre, the tips
of the flames should stay beneath the
pan base. Flame tips which extend
beyond the sides of the pan merely
warm up the air in the room and can
also damage pan handles and
increase the danger of burning.
16
CONTENTS

Suitable pans for gas burners
Small burner
10
Medium burner
12
Large burner
14
Wok burner
14*
Pans with thick bases are preferable

as these distribute heat more evenly,
and therefore lessen the risk of heat
spots occurring which can cause
food to stick or burn. With thin bases
heat is conducted quickly to the
food, however there is a danger of
food heating up unevenly and too
quickly increasing the risk of burning.
Stir the food frequently.
Max. diameter at
top of pans in cm
Any heat-resistant pans can be used

on a gas burner.
Small burner
22
Medium burner
22
Large burner
24
Remember when purchasing new

pans that manufacturers usually refer
to the diameter at the top of the pan
in their documentation.
Wok burner
24*
Burners
Min. pan base

diameter in cm
* This diameter doesn't apply when

using a wok.
You should select pans which are
suitable for the burner they are to be
used on. In general: use larger
diameter pans on the large burner
and smaller diameter pans on the
small burner.
Wide, shallow pans are preferable to
tall, narrow ones. They will heat up
faster.
Refer to the chart above and ensure

that the pan diameter falls within the
minimum and maximum diameters
given for the burner you are using. A
pan which is too small will be
unstable on the pan support. If the
pan diameter is too large flames can
spread out to the sides and damage
or burn the worktop, wall claddings
or surrounding units and also parts of
the cooktop. The manufacturer
cannot be held liable for this type of
damage.
Use a pan lid whenever possible to
minimise heat loss.
17
CONTENTS

Safety cut-out
Use during a power cut
This appliance is fitted with an electric

ignition safety device which cuts off the
supply of gas to a burner if the flame
goes out, for example if food has boiled
over, or if there was a sudden draught.
If there is an interruption to the

electricity supply the gas can be
ignited with a match:
^ To use the cooktop again, turn the

knob clockwise until the "" position
is reached and switch on as normal.
The safety cut-out operates
independently from the electricity
supply. This means that it is still active
when the cooktop is used during a
power cut (see "Use during a power
cut").
18
^ Press in the relevant control knob

and turn it anti-clockwise to the large
gas symbol.
^ Hold the control pressed in and light
the gas at the burner with a match.
^ Keep the control knob pressed in for
a further 8-10 seconds and then
release it.
CONTENTS
Cleaning and care

General
Pan support, Control knobs
Clean the appliance regularly,

preferably after each use. Allow it to
cool sufficiently.
Take off the pan supports.
Do not use a steam cleaner to clean

this appliance. The steam could
reach electrical components and
cause a short circuit. Pressurised
steam could also cause permanent
damage to the surface and to other
components, for which the
manufacturer cannot accept liability.
Clean these and the control knobs with

a damp cloth, washing up liquid and
warm water. Stubborn soiling is best
soaked before.
Finally dry everything with a clean soft
cloth.
On stainless steel models:
Replace the pan supports carefully
to avoid scratching the surface.
Do not use any sharp objects which

could damage the seal between the
ceramic surface and the
surrounding frame and between the
frame and the worktop.
Do not use any of the following on
your cooktop as they can damage
the surface material:
cleaning agents containing sand,
soda, alkalines, acids or chlorides,
grill and ovensprays, dishwasher
detergent, stain or rust removers,
scouring agents or cream cleaners,
abrasive sponges and brushes
Do not let the ignitor in the burner
get wet. It it gets wet it will not spark.
After cleaning the cooktop it must
be thoroughly dried with a soft cloth
to prevent a build up of limescale
deposits.
19
CONTENTS
Cleaning and care

Cooktop surface
Stainless steel
Clean the cooktop surface with a
sponge and a mild solution of warm
water and washing up liquid. Soak
baked or hardened spills.
Dry the cooktop surface thoroughly
after cleaning.
The stainless steel surface of the
cooktop can be cleaned using a
proprietary non-abrasive cleaning
agent designed for use on stainless
steel surfaces. Apply with an even
pressure following the direction of the
"grain".
Please contact Miele for information on
the appropriate cleaning product.
Thoroughly remove salty foods or
liquids from the cooktop as soon as
possible to avoid the risk of
corrosion.
Ceramic surface
Wipe soiling off using a damp cloth.
Stubborn soiling is best removed with a
shielded scraper blade.
Then apply a proprietary cleaning
agent for ceramic surfaces using a soft
cloth or kitchen paper towel. This way
any limescale deposits, caused for
example by water boiling over, are
removed.
Finally wipe the cooktop surface with a
damp cloth and then dry it with a clean
soft cloth.
Note that some cleaning agents contain
a protective additive designed to
prevent water marks and smears
adhering to the surface.
Do not use washing up liquid on the

ceramic surface as it can leave a
blue sheen which may be difficult to
remove.
When using a cleaner for ceramic
surfaces follow the manufacturers
instructions on the packaging.
20
CONTENTS
Cleaning and care

Burners
The burners can be dismantled for
cleaning.
Proceed as follows:
^ Take off all the removable parts of the
burner and wash in a solution of hot
water and washing-up liquid. Then
dry them all thoroughly. Make sure
that the flame holes are clean and
completely dry.
The surface of the burner cover will

gradually become more matt with time.
This is quite normal and will not affect
the operation of the cooktop.
^ Wipe the fixed parts of the burner
base with a damp cloth and dry
afterwards.
^ Gently wipe the ignitor and the
ignition safety device with a well
wrung-out cloth and wipe dry with a
clean cloth.
21
CONTENTS
Cleaning and care

Re-assemble the auxiliary, normal
and fast burners as follows:
Please ensure that all locating tabs and
notches are aligned correctly to enable
correct positioning of components.
^ Position the burner head p to the
burner base q so that the ignitor r
and the ignition safety device s
extend through the respective burner
head holes.
^ Finally, position the burner cap n
over the burner head p. Ensure that
the locating tabs fit into the notches
in the burner head.
Important: Please ensure that the
components are placed in the correct
order after cleaning is complete.
1. Do not mix up the top and bottom.
2. The locating lugs must fit exactly
into the notches.
22
CONTENTS
Cleaning and care

Re-assemble the wok-burner as
follows:
Please ensure that all locating tabs and
notches are aligned correctly to enable
correct positioning of components.
^ Position the burner head p to the
burner base q, so that the ignitor r
and the ignition safety device s fit
through the holes of the burner head.
If the burner head is correctly
positioned, it does not move about.
^ Position the burner ring o.
^ Position the outer burner cap n.
Important: Please ensure that the
components are placed in the correct
order after cleaning is complete.
1. Do not mix up the top and bottom.
2. The locating lugs must fit exactly
into the notches.
23
CONTENTS

Repairs to the gas and electrical
components of this appliance must
only be carried out by a suitably
qualified and competent person to
ensure safety. Unauthorised repairs
could be dangerous.
However, some minor problems can be

resolved as follows:
What to do if ...
... the burner does not ignite after
several attempts?
Check whether
... the gas flame goes out after being

lit?
Check whether the burner cover is
correctly assembled.
... the ignitor on the burner does not
spark?
Check whether food deposits have
lodged themselves between the ignitor
and the burner cover.
Carefully remove any soiling. Do not let
the ignitor get wet.
... the flame suddenly looks
different?
Check whether the burner is correctly
assembled.
the burner is correctly assembled.

the gas supply tap is turned on.
the burner is dry and clean.
the flame slits are clean and
unblocked.
The mains fuse has blown. If this is
the case, call a qualified electrician
or Miele. (The gas can be lit with a
match). (See "Use during a power
cut").
24
CONTENTS
Gas connection
Connection to the gas supply, or
conversion from use of one type of
gas to another should only be
undertaken by an approved fitter,
who is responsible for the correct
functioning of the appliance when
installed. Every appliance should
have its own isolating valve.
Check with your local gas supplier
about the type of gas and its
calorific value and compare this
information with the type of gas
quoted on the data plate.
Depending on country of destination

this appliance is set up for connection
to natural or liquid gas (see adhesive
label on the appliance).
Depending on country of destination
jets are supplied for conversion to a
different type of gas.
If the appropriate jets have not been
supplied with the appliance you will
need to contact your Chartered Agent
or Miele.
Conversion to another type of gas is
described in the separate Installation
Instructions supplied with this cooktop.
The gas installation must be made in

such a way that the isolating valve is
visible and easily accessible.
25
CONTENTS
All electrical work should be carried out
by a competent person, in strict
accordance with national and local
safety regulations.
For extra safety it is advisable to install
a residual current device (RCD), with a
trip current of 30 mA.
Connection for each appliance should
be made via a suitable isolator.
The data plate gives the necessary
data for connection.
Voltage:
230 - 240 V, 50 Hz
Rated load:
see data plate
Plug rating:
10 A
Test marks
Gas safety
Electrical safety,
C-Tick Mark.
WARNING
THIS APPLIANCE MUST BE
EARTHED
26
Important:
The wires in the mains lead are
coloured in accordance with the
following code:
Green/yellow = earth
Blue
= neutral
Brown
= live
As the colours of the wires in the mains
lead of this appliance may not
correspond with the coloured markings
identifying the terminals in your plug
proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured green and
yellow must be connected to the
terminal in the plug which is marked
with the letter E or by the earth symbol
z or coloured green or green and
yellow.
The wire which is coloured blue must
be connected to the terminal which is
marked with the letter N or coloured
black.
The wire which is coloured brown must
be connected to the terminal which is
marked with the letter A or coloured
red.
CONTENTS
After Sales Service

In the event of any faults which you cannot remedy yourself, please contact:
Miele (see back of manual for contact details).
When contacting Miele, please quote the model and serial number of your
appliance. These are given on the data plate.
Space in which to stick the extra data plate supplied with the appliance. Ensure
that the model number is the same as the one on the front of these instructions.
Warranty
The manufacturer's warranty for this appliance is two years.
27
CONTENTS
31
CONTENTS
KM 362 / KM 362-1 / KM 370 / KM 370-1 / KM 371

en - AU, NZ
M.-Nr. 05 827 401 / 04

CONTENTS
EXP
Guarantee
MX
Pliza de Garanta
AU, NZ Warranty
US
Limited Warranty
CA
Limited Warranty
Garantie Limite
M-Nr. 05 745 317

CONTENTS
Guarantee / Guarantee card
Export
Guarantee Export (Countries without Miele subsidiaries)

I. Conditions of Guarantee
Miele & Cie. will guarantee equipment which:
1. has been purchased from one of its authorised distributors or dealers or directly from the factory.
2. has been installed by an authorised service agent, in as far as necessary.
II. Extent of guarantee
1. Miele & Cie. will replace free of charge, FOB German seaport/Free German delivery
station/-border only, excluding transportation cost to another destination and other cost such as customs duty,
labour cost etc. On special request by Miele defective components resulting from poor workmanship subject
to the above conditions are to be returned to the factory at the expense of the owner. These components then
automatically become the property of Miele & Cie.
2. The validity of any claim under the terms of this guarantee in respect of any defect covered by this guarantee is
subject to an inspection of the parts concerned at the Miele factory.
3. This guarantee will not cover any fault or defect caused by:
a) Faulty installation, viz. the failure to observe the official installation instructions.
b) Misuse of the appliance, e. g. the use of unsuitable detergents or lack of maintenance.
c) The deterioration of components subject to normal wear and tear, such as V-belts, brake linings

and rubber items, etc.
d) Damage caused as the result of handling during transit, atmospheric conditions or from forces

outside our control, etc.
e) Repairs or modifications carried out by firms other than authorised Miele Service Agents or
dealers.
4. Any other type of claim whatsoever, whether in respect of nullification, depreciation, the replacement of the
appliance, financial recompense arising as the result of repairs carried out by a third party and claims in respect
of damaged laundry are absolutely excluded.
III. Terms of guarantee and notifications of claims
1. This guarantee is valid for 12 months.
The term commences from the date of delivery, which must be entered on the guarantee card by the Miele
Service Agent. Replacements made under the terms of the guarantee do not alter the terms of the guarantee.
2. The user must notify all claims to either the Miele Service Agent, or if the appliance was purchased directly, to the
factory at Gtersloh.
IV. Miscellaneous

Further claims for damage will not be accepted by Miele.
Model No.:
Serial No. of machine:
The Miele product as designated above is of perfect quality and functional design. Miele undertakes to
rectify free of charge faults in material or production which are covered by the guarantee.
Date of purchase:
Installed by
(Name of installation company):
stamp of company

signature of retailer
CONTENTS
Warranty Card
WARRANTY
installation;
Service Agent; or
CONTENTS
Warranty Card





Knoxfield VIC 3180





PRIVACY
to its customers.
GOVERNING LAW
CONTENTS
Warranty Card
IMPORTANT
Model no.
Serial no.
Date of purchase
Store details
Installed by
CONTENTS
www.miele.com.au or
www.miele.co.nz.
AU NZ
Title
First name
Model no.
Surname
Street address
Suburb / Town
Postcode
Date of purchase
Store details
Email
CONTENTS
Info - Coupon
Miele laundry care
Miele dishwashers
machines)
wine conditioners)
establishments

REPLY PAID 381
Australia

CONTENTS
USA
Miele, Inc.
9 Independence Way
Princeton, NJ 08540
Phone: 800-843-7231
609-419-9898
Fax:
609-419-4298
www.mieleusa.com
Canada
Miele Limited
Vaughan, ON L4K 4V8
Phone: 800-643-5381
905-660-9936
Fax:
905-532-2290
www.miele.ca
Mxico
Miele, S.A. de C.V.
Miele Center
Arqumedes # 43
Tel.:
01 800 MIELE 00
(01 800 64353 00)
Correo electrnico:
www.miele.com.mx
1115
Australia
REPLY PAID 381
Fax
(03) 9764 7149
www.miele.com.au
New Zealand
8 College Hill
Freemans Bay
Auckland 1011
New Zealand
Telephone: 0800 464 353
Fax:
+64 9378 0146
www.miele.co.nz
Germany
Miele & Cie. KG
Carl-Miele-Strae 29
33332 Gtersloh
Tel:
+49 5241 89-0
Fax:
+49 5241 89-2090
www.miele.de
M-Nr. 05 745 317 / 04
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
C - O ve n
CONTENTS
( i ) Ar i s t o n
CONTENTS
Powered by TCPDF (www.tcpdf.org)
600mm Multi-Function Oven

FH837CIX
Features:
5 cooking functions
Electronic clock & timer
Catalytic cleaning liners
Dimensions: H595 x W595 x D565mm
CONTENTS
OVEN
Contents
AUS
AR
English,1
AUS
Installation, 2-3
Positioning
Electrical connections

Overall view
Control panel
Start-up and use, 5

Starting the oven
Using the cooking timer
Data plate
The electronic cooking programmer, 6

FH 837 C AUS
FH 837 C IX AUS
Cooking modes, 7-9
Cooking modes
Practical cooking advice
Cooking advice table
Precautions and tips, 10
General safety
Disposal
Respecting and conserving the environment
Maintenance and care, 11

Cleaning the oven door
Replacing the light bulb
Assistance, 12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CONTENTS
Installation
AUS
Before placing your new appliance into operation

please read these operating instructions carefully.
They contain important information for safe use, for
installation and for care of the appliance.
Please keep these operating instructions for future
reference. Pass them on to possible new owners of
the appliance.
Ventilation
To ensure good ventilation, the back panel of the
cabinet must be removed. It is advisable to install the
oven so that it rests on two strips of wood, or on a
completely flat surface with an opening of at least 45 x
560 mm (see diagrams).
Positioning
560
Keep packaging material out of the reach of

children.It can become a choking or suffocation
hazard. see Precautions and tips).
! The appliance must be installed by a qualified
person in compliance with the instructions provided.
Incorrect installation may cause harm to persons,
animals or may damage property.
Fitting the appliance
Use the appropriate cabinet to ensure that the
appliance functions properly.
The panels adjacent to the oven must be made of
heat-resistant material.
mm
45 m
m.
Centring and fastening

Position the 4 tabs on the side of the oven according
to the 4 holes of the outer frame. Adjust the tabs
according to the thickness of the cabinet side panel,
as shown below:
thickness of 20 mm: take off
the removable part of the tab
(see diagram)
Cabinets with a veneer exterior must be assembled

with glues which can withstand temperatures of up
to 100C.
547
.m
mm
558
mm
.
thickness of 16 mm: use the

second groove (see diagram)
5 mm.
567 mm.
595 mm.
45 m
thickness of 18 mm: use the

first groove, which has already
been set in the factory (see
diagram)
in.
m.
593 mm.
23 mm.
To install the oven under the counter (see diagram)

and in a kitchen unit, the cabinet must have the
following dimensions:
595
mm
24
545
mm
.
mm
! The appliance must not come into contact with

electrical parts once it has been installed.
The consumption indications on the data plate have
been calculated for this type of installation.
Secure the appliance to the cabinet by opening the

oven door and putting 4 screws into the 4 holes of the
outer frame.
! All parts which ensure the safe operation of the
appliance must not be removable without the aid of a
tool.
2
CONTENTS
Centring and fixing*
Connecting the supply cable to the mains
1. Position brackets A against oven support B.

2. Position tabs C against brackets A. If the
thickness of the cabinet side panel:
is 16 mm thick: place the tab so that the
number 16 written on it is facing you;
is 18 mm thick: place the tab so that the part
without any text is facing you;
is 20 mm thick: do not fit the tab.
3. Fix the brackets and tabs onto the edge of the
cabinet side panel using screws D.
4. Fix the oven to the cabinet using the screws and
plastic washers E.
Install a standardised plug corresponding to the

load indicated on the data plate (see side).
The appliance must be directly connected to the mains
using an omnipolar circuit-breaker with a minimum
contact opening of 3 mm installed between the appliance
and the mains, suitable for the load indicated and
complying with current electrical regulations (the earthing
wire must not be interrupted by the circuit-breaker). The
supply cable must not come into contact with surfaces
with temperatures higher than 50C.
D C
16
AUS

connection has been made and that it is compliant
with safety regulations.
16
Before connecting to the power supply, make sure that:

A
D C
16
16
The appliance is earthed and the plug is compliant

with the law.
The socket can withstand the maximum power of
the appliance, which is indicated on the data plate
(see below).
Electrical connections
The voltage must be in the range between the

values indicated on the data plate (see below).
! Ovens equipped with a three-pole power supply

cable are designed to operate with alternating
current at the voltage and frequency indicated on
the data plate located on the appliance (see below).
The socket is compatible with the plug of the

appliance. If the socket is incompatible with the
plug, ask an authorised technician to replace it. Do
not use extension cords or multiple sockets.
Fitting the power supply cable

1. Open the terminal
board by inserting a
screwdriver into the
side tabs of the cover.
Use the screwdriver as
a lever by pushing it
down to open the cover
(see diagram).
2. Loosen the cable
clamp screw and
remove it, using a
screwdriver as a lever
(see figure).
3. Remove the wire
contact screws L-N, then fasten the wires
under the screw heads,
respecting the colour
code: Blue (N), Brown
(L) and Yellow-Green
Verde ( ).
! Once the appliance has been installed, the power

supply cable and the electrical socket must be easily
accessible.
! The cable must be checked regularly and replaced
by authorised technicians only (see Assistance).
! The manufacturer declines any liability should
these safety measures not be observed.
* Only on certain models.
3
CONTENTS

AUS
Overall view
GUIDES for the
sliding racks
Control panel
position 5
position 4
position 3
position 2
position 1
GRILL
DRIPPING PAN
Control panel
SELECTOR
Knob
Indicator light
THERMOSTAT
THERMOSTAT
Knob

ELECTRONIC
Programmer*
* Only on certain models.
4
CONTENTS
Start-up and use

! The first time you use your appliance, heat the
empty oven with its door closed at its maximum
temperature for at least half an hour. Ensure that the
room is well ventilated before switching the oven off
and opening the oven door. The appliance may
produce a slightly unpleasant odour caused by the
burning away of protective substances used during
the manufacturing process.
AUS
Starting the oven

1. Select the desired cooking mode by turning the
SELECTOR knob.
2. Select the desired temperature with the
THERMOSTAT knob. See the Cooking advice table for
cooking modes and the suggested cooking
temperatures (see Cooking Modes).
3. When lit, the THERMOSTAT indicator light indicates
that the oven is heating up to the temperature set.
4. You may do the following during cooking:
- change the cooking mode by turning the SELECTOR
knob.
- change the temperature by turning the
THERMOSTAT knob.
- stop cooking by turning the SELECTOR knob to the
0 position.
! Never put objects directly on the oven bottom to
avoid damaging the enamel coating.
! Always place cookware on the rack(s) provided.
Cooling ventilation
In order to cool down the external temperature of the
oven, some models are fitted with a cooling fan that
blows out air between the control panel and the oven
door.
! Once the cooking has been completed, the cooling
fan remains on until the oven has cooled down
sufficiently.
Oven light
It goes on when selecting
with the SELECTOR
knob. It stays on when a cooking mode is selected.
DATA PLATE
Dimensions
width 43.5 cm
height 32 cm
depth 41,5 cm
Volume
lt. 58
Electrical
connections
voltage: 220-240V ~ 50Hz

maximum power absorbed
2800W
Directive 2002/40/EC on the label
of electric ovens.
Standard EN 50304
ENERGY LABEL
Energy consumption for Natural

convection heating mode:
/
Convection mode.
Declared energy consumption for
Forced convection Class heating
mode:
/
Baking.
This appliance conforms to the
following European Economic
Community directives:
- 2006/95/EEC of 12/12/06 (Low
Voltage) and subsequent
amendments;
- 2004/108/EEC of 15/12/04
(Electromagnetic Compatibility) and
subsequent amendments;
- 93/68/EEC of 22/07/93 and
subsequent amendments.
- 2002/96/EC and subsequent
amendments.
5
CONTENTS
The electronic cooking programmer

Programming cooking
AUS
A cooking mode must be selected before

programming can take place.
DISPLAY
END OF
COOKING icon
DURATION
icon
DECREASE TIME
button
CLOCK icon
Programming the cooking duration
TIMER icon
1. Press the
button several times until the
icon and the three digits on the DISPLAY begin to
flash.
2. Use the + and - buttons to set the desired
duration; if you press and hold either button, the
display will scroll through the values more quickly,
making it quicker and easier to set the value.
INCREASE TIME
button
SET TIME
button
Setting the clock
The clock may be set when the oven is switched

off or when it is switched on, provided that a the end
time of a cooking cycle has not been programmed
previously.
After the appliance has been connected to the
mains, or after a blackout, the
icon and the four
numerical digits on the DISPLAY will begin to flash.
1. Press the
icon and the four digits on the display begin to
flash.
2. Use the + and - buttons to adjust the time; if
you press and hold either button, the display will
scroll through the values more quickly, making it
quicker and easier to set the desired value.
3. Wait for 10 seconds or press the
to finalise the setting.
button again
Setting the timer

This function does not interrupt cooking and does
not affect the oven; it is simply used to activate the
buzzer when the set amount of time has elapsed.
1. Press the
icon and the three digits on the display begin to
flash.
2. Use the + and - buttons to set the desired
time; if you press and hold either button, the display
will scroll through the values more quickly, making it
quicker and easier to set the value.
button again
The display will then show the time as it counts
down. When this period of time has elapsed the
buzzer will be activated.

button again
4. When the set time has elapsed, the text END
appears on the DISPLAY, the oven will stop cooking
and a buzzer sounds.
For example: it is 9:00 a.m. and a time of 1 hour
and 15 minutes is programmed. The programme
will stop automatically at 10:15 a.m.
Setting the end time for a cooking mode
A cooking duration must be set before the cooking
end time can be scheduled.
1. Follow steps 1 to 3 to set the duration as detailed
above.
2. Next, press the
button until the
icon and
the four digits on the DISPLAY begin to flash.
3. use the + and - buttons to adjust the cooking
end time; if you press and hold either button, the
display will scroll through the values more quickly,
making it quicker and easier to set the desired
value.
button again
5. When the set time has elapsed, the text END
appears on the DISPLAY, the oven will stop cooking
Programming has been set when the
and
buttons are illuminated. The DISPLAY shows the
cooking end time and the cooking duration
alternately.
Cancelling a programme
To cancel a programme:
press the
button until the icon corresponding to
the setting you wish to cancel and the digits on the
display are no longer flashing. Press the - button
until the digits 00:00 appear on the display.
Press and hold the + and - buttons; this will
cancel all the settings selected previously,
including timer settings.
6
CONTENTS
Cooking modes
Cooking modes
! A temperature value can be set for all cooking
modes between 60C and Max, except for
BARBECUE (recommended: set only to MAX power
level);
GRATIN (recommended: do not exceed 200C).
LEAVENING mode
The oven reaches and maintains a temperature of
40C irrespective of the position of the THERMOSTAT
knob. This mode is ideal for leavening dough made
with yeast.
TRADITIONAL OVEN mode
Both the top and bottom heating elements will come
on. With this traditional cooking mode, it is best to use
one cooking rack only: if more than one rack is used,
the heat distribution will be uneven.
BAKING mode
The rear heating element and the fan come on,
guaranteeing the distribution of heat delicately and
uniformly throughout the oven. This mode is ideal for
baking and cooking temperature sensitive foods such
as cakes that need to rise and to prepare certain
tartlets on 3 shelves simultaneously.
PIZZA mode
AUS
The heating elements (bottom and circular) and the

fan come on. This combination heats the oven rapidly
by producing a considerable amount of heat,
particularly from the bottom element. If you use more
than one rack simultaneously, switch the position of
the dishes halfway through the cooking process.
BARBECUE mode
The top heating element and the rotisserie (where
present) come on. The high and direct temperature of
the grill is recommended for food that requires high
surface temperature. Always cook in this mode with
the oven door closed.
GRATIN mode
The top heating element as well as the fan and the
rotisserie (where present) come on. This combination
of features increases the effectiveness of the
unidirectional thermal radiation of the heating
elements through forced circulation of the air
throughout the oven.
This helps prevent food from burning on the surface,
allowing the heat to penetrate right into the food.
Always cook in this mode with the oven door closed.
FAST COOKING mode

The heating elements and the fan come on,
guaranteeing the distribution of heat consistently and
uniformly throughout the oven.
Pre-heating is not necessary for this cooking mode.
This mode is especially recommended for cooking
pre-packed food quickly (frozen or pre-cooked). The
best results are obtained if you use one cooking rack
only.
MULTI-COOKING mode
All the heating elements (top, bottom and circular), as
well as the fan, will come on. Since the heat remains
constant throughout the oven, the air cooks and
browns food uniformly. A maximum of two racks may
be used at the same time.
7
CONTENTS
AUS

! Do not place racks in position 1 and 5 during fanassisted cooking. Excessive direct heat can burn
temperature sensitive foods.
! In the BARBECUE and GRATIN cooking modes,
particularly when using the rotisserie, place the
dripping pan in position 1 to collect cooking residues
(fat and/or grease).
MULTI-COOKING
Use position 2 and 4, placing the food that requires
more heat on 2.
Place the dripping pan on the bottom and the rack
on top.
BARBECUE
Insert the rack in position 3 or 4. Place the food in
the centre of the rack.
We recommend that you set the maximum power
level. The top heating element is regulated by a
thermostat and may not always be on.
PIZZA MODE
Use a light aluminium pizza pan. Place it on the
rack provided.
For a crispy crust, do not use the dripping pan
(prevents crust from forming by extending cooking
time).
If the pizza has a lot of toppings, we recommend
adding the mozzarella cheese on top of the pizza
halfway through the cooking process.
8
CONTENTS
Cooking advice table

Cooking
modes
Foods
Leavening process of dough made with

yeast or baking powder (brioches, bread,
sugar pie, croissants, etc.)
Duck
Traditional Roast veal or beef
Pork roast
Oven
Biscuits (short pastry)
Tarts
Tarts
Fruit cakes
Plum cake
Sponge cake
Baking
Stuffed pancakes (on 2 racks)
Small cakes (on 2 racks)
Mode
Cheese puffs (on 2 racks)
Cream puffs (on 3 racks)
Biscuits (on 3 racks)
Meringues (on 3 racks)
Frozen food
Pizza
Courgette and prawn pie
Country style spinach pie
Turnovers
Lasagne
Golden Rolls
Fast
Chicken morsels
cooking
Pre-cooked food
Golden chicken wings
Fresh Food
Biscuits (short pastry)
Plum cake
Cheese puffs
Pizza (on 2 racks)
Lasagne
Lamb
Roast chicken + potatoes
Mackerel
MultiPlum cake
cooking
Cream puffs (on 2 racks)
Biscuits (on 2 racks)
Sponge cake (on 1 rack)
Sponge cake (on 2 racks)
Savoury pies
Pizza
Pizza Mode Roast veal or beef
Chicken
Soles and cuttlefish
Squid and prawn kebabs
Cuttlefish
Cod filet
Grilled vegetables
Barbecue Veal steak
Sausages
Hamburgers
Mackerels
Toasted sandwiches (or toast)
Grilled chicken
Gratin
Cuttlefish
AUS
Weight
(in kg)
Rack Position
Pre-heating
time
(minutes)
Recommended
temperature
Cooking
time
(minutes)
1
1
1
1
0.5
1
0.7
0.5
1.2
0.6
0.4
0.7
0.7
0.5
3
3
3
3
3
3
2 or 3
3
3
2 and 4
2 and 4
2 and 4
1 and 3 and 5
1 and 3 and 5
1 and 3 and 5
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
200
200
200
180
180
180
180
180
160
200
190
210
180
180
90
65-75
70-75
70-80
15-20
30-35
20-30
40-45
40-50
25-30
30-35
20-25
15-20
20-25
20-25
180
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.3
0.5
0.4
0.4
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
250
200
220
200
200
180
220
12
20
30-35
25
35
25-30
15-20
0.4
200
20-25
0.3
0.6
0.2
1
1
1
1+1
1
1
0.5
0.5
0.5
1
1.5
0.5
1
1
0.7
0.6
0.6
0.8
0.4
0.8
0.6
0.6
1
4 and 6
1.5
1.5
2
2
2
2 and 4
3
2
2 and 4
2
2
2 and 4
2 and 4
2
2 and 4
3
3
2
2 or 3
4
4
4
4
3 or 4
4
4
4
4
4
2
2
15
10
10
15
10
10
10
10
10
10
15
15
10
10
10
10
200
180
210
230
180
180
200
180
170
190
180
170
170
200
220
220
180
Max
Max
Max
Max
Max
Max
Max
Max
Max
Max
200
200
15-18
45
10-12
15-20
30-35
40-45
60-70
30-35
40-50
20-25
10-15
15-20
20-25
25-30
15-20
25-30
60-70
10-12
8-10
10-15
10-15
15-20
15-20
15-20
10-12
15-20
3-5
55-60
30-35
Leavening
9
CONTENTS

AUS
! The appliance was designed and manufactured in

compliance with international safety standards. The
following warnings are provided for safety reasons
and must be read carefully.
General safety
The appliance was designed for domestic use

inside the home and is not intended for
The appliance must not be installed outdoors,
even in covered areas. It is extremely dangerous
to leave the appliance exposed to rain and
storms.
When handling the appliance, always use the
handles provided on the sides of the oven.
Do not touch the appliance with bare feet or with
wet or moist hands and feet.
The appliance must be used by adults only for
the preparation of food, in accordance with the
instructions outlined in this booklet. Any other
use of the appliance (e.g. for heating the room)
constitutes improper use and is dangerous.
The manufacturer may not be held liable for
any damage resulting from improper, incorrect
and unreasonable use of the appliance.
When the appliance is in use, the heating
elements and some parts of the oven door
become extremely hot. Make sure you don't
touch them and keep children well away.
Ensure that the power supply cable of other
electrical appliances does not come into contact
with the hot parts of the oven.
The openings used for ventilation and dispersion
of heat must never be covered.
Always grip the oven door handle in the centre:
the ends may be hot.
Always use oven gloves to place cookware in the
oven or when removing it.
Do not use aluminium foil to line the bottom of the
oven.
Do not place flammable materials in the oven: if
the appliance is switched on by mistake, it could
catch fire.
Always make sure the knobs are in the l/
position when the appliance is not in use.
When unplugging the appliance always pull the
plug from the mains socket, do not pull on the
cable.
Never carry out any cleaning or maintenance work
without having unplugged the plug from the
mains.
In the case of a malfunction, under no
circumstances should you attempt to repair the
appliance yourself. Repairs carried out by
inexperienced persons may cause injury or further
malfunctioning of the appliance. Contact a Service

Centre (see Assistance).
Do not rest heavy objects on the open oven door.
The appliance should not be operated by people
(including children) with reduced physical,
sensory or mental capacities, by inexperienced
individuals or by anyone who is not familiar with
the product. These individuals should, at the very
least, be supervised by someone who assumes
responsibility for their safety or receive
preliminary instructions relating to the operation of
the appliance.
Disposal
Observe local environmental standards when

disposing packaging material for recycling
purposes. Observe existing legislation when
disposing of the old appliance.
The European Directive 2002/96/EC on Waste
Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE),
requires that old household electrical appliances
must not be disposed of in the normal unsorted
municipal waste stream. Old appliances must be
collected separately in order to optimise the
recovery and recycling of the materials they
contain and reduce the impact on human health
and the environment. The crossed out wheeled
bin symbol on the product reminds you of your
obligation, that when you dispose of the
appliance it must be separately collected.
Consumers should contact their local authority or
retailer for information concerning the correct
disposal of their old appliance.
Respecting and conserving the

environment
By using the appliance in the hours between late

afternoon and early morning, you can help reduce
the work load placed on electrical companies.
Always keep the oven door closed when using the
BARBECUE and GRATIN modes: to attain best
results and to save energy (approximately 10%).
Regularly check the door seals and wipe clean to
ensure they are free of debris so that they stick
properly to the door and do not allow heat to
disperse.
10
CONTENTS

Inspecting the seals
Check the door seals around the oven periodically. If

the seals are damaged, please contact your nearest
After-sales Service Centre (see Assistance). We
recommend not using the oven until the seals have
been replaced.
Disconnect your appliance from the electricity supply

before carrying out any work on it.
The stainless-steel or enamel-coated external parts as
well as the rubber seals may be cleaned using a
sponge that has been soaked in lukewarm water and
neutral soap. If these stains are difficult to remove,
use only specialised products. After cleaning, rinse
and dry thoroughly. Do not use abrasive powders or
corrosive substances.
Ideally, the inside of the oven should be cleaned after
each use, when it is still lukewarm. Use hot water and
detergent, rinse and dry with a soft cloth. Do not use
abrasive products.
All accessories can be washed like everyday
crockery, and are even dishwasher safe.
Never use steam cleaners or pressure cleaners on
the appliance.
AUS

To replace the oven light bulb:
1. Remove the glass cover of
the lamp-holder.
2. Remove the light bulb and
replace it with a similar one:
Wattage 25 W, cap E 14.
3. Replace the glass cover (see
diagram).
Clean the glass part of the oven door using a sponge

and a non-abrasive cleaning product, then dry
thoroughly with a soft cloth. Do not use rough abrasive
material or sharp metal scrapers as these could scratch
the surface and cause the glass to crack.
To clean more thoroughly, you can remove the oven
door.
1. Open the oven door fully
(see diagram).
2. Use a screwdriver to lift up
and turn the small levers .
located on the two hinges (see
diagram).
3. Grip the door on the two outer sides and close it

approximately half way. Pull the door towards you
lifting it out of its seat (see diagram).*
To replace the door, reverse this sequence.
* Only on certain models

11
CONTENTS
Assistance
AUS
Communicating:
appliance model (Mod.)
serial number (S/N)
This information is found on the data plate located on the appliance and/or on the packaging.
ARISTON
PRIORITY SERVICE
If you are not completely satisfied with your appliance
or require service call:
Australia
Phone: 1300 815 589
New Zealand
Phone: (09) 306 1020
GENUINE ACCESSORIES
& SPARE PARTS
accessories are available for your appliance call:
Australia
Phone: 03 9768 0888
New Zealand
Phone: (09) 306 1020
AUSTRALIA
ARISIT PTY LIMITED
VIC 3175, Australia
NEW ZEALAND
ARISIT PTY LIMITED
1145, New Zealand
Fax: (09) 302 0077
Email: sales@aristonappliances.co.nz
12
CONTENTS
(ii) Miele
(Purchaser Upgrade)
CONTENTS
Operating and installation instructions

Oven
To prevent the risk of accidents or damage to the appliance, it is

essential to read these instructions before it is installed and used for the
first time.
en - AU, NZ
M.-Nr. 10 102 370

CONTENTS
Contents
Oven overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Oven controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Function selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Oven functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Clock/timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Temperature selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Temperature indicator light 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Model numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Data plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Items supplied with delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Standard and optional accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Shelf runners. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Baking tray, universal tray and rack with non-tip safety notches . . . . . . . . . . . 21
FlexiClip telescopic runners HFC 50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Fitting the FlexiClip telescopic runners. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Removing the FlexiClip telescopic runners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Oven controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Safety features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
System lock 0 for the oven. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Cooling fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Vented oven door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
PerfectClean treated surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Catalytic enamelled surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Using for the first time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Before using for the first time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Setting the time of day for the first time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Heating up the oven for the first time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Overview of functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Tips on saving energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Using the oven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Cooling fan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
2
CONTENTS
Contents
Pre-heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Clock/Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Symbols in the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
How to set the time or a duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Displaying times/durations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
When the time/duration has elapsed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Using the minute minder N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Setting the minute minder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
To change the time set for the minute minder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
To cancel the time set for the minute minder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Switching cooking programmes on and off automatically. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Setting a cooking duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
At the end of the cooking duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Setting a cooking duration and finish time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Changing the cooking duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Deleting a cooking duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Deleting a finish time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Changing the time of day . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Changing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Baking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Notes on the baking chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Baking chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Roasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Notes on the roasting chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Roasting chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Low temperature cooking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Grilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Notes on the grilling chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Fan Grilling guide (Fan Grill \) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Grilling guide (Grill Y) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Bottling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Drying food . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Frozen food/Ready meals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Gentle Bake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
3
CONTENTS
Contents
Useful tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Normal soiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Cleaning the seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Stubborn soiling (does not apply to the FlexiClip telescopic runners) . . . . . . . . . 74
Stubborn soiling on the FlexiClip telescopic runners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Cleaning the catalytic enamelled back panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Removing soiling caused by spices, sugar and similar deposits . . . . . . . . . . 75
Removing oil and grease soiling from the catalytic enamelled panel . . . . . . . 76
Removing the door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Dismantling the door. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Fitting the door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Removing the shelf runners with FlexiClip telescopic runners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Removing the back panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Lowering the top heat/grill element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
After sales service and warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Building-in diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Appliance dimensions and unit cut-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Installing the oven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Contact details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
4
CONTENTS

This appliance conforms to current safety requirements.
Inappropriate use can, however, lead to personal injury and
damage to property.
please read these instructions carefully before using it for the first
time.
They contain important notes on installation, safety, use and
maintenance.
Miele cannot be held liable for non-compliance with these
instructions.
Keep these instructions in a safe place and ensure that new users
are familiar with the contents. Pass them on to any future owner.
5
CONTENTS

Correct application
~ This oven is designed for domestic use and for use in similar
environments by guests in hotel or motel rooms, bed & breakfasts

and other typical living quarters. This does not include
common/shared facilities or commercial facilities within hotels,
motels or bed & breakfasts.
~ The oven is not suitable for outdoor use.

~ The oven is intended only to cook, bake, roast, grill, defrost,
bottle, dry fruit etc.
Any other usage is at the owner's risk.
~ This oven is not intended for use by persons (including children)
with reduced physical, sensory or mental capabilities, or lack of

experience and knowledge, unless they are supervised whilst using
it or have been given instruction concerning its use by a person
responsible for their safety.
They must be able to recognise the dangers of misuse.
6
CONTENTS

~ Young children must not be allowed to use this appliance.

~ Cleaning work may only be carried out by older children under

the supervision of an adult.
~ Children should be supervised near the appliance. Ensure that

they do not play with the appliance.
~ Children may be able to wrap themselves in packing material or

pull it over their heads with the risk of suffocation. Keep children
away from any packing material.
7
CONTENTS
~ Danger of burning!
Children's skin is far more sensitive to high temperatures than that of

adults. Great care should be taken to ensure that children do not
touch the appliance when it is being used. External parts of the oven
such as the door glass, control panel and the vents become quite
hot.
~ Danger of injury!
The maximum load capacity for the door is 15 kg. Children can hurt
themselves on an open door.
Ensure that children do not sit on or swing on the door.
8
CONTENTS

Technical safety
~ Repairs and other work by unqualified persons could be
dangerous. Installation, maintenance work and repairs to electrical

appliances must only be carried out by a Miele approved service
technician.
~ A damaged appliance is dangerous. Check it for any visible
damage. Never install or attempt to use a damaged appliance.
~ Reliable and safe operation of this oven can only be assured if it

has been connected to the mains electricity supply.

system. It is most important that this basic safety requirement is
present and tested regularly and, where there is any doubt, the
household wiring system should be inspected by a qualified
electrician.
~ Before connecting the appliance to the mains supply, make sure

that the rating on the data plate (voltage and frequency)
corresponds to that of the household supply. This data must
correspond in order to avoid risk of damage to the appliance.
Consult a qualified electrician if in any doubt.
~ Do not connect the appliance to the mains electricity supply by a

~ For safety reasons, this appliance may only be used when it has
been built in.
~ This oven must not be installed and operated in mobile

9
CONTENTS
~ Tampering with electrical connections or components and
mechanical parts is highly dangerous to the user and can cause

operational faults.
Do not open the outer casing of the appliance.
~ The manufacturer's warranty will be invalidated if the appliance is

not repaired by a Miele approved service technician.
spare parts. The manufacturer can only guarantee the safety of the
appliance when Miele replacement parts are used.
~ If the oven is delivered without a connection cable, or if the
connection cable supplied is damaged, a special connection cable

must installed by a Miele approved service technician (see
"Electrical connection").
~ During installation, maintenance and repair work, the appliance

must be disconnected from the mains electricity supply, e.g. if the
oven lighting is faulty (see "Problem solving guide").
It is only completely isolated from the electricity supply when:
it is switched off at the mains circuit breaker, or
it is switched off at the wall socket and the plug is withdrawn from
the socket.
Do not pull the mains connection cable but the mains plug to
disconnect your appliance from the mains electricity supply.
10
CONTENTS
~ For the oven to function correctly, it requires a sufficient intake of

cool air. Ensure the intake of cool air to the oven is not impaired
(e.g. due to the installation of insulation material inside the housing
unit). Furthermore, the incoming cool air must not be excessively
heated by other heat sources (e.g. fuel furnaces).
~ If the oven is installed behind a furniture door, do not close the
door while the oven is in operation. Heat and moisture would build
up behind a closed furniture door, potentially causing damage to the
oven, the furniture unit and the flooring. Wait until the oven has
cooled down completely before closing the furniture door.
11
CONTENTS

Correct use
, Danger of burning!
The oven becomes hot when in use.

Exercise care when handling food and trays so as not to burn
yourself on heating elements, the walls of the oven, shelf runners,
trays and hot food itself.
Use oven gloves when placing food in the oven, turning or
removing it and when adjusting oven shelves etc. in a hot oven.
~ Do not use the oven to heat up the room.
Due to the high temperatures radiated, objects left near the

appliance could catch fire.
~ Never leave the appliance unattended when cooking with oil or

fats as these are a fire hazard if allowed to overheat.
Do not attempt to extinguish oil or fat fires with water.
Switch off the oven and smother the flames by keeping the oven
door closed.
~ Make sure that you keep to the recommended grilling times when
using grilling functions.
Excessively long grilling times can lead to food drying out and
burning or could even cause the food to catch fire.
12
CONTENTS
~ Some foods dry out very quickly and can be ignited by high
grilling temperatures. Do not use grilling functions for crisping rolls

or bread or to dry flowers or herbs. Instead use Fan Plus U or
Conventional Heat V.
~ If using alcohol in your recipes, please be aware that high
temperatures can cause the alcohol to vaporise and even to ignite

on the hot heating elements.
~ When residual heat is used to keep food warm, the high level of
humidity and condensation can cause corrosion in the oven. The

control panel, worktop or furniture unit may also be damaged.
Do not switch the oven off completely while food is inside it, but
select the lowest possible temperature for the oven function you are
using. This will ensure the fan will automatically continue to run.
~ Cover any food which is left in the oven to be kept hot, as
moisture in the food could lead to corrosion damage in the oven.

This also prevents the food from drying out.
~ Never cover the floor of the oven with aluminium foil, or place
oven dishes, pans, saucepans or trays directly onto the floor of the
oven.
This would cause concentrations of heat which could cause damage
to the floor of the oven.
~ When storing pots or pans in the oven, do not slide them across
the floor of the oven as this will damage the enamel coating.
13
CONTENTS
~ Never pour cold water onto hot surfaces in a hot oven.
The steam created could cause serious burns or scalding and the
sudden change in temperature can damage the enamel in the oven.
~ It is important that the heat is allowed to spread evenly
throughout the food being cooked. This can be achieved by stirring

and/or turning the food.
~ Plastic containers, which are not heat-resistant, melt and may
ignite at high temperatures and can damage the oven.

Use only plastic containers that are indicated by the manufacturer
as being suitable for use in ovens.
~ Do not use the appliance to heat up or bottle food in sealed jars
and tins.
Pressure will build up inside them and they can explode causing
damage to the appliance, as well as the risk of injury and scalding.
~ Do not leave the oven door open unnecessarily as someone may

trip over it or be injured by it.
~ The oven door can support a maximum load of 15 kg.
Do not lean or sit on an open oven door, or place heavy items on it.
Also make sure that nothing can get trapped between the door and
the oven cavity. This could damage the oven.
14
CONTENTS

Cleaning and care
~ Do not use a steam cleaning appliance to clean this oven.
Pressurised steam could reach the electrical components and

cause a short circuit.
~ Scratches on the door glass can result in the glass breaking.

Do not use abrasive cleaners, hard sponges, brushes or sharp
metal tools to clean the door glass.
~ The shelf runners can be removed for cleaning purposes (see
"Cleaning and care").

Ensure they are correctly fitted after cleaning and never operate the
oven without the shelf runners fitted.
~ The catalytic enamelled back panel can be removed for cleaning

purposes (see "Cleaning and care").
Ensure it is correctly fitted after cleaning and never operate the
oven without the back panel fitted.
Accessories
~ Use only genuine original Miele spare parts. If spare parts or
accessories from other manufacturers are used, the warranty will be

invalidated, and Miele cannot accept liability.
15
CONTENTS

material

appliance

Recycling the packaging reduces the
use of raw materials in the
manufacturing process and also
reduces the amount of waste in landfill
sites.
Rather than just throwing these
offered for recycling.
Ensure that any plastic wrappings,
bags, etc. are disposed of safely and
kept out of the reach of babies and
young children. Danger of suffocation!

Therefore, please do not dispose of
your old appliance with your household
waste.

centre.
16
CONTENTS
Oven overview
a Oven controls*
b Top heat/grill element
c Catalytic enamelled back panel
d Air inlet for the fan with ring heating element behind it
e Shelf runners with 4 shelf levels
g Oven floor with bottom heat element underneath it
g Front frame with data plate
h Door
* Depending on model
17
CONTENTS
Oven controls
a Function selector
b Clock/timer
c Temperature selector
d Temperature indicator light
Function selector
Oven functions
The function selector is used to select

oven functions and to switch on the
oven lighting separately.
T
V
X
Y
P
S
U
O
\
K
The function selector can be turned

clockwise or anti-clockwise.
When the function selector is in the 0
position, it can be retracted by pushing
it in.
Lighting
Conventional Heat
Bottom Heat
Grill
Defrost
Rapid Heat-up
Fan Plus
Intensive Bake
Fan Grill
Gentle Bake
18
CONTENTS
Oven controls
Clock/timer
Temperature selector
The clock/timer is operated via the
display with the V, OK and W buttons.
Use the temperature selector to select

the temperature for the cooking
processes.
Display
The time of day or your settings appear
in the display.
It goes dark if settings are not being
entered.
The temperature selector can be turned

clockwise as far as it will go, and then
back again.
When the temperature selector is in the
position, it can be retracted by
pushing it in.
Please refer to "Clock/Timer" for more

information.
The temperature settings are marked

on the temperature selector and on the
control panel.
Buttons
Temperature indicator light 6
These ovens have push buttons.
The temperature indicator light 6 lights

up whenever the oven is heating.
As soon as the set temperature is
reached,
the oven heating switches off,
the temperature indicator light goes
out.
The temperature regulator ensures that
the oven heating and temperature
indicator light switch back on again
when the oven temperature falls below
the level set.
19
CONTENTS
Features
Model numbers
A list of the ovens described in these
operating and installation instructions
can be found on the back page of this
booklet.
Data plate
The data plate located on the front
frame of the oven is visible when the
door is open.
On the data plate are printed the model
number, serial number and the
connection data
(voltage/frequency/maximum rated
load).
Have this information available if you
need to contact Miele so that any
issues can be rectified as quickly as
possible.
Items supplied with delivery
Standard and optional

accessories
Depending on model!
All ovens are supplied with shelf
runners, a universal tray and
baking and roasting rack (rack for
short).
Depending on the model, Miele
ovens may be supplied with the
accessories listed below.
All accessories and cleaning and care
products in these instructions are
designed to be used with Miele
appliances.
They can be ordered at
www.miele-shop.com (depending on
country) or from Miele.
Please state the model number of your
oven and that of any accessories you
wish to purchase.
Included in delivery are:

the operating and installation
instructions for using the oven
functions,
screws for fixing the oven to the
housing unit,
various accessories.
20
CONTENTS
Features
Shelf runners
Shelf runners are located on the right
and left-hand sides of the oven with the
levels for inserting accessories.
Each shelf runner has two rails:
Accessories are inserted between
the two rails of a shelf runner.
FlexiClip telescopic runners (if
available) are attached to the top rail
of a shelf runner.
The shelf runners can be pulled out for
cleaning purposes (See "Cleaning and
care").
Baking tray, universal tray and rack
with non-tip safety notches
Insert these accessories into the shelf

runners between the two rails of a shelf
level.
Always place the rack on the shelf
runners with the standing surface at the
bottom.
Non-tip safety notches are located on
the accessories which prevent the trays
being pulled out completely when you
only wish to pull them out partially.
The non-tip safety notches are located
towards the rear of the short sides.
Insert the accessories in the oven
with the non-tip safety notches
towards the back of the oven.
Baking tray HBB 51:
Universal tray HUBB 51:
If you are using the universal tray with

the rack on top, insert the tray between
the rails of a shelf runner and the rack
will sit on top of it.
These accessories have been treated
with PerfectClean enamel.
Rack HBBR 50:
21
CONTENTS
Features
FlexiClip telescopic runners HFC 50
The FlexiClip telescopic runners can be

used on the three lower shelf levels.
Each shelf level can be drawn right out
of the oven individually to give a good
overview of cooking in progress.
Push the telescopic runners right in
before placing any accessories on
top of them.
To prevent the risk of accessories

sliding off the telescopic runners:
make sure that they are sitting
securely on their runners in between
the stoppers at either end of each
runner,
always place the rack with the
loading surface in the lower position
on the FlexiClip telescopic runners.
The FlexiClip runners can support a
maximum load of 15 kg.
22
CONTENTS
Features
Because the FlexiClip telescopic
runners sit on the top rail of the shelf
runners, the gap between the level
the FlexiClip telescopic runners are
on and the one above is smaller than
if, for instance, racks were fitted on
each level. Cooking results will be
affected if the gap is too small.
If you are using the universal tray with a

rack on top of it:
^ Slide the universal tray together with

the rack onto the FlexiClip telescopic
runners. The rack will automatically
slide between the rails of the shelf
level above the FlexiClip telescopic
runners.
If you need to cook using more than

one baking tray, universal tray or rack:
^ Leave at least one shelf level free

between the telescopic runners and
any baking tray, universal tray or rack
above them.
^ Place the baking tray, universal tray

or rack on the FlexiClip telescopic
runners.
^ Leave at least one shelf level free
between the telescopic runners and
any baking tray, universal tray or rack
above them.
23
CONTENTS
Features
Fitting the FlexiClip telescopic
runners
,Danger of burning!
Make sure the oven heating
elements are switched off and the
oven interior is cool.
Each shelf level is made up of two rails.
The FlexiClip telescopic runners fit on
the top rail of these two rails.
The telescopic runner with the Miele
logo must be fitted on the right.
Do not extend the FlexiClip
telescopic runners when fitting them
or taking them out.
If the telescopic runners are difficult
to pull out after fitting, you may need
to pull firmly on them once to
release them.
^ Hook the FlexiClip telescopic runner

onto the front of the top rail of a shelf
runner (1.) and then hold it at an
angle in towards the middle of the
oven compartment (2.).
^ Slide the FlexiClip telescopic runner

at an angle along the top rail as far
as it will go.
^ Then swing it back to the side of the

oven cavity and secure it to the top
rail with an audible click.
24
CONTENTS
Features
Removing the FlexiClip telescopic
runners
Grilling and roasting insert HGBB 51
^ Push the FlexiClip telescopic runner

all the way in.
^ Push down on the tab at the front of

the FlexiClip telescopic runner (1.).
The grilling and roasting insert should

be placed in the universal tray below
the rack.
The juices from the food being cooked
collect under the insert. This prevents
them from spitting and making the oven
dirty. The juices can then be used for
making gravy and sauces.
The surface has been treated with
PerfectClean enamel.
Pizza tray HBF 27-1
^ Swing the FlexiClip telescopic runner

towards the middle of the oven cavity
(2.) and pull it forwards along the top
rail (3.).
^ Lift the telescopic runner off the rail
and take it out of the oven.
This circular pan is suitable for cooking

pizzas, flat cakes made with yeast or
whisked mixtures, sweet and savoury
tarts, baked desserts, and can also be
used for frozen cakes.
The surface has been treated with
PerfectClean enamel.
25
CONTENTS
Features
Pizza stone HBS 60
The pizza stone is ideal for items which

need a well-baked base such as pizza,
quiche, bread, bread rolls and savoury
snacks.
The baking stone is made from heat
retaining fire brick and is glazed.
Place it directly on the rack.
A wooden paddle is supplied with it for
placing food on the pizza stone and
taking it off.
Handle HEG
The handle makes it easier to take the

universal tray, baking tray and rack out
of the oven, or to put them into it. The
two prongs at the top go inside the tray
or above the rack, and the U-shape
supports underneath.
Gourmet oven dishes HUB and lids

HBD
Unlike other oven dishes, the Miele
Gourmet oven dishes can be placed in
the oven directly on the shelf runners.
They have non-tip safety notches like
the rack to prevent them being pulled
out too far.
The surface of the oven dishes has a
non-stick coating.
The oven dishes have depths of 22 cm
or 35 cm. They have the same width
and height.
Suitable lids are available separately.
Please quote the model number of your
Miele oven dish when ordering a lid.
Depth: 22 cm
Depth: 35 cm
HUB 61-22
HUB 62-22*
HUB 61-35
HBD 60-22
HBD 60-35
* Suitable for induction cooktops
26
CONTENTS
Features
Catalytic enamelled liners
Side panels
These are fitted behind the shelf
runners and protect the oven walls
against soiling.
Ceiling panel
This is fitted above the top heat/grill
element and protects the ceiling
against soiling.
Back panel
This should be replaced if the
catalytic enamel has become
ineffective due to incorrect use or
very heavy soiling.
Original Miele all purpose microfibre

cloth
Light soiling and fingerprints can be
easily removed with the microfibre
cloth.
Original Miele oven cleaner
The Original Miele oven cleaner is
suitable for removing very stubborn
soiling. It is not necessary to pre-heat
the oven beforehand.
When ordering, please quote the model

number of your oven.
27
CONTENTS
Features
Oven controls
Cooling fan
(features will vary depending on model)
The cooling fan comes on automatically

when a cooking programme is started.
The cooling fan mixes hot air from the
oven cavity with cool room air before
venting it out into the kitchen through
vents located between the appliance
door and the control panel.
The oven controls enable you to use the

various cooking functions to bake, roast
and grill.
Ovens with a clock/timer also offer:
a time of day display,
a minute minder,
a timer to automatically switch
cooking programmes on and off,
settings that can be customised.
Safety features
System lock 0 for the oven
The system lock prevents the oven from
being used unintentionally (see
"Clock/timer - Changing settings P 3").
When the system lock is engaged, 0
will appear in the display.
The cooling fan will continue to run for a

while after the oven has been switched
off to prevent any humidity building up
in the oven, on the control panel or in
the oven housing unit.
When the temperature in the oven has
fallen sufficiently, the cooling fan will
switch off automatically.
Vented oven door
The door panes have a heat-reflective
coating.
The door can be removed and
dismantled for cleaning (see "Cleaning
and care").
28
CONTENTS
Features
PerfectClean treated surfaces
Catalytic enamelled surfaces
Surfaces treated with PerfectClean

enamel are characterised by their
exceptional non-stick properties and
ease of cleaning.
The back panel is coated with catalytic

enamel. Soiling from oil and fat is burnt
off this surface when very high
temperatures are used in the oven.
Food can be taken off easily, and

soiling from baking and roasting is
simple to remove.
See "Cleaning and care" for more

information.
You can cut up food on surfaces

treated with PerfectClean enamel.
However, do not use ceramic knives
as these will scratch the
PerfectClean surface.
enamel can be cleaned as you would
clean glass.
Read the instructions in "Cleaning and
care" so that the benefits of the
non-stick properties and easy cleaning
are retained.
The following surfaces have been
treated with PerfectClean enamel:
Oven interior
Universal tray
Baking tray
Grilling and roasting insert
Pizza tray
29
CONTENTS
Using for the first time

,The oven must be built into its

housing unit before it can be used.
^ Press and release the function and
temperature selectors if they are
retracted.
The time of day can only be changed
when the function selector is at 0.
^ Set the time of day on ovens with a
clock/timer.
Setting the time of day for the

first time
The time of day is shown in the 24-hour
format.
i2:00
After connecting the oven to the

electricity supply, i2:00 flashes in the
display.
The time of day is set in segments: first
the hours, then the minutes.
^ Press OK.
i2:00 lights up and + flashes.
^ While + is flashing, press OK.
The hours will flash.
^ Set the hours using V or W.
^ Press OK.
The hours are saved and the minutes
will flash.
^ Set the minutes using V or W.
^ Press OK.
The time of day is now saved.
The time of day can be displayed in
12-hour format by setting P 2 in the
settings menu to status i2 (see
"Clock/timer Changing settings").
30
CONTENTS
Using for the first time

Heating up the oven for the
first time
New ovens can give off a slight smell
on first use. Heating up the oven for at
least 1 hour with nothing in it will get rid
of this smell.
Ensure that the kitchen is well
ventilated while the appliance is
being heated up for the first time.
Close doors to other rooms to
prevent the smell spreading
throughout the house.
,Danger of burning!
Allow the oven to cool down before
cleaning by hand.
^ Clean the oven interior with warm
water, a little washing-up liquid and a
clean sponge, or with a damp
microfibre cloth.
^ Dry all surfaces with a soft cloth.
Leave the oven door open until the
oven interior is completely dry.
^ Remove any protective wrapping and

sticky labels from the oven.
^ Take all accessories out of the oven
and clean them (see "Cleaning and
care").
^ Before heating up the oven, it is a
good idea to wipe the interior out with
a damp cloth first. This way any dust
or bits of packaging that may have
accumulated in the oven
compartment during storage and
unpacking will be removed.
^ Select Fan Plus U.
The oven heating, lighting and cooling
fan will switch on.
^ Select the maximum temperature
(250 C).
^ Heat up the oven for at least 1 hour.
^ At the end of the heating up time,
turn the function selector to 0 and the
temperature selector to .
31
CONTENTS
Overview of functions
Your oven has a range of functions for
preparing a wide variety of recipes.
Depending on the function selected,
different heating elements are switched
on and sometimes combined with the
fan (see details in parentheses).
Conventional Heat V
(Top heat/grill element + bottom heat
element)
For baking and roasting traditional
recipes, preparing souffls and cooking
at low temperatures.
If using an older recipe or cookbook,
set the oven temperature for
Conventional Heat 10 C lower than that
recommended. This won't change
cooking times.
Bottom Heat X
(Bottom heat element)
Use this function towards the end of
cooking to reheat or brown the base of
a cake, quiche or pizza.
Grill Y
(Top heat/grill element)
For grilling and toasting bread, open
sandwiches etc. and browning baked
dishes.
Defrost P
(Fan)
For the gentle defrosting of frozen food.
32
CONTENTS
Overview of functions
Rapid Heat-up S
Fan Grill \
(Top heat/grill element + ring heat

element + fan)
(Top heat/grill element + fan)
For pre-heating the oven compartment

quickly.
The oven function required must then
be selected once the desired
temperature has been reached.
For grilling thicker cuts of meat

(e.g. roulades, chicken). Lower
temperatures can be used than when
using the Grill Y function, as the fan
distributes the heat to the food straight
away.
Fan Plus U
Gentle Bake K
(Ring heat element + fan)
(Top heat/grill element + ring heat

element + fan)
This function is used for baking and

roasting on different levels at the same
time.
A lower temperature can be selected
than when using Conventional heat V,
as the fan distributes the heat to the
food straight away.
Ideal for cooking bakes and gratins that

need to be crispy on top.
Intensive Bake O
(Ring heat element + fan + bottom heat
element)
For baking cakes, tarts, pies, quiches
and pizzas that require a crisper base
or moist toppings.
Intensive Bake is not suitable for baking
thin biscuits or for roasting as the juices
will become too dark.
33
CONTENTS
Tips on saving energy

Cooking
^ Remove any accessories from the
oven that you do not require for
cooking.
^ Pre-heat the oven only if instructed to
do so in the recipe or the cooking
chart.
^ Avoid opening the door during
cooking.
^ In general, if a range of temperatures
is given, it is best to select the lower
temperature and to check the food
after the shortest given time.
^ It is best to use dark baking tins and
containers with a matt finish made
from non-reflective materials
(enamelled steel, oven-proof
glassware, non-stick coated cast
aluminium). Shiny materials such as
stainless steel or aluminium reflect
heat, preventing it reaching the food
efficiently. Do not cover the oven floor
or the rack with heat-reflective
aluminium foil.
^ Observe cooking durations to avoid

energy wastage when cooking food.
Wherever possible set the cooking
duration, or use a food probe.
^ Fan plus U can be used for cooking
many types of food. Because the fan
distributes the heat to food straight
away it allows you to use a lower
temperature than you would with
Conventional heat V. It also enables
you to cook on several shelf levels at
the same time.
^ Fan grill \ can be used for a wide
variety of food. With Fan grill you can
use lower temperatures than with
other grill functions which use the
maximum temperature setting.
^ Whenever possible you should cook
several dishes at the same time.
Place them next to each other in the
oven or on different shelf levels.
^ Dishes which you are unable to
prepare at the same time should, if
possible, be cooked one after the
other in order to make use of existing
heat in the oven.
34
CONTENTS
Tips on saving energy

Using residual heat
^ The temperature in cooking
programmes using temperatures
above 140 C which take longer than
30 minutes to cook can be turned
down to the lowest possible
temperature about 5 minutes before
the end of cooking in order to make
use of residual heat. The cooling fan
and, depending on cooking function
the hot air fan, will remain on. Do not
switch the oven off (see "Safety
instructions").
^ If you wish to clean catalytic
enamelled parts of the oven, it is best
to do so immediately after a cooking
programme. The residual heat in the
oven will help reduce the amount of
energy required.
35
CONTENTS
Operation
Using the oven
Cooling fan
^ Place the food in the oven if the

cooking programme does not require
pre-heating.

while after the oven has been switched
off to prevent any humidity building up
in the oven, on the control panel or in
the oven housing unit.
^ Select the required oven function with

the function selector.
The oven lighting and the fan will switch
on.
When the temperature in the oven has

fallen sufficiently, the cooling fan will
switch off automatically.
^ Select the temperature with the

temperature selector.
The oven heating will switch on.
After the cooking process:
^ Turn the function selector to 0 and
the temperature selector to .
^ Remove the food from the oven.
36
CONTENTS
Operation
Pre-heating
It is only necessary to pre-heat the oven
in a few instances.
Most dishes can be placed in a cold
oven. They will then make use of the
heat produced during the heating-up
phase. If the recipe requires
pre-heating, place the food in the oven
once the temperature indicator light
goes out.
Pre-heat the oven when cooking the
following food with the following oven
functions:
Fan Plus U
dark bread doughs,
beef sirloin joints and fillets.
Rapid Heat-up
Do not use Rapid Heat-up S to
pre-heat the oven when baking
pizzas or delicate mixtures (e.g.
small baked goods with a high
sugar content, pizza, choux
pastries, sponges).
They will brown too quickly.
^ Select Rapid Heat-up S.
^ Select a temperature.
^ When the temperature indicator light
6 goes out for the first time, set the
oven function you require for
continued cooking or baking.
^ Place the food in the oven.
Conventional Heat V
cakes or biscuits with a short baking
time (up to 30 minutes),
delicate mixtures (e. g. sponges),
dark bread doughs,
beef sirloin joints and fillets.
37
CONTENTS
Clock/Timer
You can only set or change a function if

the function selector is in the correct
position.
The clock/timer:
displays the time of day,
can be used as a minute minder,
Buttons
can switch cooking programmes on

or off,
Button Use
V
Highlighting functions
Reducing times
Calling up settings P
Changing the status S of a
setting P
W
Highlighting functions
Increasing times
Changing the status S of a
setting P
OK Calling up functions
Saving set times and
adjusted settings
Calling up set times
can be used to change various

settings P.
The clock/timer is operated via the
display with the V, OK and W buttons .
The functions available are indicated by
symbols.
Display
0:00
N T S +
Symbols in the display
Hours, minutes or seconds are set with

the V or W buttons in individual steps.
Holding the button pressed will speed
up the change in the display.
Depending on the position of the

function selector V and/or which button
is pressed, the following symbols will
appear:
Symbol/Function
V
N Minute minder
Any
T Duration
Oven
function
S End of cooking duration
+ Time of day
P Setting
0
S Setting status
0 System lock
38
CONTENTS
Clock/Timer
How to set the time or a
duration
Times are set in segments:
For the time of day and cooking
durations, first the hours, then the
minutes.
For the minute minder, first the
minutes, then the seconds.
^ Press OK.
Depending on the position of the
function selector, the functions (N, T,
S or +) will appear.
^ Highlight the required function using
V or W.
The corresponding symbol flashes for
approx. 15 seconds.
^ Press OK while the symbol is
flashing.
The function is selected and the left
numeric block will start to flash.
Displaying times/durations
If you have set times, the symbols N
and T or S indicate which time
functions have been set.
If you are using the minute minder N,
cooking duration T and end of
cooking time S functions
simultaneously, the last selected time
will be displayed.
If you have selected a cooking
duration, the time of day cannot be
displayed.
When the time/duration has elapsed
the relevant symbol will flash,
a buzzer will sound, if this option is
selected (see "Clock/timer Changing settings").
^ Press OK.
The buzzer will stop and the symbols in
the display will go out.
You can only set the time/duration

while the numeric block is flashing. If
the symbol has stopped flashing, you
will need to select the function again.
^ Set the required value using V or W.
^ Press OK.
The right numeric block will start to
flash.
^ Set the required value using V or W.
^ Press OK.
Your time/duration setting is now saved.
39
CONTENTS
Clock/Timer
Using the minute minder N
The minute minder can be used to time
other activities in the kitchen, e. g.
boiling eggs.
If you then press V once, two lines

will appear and, after pressing again,
the maximum possible minute value
(99) will appear.
The minute minder can also be used at

the same time as a cooking programme
for which the start and finish times have
been set, e.g. as a reminder to stir a
dish or add seasoning etc.
A maximum minute minder time of 99
minutes and 59 seconds can be set.
06:00
Setting the minute minder
^ Press OK.
Example:
You want to boil some eggs and set a
minute minder time of 6 minutes and 20
seconds.
The minutes are saved and the

seconds will flash.
0:00
^ Press V repeatedly until N starts

flashing.
^ Set the seconds using V or W.

^ Press OK.
^ Press OK.
00:00
00:00 appears and the minutes will

flash.
06:20
6:20
The minute minder is saved and will

count down in seconds.
The N symbol indicates the minute
minder has been set.
40
CONTENTS
Clock/Timer
At the end of the minute minder time
N flashes,
the time will count upwards,
a buzzer will sound for approx. 7
minutes, if this option is selected
(see "Clock/timer - Changing
settings").
^ Press OK.
The buzzer will stop and the symbols in
the display will go out.
If cooking durations have not been set,
the time of day will appear in the
display.
To change the time set for the minute

minder
flashing.
To cancel the time set for the minute

minder
flashing.
^ Press OK.
The minutes will flash.
^ Decrease the minutes to 00 by
pressing V, or increase them to 99 by
pressing W.
The next time the relevant button is
pressed, two lines will appear instead
of the minutes:
^ Press OK.
Four lines will appear:
The minute minder time selected

appears.
^ Press OK.
^ Press OK.
The seconds will flash.
^ Set the seconds using V or W.
-.-:00
-.-:-.-
^ Press OK.
The minute minder is now cancelled.
If cooking durations have not been set,
the time of day will appear in the
display.
^ Press OK.
The changed minute minder is saved
and will count down in seconds.
41
CONTENTS
Clock/Timer
Switching cooking
programmes on and off
automatically
Cooking programmes can be switched
on or off automatically.
To do this, set a duration or a duration
and finish time after selecting an oven
function and a temperature.
The maximum duration which can be
set for a cooking programme is
11 hours and 59 minutes.
We recommend using automatic
switching on and off when roasting.
However, do not delay the start for too
long when baking as the cake mixture
or dough will dry out, and the raising
agents will lose their effectiveness.
Setting a cooking duration

Example:
A cake requires 1 hour and 5 minutes
baking time.
^ Place the food in the oven if the
cooking programme does not require
pre-heating.
^ Select the required oven function and
the temperature.
fan will switch on.
^ Press W repeatedly until T starts
flashing.
0:00
N T S
00:00 will appear.

^ Press OK.
00:00
T
00:00 appears and the hours will flash.

If you then press V once, two lines
will appear and, after pressing again,
the maximum possible hour value (ii)
will appear.
42
CONTENTS
Clock/Timer
0i:00

^ Press OK.
will flash.
0i:05
At the end of the cooking duration

00:00 appears,
T starts to flash,
the oven heating switches off
automatically,
the cooling fan remains switched on,
a buzzer will sound for approx. 7
minutes, if this option is selected
(see "Clock/timer - Changing
settings").
^ Press OK.
As soon as you press OK,
the buzzer will stop and the symbols

in the display will go out.
^ Press OK.
the time of day will appear,
i:05
the oven heating will switch back on.

The cooking duration is saved and then

counts down in minutes, with the last
minute counting down in seconds.
The T symbol indicates a cooking
duration has been set.
43
CONTENTS
Clock/Timer
Setting a cooking duration and finish
time
A cooking duration and finish time can
be set to switch a cooking programme
on and off automatically.
i:30
Example:
The time is now 11:15 ;
you want a dish with a cooking duration
of 90 minutes to be ready by 13:30 .
The T symbol indicates a cooking

duration has been set.
^ Place the food in the oven.
^ Press W repeatedly until S starts

flashing.

the temperature.
fan will switch on.
Set the cooking duration first:
flashing.
^ Press OK.
00:00 appears and the hours will flash.
^ Press OK.
will flash.
Then set the finish time:
i2:45
S
i2:45 will appear in the display (=

current time of day + cooking duration
= ii:i5 + i:30).
^ Press OK.
i3:45
S
^ Press OK.
^ Press OK.
The cooking duration is now saved.

will flash.
44
CONTENTS
Clock/Timer
i3:30
S
Changing the cooking duration

flashing.
The remaining cooking duration
appears in the display.
^ Press OK.
^ Press OK.
The finish time S is now saved.

fan will switch off.
^ Press OK.
The selected finish time appears in the

display.
As soon as the start time

(i3:30 - i:30 = i2:00) is reached, the oven
heating, lighting and cooling fan will
switch on.

^ Press OK.
The changed cooking duration is now
saved.
The set cooking duration T appears

and then counts down in minutes, with
the last minute counting down in
seconds.
45
CONTENTS
Clock/Timer
Deleting a cooking duration
Deleting a finish time
^ Press V or W repeatedly until T

starts to flash.
^ Press V or W repeatedly until S starts

to flash.
^ Press OK.
^ Press OK.
^ Press V or W repeatedly until two

lines appear:
^ Press V or W repeatedly until two

lines appear.
-.-:45
T
^ Press OK.
Four lines will appear:
-.-:-.-
^ Press OK.
The cooking duration and any finish
time will be deleted.
The time of day appears if no minute
minder has been set.
^ Press OK.
Four lines will appear.
^ Press OK.
The T symbol appears and the
cooking duration counts down in
minutes, with the last minute counting
down in seconds.
If you want to finish the cooking
programme:
If you turn the function selector to 0,
the settings for the cooking duration
and the finish time will be deleted.

fan will switch on.
If you want to finish the cooking
programme:
46
CONTENTS
Clock/Timer
Changing the time of day
The time of day can only be changed
when the function selector is at 0.
^ Turn the function selector to 0.
^ Press W repeatedly until + starts
flashing.
^ Press OK.
^ Press OK.
will flash.
^ Press OK.
The time of day is now saved.
After a power cut, the time of day
needs to re-entered.
47
CONTENTS
Clock/Timer
Changing settings
To change the status:
Your appliance is supplied with a

number of standard default settings
(see the "Settings overview" chart).
^ Press V or W repeatedly until the

required status appears in the
display.
A setting P can be changed by altering

its status s.
^ Press OK.
^ Turn the function selector to 0.

^ Press and hold V until P I appears.
^ If you want to change another setting,

press V or W repeatedly until the
relevant number appears.
The selected status is saved and the

setting P appears again.
If you want to change further settings,
proceed as described above.
If you do not want to change any further
settings:
^ Wait approx. 15 seconds until the
time of day appears.
The settings remain in the memory
even after a power cut.
^ Press OK.
S 0
The setting is selected and the current
status S appears, e.g. 0.
48
CONTENTS
Clock/Timer
Settings overview
Setting
P I
Buzzer
volume
P 2
Clock format
P 3
System lock for
the oven
Status
S 0
S I to
S 30*
24*
I2
S 0*
S I
The buzzer is switched off.

The buzzer is switched on.
The volume can be altered. When you select a
status, you will hear the corresponding buzzer.
The time of day is shown in the 24-hour format.
The time of day is shown in the 12-hour format.
If you change the clock after 1 pm (13:00) from a
12-hour clock to a 24-hour clock, you will need to
update the hours for the time of day accordingly.
The system lock is switched off.
The system lock is switched on and 0 appears in
the display.
The system lock prevents the oven from being
used unintentionally, by children for example.
The system lock remains active even after a power
cut.
* Factory default setting
49
CONTENTS
Baking
Eating food which has been cooked
correctly is important for preventing
food poisoning or other ailments.
Only bake cakes, pizza, chips etc.
until they are golden brown. Do not
overcook them.
Oven functions
Depending on how the food is
prepared, you can use Fan Plus U,
Intensive Bake O or Conventional
Heat V.
Always place baking tins on the rack.

Position rectangular tins with the
longer side across the width of the
rack for optimum heat distribution
and even baking results.
When baking cakes with fresh fruit
toppings and deep sponge cakes,
place the tin on the universal tray to
catch any spillages and keep the
oven cleaner.
Baking paper, greasing
Bakeware
Miele accessories, e.g. the universal

tray, are treated with PerfectClean
enamel (see "Features").
The choice of bakeware depends on

the oven function and how the food is
prepared.

enamel generally do not need to be
greased or covered with baking paper.
Fan Plus U, Intensive Bake O:

Baking tray, universal tray, bakeware
of any ovenproof material.
Baking paper is only needed with
Conventional Heat V:
Dark baking tins with a matt finish.
Avoid using bright, shiny metal tins
as they give an uneven and poor
browning result and in some cases
cakes might not cook properly.
anything with a high salt content

(e.g. pretzels, bread sticks), because
sodium can damage the
PerfectClean surface;
meringues or sponges with a high
egg-white content, because they are
more likely to stick;
frozen food cooked on the rack.
50
CONTENTS
Baking
Notes on the baking chart
Shelf levels
Temperature 6
The shelf level on which you place your

food for baking depends on the oven
function and number of trays being
used.
As a general rule, select the lower

temperature given in the chart.
Baking at temperatures higher than
those recommended may reduce the
cooking time, but will lead to uneven
browning, and unsatisfactory cooking
results.
Baking time +
Check if the food is cooked at the end
of the shortest time quoted.
To check if a cake is ready, insert a
wooden skewer into the centre. It is
ready if the skewer comes out clean,
without dough or crumbs sticking to it.
Fan Plus U
1 tray: Shelf level 1
2 trays: Shelf levels 1+3
3 trays: Shelf levels 1+2+4
The univsersal tray should be placed
underneath the baking tray if you are
using a universal tray and a baking
tray on several levels at the same
time.
Bake moist biscuits and cakes on a
maximum of two levels at the same
time.
Intensive Bake O
1 tray: Shelf level 1
Conventional Heat V
1 tray: Shelf level 1 or 2
51
CONTENTS
Baking
Baking chart
U
Cakes/Biscuits
[C]
[min.]
Creamed mixture
Sand cake
140160
Ring cake
140160
Muffins (1 [2] tray/s)

Small cakes (1 tray) 1) 2)
1) 2)
Small cakes (2 trays)
6070
6580
4)
140160
1 [1+3 ]
3050
150
2540
150
1+3
2540
Foam cake (tray)
140160
2540
Marble, nut cake (tin)
140160
6080
Fresh fruit cake, with meringue topping (tray)
140160
4550
Fresh fruit cake (tray)
140160
3545
Fresh fruit cake (tin)
140160
5565
Flan base 1)
140160
2530
Small cakes/biscuits 1) (1 [2] tray/s)
140160
1 [1+3 4)]
2025
Flan base
140160
2025
Streusel cake
140160
Rubbed in mixture
Small cakes/biscuits
1)
(1 [2] tray/s)
4555
4)
140160
1 [1+3 ]
1525
140
1 [1+3 4)]
2540
140160
7090
150
6090
Apple tart 1)
150170
5070
Apricot tart with topping (tin)
140160
5575
Drop cookies 1) 2) (1 [2] tray/s)

Cheesecake
Apple pie (C 20 cm tin) 1) 2)
Swiss apple cake
The data for the recommended oven function is printed in bold.

Unless otherwise stated, the times given are calculated on the basis of an oven
which has not been pre-heated. With a pre-heated oven, shorten times by up to
10 minutes.
In general, if a range of temperatures is given, it is best to select the lower
temperature and to check the food after the shortest time.
52
CONTENTS
Baking
V
6
[C]
O
+
[min.]
[C]
+
[min.]
140160
6070
160180
6580
150170
2545
140 3)
2535
160180
2540
140160
6080
160180
4550
140160
3035
160180
3545
150170
5565
160180
2025
1220
160180
1520
160180
4555
160180
3)
160180
1020
160 3)
1530
160180
7090
140160
6575
170
6090
160
60-90
160180
4565
140160
5060
160180
5575
140160
5060
210230 3)
2535
180200 3)
2530
U Fan Plus / V Conventional Heat / O Intensive Bake

6 Temperature / Shelf level / + Baking duration
1) Do not use the Rapid Heat-up S function during the heating-up phase.
2) Settings also apply to requirements according to EN 60350.
3) Pre-heat the oven.
4) Take baking trays out of the oven early if the food is sufficiently browned before the
specified time has elapsed.
53
CONTENTS
Baking
Baking chart
U
Cakes/Biscuits
[C]
[min.]
Sponge mix 1)
Flan base (2 eggs) 1)
150170
2025
Sponge cake (4 to 6 eggs) 1)
150170
2535
Whisked sponge cake
1) 2)
160
2535
150170
20 25
30-40
5)
1530
Gugelhupf
140160
5060
Stollen
140160
5565
Streusel cake
140160
3545
Fresh fruit cake (tray)
150170
4050
White bread
150170
4050
5060
3545
Swiss roll 1)
Yeast mixtures and quark dough
Proving yeast dough
Wholegrain bread
Pizza (tray) 1)
160180
3)
160180
Onion tart
160180
3545
Apple turnovers (1 [2] tray/s)
140160
1 [1+3 4)]
2530
Choux pastry 1), Eclairs (1 [2] tray/s)
150170
1 [1+3 4)]
3040
Puff pastry (1 [2] tray/s)
160180
1 [1+3 4)]
2025
Meringues (1 [2] tray/s)
100120
4)
1 [1+3 ]
2560

which has not been pre-heated. With a pre-heated oven, shorten times by up to
10 minutes.
54
CONTENTS
Baking
V
6
[C]
O
+
[min.]
[C]
+
[min.]
160180 3)
1520
160180 3)
2035
3)
2045
170190 3)
1216
50
5)
1530
150170
5060
140160
5565
170190
3545
4050
4050
5060
3040
160180
3040
140170
160180
1)
170190
180200
3)
180200
170190
2535
160180
2535
150170
2530
3)
2535
180200 3)
1525
3)
2560
170190
120140
U Fan Plus / V Conventional Heat / O Intensive Bake

6 Temperature / Shelf level / + Baking duration
1) Do not use the Rapid Heat-up S function during the heating-up phase.
2) Settings also apply to requirements according to EN 60350.
3) Pre-heat the oven.
4) Take baking trays out of the oven early if the food is sufficiently browned before the
specified time has elapsed.
5) Place the rack on the floor of the oven, and stand the bowl containing the dough on the
rack.
55
CONTENTS
Roasting
Oven functions
Notes on the roasting chart
Depending on how the food is

prepared, you can use either Fan
Plus U or Conventional Heat V.
Temperature 6
Roasting dishes
You can use any heat-resistant
crockery:
Miele Gourmet oven dishes, roasting
pans, ovenproof glass trays, roasting
bags, dishes made from earthenware
or cast iron, the universal tray, rack
and/or grilling and roasting insert (if
available) on top of the universal tray.
We recommend roasting in covered
oven dishes as this ensures that
sufficient stock remains for making
gravy.
The oven also stays cleaner than with
open roasting.

If higher temperatures are used, the
meat will brown on the outside, but will
not be properly cooked through.
When cooking with Fan Plus U, select
a temperature 20 C lower than when
using Conventional Heat V.
Select a temperature of approx. 10 C
lower than quoted in the roasting chart
for meat weighing more than 3 kg.
The roasting process will take longer,
but the meat will cook evenly through
and the skin or crackling will not be too
thick.
When roasting on the rack, set a
temperature approx. 10 C lower than if
using an oven dish.
Pre-heating
Pre-heating is only required when
roasting beef sirloin joints and fillets.
56
CONTENTS
Roasting
Roasting duration +
The roasting time can be determined
by multiplying the thickness of the roast
[cm] with the time per cm [min./cm]
stated below, depending on the type of
meat:
Beef/Venison: . . . . . . . . . 1518 min./cm
Pork/Veal/Lamb:. . . . . . . 1215 min./cm
Sirloin joints/Fillets:. . . . . . 810 min./cm
Check if the meat is cooked after the

shortest time quoted.
Shelf levels
As a general rule, use shelf level 1.
Useful tips
Browning
Browning only occurs towards the end
of the roasting time. If cooking with a
roasting dish, remove the lid about
halfway through the roasting time if a
more intensive browning result is
desired.
Standing time
At the end of the programme, take the
roast out of the oven, wrap in aluminium
foil and leave to stand for about
10 minutes. This helps retain juices
when the meat is carved.
Roasting poultry
For a crisp finish, baste the poultry
10 minutes before the end of the
cooking time with slightly salted water.
57
CONTENTS
Roasting
Roasting chart
Meat/Fish
Roast beef, approx. 1 kg 1)

Fillet of beef/Sirloin joint, approx. 1 kg2)
Venison, approx. 1 kg 3)
Pork roast/neck approx. 1 kg 3)
Pork joint with crackling, approx. 2 kg 3)
Gammon joint, approx. 1 kg 3)
Meat loaf, approx. 1 kg 3)
Veal, approx. 1.5 kg 3)
Leg of lamb, approx. 1.5 kg 2)
Rack of lamb, approx. 1.5 kg
Poultry, 0.8 1 kg
Poultry, approx. 2 kg
Poultry, stuffed, approx. 2 kg
Poultry, approx. 4 kg
Fish, whole, approx. 1.5 kg

which has not been pre-heated.
Temperatures refer to cooking in an uncovered dish.
If roasting directly on the universal tray or the rack, set the temperature to 10 C
lower.
58
CONTENTS
Roasting
U
6
[C]
160180
[min.]
[C]
100120
180200
+
[min.]
100120
180200
4555
190210
4555
170190
90120
180200
90120
140160
100120
170190
100120
150170
160180
180200
120150
160180
6070
190210
6070
150170
7080
180200
7080
170190
100120
180200
100120
160180
90120
190210
90120
160180
5060
180200
5060
180200
6070
180200
6070
160180
90110
180200
90110
160180
110130
180200
110130
150170
150180
170190
150180
150170
3555
180200
3555
U Fan Plus / V Conventional Heat

6 Temperature / Shelf level / + Roasting duration
1) Roast with the lid on first, then remove the lid halfway through roasting and pour over
approx. litre liquid.
2) Pre-heat the oven. Do not use the Rapid Heat-up S function to do this.
3) Pour over approx. litre liquid halfway through roasting.
59
CONTENTS
Low temperature cooking

This programme is ideal for cooking
beef, pork, veal or lamb when a tender
result is required.
First the meat needs to be seared all
over briefly at a high temperature on
the cooktop in order to seal it.
Then place the meat in the pre-heated
oven where the low temperature and
long cooking time will cook it to
perfection and ensure it is very tender.
The meat relaxes and the juices inside
start to circulate evenly throughout the
meat to reach the outer layers.
This has very tender and succulent
results.
Useful tips
Use lean meat which has been
correctly hung and trimmed. Bones
should be removed before cooking.
For searing, use a suitable cooking
oil or fat that can withstand high
temperatures (e.g. clarified butter).

procedure
Use the universal tray with the rack
placed on top of it.
Do not use the Rapid Heat-up S
function to pre-heat the oven.
^ Place the rack together with the
universal tray on shelf level 1.
^ Select Conventional Heat V and a
temperature of 130 C.
^ Pre-heat the oven together with the
universal tray and rack for approx.
15 minutes.
^ While the oven is pre-heating, sear
the meat on all sides on the cooktop.
,Danger of burning!
Use oven gloves when placing food
in the oven, turning or removing it
and when adjusting oven shelves
etc. in a hot oven.
Do not cover meat during cooking.
^ Place the seared meat on the rack.
The cooking duration is approx. 24

hours and depends on the weight and
size of the meat, as well as the desired
degree of doneness and browning.
^ Reduce the temperature to 100 C.

^ Continue cooking until the end of the
cooking duration.
On models with a clock/timer, you can
set the cooking process to finish
automatically (see "Clock/timer - Setting
the cooking duration").
60
CONTENTS

After cooking
Because the cooking and core
temperatures are very low:
Cooking durations/Core
temperatures
Meat
Meat can be carved straight from the

oven. It does not need to rest.
The cooking result won't be affected
if the meat is left in the oven after the
finish of the programme. It can be
kept warm until you serve it.
The meat is at an ideal temperature
to be eaten straight away. Serve on
pre-heated plates with very hot
sauce or gravy to prevent it cooling
down too quickly.
Sirloin joint
Rare
Medium
Well-done
Pork fillet
Gammon*
Saddle of veal*
Saddle of lamb*
* Boned
Duration Core
temperatur**
[min.]
[C]
6090
120150
180240
120150
150210
180210
90120
5560
6570
7075
6580
7580
6575
6575
** Use a food probe if you need to

monitor the increase in the core
temperature.
61
CONTENTS
Grilling
,Danger of burning!
Grilling dishes
Grill with the oven door closed. If

you grill with the door open, hot air
will escape from the oven instead of
being cooled by the cooling fan.
The controls will get hot.
Oven functions
Grill Y
For grilling and toasting bread, open
sandwiches etc. and browning baked
dishes.
The top heat/grill element is ready for
use when it glows red.
Fan Grill \
For grilling thicker items, e.g. rolled
meat, poultry pieces.
Use the universal tray with the rack or

grilling and roasting insert (if available)
on top.
The juices from the food being cooked
collect under the insert. This prevents
them from spitting and making the oven
dirty. The juices can then be used for
making gravy and sauces.
Do not use the baking tray.
The top heat/grill element and fan are

switched on alternately.
62
CONTENTS
Grilling
Notes on the grilling chart
Testing to see if cooked
Temperature 6
One way of finding out how far through

a piece of meat has been cooked is to
press down on it with a spoon:

If higher temperatures are used, the
meat will brown on the outside, but will
not be properly cooked through.
The Y setting is recommended for
toasting and the fast browning of lean
items.
Pre-heating
Rare:
If there is very little

resistance to the pressure
of the spoon, it will still be
red on the inside.
Medium:
If there is some resistance,

the inside will be pink
Well-done: If there is great resistance,

it is cooked through.
Always pre-heat the top heat/grill

element for approx. 5 minutes with the
door closed.
Check if the meat is cooked after the

shortest time quoted.
Shelf levels
Tip
Select the shelf level according to the

thickness of the food.
If the surface of thicker cuts of meat is

cooked but the centre is still raw,
continue grilling at a lower temperature
setting or use a lower shelf level to
allow the food to cook through to the
centre. This will also prevent the
surface of the meat getting too dark.
Thin cuts: Shelf levels 3/4

Thicker cuts: Shelf levels 2/3
Grilling duration +
Turn the food halfway through the
cooking time.
63
CONTENTS
Grilling
Preparing food for grilling
Grilling
Rinse meat briefly under cold, running

water and then pat dry. Do not season
meat with salt before grilling as this
draws the juices out.

the temperature.
Add a little oil to lean meat if necessary.

Do not use other types of fat as they
can burn too easily and cause smoke.
Clean fish in the normal way. To
enhance the flavour, add a little salt or
squeeze a little lemon juice over the
fish.
^ Pre-heat the top heat/grill element for

approx. 5 minutes with the door
closed.
,Danger of burning!
Use oven gloves when placing food
in the oven, turning or removing it
and when adjusting oven shelves
etc. in a hot oven.
^ Place the food on the rack.
^ Place the food on the appropriate
shelf level (see Fan Grilling guide
and Grilling guide).
If you are grilling on shelf levels 1-3,
place the grilling and roasting insert
(if available) on the rack, and then
place these together on the universal
tray and put in the oven.
If you are grilling on shelf level 4,
place only the rack on this shelf level
and then place the universal tray
together with the grilling and roasting
insert (if available) on shelf level 1.
^ Close the door.
^ Turn the food halfway through the
cooking time.
64
CONTENTS
Grilling
Fan Grilling guide (Fan Grill \)
Use the Fan Grill function for meat, fish, poultry and vegetables.
Always pre-heat for at least 5 minutes before Fan Grilling.
It is not necessary to turn food when Fan Grilling.
The door must be closed during Fan Grilling.
When using red meat, pat the meat dry before Fan Grilling as this encourages a
richer colour.
Most Fan Grills are cooked on shelf position 4 (top shelf position) Thicker cuts
of meat and sausages can be cooked on shelf position 3.
Note: all temperatures are approximations and must be varied according to the
thickness and preparation of the meat. The chart below is a suggested guide
only. Personal taste and size of serves will vary times and temperatures. We
recommend you monitor cooking results for best outcomes.
Food
[C]
+
[min.]
Lean thin sausages
190
1012
Thick sausages
190
1520
Lean scotch fillet steak
230
612
Chicken breast fillet
180
1418
Whole butterflied chicken
200
3035
White fish fillets (in universal tray)
220
610
Thick fish fillets, oily fish (on rack over universal tray)
200
610
Lamb loin chops
190
1214
Lamb back straps
200
810
Vegetables, capsicum, zucchini, sweet potato, eggplant
190
1215
Potato wedges or small roast potatoes
200
1525
Kebabs and satays (red meat)
200
1215
6 Temperature / Shelf level / + Total grilling time
Fan grilling can be used for small roasts but is only recommended for tender cuts
of meat, eg lamb racks, rump roasts, and beef fillet. Fan Grill at 200 C on shelf
position 2, approx 25 minutes depending on thickness.
65
CONTENTS
Grilling
Grilling guide (Grill Y)
Use for thick toasts, muffins, cheese on toast, foccacia, bruschetta and bacon.
Pre-heat grill for at least 5 minutes on 200220 C.
Select the appropriate shelf level for the thickness of the food.
The door must be closed for Grilling.
This is a suggested guide only. Personal taste and size of serves will vary times
and temperatures.
66
CONTENTS
Defrost
Use the Defrost P function to gently
defrost frozen food.
When this function is selected, only the
fan switches on and circulates the air at
room temperature.
,Danger of salmonella poisoning!

It is particularly important to observe
food hygiene rules when defrosting
poultry. Do not use the liquid from
the defrosted poultry. Pour it away,
and wash the tray, the sink and your
hands.
Useful tips
Where possible, remove the
packaging and put the food to be
defrosted on the universal tray or into
a suitable dish.
Defrosting times
The time needed for defrosting
depends on the type and weight of the
food, and at what temperature it was
deep frozen. The following chart is for
guidance only. It is important to check
that food is thoroughly defrosted.
Frozen food
Chicken
Meat
Sausages
Fish
Strawberries
Butter cake
Bread
Weight
[g]
800
500
1 000
500
1 000
300
500
500
Duration
[min.]
90120
6090
90120
3050
6090
3040
2030
3050
When defrosting poultry, put it on the

rack over the universal tray to catch
the defrosted liquid so that the meat
is not lying in this liquid.
Meat and poultry need to be fully
defrosted before cooking. Fish, on
the other hand, can be partially
defrosted before cooking.
Defrost so that the surface is
sufficiently soft to take herbs and
seasoning.
67
CONTENTS
Bottling
Containers for bottling
,Danger of injury!
Do not use the appliance to heat up

or bottle food in sealed jars and tins.
Pressure will build up inside them
and they can explode causing
damage to the appliance, as well as
the risk of injury and scalding.
Only use special jars for bottling:
bottling jars,
Fruit/Cucumbers
^ Turn the function selector to
Lighting T as soon as bubbles are
visible in the jars. Then leave the jars
in the oven for a further
2530 minutes.
Vegetables
^ Reduce the temperature to 100 C as
soon as bubbles are visible in the
jars.
jars with twist-off lids.

Bottling fruit and vegetables
We recommend using Fan Plus U.
The instructions are for 5 jars with a
capacity of 1 litre each.
^ Place the universal tray on shelf
level 1 and place the jars on the tray.
Asparagus, carrots
Peas, beans
Bottling
duration
[min.]
6090
90120
^ After the bottling duration has

finished, turn the function selector to
Lighting T and leave the jars in the
oven for a further 2530 minutes.
^ Select Fan Plus U and a

temperature of 150170 C.
^ Wait until bubbles evenly rise in the
jars.
Reduce the temperature at the right
time to avoid the produce boiling
over.
After bottling
,Danger of burning!
Wear oven gloves when removing
the jars from the oven.
^ Take the jars out of the oven.
^ Cover the jars with a towel and leave
to set for approx. 24 hours.
^ Make sure all jars are closed properly
when storing them.
68
CONTENTS
Drying food
Drying is a traditional method of
preserving fruit, certain vegetables and
herbs.
It is important that fruit and vegetables
are ripe and not bruised before they are
dried.
^ To prepare food for drying:
Peel and core apples, and cut into
slices 0.5 cm thick.
Core plumbs if necessary.
Peel, core and cut pears into
wedges.
Peel and slice bananas.
Clean mushrooms, then either halve
or slice them.
Remove parsley and dill from the
stem.
^ Distribute the food evenly over the
universal tray.
^ Select Fan Plus U or Conventional
Heat V.
Food
Drying time
Fruit
28 hours
Vegetables
38 hours
Herbs*
5060 minutes
* Use Conventional Heat V for drying
herbs.
^ Reduce the temperature if
condensation begins to form in the
oven.
,Danger of burning!
Wear oven gloves when removing
the dried food from the oven.
^ Allow the dried fruit or vegetables to
cool down after drying.
Dried fruit must be completely dry,
but also soft and elastic. No juice
should be left inside fruit.
^ Store in tightly sealed jars or cans.
^ Select a temperature of 80100 C.

^ Place the universal tray on shelf level
1.
If you are using Fan Plus U, you can
dry on shelf levels 1+3 at the same
time.
69
CONTENTS
Frozen food/Ready meals

Useful tips
Cakes, pizza, baguettes
Large frozen items such as cakes,
pizzas or baguettes cover an
extensive area of the baking tray or
universal tray.
The temperature difference if large
frozen items are cooked in these
trays can cause the tray to distort in
such a way that it cannot be
removed from the oven when it is hot.
Further use will make the distortion
worse. Place this type of food on
baking paper on the rack to prevent
the risk of this happening.
Use the lowest temperature
recommended on the manufacturer's
packaging.
Oven chips, croquettes or similar
items
Preparation
Eating food which has been cooked
correctly is important for preventing
food poisoning or other ailments.
Only bake cakes, pizza, chips etc.
until they are golden brown. Do not
overcook them.
^ Select the function and temperature
packaging.
^ Pre-heat the oven.
^ Place the food in the oven on the
shelf level recommended on the
packaging when the temperature
indicator light goes out.
^ Check the food at the end of the
shortest time recommended on the
packaging.
Small items of frozen food such as

oven chips can be cooked on the
baking tray or universal tray.
Place baking paper on the tray so
that they cook gently.
Use the lowest temperature
packaging.
Turn several times during cooking.
70
CONTENTS
Gentle Bake
The Gentle Bake K function is ideal for bakes and gratins which require a crisp
top.
Food
6
[C]
+
[min.]
Lasagne
190
4560
Potato gratin
180
5565
Vegetable bake
180
5565
Pasta bake
180
4050
6 Temperature / Shelf level / + Duration
The table contains just a few examples.

For other recipes, use the temperature and time settings given for Fan Plus U as
a guide.
71
CONTENTS
Cleaning and care

,Danger of burning! Make sure
the oven heating elements are

switched off and that the oven cavity
is cool.
,Danger of injury! Do not use a
steam cleaning appliance to clean

this appliance. The steam could
reach electrical components and
Unsuitable cleaning agents

To avoid damaging the surfaces of your
appliance, do not use:
descaling agents on the oven front,
abrasive cleaning agents,
e.g. powder cleaners and cream
cleaners,
All external surfaces are susceptible

to discolouration or change in
appearance if unsuitable cleaning
agents are used.
Oven cleaners and descaling
agents will damage the front of the
oven, in particular.
Cleaning agent residues must be
removed immediately after use.
All surfaces are also susceptible to
scratching. Scratches on glass
surfaces could even cause a
breakage in certain circumstances.
stainless steel cleaning agents,

dishwasher cleaner,
cleaning agents for ceramic
cooktops,
hard, abrasive brushes or sponges,
e.g. pot scourers, brushes or
sponges which have been previously
used with abrasive cleaning agents,
dirt erasers,
sharp metal tools,
steel, wool or metal scourers
spot cleaning,
oven cleaner*,
stainless steel spiral pads*.
* These can, however, be used to

remove very heavy soiling from
PerfectClean treated surfaces in a
spot treatment.
72
CONTENTS
Cleaning and care

Normal soiling
Remove any soiling immediately
after use.
remove.
Continued use without regular
cleaning will make the oven much
harder to clean.
The accessories are not

dishwasher-proof.
Useful tips
Soiling caused by spilt juices and
cake mixtures is best removed whilst
the oven is still warm. Exercise
caution and make sure the oven is
not too hot - danger of burning.
To make cleaning easier, you can
dismantle the oven door, remove the
shelf runners and the FlexiClip
telescopic runners (if present),
remove the catalytic back panel and
lower the top heat/grill element.
See "Cleaning the catalytic back

panel" for instructions on how to keep
the back panel clean.
^ It is best to remove normal soiling immediately using a clean sponge and
a solution of hot water and
washing-up liquid or with a clean,
damp microfibre cloth.
^ After cleaning, make sure all residual
cleaning agents are thoroughly
removed with clean water. This is
particularly important when cleaning
surfaces treated with PerfectClean
enamel as cleaning agent residues
can impair the non-stick properties.
^ After cleaning, wipe the surfaces dry
using a soft cloth.
Cleaning the seal
There is a seal around the oven interior
which seals the oven interior and the
inside of the door.
Grease deposits on the seal can
cause it to become brittle and
cracked.
^ It is advisable to wipe the seal clean
after each use.
73
CONTENTS
Cleaning and care

Stubborn soiling (does not
apply to the FlexiClip
telescopic runners)
Spilt fruit and roasting juices may
cause lasting discolouration or matt
patches on enamelled surfaces.
This discolouration is permanent but
will not affect the efficiency of the
finish. Do not use force to remove
this discolouration! Clean these
following the instructions given here.
^ Baked on deposits can be removed
with a glass scraper or a
non-abrasive stainless steel spiral
pad.
Remove catalytic panels before
using oven spray. The chemicals
used in oven sprays will damage
catalytic enamel, rendering it
ineffective.
^ Very stubborn soiling on

PerfectClean treated enamel can be
cleaned using the Original Miele
oven cleaner. It must be applied to
cold surfaces in accordance with
Non-Miele oven spray must only be
used in a cold oven and for no longer
than a maximum of 10 minutes.
^ If necessary, the scouring pad on the
back of a non-scratching washing-up
sponge can be used to remove the
soiling.
^ After cleaning, remove all oven
cleaning agent residues thoroughly
with clean water, and dry with a soft
cloth.
74
CONTENTS
Cleaning and care

Stubborn soiling on the
FlexiClip telescopic runners
Do not clean FlexiClip telescopic
runners in a dishwasher. The special
lubricant used in the telescopic
runners will wash out during
dishwashing.
In the case of stubborn soiling on the
surfaces of the telescopic runners, or
clogged bearings caused by fruit juices
spilling over, proceed as follows:
^ Soak the FlexiClip runners for approx.
10 minutes in a solution of hot water
and washing-up liquid. If necessary,
use the back of a washing-up
sponge to remove the soiling. The
bearings can be carefully cleaned
with a soft brush.
The runners may appear discoloured
or a lighter colour in places after they
have been cleaned. This will not
affect the functioning of the runners
in any way.
Cleaning the catalytic

enamelled back panel
Soiling from oil and fat is burnt off
catalytic enamel when very high
temperatures are used in the oven.
The higher the temperature, the more
effective the process.
Exposure to scouring agents,
abrasive brushes or sponges and
oven sprays can cause catalytic
enamel to lose its self-cleaning
properties.
Catalytic enamelled panels should
therefore be taken out of the oven
before using oven spray in it.
Removing soiling caused by spices,
sugar and similar deposits
^ Remove the back panel (see
"Cleaning and care - Removing the
back panel").
^ Clean the back panel by hand with a
solution of hot water and washing-up
liquid applied with a soft brush.
^ Rinse it thoroughly and then leave it
to dry before fitting it back in the
oven.
75
CONTENTS
Cleaning and care

Removing oil and grease soiling from
the catalytic enamelled panel
^ Remove any accessories from the
oven, including the shelf runners.
^ Wipe large deposits of soiling from
the oven interior and the inside of the
door before starting the cleaning
process to avoid them baking on.
^ Select the Fan Plus U function and
a temperature of 250 C.
^ Then heat the empty oven for at least
an hour.
The length of time required will depend
on the level of soiling.
,Danger of burning! Allow the

oven to cool down before cleaning
by hand.
^ Clean the inside of the door and the
oven interior with a clean sponge and
a solution of hot water and
washing-up liquid or a clean, damp
microfibre cloth.
Any remaining soiling on the panel
will gradually disappear with each
subsequent use of the oven at high
temperatures.
If the catalytic coating is very heavily

soiled with oil and grease, a film can
form on the surfaces of the oven
interior during the cleaning process.
76
CONTENTS
Cleaning and care

Removing the door
Do not attempt to take the door off
the retainers when it is in the
horizontal position as the retainers
will spring back against the oven.
Do not use the handle to pull the
door off the retainers as the handle
could break.
^ Raise the door up till it rests open.
The oven door is connected to the

hinges by retainers.
Before removing the door from the
retainers, the locking clamps on both
hinges have to be released.
^ Open the door fully.
^ Release the locking clamps by

turning them as far as they will go.
^ Hold the door securely at both sides,

and lift it upwards off the retainers.
Make sure you take it off straight.
77
CONTENTS
Cleaning and care

Dismantling the door
The door is sealed all round to prevent
air in the oven cavity from getting into it.
In the unlikely event that soiling has
worked its way in between the glass
panes, the door can be dismantled in
order to clean in between the panes.
Take particular care as scratches
can damage the glass.
When cleaning the glass panes, do
not use abrasive cleaning agents,
hard sponges or brushes and do not
use sharp metal tools or scrapers.
Please also read the general notes
on cleaning the oven front before
cleaning the glass panes.
,Danger of injury!
Always remove the door before
dismantling it.
^ Place the door on a protective
surface (e.g. on a table cloth) to
prevent it getting scratched. The
door handle should line up with the
edge of the table. Make sure the
glass lies flat and does not get
broken during cleaning.
Oven spray will damage the

aluminium trims inside the door.
These should only be cleaned using
hot water and washing-up liquid
applied with a clean sponge or a
clean, damp microfibre cloth.
Be especially vigilant after
dismantling the door that the glass
panes do not break.
^ Unscrew the Torx screws and then

pull off the guides and the trim
together with the seal.
You can now remove the inner and
middle panes.
78
CONTENTS
Cleaning and care

^ Clean the door panes and other
individual parts with a clean sponge
and a solution of hot water and
washing-up liquid or a clean, damp
microfibre cloth.
^ Dry all parts with a soft cloth.
Then reassemble the door carefully:
^ Gently lift the inner pane up and out

of the plastic strip.
^ Slide the middle pane in slightly and

then refit the seal. Then push the
pane right in.
^ Pull the middle pane out.

Take care not to dislodge the seals that
are fitted to the right and left-hand side
of the pane next to the guides. These
seals are designed to hold the glass
pane securely in the frame.
79
CONTENTS
Cleaning and care
^ Fit the side seals for the inner pane in

the grooves provided.
^ Fit the trim together with its seal over

the panes.
If the seal is fitted correctly, hot air
from the oven cavity will not be able
to get into the door.
^ Fit the middle pane with the matt

printed surface facing downwards.
Make sure that the side seals do not
slip and push the pane in as far as it
will go.
^ Refit the guides and screw the trim

firmly back in position.
80
CONTENTS
Cleaning and care

Fitting the door
^ Open the door fully.

It is essential that the locking
clamps lock securely when the door
is refitted after cleaning. Otherwise
the door could work loose from the
retainers and be damaged.
^ Hold the door securely on both sides

and carefully fit it back into the hinge
retainers.
Make sure that the door goes back
on straight.
^ Flip both locking clamps back up as

far as they will go into a horizontal
position.
81
CONTENTS
Cleaning and care

Removing the shelf runners
with FlexiClip telescopic
runners
,Danger of injury!
Do not use the oven without the
shelf runners.
You can remove the shelf runners
together with the FlexiClip telescopic
runners (if present).
If you wish to remove the FlexiClip
telescopic runners separately
beforehand, please follow the
instructions in "Features Fitting and
removing the FlexiClip telescopic
runners".
,Danger of burning!
^ Pull the runners out of the holder (1)

at the front of the oven and then pull
them out of the oven (2).
Refit in the reverse order.
^ Ensure that all parts are correctly
fitted.

82
CONTENTS
Cleaning and care

Removing the back panel
,Danger of injury!
Do not use the oven without the
back panel fitted.
The back panel can be removed for
cleaning purposes.
,Danger of burning!
^ Disconnect the appliance from the
mains. Switch off at the wall and
withdraw the plug from the socket, or
disconnect the mains fuse or remove
the screw-out fuse in countries where
this is applicable.
^ Remove the shelf runners.
^ Undo the screws and take the back

panel out.
^ Clean the back panel (see "Cleaning
and Care - Cleaning the catalytic
back panel").
Refit in the reverse order.
Ensure that all parts are correctly
fitted.
^ Reconnect the oven to the electricity
supply.
83
CONTENTS
Cleaning and care

Lowering the top heat/grill
element
,Danger of burning!
^ Remove the shelf runners.
^ Undo the wing nut.

Do not use force to lower the top
heat/grill element as this can cause
it to break.
^ Carefully lower the top heat/grill
element.
You can now clean the oven ceiling.
^ Raise the top heat/grill element and
tighten the wing nut securely.
^ Refit the shelf runners.
84
CONTENTS

With the aid of the following guide, minor problems can be easily corrected
without contacting Miele. If, after reading this guide, you can't remedy the problem
yourself, please call Miele (see back cover for details).
Please note, however, that a call-out charge will be applied to unnecessary service visits where the problem could have been rectified as described in these
,Danger of injury!
Installation, maintenance and repairs may only be carried out by a suitably
qualified and competent person. Repairs and other work by unqualified
persons could be dangerous.
Miele cannot be held liable for unauthorised work.
Do not attempt to open the casing of the oven yourself.
Problem
The display is dark.
Possible cause and remedy

There is no power to the oven.
^ Check whether the mains fuse has tripped. If it has,
contact a qualified electrician or Miele.
The oven does not

heat up.
You have only selected an oven function or a temperature.

^ Select both a function and a temperature.
The system lock 0 has been switched on.
^ Switch off the system lock (see "Clock/timer - Changing
settings").
There is no power to the oven.
^ Check whether the mains fuse has tripped. If it has,
contact a qualified electrician or Miele.
85
CONTENTS
Problem
On ovens with a
There has been a power cut.
clock/timer, i2:00 starts ^ Reset the time of day (see "Using for the first time").
flashing in the display.
Cooking durations will also need to be reset for any
programme in use.
0:00 appears
unexpectedly in the
display and T is
flashing at the same
time. The buzzer might
also be sounding.
A noise can be heard
after a cooking process.
Rust-like spots appear
on catalytic surfaces.
The oven has been operating for an unusually long time

and this has activated the safety switch-off function.
^ Turn the function selector to 0. The oven is now ready
to use again immediately.
The cooling fan is switched on.

When the temperature in the oven has fallen sufficiently,
the cooling fan will switch off automatically.
The catalytic cleaning process does not remove spices,
sugar and similar deposits.
Take catalytic panels out of the oven and remove this
type of soiling with a mild solution of hot water and
washing-up liquid applied with a soft brush (see
"Cleaning and care - Cleaning the catalytic back
panel").
86
CONTENTS
Problem
Cakes and biscuits are
not cooked properly
after following the times
given in the chart.
Browning is uneven.

A different temperature from the one given in the recipe
was used.
^ Select the temperature required for the recipe.
The ingredient quantities are different from those given
in the recipe.
^ Check whether there has been a change to the
recipe. The addition of more liquid or more eggs
makes a moister mix which would take longer to cook.
The wrong temperature or shelf level was selected.
^ There will always be a slight unevenness. If the
unevenness is pronounced, check whether the
correct temperature and shelf level have been
selected.
The material or colour of the baking tin is not suitable
for the oven function.
^ With Conventional Heat V light-coloured, shiny tins
are less suitable.
Use matt, dark-coloured tins.
FlexiClip telescopic
runners do not push in
or pull out smoothly.
The bearings in the FlexiClip telescopic runners are not

sufficiently lubricated.
^ Lubricate the bearings with the special Miele
lubricant.
Only use this special lubricant as it is designed to
withstand high temperatures in the oven. Other
lubricants can harden and stick to the telescopic
runners when they are heated.
The Miele lubricant is available to order from Miele or
via the Miele online shop.
87
CONTENTS
Problem
The oven lighting does
not switch on.

The halogen lamp needs replacing.
Danger of burning!
Make sure the oven heating elements are switched
off and the oven interior is cool.
^ Disconnect the appliance from the mains. Switch off
at the wall and withdraw the plug from the socket, or
disconnect the mains fuse or remove the screw-out
fuse in countries where this is applicable.
^ Turn the lamp cover a quarter turn anti-clockwise to

release it and then pull it together with its seal
downwards to take it out.
^ Replace it with a new halogen lamp
(Osram 66725 AM/A, 230 V, 25 W, G9).
^ Refit the lamp cover together with its seal and turn
clockwise to secure.
^ Reconnect the oven to the electricity supply.
88
CONTENTS
After sales service and warranty

After sales service
Warranty
In the event of any faults which you

cannot easily remedy, please contact
Miele.
This appliance has a manufacturer's

warranty period of 2 years.
See back cover for contact details.
For further information, please refer to

your warranty booklet.
Please quote the model and serial

number of your appliance when
contacting Miele.
This information is given on the data
plate, visible on the front frame of the
oven, with the door fully open.
89
CONTENTS
,Danger of injury!
All electrical work should be

undertaken by a suitably qualified
and competent person.
Installation, repairs and other work
by unqualified persons could be
dangerous. Miele cannot be held
liable for unauthorised work.
Ensure power is not supplied to the
appliance until after installation or
repair work has been carried out.
Connection of this appliance should
comply with national and local safety
regulations.
Connection to a switched socket is
recommended as this provides easier
access and isolation in the case of a
service call.
If the switch is not accessible after
installation or the appliance is
hard-wired (depending on country), an
additional means of disconnection must
be provided for all poles.
Connection data
The required connection data can be
found on the data plate located on the
oven frame visible when the door is
open.
Please ensure this information matches
the household mains supply.
When contacting Miele, please quote
the following:
model number,
serial number,
connection data
(voltage/frequency/maximum rated
load).
When replacing the connection
cable supplied with another cable,
or changing the connection, only
cable type H 05 VV-F with a suitable
cross-sectional area (CSA) may be
used (available from Miele).
When switched off there must be an

all-pole contact gap of 3 mm in the
isolator switch (including switch, fuses
and relays according to EN 60335).
90
CONTENTS
Oven
Ovens are supplied for connection with
an approx. 1.7 m long 3-core cable for
connection to a 230 V, 50 Hz supply.
The wires in the mains lead are
coloured as follows:
Green/yellow = earth;
Blue = neutral;
Brown = live
WARNING - THIS APPLIANCE MUST
BE EARTHED
Fuse rating is 16 A.
Connection should be made via a fused
connection unit or suitable isolator
which complies with national and local
safety regulations. For extra safety it is
advisable to protect the appliance with
a suitable residual current device
(RCD).
Maximum rated load: see data plate.
91
CONTENTS
Building-in diagrams
Appliance dimensions and unit cut-out
Dimensions are given in mm.
Installation in a base unit
A H21xx: 45 mm
H22xx: 42 mm
* Ovens with glass front
** Ovens with metal front
92
CONTENTS
Building-in diagrams
Installation in a tall unit
A H21xx: 45 mm
H22xx: 42 mm
* Ovens with glass front
** Ovens with metal front
93
CONTENTS
Installing the oven

,The oven must be built into its
housing unit before it can be used.
^ Push the oven into the housing unit

and align it.
^ Open the door (if you have not
removed it previously).
In order to function correctly, the

oven requires an adequate supply
of cool air.
Ensure that the supply of cool air is
not impaired (e.g. by heat insulation
strips in the housing unit).
Please also ensure that the cool air
supply is not unduly heated by other
heat sources such as a wood
burning stove.
Before installation
^ Before connecting the oven to the
mains, you must disconnect the
power supply to the oven isolator
switch.
Installing the oven
^ Use the screws supplied to secure

the oven to the side walls of the
housing unit through the holes in the
oven trim.
^ Refit the door, if necessary (see
"Cleaning and care - Refitting the
door").
^ Connect the mains cable from the

oven to the isolator.
Lifting the oven by the door handle
can damage the door.
Use the handle recesses on the side
of the casing.
It is advisable to remove the door
before installing the appliance (see
"Cleaning and Care - Removing the
door") and remove accessories from
the oven cavity. This will make it easier
to install in its niche and you will not be
tempted to use the handle to carry it.
94
CONTENTS

ACN 005 635 398
ABN 96 005 635 398
Miele Center and Head Office Melbourne:
Knoxfield, VIC 3180
Miele Center and Office Melbourne:
206-210 Coventry Street
South Melbourne, VIC 3205
Miele Center and Office Sydney:
3 Skyline Place
Frenchs Forest, NSW 2086
Miele Center and Office Brisbane:
39 Harvey Street North
Eagle Farm, QLD 4009
Miele Center and Office Adelaide:
83-85 Sir Donald Bradman Drive
Hilton, SA 5033
Miele Center and Office Perth:
205-207 Stirling Highway
Claremont, WA 6010

IRD 98 463 631
Head Office:
Level 2, 10 College Hill
Freemans Bay, Auckland 1011
Miele Center Auckland:
8 College Hill
Telephone:
0800 4 MIELE (0800 464 353)
www.miele.co.nz
www.miele.com.au
Miele Global Headquarters
Germany
Miele & Cie. KG
Carl-Miele-Strae 29
33332 Gtersloh
Federal Republic of Germany
95
CONTENTS
H2260B; H2261B
en - AU, NZ
M.-Nr. 10 102 370 / 00

CONTENTS
EXP
Guarantee
MX
Pliza de Garanta
AU, NZ Warranty
US
Limited Warranty
CA
Limited Warranty
Garantie Limite
M-Nr. 05 745 317

CONTENTS
Warranty Card
WARRANTY
installation;
Service Agent; or
6
CONTENTS
Warranty Card





Knoxfield VIC 3180





PRIVACY
to its customers.
GOVERNING LAW
7
CONTENTS
Warranty Card
IMPORTANT
Model no.
Serial no.
Date of purchase
Store details
Installed by
8
CONTENTS
www.miele.com.au or
www.miele.co.nz.
AU NZ
Title
First name
Model no.
Surname
Street address
Suburb / Town
Postcode
Date of purchase
Store details
Email
CONTENTS
Info - Coupon
Miele laundry care
Miele dishwashers
machines)
wine conditioners)
establishments

REPLY PAID 381
Australia

CONTENTS
USA
Miele, Inc.
9 Independence Way
Princeton, NJ 08540
Phone: 800-843-7231
609-419-9898
Fax:
609-419-4298
www.mieleusa.com
Canada
Miele Limited
Vaughan, ON L4K 4V8
Phone: 800-643-5381
905-660-9936
Fax:
905-532-2290
www.miele.ca
Mxico
Miele, S.A. de C.V.
Miele Center
Arqumedes # 43
Tel.:
01 800 MIELE 00
(01 800 64353 00)
Correo electrnico:
www.miele.com.mx
1115
Australia
REPLY PAID 381
Fax
(03) 9764 7149
www.miele.com.au
New Zealand
8 College Hill
Freemans Bay
Auckland 1011
New Zealand
Telephone: 0800 464 353
Fax:
+64 9378 0146
www.miele.co.nz
Germany
Miele & Cie. KG
Carl-Miele-Strae 29
33332 Gtersloh
Tel:
+49 5241 89-0
Fax:
+49 5241 89-2090
www.miele.de
M-Nr. 05 745 317 / 04
CONTENTS
D - Rangehood
CONTENTS
ARU52X
52cm Undermount Hood

500 m3/h Extraction
Removes cooking odours with ease
50.6 dB Noise Rating
Quiet operation makes this unit perfect for open plan kitchens
Halogen Lighting
Giving extra light when needed in the kitchen
3 Speed Settings
Depending on what youre cooking you can vary the amount of extraction as required

Ph: 1300 762 219
1A Howe street, Auckland, New Zealand 1145
Fax: 03 9768 0838
Ph: (09) 306 1020
Fax: 09 3020077
CONTENTS
ARU52X
500 m3/h
Extraction Rate
Speed Settings
Technical
Lighting Type / Position
Halogen / Rear
Connection
Control Type
Colour
White / Stainless Steel
Ducting Outlet
150mm
Aluminum
Filter Type
Single
Motor
50.6
dB Rating
220-240V~ 50Hz
Sliding switch
520 x 254 x 314

Ph: 1300 762 219
Fax: 03 9768 0838
Ph:(09) 306 1020
Fax: (09) 302 0077
CONTENTS
ARU52X
Ariston 52cm Undermount Rangehood

5 Year Warranty
Details:
500m3/h Extraction
55dBl Noise rating
2 x Rear set halogen lights
3 Speed settings
150mm Ducting
Push Button control
1 x Round Aluminium filter (carbon optional)
Single Motor
White body with stainless steel fascia
Dimensions (W) x (H) x (D) 520 x 254 x 295
CONTENTS
USER MANUAL
520 & 750 // UNDERMOUNT HOOD

ARU52X | ARU75X
IMPORTANT // Please ensure that you read through this user manual prior to installation and use. This
manual contains important information to ensure optimal performance and keep you safe. Please retain
your proof of purchase, as this will be required in the event that you require warranty service. Remember
to retain this manual for future reference.
www.aristonbrand.com
CONTENTS
HELLO
CONGRATULATIONS ON THE SELECTION OF THIS ARISTON APPLIANCE.
ARISTON APPLIANCES HAVE BEEN SPECIFICALLY DESIGNED FOR
AUSTRALIAN AND NEW ZEALAND KITCHENS.
Please read through this user manual carefully as it contains information
that will ensure that your appliance is installed correctly, important operating
& care instructions and also some advice of what you need to do if this
appliance is not performing as intended.
pg 2
CONTENTS
www.aristonbrand.com |
CONTENTS
HELLO
CONTENTS
WARNING & SAFETY INFORMATION
INSTALLATION & DUCTING
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
MAINTAINING YOUR RANGEHOOD
PRODUCT SPECIFICATION
PROOF OF PURCHASE
10
NOTES
11
CONTACT DETAILS
12
CONTENTS
| www.aristonbrand.com
pg 3
WARNING &
SAFETY
INFORMATION
This appliance is not intended for use
by persons (including children) with
reduced physical, sensory or mental
capabilities, or lack of experience and
knowledge, unless they have been
given supervision or instruction
concerning use of the appliance by a
person responsible for their safety.
The minimum distance between the

hob surface and the lowest part of the
rangehood is 600mm. This distance
shall be at least 650mm, if the
rangehood is installed over a gas hob.
If the instructions for the gas hob
specify a greater distance, this has to
be taken into account.
Young children should be supervised

to ensure that they do not play with the
appliance.
Attention should be given to ensure that

any applicable regulations concerning
the discharge of exhaust air is fulfilled.
There shall be adequate ventilation of

the room when the rangehood is used
at the same time as appliances burning
gas or other fuels.
If the supply cord of this equipment is

damaged, it must only be replaced by
the manufacturer or its service agent or
a similarly qualified person in order to
avoid a hazard.
You must read the details concerning

the method and frequency of cleaning.
There is a fire risk if cleaning is not
carried out in accordance with the
instructions.
This appliance has been designed for

indoor domestic use only.
Do not remove or inspect the filters
whilst the hood is in operation.
Do not flamb under the rangehood.

Exhaust air must not be discharged
into an existing flue which is used for
exhausting fumes from appliances
burning gas or other fuels.
pg 4
CONTENTS
INSTALLATION &
DUCTING
IMPORTANT // Before handling the rangehood during installation, it is recommended

that you remove the filter to prevent damage.
Fig 1.2 illustrates the minimum height from the hob surface to the underside of the
rangehood. Electric hob 600mm, Gas hob - 650mm.
4 Fascia Screws
Minimum Height
Electric Hob 600mm
Gas Hob 650mm
FIG 1.2
NOTICE // If the instructions for the gas hob

specify a greater distance, this has to be
observed. Any installation above 750mm will
compromise performance.
CONTENTS
pg 5
INSTALLATION &
DUCTING
TOP DUCTING
SIDE DUCTING
RE-CIRCULATING
(Carbon filter required)
DUCTED OPTION
NOTICE // ALL DUCTING MATERIAL MUST BE COMPLIANT WITH THE LOCAL
LAWS IN FORCE.
INSTALLATION
1. Remove the filter and light globes. (If installed)
2. Remove the stainless steel fascia (4 screws) take care not to damage the fascia.
3. Determine the most efficient path for the ductwork, minimise bends and keep the
length of the ductwork to a minimum.
4. It is important to run and finish (install roof / wall caps) prior to installation of
the hood.
5. Cut out the cabinetry as per the installation diagram. Ensure that access has been
allowed for the power cable.
6. Hold the hood up to the underside of the cabinet (2 people required); Screw the
hood to the cabinetry.
7. Attach the ducting adaptor to the ducting.
8. Re-install the stainless steel fascia.
9. Re-install filter.
10. Plug in the power to the unit, turn on and test.
WARNING // Do not penetrate any screws into the rangehood as this may result in
electrical hazards. Failure to install the screws or fixing device in accordance with these
instructions may result in electrical hazards.
pg 6
CONTENTS
OPERATING
INSTRUCTIONS
FAN SPEED
OFF/LOW/MEDIUM/HIGH switch - located on the left hand side of the control panel.
This unit features 3 speed settings; single line indicate low speed, double lines indicate
the medium speed & triple lines indicate high speed.
To turn the unit off, set the speed switch to the 0 position (off).
LIGHT
On/Off switch - located on the right hand side of the control panel as indicated in the
diagram above.
CONTENTS
pg 7
MAINTAINING
YOUR
RANGEHOOD
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Ensure that the power to the unit is switched off prior to cleaning the unit. Surface should
only be cleaned with warm soapy water and a soft non-abrasive cloth. In coastal
environments and humid areas more frequent cleaning is required to maintain the finish.
FILTERS
These filters should be cleaned frequently, dependant on use (minimum monthly).
Aluminium filers are dishwasher safe or can be cleaned with hot soapy water. Ensure that
filters are thoroughly dry before re-installing. Slight discolouration may occur when
cleaned in the dishwasher.
LAMPS
Your range hood is fitted with GU10 halogen lamps. Before replacing, ensure that lamps
are completely cool and the power to the unit has been switched off. Replacement lamps
can be purchased from your nearest service centre.
To remove the lamp, twist the lamp in an anti-clockwise direction. Be careful when
installing the new lamp not to make contact with the skin as this may damage the lamp
and shorten its life.
pg 8
CONTENTS
PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
SERIAL:
MODEL: ARU52X
ISS: 2307007
Lights 2 x 40W
Motor: 100W
230V ~ 50Hz
Total: 180W
For service please call:
Australia: 1300 815 589
New Zealand: 09 306 1020
SERIAL:
MODEL: ARU75X
Lights 2 x 40W
Motor: 100W
ISS: 2307008
230V ~ 50Hz
Total: 180W
5364
For service please call:
Australia: 1300 815 589
New Zealand: 09 306 1020
5364
CONTENTS
pg 9
PROOF OF
PURCHASE
ATTACH YOUR PROOF OF PURCHASE

FOR FUTURE REFERENCE
pg 10
CONTENTS
NOTES
CONTENTS
pg 11
CONTACT DETAILS
AUSTRALIA
ARISIT PTY LIMITED
40-44 Mark Anthony Drive
Dandenong South, VIC 3175
Australia
Ph 1300 815 589
FX (03) 9768 0838
consumer.care@arisit.com
NEW ZEALAND
ARISIT PTY LIMITED
PO Box 68-140
Newton, Auckland
1145
New Zealand
Ph (09) 306 1020
FX (09) 302 0077
sales@aristonappliances.co.nz
ARISTON IS COMMITTED TO ONGOING RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT.
EVERY EFFORT HAS BEEN MADE TO ENSURE ALL INFORMATION IN THIS
USER MANUAL IS CORRECT AT TIME OF GOING TO PRINT.
DIMENSIONS SHOULD BE USED AS A REFERENCE ONLY AND ACTUAL
DIMENSIONS SHOULD BE TAKEN FROM THE PHYSICAL PRODUCT ONLY.
MANUFACTURER RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE SPECIFICATIONS
WITHOUT NOTICE
VERSION 1.3
aristonbrand.com
CONTENTS
E M i c r ow a ve ( P u r c h a s e r V a r i a t i o n )
CONTENTS
( i ) Ar i s t o n
CONTENTS
Instruction manual
MICROWAVE OVEN
Contents
GB
IT
Italiano, 1
ES
Espaol, 64
GB
English, 22
PT
Portogus, 85
TR
Turc, 127
FR
Franais, 43
EL
Grec, 106
Notices to the user, 23

Notices to the user, 24
Installing your appliance, 25
General description, 26
The control Panel, 27
Setting the clock / Microwave power
settings, 28
The display, 29
The selector knobs / Programming, 30
Microwave programming, 31
The speed defrost function, 32
The grilling rack * / The grill function *, 33
Programming the grill * /
the microwave + grill function *, 34
The pizza function *, 35
The pizza function *, 36
The pizza dish *, 37
Linked programmes, 38
Recommendations, 39
Care & cleaning, 40
Troubleshooting guide, 41
After Sales Service, 42
Important safety instructions.

Read carefully and keep for future reference.
* for certain models
CONTENTS
Notices to the user

Important:
Keep this user guide with your appliance. If the
appliance is ever sold or transferred to another
person, ensure that the new owner receives the user
guide. Please become familiar with these
recommendations before installing and using your
appliance. They were written for your safety and the
safety of others.
SAFETY RECOMMENDATIONS
Your appliance is designed for standard household
use for cooking, reheating and defrosting foods. The
manufacturer declines any responsibility in the case
of inappropriate use.
The appliance is not intended to be used by
persons (including children) with reduced physical,
sensory or mental abilities, or persons lacking
experience or awareness, unless using it with the
help of a person responsible for their safety, or
under supervision and with prior instruction in its
use.
Ensure that the cookware is suitable for use in a
microwave oven.
To avoid damaging your appliance, never operate it
while empty or without the turntable.
Do not interfere with the openings on the lock on
the front of the appliance; this could cause damage
to your appliance that would require a service call.
The contents of baby bottles and baby food jars

should be shaken or stirred and their temperature
checked before consumption to avoid burns.
GB
Never heat a baby bottle with the nipple on (risk of

explosion).
Make sure children do not play with the appliance.
Do not allow children to use the microwave oven
without supervision, unless appropriate instructions
have been given so that the child can use the oven
safely and understands the dangers of incorrect
operation.
Always use oven mitts to remove dishes from the
oven. Some dishes absorb the heat of foods and,
therefore, are very hot.
Liquids and other foods should not be heated in
sealed containers because they may explode.
It is recommended that you avoid heating eggs in
their shells and whole hard-boiled eggs in the
microwave oven because they run the risk of
explosion, even after cooking is complete.
Heating beverages in the microwave oven can
cause sudden and/or delayed splattering of boiling
liquid, so precautions must be taken when handling
their containers.
In the case of small quantities (a sausage, a
croissant, etc.) place a glass of water next to the
food.
The seal and frame of the door must be regularly

examined to ensure that they have not deteriorated.
If these areas are damaged, discontinue use of the
appliance and have a specialised technician check
it.
Excessive cooking times may dry out foods and

carbonise them. To avoid such incidents, never use
the same times recommended for cooking in a
traditional oven.
While heating food items in plastic or paper

containers, monitor the microwaves contents for
there is a risk of spontaneous combustion.
If smoke appears, stop or unplug the oven and

leave the door closed to smother any flames that
may appear.
For the microwave and microwave + fan heating

functions, the use of metallic cookware, forks,
spoons, knives or metal staples or fasteners for
frozen foods is not recommended.
23
CONTENTS
Notices to the user
GB
OPERATING PRINCIPLE
PROTECTING THE ENVIRONMENT
The microwaves used for cooking are electromagnetic waves. They are commonly found in our
environment in the form of radio-electric waves,
light or infrared rays.
Their frequency is in the 2450 MHz range.
Their behaviour:
They are reflected by metals.
They travel through all other materials.
They are absorbed by water, fat and sugar
molecules.
This appliances packing materials are recyclable.

Recycle them and play a role in protecting the
environment by disposing of them in municipal
containers provided for this purpose.
When food is exposed to microwaves, its molecules

begin moving rapidly, which causes heating.
The penetration depth of waves into the food is
approximately 2.5 cm; if the food is thicker, the core
of the food will be cooked by conduction, as in
traditional cooking.
Your appliance also contains various

recyclable materials. Thus it is stamped
with this logo to indicate to you that used
appliances should be mixed with other
waste. The recycling of appliances
organised by your manufacturer will take
place under the best conditions, in compliance with
European directive 2002/96/CE concerning electrical
and electronic equipment waste. Consult your city
hall or your retailer to find the drop-off points for
used appliances that is nearest to your home. We
thank you for your help in protecting the
environment.
It is valuable to note that the microwaves trigger

within the food a simple thermal phenomenon and
that they are not harmful to ones health.
Fig.01
24
CONTENTS
Installing your appliance

BEFORE HOOK-UP
Warning:
Ensure that your appliance has not suffered
any damage during transport (deformed seal or
door, etc...). If you see any kind of damage,
before doing anything else, contact your retailer.
In order to easily locate the reference information
for your appliance, we recommend that you note
these data on the After-Sales Service
Department and Customer Relations page.
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
Ensure that:
- The electrical installation has sufficient voltage.
- The electrical wires are in good condition.
- The dia meter of the wires complies with the
- Your electrical installation is equipped with 16ampere thermal-sensitive protection.
In case of doubt, consult your electrician-installer.
The electrical connections are made before the
appliance is installed in its housing.
In the case of connections with an electric

receptacle, it must remain accessible after
installation of the appliance.
GB
The ovens neutral conductor (blue wire) must be

connected to the networks neutral conductor.
In your electrical installation, allow for a useraccessible device that must be able to separate the
appliance from the main power supply and whose
contact opening is at least 3 mm above all the
terminals.
If the power cable is damaged, it should be
replaced by the manufacturer, its after-sales service
department or by a qua lified person to avoid
danger.
Warning:
We cannot be held responsible for any
accident resulting from an inexistent, defective
or incorrect ground lead.
If the oven malfunctions in any way, unplug the
appliance or remove the relevant fuse at the
ovens connection lead-in.
Electrical safety must be provided by a correct

build-in. During installation and maintenance
operations, the appliance must be unplugged from
the electrical grid; fuses must be cut off or removed.
The oven must be connected with a power cable
(standardized) with three 1.5 mm2 conductors (1 ph
+ 1 N + ground) that must be connected to a
monophase 220-240 V network via a CEI 60083
standardised receptacle (1 ph + 1 N + ground lead)
or in accordance with installation rules. The safety
wire (green-yellow) is connected to the appliances
terminal
and must be connected to the ground
lead of the electrical set-up.
25
CONTENTS
General description
GB
Rf. 1216560
Identification
label
26
Speed
Defrost
sticker
Drive
shaft
THE TURNTABLE :
ensures equal cooking of food throughout with no
need to stir or turn the dish.
- It may be used as a cooking platter.
- Rotation is controlled by the drive shaft and
the wheel support.
- The turntable revolves in both directions.
- If it does not turn, verify that all components
are properly positioned.
- For easy removal, wells are provided on either
side.
Wheel
support
Turntable
TURNTABLE OFF
:
stops the turntable from revolving in order to use
platters which require the entire oven space.
THE WHEEL SUPPORT :

Do not try to rotate the roller ring manually, as
you could damage the drive system. If it does not
turn smoothly, make sure that there is nothing in
the well beneath the turntable.
CONTENTS
Control panel
Display window :
to simplify programming, the display indicates : the time of day,
the types of food and functions, the minutes / seconds, or
weight programmed.
GB
The selector knob

:
to choose the food type or function.
The selector knob
:
to choose the programme time or weight.
The AUTO keys
:
automatically set the appropriate pro-gramme time according to
the weight and the selected food type.
The MODE key :
to choose the appropriate function.
*:
The GRILL/PIZZA key
to directly programme the grill / microwave + grill / pizza
function.
The KEEP WARM key
:
to keep your dish warm.
The PAUSE/CANCEL key C:
to interrupt (press once) or cancel a programme (press twice).
Also used to set the clock.
Stop-Turntable key
:
to stop the turntable from revolving.
START key
:
to start all programmes.
DOOR OPEN button :
press this button to open the door or stop the appliance.
27
CONTENTS
Setting the clock
GB
After first plugging in your microwave oven or after a power outage,

the clock reads 00:00 and the two dots flash.
To set the clock :
- Press the PAUSE / CANCEL key C for 5 seconds.
"00:00" flashes, and a tone sounds requesting the hour be set.
- Turn the selector knob to display the correct time
.
- Validate by pressing the PAUSE / CANCEL key C.
Your clock is set.
00:00
00:00
12:00
Microwave power settings

power setting
DEFROST
150 W
SIMMER
500 W
HEAT
700 W
HIGH COOK
900 W
APPLICATION
To defrost all frozen food or to top off cooking of delicate
dishes or to cook very slowly.
To cook fish and poultry. To finish programmes begun with

the HIGHCOOK power setting, for instance beans, lentils, or
dairy products.
(This power setting is available when you programme the
function using the mode key ).
To heat up all liquids and all fresh or frozen

pre-cooked dishes.
To cook vegetables and soup.
Microwave output power : 900 W
28
CONTENTS
The display
GB
12:30
The display and the selector knobs guide you in your choice of :
les aliments
beverages
fish
pork,
veal
turkey
fresh
readymade dishes
beef,
lamb
vegetables
poultry
frozen
readymade
dishes
functions
DEFROST
SIMMER
REHEAT
COOK
MICROWAVE
PIZZA
KEEP WARM
LOW GRILL
HIGH GRILL
GRILL
the weight for an AUTO programme

the length of the programme (or time of day)
12:00
The food type or function being selected will flash in the display.
29
CONTENTS
The selector knobs
GB
The 2 selector knobs are used for the various programmes:

The first to select :
FOOD TYPE / FUNCTION
- the food type

- the function
the second to programme :
TIME / WEIGHT
- the length of the programme
- the weight of the food
Programming
Your microwave oven is now plugged in and the
clock is set.
Open the door. Set the dish inside, close the door. If
the door is nor properly shut, the appliance will not
operate.
30
If you think there is insufficient space for the dish

to turn freely inside the oven, press the stop
turntable key
before or during the
programme.
If there is an error in the programming, press the
cancel key C twice.
3 beeps announce the end of a programme. The

beeps are repeated every minute for 10 minutes
until you open the door.
CONTENTS
Microwave programming
Available programmes :
GB
Express programming
Set the desired programme length (ex. 2 minutes) with the selector knob
Press start
. The maximum power setting
for quick reheating.
2:00
is programmed directly
Automatic programming by weight :

with the AUTO keys, the programme length is calculated automatically.
Choose the food type with the selector knob
Press one of the microwaving keys
or
(ex. fish).
(ex. COOK
).
50g blinks; programme the weight of your food item using the selector knob
(ex. 500 g).
Press start
. The appropriate power level is programmed, the adequate programme length
is displayed automatically (ex. 5 min) and the programme begins.
500
5:00
Automatic programming by function

Press the MODE
SIMMER
key to select the desired function, ex. press 4 times for the
function. The SIMMER symbol
is displayed.
Set the desired programme length (ex. 5 minutes), with the selector knob
Press start
5:00
Programming the keep warm function

Press the KEEP WARM key, 10:00 is displayed, the symbol
You may shorten the time with the selector knob
Press start
flashes.
Your dish is kept warm for ten minutes.
1 0:00
31
CONTENTS
The speed defrost function
GB
With the Speed DEFROST key you can quickly defrost all types
of frozen food. To guarantee quality results, use Speed DEFROST
for dishes weighing up to 500g. To defrost food items over 500g,
use the microwave key.
For quick defrosting of meat, poultry, fish, vegetables and

beverages, press the Speed DEFROST key
is displayed.
S 1
For quick defrosting of bread, rolls and pastry, press the Speed
DEFROST key twice
:
is displayed.
S 2
Wait until
100
flashes.
Use the weight selector knob to enter the weight of your food
item (up to 500g).
ex.
40 0
Press START
The defrost time corresponding to the given weight is

automatically calculated.
Necessary time may vary according to the initial temperature
of the food (the defrost times were calculated for food frozen at
-18C).
The defrost time is displayed and the programme begins.

When using Speed DEFROST or the defrost function a beep
indicates the midpoint of the programme (the oven continues to
operate). To obtain the best results, turn the food at this time,
close the door and press the Start key to continue the second
half of the programme.
32
CONTENTS
The grilling rack *

Make sure that the rack is always well centered on the turntable.
GB
Never use any metal dish with the rack with the microwave, grill + microwave or fan + microwave functions.
Nevertheless you may heat up food in an aluminium tray if you place a plate between the tray and the rack.
The folding rack :
The 2 level rack
To fold down the rack :

push in on the protruding hooks and fold in the stands
with the Grill or Grill + Microwave functions :

choose the rack level according to the dish you wish to grill
- high position to brown dishes which are rather flat
- low position as required for other dishes.
with the fan* or fan* + microwave functions :
always set your dishes on the rack folded down
high
position
low
position
(folded)
to the low position.
The grill function *

This function enables you to brown dishes such
as gratins or meat. It may be used before or after
cooking, as called for in the recipe.
After grilling make sure to use an oven mitt to

handle dishes, and remember to use only
ovenproof cookware such as ceramic dishes or
heat resistant glass.
For those models featuring the fan function, 2

grilling levels are available :
HIGH GRILL
and LOW GRILl
. As a rule,
use the HIGH GRILL level to grill meat and fish
and the LOW GRILL level to brown delicate
dishes.
WARNING : certain exposed parts may heat up
during use of the grill. Be sure to keep children
away.
33
CONTENTS
Programming the grill *
GB
Using the 2 level grill
Press the
key once to choose the LOW GRILL
, twice to choose the HIGH GRILL
Set the desired programme length with the selector knob
and press start
The microwave + grill function *

This function enables you to use the microwaves and grill simultaneously, for rapid cooking.
Using the microwave + grill function
Select the microwave + grill function by pressing the
key 4 times.
An intermediate microwave power level together with the high grill are programmed.
Set the programme length with the selector knob

Press start
, ex. 10 min.
10:00
34
CONTENTS
The PIZZA function *

With the PIZZA function you can save time and
energy cooking your favorite dishes and have them
turn out as crispy, tasty and golden brown as if
cooked in a traditional oven.
Recommendations :
Use of the PIZZA key together with the PIZZA

dish, allows you to use the grill and microwave
functions simultaneously.
The PIZZA dish features a special coating that

absorbs microwaves through its bottom.
It radiates heat from below the food to cook or

reheat it, giving it the required color and
crispness while the grill browns the top.
GB
Take foods out of their metallic or plastic

packaging before cooking or reheating them with
the PIZZA function.
It is advisable to program shorter cooking times
and extend if necessary.
All foods with a skin or wrapping, such as
potatoes and sausages, must be pierced before
cooking.
Make sure pieces of meat are completely thawed
out and dried off before searing with the PIZZA
function.
2 cooking methods :
Without preheating - by using the PIZZA function

you can cook and brown most frozen meals and
fresh, dough-based dishes without preheating the
PIZZA dish. They turn out as crispy as if cooked
in a traditional oven.
With preheating - the PIZZA dish can be
preheated using the PIZZA key for a maximum of
2 minutes. Preheating is recommended to cook or
brown small pieces of meat or fish and some
dough-based, frozen and take-out dishes.
Keep an eye on the foods coloring, just as you

would with a traditional oven.
Protect your hands when taking out the dish
because it can be extremely hot.
Do not serve stuffed foods (apple pastry for
example) too quickly because they can be warm
on the surface whereas the filling is extremely
hot.
Cooking or reheating of eggs with the PIZZA
function is prohibited.
If you wish to cook several dishes consecutively
with the PIZZA function, allow the oven to cool 10
minutes between dishes for better browning.
35
CONTENTS
The PIZZA function *
GB
Example : to cook a frozen pizza (350 g)

Place the frozen pizza directly on the PIZZA dish, place the
PIZZA dish on the middle of the turntable.
Programming
Press the
key 3 times :
is displayed
Program 6 minutes
6:00
Press START
is displayed
the turntable revolves, the oven light comes on.
Be sure and use an oven mitt to remove the pizza dish.
36
CONTENTS
The Pizza dish *

Care of the PIZZA dish
GB
The PIZZA dish

The inside of the dish is covered with a non-stick

coating, so it is not necessary to grease it before
use.
Do not cut foods directly in the PIZZA dish as this
damages the non-stick coating.
The PIZZA dish is dishwasher-safe.
Use a sponge, hot water and dishwashing liquid
to wash the dish. Do not use a metallic sponge
or scouring powder.
POWDER
Recommendations
Do not place the PIZZA dish on the rack; this

could cause irremediable damage to your oven.
Do not place the PIZZA dish in a traditional oven,
on gas, electric or other stoves or on any very hot
surface.
- The PIZZA dish may be preheated for certain
purposes but never preheat for longer than 2
minutes.
Do not leave any utensils in a hot PIZZA dish as
the high temperature may damage them.
- If you wish to cook several dishes consecutively
with the PIZZA function, allow the oven to cool
10 minutes between dishes for better browning.
37
CONTENTS
Linked programmes
GB
You may link 2 different programmes, combining any of the available functions : microwave / grill /
microwave + grill / pizza / keep warm.
Example : Using linked programming to defrost ten minutes followed by simmer level microwave + grill
programme for 20 minutes
Proceed as if setting only a defrost programme :
- press the
key and select the defrost function
- set the programme time (ex. 10 min).
10:00
Instead of pressing START, programme the next operation :
- press the grill key

4 times to select the microwave + grill function
- set the programme length by adding the microwave + grill time (ex. 20 min)
to the defrost time.
20:00
Press START
.
The linked microwave + grill programme will automatically begin at the end of the defrost programme.
38
CONTENTS
Recommendations
WHILE THE OVEN IS OPERATING :
You may stop or start the turntable revolving

during a programme by pressing the turntable
stop key
.
To change the food type or function selection,
press the cancel key C twice and programme
again.
If you open the door before the end of the
programme, shut the door and press the start key
to continue the programme.
If you remove a dish before the end of the

programme, press the cancel key C twice to
erase the programme.
GB
REMARKS :
If you wait longer than 4 minutes to press the

start key
after having entered a programme, it
will be cancelled (the clocktime will be displayed).
If you wish to defrost frozen food after using one
of the grill functions, for better results, first let the
microwave oven cool down for about ten minutes.
When using the defrost function

, a beep
indicates the mid-point of the programme (the
oven continues to operate); to obtain the best
results, turn the food at this time, close the door
and press the start key
to continue the
second half of the programme.
39
CONTENTS
Care & cleaning
GB
WARNING : It is recomended to clear the oven

regularly and to take any food
deposit inside and outside the
appliance.Use a soapy and wet
cloth. If the appliance is not kept
SOAP
+
clean, its surface could deteriorat
WATER
and adversely affect its life and
possibly result in a hazardous
situation. If the door or door seals are damaged,
the oven must not be operated until it has been
repaired by a competent person.
A steam cleaner is not to be used.
Do not use
abrasives, alcohol
or solvents as they
are liable to
damage the oven.
In the event of unsavory odors or caked-on dirt,

boil water containing lemon juice or vinegar in a
cup for 2 minutes and clean the walls with a little
dishwashing liquid.
For those ovens with grill or convection heat
functions, the top and rear air vents become very
hot. Do not touch these parts after use; wait till
the appliance has cooled down in order to clean
it. Use a fine steel wool pad on the metal parts.
The turntable can
be removed for
cleaning. Wells are
provided on both
sides for easy
access.
If you remove the drive shaft, do not allow water
to enter the motor shaft hole.
Be sure to put the turntable, the drive shaft and
the wheel support back in their proper place.
40
CONTENTS
Troubleshooting guide
Problem
Suggestion
The time counts down, but the appliance does

not function (the turntable does not rotate, the
light does not come on and the food is not
heated).
Press the turntable off key
The microwave oven is noisy when operating.
Adjust the front left foot.

Clean the wheels and the well area beneath the
turntable.
Condensation forms on the door glass.
Clean the vents under the appliance.
The turntable does not revolve correctly.
Clean the wheels and the well beneath the

turntable.
The microwave programmes do not produce the desired results.
Clean the vents under the appliance.

Make sure that you use only containers
which are suitable for microwave cooking.
The appliance produces sparks.
Check whether the wheel support is correctly

positioned.
Thoroughly clean the appliance :
remove any greasy deposits, cooking residue,
etc...
Move any metal objects away from the oven
walls.
Never use metallic containers with a rack.
GB
for 5 seconds.
41
CONTENTS
After-sales service
GB
If the equipment has sustained any damage :

Check that the door is not deformed.
If the oven does not operate, before calling the repairman :
- Check the electrical supply.
- Check that the door is properly closed.
- Check your programming.
CAUTION : never attempt to repair your oven yourself.

WARNING : it is dangerous for anyone other than qualified personnel to make any repairs requiring removal of
the cover providing protection from exposure to microwave energy.
Only a specially trained technician is qualified to repair your microwave oven.
42
CONTENTS
(ii) Miele
CONTENTS
Microwave oven
To avoid the risk of accidents or damage to the

appliance, it is essential to read these instructions
before it is installed and used for the first time.
en - AU
M.-Nr. 10 229 970

CONTENTS
Contents
Oven interior and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Accessories supplied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Optional accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Caring for the environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Description of the functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
How the microwave oven works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Description of functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
What can a microwave oven do?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
What functions does the microwave oven have? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Microwave Solo mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Grill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Combination mode (Microwave + Grill) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Automatic programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Suitable containers for microwave ovens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Material and shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Testing dishes for their suitability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
The cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Time of day display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Setting the time of day . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Altering the time of day . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Invisible time display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Opening the door. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Placing a dish in the microwave oven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Turntable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Closing the door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Starting a programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
"door" message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Interrupting or restarting a programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Altering the settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Cancelling a programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
At the end of a programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Keep warming function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
2
CONTENTS
Contents
Quick start (programmable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
System lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Minute minder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Altering a minute minder entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Minute minder + cooking process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Operation - Grilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Gourmet plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Some suggested uses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Recipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Operation - Automatic programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Automatic defrosting ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Automatic cooking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Popcorn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Recipes - Automatic programmes 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Saving a favourite programme (memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Changing the settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Reheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Cooking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Defrosting / Defrosting and reheating or cooking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Bottling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Some suggested uses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Oven interior and inside of the door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Appliance front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Accessories supplied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Optional accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
After sales service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Contact details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
CONTENTS

Oven interior and accessories
a Control panel
e Grilling rack
b Grill
f Gourmet plate
c Turntable
g Cover
d Appliance door
CONTENTS

Control panel
i On/Off sensor K
j Popcorn Automatic programme
k Rotary selector
for microwave power, grill, combination programmes and Automatic
programmes
(can be turned clockwise and anti-clockwise, and is retractable at position)
l Electronic timer and clock display
m Memory sensor
(to save a 1-3 stage programme sequence) M
n Appliance settings X
o Time of day +
p Rotary selector for, e.g. entering time and weight
(can be turned clockwise and anti-clockwise, and is retractable)
q Minute minder N
r Stop sensor U U
s Start sensor / Add a minute sensor /
Quick start sensor (programmable) c
t Back # sensor for deleting the previous entry
u OK sensor
CONTENTS

Accessories supplied
Grilling rack
Glass tray
The grilling rack can be used for all

functions with and without
microwave power, except for
Microwave Solo mode.
To avoid the grilling rack being used
inadvertently on Microwave Solo, it
should not be kept inside the
microwave oven.
The glass tray is suitable for use with all

cooking functions.
It is heat-resistant and microwave-safe.
When grilling directly on the rack, the
glass tray should be placed underneath
the rack to catch any fat or juices.
Gourmet plate
The Gourmet plate is a round, non-stick
grilling plate. It can be used to heat
snacks or small meals quickly whilst
maintaining crispness.
Cover
The cover supplied must only be used
in the Microwave Solo mode.
It prevents the food from drying out and
the oven from becoming dirty, and it
accelerates the heating process.
These products and other useful

accessories can be ordered via the
internet (depending on country) or from
Miele (see back cover for contact
details).
CONTENTS

material

appliance


Do not dispose of your old appliance
with your household waste.
Recycling the packaging reduces the

use of raw materials in the
manufacturing process and also
reduces the amount of waste in landfill
sites. Rather than just throwing these
offered for recycling.

community waste collection/recycling
centre.
Ensure that any plastic wrappings,

bags, etc. are disposed of safely and
kept out of the reach of babies and
young children. Danger of suffocation!

CONTENTS

This appliance complies with all relevant local and national safety
requirements. Improper use of the appliance can, however,
present a risk of both personal injury and material damage.
please read these instructions carefully before installation and
before using it for the first time. They contain important notes on
the installation, safety, operation and care of the appliance. Miele
cannot be held liable for damage caused by non-compliance with
these Warning and Safety instructions.
Keep these instructions in a safe place and pass them on to any
future owner.
Correct application
~ This appliance is designed for domestic use and for use in similar
environments
by guests in hotel or motel rooms, bed & breakfasts, farm houses
and other typical living quarters. This does not include common/
shared facilities or commercial facilities within hotels, motels or
bed & breakfasts, staff kitchen areas in shops, offices and other
working environments and farm houses.
This appliance is not suitable for outdoor use.
~ This microwave oven can only be used at elevations below

2000 m.
~ This microwave oven is intended to cook, defrost, reheat, grill and

bottle food. Any other usage is at the owner's risk.
CONTENTS
~ When using the microwave function, any moisture will be
vaporised. Therefore, if flammable materials are being dried in the

microwave, they may dry out and ignite. Never use the microwave to
store or dry items which could ignite easily.
~ This appliance is not intended for use by persons (including
children) with reduced physical, sensory or mental capabilities, or

lack of experience and knowledge, unless they have been given
supervision or instruction concerning its use by a person
responsible for their safety, and are able to recognise the dangers of
misuse.
~ Young children must not be allowed to use this appliance unless

they are constantly supervised.
~ Cleaning work may only be carried out by older children under

the supervision of an adult.
~ Children should be supervised to ensure that they do not play

with the appliance.
CONTENTS
~ Danger of suffocation! Children may be able to wrap themselves

in packing material or pull it over their heads with the risk of
suffocation. Keep children away from any packing material.
~ Danger of burning! Children's skin is far more sensitive to high
temperatures than that of adults. When grilling with or without the

microwave function, the oven interior, grill element and door can get
hot. Do not let small children touch the oven while it is in operation,
as there is the danger of being burnt.
~ Danger of injury! The maximum load capacity for the door is 8 kg.
Children can hurt themselves on an open door. Ensure that children
do not sit on or swing on the door.
Technical safety
~ A damaged appliance is dangerous. Check the appliance for any

visible damage. Never install or attempt to use a damaged
appliance.
~ If the connection cable is faulty, it must only be replaced by a
Miele approved service technician to protect the user from danger.
10
CONTENTS
~ Do not use the microwave if
the door is warped.

the door hinges are loose.
holes or cracks are visible in the casing, the door or the oven
interior walls.
Operating the appliance with this type of damage will result in
microwave leakage and present a hazard to the user.
~ Tampering with electrical connections or components and
mechanical parts is highly dangerous to the user and can cause

operational faults. Do not open the outer casing of the appliance.
~ Before connecting the appliance to the mains supply, make sure

that the rating on the data plate corresponds to the voltage and
frequency of the household supply. This data must correspond in
order to avoid the risk of damage to the appliance. Consult a
qualified electrician if in any doubt.
~ Do not connect the appliance to the mains electricity supply by a

11
CONTENTS

system which complies with local and national safety regulations. It
is most important that this basic safety requirement is present and
tested regularly and, where there is any doubt, the household wiring
system should be inspected by a qualified electrician. Miele cannot
be held liable for the consequences of an inadequate earthing
system (e.g. electric shock).
~ For safety reasons, this appliance may only be used when it has
been fully installed.
~ Repairs and other work by unqualified persons could be
dangerous. The manufacturer cannot be held liable for unauthorised

work. Installation work and repairs to electrical appliances must only
be carried out by a Miele approved service technician.
~ The manufacturer's warranty will be invalidated if the appliance is

not repaired by a Miele approved service technician.
12
CONTENTS
~ The appliance must be disconnected from the mains electricity

supply before repairs, cleaning and maintenance work is carried
out. The appliance is only completely isolated from the electricity
supply when:
it is switched off at the wall socket and the plug removed,
the mains fuse is disconnected,
or the screw-out fuse is removed (in countries where this is
applicable).
original spare parts. The manufacturer can only guarantee the safety
of the appliance when Miele replacement parts are used.
~ Appliances which are built-in behind a furniture door must only be

operated when the door is open. Do not close the furniture door
when the appliance is in operation. Heat and moisture would build
up behind a closed furniture door, potentially causing damage to the
microwave oven and the furniture unit. Wait until the appliance has
cooled down completely before closing the furniture door.
13
CONTENTS
~ This appliance must not be installed and operated in mobile

~ Reliable and safe operation of this appliance can only be
guaranteed if it has been connected to the mains electricity supply.
Correct use
, Danger of burning! The microwave oven gets hot during

grilling (with and without the microwave function). Be careful not
to burn yourself on the oven interior, grill element, food,
accessories or the appliance door.
Use oven gloves when placing food in the microwave oven,
turning or removing it and when adjusting shelves etc. in a hot
microwave oven.
~ Always ensure that food is sufficiently cooked or reheated.
Many factors will affect the overall cooking time, including the size
and amount of food, its initial temperature, changes to recipe and
the shape and size of cooking container.
Some foods may contain micro-organisms which are only destroyed
by thorough cooking, therefore when cooking or reheating foods,
e.g. poultry, it is particularly important that food is fully cooked
through (at temperatures of over 70 C for more than 10 minutes). If
in doubt, select a longer cooking or reheating time.
14
CONTENTS
~ It is important that the heat is allowed to spread evenly
throughout the food being cooked. This can be achieved by stirring

and/or turning the food, and by observing a sufficiently long
standing time, which should be added to the time needed for
cooking, reheating or defrosting.
~ Always remember that times for cooking, reheating and
defrosting in a microwave oven are usually considerably shorter

than with traditional methods of food preparation.
Excessively long cooking times can lead to food drying out and
burning, or could even cause it to catch fire.
Fire hazard!
There is also a danger of fire if bread, breadcrumbs, flowers, herbs,
etc., are dried in the microwave oven. Do not dry these items in the
microwave oven.
~ Do not use the microwave function to heat up cushions or pads
filled with cherry kernels, wheat grain, lavender or gel, such as those
used in aromatherapy. These pads can ignite when heated even
after they have been removed from the appliance.
~ The microwave is not suitable for cleaning or disinfecting items.
Items can get extremely hot, and there is a danger of burning when
the item is removed from the microwave.
15
CONTENTS
~ The appliance could be damaged if used without food, or if it is
incorrectly loaded. Therefore, do not use this appliance to pre-heat

crockery or dry herbs and the like.
~ Always ensure that food, the Gourmet plate or a browning dish
has been placed in the microwave, and that the turntable is in place,
before switching on.
~ Never cook or reheat food or liquids in sealed containers, jars or

bottles.
With baby bottles, the screw top and teat must be loosened.
Otherwise pressure builds up which can cause the bottle or
container to explode, posing a severe risk of injury.
~ When heating food and drinks, remember that the heat is created
in the food itself, and that the container will normally be cooler. The
dish is only warmed by the heat of the food. Before serving,
remember to allow a sufficient standing time and then always check
the temperature of the actual food itself after taking it out of the
microwave. The temperature of the container is not an indication of
the temperature of the food or liquid in it. This is particularly
important when preparing food for babies, children, and the
elderly or infirm.Shake or stir baby milk and food thoroughly after
heating, and try it for temperature to ensure that it will not scald the
baby.
16
CONTENTS
~ When heating liquids, milk, sauces etc., using microwave power,
the boiling point of the liquid may be reached without the production
of typical bubbles.
The liquid does not boil evenly throughout. This so-called 'boiling
delay' can cause a sudden build-up of bubbles when the container
is removed from the oven or shaken. This can lead to the liquid
boiling over suddenly and explosively. Danger of burning!
The formation of bubbles can be so strong that the pressure forces
the oven door open. The user could be injured and the appliance
damaged. To avoid this, always wait a minimum of 20 seconds
before removing the container from the oven. You can also place a
suitable glass rod or utensil into the cup or glass when heating
liquids.
17
CONTENTS
~ To avoid fuelling any flames, do not open the oven door if smoke
occurs in the oven interior.
Interrupt the process by pressing the On/Off sensor. Switch off at
the wall socket and remove the plug.
Do not open the door until the smoke has dispersed.
~ Oils and fats are a fire hazard if allowed to overheat. Never leave
the microwave oven unattended when cooking with oil or fats. Do
not use the appliance for deep frying food. Do not attempt to
extinguish oil or fat fires with water. Switch off the appliance and
smother the flames by keeping the appliance door closed.
~ Do not use the appliance to heat up the room. Due to the high
temperatures radiated, objects left near the appliance could catch

fire.
~ Never heat undiluted alcohol in the microwave, as this can easily

ignite. If using alcohol in your recipes, please be aware that high
temperatures can cause the alcohol to vaporise and even to ignite
on the hot surfaces. Alcohol should be burnt off before the dish is
placed in the oven to avoid this danger.
18
CONTENTS
~ Do not use the appliance to heat up or bottle food in sealed jars

and tins. Pressure will build up inside them and they can explode
causing damage to the appliance, as well as the risk of injury and
scalding.
~ Food which is left in the microwave oven can dry out and the
escaping moisture can lead to corrosion in the appliance. The

control panel, worktop or furniture unit may also be damaged.
Therefore, always cover food which is left in the microwave oven.
~ Try to avoid the interior walls being splashed with food or liquids
containing salt. If this does happen, wipe these away thoroughly to
avoid corrosion on the stainless steel surface.
~ The oven interior can get hot during use.
Danger of burning!
Clean the interior of the microwave oven and accessories as soon
as they have cooled down. If you wait too long, cleaning becomes
not only difficult, but may become impossible in extreme cases.
Under certain circumstances heavy soiling may damage the
appliance and give rise to dangerous situations. Danger of burning!
Please see instructions in "Cleaning and care".
19
CONTENTS
~ Fire hazard! Do not use any containers or cutlery made from or
containing metal, aluminium foil, lead crystal glassware,

temperature-sensitive plastics, wooden utensils or cutlery, metal
clips or wire ties. Do not use bowls with milled rims, or plastic pots
with the foil lid only partially removed.
Such items could be damaged or cause a fire hazard (see "Suitable
containers for microwave ovens").
~ Do not leave the microwave oven unattended when reheating or
cooking food in disposable containers made of plastic, paper or

other flammable materials.
Before using single-use containers, make sure they are suitable for
use in microwave ovens. See "Suitable containers for microwave
ovens / Plastics".
~ Heat-retaining bags usually contain a thin layer of aluminium foil
which reflects microwaves. This reflected energy can, in turn, cause

the outer paper covering to become so hot that it ignites.
Do not reheat food in the microwave oven in heat-retaining bags
intended for use in normal ovens.
~ Eggs can be cooked without their shells using microwave power

only if the yolk membrane has been punctured several times first.
The pressure could otherwise cause the egg yolk to explode.
20
CONTENTS
~ Eggs can only be cooked in their shells in the microwave oven in

a specially designed egg-boiling device available from specialist
shops. Eggs can burst, even after they have been taken out of the
oven.
Do not heat up hard-boiled eggs in the microwave oven.
~ Food with a thick skin or peel, such as tomatoes, sausages,
jacket potatoes and eggplants, should be pierced or cut in several

places to allow steam to escape and prevent the food from bursting.
~ Ovenproof earthenware can retain a considerable amount of
moisture. Earthenware and porcelain containers with hollow handles

and lid knobs must only be used in this microwave oven if they have
sufficiently large vent holes which allow the moisture to escape.
Without vent holes, pressure can build up, causing the container to
crack or shatter with the danger of injury.
~ Only use a thermometer specifically approved for food use to
measure the temperature of the food. Never use a thermometer

containing mercury or liquid, as these are not suitable for use with
very high temperatures and will break very easily.
~ Do not use a steam cleaning appliance to clean this appliance.

Pressurised steam could reach the electrical components and
21
CONTENTS

The following applies to stainless steel surfaces:
~ The coating on the stainless steel surfaces will become damaged

by adhesives and lose its protective properties against soiling. Do
not adhere stickers, adhesive tape or any other adhesive materials
to stainless steel surfaces.
~ Stainless steel scratches very easily and even magnets can

cause damage to the surface.
Accessories
~ Use only Miele Original spare parts. If spare parts or accessories

from other manufacturers are used, the warranty will be invalidated,
and Miele cannot accept liability.
~ The rack and Gourmet plate supplied with the appliance are
designed to be compatible with microwaves and can therefore be

used for grilling with or without the microwave function.
However, do not use the rack and Gourmet plate at the same time
as the Gourmet plate will be damaged. Always place the Gourmet
plate directly on the turntable.
22
CONTENTS
~ The Gourmet plate gets extremely hot when in use. Always use
oven gloves when handling it to avoid burns. Place it on a suitable

heat-resistant mat or pot rest.
The rack gets hot during grilling (with and without the microwave
function).
Take care not to burn yourself on it.
~ Do not use the cover with the Gourmet plate, as the cover will get
too hot.
~ Never place the hot glass tray (or any other hot cooking
containers) on a cold surface, such as a tiled or granite worktop.

The glass tray or container could crack or shatter, and the worktop
surface could get damaged. Use a suitable heat-resistant mat or pot
rest.
23
CONTENTS
Description of the functions

How the microwave oven
works
In a microwave oven there is a highfrequency tube called a magnetron.
This converts electrical energy into
microwaves. These microwaves are
distributed evenly throughout the oven
interior, and rebound off the metal
sides of the oven interior to reach the
food from all sides. Microwave
distribution is improved with the
turntable engaged.
In order for microwaves to reach the
food, they must be able to penetrate
the cooking container being used.
Microwaves can penetrate porcelain,
glass, cardboard and plastics, but not
metal. Do not, therefore, use dishes
made of metal, or which contain metal,
for example in the form of gold or silver
trim. The metal reflects the microwaves
and this could lead to the creation of
sparks. The microwaves cannot be
absorbed.
Food can generally be cooked

without adding much liquid or
cooking oil.
Cooking, reheating and defrosting in
a microwave oven is quicker than
using conventional methods.
Nutrients, such as vitamins and
minerals, are generally retained.
The colour, texture and taste of food
are not significantly impaired.
Microwaves stop being produced as
soon as the cooking process is
interrupted or the appliance door is
opened.
When the appliance is in operation, the
closed, sealed door prevents
microwaves escaping from the
appliance.
Microwaves pass through a suitable

container and find their way directly into
the food. All food contains moisture
molecules which, when subjected to
microwave energy, start to oscillate
approx. 2.5 billion times a second. The
friction caused by this vibration creates
heat, which first starts developing
around the outside of the food and then
slowly penetrates towards the centre.
The moisture content of food will affect
the speed at which it is cooked. The
more moisture a food contains, the
faster it will cook.
Heat is produced directly in the food.
This results in the following benefits:
24
CONTENTS
Description of functions
What can a microwave oven
do?
What functions does the

microwave oven have?
In the microwave oven, food is cooked,

reheated or defrosted quickly.
Microwave Solo mode
You can use the microwave in the

following ways:
Food can be defrosted, reheated or
cooked by entering a power level and
a time.
Deep-frozen, ready-made meals can
be defrosted and then reheated or
cooked.
The microwave oven can also be
used for other tasks, e.g. for proving
dough, melting chocolate and butter,
dissolving gelatine or for bottling
small amounts of fruit, vegetables
and meat.
This function is suitable for defrosting,

reheating and cooking.
Grill
This is ideal for grilling thin cuts of
meat, e.g. bacon.
Combination mode (Microwave +
Grill)
This function is ideal for browning
dishes with toppings. The microwave
cooks the food, and the grill browns it.
Automatic programmes
You can choose from the following
Automatic programmes:
9 defrosting programmes
(): Ad 1 to Ad 9),
4 cooking programmes for frozen
food
() 2: Ac 1
10 cooking programmes for fresh
food
(2: Ac 5 to Ac 14).
These programmes rely on the weight
of the food being entered.
The weight of the food can be shown in
either grams (g) or in pounds (lb) (see
"Changing the settings").
The appliance also has the Popcorn
Automatic programme.
25
CONTENTS
Suitable containers for microwave ovens

Microwaves
Material and shape

The material and shape of containers
used affect cooking results and times.
Heat distribution is more even in round
and oval shaped flat containers than in
rectangular containers, providing better
results.
are reflected by metal.
Containers and lids with hollow

handles or knobs in which moisture
can collect are unsuitable.
Exception: The hollow spaces have
vent holes.
Without vent holes, pressure can
build up, causing the container to
crack or shatter with the danger of
injury.
Metal
pass through glass, porcelain,

plastic and cardboard.
Metal containers, aluminium foil,

metal cutlery, and china with
metallic decoration such as gold
rims or cobalt blue must not be used
on microwave mode.
Metal reflects microwaves and
obstructs the cooking process.
Also, avoid using plastic containers
where the foil lid has not been
completely removed.
and are absorbed by food.
,Fire hazard!
Containers which are not
microwave-safe can be destroyed,
resulting in damage to the
appliance.
26
CONTENTS

Exceptions:
Glassware
Ready-meals in aluminium foil dishes
Heat-resistant glass or ceramic glass

are ideal for use in the microwave oven.
These can be defrosted and reheated

in the microwave oven, if
recommended by the manufacturer.
Important: Remove the lid and make
sure the foil dish is at least 2 cm from
the oven walls at all times. Important:
As food is only heated from the top, it is
better to remove the food from the
aluminium foil container and transfer it
to a dish suitable for a microwave oven.
The heat distribution will be more even.
Do not place aluminium foil dishes
on the grilling rack in case the dish
sparks or arcs. If sparks occur,
transfer food to a microwave-safe
container.
Pieces of aluminium foil
For even defrosting and to avoid
overcooking unevenly shaped cuts of
meat, poultry or fish, small pieces of
aluminium foil may be used to mask
wingtips or other thin parts for the last
few minutes of the programme.
Make sure that the aluminium foil is
at least 2 cm from the microwave
oven walls at all times. It must not
touch the walls.
Metal meat skewers or clamps
These should only be used if they are
very small in comparison to the size of
the cut of meat.
Crystal glass is unsuitable as it

contains lead which could cause the
glass to crack in the microwave.
Porcelain
Porcelain is a suitable material.
Do not use porcelain with gold or
silver edging or items with hollow
knobs or handles.
Earthenware
Decorated earthenware is only suitable
if the decoration is beneath an all-over
glaze.
Earthenware can get very hot, and
may crack.
Glazes and colours
Some glazes and colours contain
metals which make them unsuitable
for use in a microwave oven.
Wood
Wooden dishes are not suitable.
Moisture contained in the wood
evaporates when exposed to
microwave energy, causing the
wood to dry out and crack.
27
CONTENTS

Plastics
When purchasing plasticware, make
sure that it is suitable for use in a
microwave oven.
It must be heat-resistant to a
minimum of 110 C. Otherwise the
plastic may melt and fuse with the
food.
Special plastic containers designed for
use in microwave ovens are available
from good retail outlets.
Melamine is not suitable for use in this
microwave oven as it absorbs
microwave energy and gets hot. When
purchasing plasticware, make sure that
it is suitable for use in a microwave
oven.
Disposable containers
Only those plastic disposable
containers which are specified by the
manufacturer as suitable for use in a
microwave oven may be used.
Do not leave the microwave oven
unattended when reheating or
cooking food in disposable
containers made of plastic, paper or
other inflammable materials.
Disposable containers are not always
recyclable or biodegradable.
Disposable containers, such as trays

made from polystyrene, can only be
used for very brief warming and
reheating of food.
Plastic boiling bags can be used for
cooking and reheating. They should
be pierced beforehand so that
steam can escape. This prevents a
build-up of pressure and reduces
the risk of the bag bursting.
There are also special steaming
bags available which do not need to
be pierced. Please follow
instructions given on the packet.
Do not use metal clips, plastic clips

containing metal parts, or paper ties
containing wire. There is a danger
that they will ignite when heated.
28
CONTENTS

Testing dishes for their
suitability
If in doubt as to whether glass,
earthenware or porcelain plates or
dishes are suitable for use in a
microwave oven, a simple test can be
performed:
^ Place the item you wish to test in the
centre of the oven.
^ Close the door.
^ Turn the rotary power selector to 900
watts.
^ Enter 30 seconds with the time
selector.
^ Touch the Start sensor.
If a crackling noise is heard
accompanied by sparks during the
test, switch the appliance off immediately (touch the On/Off sensor).
Any crockery which causes this
reaction is unsuitable for use with
microwave power.
If any doubt exists about the
suitability of containers, please
contact the supplier.
This test cannot be used to check

whether items with hollow knobs or
handles are suitable for use with
microwave power.
29
CONTENTS

The cover
prevents too much steam escaping,
especially when cooking foods which
need longer to cook, such as
potatoes.
speeds up the cooking process.
prevents food from drying out.
prevents soiling in the oven interior.
,Never cook or reheat food or

liquids in sealed containers, jars or
bottles.
With baby bottles, the screw top
and teat must be loosened.
Otherwise pressure builds up which
can cause the bottle or container to
explode, posing a severe risk of
injury.
Do not use a lid or cover if
food coated with breadcrumbs is
being cooked.
cooking meals which are to be given
a crisp finish.
the Gourmet plate is being used.
Always cover food with the cover

supplied when cooking on Microwave
Solo.
Alternatively, use lids or covers made of
microwave-safe glass or plastic, or use
a clingfilm recommended for use in a
microwave oven (pierce as instructed
by the manufacturer).
Heat can cause normal clingfilm to
distort and fuse with the food.
30
,Because the cover can only

withstand temperatures of up to
110 C, it must only be used in
Microwave Solo mode.
It must not be used in conjunction
with the Gourmet plate. At
temperatures in excess of 110 C,
the plastic can melt and fuse with
the food.
The cover should not form a seal
with the container. If the cover is
used with a container which only
has a narrow diameter, there might
not be enough room for
condensation to escape through the
holes in the side. The cover could
get too hot and could start to melt.
CONTENTS

After unpacking, let the appliance
stand for approx. 2 hours at room
temperature after transporting it to
its final location before connecting it
to the mains.
During this time a temperature
equalisation occurs between the
appliance and the ambient
temperature.
This is important for the correct
electronic functioning of the appliance.
,Danger of suffocation! Children
may be able to wrap themselves in

packing material or pull it over their
heads with the risk of suffocation.
Keep children away from any
packing material.
^ Remove all the packaging materials

from the appliance.
Do not remove the cover to the

microwave outlet inside the oven
interior, nor the film covering the
inside of the door.
It is hazardous for anyone other than
a qualified and competent person to
carry out any service or repair
operation that involves the removal
of a cover which gives protection
against exposure to microwave
energy.
^ Check the appliance for any
damage.
Do not use the microwave if
the door is warped.
the door hinges are loose.
holes or cracks are visible in the
casing, the door or the oven interior
walls.
Operating the appliance with this
type of damage will result in
microwave leakage and present a
hazard to the user.
31
CONTENTS

^ Clean the inside of the microwave
oven and all the accessories with
warm water applied with a well
wrung-out soft sponge or cloth.
^ Stick the enclosed short instructions

to the frame behind the door as
illustrated, making sure they do not
block any of the vents.
32
CONTENTS
Time of day display

,The appliance must be built in
Altering the time of day
before it can be used. Otherwise it

poses an electric shock hazard.
^ Press and release both rotary
selectors if they are retracted.
Setting the time of day

^ Connect the appliance to the mains
electricity supply.
12:00 and the + symbol will flash in
the display until the current time of
day is set.
^ Touch the + sensor.

The + symbol will flash for a few
seconds in the display.
^ Change the time of day with the time
selector while the + symbol is
flashing.
^ Touch the OK sensor or + to confirm,
otherwise the display will revert back
to the previously set time.
Invisible time display
^ Turn the time selector to set the time

of day.
^ Touch the OK sensor or + to confirm.
The set time is now saved.
You can change from the 24-hour
format to the 12-hour format (see
The time display switches off and

continues to run in the background if
the appliance has not been used for
more than approx. 10 minutes. The
display appears dark.
The appliance is switched off and must
be switched on with the ON/OFF sensor
K before it can be used again.
You can change this setting if you want
the time of day always to be visible (see
33
CONTENTS
Operation
Opening the door
Closing the door
If the microwave oven is being used,

opening the door will interrupt the
cooking programme.
If the door has been opened during a

cooking process, touch the Start sensor
to resume cooking.
,Danger of injury! The maximum

load capacity for the door is 8 kg.
Children can hurt themselves on an
open door. Ensure that children do
not sit on or swing on the door.
Placing a dish in the
microwave oven
Ideally the dish should be placed in the
middle of the oven compartment.
Starting a programme
Use the appropriate selector to choose
the microwave power level and the
cooking duration.
^ Use the power selector to select a
microwave power level.
The h symbol and the power level
will light up in the display. 00:00 will
flash until the minutes are entered.
Turntable
The turntable helps the food to cook,
reheat or defrost evenly.
Do not operate the microwave
without the turntable in place.
The turntable starts turning
automatically when the appliance is
operated.
Do not cook, reheat or defrost food
directly on the turntable. Check that the
dish is not larger in size than the
turntable.
There is a choice of 7 power levels.

The higher the power level, the more
microwaves reach the food.
Turn or stir food during cooking, or turn

the dish so that it heats up evenly.
34
CONTENTS
Operation
When heating up food which cannot be
stirred or turned during cooking, as with
a plated meal, it is best to use a lower
microwave power level.
This ensures the heat is distributed
evenly. Heat for long enough to cook
the food properly.
the frequency of stirring or turning

the food.
Frequent stirring or turning heats the
food more evenly, and it is therefore
ready in a shorter time.
the amount of food.
As a general rule, allow approx. time
and a half for double the quantity.
For a smaller quantity, possibly
shorten the time but ensure food is
cooked thoroughly.
the shape and material of the
container.
^ Touch the Start sensor to start the
programme.
The interior lighting comes on.
^ Set the required time using the time

selector.
Any time between 10 seconds and 90
minutes can be selected. Exception: If
the maximum microwave power is
selected, a maximum cooking duration
of 15 minutes can be set. If you then
continue to select full power, the power
level may reduce to 600 W, and this is
shown in the display (protection against
overheating).
The time required depends on:
the initial temperature of the food.
Food taken from the refrigerator will
need longer to reheat or cook than
food already at room temperature.
the type and texture of the food.
Fresh vegetables contain more water
and cook more quickly than stored
vegetables.
A programme can only be started if the

door is closed.
"door" message
The "door" message in the display is a
reminder that the appliance should not
be used without food inside it.
Operating the appliance without
food can damage the appliance.
If the door has been closed for 20
minutes or longer when the "Start"
sensor is touched, the word door will
appear in the display to remind you to
open the door and make sure there is
food in the appliance. You cannot start
a process until you do this.
35
CONTENTS
Operation
Interrupting or restarting a
programme
At any time you can . . .
. . . interrupt a programme:
Or alternatively:
^ use the time selector to change the
duration and continue the
programme by touching Start.
Or alternatively:
^ Touch the U U sensor, or open the

appliance door.
The time stops counting down.
. . . continue a programme:
^ Close the door and touch Start.
The programme will continue.
Altering the settings

If you discover after starting a
programme that . . .
. . . the Microwave power level is too
high or too low, you can:
^ select a new level.
. . . the duration set is too short or too
long, you can:
^ interrupt the programme (touch the U U
sensor), use the time selector to set a
new time, and continue the
programme by touching Start.
36
^ touch the Start sensor during

operation to increase the cooking
time. Each touch of the sensor
increases the time by another minute.
(Exception: The time increases by 30
seconds when the microwave oven is
being used at maximum power.)
Cancelling a programme
^ Touch the U U sensor, or open the
appliance door.
The time stops counting down.
^ Touch the # sensor.
At the end of a programme

An audible tone will sound when the
cooking programme is complete. The
oven interior lighting goes out.
The audible tone is repeated several
times. After this, a short reminder tone
sounds at regular intervals for approx.
20 minutes after the end of the
programme. You can deactivate this
function (see "Changing settings").
^ If you would like to stop the audible
tone, touch the # sensor.
CONTENTS
Operation
Keep warming function
Programming durations
The keeping warm function will switch

on automatically at 80 W for a maximum
of 15 minutes approx. 2 minutes after
the end of a cooking programme which
has used at least 450 W, providing the
door remains closed and no sensors
are touched.
To alter the set durations:
h, 80 W and H:H will light up in the

display.
Opening the door or operating one of
the sensors or selectors while the
keeping warm function is in progress
cancels the function.
The keeping warm function cannot be
set as a separate function.
^ Use the "Start /c" sensor to select

the time you want to reprogramme
(touch once, twice or three times)
and hold the Start /c sensor.
^ While your finger is on the Start
sensor, alter the time with the time
selector (to max. 15 minutes).
The altered programme runs when
the Start c sensor is released.
An interruption to the power supply
will cancel any altered programmed
durations, and they will need to be
entered again.
You can deactivate this function (see

Quick start (programmable)

Touching the Start/c sensor is
sufficient to set the appliance operating
at maximum power.
Three set times are stored in the
memory:
^ 30 sec.: Touch Start /c once
^ 1 min.: Touch Start /c twice
^ 2 min.: Touch Start /c three times
Touching Start /c four times in a row
will return you to the first saved time,
etc.
The cooking duration can be increased
by touching the Start button during
operation; each time the Start button is
touched, the cooking duration is
increased by another 30 seconds.
37
CONTENTS
Operation
System lock
The system lock prevents the appliance
being used by children, for example.
Activating the system lock
After a few seconds, the display

changes to the time of day and the 0
symbol.
Almost all functions are now locked.
Only the minute minder can be used
when the system lock is activated (see
"Minute minder").
After an interruption to the mains
power supply, the system lock will
need to reactivated.
^ Touch the X sensor. 0 and P light

up in the display, and the X symbol
flashes.
Deactivating the system lock

^ If you would like to deactivate the
system lock, touch and hold the OK
sensor for a few seconds until an
audible tone sounds.
The 0 symbol will disappear.
^ Turn the rotary selector until S 0

appears in the display.
S 0 and X light up in the display and
0 flashes.
^ Confirm with OK.
S 0 lights up in the display and 0
flashes.
^ Turn the rotary until S I appears in
the display.
S I lights up in the display and 0
flashes.
^ Confirm with OK.
X and S I light up in the display, and
0 flashes.
38
CONTENTS
Operation
Minute minder
The minute minder can be used to time
any activity in the kitchen, e.g. boiling
eggs. The time set counts down in onesecond steps.
^ Use the time selector to alter the

time.
^ Touch Start/c to continue the minute
minder.
Minute minder + cooking process
The minute minder can be used at the
same time as a cooking process, and
counts down in the background.
^ Touch the N.
sensor. 00:00 flashes in the display
and the N symbol lights up.
^ Use the time selector to set the
minute minder time you require.
^ Touch the Start sensor to start the
minute.
The minute minder will also start on
its own after a few seconds if the
Start sensor is not touched.
^ At the end of the minute minder time,
an audible tone sounds, 0:00
appears and the N symbol flashes.
^ Touch the # sensor once. The N
symbol will disappear and the time of
day reappears.
Otherwise, the audible tone will repeat
several times before the time begins to
count upwards in seconds. This
enables you to see how long ago the
minute minder time elapsed.
Altering a minute minder entry
^ Touch the N sensor during the

cooking process.
00:00 flashes in the display and the
N symbol lights up.
^ Use the time selector to set the
minute minder time you require.
^ After a few seconds, the minute
minder time set will begin to count
down.
A few seconds later, the display will
change again to show the cooking
duration counting down. The minute
minder time counting down in the
background is represented by the N
symbol in the display.
The Start sensor is not used in this
instance to start the minute minder, as
touching the Start sensor would also
increase the cooking duration by a
minute.
Requesting the minute minder time
remaining
^ Touch the N button.
The minute minder time still
remaining will appear in the display.
^ Touch the U U sensor.

The current minute minder is
stopped.
39
CONTENTS
Operation - Grilling
The grill can be used on 4 settings: by
itself, and in combination with the
Microwave function at one of three
different power levels.
The container/glass tray and grill rack

will be easier to clean if washed in
soapy water immediately after grilling.
If the total grilling time required is less

than 15 minutes, the grill should be preheated for approx. 5 minutes before
placing food under it.
Grilling without the Microwave

function
This function is ideal for grilling thin
cuts of meat, e.g. steak or sausages.
Thin, flat cuts of fish and meat should

usually be turned halfway through
grilling for even results. Larger, thicker
pieces should be turned several times.
Grilling times depend on the type and
thickness of the food, and on the user's
preference for a rare or well-cooked
result.
When grilling directly on the rack, a
heat-resistant, microwave-safe dish
should be placed underneath the rack
to catch any fat or juices.
Useful tip: The glass tray is very
suitable for this. It can be ordered as an
optional accessory from Miele.
The Gourmet plate supplied is not
suitable for catching dripping fat.
Because it is empty, it will overheat
and the surface coating may be
damaged.
^ Turn the power selector to the Y

symbol.
The grill symbol Y will light up in the
display and 00:00:00 will flash.
^ Select a cooking duration using the
time selector.
An audible tone will sound at the end
of the process.
^ Place the food in a suitable container.

^ Place the rack and a heat-resistant,
microwave-safe dish/glass tray or the
container with the food on the
turntable.
,The rack and container/glass

tray become hot during use.
Danger of burning!
40
CONTENTS
Operation - Grilling
Changing the duration
The cooking duration can be changed
during operation. To do this, interrupt
the cooking process by touching the U U
sensor, and change the duration.
Continue the cooking process by
touching the Start sensor.
The cooking duration can also be
extended during operation by pressing
the Start sensor once for each minute
you wish to extend the cooking duration
by.
The area on the ceiling around the grill
becomes discoloured over time. This is
an unavoidable consequence of use,
and does not impair the function of the
appliance in any way.
Combination mode Microwave + Grill

This function is ideal for baking and
browning. The microwave cooks the
food, and the grill browns it.
The grill can be combined with one of
three different microwave power levels:
150, 300 and 450 W.
It is possible during the cooking
process to switch between the different
power levels without interrupting the
programme.
^ Use the power level selector to select

the required combination v, w or
x.
h, the microwave power level and
the grill symbol Y will light up in the
display. 0:00 will flash.
^ Select a cooking duration using the
time selector.
An audible tone will sound at the end
of the process.
Changing the duration
The cooking duration entered can be
changed during operation if required.
Interrupt the process by touching the U U
sensor. Then change the duration. To
continue, touch the Start sensor.
The cooking duration can also be
extended during operation by touching
the Start sensor once for each minute
you wish to extend the cooking duration
by.
41
CONTENTS
Gourmet plate
Use
The Gourmet plate gets extremely
hot when in use. Always use oven
gloves when handling it to avoid
burns. Place it on a suitable heatresistant mat or pot rest.
Do not place it on the rack. Make

sure there is a gap of approx. 2 cm
between the Gourmet plate and the
interior walls of the appliance,
otherwise sparking could occur and
damage the Gourmet plate and the
oven interior.

Before using the Gourmet plate for the
first time, fill it with 400 ml water and
add 30-40 ml vinegar or lemon juice.
Heat for 5 minutes on 450 W + Grill x.
The Gourmet plate has an easy-toclean anti-stick coating so that food
can be removed easily. The coating
is susceptible to cuts and scratches.
Therefore do not cut food up directly
on the plate.
Use wooden or plastic utensils to
mix or turn food. Metallic or sharp
objects can damage the coating.
Searing / Browning food
Because food does not stick to the antistick coating, only very little fat or oil is
necessary when cooking with this dish.
Never leave the Gourmet plate
unattended when cooking with oil or
fats as these are a fire hazard if
allowed to overheat.
^ Heat up the plate on 450 W + Grill

x for approx. 5 minutes.
Do not overheat the empty Gourmet
plate, otherwise the coating could
be damaged. Do not place the plate
under the rack to catch dripping fat
when grilling.
If using oil, you can either heat up the
oil on the Gourmet plate, or you can
heat the oil separately and then add it
to the plate.
Butter, however, should always be
added to the Gourmet plate after
heating up. It has a lower burning point
than oil and would get too dark or burn
if added too soon.
Always dry meat, poultry, fish and
vegetables thoroughly before placing
them on the Gourmet plate.
Do not use the Gourmet plate to
cook eggs or reheat cooked eggs.
The eggs may explode.
^ When using the Gourmet plate, make

sure that the food is ready to transfer
to the Gourmet plate as soon as it
has heated up.
^ Place the Gourmet plate directly on
the turntable.
42
CONTENTS
Gourmet plate
Some suggested uses
Pre-heat the Gourmet plate directly on
the turntable for max. 5 minutes at 450
W + Grill x.
Fish fingers (frozen), 150 g + 1 tbsp. oil
x, min. 3 4 minutes each side.
Hamburgers, 2 burgers + 1 tbsp. oil
x, min. 3 4 minutes each side.
Croquette potatoes (frozen), 10 12 +
1 tbsp. oil
x, min. 6 8 minutes, turning halfway
through.
Fillet steak, approx. 200 g
v, min. 5 minutes each side
(according to taste).
Pizza (frozen), 300 g,
x, min. 7 9 minutes.
Pizza (fresh), without pre-heating
x, approx. 15 minutes (depending on
topping).
Recipes
Croque monsieur
(Serves 3)
Preparation time: 10 15 minutes
6 slices of bread
30 g soft butter
75 g grated Emmental cheese
3 slices of cooked ham
Butter the bread. Add the cheese to
three of the bread slices in equal
amounts and arrange a slice of ham on
top of each. Place the remaining three
slices of bread on top of the ham with
the buttered side face down. Pre-heat
the Gourmet plate for 5 minutes at 450
W + Grill. Remove from the microwave
oven, then place the bread on the
Gourmet plate. Now place the Gourmet
plate on the turntable, and brown for
approx. 3 minutes per side at 450 W +
Grill.
Other fillings could include tuna, finely
sliced onion rings, pineapple, cheese
and ham.
The preparation times given refer to the

total time required for preparing and
cooking. Standing times and times for
marinating food are given separately.
43
CONTENTS
Gourmet plate
Vegetable stir fry
(Serves 3)
Home-made potato rsti

(Serves 2)
2 onions
1 tbsp. oil
100 g mushrooms, cleaned
150 g baby carrots or carrot slices
100 g broccoli florets
1 red capsicum or 100 g capsicum
strips
1 tomato
Salt, pepper
30 g grated Parmesan cheese
400 g peeled potatoes

2 small onions
50 g grated Emmental cheese
Salt, pepper
20 g butter
Slice the onions into fine rings. Halve,

quarter and deseed the capsicum, and
then cut into strips. Dice the tomato.
Place the Gourmet plate on the
turntable, and pre-heat for approx.
5 minutes at 450 W + Grill. Place the oil
and the onions on the Gourmet plate.
Place the plate on the turntable and
brown the onions for approx 2 minutes
at 450 W + Grill. Add the mushrooms,
carrots, broccoli, capsicum strips,
diced tomato and seasoning. Mix well.
Cook for 6 minutes at 450 W + Grill.
Turn out and sprinkle with Parmesan
cheese before serving.
44
Coarsely grate the potato and onion,

and mix together with the cheese, salt
and pepper. Place the Gourmet plate
on the turntable, and pre-heat for
approx. 5 minutes at 450 W + Grill. Add
the butter and melt. Remove from the
oven, add the potato mixture and press
it into the Gourmet plate. Place the
Gourmet plate back on the turntable,
and cook for approx 8 minutes at
450 W + Grill. Turn over, and cook for a
further 4 minutes until golden.
Garnish with smoked salmon or strips
of ham and sour cream.
CONTENTS
Gourmet plate
Pork fillets
(Serves 2)
Curry chicken
(Serves 3)
1 pork fillet (approx. 400 g)

4 rashers streaky bacon
Salt, pepper
10 g butter
200 g sliced mushrooms
200 ml double cream
1 tbsp. brandy
600 g chicken or turkey breasts

1 tbsp. oil
1 tbsp. white wine
1 tbsp. apple juice
1/2 tbsp. lemon juice
Salt, freshly ground black pepper
1 tsp. curry powder
A pinch of finely chopped rosemary
A pinch of ground ginger
A pinch of cayenne pepper
1
/2 tsp. Tabasco sauce
20 g butter
Cut the pork into 4 slices. Season each

slice with salt and pepper, and wrap in
a rasher of streaky bacon. Place the
Gourmet plate on the turntable, and
pre-heat for approx. 5 minutes at 450 W
+ Grill. Add the butter to the plate, and
place the pork slices on top. Now place
the Gourmet plate on the turntable, and
brown for approx. 3 minutes per side at
450 W + Grill. Transfer the meat to a
serving dish, cover and keep warm.
Add the mushrooms, cream and
brandy to the juices from the meat.
Lightly cook for approx. 4 minutes at
900 W. Serve with the meat.
Pork fillet in a Roquefort sauce
Cut the pork into 4 slices. Cook each
side for approx. 4 minutes in the preheated Gourmet plate at 450 W + Grill.
Add 50 ml white wine, 125 ml cream, 2
tbsp. roux (made from 1 tbsp. each of
flour and melted butter) and 150 g
Roquefort cheese, or another blue
cheese. Stir the sauce until smooth,
and cook for a further 3 minutes.
Dice the meat into 2 x 2 cm pieces.

Combine the rest of the ingredients
apart from the butter, mix together well,
and sprinkle over the meat. Turn the
meat so it is well coated with the herbs
and spices, and leave to stand for
approx. 30 minutes. Place the Gourmet
plate on the turntable, and pre-heat for
approx. 5 minutes at 450 W + Grill.
Remove from the microwave oven, melt
the butter in the heated plate, then add
the meat. Place the plate back on the
turntable, and cook for approx. 4
minutes at 450 W + Grill. Turn the meat,
and cook for a further 4 minutes on the
same setting. Drain surplus liquid from
the meat if necessary so that it browns
well.
45
CONTENTS
Gourmet plate
Fisherman's salmon
(Serves 2)
Zubereitungszeit: 5 10 Minuten
2 pieces of salmon fillet (each 150 g)
1/2 tbsp. lemon juice
Salt, white pepper
Drizzle the salmon with the lemon juice,
and leave to stand for approx. 10
minutes. Place the Gourmet plate on
the turntable, and pre-heat for approx.
5 minutes at 450 W + Grill. Remove
from the oven, pat the fish dry with
kitchen paper, and place on the
Gourmet plate, pressing down on it
slightly. Place the Gourmet plate back
on the turntable, and cook for approx.
11/2 2 minutes per side at 450 W +
Grill.
Serve with rice, hollandaise sauce or
melted butter and a fresh green salad.
46
CONTENTS
Gourmet plate
Pineapple cake
Quick almond tart
For the cake:

2 eggs
80 g sugar
11/2 ripe bananas
30 g chocolate chips
100 g plain flour
3
/4 tsp. baking powder
For the pastry:

100 g plain flour
1
/2 level tsp. baking powder
75 g butter or margarine
30 g sugar
Topping:
1 tin pineapple chunks
(drained weight 240 g)
1 tbsp. brown sugar
1 tbsp. desiccated coconut
Beat together the eggs and sugar until
frothy. Mash the bananas with a fork,
and add to the egg mixture. Sift
together the flour and the baking
powder, stir in the chocolate chips, and
fold into the mixture. Spread the mixture
on the Gourmet plate. Scatter the
drained pineapple over the mixture,
and sprinkle over the sugar and
desiccated coconut. Place the Gourmet
plate on the turntable. Bake the cake
for approx. 10 minutes at 450 W + Grill
until golden. Cut into 8 slices.
Filling:
75 g butter
100 g chopped almonds
A few drops of almond essence
30 g sugar
4 g vanilla sugar
75 ml cream
To spread over the top:
50 g apricot jam
Mix together the flour, baking powder,
butter and sugar, and knead to a
smooth dough. Roll out the mixture on
the Gourmet plate, and build up the
edges to 1 cm. Place the Gourmet plate
on the turntable, and bake the base for
approx. 4 minutes at 450 W + Grill. For
the filling, melt the butter in a pan on
the cooktop, stir in the rest of the
ingredients and simmer for approx. 5
minutes. Whilst still hot, spoon the
mixture into the base. Place the
Gourmet plate on the turntable, and
bake the tart for approx. 5 minutes at
450 W + Grill until golden. When cool,
spread with apricot jam. Cut into 8
slices.
47
CONTENTS
Operation - Automatic programmes

All of the Automatic programmes are
weight dependent.
when the signal sounds at halfway

through defrosting.
The weight of the food can be shown in

either grams (g) or in pounds (lb) (see
Automatic cooking
After selecting a programme, enter the

weight of the food. The appliance
automatically calculates the duration
according to the weight given.
After cooking, allow the food to stand at
room temperature for the suggested
number of minutes ("standing time") to
allow the heat to be distributed evenly
throughout the food.
Automatic defrosting )
There are 4 programmes for frozen

food and 10 programmes for fresh
food. The standing time for each of
these programmes is approx. 2
minutes.
,Only use the cover supplied with

the microwave on Microwave Solo
mode.
Never use a cover when the grill is
switched on. You can recognise this
by the grill symbol Y in the display
with the selection of programmes
(Ac 3, 4, 8, 9, 10, 11, 13 and 14).
The plastic can otherwise melt and
fuse with the food.Never use a cover
when the grill is switched on
There are 9 programmes for defrosting

different types of food. The standing
time for programme Ad 5 is up to 30
minutes, depending on the weight, and
approx. 10 minutes for the remaining
programmes.
Cooking frozen food ) 2
Ad 1 Steak, chops (0.2 1.0 kg)
Ac 1 #
Ad 2 % Roast (0.2 2.0 kg)
Ac 2 Ready meals which can be

stirred (0.3 1.0 kg)
Ad 3 Mince (0.2 1.5 kg)

Ad 4 Chicken thighs
(0.2 1.5 kg)
Ad 5 Chicken (0.8 4.0 kg)
Vegetables (0.05 2.0 kg)
Ac 3 Bakes and gratins

(0.2 1.2 kg)
Ac 4 Chips (0.2 0.75 kg)
Ad 6 Fish fillet (0.5 1.5 kg)
Cooking fresh food 2
Ad 7 $ Fish, whole (0.15 1.5 kg)
Ac 5 #
Vegetables (0.05 2.0 kg)
Ad 8
Ac 6
Potatoes (0.1 1.5 kg)
Ac 7
Rice (0.05 0.5 kg)
Cakes (0.1 1.4 kg)
Ad 9 Bread (0.1 1.5 kg)

This programme is best used for sliced
breads. If possible, place single slices
in the appliance, or separate the slices
48
Ac 8 Bakes and gratins

(0.25 2.0 kg)
Ac 9 Kebabs (0.2 1.6 kg)
CONTENTS

Ac 10 Chicken thighs
(0.2 1.5 kg)
Ac 11 Chicken (small, whole)
(0.8 1.8 kg)
Ac 12 Fish fillet in sauce
(0.4 2.0 kg)
Ac 13 Fish bake (0.25 1.5 kg)
Ac 14 $ Fish, whole (0.15 1.5 kg)
^ Touch OK.
Either g or lb will flash in the display to
request the weight to be entered, and
the symbols for the functions (h for
Microwave and n for Grill), as well as )
and/or 2 will light up depending on the
group to which the Automatic
programme belongs.
The minimum weight of the required
Automatic programme also lights up.
^ Change the weight with the rotary
selector.
^ Touch OK.
The duration based on the weight
entered appears in the display and the
Start symbol flashes.
^ Turn the power level selector to c.

The symbols for the first selectable
Automatic programme appear in the
display: The symbol for microwave
power level h and Ad: I light up and
the Defrost symbol ) flashes.
The duration will begin to count down,

and the symbols for the functions that
are currently in use will light up (h and/
or n), as well as ) and/or 2.
An audible tone will sound halfway
through the cooking time.
^ Interrupt the programme to turn or stir
the food, and then continue the
programme.
The programmed duration can, if
necessary, be extended by a few
minutes during operation by pressing
the Start sensor repeatedly until the time
required appears in the display. On all
programmes it is only possible to extend
the duration by a few minutes.
^ Turn the rotary selector until the

required Automatic programme
appears in the display: for example,
Ac II for chicken .
An audible tone will sound when the

cooking programme is complete.
The interior lighting will go out.
49
CONTENTS

Popcorn
This Automatic programme is suitable
for making microwave popcorn.
Microwave popcorn is available in
stores in a variety of weights. This
programme is intended for a net weight
of approx. 100 g. With weights other
than 100 g, the time parameters for this
programme can be altered in certain
intervals (see "Changing the settings").
The time parameters for a programme
in use, however, cannot be altered.
The programme is not suitable for
making popcorn with natural
popping corn or maize kernels.
Use only specially labelled
microwave popcorn in a sealed bag
with this Automatic programme.
^ Place the bag on the turntable
according to the instructions on the
packaging.
^ Touch .
The programme will start after a few
seconds. It starts immediately if the
Start sensor is pressed.
After a short time, the popping of the
corn will be audible.
^ Stop the programme before the end if
the popping noises become
infrequent. Take note of the
The bag will be very hot.
Therefore, exercise caution when
removing it from the microwave
oven.
Ensure the bag is able to expand

unhindered in the microwave oven.
If it touches the walls and gets
caught on them, a build-up of heat
may occur.
50
CONTENTS
Recipes - Automatic programmes 2

Below are some recipe suggestions for
the Automatic programmes using the
"Cooking fresh food function 2". These
can be adapted to suit your
requirements.
It is important to follow the weight
guidelines for the programme
concerned. If the weight guidelines
are exceeded, the food will not cook
sufficiently.
Ac 5 # Vegetables
Place the prepared vegetables in a
container. Depending on the freshness
and moisture content of the vegetables,
add 30-40 ml water and a little salt or
seasoning. Enter the weight including
that of the water, place the covered
cooking container on the turntable and
cook. Halfway through the cooking
duration, an audible tone will sound to
prompt you to turn or stir the food.
When cooking vegetables in a sauce,
the weight entered must include the
sauce. Do not exceed the maximum
weight guidelines.
Carrots in a chervil cream sauce

(Serves 2)
350 g carrots, washed and peeled
5 g butter
50 ml vegetable stock (instant)
75 g crme frache
1/2 tbsp. white wine
Salt and pepper
A pinch of sugar
tsp. mustard
1 tbsp. fresh chervil, chopped, or
1/2 tbsp. dried chervil, chopped
Approx. 1/2 tbsp. cornflour
Cut the carrots into fine batons or slices
(approx. 3 4 mm thick) and place in a
cooking container.
Combine the rest of the ingredients to
make a smooth sauce, and pour over
the carrots.
Cover and cook. Stir when the audible
tone sounds halfway through the
cooking duration.
Setting: Cooking fresh food Ac 5 1
Weight: 525 g
Place cooking container on the
turntable.
51
CONTENTS

Ac 6 Potatoes
This programme can be used to cook
new potatoes, boiled potatoes and
bouillon potatoes. Enter the weight for
the potatoes and the cooking liquid.
For new potatoes, wash and drain the
potatoes and place them in a cooking
container. Season with a little salt,
cover and cook.
When cooking new potatoes, add
approx. 1/2 tbsp. water per potato. If
cooking the potatoes in their skins,
pierce the skins several times with a
fork or skewer before cooking, then
cover the container and cook.
Setting: Cooking fresh food Ac 6

Weight: 1000 g
turntable.
Ac 7 Rice
This programme can be used to cook
rice in the microwave oven. Enter the
dry weight of the rice.
Pour boiling water over the rice in a
ratio of 1 part rice to 2 parts water.
Cook the rice uncovered.
Golden curried potatoes

(Serves 3)
500 g peeled potatoes
1 onion, finely diced
10 g butter
1 tbsp. curry powder
50 ml cream
125 g peas (frozen)
Salt and pepper
Cut the potatoes into large cubes
(approx. 3 x 3 cm), or use small
potatoes.
Place all of the ingredients into a
suitable container and mix well.
Cover and cook. Stir when the audible
tone sounds halfway through the
cooking duration, then continue
cooking.
52
CONTENTS

Ac 8 Gratins/Bakes
Vegetable gratin
(Serves 4)
Preparation time: approx. 40 minutes
400 g cauliflower or broccoli
400 g carrots
For the cheese sauce:
20 g margarine
20 g plain flour
200 ml milk
100 g Emmental cheese, diced
50 g Gouda cheese, grated
Salt, pepper and ground nutmeg
1/2 tbsp. chopped parsley
Cut the cauliflower or broccoli into small
rosettes, and finely slice the carrots
(3 mm thick). Place the vegetables in a
baking dish (approx. 24 cm in
diameter), and mix well.
Melt the margarine in a pan on the
cooktop, stir in the flour and then add
the stock and milk whilst continuing to
stir. Stir in the Emmental cheese, and
simmer until the cheese has melted.
Season generously with salt, pepper
and nutmeg, and stir in the parsley.
Pour the sauce over the vegetables,
sprinkle with Gouda and bake
uncovered.
Potato cheese gratin

(Serves 4)
500 g potatoes, peeled
250 ml cream
125 g crme frache
150 g Gouda, grated
1 clove of garlic
Salt, black pepper, nutmeg
Butter
Slice the potatoes finely, mix with
approx. 2/3 of the cheese, and place in
the base of a baking dish (approx. 24
cm in diameter) which has been
greased and rubbed with the garlic.
Mix together the cream and crme
frache, season with salt, pepper and
nutmeg and pour over the potato and
cheese mixture. Sprinkle with the rest of
the cheese and bake uncovered.
Weight: 1050 g
turntable.

Weight: 1500 g
turntable.
53
CONTENTS

Ac 9 Kebabs
Pork kebabs
(8 skewers)
+ 1 hour resting time
1 pork filet, approx. 300 g
1 red capsicum
2 onions
For the marinade:
4 tbsp. oil
Pepper, salt, sweet paprika and chilli
powder
8 wooden skewers
Cut the pork fillet into 16 cubes. Wash
the capsicum and cut into bite-sized
pieces. Peel the onion and cut into
eighths.
Arrange the meat, capsicum and
onions alternately on the skewers.
Mix together the ingredients for the
marinade, and brush onto the kebabs.
Set aside for 1 hour.
Put the kebabs on the grilling rack, and
place on the glass tray in the
microwave oven. Turn halfway through
grilling when the audible tone sounds.
Weight: 100 g per kebab
Place the grilling rack supporting the
food on the glass tray on the turntable.
54
Chicken kebabs
(8 skewers)
+ 1 hour resting time
4 chicken breasts, each approx. 120 g
4 pineapple rings (tinned)
16 apricot halves (tinned)
For the marinade:
2 tbsp. vegetable oil
2 tbsp. sesame oil
Salt and pepper
tsp. paprika
tsp. curry powder
A little chilli powder
Optional: ground ginger or ground
coriander
8 wooden skewers
Cut each chicken breast into 4 pieces.
Cut the pineapple slices into quarters.
Drain the apricots well.
Mix together all of the ingredients for
the marinade.
Arrange the chicken pieces, pineapple
and apricots alternately on the wooden
skewers, brush with the marinade and
set aside for 1 hour.
Put the kebabs on the grilling rack, and
place on the glass tray in the
microwave oven. Turn halfway through
cooking when the audible tone sounds.
Weight: 100 g per kebab
CONTENTS

Ac 10 Chicken drumsticks
Brush the drumsticks with melted butter
or oil, and season. Place the drumsticks
on the grilling rack, and place on the
glass tray in the microwave oven.
Halfway through cooking, when an
audible tone sounds, turn the
drumsticks over and continue to cook.
Ac 11 Chicken
Cut the chicken in half. Brush with
melted butter or oil, and season.
Arrange the two halves with the cut side
uppermost on the grilling rack on top of
the glass tray, and place in the
microwave oven. Halfway through
cooking, when an audible tone sounds,
turn the chicken over and continue to
cook.
For programmes Ac 9 and Ac 10
For a good colour and flavour when
grilling chicken, sprinkle with a mixture
of paprika and curry powder.
Ac 12 Fish fillet in sauce

Fish curry
(Serves 4)
300 g pineapple pieces (tinned)
1 red capsicum
1 small banana
500 g perch or rosefish fillets
1 1/2 tbsp. lemon juice
30 g butter
100 ml white wine
100 ml pineapple juice
Salt, sugar and chilli powder
1 tbsp. cornflour
Dice the fish and place in a suitable
container. Drizzle with lemon juice.
Quarter the capsicum, remove the
seeds and pith, and cut into narrow
strips. Peel and slice the banana. Add
to the fish along with the capsicum and
pineapple pieces, and mix well. Add
the butter.
Mix together the wine, juice, seasoning
and cornflour to make a smooth sauce,
and pour over the fish. Mix everything
thoroughly, then cover and cook.
Weight: 1200 g
turntable.
55
CONTENTS

Ac 13 Fish bake
Crispy fish pie
(Serves 2)
400 g perch or rosefish fillets
1 1/2 tbsp. lemon juice
Salt and white pepper
50 g butter
2 tsp. mustard
1 onion, finely diced
20 g golden breadcrumbs
1 tbsp. freshly chopped dill
Drizzle the fish fillet with the lemon
juice, and leave to stand for approx. 10
minutes. Grease a shallow baking dish
with a little butter.
Pat the fish dry, season with salt and
pepper and arrange in the dish.
Melt the butter for 40 50 seconds at
450 W, then mix well with the mustard,
onion, Gouda, breadcrumbs and dill.
Spread over the fish. Cook until golden.
Perch and tomato gratin

(Serves 4)
500 g perch or rosefish fillet
1 tbsp. lemon juice
500 g tomatoes
Herb salt
2 tsp. oregano, finely chopped
Cut the perch into pieces, drizzle with
lemon juice and leave to stand for
approx. 10 minutes.
Dice the tomatoes, and place in a
baking dish with the fish and half of the
cheese.
Season generously with herb salt and
oregano, and mix well.
Sprinkle with the rest of the cheese and
bake uncovered.
Weight: approx. 1150 g
turntable.

Weight: approx. 600 g
turntable.
56
CONTENTS

Ac 14 $
Fish
Grilled trout
(Serves 4)
4 trout, 250 g each
2 4 tbsp. chopped parsely
Salt, pepper, lemon juice
Butter
Clean the trout, season inside and out
and fill with herbs.
Place the trout on the lightly oiled
grilling rack, spread with soft butter,
and place in the microwave oven on the
glass tray.
Setting: Cooking fresh food Ac 14 $
Weight: 1000 g
57
CONTENTS
Saving a favourite programme (memory)

One favourite programme can be
saved in memory. This programme can
be used for your most frequently
cooked recipe. The programme can
have up to 3 stages (e.g.: 1 minute at
600 W, followed by 2 minutes on Grill,
and finally 3 minutes at 150 W + Grill).
Programming
(The example given is for a 3-stage
programme)
^ Touch OK.
^ Then select the second function and
duration.
^ Confirm with OK.
^ Then select the third function and
duration. Touch OK.
^ When you have finished
programming, turn the power
selector to the 12 o'clock position.
^ Turn the power level selector to the

12 o'clock position.
Afterwards you can use the rotary

control on the right to scroll through
your entries and check them.
^ Start the programme to save the
entries. Only ever run the entire
programme with food in the
appliance.
^ Touch M.
The number 1 will flash in the display.
^ Select the function and duration for
the next stage.
If there is no food in the appliance,

touch the U U sensor as soon as you
have started the programme so that
the appliance is not damaged by
having no food in it.
1 and 2-stage programmes can be
saved in the same way: the
programming process is finished when
the programme selector is in the 12
o'clock position and the Start sensor
has been pressed.
58
CONTENTS
Saving a favourite programme (memory)

Calling up your favourite programme
^ Touch M.
^ Turn the rotary selector on the right to
check the individual programme
stages.
In the event of a power cut, the
favourite programme is no longer
saved and must be re-entered.
Changing an entry
Entering a new programme overrides
the previously saved programme.
^ Touch M.
The first programme stage is visible
in the display.
^ Touch OK to change the first stage.
The number 1 will flash in the display.
^ Enter the new programme sequence
as previously described.
59
CONTENTS
Changing the settings

You can change the standard default
settings by altering the "status" of the
setting.
Please consult the chart for the different
options.
The factory default settings are marked
with a star* in the chart.
To change the settings, proceed as
follows:
^ Turn the time selector if you wish to

change the status (see chart), and
confirm your entry by touching OK
(for P 8 and P 0, touch and hold OK
for approx. 4 seconds).
The change to the setting is then stored
in memory. P will appear in the display
again together with the number for the
setting.
The other settings can be changed in
the same way.
If you do not want to change a setting
and want to switch to another setting,
touch #.
^ Touch X.
X flashes in the display and P and 0
light up.
^ If you want to change further settings,

touch X.
The altered settings are retained

after a power cut.
If you wait a while before the making
the next entry, the time of day will
appear in the display. If this happens,
repeat the entries.
^ Touch OK.
P I appears in the display.
^ Use the time selector to select the
setting that you wish to change (P I
to P 11 and P 0). Turn it until the
setting required appears in the
display.
^ Touch OK to select the setting.
The current status will appear in the
display, e.g. S 1.
60
CONTENTS

Setting
Settings available (* factory default)
P I
S 0 *
Time of day
display
S I
The time of day disappears and continues to

run in the background if the appliance has
not been used for some time. The appliance
is switched off and must be switched on
before using.
The time of day is switched on and remains
visible. The appliance is ready to use.
P 2 Audible
tones
S 0
S I
to
S 7,
S 4 *
The audible tones are switched off.

The audible tones are switched on. You can
change the volume. When you select a
status, the corresponding audible tone will
sound simultaneously.
P 3 Keypad tones
S 0
S I *
The keypad tones are switched off.

The keypad tones are switched on.
P 4 Time of day
24 h *
12 h
24-hour format is activated.

12-hour format is activated.
P 5 Reminder tone
S 0
S I *
The reminder tone is deactivated.

The reminder tone sounds every 5 minutes
for a while after the end of a programme.
P 6 Unit of weight
S I *
S 2
The weight of food is displayed in grams (g).

The weight of food is displayed in pounds
(lb).
P 7 Display brightness S I
to
S 7,
S 4 *
You can set different levels of brightness.

When you select a status, the corresponding
level of brightness appears immediately.
P 8 Demo mode
S 0 *
(for showroom use S I
only)
Demo mode is deactivated.

Demo mode is activated. When a sensor or
selector is operated, MES_ appears briefly in
the display. The appliance can be operated,
but the microwave function and the grill are
inactive.
P 9 Keeping warm
function
The keeping warm function is deactivated.

The keeping warm function is activated.
S 0
S I *
61
CONTENTS

P I0 "door" message
S 0
S I *
The "door" message does not appear.

The "door" message appears if the door has
not been opened for approx. 20 minutes.
Start is blocked, as it is assumed that there is
no food in the appliance.
P II Popcorn
02:30
02:40
02:50
The maximum duration for this programme

can be altered between these limits.
03:20 *
03:50
P 0 Factory default
settings
62
S O
S I *
Factory default settings have been changed.

Factory default settings have been restored,
or have not been changed.
CONTENTS
Reheating
Select the following microwave power
levels to reheat food:
Drinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900 W
Food . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600 W
Food for babies and toddlers . . . 450 W
,We do not recommend heating
or reheating food or drinks for

babies or young children in the
microwave oven. Any decision to do
this is the responsibility of the user,
and should only be done with the
utmost care. Pasteurised or
sterilised cooked food should be
gently heated for 1/2 to 1 minute at
450 W, and tasted to make sure it is
not too hot for a baby's palate
before serving. When reheating
other food or drink, heat to a high
temperature and allow to cool to a
suitable heat for eating. For formula
milk, follow the manufacturer's
instructions.
Tips on reheating
Always use a lid or cover for reheating
food, except when a drier finish is
needed, e.g. breaded poultry/meat.
,Always remove the lids from

jars, especially jars of baby food.
Remove the screw cap with the
rubber teat before warming baby
bottles.
To avoid a boiling delay and liquids
boiling over suddenly and
explosively, ensure liquids are
stirred before heating.
After heating, always wait a
minimum of 20 seconds before
removing the container from the
oven. You can also place a suitable
glass rod or utensil into the cup or
glass when heating liquids.
Never reheat hard boiled eggs in a
microwave oven, even without the
shell. The eggs may burst.
Food taken straight from the refrigerator
takes longer to reheat than food which
has been kept at room temperature.
The time required depends on the
nature of the food, its initial temperature
and the amount to be reheated.
Always ensure that food is
sufficiently reheated.
If in any doubt that a sufficiently high
temperature has been reached,
continue reheating for a little longer.
63
CONTENTS
Reheating
Stir or turn food from time to time during
reheating. Stir the food from the outside
towards the middle, as food heats more
quickly from the outside.
After reheating
,Be careful when removing a dish

from the oven. It may be hot.
Although heat is not normally produced
in the container itself by the
microwaves (apart from stoneware),
heat transfer from the food to the
container may be considerable, making
the container itself hot.
Allow food to stand for a few minutes at
room temperature at the end of a
reheating process to enable the heat to
spread evenly throughout the food.
,After reheating food, especially

food for babies and small children,
stir the food or shake the container
and check that the temperature
does not pose any danger. Double
check after it has been left to stand.
64
CONTENTS
Cooking
Place the food in a microwave-proof
dish and cover it.
When cooking, it is a good idea to
select a power level of 900 W to start
with and then when the food is hot,
reduce the power level to 450 W for
more gentle continued cooking.
For dishes such as rice or semolina
pudding, first select a power level of
900 W, and then reduce it to 150 W for
simmering.
Tips on cooking
Vegetable cooking times depend on
the composition of the vegetable.
Fresh vegetables contain more water
than vegetables which have been
stored, and usually cook more quickly.
Add a little water to vegetables which
have been kept stored.
Food taken straight from the refrigerator
takes longer to cook than food which
has been kept at room temperature.
Stir or turn food from time to time during
cooking to help it cook more evenly.
Ensure that food such as meat and
fish which can spoil easily is
thoroughly cooked for an
appropriate length of time.
Food with a thick skin or peel, such

as tomatoes, sausages, jacket potatoes
and eggplants, should be pierced or
the skin cut in several places before
cooking to allow steam to escape and
to prevent the food from bursting.
Eggs can only be cooked in their
shells in the microwave oven in a
specially designed egg-boiling
device available from specialist
shops.
Eggs can burst, even after they
have been taken out of the oven.
Eggs can be cooked without their shells
in the microwave oven only if the yolk
membrane has been punctured several
times first.
The pressure could otherwise cause
the egg yolk to explode.
After cooking
Be careful when removing a dish
from the oven. It may be hot.
Although heat is not normally produced
in the container itself by the
microwaves (apart from stoneware),
heat transfer from the food to the
container may be considerable, making
the container itself hot.
Allow food to stand for a few minutes at
room temperature at the end of cooking
to enable the heat to spread evenly
throughout the food.
65
CONTENTS
Defrosting / Defrosting and reheating or cooking

Do not refreeze food once it has
thawed. Defrosted food should be
used up as quickly as possible as
food soon loses its nutritional value
and goes off. Defrosted food may
only be refrozen after it has been
cooked.
Fish does not need to be fully defrosted

before cooking.
Defrost so that the surface is sufficiently
soft to take herbs and seasoning.
Defrosting followed by
reheating or cooking
Defrosting
Deep-frozen food can be defrosted and

immediately reheated or cooked.
Select the following microwave power

settings to defrost food:
After defrosting, select 900 W followed

by 450 W.
80 W
For defrosting very delicate food,
e.g. cream, butter, gateau and
cheese.
Remove the food from its packaging

and place in a covered microwaveproof dish for defrosting and reheating
or cooking. Exception: Minced meat
should be left uncovered while cooking.
150 W
For defrosting everything else.
Remove the food from its packaging,
place in a microwave-proof container
and defrost uncovered. Turn, stir or
separate the food about halfway
through the defrosting time.
To defrost meat, unpack the frozen
meat and place it on an upturned plate
in a glass or china container so that the
meat juice can run off and be collected.
Turn halfway through defrosting.
Soups, stew and vegetables should be

stirred several times during the
process. Carefully separate and turn
slices of meat halfway through the
programme. Turn pieces of fish at the
halfway stage as well.
After defrosting followed by
reheating or cooking
Allow the food to stand at room
temperature for a few minutes to enable
the heat to spread evenly throughout
the food.
It is particularly important to observe

food hygiene rules when defrosting
poultry. Do not use the liquid from
defrosted poultry. Pour it away, and
wash the tray, the sink and your
hands.
Danger of salmonella poisoning!
66
CONTENTS
Bottling
You can preserve small portions of fruit,
vegetables and meat in preserving jars
with your microwave oven. Prepare the
jars in the usual way.
Fill the jars up to 2 cm below the rim.
Close the jars with clear adhesive
tape or with clips suitable for
microwave use.
Never use metal clips or jars with
screw-on lids.
Do not use tins for bottling. Pressure
can build up and they may explode,
resulting in injury or damage.
Do not attempt to place more than four
1
/2 - litre jars onto the turntable at the
same time.
1 glass jar . . . . . . . . . approx. 3 minutes

2 glass jars . . . . . . . . approx. 6 minutes
3 glass jars . . . . . . . . approx. 9 minutes
4 glass jars . . . . . . . approx. 12 minutes
This is sufficient time for bottling fruit
and cucumbers.
For vegetables, reduce the power to
450 W once the produce starts
bubbling. Cook
- carrots for approx. 15 minutes
- peas for approx. 25 minutes.
After bottling
Take the glass jars from the microwave
oven, cover the jars with a cloth and
allow to cool for approx. 24 hours.
Remove the clips or the adhesive tape
and make sure the glasses are closed
properly.
Set to 900 W and bring the content in

the jars to bubble. The time required
depends on:
the initial temperature of the produce
in the jar.
the number of glass jars.
Duration until bubbles evenly ascend in
all jars:
67
CONTENTS
Some suggested uses

Produce
Quantity
MW
power
level
(in watts)
Melting butter
and margarine
100 g
450
1:00 1:10 Do not cover.
Melting
chocolate
100 g
450

Stir occasionally.
Dissolving gelatine
1 packet +
2 1/2 tbsp. water
450

Stir occasionally.
Preparing flan
topping/jelly glaze
1 packet +
250 ml liquid
450
45
Do not cover.
Stir occasionally.
Made with
100 g flour
80
35
Cover and leave to prove.
20 g
600
Salad
dressings
125 ml
150
12
Heat uncovered on a gentle

heat.
Tempering citrus
fruits
150 g
150
12
Place on a plate, do not cover.
Frying bacon
100 g
900
2 2:30
Place on kitchen paper, do not

cover.
Softening
ice cream
500 g
150
13
Place open ice cream container

in microwave.
Skinning
tomatoes
3 tomatoes
450
67
Cut a cross shape into the top of

each tomato, cover, and heat in
a little water. The skins will slip
off easily. Take care, as the
tomatoes may get very hot.
300 g
strawberries,
300 g jam sugar
900
79
Mix the fruit and sugar in a deep

container, cover and cook.
2 rolls
150 + Grill
Grill
12
46
Place uncovered on the rack,

turning halfway through.
Yeast dough
Chocolate covered
cream cake
Strawberry jam
Defrosting and
baking bread rolls
Duration
(in
minutes)
Notes
0:10 0:20 Place on a plate, do not cover.
The information given in this chart is intended only as a guide.
68
CONTENTS
Cleaning and care

Disconnect the microwave oven
from the power supply before
cleaning (e.g. switch off at the
socket and remove the plug).
clean using a little washing-up liquid if

necessary.
Do not use a steam cleaning

appliance to clean this appliance.
Pressurised steam could reach the
electrical components and cause a
short circuit.
Oven interior and inside of the

door
,The oven interior can get hot

during use. To avoid the danger of
being burnt, wait until it has cooled
down before cleaning. It should be
cleaned after each use. Waiting too
long can make cleaning
unnecessarily difficult and in some
cases impossible.
In certain circumstances, very
heavy soiling can even damage the
appliance and be dangerous. Fire
hazard!
The oven interior and door interior can
be cleaned using a damp cloth with a
little washing-up liquid or a mild
detergent and water. Wipe dry with a
soft cloth.
For more heavy soiling, heat a glass of
water with a glass rod or suitable
utensil placed in it for 2 to 3 minutes
until the water begins to boil. The steam
will collect on the walls and soften the
soiling.
The oven interior can now be wiped
Do not remove the cover to the

microwave outlet inside the oven
interior, nor the film covering the
inside of the door.
Do not let water or any small

particles penetrate the vents in the
appliance.
Wring out cloths before using them
to wipe out the oven to avoid
moisture getting into the openings.
Do not use abrasive cleaners, as
these will scratch the surface.
To neutralise odours in the oven, put a
cup of water with some lemon juice with
a glass rod or suitable utensil placed in
it in the microwave oven and simmer for
a few minutes.
69
CONTENTS
Cleaning and care

The door should be kept clean at all
times and checked at regular intervals
for any signs of damage.
,If any damage is noticed, the

appliance should not be used until
the fault has been rectified by a
Miele authorised and trained service
technician.
To clean the interior:
^ Always keep the roller ring

underneath it clean, as well as the
oven floor, to enable the turntable to
turn smoothly.
^ Clean the area between the turntable
and the roller ring.
Do not turn the carrier manually, as
this could damage the drive motor.
^ Remove the turntable, and wash in
the dishwasher or by hand.
70
CONTENTS
Cleaning and care

Appliance front
Do not let water or any small
particles penetrate the vents in the
appliance.
To avoid damaging the surfaces of

your appliance, do not use:
descaling agents,
Remove any soiling immediately.

remove and could cause the surface
to alter or discolour.
abrasive cleaning agents, e.g.

powder cleaners and cream
cleaners,
Clean the front with a solution of warm

water and a little washing-up liquid
applied with a soft sponge. Wipe the
surfaces dry using a soft cloth.
For cleaning, you can also use a clean,
damp microfibre cloth without any
cleaning agent, such as the Original
Miele all purpose microfibre cloth.
The surfaces of this appliance are
all susceptible to scratching.
Scratches on glass surfaces could
even cause a breakage in certain
circumstances.
Contact with unsuitable cleaning
agents can alter or discolour
surfaces.
stainless steel cleaners,

dishwasher cleaner,
oven sprays,
hard, abrasive sponges and
brushes, e.g. pot scourers,
dirt erasers,
sharp metal scrapers.
71
CONTENTS
Cleaning and care

Accessories supplied
Cover
Rinse the cover after each use.
The cover can be washed in a
dishwasher. However, discolouration
caused by natural dyes, e.g. from
carrots, tomatoes or ketchup, may
occur.
This discolouration is irreversible but
does not affect the stability of the cover.
Gourmet plate
Clean the Gourmet plate with hot water
and a cloth with a little washing-up
liquid to remove any grease.
Rack
Wash and dry the rack after each use.
It is dishwasher-proof, or can be
washed by hand in hot water with a little
washing-up liquid.
Remove stubborn soiling with a
stainless steel cleaner.
Glass tray
The glass tray can be washed by hand
using a solution of hot water and
washing-up liquid, or it can be washed
in a dishwasher.
Do not use abrasive cleaning agents.
Do not use wire wool, or abrasive

sponges, aggressive or abrasive
cleaning agents.
The Gourmet plate is not suitable for
cleaning in a dishwasher.
If the Gourmet plate has been used to
prepare foods with a strong aroma, you
can neutralise any odours by adding
some water and lemon juice to the
Gourmet plate and heating in the
microwave at maximum power for 2 3
minutes. Rinse the Gourmet plate
afterwards with clean water.
72
CONTENTS

,Repairs may only be carried out
by a suitably qualified and

competent person authorised by
Miele in accordance with national
and local safety regulations. Repairs
and other work by unqualified
persons could be dangerous. The
manufacturer cannot be held liable
for unauthorised work.
Some minor problems can be corrected
without contacting Miele. Please note,
however, that a call-out charge will be
applied to unnecessary service visits
where the problem could have been
rectified as described in these
What to do if . . .
. . . a programme will not start.
Check whether,
^ the appliance door is closed
properly.
^ the system lock has been activated
(see "System lock").
^ "door" appears in the display. The
door hasn't been opened for more
than 20 minutes (see "door
message").
^ the appliance is plugged into the
mains supply and switched on at the
socket.
^ the mains fuse has tripped because
the mains voltage or another
appliance is faulty (unplug the
appliance, call a qualified electrician
or call Miele - see "After sales service").
. . . a noise can be heard after a

cooking programme.
This is not a fault.
while after the microwave oven has
been switched off to prevent any
humidity building up in the oven, on the
control panel or on the oven housing
unit.
It will switch off automatically.
. . . the display does not light up.
Check whether,
^ the time of day has been switched
off.
. . . the turntable does not turn
smoothly.
^ Check whether the area underneath
the turntable is clean.
^ Check whether the surfaces between
the turntable and the roller ring are
clean.
Remove any soiling.
. . . food is not adequately defrosted,
heated or cooked at the end of the
selected cooking duration.
^ Check whether the correct power
level was selected for the duration
set.
The lower the power level, the longer
the duration required.
^ Check whether the programme has
been interrupted and not restarted.
73
CONTENTS

. . . the microwave operation works
but not the lighting.
^ You can operate the appliance as
normal, but the lighting is faulty.
Contact Miele if you need to replace
the lighting.
such as plated meals, it is therefore

sensible to select a lower power level
and lengthen the duration required.
. . . the microwave switches itself off
during a cooking, reheating or
defrosting programme.
. . . strange noises are heard when

the microwave oven is being used.
There may be insufficient air circulation.
Check whether,
^ the air inlet or outlet is blocked.
^ the food is covered with aluminium

foil.
If so, remove it.
^ sparks are being created by the use
of crockery with a metallic finish. See
"Suitable containers for microwave
ovens".
. . . the time of day in the display is
not accurate.
After a power cut, the time of day
needs to be re-entered.
^ Set the correct time of day.
. . . food cools down too quickly.
In the microwave oven, food begins to
cook from the outside first, the inside of
the food relying on the slower
conduction of heat.
Check whether,
If so, remove any obstruction. The

appliance switches off automatically in
cases of overheating. Cooking can be
continued after a cooling-down period.
If the microwave oven switches itself off
repeatedly, please call Miele.
,If it is not possible to remedy a

fault by following the instructions
given above, on no account open
the appliance casing.
This microwave oven should only be
repaired by a suitably qualified
technician trained by Miele. Danger
of electrocution!
If food is cooked at a high power level,

it is possible that the heat may not have
reached the centre of the food, so it is
hot on the outside but cold in the
centre. During standing time heat is
transferred to the centre of the food.
This may leave the food warm in the
middle but cool on the outside. When
reheating food with different densities,
74
CONTENTS
After sales service

In the event of any faults which you
cannot remedy yourself, please
contact:
Miele
The contact details for Miele are
given at the back of these operating
instructions.
When contacting Miele, please quote
the model and serial number of your
appliance. This information is given on
the data plate, which is located on the
inside of the appliance front.
Warranty
The manufacturer's warranty for this
appliance is 2 years.
For further information on warranty
conditions, please refer to the warranty
booklet supplied with the appliance.
75
CONTENTS
,Before connecting the
appliance, ensure that it has not

been damaged in any way. Do not
use a damaged appliance.
The appliance is supplied with a mains
cable and moulded plug ready for
connection to an AC single phase 220240 V 50 Hz supply.
Fuse protection is to be conducted as
follows: Connection to an earthed
power socket, protected with 10 A-L
automat or fuse 10 A.
Connection must only be made via a
suitable switched socket. The electrical
system must comply with VDE 0100.
The appliance should be positioned so
that the plug is accessible.
If the switch is not accessible after
installation or the appliance is hardwired (depending on country), an
additional means of disconnection must
be provided for all poles.
When switched off there must be an allpole contact gap of 3 mm in the isolator
switch (including switch, fuses and
relays according to EN 60335).
76
The voltage, rated load and fuse rating

are given on the data plate situated at
the front of the oven interior. Please
ensure these match the household
mains supply.
If the connection cable is damaged, it
must be replaced by a Miele approved
service technician to avoid a hazard.
This appliance meets the requirements
of the European Standard EN 55011.
This appliance is classified as Group 2,
Class B. Group 2 indicates that the
appliance can be used for the purpose
of cooking food with high frequency
energy in the form of electro-magnetic
radiation. Class B indicates that the
appliance is suitable for domestic use.
Do not connect the machine to an
inverter such as those used with an
autonomous energy source e.g. Solar
power. When switched on, peak loads
in the system can cause the safety
switch-off mechanism to be triggered.
This can damage the electronic unit.
The machine must not be used with socalled Energy saving devices either.
These reduce the amount of energy
supplied to the machine, causing it to
overheat.
CONTENTS
Installation
Building-in dimensions
When building in the appliance,
ensure that air entering and leaving
the front of the appliance is not
hindered.
Therefore, do not block the
ventilation gaps with any objects.
Do not lift up the microwave oven by

the door handle as this may damage
the door.
Use the hand grips on the sides of
the housing to carry the appliance.
77
CONTENTS
Installation
Installation instructions
The appliance must be built in
before it can be used. Otherwise it
poses an electric shock hazard.
^ Align the appliance.
^ Slide the appliance into the housing

unit, and pull the cable with the plug
through the back of the unit.
78
^ Open the door and use the 2 screws

supplied to secure the appliance to
the side walls of the housing unit.
CONTENTS

ACN 005 635 398
ABN 96 005 635 398
Miele Center and Head Office Melbourne:
Knoxfield, VIC 3180
Miele Center South Melbourne:
206-210 Coventry Street
South Melbourne, VIC 3205
Miele Center and Office Sydney:
3 Skyline Place
Frenchs Forest, NSW 2086
Miele Center and Office Brisbane:
39 Harvey Street North
Eagle Farm, QLD 4009
Miele Center Gold Coast:
131 Ferry Road
Southport, QLD 4215
Miele Center and Office Adelaide:
83-85 Sir Donald Bradman Drive
Hilton, SA 5033
Miele Center and Office Perth:
205-207 Stirling Highway
Claremont, WA 6010

IRD 98 463 631
Head Office:
Level 2, 10 College Hill
Miele Center Auckland:
8 College Hill
Telephone:
0800 4 MIELE (0800 464 353)
www.miele.co.nz
Miele (Hong Kong) Limited
41/F - 4101, Manhattan Place
23 Wang Tai Road
Kowloon Bay, Hong Kong
Tel: (852) 2610 1331
Fax: (852)2610 1013
Email: mielehk@miele.com.hk
Miele Global Headquarters

Germany
Miele & Cie. KG
Carl-Miele-Strae 29
33332 Gtersloh
Federal Republic of Germany
www.miele.com.au
79
CONTENTS
M 6262 TC
en - AU
M.-Nr. 10 229 970 / 00

CONTENTS
F - Clothes Dryer
CONTENTS
OCD4W
Capacity 4.0kg
OCD4W
1450W
20kg
435
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
4.0
High
Low
CONTENTS
Heat
Heat
Low
High
High
5
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
Section 5.19
Internal & External Blinds (If Applicable)
CONTENTS
Light and Co Apartments - Illuminate & Radiance
OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Version
#
1.0
Implemented
By
Mario Medrano
Revision
Date
26/9/2015
Approved
By
Mario
Medrano
Approval
Date
Comments
26/9/2016
Version: 30/7/2014
Page 1 of 6
CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................. 3
1.1 Purpose ............................................................................................................................ 3
2.0 KEY FEATURES................................................................................................................... 3
2.1
Blind Operation ......................................................................................................... 3
2.2
Warranty .................................................................................................................... 3
Helioscreen ................................................................................................................ 4
Roller Blinds Warranty 5 Years for Components and fabric ..................................... 4
3.0 KEY CONTACTS .................................................................................................................. 6
Page 2 of 6
CONTENTS
1.0
INTRODUCTION
1.1 PURPOSE
Project Specific Maintenance Manual for Light and Co Apartments roller blinds.
Units Illuminate
10504, 10506, 10505, 10508, 10513, 10403, 10404, 10406, 10407, 10409, 10410, 10302,
10304, 10306, 10310, 10313, 10316, 10202, 10204, 10208, 10210, 10211, 10215, 10216,
10102, 10104, 10105, 10106, 10109, 10110, 10111
Units Radiance
20004, 20005, 20103, 20104, 20105,
20303, 20304, 20310, 20313, 20401,
20505, 20506, 20514, 20601, 20604,
20710, 20711, 20803, 20804, 20806,
20911, 21008, 21106, 21107, 21108
20108,
20403,
20606,
20809,
20111,
20404,
20610,
20902,
20206,
20406,
20702,
20903,
20207,
20409,
20703,
20904,
20209,
20501,
20704,
20905,
20210,
20503,
20706,
20907,
20214,
20504,
20709,
20908,
And External Rollerblinds

10113, 10213, 10313, 10413, 10513, 10112, 10212, 10312, 10412, 10512, 10111, 10211,
10311, 10411, 10511, 10110, 10210, 10310, 10410, 10510, 10109, 10209, 10309, 10409,
10509, 10108, 10208, 10308, 10408
KEY FEATURES
2.0
2.1
BLIND OPERATION
ROLLER BLINDS
Manufacture Types
Operation Nothing could be simpler. The roller blind is fitted either with a pull or sidewinder
control. With the sidewinder control, simply pull the control chain to raise or lower the blind.
With the pull control, gently pull outwards to release the tension and allow the blind to move
freely to the desired height and release the pull cord. Once the spring mechanism has locked
off, guide the blind to avoid the fabric from coming into contact with the window frame and
brackets as fraying may occur.
Project Blinds Pty Ltd will not accept any responsibility for damage to blinds caused by
misuse.
Page 3 of 6
CONTENTS

Re-Tensioning The Spring Occasionally after prolonged use for pull controlled blinds the
spring may lose tension. If this occurs, unroll the blind fabric until the roll is totally visibly
exposed. Remove the blind from the brackets, taking care not to crease the fabric. Re-roll the
fabric onto the barrel keeping the edges in align and the fabric taut. Replace the blind into the
bracket. Replacement springs are available if required.
Warranty Helioscreen Roller Blinds Warranty 5 Years for Components and Fabric
EXTERNAL ROLLER BLINDS

Operation - Somfy Controller press up button to bring awning out and down button to retract.
The middle button is to stop the awning at anytime. The awning is automatically set limits for
both in and out.
For a further detailed explanation please see attached somfy user guide to manual.
Wind Sensors
Wind sensors default is set to 60km per hour. This is can be changed only by the body corporate
as the sensors are shared on the facade. In an event of high winds the roller blind will
automatically retract into its up limit. Up limit is set automatically to have blind fully retracted
up. In an event of a power surge and limits have been changed you can change limits using the
somfy user manual attached or contact project blinds representative to limits reset.
It is recommended wind sensor should be checked every 2 years to make sure all blinds are
paired to sensor. Sensor to be checked by Project Blinds installation representative and organise
by body corporate if needed. Sensor speed can be changed up or down however approval of body
corporate must be obtained before this can be changed.
Page 4 of 6
CONTENTS
SOMFY INSTRUCTIONS
TELIS RTS REMOTE CONTROLS
SINGLE & FIVE CHANNEL
Pen
UP
Part #s
1810632 Telis 1 RTS Pure
1810633 Telis 5 RTS Pure
1810639 Telis 1 RTS Silver
1810641 Telis 5 RTS Silver
1810650 Telis 1 RTS Lounge
1810652 Telis 5 RTS Lounge
1810643 Telis 1 RTS Patio
1810645 Telis 5 RTS Patio
STOP
UP
STOP
my
DOWN
my
DOWN
LED
Indicator
Light
LED Lights
Programming
Button
Channel
Selector
Single Channel
Version
Five Channel
Version
BACK
PROGRAMMING ADDING A NEW REMOTE OR OPERATING CHANNEL

A previously programmed remote can be used in order to add a new remote or channel to the Motorized Window Covering.
If a Telis Transmitter has not been previously programmed, please refer to the installation instructions of the relevant RTS
motorized window covering.
Previously
programmed remote
Adding a Telis 1 RTS Transmitter only:

1. Using the previously programmed Telis
remote, press and hold the programming
button on back of remote until
window covering jogs.
Pen
New Telis 1
remote to be added
2. Using the new Telis 1 remote,

briefly press the programming
button until the window covering
jogs. Window covering has
now learned the commands of
the new Telis remote.
Programming
Button
BACK VIEW
Pen
Programming
Button
BACK VIEW
Previously
programmed remote
Adding a Telis 5 RTS Transmitter only:

1. Using the previously programmed Telis
remote, press and hold the programming
button on back of remote until window
covering jogs.
Pen
2. Using the new Telis 5 remote, select

the desired channel using the CHANNEL
SELECTOR BUTTON. (The LED will illuminate
each time the Channel Selector Button is
pressed, indicating the selected channel)
Programming
Button
BACK VIEW
my
LED Lights
Channel
Selector
New Telis 5
remote to
be added
3. Using the Telis 5 remote, briefly press the

programming button until the motorized
window covering jogs. The RTS motorized
window covering has now learned the
commands of the new Telis 5 remote.
Pen
Programming
Button
BACK VIEW
Copyright Somfy Systems, Inc. 1/2010
C-0001
PAGE
1 REV 6
CONTENTS
PROGRAMMING - SETTING A FAVORITE POSITION (MY)

In addition to standard OPEN and CLOSE features, the Telis remote enables the user to pre-establish a favorite stop location. a.k.a. MY
favorite position. An example could be to command the RTS motorized window covering to a 50% or 75% open or closed position
when the MY button is briefly pressed.
Telis 1 RTS Transmitter only:
1. Using the UP ( ) or DOWN ( ) Buttons,
activate the window covering to a desired
position, for example halfway Open or
Closed. Briefly press the MY ( my ) (stop)
Button to stop the window covering
once position is reached.
2. Press ans hold the MY ( my) Button until the

window covering jogs. Favorite position is
now recorded.

1a. Using the Telis 5 remote, select the
appropriate channel using the CHANNEL
SELECTOR BUTTON. (The LED lights will
illuminate each time the Channel Selector
Button is pressed, indicating the selected
channel)
3. Favorite MY ( my ) position can be activated

from any previous window covering position.
Example: Briefly press the MY( my ) button
while window coverings in a Open or Closed
position.
1b. Using the UP ( ) or DOWN ( )

Buttons, activate window covering
to a desired position, for example
halfway Open or Closed. Briefly
press the MY ( my ) (stop) Button
to stop the window covering once
my
LED Lights
Channel
Selector
Note: Activating window covering to a

Favorite position while already in-motion
will require two brief presses of the MY
(stop) button.
my
my
OR
Window covering MUST BE in a stationary

(Stopped) position before the MY favorite
position can be activated.
OPERATING THE MOTORIZED WINDOW COVERING

1. Using the Telis 5 remote, select
the appropriate channel using the
CHANNEL SELECTOR BUTTON. (The LED
lights will illuminate each time the
Channel Selector Button is pressed,
indicating the selected channel)

1. Use the UP ( ) or DOWN ( )Buttons to
open or close the window covering.
If a specific position is necessary,
briefly press the MY ( my ) (stop)
Button to stop the window covering
once position is reached.
2. Using the UP ( ) or DOWN ( )

Buttons to open or close the
window covering. If a specific
position is necessary, briefly press
the MY (stop) ( my ) Button to
stop the window covering once
my
LED Lights
Channel
Selector
my
my
REPLACING THE BATTERY

1. Using a small screwdriver loosen the
screws on the reverse side of the remote
control and remove the back cover.
2. Replace the battery with one
2430 Lithium 3V battery.
NOTE: IN CASE OF A LOST TRANSMITTER, PROFESSIONAL PROGRAMMING ASSISTANCE IS REQUIRED. PLEASE CONTACT SOMFY
AT somfytech@somfy.com OR YOUR LOCAL DEALER AT www.somfysystems.com/locatedealer.
Copyright SOMFY SYSTEMS, INC. 1/2010
C-0001
PAGE
2 REV 6
CONTENTS
WARRANTY POLICY:
PRODUCT WARRANTY:
All products supplied and installed by Project Blinds Pty are covered by the manufactures
warranty, unless stated in writing or if agreed upon and forms part of the original contract.
Product Warranty may be void if any damage arises from any unauthorised parties altering,
adjusting, removing and/or operating the product outside its normal operating conditions, and .
Any damage/stain/water marks resulting from any attempts to remove any types of marks and/or
stains on the blind fabric that are done outside the care instructions supplied by the manufacture,
by any unauthorised parties may void the warranty.
INSTALLATION WARRANTY:
Installation warranty for any product supplied and/or installed by or on behalf of Project Blinds
Pty is based on 12 mouths from date of installation, unless otherwise stated in writing or as part or
the original contract, and is based upon a sound structural surface for the product to be fixed to.
Warranty may be void through miss use, rough operation, structurally unsound surface that the
product is fixed to and/or if the product has been removed and/or reinstalled, altered, adjusted in
any way by any parties that are unauthorised to do so.
Project Blinds Pty Ltd, its office holders, its employees and sub-contractors will not be held
liable for any damage and/or injury of any type resulting from any miss use, rough operation,
structurally unsound surface that the product is fixed to and/or if the product has been removed
and/or reinstalled, altered, adjusted in any way by any parties that are unauthorised to do so.
Any repair/replacement of any component under a manufactures warranty but out side the 12
month installation warranty may incur a labour charge and/or out of pocket charges (EG: Scaffold
Hire Charge). This charge is at the sole discursion of Project Blinds Pty Ltd and will be charged
an hourly rate for labour and any external expensed incurred during the course carrying out the
repair.
Any damage to blinds and/or injury to persons arising from any foreign obstacles obstructing the
operation of the blinds, as they were intended to be operated, may not be covered by either Project
Blinds Pty Ltd or manufactures warranties.
Page 5 of 6
CONTENTS
ELECTRICAL WORK:
All warranties for any electrical work carried out on any blinds supplied and installed by Project
Blinds Pty Ltd will be the responsibility of the electrical contractors and will form part of their
warrant policy as our installers are not licensed electricians and can not, by law, and will not carry
out any electrical work that requires an Electrical Trade License. Project Blinds Pty Ltd its
employees, and/or sub-contractors will not be held liable for damage and/or injury(s) caused by or
arise from any wiring issues. Please note that incorrect wiring may result in the
manufactures warranty being void.
UNAUTHORISED PARTIES:
Unauthorised parties is anyone altering, adjusting, removing and/or operating the product outside
of its normal operation and/or carrying out any maintenance on the product, that is not authorised
to do so, in writing by Project Blinds Pty Ltd.
3.0 KEY CONTACTS

Company
Project Blinds
Description
Contractor
Contact
Mario Medrano
mario@projectblinds.com.au
P: 0498 469 158
Date of
Commencement
15/10/2016
Address
321 Montague Rd
West End
Contact
Warranty has been approved
by Project Blinds
P: 0498 469 158
Page 6 of 6
CONTENTS
Section 5.20
Ai r C o n d i t i o n i n g
CONTENTS
(i)
Sp l i t S y s t e m - F T X S 2 0 - 4 6 S e r i e s
CONTENTS
DAIKIN ROOM AIR CONDITIONER
OPERATION MANUAL
MODELS
FTXS25KVMA
FTXS35KVMA
FTXS46KVMA
CTXS20KVMA
FTKS25KVMA
FTKS35KVMA
CTKS20KVMA
CONTENTS
Feature
For your comfort and energy

saving
INTELLIGENT EYE
The INTELLIGENT EYE sensor detects the human movement in
a room. If no one is room for more than 20 minutes, the
operation automatically changes to energy saving operation.
Page 15
WEEKLY TIMER
Up to 4 timer settings can be saved for each day of the week
according to your familys life style. The WEEKLY TIMER allows
you to set on/off time and the desired temperature.
Page 22
Other functions
COMFORT AIRFLOW
OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET
The airflow direction will be in upward

while in COOL operation, in downward
while in HEAT operation. This function
will prevent cold or warm air from
Page 15
directly blowing on your body.
OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation

lowers the noise level of the outdoor
unit. This function is useful when you
need to consideration for your
Page 18
neighborhood.
1
CONTENTS
Contents
Read before Operation
Safety Precautions ......................................... 3
Name of Parts ................................................. 5
Preparation before Operation ......................... 9
Operation
AUTO DRY COOL HEAT FAN
Operation ........................................... 11
Adjusting the Airflow Direction
and Rate ............................................ 13
COMFORT AIRFLOW /
INTELLIGENT EYE Operation ........... 15
POWERFUL Operation ...................... 17
OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET
Operation ........................................... 18
ECONO Operation ............................. 19
OFF TIMER Operation ....................... 20
ON TIMER Operation ........................ 21
WEEKLY TIMER Operation ............... 22
Multi Connection
Note for Multi System .................................. 28
Care
Care and Cleaning ....................................... 30
ECONO
This function enables efficient operation
by limiting the maximum power
consumption. It is useful when using the
air conditioner and other electrical
Page 19
devices simultaneously.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting ........................................... 35
2
CONTENTS
Safety Precautions
Keep this manual where the operator can easily find it.
Read the precautions in this manual carefully before operating the unit.
The precautions described herein are classified as WARNING and CAUTION. They both contain important information
regarding safety. Be sure to observe all precautions without fail.
WARNING
Failure to follow these instructions properly may result in
personal injury or loss of life.
Never attempt.
CAUTION
Failure to observe these instructions properly may result in
property damage or personal injury, which may be serious
depending on the circumstances.
Never wet the air conditioner nor the remote controller with
water.
Be sure to follow the instructions.
Be sure to establish an earth connection.
Never touch the air conditioner nor the remote controller with
wet hands.
After reading, keep this manual in a convenient place so that you can refer to it whenever necessary. If the equipment is
transferred to a new user, be sure also to hand over the manual.
WARNING
In order to avoid fire, explosion or injury, do not operate the unit when harmful, among which flammable or corrosive
gases, are detected near the unit.
Be aware that prolonged, direct exposure to cool or warm air from the air conditioner, or to air that is too cool or too
warm can be harmful to your physical condition and health.
Do not place objects, including rods, your fingers, etc., in the air inlet or outlet. Product malfunctioning, product or
injury damage may result due to contact with the air conditioners high-speed fan blades.
Do not attempt to repair, dismantle, reinstall or modify the air conditioner yourself as this may result in water leakage,
electric shocks or fire hazards.
Do not use flammable spray near the air conditioner, or otherwise fire may result.
Beware of fire in case of refrigerant leakage. If the air conditioner is not operating correctly, i.e. not generating cool or
warm air, refrigerant leakage could be the cause. Consult your dealer for assistance. The refrigerant within the air
conditioner is safe and normally does not leak.
However, in the event of a leakage, contact with a naked burner, heater or cooker may result in generation of noxious
gas. Do not longer use the air conditioner until a qualified service person confirms that the leakage has been
repaired.
Do not attempt to install or repair the air conditioner yourself. Improper workmanship may result in water leakage,
electric shocks or fire hazards. Please contact your local dealer or qualified personnel for installation and
maintenance work.
When the air conditioner is malfunctioning (giving off a burning odour, etc.) turn off power to the unit and contact your
local dealer. Continued operation under such circumstances may result in a failure, electric shocks or fire hazards.
Be sure to install an earth leakage breaker. Failure to install the earth leakage breaker may result in electric shocks or fire.
Be sure to earth the unit. Do not earth the unit to a utility pipe, lightning conductor or telephone earth lead. Imperfect
earthing may result in electric shocks.
CAUTION
Do not use the air conditioner for purposes other than those for which it is intended. Do not use the air conditioner for
cooling precision instruments, food, plants, animals or works of art as this may adversely affect the performance,
quality and/or longevity of the object concerned.
Do not expose plants or animals directly to airflow from the unit as this may cause adverse effects.
Do not place appliances that produce naked flames in places exposed to the airflow from the unit as this may impair
combustion of the burner.
3
CONTENTS
CAUTION
Do not block air inlets nor outlets. Impaired airflow may result in insufficient performance or trouble.
Do not sit on the outdoor unit, put things on the unit, or pull the unit. Doing so may cause accidents, such as falling or
toppling down, thus resulting in injury, product malfunctioning, or product damage.
Do not place objects that are susceptible to moisture directly beneath the indoor or outdoor units. Under certain
conditions, condensation on the main unit or refrigerant pipes, air filter dirt or drain blockage may cause dripping,
resulting in fouling or failure of the object concerned.
After prolonged use, check the unit stand and its mounts for damage. If they are left in a damaged condition, the unit
may fall and cause injury.
To avoid injury, do not touch the air inlet or aluminum fins of the indoor or outdoor units.
This appliance is not intended for use by persons (including children) with reduced physical, sensory or mental
capabilities, or lack of experience and knowledge, unless they have been given supervision or instruction concerning
use of the appliance by a person responsible for their safety.
Children should be supervised to ensure that they do not play with the unit or its remote controller. Accidental
operation by a child may result in impairment of bodily functions and harm health.
Do not give impact to the indoor and outdoor units, or otherwise product damage may result.
Do not place flammable items, such as spray cans, within 1 meter of the air outlet.
The spray cans may explode as a result of hot air from the indoor or outdoor units.
Be careful not to let pets urinate on the air conditioner. Urination on the air conditioner may result in electric shocks or fire.
To avoid oxygen depletion, ensure that the room is adequately ventilated if equipment such as a burner is used
together with the air conditioner.
Before cleaning, be sure to stop unit operation, turn the breaker off or remove the power cord. Otherwise, an electric
shock and injury may result.
Only connect the air conditioner to the specified power supply circuit. Power supplies other than the one specified
may result in electric shocks, overheating and fires.
Arrange the drain hose to ensure smooth drainage. Imperfect drainage may cause wetting of the building, furniture etc.
Do not place objects in direct proximity of the outdoor unit and do not let leaves and other debris accumulate around
the unit. Leaves are a hotbed for small animals which can enter the unit. Once in the unit, such animals can cause
malfunctions, smoke or fire when making contact with electrical parts.
Do not place objects around the indoor unit.
Doing so may have an adverse influence on the performance, product quality, and life of the air conditioner.
To avoid electric shocks, do not operate with wet hands.
Do not wash the air conditioner with water, as this may result in electric shocks or fire.
Do not place water containers (vases etc.) above the unit, as this may result in electric shocks or fire hazards.
Installation site.
To install the air conditioner in the following types of environments, consult the dealer.
Places with an oily ambient or where steam or soot occurs.

Salty environment such as coastal areas.
Places where sulfide gas occurs such as hot springs.
Places where snow may block the outdoor unit.
The indoor unit is at least 1 meter away from any television or radio set (unit may cause interference with the picture or sound).
The drain from the outdoor unit must be discharged to a place of good drainage.
Consider nuisance to your neighbours from noises.

For installation, choose a place as described below.
A place solid enough to bear the weight of the unit which does not amplify the operation noise or vibration.
A place from where the air discharged from the outdoor unit or the operation noise will not annoy your neighbours.
Electrical work.
For power supply, be sure to use a separate power circuit dedicated to the air conditioner.
System relocation.
Relocating the air conditioner requires specialized knowledge and skills. Please consult the dealer if relocation is
necessary for moving or remodeling.
4
CONTENTS
Name of Parts
Indoor Unit
Air inlet
Front panel
Panel tab
INTELLIGENT EYE
sensor
It detects the movements of
people and automatically
switches between normal
operation and energy saving
operation. Page 15
Model
name plate
Air outlet
Louvers (vertical blades)
Room temperature
sensor
The louvers are inside of the air

outlet. Page 13
It detects the air temperature

around the unit.
Flaps (horizontal blades)

Page 13
Display
Operation lamp (green)
TIMER lamp (yellow)
Signal receiver
It receives signals from the remote
controller.
When the unit receives a signal, you
will hear a beep sound.
Case
Sound type
Operation start
beep-beep
Setting changed
beep
Operation stop
long beep
Page 20,21
INTELLIGENT EYE lamp

(green) Page 15
Indoor unit ON/OFF switch

Press this switch once to start operation.
Press once again to stop it.
The operation mode refer to the following table.
Mode
Temperature setting
Airflow rate
COOLING ONLY
Model
COOL
22C
AUTO
HEAT PUMP
AUTO
25C
AUTO
This switch is useful when the remote controller is missing.
5
CONTENTS
Open the front panel
Air filter
Titanium apatite photocatalytic

air-purifying filter
Outdoor Unit
Appearance of the outdoor unit may differ from some models.
Air inlet
(back and side)
Outdoor temperature
sensor (back)
Drain hose
Earth terminal
It is inside of this cover.
Air outlet
Name plate
Refrigerant piping and
inter-unit wiring
6
CONTENTS
Name of Parts
Remote Controller
Signal transmitter
Display (LCD)
Receiver
To use the remote controller, aim the

transmitter at the indoor unit. If there
is anything to block signals between
the unit and the remote controller,
such as a curtain, the unit will not
operate.
Do not drop the remote controller. Do
not get it wet.
The maximum distance for
communication is approx. 7m.
TEMPERATURE
adjustment buttons
It changes the temperature setting.
Page 12
ON/OFF button
FAN setting button

It selects the airflow rate setting.
Page 14
POWERFUL button
POWERFUL operation.
It displays the current settings.

(In this illustration, each section is
shown with all its displays on for the
purpose of explanation.)
Page 17
HEAT PUMP model

COOLING ONLY model
Press this button once to start

operation.
Press once again to stop it. Page 11
Front cover
Open the front cover.
Page 8
ARC452A4
ARC452A13
7
CONTENTS
Open the front cover
MODE selector button

It selects the operation mode.
(AUTO/DRY/COOL/HEAT/
FAN) Page 11
ECONO button
ECONO operation.
Page 19
QUIET button
OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET
operation. Page 18
SWING button
Adjusting the airflow direction.
Page 13
COMFORT/SENSOR
button
COMFORT AIRFLOW and
INTELLIGENT EYE
operation. Page 15,16
: WEEKLY button
: PROGRAM button
: COPY button
: BACK button
: NEXT button
OFF TIMER button
WEEKLY TIMER operation.

Page 22
Page 20
ON TIMER button
Page 21
TIMER CANCEL
button
It cancels the timer setting.
Page 20,21
CLOCK button
Page 10
It cannot be used for the

SELECT button
It changes the ON/OFF
TIMER and WEEKLY TIMER
settings. Page 20,21,22
8
CONTENTS
Preparation before Operation

To set the batteries
2
Position + and
correctly!
3
1
1. Slide the front cover to take it off.

2. Set 2 dry batteries AAA.LR03 (alkaline).
3. Set the front cover as before.
To fix the remote controller holder on the wall
Remote controller
1. Choose a place from where the signals

reach the unit.
2. Fix the holder to a wall, a pillar, etc. with the

screws supplied with the holder.
Screws
Remote
controller holder
3. Place the remote controller in the remote

controller holder.
NOTE
Notes on batteries
When replacing the batteries, use batteries of the same type, and replace the 2 old batteries together.
When the system is not used for a long time, take the batteries out.
The batteries will last for approx. 1 year. If the remote controller display begins to fade and the degradation of reception performance occurs
within a year, however, replace both 2 batteries with new, size AAA.LR03 (alkaline).
The attached batteries are provided for the initial use of the system.
The usable period of the batteries may be short depending on the manufactured date of the air conditioner.
Notes on remote controller

Never expose the remote controller to direct sunlight.
Dust on the signal transmitter or receiver will reduce the sensitivity. Wipe off dust with soft cloth.
Signal communication may be disabled if an electronic-starter-type fluorescent lamp (such as inverter-type lamps) is in the room. Consult
the shop if that is the case.
If the remote controller signals happen to operate another appliance, move that appliance to somewhere else, or consult the service shop.
9
CONTENTS
Turn the breaker on

After the power is turned on, the flaps of the indoor unit opens and closes once to set
the reference position.
To set the clock
1. Press
2. Press
3. Press
blink.
to set the current day of the week.

.
4. Press
blinks.
to set the clock to the present time.
Holding down
5. Press
is displayed.
and
or
button rapidly increases or decreases the time display.
Point the remote controller at the indoor unit when pressing the buttons.
blinks.
NOTE
Note on setting the clock
If the indoor units internal clock is not set to the correct time, ON/OFF TIMER and WEEKLY TIMER will not operate punctually.
10
CONTENTS
AUTO DRY COOL HEAT

FAN Operation
The air conditioner operates with the operation mode of your choice.
From the next time on, the air conditioner will operate with the same operation mode.
To start operation
1. Press
and select a operation mode.
Each pressing of the button advances the mode setting in sequence.
COOLING ONLY
model
HEAT PUMP
model
2. Press
DRY
COOL
FAN
AUTO
DRY
COOL
HEAT
FAN
is displayed on the LCD.

The OPERATION lamp lights up.
Display
To stop operation
Press
again.
disappears from the LCD.

The OPERATION lamp goes off.
NOTE
MODE
Notes on each operation mode
HEAT
Since this air conditioner heats the room by taking heat from outdoor air to indoors, the heating capacity becomes smaller in
lower outdoor temperatures. If the heating effect is insufficient, it is recommended to use another heating appliance in
combination with the air conditioner.
The heat pump system heats the room by circulating hot air around all parts of the room. After the start of heating
operation, it takes some time before the room gets warmer.
In HEAT operation, frost may occur on the outdoor unit and lower the heating capacity. In that case, the system switches
into defrosting operation to take away the frost.
During defrosting operation, hot air does not flow out of indoor unit.
COOL
This air conditioner cools the room by releasing the heat in the room outside.
Therefore, the cooling performance of the air conditioner may be degraded if the outdoor temperature is high.
DRY
AUTO
FAN
The computer chip works to rid the room of humidity while maintaining the temperature as much as possible. It automatically
controls temperature and airflow rate, so manual adjustment of these functions is unavailable.
In AUTO operation, the system selects an appropriate operation mode (COOL or HEAT) based on the room and outside
temperatures and starts the operation.
The system automatically reselects setting at a regular interval to bring the room temperature to user-setting level.
This mode is valid for fan only.
11
CONTENTS
To change the temperature setting
Press
or
The displayed items on the LCD will change whenever either one of the buttons is
pressed.
COOL mode
HEAT mode
AUTO mode
18 32C
10 30C
18 30C
Press
to raise the temperature and press
temperature.
to lower the
DRY or FAN mode

The temperature setting is
not variable.
Operating conditions
Recommended temperature setting
For cooling: 26C 28C
For heating: 20C 24C
Tips for saving energy

Be careful not to cool (heat) the room too much.
Keeping the temperature setting at a moderate level helps save energy.
Cover windows with a blind or a curtain.
Blocking sunlight and air from outdoors increases the cooling (heating) effect.
Clogged air filters cause inefficient operation and waste energy. Clean them once in about every 2 weeks.
Page 34
Notes on the operating conditions

The air conditioner always consumes a small amount of electricity even while it is not operating.
If you are not going to use the air conditioner for a long period, for example in spring or autumn, turn the breaker off.
Use the air conditioner in the following conditions.
MODE
COOL
Outdoor temperature : 10 to 46C

Indoor temperature : 18 to 32C
Indoor humidity : 80% max.
A safety device may work to stop the operation.

(In multi system, it may work to stop the operation of the outdoor unit only.)
Condensation may occur on the indoor unit and drip.
If operation is continued out of this range
HEAT

DRY


Operation outside this humidity or temperature range may cause a safety device to disable the system.
12
CONTENTS

and Rate
You can adjust the airflow direction to increase your comfort.
To start auto swing

Upper and lower airflow direction
Press

The flaps (horizontal blades) will begin to swing.
Right and left airflow direction
Press

The louvers (vertical blades) will begin to swing.
The 3-D airflow direction
Press
and
and
are displayed on the LCD.
The flaps and louvers move in turn.
To cancel 3-D airflow, press either
or
The flaps or louvers will stop moving.
again.
To set the flaps or louvers at desired position

This function is effective while flaps or louvers are in auto swing mode.
Press
and
when the flaps or
louvers have reached the desired position.
In the 3-D airflow, the flaps and louvers move in turn.
or
13
CONTENTS
To adjust the airflow rate setting
Press
Each pressing of
Auto
advances the airflow rate setting in sequence.
Indoor unit quiet
High
Middle high
Low
Middle low
Middle
When the airflow is set to

, indoor unit quiet operation will start and the noise
from the unit will become quieter.
In indoor unit quiet operation, the airflow rate is set to a weak level.
In DRY mode, the airflow rate setting is not variable.
NOTE
Note on the angles of the flaps
The flaps swinging range depends on the operation mode. (See the figure.)
COOL and DRY operation
HEAT operation
FAN operation
Stop operation
COMFORT 8
AIRFLOW
15
Upper limit 45
Lower limit
Stop operation
30
Upper limit 70
Lower limit
80
COMFORT AIRFLOW
Upper limit 8
80
Lower limit
Stop operation
Note on 3-D airflow

Using 3-D airflow circulates cold air, which tends to collected at the bottom of the room, and hot air, which tends to collect near the ceiling,
throughout the room, preventing areas of cold and hot developing.
Note on airflow rate setting

At smaller airflow rates, the cooling (heating) effect is also smaller.
CAUTION
Always use a remote controller to adjust the angles of the flaps and louvers. If you attempt to move the flaps and louvers forcibly with hand
when they are swinging, the mechanism may be broken.
Always use a remote controller to adjust the louvers angles. Inside the air outlet, a fan is rotating at a high speed.
14
CONTENTS
COMFORT AIRFLOW /
INTELLIGENT EYE Operation
COMFORT AIRFLOW operation
The flow of air will be in the upward direction while in COOL operation and in the downward direction
while in HEAT operation, which will provide a comfortable wind that will not come in direct contact with
people.
COOL operation
HEAT operation
INTELLIGENT EYE operation

INTELLIGENT EYE is the infrared sensor which detects the human movement.
If no one is in the room for more than 20 minutes, the operation automatically changes to energy saving
operation.
[Example]
When someone is in
the room
Normal operation
The air conditioner is in
normal operation while the
sensor is detecting the
movement of people.
When no one is in the

room
20 min. after, start
energy saving
operation.
The set temperature is
shifted in 2C steps.
Someone is back in the

room
Back to normal
operation.
The air conditioner will
return to normal operation
when the sensor detects the
movement of people again.
INTELLIGENT EYE operation is useful for energy saving

Energy saving operation
If no presence detected in the room for 20 minutes, the energy saving operation will start.
This operation changes the temperature 2C in HEAT / +2C in COOL / +2C in DRY mode from set temperature.
This operation decreases the airflow rate slightly in FAN mode only.
Combination COMFORT AIRFLOW and INTELLIGENT EYE operation

The air conditioner can go into operation with the COMFORT AIRFLOW and INTELLIGENT EYE functions
combined.
15
CONTENTS
To start operation
Press
and select the desired mode.
Each time the

is pressed a different setting option is displayed on the LCD.
By selecting
from the following icons, the air conditioner will be in COMFORT
AIRFLOW operation combined with INTELLIGENT EYE operation.
COMFORT
AIRFLOW
INTELLIGENT
EYE
Combination
blank
No Setting
When the flaps (horizontal blades) are swinging, the operating as above will stop
movement of them.
To cancel operation
Press
and select blank on the LCD.
NOTE
Notes on COMFORT AIRFLOW operation
The flap position will change, preventing air from blowing directly on the occupants of the room.
POWERFUL operation and COMFORT AIRFLOW operation cannot be used at the same time.
Priority is given to the function of whichever button is pressed last.
The airflow rate will be set to AUTO. If the upper and lower airflow direction is selected, the COMFORT AIRFLOW function will be canceled.
Notes on INTELLIGENT EYE operation

Application range is as follows.
Vertical angle 90
(Side view)
Horizontal angle 110

(Top view)
55 55
90
Sensor may not detect moving objects further than 7m away. (Check the application range)
Sensor detection sensitivity changes according to indoor unit location, the speed of passersby, temperature range, etc.
The sensor also mistakenly detects pets, sunlight, fluttering curtains and light reflected off of mirrors as passersby.
INTELLIGENT EYE operation will not go on during POWERFUL operation.
NIGHT SET MODE
Page 20 will not go on during use of INTELLIGENT EYE operation.
Notes on combination of COMFORT AIRFLOW operation and INTELLIGENT EYE operation

The airflow rate will be set to AUTO. If the upper and lower airflow direction is selected, the COMFORT AIRFLOW operation will be
canceled.
CAUTION
Do not place large objects near the sensor.
Also keep heating units or humidifiers outside the sensors detection area. This sensor can detect undesirable objects.
Do not hit or violently push the INTELLIGENT EYE sensor. This can lead to damage and malfunction.
16
CONTENTS
POWERFUL Operation
POWERFUL operation quickly maximizes the cooling (heating) effect in any
operation mode. You can get the maximum capacity.
To start POWERFUL operation
Press
during operation.
POWERFUL operation ends in 20 minutes. Then the system automatically operates

again with the previous settings which were used before POWERFUL operation.
To cancel POWERFUL operation
Press
again.
[Example]
Normal operation
When you want to get the
cooling effect quickly, start
the powerful operation.
POWERFUL operation
POWERFUL operation will
work for 20 minutes.
Back to normal
operation
NOTE
Notes on POWERFUL operation
When using POWERFUL operation, there are some functions which are not available.
POWERFUL operation cannot be used together with ECONO, COMFORT AIRFLOW or OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation.
POWERFUL operation can only be set when the unit is running. Pressing
from the LCD.
causes the settings to be canceled, and the
disappears
POWERFUL operation will not increase the capacity of the air conditioner if the air conditioner is already in operation with its maximum
capacity demonstrated.
In COOL, HEAT and AUTO mode
To maximize the cooling (heating) effect, the capacity of outdoor unit is increased and the airflow rate is fixed to the maximum setting.
The temperature and airflow settings are not variable.
In DRY mode
The temperature setting is lowered by 2.5C and the airflow rate is slightly increased.
In FAN mode
The airflow rate is fixed to the maximum setting.
17
CONTENTS
OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET

Operation
OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation lowers the noise level of the outdoor unit by
changing the frequency and fan speed on the outdoor unit. This function is
convenient during the night.
To start OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation
Press
To cancel OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation
Press
[Example]
again.
Using the OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation during the night.
The noise level of the outdoor unit will be lower.

This is convenient when you need to consideration for your neighborhood.
NOTE
Notes on OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation
If using a multi system, the OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation will work only when this function is set on all operated indoor units. However,
if using priority room setting, refer to Note for multi system. Page 28
This function is available in COOL, HEAT, and AUTO mode.
This is not available in FAN and DRY mode.
POWERFUL operation and OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation cannot be used at the same time.
Even the operation is stopped using the remote controller or the main unit ON/OFF switch when using OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation,
will remain on the remote controller display.

OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation will drop neither the frequency nor fan speed if they have been already dropped low enough.
18
CONTENTS
ECONO Operation
ECONO operation is a function which enables efficient operation by limiting the
maximum power consumption value.
This function is useful for cases in which attention should be paid to ensure a
circuit breaker will not trip when the product runs alongside other appliances.
To start ECONO operation
Press
during operation.
To cancel ECONO operation
Press
again.
[Example]
Normal operation
ECONO operation
In case the air conditioner and other

appliances which require high power
consumption are used at same time, a circuit
breaker may trip if the air conditioner operate
with its maximum capacity.
The maximum power consumption of the air

conditioner is limited by using ECONO
operation.
The circuit breaker will hardly trip even if the
air conditioner and other appliances are used
at same time.
Running current and

power consumption
This diagram is a representation for illustrative

purposes only.
The maximum running current and power
consumption of the air conditioner in ECONO
mode vary with the connecting outdoor unit.
Normal
operation
Maximum during
normal operation
Maximum during
ECONO Mode
ECONO
Mode
Time
NOTE
From start up until set temperature is reached
Notes on ECONO operation

ECONO operation can only be set when the unit is running. Pressing
from the LCD.
disappears
ECONO operation is a function which enables efficient operation by limiting the power consumption of the outdoor unit (operating
frequency).
ECONO operation functions in AUTO, COOL, DRY, and HEAT modes.
POWERFUL and ECONO operation cannot be used at the same time.
If the level of power consumption is already low, ECONO operation will not drop the power consumption.
19
CONTENTS
OFF TIMER Operation

Timer functions are useful for automatically switching the air conditioner on or off
at night or in the morning. You can also use OFF TIMER and ON TIMER in
combination.
To use OFF TIMER operation

Check that the clock is correct.
If not, set the clock to the present time.
1. Press
Page 10

blinks.
and day of the week disappear from the LCD.
2. Press
until the time setting reaches the
point you like.

Each pressing of either button increases or decreases the time setting by 10 minutes.
Holding down either button changes the time setting rapidly.
3. Press
again.
and setting time are displayed on the LCD.

The TIMER lamp lights up.
Display
To cancel OFF TIMER operation
Press
and setting time disappear from the LCD.

and day of the week are displayed on the LCD.
The TIMER lamp goes off.
NOTE
Notes on TIMER operation
When TIMER is set, the present time is not displayed.
Once you set ON/OFF TIMER, the time setting is kept in the memory. The memory is canceled when remote controller batteries are
replaced.
When operating the unit via the ON/OFF timer, the actual length of operation may vary from the time entered by the user. (Maximum approx.
10 minutes)
NIGHT SET MODE

When the OFF TIMER is set, the air conditioner automatically adjusts the temperature setting (0.5C up in COOL, 2.0C down in HEAT) to
prevent excessive cooling (heating) for your pleasant sleep.
20
CONTENTS
ON TIMER Operation
To use ON TIMER operation
1. Press
Page 10

blinks.
2. Press

point you like.
Holding down either button changes the setting rapidly.
3. Press
again.

Display
To cancel ON TIMER operation
Press

To combine ON TIMER and OFF TIMER

A sample setting for combining the 2 timers is shown below.
(Example)
Present time: 23:00 (The unit operating)
OFF TIMER at 0:00
Combined
ON TIMER at 14:00
NOTE
In the following cases, set the timer again.
After a breaker has turned off.
After a power failure.
After replacing batteries in the remote controller.
21
CONTENTS
WEEKLY TIMER Operation

Up to 4 timer settings can be saved for each day of the week. It is convenient if the WEEKLY TIMER is set
according to the familys life style.
Using in these cases of WEEKLY TIMER

Example: The same timer settings are made for the week from Monday through Friday while different timer settings are
made for the weekend.
[Monday]
Make timer settings up to programs 1-4.
Page 23
Program 1
Program 2
Program 3
ON
OFF
ON
Program 4
OFF
25C
27C
6:00
8:30
ON
[Tuesday]
to
[Friday]
17:30
OFF
22:00
ON
OFF
Use the copy mode to make settings for Tuesday to Friday, because these settings are the same as
those for Monday. Page 25
Program 1
Program 2
Program 3
ON
OFF
ON
Program 4
OFF
25C
27C
6:00
[Saturday]
[Sunday]
8:30
17:30
22:00
No timer settings
Page 23
Program 1
Program 2
Program 3
Program 4
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
25C
8:00
ON
27C
10:00
OFF
27C
19:00
OFF
21:00
ON
Up to 4 reservations per day and 28 reservations per week can be set in the WEEKLY TIMER. The effective use of the
copy mode ensures ease of making reservations.
The use of ON-ON-ON-ON settings, for example, makes it possible to schedule operating mode and set temperature
changes. Furthermore, by using OFF-OFF-OFF-OFF settings, only the turn off time of each day can be set. This will turn
off the air conditioner automatically if the user forgets to turn it off.
22
CONTENTS

To use WEEKLY TIMER operation
Setting mode
Make sure the day of the week and time are set. If not, set the day of the week and time.
Page 10
Program 1
Program 2
ON
OFF
[Monday]
Program 3
Program 4
ON
25C
OFF
27C
6:00
8:30
17:30
22:00
Setting Displays
Day and number settings
1. Press
ON/OFF settings
Time settings
Temperature settings
The day of the week and the reservation number of the current day will be displayed.
1 to 4 settings can be made per day.
2. Press
to select the desired day of the

week and reservation number.
Pressing
3. Press
changes the reservation number and the day of the week.
The day of the week and reservation number will be set.
and blink.
4. Press
Pressing
ON TIMER
to select the desired mode.

changes
OFF TIMER
or
setting in sequence.
blank
In case the reservation has already been set, selecting blank deletes the
reservation.
Go to STEP 9 if blank is selected.
5. Press
The ON/OFF TIMER mode will be set.
and the time blink.
23
CONTENTS
6. Press
to select the desired time.
The time can be set between 0:00 and 23:50 in 10 minute intervals.
To return to the ON/OFF TIMER mode setting, press
.
Go to STEP 9 when setting the OFF TIMER.
7. Press
The time will be set.
and the temperature blink.
8. Press
to select the desired temperature.
The temperature can be set between 10C and 32C.

Cooling: The unit operates at 18C even if it is set at 10 to 17C.
Heating: The unit operates at 30C even if it is set at 31 to 32C.
To return to the time setting, press
.
The set temperature is only displayed when the mode setting is on.
9. Press
The temperature will be set and go to the next reservation setting.

To continue further settings, repeat the procedure from STEP 4.
10. Press
to complete the setting.
Be sure to direct the remote controller toward the indoor unit and check for a receiving
tone and flashing the operation lamp.
is displayed on the LCD and WEEKLY TIMER operation is activated.

Display
A reservation made once can be easily copied and the same settings used for another
day of the week. Refer to Copy mode . Page 25
NOTE
Notes on WEEKLY TIMER operation
Do not forget to set the clock on the remote controller first.
Page 10
The day of the week, ON/OFF TIMER mode, time and set temperature (only for ON TIMER mode) can be set with WEEKLY TIMER.
Other settings for ON TIMER are based on the settings just before the operation.
Both WEEKLY TIMER and ON/OFF TIMER operation cannot be used at the same time. The ON/OFF TIMER operation has priority if it is set
while WEEKLY TIMER is still active. The WEEKLY TIMER will go into standby state, and
will disappear from the LCD. When
ON/OFF TIMER is up, the WEEKLY TIMER will automatically become active.
Only the time and set temperature with the WEEKLY TIMER are sent with the
operation mode, the airflow rate and the airflow direction ahead of time.
. Set the WEEKLY TIMER only after setting the
Shutting the breaker off, power failure, and other similar events will render operation of the indoor units internal clock inaccurate. Reset the
clock. Page 10
The
can be used only for the time and temperature settings. It cannot be used to go back to the reservation number.
24
CONTENTS

Copy mode
A reservation made once can be copied to another day of the week. The whole reservation
of the selected day of the week will be copied.
Program 1
Program 2
ON
OFF
[Monday]
Program 3
Program 4
ON
25C
OFF
27C
6:00
8:30
17:30
22:00
COPY
Program 1
Program 2
ON
OFF
[Tuesday]
to
[Friday]
Program 3
Program 4
ON
25C
OFF
27C
6:00
8:30
17:30
22:00
Setting Displays
Confirmation display
1. Press
Copy display
Paste display
Normal display
2. Press
to confirm the day of the week to be
copied.
3. Press
The whole reservation of the selected day of the week will be copied.
4. Press
5. Press
to select the destination day of the week.

.
The reservation will be copied to the selected day of the week. The whole reservation
To continue copying the settings to other days of the week, repeat STEP 4 and
STEP 5.
6. Press

NOTE
Note on COPY MODE
The entire reservation of the source day of the week is copied in the copy mode.
In the case of making a reservation change for any day of the week individually after copying the content of weekly reservations, press
and change the settings in the steps of Setting mode . Page 23
25
CONTENTS
Confirming a reservation
The reservation can be confirmed.
Setting Displays
Normal display
1. Press
The day of the week and the reservation number of current day will be displayed.
2. Press
to select the day of the week and

the reservation number to be confirmed.
Pressing
displays the reservation details.
To change the confirmed reserved settings, select the reservation number and press
.
The mode is switched to setting mode. Go to Setting mode STEP 4. Page 23
3. Press
to exit confirming mode.

Display
To deactivate WEEKLY TIMER operation
Press
the LCD.
while
is displayed on

again.
To reactivate the WEEKLY TIMER operation, press
If a reservation deactivated with
is activated once again, the last reservation
mode will be used.
26CONTENTS

To delete reservations
The individual reservation
1. Press
The day of the week and the reservation number will be displayed.
2. Press

the reservation number to be deleted.
3. Press
.
and
4. Press
Pressing
or
blink.
and select blank .

changes ON/OFF TIMER mode.
The reservation will be no setting with selecting blank.
ON TIMER
OFF TIMER
5. Press
blank
The selected reservation will be deleted.
6. Press
If there are still other reservations, WEEKLY TIMER operation will be activated.
The reservations for each day of the week

This function can be used for deleting reservations for each day of the week.
It can be used while confirming or setting reservations.
1. Press
to select the day of the week to be
deleted.
2. Hold
for 5 seconds.
The reservation of the selected day of the week will be deleted.
All reservations
Hold
for 5 seconds while normal display.
Be sure to direct the remote controller toward the indoor unit and check for a receiving tone.
This operation is not effective on the setting display of WEEKLY TIMER.
All reservations will be deleted.
27
CONTENTS
Note for Multi System

Multi system has one outdoor unit connected to multiple indoor units.
Selecting the operation mode

With the priority room setting present but
inactive or not present.
When more than one indoor unit is operating, priority is given to
the first unit that was turned on.
In this case, set the units that are turned on later to the same
operation mode as the first unit.
Otherwise, they will enter the standby state, and the operation
lamp will flash: this does not indicate malfunction.
A room
B room
C room
D room
Outdoor unit
NOTE
Notes on operation mode for multi system
COOL, DRY and FAN mode may be used at the same time.
AUTO mode automatically selects COOL mode or HEAT mode based on the room temperature.
Therefore, AUTO mode is available when selecting the same operation mode as that of the room with the first unit to be turned on.
CAUTION
Normally, the operation mode in the room where the unit is first run is given priority, but the following situations are exceptions, so please keep
this in mind.
If the operation mode of the first room is FAN mode, then using HEAT mode in any room after this will give priority to HEAT. In this situation,
the air conditioner running in FAN mode will go on standby, and the operation lamp will flash.
With the priority room setting active.

Refer to Priority room setting on the next page.
NIGHT QUIET mode (Available only for COOL operation)

NIGHT QUIET mode requires initial programming during installation. Please consult your retailer or dealer for assistance.
NIGHT QUIET mode reduces the operation noise of the outdoor unit during the nighttime hours to prevent annoyance to
neighbors.
The NIGHT QUIET mode is activated when the temperature drops 5C or more below the highest temperature recorded that day.
Therefore, when the temperature difference is less than 5C, this function will not be activated.
NIGHT QUIET mode reduces slightly the cooling efficiency of the unit.

Refer to OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation.
Page 18
With the priority room setting present but inactive or not present.
When using the OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation feature with the Multi system, set all indoor units to OUTDOOR UNIT
QUIET operation using their remote controllers.
When clearing OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation, clear one of the operating indoor units using their remote controller.
However OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation display remains on the remote controller for other rooms.
We recommend you release all rooms using their remote controllers.

28CONTENTS

COOL / HEAT mode lock
The COOL / HEAT mode lock requires initial programming during installation. Please consult your authorized dealer for
assistance. The COOL / HEAT mode lock sets the unit forcibly to either COOL or HEAT mode. This function is convenient
when you wish to set all indoor units connected to the multi system to the same operation mode.
Priority room setting

The priority room setting requires initial programming during installation. Please consult your authorized dealer for assistance.
The room designated as the priority room takes priority in the following situations.
Operation mode priority

As the operation mode of the priority room takes precedence, the user can select a different operation mode from other
rooms.
[Example]
Room A is the priority room in the examples.
When COOL mode is selected in room A while operating the following modes in room B, C and D :
Operation mode in room B, C and D
COOL or DRY or FAN
Status of room B, C and D when the unit in room A is in COOL mode

Current operation mode maintained
HEAT
The unit enters standby mode. Operation resumes when the room A unit stops operating.
AUTO
If the unit is set to COOL mode, operation continues. If the unit is set to HEAT mode, it enters
standby mode. Operation resumes when the room A unit stops operating.
Priority when POWERFUL operation is used

[Example]
The indoor units in rooms A, B, C and D are all operating. If the unit in room A enters POWERFUL operation, operation
capacity will be concentrated in room A. In such a case, the COOL (HEAT) efficiency of the units in room B, C and D may
be slightly reduced.
Priority when using OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation

[Example]
Just by setting the unit in room A to QUIET operation, the air conditioner starts OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation.
You dont have to set all the operated indoor units to QUIET operation.
29
CONTENTS
Care and Cleaning

Quick reference
How to open / close the front panel
Hold the front panel by the panel tabs on the 2 sides and open it.
Press the front panel at both sides and the center to close it.
Cleaning parts
Panel tab
Air filter
Vacuum dust or
wash the filter.
Front panel
Wipe it with softy cloth soak
in water.
Once every
2 weeks
Refer to
If bothered by dirt
Page 32
Refer to
Titanium apatite photocatalytic air-purifying filter

Vacuum dust or replace the filter.
[Cleaning]
[Replacement]
Once every 6 months

Refer to
Once every 3 years
Page 33
Refer to
Page 33
Page 31
Indoor unit,
Outdoor unit and
Remote controller
Wipe them with soft cloth.
If bothered by dirt
Notes on cleaning
For cleaning, do not use the materials as follows.
Hot water above 40C.
Benzine, gasoline, thinner, other volatile oils.
Polishing compound.
Scrubbing brushes, other hard stuff.
CAUTION
Before cleaning, be sure to stop the operation and turn the breaker off.
Do not touch the aluminum fins of the indoor unit. If you touch those parts, this may cause an injury.
30CONTENTS
Care and Cleaning

Front panel
1. Remove the front panel.

Open the front panel.
Slide the front panel to either the left or right and
pulling it toward you.
This will disconnect the front panel shaft on one
side.
2. Clean the front panel.

Wipe it with a soft cloth soaked in water.
Only neutral detergent may be used.
In case of washing the panel with water, wipe it
with dry soft cloth, dry it up in the shade after
washing.
3. Attach the front panel.
2) Pull
Align the front panel shaft on the left and right of

the front panel with the slots, then push them all
the way in.
Front panel shaft

1) Slide
Front panel
shaft
2) Pull
1) Slide
Slot
Disconnect the front panel shaft on the other

side in the same manner.
Close the front panel slowly. (Press the panel at

both sides and the center.)
CAUTION
When removing or attaching the front panel, use a robust and stable stool and watch your steps carefully.
When removing or attaching the front panel, support the panel securely with hand to prevent it from falling.
After cleaning, make sure that the front panel is securely fixed.
31
CONTENTS
Air filter
1. Pull out the air filters.

Push a little upwards the filter tab at the center of
each air filter, then pull it down.
If the dust does not come off easily

Wash the air filters with neutral detergent thinned with
lukewarm water, then dry them up in the shade.
Be sure to remove the titanium apatite photocatalytic
air-purifying filter. Refer to Titanium apatite
photocatalytic air-purifying filter on the next page.
1) Push
3. Set the filters as they were

and close the front panel.
2) Pull down
2. Wash the air filters with
water or clean them with

vacuum cleaner.
It is recommended to clean the air filters every
2 weeks.
CAUTION
Do not touch the aluminum fins by bare hand at the time of dismounting or mounting the filter.
32
CONTENTS
Care and Cleaning

1. Take off the titanium
apatite photocatalytic airpurifying filter.

Open the front panel and pull out the air filters.
Hold the recessed parts of the frame and unhook
the 4 claws.
[Replacement]
Remove the tabs on the filter
frame and replace with a new
filter.
Do not throw away the filter frame. Reuse the

filter frame when replacing the titanium apatite
photocatalytic air-purifying filter.
Dispose of the old filter as non-flammable waste.
Claw

2. Clean or replace the titanium

[Maintenance]
2-1 Vacuum dusts, and soak in
lukewarm water or water for about
10 to 15 minutes if dirt is heavy.
Do not remove the filter from frame when
washing with water.
NOTE
2-2 After washing, shake off remaining

water and dry in the shade.
Since the material is made out of polyester, do
not wring out the filter when removing water from
it.
33
Operation with dirty filters:

cannot deodorize the air,
cannot clean the air,
results in poor heating or cooling,
may cause odour.
Dispose of old filters as non-flammable waste.
To order titanium apatite photocatalytic air-purifying
filter contact to the service shop there you bought the
air conditioner.
Item

air-purifying filter (without frame) 1 set
Part No.
KAF970A46
CONTENTS
Check the units

Check that the base, stand and other fittings of the outdoor unit are not decayed or corroded.
Check that nothing blocks the air inlets and the outlets of the indoor unit and the outdoor unit.
Check that the drain comes smoothly out of the drain hose during COOL or DRY operation.
If no drain water is seen, water may be leaking from the indoor unit. Stop operation and consult the service shop if this is the
case.
Before a long idle period
1. Operate the FAN only for several hours on a fine day to dry
out the inside.
Press
Press
and select
operation.
and start the operation.
2. After operation stops, turn off the breaker for the room air
conditioner.
3. Clean the air filters and set them again.

4. Take out batteries from the remote controller.
When a multi outdoor unit is connected, make sure the heating operation is not used at the other room before you
use the fan operation. Page 28
34
CONTENTS
Troubleshooting
These cases are not troubles.
The following cases are not air conditioner troubles but have some reasons. You may just continue using it.
Indoor unit
The flaps do not start swing

immediately.
The air conditioner is adjusting the flap position. The
flap will start moving soon.
The HEAT operation stops suddenly

and a flowing sound is heard.
The outdoor unit is taking away the frost.
The HEAT operation starts after the frost on the
outdoor unit is removed. You should wait for about
4 to 12 minutes.
Operation does not start soon.

When ON/OFF button was pressed soon
after operation was stopped.
When the mode was reselected.
A sound is heard.
A sound like a flow of water
This sound is generated because the refrigerant in
the air conditioner is flowing.
This is a pumping sound of the water in the air
conditioner it is heard when the water is pumped out
from the air conditioner in cooling or drying operation.
The refrigerant flows in the air conditioner even if the
air conditioner is not working when the indoor units in
other rooms are in operation.
Blowing sound
This sound is generated when the flow of the
refrigerant in the air conditioner is switched over.
Pinging sound
This sound is generated when the size of the air
conditioner slightly expands or shrinks as a result of
temperature changes.
This is to protect the air conditioner.

You should wait for about 3 minutes.
Outdoor unit
The outdoor unit emits water or steam.

In HEAT mode
The frost on the outdoor unit melts into water or steam when the air
conditioner is in defrost operation.
In COOL or DRY mode

Moisture in the air condenses into water on the cool surface of outdoor
unit piping and drips.
35
CONTENTS
Troubleshooting measures are classified into the following two types on a remedial basis.
Take an appropriate measure according to the symptom.
Not trouble
Check
Please check again before calling a repair person.
The air conditioner does not operate.

(OPERATION lamp is off.)
Operation stopped suddenly.

(OPERATION lamp flashes.)
Are the air filters clean?

Clean the air filters.
Is there anything to block the air inlet or the outlet of
the indoor and the outdoor units?
Turn the bleaker off and take all obstacles away. Then
turn it on again and try operating the air conditioner
with the remote controller. If the lamp still flashes, call
the service shop where you bought the air conditioner.
Are operation modes all the same for indoor units
connected to outdoor units in the multi system?
If not, set all indoor units to the same operation mode
and confirm that the lamps flash.
When the operation mode is in AUTO, set all indoor
unit operation modes to COOL or HEAT for a
moment and check again that the lamps are normal. If
the lamps stop flashing after the above steps, there is
no malfunction. Page 28
Hasnt a breaker turned off or a fuse blown?

Isnt it a power failure?
Are batteries set in the remote controller?
Is the timer setting correct?
Hot air does not flow out soon after

the start of heating operation.
The air conditioner is warming up. You should wait for
1 to 4 minutes. (The system is designed to start
discharging air only after it has reached a certain
temperature.)

(OPERATION lamp is on.)
For system protection, the air conditioner may stop
operating on a sudden large voltage fluctuation. It
automatically resumes operation in about 3 minutes.
Mist comes out of the indoor unit.

This happens when the air in the room is cooled into
mist by the cold airflow during COOL operation.
This is because the air in the room is cooled by the
heat exchanger and becomes mist during defrosting
operation.
36
CONTENTS
Troubleshooting
Cooling (Heating) effect is poor.
Is the temperature setting appropriate?
Are the windows and doors closed?
Are the airflow rate and the airflow direction set
appropriately?
The ON/OFF TIMER does not

operate according to the settings.
Check if the ON/OFF TIMER and the WEEKLY TIMER
are set to the same time.
Change or deactivate the settings in the WEEKLY
TIMER. Page 22
The indoor unit gives out odour.

Remote controller does not work
properly.
No remote controller signals are displayed.
The remote controller sensitivity is low.
The display is low in contrast or blacked out.
The display runs out of control.
This happens when smells of the room, furniture, or

cigarettes are absorbed into the unit and discharged
with the airflow.
(If this happens, we recommend you to have the
indoor unit washed by a technician. Consult the
service shop where you bought the air conditioner.)
The batteries are dying and the remote controller is

malfunctioning. Replace all the batteries with new, size
AAA.LR03 (alkaline). For details, refer to To set the
batteries of this manual. Page 9
The outdoor fan rotates while the

air conditioner is not in operation.
After operation is stopped
Heating cannot be selected, even

though the unit is heat pump model.
Slide the DIP switch to the left as shown in the
illustration so that the heating mode can be selected
with the mode selector button.
The outdoor fan continues rotating for another

60 seconds for system protection.
While the air conditioner is not in operation

When the outdoor temperature is very high, the
outdoor fan starts rotating for system protection.
Dipswitches
Heating side
An abnormal functioning happens

during operation.
The air conditioner may malfunction with lightning or
radio waves. Turn the breaker off, turn it on again and
try operating the air conditioner with the remote
controller.
37
CONTENTS
Call the service shop immediately
WARNING
When an abnormality (such as a burning smell) occurs, stop operation and turn the breaker off.
Continued operation in an abnormal condition may result in troubles, electric shocks or fire.
Consult the service shop where you bought the air conditioner.
Do not attempt to repair or modify the air conditioner by yourself.
Incorrect work may result in electric shocks or fire.
If one of the following symptoms takes place, call the service shop immediately.
The power cord is abnormally hot or damaged.
An abnormal sound is heard during operation.
The safety breaker, a fuse, or the earth leakage breaker
cuts off the operation frequently.
Turn the breaker off and call the service shop.
A switch or a button often fails to work properly.

There is a burning smell.
Water leaks from the indoor unit.
After a power failure

The air conditioner automatically resumes operation in about 3 minutes. You should just wait for a while.
Lightning
If lightning may strike the neighbouring area, stop operation and turn the breaker off for system protection.
Disposal requirements
Dismantling of the unit, treatment of the refrigerant, oil and eventual other parts, should be done in accordance with the
relevant local and national regulations.
We recommend periodical maintenance

In certain operating conditions, the inside of the air conditioner may get foul after several seasons of use, resulting in poor
performance. It is recommended to have periodical maintenance by a specialist aside from regular cleaning by the user.
For specialist maintenance, contact the service shop where you bought the air conditioner.
The maintenance cost must be born by the user.
38
CONTENTS
Quick Reference
Two-dimensional bar code is a code

for manufacturing.
3P266959-1 M09B393
CONTENTS
This Warranty applies to domestic and Sky Air products

purchased and installed in Australia.
repaired or replaced if the goods fail to be of acceptable quality and the
failure does not amount to a major failure. Your Australian Consumer
Law guarantees, and similar statutory rights, are called the Owners
Statutory Rights in this Warranty.
THE RIGHTS GIVEN BY THE DAIKIN AUSTRALIA 5 YEAR
WARRANTY ARE IN ADDITION TO THE OWNERS STATUTORY
RIGHTS.
CONTENTS
The Daikin equipment listed on the back of this card is warranted by Daikin Australia Pty Limited
(ABN 62 000 172 967) (Daikin Australia) against defects in design, materials and
workmanship for a period of 5 years from the date the equipment is purchased by the original
owner.
Equipment defects covered by this Warranty will be repaired or replaced at the discretion of
Daikin Australia (subject to the Owners rights under the Australian Consumer Law with respect
to major failures) without cost to the owner for parts or direct repair labour. The repair or
replacement shall be performed during normal business hours by Daikin Australia or a repair
agent authorised by Daikin Australia.
Any Daikin parts or Daikin equipment replaced under this Warranty will be warranted in
accordance with the provisions of this Warranty for the remainder of the original warranty period
or 12 months from the completion of the repair, whichever is the greater.
Except where inconsistent with the Owners Statutory Rights and the rights given by this
Warranty, all other warranties and all liability of Daikin Australia for any loss or damage direct
and consequential is expressly excluded.
This Warranty DOES NOT cover:a)
Damage or problems or unsatisfactory performance caused to the equipment by faulty

or incorrect external electrical wiring, incorrect power supply, voltage fluctuations, over
voltage transients or electromagnetic interference not originating within the equipment.
b)
Damage or problems resulting from incorrect or poor installation.
c)
Damage or problems caused by the use of an accessory, component or equipment not

supplied by Daikin Australia.
d)
Damage or problems caused by storm, fire, flood, vandalism, misuse, negligence, Acts
of God, earthquake, war, vermin, foreign matter entering the equipment (e.g. dirt and
moisture) or any other outside agency.
e)
Damage or deterioration to the external surfaces or refrigeration coils caused by normal

weathering or corrosive atmospheric conditions.
f)
Any costs or additional labour associated with gaining acceptable service access to
equipment installed in restricted or unsafe (e.g. high) locations.
g)
Freight charges (including insurance) or travelling cost for repairs performed outside the
area normally serviced by Daikin Australia or a repair agent authorised by Daikin
Australia.
h)
Equipment which has been installed in a transportable or mobile application (e.g.

caravan or boat).
i)
Equipment which has been re-installed in a transportable or mobile application (eg

caravan or boat).
j)
Equipment which has been re-installed at a location other than the original location.
k)
Any consumable item (e.g. batteries, filters, belts) supplied with the equipment unless
the item is shown to be defective at the time of purchase.
page 2
CONTENTS
l)
Damage or problems or unsatisfactory performance resulting from operation in an

environment where the climatic comfort of humans is not the primary function of the
equipment.
m)
Damage or problems or unsatisfactory performance resulting from operations at

conditions outside the operating conditions specified in the Daikin technical or sales
literature applicable to the equipment.
n)
Damage, problems or unsatisfactory performance resulting from misapplication of the

equipment.
Where this Warranty does not apply, the Owners rights are limited to the Owners nonexcludable Statutory Rights.
Owners Responsibility
The owner is responsible for the correct operation and regular maintenance of the equipment as
listed below. The correction of any non product fault or problem is not covered by this warranty.
a)
Operation and maintenance of the equipment in accordance with the operating

instructions.
b)
Regular cleaning of the air filter(s) and replacement where necessary.
c)
Ensuring that the air inlet and outlet on the outdoor unit is kept clear of any obstructions
(e.g. dirt, leaves, plants)
d)
Ensuring that the condensate drain is kept clean.
e)
Replacement of exhausted batteries.
f)
The application of additional corrosion protection if the product is installed in a corrosive

environment (e.g. Industrial pollution, sea air).
Owners Statutory Rights

In respect of any goods supplied under the contract which are not of a kind ordinarily acquired
for personal domestic or household use or consumption, unless the owner establishes the
following limitation of liability would not be fair and reasonable, the liability of Daikin Australia for
any defect of design, materials or workmanship will be limited to any of the following as
determined by Daikin Australia:a)
replacing the equipment or supplying equivalent equipment;
b)
repairing the equipment;
c)
paying the cost of replacing the equipment or acquiring equivalent equipment;
d)
paying the cost of having the equipment repaired.
page 3
CONTENTS
Please complete the details below and store this card along with the purchase docket in
a safe place. To receive repair under Warranty both this card and the purchase docket
must be presented.
Outdoor Unit
Model No. ................................. Serial No. ..................................
Indoor Unit(s)

Controller(s)
Model No. .................................
Supplied by
................................................... Phone No. .................................
Installed by
...................................................
Owners Name
.........................................................................................................
Address
.........................................................................................................
Date .............................
Important Note
For repair of equipment under this Warranty it is recommended that the owner contact their
Daikin Dealer / Installer. If the owner requests Daikin Australia to perform or arrange the service
call, the owner will be liable for all associated costs if the problem is not covered by the
provisions of this Warranty or the Owners Statutory Rights.
DAIKIN AUSTRALIA PTY LTD

A.B.N. 62 000 172 967
62-66 Governor Macquarie Drive, Chipping Norton, NSW 2170, Australia
CUSTOMER SERVICE: 1300 787 266
www.daikin.com.au
Part No. DADW0203
page 4
CONTENTS
(ii)
Sp l i t S y s t e m - F T X S 5 0 - 7 1 S e r i e s
CONTENTS
DAIKIN ROOM AIR CONDITIONER
OPERATION MANUAL
MODELS
FTXS50KVMA
FTXS60KVMA
FTXS71KVMA
FTKS50KVMA
FTKS60KVMA
FTKS71KVMA
CONTENTS
Feature
For your comfort and energy

saving
INTELLIGENT EYE
The INTELLIGENT EYE sensor detects the human movement in
a room. If no one is room for more than 20 minutes, the
operation automatically changes to energy saving operation.
Page 15
WEEKLY TIMER
Up to 4 timer settings can be saved for each day of the week
according to your familys life style. The WEEKLY TIMER allows
you to set on/off time and the desired temperature.
Page 22
Other functions
COMFORT AIRFLOW
OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET
The airflow direction will be in upward

while in COOL operation, in downward
while in HEAT operation. This function
will prevent cold or warm air from
Page 15
directly blowing on your body.

lowers the noise level of the outdoor
unit. This function is useful when you
need to consideration for your
Page 18
neighborhood.
CONTENTS
Contents
Read before Operation
Safety Precautions ......................................... 3
Name of Parts ................................................. 5
Preparation before Operation ......................... 9
Operation
AUTO DRY COOL HEAT FAN
Operation ........................................... 11
and Rate ............................................ 13
COMFORT AIRFLOW /
INTELLIGENT EYE Operation ........... 15
POWERFUL Operation ...................... 17
OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET
Operation ........................................... 18
ECONO Operation ............................. 19
OFF TIMER Operation ....................... 20
ON TIMER Operation ........................ 21
WEEKLY TIMER Operation ............... 22
Multi Connection
Note for Multi System .................................. 28
Care
Care and Cleaning ....................................... 30
ECONO
This function enables efficient operation
by limiting the maximum power
consumption. It is useful when using the
air conditioner and other electrical
Page 19
devices simultaneously.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting ........................................... 35
2
CONTENTS
Safety Precautions
Keep this manual where the operator can easily find it.
Read the precautions in this manual carefully before operating the unit.
The precautions described herein are classified as WARNING and CAUTION. They both contain important information
regarding safety. Be sure to observe all precautions without fail.
WARNING
Failure to follow these instructions properly may result in
personal injury or loss of life.
Never attempt.
CAUTION
Failure to observe these instructions properly may result in
property damage or personal injury, which may be serious
depending on the circumstances.
Never wet the air conditioner nor the remote controller with
water.
Be sure to follow the instructions.
Be sure to establish an earth connection.
Never touch the air conditioner nor the remote controller with
wet hands.
After reading, keep this manual in a convenient place so that you can refer to it whenever necessary. If the equipment is
transferred to a new user, be sure also to hand over the manual.
WARNING
In order to avoid fire, explosion or injury, do not operate the unit when harmful, among which flammable or corrosive
gases, are detected near the unit.
Be aware that prolonged, direct exposure to cool or warm air from the air conditioner, or to air that is too cool or too
warm can be harmful to your physical condition and health.
Do not place objects, including rods, your fingers, etc., in the air inlet or outlet. Product malfunctioning, product or
injury damage may result due to contact with the air conditioners high-speed fan blades.
Do not attempt to repair, dismantle, reinstall or modify the air conditioner yourself as this may result in water leakage,
electric shocks or fire hazards.
Do not use flammable spray near the air conditioner, or otherwise fire may result.
Beware of fire in case of refrigerant leakage. If the air conditioner is not operating correctly, i.e. not generating cool or
warm air, refrigerant leakage could be the cause. Consult your dealer for assistance. The refrigerant within the air
conditioner is safe and normally does not leak.
However, in the event of a leakage, contact with a naked burner, heater or cooker may result in generation of noxious
gas. Do not longer use the air conditioner until a qualified service person confirms that the leakage has been
repaired.
Do not attempt to install or repair the air conditioner yourself. Improper workmanship may result in water leakage,
electric shocks or fire hazards. Please contact your local dealer or qualified personnel for installation and
maintenance work.
When the air conditioner is malfunctioning (giving off a burning odour, etc.) turn off power to the unit and contact your
local dealer. Continued operation under such circumstances may result in a failure, electric shocks or fire hazards.
Be sure to install an earth leakage breaker. Failure to install the earth leakage breaker may result in electric shocks or fire.
Be sure to earth the unit. Do not earth the unit to a utility pipe, lightning conductor or telephone earth lead. Imperfect
earthing may result in electric shocks.
CAUTION
Do not use the air conditioner for purposes other than those for which it is intended. Do not use the air conditioner for
cooling precision instruments, food, plants, animals or works of art as this may adversely affect the performance,
quality and/or longevity of the object concerned.
Do not expose plants or animals directly to airflow from the unit as this may cause adverse effects.
Do not place appliances that produce naked flames in places exposed to the airflow from the unit as this may impair
combustion of the burner.
CONTENTS
CAUTION
Do not block air inlets nor outlets. Impaired airflow may result in insufficient performance or trouble.
Do not sit on the outdoor unit, put things on the unit, or pull the unit. Doing so may cause accidents, such as falling or
toppling down, thus resulting in injury, product malfunctioning, or product damage.
Do not place objects that are susceptible to moisture directly beneath the indoor or outdoor units. Under certain
conditions, condensation on the main unit or refrigerant pipes, air filter dirt or drain blockage may cause dripping,
resulting in fouling or failure of the object concerned.
After prolonged use, check the unit stand and its mounts for damage. If they are left in a damaged condition, the unit
may fall and cause injury.
To avoid injury, do not touch the air inlet or aluminum fins of the indoor or outdoor units.
This appliance is not intended for use by persons (including children) with reduced physical, sensory or mental
capabilities, or lack of experience and knowledge, unless they have been given supervision or instruction concerning
use of the appliance by a person responsible for their safety.
Children should be supervised to ensure that they do not play with the unit or its remote controller. Accidental
operation by a child may result in impairment of bodily functions and harm health.
Do not give impact to the indoor and outdoor units, or otherwise product damage may result.
Do not place flammable items, such as spray cans, within 1 meter of the air outlet.
The spray cans may explode as a result of hot air from the indoor or outdoor units.
Be careful not to let pets urinate on the air conditioner. Urination on the air conditioner may result in electric shocks or fire.
To avoid oxygen depletion, ensure that the room is adequately ventilated if equipment such as a burner is used
together with the air conditioner.
Before cleaning, be sure to stop unit operation, turn the breaker off or remove the power cord. Otherwise, an electric
shock and injury may result.
Only connect the air conditioner to the specified power supply circuit. Power supplies other than the one specified
may result in electric shocks, overheating and fires.
Arrange the drain hose to ensure smooth drainage. Imperfect drainage may cause wetting of the building, furniture etc.
Do not place objects in direct proximity of the outdoor unit and do not let leaves and other debris accumulate around
the unit. Leaves are a hotbed for small animals which can enter the unit. Once in the unit, such animals can cause
malfunctions, smoke or fire when making contact with electrical parts.
Do not place objects around the indoor unit.
Doing so may have an adverse influence on the performance, product quality, and life of the air conditioner.
To avoid electric shocks, do not operate with wet hands.
Do not wash the air conditioner with water, as this may result in electric shocks or fire.
Do not place water containers (vases etc.) above the unit, as this may result in electric shocks or fire hazards.
Installation site.
To install the air conditioner in the following types of environments, consult the dealer.
Places with an oily ambient or where steam or soot occurs.

Salty environment such as coastal areas.
Places where sulfide gas occurs such as hot springs.
Places where snow may block the outdoor unit.
The indoor unit is at least 1 meter away from any television or radio set (unit may cause interference with the picture or sound).
The drain from the outdoor unit must be discharged to a place of good drainage.
Consider nuisance to your neighbours from noises.

For installation, choose a place as described below.
A place solid enough to bear the weight of the unit which does not amplify the operation noise or vibration.
A place from where the air discharged from the outdoor unit or the operation noise will not annoy your neighbours.
Electrical work.
For power supply, be sure to use a separate power circuit dedicated to the air conditioner.
System relocation.
Relocating the air conditioner requires specialized knowledge and skills. Please consult the dealer if relocation is
necessary for moving or remodeling.
4
CONTENTS
Name of Parts
Indoor Unit
Air inlet
Front panel
Panel tab
INTELLIGENT EYE
sensor
It detects the movements of
people and automatically
switches between normal
operation and energy saving
operation. Page 15
Model name
plate
Air outlet
Room temperature
sensor
Louvers (vertical blades)

The louvers are inside of the air
outlet. Page 13
It detects the air temperature

around the unit.
Flaps (horizontal blades)

Page 13
Display
Operation lamp (green)
Signal receiver
TIMER lamp (yellow)
It receives signals from the remote

controller.
When the unit receives a signal, you
will hear a beep sound.
Page 20,21
INTELLIGENT EYE lamp

(green) Page 15
Case
Sound type
Operation start
beep-beep
Setting changed
beep
Operation stop
long beep
Indoor unit ON/OFF switch

Press this switch once to start operation.
Press once again to stop it.
The operation mode refer to the following table.
Mode
Temperature setting
Airflow rate
COOLING ONLY
Model
COOL
22C
AUTO
HEAT PUMP
AUTO
25C
AUTO
This switch is useful when the remote controller is missing.
CONTENTS
Open the front panel
Air filter
Titanium apatite
photocatalytic
Outdoor Unit
Appearance of the outdoor unit may differ from some models.
Air inlet
(back and side)
Outdoor temperature
sensor (back)
Drain hose
Earth terminal
It is inside of this cover.
Air outlet
Name plate
Refrigerant piping and
inter-unit wiring
6
CONTENTS
Name of Parts
Remote Controller
Signal transmitter
Display (LCD)
Receiver
To use the remote controller, aim the

transmitter at the indoor unit. If there
is anything to block signals between
the unit and the remote controller,
such as a curtain, the unit will not
operate.
Do not drop the remote controller. Do
not get it wet.
The maximum distance for
communication is approx. 7m.
FAN setting button

It selects the airflow rate setting.
Page 14
It displays the current settings.

(In this illustration, each section is
shown with all its displays on for the
purpose of explanation.)
TEMPERATURE
adjustment buttons
It changes the temperature setting.
Page 12
ON/OFF button
Press this button once to start
operation.
Press once again to stop it. Page 11
POWERFUL button
POWERFUL operation.
Page 17
Front cover
Open the front cover.
HEAT PUMP model

COOLING ONLY model
Page 8
ARC452A4
ARC452A13
CONTENTS
Open the front cover
MODE selector button

It selects the operation mode.
(AUTO/DRY/COOL/HEAT/
FAN) Page 11
ECONO button
ECONO operation.
Page 19
QUIET button
OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET
operation. Page 18
SWING button
Adjusting the airflow direction.
Page 13
COMFORT/SENSOR
button
COMFORT AIRFLOW and
INTELLIGENT EYE
operation. Page 15,16
: WEEKLY button
: PROGRAM button
: COPY button
: BACK button
: NEXT button
OFF TIMER button

Page 22
Page 20
ON TIMER button
Page 21
TIMER CANCEL
button
It cancels the timer setting.
Page 20,21
CLOCK button
Page 10
It cannot be used for the

SELECT button
It changes the ON/OFF
TIMER and WEEKLY TIMER
settings. Page 20,21,22
8
CONTENTS
Preparation before Operation

To set the batteries
2
Position + and
correctly!
3
1
1. Slide the front cover to take it off.

2. Set 2 dry batteries AAA.LR03 (alkaline).
3. Set the front cover as before.
To fix the remote controller holder on the wall
Remote controller
1. Choose a place from where the signals

reach the unit.
2. Fix the holder to a wall, a pillar, etc. with the

screws supplied with the holder.
Screws
Remote
controller holder
3. Place the remote controller in the remote

controller holder.
NOTE
Notes on batteries
When replacing the batteries, use batteries of the same type, and replace the 2 old batteries together.
When the system is not used for a long time, take the batteries out.
The batteries will last for approx. 1 year. If the remote controller display begins to fade and the degradation of reception performance occurs
within a year, however, replace both 2 batteries with new, size AAA.LR03 (alkaline).
The attached batteries are provided for the initial use of the system.
The usable period of the batteries may be short depending on the manufactured date of the air conditioner.
Notes on remote controller

Never expose the remote controller to direct sunlight.
Dust on the signal transmitter or receiver will reduce the sensitivity. Wipe off dust with soft cloth.
Signal communication may be disabled if an electronic-starter-type fluorescent lamp (such as inverter-type lamps) is in the room. Consult
the shop if that is the case.
If the remote controller signals happen to operate another appliance, move that appliance to somewhere else, or consult the service shop.
CONTENTS
Turn the breaker on

After the power is turned on, the flaps of the indoor unit opens and closes once to set
the reference position.
To set the clock
1. Press
2. Press
3. Press
blink.
to set the current day of the week.

.
4. Press
blinks.
to set the clock to the present time.
Holding down
5. Press
is displayed.
and
or
button rapidly increases or decreases the time display.
Point the remote controller at the indoor unit when pressing the buttons.
blinks.
NOTE
Note on setting the clock
If the indoor units internal clock is not set to the correct time, ON/OFF TIMER and WEEKLY TIMER will not operate punctually.
10
CONTENTS
AUTO DRY COOL HEAT

FAN Operation
The air conditioner operates with the operation mode of your choice.
From the next time on, the air conditioner will operate with the same operation mode.
To start operation
1. Press
and select a operation mode.
Each pressing of the button advances the mode setting in sequence.
COOLING ONLY
model
HEAT PUMP
model
2. Press
DRY
COOL
FAN
AUTO
DRY
COOL
HEAT
FAN

The OPERATION lamp lights up.
Display
To stop operation
Press
again.

The OPERATION lamp goes off.
NOTE
MODE
HEAT
COOL
DRY
AUTO
FAN
11
Notes on each operation mode

Since this air conditioner heats the room by taking heat from outdoor air to indoors, the heating capacity becomes smaller in
lower outdoor temperatures. If the heating effect is insufficient, it is recommended to use another heating appliance in
combination with the air conditioner.
The heat pump system heats the room by circulating hot air around all parts of the room. After the start of heating
operation, it takes some time before the room gets warmer.
In HEAT operation, frost may occur on the outdoor unit and lower the heating capacity. In that case, the system switches
into defrosting operation to take away the frost.
During defrosting operation, hot air does not flow out of indoor unit.
This air conditioner cools the room by releasing the heat in the room outside.
Therefore, the cooling performance of the air conditioner may be degraded if the outdoor temperature is high.
The computer chip works to rid the room of humidity while maintaining the temperature as much as possible. It automatically
controls temperature and airflow rate, so manual adjustment of these functions is unavailable.
In AUTO operation, the system selects an appropriate operation mode (COOL or HEAT) based on the room and outside
temperatures and starts the operation.
The system automatically reselects setting at a regular interval to bring the room temperature to user-setting level.
This mode is valid for fan only.
CONTENTS
To change the temperature setting
Press
or
The displayed items on the LCD will change whenever either one of the buttons is
pressed.
COOL mode
HEAT mode
AUTO mode
18 32C
10 30C
18 30C
Press
to raise the temperature and press
temperature.
to lower the
DRY or FAN mode

The temperature setting is
not variable.
Recommended temperature setting
For cooling: 26C 28C
For heating: 20C 24C
Tips for saving energy

Be careful not to cool (heat) the room too much.
Keeping the temperature setting at a moderate level helps save energy.
Cover windows with a blind or a curtain.
Blocking sunlight and air from outdoors increases the cooling (heating) effect.
Clogged air filters cause inefficient operation and waste energy. Clean them once in about every 2 weeks.
Page 34
Notes on the operating conditions

The air conditioner always consumes a small amount of electricity even while it is not operating.
If you are not going to use the air conditioner for a long period, for example in spring or autumn, turn the breaker off.
Use the air conditioner in the following conditions.
MODE
COOL


(In multi system, it may work to stop the operation of the outdoor unit only.)
If operation is continued out of this range
HEAT

DRY


Operation outside this humidity or temperature range may cause a safety device to disable the system.
12
CONTENTS

and Rate
You can adjust the airflow direction to increase your comfort.
To start auto swing

Upper and lower airflow direction
Press

The flaps (horizontal blades) will begin to swing.
Right and left airflow direction
Press

The louvers (vertical blades) will begin to swing.
The 3-D airflow direction
Press
and
and
are displayed on the LCD.
The flaps and louvers move in turn.
To cancel 3-D airflow, press either
or
The flaps or louvers will stop moving.
again.
To set the flaps or louvers at desired position

This function is effective while flaps or louvers are in auto swing mode.
Press
and
when the flaps or
louvers have reached the desired position.
In the 3-D airflow, the flaps and louvers move in turn.
or
13
CONTENTS
To adjust the airflow rate setting
Press
Each pressing of
Auto
advances the airflow rate setting in sequence.
Indoor unit quiet
High
Middle high
Low
Middle low
Middle
When the airflow is set to

, indoor unit quiet operation will start and the noise
from the unit will become quieter.
In indoor unit quiet operation, the airflow rate is set to a weak level.
In DRY mode, the airflow rate setting is not variable.
NOTE
Note on the angles of the flaps
The flaps swinging range depends on the operation mode. (See the figure.)
COOL and DRY operation
HEAT operation
FAN operation
Stop operation
COMFORT AIRFLOW 5
10
Upper limit 40
Lower limit
15
Upper limit
Stop operation
55
Lower limit and
COMFORT AIRFLOW
Upper limit
5
55
Lower limit
Stop operation
Note on 3-D airflow

Using 3-D airflow circulates cold air, which tends to collected at the bottom of the room, and hot air, which tends to collect near the ceiling,
throughout the room, preventing areas of cold and hot developing.
Note on airflow rate setting

At smaller airflow rates, the cooling (heating) effect is also smaller.
CAUTION
Always use a remote controller to adjust the angles of the flaps and louvers. If you attempt to move the flaps and louvers forcibly with hand
when they are swinging, the mechanism may be broken.
Always use a remote controller to adjust the louvers angles. Inside the air outlet, a fan is rotating at a high speed.
14
CONTENTS
COMFORT AIRFLOW /
INTELLIGENT EYE Operation
COMFORT AIRFLOW operation
The flow of air will be in the upward direction while in COOL operation and in the downward direction
while in HEAT operation, which will provide a comfortable wind that will not come in direct contact with
people.
COOL operation
HEAT operation
INTELLIGENT EYE operation

INTELLIGENT EYE is the infrared sensor which detects the human movement.
If no one is in the room for more than 20 minutes, the operation automatically changes to energy saving
operation.
[Example]
When someone is in
the room
Normal operation
The air conditioner is in
normal operation while the
sensor is detecting the
movement of people.
When no one is in the

room
20 min. after, start
energy saving
operation.
The set temperature is
shifted in 2C steps.
Someone is back in the

room
Back to normal
operation.
The air conditioner will
return to normal operation
when the sensor detects the
movement of people again.
INTELLIGENT EYE operation is useful for energy saving

Energy saving operation
If no presence detected in the room for 20 minutes, the energy saving operation will start.
This operation changes the temperature 2C in HEAT / +2C in COOL / +2C in DRY mode from set temperature.
This operation decreases the airflow rate slightly in FAN mode only.
Combination COMFORT AIRFLOW and INTELLIGENT EYE operation

The air conditioner can go into operation with the COMFORT AIRFLOW and INTELLIGENT EYE functions
combined.
15
CONTENTS
To start operation
Press
and select the desired mode.
Each time the

is pressed a different setting option is displayed on the LCD.
By selecting
from the following icons, the air conditioner will be in COMFORT
AIRFLOW operation combined with INTELLIGENT EYE operation.
COMFORT
AIRFLOW
INTELLIGENT
EYE
Combination
blank
No Setting
When the flaps (horizontal blades) are swinging, the operating as above will stop
movement of them.
To cancel operation
Press
and select blank on the LCD.
NOTE
Notes on COMFORT AIRFLOW operation
The flap position will change, preventing air from blowing directly on the occupants of the room.
POWERFUL operation and COMFORT AIRFLOW operation cannot be used at the same time.
The airflow rate will be set to AUTO. If the upper and lower airflow direction is selected, the COMFORT AIRFLOW function will be canceled.
Notes on INTELLIGENT EYE operation

Application range is as follows.
Vertical angle 90
(Side view)
Horizontal angle 110

(Top view)
55 55
90
Sensor may not detect moving objects further than 7m away. (Check the application range)
Sensor detection sensitivity changes according to indoor unit location, the speed of passersby, temperature range, etc.
The sensor also mistakenly detects pets, sunlight, fluttering curtains and light reflected off of mirrors as passersby.
INTELLIGENT EYE operation will not go on during POWERFUL operation.
NIGHT SET MODE
Page 20 will not go on during use of INTELLIGENT EYE operation.
Notes on combination of COMFORT AIRFLOW operation and INTELLIGENT EYE operation

The airflow rate will be set to AUTO. If the upper and lower airflow direction is selected, the COMFORT AIRFLOW operation will be
canceled.
CAUTION
Do not place large objects near the sensor.
Also keep heating units or humidifiers outside the sensors detection area. This sensor can detect undesirable objects.
Do not hit or violently push the INTELLIGENT EYE sensor. This can lead to damage and malfunction.
16
CONTENTS
POWERFUL Operation
POWERFUL operation quickly maximizes the cooling (heating) effect in any
operation mode. You can get the maximum capacity.
To start POWERFUL operation
Press
during operation.
POWERFUL operation ends in 20 minutes. Then the system automatically operates

again with the previous settings which were used before POWERFUL operation.
To cancel POWERFUL operation
Press
again.
[Example]
Normal operation
When you want to get the
cooling effect quickly, start
the powerful operation.
POWERFUL operation
POWERFUL operation will
work for 20 minutes.
Back to normal
operation
NOTE
Notes on POWERFUL operation
When using POWERFUL operation, there are some functions which are not available.
POWERFUL operation cannot be used together with ECONO, COMFORT AIRFLOW or OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation.
POWERFUL operation can only be set when the unit is running. Pressing
from the LCD.
disappears
POWERFUL operation will not increase the capacity of the air conditioner if the air conditioner is already in operation with its maximum
capacity demonstrated.
In COOL, HEAT and AUTO mode
To maximize the cooling (heating) effect, the capacity of outdoor unit is increased and the airflow rate is fixed to the maximum setting.
The temperature and airflow settings are not variable.
In DRY mode
The temperature setting is lowered by 2.5C and the airflow rate is slightly increased.
In FAN mode
The airflow rate is fixed to the maximum setting.
17
CONTENTS
OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET

Operation
OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation lowers the noise level of the outdoor unit by
changing the frequency and fan speed on the outdoor unit. This function is
convenient during the night.
To start OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation
Press
To cancel OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation
Press
[Example]
again.
Using the OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation during the night.
The noise level of the outdoor unit will be lower.

This is convenient when you need to consideration for your neighborhood.
NOTE
Notes on OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation
If using a multi system, the OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation will work only when this function is set on all operated indoor units. However,
if using priority room setting, refer to Note for multi system. Page 28
This function is available in COOL, HEAT, and AUTO mode.
This is not available in FAN and DRY mode.
POWERFUL operation and OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation cannot be used at the same time.
Even the operation is stopped using the remote controller or the main unit ON/OFF switch when using OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation,
will remain on the remote controller display.

OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation will drop neither the frequency nor fan speed if they have been already dropped low enough.
18
CONTENTS
ECONO Operation
ECONO operation is a function which enables efficient operation by limiting the
maximum power consumption value.
This function is useful for cases in which attention should be paid to ensure a
circuit breaker will not trip when the product runs alongside other appliances.
To start ECONO operation
Press
during operation.
To cancel ECONO operation
Press
again.
[Example]
Normal operation
ECONO operation
In case the air conditioner and other

appliances which require high power
consumption are used at same time, a circuit
breaker may trip if the air conditioner operate
with its maximum capacity.
The maximum power consumption of the air

conditioner is limited by using ECONO
operation.
The circuit breaker will hardly trip even if the
air conditioner and other appliances are used
at same time.
Running current and

power consumption

purposes only.
The maximum running current and power
consumption of the air conditioner in ECONO
mode vary with the connecting outdoor unit.
Normal
operation
Maximum during
normal operation
Maximum during
ECONO Mode
ECONO
Mode
Time
NOTE
From start up until set temperature is reached
Notes on ECONO operation

ECONO operation can only be set when the unit is running. Pressing
from the LCD.
disappears
ECONO operation is a function which enables efficient operation by limiting the power consumption of the outdoor unit (operating
frequency).
ECONO operation functions in AUTO, COOL, DRY, and HEAT modes.
POWERFUL and ECONO operation cannot be used at the same time.
If the level of power consumption is already low, ECONO operation will not drop the power consumption.
19
CONTENTS
OFF TIMER Operation

Timer functions are useful for automatically switching the air conditioner on or off
at night or in the morning. You can also use OFF TIMER and ON TIMER in
combination.
To use OFF TIMER operation

1. Press
Page 10

blinks.
2. Press
point you like.

Holding down either button changes the time setting rapidly.
3. Press
again.

Display
To cancel OFF TIMER operation
Press

NOTE
Notes on TIMER operation
When TIMER is set, the present time is not displayed.
Once you set ON/OFF TIMER, the time setting is kept in the memory. The memory is canceled when remote controller batteries are
replaced.
When operating the unit via the ON/OFF timer, the actual length of operation may vary from the time entered by the user. (Maximum approx.
10 minutes)
NIGHT SET MODE

When the OFF TIMER is set, the air conditioner automatically adjusts the temperature setting (0.5C up in COOL, 2.0C down in HEAT) to
prevent excessive cooling (heating) for your pleasant sleep.
20
CONTENTS
ON TIMER Operation
To use ON TIMER operation
1. Press
Page 10

blinks.
2. Press

point you like.
Holding down either button changes the setting rapidly.
3. Press
again.

Display
To cancel ON TIMER operation
Press

To combine ON TIMER and OFF TIMER

A sample setting for combining the 2 timers is shown below.
(Example)
Present time: 23:00 (The unit operating)
OFF TIMER at 0:00
Combined
ON TIMER at 14:00
NOTE
In the following cases, set the timer again.
After a breaker has turned off.
After a power failure.
After replacing batteries in the remote controller.
21
CONTENTS

Up to 4 timer settings can be saved for each day of the week. It is convenient if the WEEKLY TIMER is set
according to the familys life style.
Using in these cases of WEEKLY TIMER

Example: The same timer settings are made for the week from Monday through Friday while different timer settings are
made for the weekend.
[Monday]
Page 23
Program 1
Program 2
Program 3
ON
OFF
ON
Program 4
OFF
25C
27C
6:00
8:30
ON
[Tuesday]
to
[Friday]
17:30
OFF
22:00
ON
OFF
Use the copy mode to make settings for Tuesday to Friday, because these settings are the same as
those for Monday. Page 25
Program 1
Program 2
Program 3
ON
OFF
ON
Program 4
OFF
25C
27C
6:00
[Saturday]
[Sunday]
8:30
17:30
22:00
No timer settings
Page 23
Program 1
Program 2
Program 3
Program 4
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
25C
8:00
ON
27C
10:00
OFF
27C
19:00
OFF
21:00
ON
Up to 4 reservations per day and 28 reservations per week can be set in the WEEKLY TIMER. The effective use of the
copy mode ensures ease of making reservations.
The use of ON-ON-ON-ON settings, for example, makes it possible to schedule operating mode and set temperature
changes. Furthermore, by using OFF-OFF-OFF-OFF settings, only the turn off time of each day can be set. This will turn
off the air conditioner automatically if the user forgets to turn it off.
22
CONTENTS

To use WEEKLY TIMER operation
Setting mode
Make sure the day of the week and time are set. If not, set the day of the week and time.
Page 10
Program 1
Program 2
ON
OFF
[Monday]
Program 3
Program 4
ON
25C
OFF
27C
6:00
8:30
17:30
22:00
Setting Displays
Day and number settings
1. Press
ON/OFF settings
Time settings
Temperature settings
The day of the week and the reservation number of the current day will be displayed.
1 to 4 settings can be made per day.
2. Press
to select the desired day of the

week and reservation number.
Pressing
3. Press
changes the reservation number and the day of the week.
The day of the week and reservation number will be set.
and blink.
4. Press
Pressing
ON TIMER
to select the desired mode.

changes
OFF TIMER
or
setting in sequence.
blank
In case the reservation has already been set, selecting blank deletes the
reservation.
Go to STEP 9 if blank is selected.
5. Press
The ON/OFF TIMER mode will be set.
and the time blink.
23
CONTENTS
6. Press
to select the desired time.
The time can be set between 0:00 and 23:50 in 10 minute intervals.
To return to the ON/OFF TIMER mode setting, press
.
Go to STEP 9 when setting the OFF TIMER.
7. Press
The time will be set.
and the temperature blink.
8. Press
to select the desired temperature.
The temperature can be set between 10C and 32C.

Cooling: The unit operates at 18C even if it is set at 10 to 17C.
Heating: The unit operates at 30C even if it is set at 31 to 32C.
To return to the time setting, press
.
The set temperature is only displayed when the mode setting is on.
9. Press
The temperature will be set and go to the next reservation setting.

To continue further settings, repeat the procedure from STEP 4.
10. Press
Be sure to direct the remote controller toward the indoor unit and check for a receiving
tone and flashing the operation lamp.

Display
A reservation made once can be easily copied and the same settings used for another
day of the week. Refer to Copy mode . Page 25
NOTE
Notes on WEEKLY TIMER operation
Do not forget to set the clock on the remote controller first.
Page 10
The day of the week, ON/OFF TIMER mode, time and set temperature (only for ON TIMER mode) can be set with WEEKLY TIMER.
Other settings for ON TIMER are based on the settings just before the operation.
Both WEEKLY TIMER and ON/OFF TIMER operation cannot be used at the same time. The ON/OFF TIMER operation has priority if it is set
while WEEKLY TIMER is still active. The WEEKLY TIMER will go into standby state, and
will disappear from the LCD. When
ON/OFF TIMER is up, the WEEKLY TIMER will automatically become active.
Only the time and set temperature with the WEEKLY TIMER are sent with the
operation mode, the airflow rate and the airflow direction ahead of time.
. Set the WEEKLY TIMER only after setting the
Shutting the breaker off, power failure, and other similar events will render operation of the indoor units internal clock inaccurate. Reset the
clock. Page 10
The
can be used only for the time and temperature settings. It cannot be used to go back to the reservation number.
24
CONTENTS

Copy mode
A reservation made once can be copied to another day of the week. The whole reservation
Program 1
Program 2
ON
OFF
[Monday]
Program 3
Program 4
ON
25C
OFF
27C
6:00
8:30
17:30
22:00
COPY
Program 1
Program 2
ON
OFF
[Tuesday]
to
[Friday]
Program 3
Program 4
ON
25C
OFF
27C
6:00
8:30
17:30
22:00
Setting Displays
1. Press
Copy display
Paste display
Normal display
2. Press
to confirm the day of the week to be
copied.
3. Press
The whole reservation of the selected day of the week will be copied.
4. Press
5. Press
to select the destination day of the week.

.
The reservation will be copied to the selected day of the week. The whole reservation
To continue copying the settings to other days of the week, repeat STEP 4 and
STEP 5.
6. Press

NOTE
Note on COPY MODE
The entire reservation of the source day of the week is copied in the copy mode.
In the case of making a reservation change for any day of the week individually after copying the content of weekly reservations, press
and change the settings in the steps of Setting mode . Page 23
25
CONTENTS
Confirming a reservation
The reservation can be confirmed.
Setting Displays
Normal display
1. Press
The day of the week and the reservation number of current day will be displayed.
2. Press

the reservation number to be confirmed.
Pressing
displays the reservation details.
To change the confirmed reserved settings, select the reservation number and press
.
The mode is switched to setting mode. Go to Setting mode STEP 4. Page 23
3. Press
to exit confirming mode.

Display
To deactivate WEEKLY TIMER operation
Press
the LCD.
while
is displayed on

To reactivate the WEEKLY TIMER operation, press
again.
is activated once again, the last reservation
If a reservation deactivated with
mode will be used.
26
CONTENTS

To delete reservations
The individual reservation
1. Press
The day of the week and the reservation number will be displayed.
2. Press

the reservation number to be deleted.
3. Press
.
and
4. Press
Pressing
or
blink.
and select blank .

changes ON/OFF TIMER mode.
The reservation will be no setting with selecting blank.
ON TIMER
OFF TIMER
5. Press
blank
The selected reservation will be deleted.
6. Press
If there are still other reservations, WEEKLY TIMER operation will be activated.
The reservations for each day of the week

This function can be used for deleting reservations for each day of the week.
It can be used while confirming or setting reservations.
1. Press
to select the day of the week to be
deleted.
2. Hold
for 5 seconds.
The reservation of the selected day of the week will be deleted.
All reservations
Hold
for 5 seconds while normal display.
Be sure to direct the remote controller toward the indoor unit and check for a receiving tone.
This operation is not effective on the setting display of WEEKLY TIMER.
All reservations will be deleted.
27
CONTENTS

Multi system has one outdoor unit connected to multiple indoor units.
Selecting the operation mode

With the priority room setting present but
inactive or not present.
When more than one indoor unit is operating, priority is given to
the first unit that was turned on.
In this case, set the units that are turned on later to the same
operation mode as the first unit.
Otherwise, they will enter the standby state, and the operation
lamp will flash: this does not indicate malfunction.
A room
B room
C room
D room
Outdoor unit
NOTE
Notes on operation mode for multi system
COOL, DRY and FAN mode may be used at the same time.
AUTO mode automatically selects COOL mode or HEAT mode based on the room temperature.
Therefore, AUTO mode is available when selecting the same operation mode as that of the room with the first unit to be turned on.
CAUTION
Normally, the operation mode in the room where the unit is first run is given priority, but the following situations are exceptions, so please keep
this in mind.
If the operation mode of the first room is FAN mode, then using HEAT mode in any room after this will give priority to HEAT. In this situation,
the air conditioner running in FAN mode will go on standby, and the operation lamp will flash.

NIGHT QUIET mode (Available only for COOL operation)

NIGHT QUIET mode requires initial programming during installation. Please consult your retailer or dealer for assistance.
NIGHT QUIET mode reduces the operation noise of the outdoor unit during the nighttime hours to prevent annoyance to
neighbors.
The NIGHT QUIET mode is activated when the temperature drops 5C or more below the highest temperature recorded that day.
Therefore, when the temperature difference is less than 5C, this function will not be activated.
NIGHT QUIET mode reduces slightly the cooling efficiency of the unit.

Refer to OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation.
Page 18
With the priority room setting present but inactive or not present.
When using the OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation feature with the Multi system, set all indoor units to OUTDOOR UNIT
QUIET operation using their remote controllers.
When clearing OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation, clear one of the operating indoor units using their remote controller.
However OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation display remains on the remote controller for other rooms.
We recommend you release all rooms using their remote controllers.

28
CONTENTS

COOL / HEAT mode lock
The COOL / HEAT mode lock requires initial programming during installation. Please consult your authorized dealer for
assistance. The COOL / HEAT mode lock sets the unit forcibly to either COOL or HEAT mode. This function is convenient
when you wish to set all indoor units connected to the multi system to the same operation mode.
Priority room setting

The priority room setting requires initial programming during installation. Please consult your authorized dealer for assistance.
The room designated as the priority room takes priority in the following situations.
Operation mode priority

As the operation mode of the priority room takes precedence, the user can select a different operation mode from other
rooms.
[Example]
When COOL mode is selected in room A while operating the following modes in room B, C and D :
Operation mode in room B, C and D
COOL or DRY or FAN
Status of room B, C and D when the unit in room A is in COOL mode

Current operation mode maintained
HEAT
The unit enters standby mode. Operation resumes when the room A unit stops operating.
AUTO
If the unit is set to COOL mode, operation continues. If the unit is set to HEAT mode, it enters
standby mode. Operation resumes when the room A unit stops operating.
Priority when POWERFUL operation is used

[Example]
The indoor units in rooms A, B, C and D are all operating. If the unit in room A enters POWERFUL operation, operation
capacity will be concentrated in room A. In such a case, the COOL (HEAT) efficiency of the units in room B, C and D may
be slightly reduced.
Priority when using OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation

[Example]
Just by setting the unit in room A to QUIET operation, the air conditioner starts OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation.
You dont have to set all the operated indoor units to QUIET operation.
29
CONTENTS
Care and Cleaning

Quick reference
How to open / close the front panel
Hold the front panel by the panel tabs on the 2 sides and open it.
Press the front panel at both sides and the center to close it.
Panel tab
Cleaning parts
Front panel
Wipe it with softy cloth soak
in water.
If bothered by dirt
Refer to
Page 31
Air filter
Vacuum dust or wash the
filter.
Once every 2 weeks

Refer to
Page 32

Vacuum dust or replace the filter.
[Cleaning]
[Replacement]
Once every 6 months

Refer to
Once every 3 years
Page 33
Refer to
Page 33
Indoor unit,
Outdoor unit and
Remote controller
Wipe them with soft cloth.
If bothered by dirt
Notes on cleaning
For cleaning, do not use the materials as follows.
Hot water above 40C.
Benzine, gasoline, thinner, other volatile oils.
Polishing compound.
Scrubbing brushes, other hard stuff.
CAUTION
Before cleaning, be sure to stop the operation and turn the breaker off.
Do not touch the aluminum fins of the indoor unit. If you touch those parts, this may cause an injury.
30
CONTENTS
Care and Cleaning

Front panel
1. Remove the front panel.

Slide the front panel to either the left or right and
pulling it toward you.
This will disconnect the front panel shaft on one
side.
2. Clean the front panel.

Wipe it with a soft cloth soaked in water.
Only neutral detergent may be used.
In case of washing the panel with water, wipe it
with dry soft cloth, dry it up in the shade after
washing.
3. Attach the front panel.
2) Pull
Align the front panel shaft on the left and right of

the front panel with the slots, then push them all
the way in.
Front panel shaft

1) Slide
Front panel
shaft
2) Pull
Slot
1) Slide
Disconnect the front panel shaft on the other

side in the same manner.
Close the front panel slowly. (Press the panel at

both sides and the center.)
CAUTION
When removing or attaching the front panel, use a robust and stable stool and watch your steps carefully.
When removing or attaching the front panel, support the panel securely with hand to prevent it from falling.
After cleaning, make sure that the front panel is securely fixed.
31
CONTENTS
Air filter
1. Pull out the air filters.

Push a little upwards the filter tab at the center of
each air filter, then pull it down.
If the dust does not come off easily

Wash the air filters with neutral detergent thinned with
lukewarm water, then dry them up in the shade.
Be sure to remove the titanium apatite photocatalytic
air-purifying filter. Refer to Titanium apatite
photocatalytic air-purifying filter on the next page.
1) Push

2) Pull down
Press the front panel at both sides and the

center.
2. Wash the air filters with
water or clean them with

vacuum cleaner.
It is recommended to clean the air filters every
2 weeks.
CAUTION
Do not touch the aluminum fins by bare hand at the time of dismounting or mounting the filter.
32
CONTENTS
Care and Cleaning

1. Take off the titanium

Open the front panel and pull out the air filters.
Hold the recessed parts of the frame and unhook
the 4 claws.
[Replacement]
Remove the tabs on the filter
frame and replace with a new
filter.
Do not throw away the filter frame. Reuse the

filter frame when replacing the titanium apatite
photocatalytic air-purifying filter.
Dispose of the old filter as non-flammable waste.
Claw

2. Clean or replace the titanium
Press the front panel at both sides and the

center.
[Maintenance]
2-1 Vacuum dusts, and soak in
lukewarm water or water for about
10 to 15 minutes if dirt is heavy.
Do not remove the filter from frame when
washing with water.
NOTE
2-2 After washing, shake off remaining

water and dry in the shade.
Since the material is made out of polyester, do
not wring out the filter when removing water from
it.
33
Operation with dirty filters:

cannot deodorize the air,
cannot clean the air,
results in poor heating or cooling,
may cause odour.
Dispose of old filters as non-flammable waste.
To order titanium apatite photocatalytic air-purifying
filter contact to the service shop there you bought the
air conditioner.
Item

air-purifying filter (without frame) 1 set
Part No.
KAF970A46
CONTENTS
Check the units

Check that the base, stand and other fittings of the outdoor unit are not decayed or corroded.
Check that nothing blocks the air inlets and the outlets of the indoor unit and the outdoor unit.
Check that the drain comes smoothly out of the drain hose during COOL or DRY operation.
If no drain water is seen, water may be leaking from the indoor unit. Stop operation and consult the service shop if this is the
case.
Before a long idle period
1. Operate the FAN only for several hours on a fine day to dry
out the inside.
Press
Press
and select
operation.
and start the operation.
2. After operation stops, turn off the breaker for the room air
conditioner.
3. Clean the air filters and set them again.

4. Take out batteries from the remote controller.
When a multi outdoor unit is connected, make sure the heating operation is not used at the other room before you
use the fan operation. Page 28
34
CONTENTS
Troubleshooting
The following cases are not air conditioner troubles but have some reasons. You may just continue using it.
Indoor unit
The flaps do not start swing

immediately.
The air conditioner is adjusting the flap position. The
flap will start moving soon.
The HEAT operation stops suddenly

and a flowing sound is heard.
The outdoor unit is taking away the frost. The HEAT
operation starts after the frost on the outdoor unit is
removed. You should wait for about 4 to 12 minutes.
Operation does not start soon.

When ON/OFF button was pressed soon
after operation was stopped.
When the mode was reselected.
This is to protect the air conditioner.
You should wait for about 3 minutes.
A sound is heard.
A sound like a flow of water
This sound is generated because the refrigerant in
the air conditioner is flowing.
This is a pumping sound of the water in the air
conditioner it is heard when the water is pumped out
from the air conditioner in cooling or drying operation.
The refrigerant flows in the air conditioner even if the
air conditioner is not working when the indoor units in
other rooms are in operation.
Blowing sound
This sound is generated when the flow of the
refrigerant in the air conditioner is switched over.
Pinging sound
This sound is generated when the size of the air
conditioner slightly expands or shrinks as a result of
temperature changes.
Whistling sound
This sound is generated when refrigerant flows during
defrosting operation.
Outdoor unit
The outdoor unit emits water or steam.

In HEAT mode
The frost on the outdoor unit melts into water or steam when the air
conditioner is in defrost operation.
In COOL or DRY mode

Moisture in the air condenses into water on the cool surface of outdoor
unit piping and drips.
35
CONTENTS
Troubleshooting measures are classified into the following two types on a remedial basis.
Take an appropriate measure according to the symptom.
Not trouble
Check
Please check again before calling a repair person.
The air conditioner does not operate.

(OPERATION lamp is off.)

(OPERATION lamp flashes.)

Clean the air filters.
Turn the bleaker off and take all obstacles away. Then
turn it on again and try operating the air conditioner
with the remote controller. If the lamp still flashes, call
the service shop where you bought the air conditioner.
Are operation modes all the same for indoor units
connected to outdoor units in the multi system?
If not, set all indoor units to the same operation mode
and confirm that the lamps flash.
When the operation mode is in AUTO, set all indoor
unit operation modes to COOL or HEAT for a
moment and check again that the lamps are normal. If
the lamps stop flashing after the above steps, there is
no malfunction. Page 28
Hasnt a breaker turned off or a fuse blown?

Isnt it a power failure?
Are batteries set in the remote controller?
Is the timer setting correct?
Hot air does not flow out soon after

the start of heating operation.
The air conditioner is warming up. You should wait for
1 to 4 minutes. (The system is designed to start
discharging air only after it has reached a certain
temperature.)

(OPERATION lamp is on.)
For system protection, the air conditioner may stop
operating on a sudden large voltage fluctuation. It
automatically resumes operation in about 3 minutes.
Mist comes out of the indoor unit.

This happens when the air in the room is cooled into
mist by the cold airflow during COOL operation.
This is because the air in the room is cooled by the
heat exchanger and becomes mist during defrosting
operation.
36
CONTENTS
Troubleshooting
Cooling (Heating) effect is poor.
Is the temperature setting appropriate?
Are the windows and doors closed?
Are the airflow rate and the airflow direction set
appropriately?
The ON/OFF TIMER does not

operate according to the settings.
Check if the ON/OFF TIMER and the WEEKLY TIMER
are set to the same time.
Change or deactivate the settings in the WEEKLY
TIMER. Page 22
The indoor unit gives out odour.

Remote controller does not work
properly.
No remote controller signals are displayed.
The remote controller sensitivity is low.
The display is low in contrast or blacked out.
The display runs out of control.
This happens when smells of the room, furniture, or

cigarettes are absorbed into the unit and discharged
with the airflow.
(If this happens, we recommend you to have the
indoor unit washed by a technician. Consult the
service shop where you bought the air conditioner.)
The batteries are dying and the remote controller is

malfunctioning. Replace all the batteries with new, size
AAA.LR03 (alkaline). For details, refer to To set the
batteries of this manual. Page 9
The outdoor fan rotates while the

air conditioner is not in operation.
After operation is stopped
The operation mode display of the

remote controller is unusual.
Heating cannot be selected, even though the
unit is heat pump model.
The outdoor fan continues rotating for another

60 seconds for system protection.
While the air conditioner is not in operation

When the outdoor temperature is very high, the
outdoor fan starts rotating for system protection.
Slide the DIP switch to the left as shown in the

illustration so that the HEAT mode can be selected
with the MODE selector button.
The LCD displays AUTO and HEAT operation

modes though the unit is a cooling only model.
Slide the DIP switch to the right as shown in the illustration
so that the AUTO and HEAT mode displays will disappear.
37
[ Heat pump model ]
[ Cooling only model ]
DIP switch
DIP switch
An abnormal functioning happens

during operation.
The air conditioner may malfunction with lightning or
radio waves. Turn the breaker off, turn it on again and
try operating the air conditioner with the remote
controller.
CONTENTS
Call the service shop immediately
WARNING
When an abnormality (such as a burning smell) occurs, stop operation and turn the breaker off.
Continued operation in an abnormal condition may result in troubles, electric shocks or fire.
Do not attempt to repair or modify the air conditioner by yourself.
Incorrect work may result in electric shocks or fire.
If one of the following symptoms takes place, call the service shop immediately.
The power cord is abnormally hot or damaged.
An abnormal sound is heard during operation.
The safety breaker, a fuse, or the earth leakage breaker
cuts off the operation frequently.
Turn the breaker off and call the service shop.
A switch or a button often fails to work properly.

There is a burning smell.
Water leaks from the indoor unit.
After a power failure

The air conditioner automatically resumes operation in about 3 minutes. You should just wait for a while.
Lightning
If lightning may strike the neighbouring area, stop operation and turn the breaker off for system protection.
Disposal requirements
Dismantling of the unit, treatment of the refrigerant, oil and eventual other parts, should be done in accordance with the
relevant local and national regulations.
We recommend periodical maintenance

In certain operating conditions, the inside of the air conditioner may get foul after several seasons of use, resulting in poor
performance. It is recommended to have periodical maintenance by a specialist aside from regular cleaning by the user.
For specialist maintenance, contact the service shop where you bought the air conditioner.
The maintenance cost must be born by the user.
38 CONTENTS
Quick Reference
Two-dimensional bar code is a code

for manufacturing.
3P266960-1 M09B394
CONTENTS

RIGHTS.
CONTENTS
owner.

b)
c)

d)
e)

f)
g)
Australia.
h)

caravan or boat).
i)

caravan or boat).
j)
k)
page 2
CONTENTS
l)

equipment.
m)

n)

equipment.
a)

instructions.
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)


b)
c)
d)
page 3
CONTENTS
must be presented.
Outdoor Unit
Indoor Unit(s)

Controller(s)
Model No. .................................
Supplied by
................................................... Phone No. .................................
Installed by
...................................................
Owners Name
.........................................................................................................
Address
.........................................................................................................
Date .............................
Important Note

A.B.N. 62 000 172 967
www.daikin.com.au
Part No. DADW0203
page 4
CONTENTS
(iii) Condenser City Multi
CONTENTS
PCRAU1451
Multi-Split Type Air Conditioners

DC Inverter Control
Cooling Only and Reverse Cycle 50 Hz
CONTENTS
Benefits
Multi-Split Systems: Overview
uring the day, people tend to use shared spaces such

as the living room more. At night, they mainly use the
bedrooms. Based on these patterns, it is unusual for all
indoor units to operate at the same time. In this situation, a
multi-split system is the right choice for your home.

With split type air conditioners, indoor and outdoor units are required
for each room. This can create problems when there is limited space,
including unattractive cluttering of a homes exterior. With a multi-split
system, however, a single outdoor unit can power several indoor units.
The multi-split type shares operating capacity between indoor
units as needed, allowing a system with the smaller capacities to
effectively air condition your whole home. This also helps to reduce
electricity consumption.
When people are awake,

they generally use the living room.
Contents
Benefits
Multi-Split Systems: Overview
Indoor Unit
Page 1
Benefits
Super Multi NX
Indoor Unit
Page 3
Product Lineup
Single Outdoor Unit Connectable to Up to Five Indoor Units
Page 5
Page 7
Page 9
Indoor Unit
Wall-Mounted Type CTXG-P Series
Ceiling-Mounted Cassette Type

Features
Page 11
Features
Wide Variety of Indoor Unit Configuration

Function List
Floor/Ceiling-Suspended Dual Type

Indoor Unit
Features
Quiet Nights in Your Neighbourhood
Floor-Standing Type
Indoor Unit
Features
DC Inverter Control
Duct-Connected Type
Indoor Unit
Features
Compact and Powerful System
Wall-Mounted Type FTKS-K and FTXS-K Series
Page 13
Page 15
From Individual to Centralised Control

Functions
Specifications and Options
Capacity Tables
Page 19
Page 21
Page 23
Page 25
Page 27
Page 29
Page 31
Page 33
Page 37
When people are sleeping,

they mainly use the bedrooms.
Page 17
CONTENTS
Benefits
Super Multi NX
n 1969, Daikin developed the worlds first multi-split air conditioning system. In the 40
years since this milestone, we have built an international reputation based on the
quality, reliability and advanced technology incorporated into our products.
Super Multi NX requires only a single outdoor unit to maintain optimum comfort
in up to five rooms. The many benefits offered by a multi-split system are enhanced by the
NX series highly efficient DC Inverter technology.
Features of Super Multi NX

1. Single outdoor unit connectable to up to five indoor units
2. Compact and powerful system able to air condition an entire home
3. Wide variety of indoor units in different configurations
4. Energy-saving multi split and DC Inverter Control
5. Combination of individual and centralised control
Up to five indoor units
Up to four indoor units
Up to three indoor units
4
CONTENTS
Product Lineup
Single Outdoor Unit Connectable to Up to Five Indoor Units

Outdoor Unit
Indoor Unit
Model name
Capacity class
Max. piping length
Max. level difference
3MKS58LVMA9
5.8 kW
50 m
15 m
3MKS68LVMA9
6.8 kW
60 m
15 m
3MXS52LVMA9
5.2 kW
50 m
15 m
3MXS68LVMA9
6.8 kW
60 m
15 m
Cooling only
4MKS80LVMA9
8.0 kW
70 m
15 m
Reverse cycle
4MXS80LVMA9
8.0 kW
70 m
15 m
Cooling only
5MKS100LVMA9
10.0 kW
80 m
15 m
Reverse cycle
5MXS100LVMA9
10.0 kW
80 m
15 m
Model
Connectable to up to
three indoor units
Cooling only
Reverse cycle
four indoor units
five indoor units
2.0 kW class
Model
Wall-Mounted Type
CTXG-P Series
3.5 kW class
5.0 kW class
6.0 kW class
7.1 kW class
CTXG25PVMAW CTXG35PVMAW CTXG50PVMAW
Reverse cycle
Reverse cycle
Wall-Mounted Type
FTKS-K and FTXS-K Series
2.5 kW class
CTXG25PVMAS
CTXG35PVMAS
Cooling only
FTKS20KVMA
FTKS25KVMA
FTKS35KVMA
Reverse cycle
FTXS20KVMA
FTXS25KVMA
FTXS35KVMA
CTXG50PVMAS
Cooling only
FTKS50KAVMA
FTKS60KAVMA
FTKS71KAVMA
Reverse cycle
FTXS50KAVMA
FTXS60KAVMA
FTXS71KAVMA
Duct-Connected Type
Possible Combinations for Indoor and Outdoor Units

2.0 kW class
Model
2.5 kW class
3.5 kW class
5.0 kW class
Width of 700 mm
6.0 kW class
Cooling only
CDKS25EAVMA
CDKS35EAVMA
Reverse cycle
CDXS25EAVMA
CDXS35EAVMA
Cooling only
CDKS25CVMA
CDKS35CVMA
CDKS50CVMA
CDKS60CVMA
Reverse cycle
FDXS25CVMA
FDXS35CVMA
FDXS50CVMA
FDXS60CVMA
Reverse cycle
FVXS25KV1A
FVXS35KV1A
FVXS50KV1A
Reverse cycle
FLXS25BVMA
FLXS35GVMA
FLXS50GVMA
FLXS60GVMA
Cooling only
FFQ25BV1B
FFQ35BV1B
FFQ50BV1B
FFQ60BV1B
Reverse cycle
FFQ25BV1B
FFQ35BV1B
FFQ50BV1B
FFQ60BV1B
7.1 kW class
3MKS58LVMA9
3MKS68LVMA9
Width of 900 and 1,100 mm
4MKS80LVMA9
Cooling only
Floor-Standing Type
5MKS100LVMA9
Reverse cycle
3MXS52LVMA9
3MXS68LVMA9
4MXS80LVMA9
5MXS100LVMA9
Option
Note:
indicates a new design model.
6
CONTENTS
Features
Compact and Powerful System

Connectable to up to 181% of
Outdoor Capacity
In most family homes, it is unusual for all indoor
units to operate together. During the day, people
tend to use shared spaces such as the living room.
At night, they mainly use the bedrooms.
This is a reason why a single multi-split outdoor
unit can be connected to indoor units which exceed
its capacity. Super Multi NX can be connectable by
150% to 181% for the reverce cycle type.
The outdoor unit shares capacity between
indoor units as needed, allowing a smaller system
to effectively air condition the areas that are turned
on. This simplifies the installation and keeps power
consumption to a minimum.
Priority Room Setting
Priority Room Setting assigns priority control

over Inverter Powerful Operation and operation
mode to a selected room. This enables a
combination of individual and centralised control.
Initial setting is required during installation to
activate this function.
Inverter Powerful Operation: When Inverter Powerful
Operation is selected in the priority room, indoor unit
capacity is increased by shifting capacity from other
units.
After 20
minutes, all units automatically return to
Priority
Room
their original settings1.
Operation Mode: The operation mode (cooling or

heating) of the indoor unit in the priority room is given
Room D
Room A
3MXS52LVMA9
Max. connected
indoor unit capacity
9.0 kW
3MXS68LVMA9
11.0 kW
4MXS80LVMA9
14.5 kW
to being operation. Operation mode cannot be changed
5MXS100LVMA9
from other rooms.
Room A
Room C
Priority Room
The outdoor unit divides capacity between the indoor units as needed.
Room
Roo
oom
oo
mB
Room D
15.6 kW
preference. If the modes of units in other rooms differ

from the unit in the priority room, they wait on standby
Priority Room Room C

Reverse cycle models
Inverter Powerful Operation boosts airflow to maximum

volume for a 20 minute period. This function is convenient
for quickly adjusting the indoor temperature to the set
temperature.
Room D
Room A
Room C
Room
Roo
oom
oo
mB
During cooling operation
Room D
Room
om
mB
Room A
Room D
Priority Room Room C
Room A
Room C
Room D
Room D
5MXS100LVMA9
2.5 kW class
1.67 kW
2.5 kW class
1.67 kW
2.5 kW class
1.67 kW
2.5 kW class
1.67 kW
3.32 kW
Room
Roo
oom
mB
Room A
5.0 kW class
Room A
Room
om
mB
Room C
Room C
Room B
Room D
During cooling operation
Room A
Room
Roo
oom
mB
Room C
Outdoor Unit Quiet Operation: If Priority Room

Room B
Setting is activated, this function can be set easily from

the remote controller in the priority room.1, 2
5MXS100LVMA9
2.5 kW class
2.44 kW
2.5 kW class
2.5 kW class
2.5 kW class
5.0 kW class
4.89 kW
Notes: 1. Inverter Powerful Operation and Outdoor Unit Quiet Operation are not available for the ceiling-mounted cassette type FFQ-B series.
2. If Priority Room Setting is activated during installation, Outdoor Unit Quiet Operation can be easily set from the remote controller in the priority room. Unless a priority room is
registered, Outdoor Unit Quiet Operation must be set from the remote controller for each indoor unit.
8
CONTENTS
Features
DC Inverter Control
Less Temperature Fluctuation
Inverter type
Temp.
Not cold
DC Inverter Control
Swing Compressor
DC Inverter is Daikins term for an inverter air
With its smooth rotation, the swing
conditioner equipped with a DC motor. These
compressor significantly decreases friction
motors use magnets to generate rotation, making
and vibration. It also eliminates the leakage
them more efficient than AC motors. Our advanced
of refrigerant gas during compression.
DC motors for compressors and fan motors
These advantages provide quiet and
are fitted with powerful neodymium magnets to
efficient operation.
achieve even greater efficiency. We call these

Comfortable
Non-inverter type
Set temp.
Time

purposes only. It shows cooling operation.
Start
More Energy-Saving
Powerful
Inverters are devices which are able to vary their
Inverter air conditioners operate at maximum
capacity by adjusting operating frequency. Inverter
capacity as soon as they start up. This burst of
air conditioners do this by altering the power supply
increased power allows them to reach the set
frequency of their compressors. In contrast, non-
temperature more quickly.
Inverter systems finely adjust their capacity

according to the air conditioning load,
Rotations
Controls rotation according

to required power
minimising the difference between the set

temperature and room temperature. This
ensures higher comfort levels than with non-
Inverter
inverter systems.
Large loss of electricity
Non-inverter
Energy-Efficient
Time
Inverter systems can cut energy consumption compared to noninverter models. This helps to reduce household power bills and
also lowers CO2 emissions caused by electricity generation.
As the set temperature is reached, inverter
More than
20%
70
Reluctance DC Motor for

Compressors
AC motor
The compressor is one of an air conditioners core

components and its performance is directly linked
60
to the motor. Daikin was the first manufacturer to

0
30
60
90
Rotational speed (rps)
120
successfully use a Reluctance DC motor with a scroll

compressor in commercial-use air conditioners2. We
Reluctance DC motors are more efficient in the low frequency

range commonly used by air conditioner compressors. They
are capable of improving efficiency by approximately 20%1.
have now adapted this high-efficiency motor for the

swing compressors in our residential-use systems.
Reluctance DC motor
80
Efficiency (%)
stopping their compressors.
Comfortable
80
50
inverter air conditioners have a fixed capacity and

can only control the indoor temperature by starting or
Reluctance DC motor
90
Motor efficiency (%)
Too cold
devices Reluctance DC motors.
Magnetic power
DC motor
Approx.
60
Approx.
40
40%
increase
Rapid switching
20%
increase
AC motor
20
0
200
Neodymium magnet
Electromagnet
400
600
800
Motor speed (rpm)
1,000
Embedding high-strength neodymium magnets in the shaft turns

the entire centre of the motor into a powerful magnet. By rapidly
switching the poles of this electromagnet, the Reluctance DC motor
is able to produce even greater speed and power.
DC motors are more efficient in the low speed range usually

used by air conditioner fans. They provide improvements in
efficiency of up to 40%1.
High COPs of 3.85 and 4.60
operation adjusts to reduce capacity to maintain
The 5MXS100L achieves a COP of 3.85 during cooling operation and 4.60 during heating operation
the room temperature. This precise control
thanks to Daikin's DC Inverter control and combined energy-saving technologies. These values are for
makes inverter models more energy-efficient
rated capacity operation of five indoor units (2.5+2.5+2.5+2.5+5.0 kW class).
than non-inverters, which must repeatedly start

or stop their compressors.
Repelling power
COP (coefficient of performance) indicates how efficiently an air conditioner uses

energy. A higher COP means greater energy efficiency. It also means lower electricity
consumption, and of course lower power bills.
COP=
Capacity (W)
Power consumption (W)
Notes: 1. Values are based on in-house simulations.

2. Daikins achievement was recognised by the Institute of Electrical Engineers of Japan at the 54th Academic Promotion and Technical Development Awards in 1998.
10
CONTENTS
Features
Quiet Nights in Your Neighbourhood
Indoor Unit Quiet Operation

The FTKS-K and FTXS-K series give you a choice of
5-step, Quiet or Automatic settings for the fan speed.
The Quiet setting selects Indoor Unit Quiet Operation,
which decreases the sound pressure level by 3 dB (A)
below the Low setting.
22 dB (A) is so quiet you

can even hear whispers1
This wide range of settings allows you to precisely
Normal office
control the fan speed according to your needs. For

example, the Quiet function will help you to sleep more
comfortably at night. The indoor sound pressure level is
just 22 dB (A) for the FTKS20/25K and FTXS20/25K.
Outdoor unit
FTXS20/25K during cooling operation

Fan speeds
Indoors sound pressure levels
High (H)
38 dB (A)
Low (L)
25 dB (A)
Quiet (SL)
22 dB (A)
Auto
SL
Library
3 dB (A)
H
Pendulum of a wall clock

Sound pressure
level
Low
High
Demand Response Compatibility
Each decrease in airflow volume reduces the

sound pressure level.
Indoor unit
Rustling of leaves
Outdoor Unit Quiet Operation
The inclusion of a demand response enabling device (DRED)2
This system leads to reductions in household electricity
allows the electricity provider to independently control the capacity
bills. In addition, consumers in some states may be eligible
of an air conditioning system at various programmed levels.
for Energy Saving Incentives when they purchase new
This helps the provider to manage peak power demand and
energy efficient air conditioners equipped with demand
reduce load on the electricity grid when necessary.
response enabling devices.

Demand Response Adaptor
The air conditioner receives signals sent by the provider
This function decreases the outdoor sound pressure level
to reduce electricity consumption using a wattmeter (Smart
by 3 dB (A) below the rated operation. It provides a sound
Meter) installed in each household, and controls its power
pressure level of 43 dB (A) for the 3MXS52L. Capacity may
accordingly. Such control complies with
decrease when Outdoor Unit Quiet Operation is selected.
demand response mode (DRM) 1, 2 and

(dB (A))
3 of Australian Standard AS4755.
Demand response
enabling devices
BRP070A41 and
BRP070A42
(option)
Demand response modes
3MXS52L during cooling operation

Operations
Outdoors sound pressure levels
Rated (H)
46 dB (A)
Quiet (SL)
43 dB (A)
3 dB (A)
DRM 1
DRM 2
DRM 3
Minimum load
Reduced load
Reduced load
Compressor off until Not to exceed 60% of

DRED signal ceases kW capacity
Can be set from 60%,

70%, 80% and 90%
of kW capacity
Stops power consumption from

exceeding the set limit
Power consumption
Fan speed
Set power
consumption limit
Maintains maximum capacity

within the set limit
Morning
Daytime
Night
Operating time
Notes: 1. Based on Examples of Sound Pressure Levels, Ministry of the Environment, Japan, November 2002.
2. Demand response enabling device BRP070A41 or BRP070A42 is required. The device must be connected to the printed circuit board in the outdoor unit.
11
12
CONTENTS
Features
Wide Variety of Indoor Unit Configurations
Wall-Mounted Type
The CTXG-P series features

a sophisticated design with a
uniquely European style. The
sleek body houses advanced
technology which provides a
wide variety of functions.
uper Multi NX lets you freely combine indoor

units in different configurations to suit your
home interior and air conditioning needs.
With such a wide range of configurations
available, it is easy to choose the best unit for any
installation surface or situation.
CTXG-P series Page 17

FTKS-K and FTXS-K series Page 19
Ceiling-Mounted
Cassette Type
Duct-Connected Type
These units can be hidden
inside the ceiling to provide a
smooth interior finish. They are
suitable for living rooms with
shallow tray ceilings or spots
requiring a discreet appearance.
This configuration allows

completely flat installation
inside a ceiling with a height
of 300 mm or more. Lights,
speakers and sprinklers
can easily be placed inside
adjoining spaces.
Page 21
Page 27
Floor-Standing Type
Floor/Ceiling-Suspended
Dual Type
This type can be recessed inside a
wall at floor level or suspended from
This type can be recessed

inside a wall at floor level. It is
particularly convenient for living
rooms with high ceilings.
Page 23
the ceiling.
Page 25
13
14
CONTENTS
Function List
Indoor Unit
Models
Wall-Mounted Type
CTXG25/35/50PVMAW CTXG25/35/50PVMAS
Functions
FTKS20/25/35K, FTXS20/25/35K
Duct-Connected Type
FTKS50/60/71KA, FTXS50/60/71KA CDKS-EA, CDXS-EA, CDKS-C, FDXS-C
Floor-Standing Type
FVXS-K
FLXS-B, FLXS-G
FFQ-B
Comfortable Airflow
Power-Airflow Dual Flaps

Wide-Angle Louvers
Vertical Auto-Swing (up and down)
Horizontal Auto-Swing (left and right)
3D Airflow
Comfort Airflow Mode
Comfort Control
Automatic Operation1
Intelligent Eye
Two Area Intelligent Eye
Programme Dry Function
Auto Fan Speed
Lifestyle Convenience
Hot-Start Function1
Inverter Powerful Operation
Econo Mode
Home Leave Operation
Indoor Unit On/Off Switch
Wireless Remote Controller with Backlight
Cleanliness
Titanium Apatite Photocatalytic Air-Purifying Filter

Air-Purifying Filter with Photocatalytic Deodorising Function
Air-Purifying Filter
Wipe-Clean Flat Panel
Filter Cleaning Indicator
Timers
24 Hour On/Off Timer

Weekly Timer
Worry Free
Night Set Mode

Auto-Restart after Power Failure
Self-Diagnosis with Digital Display
Outdoor Unit
Worry Free
Lifestyle
Convenience
Comfort Control
Functions
Models
Night Quiet Mode

Quick Warming Function1, 2
Automatic Defrosting1
Anti-Corrosion Treatment of Outdoor Heat Exchanger Fins
Cooling/Heating Mode Lock1
Notes: 1. This function is available with the reverse cycle type.
15
3MKS58/68L, 3MXS52/68L, 4MKS80L, 4MXS80L, 5MKS100L, 5MXS100L
2. This function is not available for 5MXS100LVMA9.
16
CONTENTS
Indoor Unit

Elegant Appearance with
Curved Panel
The sleek design of the CTXG-P indoor unit features
Comfort Airflow Mode prevents uncomfortable
a uniquely European style. This elegant body houses
drafts from blowing directly on to a persons
state-of-the-art technology which delivers superior
body. During cooling operation, the flap moves
performance. The CTXG-P series offers a versatile
upwards to prevent cold drafts. During heating
choice for home-owners, designers and architects alike.
operation, the flap turns vertically downwards

to drive warm air to the floor.
Two-Area Intelligent Eye
3D Airflow
A combination of Comfort Airflow Mode and
3D Airflow combines Vertical and Horizontal
Intelligent Eye directs airflow away from
Auto-Swing to reduce indoor temperature
people to avoid drafts. If there is no movement
fluctuation. This function circulates air to every
in a room for 20 minutes, Intelligent Eye
part of a room for uniform cooling or heating
automatically adjusts the set temperature by
of even large spaces. To start 3D Airflow, push
approximately 2C to save energy.
both the Vertical and Horizontal Auto-Swing

buttons. The flaps and louvers swing in turn.
Area 1
Area 2
Silver
White
If a person is detected in area 1, airflow is directed

away from him/her.
Area 1
Colour
2.5 kW class
3.5 kW class
5.0 kW class
White
CTXG25PVMAW
CTXG35PVMAW
CTXG50PVMAW
Silver
CTXG25PVMAS
CTXG35PVMAS
CTXG50PVMAS
Area 2
Reverse cycle
Note:
17
If a person is detected in area 2, airflow is directed

away from him/her.
The flaps and louvers swing in turn, expanding the comfort zone.
indicates a new design model.
18
CONTENTS
Indoor Unit

Variety of Functions
Intelligent Eye
The FTKS-K and FTXS-K series feature a simple
Intelligent Eye prevents energy wastage by
yet sophisticated design. These stylish units house
using its infrared sensors to detect human
advanced technologies which provide a wide variety of
movement in a room. If there is no movement
comfort and lifestyle functions.
for 20 minutes, it automatically adjusts the set

temperature by approximately 2C.

Comfort Airflow Mode prevents uncomfortable
drafts from blowing directly on to a persons body.
The flap moves upward during cooling operation
and downward during heating operation.
Weekly Timer (Backlit LCD with

luminescent control buttons)
The Weekly Timer allows up to four actions to
be programmed for each day of the week. It is
possible to schedule not only the On and Off
times but also to set temperatures. Once you
set up the Weekly Timer, the air conditioner
Titanium Apatite Photocatalytic

Titanium apatite is an advanced photocatalytic
operates each day without controller input.

The Weekly Timer synchronises the air
conditioner with your familys schedule, greatly
improving comfort in your home.
material with great adsorption power. While a

filters micron-level fibres trap dust, titanium
Option
2.0 kW class
2.5 kW class
3.5 kW class
Cooling only
FTKS20KVMA
FTKS25KVMA
FTKS35KVMA
Reverse cycle
FTXS20KVMA
FTXS25KVMA
FTXS35KVMA
apatite effectively adsorbs and decomposes

bacteria1, 2. The photocatalyst is activated
simply by exposure to light. This filter delivers
consistent performance for approximately
three years if it is washed with water once
every six months.
Air filter catches dust
Option
19
5.0 kW class
6.0 kW class
7.1 kW class
Cooling only
FTKS50KAVMA
FTKS60KAVMA
FTKS71KAVMA
Reverse cycle
FTXS50KAVMA
FTXS60KAVMA
FTXS71KAVMA

Notes: 1. Bacteria Removal Test

Testing method: Dropping method
Testing organisation: Japan Spinners Inspecting Foundation
Result certificate: No. 012553-1 and 012553-2
2. This filter is not a medical device. Benefits such as the adsorption and
decomposition of bacteria are only effective for substances which are directly
attached to the Titanium Apatite Photocatalytic Air-Purifying Filter.
20
CONTENTS
Indoor Unit
Duct-Connected Type
Bulkhead Installation
The duct-connected type can be hidden inside the
Inverter Powerful Operation boosts airflow
ceiling to provide a clean exterior. It is suitable for living
to maximum volume for a 20 minute period.
rooms with shallow tray ceilings or areas requiring
This function is convenient for quickly adjusting
a discreet appearance. The CDKS25/35EA and
the indoor temperature to the set temperature.
CDXS25/35EA are only 700 mm wide, making them
After 20 minutes, the unit automatically returns
ideal for narrow spaces.
to its previous settings.
20
All models are 200 mm high and require a space

of only 240 mm between the drop ceiling and ceiling
minutes
slab. With these compact measurements, any unit can

easily be installed in even shallow tray ceilings.
Air outlet
Air inlet and suction grille

(parts obtained locally)
Night Set Mode

Pressing the Off timer button automatically
240 mm
selects Night Set Mode. This function prevents

excessive cooling or heating for more restful
sleep. One hour after the Off timer button is
pressed, the room temperature is raised by
0.5C for cooling operation or lowered by 2C
for heating operation.
700 mm
Width of
700 mm
Width of
900 and
1,100 mm
21
Option
900 and 1,100 mm
2.5 kW class
3.5 kW class
Cooling only
CDKS25EAVMA
CDKS35EAVMA
Reverse cycle
CDXS25EAVMA
CDXS35EAVMA
Cooling only
CDKS25CVMA
CDKS35CVMA
Reverse cycle
FDXS25CVMA
5.0 kW class
Indoor unit on/off switch
6.0 kW class
Signal receiver

CDKS50CVMA
CDKS60CVMA
This switch allows convenient manual starting

of the indoor unit if the wireless remote controller
FDXS35CVMA
FDXS50CVMA
FDXS60CVMA
is misplaced or its batteries are not charged.
22
CONTENTS
Indoor Unit
Floor-Standing Type
Dual Air Discharge
Daikins inverter floor standing units provide highly
Dust on the panel surface can be simply wiped
effective heating operation. While dual outlets diffuse
away with a soft cloth. The unit can also be
warmth at floor level, vertical auto swing louvers
installed off the floor to enable cleaning of the
spread air evenly across the whole room. In warmer
space underneath.
months, the lower vent can be closed, leaving the top

outlet to stream cool, refreshing air up and outwards.
Wiping the flat panel is a breeze.
Depth of Only 115 mm
Easily clean beneath the unit.

Double airflow keeps the floor warm during heating operation.
A cleverly designed flat panel allows this type to be

installed either fully exposed against a wall at floor
level or semi-recessed in spaces such
as the structure around a fireplace. It is
particularly convenient for living rooms
with high ceilings.
The exposed part of a unit
measures only 115 mm, enabling
installation almost anywhere.
115 mm
Titanium Apatite Photocatalytic Air-Purifying Filter

Titanium apatite is an advanced photocatalytic
material with great adsorption power. While a
filters micron-level fibres trap dust, titanium
apatite effectively adsorbs and decomposes
bacteria1, 2. The photocatalyst is activated
simply by exposure to light. This filter delivers
Reverse cycle
2.5 kW class
3.5 kW class
5.0 kW class
consistent performance for approximately
FVXS25KV1A
FVXS35KV1A
FVXS50KV1A
every six months.
3D air filter catches dust.

three years if it is washed with water once
Internal structure
23
Notes: 1. Bacteria Removal Test

Testing method: Dropping method
Testing organisation: Japan Spinners Inspecting Foundation
Result certificate: No. 012553-1 and 012553-2
2. This filter is not a medical device. Benefits such as the adsorption and
decomposition of bacteria are only effective for substances which are directly
attached to the Titanium Apatite Photocatalytic Air-Purifying Filter.
24
CONTENTS
Indoor Unit
The floor-level installation
Wide-Angle Louvers
The ceiling-suspended installation
Vertical Auto-Swing and Wide-Angle Louvers
Home Leave Operation prevents a room
help to distribute airflow across large rooms,
from becoming too hot or cold while you are
air conditioning the whole space evenly.
sleeping or out of your home. This ensures

you always wake or return to air conditioned
Two Way Installations
comfort. It also means the indoor temperature
The floor/ceiling-suspended dual type can be recessed
function can be set at any temperature from 18
inside a wall at floor level or suspended from the ceiling.
to 32C for cooling operation and 10 to 30C
Floor level installation is recommended for units which
for heating operation.
quickly returns to your preferred setting. The
are mainly used for heating operation.
23C
Reverse cycle
25
2.5 kW class
3.5 kW class
5.0 kW class
6.0 kW class
FLXS25BVMA
FLXS35GVMA
FLXS50GVMA
FLXS60GVMA
23C
30C
During cooling operation, with

settings of 23C for the room
temperature and 30C for Home
Leave Operation.
26
CONTENTS
Indoor Unit

Completely Flat Finish
Soil Prevention Setting
This discreet configuration allows the indoor unit to
This setting directs airflow away from the ceiling to
be installed completely flat to the ceiling. The unit is
prevent dust build-up and other marking. When it is
designed to fit inside a ceiling with a height of 300 mm
selected, the flap arc is limited to a range of 25 to 60
or more and a ceiling grid of just 600 mm wide. This
degrees1. The result is a cleaner ceiling which requires
allows lights, speakers and sprinklers to be placed in
minimal maintenance.
adjoining ceiling tiles.
Standard Setting
0 to 60 degrees
Soil Prevention Setting

25 to 60 degrees
Draft Prevention Setting
Free Installation Position
The Draft Prevention Setting stops air blowing directly
Air discharge patterns can be selected according to the
on to a persons body. With this setting, flap movement
installation position.
can be limited to an arc of 0 to 35 degrees . This helps

to eliminate uncomfortable drafts while maintaining
effective airflow.
Signal receiver
unit
Option
Standard Setting
0 to 60 degrees
Option
Hot Start Function

2.5 kW class
3.5 kW class
5.0 kW class
6.0 kW class
Cooling only
FFQ25BV1B
FFQ35BV1B
FFQ50BV1B
FFQ60BV1B
Reverse cycle
FFQ25BV1B
FFQ35BV1B
FFQ50BV1B
FFQ60BV1B
After defrosting or when starting heating

operation, air is preheated before discharge to
prevent uncomfortable cold drafts.
Draft Prevention Setting
0 to 35 degrees
Note: 1. Angles shown are provided as a guide. They may differ depending on the installation site.
27
28
CONTENTS
Features
From Individual to Centralised Control
Controllers
CTXG-P Series
Super Multi NX offers both individual and centralised control. When individual control is selected,
each unit can be operated with its remote controller. If the 5-room centralised remote controller is
used, units in individual rooms can all be operated from the main control panel. Even when wireless
remote controllers are used in each room, Priority Room Setting allows a combination of both
The backlit LCD allows easy

operation in the dark.
On and Off switch 1
Inverter Powerful Operation 3
individual and centralised control.
9 Sets room temperature.
Selects fan speed.

Auto Fan Speed and 2
Selects operation mode: Cooling,

4
Heating, Automatic, Dry and Fan Only.
Sets brightness of the multi monitor and
5
timer indicators on the indoor unit.
10 Econo Mode and Outdoor

Unit Quiet Operation
1
2
3
4
5
6
9
10
11
11 Sets vertical airflow direction.

Vertical Auto-Swing and 3D Airflow
12 Sets horizontal airflow direction.
Horizontal Auto-Swing and 3D Airflow
12
Weekly Timer:
Weekly
7
8
Comfort Airflow Mode and
13
14
15
Inverter Powerful Operation 3

Econo Mode 4
Selects operation mode: Cooling,
5
Heating, Automatic, Dry and Fan Only.
Outdoor Unit Quiet Operation 6
24 Hour Off Timer and
7
Night Set Mode
Cancels timers. 8
29
Moves forward.
The backlit LCD allows easy

operation in the dark.
Selects fan speed.

Auto Fan Speed and 2
Unified on/off
controller (option)
Moves back.
Next
Selects timer, mode, setting

15 significant number, day, time
and temperature.
On and Off switch 1
Central remote
controller (option)
Copies settings.
Back
14 Sets clock.
FVXS-K Series
5-room centralised
controller (option)
Copy
13 24 Hour On Timer
Wired remote
controller (option)
Wireless remote controller
Starts and completes settings.
24 Hour Off Timer and

7
Night Set Mode
Cancels timers.
Deactivates, reactivates or deletes

Weekly Timer settings.
9 Sets room temperature.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
Sets vertical airflow direction.

Vertical Auto-Swing
9
Weekly Timer:
10
WEEKLY
Deactivates, reactivates or deletes

Weekly Timer settings.
Starts and completes settings.
COPY
Copies settings.
11
BACK
Moves back.
12
13
NEXT
Moves forward.
11 24 Hour On Timer
12 Sets clock.
13 Selects timer, mode, setting, significant
number, day, time and temperature.
30
CONTENTS
Functions
Comfortable Airflow
Power-Airflow Dual Flaps
The Power-Airflow Dual Flaps can flatten out during cooling

operation to deliver cool air to the corners of a room. The
flaps can direct warm air straight down to the floor during
heating operation.
Wide-Angle Louvers
The Wide-Angle Louvers provide wide airflow coverage for

effective operation no matter where the indoor unit is placed
in a room.
See page 26
Vertical Auto-Swing (up and down)
This function automatically moves the flaps up and down to

distribute air across a room.
Horizontal Auto-Swing (left and right)
Horizontal Auto-Swing automatically moves the louvers to

the left and right to cover a room with cool or warm air.
3D Airflow
This function combines Vertical and Horizontal Auto-Swing

to circulate a cloud of cool or warm air right to the corners of
even large spaces. The flaps and louvers swing in turn.
See page 18
This function prevents uncomfortable drafts from blowing

directly on to the body. To prevent drafts, the flap moves
upward during cooling operation and downward during
heating operation.
See pages 18 and 20
Comfort Control
Indoor unit operating sound pressure levels can be

decreased from the Low setting fan speed using the
wireless remote controller.
See page 11
Outdoor unit operating sound pressure levels can be

decreased from the rated operation sound using the
wireless remote controller.
See page 11
Night Quiet Mode
Lifestyle Convenience
Intelligent Eye
Intelligent Eye with its infrared sensor automatically controls

air conditioner operation according to human movement in a
room. When there is no movement for 20 minutes, it adjusts
the temperature by approximately 2C for energy savings.
This function boosts cooling or heating performance for a

20 minute period. It is convenient when the air conditioner
is first turned on or it is necessary to change the room
temperature quickly.
Econo Mode
See page 20
This function detects the location of people in two areas and

automatically redirects airflow to avoid uncomfortable drafts.
It also adjusts the set temperature by approximately 2C to
save energy if there is no movement for 20 minutes.
See page 18
Programme Dry Function
The microprocessor works to eliminate humidity while

maintaining the most consistent temperature possible. It
automatically controls the temperature and fan speed.
Auto Fan Speed
The microprocessor automatically controls fan speed to

adjust the room temperature to the set temperature.
Hot-Start Function
After defrosting or when starting heating operation, air is

preheated before discharge to prevent uncomfortable cold
drafts. This function is available with the reverse cycle type.
See page 28
Cleanliness
This filter contains the advanced photocatalytic material
titanium apatite. While the filters micron-level fibres
trap dust, this photocatalyst adsorbs and decomposes
bacteria. The filter can be used for up to three years with
proper maintenance.
See pages 20 and 24
Air-Purifying Filter with Photocatalytic

Deodorising Function
This filter is made of titanium oxide. It adsorbs and

decomposes bacteria. The filter can be used for up to three
years with proper maintenance.
Outdoor unit operating sound pressure levels are

automatically decreased from the rated operation sound
when the outdoor temperature has dropped by 6C from the
maximum temperature recorded during the daytime. Initial
setting is required during installation.
Automatic Operation
The flat panel design can be cleaned with only the single
pass of a cloth across its smooth surface. The flat panel can
also be easily removed for more thorough cleaning.
This function automatically selects cooling or heating

operation mode based on the room temperature at startup.
This function is available with the reverse cycle type.
This filter removes impurities such as dust, pollen as well as

bacteria and viruses from the air.

See page 24
Filter Cleaning Indicator
Dust deposited on the air filters is not only unhygienic, it

also reduces the operating efficiency of the air conditioner.
A message indicates when the air filters need cleaning.
31
See page 22
This mode limits maximum power consumption. This

improves operating efficiency and also prevents circuit
breakers from being overloaded.
Home Leave Operation continues operation to prevent a room

from becoming too hot or cold while you are sleeping or out
of your home. Select any temperature from 18 to 32C for
cooling operation and 10 to 30C for heating operation.
See page 26
The unit can be conveniently started by hand if the wireless

remote controller is misplaced or its batteries are not charged.
See page 22
This function assigns preferential air conditioning to the indoor

unit in the priority room. The unit is able to operate at a higher
capacity than other units. It also receives priority control
over Inverter Powerful Operation and the operation mode.
See page 8
Wireless Remote Controller with Backlight

The backlit LCD allows easy operation in the dark.
Frequently used functions are conveniently located on the
front of the controller.
Worry Free
Auto-Restart after Power Failure
The air conditioner memorises the settings for the operation

mode (cooling, dry, heating, automatic and fan only), airflow,
temperature, etc., and automatically returns to them when
power is restored after a power failure.
Timers
This timer can start or stop the air conditioner within a 24

hour period. It can be preset in 10 minute steps by pressing
the On/Off Timer button on the wireless remote controller.
The On Timer and Off Timer can be used in combination.
This timer can start or stop the air conditioner within a 72

hour period. It can be preset in one hour steps by pressing
the programming timer button on the wired or wireless
remote controller. The controllers are options.
Weekly Timer
The Weekly Timer allows up to four actions to be

programmed for each day of the week. It is possible to
schedule not only the on and off times, but also the desired
temperatures during these periods. The copy function
also makes the setting much easier and enables a daily
programme to be repeated on other days as required.
See page 20
Night Set Mode
Pressing the Off Timer button automatically selects Night

Set Mode. This function prevents excessive cooling or
heating for a pleasant sleep. After 60 minutes, the room
temperature is raised by 0.5C for cooling operation or
lowered by 2C for heating operation.
See page 22
Others
Quick Warming Function
During low outdoor temperatures, this function preheats the

compressor to shorten the time required to discharge warm air.
Automatic Defrosting
Before starting heating operation, a sensor checks for frost

in the outdoor unit and performs automatic defrosting if
necessary before air is discharged.
These two functions are available with the reverse cycle type.
Malfunction codes are shown on the digital display panel of the

wireless remote controller for fast and easy maintenance.
Anti-Corrosion Treatment of Outdoor

Heat Exchanger Fins
The outdoor units heat exchanger fins are processed using

a special anti-corrosion treatment. The surface is covered
with a thin acrylic resin layer to enhance the fins resistance
to acid rain and salt corrosion.
Cooling/Heating Mode Lock
With this function, the operation mode can be locked in

individual rooms to prevent it being changed. This feature
is particularly useful for facilities such as small hotels and is
available with the reverse cycle type.
32
CONTENTS
Specifications
Outdoor Unit
Model name
Power supply
Max. connected indoor units capacity kW
Casing colour
Compressor type
Refrigerant type
Outdoor sound
pressure level*1 Rated/Quiet dB (A)
Outdoor sound
H
power level
Dimensions
HxWxD
Machine weight
Outdoor operating range
Max. piping length
Additional charge
Model name
Power supply
Max. connected indoor units capacity
Casing colour
Compressor type
Refrigerant type
Outdoor sound Rated/ Cooling
pressure level*1 Quiet Heating
Cooling
Outdoor sound
H
power level
Heating
Dimensions
HxWxD
Machine weight
Cooling
Outdoor operating
range
Heating
3MKS58LVMA9
10.0
m
g/m
m
kW
dB (A)
dB (A)
mm
kg
CDB
CWB
Max. piping length
Additional charge
g/m
m
4MKS80LVMA9
3MKS68LVMA9
1 phase, 220-240 V, 50 Hz / 1 phase, 220-230 V, 60 Hz
15.6
11.0
Ivory white
Hermetically sealed swing type
R-410A
5MKS100LVMA9
46/43
48/45
49/46
59
61
62
dB (A)
mm
kg
CDB
Cooling only
735 x 936 x 300

49
58
50 (total)
10 to 46
60 (total)
25 (for one room)
Chargeless
20 (for over 30 m)
15 (between indoor and outdoor units) /15 (between indoor units)
770 x 900 x 320

69
990 x 940 x 320

83
80 (total)
30 (for one room)
20 (for over 40 m)
Chargeless
15 (between indoor and outdoor units) /7.5 (between indoor units)
70 (total)
Reverse cycle
5MXS100LVMA9
4MXS80LVMA9
3MXS68LVMA9
3MXS52LVMA9
15.6
14.5
11.0
9.0
Ivory white
Hermetically sealed swing type
R-410A
49/46
46/43
48/45
49/46
47/44
62
59
61
62
60
990 x 940 x 320
770 x 900 x 320
735 x 936 x 300
83
72
58
49
-5 to 46
-10 to 46
-15 to 18
-15 to 15.5
80 (total)
70 (total)
60 (total)
50 (total)
30 (for one room)
25 (for one room)
20 (for over 30 m)
20 (for over 40 m)
15 (between indoor and outdoor units) / 7.5 (between indoor units)
Note: *1. The value to the left of the slash is for rated operation. The value to the right is when using Outdoor Unit Quiet Operation.
Indoor Unit

Model name
Power supply
Front panel colour
Indoor airflow
H
rate
Indoor sound
pressure level
Cooling
l/s
Heating (cfm)
Cooling
H/L/SL
dB (A)
Heating
Cooling
H
dB (A)
Heating
Indoor sound
power level
Fan speed
Temperature control
Dimensions
HxWxD
Machine weight
Liquid (flare)
Piping
Gas (flare)
connections
Drain
Heat insulation
33
Reverse cycle
CTXG25PVMAS
CTXG35PVMAW
CTXG35PVMAS CTXG50PVMAW
CTXG50PVMAS
Silver
White
Silver
White
Silver
180 (381)
138 (293)
177 (374)
207 (438)
198 (420)
173 (367)
46/35/32
38/25/21
45/26/22
47/35/32
41/28/21
45/29/22
62
61
54
63
57
61
5 steps, quiet and automatic
Microcomputer control
303 998 212
12
6.4
9.5
12.7
18
Both liquid and gas pipes
CTXG25PVMAW
mm
kg
mm
White
Model name
Power supply
Front panel colour
Indoor airflow rate
Indoor sound
pressure level
l/s (cfm)
Cooling only
FTKS60KAVMA
FTKS50KAVMA
FTKS25KVMA
FTKS35KVMA
White
161 (343)
270 (572)
245 (519)
188 (399)
H/L/SL
dB (A)
38/25/22
42/26/23
44/35/32
45/36/33
46/37/34
54
58
60
61
62
FTKS20KVMA
Indoor sound
dB (A)
H
power level
Fan speed
Temperature control
mm
Dimensions
HxWxD
kg
Machine weight
Liquid (flare)
Piping
mm
Gas (flare)
connections
Drain
Heat insulation
Model name
Power supply
Front panel colour
Indoor airflow
H
rate
Indoor sound
pressure level
295 x 800 x 215
10
6.4
9.5
Inside diameter 14.0, Outside diameter 18.0
mm
kg
mm
Cooling only
Model name
Power supply
Indoor airflow
rate
12.7
18.0
Reverse cycle
FTXS60KAVMA
FTXS50KAVMA
FTXS35KVMA
FTXS25KVMA
White
161 (343)
270 (572)
245 (519)
188 (399)
175 (371)
290 (614)
270 (572)
191 (406)
45/36/33
38/25/22
44/35/32
42/26/23
44/35/32
39/28/25
42/33/30
42/29/26
61
54
60
58
60
55
58
58
295 x 800 x 215
290 x 1,050 x 250
9
10
12
6.4
9.5
12.7
Inside diameter 14.0, Outside diameter 18.0
18.0
Duct-Connected Type: Width of 700 mm

CDKS25EAVMA
Cooling
l/s
Heating (cfm)
Cooling
Indoor sound
dB (A)
H/L/SL
pressure level*1
Heating
Cooling
Indoor sound
dB (A)
H
power level
Heating
Fan speed
Temperature control
Dimensions
mm
HxWxD
Machine weight
kg
Liquid
(flare)
Piping
mm
Gas (flare)
connections
Drain
Heat insulation
External static pressure
Pa
H
290 (614)
290 x 1,050 x 250

12
FTXS20KVMA
Cooling
l/s
Heating (cfm)
Cooling
H/L/SL
dB (A)
Heating
Cooling
H
dB (A)
Heating
Indoor sound
power level
Fan speed
Temperature control
Dimensions
HxWxD
Machine weight
Liquid (flare)
Piping
Gas (flare)
connections
Drain
Heat insulation

FTKS71KAVMA
15.9
FTXS71KAVMA
290 (614)
358 (759)
46/37/34
46/37/34
62
62
15.9
Reverse cycle
CDXS25EAVMA
CDXS35EAVMA
CDKS35EAVMA
145 (307)
145 (307)
35/31/29
35/31/29
53
53

200 x 700 x 620
21
6.4
9.5
VP20 (Inside diameter 20, Outside diameter 26)
30
Note: *1. The values are for rear-suction operation of the CDKS-EA and CDXS-EA at an external static pressure of 30 Pa. Values for bottom-suction operation can be obtained
by adding 6 dB(A).
Duct-Connected Type: Width of 900 and 1,100 mm

Model name
Power supply
Indoor airflow
rate
Cooling only
Reverse cycle
CDKS35CVMA CDKS50CVMA CDKS60CVMA FDXS25CVMA FDXS35CVMA FDXS50CVMA FDXS60CVMA
158 (335)
167 (353)
200 (424)
267 (565)
158 (335)
167 (353)
200 (424)
267 (565)
158 (335)
167 (353)
200 (424)
267 (565)
35/31/29
37/33/31
38/34/32
35/31/29
37/33/31
38/34/32
35/31/29
37/33/31
38/34/32
53
55
56
55
56
53
53
55
56
200 x 900 x 620
200 x 900 x 620
200 x 1,100 x 620
200 x 1,100 x 620
25
27
30
25
27
30
6.4
9.5
9.5
12.7
12.7
VP 20 (Inside diameter 20, Outside diameter 26)
40
CDKS25CVMA
Cooling
l/s
Heating (cfm)
Indoor sound H/L/SL Cooling
dB (A)
pressure level*1
Heating
Cooling
Indoor sound
H
dB (A)
power level
Heating
Fan speed
Temperature control
Dimensions
mm
HxWxD
Machine weight
kg
Liquid (flare)
Piping
mm
Gas (flare)
connections
Drain
Heat insulation
External static pressure
Pa
H
Note: *1. The values are for rear-suction operation of the CDKS-C and FDXS-C at an external static pressure of 40 Pa. Values for bottom-suction operation can be obtained by
adding 5 dB(A).
34
CONTENTS
Specifications
Floor-Standing Type
Model name
Power supply
Front panel colour
Indoor airflow
H
rate
Options
FVXS25KV1A
Cooling
l/s
Heating (cfm)
Indoor sound H/L/SL Cooling dB (A)
pressure level
Heating
Cooling dB (A)
Indoor sound
H
power level
Heating
Fan speed
Temperature control
mm
HxWxD
Dimensions
kg
Machine weight
Liquid (flare)
Piping
mm
Gas (flare)
connections
Drain
Heat insulation
137 (290)
147 (311)
38/26/23
38/26/23
47
47
9.5
16
9.5
No.
1
2
3
6.4
3MXS52L
Item
Air direction adjustment grille
Drain plug
Demand response enabling device
17
12.7
18.0
4MXS80L
4MKS80L 5MXS100L 5MKS100L

KPW5E112
KKP945A4*2
BRP070A42
Air direction
adjustment grille
KPW945A4
Drain plug
KKP937A4
Indoor Unit
2
3
200 (424)
213 (452)
48/41/39
47/37/34
64
63
3MXS68L 3MKS68L
KPW945A4
KKP937A4*1
BRP070A41
Demand response
enabling device
BRP070A41 and
BRP070A42
No.
FLXS60GVMA
3MKS58L
Notes: *1. One set includes five pieces for five units.
*2. One set includes one piece for one unit.
12.7
Reverse cycle
FFQ60BV1B FFQ25BV1B FFQ35BV1B FFQ50BV1B FFQ60BV1B
1 phase, 220-240 V, 50 Hz
250 (530)
200 (424)
167 (353)
150 (318)
250 (530)
200 (424)
167 (353)
150 (318)
250 (530)
200 (424)
167 (353)
150 (318)
36/27
32/25
29.5/24.5
41/32
36/27
32/25
29.5/24.5
41/32
36/27
32/25
29.5/24.5
41/32
53
49
46.5
58
53
49
46.5
58
53
49
46.5
58
2 steps
286 x 575 x 575
17.5
6.4
9.5
12.7
9.5
12.7
VP20 (Inside diameter 20, Outside diameter 26)
BYFQ60B8W1
White
55 x 700 x 700
2.7
FFQ25BV1B
Cooling
l/s
Heating (cfm)
Indoor sound H/L/SL Cooling
dB (A)
pressure level*
Heating
Cooling
Indoor sound
H
dB (A)
power level
Heating
Fan speed
Temperature control
Unit dimensions
mm
HxWxD
Machine weight
kg
Liquid (flare)
Piping
Gas (flare)
mm
connections
Drain
Heat insulation
Model
Colour
Panel
(option) Dimensions H x W x D mm
kg
Weight
Indoor airflow
rate
FLXS50GVMA
FLXS35GVMA
Almond white
190 (403)
143 (304)
202 (427)
163 (346)
47/39/36
38/32/29
46/35/33
39/33/30
63
54
62
55
490 x 1,050 x 200
126 (268)
153 (325)
37/31/28
37/31/29
53
53

Model name
Power supply
178 (378)
197 (417)
44/36/32
45/36/32
53
54
Outdoor Unit
FLXS25BVMA
Cooling
l/s
Heating (cfm)
Cooling
Indoor sound
dB (A)
H/L/SL
pressure level*
Heating
Cooling
Indoor sound
dB (A)
H
power level
Heating
Fan speed
Temperature control
HxWxD
Dimensions
mm
Machine weight
kg
Liquid (flare)
Piping
mm
Gas (flare)
connections
Drain
Heat insulation
Indoor airflow
rate
FVXS50KV1A
20.0

Model name
Power supply
Front grille colour
FVXS35KV1A
1 phase, 220-240 V, 50 Hz
White
142 (300)
157 (332)
39/27/24
39/27/24
48
48
600 x 700 x 210
14
6.4
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Wall-Mounted Type
Item
*1
Wired remote controller
Wired remote controller Length 3 m (shielded wire)
cord
Length 8 m (shielded wire)
5-room centralised controller
*2
*3
Wiring adaptor for time clock/remote controller
(Normal open pulse contact/normal open contact)
*4
Air-purifying filter with photocatalytic deodorising function with frame *4
Air-purifying filter with photocatalytic deodorising function without frame *4
*5
Air-purifying filter with frame
*5
Air-purifying filter without frame
Wireless remote controller loss prevention chain
Insulation kit for high humidity
Duct-Connected Type
Floor-Standing
Floor/CeilingType
Suspended Dual Type
CDK(X)S25/35EA C(F)DK(X)S25-50C C(F)DK(X)S60C
BRC944B2
BRCW901A03
BRCW901A08
KRC72A
KRP413AB1S
KAF970A46
KKF910A4
KDT25N32
KAF968B42
KKF917A4
KDT25N50
KKF910A4
KDT25N63
KAF968B41
KAF968B42
KAF925D41
KAF925D42
KKF917A4
Notes: *1. 3 m (BRCW901A03) or 8 m (BRCW901A08) length wired remote controller cord is necessary.
*2. A wiring adaptor (KRP413AB1S) is also required for each indoor unit.
*3. The time clock and other devices should be obtained locally.
*4. The filter is a standard accessory. It should be replaced approximately every 3 years.
*5. The air-purifying filter is a standard accessory. It should be replaced approximately once every 3 months. This accessory is required for the replacement of filters.
Cooling only
FFQ35BV1B FFQ50BV1B
Note: * Anechoic chamber conversion value, measured according to JIS parameters and criteria. During operation these values are somewhat higher owing to ambient conditions.
Wired remote
controller
BRC944B2
5-room centralised
controller
KRC72A
No.
1
Decoration panel
Remote controller
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Adaptor for wiring

*2
Wiring adaptor for electrical appendices
*2
Installation box for adaptor PCB
Remote sensor
For indoor temperature
Replacement long-life filter
Direct installation type
Fresh air intake kit
Sealing member of air discharge outlet
Panel spacer

KAF970A46

BYFQ60B8W1
BRC1C61
BRC7E530W
BRC7E531W
KRP1BA57
KRP4AA53
KRP1BA101
KRCS01-1B
KAFQ441BA60
KDDQ44XA60
KDBH44BA60
KDBQ44BA60A
Item
Wired type
Wireless type
Reverse cycle use

Cooling only use
Remote controller loss

prevention chain
KKF917A4
*1
Notes: *1. Wiring for wired remote controller should be obtained locally.
*2. Installation box for adaptor PCB (KRP1BA101) is necessary.
Measurement conditions
1. Cooling operation data is based on the following conditions: indoor temp. 27CDB, 19CWB; outdoor temp. 35CDB; piping length 5 m.
2. Heating operation data is based on the following conditions: indoor temp. 20CDB; outdoor temp. 7CDB, 6CWB; piping length 5 m.
3. Sound levels are anechoic conversion values. These values are normally somewhat higher during actual operation as a result of ambient conditions.
Control System
No.
1
2
3
4
Item
Central remote controller
Unified on/off controller
Schedule timer
Interface adaptor for DIII-NET use
Wall-Mounted Duct-Connected
Type
Type
*1
*1
*1
Floor-Standing
Floor/CeilingType
Suspended Dual Type
DCS302CA61
DCS301BA61
DST301BA61
KRP928BB2S
Ceiling-Mounted
Cassette Type
DTA112BA51
Note: *1. Interface adaptor for DIII-NET use (KRP928BB2S or DTA112BA51) is also required for each indoor unit.
Central remote
controller
DCS302CA61
35
Unified on/off
controller
DCS301BA61
Schedule timer
DST301BA61
36
CONTENTS
Capacity Tables
Cooling Only 240 V, 50 Hz
Outdoor
unit
3MKS58LVMA9
Cooling
capacity
3MKS68LVMA9
Cooling
capacity
4MKS80LVMA9
Cooling
capacity
37
Combinations
of indoor units
20
25
35
50
20+20
20+25
20+35
20+50
25+25
25+35
25+50
35+35
35+50
50+50
20+20+20
20+20+25
20+20+35
20+20+50
20+25+25
20+25+35
20+25+50
20+35+35
25+25+25
25+25+35
25+25+50
25+35+35
20
25
35
50
60
20+20
20+25
20+35
20+50
20+60
25+25
25+35
25+50
25+60
35+35
35+50
35+60
50+50
50+60
20+20+20
20+20+25
20+20+35
20+20+50
20+20+60
20+25+25
20+25+35
20+25+50
20+25+60
20+35+35
20+35+50
25+25+25
25+25+35
25+25+50
25+25+60
25+35+35
25+35+50
35+35+35
20
25
35
50
60
71
20+20
20+25
20+35
20+50
Capacity of each indoor unit (kW)

A room B room C room D room E room
2.00
2.50
3.50
5.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.50
1.95
3.40
1.60
4.00
2.60
2.60
2.27
3.18
1.88
3.77
2.80
2.80
2.39
3.41
2.90
2.90
1.93
1.93
1.93
1.78
1.78
2.24
1.55
1.55
2.70
1.29
1.29
3.22
1.66
2.07
2.07
1.45
1.81
2.54
1.22
1.53
3.05
1.28
2.26
2.26
1.93
1.93
1.93
1.71
1.71
2.38
1.45
1.45
2.90
1.52
2.14
2.14
2.00
2.50
3.50
5.00
6.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.50
2.00
3.50
1.94
4.86
1.70
5.10
2.50
2.50
2.50
3.50
2.27
4.53
2.00
4.80
3.40
3.40
2.80
4.00
2.51
4.29
3.40
3.40
3.09
3.71
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.50
1.81
1.81
3.18
1.51
1.51
3.78
1.36
1.36
4.08
1.94
2.43
2.43
1.70
2.13
2.97
1.43
1.79
3.58
1.30
1.62
3.88
1.52
2.64
2.64
1.30
2.27
3.23
2.27
2.27
2.27
2.00
2.00
2.80
1.70
1.70
3.40
1.55
1.55
3.70
1.78
2.51
2.51
1.55
2.16
3.09
2.27
2.27
2.27
2.00
2.50
3.50
5.00
6.00
7.10
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.50
2.00
3.50
2.00
5.00
Total capacity (kW)

Rated (Min._ Max.)
Total power input (W)

Rated (Min._ Max.)
Total current (A)

Rated (Min._ Max.)
2.00 (1.59-3.07)
2.50 (1.59-3.30)
3.50 (1.61-4.56)
5.00 (1.73-5.84)
4.00 (1.69-5.96)
4.50 (1.69-6.23)
5.35 (1.71-6.24)
5.60 (1.78-6.91)
5.20 (1.69-6.23)
5.45 (1.71-6.35)
5.65 (1.78-6.91)
5.60 (1.72-6.40)
5.80 (1.79-6.92)
5.80 (1.84-7.06)
5.80 (1.80-7.04)
5.80 (1.80-7.04)
5.80 (1.81-7.07)
5.80 (1.85-7.32)
5.80 (1.80-7.04)
5.80 (1.81-7.07)
5.80 (1.87-7.34)
5.80 (1.82-7.16)
5.80 (1.80-7.04)
5.80 (1.81-7.13)
5.80 (1.90-7.36)
5.80 (1.82-7.22)
2.00 (1.95-3.00)
2.50 (1.95-3.40)
3.50 (1.95-4.75)
5.00 (1.96-5.89)
6.00 (1.96-6.52)
4.00 (2.19-5.35)
4.50 (2.19-5.72)
5.50 (2.19-6.34)
6.80 (2.19-7.45)
6.80 (2.19-7.69)
5.00 (2.19-6.08)
6.00 (2.19-6.67)
6.80 (2.19-7.51)
6.80 (2.19-7.69)
6.80 (2.19-7.45)
6.80 (2.19-7.70)
6.80 (2.25-7.94)
6.80 (2.36-8.13)
6.80 (2.42-8.31)
6.00 (2.20-7.43)
6.50 (2.20-7.63)
6.80 (2.20-7.84)
6.80 (2.23-8.28)
6.80 (2.36-8.41)
6.80 (2.20-7.70)
6.80 (2.20-7.97)
6.80 (2.23-8.78)
6.80 (2.36-8.85)
6.80 (2.21-8.11)
6.80 (2.36-8.86)
6.80 (2.20-8.02)
6.80 (2.20-8.16)
6.80 (2.35-8.83)
6.80 (2.42-9.00)
6.80 (2.25-8.36)
6.80 (2.42-8.92)
6.80 (2.37-8.44)
2.00 (1.80-3.27)
2.50 (1.87-3.52)
3.50 (1.91-4.85)
5.00 (2.07-5.94)
6.00 (2.17-7.07)
7.10 (2.28-7.52)
4.00 (2.30-5.58)
4.50 (2.30-5.80)
5.50 (2.33-6.38)
7.00 (2.27-7.91)
440 (320- 770)

590 (320- 830)
950 (320-1,390)
1,520 (310-2,160)
990 (320-1,860)
1,210 (320-2,180)
1,620 (320-2,180)
1,540 (310-2,240)
1,580 (320-2,180)
1,690 (320-2,180)
1,580 (310-2,240)
1,760 (320-2,190)
1,620 (310-2,250)
1,500 (300-2,060)
1,590 (310-2,260)
1,590 (310-2,260)
1,560 (310-2,230)
1,510 (300-2,160)
1,590 (310-2,260)
1,560 (310-2,230)
1,510 (300-2,160)
1,560 (310-2,240)
1,590 (310-2,260)
1,560 (310-2,270)
1,510 (300-2,160)
1,560 (310-2,280)
470 (440- 730)
600 (440- 880)
910 (460-1,500)
1,560 (430-2,100)
2,150 (430-2,570)
980 (450-1,530)
1,190 (450-1,740)
1,610 (450-2,080)
2,260 (420-2,740)
2,260 (420-2,890)
1,420 (450-1,950)
1,910 (450-2,310)
2,260 (420-2,790)
2,260 (420-2,890)
2,410 (440-2,900)
2,210 (420-2,890)
2,210 (440-3,050)
2,110 (450-3,050)
2,060 (450-3,160)
1,620 (380-2,390)
1,880 (380-2,530)
2,010 (380-2,630)
1,870 (380-2,780)
1,870 (410-2,830)
2,020 (380-2,580)
2,010 (380-2,730)
1,870 (380-3,210)
1,870 (410-3,210)
1,970 (370-2,780)
1,870 (410-3,210)
2,020 (380-2,840)
2,010 (380-2,890)
1,870 (410-3,260)
1,870 (410-3,380)
1,970 (400-2,990)
1,870 (410-3,260)
1,920 (420-2,990)
490 (450- 820)
620 (480- 890)
900 (480-1,340)
1,350 (500-1,770)
1,780 (530-2,440)
2,450 (540-2,780)
960 (540-1,460)
1,120 (540-1,560)
1,470 (540-1,800)
2,070 (510-2,940)
1.9 (1.4- 3.3)

2.5 (1.4- 3.5)
4.0 (1.4- 5.9)
6.4 (1.4- 9.1)
4.2 (1.4- 7.9)
5.1 (1.4- 9.2)
6.8 (1.4- 9.2)
6.5 (1.4- 9.5)
6.6 (1.4- 9.2)
7.1 (1.4- 9.2)
6.6 (1.4- 9.5)
7.4 (1.4- 9.3)
6.8 (1.4- 9.5)
6.3 (1.3- 8.7)
6.7 (1.4- 9.6)
6.7 (1.4- 9.6)
6.6 (1.4- 9.4)
6.4 (1.3- 9.1)
6.7 (1.4- 9.6)
6.6 (1.4- 9.4)
6.4 (1.3- 9.1)
6.6 (1.4- 9.5)
6.7 (1.4- 9.6)
6.6 (1.4- 9.6)
6.4 (1.3- 9.1)
6.6 (1.4- 9.6)
2.0 (1.9- 3.1)
2.5 (1.9- 3.8)
3.8 (2.0- 6.4)
6.6 (1.9- 8.9)
9.0 (1.9-10.9)
4.1 (1.9- 6.5)
5.0 (1.9- 7.4)
6.8 (1.9- 8.8)
9.5 (1.8-11.6)
9.5 (1.8-12.2)
6.0 (1.9- 8.3)
8.0 (1.9- 9.8)
9.5 (1.8-11.8)
9.5 (1.8-12.2)
10.1 (1.9-12.3)
9.3 (1.8-12.2)
9.3 (1.9-12.9)
8.9 (1.9-12.9)
8.7 (1.9-13.3)
6.8 (1.6-10.1)
7.9 (1.6-10.7)
8.5 (1.6-11.1)
7.9 (1.6-11.8)
7.9 (1.8-12.0)
8.5 (1.6-10.9)
8.5 (1.6-11.5)
7.9 (1.6-13.6)
7.9 (1.8-13.6)
8.3 (1.6-11.8)
7.9 (1.8-13.6)
8.5 (1.6-12.0)
8.5 (1.6-12.2)
7.9 (1.8-13.8)
7.9 (1.8-14.3)
8.3 (1.7-12.6)
7.9 (1.8-13.8)
8.1 (1.8-12.6)
2.1 (2.0- 3.5)
2.6 (2.1- 3.8)
3.8 (2.1- 5.7)
5.7 (2.2- 7.6)
7.6 (2.3-10.4)
10.4 (2.3-11.9)
4.1 (2.3- 6.3)
4.8 (2.3- 6.7)
6.3 (2.3- 7.7)
8.8 (2.2-12.5)
Outdoor
unit
4MKS80LVMA9
Cooling
capacity
Combinations
of indoor units
20+60
20+71
25+25
25+35
25+50
25+60
25+71
35+35
35+50
35+60
35+71
50+50
50+60
50+71
60+60
60+71
71+71
20+20+20
20+20+25
20+20+35
20+20+50
20+20+60
20+20+71
20+25+25
20+25+35
20+25+50
20+25+60
20+25+71
20+35+35
20+35+50
20+35+60
20+35+71
20+50+50
20+50+60
20+50+71
20+60+60
20+60+71
25+25+25
25+25+35
25+25+50
25+25+60
25+25+71
25+35+35
25+35+50
25+35+60
25+35+71
25+50+50
25+50+60
25+50+71
25+60+60
25+60+71
35+35+35
35+35+50
35+35+60
35+35+71
35+50+50
35+50+60
35+50+71
35+60+60
50+50+50
20+20+20+20
20+20+20+25
20+20+20+35
20+20+20+50
20+20+20+60
20+20+20+71
20+20+25+25
20+20+25+35
20+20+25+50
20+20+25+60
20+20+25+71
20+20+35+35
20+20+35+50

1.83
5.47
1.66
5.90
2.50
2.50
2.50
3.50
2.40
4.79
2.18
5.24
2.00
5.67
3.50
3.50
3.06
4.36
2.82
4.83
2.61
5.29
3.88
3.88
3.63
4.36
3.31
4.69
4.00
4.00
3.66
4.34
4.00
4.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.50
1.94
1.94
3.41
1.78
1.78
4.43
1.60
1.60
4.80
1.44
1.44
5.12
2.00
2.50
2.50
1.88
2.35
3.29
1.68
2.11
4.21
1.52
1.90
4.58
1.38
1.72
4.90
1.77
3.11
3.11
1.52
2.67
3.81
1.39
2.43
4.18
1.27
2.22
4.51
1.34
3.33
3.33
1.23
3.08
3.69
1.13
2.84
4.03
1.14
3.43
3.43
1.06
3.18
3.76
2.43
2.43
2.43
2.28
2.28
3.20
2.00
2.00
4.00
1.82
1.82
4.36
1.65
1.65
4.70
2.10
2.95
2.95
1.82
2.55
3.63
1.67
2.33
4.00
1.53
2.14
4.33
1.60
3.20
3.20
1.48
2.96
3.56
1.37
2.74
3.89
1.38
3.31
3.31
1.28
3.08
3.64
2.67
2.67
2.67
2.33
2.33
3.34
2.15
2.15
3.70
1.99
1.99
4.02
2.08
2.96
2.96
1.93
2.76
3.31
1.79
2.56
3.64
1.81
3.10
3.10
2.67
2.67
2.67
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
1.88
1.88
1.88
2.36
1.68
1.68
1.68
2.96
1.45
1.45
1.45
3.65
1.33
1.33
1.33
4.01
1.22
1.22
1.22
4.34
1.78
1.78
2.22
2.22
1.60
1.60
2.00
2.80
1.39
1.39
1.74
3.48
1.28
1.28
1.60
3.84
1.18
1.18
1.47
4.17
1.45
1.45
2.55
2.55
1.28
1.28
2.24
3.20
Total capacity (kW)

Rated (Min._ Max.)

Rated (Min._ Max.)
Total current (A)

Rated (Min._ Max.)
7.30 (2.41-8.11)
7.56 (2.56-8.28)
5.00 (2.30-6.31)
6.00 (2.33-7.14)
7.19 (2.34-8.03)
7.42 (2.48-8.11)
7.67 (2.63-8.28)
7.00 (2.27-7.62)
7.42 (2.48-8.10)
7.65 (2.61-8.30)
7.90 (2.77-8.35)
7.76 (2.68-8.76)
7.99 (2.82-8.82)
8.00 (2.97-8.99)
8.00 (2.96-9.01)
8.00 (3.11-9.05)
8.00 (3.26-9.10)
6.00 (2.17-7.81)
6.50 (2.22-8.24)
7.28 (2.34-8.43)
7.99 (2.55-8.97)
8.00 (2.68-9.03)
8.00 (2.83-9.20)
7.00 (2.27-8.24)
7.52 (2.41-8.43)
8.00 (2.61-8.97)
8.00 (2.75-9.03)
8.00 (2.90-9.20)
7.99 (2.55-8.63)
8.00 (2.75-9.03)
8.00 (2.89-9.21)
8.00 (3.04-9.25)
8.00 (2.96-9.46)
8.00 (3.09-9.61)
8.00 (3.25-9.63)
8.00 (3.23-9.64)
8.00 (3.38-9.80)
7.28 (2.34-8.36)
7.76 (2.48-8.43)
8.00 (2.68-8.97)
8.00 (2.82-9.03)
8.00 (2.97-9.20)
8.00 (2.61-8.63)
8.00 (2.82-9.03)
8.00 (2.96-9.21)
8.00 (3.11-9.25)
8.00 (3.03-9.52)
8.00 (3.16-9.61)
8.00 (3.16-9.63)
8.00 (3.30-9.64)
8.00 (3.45-9.80)
8.00 (2.75-8.69)
8.00 (2.96-9.20)
8.00 (3.09-9.26)
8.00 (3.25-9.30)
8.00 (3.16-9.58)
8.00 (3.30-9.62)
8.00 (3.45-9.80)
8.00 (3.44-9.80)
8.00 (3.37-9.85)
8.00 (2.41-8.90)
8.00 (2.48-8.97)
8.00 (2.61-9.02)
8.00 (2.82-9.43)
8.00 (2.96-9.59)
8.00 (3.11-9.63)
8.00 (2.55-9.10)
8.00 (2.68-9.15)
8.00 (2.89-9.56)
8.00 (3.03-9.59)
8.00 (3.18-9.68)
8.00 (2.82-9.20)
8.00 (3.03-9.59)
2,240 (550-3,080)
2,360 (580-3,220)
1,290 (540-1,790)
1,700 (540-2,480)
2,170 (510-3,060)
2,290 (550-3,080)
2,410 (580-3,220)
2,210 (540-2,840)
2,290 (550-3,080)
2,410 (580-3,220)
2,540 (620-3,230)
2,290 (590-3,290)
2,410 (620-3,310)
2,420 (660-3,450)
2,420 (660-3,450)
2,360 (700-3,460)
2,370 (730-3,470)
1,530 (480-2,610)
1,780 (480-2,970)
2,150 (520-3,110)
2,420 (550-3,320)
2,360 (550-3,330)
2,370 (590-3,470)
1,980 (520-2,970)
2,260 (520-3,110)
2,420 (550-3,320)
2,360 (590-3,330)
2,370 (620-3,470)
2,550 (550-3,260)
2,360 (590-3,330)
2,370 (620-3,480)
2,310 (660-3,480)
2,260 (620-3,510)
2,210 (650-3,510)
2,210 (690-3,510)
2,210 (690-3,510)
2,200 (730-3,650)
2,140 (520-3,100)
2,430 (550-3,110)
2,420 (590-3,320)
2,360 (590-3,330)
2,370 (620-3,470)
2,550 (590-3,260)
2,360 (590-3,330)
2,370 (620-3,480)
2,310 (660-3,480)
2,260 (620-3,510)
2,210 (650-3,510)
2,210 (650-3,510)
2,210 (690-3,510)
2,200 (730-3,650)
2,560 (620-3,270)
2,370 (620-3,470)
2,310 (660-3,480)
2,320 (690-3,490)
2,210 (650-3,510)
2,210 (690-3,510)
2,200 (730-3,650)
2,200 (730-3,650)
2,140 (680-3,650)
2,370 (480-3,140)
2,370 (520-3,200)
2,320 (550-3,210)
2,190 (580-3,370)
2,140 (610-3,510)
2,130 (650-3,510)
2,370 (520-3,340)
2,320 (550-3,350)
2,190 (580-3,510)
2,140 (610-3,510)
2,130 (650-3,510)
2,320 (590-3,350)
2,140 (610-3,510)
9.5 (2.4-13.1)
10.0 (2.5-13.7)
5.5 (2.3- 7.7)
7.2 (2.3-10.6)
9.2 (2.2-13.1)
9.7 (2.4-13.1)
10.2 (2.5-13.7)
9.4 (2.3-12.1)
9.7 (2.4-13.1)
10.2 (2.5-13.7)
10.8 (2.7-13.8)
9.7 (2.6-14.0)
10.2 (2.7-14.1)
10.3 (2.9-14.7)
10.3 (2.9-14.7)
10.0 (3.0-14.8)
10.1 (3.2-14.8)
6.5 (2.1-11.1)
7.6 (2.1-12.7)
9.1 (2.3-13.3)
10.3 (2.4-14.2)
10.0 (2.4-14.2)
10.1 (2.6-14.8)
8.4 (2.3-12.7)
9.6 (2.3-13.3)
10.3 (2.4-14.2)
10.0 (2.6-14.2)
10.1 (2.7-14.8)
10.8 (2.4-13.9)
10.0 (2.6-14.2)
10.1 (2.7-14.8)
9.8 (2.9-14.8)
9.6 (2.7-15.0)
9.4 (2.8-15.0)
9.4 (3.0-15.0)
9.4 (3.0-15.0)
9.4 (3.2-15.6)
9.1 (2.3-13.2)
10.3 (2.4-13.3)
10.3 (2.6-14.2)
10.0 (2.6-14.2)
10.1 (2.7-14.8)
10.8 (2.6-13.9)
10.0 (2.6-14.2)
10.1 (2.7-14.8)
9.8 (2.9-14.8)
9.6 (2.7-15.0)
9.4 (2.8-15.0)
9.4 (2.8-15.0)
9.4 (3.0-15.0)
9.4 (3.2-15.6)
10.9 (2.7-14.0)
10.1 (2.7-14.8)
9.8 (2.9-14.8)
9.9 (3.0-14.9)
9.4 (2.8-15.0)
9.4 (3.0-15.0)
9.4 (3.2-15.6)
9.4 (3.2-15.6)
9.1 (2.9-15.6)
10.1 (2.1-13.4)
10.1 (2.3-13.7)
9.9 (2.4-13.7)
9.3 (2.5-14.4)
9.1 (2.6-15.0)
9.1 (2.8-15.0)
10.1 (2.3-14.3)
9.9 (2.4-14.3)
9.3 (2.5-15.0)
9.1 (2.6-15.0)
9.1 (2.8-15.0)
9.9 (2.6-14.3)
9.1 (2.6-15.0)
38
CONTENTS
Capacity Tables
Outdoor
unit
4MKS80LVMA9
Cooling
capacity
5MKS100LVMA9
Cooling
capacity
39
Combinations
of indoor units
20+20+35+60
20+20+35+71
20+20+50+50
20+20+50+60
20+25+25+25
20+25+25+35
20+25+25+50
20+25+25+60
20+25+25+71
20+25+35+35
20+25+35+50
20+25+35+60
20+25+35+71
20+25+50+50
20+25+50+60
20+35+35+35
20+35+35+50
20+35+35+60
20+35+50+50
25+25+25+25
25+25+25+35
25+25+25+50
25+25+25+60
25+25+25+71
25+25+35+35
25+25+35+50
25+25+35+60
25+25+35+71
25+25+50+50
25+35+35+35
25+35+35+50
25+35+35+60
35+35+35+35
35+35+35+50
20
25
35
50
60
71
20+20
20+25
20+35
20+50
20+60
20+71
25+25
25+35
25+50
25+60
25+71
35+35
35+50
35+60
35+71
50+50
50+60
50+71
60+60
60+71
71+71
20+20+20
20+20+25
20+20+35
20+20+50
20+20+60
20+20+71
20+25+25
20+25+35
20+25+50
20+25+60
20+25+71
20+35+35

1.19
1.19
2.07
3.55
1.10
1.10
1.92
3.88
1.14
1.14
2.86
2.86
1.07
1.07
2.67
3.20
1.67
2.11
2.11
2.11
1.52
1.90
1.90
2.68
1.33
1.67
1.67
3.33
1.23
1.54
1.54
3.69
1.13
1.42
1.42
4.03
1.40
1.74
2.43
2.43
1.23
1.54
2.15
3.08
1.14
1.43
2.00
3.43
1.06
1.32
1.85
3.76
1.10
1.38
2.76
2.76
1.03
1.29
2.58
3.10
1.28
2.24
2.24
2.24
1.14
2.00
2.00
2.86
1.07
1.87
1.87
3.20
1.03
1.81
2.58
2.58
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
1.82
1.82
1.82
2.54
1.60
1.60
1.60
3.20
1.48
1.48
1.48
3.56
1.37
1.37
1.37
3.89
1.67
1.67
2.33
2.33
1.48
1.48
2.07
2.97
1.38
1.38
1.93
3.31
1.28
1.28
1.79
3.64
1.33
1.33
2.67
2.67
1.55
2.15
2.15
2.15
1.38
1.93
1.93
2.76
1.29
1.81
1.81
3.10
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
1.81
1.81
1.81
2.58
2.00
2.50
3.50
5.00
6.00
7.10
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.50
2.00
3.50
2.00
5.00
1.91
5.72
1.82
6.46
2.50
2.50
2.50
3.50
2.44
4.89
2.33
5.59
2.23
6.34
3.50
3.50
3.26
4.66
3.14
5.38
3.03
6.14
4.41
4.41
4.27
5.13
4.13
5.87
5.00
5.00
4.58
5.42
5.00
5.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.50
1.97
1.97
3.46
1.89
1.89
4.73
1.85
1.85
5.56
1.80
1.80
6.40
2.00
2.50
2.50
1.94
2.43
3.39
1.87
2.34
4.67
1.83
2.29
5.50
1.72
2.16
6.12
1.89
3.31
3.31
Total capacity (kW)

Rated (Min._ Max.)

Rated (Min._ Max.)
Total current A)
Rated (Min._ Max.)
8.00 (3.16- 9.66)

8.00 (3.32- 9.68)
8.00 (3.23- 9.75)
8.00 (3.37- 9.80)
8.00 (2.61- 9.10)
8.00 (2.75- 9.15)
8.00 (2.96- 9.56)
8.00 (3.09- 9.61)
8.00 (3.25- 9.68)
8.00 (2.89- 9.33)
8.00 (3.09- 9.61)
8.00 (3.23- 9.66)
8.00 (3.38- 9.80)
8.00 (3.30- 9.80)
8.00 (3.44- 9.80)
8.00 (3.03- 9.37)
8.00 (3.23- 9.63)
8.00 (3.37- 9.80)
8.00 (3.43- 9.83)
8.00 (2.68- 9.10)
8.00 (2.82- 9.15)
8.00 (3.03- 9.56)
8.00 (3.16- 9.65)
8.00 (3.16- 9.68)
8.00 (2.96- 9.33)
8.00 (3.16- 9.63)
8.00 (3.30- 9.67)
8.00 (3.45- 9.80)
8.00 (3.37- 9.83)
8.00 (3.09- 9.37)
8.00 (3.30- 9.63)
8.00 (3.44- 9.80)
8.00 (3.23- 9.42)
8.00 (3.43- 9.80)
2.00 (2.04- 3.52)
2.50 (2.04- 3.63)
3.50 (2.07- 3.88)
5.00 (2.39- 6.01)
6.00 (2.42- 7.12)
7.10 (2.44- 7.57)
4.00 (2.76- 5.66)
4.50 (2.76- 5.97)
5.50 (2.78- 6.40)
7.00 (2.96- 8.71)
7.63 (2.98- 9.64)
8.28 (3.00-10.08)
5.00 (2.76- 6.27)
6.00 (2.78- 7.46)
7.33 (2.96- 9.48)
7.92 (2.98- 9.64)
8.57 (3.00-10.08)
7.00 (2.81- 7.98)
7.92 (2.98- 9.63)
8.52 (3.01-10.11)
9.17 (3.02-10.24)
8.81 (3.12-10.88)
9.40 (3.14-11.02)
10.00 (3.15-11.11)
10.00 (3.15-11.15)
10.00 (3.17-11.24)
10.00 (3.26-11.32)
6.00 (3.01- 8.66)
6.50 (3.01- 9.18)
7.39 (3.03-10.17)
8.51 (3.16-11.40)
9.25 (3.18-11.53)
10.00 (3.19-11.61)
7.00 (3.01- 9.18)
7.76 (3.03-10.17)
8.88 (3.16-11.40)
9.62 (3.18-11.53)
10.00 (3.19-11.61)
8.51 (3.06-10.31)
2,130 (650-3,510)
2,130 (680-3,510)
1,990 (640-3,560)
1,990 (670-3,630)
2,370 (550-3,340)
2,320 (590-3,350)
2,190 (620-3,510)
2,140 (610-3,510)
2,130 (690-3,510)
2,320 (620-3,490)
2,140 (650-3,510)
2,130 (650-3,510)
2,130 (680-3,650)
1,990 (640-3,640)
1,990 (670-3,630)
2,260 (660-3,500)
2,130 (650-3,510)
2,130 (680-3,580)
2,050 (710-3,560)
2,370 (550-3,340)
2,320 (590-3,350)
2,190 (620-3,510)
2,140 (650-3,510)
2,130 (650-3,510)
2,320 (620-3,490)
2,140 (650-3,510)
2,130 (690-3,510)
2,130 (720-3,650)
2,060 (670-3,640)
2,260 (660-3,500)
2,130 (690-3,510)
2,130 (720-3,580)
2,260 (690-3,500)
2,140 (720-3,580)
440 (430- 800)
550 (430- 840)
800 (430- 940)
1,190 (460-1,690)
1,640 (460-2,560)
2,430 (460-2,960)
810 (470-1,350)
980 (470-1,490)
1,350 (470-1,650)
1,850 (480-2,870)
2,140 (480-3,520)
2,510 (480-3,960)
1,160 (470-1,650)
1,550 (470-2,490)
2,020 (480-3,520)
2,320 (480-3,520)
2,700 (480-3,960)
2,140 (470-2,880)
2,320 (480-3,520)
2,700 (480-3,960)
3,110 (480-3,960)
2,500 (480-3,950)
2,830 (480-3,940)
3,240 (480-3,940)
3,240 (480-3,940)
3,170 (480-3,940)
3,090 (480-3,930)
1,300 (480-2,480)
1,490 (480-2,870)
1,900 (480-3,510)
2,250 (480-3,940)
2,630 (480-3,940)
3,090 (480-3,930)
1,700 (480-2,870)
2,140 (480-3,510)
2,440 (480-3,940)
2,890 (480-3,940)
3,090 (480-3,930)
2,500 (480-3,510)
9.1 (2.8-15.0)
9.1 (2.9-15.0)
8.5 (2.8-15.2)
8.5 (2.9-15.5)
10.1 (2.4-14.3)
9.9 (2.6-14.3)
9.3 (2.7-15.0)
9.1 (2.6-15.0)
9.1 (3.0-15.0)
9.9 (2.7-14.9)
9.1 (2.8-15.0)
9.1 (2.8-15.0)
9.1 (2.9-15.6)
8.5 (2.8-15.5)
8.5 (2.9-15.5)
9.6 (2.9-14.9)
9.1 (2.8-15.0)
9.1 (2.9-15.3)
8.7 (3.1-15.2)
10.1 (2.4-14.3)
9.9 (2.6-14.3)
9.3 (2.7-15.0)
9.1 (2.8-15.0)
9.1 (2.8-15.0)
9.9 (2.7-14.9)
9.1 (2.8-15.0)
9.1 (3.0-15.0)
9.1 (3.1-15.6)
8.8 (2.9-15.5)
9.6 (2.9-14.9)
9.1 (3.0-15.0)
9.1 (3.1-15.3)
9.6 (3.0-14.9)
9.1 (3.1-15.3)
1.9 (1.9- 3.5)
2.4 (1.9- 3.7)
3.4 (1.9- 4.1)
5.1 (2.0- 7.3)
7.0 (2.0-11.0)
10.4 (2.0-12.8)
3.5 (2.1- 5.8)
4.2 (2.1- 6.5)
5.8 (2.1- 7.1)
7.9 (2.1-12.4)
9.2 (2.1-15.2)
10.8 (2.1-17.1)
5.0 (2.1- 7.1)
6.7 (2.1-10.7)
8.7 (2.1-15.2)
10.0 (2.1-15.2)
11.6 (2.1-17.1)
9.2 (2.1-12.4)
10.0 (2.1-15.2)
11.6 (2.1-17.1)
13.4 (2.1-17.1)
10.7 (2.1-17.0)
12.2 (2.1-17.0)
13.9 (2.1-17.0)
13.9 (2.1-17.0)
13.6 (2.1-17.0)
13.3 (2.1-16.9)
5.6 (2.1-10.7)
6.4 (2.1-12.4)
8.2 (2.1-15.1)
9.7 (2.1-17.0)
11.3 (2.1-17.0)
13.3 (2.1-16.9)
7.3 (2.1-12.4)
9.2 (2.1-15.1)
10.5 (2.1-17.0)
12.4 (2.1-17.0)
13.3 (2.1-16.9)
10.7 (2.1-15.1)
Outdoor
unit
5MKS100LVMA9
Cooling
capacity
Combinations
of indoor units
20+35+50
20+35+60
20+35+71
20+50+50
20+50+60
20+50+71
20+60+60
20+60+71
25+25+25
25+25+35
25+25+50
25+25+60
25+25+71
25+35+35
25+35+50
25+35+60
25+35+71
25+50+50
25+50+60
25+50+71
25+60+60
25+60+71
35+35+35
35+35+50
35+35+60
35+35+71
35+50+50
35+50+60
35+50+71
35+60+60
50+50+50
20+20+20+20
20+20+20+25
20+20+20+35
20+20+20+50
20+20+20+60
20+20+20+71
20+20+25+25
20+20+25+35
20+20+25+50
20+20+25+60
20+20+25+71
20+20+35+35
20+20+35+50
20+20+35+60
20+20+35+71
20+20+50+50
20+20+50+60
20+25+25+25
20+25+25+35
20+25+25+50
20+25+25+60
20+25+25+71
20+25+35+35
20+25+35+50
20+25+35+60
20+25+35+71
20+25+50+50
20+25+50+60
20+35+35+35
20+35+35+50
20+35+35+60
20+35+50+50
25+25+25+25
25+25+25+35
25+25+25+50
25+25+25+60
25+25+25+71
25+25+35+35
25+25+35+50
25+25+35+60
25+25+35+71
25+25+50+50

1.83
3.21
4.58
1.74
3.04
5.22
1.59
2.78
5.63
1.66
4.17
4.17
1.54
3.85
4.61
1.41
3.55
5.04
1.42
4.29
4.29
1.32
3.97
4.71
2.46
2.46
2.46
2.39
2.39
3.35
2.31
2.31
4.63
2.27
2.27
5.46
2.07
2.07
5.86
2.33
3.27
3.27
2.27
3.18
4.54
2.08
2.92
5.00
1.91
2.67
5.42
2.00
4.00
4.00
1.85
3.70
4.45
1.71
3.42
4.87
1.72
4.14
4.14
1.60
3.85
4.55
3.14
3.14
3.14
2.92
2.92
4.16
2.69
2.69
4.62
2.48
2.48
5.04
2.60
3.70
3.70
2.41
3.45
4.14
2.24
3.21
4.55
2.26
3.87
3.87
3.33
3.33
3.33
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.50
2.00
2.00
2.00
3.50
1.82
1.82
1.82
4.54
1.67
1.67
1.67
4.99
1.53
1.53
1.53
5.41
2.00
2.00
2.50
2.50
2.00
2.00
2.50
3.50
1.74
1.74
2.17
4.35
1.60
1.60
2.00
4.80
1.47
1.47
1.84
5.22
1.82
1.82
3.18
3.18
1.60
1.60
2.80
4.00
1.48
1.48
2.59
4.45
1.37
1.37
2.40
4.86
1.43
1.43
3.57
3.57
1.33
1.33
3.33
4.01
2.00
2.50
2.50
2.50
1.90
2.38
2.38
3.34
1.67
2.08
2.08
4.17
1.54
1.92
1.92
4.62
1.42
1.77
1.77
5.04
1.74
2.18
3.04
3.04
1.54
1.92
2.69
3.85
1.43
1.79
2.50
4.28
1.32
1.66
2.32
4.70
1.38
1.72
3.45
3.45
1.29
1.61
3.23
3.87
1.60
2.80
2.80
2.80
1.43
2.50
2.50
3.57
1.33
2.33
2.33
4.01
1.29
2.25
3.23
3.23
2.50
2.50
2.50
2.50
2.27
2.27
2.27
3.19
2.00
2.00
2.00
4.00
1.85
1.85
1.85
4.45
1.71
1.71
1.71
4.87
2.08
2.08
2.92
2.92
1.85
1.85
2.59
3.71
1.72
1.72
2.41
4.15
1.60
1.60
2.24
4.56
1.67
1.67
3.33
3.33
Total capacity (kW)

Rated (Min._ Max.)

Rated (Min._ Max.)
Total current (A)

Rated (Min._ Max.)
9.62 (3.17-11.52)
10.00 (3.19-11.64)
10.00 (3.20-11.72)
10.00 (3.26-12.20)
10.00 (3.27-12.28)
10.00 (3.28-12.34)
10.00 (3.28-12.35)
10.00 (3.29-12.40)
7.39 (3.01-10.03)
8.14 (3.03-10.17)
9.25 (3.16-11.40)
9.99 (3.18-11.53)
10.00 (3.19-11.61)
8.88 (3.06-10.37)
9.99 (3.17-11.52)
10.00 (3.19-11.64)
10.00 (3.20-11.72)
10.00 (3.26-12.20)
10.00 (3.27-12.28)
10.00 (3.28-12.34)
10.00 (3.30-12.35)
10.00 (3.31-12.40)
9.42 (3.08-10.51)
10.00 (3.19-11.63)
10.00 (3.21-11.74)
10.00 (3.25-11.82)
10.00 (3.27-12.28)
10.00 (3.30-12.35)
10.00 (3.31-12.40)
10.00 (3.31-12.41)
10.00 (3.32-12.61)
8.00 (3.20-11.20)
8.50 (3.20-11.20)
9.50 (3.21-11.77)
10.00 (3.28-12.37)
10.00 (3.29-12.43)
10.00 (3.30-12.48)
9.00 (3.20-11.67)
10.00 (3.21-11.77)
10.00 (3.28-12.37)
10.00 (3.29-12.43)
10.00 (3.30-12.48)
10.00 (3.22-11.87)
10.00 (3.29-12.43)
10.00 (3.30-12.49)
10.00 (3.31-12.52)
10.00 (3.33-12.68)
10.00 (3.34-12.69)
9.50 (3.20-11.67)
10.00 (3.21-11.77)
10.00 (3.28-12.37)
10.00 (3.29-12.43)
10.00 (3.30-12.48)
10.00 (3.22-11.87)
10.00 (3.29-12.43)
10.00 (3.30-12.49)
10.00 (3.31-12.52)
10.00 (3.33-12.68)
10.00 (3.34-12.69)
10.00 (3.24-11.96)
10.00 (3.30-12.48)
10.00 (3.31-12.53)
10.00 (3.34-12.69)
10.00 (3.20-11.67)
10.00 (3.21-11.77)
10.00 (3.28-12.37)
10.00 (3.29-12.43)
10.00 (3.30-12.48)
10.00 (3.22-11.87)
10.00 (3.29-12.43)
10.00 (3.30-12.49)
10.00 (3.31-12.52)
10.00 (3.33-12.68)
2,890 (480-3,940)
3,090 (480-3,930)
3,020 (480-3,930)
2,810 (480-3,990)
2,810 (480-3,990)
2,810 (480-3,990)
2,740 (480-3,990)
2,740 (480-3,980)
1,960 (480-3,520)
2,320 (480-3,510)
2,690 (480-3,940)
3,160 (480-3,940)
3,090 (480-3,930)
2,770 (480-3,580)
3,160 (480-3,940)
3,090 (480-3,930)
3,020 (480-3,930)
2,810 (480-3,990)
2,810 (480-3,990)
2,810 (480-3,990)
2,740 (480-3,990)
2,740 (480-3,980)
3,110 (480-3,580)
3,090 (480-3,930)
3,020 (480-3,930)
2,950 (480-3,930)
2,810 (480-3,990)
2,740 (480-3,990)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,670 (480-3,970)
1,960 (480-3,490)
2,190 (480-3,490)
2,690 (480-3,930)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,430 (480-3,930)
3,020 (480-3,930)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,950 (480-3,930)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,670 (480-3,980)
2,600 (480-3,960)
2,600 (480-3,960)
2,750 (480-3,930)
3,020 (480-3,930)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,950 (480-3,930)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,670 (480-3,980)
2,600 (480-3,960)
2,600 (480-3,960)
2,880 (480-3,920)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,670 (480-3,970)
2,600 (480-3,960)
3,090 (480-3,930)
3,020 (480-3,930)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,950 (480-3,930)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,670 (480-3,980)
2,600 (480-3,960)
12.4 (2.1-17.0)
13.3 (2.1-16.9)
13.0 (2.1-16.9)
12.1 (2.1-17.2)
12.1 (2.1-17.2)
12.1 (2.1-17.2)
11.8 (2.1-17.2)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
8.4 (2.1-15.2)
10.0 (2.1-15.1)
11.6 (2.1-17.0)
13.6 (2.1-17.0)
13.3 (2.1-16.9)
11.9 (2.1-15.4)
13.6 (2.1-17.0)
13.3 (2.1-16.9)
13.0 (2.1-16.9)
12.1 (2.1-17.2)
12.1 (2.1-17.2)
12.1 (2.1-17.2)
11.8 (2.1-17.2)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
13.4 (2.1-15.4)
13.3 (2.1-16.9)
13.0 (2.1-16.9)
12.7 (2.1-16.9)
12.1 (2.1-17.2)
11.8 (2.1-17.2)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
11.5 (2.1-17.1)
8.4 (2.1-15.0)
9.4 (2.1-15.0)
11.6 (2.1-16.9)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
10.4 (2.1-16.9)
13.0 (2.1-16.9)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
12.7 (2.1-16.9)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
11.5 (2.1-17.1)
11.2 (2.1-17.1)
11.2 (2.1-17.1)
11.8 (2.1-16.9)
13.0 (2.1-16.9)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
12.7 (2.1-16.9)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
11.5 (2.1-17.1)
11.2 (2.1-17.1)
11.2 (2.1-17.1)
12.4 (2.1-16.9)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
11.5 (2.1-17.1)
11.2 (2.1-17.1)
13.3 (2.1-16.9)
13.0 (2.1-16.9)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
12.7 (2.1-16.9)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
11.5 (2.1-17.1)
11.2 (2.1-17.1)
40
CONTENTS
Capacity Tables
Reverse Cycle 240 V, 50 Hz

Outdoor
unit
5MKS100LVMA9
Cooling
capacity
Combinations
of indoor units
25+35+35+35
25+35+35+50
25+35+35+60
35+35+35+35
35+35+35+50
20+20+20+20+20
20+20+20+20+25
20+20+20+20+35
20+20+20+20+50
20+20+20+20+60
20+20+20+20+71
20+20+20+25+25
20+20+20+25+35
20+20+20+25+50
20+20+20+25+60
20+20+20+25+71
20+20+20+35+35
20+20+20+35+50
20+20+20+35+60
20+20+25+25+25
20+20+25+25+35
20+20+25+25+50
20+20+25+25+60
20+20+25+35+35
20+20+25+35+50
20+20+35+35+35
20+25+25+25+25
20+25+25+25+35
20+25+25+25+50
20+25+25+25+60
20+25+25+35+35
20+25+25+35+50
20+25+35+35+35
25+25+25+25+25
25+25+25+25+35
25+25+25+25+50
25+25+25+35+35
25+25+35+35+35

1.93
2.69
2.69
2.69
1.72
2.41
2.41
3.46
1.61
2.26
2.26
3.87
2.50
2.50
2.50
2.50
2.26
2.26
2.26
3.22
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
1.90
1.90
1.90
1.90
2.40
1.74
1.74
1.74
1.74
3.04
1.54
1.54
1.54
1.54
3.84
1.43
1.43
1.43
1.43
4.28
1.32
1.32
1.32
1.32
4.72
1.82
1.82
1.82
2.27
2.27
1.67
1.67
1.67
2.08
2.91
1.48
1.48
1.48
1.85
3.71
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.72
4.14
1.28
1.28
1.28
1.60
4.56
1.54
1.54
1.54
2.69
2.69
1.38
1.38
1.38
2.41
3.45
1.29
1.29
1.29
2.26
3.87
1.74
1.74
2.17
2.17
2.17
1.60
1.60
2.00
2.00
2.80
1.43
1.43
1.79
1.79
3.56
1.33
1.33
1.67
1.67
4.00
1.48
1.48
1.86
2.59
2.59
1.33
1.33
1.68
2.33
3.33
1.38
1.38
2.41
2.41
2.41
1.68
2.08
2.08
2.08
2.08
1.54
1.92
1.92
1.92
2.70
1.38
1.72
1.72
1.72
3.46
1.29
1.61
1.61
1.61
3.88
1.42
1.79
1.79
2.50
2.50
1.29
1.61
1.61
2.26
3.23
1.33
1.67
2.33
2.33
2.33
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
1.85
1.85
1.85
1.85
2.60
1.67
1.67
1.67
1.67
3.32
1.72
1.72
1.72
2.42
2.42
1.61
1.61
2.26
2.26
2.26
Total capacity (kW)

Rated (Min._ Max.)

Rated (Min._ Max.)
Total current (A)

Rated (Min._ Max.)
10.00 (3.24-11.96)
10.00 (3.30-12.48)
10.00 (3.31-12.53)
10.00 (3.25-12.04)
10.00 (3.31-12.53)
10.00 (3.30-12.50)
10.00 (3.30-12.50)
10.00 (3.31-12.55)
10.00 (3.34-12.71)
10.00 (3.34-12.71)
10.00 (3.34-12.71)
10.00 (3.30-12.50)
10.00 (3.31-12.55)
10.00 (3.34-12.71)
10.00 (3.34-12.71)
10.00 (3.34-12.71)
10.00 (3.32-12.59)
10.00 (3.34-12.71)
10.00 (3.34-12.71)
10.00 (3.30-12.50)
10.00 (3.31-12.55)
10.00 (3.34-12.71)
10.00 (3.34-12.71)
10.00 (3.32-12.59)
10.00 (3.34-12.71)
10.00 (3.32-12.62)
10.00 (3.30-12.50)
10.00 (3.31-12.55)
10.00 (3.34-12.71)
10.00 (3.34-12.71)
10.00 (3.32-12.59)
10.00 (3.34-12.71)
10.00 (3.32-12.62)
10.00 (3.30-12.50)
10.00 (3.31-12.55)
10.00 (3.34-12.71)
10.00 (3.32-12.59)
10.00 (3.32-12.62)
2,880 (480-3,920)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,670 (480-3,970)
2,880 (480-3,920)
2,670 (480-3,980)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,670 (480-3,970)
2,600 (480-3,960)
2,600 (480-3,950)
2,600 (480-3,940)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,670 (480-3,970)
2,600 (480-3,960)
2,600 (480-3,950)
2,600 (480-3,940)
2,670 (480-3,970)
2,600 (480-3,960)
2,600 (480-3,950)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,670 (480-3,970)
2,600 (480-3,960)
2,600 (480-3,950)
2,670 (480-3,970)
2,600 (480-3,950)
2,670 (480-3,970)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,670 (480-3,970)
2,600 (480-3,960)
2,600 (480-3,950)
2,670 (480-3,970)
2,600 (480-3,960)
2,670 (480-3,970)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,670 (480-3,970)
2,600 (480-3,960)
2,670 (480-3,970)
2,670 (480-3,970)
12.4 (2.1-16.9)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
11.5 (2.1-17.1)
12.4 (2.1-16.9)
11.5 (2.1-17.1)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
11.5 (2.1-17.1)
11.2 (2.1-17.1)
11.2 (2.1-17.0)
11.2 (2.1-17.0)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
11.5 (2.1-17.1)
11.2 (2.1-17.1)
11.2 (2.1-17.0)
11.2 (2.1-17.0)
11.5 (2.1-17.1)
11.2 (2.1-17.1)
11.2 (2.1-17.0)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
11.5 (2.1-17.1)
11.2 (2.1-17.1)
11.2 (2.1-17.0)
11.5 (2.1-17.1)
11.2 (2.1-17.0)
11.5 (2.1-17.1)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
11.5 (2.1-17.1)
11.2 (2.1-17.1)
11.2 (2.1-17.0)
11.5 (2.1-17.1)
11.2 (2.1-17.1)
11.5 (2.1-17.1)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
11.5 (2.1-17.1)
11.2 (2.1-17.1)
11.5 (2.1-17.1)
11.5 (2.1-17.1)
Outdoor
unit
3MXS52LVMA9
Cooling
capacity
3MXS52LVMA9
Heating
capacity
Notes: 1. Cooling operation data is based on the following conditions: indoor temp. 27CDB, 19CWB; outdoor temp. 35CDB;
corresponding refrigerant piping length 5m; level difference 0m.
2. Total capacity of connected indoor units is; up to 10.0 kW to the 3MKS58; up to 11.0 kW to the 3MKS68; up to the 15.6 kW to the 4MKS80 and the 5MKS100.
3. The above is the value for connecting with the following indoor units: 2.0/2.5/3.5/5.0/6.0/7.1 kW class, wall-mounted K series.
3MXS68LVMA9
Cooling
capacity
41
Combinations
of indoor units
20
25
35
50
20+20
20+25
20+35
20+50
25+25
25+35
25+50
35+35
35+50
20+20+20
20+20+25
20+20+35
20+25+25
20+25+35
20+35+35
25+25+25
25+25+35
20+20+50
20
25
35
50
20+20
20+25
20+35
20+50
25+25
25+35
25+50
35+35
35+50
20+20+20
20+20+25
20+20+35
20+25+25
20+25+35
20+35+35
25+25+25
25+25+35
20+20+50
20
25
35
50
60
20+20
20+25
20+35
20+50
20+60
25+25
25+35
25+50
25+60
35+35
35+50
35+60
50+50
50+60
20+20+20
20+20+25
20+20+35
20+20+50
20+20+60
20+25+25
20+25+35
20+25+50
20+25+60
20+35+35

2.00
2.50
3.50
5.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.50
1.89
3.31
1.49
3.71
2.60
2.60
2.17
3.03
1.73
3.47
2.60
2.60
2.14
3.06
1.73
1.73
1.73
1.60
1.60
2.00
1.39
1.39
2.42
1.48
1.86
1.86
1.30
1.63
2.27
1.16
2.02
2.02
1.73
1.73
1.73
1.53
1.53
2.14
1.16
1.16
2.88
2.72
3.40
4.20
5.80
3.05
3.05
2.78
3.47
2.38
4.17
1.94
4.86
3.25
3.25
2.79
3.91
2.27
4.53
3.40
3.40
2.80
4.00
2.26
2.26
2.26
2.09
2.09
2.60
1.81
1.81
3.16
1.94
2.42
2.42
1.70
2.13
2.97
1.52
2.64
2.64
2.26
2.26
2.26
2.00
2.00
2.80
1.51
1.51
3.78
2.00
2.50
3.50
5.00
6.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.50
2.00
3.50
1.94
4.86
1.70
5.10
2.50
2.50
2.50
3.50
2.27
4.53
2.00
4.80
3.40
3.40
2.80
4.00
2.51
4.29
3.40
3.40
3.09
3.71
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.50
1.81
1.81
3.18
1.51
1.51
3.78
1.36
1.36
4.08
1.94
2.43
2.43
1.70
2.13
2.97
1.43
1.79
3.58
1.30
1.62
3.88
1.52
2.64
2.64
Total capacity (kW)

Rated (Min._ Max.)

Rated (Min._ Max.)
Total current (A)

Rated (Min._ Max.)
2.00 (1.63-2.95)
2.50 (1.63-3.24)
3.50 (1.65-4.52)
5.00 (1.77-5.84)
4.00 (1.80-5.96)
4.50 (1.80-6.23)
5.20 (1.82-6.24)
5.20 (1.90-6.91)
5.20 (1.80-6.23)
5.20 (1.82-6.35)
5.20 (1.90-6.91)
5.20 (1.83-6.40)
5.20 (1.91-6.96)
5.20 (1.92-7.08)
5.20 (1.92-7.08)
5.20 (1.93-7.17)
5.20 (1.92-7.08)
5.20 (1.93-7.17)
5.20 (1.94-7.18)
5.20 (1.92-7.08)
5.20 (1.93-7.17)
5.20 (1.94-7.30)
2.72 (1.21-3.76)
3.40 (1.21-4.05)
4.20 (1.22-4.85)
5.80 (1.30-6.82)
6.10 (1.37-7.00)
6.25 (1.37-7.00)
6.55 (1.38-7.04)
6.80 (1.39-7.99)
6.50 (1.37-7.00)
6.70 (1.38-7.19)
6.80 (1.42-7.99)
6.80 (1.40-7.37)
6.80 (1.42-8.02)
6.78 (1.39-8.05)
6.78 (1.39-8.05)
6.78 (1.45-8.11)
6.78 (1.39-8.05)
6.80 (1.57-8.11)
6.80 (1.56-8.09)
6.78 (1.45-8.05)
6.80 (1.57-8.11)
6.80 (1.64-8.34)
2.00 (1.95-3.00)
2.50 (1.95-3.40)
3.50 (1.95-4.75)
5.00 (1.96-5.89)
6.00 (1.96-6.52)
4.00 (2.19-5.35)
4.50 (2.19-5.72)
5.50 (2.19-6.34)
6.80 (2.19-7.45)
6.80 (2.19-7.69)
5.00 (2.19-6.08)
6.00 (2.19-6.67)
6.80 (2.19-7.51)
6.80 (2.19-7.69)
6.80 (2.19-7.45)
6.80 (2.19-7.70)
6.80 (2.25-7.94)
6.80 (2.36-8.13)
6.80 (2.42-8.31)
6.00 (2.20-7.43)
6.50 (2.20-7.63)
6.80 (2.20-7.84)
6.80 (2.23-8.28)
6.80 (2.36-8.41)
6.80 (2.20-7.70)
6.80 (2.20-7.97)
6.80 (2.23-8.78)
6.80 (2.36-8.85)
6.80 (2.21-8.11)
440 (320- 730)

590 (320- 820)
950 (320-1,380)
1,520 (310-2,160)
980 (310-1,860)
1,180 (310-2,180)
1,510 (310-2,180)
1,340 (300-2,240)
1,540 (310-2,180)
1,510 (310-2,180)
1,340 (300-2,240)
1,450 (300-2,190)
1,310 (300-2,250)
1,280 (290-2,260)
1,280 (290-2,260)
1,250 (290-2,270)
1,280 (290-2,260)
1,250 (290-2,270)
1,250 (290-2,280)
1,280 (290-2,260)
1,250 (290-2,270)
1,220 (280-2,280)
570 (220- 910)
780 (220-1,020)
1,030 (200-1,290)
1,580 (220-2,050)
1,400 (200-1,750)
1,460 (200-1,750)
1,550 (200-1,720)
1,550 (190-2,020)
1,570 (200-1,750)
1,600 (200-1,780)
1,550 (210-2,020)
1,610 (210-1,810)
1,530 (210-1,990)
1,430 (180-1,900)
1,430 (180-1,900)
1,420 (190-1,920)
1,430 (180-1,900)
1,440 (200-1,920)
1,430 (200-1,910)
1,430 (190-1,900)
1,440 (200-1,920)
1,420 (220-2,020)
470 (440- 730)
600 (440- 880)
910 (460-1,500)
1,560 (430-2,100)
2,150 (430-2,570)
980 (450-1,530)
1,190 (450-1,740)
1,610 (450-2,080)
2,260 (420-2,740)
2,260 (420-2,890)
1,420 (450-1,950)
1,910 (450-2,310)
2,260 (420-2,790)
2,260 (420-2,890)
2,410 (440-2,900)
2,210 (420-2,890)
2,210 (440-3,050)
2,110 (450-3,050)
2,060 (450-3,160)
1,620 (380-2,390)
1,880 (380-2,530)
2,010 (380-2,630)
1,870 (380-2,780)
1,870 (410-2,830)
2,020 (380-2,580)
2,010 (380-2,730)
1,870 (380-3,210)
1,870 (410-3,210)
1,970 (370-2,780)
1.9 (1.4- 3.1)

2.5 (1.4- 3.5)
4.0 (1.4- 5.9)
6.4 (1.4- 9.1)
4.1 (1.4- 7.9)
5.0 (1.4- 9.2)
6.4 (1.4- 9.2)
5.6 (1.3- 9.5)
6.5 (1.4- 9.2)
6.4 (1.4- 9.2)
5.6 (1.3- 9.5)
6.1 (1.3- 9.3)
5.5 (1.3- 9.5)
5.4 (1.3- 9.6)
5.4 (1.3- 9.6)
5.3 (1.3- 9.6)
5.4 (1.3- 9.6)
5.3 (1.3- 9.6)
5.3 (1.3- 9.6)
5.4 (1.3- 9.6)
5.3 (1.3- 9.6)
5.1 (1.2- 9.6)
2.4 (1.0- 3.9)
3.3 (1.0- 4.3)
4.3 (0.9- 5.5)
6.6 (1.0- 8.7)
5.9 (0.9- 7.4)
6.1 (0.9- 7.4)
6.5 (0.9- 7.3)
6.5 (0.8- 8.6)
6.6 (0.9- 7.4)
6.7 (0.9- 7.5)
6.5 (0.9- 8.6)
6.8 (0.9- 7.7)
6.4 (0.9- 8.4)
6.0 (0.8- 8.0)
6.0 (0.8- 8.0)
6.0 (0.8- 8.1)
6.0 (0.8- 8.0)
6.1 (0.9- 8.1)
6.0 (0.9- 8.1)
6.0 (0.8- 8.0)
6.1 (0.9- 8.1)
6.0 (1.0- 8.6)
2.0 (1.9- 3.1)
2.5 (1.9- 3.8)
3.8 (2.0- 6.4)
6.6 (1.9- 8.9)
9.0 (1.9-10.9)
4.1 (1.9- 6.5)
5.0 (1.9- 7.4)
6.8 (1.9- 8.8)
9.5 (1.8-11.6)
9.5 (1.8-12.2)
6.0 (1.9- 8.3)
8.0 (1.9- 9.8)
9.5 (1.8-11.8)
9.5 (1.8-12.2)
10.1 (1.9-12.3)
9.3 (1.8-12.2)
9.3 (1.9-12.9)
8.9 (1.9-12.9)
8.7 (1.9-13.3)
6.8 (1.6-10.1)
7.9 (1.6-10.7)
8.5 (1.6-11.1)
7.9 (1.6-11.8)
7.9 (1.8-12.0)
8.5 (1.6-10.9)
8.5 (1.6-11.5)
7.9 (1.6-13.6)
7.9 (1.8-13.6)
8.3 (1.6-11.8)
42
CONTENTS
Capacity Tables
Outdoor
unit
3MXS68LVMA9
Cooling
capacity
3MXS68LVMA9
Heating
capacity
4MXS80LVMA9
Cooling
capacity
43
Combinations
of indoor units
20+35+50
25+25+25
25+25+35
25+25+50
25+25+60
25+35+35
25+35+50
35+35+35
20
25
35
50
60
20+20
20+25
20+35
20+50
20+60
25+25
25+35
25+50
25+60
35+35
35+50
35+60
50+50
50+60
20+20+20
20+20+25
20+20+35
20+20+50
20+20+60
20+25+25
20+25+35
20+25+50
20+25+60
20+35+35
20+35+50
25+25+25
25+25+35
25+25+50
25+25+60
25+35+35
25+35+50
35+35+35
20
25
35
50
60
71
20+20
20+25
20+35
20+50
20+60
20+71
25+25
25+35
25+50
25+60
25+71
35+35
35+50
35+60
35+71
50+50
50+60
50+71
60+60
60+71
71+71
20+20+20

1.30
2.27
3.23
2.27
2.27
2.27
2.00
2.00
2.80
1.70
1.70
3.40
1.55
1.55
3.70
1.78
2.51
2.51
1.55
2.16
3.09
2.27
2.27
2.27
2.72
3.40
4.30
7.20
7.90
3.25
3.25
3.04
3.81
2.71
4.74
2.40
6.00
2.10
6.30
3.60
3.60
3.29
4.61
2.80
5.60
2.47
5.93
4.20
4.20
3.46
4.94
3.09
5.31
4.30
4.30
3.91
4.69
2.63
2.63
2.63
2.54
2.54
3.17
2.24
2.24
3.92
1.91
1.91
4.78
1.72
1.72
5.16
2.40
3.00
3.00
2.10
2.63
3.67
1.81
2.26
4.53
1.64
2.05
4.91
1.86
3.27
3.27
1.64
2.87
4.09
2.80
2.80
2.80
2.47
2.47
3.46
2.15
2.15
4.30
1.95
1.95
4.70
2.22
3.09
3.09
1.95
2.74
3.91
2.80
2.80
2.80
2.00
2.50
3.50
5.00
6.00
7.10
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.50
2.00
3.50
2.00
5.00
1.83
5.47
1.66
5.90
2.50
2.50
2.50
3.50
2.40
4.79
2.18
5.24
2.00
5.67
3.50
3.50
3.06
4.36
2.82
4.83
2.61
5.29
3.88
3.88
3.63
4.36
3.31
4.69
4.00
4.00
3.66
4.34
4.00
4.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
Total capacity (kW)

Rated (Min._ Max.)

Rated (Min._ Max.)
Total current (A)

Rated (Min._ Max.)
6.80 (2.36- 8.86)

6.80 (2.20- 8.02)
6.80 (2.20- 8.16)
6.80 (2.35- 8.83)
6.80 (2.42- 9.00)
6.80 (2.25- 8.36)
6.80 (2.42- 8.92)
6.80 (2.37- 8.44)
2.72 (1.35- 3.90)
3.40 (1.35- 4.17)
4.30 (1.35- 4.53)
7.20 (1.61- 8.07)
7.90 (1.93- 8.54)
6.50 (1.61- 7.67)
6.85 (1.61- 7.82)
7.45 (1.75- 8.47)
8.40 (2.15-10.12)
8.40 (2.43-10.32)
7.20 (1.61- 8.21)
7.90 (1.90- 8.92)
8.40 (2.26-10.23)
8.40 (2.53-10.40)
8.40 (2.13- 9.10)
8.40 (2.50-10.41)
8.40 (2.73-10.56)
8.60 (2.83-10.61)
8.60 (3.04-10.64)
7.89 (1.89-10.08)
8.25 (2.02-10.15)
8.40 (2.27-10.20)
8.60 (2.67-10.47)
8.60 (2.81-10.60)
8.40 (2.15-10.10)
8.40 (2.36-10.20)
8.60 (2.70-10.61)
8.60 (2.93-10.64)
8.40 (2.68-10.41)
8.60 (3.02-10.64)
8.40 (2.26-10.23)
8.40 (2.50-10.41)
8.60 (2.83-10.61)
8.60 (3.04-10.65)
8.40 (2.73-10.57)
8.60 (3.04-10.64)
8.40 (3.01-10.62)
2.00 (1.80- 3.27)
2.50 (1.87- 3.52)
3.50 (1.91- 4.85)
5.00 (2.07- 5.94)
6.00 (2.17- 7.07)
7.10 (2.28- 7.52)
4.00 (2.30- 5.58)
4.50 (2.30- 5.80)
5.50 (2.33- 6.38)
7.00 (2.27- 7.91)
7.30 (2.41- 8.11)
7.56 (2.56- 8.28)
5.00 (2.30- 6.31)
6.00 (2.33- 7.14)
7.19 (2.34- 8.03)
7.42 (2.48- 8.11)
7.67 (2.63- 8.28)
7.00 (2.27- 7.62)
7.42 (2.48- 8.10)
7.65 (2.61- 8.30)
7.90 (2.77- 8.35)
7.76 (2.68- 8.76)
7.99 (2.82- 8.82)
8.00 (2.97- 8.99)
8.00 (2.96- 9.01)
8.00 (3.11- 9.05)
8.00 (3.26- 9.10)
6.00 (2.26- 7.81)
1,870 (410-3,210)
2,020 (380-2,840)
2,010 (380-2,890)
1,870 (410-3,260)
1,870 (410-3,380)
1,970 (400-2,990)
1,870 (410-3,260)
1,920 (420-2,990)
640 (290-1,050)
870 (290-1,160)
1,220 (290-1,300)
2,440 (370-2,960)
2,830 (470-3,220)
1,820 (360-2,380)
1,980 (360-2,460)
2,240 (390-2,790)
2,680 (460-3,400)
2,660 (550-3,420)
2,330 (360-2,680)
2,680 (430-3,060)
2,680 (510-3,440)
2,660 (580-3,450)
2,950 (500-3,250)
2,660 (580-3,450)
2,630 (620-3,460)
2,510 (590-3,240)
2,450 (660-3,210)
2,150 (350-3,070)
2,330 (390-3,120)
2,390 (450-3,090)
2,120 (510-2,930)
2,100 (550-2,930)
2,410 (410-3,100)
2,390 (470-3,090)
2,120 (530-2,970)
2,100 (570-2,940)
2,330 (530-3,120)
2,100 (600-2,940)
2,410 (450-3,140)
2,390 (490-3,160)
2,120 (560-2,970)
2,100 (620-2,950)
2,330 (560-3,170)
2,100 (620-2,940)
2,310 (620-3,140)
490 (450- 820)
620 (480- 890)
900 (480-1,340)
1,350 (500-1,770)
1,780 (530-2,440)
2,450 (540-2,780)
960 (540-1,460)
1,120 (540-1,560)
1,470 (540-1,800)
2,070 (510-2,940)
2,240 (550-3,080)
2,360 (580-3,220)
1,290 (540-1,790)
1,700 (540-2,480)
2,170 (510-3,060)
2,290 (550-3,080)
2,410 (580-3,220)
2,210 (540-2,840)
2,290 (550-3,080)
2,410 (580-3,220)
2,540 (620-3,230)
2,290 (590-3,290)
2,410 (620-3,310)
2,420 (660-3,450)
2,420 (660-3,450)
2,360 (700-3,460)
2,370 (730-3,470)
1,530 (480-2,610)
7.9 (1.8-13.6)
8.5 (1.6-12.0)
8.5 (1.6-12.2)
7.9 (1.8-13.8)
7.9 (1.8-14.3)
8.3 (1.7-12.6)
7.9 (1.8-13.8)
8.1 (1.8-12.6)
2.7 (1.3- 4.5)
3.7 (1.3- 4.9)
5.1 (1.3- 5.5)
10.3 (1.6-12.5)
11.9 (2.0-13.6)
7.7 (1.6-10.1)
8.3 (1.6-10.4)
9.4 (1.7-11.8)
11.3 (2.0-14.4)
11.2 (2.4-14.4)
9.8 (1.6-11.3)
11.3 (1.9-12.9)
11.3 (2.2-14.5)
11.2 (2.5-14.6)
12.4 (2.2-13.7)
11.2 (2.5-14.6)
11.1 (2.7-14.6)
10.6 (2.5-13.7)
10.3 (2.8-13.6)
9.0 (1.5-13.0)
9.8 (1.7-13.2)
10.1 (1.9-13.1)
8.9 (2.2-12.4)
8.8 (2.4-12.4)
10.1 (1.8-13.1)
10.1 (2.0-13.1)
8.9 (2.3-12.5)
8.8 (2.4-12.4)
9.8 (2.3-13.2)
8.8 (2.6-12.4)
10.1 (1.9-13.3)
10.1 (2.1-13.3)
8.9 (2.4-12.5)
8.8 (2.7-12.5)
9.8 (2.4-13.4)
8.8 (2.7-12.4)
9.7 (2.7-13.3)
2.1 (2.0- 3.5)
2.6 (2.1- 3.8)
3.8 (2.1- 5.7)
5.7 (2.2- 7.6)
7.6 (2.3-10.4)
10.4 (2.3-11.9)
4.1 (2.3- 6.3)
4.8 (2.3- 6.7)
6.3 (2.3- 7.7)
8.8 (2.2-12.5)
9.5 (2.4-13.1)
10.0 (2.5-13.7)
5.5 (2.3- 7.7)
7.2 (2.3-10.6)
9.2 (2.2-13.1)
9.7 (2.4-13.1)
10.2 (2.5-13.7)
9.4 (2.3-12.1)
9.7 (2.4-13.1)
10.2 (2.5-13.7)
10.8 (2.7-13.8)
9.7 (2.6-14.0)
10.2 (2.7-14.1)
10.3 (2.9-14.7)
10.3 (2.9-14.7)
10.0 (3.0-14.8)
10.1 (3.2-14.8)
6.5 (2.1-11.1)
Outdoor
unit
4MXS80LVMA9
Cooling
capacity
Combinations
of indoor units
20+20+25
20+20+35
20+20+50
20+20+60
20+20+71
20+25+25
20+25+35
20+25+50
20+25+60
20+25+71
20+35+35
20+35+50
20+35+60
20+35+71
20+50+50
20+50+60
20+50+71
20+60+60
25+25+25
25+25+35
25+25+50
25+25+60
25+25+71
25+35+35
25+35+50
25+35+60
25+35+71
25+50+50
25+50+60
25+60+60
35+35+35
35+35+50
35+35+60
35+35+71
35+50+50
35+50+60
20+20+20+20
20+20+20+25
20+20+20+35
20+20+20+50
20+20+20+60
20+20+20+71
20+20+25+25
20+20+25+35
20+20+25+50
20+20+25+60
20+20+25+71
20+20+35+35
20+20+35+50
20+20+35+60
20+20+50+50
20+25+25+25
20+25+25+35
20+25+25+50
20+25+25+60
20+25+25+71
20+25+35+35
20+25+35+50
20+25+35+60
20+25+50+50
20+35+35+35
20+35+35+50
25+25+25+25
25+25+25+35
25+25+25+50
25+25+25+60
25+25+35+35
25+25+35+50
25+25+35+60
25+35+35+35
25+35+35+50
35+35+35+35

2.00
2.00
2.50
1.94
1.94
3.41
1.78
1.78
4.43
1.60
1.60
4.80
1.44
1.44
5.12
2.00
2.50
2.50
1.88
2.35
3.29
1.68
2.11
4.21
1.52
1.90
4.58
1.38
1.72
4.90
1.77
3.11
3.11
1.52
2.67
3.81
1.39
2.43
4.18
1.27
2.22
4.51
1.34
3.33
3.33
1.23
3.08
3.69
1.13
2.84
4.03
1.14
3.43
3.43
2.43
2.43
2.43
2.28
2.28
3.20
2.00
2.00
4.00
1.82
1.82
4.36
1.65
1.65
4.70
2.10
2.95
2.95
1.82
2.55
3.63
1.67
2.33
4.00
1.53
2.14
4.33
1.60
3.20
3.20
1.48
2.96
3.56
1.38
3.31
3.31
2.67
2.67
2.67
2.33
2.33
3.34
2.15
2.15
3.70
1.99
1.99
4.02
2.08
2.96
2.96
1.93
2.76
3.31
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
1.88
1.88
1.88
2.36
1.68
1.68
1.68
2.96
1.45
1.45
1.45
3.65
1.33
1.33
1.33
4.01
1.22
1.22
1.22
4.34
1.78
1.78
2.22
2.22
1.60
1.60
2.00
2.80
1.39
1.39
1.74
3.48
1.28
1.28
1.60
3.84
1.18
1.18
1.47
4.17
1.45
1.45
2.55
2.55
1.28
1.28
2.24
3.20
1.19
1.19
2.07
3.55
1.14
1.14
2.86
2.86
1.67
2.11
2.11
2.11
1.52
1.90
1.90
2.68
1.33
1.67
1.67
3.33
1.23
1.54
1.54
3.69
1.13
1.42
1.42
4.03
1.40
1.74
2.43
2.43
1.23
1.54
2.15
3.08
1.14
1.43
2.00
3.43
1.10
1.38
2.76
2.76
1.28
2.24
2.24
2.24
1.14
2.00
2.00
2.86
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
1.82
1.82
1.82
2.54
1.60
1.60
1.60
3.20
1.48
1.48
1.48
3.56
1.67
1.67
2.33
2.33
1.48
1.48
2.07
2.97
1.38
1.38
1.93
3.31
1.55
2.15
2.15
2.15
1.38
1.93
1.93
2.76
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
Total capacity (kW)

Rated (Min._ Max.)

Rated (Min._ Max.)
Total current (A)

Rated (Min._ Max.)
6.50 (2.26-8.24)
7.28 (2.34-8.43)
7.99 (2.55-8.97)
8.00 (2.68-9.03)
8.00 (2.83-9.20)
7.00 (2.27-8.24)
7.52 (2.41-8.43)
8.00 (2.61-8.97)
8.00 (2.75-9.03)
8.00 (2.90-9.20)
7.99 (2.55-8.63)
8.00 (2.75-9.03)
8.00 (2.89-9.21)
8.00 (3.04-9.25)
8.00 (2.96-9.46)
8.00 (3.09-9.54)
8.00 (3.25-9.60)
8.00 (3.23-9.60)
7.28 (2.34-8.36)
7.76 (2.48-8.43)
8.00 (2.68-8.97)
8.00 (2.82-9.03)
8.00 (2.97-9.20)
8.00 (2.61-8.63)
8.00 (2.82-9.03)
8.00 (2.96-9.21)
8.00 (3.11-9.25)
8.00 (3.03-9.47)
8.00 (3.16-9.58)
8.00 (3.30-9.60)
8.00 (2.75-8.69)
8.00 (2.96-9.20)
8.00 (3.09-9.26)
8.00 (3.25-9.30)
8.00 (3.16-9.58)
8.00 (3.30-9.60)
8.00 (2.41-8.90)
8.00 (2.48-8.97)
8.00 (2.61-9.02)
8.00 (2.82-9.43)
8.00 (2.96-9.59)
8.00 (3.11-9.62)
8.00 (2.55-9.10)
8.00 (2.68-9.15)
8.00 (2.89-9.56)
8.00 (3.03-9.59)
8.00 (3.18-9.62)
8.00 (2.82-9.20)
8.00 (3.03-9.59)
8.00 (3.16-9.63)
8.00 (3.23-9.64)
8.00 (2.61-9.10)
8.00 (2.75-9.15)
8.00 (2.96-9.56)
8.00 (3.09-9.59)
8.00 (3.25-9.62)
8.00 (2.89-9.33)
8.00 (3.09-9.59)
8.00 (3.23-9.63)
8.00 (3.30-9.65)
8.00 (3.03-9.37)
8.00 (3.23-9.63)
8.00 (2.68-9.10)
8.00 (2.82-9.15)
8.00 (3.03-9.56)
8.00 (3.16-9.59)
8.00 (2.96-9.33)
8.00 (3.16-9.59)
8.00 (3.30-9.63)
8.00 (3.09-9.37)
8.00 (3.30-9.63)
8.00 (3.23-9.42)
1,780 (480-2,970)
2,150 (520-3,110)
2,420 (550-3,320)
2,360 (550-3,330)
2,370 (590-3,470)
1,980 (520-2,970)
2,260 (520-3,110)
2,420 (550-3,320)
2,360 (590-3,330)
2,370 (620-3,470)
2,550 (550-3,260)
2,360 (590-3,330)
2,370 (620-3,480)
2,310 (660-3,480)
2,260 (620-3,510)
2,210 (650-3,510)
2,210 (690-3,510)
2,210 (690-3,510)
2,140 (520-3,100)
2,430 (550-3,110)
2,420 (590-3,320)
2,360 (590-3,330)
2,370 (620-3,470)
2,550 (590-3,260)
2,360 (590-3,330)
2,370 (620-3,480)
2,310 (660-3,480)
2,260 (620-3,510)
2,210 (650-3,510)
2,210 (690-3,510)
2,560 (620-3,270)
2,370 (620-3,470)
2,310 (660-3,480)
2,320 (690-3,490)
2,210 (650-3,510)
2,210 (690-3,510)
2,370 (480-3,140)
2,370 (520-3,200)
2,320 (550-3,210)
2,190 (580-3,370)
2,140 (610-3,510)
2,130 (650-3,510)
2,370 (520-3,340)
2,320 (550-3,350)
2,190 (580-3,510)
2,140 (610-3,510)
2,130 (650-3,510)
2,320 (590-3,350)
2,140 (610-3,510)
2,130 (650-3,510)
1,990 (640-3,490)
2,370 (550-3,340)
2,320 (590-3,350)
2,190 (620-3,510)
2,140 (610-3,510)
2,130 (690-3,510)
2,320 (620-3,490)
2,140 (650-3,510)
2,130 (650-3,510)
1,990 (640-3,490)
2,260 (660-3,500)
2,130 (650-3,510)
2,370 (550-3,340)
2,320 (590-3,350)
2,190 (620-3,510)
2,140 (650-3,510)
2,320 (620-3,490)
2,140 (650-3,510)
2,130 (690-3,510)
2,260 (660-3,500)
2,130 (690-3,510)
2,260 (690-3,500)
7.6 (2.1-12.7)
9.1 (2.3-13.3)
10.3 (2.4-14.2)
10.0 (2.4-14.2)
10.1 (2.6-14.8)
8.4 (2.3-12.7)
9.6 (2.3-13.3)
10.3 (2.4-14.2)
10.0 (2.6-14.2)
10.1 (2.7-14.8)
10.8 (2.4-13.9)
10.0 (2.6-14.2)
10.1 (2.7-14.8)
9.8 (2.9-14.8)
9.6 (2.7-15.0)
9.4 (2.8-15.0)
9.4 (3.0-15.0)
9.4 (3.0-15.0)
9.1 (2.3-13.2)
10.3 (2.4-13.3)
10.3 (2.6-14.2)
10.0 (2.6-14.2)
10.1 (2.7-14.8)
10.8 (2.6-13.9)
10.0 (2.6-14.2)
10.1 (2.7-14.8)
9.8 (2.9-14.8)
9.6 (2.7-15.0)
9.4 (2.8-15.0)
9.4 (3.0-15.0)
10.9 (2.7-14.0)
10.1 (2.7-14.8)
9.8 (2.9-14.8)
9.9 (3.0-14.9)
9.4 (2.8-15.0)
9.4 (3.0-15.0)
10.1 (2.1-13.4)
10.1 (2.3-13.7)
9.9 (2.4-13.7)
9.3 (2.5-14.4)
9.1 (2.6-15.0)
9.1 (2.8-15.0)
10.1 (2.3-14.3)
9.9 (2.4-14.3)
9.3 (2.5-15.0)
9.1 (2.6-15.0)
9.1 (2.8-15.0)
9.9 (2.6-14.3)
9.1 (2.6-15.0)
9.1 (2.8-15.0)
8.5 (2.8-14.9)
10.1 (2.4-14.3)
9.9 (2.6-14.3)
9.3 (2.7-15.0)
9.1 (2.6-15.0)
9.1 (3.0-15.0)
9.9 (2.7-14.9)
9.1 (2.8-15.0)
9.1 (2.8-15.0)
8.5 (2.8-14.9)
9.6 (2.9-14.9)
9.1 (2.8-15.0)
10.1 (2.4-14.3)
9.9 (2.6-14.3)
9.3 (2.7-15.0)
9.1 (2.8-15.0)
9.9 (2.7-14.9)
9.1 (2.8-15.0)
9.1 (3.0-15.0)
9.6 (2.9-14.9)
9.1 (3.0-15.0)
9.6 (3.0-14.9)
44
CONTENTS
Capacity Tables
Outdoor
unit
4MXS80LVMA9
Heating
capacity
45
Combinations
of indoor units
20
25
35
50
60
71
20+20
20+25
20+35
20+50
20+60
20+71
25+25
25+35
25+50
25+60
25+71
35+35
35+50
35+60
35+71
50+50
50+60
50+71
60+60
60+71
71+71
20+20+20
20+20+25
20+20+35
20+20+50
20+20+60
20+20+71
20+25+25
20+25+35
20+25+50
20+25+60
20+25+71
20+35+35
20+35+50
20+35+60
20+35+71
20+50+50
20+50+60
20+50+71
20+60+60
25+25+25
25+25+35
25+25+50
25+25+60
25+25+71
25+35+35
25+35+50
25+35+60
25+35+71
25+50+50
25+50+60
25+60+60
35+35+35
35+35+50
35+35+60
35+35+71
35+50+50
35+50+60
20+20+20+20
20+20+20+25
20+20+20+35
20+20+20+50
20+20+20+60
20+20+20+71
20+20+25+25
20+20+25+35
20+20+25+50

2.44
3.05
4.27
6.09
7.31
8.65
2.44
2.44
2.44
3.05
2.44
4.26
2.44
6.09
2.32
6.95
2.11
7.49
3.05
3.05
3.05
4.26
2.98
5.95
2.83
6.79
2.50
7.10
4.27
4.27
3.96
5.66
3.54
6.06
3.17
6.43
4.80
4.80
4.36
5.24
3.97
5.63
4.80
4.80
4.40
5.20
4.80
4.80
2.43
2.43
2.43
2.44
2.44
3.04
2.38
2.38
4.17
2.13
2.13
5.34
1.92
1.92
5.76
1.73
1.73
6.14
2.43
3.05
3.05
2.32
2.90
4.05
2.02
2.53
5.05
1.83
2.29
5.48
1.66
2.07
5.87
2.14
3.73
3.73
1.83
3.20
4.57
1.67
2.92
5.01
1.52
2.67
5.41
1.60
4.00
4.00
1.48
3.69
4.43
1.36
3.40
4.84
1.38
4.11
4.11
2.98
2.98
2.98
2.83
2.83
3.96
2.40
2.40
4.80
2.18
2.18
5.24
1.98
1.98
5.64
2.52
3.54
3.54
2.18
3.05
4.37
2.00
2.80
4.80
1.83
2.56
5.21
1.92
3.84
3.84
1.78
3.56
4.26
1.66
3.97
3.97
3.20
3.20
3.20
2.80
2.80
4.00
2.58
2.58
4.44
2.38
2.38
4.84
2.48
3.56
3.56
2.32
3.31
3.97
2.32
2.32
2.32
2.32
2.26
2.26
2.26
2.84
2.02
2.02
2.02
3.54
1.75
1.75
1.75
4.35
1.60
1.60
1.60
4.80
1.47
1.47
1.47
5.19
2.13
2.13
2.67
2.67
1.92
1.92
2.40
3.36
1.67
1.67
2.09
4.17
Total capacity (kW)

Rated (Min._ Max.)

Rated (Min._ Max.)
Total current (A)

Rated (Min._ Max.)
2.44 (2.19- 4.47)

3.05 (2.19- 4.75)
4.27 (2.19- 5.44)
6.09 (2.18- 8.11)
7.31 (2.18- 8.58)
8.65 (2.50- 8.81)
4.88 (2.39- 7.78)
5.49 (2.39- 8.03)
6.70 (2.39- 8.27)
8.53 (2.47- 9.72)
9.27 (2.74-10.06)
9.60 (3.04-10.17)
6.09 (2.39- 8.27)
7.31 (2.39- 8.62)
8.93 (2.61- 9.78)
9.62 (2.88-10.11)
9.60 (3.17-10.22)
8.53 (2.47- 8.97)
9.62 (2.88- 9.84)
9.60 (3.15-10.17)
9.60 (3.45-10.26)
9.60 (3.28-10.35)
9.60 (3.55-10.35)
9.60 (3.85-10.36)
9.60 (3.82-10.36)
9.60 (4.12-10.38)
9.60 (4.42-10.41)
7.29 (2.38- 8.66)
7.92 (2.38- 9.08)
8.93 (2.61- 9.78)
9.60 (3.01-10.36)
9.60 (3.28-10.36)
9.60 (3.58-10.39)
8.53 (2.47- 9.16)
9.27 (2.74- 9.84)
9.60 (3.15-10.36)
9.60 (3.42-10.36)
9.60 (3.72-10.39)
9.60 (3.01-10.07)
9.60 (3.42-10.36)
9.60 (3.69-10.36)
9.60 (3.99-10.39)
9.60 (3.82-10.67)
9.60 (4.09-10.67)
9.60 (4.39-10.71)
9.60 (4.36-10.71)
8.93 (2.61- 9.38)
9.62 (2.88- 9.84)
9.60 (3.28-10.36)
9.60 (3.55-10.36)
9.60 (3.85-10.39)
9.60 (3.15-10.12)
9.60 (3.55-10.36)
9.60 (3.82-10.36)
9.60 (4.12-10.39)
9.60 (3.96-10.65)
9.60 (4.23-10.67)
9.60 (4.50-10.71)
9.60 (3.42-10.12)
9.60 (3.82-10.36)
9.60 (4.09-10.37)
9.60 (4.39-10.40)
9.60 (4.23-10.64)
9.60 (4.50-10.68)
9.28 (2.74- 9.45)
9.62 (2.88- 9.84)
9.60 (3.15-10.37)
9.60 (3.55-10.68)
9.60 (3.82-10.72)
9.60 (4.12-10.75)
9.60 (3.01-10.37)
9.60 (3.28-10.37)
9.60 (3.69-10.68)
600 (510-1,110)
750 (510-1,190)
1,050 (510-1,370)
1,540 (490-2,220)
1,950 (480-2,380)
2,390 (560-2,430)
1,130 (530-2,050)
1,330 (530-2,140)
1,680 (520-2,210)
2,300 (530-2,720)
2,570 (600-2,940)
2,680 (650-2,990)
1,490 (530-2,230)
1,900 (520-2,350)
2,440 (570-2,910)
2,720 (630-2,980)
2,680 (680-3,030)
2,330 (550-2,600)
2,710 (630-2,940)
2,700 (690-3,010)
2,660 (740-3,060)
2,670 (670-3,140)
2,660 (740-3,130)
2,620 (780-3,100)
2,640 (800-3,120)
2,610 (840-3,100)
2,570 (880-3,070)
1,750 (450-2,190)
1,970 (450-2,270)
2,320 (500-2,650)
2,570 (570-3,070)
2,560 (630-3,060)
2,520 (670-3,030)
2,200 (480-2,440)
2,460 (540-2,840)
2,570 (610-3,070)
2,560 (660-3,060)
2,520 (700-3,030)
2,590 (590-2,840)
2,550 (660-3,050)
2,540 (690-3,050)
2,500 (760-3,020)
2,510 (700-3,020)
2,500 (750-3,010)
2,460 (790-2,990)
2,480 (810-3,000)
2,340 (510-2,560)
2,610 (570-2,840)
2,570 (640-3,070)
2,560 (660-3,060)
2,520 (740-3,030)
2,590 (620-2,880)
2,550 (660-3,050)
2,540 (720-3,050)
2,500 (760-3,020)
2,510 (730-3,020)
2,500 (790-3,010)
2,480 (850-3,000)
2,580 (680-2,870)
2,530 (720-3,040)
2,520 (770-3,030)
2,480 (810-3,000)
2,490 (780-3,010)
2,480 (840-3,000)
2,320 (450-2,440)
2,470 (480-2,700)
2,450 (530-2,980)
2,410 (590-2,950)
2,390 (640-2,940)
2,360 (670-2,910)
2,470 (510-2,990)
2,450 (560-2,980)
2,410 (620-2,950)
2.6 (2.2- 4.8)

3.2 (2.2- 5.1)
4.5 (2.2- 5.9)
6.5 (2.1- 9.5)
8.3 (2.1-10.2)
10.2 (2.4-10.4)
4.8 (2.3- 8.8)
5.7 (2.3- 9.1)
7.1 (2.3- 9.4)
9.8 (2.3-11.6)
10.9 (2.6-12.5)
11.4 (2.8-12.8)
6.3 (2.3- 9.5)
8.1 (2.3-10.0)
10.4 (2.5-12.4)
11.6 (2.7-12.7)
11.4 (2.9-12.9)
9.9 (2.4-11.1)
11.5 (2.7-12.5)
11.5 (3.0-12.8)
11.3 (3.2-13.1)
11.4 (2.9-13.4)
11.3 (3.2-13.4)
11.1 (3.4-13.2)
11.2 (3.5-13.3)
11.1 (3.6-13.2)
10.9 (3.8-13.1)
7.4 (2.0- 9.4)
8.4 (2.0- 9.7)
9.9 (2.2-11.3)
10.9 (2.5-13.1)
10.9 (2.7-13.1)
10.7 (2.9-12.9)
9.4 (2.1-10.4)
10.5 (2.3-12.1)
10.9 (2.6-13.1)
10.9 (2.9-13.1)
10.7 (3.0-12.9)
11.0 (2.6-12.1)
10.8 (2.9-13.0)
10.8 (3.0-13.0)
10.6 (3.3-12.9)
10.7 (3.0-12.9)
10.6 (3.2-12.8)
10.5 (3.4-12.8)
10.5 (3.5-12.8)
9.9 (2.2-10.9)
11.1 (2.5-12.1)
10.9 (2.8-13.1)
10.9 (2.9-13.1)
10.7 (3.2-12.9)
11.0 (2.7-12.3)
10.8 (2.9-13.0)
10.8 (3.1-13.0)
10.6 (3.3-12.9)
10.7 (3.2-12.9)
10.6 (3.4-12.8)
10.5 (3.7-12.8)
11.0 (2.9-12.3)
10.8 (3.1-13.0)
10.7 (3.3-12.9)
10.5 (3.5-12.8)
10.6 (3.4-12.8)
10.5 (3.6-12.8)
9.9 (2.0-10.4)
10.5 (2.1-11.5)
10.4 (2.3-12.7)
10.2 (2.6-12.6)
10.2 (2.8-12.5)
10.0 (2.9-12.4)
10.5 (2.2-12.8)
10.4 (2.4-12.7)
10.2 (2.7-12.6)
Outdoor
unit
4MXS80LVMA9
Heating
capacity
5MXS100LVMA9
Cooling
capacity
Combinations
of indoor units
20+20+25+60
20+20+25+71
20+20+35+35
20+20+35+50
20+20+35+60
20+20+50+50
20+25+25+25
20+25+25+35
20+25+25+50
20+25+25+60
20+25+25+71
20+25+35+35
20+25+35+50
20+25+35+60
20+25+50+50
20+35+35+35
20+35+35+50
25+25+25+25
25+25+25+35
25+25+25+50
25+25+25+60
25+25+35+35
25+25+35+50
25+25+35+60
25+35+35+35
25+35+35+50
35+35+35+35
20
25
35
50
60
71
20+20
20+25
20+35
20+50
20+60
20+71
25+25
25+35
25+50
25+60
25+71
35+35
35+50
35+60
35+71
50+50
50+60
50+71
60+60
60+71
71+71
20+20+20
20+20+25
20+20+35
20+20+50
20+20+60
20+20+71
20+25+25
20+25+35
20+25+50
20+25+60
20+25+71
20+35+35
20+35+50
20+35+60
20+35+71
20+50+50
20+50+60
20+50+71
20+60+60

1.54
1.54
1.92
4.60
1.41
1.41
1.76
5.02
1.75
1.75
3.05
3.05
1.54
1.54
2.69
3.83
1.42
1.42
2.49
4.27
1.37
1.37
3.43
3.43
2.01
2.53
2.53
2.53
1.83
2.29
2.29
3.19
1.60
2.00
2.00
4.00
1.48
1.85
1.85
4.42
1.36
1.70
1.70
4.84
1.67
2.09
2.92
2.92
1.48
1.85
2.58
3.69
1.37
1.71
2.40
4.12
1.32
1.66
3.31
3.31
1.53
2.69
2.69
2.69
1.37
2.40
2.40
3.43
2.40
2.40
2.40
2.40
2.18
2.18
2.18
3.06
1.92
1.92
1.92
3.84
1.78
1.78
1.78
4.26
2.00
2.00
2.80
2.80
1.78
1.78
2.49
3.55
1.66
1.66
2.32
3.96
1.85
2.58
2.58
2.59
1.66
2.32
2.32
3.30
2.40
2.40
2.40
2.40
2.00
2.50
3.50
5.00
6.00
7.10
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.50
2.00
3.50
2.00
5.00
1.91
5.72
1.82
6.46
2.50
2.50
2.50
3.50
2.44
4.89
2.33
5.59
2.23
6.34
3.50
3.50
3.26
4.66
3.14
5.38
3.03
6.14
4.41
4.41
4.27
5.13
4.13
5.87
5.00
5.00
4.58
5.42
5.00
5.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.50
1.97
1.97
3.46
1.89
1.89
4.73
1.85
1.85
5.56
1.80
1.80
6.40
2.00
2.50
2.50
1.94
2.43
3.39
1.87
2.34
4.67
1.83
2.29
5.50
1.72
2.16
6.12
1.89
3.31
3.31
1.83
3.21
4.58
1.74
3.04
5.22
1.59
2.78
5.63
1.66
4.17
4.17
1.54
3.85
4.61
1.41
3.55
5.04
1.42
4.29
4.29
Total capacity (kW)

Rated (Min._ Max.)

Rated (Min._ Max.)
Total current (A)

Rated (Min._ Max.)
9.60 (3.96-10.72)
9.60 (4.26-10.75)
9.60 (3.55-10.41)
9.60 (3.96-10.69)
9.60 (4.23-10.73)
9.60 (4.36-11.00)
9.60 (3.15-10.37)
9.60 (3.42-10.37)
9.60 (3.82-10.68)
9.60 (4.09-10.72)
9.60 (4.39-10.75)
9.60 (3.69-10.38)
9.60 (4.09-10.69)
9.60 (4.36-10.73)
9.60 (4.50-11.00)
9.60 (3.96-10.38)
9.60 (4.36-10.70)
9.60 (3.28-10.37)
9.60 (3.55-10.37)
9.60 (3.96-10.68)
9.60 (4.23-10.72)
9.60 (3.82-10.38)
9.60 (4.23-10.69)
9.60 (4.50-10.73)
9.60 (4.09-10.38)
9.60 (4.50-10.70)
9.60 (4.36-10.39)
2.00 (2.04- 3.52)
2.50 (2.04- 3.63)
3.50 (2.07- 3.88)
5.00 (2.39- 6.01)
6.00 (2.42- 7.12)
7.10 (2.44- 7.57)
4.00 (2.76- 5.66)
4.50 (2.76- 5.97)
5.50 (2.78- 6.40)
7.00 (2.96- 8.71)
7.63 (2.98- 9.64)
8.28 (3.00-10.08)
5.00 (2.76- 6.27)
6.00 (2.78- 7.46)
7.33 (2.96- 9.48)
7.92 (2.98- 9.64)
8.57 (3.00-10.08)
7.00 (2.81- 7.98)
7.92 (2.98- 9.63)
8.52 (3.01-10.11)
9.17 (3.02-10.24)
8.81 (3.12-10.88)
9.40 (3.14-11.02)
10.00 (3.15-11.11)
10.00 (3.15-11.15)
10.00 (3.17-11.24)
10.00 (3.26-11.32)
6.00 (3.01- 8.66)
6.50 (3.01- 9.18)
7.39 (3.03-10.17)
8.51 (3.16-11.40)
9.25 (3.18-11.53)
10.00 (3.19-11.61)
7.00 (3.01- 9.18)
7.76 (3.03-10.17)
8.88 (3.16-11.40)
9.62 (3.18-11.53)
10.00 (3.19-11.61)
8.51 (3.06-10.31)
9.62 (3.17-11.52)
10.00 (3.19-11.64)
10.00 (3.20-11.72)
10.00 (3.26-12.20)
10.00 (3.27-12.28)
10.00 (3.28-12.34)
10.00 (3.28-12.35)
2,390 (670-2,940)
2,360 (710-2,910)
2,430 (610-2,970)
2,390 (670-2,940)
2,380 (720-2,930)
2,370 (730-2,900)
2,470 (540-2,990)
2,450 (590-2,980)
2,410 (650-2,950)
2,390 (700-2,940)
2,360 (740-2,910)
2,430 (640-2,970)
2,390 (700-2,940)
2,380 (760-2,930)
2,370 (760-2,900)
2,420 (690-2,950)
2,370 (750-2,920)
2,470 (570-2,990)
2,450 (620-2,980)
2,410 (680-2,950)
2,390 (740-2,940)
2,430 (670-2,970)
2,390 (730-2,940)
2,380 (790-2,930)
2,420 (720-2,950)
2,370 (790-2,920)
2,400 (770-2,940)
440 (430- 800)
550 (430- 840)
800 (430- 940)
1,190 (460-1,690)
1,640 (460-2,560)
2,430 (460-2,960)
810 (470-1,350)
980 (470-1,490)
1,350 (470-1,650)
1,850 (480-2,870)
2,140 (480-3,520)
2,510 (480-3,960)
1,160 (470-1,650)
1,550 (470-2,490)
2,020 (480-3,520)
2,320 (480-3,520)
2,700 (480-3,960)
2,140 (470-2,880)
2,320 (480-3,520)
2,700 (480-3,960)
3,110 (480-3,960)
2,500 (480-3,950)
2,830 (480-3,940)
3,240 (480-3,940)
3,240 (480-3,940)
3,170 (480-3,940)
3,090 (480-3,930)
1,300 (480-2,480)
1,490 (480-2,870)
1,900 (480-3,510)
2,250 (480-3,940)
2,630 (480-3,940)
3,090 (480-3,930)
1,700 (480-2,870)
2,140 (480-3,510)
2,440 (480-3,940)
2,890 (480-3,940)
3,090 (480-3,930)
2,500 (480-3,510)
2,890 (480-3,940)
3,090 (480-3,930)
3,020 (480-3,930)
2,810 (480-3,990)
2,810 (480-3,990)
2,810 (480-3,990)
2,740 (480-3,990)
10.2 (2.9-12.5)
10.0 (3.1-12.4)
10.3 (2.6-12.7)
10.2 (2.9-12.5)
10.1 (3.1-12.5)
10.1 (3.2-12.4)
10.5 (2.3-12.8)
10.4 (2.6-12.7)
10.2 (2.8-12.6)
10.2 (3.0-12.5)
10.0 (3.2-12.4)
10.3 (2.8-12.7)
10.2 (3.0-12.5)
10.1 (3.3-12.5)
10.1 (3.3-12.4)
10.3 (3.0-12.6)
10.1 (3.2-12.5)
10.5 (2.5-12.8)
10.4 (2.7-12.7)
10.2 (2.9-12.6)
10.2 (3.2-12.5)
10.3 (2.9-12.7)
10.2 (3.2-12.5)
10.1 (3.4-12.5)
10.3 (3.1-12.6)
10.1 (3.4-12.5)
10.2 (3.3-12.5)
1.9 (1.9- 3.5)
2.4 (1.9- 3.7)
3.4 (1.9- 4.1)
5.1 (2.0- 7.3)
7.0 (2.0-11.0)
10.4 (2.0-12.8)
3.5 (2.1- 5.8)
4.2 (2.1- 6.5)
5.8 (2.1- 7.1)
7.9 (2.1-12.4)
9.2 (2.1-15.2)
10.8 (2.1-17.1)
5.0 (2.1- 7.1)
6.7 (2.1-10.7)
8.7 (2.1-15.2)
10.0 (2.1-15.2)
11.6 (2.1-17.1)
9.2 (2.1-12.4)
10.0 (2.1-15.2)
11.6 (2.1-17.1)
13.4 (2.1-17.1)
10.7 (2.1-17.0)
12.2 (2.1-17.0)
13.9 (2.1-17.0)
13.9 (2.1-17.0)
13.6 (2.1-17.0)
13.3 (2.1-16.9)
5.6 (2.1-10.7)
6.4 (2.1-12.4)
8.2 (2.1-15.1)
9.7 (2.1-17.0)
11.3 (2.1-17.0)
13.3 (2.1-16.9)
7.3 (2.1-12.4)
9.2 (2.1-15.1)
10.5 (2.1-17.0)
12.4 (2.1-17.0)
13.3 (2.1-16.9)
10.7 (2.1-15.1)
12.4 (2.1-17.0)
13.3 (2.1-16.9)
13.0 (2.1-16.9)
12.1 (2.1-17.2)
12.1 (2.1-17.2)
12.1 (2.1-17.2)
11.8 (2.1-17.2)
46
CONTENTS
Capacity Tables
Outdoor
unit
5MXS100LVMA9
Cooling
capacity
47
Combinations
of indoor units

1.32
3.97
4.71
20+60+71
2.46
2.46
2.46
25+25+25
2.39
2.39
3.35
25+25+35
2.31
2.31
4.63
25+25+50
2.27
2.27
5.46
25+25+60
2.07
2.07
5.86
25+25+71
2.33
3.27
3.27
25+35+35
2.27
3.18
4.54
25+35+50
2.08
2.92
5.00
25+35+60
1.91
2.67
5.42
25+35+71
2.00
4.00
4.00
25+50+50
1.85
3.70
4.45
25+50+60
1.71
3.42
4.87
25+50+71
1.72
4.14
4.14
25+60+60
1.60
3.85
4.55
25+60+71
3.14
3.14
3.14
35+35+35
2.92
2.92
4.16
35+35+50
2.69
2.69
4.62
35+35+60
2.48
2.48
5.04
35+35+71
2.60
3.70
3.70
35+50+50
2.41
3.45
4.14
35+50+60
2.24
3.21
4.55
35+50+71
2.26
3.87
3.87
35+60+60
3.33
3.33
3.33
50+50+50
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
20+20+20+20
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.50
20+20+20+25
2.00
2.00
2.00
3.50
20+20+20+35
1.82
1.82
1.82
4.54
20+20+20+50
1.67
1.67
1.67
4.99
20+20+20+60
1.53
1.53
1.53
5.41
20+20+20+71
2.00
2.00
2.50
2.50
20+20+25+25
2.00
2.00
2.50
3.50
20+20+25+35
1.74
1.74
2.17
4.35
20+20+25+50
1.60
1.60
2.00
4.80
20+20+25+60
1.47
1.47
1.84
5.22
20+20+25+71
1.82
1.82
3.18
3.18
20+20+35+35
1.60
1.60
2.80
4.00
20+20+35+50
1.48
1.48
2.59
4.45
20+20+35+60
1.37
1.37
2.40
4.86
20+20+35+71
1.43
1.43
3.57
3.57
20+20+50+50
1.33
1.33
3.33
4.01
20+20+50+60
2.00
2.50
2.50
2.50
20+25+25+25
1.90
2.38
2.38
3.34
20+25+25+35
1.67
2.08
2.08
4.17
20+25+25+50
1.54
1.92
1.92
4.62
20+25+25+60
1.42
1.77
1.77
5.04
20+25+25+71
1.74
2.18
3.04
3.04
20+25+35+35
1.54
1.92
2.69
3.85
20+25+35+50
1.43
1.79
2.50
4.28
20+25+35+60
1.32
1.66
2.32
4.70
20+25+35+71
1.38
1.72
3.45
3.45
20+25+50+50
1.29
1.61
3.23
3.87
20+25+50+60
1.60
2.80
2.80
2.80
20+35+35+35
1.43
2.50
2.50
3.57
20+35+35+50
1.33
2.33
2.33
4.01
20+35+35+60
1.29
2.25
3.23
3.23
20+35+50+50
2.50
2.50
2.50
2.50
25+25+25+25
2.27
2.27
2.27
3.19
25+25+25+35
2.00
2.00
2.00
4.00
25+25+25+50
1.85
1.85
1.85
4.45
25+25+25+60
1.71
1.71
1.71
4.87
25+25+25+71
2.08
2.08
2.92
2.92
25+25+35+35
1.85
1.85
2.59
3.71
25+25+35+50
1.72
1.72
2.41
4.15
25+25+35+60
1.60
1.60
2.24
4.56
25+25+35+71
1.67
1.67
3.33
3.33
25+25+50+50
1.93
2.69
2.69
2.69
25+35+35+35
1.72
2.41
2.41
3.46
25+35+35+50
1.61
2.26
2.26
3.87
25+35+35+60
2.50
2.50
2.50
2.50
35+35+35+35
2.26
2.26
2.26
3.22
35+35+35+50
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
20+20+20+20+20 2.00
1.90
1.90
1.90
2.40
20+20+20+20+25 1.90
Total capacity (kW)

Rated (Min._ Max.)

Rated (Min._ Max.)
Total current (A)

Rated (Min._ Max.)
10.00 (3.29-12.40)
7.39 (3.01-10.03)
8.14 (3.03-10.17)
9.25 (3.16-11.40)
9.99 (3.18-11.53)
10.00 (3.19-11.61)
8.88 (3.06-10.37)
9.99 (3.17-11.52)
10.00 (3.19-11.64)
10.00 (3.20-11.72)
10.00 (3.26-12.20)
10.00 (3.27-12.28)
10.00 (3.28-12.34)
10.00 (3.30-12.35)
10.00 (3.31-12.40)
9.42 (3.08-10.51)
10.00 (3.19-11.63)
10.00 (3.21-11.74)
10.00 (3.25-11.82)
10.00 (3.27-12.28)
10.00 (3.30-12.35)
10.00 (3.31-12.40)
10.00 (3.31-12.41)
10.00 (3.32-12.61)
8.00 (3.20-11.20)
8.50 (3.20-11.20)
9.50 (3.21-11.77)
10.00 (3.28-12.37)
10.00 (3.29-12.43)
10.00 (3.30-12.48)
9.00 (3.20-11.67)
10.00 (3.21-11.77)
10.00 (3.28-12.37)
10.00 (3.29-12.43)
10.00 (3.30-12.48)
10.00 (3.22-11.87)
10.00 (3.29-12.43)
10.00 (3.30-12.49)
10.00 (3.31-12.52)
10.00 (3.33-12.68)
10.00 (3.34-12.69)
9.50 (3.20-11.67)
10.00 (3.21-11.77)
10.00 (3.28-12.37)
10.00 (3.29-12.43)
10.00 (3.30-12.48)
10.00 (3.22-11.87)
10.00 (3.29-12.43)
10.00 (3.30-12.49)
10.00 (3.31-12.52)
10.00 (3.33-12.68)
10.00 (3.34-12.69)
10.00 (3.24-11.96)
10.00 (3.30-12.48)
10.00 (3.31-12.53)
10.00 (3.34-12.69)
10.00 (3.20-11.67)
10.00 (3.21-11.77)
10.00 (3.28-12.37)
10.00 (3.29-12.43)
10.00 (3.30-12.48)
10.00 (3.22-11.87)
10.00 (3.29-12.43)
10.00 (3.30-12.49)
10.00 (3.31-12.52)
10.00 (3.33-12.68)
10.00 (3.24-11.96)
10.00 (3.30-12.48)
10.00 (3.31-12.53)
10.00 (3.25-12.04)
10.00 (3.31-12.53)
10.00 (3.30-12.50)
10.00 (3.30-12.50)
2,740 (480-3,980)
1,960 (480-3,520)
2,320 (480-3,510)
2,690 (480-3,940)
3,160 (480-3,940)
3,090 (480-3,930)
2,770 (480-3,580)
3,160 (480-3,940)
3,090 (480-3,930)
3,020 (480-3,930)
2,810 (480-3,990)
2,810 (480-3,990)
2,810 (480-3,990)
2,740 (480-3,990)
2,740 (480-3,980)
3,110 (480-3,580)
3,090 (480-3,930)
3,020 (480-3,930)
2,950 (480-3,930)
2,810 (480-3,990)
2,740 (480-3,990)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,670 (480-3,970)
1,960 (480-3,490)
2,190 (480-3,490)
2,690 (480-3,930)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,430 (480-3,930)
3,020 (480-3,930)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,950 (480-3,930)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,670 (480-3,980)
2,600 (480-3,960)
2,600 (480-3,960)
2,750 (480-3,930)
3,020 (480-3,930)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,950 (480-3,930)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,670 (480-3,980)
2,600 (480-3,960)
2,600 (480-3,960)
2,880 (480-3,920)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,670 (480-3,970)
2,600 (480-3,960)
3,090 (480-3,930)
3,020 (480-3,930)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,950 (480-3,930)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,670 (480-3,980)
2,600 (480-3,960)
2,880 (480-3,920)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,670 (480-3,970)
2,880 (480-3,920)
2,670 (480-3,980)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,740 (480-3,980)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
8.4 (2.1-15.2)
10.0 (2.1-15.1)
11.6 (2.1-17.0)
13.6 (2.1-17.0)
13.3 (2.1-16.9)
11.9 (2.1-15.4)
13.6 (2.1-17.0)
13.3 (2.1-16.9)
13.0 (2.1-16.9)
12.1 (2.1-17.2)
12.1 (2.1-17.2)
12.1 (2.1-17.2)
11.8 (2.1-17.2)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
13.4 (2.1-15.4)
13.3 (2.1-16.9)
13.0 (2.1-16.9)
12.7 (2.1-16.9)
12.1 (2.1-17.2)
11.8 (2.1-17.2)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
11.5 (2.1-17.1)
8.4 (2.1-15.0)
9.4 (2.1-15.0)
11.6 (2.1-16.9)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
10.4 (2.1-16.9)
13.0 (2.1-16.9)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
12.7 (2.1-16.9)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
11.5 (2.1-17.1)
11.2 (2.1-17.1)
11.2 (2.1-17.1)
11.8 (2.1-16.9)
13.0 (2.1-16.9)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
12.7 (2.1-16.9)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
11.5 (2.1-17.1)
11.2 (2.1-17.1)
11.2 (2.1-17.1)
12.4 (2.1-16.9)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
11.5 (2.1-17.1)
11.2 (2.1-17.1)
13.3 (2.1-16.9)
13.0 (2.1-16.9)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
12.7 (2.1-16.9)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
11.5 (2.1-17.1)
11.2 (2.1-17.1)
12.4 (2.1-16.9)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
11.5 (2.1-17.1)
12.4 (2.1-16.9)
11.5 (2.1-17.1)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
Outdoor
unit
5MXS100LVMA9
Cooling
capacity
5MXS100LVMA9
Heating
capacity
Combinations
of indoor units
20+20+20+20+35
20+20+20+20+50
20+20+20+20+60
20+20+20+20+71
20+20+20+25+25
20+20+20+25+35
20+20+20+25+50
20+20+20+25+60
20+20+20+25+71
20+20+20+35+35
20+20+20+35+50
20+20+20+35+60
20+20+25+25+25
20+20+25+25+35
20+20+25+25+50
20+20+25+25+60
20+20+25+35+35
20+20+25+35+50
20+20+35+35+35
20+25+25+25+25
20+25+25+25+35
20+25+25+25+50
20+25+25+25+60
20+25+25+35+35
20+25+25+35+50
20+25+35+35+35
25+25+25+25+25
25+25+25+25+35
25+25+25+25+50
25+25+25+35+35
25+25+35+35+35
20
25
35
50
60
71
20+20
20+25
20+35
20+50
20+60
20+71
25+25
25+35
25+50
25+60
25+71
35+35
35+50
35+60
35+71
50+50
50+60
50+71
60+60
60+71
71+71
20+20+20
20+20+25
20+20+35
20+20+50
20+20+60
20+20+71
20+25+25
20+25+35
20+25+50
20+25+60
20+25+71
20+35+35
20+35+50
20+35+60
20+35+71

3.04
1.74
1.74
1.74
1.74
3.84
1.54
1.54
1.54
1.54
4.28
1.43
1.43
1.43
1.43
4.72
1.32
1.32
1.32
1.32
2.27
1.82
1.82
1.82
2.27
2.91
1.67
1.67
1.67
2.08
3.71
1.48
1.48
1.48
1.85
4.14
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.72
4.56
1.28
1.28
1.28
1.60
2.69
1.54
1.54
1.54
2.69
3.45
1.38
1.38
1.38
2.41
3.87
1.29
1.29
1.29
2.26
2.17
1.74
1.74
2.17
2.17
2.80
1.60
1.60
2.00
2.00
3.56
1.43
1.43
1.79
1.79
4.00
1.33
1.33
1.67
1.67
2.59
1.48
1.48
1.86
2.59
3.33
1.33
1.33
1.68
2.33
2.41
1.38
1.38
2.41
2.41
2.08
1.68
2.08
2.08
2.08
2.70
1.54
1.92
1.92
1.92
3.46
1.38
1.72
1.72
1.72
3.88
1.29
1.61
1.61
1.61
2.50
1.42
1.79
1.79
2.50
3.23
1.29
1.61
1.61
2.26
2.33
1.33
1.67
2.33
2.33
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.60
1.85
1.85
1.85
1.85
3.32
1.67
1.67
1.67
1.67
2.42
1.72
1.72
1.72
2.42
2.26
1.61
1.61
2.26
2.26
2.53
3.16
4.43
6.33
7.60
8.99
2.54
2.54
2.53
3.17
2.53
4.44
2.53
6.34
2.34
7.02
2.16
7.65
3.17
3.17
3.17
4.43
3.05
6.11
2.81
6.76
2.61
7.41
4.44
4.44
3.94
5.63
3.67
6.30
3.44
6.98
5.09
5.09
4.81
5.78
4.55
6.45
5.50
5.50
5.04
5.96
5.50
5.50
2.53
2.53
2.53
2.53
2.53
3.17
2.45
2.45
4.30
2.22
2.22
5.53
2.10
2.10
6.28
1.98
1.98
7.04
2.53
3.17
3.17
2.37
2.96
4.13
2.15
2.69
5.39
2.05
2.56
6.13
1.90
2.37
6.73
2.21
3.88
3.88
2.05
3.58
5.11
1.91
3.35
5.74
1.75
3.06
6.19
Total capacity (kW)

Rated (Min._ Max.)

Rated (Min._ Max.)
Total current (A)

Rated (Min._ Max.)
10.00 (3.31-12.55)
10.00 (3.34-12.71)
10.00 (3.34-12.71)
10.00 (3.34-12.71)
10.00 (3.30-12.50)
10.00 (3.31-12.55)
10.00 (3.34-12.71)
10.00 (3.34-12.71)
10.00 (3.34-12.71)
10.00 (3.32-12.59)
10.00 (3.34-12.71)
10.00 (3.34-12.71)
10.00 (3.30-12.50)
10.00 (3.31-12.55)
10.00 (3.34-12.71)
10.00 (3.34-12.71)
10.00 (3.32-12.59)
10.00 (3.34-12.71)
10.00 (3.32-12.62)
10.00 (3.30-12.50)
10.00 (3.31-12.55)
10.00 (3.34-12.71)
10.00 (3.34-12.71)
10.00 (3.32-12.59)
10.00 (3.34-12.71)
10.00 (3.32-12.62)
10.00 (3.30-12.50)
10.00 (3.31-12.55)
10.00 (3.34-12.71)
10.00 (3.32-12.59)
10.00 (3.32-12.62)
2.53 (2.48- 4.64)
3.16 (2.48- 5.25)
4.43 (2.48- 6.02)
6.33 (2.49- 7.74)
7.60 (2.49- 8.67)
8.99 (2.50-10.15)
5.07 (2.50- 9.62)
5.70 (2.50- 9.83)
6.97 (2.50-10.77)
8.87 (2.50-11.35)
9.36 (2.50-11.37)
9.81 (2.50-11.40)
6.33 (2.50-10.22)
7.60 (2.50-10.93)
9.16 (2.50-11.35)
9.57 (2.50-11.37)
10.02 (2.50-11.40)
8.87 (2.50-11.33)
9.57 (2.50-11.37)
9.97 (2.50-11.38)
10.42 (2.50-11.41)
10.18 (2.50-11.61)
10.59 (2.50-11.62)
11.00 (2.50-11.64)
10.99 (2.50-11.63)
11.00 (2.49-11.65)
11.00 (2.49-11.65)
7.60 (2.81-11.43)
8.23 (2.81-11.50)
9.20 (2.81-11.64)
9.97 (2.80-12.14)
10.48 (2.80-12.15)
11.00 (2.80-12.14)
8.87 (2.81-11.57)
9.46 (2.81-11.64)
10.23 (2.80-12.14)
10.74 (2.80-12.15)
11.00 (2.80-12.14)
9.97 (2.81-12.14)
10.74 (2.80-12.15)
11.00 (2.80-12.15)
11.00 (2.79-12.14)
2,670 (480-3,970)
2,600 (480-3,960)
2,600 (480-3,950)
2,600 (480-3,940)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,670 (480-3,970)
2,600 (480-3,960)
2,600 (480-3,950)
2,600 (480-3,940)
2,670 (480-3,970)
2,600 (480-3,960)
2,600 (480-3,950)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,670 (480-3,970)
2,600 (480-3,960)
2,600 (480-3,950)
2,670 (480-3,970)
2,600 (480-3,950)
2,670 (480-3,970)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,670 (480-3,970)
2,600 (480-3,960)
2,600 (480-3,950)
2,670 (480-3,970)
2,600 (480-3,960)
2,670 (480-3,970)
2,740 (480-3,980)
2,670 (480-3,970)
2,600 (480-3,960)
2,670 (480-3,970)
2,670 (480-3,970)
460 (430-1,030)
620 (430-1,240)
970 (430-1,510)
1,570 (420-2,150)
2,060 (420-2,550)
2,590 (420-3,320)
1,170 (420-2,620)
1,360 (420-2,740)
1,770 (420-3,350)
2,450 (410-3,630)
2,610 (410-3,580)
2,690 (410-3,420)
1,570 (420-3,010)
2,000 (420-3,480)
2,580 (410-3,630)
2,740 (410-3,580)
2,750 (410-3,420)
2,520 (410-3,750)
2,720 (410-3,560)
2,820 (410-3,510)
2,890 (410-3,360)
2,790 (410-3,570)
2,940 (410-3,510)
3,000 (400-3,360)
3,090 (400-3,470)
2,970 (400-3,320)
2,850 (400-3,190)
1,760 (460-3,230)
1,960 (460-3,290)
2,290 (460-3,340)
2,470 (450-3,600)
2,600 (450-3,550)
2,720 (450-3,410)
2,220 (460-3,350)
2,400 (460-3,340)
2,570 (450-3,600)
2,710 (450-3,550)
2,720 (450-3,410)
2,530 (460-3,710)
2,700 (450-3,540)
2,770 (450-3,490)
2,680 (440-3,360)
11.5 (2.1-17.1)
11.2 (2.1-17.1)
11.2 (2.1-17.0)
11.2 (2.1-17.0)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
11.5 (2.1-17.1)
11.2 (2.1-17.1)
11.2 (2.1-17.0)
11.2 (2.1-17.0)
11.5 (2.1-17.1)
11.2 (2.1-17.1)
11.2 (2.1-17.0)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
11.5 (2.1-17.1)
11.2 (2.1-17.1)
11.2 (2.1-17.0)
11.5 (2.1-17.1)
11.2 (2.1-17.0)
11.5 (2.1-17.1)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
11.5 (2.1-17.1)
11.2 (2.1-17.1)
11.2 (2.1-17.0)
11.5 (2.1-17.1)
11.2 (2.1-17.1)
11.5 (2.1-17.1)
11.8 (2.1-17.1)
11.5 (2.1-17.1)
11.2 (2.1-17.1)
11.5 (2.1-17.1)
11.5 (2.1-17.1)
2.0 (1.9- 4.5)
2.7 (1.9- 5.4)
4.2 (1.9- 6.5)
6.7 (1.9- 9.3)
8.8 (1.9-11.0)
11.1 (1.9-14.3)
5.0 (1.9-11.3)
5.8 (1.9-11.8)
7.6 (1.9-14.4)
10.5 (1.8-15.6)
11.2 (1.8-15.4)
11.6 (1.8-14.7)
6.7 (1.9-13.0)
8.6 (1.9-15.0)
11.1 (1.8-15.6)
11.8 (1.8-15.4)
11.8 (1.8-14.7)
10.8 (1.8-16.2)
11.7 (1.8-15.3)
12.1 (1.8-15.1)
12.4 (1.8-14.5)
12.0 (1.8-15.4)
12.6 (1.8-15.1)
12.9 (1.8-14.5)
13.3 (1.8-15.0)
12.8 (1.8-14.3)
12.2 (1.8-13.8)
7.6 (2.0-13.9)
8.4 (2.0-14.2)
9.8 (2.0-14.4)
10.6 (2.0-15.5)
11.2 (2.0-15.3)
11.7 (2.0-14.7)
9.5 (2.0-14.4)
10.3 (2.0-14.4)
11.0 (2.0-15.5)
11.6 (2.0-15.3)
11.7 (2.0-14.7)
10.9 (2.0-16.0)
11.6 (2.0-15.3)
11.9 (2.0-15.0)
11.5 (1.9-14.5)
48
CONTENTS
Capacity Tables
Outdoor
unit
5MXS100LVMA9
Heating
capacity
49
Combinations
of indoor units
20+50+50
20+50+60
20+50+71
20+60+60
20+60+71
25+25+25
25+25+35
25+25+50
25+25+60
25+25+71
25+35+35
25+35+50
25+35+60
25+35+71
25+50+50
25+50+60
25+50+71
25+60+60
25+60+71
35+35+35
35+35+50
35+35+60
35+35+71
35+50+50
35+50+60
35+50+71
35+60+60
50+50+50
20+20+20+20
20+20+20+25
20+20+20+35
20+20+20+50
20+20+20+60
20+20+20+71
20+20+25+25
20+20+25+35
20+20+25+50
20+20+25+60
20+20+25+71
20+20+35+35
20+20+35+50
20+20+35+60
20+20+35+71
20+20+50+50
20+20+50+60
20+25+25+25
20+25+25+35
20+25+25+50
20+25+25+60
20+25+25+71
20+25+35+35
20+25+35+50
20+25+35+60
20+25+35+71
20+25+50+50
20+25+50+60
20+35+35+35
20+35+35+50
20+35+35+60
20+35+50+50
25+25+25+25
25+25+25+35
25+25+25+50
25+25+25+60
25+25+25+71
25+25+35+35
25+25+35+50
25+25+35+60
25+25+35+71
25+25+50+50
25+35+35+35
25+35+35+50
25+35+35+60

1.84
4.58
4.58
1.69
4.23
5.08
1.56
3.90
5.54
1.58
4.71
4.71
1.46
4.37
5.17
3.07
3.07
3.07
2.86
2.86
3.99
2.62
2.62
5.24
2.50
2.50
6.00
2.27
2.27
6.46
2.69
3.77
3.77
2.50
3.50
5.00
2.29
3.21
5.50
2.10
2.94
5.96
2.20
4.40
4.40
2.04
4.07
4.89
1.88
3.77
5.35
1.90
4.55
4.55
1.76
4.23
5.01
3.58
3.58
3.58
3.21
3.21
4.58
2.96
2.96
5.08
2.73
2.73
5.54
2.86
4.07
4.07
2.66
3.79
4.55
2.47
3.53
5.00
2.48
4.26
4.26
3.67
3.67
3.67
2.41
2.41
2.41
2.41
2.34
2.34
2.34
2.94
2.24
2.24
2.24
3.93
2.00
2.00
2.00
5.00
1.83
1.83
1.83
5.51
1.68
1.68
1.68
5.96
2.29
2.29
2.86
2.86
2.20
2.20
2.75
3.85
1.91
1.91
2.39
4.79
1.76
1.76
2.20
5.28
1.62
1.62
2.02
5.74
2.00
2.00
3.50
3.50
1.76
1.76
3.08
4.40
1.63
1.63
2.85
4.89
1.51
1.51
2.64
5.34
1.57
1.57
3.93
3.93
1.47
1.47
3.67
4.39
2.25
2.80
2.80
2.80
3.66
2.10
2.62
2.62
4.59
1.83
2.29
2.29
5.07
1.69
2.12
2.12
5.54
1.56
1.95
1.95
3.35
1.91
2.39
3.35
4.23
1.69
2.12
2.96
4.72
1.57
1.96
2.75
5.17
1.46
1.82
2.55
3.79
1.52
1.90
3.79
4.26
1.42
1.77
3.55
3.08
1.76
3.08
3.08
3.93
1.57
2.75
2.75
4.39
1.47
2.57
2.57
3.55
1.42
2.48
3.55
2.75
2.75
2.75
2.75
3.50
2.50
2.50
2.50
4.40
2.20
2.20
2.20
4.88
2.04
2.04
2.04
5.36
1.88
1.88
1.88
3.21
2.29
2.29
3.21
4.07
2.04
2.04
2.85
4.54
1.90
1.90
2.66
5.01
1.76
1.76
2.47
3.67
1.83
1.83
3.67
2.96
2.12
2.96
2.96
3.78
1.90
2.66
2.66
4.27
1.77
2.48
2.48
Total capacity (kW)

Rated (Min._ Max.)

Rated (Min._ Max.)
Total current (A)

Rated (Min._ Max.)
11.00 (2.79-12.14)
11.00 (2.79-12.14)
11.00 (2.78-12.13)
11.00 (2.79-12.14)
11.00 (2.78-12.12)
9.20 (2.81-11.64)
9.71 (2.81-11.78)
10.48 (2.80-12.14)
11.00 (2.80-12.15)
11.00 (2.80-12.14)
10.23 (2.81-12.14)
11.00 (2.80-12.15)
11.00 (2.80-12.15)
11.00 (2.79-12.14)
11.00 (2.79-12.14)
11.00 (2.79-12.14)
11.00 (2.78-12.13)
11.00 (2.79-12.14)
11.00 (2.78-12.12)
10.74 (2.80-12.14)
11.00 (2.80-12.15)
11.00 (2.80-12.15)
11.00 (2.79-12.14)
11.00 (2.79-12.14)
11.00 (2.79-12.13)
11.00 (2.78-12.12)
11.00 (2.78-12.13)
11.00 (2.78-12.12)
9.62 (3.10-11.70)
9.96 (3.10-11.83)
10.65 (3.09-12.50)
11.00 (3.08-12.50)
11.00 (3.08-12.50)
11.00 (3.06-12.50)
10.31 (3.10-12.50)
11.00 (3.09-12.50)
11.00 (3.08-12.50)
11.00 (3.08-12.50)
11.00 (3.06-12.50)
11.00 (3.09-12.50)
11.00 (3.07-12.50)
11.00 (3.07-12.50)
11.00 (3.06-12.50)
11.00 (3.06-12.50)
11.00 (3.05-12.50)
10.65 (3.10-12.50)
11.00 (3.09-12.50)
11.00 (3.08-12.50)
11.00 (3.08-12.50)
11.00 (3.06-12.50)
11.00 (3.09-12.50)
11.00 (3.07-12.50)
11.00 (3.07-12.50)
11.00 (3.06-12.50)
11.00 (3.06-12.50)
11.00 (3.05-12.50)
11.00 (3.08-12.50)
11.00 (3.07-12.50)
11.00 (3.06-12.50)
11.00 (3.05-12.50)
11.00 (3.10-12.50)
11.00 (3.09-12.50)
11.00 (3.08-12.50)
11.00 (3.08-12.50)
11.00 (3.06-12.50)
11.00 (3.09-12.50)
11.00 (3.07-12.50)
11.00 (3.07-12.50)
11.00 (3.06-12.50)
11.00 (3.06-12.50)
11.00 (3.08-12.50)
11.00 (3.07-12.50)
11.00 (3.06-12.50)
2,700 (450-3,380)
2,670 (440-3,340)
2,580 (440-3,220)
2,640 (440-3,300)
2,560 (440-3,190)
2,330 (460-3,400)
2,460 (460-3,450)
2,630 (450-3,600)
2,820 (450-3,550)
2,720 (450-3,410)
2,640 (460-3,710)
2,810 (450-3,540)
2,770 (450-3,490)
2,680 (440-3,360)
2,700 (450-3,380)
2,670 (440-3,340)
2,580 (440-3,220)
2,640 (440-3,300)
2,560 (440-3,190)
2,770 (450-3,640)
2,760 (450-3,470)
2,730 (450-3,430)
2,640 (440-3,300)
2,660 (440-3,330)
2,630 (440-3,290)
2,550 (440-3,180)
2,600 (440-3,250)
2,560 (440-3,200)
2,170 (490-2,940)
2,260 (490-3,030)
2,470 (490-3,650)
2,490 (480-3,520)
2,470 (480-3,490)
2,460 (480-3,390)
2,360 (490-3,710)
2,570 (490-3,650)
2,490 (480-3,520)
2,470 (480-3,490)
2,460 (480-3,390)
2,530 (490-3,600)
2,460 (480-3,470)
2,440 (480-3,440)
2,430 (470-3,360)
2,440 (480-3,370)
2,430 (470-3,350)
2,500 (490-3,710)
2,570 (490-3,650)
2,490 (480-3,520)
2,470 (480-3,490)
2,460 (480-3,390)
2,530 (490-3,600)
2,460 (480-3,470)
2,440 (480-3,440)
2,430 (470-3,360)
2,440 (480-3,370)
2,430 (470-3,350)
2,500 (490-3,550)
2,430 (480-3,430)
2,420 (480-3,400)
2,420 (470-3,340)
2,600 (490-3,710)
2,570 (490-3,650)
2,490 (480-3,520)
2,470 (480-3,490)
2,460 (480-3,390)
2,530 (490-3,600)
2,460 (480-3,470)
2,440 (480-3,440)
2,430 (470-3,360)
2,440 (480-3,370)
2,500 (490-3,550)
2,430 (480-3,430)
2,420 (480-3,400)
11.6 (2.0-14.6)
11.5 (1.9-14.4)
11.1 (1.9-13.9)
11.3 (1.9-14.2)
11.0 (1.9-13.8)
10.0 (2.0-14.7)
10.6 (2.0-14.9)
11.3 (2.0-15.5)
12.1 (2.0-15.3)
11.7 (2.0-14.7)
11.3 (2.0-16.0)
12.1 (2.0-15.3)
11.9 (2.0-15.0)
11.5 (1.9-14.5)
11.6 (2.0-14.6)
11.5 (1.9-14.4)
11.1 (1.9-13.9)
11.3 (1.9-14.2)
11.0 (1.9-13.8)
11.9 (2.0-15.7)
11.9 (2.0-15.0)
11.7 (2.0-14.8)
11.3 (1.9-14.2)
11.4 (1.9-14.4)
11.3 (1.9-14.2)
11.0 (1.9-13.7)
11.2 (1.9-14.0)
11.0 (1.9-13.8)
9.3 (2.2-12.7)
9.7 (2.2-13.1)
10.6 (2.2-15.7)
10.7 (2.1-15.2)
10.6 (2.1-15.0)
10.6 (2.1-14.6)
10.1 (2.2-16.0)
11.0 (2.2-15.7)
10.7 (2.1-15.2)
10.6 (2.1-15.0)
10.6 (2.1-14.6)
10.9 (2.2-15.5)
10.6 (2.1-15.0)
10.5 (2.1-14.8)
10.4 (2.1-14.5)
10.5 (2.1-14.5)
10.4 (2.1-14.4)
10.7 (2.2-16.0)
11.0 (2.2-15.7)
10.7 (2.1-15.2)
10.6 (2.1-15.0)
10.6 (2.1-14.6)
10.9 (2.2-15.5)
10.6 (2.1-15.0)
10.5 (2.1-14.8)
10.4 (2.1-14.5)
10.5 (2.1-14.5)
10.4 (2.1-14.4)
10.7 (2.2-15.3)
10.4 (2.1-14.8)
10.4 (2.1-14.7)
10.4 (2.1-14.4)
11.2 (2.2-16.0)
11.0 (2.2-15.7)
10.7 (2.1-15.2)
10.6 (2.1-15.0)
10.6 (2.1-14.6)
10.9 (2.2-15.5)
10.6 (2.1-15.0)
10.5 (2.1-14.8)
10.4 (2.1-14.5)
10.5 (2.1-14.5)
10.7 (2.2-15.3)
10.4 (2.1-14.8)
10.4 (2.1-14.7)
Outdoor
unit
5MXS100LVMA9
Heating
capacity
Combinations
of indoor units
35+35+35+35
35+35+35+50
20+20+20+20+20
20+20+20+20+25
20+20+20+20+35
20+20+20+20+50
20+20+20+20+60
20+20+20+20+71
20+20+20+25+25
20+20+20+25+35
20+20+20+25+50
20+20+20+25+60
20+20+20+25+71
20+20+20+35+35
20+20+20+35+50
20+20+20+35+60
20+20+25+25+25
20+20+25+25+35
20+20+25+25+50
20+20+25+25+60
20+20+25+35+35
20+20+25+35+50
20+20+35+35+35
20+25+25+25+25
20+25+25+25+35
20+25+25+25+50
20+25+25+25+60
20+25+25+35+35
20+25+25+35+50
20+25+35+35+35
25+25+25+25+25
25+25+25+25+35
25+25+25+25+50
25+25+25+35+35
25+25+35+35+35

2.75
2.75
2.75
2.75
2.48
2.48
2.48
3.56
2.20
2.20
2.20
2.20
2.20
2.60
2.10
2.10
2.10
2.10
3.36
1.91
1.91
1.91
1.91
4.24
1.69
1.69
1.69
1.69
4.72
1.57
1.57
1.57
1.57
5.16
1.46
1.46
1.46
1.46
2.50
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.50
3.22
1.83
1.83
1.83
2.29
4.07
1.63
1.63
1.63
2.04
4.54
1.52
1.52
1.52
1.90
5.01
1.41
1.41
1.41
1.76
2.96
1.69
1.69
1.69
2.96
3.78
1.52
1.52
1.52
2.66
4.26
1.42
1.42
1.42
2.48
2.39
1.91
1.91
2.39
2.39
3.08
1.76
1.76
2.20
2.20
3.94
1.57
1.57
1.96
1.96
4.40
1.47
1.47
1.83
1.83
2.85
1.63
1.63
2.04
2.85
3.66
1.47
1.47
1.83
2.57
2.66
1.51
1.51
2.66
2.66
2.29
1.84
2.29
2.29
2.29
2.95
1.69
2.12
2.12
2.12
3.78
1.52
1.90
1.90
1.90
4.27
1.42
1.77
1.77
1.77
2.75
1.58
1.96
1.96
2.75
3.56
1.42
1.77
1.77
2.48
2.57
1.46
1.83
2.57
2.57
2.20
2.20
2.20
2.20
2.20
2.84
2.04
2.04
2.04
2.04
3.68
1.83
1.83
1.83
1.83
2.65
1.90
1.90
1.90
2.65
2.49
1.77
1.77
2.49
2.49
Total capacity (kW)

Rated (Min._ Max.)

Rated (Min._ Max.)
Total current (A)

Rated (Min._ Max.)
11.00 (3.08-12.50)
11.00 (3.06-12.50)
11.00 (3.50-12.70)
11.00 (3.50-12.70)
11.00 (3.50-12.70)
11.00 (3.50-12.70)
11.00 (3.50-12.70)
11.00 (3.50-12.70)
11.00 (3.50-12.70)
11.00 (3.50-12.70)
11.00 (3.50-12.70)
11.00 (3.50-12.70)
11.00 (3.50-12.70)
11.00 (3.50-12.70)
11.00 (3.50-12.70)
11.00 (3.50-12.70)
11.00 (3.50-12.70)
11.00 (3.50-12.70)
11.00 (3.50-12.70)
11.00 (3.50-12.70)
11.00 (3.50-12.70)
11.00 (3.50-12.70)
11.00 (3.50-12.70)
11.00 (3.50-12.70)
11.00 (3.50-12.70)
11.00 (3.50-12.70)
11.00 (3.50-12.70)
11.00 (3.50-12.70)
11.00 (3.50-12.70)
11.00 (3.50-12.70)
11.00 (3.50-12.70)
11.00 (3.50-12.70)
11.00 (3.50-12.70)
11.00 (3.50-12.70)
11.00 (3.50-12.70)
2,480 (480-3,500)
2,460 (480-3,390)
2,400 (550-3,690)
2,400 (550-3,690)
2,380 (550-3,670)
2,390 (540-3,610)
2,380 (540-3,600)
2,370 (530-3,590)
2,400 (550-3,690)
2,380 (550-3,670)
2,390 (540-3,610)
2,380 (540-3,600)
2,370 (530-3,590)
2,370 (540-3,640)
2,380 (540-3,600)
2,380 (530-3,590)
2,400 (550-3,690)
2,380 (550-3,670)
2,390 (540-3,610)
2,380 (540-3,600)
2,370 (540-3,640)
2,380 (540-3,600)
2,350 (540-3,620)
2,400 (550-3,690)
2,380 (550-3,670)
2,390 (540-3,610)
2,380 (540-3,600)
2,370 (540-3,640)
2,380 (540-3,600)
2,350 (540-3,620)
2,400 (550-3,690)
2,380 (550-3,670)
2,390 (540-3,610)
2,370 (540-3,640)
2,350 (540-3,620)
10.7 (2.1-15.1)
10.6 (2.1-14.6)
10.3 (2.4-15.9)
10.3 (2.4-15.9)
10.2 (2.4-15.8)
10.3 (2.4-15.6)
10.2 (2.4-15.5)
10.2 (2.3-15.5)
10.3 (2.4-15.9)
10.2 (2.4-15.8)
10.3 (2.4-15.6)
10.2 (2.4-15.5)
10.2 (2.3-15.5)
10.2 (2.4-15.7)
10.2 (2.4-15.5)
10.2 (2.3-15.5)
10.3 (2.4-15.9)
10.2 (2.4-15.8)
10.3 (2.4-15.6)
10.2 (2.4-15.5)
10.2 (2.4-15.7)
10.2 (2.4-15.5)
10.1 (2.4-15.6)
10.3 (2.4-15.9)
10.2 (2.4-15.8)
10.3 (2.4-15.6)
10.2 (2.4-15.5)
10.2 (2.4-15.7)
10.2 (2.4-15.5)
10.1 (2.4-15.6)
10.3 (2.4-15.9)
10.2 (2.4-15.8)
10.3 (2.4-15.6)
10.2 (2.4-15.7)
10.1 (2.4-15.6)
Notes: 1. Cooling operation data is based on the following conditions: indoor temp. 27CDB, 19CWB; outdoor temp. 35CDB;
corresponding refrigerant piping length 5 m; level difference 0 m.
2. Heating operation data is based on the following conditions: indoor temp. 20CDB; outdoor temp. 7CDB, 6CWB;
corresponding refrigerant piping length 5 m; level difference 0 m.
3. Total capacity of connected indoor units is; up to 9.0 kW to the 3MXS52; up to 11.0 kW to the 3MXS68;
up to the 14.5 kW to the 4MXS80; up to 15.6 kW to the 5MXS100.
4. The above is the value for connecting with the following indoor units: 2.0/2.5/3.5/5.0/6.0/7.1 kW class, wall-mounted K series.
5. A single indoor unit cannot be connected.
50
CONTENTS
Ask a qualified installer or contractor to install this product. Do not try to install the product yourself.
Improper installation can result in water or refrigerant leakage, electrical shock, fire or explosion.
Use only those parts and accessories supplied or specified by Daikin. Ask a qualified installer or
contractor to install those parts and accessories. Use of unauthorised parts and accessories or
improper installation of parts and accessories can result in water or refrigerant leakage, electrical
shock, fire or explosion.
Read the User's Manual carefully before using this product. The User's Manual provides important
safety instructions and warnings. Be sure to follow these instructions and warnings.
If you have any enquiries, please contact your local importer, distributor and/or retailer.
Cautions on product corrosion
1. Air conditioners should not be installed in areas where corrosive gases, such as acid gas or alkaline gas, are produced.
2. If the outdoor unit is to be installed close to the sea shore, direct exposure to the sea breeze should be avoided. If you need to install
the outdoor unit close to the sea shore, contact your local distributor.
Organization:
DAIKIN INDUSTRIES, LTD.
AIR CONDITIONING
MANUFACTURING DIVISION
JMI-0107
Scope of Registration:
The design/development and
manufacture of commercial air
conditioning, heating, cooling,
refrigerating equipment, heating
equipment, residential air conditioning
equipment, heat reclaim ventilation, air
cleaning equipment, compressors and
valves.
DEALER:
Organization:
DAIKIN INDUSTRIES
(THAILAND) LTD.
JQA-1452
Scope of Registration:
The design / development
and manufacture of air
conditioners and the
components including
compressors used for them
Quality
ISO 9001
Daikin Australia
Pty Limited (ISO9001)
QEC23256 May 12, 2006
Sydney, Brisbane,
Adelaide,
Melbourne, Newcastle,
Townsville, Perth,
Auckland
All of the Daikin

Groups business
facilities and
subsidiaries in Japan
are certified under the
ISO 14001
international standard
for environment
management.
Environment
ISO 14001
Daikin Australia
Pty Limited
(ISO14001)
CEM20437
October 27, 2006
Sydney, Brisbane,
Melbourne,
Adelaide, Perth
Daikin Australia Pty Limited

ABN 62 000 172 967
Email: commercial@daikin.com.au
Phone: 1300 368 300 (AU)
Phone: 09 9571 1101 (NZ)
commercial.daikin.com.au
Specifications, designs and other content appearing in this brochure are current as of December 2014 but subject to change without notice.
All rights reserved PC
CONTENTS

RIGHTS.
CONTENTS
owner.

b)
c)

d)
e)

f)
g)
Australia.
h)

caravan or boat).
i)

caravan or boat).
j)
k)
page 2
CONTENTS
l)

equipment.
m)

n)

equipment.
a)

instructions.
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)


b)
c)
d)
page 3
CONTENTS
must be presented.
Outdoor Unit
Indoor Unit(s)

Controller(s)
Model No. .................................
Supplied by
................................................... Phone No. .................................
Installed by
...................................................
Owners Name
.........................................................................................................
Address
.........................................................................................................
Date .............................
Important Note

A.B.N. 62 000 172 967
www.daikin.com.au
Part No. DADW0203
page 4
CONTENTS
Section 5.21
Exhaust Fans
CONTENTS
- f - - -
CONTENTS

--
--
- - - -
- -
- --
--
- - - -
-

- - -
- -
- - - - -
- -
--
--
- -

- -

-
-

CONTENTS
Section 5.22
Letterboxes
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
Section 5.23
St o r a g e C a g e s ( I f Ap p l i c a b l e )
CONTENTS
BLAKE ENGINEERING
Licensee Peter Blake No. 65070
Lic. under QBSA Act 1991
ABN 20 505 056 126
Delivery Address:
14 Hutcheson Street
Albion, Brisbane
Mobile 0418 150 656
e-mail: blake@aanet.com.au
Postal Address:
9 Pictavia Street, Toowong
QUEENSLAND 4066
Phone: 07-3256 0835
Fax: 07-3256 0845
26 September 2016
Pradstruct Pty Ltd
P. O. Box 3301
South Brisbane
QUEENSLAND 4101
Attention Katrina Harris
To whom it may concern
Light and Co Warranty storage cages, 321 Montague Road & 11

Beesley Street West End
Blake Engineering of 14 Hutcheson Street, Albion, hereby warranty all material and
workmanship of our works carried out on the residential chain-wire storage cages in
the above building against defects for a period of 60 months from the date of
practical completion.
Yours faithfully
Jacqueline Blake
CONTENTS
Section 5.24
O t h e r P u r c h a s e r Va r i a t i o n s ( I f Ap p l i c a b l e )
CONTENTS
A Ceiling Fans
CONTENTS
PEA12072001
SIZE:210x297mm
20P
80g
2012/08/20
120
Installation Manual
CEILING FAN MUST BE INSTALLED

BY A LICENSED ELECTRICIAN
(NO OTHER PERSONS SHOULD ATTEMPT TO INSTALL THIS FAN)
*After installation, electricians must tick off all items on the

quick checklist and fill out their details towards the back of this
Installation Manual
ELECTRICIANS - TO PROTECT YOUR CUSTOMERS WARRANTY, PLEASE READ
PAGE 2 OF THIS BOOKLET PRIOR TO THE INSTALLATION OF THIS PRODUCT.
National Warranty Line
1300 360 280

Monday to Friday from 9am to 5pm EST
Only available within Australia
CONTENTS
PEA12072001
SIZE:210x297mm
20P
80g
2012/08/20
320
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
ELECTRICIANS MUST READ PRIOR TO INSTALLATION
1.
Distributor and installer details and purchase receipts are essential for on-site warranty claims
and must be presented to repair personnel. A page towards the back of this manual has been
allocated to allow you to record these details.
2.
Fans and fixed wiring products must only be installed by persons who are appropriately licensed
by the applicable State regulatory body. Therefore, to protect our repair personnel, on-site
warranty claims will not be accepted if products have been installed by unlicensed persons.
3.
Damage caused by incorrect installation, force-majeure, electrical surges, lightning, power grid
fluctuations, water or by connection to alternative power supply sources (such as solar inverters,
etc.) is not eligible for warranty repair.
4.
Blades must be replaced only as a complete set. Blades are supplied only as a pre-balanced set
and the replacement of individual blades may void the warranty by causing mechanical
damage to the motor, excessive noise or premature wear.
5.
When products are installed in a location requiring special access equipment (such as
scaffolding or scissor lifts, etc) the cost of providing, installing and operating special access
equipment must be borne by the site owner.
6. This appliance is not intended for use by persons (including children) with reduced physical,
sensory or mental capabilities, or lack of experience and knowledge, unless they have been
given supervision or instruction concerning use of the appliance by a person responsible for their
safety. Children should be supervised to ensure that they do not play with the appliance. (AS/
NZS 60335.1 C1.7.12)
DANGER:
Contact with ceiling fan blades can cause serious injury or death.
To electricians and installers. The Australian Competition and Consumer Law 2010 mandates
consumer protection against defects or poor workmanship in provision of services (such as
installing a ceiling fan). To protect yourself and the consumer these instructions must be
followed. Failure to do so may result in the consumer making a claim against you for
consequential loss or damage.
7.
A double pole isolation switch providing full disconnection of both fan and light must be fitted in
accordance with the wiring rules (AS/NZS 60335.1 C1.7.12.2).
For safety, and to protect your customers warranty, the following must be taken into
account when installing and operating the product(s):
(a) DO NOT USE SOLID-STATE WALL CONTROLLERS. Neither leading nor lagging edge
controllers will give satisfactory performance. Wall controls must only be types approved
for use by Intercept .
(b) The fan, light and bracket must be earthed.
(c) Fan and light must be run from the same final circuit.
(d) Mounting bracket must be firmly screwed to a solid structure such as a concrete ceiling,
steel structure or timber framing. If additional bracing is added it must be firmly secured to
the rafters and not left floating on the ceiling. Special mounts, such as T-hooks, are
available for certain types of installation.
(e) After installation, fan blades must be at least 2.1 m (7 feet) above floor level.
(f) The use of these products by children and the infirm must be under supervision.
TM
IF THERE ARE ANY PROBLEMS WITH THE PRODUCT AT TIME OF

INSTALLATION THE INSTALLER MUST CONTACT THE WARRANTY
HOT LINE NUMBER 1300 360 280 BEFORE LEAVING THE JOB
SITE. PLEASE DO NOT REMOVE THE FAN FROM THE CEILING
ONCE INSTALLED UNLESS INSTRUCTED TO DO SO.
2
CONTENTS
PEA12072001
SIZE:210x297mm
20P
80g
2012/08/20
420
Installation
Manual
Parts List - Intercept without light
Hanger
Bracket
Hex Head Screw
Ball Joint
Ball Joint Screw
Down Rod
Canopy
Cover
Motor
Housing
Blade
Spacer
Blade
Screw
Washer
Base Plate
Part
Qty
Part
Qty
Part
Qty
Hanger Bracket
Down Rod Short Screw
Washer
Hex Head Screw
Motor Housing
Base Plate
Ball Joint
Canopy Cover
Wall Speed Capacitor
Ball Joint Screw
Canopy Cover Screws
HPI Wall Controller
Ball Joint Pin
Blades
Down Rod
(26mm Diameter)
Blade screws
12
Down Rod Pin Screw
Spacer
1
3
CONTENTS
PEA12072001
SIZE:210x297mm
20P
80g
2012/08/20
520
Installation
Manual
Parts List - Intercept with light (E27 Lamp Holders)
Hanger Bracket
Hex Head Screw
Ball Joint
Ball Joint Screw
Down Rod
Canopy Cover
Motor Housing
E27 Lamp Holders

Globe
(For Illustrative
Purposes only.
Bulbs not Supplied)
Blade
Screw
Blade
Light Kit Rim

Glass Cover
Part
Qty
Part
Qty
Part
Qty
Hanger Bracket
Canopy Cover
HPI Wall Controller
Hex Head Screw
Canopy Cover Screws
Wall Speed Capacitor
Ball Joint
Motor Housing
Ball Joint Screw
E27 Lamp Holders
Ball Joint Pin
Blades
Blade Screws
12
Down Rod Pin Screw
Light Kit Rim
Down Rod Short Screw
Glass Cover
Down Rod
(26mm Diameter)
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
PEA12072001
SIZE:210x297mm
20P
80g
2012/08/20
620
Installation
Manual
The table below contains information that can help you quickly identify the product you are
installing. If you have any difficulties installing our product, we recommend you to call our warranty
line on 1300 360 280 for advice.
CODE
SIZE
FAN MODEL NAME
COLOUR
300
132cm, (52)
Intercept without light
White Motor & Blades
301
132cm, (52)
Intercept without light
Brushed Aluminium Motor

& Blades
306
132cm, (52)
Intercept with light

(E27 Lamp Holders)
White Motor & Blades
307
132cm, (52)
Intercept with light

(E27 Lamp Holders)
Brushed Aluminium Motor

& Blades
1. Do not attempt to operate the fan (or optional light kit) with any wall control that is not approved by
Intercept for use with its fans. DO NOT use solid state controllers. The use of unapproved controllers
may void your warranty.
2. Do not mix blade sets from one fan to another as this may upset the balance of the fan. If only one
blade is damaged you are still required to replace with a new set.
CONTENTS
PEA12072001
SIZE:210x297mm
20P
80g
2012/08/20
720
Installation
Manual
Installation Instructions
(Assembling the fan)
Fig. 1
Fig. 1a
Ball Joint
Down Rod
Ball Joint
Canopy
Cover
Ball Joint
Screw
Ball Joint Pin
Connection
Collar
Down Rod
Pin Screw
Down Rod
Down Rod
Grub
Screw
STEP 1 (Fig. 1 & 1a)

a) Loosen the ball joint screw and remove the ball joint pin to separate the Down Rod from the ball
joint.
b) Feed wires from motor housing up and through the Down Rod.
c) Insert the down rod pin screw through the connection collar and the Down Rod (avoid pinching
wires). Tighten Down Rod pin screw. Secure Down Rod from wobbling with the other shorter Down
Rod Grub Screw provided.
d) Slide on canopy cover and refit the ball joint.
If an extension rod needs to be installed please go to page 13.
DANGER: All pins and screws must be correctly fitted and tightened.
Fig. 2
Timber
Nogging
STEP 2 (Fig. 2)
Hanger
Bracket
a) Drill a hole in the timber nogging for wiring.

b) Secure the hanger bracket onto the timber
nogging, using the two hex head screws provided.
The timber nogging should be supplied by the
installing electrician and must be supported between
the two ceiling joists as shown in the diagram.
Hex Head Screw
CONTENTS
PEA12072001
SIZE:210x297mm
20P
80g
2012/08/20
820
Installation
Manual
STEP 3 (Fig. 3)
Fig. 3
a) Hang the ball joint into the hanger bracket.

Ensure the groove on the hanger bracket is locked into
the slot on the ball joint.
(This is important to ensure the fan will not wobble and
the weight of the fan is supported).
Hanger
Bracket
Down
Rod
STEP 4 (Fig 4 & 5)
Blue
Fig. 4
Earth
Wires
Red/White
Green
Earth Wires
Brown
a) Connect wires from the fan with wires in the ceiling

via the terminal block on the hanger bracket refer to
Figure 4 and 5.
b) Make sure earth wires are also connected.
c) Connect light wires (red/white) if a light fitting is
going to be used. (Cap seal light wires if a light fitting
is not going to be used).
Wiring Instructions (with and without accessory light)

WARNING: To comply with AS/NZS 60335.1 a Double Pole Isolation
switch must be fitted in series with the supply of this product.
Fig. 5
CONTENTS
PEA12072001
SIZE:210x297mm
20P
80g
2012/08/20
920
Installation
Manual
NOTE: For fan with E27 Lamp Holders turn to page 9 for installation instructions
STEP 5 (Fig 6)
Hanger
Bracket
Fig. 6
Canopy
Cover
Keyway
Down Rod
Fig. 7
a) Loosen canopy screws half way

b) Slide canopy cover up and over the hanger bracket
and position canopy screws through the keyway in
canopy cover .
c) Rotate the canopy clockwise and tighten screws
until canopy cover is tightly held.
d) Check rim of canopy is not touching the ceiling. Add
packing washers between canopy and bracket to
lower canopy
STEP 6 (Fig 7)
Motor Housing
Blade
Blade Screw
Spacer
Washer
Base
Plate
a) In order to attach the blades, the base plate must

be removed from the motor housing. To remove the
base plate, press hand with fingers spread out on to
the base plate and turn it anticlockwise. Unscrew and
remove Base Plate.
b) Take out the washer and the spacer and put them
aside
c) Insert blades into the motor housing as shown in
Figure 7, now tighten the blade screws firmly. Repeat
this step for all four blades. Install each blade individually. Do not mix blades from different fans as this can
upset the balance of the fan.
d) Once blades are attached, place the spacer and
washer back on to the fan. Note: the spacer must be
placed in before the washer to avoid noises.
e) Reattach the base plate, turn base plate clockwise
to securely attach it to the motor housing.
STEP 7 (Fig 8)
Fig. 8
Reverse
Switch
a) Check to ensure the reverse switch is locked into

position. Make sure it is either set in the Summer or
Winter position.
b) Test and ensure fan is operating correctly on all
three speeds in both forward and reverse.
CONTENTS
PEA12072001
SIZE:210x297mm
20P
80g
2012/08/20
1020
Installation
Manual
(Assembling the E27 lamp holders)
Hanger
Bracket
Fig. 9
Canopy
Cover
Down Rod
STEP 5 (Fig 9)
a) Loosen canopy screws half way
b) Slide canopy cover up and over the hanger bracket
and position canopy screws through the keyway in
canopy cover .
c) Rotate the canopy clockwise and tighten screws
until canopy cover is tightly held.
d) Check rim of canopy is not touching the ceiling.
Add packing washers between canopy and bracket to
lower canopy
STEP 6 (Fig 10)
Fig. 10
a) Insert blades into the motor housing as shown in

Figure 10 and tighten the blade screws firmly. Repeat
this step for all four blades. Do not mix blades from
different fans as this can upset the balance of the fan.
Blade
Blade Screw
Motor
Housing
STEP 7 (Fig 11)
Fig. 11
a) Remove the three inner screws on the Light Kit

Mounting surface to attach the E27 assembly.
NOTE: DO NOT DISCARD SCREWS
Light Kit
Mounting
Surface
Inner
Screws
CONTENTS
PEA12072001
SIZE:210x297mm
20P
80g
2012/08/20
1120
Installation
Manual
STEP 8 (Fig 12)
Fig. 12
Light Kit
Mounting
Surface
Red
Wire
Blue
Wire
E27
Assembly
E27
Lamp
Holders
a) Connect the red and blues wire from those on the

E27 assembly.
b) Attach the E27 assembly to the Light Kit Mounting
surface using the three screws removed in Step 6.
NOTE: Make sure the cutting washer pierces the
paint of the light assembly plate
WARNING: The thermal insulating pad must
remain in place when installing the E27 assembly.
Screws
STEP 9 (Fig 13)
Fig. 13
a) Loosen the three outer screws on the rim of the

Light Kit Mounting surface.
NOTE: DO NOT REMOVE SCREWS COMPLETELY
AND DO NOT DISCARD.
Light Kit
Rim Screws
E27
Assembly
STEP 10 (Fig 14)
Fig. 14
a) Locate the three keyways in the Light Kit Rim and

position over the loosened screws.
Screws
Light Kit Rim
10
CONTENTS
PEA12072001
SIZE:210x297mm
20P
80g
2012/08/20
1220
Installation
Manual
STEP 11 (Fig 15)
Fig. 15
Light
Kit Rim
a) Rotate Light Kit Rim clockwise.

b) Tighten screws to secure Light Kit Rim in place.
Screw
STEP 12 (Fig 16)
Fig. 16
Keyway
Location
Lug
a) Align the Location Lugs in the Glass Cover with the

Keyway in the Light Kit Rim Plate.
b) Once aligned rotate the Glass Cover clockwise
until only just secure.
WARNING: DO NOT OVER-TIGHTEN THE GLASS
OR IT WILL BE DIFFICULT TO REMOVE. THE
GLASS COVER CANNOT FALL OFF IF IT IS
SLIGHTLY LOOSE BUT IT MAY RATTLE. TIGHTEN
ONLY ENOUGH TO PREVENT RATTLING.
Glass
Cover
STEP 13 (Fig 17)
Fig. 17
Reverse
Switch
a) Check to ensure the reverse switch is locked into a

position. Make sure it is either set in the Summer or
Winter position.
b) Test and ensure fan is operating correctly on all
three speeds in both forward and reverse directions.
11
CONTENTS
PEA12072001
SIZE:210x297mm
20P
80g
2012/08/20
1320
Installation
Manual
Trouble Shooting Tips - Light
Light will not turn on - Make sure globe has not blown and is properly fitted.
Check all light wires in the light kit, the terminal block in the canopy cover and
the wall switch have been connected correctly.
Light is not responding to remote control- Make sure globe has not blown.
Check all light wires in the light kit, the terminal block in the canopy cover and
the remote receiver have been connected correctly. Check dip switch settings in
remote hand piece and remote receiver correspond. Check handpiece battery.
Light wires appear to be missing or too short - Wires may be stuck in the
motor housing. Carefully pull wires out of the motor housing, careful not to strip
the wires as this may cause the fan to short.
Light flickers or flashes - Check globe is secured properly. Check CFL or LED
globes are not defective, then recheck wiring.
NOTE: DO NOT USE CFL OR LED GLOBES WITH LIGHT DIMMERS OR

DIMMING REMOTE CONTROLS
12
CONTENTS
PEA12072001
SIZE:210x297mm
20P
80g
2012/08/20
1420
Installation
Manual
Installation of Extension Down Rod
(Attaching an extension rod - Intercept rods to be used ONLY)
Fig. 18
Down
Rod
Fig. 19
Ball
Joint
Ball
Joint
Canopy
Cover
Ball Joint
Screw
Connection
Collar
Down Rod
Pin Screw
Ball Joint Pin
Down Rod
Grub
Screw
STEP 1 (Fig. 18)
STEP 2 (Fig. 19)
Loosen the down rod grub screw then

loosen and remove the down rod pin screw
to remove the standard down rod from the
motor housing.
Loosen the ball joint screw, take out the ball

joint pin and remove the ball joint. Then slide
off the canopy cover.
Fig. 20
Fig. 21
Ball Joint Pin
Ball Joint
Down
Rod
Ball Joint
Canopy
Cover
Tighten
Ball Joint
Screw
Down Rod
Pin Screw
Connection
Collar
Grub
Screw
Down
Rod
STEP 3 (Fig. 20 & 21)

Now install the extension rod, make sure fan wires are fed through the new rod. Reverse step
1 & 2 to secure the rod to the fan and the ball joint.
NOTE: If the extension rod needs to be shortened, cut the rod to the required length and drill the
appropriate hole size to fit the ball joint pin. The cut end of the rod should be used on the ball joint
end only. The hole for the pin must be exactly positioned to pass through the centre of the rod, drilled
straight and horizontal. When installing a 1.8m extension rod the wiring will need to be extended and
joined. This should be done using crimp style connectors.
13
CONTENTS
PEA12072001
SIZE:210x297mm
20P
80g
2012/08/20
1520
Installation
Manual
Trouble Shooting Tips - Fan
Fan will not start
Check that the reversing switch is pushed into its Summer or Winter position.
Check wire connections in the wall switch and terminal blocks, ensure all wires
are making proper contact.
Check isolation switch is on.

Fan speed is not responding to the wall controller
Check the speeds on the wall controller has been wired correctly and are making
proper contact. Brown = speed 1, Purple = speed 2, Red = speed 3.
Check wires in the terminal block are connected properly, connection wires
should be stripped back at the connection point and unused wires should be
sealed and capped off.
Check that the reversing switch is pushed into its Summer or Winter position.
Fan is not responding to the remote control (if fitted)
Check for flat battery. Make sure the dipswitch settings in the hand piece and the
remote receiver match.
Fan is wobbling
Check the ball joint slot is locked into the hanger bracket groove.
Make sure blades are a matching set; the figures on matching sets of blades
should be identical with the numbers varying within 3 grams of each other.
Check blade screws are tightened firmly. If necessary use balancing kit provided
to settle the wobble.
Make sure bracket is tight against ceiling and the ceiling and the ceiling structure
are not moving.
Fan is noisy
Check all screws and parts are secured firmly. Ensure there are no loose parts
moving inside the motor housing.
Make sure the fan is installed with an Intercept wall controller only, do not use
solid state controllers as they will cause unpleasant motor noises.
National Warranty Line 1300 360 280

14
CONTENTS
PEA12072001
SIZE:210x297mm
20P
80g
2012/08/20
1620
Installation
Manual
General Maintenance
Changing Remote Batteries: - Batteries used in Handsets will weaken over time and should
be replaced every 6 months. Batteries removed from the handset should be disposed of
properly and kept out of reach of children.
* Always ensure fan is completely switched off at the wall switch or circuit breaker *
Cleaning the Motor Housings: - Motor housings should be regularly cleaned to avoid build
up of dust. Dust will attract moisture and condensation leading to corrosion. Use a soft
damp (not wet) cloth to remove dust.
Cleaning the Blades: - Use a soft damp cloth to remove dirt from blades. Always dry blades
after cleaning. Blades should not be left damp or wet as this will damage blade finish or
cause corrosion.
Always use soft cloths to clean blades and motor housings to avoid scratching painted and
plated finishes. Ideally your fan should be cleaned every 3 to 4 months.
If removing blades for cleaning then do so for each fan separately, do not mix blades from
different fans as this can upset the balance of the fan.
Normal Wear and Tear: - Please note that a ceiling fan travels an enormous distance in the
course of its normal operation. Air is abrasive and suspended dust, high humidity and other
contamination will cause wear and tear of surfaces.
The use of fans under roofed decks and pergolas next to swimming pools and in coastal
areas will require increased maintenance due to the presence of chlorides (either as common air borne salt spray or from compounds in pool chemicals)
The temperatures attained in the peak of a pitched deck or veranda roof can easily exceed
60-70C and especially when coupled with chlorides this will increase maintenance
requirements. Even indoors in coastal areas the influx of warm, sea air can accelerate the
surface corrosion of metal parts. This can still happen a great many kilometres from the
sea.
When humidity is high and temperature drops moisture condenses on metal surfaces
including ceiling fans. The layer of moisture can be almost microscopic but it will affect the
surface by depositing a tiny layer of dissolved salts or airborne acidic compounds and thus
eventually leading to corrosion if the product is not properly and regularly cleaned.
LACK OF MAINTENANCE LEADING TO SURFACE CORROSION OR SIMILAR
DAMAGE IS NOT COVERED BY WARRANTY.
15
CONTENTS
PEA12072001
SIZE:210x297mm
20P
80g
2012/08/20
1720
Installation
Manual
FORWARD (Summer) and REVERSE (Winter) Modes Explained
Direction fan will spin in FWD

(Summer) mode when viewed from
underneath
Air is blown down,

producing a cool breeze
FORWARD (Summer) Mode

Ceiling fans are an environmentally smart choice to assist with cooling and warming your home.
In FORWARD (Summer) mode your ceiling fan will spin to push air down the centre of the fan
producing a cooling breeze.
The direction the fan will spin in FORWARD (Summer) when viewed from underneath will be anticlockwise.
An upward airflow will push warm

air off the ceiling and circulate it
downwards
Direction fan will spin in REVERSE

(Winter) mode when viewed from
underneath
REVERSE (Winter) Mode

In REVERSE (Winter) mode your ceiling fan will spin the opposite direction. Air is drawn up the
centre of the fan, and pushed along the ceiling to circulate down to the living areas.
The REVERSE (Winter) mode can also be for air circulation in a poorly ventilated rooms.
The direction the fan will spin in REVERSE (Winter) when viewed from underneath will be
clockwise.
16
CONTENTS
PEA12072001
SIZE:210x297mm
20P
80g
2012/08/20
1820
Installation
Manual
Quick Checklist
Electricians make sure everything on this checklist is ticked off before you leave the installation site.
If you have trouble installing our product please refer to the trouble shooting section on the previous
page first then phone the Intercept Warranty Line on 1300 360 280 (open 9am to 5pm EST). DO
NOT uninstall the fan and DO NOT return fan to retailer.
1.
Ceiling fan is not installed to a solid-state wall controller. Neither leading nor
lagging edge controllers will give satisfactory performance. Wall controllers must
only be types approved for use by Intercept.
2.
The fan, fan light assembly and bracket are earthed.
3.
Fan, fan light and remote control receiver are run from the same final circuit via a
double pole isolation switch.
4.
Mounting bracket must be firmly secured to a solid structure such as a concrete

ceiling, steel structure or timber framing. If additional bracing is added it must be
firmly secured to the rafters and not left floating on the ceiling. Special mounts,
such as T-hooks, are available for certain types of installation.
5.
Fan blades are at least 2.1m (7feet) above floor level.
6.
Check the fan is operating correctly on all three speeds using the wall controller.
7.
If light is installed. Check light is functioning properly.
8.
If remote control is installed. Check the fan (and light if installed) is responding to
the remote control correctly. (Non-dimming remote control only to be used with
fluorescent and LED lamps).
9.
Check electricians details have been recorded onto page 18 of this manual.
17
CONTENTS
PEA12072001
SIZE:210x297mm
20P
80g
2012/08/20
1920
Installation
Manual
Fill out the details below and keep this manual. You will need to present your product
information, installing electricians license number and proof of purchase for warranty
claims.
CUSTOMER DETAILS
Customer Name:
Installation Site Address:
INSTALLING ELECTRICIAN DETAILS

Electrical company and Electrician Name:
License No:
Telephone:
Mobile:
Install Date:
Please to fill out the product and purchase details
PRODUCT DETAILS
Qty
Product Name
Install Area
Colour
Fan Sweep (i.e.

48, 52, 54 etc)
PURCHASE DETAILS
Qty
Product Name
Purchase Place
Purchase Date
PLEASE RETAIN THE PURCHASE RECEIPT FOR WARRANTY CLAIMS
18
CONTENTS
PEA12072001
SIZE:210x297mm
20P
80g
2012/08/20
2020
FOR ANY INSTALLATION QUERIES PLEASE CALL
National Warranty Line
1300 360 280

Building 8, 256 New Line Road
DURAL NSW 2158
PEA12072001
CONTENTS
Hunter Pacific Ceiling Fans

Fan Owner Warranty and Operational Manual
THIS MANUAL MUST BE KEPT BY FAN OWNERS

*** In order to claim warranty, owners must be able to present product information,
installing electrician and purchase details as well as proof of purchase.***
Please ensure your product, purchase and installing electricians details are
recorded on the back of this booklet, purchase receipts should be stapled
onto the space provided inside this booklet
Hunter Pacific International - www.hunterpacific.com.au
CONTENTS
Fan Owner Warranty & Operations Manual
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Wall Controller Operation3
Wall Controller FAQ..3
Remote Control Operation..3
Remote FAQ4
Pull Cord Operation..... 4
Summer/Winter Switch Operation.5
General Maintenance... 6
Basic Trouble Shooting Tips..7
Warranty Information 9
Recording Product , Purchase & Installing Electrician Details.....11
Recording Remote Dipswitch Settings.11
Buy the Original Buy the Best!
Hunter Pacific International www.hunterpacific.com.au
2
CONTENTS
1)
Wall Controller Operation

0 = fan is off
I = fan is on High speed
II = fan is on Medium speed
III = fan is on Low speed
HPI WALL SWITCH
0
I
III
II
E.g. In the picture to the right, the fan setting is set to

zero thus the fan would be off.
WALL CONTROLLERS FAQ

What speed should the fan be started on?
Fan should always be started on high speed. You should then slow down your fan to the
desired speed. Starting your fan on high speed is better for the motor and will help the motor last
longer. High speed (or speed one) gives your fan full voltage which means your fan does not have to
struggle to start.
How many types of wall controllers does Hunter Pacific offer?
Hunter Pacific International has one wall control switch that is fitted with speed controlling capacitors
matched to each fan type. Wall controls must not be mixed, each fan must use the wall control it is
supplied with.
Why are wall plates not included?
Customers have told us they prefer to use existing wall plates or or choose their own wall plates to
match their dcor. Often customers prefer to have more than one switch on their wall plates.
Why cant Hunter Pacific fans be installed on to variable or solid state controllers?
Solid state and other variable wall controllers will cause a vibration/humming noise in the ceiling fan.
2) Remote Control Operation

Hunter Pacific has several different types of remote control systems. Those with light dimmers must
only be used with incandescent lamps (the use of dimmers with fluorescent lamps will damage the
lamp and the remote control system). Remote control systems for use with fluroescent lamps are also
suitable for use with LED lighting.
Do not install light globes totaling more than 150 Watts for incandescent or 75W for fluorescent as this
may damage the remote receiver.
If your remote control system uses DIP switches to syncronise between the handset and reciever then
write down the code for each fan. If a handset is replaced this code will be required to make the new
handset work with the existing receiver.
3
CONTENTS
Remotes Control Systems FAQ

What speed should the fan be started on using a remote control?
Your ceiling fan should always be started on high speed. Starting your fan on high speed is better for
the motor and will help the motor last longer. High speed gives your fan full voltage which means your
fan does not have to struggle to start.
Will the fan speed be affected if the fan is remote controlled rather than wall controlled?
Yes, this is because wall controlled fans have matching speed capacitors for each fan model. Remote
controls only have one universal set of internal speed capacitors for all fans.
Why cant I operate my fan from a wall controller as well as a remote control?
The remote control receiver in the fan requires full voltage to operate. If a wall control is used then the
receiver will not get full voltage and may be damaged.
What is an isolation switch and do I have to have one?
An isolation switch is a separate switch installed on the wall or in the switchboard (note this is not a
wall controller). This switch looks like a light switch and is only be used to interrupt power to the
receiver in your fan. We require your installing electrician to fit an isolation switch so power can be
turned off for maintenance (eg. changing light globes), to prevent surge/storm damage or in case the
receiver fails.
Can I use Hunter Pacific remote controls to operate other products?
The use of a Hunter Pacific remote control on any item other than those specified is not recommended
and will void your remote control warranty.
How often should I change the battery in my remote control?
Hunter Pacific recommends that you change the battery in your remote hand piece every 6 months to
avoid battery leakages.
3)
Pull Cord Operation
Pull cord ceiling fans are fans that can be operated using a pull cord chain which hangs from the
bottom of the fan. A pull cord can be installed and operated several ways:
1) Pull cord fan with an isolation switch:
The fan must be turned on at the isolation switch for the fan to work. Always use the pull chain before
isolation switch to turn off the fan so you know the fan control is indeed off.
2) Pull cord fan with a remote control:
Pull chain should always be left on high speed position during fan operation. You should then control
your fan speeds using the remote control. The fan will run slowly if the pull cord is not set to high.
3) Pull cord fan with a wall controller:
Pull chain should always be left on high speed position during fan operation. You should then control
your fan speeds using the wall controller. The fan will run at the slowest speed selected by either the
wall control or pull cord. If fan is too slow, check one control is left on high speed.
4) Pull cord fan with light:
The light should be operated on a separate wall switch if the fan is not on a remote control.
5) Pull cord fan wired directly with no other switch:
An isolation switch must be used. See the remote control FAQ above. Pull cord speeds are:
1st pull = High speed, 2nd pull = Medium speed, 3rd pull = Low speed and 4th pull = off.

4
CONTENTS
4)
Summer/Winter Switch Operation
The location of the Summer and Winter switch is different from fan to fan. On most Hunter Pacific
ceiling fans you should be able to locate the summer/winter switch above the motor housing (figure 1).
On the Hunter Pacific pull cord fans you will find the switch located on the pull cord assembly kit
(figure 2).
FIG 1
FIG 2
Pull Cord
Assembly Kit
Reversing Switch
NOTE: The summer/winter switch must always be locked into one of the two position for the fan
to operate. Always check the switch is locked into its correct position after cleaning. If the switch
is placed between positions, the fan will not work.
Understanding the reversing switch

Ceiling fans are an environmentally smart choice to assist
with cooling and warming your home.
Air is blown down,

producing a cool breeze
In Summer your fan should be set to Summer mode. Your

ceiling fan will spin to push air down the centre of the fan
producing a cooling breeze.
In Winter mode your ceiling fan will spin the opposite

direction. Air is drawn up the centre of the fan, and pushed
along the ceiling to circulate down to the living areas. Your
fan should be operated on slower speeds in Winter than
Summer. The Winter mode can also be for air circulation in a
poorly ventilated rooms.
An upward airflow will push warm
air off the ceiling and circulate it
downwards
CAUTION: Always ensure the fan is off and the blades have stopped spinning
before attempting to reverse the fan.

5
CONTENTS
5)
General Maintenance
Changing Remote Batteries: - Remote hand piece batteries should be replaced in every 6 months.
Batteries removed from the remote hand piece should be disposed of properly and kept out of reach
of children.
*Always ensure fan isolation switch is off and the fan cooled down before you start cleaning*
Cleaning the Motor Housings: - Fans must be regularly cleaned to avoid contamination building up on
the motor housing and damaging the finish. Use a soft, slightly damp cloth and then dry with a soft
absorbent cloth. Mild dishwashing liquid can be used to remove stains (apply to damp cloth).
Cleaning the Blades: - Use a soft damp cloth to remove contamination from blades. Always dry blades
with a soft dry cloth after cleaning. Blades should not be left damp or wet as this will damage blade
finish or cause corrosion. Mild dishwashing liquid can be used to remove stains (apply to damp cloth).
NOTE: Hunter Pacific does not recommend wooden or plated steel blade fans be used outdoors or for
very humid installations. If wooden blades are used outdoors or in humid locations the timber may
swell. Plated metal will corrode if condensation and contamination is not removed. Replacement
blades are inexpensive and swelling or corrosion is not covered by warranty.
Ideally your fan (indoors or outdoors) should be cleaned every 3 to 4 months.
Removing blades (fan must be switched off at isolation switch):
Note: Remove and clean blades from each fan separately, do not mix blades from different fans as
Blades with blade holders
This image: Aurora Alternatives 2 fan blade
Blade Washer
Blade Screw
STEP 1 (Fig. 1)
a) Loosen blade screws and washers to detach blade
from blade holder.
a) For Typhoon fans, loosen blade holder screws and
washers, then remove the blade holders and detach fan
blades.
Blade Holder
Blade
NEVER USE POWER TOOLS TO TIGHTEN SCREWS

Blades without blade holders
This Image: Concept1 Fan Fig. (2)
STEP 1 (Fig 2)
a) Twist the base plate of the motor to remove it.

b) For fans with integrated light kits. Remove the glass
and rim of the light kit to access the blades.
STEP 2 (Fig 2)
a) Remove the blade screws and slide the blades out of

the motor housing to remove blades.
NEVER USE POWER TOOLS TO TIGHTEN SCREWS
6
CONTENTS
Cleaning Stainless Steel Fans: - It is a common misconception that if a product is made of stainless
steel then it will be maintenance free. Corrosion of stainless steel does occur and will vary depending
on the conditions the product is subjected to. Tea stains and surface rust can be minimised through
regular cleaning of your stainless steel products.
To ensure your fan stays in good condition Hunter Pacific recommends cleaning stainless steel fans
every 3 to 4 months, especially ones that are installed in outdoors, near pools or coastal locations.
Use the same cleaning procedure as other fans. Exposure to chlorides (salts) will cause stainless
steel to rust and is easily prevented by proper maintenance.
Since a ceiling fan CANNOT be washed by rain water or hosed down chloride contamination will build
up quickly without adequate maintenance. The location will dictate how often it needs to be cleaned.
Stainless steel fans exposed to salt air (even at great distances from the coast) must have the
blades removed and the blade screws checked for rust or damage at least twice per year.
NEVER USE POWER TOOLS TO TIGHTEN BLADE SCREWS.
Normal Wear and Tear: - Fan blades travel an enormous distance every year. Wear and tear of the
blades will occur and environments that promote condensation will cause the fan blade finish to wear
faster. Replacement blades are inexpensive and blades should be replaced if excessive wear,
corrosion or damage appears.
6)
Basic Trouble Shooting Tips
CAUTION: Please make sure the fan isolation switch is off when performing any of the following:
Cannot start fan:
Check reversing switch is pushed fully up or down, or fully left or right.
If the fan is on a remote, check the isolation switch is turned on.
If the fan is on a remote, check dip switch settings on remote hand piece match the dip switch
settings you wrote down in this booklet.
If pull cord fan, check the pull cord chain is set on high speed (turn on the isolation switch and
then pull the cord until fan runs at high speed). Set wall control to high speed if fitted.
Fan sounds noisy:
Fans that have just been installed may make minor mechanical noises and should be given at
least 8 hours settle in period.
If light kit is present, check if the light secured firmly and ensure the glass of the light fitting and
the fitting itself is not vibrating. Re-tighten all screws for the light kit and check glass.
Re-tighten screws on all blades firmly, do not over tighten them.
If the fan is on a wall controller, make sure you are controlling your fan with the HPI wall controller
supplied (dimmer type controls will make the fan noisy).
Fan is wobbling:
If fan is wobbling a lot, check your ball joint slot is locked into the hanger bracket groove. Switch
fan off completely, hold the down rod or motor housing then grasp and rotate the rod or the motor
housing until you can feel the ball joint slot into place.
Re-tighten all screws on blades firmly but do not over tighten.
Check and ensure all your blades match. Hunter Pacific blades are marked with a set of letters
and numbers. The blade weights must be within 3 grams of each other. When manufactured the
blades are balanced and weighed as a set. Thus should only one blade be damaged the whole
set should be replaced to avoid unbalancing the fan.

Some slight wobble is normal, especially if the fan is on an extension rod. Ceiling fans tend to move
during operation because they are not rigidly mounted. Hunter Pacific fans use a ball joint and bracket
and thus a fan may move a couple of centimetres when operating. This does not suggest the fan
could fall providing our installation instructions have been followed. Please note not all ceiling fans are
identical even if they are the same model, some fans may spin faster and some may wobble more
than others.
Fan is not moving much air:
Check the reversing switch of the fan is in its correct position, the reverse switch should only be
pushed into Winter position during the cold months of the year when you want to circulate warm
air. The reversing switch should be put back into its Summer position during the warmer months
of the year when a cooling draft is required.
The distance between the ceiling and the ceiling fan blades may be too small. Increasing this
distance will help the fan perform more effectively, Hunter Pacific offers a range of down rods to
solve this issue. Remember, legally there must be at least 2.1metres between your ceiling fan
blades and the floor. Hunter Pacific recommends at least 2.4metres for metal fans.
You should also consider these factors:
Does the room have too many items which may be obstructing efficient airflow?
Is the fan too small for the size of the room?
Light is not working:
Replace light globe.
Switch off fan completely - make sure the light globe is secured properly into the light kit.
If a halogen globe feels loose, then make sure the movable white, ceramic globe holders (at each
end of the globe) are not frozen or stiff. Gently pushing or pulling the holders should help them to
move freely.
If the fan is on a remote - Check for flat battery in the hand piece.
If the fan is on a remote - Check dip switch settings on hand piece match the ones you wrote
down in this booklet.
If in doubt call the Hunter Pacific International warranty line - 1300 360 280
8
CONTENTS
7)
Warranty
CEILING FANS
Please select your fan carefully and discuss your needs with a sales professional who knows your local area.
Fans that do not perform as expected and which are not faulty cannot be replaced or exchanged under
warranty. Proper performance relies on the right fan being correctly installed in the optimum location. Fans
have 2 years in-home warranty and a further 3 years parts only warranty for the motor. Corrosion is not
covered by warranty unless the affected part is defective when first unpacked or the corrosion has occurred
within 90 days of installation in a normal indoor room not subject to condensation or poor ventilation issues.
Blades are warranted on a parts only basis as they can be removed and replaced by the customer. Please
advise our warranty department if extenuating circumstances apply (eg. related to age or disability)
REMOTE CONTROLS
Hunter Pacific remote controls have a 12 month in-home warranty period for the remote control receiver and a
12 month parts only warranty for the hand piece. Remote controls supplied as part of a "fan + remote"
package are only covered by the above 12 months warranty. Please note the remote control receiver is not
part of the fan, instead being a separately connected accessory device. The remote control receiver is often
fitted into the fan mounting bracket for convenience but is not an integral part of the fan and not covered by the
warranty provisions of the fan itself. Resetting of DIP switches in remote hand pieces is not covered by
warranty and a service call fee will apply. A service bulletin explaining how to find the correct DIP code is
available at no charge. Batteries, if supplied, are done so as a complimentary (free) item only and not covered
by warranty.
LIGHT KITS
Hunter Pacific light kits including ballasts, transformers or controllers have a 12 month warranty period. Light
globes, if supplied, are done so as a complimentary (free) item only and not covered by warranty. Corrosion is
subject to the same limitations as for fans above.
What is in-home warranty?
Hunter Pacific offers a 2 year in-home warranty (12 months for remote controls and lights) to Hunter Pacific
ceiling fans installed within the coverage of our network of service agents in cases where the product fails due
to defective materials or workmanship. This warranty does not cover corrosion, installation faults, house wiring
faults, loose blades or fittings or damage of any kind.
In areas outside coverage of Hunter Pacific service agents, Hunter Pacific will reimburse customers a standard
service call fee (based on the national average) for using their own electrician. Conditions apply and any
service request must be arranged with the Hunter Pacific warranty department before calling your own
electrician. Under no circumstances will reimbursement be made for call-out fees or other costs without prior
approval. When installed as recommended by Hunter Pacific (via an isolation switch) a fan or remote control
can be switched off at the wall in case of a fault. If the product cannot be turned off because an isolation switch
is not fitted then costs involved in disconnecting the product while awaiting warranty service are borne solely
by the customer.
What is the parts only warranty?
Hunter Pacific will supply parts only, shipped to the customer or their nominated agent. Conditions apply.
Please note labour associated with installation of these parts, or associated electrical costs of removing and
reinstalling the product to effect repair is borne by the customer.
This additional warranty offer excludes corrosion damage of any type. Please contact our warranty department
for additional information.
9
CONTENTS
ELIGIBILITY
Warranty periods begin from the day of purchase. Details for the product, installing electrician and proof of
purchase must be available to claim on-site warranty.
Fans and fixed wiring products must only be installed by persons who are appropriately licensed by the
applicable state regulatory body. Therefore, to protect our repair personnel, on-site warranty will not be
provided if products have been installed by unlicensed persons.
Damages caused by incorrect installation, force-majeure, electrical surges, lightning, power grid
fluctuations, water or by connection to alternative power supply sources (such as solar inverters etc) are not
eligible for warranty repair.
Where customers are outside coverage of Hunter Pacific service agents, Hunter Pacific will reimburse
customers a standard fee (based on the national average) for using their own electrician. Conditions apply and
any service request must be arranged with the Hunter Pacific warranty department before calling your own
electrician.
To the maximum extent permitted by law this product warranty excludes liability for consequential loss or
claims for damages. This warranty will not cover any repairs to a Hunter Pacific product where the product was
incorrectly used, physically abused, accidentally damaged or not serviced in accordance with the maintenance
instructions.
Signals sent through the power grid by the electricity supplier for the control of off peak hot water, street lights
and other devices may cause an intermittent humming noise in your electrical appliances such as your ceiling
fan. Filters are available in Australia at the customer's expense. These noises do not occur as a result of a
faulty fan and are not covered by warranty.
When products are installed in a location requiring special access equipment (such as scaffolding or scissor
lifts, etc) the cost of providing, installing and operating special access equipment must be borne by the site
owner. The need for or use of, such equipment must be stated when booking a service call. Charges will be
levied for Hunter Pacific International to arrange special access equipment and these must be paid in
advance.
Blades must be replaced only as a complete set. Blades are supplied only as a pre-balanced set and the
replacement of individual blades may void the warranty by causing mechanical damage to the motor,
excessive noise or premature wear. Mixing up of blade sets when fans are installed/maintained may void your
warranty. Re-sorting mixed blades is not covered under warranty.
If goods are found to be free of defects or the product is not functioning properly as a result of faulty
installation or maintenance then Hunter Pacific International Pty Ltd reserves the right to charge the customer
a service fee.In any event call the warranty line on 1300 360 280 for further advice.
This statement is required by the Australian Consumer Law 2010: Our goods come with guarantees that
cannot be excluded under the Australian Consumer Law. You are entitled to a replacement or refund for a
major failure and for compensation for any other reasonably foreseeable loss or damage. You are also entitled
to have the goods repaired or replaced if the goods fail to be of acceptable quality and the failure does not
.
For the purposes
of the above paragraph specific definitions for major failure are given in the ACL 2010. With
regard to product failure Hunter Pacific considers a major failure to be when the original, unopened and new
package is missing contents, those contents are damaged or defective or the fan, light or remote control does
not operate when initially installed.
Hunter Pacific warranty is only available for products that are purchased and installed within Australia.
10
CONTENTS

Fill out the details below and keep this manual. You will need to present your product information,
installing electricians license number and proof of purchase for warranty claims.
CUSTOMER DETAILS
Customer Name:
Installation Site Address:
INSTALLING ELECTRICIAN DETAILS

Electrical company and Electrician Name:
License No:
Telephone:
Mobile:
Install Date:
PRODUCT DETAILS
Qty
Product Name
Install Area
Colour
Size
PURCHASE DETAILS
Qty
Product Name
Purchase Place
Purchase Date
Record your remote dip switch settings

Use arrows to indicate the whether switches are pushed up or down on your remote hand piece.
Fan name:
Colour:
Location:
Date:
USER MUST RETAIN THE PURCHASE RECEIPT FOR WARRANTY CLAIMS

11
CONTENTS
Hunter Pacific International Pty Ltd

Head Office: Building 8, 256 New line Road,
New Line Business Park, Dural, NSW, Australia.
www.hunterpacific.com.au
ABN 18 063 521 666
National Warranty Line: 1300 360 280

Available Monday to Friday, from 9am to 5pm AEST.
CONTENTS
UMU V1-2
B SMEG Fridge
CONTENTS
User Guide Manual
SR610X
SR620X
Code : MRY6012-13
CONTENTS
Disposal of Used Electrical &

Electronic Equipment
The meaning of the symbol on the product, its
accessory or packaging indicates that this product
shall not be treated as household waste. Please,
dispose of this equipment at your applicable
collection point for the recycling of electrical &
electronic equipments waste.
In the European Union and Other European countries
there are separate collection systems for used electrical
and electronic product. By ensuring the correct disposal of
this product, you will help prevent potential hazards to the
environment and to human health, which could otherwise
be caused by unsuitable waste handling of this product.
The recycling of materials will help conserve natural
resources.
Please do not therefore dispose of your old electrical and
electronic equipment with your household waste.
For more detailed information about recycling of this
product, please contact your local city office, your
household waste disposal service or the shop where you
purchased the product.
SAFETY WARNING
This appliance contains a certain amount of
isobutane refrigerant (R600a) a natural gas
with high environmental compatibility that is,
however, also combustible.
When transporting and installing the appliance, care
should be taken to ensure that no parts of the
refrigerating circuit are damaged.
Refrigerant squirting out of the pipes could ignite or
cause eye injury. If a leak is detected, avoid any naked
flames or potential sources of ignition and air the room
in which appliance is standing for several minutes.
In order to avoid the creation of a flammable gas-air
mixture if a leak in the refrigerating circuit occurs, the size
of the room in which the appliance may be sited depends
on the amount of refrigerant used.
The room must be 1 m in size for every 8g of R600a
refrigrant inside the appliance. The amount of refrigerant
is shown on the identification plate inside the appliance.
Never start up an appliance showing any signs of
damage. lf in doubt, consult your dealer.
RoHS (Directive 2002/95/EC) Compliant

This product is environmentally sound and
sustainable free from Pb, Cd, Cr+6, Hg, PBBs
and PBDEs restricted in accordance with the
Directive.
Refrigerant Information
(R-134a Models Only)
Refrigerant
R-134a
Charge
0.190kg
Global Warming Potential
1300
Contains fluorinated greenhouse gases covered by the

Kyoto Protocol and is hermetically sealed.
Foam blown with fluorinated greenhouse gases.
Blowing Agent
C-pentane
OBSERVE AMBIENT TEMPERATURE

This refrigerator is designed to operate in ambient
temperature specified by its category, which is marked on
the rating plate
Climatic category Ambient temperature from...to
SN
+ 10 to + 32
+ 16 to + 32
ST
+ 16 to + 38
+ 16 to + 43
NOTE
Internal temperature may be affected by such factors as
the location of the refrigerator, ambient temperature and
frequency of the door opening.
Contents
Be sure to keep for safety 1~2
Installation Guide2
Control Panel 3
Temperature Control 4
How to use Interior Parts 5~6
Magic Cool Zone (Option)
How to use the Dispenser 7
How to use the Automatic Icemaker7
Care & Cleaning 8
Before You Call for Service... 9
Something strange?
Dont worry. Here is the answer 10
Installation Preparation 11
If the refrigerator can not pass through a door
during installation, follow these steps 11
Refrigerator Leveling &
Door Adjustment (if needed) 13
Water Filter 13 ~14
How to install Water Line 14
CONTENTS
Be sure to keep for safety!

Read these safety instructions thoroughly and carefully
before using. Please keep this user guide on hand for future
reference.
Indicates the possibility of danger of
death or serious injury.
Indicates the possibility of risk of personal
injury or material damage.
Other Signs
DO NOT remove or disassemble!
Be sure to unplug from outlet/mains!
NO. DO NOT...
Be sure to keep and follow!
Caution
1. If the supply cord becomes damaged, it must be replaced
by the manufacturer or its service agent or a similarly
qualified person in order to avoid a hazard.
2. This appliance is not intended for use by persons
(including children) with reduced physical, sensory or
mental capabilities, or lack of experience and knowledge,
unless they have been given supervision or instruction
concerning use of the appliance by a person responsible
for their safety.
WARNING
Never let the power cord be crushed
by the refrigerator itself or other (heavy)
objects. Never bend power cord excessively.
If the cord is damaged or peeled, it can be a
cause of fire and electric shock.
Do not plug several appliances into the
same wall outlet.
It can be a cause of overheating and/or fire.
Use an exclusive grounding receptacle for
the refrigerator.
Never hold the power cord or plug with wet
hands.
There is a risk of electric shock.
Never use a damaged power cord or plug,
or loose main socket.
There is a risk of fire, electric shock or
serious injury.
Be sure to ground. Check if your wall outlet

is grounded (earthed).
There is a risk of electric shock hazards.
Never unplug by pulling only the power cord
wire. Always grip the plug firmly.
Let the cord from the plug outlet be
directed downwards.
If it is directed up, the cord near the plug is
bent and can be damaged, which can
cause an electric shock or fire.
Do not install the refrigerator on a wet
floor or in a place with excessive humidity and
moisture.
Electric insulation gets weakened,
resulting in a risk of electric shock
hazards.
Never let the power cord touch or pass over
heating appliances.
Power cord can be damaged, resulting in a
risk of electric shock hazards.
Check if plug is loose from the wall outlet.
Electric insulation gets weakened,
resulting in a risk of electric shock
hazards.
Never pour or spray water into the
refrigerator (both interior and exterior).
Electric insulation gets weakened, resulting
in a risk of electric shock hazards.
Do not place containers with water or
liquid on top of refrigerator.
Water can spill into the refrigerator
and can cause electric shock hazards or
damage.
Do not let children hang on the refrigerator
doors.
Refrigerator can fall and harm them.
Do not move or remove compartment
shelves/pockets while foods and
containers are on them.
Hard containers (of glass, metal etc.) can
fall to hurt you and can break glass shelf
and interior parts.
Never repair or disassemble or amend the
refrigerator on your own
There is a risk of personal injury or damage
to the refrigerator. It is recommended that
any service be carried out by a qualified
person.
1
CONTENTS
Never store any flammable gas or liquid

in the refrigerator.
Never use flammable gas, benzene, thinners,
gasoline, spray etc. near the refrigerator.
There is a risk of fire, explosion and
personal injury or damage.
If a gas leak is found near the refrigerator
or in the kitchen, ventilate it immediately
without touching the power plug or
refrigerator.
Do not store medicine or academic research
samples which require strict temperature
control in the refrigerator.
Never insert fingers or hands into the bottom
of the refrigerator, especially into the bottom
at the back.
You can be hurt by sharp metal edges or can
receive an electric shock.
Do not change fuse or LED lamp on your own.
Call the service agent to change them.
When you find the power cord damaged or
cut, call the service agent immediately.
When you get rid of your old refrigerator, be
sure to remove the door packings first.
Children can be entrapped and suffocated in
an abandoned refrigerator.
Keep ventilation openings, in the appliance
enclosure or in the built-in structure,
clear of obstruction.
Do not use mechanical devices or other means to
accelerate the defrosting process.
Do not use electrical appliances inside the food
storage compartments of the appliance.
The ice-maker in the freezer can be only replaced
by the manufacturer or the service agent.
When the freezer door is open, do not press the
dispenser lever.
Connect to drinkable water supply only.
CAUTION
Be sure to unplug the refrigerator when it is
not going to be used for a long time.
Never touch foods and containers

especially of metal with wet hands in the
freezer compartment.
You can be hurt by chilblains or cold burns.
Never eat any decayed or deteriorated food at all.
Foods stored too long in the refrigerator can
deteriorate and become decayed.
Never place bottles and containers of glass
in the freezer compartment.
Glass containers and bottles can break and
can hurt you.
When moving the refrigerator (horizontally
or tilted), more than 2 people are required
to hold it.
(One to hold top back handles, the other to hold
the bottom holder.)
If other parts are held instead, it is very dangerous
and likely to slip.
Be sure to turn up the wheel first before
moving the refrigerator.
The wheels can damage or scratch the floor.
If you are moving it for a long distance, never forget
to fasten the interior parts tightly with tapes.
Otherwise, the parts can collide and break each
other.
Installation Guide
Read these safety instructions carefully before use and

follow precautions for your safety.
Precautions in installation and

power connection
To prevent fire, electric shock or leakage.
Never install the refrigerator on a wet, watery floor or
where water can gather easily.
Check the following before power connection.
Connect power plug only to a grounded wall socket
(an earthed mains).
Do not plug refrigerator power together with other
appliances to the same socket.
Do not use an adapter plug or an extension cord.
2
CONTENTS
Do not let the power cord be crushed by other

(heavy) objects .
If you hear a strange noise, strong chemical odour
or find smoke etc. from the refrigerator after the power
is plugged in, pull out the plug immediately and call
the service agent.
Wait about 5 minutes before you plug-in again in
order to prevent any damage to the compressor and
electrical devices of refrigerator.
Wait 2~3 hours until the inside gets cold enough after
the first power plug-in, then store foods inside.
(There can be some smell of plastic parts on initial
operation of the refrigerator after plugging in.
The smell fades away as the refrigerator works and
doors are opened and closed.)
2.
LIGHT/FILTER button
1) Button for dispenser light on.
2) Button for filter exchange or reset.
After exchanging or to reset press the button
for 3 seconds.
3.
Alarm display
Customers can be informed of temperature status
when temperature abnormally rises due to
accidents (for example, blackout)
1) Alarm icon blinks displaying the highest
inner temperature.
2) Alarm stops when
button is pressed,
and display shows temperature control value.
4.
Displays the button 'Lock'.
5.
Filter exchange display

After 6 months of first power input, the icon will
flicker.
6.
Button for water dispensing. Water symbol lights up

when selected.
7.
Selection button for ice dispensing and lock for ice

maker.
8.
REF.SET button
Selection button for refrigerator compartment
temperature.
9.
Lock button for control panel

Press button for more than 3 seconds to activate
and prevent settings from being unintentionally
changed.
To release the button, press for longer than
3 seconds. The display goes out.
Precautions in use
To prevent personal injury, fire, electric shock etc. read
this user guide carefully before use and keep it at
hand for any reference.
Accessories
Control Panel
Dispenser Model
Non Dispenser Model
1.
FRZ.SET button
Selection button for freezer compartment
temperature.
Note
Interior lights of the refrigerator turn off when the doors are open for more than 10 minutes.
In case either the freezer or refrigerator door is left open for more than a minute, door alarm rings for 5 minutes with
1 minute intervals.
Display off function
- 5 minutes after no buttons or doors are operated by customer, all the display LED except for water, ice and ice lock icon
go out.
- Under the LED off status, it returns to normal display mode when customers operate buttons or doors.
System off function (power off function)
- You can stop operating the appliance without unplugging especially on holidays.
- Pressing FRZ.SET and REF.SET button at the same time for 5 seconds will turn the appliance off.
- Under the off mode, freezer and refrigerator temperature displays -- --.
- Other LED lights go out and all the operation of your appliance halt.
- Conversely, pressing FRZ.SET and REF.SET button together for 5 seconds will switch it back on.
3
CONTENTS
1.
Displays the button 'Lock'
2.
FRZ.SET button
Selection button for freezer compartment
3.
Lock button for control panel

Press button to prevent settings from being
unintentionally changed.
To release the button, press for longer than 3 seconds.
The display goes out.
4.
REF.SET button
Selection button for refrigerator compartment
temperature.
5. Alarm display
Customers can be informed of temperature status
when temperature abnormally rises due to accidents.
(for example, blackout)
1) Temperature display blinks with displaying the highest
inner temperture.
2) Alram stops when LOCK button is pressed,
and display shows temperature control value.
Temperature Control
When this refrigerator is first plugged in, the temperature
mode is set to [Middle].
Faster Cooling or
Refrigeration
When you want faster cooling or refrigeration , push the
REF.SET button, until 'Super' LED turns on. Just push the
button again to release.
Note
(Dispenser models only) Temperature

indicator convert function
(Fahrenheit Celsius)
Press the lock button to enter locked mode.
Under the locked mode, press the light and
water button at the same time for 10 sec to
swap temperature scale (default setting is
celsius).
Non Dispenser Model
Freezer Compartment
Push the FRZ. SET button and the setting
temperature changes as the figure shows.
>>> Sequential Temperature Change <<<
Faster
Freezing...
Freezer Compartment
Push the FRZ. SET button and the setting temperature
changes as the figure shows.
When you want faster freezing, push the FRZ.SET button,

until ' ' LED turns on. Just push the button again to
release.
Refrigerator Compartment
Faster Freezing...
Push the REF. SET button and the setting

temperature changes as the figure shows.
When you want faster freezing, push the FRZ.SET button,

until 'Super' LED turns on. Just push the button again to
release.
Refrigerator Compartment
Push the REF. SET button and the setting temperature
changes as the figure shows.
Faster Cooling or
Refrigeration
When you want faster freezing, push the REF.SET button,
until ' ' LED turns on. Just push the button again to
release.
Caution
Foods in the refrigerator can be frozen if the ambient
temperature of the refrigerator is below 5c.
4
CONTENTS
How to use the interior parts

Non Dispenser Model
Dispenser Model
This instruction manual refers to several models. The real features are model dependent.
1. Door storage compartment
for short-term storage of food and
ice cream.
7. Xpress Can Chiller

for storing beverage
(quick cooling compartment ).
2. Door storage compartment

for storing frozen food.
8. Refrigerator shelf
for storing common foods.
3. Freezer shelf
for storing frozen foods such as
meat, fish, ice-cream.
4. Ice cube tray (not all models)
9. Egg case
(do not use the case for storing ice
cubes nor place in the freezer
compartment.)
5. Freezer case
for storing dried or fish, meat for
long periods of time.
10. Vegetable case
6. Ice maker & storage

(not all models)
12. Magic cool Zone

(not all models)
refer to page 7 for more
information.
11. Fruit case
13. Water filter (not all models)

14. Multi Plus Zone
for storing general medicines or
cosmetic products. (Safekeeping
is not guaranteed for products
such as academic sampling or
medicine which requires a specific
temperature range.)
15. Refreshment compartment
(not all models)
for frequently used cans, drink
water, beverages.
16. Refreshment Pocket
for storing refrigerating foods,
milk, juice, beer bottle etc.
Caution
Do not touch or hold with wet hands foods (food container) in the freezer compartment.
There is a risk of chilblains (cold burns).
Do not store medicine, academic research samples etc. in the refrigerator.
Do not store vegetables in the chilled room, as they can be frozen.
5
CONTENTS
Food Storage Tips

Wash foods before storing.
Refreshment compartment
(Not all models)
Divide and separate foods into

smaller pieces.
Place watery foods or foods

with a lot of moisture in front
shelves (close to door side).
If they are placed close to the
cold air spout, they can be
frozen.
1. Softly press the upper centre of Home Bar to open

(one-touch push type).
- You can access the refreshment compartment without
opening the door thus saving electricity.
- The refrigerator lamp is lit when the refreshment
compartment door is open. It is easy to identify the
contents.
Warm or hot foods should be

cooled down enough before
storing to reduce power
consumption and to enhance
refrigeration performance.
Be careful in storing tropical fruits
such as bananas, pineapples and
tomatos, as they can easily deteriorate in
lower temperatures.
2. You can put your wine or food on the opened home bar
cover.
- Leaving the cover open for too long could weaken
cooling performance.
Keep enough space between

foods. If too tight or too close, cold air
circulation is hindered, resulting
in poor refrigeration.
Never forget to cover or wrap

foods to prevent odours.
6
CONTENTS
Magic cool zone (Option)

Magic cool zone Control graphic and Control function
When you plug in first, FRESH LED is ON.

You can choose FRESH VEGETABLE FISH
MEAT by pushing the SELECT button.
Step
Display
Target Temperature
1st
fresh
5~6
2nd
vegetable
3~4
3rd
fish
-1~0
4th
meat
-3~-2
How to use the Automatic

Icemaker(For dispenser models)
About 10 icecubes (14~15 times a day) are made at one
time. If the ice storage case is full, icemaking stops.
It is normal for the icemaker to make banging sounds
when the icecubes are falling into the ice storage case.
To prevent bad odours or smells, regularly clean the
icecubes storage case.
If the amount of ice in the storage case is not sufficient,
the ice may not be dispensed. Wait a day or so to make
more ice.
If the ice does not dispense easily, ensure the dispenser
outlet is not blocked.
In case the icemaker doesnt work

If the icecubes get stuck and not
dispensed
Pull out the ice storage case and separate any icecubes
that may have stuck together.
If the amount of water which is supplied to the icemaker
needs adjusting, call for the service agent.
How to use the Dispenser
In case of power failure
Select the 'WATER' or 'ICE' button and push the lever

smoothly with your cup.
Your selection will come out 1~2 seconds later.
The icecubes in the case may melt to flow down to the

freezer room.
If many hours of power failure is predicted, pull out the
case, remove the icecubes in it and replace it back when
power resumes.
(For dispenser models)
Press the 'WATER' button and icon lights up.

Press the 'ICE' button and icon lights up.
WATER
CUBED ICE
When cleaning the icecubes case assembly or if

you will not use it for a long time, remove the
icecubes in the ice storage case and lock the
icemaker by pushing the 'ICE' button for 3 seconds.
Caution
Avoid using thin fragile cups or crystal glasses when
taking icecubes.
For your safety, never insert your fingers or other tools
into the dispenser outlet.
If you find the ice cubes are discolored, stop using
the dispenser and call the service agent.
7
CONTENTS
Care & Cleaning
Be sure to
unplug first
Dispenser Water Shelf
Freezer & Refrigerator Pockets
Remove the spill grill and clean the water shelf

regularly. (The spill shelf is not self-draining.)
Hold both ends and pull up.
Freezer & Refrigerator Shelves

Open the doors fully,
then pull the shelves forward to remove.
Icecubes storage Case

Removing: Pull up the case assembly
forward to remove.
Replacing: Fit to the side grooves and insert to the
end. If it is difficult to fully insert the case, remove it,
rotate the swirl coil in the case or drive mechanism a
quarter turn and insert again.
Do not store the icecubes for too long.
Vegetable Case & Fruit Case

Pull forward and lift up a little to remove.
8
CONTENTS
How to Clean
Problem
Foods in the
refrigerator get frozen.
Interior Parts
Use cloth with water and mild detergent to clean.
Checkup Point
Is temperature set to [High]?
Is the room temperature too low?
Is food with moisture stored close to the cold air spout ?
Action
Back (Machine section)
Remove dust on grill with a vacuum cleaner
at least once a year.
Set the temperature to [Middle] or [Low].

Foods can be frozen if ambient temperature is below 5.
Move to a place where the temperature is over 5.
Place foods with moisture on the shelves close to the
doors.
Problem
Strange sounds from
the refrigerator.
Checkup Point
Caution
Never use petrol, benzene,
thinners, scouring pads or harsh
abrasives, for they can damage
the surfaces.
Is the floor beneath the refrigerator uneven?

Is the space between refrigerator back and the wall too
close?
Do any objects or other stuff touch the refrigerator?
Action
Before You Call for Service...
Move the refrigerator to a level and even floor.

Keep sufficient space.
Remove any object which touches the refrigerator.
Please checkup the following troubleshooting tips before you

call for service!
Problem
Odour or unpleasant
smell from the inside.
Problem
It never gets cold inside.
Freezing & refrigerating is
not so good.
Checkup Point
Is the refrigerator unplugged?
Is the temperature set to [Low Mode]?
Is the refrigerator under direct sunlight or is a
heat appliance placed near it?
Is the space between the refrigerator back and the
wall too close?
Action
Checkup Point
Is the food stored uncovered or unwrapped?
Are the shelves and pockets stained with food stuff?
Is the food stored too long?
Action
Be sure to cover and wrap the foods.
Clean them regularly. Once smell gets soaked into those
parts, it is not easy to remove.
Do not store foods for too long. A refrigerator is neither a
perfect nor a permanent food keeper.
Plug in the refrigerator.

Set the temperature mode to Middle or High.
Move to a place where there is no direct
sunlight, no heat appliences around.
Keep sufficient space (more than 10cm)
between the back of the refrigerator and the wall.
9
CONTENTS
Something strange?
Dont worry. Here is the
answer.
Case
Heat
Door
is
sticky
Explanation
Front and side of refrigerator feels

warm or hot.
Pipes (refrigerant vessel) are placed beneath the

surface to prevent moisture forming on it.
Doors do not open easily.
When you close the door and then open again

immediately, the door is not easy to open. Warm
air rushes into the inside to create the pressure
difference.
In this case wait for a minute, then it will open
easily.
It sounds like water is flowing from

the refrigerator.
When the compressor starts to run or stops,

refrigerant which makes the inside cold flowing in
the pipes can make such a sound.
Defrosted water can also make such a sound.
(This refrigerator adopts an automatic defrosting
system.)
Cracking or clicking sounds.
Inside parts shrink and/or expand due to

temperature change --- When the inside gets cold
or when the door is open, such sounds can be
made.
Humming or buzzing sounds.
Compressor or fans for cold air circulation can

make such working sound. (If the refrigerator is
not level, the sound can be louder.)
Strange
Sound
Dew or frost on the wall and/or

food container surface in the
freezer and refrigerator
compartment.
Frost
& Dew
Dew on the cabinet surface.
Frost and/or dew can be made in the following

cases;
High temperature and/or high humidity around
the refrigerator.
When doors are open too long.
Foods with much moisture are stored uncovered
or unwrapped.
You can see the same appearance when cold
water is poured in a glass cup and dew is
forming on the surface of it.
If it is highly humid around the refrigerator,
moisture in the air sticks to the surface to form
dew.
10
CONTENTS
Installation Preparation
Check if the refrigerator can pass a
doorway or enter a door first.
Dimensions (including Door Handles)
(Width*Depth*Height) 905mm720mm1770mm
If the refrigerator can not

pass through a door
during installation, follow
these steps.
(This guide refers to several models. The real features are
model dependent.)
Removing Freezer Door

Remove front bottom cover first, if it is attached.
Pull out bending tube guide and the left water tube.
2 Unscrew top hinge cover with a screw driver.

Find a suitable place to install
Sufficient space from the back of refrigerator to the wall for
free air ventilation.
top hinge fastener counterclockwise 3~4 times.
3 Turn
Disconnect the harness wires.
up the front of hinge to remove. (After the hinge is

4 Lift
removed the door can fall down forward. Be careful!)
Avoid direct sunlight.
careful not to damage the water line when removing

5 Be
the door.
Note
Once the installation place is ready follow the

installation instructions.
If the surrounding temperature of refrigerator
is low (below 5), foods can be frozen or the
refrigerator can function abnormally.
11
CONTENTS
Removing Refrigerator Door
the hinge fastener tightly to the end.

3 Turn
Connect harness wirings and screw down the ground wire.
top hinge cover with a screwdriver.

1 Unscrew
Insert a thin screwdriver into the
side groove of the cover to remove.
the bending tube guide and insert the water

4 Fasten
tube far into the coupling.
top hinge fastener counterclockwise 3~4 times.
2 Turn
Disconnect harness wires (model dependent).
Replacing Refrigerator Door
3 Lift the door straight up to remove.
Replacing Freezer Door

the water tube into the hole of the bottom hinge
1 Insert
pin first.
the top of door close to the cabinet and insert the

2 Let
top hinge pin to the top hole of freezer door.
(Insert the back of hinge to the groove of protrusion
first, then front to the top hole of door.)
the bottom hole of refrigerator

1 Insert
door straight into the bottom hinge pin.
the top of door close to the cabinet and insert the

2 Let
top hinge pin to the top hole of refrigerator door.
(Insert the back of hinge to the groove of protrusion
first, then front to the top hole of door.)
the hinge fastener tightly to the end.

3 Turn
Connect harness wirings (model dependent) and screw
down the ground wire. Click and screw the top hinge
cover.
12
CONTENTS
Refrigerator Leveling &

Door Adjustment (If needed)
The refrigerator must be level in order to maintain optimal
performance and desirable front appearance.
(If the floor beneath the refrigerator is uneven, the freezer
and refrigerator doors look unbalanced.)
In case freezer door is lower than

refrigerator door...
If the refrigerator door is not balanced by step 1, then

follow the next steps.
a spanner (A part) into the hinge nut (1 part) and
2 Insert
unscrew the nut by turning clockwise.
a spanner (B part) into the hinge nut (2 part) and
3 Insert
turn counter-clockwise to tighten the door.
4
a screw driver (flat

1 Insert
tip) into a groove of the left
wheel (bottom of freezer)
and turn it clockwise until the
door is balanced. (Clockwise
to raise freezer door,
counterclockwise to lower.)
If the freezer door is not balanced by step 1, then
follow the next steps.
the doors, unscrew the
2 Open
front cover and remove, if it is
attached.
If the door is aligned, fasten the nut (1) tightly by

turning.
Front Cover
After installation and/or door leveling, fasten front cover with
screws. (Remove the screws on the front bottom panel first.
Click and screw the cover.)
Caution
The front of refrigerator needs to be just a little
higher than the back for easy door closing, but if
the wheel is raised too much for door balance,
i.e. the front of refrigerator is much higher than
the back, it can be difficult to open the door.
Water Filter
1. Remove the locking cap for
installing the filter.
(The ice and water dispenser can
also be used without a water filter,
in which case the locking cap must
be used.)
Insert a spanner (A part) into the hinge nut (1 part) and

unscrew the nut by turning clockwise.
a spanner (B part) into the hinge nut (2 part)
4 Insert
and turn clockwise to lower the door.
If the door is aligned, fasten the nut (1) tightly by turning
counter-clockwise.
2. Carefully turn the filter clockwise.

3. Change the filter at least once
every 6 months.
In case refrigerator door is lower than

freezer door...
* A New filter can be obtained from

aftersales services.
a screw driver (flat tip)

1 Insert
into a groove of the right wheel
(bottom of refrigerator) and
turn it clockwise until the door
is balanced. (Clockwise to
raise refrigerator door,
counterclockwise to lower.)
Caution
Wipe up with cloth if droplets fall when
exchanging the filter.
13
CONTENTS
Information concerning the water filter
WATER SUPPLY KIT
- After use, the water system is subject to low pressure.

Proceed with caution when removing the filter.
Check the parts below for installing water supply.

Some other necessary parts are available at your local
service agents.
- Flush the water system if the appliance has not been in

use for a long period of time, or if the ice/water has an
unpleasant taste or smell. To do this, dispense water
through the water dispenser for several minutes.
If the unpleasant taste or smell remains, replace the filter.
- Protect from frost: remove the filter cartridge if you expect
the temperature to drop below freezing.
Installation Procedure
- If pressure surges could occur in the water pipe, do not

install the water filter without a suitable surge eliminator.
Contact an installation expert if you are not sure whether
pressure surges could occur in the water pipe.
- After installing a new filter:
Discard any ice produced in the first 24 hours after
switching on.
- If no ice has been removed for a long period of time, empty
the ice box and discard any ice produced over the next
24 hours.
How to install Water Line
1. Connecting the appliance
(For dispenser models)

1. The water pressure should be 2.0~12.5 kgf/cm
(1.96 ~12.26 Bar) or more to run the automatic icemaker.
Check your tap water pressure; if a cup of 180cc is
full within 10 seconds, the pressure is OK.
2. When installing the water tubes, ensure they are not
close to any hot surfaces.
3. The water filter only filters water; it does not eliminate
any bacteria or microbes.
4. If the water pressure is not sufficient to run the icemaker,
call the local plumber to get an additional water pressure
pump.
5. The filter life depends on the amount of use. We
recommend you to replace the filter at least once every
6 months.
6. After installation of refrigerator and water line system,
select [WATER] on your control panel and press it for
2~3 minutes to supply water into the water tank and
dispense water.
7. Use plumbers thread sealing tape on every connection of
pipes/tubes to ensure there is no water leaks.
8. The water tube should be connected to the cold water
line.
2. Connecting the tap water line

Figure A
Figure B
Place the rubber washer inside the tap connector

and screw onto the water tap.
14
CONTENTS
C P y r o l y t i c O ve n
CONTENTS
Unit 10518
OK 999 ELD PX AUS S

60cm Built In Oven
60cm Large Capacity Oven - 4 Ovens in 1

10 Cooking Functions in the XL oven
7 Universal programs and 3 Automatic programs makes this oven extremely versatile
Split Cavity Option
By putting the divider in place you can create 2 separate ovens. You can cook with 2
different temperatures and cooking functions at the same time. Perfect for the home
baker or aspiring chefs alike. This is by far the most versatile oven on the market
Pyrolytic Cleaning
Pyrolytic oven turns food residue and grime into ash which can then be easily wiped
clean using a damp cloth. No harsh chemicals or scrubbing required
Large Capacity
81L of space, with up to 4 levels of cooking at a time. And with no cross over of
flavours or smells so you can cook different dishes all at once
Fully Programmable Timer
You can program the oven to turn on and off at the desired times, or simply use it as a
countdown timer
Triple Glazed Door
Cool touch door makes it safer for all the family in the kitchen. Less chance of burning
yourself if the door is accidently touched while the oven is on.
LED Lighting
Stylish Led lights so you can see what your cooking
Telescopic Rails
Makes moving and removing your food from the oven very easy. The rails simply slide
so there is no need to lift your trays when cooking
Rotisserie
Cooking and roasting meat is so easy with the easy to use rotisserie

Ph: 1300 762 219

Ph:(09) 306 1020
Fax: 03 9768 0838
Fax: (09) 302 0077

CONTENTS
OS
PIX PX AUS S
OK 99D
999 ELD
60cm
60cm Wall
Built Oven
In Oven
No. Functions
10 Multifunction
Technical
81L
Oven Capacity (Gross)
Timer
Fully Programmable
No. Door Glass
Pyrolytic
Cleaning
Finish
Dimensions built in (W) x (H) x (D)
Stainless Steel
Accessories
1 x tray & grid, 3 x shelves, 1 x divider,

1 x rotisserie
Cooling Fan
Absorbed Power
Connection
3400W
220-240V / 50Hz /14.8A
595 x 570/20 x 550

Ph: 1300 762 219

Ph:(09) 306 1020
Fax: 03 9768 0838
Fax: (09) 302 0077

CONTENTS
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
997E LDP X AUS S

997E LDP AUS S
999E LDP AUS S
999E LDP X AUS S
999EL S D P X AUS
999EL S D P AUS
English
OVEN
Contents
Operating Instructions,1
Warnings,2
Assistance,3
Description of the appliance,4
Installation,6
Electrical Connection,7
Oven structure,8
Start-up and use,9
Cooking modes,10
Precautions and tips,17
Maintenance and care,17
Troubleshooting,20
CONTENTS
AUS
Warnings
WARNING: The appliance and its
accessible parts become hot during use.
Care should be taken to avoid touching
heating elements. Children less than 8
years of age shall be kept away unless
continuously supervised. This appliance
can be used by children aged from 8 years
and above and persons with reduced
physical, sensory or mental capabilities
or lack of experience and knowledge
if they have been given supervision
or instruction concerning use of the
appliance in a safe way and understand
the hazards involved. Children shall not
play with the appliance. Cleaning and
user maintenance shall not be made by
children without supervision.
Do not use harsh abrasive cleaners or
sharp metal scrapers to clean the oven door
glass since they can scratch the surface,
which may result in shattering of the glass.
Before initiating the automatic cleaning
cycle:
clean the oven door;
remove large or coarse food residues
from the inside of the oven using a
damp sponge. Do not use detergents;
remove all accessories and the sliding
rack kit (where present);
do not place tea towels
Keep children away from the appliance
during the automatic cleaning cycle as
surfaces may become very hot.
Never use steam cleaners or pressure
cleaners on the appliance.
WARNING: Ensure that the appliance is
switched off before replacing the lamp to
avoid the possibility of electric shock
! When you place the rack inside, make
sure that the stop is directed upwards and
in the back of the cavity.
CONTENTS
AUS
Assistance
! Never use the services of an unauthorised technician.
The type of problem encountered.
The latter two pieces of information can be found on the
data plate located on the appliance.
ARISTON
PRIORITY SERVICE
GENUINE ACCESSORIES
& SPARE PARTS
AUSTRALIA
ARISIT PTY LIMITED
---

NEW ZEALAND
ARISIT PTY LIMITED
-
-

CONTENTS
AUS

Overall view
1. POSITION 1
2. POSITION 2
3. POSITION 3
4. POSITION 4
5. POSITION 5
6. DIVIDER D POSITION
7. POSITION 6
8. POSITION 7
9. GUIDES for the sliding racks
10. DRIPPING PAN
11. RACK shelf
12. DIVIDER shelf
13. Control panel
9
13
8
12
7
6
11
10
2
1
CONTENTS
Control panel
AUS
14. SELECTOR knob

15. CONTROL PANEL POWER icon
16. DISPLAY
17. THERMOSTAT / TIMER knob
18. START / STOP
19. MINUTE MINDER icon
20. TIMER icon
21. DOOR / CONTROL PANEL LOCK icon
22. FAST CLEAN icon
23. SELECT CAVITY icon
24. LIGHT icon
14
15
16
17
24 23 22 21 20 19
18
Display
25. SMALL CAVITY icon
26. CAVITY TEMPERATURE display
27. CONTROL PANEL LOCK indicator
28. TIME display
29. DURATION icon
30. END OF COOKING icon
31. CLOCK icon
32. MINUTE MINDER icon
33. DOOR LOCK indicator
34. CAVITY PREHEATING / RESIDUAL HEAT indicator
35. MAIN CAVITY icon
36. MODE icons
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
36
35
34
33
32
5
CONTENTS
Ventilation
Installation
! Please keep this instruction booklet in a safe place for
future reference. If the appliance is sold, given away or
moved, please make sure the booklet is also passed on to
the new owners so that they may benefit from the advice
contained within it.
To ensure adequate ventilation, the

back panel of the cabinet must be
removed. It is advisable to install
the oven so that it rests on two
strips of wood, or on a completely
flat surface with an opening of at
least 45 x 560 mm (see diagrams).
! Please read this instruction manual carefully: it contains

important information concerning the safe operation,
installation and maintenance of the appliance.
Positioning
! Do not let children play with the packaging material; it

should be disposed of in accordance with local separated
waste collection standards (see Precautions and tips).
! The appliance must be installed by a qualified professional
in accordance with the instructions provided. Incorrect
installation may damage property or cause harm to people
or animals.
Built-in appliances
Use an appropriate cabinet to ensure that the appliance
operates properly:
The panels adjacent to the oven must be made of heatresistant material.
560
mm
min. 20 mm
45 m
m.
FAN ASSISTED
MODE
min. 45 mm

Centring and fixing
Secure the appliance to the cabinet:
Open the oven door.
Slide out the side gaskets at the top until the 2 fixing
holes are exposed;
Fix the oven to the cabinet using the 2 wood screws.
Reposition the 2 gaskets.
Cabinets with a veneer exterior must be assembled with

glues which can withstand temperatures of up to 100C.
20 mm.
.
mm
550 in.
m
570 mm.
m
45 m
595
mm
560
mm
575-585 mm.
To install the oven under the counter (see diagram) or

in a kitchen unit, the cabinet must have the following
dimensions:
590 mm.
AUS
! All parts which ensure the safe operation of the appliance

must not be removable without the aid of a tool.
.
mm
550
.
m
5 m .*
20, mm
5
,
2
2
* Stainless steel models only

! The appliance must not come into contact with electrical
parts once it has been installed.
The indications for consumption given on the data plate
have been calculated for this type of installation.
CONTENTS
Electrical Connection
The electrical connection to the mains must be made on
the appliance. The power voltage and frequency are as
indicated on the rating plate.
! THIS APPLIANCE MUST BE EARTHED.
Fitting the power supply cable
1. Open the terminal board

by inserting a screwdriver
into the side tabs of the
cover. Use the screwdriver
as a lever by pushing it
down to open the cover (see
diagram)
.
2. Install the power supply
cable by loosening the
cable clamp screw and the
three wire contact screws
.
L-NConnect the wires to the
corresponding terminals:
the Blue wire to the terminal
marked (N), the Brown wire
to the terminal marked (L)
and the Yellow/Green wire
to the terminal marked
(see diagram).
3. Secure the cable by fastening the clamp screw.

4. Close the cover of the terminal board.
Connecting the power supply cable to the electricity
mains
Install a standardised plug corresponding to the load
indicated on the data plate (see opposite).
The appliance must be directly connected to the mains using
an omnipolar switch with a minimum contact opening of 3
mm installed between the appliance and the mains. The
switch must be suitable for the charge indicated and must
comply with current electrical regulations (the earthing wire
must not be interrupted by the switch). The supply cable
must be positioned so that it does not come into contact
with temperatures higher than 50C at any point (the back
panel of the oven, for example).
connection has been performed and that it is fully compliant
with safety regulations.
Before connecting the appliance to the power supply, make
sure that:
The appliance is earthed and the plug is compliant with
the law;
The socket can withstand the maximum power of the
appliance, which is indicated on the data plate (see
below);
The voltage is in the range between the values indicated

on the data plate (see below);
The socket is compatible with the plug of the appliance.
If the socket is incompatible with the plug, ask an
authorised technician to replace it. Do not use extension
cords or multiple sockets.
AUS
!Once the appliance has been installed, the power supply

cable and the electrical socket must be easily accessible.
! The cable must be checked regularly and replaced by
authorised technicians only (see Assistance).
! The manufacturer declines any liability should
these safety measures not be observed.
APPLIANCE SPECIFICATIONS
width 43.5 cm
Dimensions*
height 41 cm
depth 41 cm
Volume*
74 l
width 45.6 cm
Dimensions**
height 41 cm
depth 41 cm
Volume**
77 l
voltage: 220 - 240 V ~50 Hz
Electrical
maximum power absorbed
connections
3400 W (see data plate)
Directive 2002/40/EC on the
label of electric ovens.
Standard EN 50304
ENERGY LABEL
Declared energy consumption

for Forced convection
Class heating mode:
ECO
This appliance conforms to the
following European Economic
Community directives:
2006/95/EEC dated 12/12/06
(Low Voltage) and subsequent
amendments 2004/108/EEC
dated 15/12/04
(Electromagnetic
Compatibility) and subsequent
amendments - 93/68/EEC
dated 22/07/93 and
subsequent amendments.
2012/19/EEC and subsequent
amendments.
1275/2008 Stand-by/off mode

* Only for models with drawn rails.
** Only for models with wire rails.
CONTENTS
AUS
Oven structure
The OPEN SPACE oven has a capacity of 70 litres and
offers users the option of cooking on 4 shelves at the same
time or cooking large quantities which would not necessarily
be possible in a traditional oven.
The 56 universal (Creation) and automatic (Success)
cooking modes guarantee perfect results every time,
regardless of the dish you are cooking.
OPEN SPACE also offers maximum comfort for all
requirements, with 4 different operating options: the oven
is one large compartment but can be divided into separate
spaces of various sizes, each with its own independent
temperature and duration controls.
This is made possible thanks to the heat-insulating

DIVIDER, which divides the whole ExtraLarge Space into
two different-sized spaces: the Main Space and the Small
Space.
The two Main and Small Space compartments may be used
at the same time to cook different dishes more quickly,
or they may be used separately so that only the space
necessary is used.
When the two compartments are used at the same time,
the cooking temperature of each may be adjusted to a
value between 30 and 300. There may be a difference in
temperature of 100 between the two zones, which means it
is possible to cook very different dishes without any flavours
or aromas intermingling.
Main and Small Space: simultaneous operation
ExtraLarge Space: cooking on 4 shelf levels
RACK
EXTRALARGE
SPACE
RACK
RACK
DRIPPING PAN
Cooking using the Small Space only

SMALL
SPACE
RACK or DRIPPING PAN

Divider "D"
(fixed position)
MAIN
SPACE
The table below lists the possible temperature values which

may be set. The intelligent display will guide you through
SMALL
SPACE
MAIN
SPACE
RACK or DRIPPING PAN

Divider "D" (fixed position)
RACK (cooking on 3 shelves)
DRIPPING PAN
(cooking on 3 shelves)
Cooking using the Main Space only: cooking on 3 shelf levels

SMALL
SPACE
MAIN
SPACE
Divider "D" (fixed position)

DRIPPING PAN
(cooking on 3 shelves)
the correct procedure used to adjust the temperature of

the two cavities.
Temperature in the first cavity

(Main or Small Space)
Between 40C and 150C
Temperature in the second cavity

(Small or Main Space)
The temperature difference in relation to the first recess
selected is no greater than 50C
For example: if you set one recess to 90C,
you may set a value of between 40C (90C-50C) and 140C (90C+50C) for the other.
you may set a value of between 110C (180C-70C) and 250C (180C+70C) for the other.
you may set a value of between 110C (210C-100C) and 250C (maximum temperature setting) for the other.
CONTENTS
for at least 2 seconds.
Start-up and use

WARNING! The oven is
provided with a stop system
to extract the racks and
prevent them from coming
out of the oven (1).
As shown in the drawing,
to extract them completely,
simply lift the racks, holding
them on the front part, and
AUS
! When cleaning the appliance, the door lock may be closed

accidentally (there is an exposed spring). If this happens,
reopen it by turning the door lock upwards (see figure).
KO
OK
pull (2).
! The first time you use your appliance, heat the empty oven
with its door closed at its maximum temperature for at least
half an hour. Make sure that the room is well ventilated
before switching the oven off and opening the oven door.
The appliance may emit a slightly unpleasant odour caused
by protective substances used during the manufacturing
process burning away.
! To make the setting process easier, keep the knob in
or position: this will increase the scrolling speed of the
numbers on the display.
! Each setting will automatically be stored in the appliance
memory after 10 seconds.
! During operation, we recommend the removal of any
crockery or delicate foodstuffs from the cavities not being
used.
Some models are equipped with a system of hinges which
allows the door to close slowly, without the user having to
follow the movement through with his/her hand. To use the
system correctly, before closing the door:
Open the door fully.
Do not force the closing movement manually.
! Once cooking has begun, before the DIVIDER is removed,
the oven must be switched off using the
icon.
! Every time the oven is switched on it is set to the

CREATION cooking mode.
! The touch controls cannot be activated if the user is
wearing gloves.
! In order to optimise the cooking performance, when
starting the selected function, product settings will be
applied that could cause a delayed start of the fan and
heating elements.
Control panel lock
! The control panel can be locked while the oven is off, once
cooking has started or finished and during programming.
To lock the oven controls, press and hold the
icon for at
least 2 seconds. A buzzer will sound and the display shows
the key symbol nO. The
and
icons, when lit,
indicate lock function activation.
To deactivate the lock, press and hold the
icon again
Setting the clock
! The clock can only be set when the oven is switched off. If
the oven is in standby mode, pressing the
icon once will
display the current time setting. Press it again to set the time.
After connection to the power supply network or after
a blackout, the
icon and the digits on the TIME display
will flash for 10 seconds.
To set the clock:
1. Press the
icon.
2. Turn the TIMER knob towards and to adjust the
hour value.
3. Once you have reached the correct hour value, press
the
icon.
4. Repeat the above process to set the minutes.
If a blackout occurs, it will be necessary to reset the clock.
If the
icon flashes on the display, this indicates that the
clock has not been set correctly.
Setting the minute minder
! The minute minder may be set regardless of whether the

oven is switched on or off. It does not switch the oven on or off.
When the set time has elapsed, the timer emits a buzzer
that will automatically stop after 30 seconds or when any
active button on the control panel is pressed.
To adjust the timer proceed as follows:
icon.
1. Press the
2. Turn the TIMER knob towards and to adjust the
hour value.
3. Once you have reached the desired value, press the
icon again.
The lit
symbol will remind you that the minute minder
is on. The DISPLAY will show the countdown.
To cancel the minute minder, press the
the knob to set the time to 00:00. Press the
icon and use

icon again.
The
icon will switch off to indicate that the minute minder
has been disabled.
Cooling ventilation
In order to cool down the external temperature of the oven,
a cooling fan blows a stream of air between the control
9
CONTENTS
AUS
panel and the oven door, as well as towards the bottom of

the oven door.At the beginning of the FAST CLEAN mode,
the cooling fan operates at low speed.
! Once the cooking has been completed, the cooling fan
remains on until the oven has cooled down sufficiently.
Oven light
The light comes on when the oven door is opened or when
a cooking mode starts.
When models featuring LED INSIDE technology begin
cooking, the LEDs on the door light up for improved
illumination of all cooking levels.
The
button can be used to switch on the light at any time.
Residual heat indicators

The appliance is fitted with a residual heat indicator. When
the oven is off, the residual heat light on the display comes
on to indicate high temperatures inside the oven cavity. The
indicator light switches off when the inside of the oven has
cooled down.
Restoring the factory settings

The oven factory settings can be restored to reset all
selections made by the user (clock and customised
durations). To carry out a reset, switch off the oven, then
keep the SELECTOR knob turned while pressing the
icon for 6 seconds. Once the restore procedure is complete,
icon is pressed,
a buzzer will sound. The first time the
the oven will behave as if it is being switched on for the
first time.
Standby
This product complies with the requirements of the latest
European Directive on the limitation of power consumption
in standby mode. If no buttons are pressed for 30 minutes
and the control panel/door lock has not been activated,
the appliance automatically reverts to standby mode. The
standby mode is visualised by the high luminosity Watch
Icon. As soon as interaction with the machine resumes,
system operation is restored.
Cooking modes
! To guarantee perfectly soft or crispy food, the oven
releases water contained within the food in the form of
steam. This means it is possible to achieve optimal cooking
results for all dishes.
! Every time the oven is switched on, it suggests the first
CREATION cooking mode.
! Never put objects directly on the bottom of the oven; this
will prevent the enamel coating from being damaged.
! Always place cookware on the rack(s) provided.
ExtraLarge Space
! Do not use position D for racks.
10
Starting the oven

icon. The
1. Switch the control panel on by pressing the
appliance buzzer sounds three times (ascending) and all
buttons light up in sequence.
2. Select the desired cooking mode by turning the
SELECTOR knob. The TEMPERATURE display shows:
- the temperature associated with the mode, if programming
manually;
- Auto, if programming is automatic.
The TIME display shows:
- the current time, if programming manually;
- the duration, if programming is automatic.
icon to begin cooking.
3. Press the
4. The oven will begin its preheating stage: the preheating
light flashes.
5. When the preheating process has finished, a buzzer
sounds and the preheating indicator light shows that this
stage has been completed: the food can then be placed
in the oven.
6. During cooking it is always possible to:
- modify the temperature by turning the THERMOSTAT knob
(manual modes only);
- set the duration of a cooking mode (see Cooking Modes);
icon to stop cooking. In this case the
- press the
appliance stores the temperature modified previously in its
memory (manual modes only);
icon for 3 seconds.
- switch off the oven by pressing the
7. In case of a blackout, if the oven was already operating,
an automatic system within the appliance will reactivate
the cooking mode from where it was interrupted as long
as the temperature did not drop below a certain level.
Programmed cooking modes which have not yet started will
not be restored and must be reprogrammed (for example:
a cooking mode has been programmed to start at 20:30. At
19:30 a blackout occurs. When the power supply is restored,
the mode will have to be reprogrammed).
! There is no preheating stage for the BARBECUE mode.
! The oven will begin its preheating phase after 2 seconds
from selecting the desired cycle
CREATION cooking modes
! All cooking modes have a default cooking temperature
which may be adjusted manually to a value between 30C
and 250C as desired (300C for GRILL mode). CREATION
cooking modes include all manual programmes.
The oven controls all essential aspects of each of these
cooking modes and makes it easier for you to create
the perfect dish, from the simplest recipe to the most
sophisticated culinary delights: the temperature, heat
source, humidity and fan assisted operation are all
controlled automatically.
This chapter was written with the help of our very own
culinary expert. We invite you to follow his advice so you can
benefit from his experience and perfect your cooking skills.
The recommended cooking modes, temperatures and
oven shelf heights reflect our experts own experience in
CONTENTS
the kitchen and will help you achieve the very best results.
The table below specifies whether it is best to pre-heat your
oven or not for each CREATION cooking mode. Observing
these suggestions will guarantee perfect results.
If you wish to place food in a preheated oven, wait for the
preheating stage to be completed (this will be signalled by
a series of beeps).
The temperature is set automatically, according to the
cooking mode selected; however, you may adjust it to
suit your recipe.
You can also set a cooking duration with an immediate or
delayed start.
ECO mode
The rear heating element and the fan are switched on,
thus guaranteeing the distribution of heat in a delicate and
uniform manner throughout the entire oven. This energy
saving mode is suitable for cooking small dishes, reheating
meat and finishing off cooking processes.
Rotisserie spit*
To operate the rotisserie function (see diagram) proceed
as follows:
1. Place the dripping pan in
position 1.
2. Place the rotisserie
support in position 3 and
insert the spit in the hole
provided on the back panel
of the oven.
3. Start the rotisserie
function by selecting the
MULTILEVEL mode
All heating elements and the fan are activated. Since the
heat remains constant throughout the oven, the air cooks
and browns food in a uniform manner. A maximum of two
racks may be used at the same time.
LOW TEMPERATURE modes
This type of cooking can be used for proving, defrosting,
preparing yoghurt, heating dishes at the required speed and
slow cooking at low temperatures. The temperature options
are: 40, 65 and 90C.
AUS
or
modes.
! When
mode is on, the rotisserie will stop if the door
is opened.
SUCCESS cooking modes
FAN GRILLING mode

The top heating element and the rotisserie spit (where
present) are activated and the fan begins to operate.
During part of the cycle the circular heating element is
also activated. This combination of features increases the
effectiveness of the unidirectional thermal radiation provided
by the heating elements through the forced circulation of
the air throughout the oven.
This helps prevent food from burning on the surface and
allows the heat to penetrate right into the food. Always cook
in this mode with the oven door closed.
GRILL mode
present) are activated. The high and direct temperature
of the grill is recommended for food which requires a high
surface temperature. Always cook in this mode with the oven
door closed (see Practical cooking advice).
FAST COOKING mode
Preheating is not necessary for this cooking mode. This mode
is particularly suitable for cooking pre-packed food quickly
(frozen or pre-cooked). The best results are achieved using
one cooking rack only.
PIZZA mode
The top and circular heating elements switch on and the fan
begins to operate. This combination heats the oven rapidly.
If you use more than one rack at a time, switch the position
of the dishes halfway through the cooking process.
! The temperature and cooking duration are preset values, guaranteeing a perfect result every time automatically. These values cannot be adjusted and use
the C.O.P. (Programmed Optimal Cooking) system. The
cooking cycle stops automatically and the oven indicates
when the dish is cooked. You may start cooking whether
the oven has been preheated or not. The cooking duration
can be customised according to personal tastes, modifying
it - before the start time - by 5/20 minutes depending on
the selected programme. Once cooking has begun, it is still
possible to modify its duration. If the value is modified before
cooking begins, it is stored in the appliance memory and
suggested again when that cooking mode is next used. If
the temperature inside the oven is higher than the suggested
value for the selected mode, the text Hot appears on the
TEMPERATURE display and it will not be possible to begin
cooking; wait for the oven to cool.
! When the cooking stage has been reached, the oven
buzzer sounds.
! Do not open the oven door as this will disrupt the cooking
time and temperature.
BEEF mode
Use this function to cook beef and pork. Place the food
inside the oven while it is still cold. The dish may also be
placed in a preheated oven.
* Only available in certain models
11
CONTENTS
AUS
DESSERTS mode
This function is ideal for cooking desserts which are made
using natural yeast, baking powder and desserts which
contain no yeast. Place the dish in the oven while it is still
cold. The dish may also be placed in a preheated oven.
and SMALL Space compartments separately or at the

same time.
icon will be enabled. The selected cavity alternates
The
every time the button is pressed. The MAIN cavity is
selected by default.
BREAD mode
Use this function to bake bread. To obtain the best results,
we recommend that you carefully observe the instructions
below:
Small Space
Follow the recipe.

Do not exceed the maximum weight of the dripping pan.
Remember to pour 100 g (1dl) of cold water into the
dripping pan, which should be placed in position 7.
The dough must be left to rise at room temperature for
1 1 hours (depending on the room temperature) or
until the dough has doubled in size.
SMALL Space cavity. The

icon will light up.
2. Follow the above instructions for the EXTRALARGE
cavity when carrying out the various adjustment and setting
procedures.
Recipe for BREAD:

1 dripping pan holding 1000 g max, lower level
2 dripping pans each holding 1000 g max, middle and
lower levels
GRILL mode
present) are activated. The high and direct temperature
of the grill is recommended for food which requires a high
surface temperature. Always cook in this mode with the oven
door closed (see Practical cooking advice).
Recipe for 1000 g of dough: 600 g flour, 360 g water, 11g

salt, 25 g fresh yeast (or 2 sachets of powder yeast)
Method:
Mix the flour and salt in a large bowl.
Dilute the yeast in lukewarm water (approximately 35
degrees).
Make a small well in the mound of flour.
Pour in the water and yeast mixture.
Knead the dough by stretching and folding it over itself
with the palm of your hand for 10 minutes until it has a
uniform consistency and is not too sticky.
Form the dough into a ball shape, place it in a large bowl
and cover it with transparent plastic wrap to prevent the
surface of the dough from drying out. Select the manual
LOW TEMPERATURE function on the oven and set the
temperature to 40C. Place the bowl inside and leave
the dough to rise for approximately 1 hour (the dough
should double in volume).
Cut the dough into equal sized loaves.
Place them in the dripping pan, on a sheet of baking
paper.
Dust the loaves with flour.
Make incisions on the loaves.
Place the food inside the oven while it is still cold.
Start the
BREAD cooking mode.
Once baked, leave the loaves on one of the grill racks
until they have cooled completely.
THE DIVIDER
Fit the DIVIDER to the DIVIDER shelf D using the pin,
with the arrows turned towards the rear part of the oven.
A buzzer will sound to confirm that the DIVIDER has been
fitted correctly; it will then be possible to use the two MAIN
Starting the oven

1. With the DIVIDER inserted, use the
icon to select the
Cooking modes
FAST COOKING mode

Preheating is not necessary for this cooking mode. This
mode is particularly suitable for cooking pre-packed
food quickly (frozen or pre-cooked). The best results are
achieved using one cooking rack only.
Main Space
Starting the oven
1. With the DIVIDER inserted, use the
icon to select the
SMALL Space cavity. The

icon will light up.
2. Follow the above instructions for the EXTRALARGE
cavity when carrying out the various adjustment and setting
procedures.
CREATION cooking modes
! All cooking modes have a default cooking temperature
which may be adjusted manually to a value between 30C
and 250C as desired (300C for GRILL mode). CREATION
cooking modes include all manual programmes.
The oven controls all essential aspects of each of these
cooking modes and makes it easier for you to create
the perfect dish, from the simplest recipe to the most
sophisticated culinary delights: the temperature, heat
source, humidity and fan assisted operation are all
controlled automatically.
This chapter was written with the help of our very own
culinary expert. We invite you to follow his advice so you can

12
CONTENTS
benefit from his experience and perfect your cooking skills.

The recommended cooking modes, temperatures and
oven shelf heights reflect our experts own experience in
the kitchen and will help you achieve the very best results.
The table below specifies whether it is best to pre-heat your
oven or not for each CREATION cooking mode. Observing
these suggestions will guarantee perfect results.
If you wish to place food in a preheated oven, wait for the
preheating stage to be completed (this will be signalled by
a series of beeps).
The temperature is set automatically, according to the
cooking mode selected; however, you may adjust it to
suit your recipe.
You can also set a cooking duration with an immediate or
delayed start.
MULTILEVEL mode
All heating elements and the fan are activated. Since the
heat remains constant throughout the oven, the air cooks and
browns food in a uniform manner. A maximum of two racks
may be used at the same time.
LOW TEMPERATURE modes
This type of cooking can be used for proving, defrosting,
preparing yoghurt, heating dishes at the required speed and
slow cooking at low temperatures. The temperature options
are: 40, 65 and 90C.
PIZZA mode
The top and circular heating elements switch on and the fan
begins to operate. This combination heats the oven rapidly.
If you use more than one rack at a time, switch the position
of the dishes halfway through the cooking process.
ECO mode
The rear heating element and the fan are switched on,
thus guaranteeing the distribution of heat in a delicate and
uniform manner throughout the entire oven. This energy
saving mode is suitable for cooking small dishes, reheating
meat and finishing off cooking processes.
SUCCESS cooking modes
! The temperature and cooking duration are preset values, guaranteeing a perfect result every time automatically. These values cannot be adjusted and use
the C.O.P. (Programmed Optimal Cooking) system. The
cooking cycle stops automatically and the oven indicates
when the dish is cooked. You may start cooking whether
the oven has been preheated or not. The cooking duration
can be customised according to personal tastes, modifying
it - before the start time - by 5/20 minutes depending on
the selected programme. Once cooking has begun, it is still
possible to modify its duration. If the value is modified before
cooking begins, it is stored in the appliance memory and
suggested again when that cooking mode is next used. If

the temperature inside the oven is higher than the suggested
value for the selected mode, the text Hot appears on the
TEMPERATURE display and it will not be possible to begin
cooking; wait for the oven to cool.
AUS
! When the cooking stage has been reached, the oven

buzzer sounds.
! Do not open the oven door as this will disrupt the cooking
time and temperature.
BEEF mode
Use this function to cook beef and pork. Place the food
inside the oven while it is still cold. The dish may also be
placed in a preheated oven.
DESSERTS mode
This function is ideal for cooking desserts which are made
using natural yeast, baking powder and desserts which
contain no yeast. Place the dish in the oven while it is still
cold. The dish may also be placed in a preheated oven.
Using the Small Space and Main Space at

the same time
! Simultaneous operation is only possible when using
CREATION cooking modes.
Starting the oven
For simultaneous use, simply start a cooking mode for both
cavities in succession.
The TEMPERATURE display shows the cooking parameters
for both cavities.
! Thanks to the high energy efficiency of the appliance, it
only takes around 15 minutes for the SMALL SPACE cavity
to preheat.
Programming cooking
! A cooking mode must be selected before programming

can take place.
Programming the cooking duration
icon until the
icon and the numerical
1. Press the
digits on the display begin to flash.
2. Turn the TIMER knob towards and to adjust the time
as desired; keep the knob in position to scroll through the
numbers more quickly and make the setting process easier.
3. Once you have reached the desired duration, press the
icon again.
4. Press the
icon to begin cooking.
5. When cooking has finished, END appears on the display
For example: it is 9:00 a.m. and a duration of 1 hour and
15 minutes is programmed. The programme will stop
automatically at 10:15 a.m.

13
CONTENTS
AUS
Setting the end time for a cooking mode

! A cooking duration must be set before the cooking end
time can be scheduled.
! For the delayed programming to work properly, the clock
should be set to the correct time.
Place the grill rack in position 3 or 4 and place

the food in the centre of the rack.
We recommend that the temperature is set to its
maximum level. The top heating element is regulated by
a thermostat and may not always operate constantly.
1. Follow steps 1 to 3 to set the duration as detailed above.
FAST COOKING
Use the dripping pan on shelf level 6.
When cooking frozen foods, always follow the instructions
on the packaging.
2. Press the
icon twice: the
digits on the display will begin to flash.
3. Turn the TIMER knob towards
and
to adjust the
cooking end time value.
4. Once you have reached the desired end time, press the
icon again. The TIME display will show the duration
and the cooking end time alternately.
5. Press the
icon to activate the programmed mode.

and
icons
light up alternately. In the time before cooking starts, the
TIME display shows the cooking end time and the cooking
duration alternately.
6. Once cooking has finished, END appears on the display
For example: it is 9:00 a.m. and a time of 1 hour and
15 minutes is programmed, while the end time is set to
12:30. The programme will start automatically at 11:15
a.m.
To cancel programming press the
icon.

MULTILEVEL
Use positions 1, 3, 5 and 6.
Place the dripping pan at the bottom and the rack at the
top.
When cooking pizzas or focaccia breads, use a
lightweight aluminium tray with a maximum diameter
of 30 cm, placing it on top of the rack supplied. If the
pizza has a lot of toppings, we recommend adding the
mozzarella cheese to the top of the pizza halfway through
the cooking process. During the cooking process, it is
advisable to change the order of the shelves.
Use positions 2 and 4, placing the food which requires
more heat on 2.
Place the dripping pan on the bottom and the rack on
top.
GRILL
Preheat the oven for 5 minutes.
Fit the DIVIDER to the DIVIDER rack D.
Keep the oven door closed when cooking in this mode.
Place the rack in position 7. Position the food in the centre
of the rack. Position the dripping pan on shelf level 6.
This function is recommended for: browning food, cooking
gratins, colouring meringues, making toasted sandwiches
and grilling small quantities of thin, lean meat.
We recommend that the power level is set to maximum.
The top heating element is regulated by a thermostat
and may not always operate constantly.
14
CONTENTS
Cooking advice table for ovens with an ExtraLarge Space cavity

Function
Food
Weight
(Kg)
Cook on
shelf no.
Shelf position
Dripping
pan
Creation
Multilevel*
Tarts
Cream puffs
Biscuits
Small pastries
Crme Caramel
(bain-marie)
Panettone
Cake
Sponge cake
1,5 -2
Roast
3 or 5
3
5
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
2 or 3
1 to 2
1
1
2 or 3
1 to 2
1
1
3 to 5
3
3
5
5
3 to 5
3
3
5
5
1
2
3
2 or 3
2
1
5
4
1
2
3
1
1
2
2 or 3
2
1
1 or 2
5
4
1
2
3
1
2 or 3
2
1
1***
2 or 3
1
1
1
1
1
1
5
Pizza*
Pizza/Focaccia
1
2
3
4
2 or 3
1 or 2
1
1
Low
temperature*
Rack 2
2 or 3
1 or 2
1
3
Kebabs
Fish fillets
Frozen potatoes
Grill*
Rack 1
1
2
3
4
Fast cooking*
Fan grilling*
Preheating
5
6
5
5
Roast meats
Gratin
Large roasting joint
Large game roasting joint
1
1
1
1
Beef ribs
Sausages
Pork ribs
Bacon
Proving/
Defrosting
White meringues
Meat/Fish
1
1
1
1
1
3***
3***
3***
3***
2
4
3
1
1
3 or 5
3
3
2***
3 or 4
1***
1***
5
5
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
190
180
180
180
25-30
35-45
40-50
45-55
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
190
190
190
190
25-35
25-35
30-40
30-40
180
180
180
180
15-25
15-25
20-30
20-30
Yes
Yes
Yes
200
200
200
30-40
35-45
40-50
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
170
170
170
160
160
160
35-45
35-45
40-50
45-60
60-75
60-75
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
190
190
190
160
30-35
35-40
40-45
90-240
No
No
No
210
200
230
20-25
15-20
25-30
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
220
220
220
220
15-25
20-30
25-35
30-40
No
No
No
No
2
2
4 or 5
5 or 7
5 or 7
5 or 7
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
3
3
AUS
Cooking
duration
(minutes)
Rack 3
4 or 5
5
4
2
Recommended
temperature
(C)
5
5
No
No
200
190
200
200
100%
100%
100%
100%
35-75
40-60
90-120
90-120
20-30
10-20
15-25
3-6
40
65
90
8-12 hours
90-180
Success
Bread
Bread (see recipe)
Beef
Roast
Cakes
Cakes
2
2
2
1,2-1,5
1
2
3
1
7**
7**
7**
1***
2
1
1
5
1
2
4
3
2
2
No
No
No
No
No
No
* The cooking times listed above are intended as guidelines only and may be modified according to personal tastes.
Oven preheating times are set as standard and may not be modified manually.
** As stated in the recipe, pour 100 g water into the dripping pan in position 7.
*** Use the dripping pan to collect any oil or fat produced as a result of the cooking process.
! ECO cooking mode: This energy saving mode takes longer but saves energy, and is suitable for cooking dishes
such as fish fillets, small pastries and vegetables. It is also ideal for reheating meat and finishing off cooking
processes.
Cooking advice table for the Small Space feature

Function
Fast cooking*
Grill*
Food
Fish fillets
Meat fillets
Frozen pizza
Frozen prepared foods
Toast
Bacon
Pork steaks
Weight
(Kg)
Cook on
shelf
Shelf position
no.
Dripping
pan
1
1
1
1
6
6
6
6
1
1
1
6**
6**
Rack 1
6
7
7
Preheating
Recommended
temperature
(C)
Cooking
duration
(minutes)
Divider
D
D
D
D
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
160-180
180-200
20-30
30-40
D
D
D
Yes
Yes
Yes
100%
100%
100%
3-5
3-6
15-25
* The cooking times listed above are intended as guidelines only and may be modified according to
personal tastes. Oven preheating times are set as standard and may not be modified manually.
** Use the dripping pan to collect any oil or fat produced as a result of the cooking process.
15
CONTENTS
AUS
Cooking advice table for the Main Space feature

Function
Food
Weight
(Kg)
Cook on
shelf no.
Shelf position
Dripping
pan
Creation
1
2
2
1
1
2
1
2
2
1
2
1
1
2
2
1
Crme Caramel
(bain-marie)
Cake
Sponge cake
Pizza*
Pizza/Focaccia
Low
temperature*
Proving/
Defrosting
White meringues
Meat/Fish
Multilevel*
Tarts
Cream puffs
Biscuits
Small pastries
Preheating
Rack 1
Recommended
temperature
(C)
Cooking
duration
(minutes)
Divider
D
D
Yes
Yes
200
200
30-40
35-45
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
190
190
25-35
25-35
D
D
D
D
D
D
Yes
Yes
180
180
200
200
15-25
15-25
30-40
35-45
Yes
170
35-45
Yes
160
60-75
1
2
2
1
D
D
Yes
Yes
190
190
30-35
35-40
1
2
2 or 3
1 or 2
3 or 5
D
D
Yes
Yes
220
220
15-25
20-30
No
40
D
D
No
No
65
90
3
3
2
2
1
1
3
3
8-12 hours
90-180
Success
Beef
Roast
Cakes
Cakes
1,2-1,5
1**
1
2
2
1
No
D
D
No
No
* The cooking times listed above are intended as guidelines only and may be modified according to personal
tastes. Oven preheating times are set as standard and may not be modified manually.
! ECO cooking mode : This energy saving mode takes longer but saves energy, and is suitable for cooking
dishes such as fish fillets, small pastries and vegetables. It is also ideal for reheating meat and finishing off
cooking processes.
Cooking advice table for using the Small Space and Main Space at the same time
Main Space
Function
Food
Weight
(kg)
Pizza*
Rack position
Preheating
Recommended
temperature
(C)
Cooking
duration
(minutes)
no.
Dripping
pan
1
2
2
1
D
D
Yes
Yes
200
200
30-40
35-45
Biscuits
1
2
2
1
D
D
Yes
Yes
Small pastries
1
2
2
1
D
D
Yes
Yes
180
180
200
200
15-25
15-25
30-40
35-45
Crme Caramel
(bain-marie)
Yes
170
35-45
Cake
Yes
160
60-75
Pizza (see recipe)
1
2
2 or 3
1 or 2
D
D
Yes
Yes
220
220
15-25
20-30
Creation
Multilevel*
Cook on
shelf
Tarts
Rack 1
Divider
3 or 5
Small Space
Function
Fast cooking*
Grill*
Food
Weight
(kg)
Cook on
shelf
Shelf position
no.
Dripping
pan
Fish fillets
Meat fillets
Frozen pizza
Frozen prepared foods
1
1
1
1
6
6
6
6
Pork steaks
6**
Rack 1
Preheating
Recommended
temperature
(C)
Cooking
duration
(minutes)
Divider
D
D
D
D
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
160-180
180-200
Yes
100%
20-30
30-40
15-25
* The cooking times listed above are intended as guidelines only and may be modified according to
personal tastes. Oven preheating times are set as standard and may not be modified manually.
16
CONTENTS

! This appliance has been designed and manufactured
in compliance with international safety standards. The
following warnings are provided for safety reasons and
must be read carefully.
General safety
The appliance was designed for domestic use inside the
home and is not intended for commercial or industrial use.
The appliance must not be installed outdoors, even in
covered areas. It is extremely dangerous to leave the
appliance exposed to rain and storms.
When moving or positioning the appliance, always use
the handles provided on the sides of the oven.
Do not touch the appliance while barefoot or with wet or
damp hands and feet.
The appliance must be used by adults only for
the preparation of food, in accordance with the
instructions provided in this booklet. Any other
use of the appliance (e.g. for heating the room)
constitutes improper use and is dangerous. The
manufacturer may not be held responsible for any
damage caused as a result of improper, incorrect
and unreasonable use of the appliance.
Do not touch the heating elements or certain parts
of the oven door when the appliance is in use; these
parts become extremely hot. Keep children well away
from the appliance.
Make sure that the power supply cables of other electrical
appliances do not come into contact with the hot parts of
the oven.
The ventilation and heat dispersal openings must never
be obstructed.
Always grip the oven door handle in the centre: the ends
may be hot.
Always use oven gloves when placing cookware in the
oven or when removing it.
Do not use aluminium foil to line the bottom of the oven.
Do not place flammable materials in the oven: if the
appliance is switched on accidentally, the materials could
catch fire.
Always make sure the knobs are in the / position
when the appliance is not in use.
When unplugging the appliance, always pull the plug
from the mains socket; do not pull on the cable.
Do not perform any cleaning or maintenance work without
having disconnected the appliance from the electricity
mains.
If the event of malfunctions, under no circumstances
should you attempt to perform the repairs yourself.
Contact an authorised Service Centre (see Assistance).
Do not rest objects on the open oven door.
The appliance should not be operated by people (including
children) with reduced physical, sensory or mental
capacities, by inexperienced individuals or by anyone
who is not familiar with the product. These individuals
should, at the very least, be supervised by someone who
assumes responsibility for their safety or receive preliminary
instructions relating to the operation of the appliance.
The appliance is not intended to be operated by

means of an external timer or separate remotecontrol system.
AUS
Disposal
When disposing of packaging material: observe local
legislation so that the packaging may be reused.
The European Directive 2012/19/EEC on Waste
Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE), requires
that old household electrical appliances must not
be disposed of in the normal unsorted municipal
waste stream. Old appliances must be collected
separately in order to optimise the recovery and
recycling of the materials they contain and reduce
the impact on human health and the environment.
The crossed out wheeled bin symbol on the product
reminds you of your obligation, that when you dispose
of the appliance it must be separately collected.
Consumers should contact their local authority or retailer
for information concerning the correct disposal of their
old appliance.
Respecting and conserving the environment

You can help to reduce the peak load of the electricity
supply network companies by using the oven in the
hours between late afternoon and the early hours of
the morning. The cooking mode programming options,
the delayed cooking mode (see Cooking modes) and
delayed automatic cleaning mode (see Care and
Maintenance) in particular, enable the user to organise
their time efficiently.
Always keep the oven door closed when using the GRILL
and FAN GRILLING modes: this will achieve improved
results while saving energy (approximately 10%).
Check the door seals regularly and wipe them clean
to ensure they are free of debris so that they adhere
properly to the door, thus avoiding the dispersal of heat.
! This product complies with the requirements of the latest
European Directive on the limitation of power consumption
of the standby mode.

Disconnect your appliance from the electricity supply before
carrying out any work on it.

Slight differences in colour on the front of the oven are due
to the different materials used, i.e. glass, plastic or metal.
Any shady areas resembling grooves on the oven door
glass are caused by reflections from the oven light.
The enamel is branded at very high temperatures. This
process may cause colour variations. This is normal and
will not affect appliance operation in any way. The thin
edges of the sheet metal cannot be entirely enamelled
and may therefore appear to be unfinished. This will not
affect the rust protection.
17
CONTENTS
AUS
The stainless steel or enamel-coated external parts and

the rubber seals may be cleaned using a sponge that
has been soaked in lukewarm water and neutral soap.
Use specialised products for the removal of stubborn
stains. After cleaning, rinse and dry thoroughly. Do not
use abrasive powders or corrosive substances.
The inside of the oven should ideally be cleaned after
each use, while it is still lukewarm. Use hot water and
detergent, then rinse well and dry with a soft cloth. Do
not use abrasive products.
All accessories - with the exception of the sliding racks
- can be washed like everyday crockery, and are even
dishwasher safe.
We recommend that detergents are not sprayed directly
onto the control panel, but that a sponge is used instead.
! Never use steam cleaners or pressure cleaners on the
appliance.

Lamp
Holder
compartment
Lamp
Glass cover
! Do not touch the light bulb directly with your hands.

! Do not use the oven lamp as/for ambient lighting.
Sliding rack kit assembly

!The door of LED INSIDE models cannot be removed.
Clean the glass part of the oven door using a sponge and
a non-abrasive cleaning product, then dry thoroughly with a
soft cloth. Do not use rough abrasive material or sharp metal
scrapers as these could scratch the surface and cause the
glass to crack. For more thorough cleaning purposes, the
oven door may be removed:
1. Open the oven door fully (see diagram).
2. Use a screwdriver to lift up and turn the small levers F
located on the two hinges (see diagram).
Left
guide rail
Right guide
rail
B
F
To replace the oven light

bulb:
1. Remove the glass cover
of the lamp-holder.
2. Remove the light bulb and
replace it with a similar one:
halogen lamp voltage 230 V,
wattage 25 W, cap G 9.
3. Replace the glass cover
(see diagram).
C o Dire
f e ct
xt ion
ra
ct
io
n
To assemble the sliding

racks:
1. Remove the two frames,
lifting them away from the
spacers A (see figure).
2. Choose which shelf to use

with the sliding rack. Paying
attention to the direction in
which the sliding rack is to
be extracted, position joint B
and then joint C on the
frame.

3. Grip the door on the two outer
sides and close it approximately
half way. Pull the door towards you,
lifting it out of its slot (see diagram).
To replace the door, reverse this
sequence.
Inspecting the seals

Check the door seals around the oven regularly. If the seals
are damaged, please contact your nearest Service Centre
(see Assistance). We recommend that the oven is not used
until the seals have been replaced.
18
3. Secure the two frames

with the guide rails using the
holes provided on the oven
walls (see diagram). The
holes for the left frame are
situated at the top, while the
holes for the right frame are
at the bottom.
4. Finally, fit the frames on
the spacers A.
! Do not place the sliding racks in position 5.
CONTENTS
Automatic cleaning with the FAST CLEAN

function
With the FAST CLEAN mode, the internal temperature of the
oven reaches 500C. The pyrolytic cycle is activated, burning
away food and grime residues. Dirt is literally incinerated.
Keep children away from the appliance during the automatic
cleaning cycle as surfaces may become very hot. Particles
may ignite inside the oven as a result of the combustion
process. There is no cause for concern: this process is both
normal and hazard-free.
Before initiating the FAST CLEAN mode:
clean the oven door;
remove large or coarse food residues from the inside of
the oven using a damp sponge. Do not use detergents;
remove all accessories and the sliding rack kit (where
present);
do not place tea towels or pot holders over the oven
handle.
! If the oven is too hot, the pyrolytic cycle may not start.
Wait for the oven to cool down.
! The programme may only be started once the oven door
has been closed.
The desired Fast Clean mode will be confirmed and started
automatically if the CLOCK icon button is not pressed within
10 seconds from selecting the cooking time
To activate the Fast Clean programme:
1. Switch the control panel on by pressing the
icon.
2. Press the
icon; the display will show the text Piro,
nor and the default duration of 1:30 h (normal cycle)
alternately.
3. Press the
icon, then turn the TIMER knob to adjust
the default cleaning level. There are 3 different levels to
choose from, each with a pre-set duration which cannot
be modified:
1. Economy (ECO): turn the knob towards -. Duration 1
hour.
2. Normal (NOR): initial level. Duration 1 hour and 30
minutes.
3. Intensive (INT): turn the knob towards +. Duration 2
hours.
4. Press the
icon to confirm.
5. Press the
icon to begin the cleaning cycle.
pressing the
icon cancels the cleaning cycle at any
time;
if a malfunction occurs, the heating elements will be
switched off;
once the oven door has been locked, you cannot change
the duration and end time settings.
AUS
Programming the automatic cleaning end time

1. Press the
icon twice: the
digits on the display will begin to flash.
2. Turn the TIMER knob towards
and
to adjust the
cleaning end time value.
3. Once you have reached the desired end time, press
the
icon again. The display will show the duration, the
cleaning end time and the set cleaning level alternately.
4. Press the
icon to activate the programmed mode.

and
buttons
are illuminated.
5. Once cleaning has finished, END appears on the display
For example: it is 9:00 a.m. and the Economy (ECO)
FAST CLEAN level has been selected, with the default
duration of 1 hour. 12:30 is scheduled as the end time.
The programme will start automatically at 11:30 a.m.
To cancel programming press the
icon.
Once the automatic cleaning cycle is over

Before you can open the oven door, you will have to wait
for the
icon to switch off: this indicates the oven
temperature has dropped to an acceptable level. You will
notice some white dust deposits on the bottom and the sides
of your oven; remove these deposits with a damp sponge
once the oven has cooled down completely. Alternatively,
you can make use of the already heated oven, in which
case it is not necessary to remove the deposits, they are
completely harmless and will not affect your food in any way.
An end time for the FAST CLEAN cycle (as for a normal
cooking cycle) may be programmed (see Programming the
automatic cleaning end time).
Safety devices
the door locks automatically as soon as the temperature
reaches a high value; the
display;
icon lights up on the
19
CONTENTS
195102565.03
06/2013 - XEROX FABRIANO
NOTICE
AUS
GB
Do not place
or rest anything
on the open door
Make sure that the racks

and dripping pans have been
inserted fully before closing the door
Please read the manual

carefully for information
regarding the automatic
cleaning (pyrolytic) cycle
Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible cause
The Clock button and the

digits on the display flash.
The appliance has just been

Set the clock.
connected to the electricity mains
or there has been a blackout.
There has been a blackout.
Reprogram the cooking mode.
A programmed cooking mode

does not start.
Only the high luminosity
Clock button is lit.
An automatic mode has been
selected. Hot appears on the
display and cooking does not
start.
Fan-assisted cooking has been
selected and the food looks burnt.
20
Solution
The appliance is in standby mode Press any button to exit

standby mode.
The temperature inside the oven Wait for the oven to cool down.
is higher than the suggested
value for the selected mode.
Positions 1 and 5: the direct
heat could cause
temperature-sensitive
foods to burn.
We recommend switching
dripping pan positions halfway
through cooking.
CONTENTS
D Toilet & Bidet
CONTENTS
VENECIA
COLLECTION
BATHROOM
TOILETS
BASINS
MIXERS
SHOWERS
ACCESSORIES
CONTENTS
AFFORDABILITY
WITH
STYLE
TOILET SUITES
All Stylus toilet suites provide you peace of mind
and assurance of Stylus quality, reliability and
performance, and are backed by a complete
product warranty. The range includes a wall
faced suite, neat looking close coupled suites
and the traditional connector suites.
The Stylus Venecia range of bathroom

products are designed with your individual
needs in mind. With Stylus, emphasis is
on quality manufacturing and affordability.
From toilets and basins to taps and
showers, Stylus offers smart selections.
The neatly designed Venecia range of

toilet suites adds value to any bathroom.
WELS 4 star rated
Vitreous China cistern
Venecia Close Coupled Suite

(S or P trap available)
Venecia Wall Faced Close Coupled Suite

(Universal trap)
Venecia Connector Suite

(S or P trap available)
W45004SCW
W45004PCW
W45004SSC
W45004PSC
W45101WCW
W45100SC
W45304SCW
W45304PCW
W45304SSC
W45304PSC
S Trap - Std seat

P Trap - Std seat
S Trap - Soft Close seat
P Trap - Soft Close seat
Std seat
Soft Close seat
S Trap - Std seat

P Trap - Std seat
S Trap - Soft Close seat
P Trap - Soft Close seat
3
CONTENTS
VENECIA CLOSE COUPLED SUITE

The neatly designed Venecia toilet suites add a modern touch to any bathroom.
Chrome flush buttons standard
Bottom right fitted inlet valve
Fixing screws to pan included
Concealed trap, boxed rim
Optional pan screws available
Includes soft-close seat or standard hinge seat
Pan set out dimension S trap: 140mm recommended (85mm - 150mm)
Uniconnector included for set out from 85mm - 150mm
WELS 4 star rated, 4.5/3L
Specification
Product Type Wall Faced Toilets

Trap Type Universal Trap
P Trap Set Out - Min. (mm) 185
P Trap Set Out - Max. (mm) 185
S Trap Set Out - Min. (mm) 85
S Trap Set Out - Max. (mm) 150
WELS Star Rating 4
Product codes
W45004SCW Venecia Close Coupled Bottom Inlet S Trap Suite

W45004PCW Venecia Close Coupled Bottom Inlet P Trap Suite
W45004SSC Venecia Close Coupled Bottom Inlet S Trap SC Suite
W45004PSC Venecia Close Coupled Bottom Inlet P Trap SC Suite
Technical downloads available from http://www.stylus.com.au/products/toiletsuites/venecia/venecia-close-coupled-suite
CONTENTS
^ For full warranty and conditions please visit stylus.com.au
*T
hese products are not included in the WELS scheme and therefore are not star rated.
They are excluded from the scheme as the water they use is limited to the capacity of the
bath or washing machine.
The more
stars the more
water efficient
The more
stars the more
water efficient
The more
stars the more
water efficient
WATER
RATING
WATER
RATING
WATER
RATING
Licence No. 0001
Licence No. 0001
Licence No. 0001
litres per minute
litres per minute
litres per minute
For more information, call 13 14 16 or visit www.stylus.com.au

Copyright 2016. Caroma Industries Limited. ABN 35 000 189 499. All rights reserved. Material and design specifications subject to change without notice.
Plug and waste not included on Baths. Product colour reproduction is as near to actual product colour as production methods allow. Warning: Products in
this brochure are the subject of registered designs and patents. This brochure relates to products distributed in Australia only and some product, design or
specifications may differ in other countries.
CONTENTS
Coway BA 12 Bidet
Coways natural water BA 12 Bidet toilet seat operates without electricity using only
your household water pressure.
This environmentally friendly Bidet represents the best value available on the
market today while offering a sophisticated and modern design.
The Bidet installs in minutes; replacing your existing toilet seat, all parts are supplied.
This model Bidet includes an Air+ function and twin nozzles for hygienic use.
MODEL
Water
cleansing device
BA-12
Rear cleansing
1 minute, Max. 0.3gal/min (1.2/min),

Self-cleaning nozzle
Front cleansing
1 minute, Max. 0.3gal/min (1.2/min),

Self-cleaning nozzle
Water Pressure
Filtration
MF filter
Other functions
Air+ water stream
Control type
Dial control
Feed power
Feed water pressure
14.5 psi ~ 100 psi (0.1 Mpa ~ 0.7 Mpa)
Feed water temperature
Required flushing rate
Dimensions (W X D X H)
18.4 X 20.4 X 6.1 inch (464 X 518 X 156 mm)
Net weight
5.1 b (2.3 kg)
Remark
Warranty
All Bidets come with a Manufactures warranty that covers 100% replacement parts and labor for
12 months.
If your Coway bidet incurs a problem we request that you contact our seven day a week support
centre as most issues can be solved over the phone. If this is not the case we will arrange free
shipment to our service centre, where all repairs are carried out by a qualified technician. The
Coway bidet products are normally repaired the same day and once the repair and testing has
been carried out the Coway bidet is shipped back to you free of charge immediately.
Our Coway bidet range comes with guarantees that cannot be excluded under the Australian
Consumer Law. You are entitled to a replacement or refund for a major failure and for
compensation for any other reasonably foreseeable loss or damage. You are also entitled to have
the bidets repaired or replaced if the goods fail to be of acceptable quality and the failure does not
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
AP P E N D I X 1
DEFECTS PROFORMA LIST
CONTENTS
FINAL DEFECTS LIST
ITEMS TO BE RECTIFIED ON EXPIRATION OF DEFECTS

PERIOD
LIGHT & CO - ILLUMINATE
Lot No. _________
Owners Details
Builder: Pradstruct Pty Ltd QBCC 707218
Name:
Current address:
Mobile:
Home:
Work:
Reason for Purchase (please tick)
Investor
Owner Occupier
Preferred Method of Contact for

Written Correspondence (please tick
one only)
Email
Mail
Email Address:
Note: This is the method we will use to contact you in future
Tenants Details (If Applicable)

Managing Agent:
Rent Central Holdings
Other (please specify) ______________
Name/s:
Mobile:
Home:
Work:
Email Address:
SUBMIT TO:
Item Number
Attention: Sarah Armitage

Legal Contracts Administrator
Pradella Developments Pty Ltd
Po Box 3301, South Brisbane QLD 4101
Description
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Owners Signature:
Date: _________
CONTENTS
FINAL DEFECTS LIST
ITEMS TO BE RECTIFIED ON EXPIRATION OF DEFECTS

PERIOD
LIGHT & CO - RADIANCE
Lot No. _________
Owners Details
Builder: Pradstruct Pty Ltd QBCC 707218
Name:
Current address:
Mobile:
Home:
Work:
Reason for Purchase (please tick)
Investor
Owner Occupier
Preferred Method of Contact for

Written Correspondence (please tick
one only)
Email
Mail
Email Address:
Note: This is the method we will use to contact you in future
Tenants Details (If Applicable)

Managing Agent:
Rent Central Holdings
Other (please specify) ______________
Name/s:
Mobile:
Home:
Work:
Email Address:
SUBMIT TO:
Item Number
Attention: Sarah Armitage

Legal Contracts Administrator
Po Box 3301, South Brisbane QLD 4101
Description
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Owners Signature:
Date: _________
CONTENTS
AP P E N D I X 2
N AP I E R & B L AK E L E Y D E P R E C I AT I O N
SCHEDULE LETTER
CONTENTS
Property Depreciation
Kath Hemphill
Light & Co - Illuminate
khemphill@nbtax.com.au
West End QLD 4101
Congratulations on your
recent purchase and
weve got more good news!
As an investor at Light & Co - Illuminate, youre
now eligible for a property tax depreciation
schedule at an exclusive rate. Because of our
involvement with the development, NBtax, market leaders in property consultancy and taxation, are able to offer you a property tax depreciation schedule for your investment property
at a reduced rate of $385 ($350 + $35 GST)
which is 100% tax deductible. This special offer is
valid for 90 days from your settlement date.
What is property tax depreciation?
Property tax depreciation (or property allowances) are deductions
often overlooked by property investors. Claiming depreciation can
reduce your taxable income, cut your tax bill and put more cash back
in your pocket.
Deductions are based on two allowances:
1. Depreciating Assets: Capital Allowances (Division 40)
These are items that loose value more quickly such as carpet, lifts and
white goods. Many owners can claim up to 20% of the propertys
purchase price as depreciated assets.
2. Building Allowances: Capital Works (Division 43)
Depending on when your property was built, you may be eligible to claim
a deduction for part of the original construction and / or refurbishment costs.
How much can I claim?

This depends on a number of
factors, including purchase
date, the property type and
your financial situation. We find
many property investors have
been missing out on deductions
and the extra cash.
The tables adjacent provide an
example of the property tax
depreciation deductions on a
property and how much you
might be eligible to claim.
REGISTERED TAX AGENTS 56265006
1300 730 382

www.nbtax.com.au
Typical Analysis
Property Income
$520 pw
$27,040
Annual Estimate Costs
Annually
Management Fees
Insurance
$450
Rates
$1,850
Body Corporate
$1,950
SUB TOTAL
Estimated Interest Cost
$1,250
$5,500
First Year
$28,750
Total Investment Expense (Estimate only)
$34,250
Estimate based on 37% Marginal Rate

No
Investment
Without
Depreciation
With
Depreciation
$120,000
$120,000
$120,000
$27,040
$27,040
$147,040
$147,040
$34,250
$34,250
Personal Income
Property Income
Taxable Income
$120,000
Investment Expenses
1st Year Depreciation
$13,800
Taxable Income
Tax Due
$120,000
$112,790
$98,990
$32,347
$29,680
$24,573
Cash Savings
$5,107
Apartment Purchased 2015

Year
Division 40
Allowances
Division 43
Deductions
Annual
Total
$8,700
$5,100
$13,800
$7,800
$5,100
$12,900
$6,100
$5,100
$11,200
$4,900
$5,100
$10,000
$4,000
$5,100
$9,100
6+
$27,600
$179,100
$206,700
Cash Savings
$263,700
These figures are of a general nature, are not related to this development and
should not be applied or acted upon unless supported by our specialised advice.
The rates above do not include the Medicare Levy.
The estimates above must not be used for taxation purposes.
A claim will be dependant on the property owners tax position.
PROPERTY DEPRECIATION MARKET LEADERS SINCE 1985

CONTENTS
SYDNEY | MELBOURNE | BRISBANE | ADELAIDE | PERTH | SINGAPORE
Kath Hemphill
1300 730 382
www.nbtax.com.au
West End QLD 4101
Request your property tax depreciation schedule

There are two simple ways to order your property tax depreciation schedules
1. Visit us online at nbtax.com.au, click request now and use this campaign code:
LIGHT&COA
2. Complete the form below and email to khemphill@nbtax.com.au OR fax to 1300 730 384
When ordering your schedule, you will need some specific details about your property. To keep it simple, make sure you have your purchase
contract when completing the below fields or when you visit us online.
Our fees to prepare a detailed property depreciation schedule
Detailed Property Depreciation Report (issued electronically)
This schedule will be suitable for tax purposes
$350 + $35 GST = $385 Total^

Lump sum fee (valid for 90 days from settlement)
Your contact details

Name:
Phone No: (
Email:
Your investment property information for: Light & Co - Illuminate West End, QLD 4101 (REF: 4101057444 Illuminate)
Property Address:
(Please include your Lot and Unit number here if Applicable)
Name of purchaser:
Date of settlement:
Purchase price:
Stamp duty paid on transfer of land:
Land value (can be found on your rates notice):
Legal fees paid associated with purchase:
Do you require a furniture analysis:
Yes
No
Additional fee
$100 + GST
This is for owners who have furnished their investment
Contact details to arrange inspection if different from above:

Authorisation for Credit Card Payment:
Amount authorised to charge on card: $385 ($350 + $35 GST)* OR $495 ($450+ $45 GST)* for furniture analysis
Card Type: Mastercard / VISA
Cardholders Signature:
Card No:
Name to appear
on tax invoice:
Expiry Date:
Cardholders Contact No: (
CCV:
)
PLEASE CIRCLE
Date:
Bank Deposit Details:

Account Name: NAPIER & BLAKELEY PTY LTD
SWIFT CODE: WPACAU2SBRI
Description: Your first & last name
Branch (BSB): 034 000
Please submit confirmation of transfer along with this form
Account No: 381 291
The property tax depreciation schedule is suitable for use in compiling deductions for your tax return to the Australian Tax Office.
All property tax depreciation schedules are completed on a pre paid basis. Please complete and return this document via the submission details above.
Schedules are issued electronically. Should you require a hard copy further charges will apply. Please contact us for more information.
^Offer valid 90 days from date of settlement. Should this period have passed please contact us for a revised fee. Deduction of our fee does not signify completion of the
report and normal processing times will apply.
*Please note that when providing credit card details we will consider the job as prepaid and charge the card on receipt of details.
CONTENTS

Kath Hemphill
Light & Co - Radiance
1300 730 382
www.nbtax.com.au
West End QLD 4101
Congratulations on your
recent purchase and
weve got more good news!
As an investor at Light & Co - Radiance, youre
now eligible for a property tax depreciation
schedule at an exclusive rate. Because of our
involvement with the development, NBtax, market leaders in property consultancy and taxation, are able to offer you a property tax depreciation schedule for your investment property
at a reduced rate of $385 ($350 + $35 GST)
which is 100% tax deductible. This special offer is
valid for 90 days from your settlement date.
What is property tax depreciation?
Property tax depreciation (or property allowances) are deductions
often overlooked by property investors. Claiming depreciation can
reduce your taxable income, cut your tax bill and put more cash back
in your pocket.
Deductions are based on two allowances:
1. Depreciating Assets: Capital Allowances (Division 40)
These are items that loose value more quickly such as carpet, lifts and
white goods. Many owners can claim up to 20% of the propertys
purchase price as depreciated assets.
2. Building Allowances: Capital Works (Division 43)
Depending on when your property was built, you may be eligible to claim
a deduction for part of the original construction and / or refurbishment costs.
How much can I claim?

This depends on a number of
factors, including purchase
date, the property type and
your financial situation. We find
many property investors have
been missing out on deductions
and the extra cash.
The tables adjacent provide an
example of the property tax
depreciation deductions on a
property and how much you
might be eligible to claim.
Typical Analysis
Property Income
$520 pw
$27,040
Annual Estimate Costs
Annually
Management Fees
Insurance
$450
Rates
$1,850
Body Corporate
$1,950
SUB TOTAL
Estimated Interest Cost
$1,250
$5,500
First Year
$28,750
Total Investment Expense (Estimate only)
$34,250
Estimate based on 37% Marginal Rate

No
Investment
Without
Depreciation
With
Depreciation
$120,000
$120,000
$120,000
$27,040
$27,040
$147,040
$147,040
$34,250
$34,250
Personal Income
Property Income
Taxable Income
$120,000
Investment Expenses
1st Year Depreciation
$13,800
Taxable Income
Tax Due
$120,000
$112,790
$98,990
$32,347
$29,680
$24,573
Cash Savings
$5,107
Apartment Purchased 2015

Year
Division 40
Allowances
Division 43
Deductions
Annual
Total
$8,700
$5,100
$13,800
$7,800
$5,100
$12,900
$6,100
$5,100
$11,200
$4,900
$5,100
$10,000
$4,000
$5,100
$9,100
6+
$27,600
$179,100
$206,700
Cash Savings
$263,700
These figures are of a general nature, are not related to this development and
should not be applied or acted upon unless supported by our specialised advice.
The rates above do not include the Medicare Levy.
The estimates above must not be used for taxation purposes.
A claim will be dependant on the property owners tax position.

CONTENTS
Kath Hemphill
1300 730 382
www.nbtax.com.au
West End QLD 4101
Request your property tax depreciation schedule

There are two simple ways to order your property tax depreciation schedules
1. Visit us online at nbtax.com.au, click request now and use this campaign code:
LIGHT&COB
2. Complete the form below and email to khemphill@nbtax.com.au OR fax to 1300 730 384
When ordering your schedule, you will need some specific details about your property. To keep it simple, make sure you have your purchase
contract when completing the below fields or when you visit us online.
Our fees to prepare a detailed property depreciation schedule
Detailed Property Depreciation Report (issued electronically)
This schedule will be suitable for tax purposes
$350 + $35 GST = $385 Total^

Lump sum fee (valid for 90 days from settlement)
Your contact details

Name:
Phone No: (
Email:
Your investment property information for: Light & Co - Radiance West End, QLD 4101 (REF: 4101057444 Radiance)
Property Address:
(Please include your Lot and Unit number here if Applicable)
Name of purchaser:
Date of settlement:
Purchase price:
Stamp duty paid on transfer of land:
Land value (can be found on your rates notice):
Legal fees paid associated with purchase:
Do you require a furniture analysis:
Yes
No
Additional fee
$100 + GST
This is for owners who have furnished their investment
Contact details to arrange inspection if different from above:

Authorisation for Credit Card Payment:
Amount authorised to charge on card: $385 ($350 + $35 GST)* OR $495 ($450+ $45 GST)* for furniture analysis
Card Type: Mastercard / VISA
Cardholders Signature:
Card No:
Name to appear
on tax invoice:
Expiry Date:
Cardholders Contact No: (
CCV:
)
PLEASE CIRCLE
Date:
Bank Deposit Details:

Account Name: NAPIER & BLAKELEY PTY LTD
SWIFT CODE: WPACAU2SBRI
Description: Your first & last name
Branch (BSB): 034 000
Please submit confirmation of transfer along with this form
Account No: 381 291
The property tax depreciation schedule is suitable for use in compiling deductions for your tax return to the Australian Tax Office.
All property tax depreciation schedules are completed on a pre paid basis. Please complete and return this document via the submission details above.
Schedules are issued electronically. Should you require a hard copy further charges will apply. Please contact us for more information.
^Offer valid 90 days from date of settlement. Should this period have passed please contact us for a revised fee. Deduction of our fee does not signify completion of the
report and normal processing times will apply.
*Please note that when providing credit card details we will consider the job as prepaid and charge the card on receipt of details.
CONTENTS

AP P E N D I X 3
S I T E L AY O U T P L AN
CONTENTS
01
Pidgeon Beesley Corner Node
05
Porte Cochere
09
Internal Arcade
13
The Fountain Room
02
Pidgeon Close Link
06
Arc Driveway Entry
10
Plaza
14
Circular Shelter with seating
03
Gymnasium
07
Montague Beesley corner active forecourt
11
Multi Purpose Room
15
The Reservoir - Resort Pool
04
Beesley Street Riverwalk
08
Montague Collonade
12
The Pitch Lawn
16
The Spring - Leisure Pool
13
14
12
15
FUTURE
STAGE
16
CLOSE
09
ROAD
08
02
MONTAGUE
10
PIDGEON
11
03
FUTURE
STAGE
05
06
01
07
04
BEESLEY
STREET
0
10
20
LANDSCAPE MASTER PLAN
Unit 1, 36 Wyandra street, Newstead Q 4006

07 3852 5270
info@lat27.com.au
www.lat27.com.au
CONTENTS
AP P E N D I X 4
NMI SCHEDULE
CONTENTS
I L L U M I N AT E 3 2 1 M O N TAG U E R O AD ,
WEST END
UNIT
10101
10102
10103
NMI
31202845146
31202845154
31202845162
UNIT
10305
10306
10307
NMI
31202845600
31202845618
31202845624
UNIT
10509
10510
10511
NMI
31202846005
31202846013
31202846029
10104
10105
10106
10107
10108
10109
31202845179
31202845187
31202845195
31202845204
31202845212
31202845228
10308
10309
10310
10311
10312
10313
31202845632
31202845640
31202845658
31202845666
31202845673
31202845681
10512
10513
10514
10515
10516
10517
31202846037
31202846045
31202846053
31202846061
31202846078
31202846086
10110
10111
10112
10113
10114
10115
31202845236
31202845244
31202845252
31202845260
31202845277
31202845285
10314
10315
10316
10317
10318
10401
31202845699
31203030147
31202845717
31202845723
31202845731
31202845749
10518
31202846094
10116
10117
10118
10201
10202
10203
31202845293
31202845303
31202845311
31202845327
31202845335
31202845343
10402
10403
10404
10405
10406
10407
31202845757
31202845765
31202845772
31202845780
31202845780
31202845808
10204
10205
10206
10207
10208
10209
31202845351
31202845369
31202845376
31202845384
31202845392
31202845402
10408
10409
10410
10411
10412
10413
31202845816
31202845822
31202845830
31202845848
31202845856
31202845864
10210
10211
10212
10213
10214
10215
31202845410
31202845426
31202845434
31202845442
31202845450
31202845468
10414
10415
10416
10417
10418
10501
31202845871
31202845889
31202845897
31202845907
31202845915
31202845921
10216
10217
10218
10301
10302
10303
31202845475
31202845483
31202845491
31202845567
31202845574
31202845582
10502
10503
10504
10505
10506
10507
31202845939
31202845947
31202845955
31202845963
31202845970
31202845988
10304
31202845590
10508
31203081959

CONTENTS
R AD I AN C E 11 B E E S L E Y S T R E E T,
WEST END
UNIT
20001
20002
20003
NMI
31202846152
31202846160
31202846177
UNIT
20309
20310
20311
NMI
31202846565
31202846572
31202846580
UNIT
20606
20607
20608
NMI
31202846945
31202846961
31202846978
20004
20005
20101
20102
20103
20104
31202846185
31202846193
31202846202
31202846210
31202846226
31202846234
20312
20313
20314
20401
20402
20403
31202846598
31202846608
31202846616
31202846622
31202846630
31202846648
20609
20610
20611
20701
20702
20703
31202846986
31202846986
31202847002
31202847010
31202847026
31202847034
20105
20106
20107
20108
20109
20110
31202846242
31202846250
31202846268
31202846275
31202846283
31202846291
20404
20405
20406
20407
20408
20409
31202846656
31202846664
31202846671
31202846689
31202846697
31202846707
20704
20705
20706
20707
20708
20709
31202847042
31202847050
31202847068
31202847075
31202847083
31202847091
20111
20112
20201
20202
20203
20204
31202846301
31202846319
31202846333
31202846341
31202846359
31202846367
20410
20411
20412
20413
20414
20501
31202846715
31202846721
31202846739
31202846747
31202846755
31202846763
20710
20711
20801
20802
20803
20804
31202847101
31202847119
31202847125
31202847133
31202847141
31202847159
20205
20206
20207
20208
20209
20210
31202846374
31202846382
31202846390
31202846400
31202846418
31202846424
20502
20503
20504
20505
20506
20507
31202846770
31202846788
31202846796
31202846806
31202846814
TBC
20805
20806
20807
20808
20809
20810
31202847167
31202847174
31202847182
31202847190
31202847209
31202847209
20211
20212
20213
20214
20301
20302
31202846432
31202846440
31202846458
31202846466
31202846481
31202846499
20508
20509
20510
20511
20512
20513
31202846838
31202846846
31202846854
31202846862
31202846879
31202846887
20811
20901
20902
20903
20904
20905
31202847223
31202847231
31202847249
31202847257
31202847265
31202847272
20303
20304
20305
20306
20307
20308
31202846509
31202846517
31202846523
31202846531
31202846549
31202846557
20514
20601
20602
20603
20604
20605
31202846895
31202846905
31202846913
31202846929
31202846937
31202846945
20906
20907
20908
20909
20910
20911
31202847280
31202847298
31202847308
31202847316
31202847322
31202847330

CONTENTS
UNIT
21001
21002
21003
NMI
31202847348
31202491001
31202847364
21004
21005
21006
21007
21008
21009
31202847371
31202847389
31202847397
31202847407
31202847415
31202847421
21010
21011
21101
21102
21103
21104
31202847439
31202847447
31202847455
31202847463
31202847470
31202847488
21105
21106
21107
21108
21109
21110
31202847488
31202847506
31202847514
31202847520
31202847538
31202847546
21111
31202847554
UNIT
NMI
UNIT
NMI
CONTENTS
AP P E N D I X 5
NBN LETTER
CONTENTS
Your User Guide

Useful information about your NBN equipment
For NBN Fibre installations after 19th December 2013

Before performing any maintenance please read
the important safety warnings on the back cover.
CONTENTS
Getting started
Your NBN User Guide

Getting started
Plugging your devices into the NBN connection box*
Identifying your NBN equipment
Maintaining your NBN equipment
Frequently asked questions
NBN connection box indicator lights
12
Optional Power Supply with Battery Backup

Managing the Power Supply with Battery Backup
14
Emergency calls checklist
16
Connecting to the mains power supply
17
How to replace your Backup Battery
18
What to do if the mains power fails
20
Power Supply with Battery Backup indicator

lights and alarm sounds
21
Useful information and troubleshooting

Troubleshooting checklist
22
Important safety warnings
24
* Also known as Network Termination Device (NTD).

2
NBN User Guide
CONTENTS
Your NBN User Guide

Congratulations on connecting to the National Broadband Network
(NBN). With your new fibre optic connection, youll be able to access the
benefits of world class high speed broadband, including:*
high quality video calls to stay connected with family and friends
working from home like you would at the office
getting the whole family online at once
downloading movies in minutes and streaming TV online
access to health services and interactive educational content online
make phone calls over the NBNs fibre optic technology.
This booklet gives you the information you need on how to ensure your
NBN equipment stays in good working order. It also outlines the things
you can do if your system is not working properly.
* Your experience including the speeds actually achieved over the NBN depends on some
factors outside our control like your equipment quality, software, your organisations IT policy and
infrastructure, broadband plans and how your service provider designs its network.
3
CONTENTS
2013 NBN Co Ltd.
Getting started
started
Once your NBN connection box has been installed and your service provider has advised your
services are now active, just follow the simple steps below to begin enjoying your new NBN
service.
1. Connect any compatible equipment to the NBN connection box. Use the port designated for
that service as directed by your phone and internet service providers. Further information on
the ports can be found on page 5.
To access the ports, first remove the cover by pressing the two clips at the
base (either together or one at a time); pull the base of the cover out, then up to
remove it completely.
2. If you have arranged a phone service to be supplied through the voice (UNI-V) port then
your phone should be connected to the designated active voice (UNI-V) port on the NBN
connection box (or to your existing phone sockets if a registered cabler has wired them up
to your NBN connection box). Your phone and internet service providers will also let you
know which connection to use.
Removing the NBN connection box cover
B. Lift the
cover at an
angle to
remove
B
Property of NBNCo - Do not Remove
NBN connection box

(with cover removed)
Contact your service provider for

assistance with this equipment

A. Press these two clips first to release cover
Things to note:
If you have the Power Supply with Battery Backup, the system status light on it should
glow green.
The NBN connection box power and optical lights will both glow green.
For more information on indicator lights, see pages 12 and 21.
NBN User Guide
CONTENTS
Plugging your devices into the

NBN connection box
The bottom of your NBN connection box (inside the cover that is mounted to the wall) will have
a row of ports that look like this:
UNI-V
Data (UNI-D) Ports
The two voice (UNI-V)

ports are to connect
telephones, using RJ-11
cables.
RESET
Power
Fibre Optic
UNI-D
Voice (UNI-V) Ports
The four data (UNI-D) ports are to

connect data and in-band video
services, using Ethernet RJ-45 cables.
POWER
Port for
the power
cable from
your Power
Supply.
DO NOT
DISCONNECT
this cable unless
instructed to do so by
your service provider.
Connecting your phone service

If you have chosen a phone service from your service provider to be delivered through a
voice (UNI-V) or data (UNI-D) port, your service provider will advise you how to connect your
phone(s).
Connecting your broadband service

Your broadband services will be delivered through the data (UNI-D) ports on the NBN
connection box. Your service provider(s) will advise you which data (UNI-D) ports they have
designated for your services, and how to connect any necessary equipment to these services.
Additional cables
All the power and fibre optic cables required for the NBN connection box to operate will be
supplied and connected free of charge by your NBN Co installer. If other cables are needed
to connect your computer, router, phone or other devices, to the NBN connection box, you or
your retail service provider will need to provide them.
Troubleshooting
If youve followed the instructions from your service provider but your phone, internet or other
broadband connections are still not working, or if you see any red or flashing lights on the
NBN connection box or Optional Power Supply with Battery Backup unit, please read the
troubleshooting guide on page 22.
IMPORTANT NOTICE! Risk of eye injury

Please do NOT disconnect, tamper with or look into the laser light
beam from the fibre optic cable as this could damage your eyes.
CONTENTS
2013 NBN Co Ltd.
Getting started
Identifying
your NBN equipment
The NBN fibre equipment may be installed several different ways depending on your building
type and requirements. These diagrams show the three main combinations of equipment and
will help you identify what each piece of equipment is for.
SYSTEM
STATUS
BATTERY
POWER
NBN utility box*
NBN connection box
REPLACE
BATTERY
ALARM
SILENCE
ALARM
SILENCE
BATTERY
EMERGENCY
USE
With NBN
connection
box cover and
standard power
supply
Outside your premises
NBN utility box*
Inside your premises
NBN connection box
Power Supply with

Battery Backup
With NBN
connection box
cover and Power
Supply with
Battery Backup
SYSTEM
STATUS
BATTERY
POWER
REPLACE
BATTERY
ALARM
SILENCE
ALARM
SILENCE
BATTERY
EMERGENCY
USE
SYSTEM
STATUS
BATTERY
POWER
REPLACE
BATTERY
ALARM
SILENCE
ALARM
SILENCE
BATTERY
EMERGENCY
USE
NBN utility box*
With NBN
connection box
(no cover), Fibre
Wall Outlet and
Power Supply
with Battery
Backup
*Also known as a Premises
Connection Device
6
NBN User Guide
Power Supply with

Battery Backup
SYSTEM
STATUS
NBN connection
box (no cover)
BATTERY
POWER
REPLACE
BATTERY
ALARM
SILENCE
ALARM
SILENCE
BATTERY
EMERGENCY
USE
SYSTEM
STATUS
BATTERY
POWER
REPLACE
BATTERY
ALARM
SILENCE
ALARM
SILENCE
Fibre Wall
Outlet
BATTERY
EMERGENCY
USE
CONTENTS
Maintaining your NBN equipment


The NBN equipment in your premises should require very little maintenance if properly cared
for. Here are some important dos and donts to ensure the NBN connection box and Power
Supply stay in good working order.
Inside your property

If you have the Power Supply with Battery Backup, keep it
plugged in at all times with the power point switched on,
otherwise your battery may wear out prematurely and your
broadband data or phone services running over your NBN
connection may not work during a power outage. Please
see section Optional Power Supply with Battery
Backup (page 14) for important information on how
the Battery Backup Service operates.

SYSTEM
STATUS
SYSTEM
STATUS
BATTERY
POWER
BATTERY
POWER
REPLACE
BATTERY
ALARM
SILENCE
REPLACE
BATTERY
ALARM
SILENCE
ALARM
SILENCE
BATTERY
EMERGENCY
USE
Keep the NBN connection box plugged in to the Power

Supply (whether or n t you have the Battery Backup). If you
dont, you wont be able to make phone calls (even in an
emergency) or use broadband data services.
ALARM
SILENCE
BATTERY
EMERGENCY
USE

SYSTEM
STATUS
BATTERY
POWER
REPLACE
BATTERY
SYSTEM
STATUS
ALARM
SILENCE
SYSTEM
STATUS
BATTERY
POWER
BATTERY
POWER
REPLACE
BATTERY
ALARM
SILENCE
ALARM
SILENCE
The indicator light will let you know when the battery needs
replacing. If you have been actively using the battery during
a power failure, the light may also indicate that the battery
is nearly flat (see page 18 for details on how to change the
battery).
REPLACE
BATTERY
ALARM
SILENCE
ALARM
SILENCE
BATTERY
EMERGENCY
USE
ALARM
SILENCE
BATTERY
EMERGENCY
USE

BATTERY
EMERGENCY
USE
Do not touch or unloop the fibre. Tampering with the

fibre (even by simply unplugging it) could damage the
connection and require a technician visit.

Do not use water to clean the equipment.

SYSTEM
STATUS
BATTERY
POWER
REPLACE
BATTERY
ALARM
SILENCE
ALARM
SILENCE
BATTERY
EMERGENCY
USE
7
CONTENTS
2013 NBN Co Ltd.
Do not cover or paint any part of the NBN connection box,

or Power Supply (with or without Battery Backup).
SYSTEM
STATUS
BATTERY
POWER
REPLACE
BATTERY
The only item that can be safely painted is the removable

front cover that goes over the NBN connection box. This
has been specifically designed to allow you to paint it.
Remove the front cover before painting it. Only use
acrylic (PVA) water-based paints.
ALARM
SILENCE
ALARM
SILENCE
BATTERY
EMERGENCY
USE
Do not unplug the NBN connection box or its power supply

unless you need to replace the battery in a Power Supply
with Battery Backup unit if you have one, or if you are going
away for an extended period or otherwise directed to do so
by your service provider.
Do not place objects on top of the NBN connection box,

as this may reduce minimum ventilation requirements,
causing your NBN connection box to operate at a higher
temperature than normal.
Outside your property

Ensure you know where any underground cables are
located before digging to avoid accidental damage to
them. It is best to always contact Dial Before you Dig by
calling 1100 or via their website at www.1100.com.au.
Lodging an enquiry is free of charge. You may incur costs
if underground cables are accidentally damaged, and
experience lengthy unplanned service disruptions until the
damaged cables can be repaired.
Keep branches and shrubs away from the fibre optic cable
and NBN utility box.
NBN User Guide
CONTENTS

Ive accidentally damaged the NBN
connection box. What do I do?
The NBN connection box and its cover, Power
Supply with Battery Backup, standard power
supply and the fibre optic cable on your property
are your responsibility to keep in good condition,
just as you are responsible for your other services
such as power, phone and gas. If you happen
to accidentally damage any part of the NBN
equipment or cable, please contact your service
provider to have it repaired. You may be charged
for the repair.
Is the NBN fibre optic cable safe?

Fibre optic cables do not conduct electricity.
However, there are other safety hazards
associated with handling the fibre optic cable.
This is why you must never disconnect, tamper
with or look directly into the laser light beamed
from the fibre optic cable.
Although the laser light found inside the fibre
optic cabling may appear invisible, you should
always assume the light is present even if you
cannot see it.
Is the NBN connection box installed

in my home or premises safe?
The NBN connection box and its power supply
only use fixed cables. That means they are not
designed to nor intended to emit any wireless
radiation.
Rest assured the NBN connection box and its
power supply have been tested to ensure they
meet:
Australian Safety and Emission requirements
in accordance with AS/NZS CISPR22 and AS/
NZS 60950-1.
These are the same standards consumer
appliances are required to comply with.
Both the NBN connection box and power
supply have passed these tests.
The NBN connection box also has a laser
warning label on it, in accordance with
Australian standards. The warning on the label
is the same one required for CD and laser
pointing devices, laser spirit level tools etc.
The NBN connection box is designed to

automatically turn off its laser in cases when
the optical fibre is pulled out or broken. The
automatic switch off happens within thousandths
of a second of a break occurring. NBN Co
nevertheless recommends that you stay away
from fallen or broken cables as a precaution
because its not always possible to tell whether
a fallen or broken cable is a safe cable, or an
unsafe cable.
Who can I contact for assistance?

If you have any questions, need help or to report
a fault please call your service provider.
If Im going away for a while can I

unplug my service to save power?
NBN Co recommends leaving your NBN
equipment connected and powered at all times.
You may shorten the life of your battery if you
leave the Power Supply with Battery Backup
unplugged for an extended period of time.
However, if you are away for an extended period,
and do not want to leave the NBN equipment
plugged in, please be sure to disconnect the
battery by following these steps (refer to diagram
on pages 18-19):
1. Turn off at the power point and disconnect the
power supply from the mains power.
2. Open the front cover of the Power Supply with
Battery Backup (A).
3. Disconnect the red + plug from the battery (B).
When returning, please remember to reconnect
the battery. If you dont, your phone and
broadband data services wont work during a
power failure, you may hear audible alarms and
your service provider may be alerted that your
battery needs servicing.
Can I plug the power supply into

a power board?
Yes, however NBN Co prefers the NBN
connection box and power supply is connected to
fixed power point where possible. However in the
event this is not possible then the power supply
can be plugged into a double adapter, extension
cord or power board as long as they are safe.
9
CONTENTS
2013 NBN Co Ltd.

Can I connect other devices to
the unused ports on the NBN
connection box?
Unlike modem/routers you might be familiar with
from ADSL and cable broadband services, each
port on the NBN connection box is reserved
for a separate service. This allows you to have
up to four separate broadband data and up
to two separate phone services through one
connection box. If you only order one broadband
service, then only one port will be active. If you
connect one of your devices to an unused NBN
connection box port, your devices wont be
connected to a phone or internet service.
What if I want to move the NBN

connection box?
If you need to have the NBN connection box
or the cables relocated, contact your service
provider. They should be able to advise you of
the cost and arrange for a technician to move
the equipment. When considering relocating
NBN equipment or cables you should keep these
things in mind:
1. The equipment must be protected from water,
steam or excessive heat.
2. The location must be well ventilated, preferably
near a fixed power point and easy for you to
check the indicator lights.
3. The equipment must be positioned in a
location away from busy areas and protected
from risk of damage. There should also be
sufficient light for you to see if the device is
functioning correctly.
4. You may be charged for the relocation cost.
I have a monitored home or

premises security system, will it
work over the NBN?
It is expected that most monitored security
systems will operate over the NBN. However,
if you would like to use an existing system, you
should check with your security provider to
ensure that your particular equipment and service
is NBN-compatible. You should test your alarm
the same day that your NBN service is activated
10
NBN User Guide
by your service provider, and also check that your

in-premises wiring is correctly connected up to
your new NBN service. For further information on
alarms and the NBN, please visit
nbnco.com.au/alarms
Can I install in-home cabling

myself?
NBN Co will professionally install the cabling from
the street to your NBN connection box (for more
information on whats included in a standard
installation please visit
nbnco.com.au/fibreinstallation). If you
choose to install additional permanent phone or
data cabling through wall, floor or ceiling cavities
it must be done by a cabler registered with an
Australian Communications and Media Authority
(ACMA) accredited industry registrar.
Your service provider may also be able to
recommend a registered cabler in your area.
Other non-permanent cabling such as plugging
your own router or phone into the NBN
connection box can be done yourself.
How do I care for the NBN

connection box cover?
You can clean the NBN connection box cover
by removing the cover and wiping it clean with
a damp cloth and mild all-purpose cleaner. Do
not use a damp cloth on internal equipment or
cables.
Can I lock the NBN connection box

cover?
A locking feature is available to restrict access
if desired. NBN Co recommends a cable tie or
small padlock to stop unwanted access.
Please note: Your service provider should not
lock the cover, as you may need to access the
ports or lights inside the cover for troubleshooting
or if you decide to change providers/devices.
CONTENTS
How do I open my NBN connection

box cover?
To remove the cover, press the two clips at the
base of the box (either together or one at a time).
Pull the base of the cover out, and then up to
remove it completely.
To reattach the cover, simply place the top over
the base then lightly guide the cover down and
back until it clips into place.
Do not touch or uncoil the cables that have been
installed inside the cover as this could affect the
performance of your service.
Can I remove my Power Supply with

Battery Backup if I no longer want
the Battery Backup service and only
want the standard power supply?
No, this is currently not possible. However you
can advise your service provider that you no
longer want the Battery Backup service which
means you can remove the battery (provided no
other users of NBN services are using the
Battery Backup service on your premises) and
your service provider will stop sending you
battery alarm reminders. If you do this, your
services will only operate if the power is switched
on at the power point; they wont work during
a power failure.
I have moved into a house with NBN

fibre already installed. Do I need
to do anything to make sure the
Battery Backup service is working?
If you move into a house where NBN fibre is
available, please let your preferred service
provider know whether you require the Battery
Backup service when arranging your services
over the NBN.
If you do require it, your service provider may
need to arrange NBN Co to install a Power
Supply with Battery Backup if there is not already
one there in the house. Your service provider will
also remind you when the battery is worn out and
needs to be changed.
You can check if the Power Supply with Battery
Backup has a working battery installed in it by
checking if there are any visual light alarms on
the unit and opening the power supply cover
to see if a battery is installed. Please follow the
instructions on page 18.
If you dont require the Battery Backup service,
and there is already a Power Supply Unit with
Battery Backup installed, then your service
provider can turn off the reminders to replace the
battery.
I only have the standard power

supply. Can I add a Power
Supply with Battery Backup if my
circumstances change or I move
into a home that does not have the
capability and I require this service?
Yes this is possible please contact your service
provider to discuss your needs and arrange an
appointment for the installation of the Power
Supply with Battery Backup. Please note that
until your Power Supply with Battery Backup is
installed, your services will not operate during
a power failure or when the power for the NBN
connection box is switched off at the power
point.
11
CONTENTS
2013 NBN Co Ltd.
NBN connection box indicator lights

POWER INDICATOR
OPTICAL INDICATOR
ALARM INDICATOR
DATA (UNI-D) INDICATORS
VOICE (UNI-
12
INDICATOR
MEANING
ACTION
OFF
This means there is no power to your

NBN connection box
Check the power supply is plugged in and switched on and is connected to

your NBN connection box. If there is still no power light contact your service
provider
RED
Your power supply is operating on

backup battery power
If there is a mains power failure, you will only have services over the NBN
for a limited period of up to five hours. Refer to the Power Supply with
Battery Backup section of this guide
GREEN
Your power supply is working normally
No action is required
GREEN
FLASHING
Your NBN connection box is

starting up
No action is required. The flashing light should turn into a

green solid light shortly
MEANING
ACTION
OFF
Your NBN connection box has been

disabled externally
Contact your service provider for further instructions
RED
Your NBN connection box has lost

connection with the fibre network
GREEN

connected and working properly
GREEN
FLASHING
This is normal and simply

means there is activity on
the network
MEANING
ACTION
OFF

working but you have no devices
connected
RED
Your NBN connection box has a fault

and is not working normally
GREEN
Your NBN connection box is working

normally and is connected
INDICATOR
INDICATOR
INDICATOR
MEANING
Property
of NBNCo - Do not Remove
ACTION
OFF
You do not have an active service

using this port at this time
This may simply mean that connected devices are not active at the moment.
If you are having difficulty with connected devices then contact your service
provider for further instructions
ORANGE
The device connected to your UNI-D

port uses 1Gbps Ethernet
ORANGE
FLASHING

Contact
service provider for
port uses
1Gbpsyour
Ethernet
GREEN

port uses 10 or 100Mbps Ethernet
GREEN
FLASHING

MEANING
ACTION
INDICATOR
NBN
User GuideYou do not have an active phone
OFF
CONTENTS
ALARM INDICATOR
DATA (UNI-D) INDICATORS
GREEN

connected and working properly
GREEN
FLASHING
This is normal and simply

means there is activity on
the network
MEANING
ACTION
OFF

working but you have no devices
connected
RED
Your NBN connection box has a fault

and is not working normally
GREEN
Your NBN connection box is working

normally and is connected
MEANING
ACTION
OFF
You do not have an active service

using this port at this time
This may simply mean that connected devices are not active at the moment.
If you are having difficulty with connected devices then contact your service
provider for further instructions
ORANGE

ORANGE
FLASHING

GREEN

GREEN
FLASHING

MEANING
ACTION
OFF
You do not have an active phone

service using this port at this time
GREEN
One or more telephones are off the

hook (being used)
GREEN
FLASHING
One or more telephones have been off

the hook for more than 1 hour
Check if someone in your household is using the phone, and if not check to
see if any of your handsets have been left off the hook by accident
MEANING
ACTION
OFF
Normal
RED
Your NBN connection box has failed

to download software
GREEN

successfully downloading software
INDICATOR
INDICATOR
VOICE (UNI-V) INDICATORS
INDICATOR
UPDATE INDICATOR
INDICATOR
13
CONTENTS
2013 NBN Co Ltd.
This section (pages 14 to 21) only applies

if you have the Optional Power Supply
with Battery Backup
Managing the Power Supply with
Battery Backup
The Power Supply with Battery
Backup:
Provides a steady 12V power supply to your
NBN connection box.
Provides battery backup power to the NBN
connection box (when fitted with a working
battery).
SYSTEM
STATUS
BATTERY
POWER
REPLACE
BATTERY
ALARM
SILENCE
ALARM
SILENCE
BATTERY
EMERGENCY
USE
During a power outage, battery backup will

last for approximately five hours (including the
battery emergency reserve).
It is always good to have another way of calling
someone during a power outage in the case of
emergency such as a charged mobile phone.
To ensure that your phone (or data) services
continue to operate during a power outage
please note:
Only standard corded phones (that dont
need to be plugged into a power point) will
work during a power outage, and only if your
phone service is also provided over the NBN
connection boxs voice (UNI-V) port. All other
devices require their own battery backup to
operate during a power outage.
If your phone plugs into a separate router/gateway from your phone or internet service
provider, you wont be able to make calls unless that router/gateway also has its own
battery backup.
Examples of devices that require their own battery backup include wireless routers, all
mains powered phones, computers or modem/routers.
Uninterruptable power supply (UPS) systems help power devices during a power outage
and are readily available through technology retailers.
Your service provider should explain how your services can work with NBN Cos Battery
Backup service and what additional solutions you may need to power your other devices.
14
NBN User Guide
CONTENTS
How long battery backup lasts

If you have a Power Supply with Battery Backup, your NBN connection box will continue
to be powered for approximately five hours during a power outage.
When approximately 40% of the battery charge is remaining (after about 3 to 3.5 hours), the
power supply will automatically turn off to preserve the remaining charge for emergency use.
When you need to use the remaining charge press the emergency reserve button and
within a few minutes your services will operate for the remaining 1.5 to 2 hours.
Extremely cold conditions (less than -1 degrees Celsius) may cause the battery to run out
more quickly.
Keeping your backup battery topped up

To ensure the backup battery works when you need it, please maintain it by following the
advice given in this guide.
Regularly check the battery indicators lights and pay attention to audible alarms, (see page 21
for a guide to indicator lights and alarms) as these may indicate a problem with your battery.
When your battery is used as indicated in the NBN User Guide, it will age to about 70% of
its original capacity in around three to five years.
A battery can age sooner if not kept at room temperature (around 20 degrees). Warmer
temperatures can accelerate aging of the battery.
Turning the power on and off frequently will cause the battery to age earlier and reach 70%
of its capacity in around one to two years.
Please ensure the battery is replaced when needed (or as arranged with your service provider).
Options for extending your battery backup

If approximately five hours of battery backup isnt enough for your needs, you can add
additional capacity by plugging the power cord of the Power Supply with Battery Backup unit
into an Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS) itself a type of battery backup unit. These are
readily available through technology retailers. Your service provider should explain how your
services can work with NBN Cos Battery Backup service and what additional solutions you
may need to power your other devices.
The UPS must supply a 230V 50Hz AC waveform in accordance with AS60038-2000.
Refer to your UPS manufacturer for confirmation.
To set up a UPS, please:
Follow the instructions provided by the UPS manufacturer to initially set up the UPS system.
Switch off the power at the power point that the NBN connection box power supply is
connected to.
Unplug the NBN power supply power cord from the power point and plug it into the UPS.
Plug the UPS power cord to the fixed power point.
Turn on the power point.
Follow the UPS manufacturers instructions on operating the UPS.
Your service provider should explain how your services can work with battery backup and
what solutions you may need for your devices. You should discuss the use of any UPS with
your service provider.
15
CONTENTS
2013 NBN Co Ltd.
Emergency calls checklist

To make calls during a power outage for up to five hours, you need to make sure you have
all of the following:
NBN Power Supply with Battery Backup
NBN Battery Backup service
A phone service connected on the NBN connection boxs UNI-V port
A standard corded phone that doesnt need to be plugged into a power point
The corded phone needs to be plugged in to the UNI-V port on the NBN connection
box, and your Power Supply with Battery Backup needs to be working and maintained
by following the instructions in this guide.
SYSTEM
STATUS
BATTERY
POWER
Powered for up to
five hours (including
emergency reserve) by
NBN Power Supply with
Battery Backup
REPLACE
BATTERY
ALARM
SILENCE
ALARM
SILENCE
BATTERY
EMERGENCY
USE

Corded
phone
NBN connection
box UNI-V port
What if
Power Supply with

Battery Backup
SYSTEM
STATUS
BATTERY
POWER
Q: I connect my phone to a router provided by my phone company?
REPLACE
BATTERY
ALARM
SILENCE
ALARM
SILENCE
BATTERY
EMERGENCY
USE

A: If your phone service provider has advised that you need to connect your phone up to
a router, gateway or box that is not the NBN connection box, then you will need to have a
separate battery backup for that device. Ask your phone service provider for advice.
SYSTEM
STATUS
BATTERY
POWER
REPLACE
BATTERY
ALARM
SILENCE
ALARM
SILENCE
BATTERY
EMERGENCY
USE
Q: I use a cordless phone?

A: Most cordless phone sets have batteries in the handsets, but not the base station, which
usually only works when plugged in to mains power. You will either need to arrange an external
battery backup unit for your cordless phone base station, or buy a new cordless phone that
has battery backup built into both the base station and handsets.
Need their own
battery backup
Cordless
phone
handset
16
Cordless
phone
base
station
NBN User Guide
Router or
box from
your phone
service
provider
Powered
for up to
five hours
(including
emergency
reserve) by
NBN Power
Supply with
Battery
Backup
SYSTEM
STATUS
BATTERY
POWER
REPLACE
BATTERY
ALARM
SILENCE
ALARM
SILENCE
BATTERY
EMERGENCY
USE

NBN connection
box UNI-D port
Power Supply with

Battery Backup
CONTENTS
Connecting to the mains power supply

1. NBN Co recommends the power supply is plugged directly into a fixed power point.
2. Where a fixed power point is not available, a safe extension cord, double adapter or power
board can be used.
Lig
3. The NBN connection box will switch to battery power if you turn the power off at the power
point. When the battery goes flat, the NBN connection box will turn off, and SYSTEM
your phone or
STATUS
data services will no longer work.
Normal
4. Dont switch off your NBN equipment. The power used by the system is minimal
equivalent to a 15W light bulb.
5. The life of the battery in a Power Supply with Battery Backup will be
routinely turned on and off, or left switched off.
IMPORTANT!
If your Power Supply with Battery Backup is showing a red light next
to the REPLACE BATTERY symbol or you hear an alarm (beeping
once every 15 minutes) this either means that you need to replace
your battery with a new one or that the battery has been removed.
NBN Co provides the first battery free of charge when the Power
Supply with Battery Backup is installed. It is your responsibility
to discuss with your service provider whether they will supply
subsequent replacement batteries or whether you should purchase
them. See Purchase a new battery on page 18.
If theres a power outage, your NBN service wont work if the
battery is faulty or missing.
If you have the Battery Backup service, your phone or internet
service provider will also let you know when your battery is worn out
and needs replacement or when your battery is missing. Detailed
instructions on how to replace the battery are on the next page.
BATTERY
reducedPOWER
if the power
REPLACE
BATTERY
ALARM
SILENCE
is
Using b
No mai
Battery
and sho
Audible
SYSTEM
STATUS
BATTERY
POWER
REPLACE
BATTERY
ALARM
SILENCE
ALARM
SILENCE
BATTERY
EMERGENCY
USE
CAUSE
POWER FAILURE
Loss of mains power
REPLACE BATTERY
Battery self test fails
If you no longer want to replace the battery or need the Battery

Backup service
LOW BATTERY Less than 50%
If you no longer require the Battery Backup service and do not intend to Battery
replacereserve
the battery,
shutdown immin
let your service provider know. They can stop reminding you when your battery needs
replacement.
AUDIBLE ALARM ON
As long as no other users at the same premises have the Battery Backup
service,
you can
Alarm
function
is enabled
remove the current battery and dispose of it at a battery recycling centre (do not place in
household garbage). Refer to instructions for battery replacement for safe removal and
AUDIBLE ALARM OFF
disposal of battery.
Alarm function is disabled
Of course, with no battery, youll have no battery backup during a power outage, so your voice
and data services will only work when plugged in and receiving mains power.
17
CONTENTS
2013 NBN Co Ltd.
How to replace your Backup Battery

1. Purchase a new battery
If you and your service provider have
agreed you will replace the battery for your
NBN connection box, you should buy a
replacement battery that is equivalent to
the original. You can purchase the battery
at most specialist battery retailers
you can find a list at
nbnco.com.au/battery along with
other useful information.
STOP!
8MM
12-24MM
Before going any

further please
read the Important
Safety Warnings on
the back cover.
2. Remove the old battery

Turn off at the power point and disconnect the power supply from the mains power.
Open the front cover of the Power Supply with Battery Backup (A).
Disconnect the red + plug from the battery (B).
Push the tabs holding the battery, one above and one below, outward and then lift
the battery out (C).
Disconnect the black plug and remove battery (D).
3. Install the new battery

Reconnect the black plug to the new battery (E).
Push the battery retaining tabs outward and insert the battery into the Power Supply with Battery
Backup (F).
Reconnect the red + plug to the new battery (G).
Make sure the wires are not being pinched by the battery or the front cover.
Close the front cover and plug the power supply back into the power point and turn
the power on.
The new battery will take 24 hours to completely charge. Please retain the old battery as
a precaution during this time unless its charge was completely exhausted.
Please note, your broadband and/or phone service delivered over the NBN will be unavailable while
the battery is being replaced and for up to 10 minutes afterwards.
PLEASE RECYCLE YOUR OLD BATTERY

The Sealed Lead Batteries supplied by NBN Co are 100% recyclable. However these
batteries cannot be simply tossed in your household recycling bin as they will
contaminate the rest of the recyclable material. Please take your battery to a specialist
recycling centre to be recycled.
18
NBN User Guide
CONTENTS
Specifications:
Battery Type:
12V 7.0-7.2Ah 6 Cell VRLA Sealed Lead Acid Battery
Dimensions:
94mm (H) x 151mm (W) x 65mm (D) (excl. terminals)

100mm (H) x 151mm (W) x 65mm (D) (incl. terminals) (all tolerances +/- 1mm)
Terminal Type:
Spade-type. Quick disconnect F2 6.35mm (W) x 0.81mm (Thickness)
Terminal position relative to the battery case:

8mm from the battery sides, 12 - 24mm from the battery end

Positive terminal positioned on the side depicted in the drawing
C
SYSTEM
STATUS
SYSTEM
STATUS
SYSTEM
STATUS
BATTERY
POWER
BATTERY
POWER
BATTERY
POWER
BATTERY
POWER
BATTERY
POWER
BATTERY
POWER
BATTERY
POWER
BATTERY
POWER
BATTERY
POWER
REPLACE
BATTERY
REPLACE
BATTERY
REPLACE
BATTERY
REPLACE
BATTERY
REPLACE
BATTERY
REPLACE
BATTERY
REPLACE
BATTERY
REPLACE
BATTERY
REPLACE
BATTERY
ALARM
SILENCE
ALARM
SILENCE
ALARM
SILENCE
ALARM
SILENCE
SYSTEM
STATUS
ALARM
SILENCE
SYSTEM
STATUS
ALARM
SILENCE
SYSTEM
STATUS
ALARM
SILENCE
SYSTEM
STATUS
ALARM
SILENCE
SYSTEM
STATUS
ALARM
SILENCE
SYSTEM
STATUS
ALARM
SILENCE
ALARM
SILENCE
ALARM
SILENCE
ALARM
SILENCE
ALARM
SILENCE
ALARM
SILENCE
ALARM
SILENCE
ALARM
SILENCE
ALARM
SILENCE
BATTERY
EMERGENCY
USE
BATTERY
EMERGENCY
USE
BATTERY
EMERGENCY
USE
BATTERY
EMERGENCY
USE
BATTERY
EMERGENCY
USE
BATTERY
EMERGENCY
USE
BATTERY
EMERGENCY
USE
BATTERY
EMERGENCY
USE
BATTERY
EMERGENCY
USE
B
F
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
STATUS
STATUS
SYSTEM
STATUS
BATTERY
BATTERY
POWER
POWER
BATTERY
POWER
REPLACE
REPLACE
BATTERY
BATTERY
REPLACE
BATTERY
ALARM
ALARM
SILENCE
SILENCE
ALARM
SILENCE
ALARM
ALARM
SILENCE
SILENCE
ALARM
SILENCE
BATTERY
BATTERY
EMERGENCY
EMERGENCY
USE
USE
BATTERY
EMERGENCY
USE
Alternatively you could take your used battery to the store where
you purchased your new battery, and ask them to recycle it for
you. Refer to NBN Co website for places to recycle lead acid
batteries. You can find a list at nbnco.com.au/battery.
Pb
19
CONTENTS
2013 NBN Co Ltd.
What to do if the mains power fails

If your mains power fails, the Power Supply with Battery Backup will beep once and
automatically switch to its backup battery power.
When only around 40% of the battery power remains (after about 3 to 3.5 hours), the Power
Supply with Battery Backup will turn off to save the remaining 40% of backup battery power
(about 1.5 to 2 hours). This saved power can then be used to make emergency calls if
needed.
What happens when only 40% of the battery power remains:

The battery power indicator will flash and the Power Supply with Battery Backup will begin to
beep four times a minute. Once the beeping stops, the Power Supply with Battery Backup will
turn itself off to preserve the remaining power for use in case of an emergency.
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 SECS
How to access the remaining backup battery power in emergencies

ALARM
SILENCE
SILENCE FOR
Press and hold the BATTERY24EMERGENCY

USE button for two
HOURS
seconds until the power supply beeps once and all 4 lights flash.
RE-ENABLE
This will provide a further 1.5 to 2 hours of power. After this, you
cant turn the battery power offSILENCE
again.
BATTERY
EMERGENCY
USE
24 HOURS +
After the battery is completely flat, the BATTERY EMERGENCY

RE-ENABLE
USE button will not work again
until mains power has been restored
and the battery is recharged.
The battery is designed to be continually recharged until it has
reached the end of its life and needs to be replaced - estimated
to occur every three to five years if used in accordance with the
guidelines.
Alarm silence
function
You can silence
audible alarm sounds
using the ALARM
SILENCE button.
Press and hold the
button to temporarily
silence or re-enable
the alarm sounds for
either 24 hours or
longer:
HOLD BUTTON FOR

TIME (SECONDS)
ALARM
SILENCE
BATTERY
EMERGENCY
USE
10
11
12
13
14
15
SILENCE FOR
24 HOURS
RE-ENABLE
ALARM
SILENCE FOR
24 HOURS+
KEEP HOLDING ALARM SILENCE BUTTON
RE-ENABLE
ALARM
KEEP HOLDING ALARM SILENCE BUTTON
= 1 BEEP
You should only silence alarms when absolutely necessary as they are designed to
alert you when your battery is in need of replacement, your battery is missing or the
battery is running low and will soon be flat.
20
NBN User Guide
CONTENTS
Power Supply with Battery Backup indicator

lights and alarm sounds
The following displays are present on the front of the unit:
Light ON
SYSTEM
STATUS
BATTERY
POWER
SYSTEM
STATUS
REPLACE
BATTERY
BATTERY
POWER
ALARM
SILENCE
REPLACE
BATTERY
Light BLINKING
Normal
System fault
Light ON
Using battery
No mains power
Normal
Light BLINKING
Battery charge low and
will soon be flat
System fault
Battery missing or battery has degraded

and should be replaced
Battery charge low and
Using battery
will soon be flat
No mains power
Audible alarms silenced

for 24 hours
Battery missing or battery has degraded
and should be replaced
Light OFF
No mains power
and power supply
unit is off
Light OFF
Using mains power
or battery is flat
No mains power
and power supply
unit is off
Battery OK
Using mains power
or battery is flat
Audible alarms
enabled
Battery OK
If the Power Supply with Battery Backup is working normally on mains power, the SYSTEM
Audible alarms
STATUS
light is green and the BATTERY POWER
and
REPLACE BATTERY
lights are off.
CAUSE ALARM
ALARM
SOUND
for 24
hours
enabled
SILENCE
Alarm sounds
POWER FAILURE
Beeps
once
The
following
describes the different types of
audible
alarm sounds you might hear:
Loss
of mainslist
power
CAUSE
REPLACE BATTERY
Battery self test fails
POWER FAILURE
Loss BATTERY
of mains power
LOW
Less than 50% remaining.
Battery reserve shutdown imminent
REPLACE BATTERY
Battery
test fails
AUDIBLEself
ALARM
ON
Alarm function is enabled
LOW BATTERY Less than 50% remaining.
Battery
imminent
AUDIBLEreserve
ALARMshutdown
OFF
AUDIBLE ALARM ON
Alarm function is enabled
ALARM SOUND
AUDIBLE ALARM OFF

Beeps once when disabled
Beeps once every 15 minutes
Beeps once
Beeps 4 times every minute
Beeps once every 15 minutes
Beeps twice when enabled
Beeps 4 times every minute
Beeps once when disabled
Beeps twice when enabled
21
CONTENTS
2013 NBN Co Ltd.
Getting started
Troubleshooting
checklist
In the event any of the services provided through your NBN connection box stop working
(e.g. internet, IPTV or phone) the first step is to check the following:
1. Power check
Is everything plugged in and turned on?

NBN connection box
Power Supply with Battery Backup or standard power supply
All cables and power points
Your own equipment
2. External fibre optic cable check

Has the fibre optic cable connection from the street
been damaged?
For example, a fallen branch may have damaged the cable. If you think this may be the case,
do NOT try to remove it or repair the cable yourself. Contact your service provider immediately.
3. Indicator light check

Check the indicator lights on your Power Supply with Battery
Backup and NBN connection box.
NBN connection box
POWER and OPTICAL lights are ON
Power Supply with Battery Backup

SYSTEM STATUS light is ON
SYSTEM
STATUS
BATTERY
POWER
REPLACE
BATTERY
ALARM
SILENCE
ALARM
SILENCE
BATTERY
EMERGENCY
USE

If you remove the cover from your NBN connection box and the lights on your NBN connection
box or Power Supply with Battery Backup (if installed) do not match those shown in this
diagram then refer to the lights and indicators sections of this guide on pages 12-13 and 21.
Still cant identify the problem or the solution?

Please note down which lights are glowing and contact your service provider for further advice.
22
NBN User Guide
CONTENTS
Phone troubleshooting
If you have a phone service which plugs into the NBN connection boxs UNI-V port, please
check the following:
1. Is your phone (or if applicable, home phone wiring & wall sockets) connected to the correct
voice (UNI-V) port on the NBN connection box? If you have only ordered one phone
service, then only one of the UNI-V ports on the NBN connection box will be activated.
2. Has the phone service ever worked? If not, please contact your retail service provider to
enquire whether it has been activated correctly.
3. Is there a dial tone? (if not, contact your phone service provider for assistance with
checking if the service is activated correctly and the phone is plugged into the right port).
4. If there is a dial tone but calls still dont work, are there any other tones or noises on the
line that suggest the phone service isnt working normally? (These may suggest electrical
interference or a fault. Contact your service provider for assistance).
5. If you have been plugging your phone in to an existing wall socket, does it work if
you unplug it and plug it in to the voice (UNI-V) port of the NBN connection box? (If so,
you may need to get a registered cabler to connect your wall socket wiring to the NBN
connection box).
6. If you are using a phone extension cord, have you tried removing the phone extension cord
and plugging the phone in directly to the voice (UNI-V) port of the NBN connection box?
(The extension cord may be faulty).
7. If it still doesnt work, can you try plugging a different phone (including a different phone
cord) in to the NBN connection box?
If your phone still does not work contact your service provider for assistance.
Internet troubleshooting
1. Has the broadband service ever worked? (if not please contact your service provider
to enquire whether the service has been activated correctly).
2. Is your equipment plugged in to the right UNI-D port on the NBN connection box? (If you
have only ordered one broadband service, only one UNI-D port will be activated on the
NBN connection box).
3. Have you tried turning the equipment you have plugged in to the NBN connection box off
and on? (sometimes equipment like wireless routers may have stopped working and this
can be resolved by turning the power off and on).
4. Have you tried using another Ethernet cable between the NBN connection box and your
equipment? (Its possible the Ethernet cable is faulty and is not connecting your equipment
properly to the NBN connection box).
5. If you are using a wireless router, have you tried testing the NBN service by connecting a
laptop or desktop PC to the correct UNI-D port on the NBN connection box directly via an
Ethernet cable? (This will help you identify whether the NBN service itself is not working or
whether its a problem with something else like your router).
If your broadband still does not work contact your service provider for assistance.
23
CONTENTS
2013 NBN Co Ltd.
Getting started
IMPORTANT SAFETY WARNINGS
Please read these notes carefully before attempting to fit
or replace a battery in your power supply.
To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not remove the cover
of the Power Supply with Battery Backup except to service the
battery. There are no user serviceable parts inside the Power Supply
with Battery Backup except the battery.
Please read this user guide about your NBN connection box
thoroughly before attempting to fit or replace a battery in your Power
Supply with Battery Backup.
To avoid electric shock when servicing the battery, first switch the
power point off and unplug the power cord from the wall.
Because of the battery, there will still be live electrical components
inside the Power Supply with Battery Backup, even when the power
cord is disconnected from the wall or the power point is switched off.
So follow the instructions on servicing the battery carefully.
During a mains power failure, the Power Supply with Battery Backup
only powers the NBN connection box. It will not power any other
devices such as cordless phone base stations, alarms or other
devices that do not have their own backup batteries.
Never turn the power off to your power supply even if you have the
Battery Backup service. Leaving the power switched off may prevent
you making phone calls or using broadband services, and if you have
the Battery Backup service, will shorten the lifespan of your battery.
To prevent the risk of fire or electric shock, your Power Supply with
Battery Backup should be installed in a reasonably warm, dry indoor
area, free of condensation and excessive dust.
For more information

1800 OUR NBN (1800 687 626)
Visit: www.nbnco.com.au
Email: info@nbnco.com.au
NBN-MKT-GDE-039
December 2013 Copyright 2013 NBN Co Limited.
All rights reserved. Not for general distribution.
CONTENTS
AP P E N D I X 6
FIRE ENGINEERING REPORT

Omnii FER Rev B
Exova Rev 9
CONTENTS
Project
321 Montague Road

West End Queensland
Principal
Profire (Qld) Pty Ltd
Building Certifier
Philip Chun & Associates Pty Ltd
Fire Engineering Report

March 2016
Project Number 5675100
Revision B
5675100 FER B
CONTENTS
321 Montague Road

West End Queensland
Document Authorisation Issue
Project:
321 Montague Road
Project Address:
West End Queensland
Project Reference:
5675100
Revision
Date Issued
Revision Comment
Prepared By
Reviewed By
3rd March 2016
Authorised Final Issue
Daniel Green
Jack Partridge
23rd March 2016
Amended as per
stakeholder comments
Daniel Green
Jack Partridge
Copyright
Copyright 2016 by Omnii Pty Ltd. All rights reserved. No portion of the contents of this document may be
reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, by parties other than Profire (Qld) Pty Ltd, or
those employed or engaged directly by Profire (Qld) Pty Ltd for this project only, without the express
written permission of Omnii Pty Ltd.
Authorisation of Final Document
Fire Safety Engineer:
Jack Partridge
Name
5675100 FER B
RPEQ 10529
Signature
March 2016, Revision B
Registration No.
i
CONTENTS
321 Montague Road

West End Queensland
Table of Contents
Page No.
Executive Summary
Summary of Alternative Solution
Fire Engineering Outcomes
1.
Introduction
1.1
General
1.2
Legislative Requirements
1.3
Client Objectives
1.4
Fire Brigade Objectives
1.5
Fire Engineering Brief
1.6
Relevant Stakeholders
1.7
Sources of Information
1.8
Glossary
1.9
Limitations
2.
Project Description
2.1
Principal Building Characteristics
2.2
Fire Brigade Characteristics
3.
Hazards and Safety Measures
3.1
4.
Alternative Building Solutions
4.1
cPVC Sprinkler Pipe Penetrations
5.
Conclusion
16
6.
References
17
10
12
12
Appendix A
Glossary
Appendix B
Correspondence
Appendix C
Fire Sprinkler System Reliability
Appendix D
Blazemaster Compatability
Appendix E
3M Certificate of Test
Appendix F
CVs
5675100 FER B
10
ii
CONTENTS
321 Montague Road

West End Queensland
Executive Summary
This document, prepared for Profire (Qld) Pty Ltd (Principal), is the Fire Engineering Report (FER)
for the proposed development located at 321 Montague Road, West End Queensland.
The proposed development is two residential apartment buildings, Illuminate (Building A) and
Radiance (Building B). The two (2) residential buildings will be connected by a common
basement carpark and Building A contains retail tenancies. Furthermore, in this report both
buildings will be considered as one united building as these buildings are connected through a
common carpark. Building A contains a total of six (6) storeys and Building B contains a total of
twelve (12) storeys.
The intent of this FER is to address a single compliance that was not addressed in the Exova
Warringtonfire FER (CRM3001383759-RPT02-2) that was prepared for these buildings. All other
aspects of the buildings design are assumed to be in accordance with the BCA DTS Provisions or
to comply with the requirements of the Exova Warringtonfire FER.
The Fire Engineering Outcomes detailed in this FER pertain only to the single compliance issue
addressed in this FER. All other required Fire Engineering Outcomes and Fire Safety Systems
relating to these buildings are detailed in the Exova Warringtonfire FER. The Exova
Warringtonfire FER has been used for background information pertaining to the building and its
fire safety systems. Consequently this FER must be read in conjunction with the Exova
Warringtonfire FER.
Utilising the National Construction Code (NCC) 2014 Building Code of Australia (BCA) Volume
One [1], an acceptable Building Solution is to be achieved by a combination of compliance with
the BCA Deemed-to-Satisfy (DTS) provisions and formulating an acceptable Alternative Solution.
This approach is intended to allow the development of an effective alternative building design,
whilst maintaining an acceptable level of Fire and Life Safety.
The fire engineering assessment will need to demonstrate that the Alternative Solution achieves
compliance with the relevant BCA Performance Requirements. All other Performance
Requirements are to be met by complying with the BCA DTS provisions or as accepted by the
Building Certifier and other Regulatory Authorities.
5675100 FER B
CONTENTS
321 Montague Road

West End Queensland
Summary of Alternative Solution

Table A summarises the BCA DTS departure and associated BCA DTS Clause and Performance
Requirements. In addition, code compliance, assessment method, proposed analysis method,
assessment methodology and acceptance criteria are also summarised.
The applicability of the proposed Alternative Solution is assessed and contained further on in this
report.
Table A BCA DTS Provision Departures
BCA DTS Clause
BCA Performance
Requirements
BCA DTS Provision Departures
Fire Resistance
C3.15
CP2, CP8
The firestopping system of the cPVC sprinkler pipes

penetrating the SOU bounding construction is not tested
to AS 1530.4.
Code Compliance and

Assessment Method:
A0.5(b)(i) and A0.9 (c) and (d) as detailed in Section 1.2
Proposed Analysis Method and

Acceptance Criteria:
Qualitative analysis method based on sprinkler protection

and testing of the variation to a tested system under
AS1530.4
Acceptance will be demonstrated where the proposed
firestopping around the cPVC sprinkler pipe at
penetrations in the bounding construction will not unduly
increase the risk of fire spread
5675100 FER B
CONTENTS
321 Montague Road

West End Queensland
Fire Engineering Outcomes

The Fire Engineering Outcomes (also known as the Trial Concept Design or Alternative Building
Solution) are required to address departures from the BCA DTS provisions and are intended to
achieve a level of fire and life safety which meets Profire (Qld) Pty Ltds objectives set out in
Section 1.3.
All other items of fire and life safety, where not specifically addressed or reviewed as part of this
document are to be in accordance with BCA DTS provisions, comply with the requirements of the
approved Exova Warringtonfire Fire Engineering Report, Report Number CRM3001383759RPT02-2, dated 6th July 2015, or as accepted by the Building Certifier and other Regulatory
Authorities.
The following Fire Engineering Outcomes detail the required preventative and protective
measures based on the fire engineering assessment in order to achieve compliance with the BCA
Performance Requirements and shall take precedence over the remainder of the Fire Engineering
Report (FER).
Fire Resistance
a.
SOU bounding walls must be constructed to comply with the BCA DTS provisions, except
that cPVC sprinkler pipe penetrations may be firestopped with 3M 3000WT Firestop as
follows:
i.
The product shall be installed in accordance with the manufactures installation

guidelines, and to a minimum depth of 13mm on each side of the penetration.
ii.
The product shall be installed by an appropriately qualified contractor, licenced by the

Queensland Building and Construction Commission (QBCC) to certify and install passive
penetration systems (Passive Fire Protection Fire Collars, penetrations and Joint
Sealing).
iii.
The licenced installer must provide a Form 16 stating that the product has been
installed in accordance with manufacturers installation guidelines, and referencing the
approved Omnii Fire Engineering Report.
Commissioning
b.
All fire safety equipment or equipment associated with fire safety must be correctly
commissioned including integrated testing.
Other Provisions
c.
A sign must be provided adjacent to the FIP or in the main entry listing the Alternative
Solution applicable to the building. The sign must be incised, inlaid or embossed letters on a
metal, wood, plastic or similar plate, securely and permanently attached to the wall.
d.
A copy of the approved Fire Engineering Report must be provided at building handover and
be located at one of the following:
e.
i.
within the FIP; or
ii.
in the Essential Safety Measures log book cabinet; or
iii.
Management In Use Plan manual; or
iv.
Maintenance manual for the fire protection systems.
No changes to the fire safety strategy without the expressed written consent of Omnii Pty
Ltd.
5675100 FER B
CONTENTS
321 Montague Road

West End Queensland
1.
Introduction
1.1
General
Omnii Pty Ltd has been commissioned by Profire (Qld) Pty Ltd to undertake a performance-based
assessment of the alternative building design for the development located at 321 Montague Road
West End Queensland.
The fire engineering assessment is to address the relevant Performance Requirements of the
National Construction Code (NCC) 2014 Building Code of Australia (BCA) Volume One [1], where
an Alternative Solution is proposed, via various analysis methods, as defined in the International
Fire Engineering Guidelines (IFEG) [2].
Utilising the BCA, an acceptable Building Solution is to be achieved by a combination of
compliance with the BCA Deemed-to-Satisfy (DTS) provisions and formulating an acceptable
Alternative Solution. This approach is intended to allow the development of an effective
alternative building design, whilst maintaining an acceptable level of Fire and Occupant Life
Safety.
1.2
Legislative Requirements
This project is to be designed under the Building Act 1975, Queensland. This invokes the Building
Regulations 2006 and the BCA.
The fire engineering assessment will need to demonstrate that the Alternative Solution achieves
compliance with the relevant BCA Performance Requirements. All other Performance
Requirements are to be met by complying with the BCA DTS provisions or accepted by the
Building Certifier and other Regulatory Authorities. It is also to be commensurate with the
Objectives outlined in Section 1.3.
Compliance with the BCA is illustrated via Clause A0.4 whereby to comply with legislative
requirements, the design of the building must comply with the BCA Performance Requirements.
Note the Performance Requirements are the only part of the BCA with which a design must
comply. The BCA Objectives and Functional Statements are given as guidance to explain the
intent of the Performance Requirements. Where the building solution complies with the BCA DTS
provisions, it is deemed to comply with the Performance Requirements.
BCA Clause A0.5 states that compliance with the BCA Performance Requirements can only be
achieved by:
a.
complying with the Deemed-to-Satisfy Provisions; or
b.
formulating an Alternative Solution which
c.
i.
complies with the Performance Requirements; or
ii.
is shown to be at least equivalent to the Deemed-to-Satisfy Provisions; or
a combination of (a) and (b).
The means by which an Alternative Building Solution must be assessed is illustrated via Clause
A0.8 of the BCA.
The various Assessment Methods that can be used, as per Clause A0.9 of the BCA, are:
a.
Evidence to support that the use of a material, form of construction or design meets a
Performance Requirement or a Deemed-to-Satisfy Provision as described in A2.2.
b.
Verification Methods such as
c.
i.
the Verification Methods in the BCA; or
ii.
such other Verification Methods as the appropriate authority accepts for determining
compliance with the Performance Requirements.
Comparison with the Deemed-to-Satisfy Provisions.
5675100 FER B
CONTENTS
321 Montague Road

West End Queensland
d.
Expert Judgement.
The Performance Requirements relevant to an Alternative Building Solution will be determined in

accordance with A0.10.
1.3
Client Objectives
It is understood that Profire (Qld) Pty Ltds objectives are to achieve compliance with the BCA.
At a community level, fire safety objectives are met if the relevant legislation and regulations are
complied with. As stated in Clause A0.4 of the BCA, A Building Solution will comply with the BCA
if it satisfies the Performance Requirements.
The BCA Performance Requirements are intended to meet the Objectives and Functional
Statements of the BCA, which outline the BCAs goal.
The BCAs goal in the area of fire safety is to protect the lives of the building occupants, facilitate
Fire Brigade intervention in the event of an emergency, and protect adjacent property from the
spread of fire and physical damage caused by structural failure [3].
1.4
Fire Brigade Objectives
The overall philosophy of the Fire Brigade objectives throughout Australia is to protect life,
property and the environment from fire [4].
We understand the Queensland Fire and Emergency Service (QFES) corporate objectives include
attendance to 90th percentile of all fires within 14 minutes from the time of notification.
Over and above the requirements of the BCA, the Fire Brigade has functions with regard to
property protection and considerations regarding occupational health and safety for its
employees, which we understand are commensurate with the Fire Safety Strategy to be
incorporated.
1.5
Fire Engineering Brief
Based on the single BCA DTS non-compliance, a Fire Engineering Brief (FEB) was not considered
necessary in this instance.
1.6
Relevant Stakeholders
The relevant stakeholders for this project are listed in Table 1.1 and Table 1.2.
Table 1.1 Design Stakeholders
Role
Company
Representative
Client/Principal
Profire (Qld) Pty Ltd
Pat Dunstan
Architect
Rothe Lowman Property Pty Ltd
TBC
Fire Safety Engineer

Fire Consultant
Omnii Pty Ltd
Jack Partridge
Daniel Green
Table 1.2 Review and Authority Stakeholders

Role
Company
Representative
Building Certifier
Michael Moran
Fire Brigade
QFES
TBC
5675100 FER B
CONTENTS
321 Montague Road

West End Queensland
1.7
Sources of Information
This document is based on the following sources of information:

a.
Email correspondence from Patrick Dunstan, Profire (Qld) Pty Ltd, received 8th February
2016, refer Appendix B.
b.
Exova Warringtonfire Fire engineering Report (CRM300759-RPT02-2), dated 6th July 2015,
refer Appendix B.
1.8
Glossary
A glossary of items is provided in Appendix A.
1.9
Limitations
Limitations relate to design boundaries applied to the analyses undertaken and the relevance of
empirical results for formulation of recommended outcomes. The following limitations apply to
this document:
a.
The relevant design criteria for the Alternative Solution to meet the Performance
Requirements of the BCA are set out herein. Where not specifically mentioned, the design is
expected to meet the BCA DTS requirements of all relevant codes and legislation at the time
of construction and/or at the time of production of this document.
b.
No liability is accepted for the application or use of the Fire Engineering Outcomes listed
herein and/or the parameters on which Omnii have based this analysis, including the set
design criteria and specific project scope/works and parameters, by any third party outside
the stakeholders and design team noted herein for this specific project works.
c.
No liability is accepted for the accuracy of the documents provided by others which form the
basis of the analysis.
d.
Drawings referred to or incorporated in this document may change resulting from design
variations. Readers of all fire engineering documentation must ensure that they observe the
latest project related drawings and relate these to this document. Changes to the sources of
information will require further fire engineering assessment to determine compliance with
the intent of the design objectives.
e.
Fire Resistance Level (FRL) grading periods, where not specifically indicated as a three
component unit for building works, must be applied at the given FRL rating in accordance
with the structural adequacy/integrity/insulation criteria specified in the relevant BCA DTS
provision for the Class occupancy applicable.
f.
The analysis of deliberate fires through acts of malicious intent or arson is limited to the
assessment as addressed in the DTS provisions of the BCA. That is to say:
i.
The likelihood of a fire through acts of malicious intent or arson is no greater than for a
design fully compliant with the DTS provisions of the BCA. The proposed design is
equivalent to the DTS provisions of the BCA in this regard.
ii.
Multiple fire ignitions are not considered in either the DTS provisions of the BCA or the
proposed design. While possible through malicious intent or arson, this event is
unlikely.
iii.
Ignition of a single item of fuel contained on the premises is within the limitation of this
analysis in so far as it is considered to result in design fires similar to those resulting by
accidental cause.
g.
Only one fire will occur at any time. It is in our opinion the BCA DTS provisions only
consider a single fire. This is evident by prescribing alternative exits and fire sprinkler
systems being designed for only one area of operation.
h.
Occupants will become aware of the fire through fire cues, respond to the cue, cope with the
cue and attempt to avoid the fire, as intended by the BCA for safe evacuation.
5675100 FER B
CONTENTS
321 Montague Road

West End Queensland
i.
Responsibility for re-installation and costs of any damages caused by fire is considered to be
beyond the scope of the fire engineering assessment.
j.
This fire engineering solution is derived making all reasonable assumptions regarding
Disability Discrimination Act (DDA) issues. That is, all physically and intellectually
handicapped occupants within the building are capable of evacuating to the fire exit of their
own accord, or are assisted by colleagues/others.
k.
The fire engineering assessment, in this case, will not include for building and contents
damage, stock loss, goodwill impact, environmental impact (in a fire situation) or any loss
of trade or business interruption associated directly or indirectly with a fire in these
premises.
l.
Except where specifically noted herein, the fire engineering assessment will not address nor
analyse explosive materials, multiple ignition sources and locations, processing of
flammable liquids, arson, sabotage of existing fire safety systems, bulk storage or the like.
m.
Omnii Pty Ltd incorporates all reasonable and practical efforts into producing a Fire Safety
Strategy commensurate with the clients objectives, expectations and operations. Omnii Pty
Ltd cannot guarantee, in producing a Fire Safety Strategy, by way of the FEB, FER and fire
engineering assessment, that ignition or fire will not occur. Moreover, no amount of advice
can guarantee that ignition or fire will not occur.
n.
Unless explicitly noted herein, this fire engineering assessment does not address protection
of the building during construction, renovation or demolition.
5675100 FER B
CONTENTS
321 Montague Road

West End Queensland
2.
Project Description
2.1
Principal Building Characteristics
2.1.1
General
The proposed development is two residential apartment buildings, Illuminate (Building A) and
Radiance (Building B). The two (2) residential buildings will be connected by a common
basement carpark and Building A contains retail tenancies. Furthermore, in this report both
buildings will be considered as one united building as these buildings are connected through a
common carpark. Building A contains a total of six (6) storeys and Building B contains a total of
twelve (12) storeys.
The intent of this FER is to address a single compliance that was not addressed in the Exova
Warringtonfire FER (CRM3001383759-RPT02-2) that was prepared for these buildings. All other
aspects of the buildings design are assumed to be in accordance with the BCA DTS Provisions or
to comply with the requirements of the Exova Warringtonfire FER.
The Fire Engineering Outcomes detailed in this FER pertain only to the single compliance issue
addressed in this FER. All other required Fire Engineering Outcomes and Fire Safety Systems
relating to these buildings are detailed in the Exova Warringtonfire FER. The Exova
Warringtonfire FER has been used for background information pertaining to the building and its
fire safety systems. Consequently this FER must be read in conjunction with the Exova
Warringtonfire FER.
2.1.2
Building Characterisation
Table 2.1 details the general subject building characteristics that are relevant to the BCA.
Table 2.1 General Building Characteristics
Characteristic
Tower A
Tower B
Effective height
16m
>25m
Rise in storeys
12
Classifications
Class 2, 6 and 7a
Class 2 and 7a
Type of construction
Relevant Code
NCC 2014 BCA Volume One
NCC 2014 BCA Volume One
Table 2.2 details the function or uses of the building or building part associated with the subject
building classification.
Table 2.2 Building Classification and Function or Use
Building Classification
Description
Class 2
(Residential)
The building is primarily a residential building with associated carparking

and auxiliary areas. Other than the residential parts, the building also
contains a small amount of retail space on the Ground Level.
5675100 FER B
CONTENTS
321 Montague Road

West End Queensland
2.1.3
Property Location
The proposed development is located at West End Queensland and will occupy the site, as shown
in Figure 2.1.
Site location
Figure 2.1 Site Location [5]
2.1.4
Proximity to Other Buildings and Boundaries
The site has existing buildings to the north and is bound to the east, south and west by
Montague Road, Beesley Street and Pidgeon Close respectively.
2.2
Fire Brigade Characteristics
2.2.1
Proximity to Fire Station
Table 2.3 details the fire stations in the local area around the proposed project. Attending Fire
Stations and travel distances have been obtained using resources available on
www.whereis.com.
Table 2.3 Local Area Fire Stations
Approx. Distance from
Site (km)
Staffing Type
279 Upper Roma Street,

Brisbane
2.8
Permanent
Ivory Street, Fortitude

Valley
5.1
Permanent
Fire Station
Fire Station Address
Roma Street
Kemp Place
2.2.2
Fire Brigade Equipment and Access
It is anticipated that the responding Fire Brigade (i.e. trained personnel) will arrive to this
building on receipt of a public initiated call (i.e. occupant or passerby) or an automated call from
the installed fire sprinkler system.
Consistent with Standard Operational Procedures, it is expected that responding Fire Brigade
personnel will be wearing appropriate turnout uniform in accordance with occupational health
and safety requirements.
5675100 FER B
CONTENTS
321 Montague Road

West End Queensland
3.
3.1
Design fires and Fire Scenarios are selected with consideration to the features of the building not
complying with the DTS provisions of the BCA. Fires generally occur based on the available
ignition sources and fuel load present within the various areas of the building.
Table 3.1 identifies the possible ignition sources, packages of fuel (fire sources) and the average
fuel load densities for the different occupancies (obtained from IFEG [2] and FEDG [6]) within
the building.
Table 3.1 Possible Ignition Sources and Fuel Loads
Ignition Sources
Fuel Load (MJ/m2)
Fuel Sources
Residential SOU (Class 2)
Smoking
Flat
300
Short circuiting of wiring

in electrical
appliances/equipment
Loose furnishings such as

couches, tables, chairs
Homes
500
Bedding and bedroom

furnishings
Vacation Home
500
Parking Building
200
Electrical faults in
distribution system
and/or fittings
Joinery units such as

bookshelves, wardrobes,
shelving
Cooking
Heating equipment
Garbage containers in
kitchen
Suspicious / Arson
Paper baskets in study,

bedrooms
Electrical equipment such

as television, sound
equipment
Kitchen appliances/cooking
Linings and covering

including carpet, rugs, wall
linings
Carpark (Class 7a)
Electrical faults in cars
Vehicles
Cigarette butts in
rubbish bins
Bikes
Flammable liquids/gases
Vehicles overheating
Plant and equipment
Suspicious / Arson
The Building Solution also incorporates preventative and protective measures, as detailed in
Table 3.2, which assists in reducing the risks associated with the ignition and fuel sources
identified in Table 3.1.
5675100 FER B
10
CONTENTS
321 Montague Road

West End Queensland
Table 3.2 Safety Measures

Preventative Measures
Protective Measures
Residential SOU (Class 2)
N/A
Fire compartmentation or bounding

construction
Smoke alarm system within SOUs
Fire sprinkler system
Sound System and Intercom System for

Emergency Purposes
Fire hydrant coverage
Fire extinguisher coverage
System monitoring by Fire Brigade or Fire

Brigade Monitoring Station
Fire compartmentation or bounding

construction
Fire sprinkler system
Fire hydrant coverage
Fire hose reel coverage
Fire extinguisher coverage
Sound System and Intercom System for

Emergency Purposes
Emergency Lighting and Exit Signs
System monitoring by Fire Brigade or Fire

Brigade Monitoring Station
Carpark (Class 7a)
No smoking policy
House keeping
Limited number of occupants
Arson/Suspicious fires are discounted in this instance (relative to the proposed Building Solution
reviewed) and are outside the scope of this document. No amount of professional advice (in both
DTS and performance based building solutions) can obviate from arson. Management
procedures/security are considered to address this issue as for any building.
It is noted that all new electrical works are understood to be installed in accordance with
AS 3000 and light fittings and electrical equipment would be expected to be in accordance with
appropriate Australian Standards, thus the risks associated with electrical works are considered
to be no greater than those in a BCA DTS building.
In any case, this assessments contained within this document assume that a fire will start.
5675100 FER B
11
CONTENTS
321 Montague Road

West End Queensland
4.
Alternative Building Solutions
The following sections detail the various aspects of the proposed Alternative Building Solution
and its deviation from the BCA DTS Provisions, the relevant BCA Performance Requirements that
need to be complied with, the Assessment and Analysis Methods and Methodologies, and
Acceptance Criteria for each BCA DTS departure.
4.1
cPVC Sprinkler Pipe Penetrations
4.1.1
General
This assessment addresses Alternate Solution 1.

4.1.2
BCA DTS Requirements
BCA Clause C3.15 requires that where an electrical, electronic, plumbing, mechanical ventilation
air-conditioning or other services penetrates a building element (other than an external wall or
roof) that is required to have an FRL with respect to integrity or insulation or a resistance to the
incipient spread of fire, that installation must comply with any one of the following:
a.
Tested Systems:
i.
4.1.3
The service, building element and any protection method at the penetration are
identical with a prototype assembly of the service, building element and protection
method which has been tested in accordance with AS 4072.1 and AS 1530.4 and has
achieved the required FRL or resistance to the incipient spread of fire.
Proposed Building Solution
It is proposed that SOU bounding walls shall be constructed to comply with the BCA DTS
provisions, except that cPVC sprinkler pipe penetrations shall be through a 60 minute wall in lieu
of a 90 minute wall :
a.
Shall be installed by an appropriately qualified contractor, licenced by the Queensland

Building and Construction Commission (QBCC) to certify and install passive penetration
systems (Passive Fire Protection Fire Collars, Penetrations and Joint Sealing).
b.
Shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer installation guidelines.
c.
The licenced installer shall provide a Form 16 stating that the product has been installed in
accordance with manufacturers installation guidelines, and referencing the approved Omnii
Fire Engineering Report.
The buildings are to be provided with a fire sprinkler system, smoke detection and alarm system,
a Sound System and Intercom System for Emergency Purposes (SSISEP), fire hydrant system,
fire hose reel system and fire extinguishers Refer to the Fire Engineering Outcomes Section of
this report and to the Exova Warringtonfire FER (CRM3001383759-RPT02-2) for detailed fire
safety measures which form part of the proposed Building Solution.
4.1.4
Code Compliance and Assessment Methods
Compliance with the BCA Performance Requirements is to be achieved via Clause A0.5(b)(i), as
detailed in Section 1.2.
Assessment Method A0.9(b)(ii) and A0.9(c) and (d) as detailed in Section 1.2, will be utilised, as
appropriate, to demonstrate that the Alternative Solution complies with the relevant
Performance requirements determined in accordance with A0.10.
The Alternative Solution is required to meet BCA Performance Requirement CP2 and CP8.
4.1.5
Analysis Methods and Acceptance Criteria
Compliance with the Performance Requirement will be achieved using a qualitative analysis
method based on sprinkler protection and testing of the fire stopping product to UL 1479.
5675100 FER B
12
CONTENTS
321 Montague Road

West End Queensland
Acceptance will be shown if the risk of fire spread to/from the SOUs via the cPVC sprinkler pipe
penetrations is not unduly increased.
4.1.6
Intent
The intent of BCA Clause C3.15, as stipulated by the Guide to the BCA, is to maintain the fire
performance of building elements by limiting fire spread by way of service penetrations.
4.1.7
Assessment
The 3M 3000WT Firestop product is approved for use on the BlazeMaster cPVC sprinkler pipe fire
rated penetrations by Lubirzol, the manufacturer of BlazeMaster, refer Appendix D. 3M 3000WT
firestopping of BlazeMaster cPVC sprinkler pipe penetrations has been tested to AS 1530.4-2005
Methods for fire tests on building materials, components and structures part 4: fire-resistance
test of elements of construction, and passed with a rating of 120 minutes, refer to Appendix E
for Certificate of Test.
The 3M 3000WT firestopping of BlazeMaster cPVC sprinkler pipe penetrations has been tested to
the requirements of AS 1530.42005 in a 120 minute fire rated lightweight wall, i.e. two layers
of 16mm fire rated plaster on each side of a stud wall. However, it is proposed that the system is
to be installed in a 60 minute fire rated lightweight wall, constructed of a single layer of 13mm
fire rated plasterboard each side of the stud wall.
As the non-compliance is a penetration of a fire wall, the structural component of the FRL is not
applicable. However, the penetration is expected to maintain the integrity and insulation
components of the FRL.
The CSIRO Test Report [7] indicates that the 3M 3000WT Firestop product is installed around the
cPVC pipe to the depth of the plasterboard cover, i.e. 32mm, on each side of the wall. It is noted
from the fire rating achieved by plasterboard wall systems that the relationship between product
thickness and achieved FRL is not necessarily linear, e.g. 13mm of fire rated plasterboard each
side of a stud wall can achieve a 60 minute insulation value, but to achieve a 120 minute
insulation value 32mm of fire rated plasterboard each side. Considering this, it is reasonable to
assume that applying the 3M 3000WT firestopping product to the depth of the fire rated
plasterboard in the 60 minute fire rated wall, i.e. 13mm each side, will maintain the insulation
and integrity values of the wall.
The Residential Levels of the building are protected with a residential sprinkler system, installed
to the requirements of AS 2118.1-1999. The building is also provided with a smoke detection
and alarm system, a Sound System and Intercom System for Emergency Purposes (SSEP), fire
hydrant system, and fire extinguishers. These systems are considered to provide adequate
occupant warning, and allow for initial attack by occupants, as well as providing for fire brigade
intervention.
The International Fire Engineering Guidelines (IFEG) [2] states that fire suppression can be
assumed to commence when sprinkler activation occurs, provided that:
a.
the enclosure height is low,
b.
the size of the enclosure is small,
c.
the fire size is relatively low,
d.
significant shielding is not expected, and
e.
the fire is likely to be extinguished with one or a few sprinkler heads.
It is considered that a fire in a residential SOU meets the above requirements, and therefore
sprinkler suppression of the fire is likely to occur.
With the sprinkler system controlling/suppressing the fire, and Fire Brigade intervention
expected to extinguish the fire, it is considered that the risk that penetrations will be subjected
to a fully developed fire is very low.
5675100 FER B
13
CONTENTS
321 Montague Road

West End Queensland
The building is located in an inner city suburb of Brisbane, with two permanently manned
responding fire stations within 7km of the building (Roma St and Kemp Place). Response from
these stations can include pumpers and ladder appliances as required. Given the proximity of the
responding fire stations, fire brigade is expected to commence firefighting operations within
30 minutes.
Given the function or use of the residential levels of the building, the fire load and potential fire
intensity in the residential levels of the building are no different to those expected in a BCA DTS
compliant building, and the sprinklers are expected to control or suppress the fire upon
operation. Sprinkler systems in Australia have a high degree of reliability, as shown in
Appendix C.
Given the above, it is considered that the intent of BCA Clause C3.15 and Performance
Requirements CP2 and CP8 are met.
4.1.8
Discussion
Table 3 and Table 4 provide a review of the relevant considerations of the identified Performance
Requirements CP2 and CP8, so that compliance with the BCA can be achieved.
Table 3 - Performance Requirement CP2
Performance Requirement
Comment
CP2(a) A building must have elements which will, to the degree necessary, avoid the spread of fire
to exits
to sole-occupancy units and
public corridors
The assessment has shown that the proposed alternative solution

reduces the risk of fire spread to/from the SOUs and public corridors
to the degree necessary.
between buildings
Not a consideration for this assessment
in a building
The assessment has shown that the proposed alternative solution

reduces the risk of fire spread to/from the SOUs and public corridors
to the degree necessary.
CP2(b) Avoidance of the spread of fire referred to in (a) must be appropriate to

the function and use of the
building
Residential building
Considered when defining parameters such as fire loads and fire
hazards, and safety measures for the building.
the fire load
Addressed as part of assessment fire load, intensity and hazards

are in line with what would be expected in a building with the
considered function or use.
the potential fire intensity

the fire hazard
the number of storeys in the
building
Type A construction each storey is fire separated therefore

considered not directly relevant to the Alternative Solution.
its proximity to other property
Distances to boundaries and other buildings on the allotment are

considered to be BCA DTS compliant. Proximity to other property is
not considered to be directly relevant.
any active fire safety systems

installed within the building
Fire safety systems provided in accordance with BCA DTS

requirements. The active fire safety systems within the building will
only serve to enhance the level of safety provided by the proposed
solution and have been considered in the assessment.
the size of the fire compartment
The size of the fire compartments within the building are BCA DTS
compliant. The size of the fire compartment is considered not
relevant to the Alternative Solution
fire brigade intervention
The assessment carried out has shown that the proposed alternative
5675100 FER B
14
CONTENTS
321 Montague Road

West End Queensland
Comment
solution reduces the risk of fire spread to/from the SOUs to the
degree necessary. Fire brigade intervention is therefore not
considered directly relevant in this case.
other elements they support
The penetrations are through bounding construction that is not load

bearing. Therefore, this parameter considered not directly relevant
to the Alternative Solution.
the evacuation time
The assessment carried out has shown that the proposed alternative
solution reduces the risk of fire spread to/from the SOUs to the
degree necessary. Therefore fire spread beyond the compartment of
fire origin is not expected to occur, and as evacuation of occupants
within the compartment of origin not dependent on the performance
of the penetrations of the bounding construction, evacuation time is
not considered directly relevant in this case.
Table 4 - Performance Requirement CP8

Comment
CP8 Any building element provided to resist the spread of fire must be protected, to the degree
necessary, so that an adequate level of performance is maintained
where openings, construction
joints and the like occur
Considered to be in accordance with the BCA DTS provisions.

Therefore this parameter is considered not relevant to the
Alternative Solution
where penetrations occur for

building services
Addressed as part of the assessment, which has demonstrated that

fire spread is unlikely to occur
4.1.9
Conclusion
Based on the above analysis and the proposed fire safety measures, the risk of fire spread to
and from the allotment boundary is considered to be restricted, to the degree necessary.
Therefore, it is considered that Performance Requirements CP2 and CP8 are satisfied.
5675100 FER B
15
CONTENTS
321 Montague Road

West End Queensland
5.
Conclusion
Based on the analysis and assessment undertaken throughout the document, and
implementation of the Fire Engineering Outcomes, the Alternative Building Solution is considered
to meet the relevant BCA Performance Requirements.
5675100 FER B
16
CONTENTS
321 Montague Road

West End Queensland
6.
References
1. Australian Building Codes Board. National Construction Code Series 2015, Volume One,
'Building Code of Australia Class 2 to Class 9 Buildings'. s.l. : Australian Building Codes Board,
2015.
2. . International Fire Engineering Guidelines. s.l. : Australian Building Codes Board, Edition
2005.
3. . Productivity Commission Study into the Reform of Building Regulation in Australia (ABCB
Chairmans Submission). Canberra City ACT : Australian Building Codes Board, April 2014.
4. Australasian Fire Authorities Council. Fire Brigade Intervention Model . V2.2. s.l. :
Australasian Fire Authorities Council, October 2004.
5. www.google.com.au/maps. [Online]
6. Spearpoint, Michael. Fire Engineering Design Guide. Christchurch : New Zealand Centre for
Advanced Engineering, University of Canterbury, NZ, Third Edition, 2008.
7. Commonwealth Scientific and Industrial Research Organisation. Fire-resistnace test on
service penetrations through a vertical separating element. Sydney : CSIRO, 2015. FSP 1706.
8. The Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers (CIBSE). Guide E: Fire
Engineering. London : The Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers, Second Edition,
September 2003.
9. Warrington Fire Research (Aust) Pty Ltd, Building Control Commission. Guide for the
Design of Fire Resistant Barriers and Structures. s.l. : Warrington Fire Research (Aust) Pty Ltd,
Building Control Commission, August 2000.
10. Marryatt, I R. Fire A Century of Automatic Sprinkler Protection in Australia and New
Zealand 1886 1986. s.l. : Craftsman Press Pty Ltd, 1988.
11. National Fire Protection Association. Fire Protection Handbook. 20th Edition. Quincy :
NFPA, 2008.
5675100 FER B
17
CONTENTS
321 Montague Road

West End Queensland
Appendix A Glossary
This document is to be read in conjunction with the definitions of terms listed in Part A1 of the BCA [1] and
the following definitions set by Omnii Pty Ltd. The definitions listed here overrules any difference arising
between the BCA and the list below.
Note that the definitions listed below may or may not necessarily apply specifically to this particular project
in this instance.
A Building Solution which complies with the Performance Requirements other than by reason of satisfying the
Deemed-to-Satisfy Provisions.
Assessment Method
A method used for determining that a Building Solution complies with the Performance Requirements.
Available Safe Evacuation Time (ASET)
The time between ignition of a Fire and the onset of untenable conditions in a specific part of a building.
Building Solution
A solution which complies with the Performance Requirements and is:
(a)
an Alternative Solution; or
(b)
a solution which complies with the Deemed-to-Satisfy Provisions; or
(c)
a combination of (a) and (b).
A Building Solution will comply with the BCA if it satisfies the Performance Requirements.
Comparative
Analysis that compares an Alternative Solution to a BCA DTS building of similar geometry and use. It
evaluates whether the Alternative Solution is equivalent to (or better than) the DTS building.
DTS: Deemed-to-Satisfy (Provisions)
The prescriptive provisions of a code that are deemed to meet the Performance Requirements.
Design Fire
A mathematical representation of a Fire that is characterised by the variation of heat output with time and is
used as the basis for assessing Fire Safety Strategy.
Design Fire Scenario
A Fire Scenario that is used as the basis for a design fire.
Deterministic Method
A methodology based on physical relationships derived from scientific theories and empirical results that for
a given set of conditions will always produce the same outcome.
Engineering Judgement
Process exercised by a professional who is qualified because of training, experience and recognised skills to
complement, supplement, accept or reject elements of a quantitative analysis.
Evacuation
The process of occupants becoming aware of a fire-related emergency and going through a number of
behavioural stages before and/or while they travel to reach a place of safety, internal or external, to their
building.
Expert Judgement
The process exercised by an appropriate person who is qualified, because of training, experience and
recognised skills to complement, supplement and assess an alternative solution using qualitative analysis or
Engineering judgement.
Fire
The process of combustion.
5675100 FER B
CONTENTS
321 Montague Road

West End Queensland
Fire Engineering Brief (FEB)

A documented process that defines the scope of work for the fire engineering assessment and the basis for
analysis as agreed by stakeholders.
Fire Engineering Report (FER)
A document which is to detail the analysis, arguments, calculations and modelling used to verify the design
meets the relevant Performance Requirements.
Fire Safety Strategy
One or any combination of the methods used in a building to:
(a)
warn people of an emergency,
(b)
provide for safe evacuation,
(c)
restrict the spread of fire, or
(d)
extinguish a fire.
It includes both active and passive systems.

Fire Scenario
The ignition, growth, spread, decay or burnout of a Fire in a building as modified by the Fire Safety Strategy
of the building. A Fire Scenario is described by the times of occurrence of the events that comprise the Fire
Scenario.
Fire Source Feature (FSF)
A Fire Source Feature (FSF) means:
(a)
The far boundary of a road, river, lake or the like adjoining the allotment, or
(b)
A side or rear boundary of the allotment, or
(c)
An external wall of another building on the same allotment which is not a Class 10 building.
Flaming Fire
A fire involving the production of flames (including flashover fires).
Flashover
The rapid transition from a localised fire to the combustion of all exposed surfaces within a room or
compartment.
Fuel Load
The quantity of combustible material within a room or compartment measured in terms of calorific value.
Hazard
The outcome of a particular set of circumstances that has the potential to give rise to unwanted
consequences.
A requirement which states the level of performance which a Building Solution must meet.
Place of Safety
A place within a building or within the vicinity of a building, from which people may disperse after escaping
the effects of a fire. It may be an open space (such as an open court) or a public space (such as a foyer or
roadway.
Probabilistic Method
A methodology that relies on the performance of various fire safety systems and measures and assigned
frequency of occurrence. A probabilistic method may also incorporate stochastic distributions, in lieu of
discrete variables.
Qualitative Analysis
Analysis that involves a non-numerical and conceptual evaluation of the identified processes.
Quantitative Analysis
Analysis that involves numerical evaluation of the identified processes.
5675100 FER B
CONTENTS
321 Montague Road

West End Queensland
Rate of Heat Release (RHR) or Heat Release Rate (HRR)

The rate at which heat is released by fire.
Required Safe Evacuation Time (RSET)
The time required for safe evacuation of occupants to a place of safety prior to the onset of untenable
conditions.
Response Time
The time it takes occupants to respond to an alarm or cues and egress the building.
Risk
The product of the likelihood and consequence of a hazardous event.
Sensitivity Analysis
A guide to the level of accuracy and/or criticality of individual parameters determined by investigating the
response of the output parameters to changes in these individual parameters.
Smoke
The airborne solid and liquid particles and gases evolved when a material undergoes pyrolysis or combustion,
together with the quantity of air that is entrained or otherwise mixed into the mass.
Smouldering Fire
The solid phase combustion of a material without flames and with smoke and heat production.
Sub-System
A part of a Fire Safety System that comprises Fire Safety measures to protect against a particular hazard (eg
smoke spread). Note: The IFEG defines six sub-systems. This also comprises the Fire Safety Strategy.
Tenable Conditions
Environmental conditions associated with a fire in which human life is sustainable.
To The Degree Necessary
Consideration of all the criteria referred to in the Performance Requirement to determine the outcome
appropriate to the circumstances, whereby in certain situations it may not be necessary to incorporate any
specific measures to meet the Performance Requirement.
Untenable Conditions
Environmental conditions associated with a fire in which human life is not sustainable.
Zone Model
A fire model that divides an enclosure into one or more zones and simulates the emission phenomena, the
movement of smoke and the concentrations of toxic species in various enclosures so that times of critical
events, such as the detection of the fire and the development of untenable conditions, can be estimated.
5675100 FER B
CONTENTS
321 Montague Road

West End Queensland
Appendix B Correspondence
5675100 FER B
CONTENTS
From:
Sent:
To:
Subject:
Attachments:
Jack Partridge
Tuesday, 22 March 2016 10:22 AM
Daniel Green
FW: 5675100 FER A - 321 Montague Road
5675100 FER A - 160308 RT Review.pdf
Regards,
Jack Partridge Senior Fire Engineer
m 0448 031 353 e jack.partridge@omnii.com.au w omnii.com.au
Qld L1, 8/56 Logan Road

Woolloongabba Qld 4102
t 61 7 3223 7370
Vic L2, 51 Queen Street

Melbourne Vic 3000
t 61 3 9620 4025
WA L1, 982 Wellington Street

West Perth WA 6005
t 61 8 6160 2300
National fax 1300 765 109

Limits of Liability and Disclaimer:
The information contained within and accompanying this e-mail is confidential, belonging to the sender which is legally privileged. This information
is intended only for the use of the individual, or entity included in the distribution listing. If you are not the intended recipient, you should not read,
print, re-transmit, store, or act in reliance on this e-mail, or any attachments, and should destroy all copies of them. If you have received this email in error, please notify us immediately by return e-mail or telephone. Virus scanning software is used by Omnii, the recipient of this e-mail shall
be responsible for their own virus protection and Omnii shall be not held liable for any subsequent loss, damage, cost or expense.
From: Pat Dunstan [mailto:pat@profire.net.au]

Sent: Thursday, 10 March 2016 12:56 PM
To: Jack Partridge
Cc: Saranya Chaidee
Subject: RE: 5675100 FER A - 321 Montague Road
Hi Jack,
The certifier has reviewed the FER and considers it acceptable for implementation on the project.
They have however nominated a handful of minor clerical changes.
Can you please review and update accordingly.
Please call should you need to discuss any of their request 0438 043 959.
Thanks and regards,
CONTENTS
mailto:jack.partridge@omnii.com.au ]
From: Jack Partridge [[mailto:jack.partridge@omnii.com.au
Sent: Thursday, 3 March 2016 5:48 PM
To: pat@profire.net.au
saranya.chaidee@omnii.com.au >
Cc: Saranya Chaidee <<saranya.chaidee@omnii.com.au
Subject: 5675100 FER A - 321 Montague Road
Hello Pat,
Please find attached the FER for Montague Rd. Any questions on the attached please call
to discuss.
Regards,
Jack Partridge Senior Fire Engineer
m 0448 031 353 e jack.partridge@omnii.com.au w omnii.com.au
Qld L1, 8/56 Logan Road

Woolloongabba Qld 4102
t 61 7 3223 7370
Vic L2, 51 Queen Street

Melbourne Vic 3000
t 61 3 9620 4025
WA L1, 982 Wellington Street

West Perth WA 6005
t 61 8 6160 2300
National fax 1300 765 109

Limits of Liability and Disclaimer:
The information contained within and accompanying this e-mail
mail is
is confidential,
confidential, belonging
belonging to
to the
the sender
sender which
which is
is legally
legally privileged.
privileged. This
This information
information
is intended only for the use of the individual, or entity included in the
the distribution
distribution listing.
listing. If
If you
you are
are not
not the
the intended
intended recipient,
recipient, you
you should
should not
not read,
read,
mail, or
or any
any attachments,
attachments, and
and should
should destroy
destroy all
all copies
copies of
of them.
them. If
If you
you have
have received
received this
this eeprint, re-transmit, store, or act in reliance on this e-mail,
mail in error, please notify us immediately by return e-mail
mail or
or telephone.
telephone. Virus
Virus scanning
scanning software
software is
is used
used by
by Omnii,
Omnii, the
the recipient
recipient of
of this
this ee-mail shall
be
be responsible
responsible for
for their
their own
own virus
virus protection
protection and
and Omnii
Omnii shall
shall be
be not
not held
held liable
liable for
for any
any subsequent
subsequent loss,
loss, damage,
damage, cost
cost or
or exp
expense.
CONTENTS
Light & Co - 'Illuminate' (Building A) and 'Radiance' (Building B)

321 Montague Road
West End, QLD 4101
Report Number: CRM300759-RPT02-2

Date: 7th August 2015
Client:
CONTENTS
Report No. CRM300759-RPT02-2

Page 2 of 92
AUTHORISATION
No.
Comment / reason for issue
Issue date
Prepared by*
Reviewed by*
FER updated to include an additional

alternative solution for omission of
sprinklers in concealed ceiling spaces
provided with Derby style ceiling fans
(e.g. ceiling spaces in wet areas).
7/08/2015
Kelvin Bong
Summer Ding & Peter

Downer
Issue date
Prepared by*
Reviewed by*
24/04/2015
Kelvin Bong
Summer Ding
REVISION HISTORY
No.
1

FER issue for review and approval by
stakeholders
*For and on behalf of Exova Warringtonfire Aus Pty Ltd.
CONTENTS

Page 3 of 92
CONDITIONS OF USE
Copyright Exova Warringtonfire Aus Pty Ltd 2015.
The report addressee may only reproduce this report in full for use with respect to the project specified in the
report. No organisations or individuals are permitted to reproduce this report or any part thereof for any other
purpose without the prior written consent of a Director of Exova Warringtonfire Aus Pty Ltd.
The copyright and intellectual property rights of Exova Warringtonfire Aus Pty Ltd extend to the data, ideas,
methodologies, calculation procedures, and conclusions presented in this report and must not be used without
authorisation in writing from Exova Warringtonfire Aus Pty Ltd. This report is subject to change and no liability will
be accepted in relation to any loss resulting from use of the report pending approval from the authority having
jurisdiction.
CONTACT INFORMATION
Exova Warringtonfire Aus Pty Ltd
Victoria
New South Wales
Unit 2, 409-411 Hammond Road

Dandenong Victoria 3175
Australia
Suite 2002a, Level 20, 44 Market Street

Sydney NSW 2000
Australia
T: +61 (0)3 9767 1000

F: +61 (0)3 9767 1001
T: +61 (0)2 8270 7600

F: +61 (0)2 9299 6076
Queensland
Perth
Northpoint, Unit 29, Level 6

231 North Quay
Brisbane QLD 4000
Australia
Level 11, 251 Adelaide Terrace

Perth WA 6000
Australia
T: +61 (0)7 3238 1700

F: +61 (0)7 3211 4833
W: http://www.exova.com
E: market.pacific@exova.com
CONTENTS

Page 4 of 92
OVERVIEW (EXECUTIVE SUMMARY)

Exova Warringtonfire Aus Pty Ltd has been engaged by Pradella Developments Pty Ltd for the professional fire
engineering services to formulate fire safety design solutions for the BCA-DTS provision departures associated
with the proposed residential apartment buildings, Illuminate (Building A) and Radiance (Building B) as part of
the Light & Co project, at 321 Montague Road, West End, QLD 4101.
The Fire Engineering Brief (FEB No. CRM300759-RPT01-3 dated 23rd March 2015) was accepted upon by the
design team and the approving authorities. The FEB was prepared generally as described in the International Fire
Engineering Guidelines (ABCB 2005) and the Engineers Australia Society of Fire Safety Code of Practice. The
QFES acceptance-in-principle of the FEB is included in Appendix B of this report.
The Fire Engineering Brief process involved the collaborative development and agreement of an appropriate
methodology, structure and trial concept(s) by relevant stakeholders. In conjunction with meetings and
correspondence with relevant stakeholders and authorities having jurisdiction, the FEB forms the basis for further
detailed fire safety analysis and design presented in this Fire Engineering Report (FER).
It is noted here that following the issue of the FER Revision 1 (FER No. CRM300759-RPT02-2 dated 24th April
2015), an additional alternative solution for omission of sprinkler protection to Derby style ceiling fans in concealed
ceiling spaces above wet areas of residential units has been included in this FER.
As confirmed by the Building Certifier, the BCA-DTS provision departures and proposed alternative solutions for
this project are detailed in Section 5 of this report.
The fire engineering strategy/requirements are detailed in Section 8 and the requirements for standards of
construction, commissioning, management and maintenance in Section 11 shall be provided to the buildings. It is
the responsibility of individual stakeholder or discipline consultant to ensure that the relevant fire engineering
requirements in this report are correctly incorporated into their design.
CONTENTS

Page 5 of 92
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 8
1.1
Project ............................................................................................................................... 8
1.2
Client ................................................................................................................................. 8
1.3
Project Address ................................................................................................................. 8
1.4
Description of Work ........................................................................................................... 8
1.5
Scope and Limits of Report ............................................................................................... 8
1.6
Regulatory Framework ...................................................................................................... 8
1.7
Information Considered for Fire Engineering Report ........................................................ 8
1.8
Fire Engineering Stakeholders ........................................................................................10
Principal Building Characteristics ..............................................................................................11
2.1
General Description .........................................................................................................11
2.2
Site Plan ..........................................................................................................................14
2.3
Functional use of the buildings ........................................................................................14
2.4
Unusual or High Hazard Factors .....................................................................................14
Dominant Occupant Characteristics ..........................................................................................15
3.1
General Occupant Review ..............................................................................................15
3.2
Distribution / Occupancy density .....................................................................................15
3.3
Residents and their Visitors, Retail Customers ...............................................................15
3.4
Staff Members .................................................................................................................15
3.5
Authorised Visitors ..........................................................................................................15
Fire Safety Design Objectives .....................................................................................................16
4.1
Client Objectives .............................................................................................................16
4.2
Loss Control Objectives ..................................................................................................16
4.3
Regulatory Objectives .....................................................................................................16
4.4
Fire Brigade Objectives ...................................................................................................16
BCA Analysis Information ...........................................................................................................17
5.1
Specific BCA-DTS Provision Departures and Applicable BCA Performance
Requirements .................................................................................................................................17
5.2
Variations to Other Objectives to be Addressed .............................................................20
Hazards ..........................................................................................................................................21
6.1
General Layout ................................................................................................................21
6.2
Activities ..........................................................................................................................21
6.3
Ignition Sources ...............................................................................................................21
6.4
Fuel Sources ...................................................................................................................21
6.5
Interactions Between Ignition and Fuel Sources .............................................................22
6.6
Fire prevention ................................................................................................................22
Fire Preventative & Protective .....................................................................................................23
7.1
Hazards Mitigation ...........................................................................................................23
7.2
Management Measures...................................................................................................23
Fire Safety Measures ....................................................................................................................25
8.1
Fire Resistance and Compartmentation ..........................................................................25
8.2
Egress Provision .............................................................................................................27
8.3
Services and Equipment .................................................................................................35
8.4
Management Provisions ..................................................................................................36
Approach and Methods of Analysis ...........................................................................................38
9.1
Fire Engineering Analysis................................................................................................38
9.2
Assessment Methodology ...............................................................................................38
CONTENTS

Page 6 of 92
10
Relevant Acceptance Criteria ......................................................................................................41

10.1
Judgement of Acceptance Criteria ..................................................................................41
10.2
Environmental and Loss Control Acceptance Criteria ....................................................41
10.3
Acceptance Criteria for the Analysis ...............................................................................41
11
Standards of Construction, Commissioning, Management and Maintenance.......................44
11.1
Construction ....................................................................................................................44
11.2
Commissioning ................................................................................................................44
11.3
Management-in-Use ........................................................................................................44
11.4
Maintenance ....................................................................................................................45
FIRE ENGINEERING ANALYSIS ....................................................................................................................46
12
Alternative Solution 1 Extended Travel Distances in Basement Carpark ...........................47
12.1
BCA-DTS Provision Departure and Alternative Solution ................................................47
12.2
Detailed Fire Engineering Assessment ...........................................................................47
12.3
Conclusion .......................................................................................................................48
13
Alternative Solution 2 Rationalised FRL for SOU Shower Floor (Building A) .....................49
13.1
13.2
13.3
Conclusion .......................................................................................................................51
14
Alternative Solution 3 Extended Travel Distances at Levels 1 -5 (Building A) ...................52
14.1
14.2
15
Alternative Solution 4 Discharge from Fire Isolated Stairs (Building A) .............................55
15.1
15.2
15.3
Conclusion .......................................................................................................................56
16
Alternative Solution 5 Omission of Sprinklers (Building A)..................................................57
16.1
16.2
16.3
Conclusion .......................................................................................................................58
17
Alternative Solution 6 Omission of Smoke Exhuast in Class 6 (Building A) ......................59
17.1
17.2
17.3
Conclusion .......................................................................................................................59
18
Alternative Solution 7 Rationalised FRL for SOU Shower Floor (Building B) .....................60
18.1
18.2
18.3
Conclusion .......................................................................................................................62
19
Alternative Solution 8 Extended Travel Distances From SOUs at Levels 1 - 11 (Building
B)
63
19.1
19.2
20
Alternative Solution 9 Extended Travel Distances From Multi Purpose Room at Level 1
(Building B)....................................................................................................................................66
20.1
20.2
21
Alternative Solution 10 Discharge from Fire Isolated Stairs (Building B) ...........................69
21.1
21.2
21.3
Conclusion .......................................................................................................................70
CONTENTS

Page 7 of 92
22
23
24
Alternative Solution 11 Omission of Sprinkler Protection To Derby Fans (Within

Concealed Ceiling Spaces) (Building B) ....................................................................................71
Conclusion ....................................................................................................................................73
Validity / Disclaimer ......................................................................................................................74
APPENDIX A
PRELIMINARY QFES CONSULTATION MEETING HELD ON 19
TH
DECEMBER 2015 75
APPENDIX B
QFES ACCEPTANCE IN PRINCPLE OF FEB (REPORT NO. CRM300759-RPT01-3
RD
DATED 23 MARCH 2015) ............................................................................................................................92
CONTENTS

Page 8 of 92
INTRODUCTION
1.1
PROJECT
The project relates to the proposed residential apartment buildings, Illuminate (Building A) and
Radiance (Building B) as part of the Light & Co project, in West End, Brisbane.
1.2
CLIENT
Exova Warringtonfire Aus Pty Ltd (Exova) has been engaged by Pradella Develpments Pty Ltd.
1.3
PROJECT ADDRESS
The proposed residential buildings are to be located at 321 Montague Road, West End, QLD 4101.
1.4
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
Exova has been engaged to provide alternative solutions to address the BCA-DTS provision
departures identified by the Building Certifier for this project.
1.5
SCOPE AND LIMITS OF REPORT

Sean Igoe of Philip Chun & Associates Pty Ltd is the Building Certifier for the purposes of
considering applications for building permits relating to the proposed buildings and construction
works at the above address. In considering the applications, the issues described in Section 5 were
identified as varying from the deemed-to-satisfy (DTS) provisions of the BCA.
The Client has requested that these issues be considered as Alternative Solutions and addressed in
accordance with appropriate methodologies and procedures so as to satisfy regulatory requirements
for the project. The analysis of the fire safety strategy against stakeholder agreed objectives is
reported in this Fire Engineering Report, and provides a technical opinion to the Authorities Having
Jurisdiction in their considerations of approving the proposed design for compliance with the
applicable regulations.
The analysis was undertaken in line with the objectives and limitations of the Society of Fire Safety
Code of Practice, and therefore does not specifically consider arson (other than as a source of initial
ignition), multiple simultaneous ignition sources, acts of terrorism, protection of property (other than
adjoining property), business interruption or losses, or personal or moral obligations of the owner /
occupier.
Exova has developed the fire safety strategy for this project taking note of our duty as designers of
workplaces under the relevant workplace safety legislation. Other practitioners documenting these
designs may also have a duty under such legislation which they must consider in preparing their
designs.
1.6
REGULATORY FRAMEWORK
In addition to the requirements of the BCA 2014, the following legislation (QLD) is pertinent to the
project:
1.7
Sustainable Planning Act 2009
Sustainable Planning Regulation 2009
Building Act 1975
Building Regulation 2006
Building Fire Safety Regulation 2008
Fire and Emergency Services Act 1990
INFORMATION CONSIDERED FOR FIRE ENGINEERING REPORT

The following documents or information have been considered in the formulation of this Fire
Engineering Report:
(i)
Regular design team meetings and communications;
CONTENTS

Page 9 of 92
(ii)
Preliminary Design Assessment Report: Summary of requirements to issue the Development

Permit (Building) prepared by Philip Chun Building Code Consulting, Job Number: 14-203752,
Revision No. 02 dated 23 October 2014.
(iii)
Preliminary QFES consultation meeting held on 19th December 2014, refer to Appendix A for
meeting minutes and materials presented at the meeting.
It is noted here that following the preliminary QFES consultation meeting held on 19 th
December 2014, additional alternative solutions associated with reduced FRL for SOU shower
slab setdown only for Building A and reduced FRL for the residential floor slabs for Building B
have been proposed by the design team. These alternative solutions have been incorporated
in this report.
(iv)
Architectural drawings associated with this report are referenced as follows:
Table 1.1 Referenced architectural drawings
Number
A_S_WD_0102
Title
Site Ground Plan
Revision
1
Date
11.11.14
A_CA_WD_0012
Basement Level 1 Overall Site Plan
20.04.15
A_CA_WD_0011
20.04.15
A_CA_WD_0013
Ground & Podium Level Plan
20.04.15
Building A Illuminate
A_A_WD_0100
Ground Floor Plan
10.04.15
A_A_WD_0101
Level 1 Floor Plan
10.04.15
A_A_WD_0102
Level 2-4 Floor Plan
10.04.15
A_A_WD_0103
Level 5 Floor Plan
10.04.15
A_A_WD_0106
Roof Plan
10.04.15
A_A_WD_1000
North Elevation
22.12.14
A_A_WD_1001
South Elevation
22.12.14
A_A_WD_1002
East Elevation
22.12.14
A_A_WD_1003
West Elevation
22.12.14
A_A_WD_1100
Building Section 1
10.04.15
A_A_WD_1101
Building Section 2
10.04.15
A_A_WD_1102
Building Section 3
10.04.15
Building B Radiance
A_B_WD_0100
Ground Floor Plan
10.04.15
A_B_WD_0101
Level 1 Floor Plan
10.04.15
A_B_WD_0102
Level 2 Floor Plan
10.04.15
A_B_WD_0103
Level 3 Floor Plan
10.04.15
A_B_WD_0104
Level 4 Floor Plan
10.04.15
A_B_WD_0105
Level 5 Floor Plan
10.04.15
A_B_WD_0106
Level 6 Floor Plan
10.04.15
A_B_WD_0107
Level 7 & 9 Floor Plan
10.04.15
A_B_WD_0108
10.04.15
A_B_WD_0109
Level 11 Floor Plan
10.04.15
A_B_WD_0110
Roof Plan
10.04.15
A_B_WD_1000
Building B North Elevation
22.12.14
A_B_WD_1001
Building B East Elevation
22.12.14
A_B_WD_1002
Building B South Elevations
22.12.14
A_B_WD_1003
Building B West Elevations
22.12.14
A_B_WD_1100
Building Section A
22.12.14
A_B_WD_1101
Building Section B
22.12.14
CONTENTS

Page 10 of 92
Number
A_B_WD_1102
1.8
Title
Building Section C
Revision
3
Date
22.12.14
FIRE ENGINEERING STAKEHOLDERS

The relevant stakeholders of this project are nominated in Table 1.2 below.
Table 1.2 Project stakeholders
Name
Mark Klisch
Duncan Betts
Adam Hamilton
Oscar Bowman
Ian Tsui
Sean Igoe
Ryan Turvey
James OBrien
Kerry Hoolihan
Geoffrey Verrall
Peter Downer
Summer Ding
Kelvin Bong
Organisation
Role
Client Representative
ROTHELOWMAN
Architect
Building Certifier
ADG
Structural Engineer
QFES
Fire Brigade
CONTENTS

Page 11 of 92
PRINCIPAL BUILDING CHARACTERISTICS
2.1
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The project relates to the development of two residential apartment buildings, Illuminate (Building A)
and Radiance (Building B) as part of the Light & Co project, in West End, Brisbane.
The two residential buildings (BCA Class 2), Illuminate (Building A) and Radiance (Building B), will
be connected by a common basement carpark (BCA Class 7a). The Ground Floor of Illuminate
(Building A) contains retail shops (Class 6). Level 1 of Radiance (Building B) has a Multi purpose
room at the end of the residential corridor.
With reference to the Preliminary Design Assessment Report prepared by Philip Chun, both
Illuminate (Building A) and Radiance (Building B) will be considered as one united building under
BCA Part A4 as these buildings are connected through a common basement carpark. Therefore,
Illuminate (Building A) and Radiance (Building B) are to comply with all the requirements of the
BCA as a single building.
The following information has been extracted from the Preliminary Design Assessment Report
prepared by Philip Chun:
Tower A Illuminate (Building A)
Use:
Classification:
Class 2, 6 and 7a
Rise in storeys:
Type of Construction:
Type A
Floor Area
(Largest Fire Compartment):
Compartment size of carpark to be confirmed
Effective Height:
16m (approx)
Climate Zone:
Zone 2
Tower B Radiance (Building B)

Use:
Classification:
Class 2 and 7a
Rise in storeys:
12
Type A
Floor Area
Effective Height:
>25m (actual height to be confirmed)
Climate Zone:
Zone 2
CONTENTS

Page 12 of 92
Figure 2.1 Image of Illuminate Building A
CONTENTS

Page 13 of 92
Figure 2.2 Image of Radiance Building B
CONTENTS

Page 14 of 92
2.2
SITE PLAN
The site plan below shows the location of the proposed development. It is noted here that this report
is limited to assessment of BCA-DTS departures associated with Building A and Building B. Building
C and Building D will be developed at a later stage and will be addressed in a separate report
Figure 2.3 Site Plan
2.3
FUNCTIONAL USE OF THE BUILDINGS

Illuminate (Building A) and Radiance (Building B) will be used for residential apartments with
carparks. The retail shops will be located at the Ground Floor of Illuminate (Building A) only.
2.4
UNUSUAL OR HIGH HAZARD FACTORS

The fire engineering process has not raised specific issues relating to BCA-DTS provisions E1.10
and E2.3.
Any dangerous goods to be stored in the property (if applicable) are to be addressed by way of
adherence with the relevant codes and standards, noting that the client has not advised that any are
expected.
CONTENTS

Page 15 of 92
DOMINANT OCCUPANT CHARACTERISTICS
3.1
GENERAL OCCUPANT REVIEW

The building occupants can be broadly classified into three groups, being:
3.2
(i)
Residents and their visitors, retail customers; and
(ii)
Staff members; and
(iii)
Authorised visitors (e.g. maintenance contractors).
DISTRIBUTION / OCCUPANCY DENSITY

BCA Table D1.13 occupancy density is applicable to the areas associated with this report.
3.3
RESIDENTS AND THEIR VISITORS, RETAIL CUSTOMERS

The majority of the building occupants within the buildings will be residents and their visitors. They
are expected to respond to a fire alarm. Retail customers are also expected to respond to a fire
alarm, and follow staff/warden instructions.
The residents are considered to be familiar with the building layout. Visitors of the residents may not
be familiar with the building layout, however it is expected that visitors are able to navigate to the
exits easily due to the relatively simple and straight grid building layout.
3.4
STAFF MEMBERS
Staff members are expected to be limited and familiar with the building layout and emergency
procedures implemented for the building(s). The range of physical and mental conditions of staff
members may include persons with disabilities which may slow their evacuation abilities; however,
work place staff members are generally expected to be alert, awake and be able to assist the general
public during an evacuation as a result of their emergency procedures training.
3.5
AUTHORISED VISITORS
Authorised visitors (such as maintenance contractors) may be unfamiliar with the building layout and
may have to enter into any part of the building(s) to undertake their duties. Management procedures
should be developed and implemented to make provisions for the safety of this group through an
induction program and/or supervision whilst on site. The physical capability of this group is generally
expected to be alert, ambulant, mobile and they are expected to form a very minor component of the
total occupancy.
CONTENTS

Page 16 of 92
FIRE SAFETY DESIGN OBJECTIVES
4.1
CLIENT OBJECTIVES
The client has not indicated any additional fire safety objectives to those required by the relevant
statutory requirements, as described in the BCA. Therefore, asset protection and community impact
of fire are excluded from the analysis outcomes.
4.2
LOSS CONTROL OBJECTIVES

Consideration of specific issues such as property and asset protection, business interruption,
insurance related risks or community impact as a result of fire losses are specifically excluded and
are therefore beyond the scope of this report, as identified in Section 1.5.
While arson as a single point of ignition may be considered in the analysis, multiple simultanous
ignition sources, use of accelerants, sabotage of fire protection systems or terrorism are not included
as part of the report scope.
It should however be noted, as is advised, that due to the clients request to develop alternative
solutions for the project, fire and smoke damage may vary when compared to a building design that
complies with the BCA-DTS provisions.
It is recommended that the building owner(s) liaises with its relevant insurers on this matter.
4.3
REGULATORY OBJECTIVES
To meet the regulatory requirements, the design is to be in accordance with the Building Code of
Australia 2014. Compliance with the fire safety objectives in the BCA is achieved by satisfying the
relevant BCA performance requirements, as determined by the authorities having jurisdiction.
4.4
FIRE BRIGADE OBJECTIVES

General fire brigade objectives are addressed in the relevant performance clauses under fire brigade
intervention. The fire brigade objective throughout Australia is to protect human life and property.
Other brigade responsibilities that may be contained within their statutory act or other objectives are
beyond the scope of this report.
CONTENTS

Page 17 of 92
BCA ANALYSIS INFORMATION
5.1
SPECIFIC BCA-DTS PROVISION DEPARTURES AND APPLICABLE BCA PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

The BCA-DTS provision departures, as advised by the Building Certifier, form the basis of the fire
engineering analysis and are the subject of the proposed alternative solutions. The proposed
alternative solutions for this development are described in in the tables below, along with details of
the relevant BCA performance requirements and BCA assessment methods.
All other items of fire and life safety where not specifically addressed or reviewed as part of the Fire
Engineering Scope or mentioned below shall be provided in compliance with the DTS provisions of
the BCA.
Table 5.1 BCA-DTS Provision Departures and Proposed Alternative Solutions in Basement
Carpark Levels 1 and 2
BCA
Clause
D1.4
BCA-DTS Provision
BCA Clause D1.4(c)

requires that no point
on a floor must be
more than 20 m from
an exit, or a point
from which travel in
different directions to
two exits is available,
in which case the
maximum distance to
one of those exits
must not exceed 40
m.
Proposed Alternative
Solution
Relevant
Performance
Requirement
Extended egress travel

distances (maximum 30m
to a point of choice and
maximum 60m to an exit)
are allowed in the
basement carpark levels.
Fast response sprinkler
heads in lieu of standard
DP4
response sprinkler heads
are provided in the
basement carpark levels to
provide quicker fire
detection/alarm activation
to offset the additional time
required for egress.
Assessment
Method
Quantitative and
qualitative
assessment
based on BCA
A0.5b(ii) and
A0.9(c)
Table 5.2 BCA-DTS Provision Departures and Proposed Alternative Solutions in Illuminate
(Building A)
BCA
Clause
BCA-DTS Provision
Solution
The floor within the
showers in the SOUs
achieves FRL 60 minutes,
in lieu of 90 minutes.
Table 3
BCA Spec C1.1

Table 3 requires the
floors of Class 2
areas to achieve FRL Note that the rest of the
residential floors achieve
90 minutes.
BCA-DTS FRL 90
minutes.
D1.4
BCA Clause D1.4 (a)

requires that the
entrance doorway of
any SOU must be not
more than 6m from
an exit or from a point
2 exits is available.
D1.7
BCA Clause D1.7(b)

requires discharge of
Spec C1.1
Maximum egress travel

distance of 8m (in lieu of
6m) to a point of choice for
egress is proposed at
Levels 1 - 5.
Additional thermal
detectors and occupant
warning are provided to
provide prompt fire
detection/fire alarm.
Relevant
Performance
Requirement
Assessment
Method
CP1, CP2
Quantitative and
qualitative
assessment
based on BCA
A0.5(b)(i) and
A0.9(b)(ii)
DP4, EP2.2
Quantitative and
qualitative
assessment
based on BCA
A0.5(b)(ii) and
A0.9(c)
Alternative paths of egress CP2, EP2.2

to open space are
Qualitative
assessment
CONTENTS

Page 18 of 92
BCA
Clause
BCA-DTS Provision
Solution
Relevant
Performance
Requirement
fire isolated stairs into available upon discharge

a space within the
from fire-isolated stairways
building (under
of Building A.
building line) to meet
compliance with this
clause.
Assessment
Method
based on BCA
A0.5b(i) and
A0.9(b)(ii)
BCA Clause D1.7(c)

states that where
travel from fireisolated exits
necessitates passing
within 6m of external
walls/ openings,
these walls shall
achieve an FRL of 60
minutes and these
windows shall be
protected.
E1.5
The effective height of

Building A is approximately
A sprinkler system
16m (less than 25m).
must be installed in a
However, as Building A
building that has an
and Building B share a
effective height of
common basement
more than 25m.
carpark and Building Bs
effective height is greater
Both Illuminate
than 25m, Building A is
(Building A) and
prescriptively required to
Radiance (Building
B) will be considered be sprinkler protected
as one united building under BCA Part A4.
under BCA Part A4
Sprinklers in Building A are EP1.4
as these buildings are
omitted as the only
connected through a
connection between
common basement
Building A and Building B
carpark. Therefore,
is the underground
Illuminate (Building
basement carpark which is
A) and Radiance
a separate fire
(Building B) are to
compartment to the
comply with all the
buildings. Further, the only
requirements of the
major connection between
BCA as a single
Building A and the
building.
basement carpark is the
fire rated lift shafts.
Table E2.2b requires

a Class 6 retail fire
compartment greater
E2.2, Table
than 2000m2 to be
E2.2b
provided with a
smoke exhaust
system.
The Ground Floor Retail

fire compartment, including
non-retail areas and
external undercroft/laneway areas, is
approximately 2119m2.
fire compartment area will
reduce below 2000m2 if
non-retail or external
under-croft/laneway area
is excluded.
EP2.2
Qualitative
assessment
based on BCA
A0.5(b)(ii) and
A0.9(c)
Qualitative
assessment
based on BCA
A0.5(b)(ii) and
A0.9(c)
The BCA-DTS smoke
CONTENTS

Page 19 of 92
BCA
Clause
BCA-DTS Provision
Solution
Relevant
Performance
Requirement
Assessment
Method
exhaust requirement to the

Ground Floor retail is
deleted.
Table 5.3 BCA-DTS Provision Departures and Proposed Alternative Solutions in Radiance
(Building B)
BCA
Clause
Spec C1.1
Table 3
BCA-DTS Provision
Relevant
Performance
Requirement
The floor within the

showers in the SOUs
BCA Spec C1.1
achieves FRL 40 minutes
while the rest of the floors
floors of Class 2
CP1, CP2
achieve FRL 60 minutes,
areas to achieve FRL in lieu of 90 minutes.
90 minutes.
Note that the building is to
be protected by sprinklers.
D1.4
BCA Clause D1.4 (a)

requires that the
entrance doorway of
any SOU must be not
more than 6m from
D1.4
BCA Clause D1.4(c)

on a floor must be
more than 20 m from
an exit, or a point
in which case the
maximum distance to
one of those exits
must not exceed 40
m.
D1.7
Solution
BCA Clause D1.7(b)

fire isolated stairs into
a space within the
building (under
clause.
BCA Clause D1.7(c)
requires travel from
fire-isolated exits
passing within 6m of
external walls/
openings to achieve

6m) from SOUs to a point
of choice for egress is
proposed at Levels 1 - 11.
Additional thermal
Assessment
Method
Quantitative and
qualitative
assessment
based on BCA
A0.5(b)(i) and
A0.9(b)(ii)
DP4, EP2.2
Quantitative and
qualitative
assessment
based on BCA
A0.5(b)(ii) and
A0.9(c)
DP4, EP2.2
Quantitative and
qualitative
assessment
based on BCA
A0.5(b)(ii) and
A0.9(c)
CP2, EP2.2
Qualitative
assessment
based on BCA
A0.5b(i) and
A0.9(b)(ii)
Travel distance from within

the multi-purpose room on
Level 1 to a point of choice
is 26m (in lieu of 20m).
Additional smoke
detectors (reduced
detectors spacing) are
provided within the multipurpose room.
This strategy could provide
earlier detection and alarm
time to offset the additional
time required for egress.
Alternative paths of egress

to open space are
available upon discharge
of Building B.
Further, FRL 1 hour
construction with minimum
2m height (in lieu of 3m) is
provided to protect the
egress paths.
CONTENTS

Page 20 of 92
BCA
Clause
BCA-DTS Provision
Solution
Relevant
Performance
Requirement
Assessment
Method
appropriate FRL or to
be protected.
Ceiling voids in the
residential units
generally comply with
AS 2118.1 sprinkler
exemption Clause
5.6.1(a), (b) and (c).
E1.5
However, Clause
5.6.1(d) states that
any concealed space
not requiring
protection under Item
(a), (b) or (c), and
which contains
electrical motors,
electric heating coils
or other heat
producing equipment
shall have a sprinkler
installed within 1.5m
of such equipment.
It is proposed to omit
sprinklers for the Derby
style ceiling fans within the
ceiling void spaces above
wet areas of the residential
units as these fans are
localised fans and are not
connected to other
systems.
Note: Sprinklers are still
EP1.4
required under ceiling void
spaces in an apartment
unit.
Qualitative
assessment
based on BCA
A0.5b(i) and
A0.9(b)(ii)
Note: Where Fan Coil

Units (FCUs) are installed
in the celling void spaces
of the residential units,
sprinklers shall be
provided to comply with
AS 2118.1.
Each of the above proposed BCA-DTS variation requires validation in the fire engineering analysis
and additional or alternative fire safety measures may be necessary to satisfy the relevant fire safety
objectives.
These variations and proposed alternative solutions require input and approval from regulatory
authorities including the Building Certifier and fire authority.
5.2
VARIATIONS TO OTHER OBJECTIVES TO BE ADDRESSED

No other fire safety objectives requiring assessment have been identified by stakeholders during the
Fire Engineering process.
CONTENTS

Page 21 of 92
HAZARDS
A review of fire hazards for Illuminate (Building A) and Radiance (Building B) apartment
development has been undertaken to identify the potential fire risk associated with the alternative
solutions.
6.1
GENERAL LAYOUT
The layout of the proposed residential development (Building A and Building B) is considered to be
legible and does not result in any apparent way finding difficulties, and there does not appear to have
any unusual egress provisions. No exposures to fire source features are evident, and none have
been advised by the design team.
6.2
ACTIVITIES
The proposed Building A and Building B are to be used for Class 2 residential accommodation and
associated car parking. The hazards relating to the activities within the buildings are considered to be
typical for residential accommodation, and primarily relate to the vulnerability of sleeping occupants,
who may take longer to respond than alert / awake occupants. The common areas (such as lobbies
and corridors) on the residential floors shall be kept clear for pedestrian traffic. The retail shops will
be located at the Ground Floor of Illuminate (Building A) only. No processes or activities which could
result in excessive fire risks have been identified by the design team.
6.3
IGNITION SOURCES
Potential ignition sources in the proposed development are listed as follows:
Cooking equipment
Heating equipment
Electrical faults, including computers, light fixtures etc.
Arson and deliberately lit fires
Smoking, careless use of cigarettes or candles
Electrical or mechanical faults associated with vehicles in basement car parks
Management policies to minimise the occurrence of ignition sources, such as non-smoking policies
in common areas, hot-works permit systems, fire system isolation permits etc. may reduce fire risk in
the buildings.
6.4
FUEL SOURCES
Fuel sources in residential units are anticipated to be similar to those of a typical household which
consist of a variety of items such as furniture, bedding and clothing etc.
Fuel sources in car park levels are typically anticipated to be vehicles and building services
equipment, items stored in the designated residential storage areas etc.
Fuel sources in the retail shops are typically anticipated to be food preparation equipment (if
applicable), retail goods, decorative items and furnishings etc.
CONTENTS

Page 22 of 92
6.5
INTERACTIONS BETWEEN IGNITION AND FUEL SOURCES

The fire safety concepts tree NFPA 5501 considers the interaction of individual elements as part of an
overall fire safety system. It recommends that one of the means of mitigating fire risk is to
eliminate/control the source of heat, ignition and fuel, as shown by the concepts tree in the figure
below. The concept is considered applicable for this type of development.
Fire Prevention
Control of
heat energy
sources
Control of
heat / fuel source
interactions
Control of
fuel sources
Figure 6.1 Fire safety concepts from NFPA 550
To mitigate fire risk, site-specific policies can be developed and implemented to minimise the risk of
fire initiation, based on maintenance, planning, housekeeping and training, as detailed in Section 11.
6.6
FIRE PREVENTION
Management procedures and policies in relation to fire prevention are considered to be necessary.
Reference to AS 3745-2010 (Emergency control organization and procedures for buildings,
structures and workplaces) is recommended as a means of developing emergency control
arrangements for the buildings.
NFPA 550, Guide to the Fire Safety Concepts Tree, National Fire Protection Association, 2002.
CONTENTS

Page 23 of 92
FIRE PREVENTATIVE & PROTECTIVE
7.1
HAZARDS MITIGATION
An appropriate fire safety strategy can be developed to mitigate fire risk by reducing the factors that
contribute to fire, including good house-keeping practices, a non-smoking policy in common area, hot
works procedures policies, installation of appropriate fire protection systems and adequate
maintenance schedules, particularly for essential fire safety measures and items of equipment
contributing to ignition risks.
7.2
MANAGEMENT MEASURES
The measures considered in the management of the hazards are summarised within Table 7.1
below. It should be noted that the IFEG2 sub-systems are considered in the fire engineering analysis
as follows:
Sub-system A Fire Initiation and Development and Control
Sub-system B Smoke Development and Spread and Control
Sub-system C Fire Spread and Impact and Control
Sub-system D Fire Detection, Warning and Suppression
Sub-system E Occupant Evacuation and Control
Sub-system F Fire Services Intervention
Table 7.1 Preventative and protective measures
Sub-system
Preventative and Protective Measures

The following measures are used:
Sub-system A
Fire initiation and
Development and
Control
The appropriate policies and procedures shall be provided to control

ignition sources (e.g. a non-smoking policy in common area, a hot work
permits policy and maintenance policies).
A housekeeping policy shall be provided to minimise the likelihood of firerelated incidents occurring and to maintain exits and paths of travel to exits
free of furnishings, clutter and general combustibles and rubbish, in order
to reduce the likelihood of fire development should one initiate within these
areas.
An automatic sprinkler system shall be provided in the basement carpark

levels and Radiance (Building B, with sprinkler protection to Derby fans in
concealed ceiling spaces omitted), which upon activation is likely to control
fire spread. Sprinklers need not be provided in Illuminate (Building A).
The following measure is used:

Sub-system B
Smoke
Development and
Spread and
Control

the size of the fire and the quantity of smoke produced.
BCA-DTS/AS1668.1 stair pressurisation system shall be provided to the

residential apartment development.
Australian Building Codes Board, ABCB, International Fire Engineering Guidelines Edition 2005, Australian Building Codes
Board, Australia, 2005.
CONTENTS

Page 24 of 92
Sub-system

Sub-system C
Fire Spread and
Impact and
Control

fire spread.
New building materials are to comply with early fire hazard indices to
reduce the incidence of rapid fire spread and significant smoke production
in the early stages of a fire.
With the exception of the alternative solution for FRL provisions as

described in Section 5, BCA-DTS FRL constructions shall be provided to
the buildings.
Sub-system D
Fire Detection,
Warning and
Suppression
BCA Specification E2.2a smoke detection and alarm systems (DTS

compliant) shall be provided to the residential apartment development.
A tailored fire engineering thermal detection and fire alarm system is also
provided on the floors/areas with extended egress travel distance in
Illuminate (Building A) and Radiance (Building B).
The automatic sprinkler system in the basement carpark levels and

Radiance (Building B) facilitates both occupant warning and the control of
fire spread (if not suppression).
Fire extinguishers are available for use by occupants in attempting initial

fire fighting prior to arrival of fire fighters, if safe to do so.
Sub-system E
Occupant
Evacuation and
Control
The automatic sprinkler system (with fast response sprinkler heads)

provided in the basement carpark minimises the risk associated with the
marginal increase in travel distance to a point of choice/ an exit.
The tailored fire engineering thermal detection and fire alarm system on
the floors/areas with extended egress travel distance in Illuminate
(Building A) and Radiance (Building B) minimises the risk associated with
the marginal increase in travel distance to a point of choice/ an exit.
Discharge from fire-isolated stairways of both buildings is facilitated by

naturally ventilated under-crofts and egress in different directions to reach
open space.
Exit signs and emergency lighting shall assist in wayfinding.
A housekeeping policy shall serve to maintain exits and paths of travel to

exits free of furnishings, clutter, and general combustibles and rubbish, in
order to reduce the risk of obstruction during an emergency evacuation.
Sub-system F
Fire Services
Intervention
A full-time fire service will be available to respond to fire incidents in the

Brisbane metropolitan region.
A fire hydrant system is available for use by fire brigade undertaking fire
fighting and/or search and rescue activities.
The automatic sprinkler system in the carpark levels and Radiance

(Building B) is likely to assist in reducing the size and severity of a fire, and
therefore the risk of exposure to attending fire-fighters is also likely to be
reduced.
The buildings are provided with appropriate access points and roads
suitable for emergency vehicle access.
CONTENTS

Page 25 of 92
FIRE SAFETY MEASURES

The fire safety measures required for this project are described below. Specific details of design for
the buildings and services are the responsibility of each discipline consultant in respect of
incorporation of fire engineering specific requirements into their design.
It should be noted that the fire engineering requirements and strategy in this section are only
provided to address the BCA-DTS provision departures specified in Section 5. Other issues/areas in
the buildings which are not part of this project are not included in this report.
8.1
FIRE RESISTANCE AND COMPARTMENTATION

Illuminate Building A
1. Minimum fire-resistance level (FRL) 60 minutes construction (i.e. minimum 180mm thick flat
slabs) shall be provided in lieu of BCA-DTS FRL 90 minutes construction to the floor within SOU
shower areas on Levels 2-5 (due to the recess of the floor slabs in these localised areas). The
mark-up below indicates the location of floors with reduced FRL of 60 minutes.
Note that the rest of the floors will achieve BCA-DTS FRL 90 minutes (i.e. minimum 200mm thick
flat slabs).
2. With the exception of Item 1 above, the Fire Resistance Level (FRL) provisions for this Building A
shall be provided in compliance with the BCA-DTS requirements for a Type A construction.
CONTENTS

Page 26 of 92
Radiance Building B
3. Minimum fire-resistance level (FRL) 40 minutes construction (i.e. minimum 160mm thick flat
slabs) shall be provided in lieu of BCA-DTS FRL 90 minutes construction to the floor within SOU
shower areas on Levels 1-11 (due to the recess of the floor slabs in these localised areas) in this
sprinkler protected building The mark-up below indicates the location of floors with reduced FRL
of 40 minutes.
Minimum FRL 60 minutes construction (i.e. minimum 180mm thick flat slabs) shall be provided in
lieu of BCA-DTS FRL 90 minutes construction to the rest of the floors.
4. With the exception of Item 3 above, the Fire Resistance Level (FRL) provisions for this Building B
shall be provided in compliance with the BCA-DTS requirements for a Type A construction.
CONTENTS

Page 27 of 92
8.2
EGRESS PROVISION
Basement Carpark Levels 1 and 2
1. Extended egress travel distances (maximum 30m to a point of choice and maximum 60m to an
exit) are allowed in the basement carpark levels.
The following fire engineering requirements shall be implemented to address the extended travel
distances in the basement carpark levels. Also refer mark-up below.
Fast response sprinkler heads (68oC operating temperature, maximum RTI = 50 m1/2s1/2) in
lieu of standard response sprinkler heads are provided in the basement carpark levels to
provide quicker fire detection/alarm time to offset the additional time required for egress.
CONTENTS

Page 28 of 92
2. Maximum egress travel distance of 8m (in lieu of 6m) to a point of choice for egress from the end
units at Grids A12 to A14 at Level 1 is proposed, as indicated in the mark-up below.
distances to a point of choice for egress at Level 1. Also refer mark-up below.
As required by BCA Clause E2.2, an automatic smoke detection and alarm system in
compliance with Specification E2.2a shall be provided to the Class 2 areas in the building.
AS1670.1 smoke detection and alarm system shall be also provided in the common/circulation
areas at Class 2 floor levels.
One additional thermal detector shall be provided in Units 10101 to 10110, 10117 and 10118.
The activation from either thermal detector in these units shall activate the fire alarm in Units
10106 and 10107 (SOUs with extended travel). Minimum sound pressure level of 75 dBA (with
all doors closed) shall be also achieved at each bedhead in Units 10106 and 10107.
In order to eliminate false alarm from these units, the activation of these thermal detectors is
not required to call out fire brigade.
It should be noted that the activation of the AS1670.1 smoke detection system in the
common/circulation areas at Level 1 shall also activate the fire alarm in Units 10106 and
10107.
3. The building layout at Levels 2 to 5 is similar to Level 1. Maximum egress travel distance of 8m
(in lieu of 6m) to a point of choice for egress is also proposed for Units 10206, 10207 at Level 2,
Units 10306, 10307 at Level 3, Units 10406, 10407 at Level 4 and Units 10506, 10507 at Level 5.
The fire engineering requirements for Level 1 (refer Item 2 above) shall be also provided to
Levels 2 to 5.
CONTENTS

Page 29 of 92
4. Discharge of fire isolated stairs into a space within the building (under building line) does not
comply with BCA Clause D1.7(b), as indicated in the mark-up below.
The following fire engineering requirements shall be implemented to address the discharge of fire
isolated stairs from Building A. Also refer mark-up below.
Alternative paths of egress to open space are available upon discharge from fire-isolated
stairways of Building A.
It is noted here that a temporary egress stair will be provided to allow egress west of Building
B to Beesley Street as part of this project. It is understood that this temporary egress stair will
be removed when Building C and Building D are completed, and that the future egress will be
via Buildings C & D towards Pidgeon Close.
CONTENTS

Page 30 of 92
Radiance Building B
5. Maximum egress travel distance of 10m (in lieu of 6m) to a point of choice for egress from SOUs
is proposed at Level 1, as indicated in the mark-up below.
One additional thermal detector shall be provided in each unit at Level 1. The activation from
either thermal detector in these units shall activate the fire alarm in Units 20102, 20103, 20110
(SOUs with extended travel) and the Multi purpose room (also with extended travel, refer Item
8 below). AS1670.4 compliant minimum sound pressure level of 75 dBA (with all doors closed)
shall be also achieved at each bedhead in Units 20102, 20103, 20110 and throughout the
Multi purpose room area.
common/circulation areas (including enclosures/cupboards/stores/comms/MSB) at Level 1
shall also activate the fire alarm in Units 20102, 20103, 20110 (SOUs with extended travel)
and the Multi purpose room (also with extended travel, refer Item 8 below).
Refer to Item 8 for the fire engineering requirements associated with the Multi purpose room.
Level 1 Floor plan
CONTENTS

Page 31 of 92
6. With the exception of the Multi purpose room which is only provided at Level 1, the building layout
at Levels 2 to 5 is similar to Level 1. Maximum egress travel distance of 10m (in lieu of 6m) to a
point of choice for egress is proposed for Units 20203, 20204, 20211, 20212 at Level 2, Units
20303, 20304, 20311, 20312 at Level 3, Units 20403 20404, 20411, 20412 at Level 4, Units
20503, 20504, 20511, 20512 at Level 5.
Levels 2 to 5. Refer mark-ups below.
Level 2 Floor plan
CONTENTS

Page 32 of 92
7. Levels 6 to 11 have extended egress travel distance (up to 9m in lieu of 6m) from the two end
units at the western end of the corridor, i.e. Units 20608, 20609 at Level 6, Units 20708, 20709 at
Level 7, Units 20808, 20809 at Level 8, Units 20908, 20909 at Level 9, Units 21008, 21009 at
Level 10, Units 21108, 21109 at Level 11.
The fire engineering strategy/requirement for Level 1 (refer Item 5 above) shall be also provided
to Levels 6 to 11. Refer mark-ups below.
Level 6 floor plan
CONTENTS

Page 33 of 92
8. Travel distance from within the Multi purpose room on Level 1 to a point of choice is 26m (in lieu
of 20m), as indicated in the mark-up below.
distances to a point of choice for egress from within the Multi purpose room. Also refer mark-up
below.
Refer to Item 5 above for the fire engineering strategy associated with SOU extended travel.
The activation from either thermal detector in units at Level 1 shall also activate the fire alarm
in the Multi purpose room, and AS1670.4 compliant minimum sound pressure level of 75 dBA
(with all doors closed) shall be also achieved throughout the Multi purpose room area. This
strategy could provide earlier fire detection in the event of a fire in an SOU and reduce alarm
time to offset the additional time required for egress (including travel from SOUs).
Provision of additional smoke detectors (reduced spacing of not more than 6.0m between
smoke detectors and not more than 3.0m between smoke detectors and wall) within the Multi
purpose room. This strategy could provide earlier fire detection in the event of a fire in the
room and reduce alarm time to offset the additional time required for egress (including travel
from SOUs).
The activation of the AS1670.1 smoke detection system in the common/circulation areas
(including enclosures/cupboards/stores/comms/MSB) at Level 1 shall also activate the fire
alarm in the Multi purpose room.
The circulation space adjoining the entry to the Multi purpose room, as indicated in the markup below, shall remain fire load sterile and no storage is permitted in this area.
CONTENTS

Page 34 of 92
The following fire engineering requirements shall be implemented to address the discharge of the
fire isolated stairs from Building B. Also refer mark-up below.
stairways (B1) of Building B.
FRL 1 hour construction with minimum 2m height (in lieu of 3m) is provided at the two
locations shown in the mark-ups below to provide protection to egress paths.
Site plan
Ground Floor plan
CONTENTS

Page 35 of 92
Level 1 Floor plan

General
10. With the exception of the proposed Alternative Solutions described above, egress shall be
provided in compliance with the BCA-DTS provisions (Section D of BCA) for this project.
11. All exit doors and doors in egress paths shall be capable of being opened with a force 110N.
12. If electromagnetic locks are to be used, these electromagnetic locks need to fail-safe open and
automatically unlock upon fire alarm.
13. Egress paths are to be kept clear of items that impede occupant egress. This is to be maintained
during the lifetime of the buildings.
14. BCA-DTS emergency lighting, exit and directional signage (BCA Part E4) shall be provided.
8.3
SERVICES AND EQUIPMENT

1. AS2118.1 sprinkler system with fast response sprinkler heads shall be provided throughout the
carpark levels. Refer Item 1 in Section 8.2 for more details.
2. Refer Items 2 and 3 in Section 8.2 for the fire engineering requirements in relation to the detection
and alarm system for Levels 1 to 5 of Building A.
3. The effective height of Building A is approximately 16m (less than 25m). However, as Building A
and Building B share a common basement carpark and Building Bs effective height is greater
than 25m, Building A is prescriptively required to be sprinkler protected under BCA Part A4. A
sprinkler system in Building A is omitted as the only connection between Building A and Building
B is the underground basement carpark which is a separate fire compartment to the Building A
and Building B.
CONTENTS

Page 36 of 92
4. The Ground Floor Retail fire compartment, including non-retail areas and external undercroft/laneway areas, is approximately 2119m2. The Ground Floor Retail fire compartment area will
reduce below 2000m2 if non-retail or external under-croft/laneway area is excluded (refer mark-up
below). The BCA-DTS smoke exhaust requirement to the Ground Floor retail is therefore deleted.
Ground Floor plan (Building A)

Radiance Building B
5. Refer Items 5 to 8 in Section 8.2 for the fire engineering requirements in relation to the detection
and alarm system for Levels 1 to 11 of Building B.
6. Sprinkler protection to the Derby style ceiling fans above wet areas in residential units is no
longer required. These fans are localised fans and are not connected to other systems. The Fan
Coil Units (FCUs, if provided) in the celling void spaces shall be provided with sprinklers to
comply with AS 2118.1. Sprinklers are still required under ceiling void spaces.
That is, with the exception of the deletion of sprinklers for derby fans in ceiling void spaces an
AS2118.1 compliant sprinkler system shall be provided within and under the ceiling void
spaces/concealed spaces in an apartment unit.
General
7. With the exception of the proposed Alternative Solutions described above, services and
equipment shall be provided in compliance with the BCA-DTS provisions (Section E of BCA) for
this project.
8.4
MANAGEMENT PROVISIONS
1. A number of management procedures and policies shall be implemented on an on-going basis to
enable the basis of the fire safety design analysis to be satisfied. The following items are to be
implemented by the building operators:
A house-keeping policy based on avoiding the accumulation of rubbish or storage within the
common areas, including the exits and the paths of travel to the exits exit routes are to be
free from obstructions.
The circulation space adjoining the entry to the Multi purpose room, as indicated in the markup in Item 8 in Section 8.2, shall remain fire load sterile and no storage is permitted in this
area.
CONTENTS

Page 37 of 92
A non-smoking policy in common area, supported by signage placed in appropriate

locations.
A hot works permit policy to address hot works activities within the buildings. A permit
system to address any hot works process involving cutting, welding, heating, angle grinding
or any other related practices so as to address:
Risks associated with exposure of adjacent combustibles
Fire watch procedures
Gas testing requirements
An emergency management policy, including staff training and regular evacuation drills, is to
be implemented in accordance with the principles of AS 3745:2010.
CONTENTS

Page 38 of 92
APPROACH AND METHODS OF ANALYSIS
9.1
FIRE ENGINEERING ANALYSIS

Analysis of the proposed fire safety design against the relevant fire safety design objectives has been
carried out based on quantitative and/or qualitative engineering analysis as outlined below in the
table below.
The fire engineering analysis details and shows how the relevant fire safety objectives (BCA
Performance Requirements or other criteria) have been achieved to the degree necessary.
9.2
ASSESSMENT METHODOLOGY
The tables below summarise the methodology of analysis for the alternative solutions for this
development.
Table 9.1 Assessment methodology Basement Carpark Levels 1 and 2
No.
1
Extended egress travel distances
(maximum 30m to a point of choice and
maximum 60m to an exit) are allowed in
the basement carpark levels.
Fast response sprinkler heads in lieu of
standard response sprinkler heads are
provided in the basement carpark levels
to provide quicker fire detection/alarm
activation to offset the additional time
Method of Analysis
A quantitative and qualitative fire engineering
assessment is provided to analyse the
appropriateness of the exit provision and
extended travel distances to a point of choice/
an exit, taking into considerations of the
occupant number, type of occupant, occupant
travel speed, potential fire hazards and the
provided fire protection systems.
The quantitative assessment involves
assessment of the increase in travel time due
to the extended travel distances and the
reduction of fire detection time as a result of
provision of fast response sprinkler heads (in
lieu of standard response sprinkler heads).
Table 9.2 Assessment methodology Illuminate (Building A)
No.
2
The floor within the showers in the SOUs
achieves FRL 60 minutes, in lieu of 90
minutes.
Note that the rest of the residential floors
achieve BCA-DTS FRL 90 minutes.
Method of Analysis
assessment (fire severity calculation) is
adopted to demonstrate that the reduction in
FRLs within the residential floors complies
with the Relevant Performance Requirements,
based on the following:
(i) Determination of the potential equivalent
fire severity for typical apartments using
the Eurocode methodology; and
(ii) Demonstrate that the calculated fire
severity is less than the proposed FRL.
Maximum egress travel distance of 8m (in

lieu of 6m) to a point of choice for egress
from SOUs is proposed at Levels 1 - 5.
Additional thermal detectors and occupant
warning are provided to provide prompt fire
Discharge of fire isolated stairs into a

space within the building (under building
line) does not meet compliance with BCA
Clause D1.7(b).

extended travel distance to a point of choice of
travel, taking into considerations of the
A qualitative fire engineering assessment is
provided to analyse the appropriateness of the
exit provision, taking into considerations of the
CONTENTS

Page 39 of 92
Alternative paths of egress to open space

are available upon discharge from fireisolated stairways of Building A.
5
The effective height of Building A is

approximately 16m (less than 25m).
However, as Building A and Building B
share a common basement carpark and
Building Bs effective height is greater
than 25m, Building A is prescriptively
required to be sprinkler protected under
BCA Part A4.
building characteristics.

provided to analyse the appropriateness of
non-provision of sprinklers in Building A,
taking into considerations of the building
effective height and its connection with
Building B.
Sprinklers in Building A are omitted as the

only connection between Building A and
Building B is the underground basement
carpark which is a separate fire
compartment to the buildings. Further, the
only major connection between Building A
and the basement carpark is the fire rated
lift shafts.
6
The Ground Floor Retail fire

compartment, including non-retail areas
and external under-croft/laneway areas, is
The Ground Floor Retail fire compartment
area will reduce below 2000m2 if nonretail or external under-croft/laneway area
is excluded.

non-provision of smoke exhaust in the Ground
floor Retail fire compartment, taking into
considerations of the characteristics of the fire
compartment (i.e. non retail areas), potential
fire hazards and the building characteristics
(i.e. external under-croft/laneway area).
The BCA-DTS smoke exhaust requirement

to the Ground Floor retail is therefore
deleted.
Table 9.3 Assessment methodology Radiance (Building B)
No.
7
achieves FRL 40 minutes while the rest of
the floors achieve FRL 60 minutes, in lieu
of 90 minutes.
Note that the building is to be protected by
sprinklers.
Method of Analysis
(i) Determination of the potential equivalent
fire severity for typical apartments using
the Eurocode methodology;
severity is less than the minimum
proposed FRL; and
(iii) Determination of the effectiveness of the
sprinklers in limiting the risk of exposing
structural elements to high temperature
conditions.
Maximum egress travel distance of 10m

(in lieu of 6m) to a point of choice for
egress from SOUs is proposed at Levels
1 - 11.
Additional thermal detectors and
occupant warning are provided to provide
quicker fire detection/fire alarm.

CONTENTS

Page 40 of 92
Travel distance from within the multipurpose room on Level 1 to a point of

choice is 26m (in lieu of 20m).
Additional smoke detectors (reduced
detectors spacing) are provided within the
multi-purpose room.
This strategy could provide earlier
detection and alarm time to offset the
additional time required for egress.
10

are available upon discharge from fireisolated stairways of Building B.
Further, FRL 1 hour construction with
minimum 2m height (in lieu of 3m) is
provided to protect the egress paths.
11
It is proposed to omit sprinklers for the

derby fans within the ceiling void spaces
above wet areas in the residential units as
these fans are localised fans and are not
connected to other systems.
Note: Sprinklers are still required under
ceiling void spaces.


provided to analyse the appropriateness of the
exit provision, taking into considerations of the
building characteristics.
non-provision of sprinklers to the localised
derby fans in ceiling voids of residential units,
taking into considerations the potential fire
hazards, fire spread and provided fire
protection systems.
CONTENTS

Page 41 of 92
10
RELEVANT ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
10.1
JUDGEMENT OF ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA

A quantitative and qualitative assessment has been undertaken generally as described in the
International Fire Engineering Guidelines3. The analysis comprises of evaluation of the interaction
between sub-systems, and includes system reliability and effectiveness.
performance requirements or other criteria) have been achieved to the degree necessary.
10.2
ENVIRONMENTAL AND LOSS CONTROL ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA

This report does not address any environmental and loss control acceptance criteria.
10.3
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA FOR THE ANALYSIS

Individual parameters of the relevant BCA performance requirements have been considered in the
quantitative and/or qualitative analysis as outlined below, commensurate with the fire hazard for
buildings possessing similar construction and occupancy characteristics.
The nominated acceptance criteria for the alternative solutions for this development are detailed in
the tables below.
Table 10.1 Acceptance criteria for the proposed alternative solutions Basement Carpark Levels
1 and 2
No.
1
maximum 60m to an exit) are allowed in the
Acceptance Criteria
This alternative solution is acceptable if the
quantitative and qualitative assessment can
demonstrate that safe evacuation is
achievable from the basement carpark.

provided in the basement carpark levels to
provide quicker fire detection/alarm
Table 10.2 Acceptance criteria for the proposed alternative solutions Illuminate (Building A)
No.
2
achieves FRL 60 minutes, in lieu of 90
minutes.
The alternative solution is acceptable if the

quantitative and qualitative assessment (fire
severity calculation) can demonstrate that:
Note that the rest of the residential floors

achieve BCA-DTS FRL 90 minutes.


achievable from SOUs.

warning are provided to provide prompt fire
4
Acceptance Criteria
Discharge of fire isolated stairs into a space

within the building (under building line) does
not meet compliance with BCA Clause
D1.7(b).
The potential equivalent fire severity for

the apartments is less than the
proposed FRL of 60 minutes.

qualitative assessment can demonstrate that
safe evacuation is achievable from the
building.
3 Australian Building Codes Board, ABCB, International Fire Engineering Guidelines, Edition 2005, Australian Building Codes Board,
Australia, 2005.
CONTENTS

Page 42 of 92

are available upon discharge from fireisolated stairways of Building A.
5

Building Bs effective height is greater than
25m, Building A is prescriptively required to
be sprinkler protected under BCA Part A4.

the building without sprinklers is not
dissimilar to a DTS compliant building with
an effective height of less than 25m.
Sprinklers in Building A are omitted as the

only connection between Building A and
Building B is the underground basement
carpark which is a separate fire
compartment to the buildings. Further, the
only major connection between Building A
and the basement carpark is the fire rated
lift shafts.
6
The Ground Floor Retail fire compartment,

including non-retail areas and external
under-croft/laneway areas, is approximately
2119m2.
The Ground Floor Retail fire compartment
area will reduce below 2000m2 if non-retail
or external under-croft/laneway area is
excluded.

the Ground Floor Retail fire compartment
without smoke exhaust is not dissimilar to a
DTS compliant design (i.e. retail fire
compartment less than 2000m2).
The BCA-DTS smoke exhaust requirement

to the Ground Floor retail is therefore
deleted.
Table 10.3 Acceptance criteria for the proposed alternative solutions Radiance (Building B)
No.
7
achieves FRL 40 minutes while the rest of
the floors achieve FRL 60 minutes, in lieu of
90 minutes in this sprinkler protected
building.
Acceptance Criteria

minimum proposed FRL of 40 minutes,
and
The sprinklers in this building would be

effective in limiting the risk of exposing
conditions.
Note that the building is to be protected by

sprinklers.

warning are provided to provide quicker fire

detectors spacing) are provided within the
multi-purpose room.


achievable from the multi-purpose room.
CONTENTS

Page 43 of 92
This strategy could provide earlier detection

and alarm time to offset the additional time
10

are available upon discharge from fireisolated stairways of Building B.
provided to protect egress paths.
11

above wet areas in the residential units as
these fans are localised fans and are not
connected to other systems.

achievable from the building.

fire spread is unlikely and safe evacuation is
CONTENTS

Page 44 of 92
11
STANDARDS OF CONSTRUCTION, COMMISSIONING, MANAGEMENT AND MAINTENANCE
11.1
CONSTRUCTION
Building works associated with the installation of the required fire safety measures and construction
elements are to be undertaken by appropriately qualified persons. Co-ordination of such works is to
be undertaken by a project manager and / or construction manager nominated for the project.
11.2
COMMISSIONING
Fire safety measures are to be the subject of any testing and commissioning requirements specified
within the relevant Australian design and installation standards.
The following inspections of the completed building works should form part of the commissioning
phase of the buildings:
An inspection by the project fire engineer for the purposes of reviewing the consistency of the
fire safety installations and architectural features with the fire safety strategy presented as the
basis of the fire engineering report, with supporting certification from the relevant designers and
installers to be provided, where necessary.
Inspections by the project stakeholders, where necessary, to determine that the fire safety
installations and architectural features comply with the fire safety strategy presented as the
basis of the fire engineering report.
The details of the fire engineering report are to be included within the buildings fire safety schedule
to assist future essential services auditing of the buildings.
11.3
MANAGEMENT-IN-USE
A number of management procedures and policies shall be implemented on an on-going basis to
enable the basis of the fire safety design analysis to be satisfied. The following items shall be
implemented for the building:
A house-keeping policy is to be implemented based on avoiding the accumulation of rubbish or

storage within the common areas, including the exits and the paths of travel to the exits exit
routes are to be free from obstructions.
The circulation space adjoining the entry to the Multi purpose room, as indicated in the mark-up
in Item 8 in Section 8.2, shall remain fire load sterile and no storage is permitted in this area.
A non-smoking policy in the common areas is to be implemented, supported by signage placed

in appropriate locations.
Management procedures to address the process of isolation for active fire protection systems
(such as the automatic fire sprinkler and detection systems) for maintenance or re-configuration
purposes are to be identified, and are to take into account the following recommendations:
Sound management of active fire protection systems includes:
Using primarily one company for fire system isolations.
Re-instatement of system at the completion of work each day.
An approval system in place which requires written permission from management before
isolation can take place and a statement as to the length of isolation (which must generally
be less than one day)
A requirement for the contractor to sign-off after completion of the work.
An evacuation and emergency response plan is to be developed and implemented for these
buildings in accordance with the principles of AS 37452010. The development of emergency
procedures is to be consistent with the egress strategy for the buildings. The plan is to include /
address the following matters as a minimum:
-
emergency plans
emergency evacuation equipment
emergency response procedures
CONTENTS

Page 45 of 92
A hot works permit policy is to be adopted to address the undertaking of hot works within the
buildings, which can present as a potential ignition source. A permit is to be submitted to
building management for any hot works process involving cutting, welding, heating, angle
grinding or any other related practices and returned to the authorising person upon completion
of the associated works, addressing:
-
risks associated with exposure of adjacent combustibles;
working within confined spaces;
fire watch procedures;
gas testing requirements.
Each permit is required to be returned to the authorising person upon completion of the
associated works.
11.4
MAINTENANCE
Under the Fire and Emergency Services Act 1990, all prescribed fire safety installations shall be
adequately maintained. Fire safety installations include any installations provided as part of the
alternative solutions prescribed in this report.
The fire safety installations shall be maintained in accordance with AS1851 and QDC MP6.1 and
undertaken by an independent suitably qualified representative (e.g. from an Essential Services
Maintenance Company). Failure to do so will render the outcomes of this report invalid, null and void.
Up to date logbooks must be provided on site.
CONTENTS

Page 46 of 92
CONTENTS

Page 47 of 92
12
ALTERNATIVE SOLUTION 1 EXTENDED TRAVEL DISTANCES IN BASEMENT CARPARK
12.1
BCA-DTS PROVISION DEPARTURE AND ALTERNATIVE SOLUTION

BCA Clause D1.4(c) requires that no point on a floor must be more than 20 m from an exit, or a point
from which travel in different directions to two exits is available, in which case the maximum distance
to one of those exits must not exceed 40 m.
Extended egress travel distances (maximum 30m to a point of choice and maximum 60m to an exit)
are allowed in the basement carpark levels.
Fast response sprinkler heads (68oC operating temperature, maximum RTI = 50 m1/2 s1/2) in lieu of
standard response sprinkler heads are provided in the basement carpark levels to provide quicker
fire detection/alarm activation to offset the additional time required for egress.
Extended travel distances in basement carpark floor areas

12.2
DETAILED FIRE ENGINEERING ASSESSMENT

The extended travel distances from within the basement carpark floor areas are considered to be
acceptable on the following basis:
AS2118.1 sprinkler system is to be provided in the basement carpark levels. For an AS2118.1
(BCA-DTS) compliant design, standard response sprinklers are required in a carpark.
It is proposed to provide fast response sprinklers in lieu of standard response sprinklers in the
basement carpark levels. The fast response sprinklers would provide a shorter activation
time/alarm time to offset the additional time required to complete the maximum increased travel
distance of 20m (60m 40m = 20m) from within the carpark floor areas.
FPETool fire modelling was used to calculate the sprinkler activation times of standard response
sprinklers and fast response sprinklers in the carpark.
National Institute of Standards and Technology (1993) FPETool Version 3.20, Gaithersburg, MD
CONTENTS

Page 48 of 92
In accordance with CIBSE , the response time index (RTI) for a standard response sprinkler
could be up to 350m1/2s1/2 and the RTI for a fast response sprinkler should not be more than
50m1/2s1/2. The RTI of 150 m1/2s1/2 for standard response sprinkler and the RTI of 50m1/2s1/2 for fast
response sprinkler are adopted for the analysis.
The typical growth rate of a car fire is adopted for the analysis (i.e. medium t2 growth rate).
Table 12.1- FPETool Inputs and Results for Sprinkler Activation Times (Basement levels)
Inputs
Height of ceiling above fuel
Standard Response
2.5m
Fast Response
2.5mm
150m1/2s1/2
50m1/2s1/2
68C
68C
Fire growth rate
Medium t
Medium t
Activation time
252 seconds
RTI
Sprinkler activation temperature
191 seconds
(61 seconds quicker)
12.3
From the analysis above, the utilisation of fast response sprinklers provides a shorter activation
time/fire alarm time of approximately 61 seconds in the basement carpark. The 61 seconds is
referred to herein as the time difference between the BCA alarm time and the fire engineering
alarm time.
The travel speed for occupants can be taken as 1m/s. Based on the travel speed of 1m/s, the
additional time required to complete the maximum increased travel distance of 20m (60 40m =
20m) from within the carpark floor areas is calculated to be 20 seconds.
Based on the assessment outcomes above, the additional time (20 seconds) required to
complete the maximum increased travel distance of 20m is less than the time difference
between the BCA alarm time and the fire engineering alarm time.
Therefore, the utilisation of fast response sprinklers provides sufficient reduction of activation
time/fire alarm time to offset the additional time required to complete the maximum increased
travel distance of 20m from within the carpark floor areas. The proposed egress travel distances
of up to 30m to a point of choice for egress and 60m to an exit are considered to be acceptable.
CONCLUSION
Based on the fire engineering analysis above, the extended travel distances from within the
basement carpark levels (i.e. up to 30m to a point of choice and 60m to an exit) are considered to be
acceptable and the BCA Performance Requirement DP4 is satisfied.
CIBSE (2010), CIBSE Guide E - Fire Safety Engineering, 3rd Edition,UK.
CONTENTS

Page 49 of 92
13
ALTERNATIVE SOLUTION 2 RATIONALISED FRL FOR SOU SHOWER FLOOR (BUILDING A)
13.1

BCA Spec C1.1 Table 3 requires the floors of Class 2 areas to achieve FRL 90 minutes.
Minimum fire-resistance level (FRL) 60 minutes construction (i.e. minimum 180mm thick flat slabs)
shall be provided in lieu of BCA-DTS FRL 90 minutes construction to the floor within SOU shower
areas on Levels 2-5 (due to the recess of the floor slabs in these localised areas). The mark-up
below indicates the location of floors with reduced FRL of 60 minutes.
Note that the rest of the floors will achieve BCA-DTS FRL 90 minutes (i.e. minimum 200mm thick flat
slabs).
13.2

The proposed FRL 60 minutes to the floor within SOU shower areas on Levels 2-5 is considered to
be acceptable on the following basis:
The Eurocode methodology is selected to analyse the equivalent fire severity of each apartment
type in this building. The proposed FRL 60 minutes construction to the floor within SOUs is
acceptable if the fire severity/time equivalency outcome from the Eurocode method is less than
60 minutes.
The empirical expression for equivalent fire severity based on the Eurocode method is:
te,d = qf,d kb wf
where
qf,d is the fire load density per unit floor area (MJ/m2), as defined below.
kb is a conversion factor based on the materials of construction. k b = 0.07 is
adopted.
wf is the ventilation factor, as defined below.
qf,d = qf,k . m . q1 . q2 . n
where
m is the combustion factor. For mainly cellulosic materials, Eurocode

recommends m = 0.8. However to be conservative, m = 1.0 is adopted.
BS EN 1991-1-2:2002, Eurocode 1: Actions on structures Part 1-2: General actions Actions on structures exposed to fire.
CONTENTS

Page 50 of 92
q1 is a factor taking into account the fire activation risk due to the size of the
compartment. For small compartment with a floor area less than 25m2, q1 = 1.0.
For a compartment with a floor area between 25m2 to 250m2, q1 = 1.1 is
adopted, while for a compartment with a floor area between 250m2 to 2500m2,
q1 = 1.5 is adopted.
q2 is a factor taking into account the fire activation risk due to the type of
occupancy. q2 = 1.0 is adopted for residential occupancy.
q2 is a factor taking into account the different active fire-fighting measures
(sprinkler, detection, automatic alarm transmission, fire brigade availability, safe
access routes, fight fighting devices). For conservative assessment, only the
factor relating to the provision of automatic alarm transmission to fire brigade
has been considered, and all other factors have been conservatively ignored.
qf,k is the characteristic fire load density per unit area. The 80% fractile of fire
load density (948 MJ/m2) for residential as given in the Eurocode methodology
has been adopted for the living areas of the residential apartments. A fire load
density of 200 MJ/m2 has been adopted for the shower rooms due to low fire
load expected in these rooms. Weighted average of the fire load energy density
is adopted for the analyses.
6.0
wf
H
where
0.3
0.62
900.4 v 4
1 bv h
0.5
v = Av/Af, 0.025 v 0.25

h = Ah/Af
bv = 12.5(1+10 v - v2 ) 10.0
Af is the floor area of the fire compartment (m2)
Av is the area of the vertical window and glazed door openings (m2)
Ah is the area of the horizontal openings in the roof (m2)
H is the height of the fire compartment (m)
When flashover occurs the glazed walls and doors of the residential units are likely to be broken
and fell out. This has been adopted in the fire severity assessment.
Key input parameters and the fire severity outcome (time equivalent) for each residential
apartment type are summarised below.
The fire severities for all residential apartment types are less than 60 minutes and therefore the
provision of FRL 60 minutes construction to the floor within SOU shower areas is considered to
be acceptable.
CONTENTS

Page 51 of 92
13.3
CONCLUSION
Based on the fire engineering analysis above, the proposed FRL 60 minutes to the floor within SOU
shower areas on Levels 2-5 is considered to be acceptable and achieves an equivalent level of
safety that would be required from a BCA-DTS solution. BCA Performance Requirements CP1 and
CP2 are satisfied.
CONTENTS

Page 52 of 92
14
ALTERNATIVE SOLUTION 3 EXTENDED TRAVEL DISTANCES AT LEVELS 1 -5 (BUILDING A)
14.1

BCA Clause D1.4 (a) requires that the entrance doorway of any SOU must be not more than 6m from
an exit or from a point from which travel in different directions to 2 exits is available.
Maximum egress travel distance of 8m (in lieu of 6m) to a point of choice for egress is proposed for
the end units at Grids A12 to A14 at Levels 1 to 5.
14.2

The extended travel distances on Levels 1 to 5 of Building A are considered to be acceptable on the
following basis:
The following fire engineering strategy/requirement is provided to address the extended travel
distance to a point of choice for egress from Level 1. Also refer mark-up below. The same fire
engineering strategy/requirement applies to Levels 2 to 5 and is not repeated here.
As required by BCA Clause E2.2, an automatic smoke detection and alarm system in compliance
with Specification E2.2a shall be provided to the Class 2 areas in the building. AS1670.1 smoke
detection and alarm system shall be also provided in the common/circulation areas at Class 2
floor levels.
One additional thermal detector shall be provided in Units 10101 to 10110, 10117 and 10118. The
activation from either thermal detector in these units shall activate the fire alarm in Units 10106
and 10107 (SOUs with extended travel). Minimum sound pressure level of 75 dBA (with all doors
closed) shall be also achieved at each bedhead in Units 10106 and 10107.
In order to eliminate false alarm from these units, the activation of these thermal detectors is not
required to call out fire brigade.
common/circulation areas at Level 1 shall also activate the fire alarm in Units 10106 and 10107.
Level 1 Building A
CONTENTS

Page 53 of 92
In accordance with BCA-DTS provisions, it is understood that a smoke or thermal detection

system is not required in each unit (SOU) of this building and that only a local alarm is required in
each unit. The activation of local alarm will only provide alarm to the fire origin unit. The fire alarm
in other areas outside the fire origin unit will not be triggered until the activation of the AS1670.1
smoke detection system in the public corridors.
Utilising the fire engineering strategy with additional thermal detector/fire alarm system in units, a
prompt detection time/fire alarm time would be provided to the SOUs with extended travel. This
would offset the additional evacuation time required to complete the maximum increased travel
distance of 2.0m (8.0m 6m = 2.0m) from the end units.
Firecalc fire engineering modelling has been used to estimate the activation time of thermal
detector in a typical residential unit. The fire scenario modelled considered a medium t2 growth
7
rate . The Firecalc input parameters and outcomes are summarised as follows:
Thermal detector activation time = 204.1 seconds
Each residential unit is provided with fire rated bounding construction. It is likely that the activation
of the AS1670.1 smoke detection system in the public corridors would take longer than the
activation of the additional thermal detection system.
Further to the above, the activation of the additional thermal detection system in the units would
activate the fire alarm in the units with extended travel (i.e. 75dBA with all door closed achieved at
each bedhead in the SOUs with extended travel). This is considered to be better than the BCADTS provision of 100dBA at the apartment entry door which could be substantially reduced in a
bedroom (to wake sleeping occupants) due to closure of the entry door and the bedroom door.
The travel speed for occupants is taken to be 1m/s. This is consistent with the recommendation
from Thompson & Marchant 8 (whereby the maximum flow speed of a male and a female is
1.08m/s ( 0.24) and 0.92m/s ( 0.24) respectively) and the 1m/s horizontal travel speed in
emergency evacuation recommended by Fruin9.
Based on the travel speed of 1m/s, the additional time required to complete the increased travel
distance of 2.0m from the end units is calculated to be 2.0 seconds.
Based on the assessment outcomes above, the additional time (2.0 seconds) required to
complete the maximum increased travel distance of 2.0m is likely to be offset by the enhanced
fire detection and fire alarm systems.
Therefore, the utilisation of fire engineering strategy with additional thermal detector/fire alarm
system in units would provide sufficient detection/fire alarm time to offset the additional time
required to complete the increased travel distance of 2.0m from the end units.
7
8
9
BS EN 1991-1-2:2002, Eurocode 1: Actions on structures - Part 1-2: General actions Actions on structures exposed to fire.
Thompson PA & Marchant EW, 1995, A computer model for the evacuation of large building populations, Fire Safety Journal,
24, 131-148, Northern Ireland.
Fruin, J.J. Pedestrian Planning and Design. Metropolitan Association of Urban Designers and Environment Planners Inc,
1971, New York
CONTENTS

Page 54 of 92
14.3
CONCLUSION
Based on the fire engineering analysis above, the extended travel distances on the residential floors
Level 1 to 5 of Building A are considered to be acceptable and the BCA Performance Requirements
DP4 and EP2.2 are satisfied.
CONTENTS

Page 55 of 92
15
ALTERNATIVE SOLUTION 4 DISCHARGE FROM FIRE ISOLATED STAIRS (BUILDING A)
15.1

BCA Clause D1.7(b) requires discharge of fire isolated stairs into a space within the building (under
building line) to meet compliance with this clause.
BCA Clause D1.7(c) states that where travel from fire-isolated exits necessitates passing within 6m
of external walls/ openings, these walls shall achieve an FRL of 60 minutes and these windows shall
be protected.
The fire isolated stairs of Building A discharge into the confines of the building (under building line)
and it is understood that the discharge does not comply with BCA Clause D1.7(b). Furthermore, the
discharge to public roads necessitates passing within 6m of retail openings which are not protected.
Refer mark-ups below. It is proposed to rationalise the egress provision and the FRL provision to the
external walls or protected openings.
Ground Floor Plan

15.2

The rationalisation of the egress provision upon discharge from the fire isolated stairs and the FRL
provision to the external walls or protected openings is considered to be acceptable on the following
basis:
stairways of Building A. Refer mark-ups below.
The discharge of fire-isolated stairways of Building A, although into the confines of the building
(under building line), is into areas which are naturally ventilated and smoke logging is unlikely to
occur.
It is noted here that a temporary egress stair will be provided to allow egress west of Building B to
Beesley Street as part of this project. It is understood that this temporary egress stair will be
removed when Building C and Building D are built, and that the future egress will be via Buildings
C & D towards Pidgeon Close.
The key strategy for this alternative solution is that occupants could always evacuate safely away
from the building upon discharge from the stairs, and that alternative paths of egress are provided
to reach a public road.
CONTENTS

Page 56 of 92
15.3
CONCLUSION
Based on the fire engineering analysis above, the rationalisation of the egress provision upon
discharge from the fire isolated stairs of Building A and the FRL provision to the external walls or
protected openings is considered to be acceptable and the BCA Performance Requirements CP2
and EP2.2 are satisfied.
CONTENTS

Page 57 of 92
16
ALTERNATIVE SOLUTION 5 OMISSION OF SPRINKLERS (BUILDING A)
16.1

In accordance with the DTS-provisions of the BCA, a sprinkler system must be installed in a building
that has an effective height of more than 25m.
Both Illuminate (Building A) and Radiance (Building B) will be considered as one united building
under BCA Part A4 as these buildings are connected through a common basement carpark.
Therefore, Illuminate (Building A) and Radiance (Building B) are to comply with all the
requirements of the BCA as a single building.
It is proposed to omit the provision of sprinklers in Illuminate (Building A).
16.2

The omission of sprinklers in Illuminate (Building A) is considered to be acceptable on the following
basis:
The effective height of Building A is approximately 16m (less than 25m). However, as Building A
than 25m, Building A is prescriptively required to be sprinkler protected under BCA Part A4.
Sprinklers in Building A are omitted as the only connection between Building A and Building B is
the underground basement carpark which is a separate fire compartment to the buildings.
Further, the only major key connection between Building A and the basement carpark is the fire
rated lift shafts. Refer to mark-ups below.
It is noted that the joined basement carpark (of both Building A and Building B) will be fully
sprinkler protected in accordance with the BCA-DTS provisions.
The risk of a fire incident occurring on Ground or any level above in Building A is considered to be
not dissimilar to a fire incident occurring in a similar non-sprinkler protected building which has an
effective height of less than 25m. This is further explained below.
Smoke and heat produced from a fire have the tendency to spill upwards due to their buoyancy.
For a fire starting on Ground Level or any residential level above, and in conjunction with the
floor-by-floor fire compartmentation provided in Building A, it is unlikely the fire would spread to
the basement. That is, this fire scenario would be similar to a fire scenario in a similar BCA-DTS
compliant building without sprinklers.
For a fire starting in the basement carpark, the sprinklers in the basement would be expected to
activate and this is likely to control the spread of fire. Further to this, the Ground Level floor slab
being fire-resistant (i.e. BCA-DTS FRL) is expected to further minimise the risk of fire spread to
the building/floor above. This fire scenario would be equivalent to (if not better than) a fire
scenario occurring in the basement of a BCA-DTS compliant building without sprinklers.
CONTENTS

Page 58 of 92
Building A and Building B - Ground and Podium Level Plan

16.3
CONCLUSION
Based on the fire engineering analysis above, the omission of sprinklers in Building A (Ground Level
and above) is considered to be acceptable and the BCA Performance Requirement EP1.4 is
satisfied.
CONTENTS

Page 59 of 92
17
ALTERNATIVE SOLUTION 6 OMISSION OF SMOKE EXHUAST IN CLASS 6 (BUILDING A)
17.1

Table E2.2b requires a Class 6 retail fire compartment greater than 2000m2 to be provided with a
smoke exhaust system.
It is proposed to omit this smoke exhaust requirement to the Class 6 retail tenancies on Ground
Level of Building A.
17.2

The omission of smoke exhaust to the Class 6 retail tenancies on Ground Level of Illuminate
(Building A) is considered to be acceptable on the following basis:
17.3
The Ground Floor retail fire compartment, including non-retail areas and external undercroft/laneway areas, is approximately 2119m2
The Ground Floor retail fire compartment area will reduce below 2000m2 if non-retail areas such
as plant/refuse rooms, stair shafts, lift shafts and lift lobby (approximately 253m 2) are excluded.
Refer to mark-ups below.
Similarly, the Ground Floor retail fire compartment area will reduce below 2000m 2 if external
under-croft/laneways (approximately 1090m2) are excluded. These external areas would be
expected to contain minimal fire load due to the open nature of the areas. Also refer to mark-ups
below.
Without the inclusion of non-retail/external areas in the retail fire compartment size calculation,
the fire compartment size will reduce below 2000m2 in floor area. A retail fire compartment less
than 2000m2 in floor area would not prescriptively require a smoke exhaust system.
The proposed retail tenancies on Ground Level of Building A, whilst have a fire compartment floor
area greater than 2000m2, would not result in a fire safety risk greater than a BCA-DTS compliant
retail fire compartment less than 2000m2 in floor area (without smoke exhaust) as the total fire
load would likely to be less.
CONCLUSION
Based on the fire engineering analysis above, the omission of smoke exhaust to the Class 6 retail
tenancies on Ground Level of Building A is considered to be acceptable and the BCA Performance
Requirement EP2.2 is satisfied.
CONTENTS

Page 60 of 92
18
ALTERNATIVE SOLUTION 7 RATIONALISED FRL FOR SOU SHOWER FLOOR (BUILDING B)
18.1

Minimum fire-resistance level (FRL) 40 minutes construction (i.e. minimum 160mm thick flat slabs)
shall be provided in lieu of BCA-DTS FRL 90 minutes construction to the floor within SOU shower
areas on Levels 1-11 (due to the recess of the floor slabs in these localised areas) in this sprinkler
protected building The mark-up below indicates the location of floors with reduced FRL of 40
minutes.
Minimum FRL 60 minutes construction (i.e. minimum 180mm thick flat slabs) shall be provided in lieu
of BCA-DTS FRL 90 minutes construction to the rest of the floors.
18.2

The proposed FRL 40 minutes to the floor within SOU shower areas and FRL 60 minutes to the rest
of the floors on Levels 2-5 is considered to be acceptable on the following basis:
The Eurocode methodology is selected to analyse the equivalent fire severity of each apartment
type in this building. The proposed FRL 40 minutes construction to the floor within SOUs and FRL
60 minutes to the rest of the floors is acceptable if the fire severity/time equivalency outcome
from the Eurocode method is less than 40 minutes.
The empirical expression for equivalent fire severity based on the Eurocode method
10
is:
te,d = qf,d kb wf
where
kb is a conversion factor based on the materials of construction. k b = 0.07 is
adopted.
10
CONTENTS

Page 61 of 92

qf,d = qf,k . m . q1 . q2 . n
where

recommends m = 0.8. However to be conservative, m = 1.0 is adopted.
q2 is a factor taking into account the different active fire-fighting measures
access routes, fight fighting devices). For conservative assessment, only the
factors relating to the provision of automatic fire suppression with 1
independent water supply have been considered, and all other factors have
been conservatively ignored. q2 = 0.53 is adopted.
density per unit area of 200 MJ/m2 has been adopted for the shower rooms due
to low fire load expected in these rooms. Weighted average of the fire load
energy density is adopted for the analyses.
6.0
wf
H
where
0.3
0.62
900.4 v 4
1 bv h
0.5
v = Av/Af, 0.025 v 0.25

h = Ah/Af
bv = 12.5(1+10 v - v2 ) 10.0
When flashover occurs the glazed walls and doors of the residential units are likely to be broken
and fell out. This has been adopted in the fire severity assessment.
Key input parameters and the fire severity outcome (time equivalent) for each residential
apartment type are summarised below.
The fire severities for all residential apartment types are less than 40 minutes and therefore the
provision of FRL 40 minutes construction to the floor within SOUs and FRL 60 minutes to the rest
of the floors is considered to be acceptable.
CONTENTS

Page 62 of 92
Further to the above, an AS2118.1 sprinkler system will be provided throughout the residential
apartments.
Based on the Australian Fire Incident Statistics, the reliability of a sprinkler system is quoted in
the range of 98-99%. Other researches indicate that it is more likely to be between 95-99%11,12. It
is considered that the sprinkler system in the building will be maintained (as part of regulatory
requirements) and operated properly in accordance with the relevant standards and procedures,
therefore high reliability can be expected for the sprinkler system in this building.
Activation of the sprinkler system is expected to control the spread of fire in the building, as well
as limit the quantity and temperature of smoke produced by the fire. The average temperature
outside the immediate area of operation of the sprinkler system is expected to be below 100C
and the average temperature within the area of sprinklers operation is expected to be below
13
200C (except the area near the seat of fire) . Therefore, the activation of sprinklers would
reduce the fire/smoke temperature the slabs would be exposed to and prevent catastrophic
structural failure.
18.3
CONCLUSION
Based on the fire engineering analysis above, the proposed FRL 40 minutes construction to the floor
within SOUs and FRL 60 minutes to the rest of the floors is considered to be acceptable and
achieves an equivalent level of safety that would be required from a BCA-DTS solution. BCA
Performance Requirements CP1 and CP2 are satisfied.
11
EK Budnick, Automatic Sprinkler System Reliability, Fire Protection Engineering, Issue No. 9 2001.
Warrington Fire Research Fire Resistant Barriers and Structures Aug 2000, section 3.6.2.2 Page 31
13
England P, Kurban K et al, Guide for the Design of Fire Resistant Barriers & Structures,2000, Section 3.6.2.2, pp29-30.
12
CONTENTS

Page 63 of 92
19
ALTERNATIVE SOLUTION 8 EXTENDED TRAVEL DISTANCES FROM SOUS AT LEVELS 1 11 (BUILDING B)
19.1

Maximum egress travel distance of 10m (in lieu of 6m) from end-of-corridor SOUs to a point of choice
for egress is proposed at Levels 1 - 11.
19.2

The extended travel distances from SOUs on Levels 1 to 11 of Building B are considered to be
distance to a point of choice for egress at Level 2. Also refer mark-up below. The same fire
engineering strategy/requirement applies to Level 1 and Levels 3 to 11 and is not repeated here.
detection system shall be also provided in the common/circulation areas at Class 2 floor levels.
One additional thermal detector shall be provided in in each unit at Level 2. The activation from
and 20212 (SOUs with extended travel). AS1670.4 compliant minimum sound pressure level of
75 dBA (with all doors closed) shall be also achieved at each bedhead in Units 20203, 20204,
20211 and 20212.
common/circulation areas (including enclosures/cupboards) at Level 2 shall also activate the fire
alarm in Units 20203, 20204, 20211 and 20212.
Level 2 Building B
CONTENTS

Page 64 of 92
In accordance with BCA-DTS provisions, a smoke or thermal detection system is not required in
each unit (SOU) of this building and only a local smoke alarm system is required in each unit. The
activation of local smoke alarms will only provide fire alarm to the fire origin unit. The fire alarm in
other areas outside the fire origin unit will not be triggered until the activation of the sprinkler
system in the fire origin unit.
shorter detection time/fire alarm time would be provided to the SOUs with extended travel. This
Firecalc fire engineering modelling has been used to estimate the activation time of the sprinkler
system and the thermal detector in a typical residential unit. The fire scenario modelled
14
considered a medium t2 growth rate . The Firecalc input parameters and outcomes are
summarised as follows:
Sprinkler activation time = 214.5 seconds
Thermal detector activation time = 204 seconds
14
CONTENTS

Page 65 of 92
From the analysis above, the utilisation of thermal detector provides a shorter detection/fire alarm
time of approximately 10 seconds (214.5 204 = 10.5 seconds) than the sprinkler system. The
10 seconds is referred herein as the time difference between the BCA alarm time and the fire
engineering alarm time.
from Thompson & Marchant15 (whereby the maximum flow speed of a male and a female is
complete the maximum increased travel distance of 4.0m is less than the time difference
19.3
For a fire incident occurring in Level 1 Multi purpose room, refer to the assessment in Section 20
for the time difference between the BCA alarm time and the fire engineering alarm time as a
result of provision of additional smoke detectors in the Multi purpose room.
CONCLUSION
Based on the fire engineering analysis above and in Section 20 below, the extended travel distances
from SOUs on the residential floors Level 1 to 11 of Building B are considered to be acceptable and
the BCA Performance Requirements DP4 and EP2.2 are satisfied.
15
16
1971, New York
CONTENTS

Page 66 of 92
20
ALTERNATIVE SOLUTION 9 EXTENDED TRAVEL DISTANCES FROM MULTI PURPOSE

ROOM AT LEVEL 1 (BUILDING B)
20.1

Travel distance from within the Multi purpose room on Level 1 to a point of choice is 26m (in lieu of
20m).
20.2

The extended travel distances from the Level 1 Multi purpose room of Building B are considered to
distance to a point of choice for egress from the Multi purpose room. Also refer mark-up below.
Refer to Section 19 above for the fire engineering strategy/assessment associated with SOU
extended travel.
The activation from either thermal detector in units at Level 1 shall also activate the fire alarm in
the Multi purpose room, and AS1670.4 compliant minimum sound pressure level of 75 dBA (with
all doors closed) shall be also achieved throughout the Multi purpose room area. This strategy
could provide earlier fire detection in the event of a fire in an SOU and reduce alarm time to offset
the additional time required for egress (including travel from SOUs, refer Section 19).
Provision of additional smoke detectors (reduced spacing of not more than 6.0m between smoke
detectors and not more than 3.0m between smoke detectors and wall) within the Multi purpose
room. This strategy could provide earlier fire detection in the event of a fire in the room and
reduce alarm time to offset the additional time required for egress (including travel from SOUs).
(including enclosures/cupboards/stores/comms/MSB) at Level 1 shall also activate the fire alarm
in the Multi purpose room.
below, shall remain fire load sterile and no storage is permitted in this area.
Level 1 Building B
CONTENTS

Page 67 of 92
For a fire incident occurring in any of the SOUs on this level, the assessment in Section 19 would
also be applicable to the extended travel from within the Multi purpose room. That is, the earlier
activation of the fire alarm (approximately 10 seconds quicker) in the Multi purpose room as a
result of provision of additional thermal detectors in the SOUs would be able to offset the
additional time (approximately 6 seconds) required for egress due to the extended travel of up to
26m to a point of choice (in lieu of 20m).
For a fire incident occurring in the Multi purpose room, the assessment below is provided to
demonstrate that the provision of additional smoke detectors in this room would also be able to
offset the additional time required for egress from the Multi purpose room. It is noted here that the
assessment below is also applicable to extended travel (of up to 4m) from the SOUs on this floor
in the event of a fire in the Multi Purpose Room.
In accordance with BCA-DTS provisions, an AS1670.1 smoke detection system is required to be

provided in the Multi purpose room. A smoke detection system complying with AS1670.1
requires smoke detectors to be provided on a grid spacing of 10.2m (or 5.1m between wall and
detector).
It is proposed to provide additional smoke detectors (reduced spacing of not more than 6.0m
between smoke detectors and not more than 3.0m between smoke detectors and wall) in the
Multi purpose room. This would offset the additional evacuation time required to complete the
maximum increased travel distance of 6.0m (26.0m 20m = 6.0m) from the Multi purpose room.
FPETool 17 fire engineering modelling has been used to estimate the activation time of the
AS1670.1 spaced smoke detectors and the smoke detectors with reduced spacing. The fire
18
scenario modelled considered a medium t2 growth rate . The FPETool input parameters and
outcomes are summarised as follows:
Table 20.1- FPETool Inputs and Results for Smoke Detection Times (Multi purpose room)
Activation Temperature
Detector RTI
Distance between Fire
and Detector
Ceiling Height
19
Fire Growth Rate
Detection Time
BCA/AS1670.1 Detection
Time
36 C
0.5 ms
Fire Engineering Detection Time

with reduced spacing
36 C
0.5 ms
5.1 m
3.0 m
2.4 m
Fast t2
3.5 m
Fast t2
62 seconds
80 seconds
From the analysis above, the additional detectors with reduced spacing provide a shorter fire
detection time of minimum 18 seconds than using the BCA/AS 16701.1 standard spacing.
distance of 6.0m from the Multi purpose room is calculated to be 6.0 seconds.
Therefore, the utilisation of fire engineering strategy with additional smoke detectors in the Multi
purpose room would provide sufficient detection/fire alarm time to offset the additional time
required to complete the increased travel distance of 6.0m from the Multi purpose room.
17
18
19
It is also noted that the time difference between the BCA alarm time and the fire engineering
alarm time is also adequate to offset the additional travel time associated with extended travel
distances from the SOUs on this floor.
EN1991-1-2:2002, Eurocde 1: Actions on structures Part 1-2: General actions Actions on structures exposed to fire.
CONTENTS

Page 68 of 92
20.3
CONCLUSION
Based on the fire engineering analysis above and in Section 19 above, the extended travel distances
from within the Multi Purpose room of Building B are considered to be acceptable and the BCA
Performance Requirements DP4 and EP2.2 are satisfied.
CONTENTS

Page 69 of 92
21
ALTERNATIVE SOLUTION 10 DISCHARGE FROM FIRE ISOLATED STAIRS (BUILDING B)
21.1

be protected.
The fire isolated stairs of Building B discharge into the confines of the building (under building line)
discharge to public roads necessitates passing within 6m of openings which are not protected. Refer
mark-ups below. It is proposed to rationalise the egress provision and the FRL provision to the
Ground Floor Plan
Level 1 Floor Plan
CONTENTS

Page 70 of 92
21.2

basis:
21.3
stairways (B2) of Building B. Refer mark-ups below.
The discharge of fire-isolated stairways of Building B, although into the confines of the building
occur.
FRL 1 hour construction with minimum 2m height (in lieu of 3m) is provided at the two locations
shown in the mark-ups above to provide protection to egress paths.
from the building upon discharge from the stairs to reach a public road.
CONCLUSION
discharge from the fire isolated stairs of Building B and the FRL provision to the external walls or
CONTENTS

Page 71 of 92
22
ALTERNATIVE SOLUTION 11 OMISSION OF SPRINKLER PROTECTION TO DERBY FANS

(WITHIN CONCEALED CEILING SPACES) (BUILDING B)
22.1
BCA-DTS PROVISION DEPARTURE AND PROPOSED ALTERNATIVE SOLUTION

Ceiling voids in the residential units generally comply with AS 2118.1 sprinkler exemption Clause
5.6.1(a), (b) and (c), as follows:
(a) Concealed spaces less than 200 mm in depth measured from the top of the ceiling material,
or the floor to the underside of the structure above, need not be protected.
(b) Concealed spaces need not be protected if they are constructed entirely of non-combustible
material and contain only
(i) fire-resistant cables to AS/NZS 3000;
(ii) non-bundled electrical wiring and lighting installed in accordance with AS/NZS 3000;
(iii) piping; and
(iv) metal ducting with flexible connections and insulation complying with AS 4254.
(c) Concealed spaces not exceeding 800 mm in depth, otherwise requiring protection, with the
roof or floor above of concrete, and with fire and draft stops provided at intervals not
exceeding 15 m in each direction, need not be sprinkler-protected.
However, Clause 5.6.1(d) states that any concealed space not requiring protection under Clause
5.6.1(a), (b) or (c) above, and which contains electrical motors, electric heating coils or other heat
producing equipment shall have a sprinkler installed within 1.5m of such equipment.
It is proposed to omit sprinklers for the derby fans provided within the ceiling void spaces above wet
areas of the residential units.
Note: The Fan Coil Units (FCUs, if provided) in the celling void spaces of the residential units will be
provided with sprinklers to comply with AS 2118.1.
22.2

The non-provision of sprinkler protection to the derby fans in residential units is acceptable on the
following basis:
The ceiling void spaces above wet areas within the residential units generally contain minimal
combustibles (combustibles would most likely to be associated with electrical cable insulation,
plastic piping etc).
The derby fans serving the wet areas are local fans and are not connected to other systems. The
fire load associated with these fans and the surrounding ceiling void spaces would be limited (e.g.
cable insulation, plastic piping etc).
In the event of failure of a derby fan due to electrical/mechanical faults, fire ignition is unlikely to
occur. In the unlikely event of a fire, a smouldering rather than flaming fire is more likely due to
low fire load in the surrounding ceiling void spaces. If a sprinkler head was provided it is unlikely
that this sprinkler head would be activated (i.e. minimal heat produced from a smouldering fire).
A smouldering fire or a flaming fire as a result of derby fan failure would generate smoke which
would be detected by the local smoke alarm(s) in the unit. Upon activation the smoke alarm(s)
this would then alert the residents in the unit of fire origin.
In the unlikely event of a significant fire developing as a result of derby fan failure (i.e. likely to be
associated with fuel load below ceiling), the sprinklers provided in other areas of the unit (i.e.
below ceiling) would activate and control (if not suppress) the fire. The activation of the sprinkler
system would also activate the building wide alarm system which would then alert occupants in
other units.
The residential sprinkler system provided in other areas of the unit (i.e. below ceiling) and the firerated bounding construction of the unit would prevent the spread of fire to public corridor and
other units.
CONTENTS

Page 72 of 92
22.3
CONCLUSION
Based on the fire engineering analysis above, the non-provision of sprinklers to the derby fans in the
residential units of the building is considered to be acceptable and the BCA Performance
Requirement EP1.4 is satisfied
CONTENTS

Page 73 of 92
23
CONCLUSION
Exova Warringtonfire Aus Pty Ltd has been engaged by Pradella Developments Pty Ltd for the
professional fire engineering services to formulate fire safety design solutions for the BCA-DTS
provision departures associated with the proposed residential apartment buildings, Illuminate
(Building A) and Radiance (Building B) as part of the Light & Co project, at 321 Montague Road,
West End, QLD 4101
This Fire Engineering Report (FER) is formulated as a fire engineering solution report and is
produced generally following the recommendations as described in the International Fire Engineering
Guidelines 2005. This report reflects the fire engineering design intent and general fire and life safety
design strategy for the project, to demonstrate that the proposed works will satisfy the intent of BCA
2014 objectives and performance requirements for the areas identified.
It is the opinion of Exova Warringtonfire Aus Pty Ltd that the relevant BCA performance requirements
for each BCA-DTS provision departure are satisfied by formulating the proposed alternative solutions
in this report. Refer Section 5 for the BCA-DTS provision departures and the proposed alternative
solutions.
The fire engineering strategy/requirements detailed in Section 8 and the requirements for standards
of construction, commissioning, management and maintenance in Section 11 shall be provided to the
building. It is the responsibility of individual stakeholder or discipline consultant to ensure that the
relevant fire engineering requirements in this report are correctly incorporated into their design.
CONTENTS

Page 74 of 92
24
VALIDITY / DISCLAIMER
This report is prepared for the proposed residential apartment buildings, Illuminate (Building A) and
Radiance (Building B) as part of the Light & Co project, at 321 Montague Road, West End, QLD
4101and shall not be applied to other buildings.
This report has formulated and analysed a fire safety design against fire safety objectives developed
in conjunction with relevant stakeholders and authorities having jurisdiction. Other issues not
specifically addressed in the context of the fire engineering design process have been excluded from
the scope of this report.
Any modifications or changes to the building, fire safety management system, or building usage from
that described may invalidate the findings of this report. Should such changes occur, a reassessment should be sought.
Arson has been shown statistically to contribute to fire. This report has addressed the incidence of
minor forms of arson as a single ignition source; however, major arson involving accelerants and/or
multiple ignition sources are beyond the scope of this analysis and therefore have been excluded
from the report.
Attention is drawn to the conditions of use depicted on page 3 of this report.
CONTENTS

Page 75 of 92
APPENDIX A
PRELIMINARY QFES CONSULTATION MEETING HELD ON 19TH DECEMBER 2015
CONTENTS

Page 76 of 92
CONTENTS

Page 77 of 92
Proposed Alternative Solutions discussed at the preliminary QFES consultation meeting held on
19th December 2015
BCA
Clause
D1.4
BCA-DTS
Provision
Solution
Relevant
Performance
Requirement

distances (maximum
BCA Clause D1.4(c) 30m to a point of choice
and maximum 60m to an
requires that no
point on a floor must exit) are allowed in the
basement carpark
be more than 20 m
levels.
from an exit, or a
point from which
travel in different
DP4
directions to two
exits is available, in response sprinkler
which case the
heads are proposed in
maximum distance
the basement carpark
to one of those exits levels to provide quicker
must not exceed 40 fire detection/alarm
m.
activation to offset the
additional time required
for egress.
Assessment
Method
Quantitative and
qualitative
assessment based
on BCA A0.5b(ii)
and A0.9(c)
CONTENTS

Page 78 of 92
19th December 2015
Tower A
BCA
Clause
D1.4
D1.7
E1.3
E1.5
BCA-DTS
Provision
Solution
Relevant
Performance
Requirement

BCA Clause D1.4 (a)
requires that the
entrance doorway of
Levels 1 - 5.
any SOU must be not
more than 6m from
DP4, EP2.2
Additional thermal
warning are proposed to
provide prompt fire
BCA Clause D1.7(b)
a space within the
building (under
compliance with this Alternative paths of egress
clause.
to open space are
available upon discharge CP2, EP2.2
BCA Clause D1.7(c) from fire-isolated stairways
requires travel from of Tower A.
fire-isolated exits
external walls/
openings to achieve
appropriate FRL or
be protected.
The booster enclosure is
located adjacent to retail
glazing and thus does not
comply with the required
AS2419.1 requires
AS2419.1 FRL protection.
booster assemblies
which are within, or
affixed to, the
It is proposed to provide
external wall of the
internal wall wetting
building to have FRL sprinklers to protect at
90 minutes protection least 2m (length) of the
EP1.3
of not less than 2m
glazing adjacent to the
each side of and 3m booster enclosure. The
above the upper
wall wetting sprinklers
hose connections in protected glazing shall
the booster
be toughnened laminated
assembly.
glass or heatstrengthened safety
glass with thickness of
not less than 10mm.
A sprinkler system
must be installed in
a building that has
an effective height

Tower A is less than
EP1.4
25m. However, as Tower
A and Tower B share a
Assessment
Method
Quantitative and
qualitative
assessment based
on BCA A0.5(b)(ii)
and A0.9(c)
Qualitative
assessment based
on BCA A0.5b(i)
and A0.9(b)(ii)
Qualitative
assessment based
on BCA A0.5b(i) and
A0.9(b)(ii)
Qualitative
assessment based
on BCA A0.5(b)(ii)
CONTENTS

Page 79 of 92
BCA
Clause
BCA-DTS
Provision
of more than 25m.
Solution
Relevant
Performance
Requirement
common basement
carpark and Tower Bs
than 25m, Tower A is
be sprinkler protected.
Assessment
Method
and A0.9(c)
sprinklers in Tower A as
the only connection
between Tower A and
Tower B is the basement
carpark which is a
separate fire
compartment to the
towers. Further, the only
connection between
Tower A and the
fire isolated lift shafts.
Table E2.2b
requires a Class 6
retail fire
compartment
Table E2.2b
greater than 2000m2
to be provided with
a smoke exhaust
system.

fire compartment,
including non-retail areas
and external undercroft/laneway areas, is
fire compartment area
EP2.2
will reduce below 2000m2
if non-retail or external
is excluded.
Qualitative
assessment based
on BCA A0.5b(i)
and A0.9(b)(ii)
It is proposed to delete
the BCA-DTS smoke
exhaust requirement to
the Ground Floor retail.
CONTENTS

Page 80 of 92
19th December 2015
Tower B
BCA
Clause
BCA-DTS
Provision
Solution
Relevant
Performance
Requirement
Specification C1.1
Clause 3.7 allows
internal columns in the
storey immediately
below a non-combustible
roof to have FRL 60
minutes if the building
effective height is less
than 25m.
C3.7
D1.7
D1.4
Specification C1.1
Table 3 requires
loadbearing internal
columns to achieve
an FRL of 90/-/-.
The concession
described above is not
CP1, CP2
applicable to the
proposed building due to
its effective height being
greater than 25m.
However, it is proposed
to provide FRL 60
minutes to the top floor
steel columns supporting
the non-combustible roof
due to their low load
ratios and sprinkler
protection.
BCA Clause D1.7(b)

fire isolated stairs into Alternative paths of
a space within the
egress to open space are
building (under
building line) to meet from fire-isolated
compliance with this stairways of Tower B.
clause.
Further, FRL 1 hour
CP2, EP2.2
BCA Clause D1.7(c) construction with
requires travel from minimum 2m height (in
fire-isolated exits
lieu of 3m) is provided at
passing within 6m of two locations to provide
external walls/
protection to egress
openings to achieve paths.
appropriate FRL or be
protected.
BCA Clause D1.4 (a) 6m) to a point of choice for
requires that the
entrance doorway of Levels 1 - 11.
any SOU must be not [Post meeting note: 9m is
more than 6m from replaced with 10m]
DP4, EP2.2
from which travel in Additional thermal
different directions to detectors and occupant
2 exits is available. warning are proposed to
Assessment
Method
Qualitative and
quantitative
assessment based
on BCA A0.5(b)(i)
and A0.9(b)(ii)
Qualitative
assessment based
on BCA A0.5b(i)
and A0.9(b)(ii)
Quantitative and
qualitative
assessment based
on BCA A0.5(b)(ii)
and A0.9(c)
CONTENTS

Page 81 of 92
BCA
Clause
D1.4
BCA-DTS
Provision
BCA Clause D1.4(c)

requires that no
point on a floor must
be more than 20 m
from an exit, or a
point from which
travel in different
directions to two
exits is available, in
which case the
maximum distance
to one of those exits
must not exceed 40
m.
D2.22 states that
doors of a fireisolated exit serving
any storey above an
effective height of
25m must not be
locked from the
inside throughout
the exit.
D2.22
The above DTS

requirement is not
applicable if a door
is fitted with a failsafe device which
unlocks the door
upon fire alarm and
(i) on at least ever
fourth storey the
doors are not able
to be locked or (ii)
an
intercommunication
system, or an
audible or visual
alarm system,
operated from within
the fire exit is
provided near the
doors.
Solution
Relevant
Performance
Requirement
Assessment
Method

additional smoke detectors
(reduced detectors
spacing) within the multipurpose room.
This strategy could
provide earlier detection
and alarm time to offset
the additional time
The intent of this BCA

clause is to minimise the
risk that a person
becomes trapped in a fire
isolated stair.
For the fire-isolated
stairways serving the
residential floors, it is
proposed to install, on
every fourth storey (in
lieu of every floor), a door
DP4
with a fail-safe device
that unlocks the door on
alarm activation and an
intercommunication
system linked to the FIP
and the Building
Managers office.
Qualitative
assessment based
on BCA A0.5b(i)
and A0.9(b)(ii)
[Post meeting note: This

item is now BCA-DTS
compliant.]
CONTENTS

Page 82 of 92
Fire engineering mark-ups presented at the preliminary QFES consultation meeting held on 19th
December 2015
Basement
CONTENTS

Page 83 of 92
December 2015
Building A
CONTENTS

Page 84 of 92
CONTENTS

Page 85 of 92
CONTENTS

Page 86 of 92
CONTENTS

Page 87 of 92
December 2015
Building B
CONTENTS

Page 88 of 92
CONTENTS

Page 89 of 92
CONTENTS

Page 90 of 92
CONTENTS

Page 91 of 92
CONTENTS

Page 92 of 92
APPENDIX B
QFES ACCEPTANCE IN PRINCPLE OF FEB (REPORT NO. CRM300759-RPT01-3 DATED

23RD MARCH 2015)
CONTENTS
321 Montague Road

West End Queensland
Appendix C Fire Sprinkler System Reliability

The building is to be fitted with a fire sprinkler system installed throughout to AS 2118.1
Automatic fire sprinkler systems Part 1: General requirements.
It is generally acknowledged (as supported by statistics) that a fire will generally be controlled or
extinguished by automatic fire sprinkler operation [6]. This rational is supported by research
conducted by CIBSE [8] and Warrington [9] which showed that the upper layer temperatures are
not likely to exceed 100C during a controlled Fire and 200C for a shielded fire respectively.
Marryatt [10], provides recorded statistics on buildings fitted with automatic Fire sprinkler
systems between the years 18861986 in Australia and New Zealand. The statistical data shows
that for a total of 9,022 recorded fires in 231 occupancies types, 99.46% were controlled or
extinguished by activation of the sprinkler system. It is further stated that the fire controlled
percentage of 99.46% is remarkable, and it is difficult to imagine any electrical, mechanical or
hydraulic device in common use which would have attained a higher standard of reliability.
Marryatt also provides life safety statistics for the total of 9,022 recorded fires in buildings fitted
with automatic sprinkler systems over the 100 year period and states that, it is remarkable that
only 11 deaths occurred in 9,022 fires in 100 years an average of just over one fatality every
nine years. However, in seven of these deaths, the victims were caught in a flash fire or
explosion. Therefore, it is likely only 4 deaths are applicable for occupancies typical to the use of
these premises.
It is also worth noting that in all of the 9,022 recorded fires, standard sprinklers were used. Also,
the current Australian Standard AS 2118.1 (1999) Automatic fire sprinkler systems Part 1:
General requirements has modern design requirements, which increases the reliability beyond
previous standards/design practices. As such, the current sprinkler design standard and design
of the fire sprinkler system in the building is expected to achieve a higher reliability than from
the period where much of the statistical data was sourced.
As supported by the statistical data listed above, sprinkler reliability is considered to be excellent
within Australia and as per Regulatory Legislation; the sprinkler system is required to be
maintained as part of the Buildings Essential Safety Measures (i.e. to AS 1851). The scenario of
sprinkler failure is, therefore, considered extremely unlikely and is therefore excluded from this
report except where specifically noted herein.
The NFPA Handbook [11] also summarises statistics from 2,860 fire incidents where fire
sprinklers were provided (refer Table 610A). Of these fires, 74% of them were controlled by the
action of six (6) or less sprinkler heads. Only six (6) fires occurred where more than 26 sprinkler
heads activated. Note that no details are given regarding the occupancies that comprise the
2,860 fire incidents.
The International Fire Engineering Guidelines [2] suggests that successful control of fires is
achieved in 99% of fires in sprinkler protected buildings.
5675100 FER B
CONTENTS
321 Montague Road

West End Queensland
Appendix D Blazemaster Compatability
5675100 FER B
CONTENTS
321 Montague Road

West End Queensland
Appendix E 3M Certificate of Test
5675100 FER B
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
321 Montague Road

West End Queensland
Appendix F
5675100 FER B
CVs
CONTENTS
Jack Partridge
Jack is a Senior Fire Engineer with Omniis Brisbane office and
has responsibility for delivering Fire Safety and Fire Protection
Services Designs. Jack also holds an Electrical Engineering
degree and is RPEQ registered in this field.
Having worked in the Building Industry since 2007, Jack has
experience providing Alternative Solutions for developments
in a wide range of buildings. Jack possesses sound modelling
skills using both Zone Models and Field Models and on-site
practical experience garnered over the years, both in
consulting and prior.
His experience extends to Hospitals, Aged Care, Office and
Retail Buildings, Storage Facilities, Industrial Buildings and
Educational/Public Buildings.
Prior to Jacks involvement in the Building Industry, Jack had
had extensive Defence Force experience, working in the
Maintenance Engineering, Project Engineering and Logistics
fields.
His project experience includes, among many other projects,
the following representative list:
Redlands City Marina, Qld
Novotel Airport Hotel, Brisbane, Qld
New Port Office, Port of Brisbane, Qld
St Vincents Hospital, Toowoomba, Qld
Pine Rivers Private Hospital, Qld
Mackay Hospital, Qld
Queensland Childrens Hospital, Qld
Steel Storage, Tingalpa, Qld
Steel Storage, Yatala, Qld
Steel Storage, Salisbury, Qld
Visy Beverage Can Factory, Yatala, Qld
Primo Smallgoods Stage 2, Wacol, Qld
Yukana Aged Care Centre, Toowoomba, Qld
St Marys College, Ipswich, Qld
14 20 Constance Street, Fortitude Valley, Qld
135 Pring Street, Hendra, Qld
Garden Central Towers, Mt Gravatt, Qld
Qualifications:
Bachelor of Engineering
Electrical
University of New South Wales
Post Graduate Certificate Aerospace Engineering
Royal Melbourne Institute of
Technology
Master of Engineering
Management
Queensland University of
Technology
Master of Engineering in Fire
Engineering
University of Canterbury, NZ
Registrations:
Chartered Professional Engineer,
Engineers Australia, CPEng
National Professional Engineers
Register, NPER
Registered Professional Engineer
Queensland, Electrical Engineering
and Fire Safety Engineering, RPEQ
Member Engineers Australia,
MIEAust (Electrical College)
Member Society of Fire Safety,
SFS
Affiliate Member of Society of Fire
Protection Engineers
Jack Partridge
CONTENTS
Light & Co - 'Illuminate' (Building A) and 'Radiance' (Building B)

321 Montague Road
West End, QLD 4101
Report Number: CRM300759-RPT02-9

Date: 04 February 2016
Client:
CONTENTS

Page 2 of 90
AUTHORISATION
No.
Issue date
Minor update following QFES comments
04/02/2016
Prepared
by*
Reviewed by*
Approved by*
Dr Summer
Ding
Peter Downer
Simon
Krishnan
RPEQ - 13510
REVISION HISTORY
No.
4
5
6
7
8

FER issue for review and approval by
stakeholders
alternative solution for omission of
sprinklers in concealed ceiling spaces
provided with Derby style ceiling fans
(e.g. ceiling spaces in wet areas).
alternative solution regarding extended
distance between stairs in Building A.
alternative solution regarding extended
corridor length in Building B.
FER updated following Building Certifiers
comments regarding floor FRLs.
Revised to include approving authority of
subject report.
FER updated following QFESs comments
regarding floor FRLs.
Minor update regarding floor FRLs.
Issue date
Prepared by*
Reviewed by*
24/04/2015
Kelvin Bong
Summer Ding
07/08/2015
Kelvin Bong
Summer Ding & Peter

Downer
06/11/2015
Dr Summer Ding
Peter Downer
10/11/2015
Dr Summer Ding
Peter Downer
12/11/2015
Dr Summer Ding
Peter Downer
14/12/2015
Dr Summer Ding
Peter Downer
17/12/2015
Dr Summer Ding
Peter Downer
28/01/2016
Dr Summer Ding
Peter Downer
*For and on behalf of Exova Warringtonfire Aus Pty Ltd.
CONTENTS

Page 3 of 90
CONDITIONS OF USE
Copyright Exova Warringtonfire Aus Pty Ltd 2016.
The report addressee may only reproduce this report in full for use with respect to the project specified in the
report. No organisations or individuals are permitted to reproduce this report or any part thereof for any other
purpose without the prior written consent of a Director of Exova Warringtonfire Aus Pty Ltd.
The copyright and intellectual property rights of Exova Warringtonfire Aus Pty Ltd extend to the data, ideas,
methodologies, calculation procedures, and conclusions presented in this report and must not be used without
authorisation in writing from Exova Warringtonfire Aus Pty Ltd. This report is subject to change and no liability will
be accepted in relation to any loss resulting from use of the report pending approval from the authority having
jurisdiction.
CONTACT INFORMATION
Victoria
New South Wales
Unit 2, 409-411 Hammond Road

Dandenong Victoria 3175
Australia
Suite 2002a, Level 20, 44 Market Street

Sydney NSW 2000
Australia
T: +61 (0)3 9767 1000

F: +61 (0)3 9767 1001
T: +61 (0)2 8270 7600

F: +61 (0)2 9299 6076
Queensland
Perth
Northpoint, Unit 29, Level 6

231 North Quay
Brisbane QLD 4000
Australia
Level 11, 251 Adelaide Terrace

Perth WA 6000
Australia
T: +61 (0)7 3238 1700

F: +61 (0)7 3211 4833
W: http://www.exova.com
E: market.pacific@exova.com
CONTENTS

Page 4 of 90
OVERVIEW (EXECUTIVE SUMMARY)

Exova Warringtonfire Aus Pty Ltd has been engaged by Pradella Developments Pty Ltd for the professional fire
engineering services to formulate fire safety design solutions for the BCA-DTS provision departures associated
with the proposed residential apartment buildings, Illuminate (Building A) and Radiance (Building B) as part of
the Light & Co project, at 321 Montague Road, West End, QLD 4101.
The Fire Engineering Brief (FEB No. CRM300759-RPT01-3 dated 23rd March 2015) was accepted upon by the
design team and the approving authorities. The FEB was prepared generally as described in the International Fire
Engineering Guidelines (ABCB 2005) and the Engineers Australia Society of Fire Safety Code of Practice. The
QFES acceptance-in-principle of the FEB is included in Appendix B of this report.
The Fire Engineering Brief process involved the collaborative development and agreement of an appropriate
methodology, structure and trial concept(s) by relevant stakeholders. In conjunction with meetings and
correspondence with relevant stakeholders and authorities having jurisdiction, the FEB forms the basis for further
detailed fire safety analysis and design presented in this Fire Engineering Report (FER).
It is noted here that following the issue of the FEB, the following additional alternative solutions have been added:
1. Reduced FRL for the residential floor slabs in Building B.
2. Extended distance between stairs (alternative exits) in Building A up to 46m, in lieu of 45m.
3. The public corridor on Ground Floor of Building B is up to 42m in length and is not divided with smokeproof walls.
4. Omission of sprinkler protection to Derby style ceiling fans in concealed ceiling spaces above wet areas of
residential units.
As confirmed by the Building Certifier, the BCA-DTS provision departures and proposed alternative solutions for
this project are detailed in Section 5 of this report.
The fire engineering strategy/requirements are detailed in Section 8 and the requirements for standards of
construction, commissioning, management and maintenance in Section 11 shall be provided to the buildings. It is
the responsibility of individual stakeholder or discipline consultant to ensure that the relevant fire engineering
requirements in this report are correctly incorporated into their design.
CONTENTS

Page 5 of 90
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 8
1.1
Project ............................................................................................................................... 8
1.2
Client ................................................................................................................................. 8
1.3
Project Address ................................................................................................................. 8
1.4
Description of Work ........................................................................................................... 8
1.5
Scope and Limits of Report ............................................................................................... 8
1.6
Regulatory Framework ...................................................................................................... 8
1.7
Information Considered for Fire Engineering Report ........................................................ 8
1.8
Fire Engineering Stakeholders ........................................................................................10
Principal Building Characteristics ..............................................................................................11
2.1
General Description.........................................................................................................11
2.2
Site Plan ..........................................................................................................................14
2.3
Functional use of the buildings ........................................................................................14
2.4
Unusual or High Hazard Factors .....................................................................................14
Dominant Occupant Characteristics ..........................................................................................15
3.1
General Occupant Review ..............................................................................................15
3.2
Distribution / Occupancy density .....................................................................................15
3.3
Residents and their Visitors, Retail Customers ...............................................................15
3.4
Staff Members .................................................................................................................15
3.5
Authorised Visitors ..........................................................................................................15
Fire Safety Design Objectives .....................................................................................................16
4.1
Client Objectives .............................................................................................................16
4.2
Loss Control Objectives ..................................................................................................16
4.3
Regulatory Objectives .....................................................................................................16
4.4
Fire Brigade Objectives ...................................................................................................16
BCA Analysis Information ...........................................................................................................17
5.1
Specific BCA-DTS Provision Departures and Applicable BCA Performance
Requirements .................................................................................................................................17
5.2
Variations to Other Objectives to be Addressed .............................................................20
Hazards ..........................................................................................................................................21
6.1
General Layout ................................................................................................................21
6.2
Activities ..........................................................................................................................21
6.3
Ignition Sources ...............................................................................................................21
6.4
Fuel Sources ...................................................................................................................21
6.5
Interactions Between Ignition and Fuel Sources .............................................................22
6.6
Fire prevention ................................................................................................................22
Fire Preventative & Protective .....................................................................................................23
7.1
Hazards Mitigation ...........................................................................................................23
7.2
Management Measures...................................................................................................23
Fire Safety Measures ....................................................................................................................25
8.1
Fire Resistance and Compartmentation..........................................................................25
8.2
Egress Provision .............................................................................................................25
8.3
Services and Equipment .................................................................................................33
8.4
Management Provisions ..................................................................................................34
Approach and Methods of Analysis ...........................................................................................36
9.1
Fire Engineering Analysis................................................................................................36
9.2
Assessment Methodology ...............................................................................................36
CONTENTS

Page 6 of 90
10
Relevant Acceptance Criteria ......................................................................................................39

10.1
Judgement of Acceptance Criteria ..................................................................................39
10.2
Environmental and Loss Control Acceptance Criteria ....................................................39
10.3
Acceptance Criteria for the Analysis ...............................................................................39
11
Standards of Construction, Commissioning, Management and Maintenance.......................42
11.1
Construction ....................................................................................................................42
11.2
Commissioning ................................................................................................................42
11.3
Management-in-Use ........................................................................................................42
11.4
Maintenance ....................................................................................................................43
FIRE ENGINEERING ANALYSIS ....................................................................................................................44
12
Alternative Solution 1 Extended Travel Distances in Basement Carpark ...........................45
12.1
12.2
12.3
Conclusion .......................................................................................................................46
13
Alternative Solution 2 Extended Travel Distances at Levels 1-5 (Building A) ....................47
13.1
13.2
14
Alternative Solution 3 Extended Distance between Stairs on Levels 1-5 (Building A) ......50
14.1
14.2
14.3
Conclusion .......................................................................................................................50
15
Alternative Solution 4 Discharge from Fire Isolated Stairs (Building A) .............................51
15.1
15.2
15.3
Conclusion .......................................................................................................................52
16
Alternative Solution 5 Omission of Sprinklers (Building A)..................................................53
16.1
16.2
16.3
Conclusion .......................................................................................................................54
17
Alternative Solution 6 Omission of Smoke Exhuast in Class 6 (Building A) ......................55
17.1
17.2
17.3
Conclusion .......................................................................................................................55
18
Alternative Solution 7 Rationalised FRL for SOU Floor (Building B) ...................................56
18.1
18.2
18.3
Conclusion .......................................................................................................................59
19
Alternative Solution 8 Extended Corridor Length on Ground Floor (Building B) ...............60
19.1
19.2
19.3
Conclusion .......................................................................................................................60
20
Alternative Solution 9 Extended Travel Distances From SOUs at Levels 1 - 11 (Building
B)
61
20.1
20.2
21
Alternative Solution 10 Extended Travel Distances From Multi Purpose Room at Level 1
(Building B) .....................................................................................................................................................64
21.1
21.2
CONTENTS

Page 7 of 90
22
Alternative Solution 11 Discharge from Fire Isolated Stairs (Building B) ...........................67

22.1
22.2
22.3
Conclusion .......................................................................................................................68
23
Alternative Solution 12 Omission of Sprinkler Protection To Derby Fans (Within
Concealed Ceiling Spaces) (Building B) ......................................................................................................69
24
Conclusion ....................................................................................................................................71
25
Validity / Disclaimer ......................................................................................................................72
APPENDIX A
PRELIMINARY QFES CONSULTATION MEETING HELD ON 19
TH
DECEMBER 2015 73
APPENDIX B
QFES ACCEPTANCE IN PRINCPLE OF FEB (REPORT NO. CRM300759-RPT01-3
RD
DATED 23 MARCH 2015) ............................................................................................................................90
CONTENTS

Page 8 of 90
INTRODUCTION
1.1
PROJECT
The project relates to the proposed residential apartment buildings, Illuminate (Building A) and
Radiance (Building B) as part of the Light & Co project, in West End, Brisbane.
1.2
CLIENT
Exova Warringtonfire Aus Pty Ltd (Exova) has been engaged by Pradella Develpments Pty Ltd.
1.3
PROJECT ADDRESS
The proposed residential buildings are to be located at 321 Montague Road, West End, QLD 4101.
1.4
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
Exova has been engaged to provide alternative solutions to address the BCA-DTS provision
departures identified by the Building Certifier for this project.
1.5
SCOPE AND LIMITS OF REPORT

Sean Igoe of Philip Chun & Associates Pty Ltd is the Building Certifier for the purposes of
considering applications for building permits relating to the proposed buildings and construction
works at the above address. In considering the applications, the issues described in Section 5 were
identified as varying from the deemed-to-satisfy (DTS) provisions of the BCA.
The Client has requested that these issues be considered as Alternative Solutions and addressed in
accordance with appropriate methodologies and procedures so as to satisfy regulatory requirements
for the project. The analysis of the fire safety strategy against stakeholder agreed objectives is
reported in this Fire Engineering Report, and provides a technical opinion to the Authorities Having
Jurisdiction in their considerations of approving the proposed design for compliance with the
applicable regulations.
The analysis was undertaken in line with the objectives and limitations of the Society of Fire Safety
Code of Practice, and therefore does not specifically consider arson (other than as a source of initial
ignition), multiple simultaneous ignition sources, acts of terrorism, protection of property (other than
adjoining property), business interruption or losses, or personal or moral obligations of the owner /
occupier.
Exova has developed the fire safety strategy for this project taking note of our duty as designers of
workplaces under the relevant workplace safety legislation. Other practitioners documenting these
designs may also have a duty under such legislation which they must consider in preparing their
designs.
1.6
REGULATORY FRAMEWORK
In addition to the requirements of the BCA 2014, the following legislation (QLD) is pertinent to the
project:
1.7
Sustainable Planning Act 2009
Sustainable Planning Regulation 2009
Building Act 1975
Building Regulation 2006
Building Fire Safety Regulation 2008
Fire and Emergency Services Act 1990
INFORMATION CONSIDERED FOR FIRE ENGINEERING REPORT

The following documents or information have been considered in the formulation of this Fire
Engineering Report:
(i)
Regular design team meetings and communications;
CONTENTS

Page 9 of 90
(ii)
Preliminary Design Assessment Report: Summary of requirements to issue the Development

Permit (Building) prepared by Philip Chun Building Code Consulting, Job Number: 14-203752,
Revision No. 02 dated 23 October 2014.
(iii)
Preliminary QFES consultation meeting held on 19th December 2014, refer to Appendix A for
meeting minutes and materials presented at the meeting.
(iv)
Architectural drawings associated with this report are referenced as follows:
Table 1.1 Referenced architectural drawings
Number
A_CA_WD_0010
Title
Site Plan
Revision
B
Date
04/09/2015
A_CA_WD_0011
04/09/2015
A_CA_WD_0012
17/08/2015
A_CA_WD_0013
Ground & Podium Level Plan
04/09/2015
01/09/2015
Building A Illuminate
A_A_WD_0100
Ground Floor Plan
A_A_WD_0101
Level 1 Floor Plan
01/09/2015
A_A_WD_0102
Level 2-5 Floor Plan
05/11/2015
A_A_WD_0106
Roof Plan
01/09/2015
A_A_WD_1000
North Elevation
01/09/2015
A_A_WD_1001
South Elevation
01/09/2015
A_A_WD_1002
East Elevation
01/09/2015
A_A_WD_1003
West Elevation
01/09/2015
A_A_WD_1100
Building Section 1
01/09/2015
A_A_WD_1101
Building Section 2
01/09/2015
A_A_WD_1102
Building Section 3
01/09/2015
Building B Radiance
A_B_WD_0100
Ground Floor Plan
01/09/2015
A_B_WD_0101
Level 1 Floor Plan
01/09/2015
A_B_WD_0102
Level 2 Floor Plan
01/09/2015
A_B_WD_0103
Level 3 Floor Plan
01/09/2015
A_B_WD_0104
Level 4 Floor Plan
01/09/2015
A_B_WD_0105
Level 5 Floor Plan
01/09/2015
A_B_WD_0106
Level 6 Floor Plan
01/09/2015
A_B_WD_0107
01/09/2015
A_B_WD_0108
01/09/2015
A_B_WD_0109
Level 11 Floor Plan
01/09/2015
A_B_WD_0110
Roof Plan
01/09/2015
A_B_WD_1000
Building B North Elevation
01/09/2015
A_B_WD_1001
Building B East Elevation
01/09/2015
A_B_WD_1002
Building B South Elevations
01/09/2015
A_B_WD_1003
Building B West Elevations
01/09/2015
A_B_WD_1100
Building Section A
01/09/2015
A_B_WD_1101
Building Section B
01/09/2015
A_B_WD_1102
Building Section C
01/09/2015
CONTENTS

Page 10 of 90
1.8
FIRE ENGINEERING STAKEHOLDERS

The relevant stakeholders of this project are nominated in Table 1.2 below.
Table 1.2 Project stakeholders
Name
Mark Klisch
Duncan Betts
Adam Hamilton
Oscar Bowman
Ian Tsui
Sean Igoe
Ryan Turvey
James OBrien
Kerry Hoolihan
Geoffrey Verrall
Simon Krishnan
Peter Downer
Summer Ding
Organisation
Role
Client Representative
ROTHELOWMAN
Architect
Building Certifier
ADG
Structural Engineer
QFES
Fire Brigade
CONTENTS

Page 11 of 90
PRINCIPAL BUILDING CHARACTERISTICS
2.1
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The project relates to the development of two residential apartment buildings, Illuminate (Building A)
and Radiance (Building B) as part of the Light & Co project, in West End, Brisbane.
The two residential buildings (BCA Class 2), Illuminate (Building A) and Radiance (Building B), will
be connected by a common basement carpark (BCA Class 7a). The Ground Floor of Illuminate
(Building A) contains retail shops (Class 6). Level 1 of Radiance (Building B) has a Multi purpose
room at the end of the residential corridor.
With reference to the Preliminary Design Assessment Report prepared by Philip Chun, both
Illuminate (Building A) and Radiance (Building B) will be considered as one united building under
BCA Part A4 as these buildings are connected through a common basement carpark. Therefore,
Illuminate (Building A) and Radiance (Building B) are to comply with all the requirements of the
BCA as a single building.
The following information has been extracted from the Preliminary Design Assessment Report
prepared by Philip Chun:
Tower A Illuminate (Building A)
Use:
Classification:
Class 2, 6 and 7a
Rise in storeys:
Type A
Floor Area
Effective Height:
16m (approx)
Climate Zone:
Zone 2
Tower B Radiance (Building B)

Use:
Classification:
Class 2 and 7a
Rise in storeys:
12
Type A
Floor Area
Effective Height:
>25m (actual height to be confirmed)
Climate Zone:
Zone 2
CONTENTS

Page 12 of 90
Figure 2.1 Image of Illuminate Building A
CONTENTS

Page 13 of 90
Figure 2.2 Image of Radiance Building B
CONTENTS

Page 14 of 90
2.2
SITE PLAN
The site plan below shows the location of the proposed development. It is noted here that this report
is limited to assessment of BCA-DTS departures associated with Building A and Building B. Building
C and Building D will be developed at a later stage and will be addressed in a separate report
Figure 2.3 Site Plan
2.3
FUNCTIONAL USE OF THE BUILDINGS

Illuminate (Building A) and Radiance (Building B) will be used for residential apartments with
carparks. The retail shops will be located at the Ground Floor of Illuminate (Building A) only.
2.4
UNUSUAL OR HIGH HAZARD FACTORS

The fire engineering process has not raised specific issues relating to BCA-DTS provisions E1.10
and E2.3.
Any dangerous goods to be stored in the property (if applicable) are to be addressed by way of
adherence with the relevant codes and standards, noting that the client has not advised that any are
expected.
CONTENTS

Page 15 of 90
DOMINANT OCCUPANT CHARACTERISTICS
3.1
GENERAL OCCUPANT REVIEW

The building occupants can be broadly classified into three groups, being:
3.2
(i)
Residents and their visitors, retail customers; and
(ii)
Staff members; and
(iii)
Authorised visitors (e.g. maintenance contractors).
DISTRIBUTION / OCCUPANCY DENSITY

BCA Table D1.13 occupancy density is applicable to the areas associated with this report.
3.3
RESIDENTS AND THEIR VISITORS, RETAIL CUSTOMERS

The majority of the building occupants within the buildings will be residents and their visitors. They
are expected to respond to a fire alarm. Retail customers are also expected to respond to a fire
alarm, and follow staff/warden instructions.
The residents are considered to be familiar with the building layout. Visitors of the residents may not
be familiar with the building layout, however it is expected that visitors are able to navigate to the
exits easily due to the relatively simple and straight grid building layout.
3.4
STAFF MEMBERS
Staff members are expected to be limited and familiar with the building layout and emergency
procedures implemented for the building(s). The range of physical and mental conditions of staff
members may include persons with disabilities which may slow their evacuation abilities; however,
work place staff members are generally expected to be alert, awake and be able to assist the general
public during an evacuation as a result of their emergency procedures training.
3.5
AUTHORISED VISITORS
Authorised visitors (such as maintenance contractors) may be unfamiliar with the building layout and
may have to enter into any part of the building(s) to undertake their duties. Management procedures
should be developed and implemented to make provisions for the safety of this group through an
induction program and/or supervision whilst on site. The physical capability of this group is generally
expected to be alert, ambulant, mobile and they are expected to form a very minor component of the
total occupancy.
CONTENTS

Page 16 of 90
FIRE SAFETY DESIGN OBJECTIVES
4.1
CLIENT OBJECTIVES
The client has not indicated any additional fire safety objectives to those required by the relevant
statutory requirements, as described in the BCA. Therefore, asset protection and community impact
of fire are excluded from the analysis outcomes.
4.2
LOSS CONTROL OBJECTIVES

Consideration of specific issues such as property and asset protection, business interruption,
insurance related risks or community impact as a result of fire losses are specifically excluded and
are therefore beyond the scope of this report, as identified in Section 1.5.
While arson as a single point of ignition may be considered in the analysis, multiple simultanous
ignition sources, use of accelerants, sabotage of fire protection systems or terrorism are not included
as part of the report scope.
It should however be noted, as is advised, that due to the clients request to develop alternative
solutions for the project, fire and smoke damage may vary when compared to a building design that
complies with the BCA-DTS provisions.
It is recommended that the building owner(s) liaises with its relevant insurers on this matter.
4.3
REGULATORY OBJECTIVES
To meet the regulatory requirements, the design is to be in accordance with the Building Code of
Australia 2014. Compliance with the fire safety objectives in the BCA is achieved by satisfying the
relevant BCA performance requirements, as determined by the authorities having jurisdiction.
4.4
FIRE BRIGADE OBJECTIVES

General fire brigade objectives are addressed in the relevant performance clauses under fire brigade
intervention. The fire brigade objective throughout Australia is to protect human life and property.
Other brigade responsibilities that may be contained within their statutory act or other objectives are
beyond the scope of this report.
CONTENTS

Page 17 of 90
BCA ANALYSIS INFORMATION
5.1
SPECIFIC BCA-DTS PROVISION DEPARTURES AND APPLICABLE BCA PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

The BCA-DTS provision departures, as advised by the Building Certifier, form the basis of the fire
engineering analysis and are the subject of the proposed alternative solutions. The proposed
alternative solutions for this development are described in in the tables below, along with details of
the relevant BCA performance requirements and BCA assessment methods.
All other items of fire and life safety where not specifically addressed or reviewed as part of the Fire
Engineering Scope or mentioned below shall be provided in compliance with the DTS provisions of
the BCA.
Table 5.1 BCA-DTS Provision Departures and Proposed Alternative Solutions in Basement
Carpark Levels 1 and 2
BCA
Clause
D1.4
BCA-DTS Provision
BCA Clause D1.4(c)

on a floor must be
more than 20 m from
an exit, or a point
in which case the
maximum distance to
one of those exits
must not exceed 40
m.
Solution
Relevant
Performance
Requirement

distances (maximum 30m
to a point of choice and
maximum 60m to an exit)
are allowed in the
DP4
response sprinkler heads
are provided in the
basement carpark levels to
detection/alarm activation
to offset the additional time
Assessment
Method
Quantitative and
qualitative
assessment
based on BCA
A0.5b(ii) and
A0.9(c)
Table 5.2 BCA-DTS Provision Departures and Proposed Alternative Solutions in Illuminate
(Building A)
BCA
Clause
BCA-DTS Provision
Solution
Levels 1 - 5.
Relevant
Performance
Requirement
D1.4
BCA Clause D1.4(a)

requires that the
entrance doorway of
any SOU must be not
more than 6m from
D1.5
BCA Clause D1.5

requires that
alternative exits in a
The stairs are located 46m
DP4, EP2.2
Class 2 building must apart on Levels 1-5.
be not more than
45m apart.
Additional thermal
provide prompt fire
DP4, EP2.2
Assessment
Method
Quantitative and
qualitative
assessment
based on BCA
A0.5(b)(ii) and
A0.9(c)
Qualitative
assessment
based on BCA
A0.5b(i) and
A0.9(b)(ii)
CONTENTS

Page 18 of 90
BCA
Clause
BCA-DTS Provision
BCA Clause D1.7(b)
a space within the
building (under
clause.
D1.7
E1.5
BCA Clause D1.7(c)

states that where
travel from fireisolated exits
necessitates passing
within 6m of external
walls/ openings,
these walls shall
achieve an FRL of 60
minutes and these
windows shall be
protected.
Solution
Relevant
Performance
Requirement

to open space are
CP2, EP2.2
of Building A.

Building A is
A sprinkler system
approximately 16m (less
must be installed in a than 25m). However, as
building that has an
effective height of
share a common
more than 25m.
basement carpark and
Building Bs effective
Both Illuminate
height is greater than 25m,
(Building A) and
Building A is prescriptively
Radiance (Building
required to be sprinkler
B) will be considered
protected under BCA Part
as one united building
A4.
under BCA Part A4
EP1.4
as these buildings are Sprinklers in Building A
connected through a are omitted as the only
common basement
connection between
carpark. Therefore,
Illuminate (Building
is the underground
A) and Radiance
basement carpark which is
(Building B) are to
a separate fire
comply with all the
compartment to the
requirements of the
buildings. Further, the only
BCA as a single
major connection between
building.
Building A and the
fire rated lift shafts.
Table E2.2b requires

a Class 6 retail fire
compartment greater
E2.2, Table
than 2000m2 to be
E2.2b
provided with a
smoke exhaust
system.

fire compartment, including
non-retail areas and
external undercroft/laneway areas, is
EP2.2
fire compartment area will
reduce below 2000m2 if
non-retail or external
Assessment
Method
Qualitative
assessment
based on BCA
A0.5b(i) and
A0.9(b)(ii)
Qualitative
assessment
based on BCA
A0.5(b)(ii) and
A0.9(c)
Qualitative
assessment
based on BCA
A0.5(b)(ii) and
A0.9(c)
CONTENTS

Page 19 of 90
BCA
Clause
BCA-DTS Provision
Solution
Relevant
Performance
Requirement
Assessment
Method
is excluded.
The BCA-DTS smoke
exhaust requirement to the
Ground Floor retail is
deleted.
Table 5.3 BCA-DTS Provision Departures and Proposed Alternative Solutions in Radiance
(Building B)
BCA
Clause
Spec C1.1
Table 3
BCA-DTS Provision
BCA Spec C1.1

floors of Class 2
areas to achieve FRL
90 minutes.
C2.14
BCA Clause C2.14

requires public
corridors in Class 2
and 3 buildings
greater than 40m to
be divided at intervals
of not more than 40m
with smoke-proof
walls.
D1.4
BCA Clause D1.4 (a)

requires that the
entrance doorway of
any SOU must be not
more than 6m from
D1.4
BCA Clause D1.4(c)

on a floor must be
more than 20 m from
an exit, or a point
in which case the
maximum distance to
one of those exits
must not exceed 40
m.
Solution
The floor on residential
levels will achieve FRL 60
minutes, in lieu of 90
minutes.
Relevant
Performance
Requirement
Assessment
Method
Note that the building is to

be protected by sprinklers.
Quantitative and
qualitative
assessment
based on BCA
A0.5(b)(i) and
A0.9(b)(ii)
The public corridor on

Ground Floor of Building B
is up to 42m in length and CP2
is not divided with smokeproof walls.
Qualitative
assessment
based on BCA
A0.5b(i) and
A0.9(b)(ii)

6m) from SOUs to a point
of choice for egress is
proposed at Levels 1 - 11.
Additional thermal
CP1, CP2
DP4, EP2.2
Quantitative and
qualitative
assessment
based on BCA
A0.5(b)(ii) and
A0.9(c)
DP4, EP2.2
Quantitative and
qualitative
assessment
based on BCA
A0.5(b)(ii) and
A0.9(c)

Additional smoke
detectors (reduced
detectors spacing) are
provided within the multipurpose room.
This strategy could provide
earlier detection and alarm
time to offset the additional
time required for egress.
CONTENTS

Page 20 of 90
BCA
Clause
D1.7
E1.5
BCA-DTS Provision
BCA Clause D1.7(b)
a space within the
building (under
clause.
Solution

to open space are
of Building B.
BCA Clause D1.7(c)

requires travel from
fire-isolated exits
external walls/
openings to achieve
appropriate FRL or to
be protected.
Further, FRL 1 hour

construction with minimum
2m height (in lieu of 3m) is
provided to protect the
egress paths.
Ceiling voids in the

residential units
generally comply with
AS 2118.1 sprinkler
exemption Clause
5.6.1(a), (b) and (c).
sprinklers for the Derby
style ceiling fans within the
ceiling void spaces above
wet areas of the residential
units as these fans are
localised fans and are not
connected to other
systems.
However, Clause
5.6.1(d) states that
any concealed space
not requiring
protection under Item
(a), (b) or (c), and
which contains
electrical motors,
electric heating coils
or other heat
producing equipment
shall have a sprinkler
installed within 1.5m
of such equipment.
Relevant
Performance
Requirement
CP2, EP2.2
Note: Sprinklers are still

EP1.4
required under ceiling void
spaces in an apartment
unit.
Assessment
Method
Qualitative
assessment
based on BCA
A0.5b(i) and
A0.9(b)(ii)
Qualitative
assessment
based on BCA
A0.5b(i) and
A0.9(b)(ii)
Note: Where Fan Coil

Units (FCUs) are installed
in the celling void spaces
of the residential units,
sprinklers shall be
provided to comply with
AS 2118.1.
Each of the above proposed BCA-DTS variation requires validation in the fire engineering analysis
and additional or alternative fire safety measures may be necessary to satisfy the relevant fire safety
objectives.
These variations and proposed alternative solutions require input and approval from regulatory
authorities including the Building Certifier and fire authority.
5.2
VARIATIONS TO OTHER OBJECTIVES TO BE ADDRESSED

No other fire safety objectives requiring assessment have been identified by stakeholders during the
Fire Engineering process.
CONTENTS

Page 21 of 90
HAZARDS
A review of fire hazards for Illuminate (Building A) and Radiance (Building B) apartment
development has been undertaken to identify the potential fire risk associated with the alternative
solutions.
6.1
GENERAL LAYOUT
The layout of the proposed residential development (Building A and Building B) is considered to be
legible and does not result in any apparent way finding difficulties, and there does not appear to have
any unusual egress provisions. No exposures to fire source features are evident, and none have
been advised by the design team.
6.2
ACTIVITIES
The proposed Building A and Building B are to be used for Class 2 residential accommodation and
associated car parking. The hazards relating to the activities within the buildings are considered to be
typical for residential accommodation, and primarily relate to the vulnerability of sleeping occupants,
who may take longer to respond than alert / awake occupants. The common areas (such as lobbies
and corridors) on the residential floors shall be kept clear for pedestrian traffic. The retail shops will
be located at the Ground Floor of Illuminate (Building A) only. No processes or activities which could
result in excessive fire risks have been identified by the design team.
6.3
IGNITION SOURCES
Potential ignition sources in the proposed development are listed as follows:
Cooking equipment
Heating equipment
Electrical faults, including computers, light fixtures etc.
Arson and deliberately lit fires
Smoking, careless use of cigarettes or candles
Electrical or mechanical faults associated with vehicles in basement car parks
Management policies to minimise the occurrence of ignition sources, such as non-smoking policies
in common areas, hot-works permit systems, fire system isolation permits etc. may reduce fire risk in
the buildings.
6.4
FUEL SOURCES
Fuel sources in residential units are anticipated to be similar to those of a typical household which
consist of a variety of items such as furniture, bedding and clothing etc.
Fuel sources in car park levels are typically anticipated to be vehicles and building services
equipment, items stored in the designated residential storage areas etc.
Fuel sources in the retail shops are typically anticipated to be food preparation equipment (if
applicable), retail goods, decorative items and furnishings etc.
CONTENTS

Page 22 of 90
6.5
INTERACTIONS BETWEEN IGNITION AND FUEL SOURCES

The fire safety concepts tree NFPA 5501 considers the interaction of individual elements as part of an
overall fire safety system. It recommends that one of the means of mitigating fire risk is to
eliminate/control the source of heat, ignition and fuel, as shown by the concepts tree in the figure
below. The concept is considered applicable for this type of development.
Fire Prevention
Control of
heat energy
sources
Control of
heat / fuel source
interactions
Control of
fuel sources
Figure 6.1 Fire safety concepts from NFPA 550
To mitigate fire risk, site-specific policies can be developed and implemented to minimise the risk of
fire initiation, based on maintenance, planning, housekeeping and training, as detailed in Section 11.
6.6
FIRE PREVENTION
Management procedures and policies in relation to fire prevention are considered to be necessary.
Reference to AS 3745-2010 (Emergency control organization and procedures for buildings,
structures and workplaces) is recommended as a means of developing emergency control
arrangements for the buildings.
NFPA 550, Guide to the Fire Safety Concepts Tree, National Fire Protection Association, 2002.
CONTENTS

Page 23 of 90
FIRE PREVENTATIVE & PROTECTIVE
7.1
HAZARDS MITIGATION
An appropriate fire safety strategy can be developed to mitigate fire risk by reducing the factors that
contribute to fire, including good house-keeping practices, a non-smoking policy in common area, hot
works procedures policies, installation of appropriate fire protection systems and adequate
maintenance schedules, particularly for essential fire safety measures and items of equipment
contributing to ignition risks.
7.2
MANAGEMENT MEASURES
The measures considered in the management of the hazards are summarised within Table 7.1
below. It should be noted that the IFEG2 sub-systems are considered in the fire engineering analysis
as follows:
Sub-system A Fire Initiation and Development and Control
Sub-system B Smoke Development and Spread and Control
Sub-system C Fire Spread and Impact and Control
Sub-system D Fire Detection, Warning and Suppression
Sub-system E Occupant Evacuation and Control
Sub-system F Fire Services Intervention
Table 7.1 Preventative and protective measures
Sub-system
Sub-system A
Fire initiation and
Development and
Control
The appropriate policies and procedures shall be provided to control

ignition sources (e.g. a non-smoking policy in common area, a hot work
permits policy and maintenance policies).
A housekeeping policy shall be provided to minimise the likelihood of firerelated incidents occurring and to maintain exits and paths of travel to exits
free of furnishings, clutter and general combustibles and rubbish, in order
to reduce the likelihood of fire development should one initiate within these
areas.

fire spread. Sprinklers need not be provided in Illuminate (Building A).
The following measure is used:

Sub-system B
Smoke
Development and
Spread and
Control

the size of the fire and the quantity of smoke produced.
BCA-DTS/AS1668.1 stair pressurisation system shall be provided to the

residential apartment development.
Australian Building Codes Board, ABCB, International Fire Engineering Guidelines Edition 2005, Australian Building Codes
Board, Australia, 2005.
CONTENTS

Page 24 of 90
Sub-system
Sub-system C
Fire Spread and
Impact and
Control

fire spread.
New building materials are to comply with early fire hazard indices to
reduce the incidence of rapid fire spread and significant smoke production
in the early stages of a fire.
With the exception of the alternative solution for FRL provisions as

described in Section 5, BCA-DTS FRL constructions shall be provided to
the buildings.
Sub-system D
Fire Detection,
Warning and
Suppression
BCA Specification E2.2a smoke detection and alarm systems (DTS

compliant) shall be provided to the residential apartment development.
A tailored fire engineering thermal detection and fire alarm system is also
provided on the floors/areas with extended egress travel distance in
Illuminate (Building A) and Radiance (Building B).
The automatic sprinkler system in the basement carpark levels and

Radiance (Building B) facilitates both occupant warning and the control of
fire spread (if not suppression).
Fire extinguishers are available for use by occupants in attempting initial

fire fighting prior to arrival of fire fighters, if safe to do so.
Sub-system E
Occupant
Evacuation and
Control
The automatic sprinkler system (with fast response sprinkler heads)

provided in the basement carpark minimises the risk associated with the
marginal increase in travel distance to a point of choice/ an exit.
The tailored fire engineering thermal detection and fire alarm system on
the floors/areas with extended egress travel distance in Illuminate
(Building A) and Radiance (Building B) minimises the risk associated with
the marginal increase in travel distance to a point of choice/ an exit.
Discharge from fire-isolated stairways of both buildings is facilitated by

naturally ventilated under-crofts and egress in different directions to reach
open space.
Exit signs and emergency lighting shall assist in wayfinding.
A housekeeping policy shall serve to maintain exits and paths of travel to

exits free of furnishings, clutter, and general combustibles and rubbish, in
order to reduce the risk of obstruction during an emergency evacuation.
Sub-system F
Fire Services
Intervention
A full-time fire service will be available to respond to fire incidents in the

Brisbane metropolitan region.
A fire hydrant system is available for use by fire brigade undertaking fire
fighting and/or search and rescue activities.
The automatic sprinkler system in the carpark levels and Radiance

(Building B) is likely to assist in reducing the size and severity of a fire, and
therefore the risk of exposure to attending fire-fighters is also likely to be
reduced.
The buildings are provided with appropriate access points and roads
suitable for emergency vehicle access.
CONTENTS

Page 25 of 90
FIRE SAFETY MEASURES

The fire safety measures required for this project are described below. Specific details of design for
the buildings and services are the responsibility of each discipline consultant in respect of
incorporation of fire engineering specific requirements into their design.
It should be noted that the fire engineering requirements and strategy in this section are only
provided to address the BCA-DTS provision departures specified in Section 5. Other issues/areas in
the buildings which are not part of this project are not included in this report.
8.1
FIRE RESISTANCE AND COMPARTMENTATION

1. The Fire Resistance Level (FRL) provisions for this Building A shall be provided in compliance
with the BCA-DTS requirements for a Type A construction.
Radiance Building B
2. Minimum FRL 60 minutes construction (i.e. minimum 180mm thick flat slabs) shall be provided in
lieu of BCA-DTS FRL 90 minutes construction to the floor on residential levels.
3. The public corridor on Ground Floor of Building B is up to 42m in length and is not divided with
smoke-proof walls.
4. With the exception of Items 2 and 3 above, the Fire Resistance Level (FRL) provisions for this
Building B shall be provided in compliance with the BCA-DTS requirements for a Type A
construction.
8.2
EGRESS PROVISION
1. Extended egress travel distances (maximum 30m to a point of choice and maximum 60m to an
exit) are allowed in the basement carpark levels.
distances in the basement carpark levels. Also refer mark-up below.
CONTENTS

Page 26 of 90
Fast response sprinkler heads (68oC operating temperature, maximum RTI = 50 m1/2s1/2) in
lieu of standard response sprinkler heads are provided in the basement carpark levels to
provide quicker fire detection/alarm time to offset the additional time required for egress.
2. Maximum egress travel distance of 8m (in lieu of 6m) to a point of choice for egress from the end
units between Gridlines A12 to A14 at residential levels 1-5 is proposed, as indicated in the markup below.
distances to a point of choice for egress on Levels 1-5. Also refer to mark-up below.
One additional thermal detector shall be provided in Units 01 to 08 on Levels 1-5 (i.e. Units
10101 to 10108, 10201 to 10208, 10301 to 10308, 10401 to 10408, and 10501 to 10508). The
activation from either thermal detector in these units shall activate the fire alarm in Units 06
and 07 on the same level (SOUs with extended travel). Minimum sound pressure level of 75
dBA (with all doors closed) shall be also achieved at each bedhead in Units 06 and 07.
common/circulation areas shall also activate the fire alarm in Units 06 and 07 on the same
level.
3. The distance between Stair A1 and Stair A2 on Levels 1-5 is proposed to be 46m (in lieu of 45m).
CONTENTS

Page 27 of 90
The following fire engineering requirements shall be implemented to address the discharge of fire
isolated stairs from Building A. Also refer mark-up below.
stairways of Building A.
Radiance Building B
5. Maximum egress travel distance of 10m (in lieu of 6m) to a point of choice for egress from SOUs
is proposed at Level 1, as indicated in the mark-up below.
One additional thermal detector shall be provided in each unit at Level 1. The activation from
(SOUs with extended travel) and the Multi purpose room (also with extended travel, refer Item
8 below). AS1670.4 compliant minimum sound pressure level of 75 dBA (with all doors closed)
shall be also achieved at each bedhead in Units 20102, 20103, 20110 and throughout the
Multi purpose room area.
common/circulation areas (including enclosures/cupboards/stores/comms/MSB) at Level 1
shall also activate the fire alarm in Units 20102, 20103, 20110 (SOUs with extended travel)
and the Multi purpose room (also with extended travel, refer Item 8 below).
Refer to Item 8 for the fire engineering requirements associated with the Multi purpose room.
CONTENTS

Page 28 of 90
Level 1 Floor plan

6. With the exception of the Multi purpose room which is only provided at Level 1, the building layout
at Levels 2 to 5 is similar to Level 1. Maximum egress travel distance of 10m (in lieu of 6m) to a
point of choice for egress is proposed for Units 20203, 20204, 20211, 20212 at Level 2, Units
20303, 20304, 20311, 20312 at Level 3, Units 20403 20404, 20411, 20412 at Level 4, Units
20503, 20504, 20511, 20512 at Level 5.
Levels 2 to 5. Refer mark-ups below.
CONTENTS

Page 29 of 90
Level 2 Floor plan

7. Levels 6 to 11 have extended egress travel distance (up to 9m in lieu of 6m) from the two end
units at the western end of the corridor, i.e. Units 20608, 20609 at Level 6, Units 20708, 20709 at
Level 7, Units 20808, 20809 at Level 8, Units 20908, 20909 at Level 9, Units 21008, 21009 at
Level 10, Units 21108, 21109 at Level 11.
The fire engineering strategy/requirement for Level 1 (refer Item 5 above) shall be also provided
to Levels 6 to 11. Refer mark-ups below.
CONTENTS

Page 30 of 90
Level 6 floor plan

8. Travel distance from within the Multi purpose room on Level 1 to a point of choice is 26m (in lieu
of 20m), as indicated in the mark-up below.
distances to a point of choice for egress from within the Multi purpose room. Also refer mark-up
below.
Refer to Item 5 above for the fire engineering strategy associated with SOU extended travel.
The activation from either thermal detector in units at Level 1 shall also activate the fire alarm
in the Multi purpose room, and AS1670.4 compliant minimum sound pressure level of 75 dBA
(with all doors closed) shall be also achieved throughout the Multi purpose room area. This
strategy could provide earlier fire detection in the event of a fire in an SOU and reduce alarm
time to offset the additional time required for egress (including travel from SOUs).
Provision of additional smoke detectors (reduced spacing of not more than 6.0m between
smoke detectors and not more than 3.0m between smoke detectors and wall) within the Multi
purpose room. This strategy could provide earlier fire detection in the event of a fire in the
room and reduce alarm time to offset the additional time required for egress (including travel
from SOUs).
(including enclosures/cupboards/stores/comms/MSB) at Level 1 shall also activate the fire
alarm in the Multi purpose room.
The circulation space adjoining the entry to the Multi purpose room, as indicated in the markup below, shall remain fire load sterile and no storage is permitted in this area.
CONTENTS

Page 31 of 90
The following fire engineering requirements shall be implemented to address the discharge of the
fire isolated stairs from Building B. Also refer mark-up below.
stairways (B1) of Building B.
FRL 1 hour construction with minimum 2m height (in lieu of 3m) is provided at the two
locations shown in the mark-ups below to provide protection to egress paths.
CONTENTS

Page 32 of 90
Site plan
Ground Floor plan
CONTENTS

Page 33 of 90
Level 1 Floor plan

General
10. With the exception of the proposed Alternative Solutions described above, egress shall be
provided in compliance with the BCA-DTS provisions (Section D of BCA) for this project.
11. All exit doors and doors in egress paths shall be capable of being opened with a force 110N.
12. If electromagnetic locks are to be used, these electromagnetic locks need to fail-safe open and
automatically unlock upon fire alarm.
13. Egress paths are to be kept clear of items that impede occupant egress. This is to be maintained
during the lifetime of the buildings.
14. BCA-DTS emergency lighting, exit and directional signage (BCA Part E4) shall be provided.
8.3
SERVICES AND EQUIPMENT

1. AS2118.1 sprinkler system with fast response sprinkler heads shall be provided throughout the
carpark levels. Refer Item 1 in Section 8.2 for more details.
2. Refer Items 2 and 3 in Section 8.2 for the fire engineering requirements in relation to the detection
and alarm system for Levels 1 to 5 of Building A.
3. The effective height of Building A is approximately 16m (less than 25m). However, as Building A
than 25m, Building A is prescriptively required to be sprinkler protected under BCA Part A4. A
sprinkler system in Building A is omitted as the only connection between Building A and Building
B is the underground basement carpark which is a separate fire compartment to the Building A
and Building B.
CONTENTS

Page 34 of 90
4. The Ground Floor Retail fire compartment, including non-retail areas and external undercroft/laneway areas, is approximately 2119m2. The Ground Floor Retail fire compartment area will
reduce below 2000m2 if non-retail or external under-croft/laneway area is excluded (refer mark-up
below). The BCA-DTS smoke exhaust requirement to the Ground Floor retail is therefore deleted.
Ground Floor plan (Building A)

Radiance Building B
5. Refer Items 5 to 8 in Section 8.2 for the fire engineering requirements in relation to the detection
and alarm system for Levels 1 to 11 of Building B.
6. Sprinkler protection to the Derby style ceiling fans above wet areas in residential units is no
longer required. These fans are localised fans and are not connected to other systems. The Fan
Coil Units (FCUs, if provided) in the celling void spaces shall be provided with sprinklers to
comply with AS 2118.1. Sprinklers are still required under ceiling void spaces.
That is, with the exception of the deletion of sprinklers for derby fans in ceiling void spaces an
AS2118.1 compliant sprinkler system shall be provided within and under the ceiling void
spaces/concealed spaces in an apartment unit.
General
7. With the exception of the proposed Alternative Solutions described above, services and
equipment shall be provided in compliance with the BCA-DTS provisions (Section E of BCA) for
this project.
8.4
MANAGEMENT PROVISIONS
1. A number of management procedures and policies shall be implemented on an on-going basis to
enable the basis of the fire safety design analysis to be satisfied. The following items are to be
implemented by the building operators:
A house-keeping policy based on avoiding the accumulation of rubbish or storage within the
common areas, including the exits and the paths of travel to the exits exit routes are to be
free from obstructions.
The circulation space adjoining the entry to the Multi purpose room, as indicated in the markup in Item 8 in Section 8.2, shall remain fire load sterile and no storage is permitted in this
area.
CONTENTS

Page 35 of 90
A non-smoking policy in common area, supported by signage placed in appropriate

locations.
A hot works permit policy to address hot works activities within the buildings. A permit
system to address any hot works process involving cutting, welding, heating, angle grinding
or any other related practices so as to address:
Risks associated with exposure of adjacent combustibles
Fire watch procedures
Gas testing requirements
An emergency management policy, including staff training and regular evacuation drills, is to
be implemented in accordance with the principles of AS 3745:2010.
CONTENTS

Page 36 of 90
APPROACH AND METHODS OF ANALYSIS
9.1

Analysis of the proposed fire safety design against the relevant fire safety design objectives has been
carried out based on quantitative and/or qualitative engineering analysis as outlined below in the
table below.
Performance Requirements or other criteria) have been achieved to the degree necessary.
9.2
ASSESSMENT METHODOLOGY
The tables below summarise the methodology of analysis for the alternative solutions for this
development.
Table 9.1 Assessment methodology Basement Carpark Levels 1 and 2
No.
1
Method of Analysis


extended travel distances to a point of choice/
an exit, taking into considerations of the

The quantitative assessment involves

assessment of the increase in travel time due
to the extended travel distances and the
reduction of fire detection time as a result of
provision of fast response sprinkler heads (in
lieu of standard response sprinkler heads).
Table 9.2 Assessment methodology Illuminate (Building A)
No.
2
Method of Analysis

1 - 5.

extended travel distance to a point of choice
of travel, taking into considerations of the

occupant warning are provided to
provide prompt fire detection/fire alarm.
The stairs are located 46m apart on

Levels 1-5, in lieu of 45m.

provided to analyse the risk of this slightly
extended distance, taking into considerations
of the occupant number, type of occupant,
occupant travel speed, potential fire hazards
and the building characteristics.

Clause D1.7(b).

the exit provision, taking into considerations of
the occupant number, type of occupant,
Alternative paths of egress to open

space are available upon discharge from
fire-isolated stairways of Building A.
CONTENTS

Page 37 of 90

BCA Part A4.

non-provision of sprinklers in Building A,
taking into considerations of the building
effective height and its connection with
Building B.
Sprinklers in Building A are omitted as

the only connection between Building A
and Building B is the underground
basement carpark which is a separate
fire compartment to the buildings.
Further, the only major connection
between Building A and the basement
carpark is the fire rated lift shafts.
6

and external under-croft/laneway areas,
is approximately 2119m2.
compartment area will reduce below
2000m2 if non-retail or external undercroft/laneway area is excluded.

non-provision of smoke exhaust in the Ground
floor Retail fire compartment, taking into
considerations of the characteristics of the fire
compartment (i.e. non retail areas), potential
fire hazards and the building characteristics
(i.e. external under-croft/laneway area).
The BCA-DTS smoke exhaust

requirement to the Ground Floor retail is
therefore deleted.
Table 9.3 Assessment methodology Radiance (Building B)
No.
7
Method of Analysis
The floor on residential levels will

achieve FRL 60 minutes, in lieu of 90
minutes.

Note that the building is to be protected

by sprinklers.
(i) Determination of the potential

equivalent fire severity for typical
apartments using the Eurocode
methodology;
severity is less than the minimum
proposed FRL; and
(iii) Determination of the effectiveness of
the sprinklers in limiting the risk of
exposing structural elements to high
temperature conditions.
8
The public corridor on Ground Floor of

Building B is up to 42m in length and is
not divided with smoke-proof walls.


provided to analyse the risk of this slightly
extended corridor lenght, taking into
considerations of the occupant number, type
of occupant, occupant travel speed, potential
fire hazards and the building characteristics.
CONTENTS

Page 38 of 90
1 - 11.
provide quicker fire detection/fire alarm.
10

detectors spacing) are provided within
the multi-purpose room.
11

fire-isolated stairways of Building B.
provided to protect the egress paths.
12

above wet areas in the residential units
as these fans are localised fans and are
not connected to other systems.


the exit provision, taking into considerations of
the occupant number, type of occupant,
non-provision of sprinklers to the localised
derby fans in ceiling voids of residential units,
taking into considerations the potential fire
hazards, fire spread and provided fire
protection systems.
CONTENTS

Page 39 of 90
10
RELEVANT ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
10.1
JUDGEMENT OF ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA

A quantitative and qualitative assessment has been undertaken generally as described in the
International Fire Engineering Guidelines3. The analysis comprises of evaluation of the interaction
between sub-systems, and includes system reliability and effectiveness.
performance requirements or other criteria) have been achieved to the degree necessary.
10.2
ENVIRONMENTAL AND LOSS CONTROL ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA

This report does not address any environmental and loss control acceptance criteria.
10.3
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA FOR THE ANALYSIS

Individual parameters of the relevant BCA performance requirements have been considered in the
quantitative and/or qualitative analysis as outlined below, commensurate with the fire hazard for
buildings possessing similar construction and occupancy characteristics.
The nominated acceptance criteria for the alternative solutions for this development are detailed in
the tables below.
Table 10.1 Acceptance criteria for the proposed alternative solutions Basement Carpark Levels
1 and 2
No.
1
Acceptance Criteria


achievable from the basement carpark.

Table 10.2 Acceptance criteria for the proposed alternative solutions Illuminate (Building A)
No.
2
Acceptance Criteria

1 - 5.


provide prompt fire detection/fire alarm.
3
The stairs are located 46m apart on

Levels 1-5, in lieu of 45m.

building.

Clause D1.7(b).

building.
3 Australian Building Codes Board, ABCB, International Fire Engineering Guidelines, Edition 2005, Australian Building Codes Board,
Australia, 2005.
CONTENTS

Page 40 of 90

fire-isolated stairways of Building A.
5

BCA Part A4.

the building without sprinklers is not dissimilar
to a DTS compliant building with an effective
height of less than 25m.
Sprinklers in Building A are omitted as

the only connection between Building A
and Building B is the underground
basement carpark which is a separate
fire compartment to the buildings.
Further, the only major connection
between Building A and the basement
carpark is the fire rated lift shafts.
6

and external under-croft/laneway areas,
is approximately 2119m2.
compartment area will reduce below
2000m2 if non-retail or external undercroft/laneway area is excluded.

the Ground Floor Retail fire compartment
without smoke exhaust is not dissimilar to a
DTS compliant design (i.e. retail fire
compartment less than 2000m2).
The BCA-DTS smoke exhaust

requirement to the Ground Floor retail is
therefore deleted.
Table 10.3 Acceptance criteria for the proposed alternative solutions Radiance (Building B)
No.
7
Acceptance Criteria
The floor on residential levels will

achieve FRL 60 minutes, in lieu of 90
minutes.

Note that the building is to be protected

by sprinklers.

minimum proposed FRL of 60 minutes,
and
The sprinklers in this building would be

effective in limiting the risk of exposing
conditions.
The public corridor on Ground Floor of

Building B is up to 42m in length and is
not divided with smoke-proof walls.

building.

1 - 11.


provide quicker fire detection/fire alarm.
CONTENTS

Page 41 of 90
10

detectors spacing) are provided within

achievable from the multi-purpose room.

11

fire-isolated stairways of Building B.
provided to protect egress paths.
12

above wet areas in the residential units
as these fans are localised fans and are
not connected to other systems.


fire spread is unlikely and safe evacuation is
CONTENTS

Page 42 of 90
11
STANDARDS OF CONSTRUCTION, COMMISSIONING, MANAGEMENT AND MAINTENANCE
11.1
CONSTRUCTION
Building works associated with the installation of the required fire safety measures and construction
elements are to be undertaken by appropriately qualified persons. Co-ordination of such works is to
be undertaken by a project manager and / or construction manager nominated for the project.
11.2
COMMISSIONING
Fire safety measures are to be the subject of any testing and commissioning requirements specified
within the relevant Australian design and installation standards.
The following inspections of the completed building works should form part of the commissioning
phase of the buildings:
An inspection by the project fire engineer for the purposes of reviewing the consistency of the
fire safety installations and architectural features with the fire safety strategy presented as the
basis of the fire engineering report, with supporting certification from the relevant designers and
installers to be provided, where necessary.
Inspections by the project stakeholders, where necessary, to determine that the fire safety
installations and architectural features comply with the fire safety strategy presented as the
basis of the fire engineering report.
The details of the fire engineering report are to be included within the buildings fire safety schedule
to assist future essential services auditing of the buildings.
11.3
MANAGEMENT-IN-USE
A number of management procedures and policies shall be implemented on an on-going basis to
enable the basis of the fire safety design analysis to be satisfied. The following items shall be
implemented for the building:
A house-keeping policy is to be implemented based on avoiding the accumulation of rubbish or

storage within the common areas, including the exits and the paths of travel to the exits exit
routes are to be free from obstructions.
in Item 8 in Section 8.2, shall remain fire load sterile and no storage is permitted in this area.
A non-smoking policy in the common areas is to be implemented, supported by signage placed

in appropriate locations.
Management procedures to address the process of isolation for active fire protection systems
(such as the automatic fire sprinkler and detection systems) for maintenance or re-configuration
purposes are to be identified, and are to take into account the following recommendations:
Sound management of active fire protection systems includes:
Using primarily one company for fire system isolations.
Re-instatement of system at the completion of work each day.
An approval system in place which requires written permission from management before
isolation can take place and a statement as to the length of isolation (which must generally
be less than one day)
A requirement for the contractor to sign-off after completion of the work.
An evacuation and emergency response plan is to be developed and implemented for these
buildings in accordance with the principles of AS 37452010. The development of emergency
procedures is to be consistent with the egress strategy for the buildings. The plan is to include /
address the following matters as a minimum:
-
emergency plans
emergency evacuation equipment
emergency response procedures
CONTENTS

Page 43 of 90
A hot works permit policy is to be adopted to address the undertaking of hot works within the
buildings, which can present as a potential ignition source. A permit is to be submitted to
building management for any hot works process involving cutting, welding, heating, angle
grinding or any other related practices and returned to the authorising person upon completion
of the associated works, addressing:
-
risks associated with exposure of adjacent combustibles;
working within confined spaces;
fire watch procedures;
gas testing requirements.
Each permit is required to be returned to the authorising person upon completion of the
associated works.
11.4
MAINTENANCE
Under the Fire and Emergency Services Act 1990, all prescribed fire safety installations shall be
adequately maintained. Fire safety installations include any installations provided as part of the
alternative solutions prescribed in this report.
The fire safety installations shall be maintained in accordance with AS1851 and QDC MP6.1 and
undertaken by an independent suitably qualified representative (e.g. from an Essential Services
Maintenance Company). Failure to do so will render the outcomes of this report invalid, null and void.
Up to date logbooks must be provided on site.
CONTENTS

Page 44 of 90
CONTENTS

Page 45 of 90
12
ALTERNATIVE SOLUTION 1 EXTENDED TRAVEL DISTANCES IN BASEMENT CARPARK
12.1

Extended egress travel distances (maximum 30m to a point of choice and maximum 60m to an exit)
are allowed in the basement carpark levels.
Fast response sprinkler heads (68oC operating temperature, maximum RTI = 50 m1/2 s1/2) in lieu of
standard response sprinkler heads are provided in the basement carpark levels to provide quicker
fire detection/alarm activation to offset the additional time required for egress.
Extended travel distances in basement carpark floor areas

12.2

The extended travel distances from within the basement carpark floor areas are considered to be
AS2118.1 sprinkler system is to be provided in the basement carpark levels. For an AS2118.1
(BCA-DTS) compliant design, standard response sprinklers are required in a carpark.
It is proposed to provide fast response sprinklers in lieu of standard response sprinklers in the
basement carpark levels. The fast response sprinklers would provide a shorter activation
time/alarm time to offset the additional time required to complete the maximum increased travel
distance of 20m (60m 40m = 20m) from within the carpark floor areas.
FPETool fire modelling was used to calculate the sprinkler activation times of standard response
sprinklers and fast response sprinklers in the carpark.
CONTENTS

Page 46 of 90
In accordance with CIBSE , the response time index (RTI) for a standard response sprinkler
could be up to 350m1/2s1/2 and the RTI for a fast response sprinkler should not be more than
50m1/2s1/2. The RTI of 150 m1/2s1/2 for standard response sprinkler and the RTI of 50m1/2s1/2 for fast
response sprinkler are adopted for the analysis.
The typical growth rate of a car fire is adopted for the analysis (i.e. medium t2 growth rate).
Table 12.1- FPETool Inputs and Results for Sprinkler Activation Times (Basement levels)
Inputs
Height of ceiling above fuel
Standard Response
2.5m
Fast Response
2.5mm
150m1/2s1/2
50m1/2s1/2
68C
68C
Fire growth rate
Medium t
Medium t
Activation time
252 seconds
RTI
Sprinkler activation temperature
191 seconds
12.3
From the analysis above, the utilisation of fast response sprinklers provides a shorter activation
time/fire alarm time of approximately 61 seconds in the basement carpark. The 61 seconds is
referred to herein as the time difference between the BCA alarm time and the fire engineering
alarm time.
The travel speed for occupants can be taken as 1m/s. Based on the travel speed of 1m/s, the
additional time required to complete the maximum increased travel distance of 20m (60 40m =
20m) from within the carpark floor areas is calculated to be 20 seconds.
Based on the assessment outcomes above, the additional time (20 seconds) required to
complete the maximum increased travel distance of 20m is less than the time difference
Therefore, the utilisation of fast response sprinklers provides sufficient reduction of activation
time/fire alarm time to offset the additional time required to complete the maximum increased
travel distance of 20m from within the carpark floor areas. The proposed egress travel distances
of up to 30m to a point of choice for egress and 60m to an exit are considered to be acceptable.
CONCLUSION
Based on the fire engineering analysis above, the extended travel distances from within the
basement carpark levels (i.e. up to 30m to a point of choice and 60m to an exit) are considered to be
acceptable and the BCA Performance Requirement DP4 is satisfied.
CIBSE (2010), CIBSE Guide E - Fire Safety Engineering, 3rd Edition,UK.
CONTENTS

Page 47 of 90
13
ALTERNATIVE SOLUTION 2 EXTENDED TRAVEL DISTANCES AT LEVELS 1-5 (BUILDING A)
13.1

Maximum egress travel distance of 8m (in lieu of 6m) to a point of choice for egress is proposed for
the end units at Grids A12 to A14 at Levels 1 to 5.
13.2

The extended travel distances on Levels 1 to 5 of Building A are considered to be acceptable on the
following basis:
distance to a point of choice for egress on Levels 1-5. Also refer mark-up below.
detection and alarm system shall be also provided in the common/circulation areas at Class 2
floor levels.
One additional thermal detector shall be provided in Units 01 to 08 on Levels 1-5 (i.e. Units 10101
to 10108, 10201 to 10208, 10301 to 10308, 10401 to 10408, and 10501 to 10508). The activation
from either thermal detector in these units shall activate the fire alarm in Units 06 and 07 on the
same level (SOUs with extended travel). Minimum sound pressure level of 75 dBA (with all doors
closed) shall be also achieved at each bedhead in Units 06 and 07.
CONTENTS

Page 48 of 90
common/circulation areas shall also activate the fire alarm in Units 06 and 07 on the same level.
In accordance with BCA-DTS provisions, it is understood that a smoke or thermal detection

system is not required in each unit (SOU) of this building and that only a local alarm is required in
each unit. The activation of local alarm will only provide alarm to the fire origin unit. The fire alarm
in other areas outside the fire origin unit will not be triggered until the activation of the AS1670.1
smoke detection system in the public corridors.
prompt detection time/fire alarm time would be provided to the SOUs with extended travel. This
Firecalc fire engineering modelling has been used to estimate the activation time of thermal
detector in a typical residential unit. The fire scenario modelled considered a medium t2 growth
6
rate . The Firecalc input parameters and outcomes are summarised as follows:
Thermal detector activation time = 204.1 seconds
Each residential unit is provided with fire rated bounding construction. It is likely that the activation
of the AS1670.1 smoke detection system in the public corridors would take longer than the
activation of the additional thermal detection system.
Further to the above, the activation of the additional thermal detection system in the units would
activate the fire alarm in the units with extended travel (i.e. 75dBA with all door closed achieved at
each bedhead in the SOUs with extended travel). This is considered to be better than the BCADTS provision of 100dBA at the apartment entry door which could be substantially reduced in a
bedroom (to wake sleeping occupants) due to closure of the entry door and the bedroom door.
from Thompson & Marchant 7 (whereby the maximum flow speed of a male and a female is
6
7
8
complete the maximum increased travel distance of 2.0m is likely to be offset by the enhanced
fire detection and fire alarm systems.
1971, New York
CONTENTS

Page 49 of 90
13.3
CONCLUSION
Based on the fire engineering analysis above, the extended travel distances on the residential floors
Level 1 to 5 of Building A are considered to be acceptable and the BCA Performance Requirements
DP4 and EP2.2 are satisfied.
CONTENTS

Page 50 of 90
14
ALTERNATIVE SOLUTION 3 EXTENDED DISTANCE BETWEEN STAIRS ON LEVELS 1-5

(BUILDING A)
14.1

BCA Clause D1.5 requires that alternative exits in a Class 2 building must be not more than 45m
apart.
The distance between Stair A1 and Stair A2 on Levels 1-5 is proposed to be 46m (in lieu of 45m).
14.2

The Guide to the BCA states that the intent of BCA Clause D1.5 is to require that if an exit is
inaccessible, access to any required alternative exit must be available within a reasonable distance.
These distances are prescribed in the DTS provisions without regard to other fire safety systems
which may be installed or which are designed to mitigate the effects of fire. Therefore consideration
must be made to the time required to reach an alternative safe exit if an exit is deemed unsafe, and
the conditions expected.
The extended distance between stairs (alternative exits) on Levels 1 to 5 of Building A are
considered to be acceptable on the following basis:
14.3
Based on an average travel speed of 1m/s, the additional 1m in travel distance may result in an
additional 1 second of travel time only.
An automatic smoke detection and alarm system in compliance with Specification E2.2a will be
provided to the Class 2 areas in the building including the common/circulation areas. The
provision of smoke detection and alarm system is expected to provide early warning to the
occupants of the building.
It should also be noted that the distance between alternative exits does not take into account of
compartmentation or smoke separation within the building. A smoke door is provided within the
public corridor on Levels 1-5 which will minimise the risk of both stairs becoming smoke logged.
As a result, the occupants will be in a relevant safe place once cross the smoke door.
CONCLUSION
Based on the fire engineering analysis above, the slightly extended distance between stairs on the
residential Levels 1 to 5 of Building A is considered to be acceptable and the BCA Performance
Requirements DP4 and EP2.2 are satisfied.
CONTENTS

Page 51 of 90
15
ALTERNATIVE SOLUTION 4 DISCHARGE FROM FIRE ISOLATED STAIRS (BUILDING A)
15.1

be protected.
The fire isolated stairs of Building A discharge into the confines of the building (under building line)
discharge to public roads necessitates passing within 6m of retail openings which are not protected.
Refer mark-ups below. It is proposed to rationalise the egress provision and the FRL provision to the
Ground Floor Plan

15.2

basis:
stairways of Building A. Refer mark-ups below.
The discharge of fire-isolated stairways of Building A, although into the confines of the building
occur.
from the building upon discharge from the stairs, and that alternative paths of egress are provided
to reach a public road.
CONTENTS

Page 52 of 90
15.3
CONCLUSION
discharge from the fire isolated stairs of Building A and the FRL provision to the external walls or
CONTENTS

Page 53 of 90
16
ALTERNATIVE SOLUTION 5 OMISSION OF SPRINKLERS (BUILDING A)
16.1

In accordance with the DTS-provisions of the BCA, a sprinkler system must be installed in a building
that has an effective height of more than 25m.
Both Illuminate (Building A) and Radiance (Building B) will be considered as one united building
under BCA Part A4 as these buildings are connected through a common basement carpark.
Therefore, Illuminate (Building A) and Radiance (Building B) are to comply with all the
requirements of the BCA as a single building.
It is proposed to omit the provision of sprinklers in Illuminate (Building A).
16.2

The omission of sprinklers in Illuminate (Building A) is considered to be acceptable on the following
basis:
The effective height of Building A is approximately 16m (less than 25m). However, as Building A
than 25m, Building A is prescriptively required to be sprinkler protected under BCA Part A4.
Sprinklers in Building A are omitted as the only connection between Building A and Building B is
the underground basement carpark which is a separate fire compartment to the buildings.
Further, the only major key connection between Building A and the basement carpark is the fire
rated lift shafts. Refer to mark-ups below.
It is noted that the joined basement carpark (of both Building A and Building B) will be fully
sprinkler protected in accordance with the BCA-DTS provisions.
The risk of a fire incident occurring on Ground or any level above in Building A is considered to be
not dissimilar to a fire incident occurring in a similar non-sprinkler protected building which has an
effective height of less than 25m. This is further explained below.
Smoke and heat produced from a fire have the tendency to spill upwards due to their buoyancy.
For a fire starting on Ground Level or any residential level above, and in conjunction with the
floor-by-floor fire compartmentation provided in Building A, it is unlikely the fire would spread to
the basement. That is, this fire scenario would be similar to a fire scenario in a similar BCA-DTS
compliant building without sprinklers.
For a fire starting in the basement carpark, the sprinklers in the basement would be expected to
activate and this is likely to control the spread of fire. Further to this, the Ground Level floor slab
being fire-resistant (i.e. BCA-DTS FRL) is expected to further minimise the risk of fire spread to
the building/floor above. This fire scenario would be equivalent to (if not better than) a fire
scenario occurring in the basement of a BCA-DTS compliant building without sprinklers.
CONTENTS

Page 54 of 90
Building A and Building B - Ground and Podium Level Plan

16.3
CONCLUSION
Based on the fire engineering analysis above, the omission of sprinklers in Building A (Ground Level
and above) is considered to be acceptable and the BCA Performance Requirement EP1.4 is
satisfied.
CONTENTS

Page 55 of 90
17
ALTERNATIVE SOLUTION 6 OMISSION OF SMOKE EXHUAST IN CLASS 6 (BUILDING A)
17.1

Table E2.2b requires a Class 6 retail fire compartment greater than 2000m2 to be provided with a
smoke exhaust system.
It is proposed to omit this smoke exhaust requirement to the Class 6 retail tenancies on Ground
Level of Building A.
17.2

The omission of smoke exhaust to the Class 6 retail tenancies on Ground Level of Illuminate
(Building A) is considered to be acceptable on the following basis:
17.3
The Ground Floor retail fire compartment, including non-retail areas and external undercroft/laneway areas, is approximately 2119m2
The Ground Floor retail fire compartment area will reduce below 2000m2 if non-retail areas such
as plant/refuse rooms, stair shafts, lift shafts and lift lobby (approximately 253m2) are excluded.
Refer to mark-ups below.
Similarly, the Ground Floor retail fire compartment area will reduce below 2000m2 if external
under-croft/laneways (approximately 1090m2) are excluded. These external areas would be
expected to contain minimal fire load due to the open nature of the areas. Also refer to mark-ups
below.
Without the inclusion of non-retail/external areas in the retail fire compartment size calculation,
the fire compartment size will reduce below 2000m2 in floor area. A retail fire compartment less
than 2000m2 in floor area would not prescriptively require a smoke exhaust system.
The proposed retail tenancies on Ground Level of Building A, whilst have a fire compartment floor
area greater than 2000m2, would not result in a fire safety risk greater than a BCA-DTS compliant
retail fire compartment less than 2000m2 in floor area (without smoke exhaust) as the total fire
load would likely to be less.
CONCLUSION
Based on the fire engineering analysis above, the omission of smoke exhaust to the Class 6 retail
tenancies on Ground Level of Building A is considered to be acceptable and the BCA Performance
Requirement EP2.2 is satisfied.
CONTENTS

Page 56 of 90
18
ALTERNATIVE SOLUTION 7 RATIONALISED FRL FOR SOU FLOOR (BUILDING B)
18.1

The floor of Levels 1-11 are proposed to be 180mm thick flat slabs which will achieve an FRL of 60
minutes, in lieu of BCA-DTS FRL 90 minutes.
18.2

To determine whether the proposed fire rating levels are appropriate for the building, the potential
equivalent fire severity is calculated for the typical apartments of the building. The Eurocode
methodology is selected to analyse the equivalent fire severity of each apartment type in this
building.
Base Case
To be conservative, any factors related to sprinklers and fire brigade intervention have been ignored.
9
The empirical expression for equivalent fire severity based on the Eurocode method is:
te,d = qf,d kb wf
where
kb is a conversion factor based on the materials of construction. kb = 0.07 is
adopted.
qf,d = qf,k m q1 q2 n
where

recommends m = 0.8.
n is a factor taking into account the different active fire-fighting measures
access routes, fight fighting devices). For conservative assessment, the effect of
sprinklers and fire brigade intervention has been ignored in this analysis. Thus
only the factor related to the provision of automatic fire detection and alarm by
smoke has been considered, and all other factors have been conservatively
ignored. n = n4 = 0.73 is adopted.
density per unit area of 200 MJ/m2 has been adopted for the shower rooms due
to low fire load expected in these rooms. Weighted average of the fire load
energy density is adopted for the analyses.
6 .0
wf =
H
where
0.3
0.62 +
90(0.4 v )4
1 + bv h
0.5
v = Av/Af, 0.025 v 0.25

h = Ah/Af
CONTENTS

Page 57 of 90
bv = 12.5(1+10 v - v2 ) 10.0
It should be noted that the equivalent fire severity calculation assumes a fully developed fire with a
total burnout of all fire loads within the enclosure. Testing has shown that the critical temperature for
10
standard toughened glass is around 200C . Therefore, it is generally assumed that all the glass
without fire resistance will break shortly after fire ignition. This assumption is considered reasonable
for the fire severity assessment, as the sprinklers are assumed to fail, thus flashover will occur.
Key input parameters and the fire severity outcome (time equivalent) for each residential apartment
type are summarised below:
INPUTS
Ref
Units
BA
BB
BC
BD
BE
BF
BG
BH
BI
BJ
Characteristic fire load density
qf ,k
MJ/m2
881
899
859
864
891
864
872
884
889
890
Combustion factor
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
Factor
q1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
Factor
q2
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
Factor
0.73
0.73
0.73
0.73
0.73
0.73
0.73
0.73
0.73
0.73
MJ/m2
Fire load density
qf ,d
Floor area of the enclosure
Af
Height of the enclosure
2.6
2.6
2.6
2.6
2.6
2.6
2.6
2.6
2.6
2.6
Area of vertical openings
Av
m2
32.8
14.3
18.9
18.4
19.3
25.5
24.7
18.2
19.0
19.1
Area of horizontal openings
Ah
m2
Conversion factor
kb
0.07
0.07
0.07
0.07
0.07
0.07
0.07
0.07
0.07
0.07
0.25
566
577
552
555
572
555
560
568
571
572
108.7
66.5
77.8
77.9
55.0
75.5
79.3
53.0
52.2
51.8
Vertical ventilationfactor (A v /Af )
0.25
0.22
0.24
0.24
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
Horizontal ventilation factor (A h/Af )
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Calculation factor
bv
42.97
38.87
42.18
41.26
42.97
42.97
42.97
42.97
42.97
42.97
Ventilation factor
wf
0.86
0.93
0.87
0.88
0.86
0.86
0.86
0.86
0.86
0.86
Equivalent fire severity
t e,d
minute
33.9
37.6
33.5
34.2
34.3
33.2
33.5
34.0
34.2
34.2
INPUTS
Ref
Units
BK
BL
BL.1
BL.2
BL.3
BM
BN
BO
BP
qf ,k
MJ/m2
855
883
883
883
883
869
848
866
869
Combustion factor
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
Factor
q1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
Factor
q2
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
Factor
0.73
0.73
0.73
0.73
0.73
0.73
0.73
0.73
0.73
Fire load density
qf ,d
MJ/m2
549
567
567
567
567
559
545
557
558
Af
m2
64.8
52.7
52.7
52.7
52.7
77.1
78.4
79.8
81.0
2.6
2.6
2.6
2.6
2.6
2.6
2.6
2.6
2.6
Av
m2
16.9
11.2
11.2
13.8
13.8
20.3
25.4
30.4
24.5
Ah
m2
Conversion factor
kb
0.07
0.07
0.07
0.07
0.07
0.07
0.07
0.07
0.07
Vertical ventilationfactor (A v /A f )
0.25
0.21
0.21
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Calculation factor
bv
42.97
38.58
38.58
42.97
42.97
42.97
42.97
42.97
42.97
Ventilation factor
wf
0.86
0.94
0.94
0.86
0.86
0.86
0.86
0.86
0.86
t e,d
minute
32.9
37.2
37.2
34.0
34.0
33.4
32.6
33.3
33.4
Sensitivity Analysis
As a sensitivity analysis, the equivalent fire severity calculation has been carried out without any
factors, i.e. ignore factors q1, q2 and n. Key input parameters and the fire severity outcome (time
equivalent) for each residential apartment type are summarised below:
10
Babrauskas, V., Feb-Mar 1998. Glass Breakage in Fires, The Fire Place (Washington Chapter IAAI Newsletter), p.15-18
CONTENTS

Page 58 of 90
INPUTS
Ref
Units
BA
BB
BC
BD
BE
BF
BG
BH
BI
BJ
qf ,k
MJ/m2
881
899
859
864
891
864
872
884
889
890
0.80
Combustion factor
1.00
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
Fire load density
qf ,d
MJ/m2
881
719
687
691
713
691
697
708
711
712
Af
m2
108.7
66.5
77.8
77.9
55.0
75.5
79.3
53.0
52.2
51.8
2.6
2.6
2.6
2.6
2.6
2.6
2.6
2.6
2.6
2.6
Av
m2
32.8
14.3
18.9
18.4
19.3
25.5
24.7
18.2
19.0
19.1
Ah
m2
Conversion factor
kb
0.07
0.07
0.07
0.07
0.07
0.07
0.07
0.07
0.07
0.07
0.25
0.22
0.24
0.24
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Calculation factor
bv
42.97
38.87
42.18
41.26
42.97
42.97
42.97
42.97
42.97
42.97
Ventilation factor
wf
0.86
0.93
0.87
0.88
0.86
0.86
0.86
0.86
0.86
0.86
t e,d
minute
52.7
46.8
41.7
42.6
42.7
41.4
41.7
42.4
42.6
42.6
INPUTS
Ref
Units
BK
BL
BL.1
BL.2
BL.3
BM
BN
BO
BP
qf ,k
MJ/m2
855
883
883
883
883
869
848
866
869
0.80
Combustion factor
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
Fire load density
qf ,d
MJ/m2
684
706
706
706
706
696
678
693
695
Af
m2
64.8
52.7
52.7
52.7
52.7
77.1
78.4
79.8
81.0
2.6
2.6
2.6
2.6
2.6
2.6
2.6
2.6
2.6
Av
m2
16.9
11.2
11.2
13.8
13.8
20.3
25.4
30.4
24.5
Ah
m2
Conversion factor
kb
0.07
0.07
0.07
0.07
0.07
0.07
0.07
0.07
0.07
0.25
0.21
0.21
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Calculation factor
bv
42.97
38.58
38.58
42.97
42.97
42.97
42.97
42.97
42.97
Ventilation factor
wf
0.86
0.94
0.94
0.86
0.86
0.86
0.86
0.86
0.86
t e,d
minute
40.9
46.4
46.4
42.3
42.3
41.6
40.6
41.5
41.6
Discussion
For both the base case and sensitivity analysis, the fire severities for all residential apartment types
are less than 60 minutes and therefore the provision of FRL 60 minutes to the residential floors is
considered to be appropriate.
It should also be pointed out that the results from the above equivalent fire severity calculation are
considered onerous due to the following:
The building is provided with a number of active fire-fighting measures. For conservative
assessment, the effect of sprinklers and fire brigade intervention has been ignored in this
analysis.
The 80% fractile of fire load density (948MJ/m2) for residential as given in the Eurocode
methodology has been adopted for the living areas of the residential apartments. This value
is considered conservative as the IFEG recommends a 90% fractile fire load density of
920MJ/m2 for residential. Both the Eurocode methodology and the IFEG recommend
780MJ/m2 as the average fire load density for residential.
The sprinklers are assumed to have failed and the fire is assumed to burn until it runs out of
fuel.
The analysis is based upon the maximum burning rate for the duration of the fire, which
does not take into account the growth stage of the fire.
The fire is assumed to be under perfect combustion. In reality, this would be unlikely and the
compartment temperatures would be less.
In the fires that involve more than one room, the time taken to burn through the dividing
walls has not been taken into account. Although they have no defined fire resistance, there
will be an inherent delay in fire spread.
An AS2118.1 sprinkler system will be provided throughout the residential apartments.

Automatic fire suppression systems will control the growth and spread of a fire. Accordingly,
fires can be controlled within an area of burning consistent with the spatial configuration of
CONTENTS

Page 59 of 90
the suppression system. For example, a maximum fire area of 12m2 may be assumed when
evaluating conditions in an enclosure protected by an automatic sprinkler system with an
array of heads on a 3m by 4m grid.
18.3
Activation of the sprinkler system is expected to control the spread of fire in the building, as
well as limit the quantity and temperature of smoke produced by the fire. The average
temperature outside the immediate area of operation of the sprinkler system is expected to
be below 100C and the average temperature within the area of sprinklers operation is
expected to be below 200C (except the area near the seat of fire) 11 . Therefore, the
activation of sprinklers would reduce the fire/smoke temperature the slabs would be exposed
to and prevent catastrophic structural failure.
CONCLUSION
Based on the fire engineering analysis above, the proposed FRL 60 minutes to the floors on Levels
1-11 are considered to be acceptable and achieves an equivalent level of safety that would be
required from a BCA-DTS solution. BCA Performance Requirements CP1 and CP2 are satisfied.
11
England P, Kurban K et al, Guide for the Design of Fire Resistant Barriers & Structures,2000, Section 3.6.2.2, pp29-30.
CONTENTS

Page 60 of 90
19
ALTERNATIVE SOLUTION 8 EXTENDED CORRIDOR LENGTH ON GROUND FLOOR

(BUILDING B)
19.1

BCA Clause C2.14 requires public corridors in Class 2 and 3 buildings greater than 40m to be
divided at intervals of not more than 40m with smoke-proof walls.
The public corridor on Ground Floor of Building B is up to 42m in length and is not divided with
smoke-proof walls.
19.2

The Guide to the BCA states that the intent of BCA Clause C2.14 is to minimise the risk of long
public corridors in Class 2 and Class 3 buildings becoming smoke logged.
The extended corridor length on Ground Floor of Building B is considered to be acceptable on the
following basis:
19.3
The building is provided with automatic sprinklers which will prevent flashover in the room of fire
origin, and improve the chance for occupants to escape or be evacuated provided the occupant is
not in intimate contact with the fire.
The risk of a fire originated within the public corridors is minimal due to limited fire load.
An automatic smoke detection and alarm system in compliance with Specification E2.2a will be
provided to the Class 2 areas in the building including the common/circulation areas. The
provision of smoke detection and alarm system is expected to provide early warning to the
occupants of the building.
There are five residential units on Ground Floor of Building B, four of which are provided with
direct access to outside via the alternative exit from the courtyard, i.e. these units do not have to
use the public corridor on Ground Floor to evacuate. Unit 20001 is not provided with an
alternative exit, however the distance between the entry door of Unit 20001 and the final exit is
only 18m. Note that BCA allows for 20m from the entrance doorway of any sole-occupancy unit to
a single exit serving the storey at the level of egress to a road or open space.
The corridor is approximately 42m in length, which is only 2m above the 40m limit.
CONCLUSION
Based on the fire engineering analysis above, the slightly extended corridor length on Ground Floor
of Building B is considered to be acceptable and the BCA Performance Requirement CP2 is
satisfied.
CONTENTS

Page 61 of 90
20
ALTERNATIVE SOLUTION 9 EXTENDED TRAVEL DISTANCES FROM SOUS AT LEVELS 1 11 (BUILDING B)
20.1

Maximum egress travel distance of 10m (in lieu of 6m) from end-of-corridor SOUs to a point of choice
for egress is proposed at Levels 1 - 11.
20.2

The extended travel distances from SOUs on Levels 1 to 11 of Building B are considered to be
distance to a point of choice for egress at Level 2. Also refer mark-up below. The same fire
engineering strategy/requirement applies to Level 1 and Levels 3 to 11 and is not repeated here.
detection system shall be also provided in the common/circulation areas at Class 2 floor levels.
One additional thermal detector shall be provided in in each unit at Level 2. The activation from
and 20212 (SOUs with extended travel). AS1670.4 compliant minimum sound pressure level of
75 dBA (with all doors closed) shall be also achieved at each bedhead in Units 20203, 20204,
20211 and 20212.
common/circulation areas (including enclosures/cupboards) at Level 2 shall also activate the fire
alarm in Units 20203, 20204, 20211 and 20212.
Level 2 Building B
CONTENTS

Page 62 of 90
In accordance with BCA-DTS provisions, a smoke or thermal detection system is not required in
each unit (SOU) of this building and only a local smoke alarm system is required in each unit. The
activation of local smoke alarms will only provide fire alarm to the fire origin unit. The fire alarm in
other areas outside the fire origin unit will not be triggered until the activation of the sprinkler
system in the fire origin unit.
shorter detection time/fire alarm time would be provided to the SOUs with extended travel. This
Firecalc fire engineering modelling has been used to estimate the activation time of the sprinkler
system and the thermal detector in a typical residential unit. The fire scenario modelled
12
considered a medium t2 growth rate . The Firecalc input parameters and outcomes are
summarised as follows:
Sprinkler activation time = 214.5 seconds
Thermal detector activation time = 204 seconds
12
CONTENTS

Page 63 of 90
From the analysis above, the utilisation of thermal detector provides a shorter detection/fire alarm
time of approximately 10 seconds (214.5 204 = 10.5 seconds) than the sprinkler system. The
10 seconds is referred herein as the time difference between the BCA alarm time and the fire
engineering alarm time.
from Thompson & Marchant13 (whereby the maximum flow speed of a male and a female is
20.3
For a fire incident occurring in Level 1 Multi purpose room, refer to the assessment in Section 21
for the time difference between the BCA alarm time and the fire engineering alarm time as a
result of provision of additional smoke detectors in the Multi purpose room.
CONCLUSION
Based on the fire engineering analysis above and in Section 21 below, the extended travel distances
from SOUs on the residential floors Level 1 to 11 of Building B are considered to be acceptable and
the BCA Performance Requirements DP4 and EP2.2 are satisfied.
13
14
1971, New York
CONTENTS

Page 64 of 90
21
ALTERNATIVE SOLUTION 10 EXTENDED TRAVEL DISTANCES FROM MULTI PURPOSE

ROOM AT LEVEL 1 (BUILDING B)
21.1

Travel distance from within the Multi purpose room on Level 1 to a point of choice is 26m (in lieu of
20m).
21.2

The extended travel distances from the Level 1 Multi purpose room of Building B are considered to
distance to a point of choice for egress from the Multi purpose room. Also refer mark-up below.
Refer to Section 19 above for the fire engineering strategy/assessment associated with SOU
extended travel.
The activation from either thermal detector in units at Level 1 shall also activate the fire alarm in
the Multi purpose room, and AS1670.4 compliant minimum sound pressure level of 75 dBA (with
all doors closed) shall be also achieved throughout the Multi purpose room area. This strategy
could provide earlier fire detection in the event of a fire in an SOU and reduce alarm time to offset
the additional time required for egress (including travel from SOUs, refer Section 19).
Provision of additional smoke detectors (reduced spacing of not more than 6.0m between smoke
detectors and not more than 3.0m between smoke detectors and wall) within the Multi purpose
room. This strategy could provide earlier fire detection in the event of a fire in the room and
reduce alarm time to offset the additional time required for egress (including travel from SOUs).
(including enclosures/cupboards/stores/comms/MSB) at Level 1 shall also activate the fire alarm
in the Multi purpose room.
below, shall remain fire load sterile and no storage is permitted in this area.
Level 1 Building B
CONTENTS

Page 65 of 90
For a fire incident occurring in any of the SOUs on this level, the assessment in Section 19 would
also be applicable to the extended travel from within the Multi purpose room. That is, the earlier
activation of the fire alarm (approximately 10 seconds quicker) in the Multi purpose room as a
result of provision of additional thermal detectors in the SOUs would be able to offset the
additional time (approximately 6 seconds) required for egress due to the extended travel of up to
26m to a point of choice (in lieu of 20m).
For a fire incident occurring in the Multi purpose room, the assessment below is provided to
demonstrate that the provision of additional smoke detectors in this room would also be able to
offset the additional time required for egress from the Multi purpose room. It is noted here that the
assessment below is also applicable to extended travel (of up to 4m) from the SOUs on this floor
in the event of a fire in the Multi Purpose Room.
In accordance with BCA-DTS provisions, an AS1670.1 smoke detection system is required to be

provided in the Multi purpose room. A smoke detection system complying with AS1670.1
requires smoke detectors to be provided on a grid spacing of 10.2m (or 5.1m between wall and
detector).
It is proposed to provide additional smoke detectors (reduced spacing of not more than 6.0m
between smoke detectors and not more than 3.0m between smoke detectors and wall) in the
Multi purpose room. This would offset the additional evacuation time required to complete the
maximum increased travel distance of 6.0m (26.0m 20m = 6.0m) from the Multi purpose room.
FPETool 15 fire engineering modelling has been used to estimate the activation time of the
AS1670.1 spaced smoke detectors and the smoke detectors with reduced spacing. The fire
16
scenario modelled considered a medium t2 growth rate . The FPETool input parameters and
outcomes are summarised as follows:
Table 21.1- FPETool Inputs and Results for Smoke Detection Times (Multi purpose room)
Activation Temperature
Detector RTI
Distance between Fire
and Detector
Ceiling Height
17
Fire Growth Rate
Detection Time
BCA/AS1670.1 Detection
Time
36 C
0.5 ms
Fire Engineering Detection Time

with reduced spacing
36 C
0.5 ms
5.1 m
3.0 m
2.4 m
Fast t2
3.5 m
Fast t2
62 seconds
80 seconds
From the analysis above, the additional detectors with reduced spacing provide a shorter fire
detection time of minimum 18 seconds than using the BCA/AS 16701.1 standard spacing.
distance of 6.0m from the Multi purpose room is calculated to be 6.0 seconds.
Therefore, the utilisation of fire engineering strategy with additional smoke detectors in the Multi
purpose room would provide sufficient detection/fire alarm time to offset the additional time
required to complete the increased travel distance of 6.0m from the Multi purpose room.
15
16
17
It is also noted that the time difference between the BCA alarm time and the fire engineering
alarm time is also adequate to offset the additional travel time associated with extended travel
distances from the SOUs on this floor.
EN1991-1-2:2002, Eurocde 1: Actions on structures Part 1-2: General actions Actions on structures exposed to fire.
CONTENTS

Page 66 of 90
21.3
CONCLUSION
Based on the fire engineering analysis above and in Section 19 above, the extended travel distances
from within the Multi Purpose room of Building B are considered to be acceptable and the BCA
Performance Requirements DP4 and EP2.2 are satisfied.
CONTENTS

Page 67 of 90
22
ALTERNATIVE SOLUTION 11 DISCHARGE FROM FIRE ISOLATED STAIRS (BUILDING B)
22.1

be protected.
The fire isolated stairs of Building B discharge into the confines of the building (under building line)
discharge to public roads necessitates passing within 6m of openings which are not protected. Refer
mark-ups below. It is proposed to rationalise the egress provision and the FRL provision to the
Ground Floor Plan
Level 1 Floor Plan
CONTENTS

Page 68 of 90
22.2

basis:
22.3
stairways (B2) of Building B. Refer mark-ups below.
The discharge of fire-isolated stairways of Building B, although into the confines of the building
occur.
FRL 1 hour construction with minimum 2m height (in lieu of 3m) is provided at the two locations
shown in the mark-ups above to provide protection to egress paths.
from the building upon discharge from the stairs to reach a public road.
CONCLUSION
discharge from the fire isolated stairs of Building B and the FRL provision to the external walls or
CONTENTS

Page 69 of 90
23
ALTERNATIVE SOLUTION 12 OMISSION OF SPRINKLER PROTECTION TO DERBY FANS

(WITHIN CONCEALED CEILING SPACES) (BUILDING B)
23.1
BCA-DTS PROVISION DEPARTURE AND PROPOSED ALTERNATIVE SOLUTION

Ceiling voids in the residential units generally comply with AS 2118.1 sprinkler exemption Clause
5.6.1(a), (b) and (c), as follows:
(a) Concealed spaces less than 200 mm in depth measured from the top of the ceiling material,
or the floor to the underside of the structure above, need not be protected.
(b) Concealed spaces need not be protected if they are constructed entirely of non-combustible
material and contain only
(i) fire-resistant cables to AS/NZS 3000;
(ii) non-bundled electrical wiring and lighting installed in accordance with AS/NZS 3000;
(iii) piping; and
(iv) metal ducting with flexible connections and insulation complying with AS 4254.
(c) Concealed spaces not exceeding 800 mm in depth, otherwise requiring protection, with the
roof or floor above of concrete, and with fire and draft stops provided at intervals not
exceeding 15 m in each direction, need not be sprinkler-protected.
However, Clause 5.6.1(d) states that any concealed space not requiring protection under Clause
5.6.1(a), (b) or (c) above, and which contains electrical motors, electric heating coils or other heat
producing equipment shall have a sprinkler installed within 1.5m of such equipment.
It is proposed to omit sprinklers for the derby fans provided within the ceiling void spaces above wet
areas of the residential units.
Note: The Fan Coil Units (FCUs, if provided) in the celling void spaces of the residential units will be
provided with sprinklers to comply with AS 2118.1.
23.2

The non-provision of sprinkler protection to the derby fans in residential units is acceptable on the
following basis:
The ceiling void spaces above wet areas within the residential units generally contain minimal
combustibles (combustibles would most likely to be associated with electrical cable insulation,
plastic piping etc).
The derby fans serving the wet areas are local fans and are not connected to other systems. The
fire load associated with these fans and the surrounding ceiling void spaces would be limited (e.g.
cable insulation, plastic piping etc).
In the event of failure of a derby fan due to electrical/mechanical faults, fire ignition is unlikely to
occur. In the unlikely event of a fire, a smouldering rather than flaming fire is more likely due to
low fire load in the surrounding ceiling void spaces. If a sprinkler head was provided it is unlikely
that this sprinkler head would be activated (i.e. minimal heat produced from a smouldering fire).
A smouldering fire or a flaming fire as a result of derby fan failure would generate smoke which
would be detected by the local smoke alarm(s) in the unit. Upon activation the smoke alarm(s)
this would then alert the residents in the unit of fire origin.
In the unlikely event of a significant fire developing as a result of derby fan failure (i.e. likely to be
associated with fuel load below ceiling), the sprinklers provided in other areas of the unit (i.e.
below ceiling) would activate and control (if not suppress) the fire. The activation of the sprinkler
system would also activate the building wide alarm system which would then alert occupants in
other units.
The residential sprinkler system provided in other areas of the unit (i.e. below ceiling) and the firerated bounding construction of the unit would prevent the spread of fire to public corridor and
other units.
CONTENTS

Page 70 of 90
23.3
CONCLUSION
Based on the fire engineering analysis above, the non-provision of sprinklers to the derby fans in the
residential units of the building is considered to be acceptable and the BCA Performance
Requirement EP1.4 is satisfied
CONTENTS

Page 71 of 90
24
CONCLUSION
Exova Warringtonfire Aus Pty Ltd has been engaged by Pradella Developments Pty Ltd for the
professional fire engineering services to formulate fire safety design solutions for the BCA-DTS
provision departures associated with the proposed residential apartment buildings, Illuminate
(Building A) and Radiance (Building B) as part of the Light & Co project, at 321 Montague Road,
West End, QLD 4101.
This Fire Engineering Report (FER) is formulated as a fire engineering solution report and is
produced generally following the recommendations as described in the International Fire Engineering
Guidelines 2005. This report reflects the fire engineering design intent and general fire and life safety
design strategy for the project, to demonstrate that the proposed works will satisfy the intent of BCA
2014 objectives and performance requirements for the areas identified.
It is the opinion of Exova Warringtonfire Aus Pty Ltd that the relevant BCA performance requirements
for each BCA-DTS provision departure are satisfied by formulating the proposed alternative solutions
in this report. Refer Section 5 for the BCA-DTS provision departures and the proposed alternative
solutions.
The fire engineering strategy/requirements detailed in Section 8 and the requirements for standards
of construction, commissioning, management and maintenance in Section 11 shall be provided to the
building. It is the responsibility of individual stakeholder or discipline consultant to ensure that the
relevant fire engineering requirements in this report are correctly incorporated into their design.
CONTENTS

Page 72 of 90
25
VALIDITY / DISCLAIMER
This report is prepared for the proposed residential apartment buildings, Illuminate (Building A) and
Radiance (Building B) as part of the Light & Co project, at 321 Montague Road, West End, QLD
4101and shall not be applied to other buildings.
This report has formulated and analysed a fire safety design against fire safety objectives developed
in conjunction with relevant stakeholders and authorities having jurisdiction. Other issues not
specifically addressed in the context of the fire engineering design process have been excluded from
the scope of this report.
Any modifications or changes to the building, fire safety management system, or building usage from
that described may invalidate the findings of this report. Should such changes occur, a reassessment should be sought.
Arson has been shown statistically to contribute to fire. This report has addressed the incidence of
minor forms of arson as a single ignition source; however, major arson involving accelerants and/or
multiple ignition sources are beyond the scope of this analysis and therefore have been excluded
from the report.
Attention is drawn to the conditions of use depicted on page 3 of this report.
CONTENTS

Page 73 of 90
APPENDIX A
PRELIMINARY QFES CONSULTATION MEETING HELD ON 19TH DECEMBER 2015
CONTENTS

Page 74 of 90
CONTENTS

Page 75 of 90
19th December 2015
BCA
Clause
D1.4
BCA-DTS
Provision
Solution
Relevant
Performance
Requirement

distances (maximum
BCA Clause D1.4(c) 30m to a point of choice
and maximum 60m to an
requires that no
point on a floor must exit) are allowed in the
be more than 20 m basement carpark
levels.
from an exit, or a
point from which
travel in different
DP4
directions to two
exits is available, in response sprinkler
which case the
heads are proposed in
maximum distance
the basement carpark
to one of those exits levels to provide quicker
must not exceed 40 fire detection/alarm
m.
activation to offset the
additional time required
for egress.
Assessment
Method
Quantitative and
qualitative
assessment based
on BCA A0.5b(ii)
and A0.9(c)
CONTENTS

Page 76 of 90
19th December 2015
Tower A
BCA
Clause
D1.4
D1.7
E1.3
E1.5
BCA-DTS
Provision
Solution
Relevant
Performance
Requirement

BCA Clause D1.4 (a)
requires that the
entrance doorway of
Levels 1 - 5.
any SOU must be not
more than 6m from
DP4, EP2.2
Additional thermal
warning are proposed to
provide prompt fire
BCA Clause D1.7(b)
a space within the
building (under
compliance with this Alternative paths of egress
to open space are
clause.
available upon discharge CP2, EP2.2
BCA Clause D1.7(c) from fire-isolated stairways
requires travel from of Tower A.
fire-isolated exits
external walls/
openings to achieve
appropriate FRL or
be protected.
The booster enclosure is
located adjacent to retail
glazing and thus does not
comply with the required
AS2419.1 requires
AS2419.1 FRL protection.
booster assemblies
which are within, or
affixed to, the
external wall of the
internal wall wetting
building to have FRL sprinklers to protect at
EP1.3
90 minutes protection least 2m (length) of the
of not less than 2m
glazing adjacent to the
each side of and 3m booster enclosure. The
above the upper
wall wetting sprinklers
hose connections in protected glazing shall
the booster
be toughnened laminated
assembly.
glass or heatstrengthened safety
glass with thickness of
not less than 10mm.
A sprinkler system
must be installed in
a building that has
an effective height

Tower A is less than
EP1.4
25m. However, as Tower
A and Tower B share a
Assessment
Method
Quantitative and
qualitative
assessment based
on BCA A0.5(b)(ii)
and A0.9(c)
Qualitative
assessment based
on BCA A0.5b(i)
and A0.9(b)(ii)
Qualitative
assessment based
on BCA A0.5b(i) and
A0.9(b)(ii)
Qualitative
assessment based
on BCA A0.5(b)(ii)
CONTENTS

Page 77 of 90
BCA
Clause
BCA-DTS
Provision
of more than 25m.
Solution
Relevant
Performance
Requirement
common basement
carpark and Tower Bs
than 25m, Tower A is
be sprinkler protected.
Assessment
Method
and A0.9(c)
sprinklers in Tower A as
the only connection
between Tower A and
Tower B is the basement
carpark which is a
separate fire
compartment to the
towers. Further, the only
connection between
Tower A and the
fire isolated lift shafts.
Table E2.2b
requires a Class 6
retail fire
compartment
Table E2.2b
greater than 2000m2
to be provided with
a smoke exhaust
system.

fire compartment,
including non-retail areas
and external undercroft/laneway areas, is
fire compartment area
EP2.2
will reduce below 2000m2
if non-retail or external
is excluded.
Qualitative
assessment based
on BCA A0.5b(i)
and A0.9(b)(ii)
It is proposed to delete
the BCA-DTS smoke
exhaust requirement to
the Ground Floor retail.
CONTENTS

Page 78 of 90
19th December 2015
Tower B
BCA
Clause
BCA-DTS
Provision
Solution
Relevant
Performance
Requirement
Specification C1.1
Clause 3.7 allows
internal columns in the
storey immediately
below a non-combustible
roof to have FRL 60
minutes if the building
effective height is less
than 25m.
C3.7
D1.7
D1.4
Specification C1.1
Table 3 requires
loadbearing internal
columns to achieve
an FRL of 90/-/-.
The concession
described above is not
CP1, CP2
applicable to the
proposed building due to
its effective height being
greater than 25m.
However, it is proposed
to provide FRL 60
minutes to the top floor
steel columns supporting
the non-combustible roof
due to their low load
ratios and sprinkler
protection.
BCA Clause D1.7(b)

fire isolated stairs into Alternative paths of
a space within the
egress to open space are
building (under
building line) to meet from fire-isolated
compliance with this stairways of Tower B.
clause.
CP2, EP2.2
Further, FRL 1 hour
BCA Clause D1.7(c) construction with
requires travel from minimum 2m height (in
fire-isolated exits
lieu of 3m) is provided at
passing within 6m of two locations to provide
external walls/
protection to egress
openings to achieve paths.
appropriate FRL or be
protected.
BCA Clause D1.4 (a) 6m) to a point of choice
requires that the
for egress is proposed at
entrance doorway of Levels 1 - 11.
any SOU must be not [Post meeting note: 9m
DP4, EP2.2
more than 6m from is replaced with 10m]
from which travel in Additional thermal
different directions to detectors and occupant
2 exits is available. warning are proposed to
Assessment
Method
Qualitative and
quantitative
assessment based
on BCA A0.5(b)(i)
and A0.9(b)(ii)
Qualitative
assessment based
on BCA A0.5b(i)
and A0.9(b)(ii)
Quantitative and
qualitative
assessment based
on BCA A0.5(b)(ii)
and A0.9(c)
CONTENTS

Page 79 of 90
BCA
Clause
D1.4
BCA-DTS
Provision
Relevant
Performance
Requirement
Assessment
Method
Travel distance from

within the multi-purpose
room on Level 1 to a
BCA Clause D1.4(c) point of choice is 26m (in
requires that no
lieu of 20m).
point on a floor must
be more than 20 m
from an exit, or a
point from which
additional smoke
travel in different
detectors (reduced
directions to two
detectors spacing) within
exits is available, in
which case the
maximum distance
to one of those exits
must not exceed 40 This strategy could
provide earlier detection
m.
and alarm time to offset
the additional time
D2.22 states that
doors of a fireisolated exit serving
any storey above an
effective height of
25m must not be
locked from the
inside throughout
the exit.
D2.22
Solution
The intent of this BCA

clause is to minimise the
risk that a person
becomes trapped in a
fire isolated stair.
For the fire-isolated

stairways serving the
residential floors, it is
The above DTS
proposed to install, on
requirement is not
applicable if a door every fourth storey (in
lieu of every floor), a
is fitted with a failDP4
door with a fail-safe
safe device which
device that unlocks the
unlocks the door
upon fire alarm and door on alarm activation
and an
(i) on at least ever
intercommunication
fourth storey the
doors are not able to system linked to the FIP
and the Building
be locked or (ii) an
intercommunication Managers office.
system, or an
[Post meeting note: This
audible or visual
item is now BCA-DTS
alarm system,
compliant.]
operated from within
the fire exit is
provided near the
doors.
Qualitative
assessment based
on BCA A0.5b(i)
and A0.9(b)(ii)
CONTENTS

Page 80 of 90
December 2015
Basement
CONTENTS

Page 81 of 90
December 2015
Building A
CONTENTS

Page 82 of 90
CONTENTS

Page 83 of 90
CONTENTS

Page 84 of 90
CONTENTS

Page 85 of 90
December 2015
Building B
CONTENTS

Page 86 of 90
CONTENTS

Page 87 of 90
CONTENTS

Page 88 of 90
CONTENTS

Page 89 of 90
CONTENTS

Page 90 of 90
APPENDIX B
QFES ACCEPTANCE IN PRINCPLE OF FEB (REPORT NO. CRM300759-RPT01-3 DATED

23RD MARCH 2015)
CONTENTS
AP P E N D I X 7
C O M M U N I T Y M AN AG E M E N T S TAT E M E N T
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
AP P E N D I X 8
O R I G I N N E W C O N N E C T I O N AP P L I C AT I O N
FORMS
CONTENTS
Hello,
Dont forget to arrange your hot water supply to keep your premises connected
Did you know your building has a centralised hot water arrangement with Origin.
Each property has its own hot water meter, so youre only billed for the hot water you use.
We know that moving can sometimes can be a stressful experience and we want to ensure that
your hot water supply stays connected. After all, theres nothing worse than having no hot water
after a big move.
To make sure your hot water is connected to your premises, you need to open an account when you
move in. Give us a call on 1800 684 993 to discuss your options.
Choose one of three easy ways to sign up to Origins hot water offer
Complete the online form at originenergy.com.au/bhwopenonline
Download, fill in and email our Move In form from originenergy.com.au/bhwopen then
email it to us at bhwmove@originenergy.com.au (or fax it to 03 8635 3012)
Give us a call on 1800 684 993 (7 am to 9 pm Monday to Friday and 9am to 5pm
Saturdays)
What happens next?
After you sign up to an Origin hot water offer well send you an hot water agreement.
If you dont arrange your hot water account with Origin you may be disconnected.
Any questions?
You can find out more about Origins agreement with your building by talking to your building
manager, body corporate representative, or owners corporation representative. Or just give us a call
on 1800 684 993 (7 am to 9 pm Monday to Friday and 9am to 5pm Saturdays)
We look forward to hearing from you soon.
Rebekah OFlaherty
General Manager, Retail
Need an interpreter? Call 1300 137 427
CONTENTS
New Connection Application for Hot Water and Cooktop
Moving In?
Phone: 1800 684 993 or
Fax form to: 03 8635 3012 or
Complete online at: originenergy.com.au/bhwopenonline or
Email form to: bhwmove@originenergy.com.au
Your building has a centralised hot water system. As arranged with the Body Corporate, each apartment is to be metered and billed separately for its
own hot water usage. Some apartments may also have a gas cooktop (please indicate by ticking the appropriate box below).
If you require information about your charges for hot water and, if applicable, gas for your cooktop, please contact us on 13 24 61. These charges will also
appear on your first bill.
Supply Type
Hot Water
/
Move In Date
Cooktop
Heating
POD ID
Owner
First Name
Surname
Renting
ACCOUNT HOLDER DETAILS

Title
Mr / Mrs / Miss / Ms
Date of Birth
/
Email Address
Receive your accounts via email
Home Phone
Work Phone
Mobile
OR Business Name
ABN
Contact Name
Work Phone
AUTHORISED CONTACT DETAILS (if not same as Account Holder)

Title
First Name
Surname
Date of Birth
/
Email Address
/
Home Phone
Work Phone
Mobile
Street
Suburb
SUPPLY ADDRESS
Unit/Flat No
Street Number
State
Postcode
State
Postcode
Building Name
POSTAL ADDRESS FOR ACCOUNTS (if same as supply address, write AS ABOVE if email, write EMAIL)
Name
Address
Suburb
Origin requires access to your meters at all times
Product and service offers: We are committed to providing you with a complete energy service, so we may present you with gas, electricity, green products and household
or business service offers in the future (including after your Agreement with us ends). We will continue to provide you with these offers until you advise us otherwise.
If you do not wish us to use, or enable our privacy compliant agents and contractors to use, your information for this purpose, please tick the box below.
To find out more about how Origin collects, uses, holds and discloses your personal and credit information see our privacy and credit reporting statements
at originenergy.com.au/privacy. Our credit reporting statement explains who we disclose credit information to (including service providers overseas) and
how this could affect your creditworthiness, as well as how you can access, correct or complain about it. Please contact us to request a paper copy.
I apply to have hot water and/or gas cooktop supplied to the above supply address and agree to pay Origin for the supply of hot water
and gas cooktop (if applicable).
6827v2.Jan16.All
Signature:
Name of
person signing:
I do not wish to receive these offers in future.
Date:
If you are not the Account Holder, you warrant that you have the
authority of the Account Holder to submit and sign this application
on their behalf. Origin may request proof of your authority.
CONTENTS
Origin Energy Retail Ltd ABN 22 078 868 425 1 King William Street, Adelaide SA 5000 Telephone 13 24 63 Facsimile 1800 132 463
Reset Form
Finalisation Application for Hot Water and Cooktop
Moving Out?
Phone: 1800 684 993 or
Fax form to: 03 8635 3012 or
Complete online at: originenergy.com.au/bhwcloseonline or
Email form to: bhwmove@originenergy.com.au
Supply Type
Hot Water
/
Move Out Date*
Cooktop
Heating
ACCOUNT DETAILS
Title
Account Number
First Name
Surname
SUPPLY ADDRESS
Unit/Flat Number
Street Number
Street
Suburb
State
Postcode
Suburb
State
Postcode
Suburb
State
Postcode
Building Name
FORWARDING ADDRESS OR EMAIL

Address
Do you need a hot water account opened at your new supply address?
Yes
No
NEW SUPPLY ADDRESS (if applicable)

Unit/Flat No
Street Number
Street
Building Name
I wish to close the above hot water and/or gas cooktop accounts at the above address from the move out date set out above.
Please sign below and we will finalise your account.
/
Signature:
Date:
Name of
person signing:
If you are not the Account Holder, you warrant that you have the
authority of the Account Holder to submit and sign this application
on their behalf. Origin may request proof of your authority.
* 5 days notice required for final meter read. Note if you do not provide this notice or access to your meter for the final
meter read, you will need to pay us any charges until the end of the notice period or your meter is read (as applicable).
6936v2.Jan16.All
Reset Form
Origin Energy Retail Ltd ABN 22 078 868 425 1 King William Street, Adelaide SA 5000 Telephone 13 24 63 Facsimile 1800 132 463
CONTENTS
MANAGING THE ORIGIN

HOT WATER SERVICES AND
ACCOUNTS IN YOUR BUILDING
Keep this sheet handy itll help you advise your residents and tenants on how to open and close
hot water accounts when they move in and out, and let you know who to contact if things go wrong.
Origin supplies hot water to your building through a centralised hot water system. And each property has its own hot
water meter, so residents and tenants are only charged for their propertys use.
Because of this, residents and tenants need to apply for a hot water account when they move in, and must close their
account and pay their final bill when they move out. If they dont open an account when they move in, their hot
water will be disconnected.
THREE WAYS YOUR RESIDENTS AND TENANTS CAN OPEN OR CLOSE A HOT WATER ACCOUNT
If theyre moving in
If theyre moving out
1. They can apply online by filling in the form

at originenergy.com.au/bhwopenonline
They can close their account online

at originenergy.com.au/bhwcloseonline
After theyve signed up, well send out their hot water
agreement and account details.
2. They can download and complete the Move In form

at originenergy.com.au/bhwopen
They can download and complete a Move Out form

at originenergy.com.au/bhwclose
They then need to email it to us

at bhwmove@originenergy.com.au
or fax it through to 03 8635 3012.
They can close an account by phone on 1800 684 993

(7 am to 9 pm weekdays, and 9 am to 5 pm on Saturdays).
They then need to email it to us

at bhwmove@originenergy.com.au
or fax it through to 03 8635 3012.
3. They can apply over the phone on 1800 684 993

(7 am to 9 pm weekdays, and 9 am to 5 pm on Saturdays).
Theyll be asked to leave forwarding contact details,

so we can send their final bill.
CONTACT INFORMATION FOR YOUR BUILDINGS RESIDENTS AND TENANTS

Residents:
Customer service
1800 684 993 (7 am to 9 pm weekdays,
and 9 am to 5 pm on Saturdays)
enquiry@originenergy.com.au
originenergy.com.au/contact
Customer sales
Energy offers 13 24 61
(electricity and natural gas only)
Business customers:
Including businesses with a single or many meters,
body corporate organisations and owners corporations:
1300 661 544 (8 am to 6 pm AEST weekdays)
businesscentre@originenergy.com.au
Business customers with collective accounts:
Including businesses that receive accounts for many
apartments all in the one bill:
customerbilling@originenergy.com.au
CONTACT INFORMATION FOR YOUR BUILDING REPRESENTATIVES
Origin Energy Retail Limited ABN 22 078 868 425 Origin Energy (Vic) Pty Limited ABN 11 086 013 283 Origin Energy Electricity Limited ABN 33 071 052 287
Origin Energy LPG Limited ABN 77 000 508 369 Sun Retail Pty Limited ABN 97 078 848 549 100 Waymouth Street Adelaide SA 5000
GPO Box 1199 Adelaide SA 5001 Telephone 13 24 63 Facsimile 1800 132 463 Web enquiries originenergy.com.au/contactus
8718.Jun15.All
You can email us at hotwatermanagement@originenergy.com.au. This email address is specifically for you as a building
manager, body corporate representative, or owners corporation representative so please dont give it out to residents
and tenants. The numbers listed above are for them.
You can also call us on 1800 002 438 if youve got a problem with an Origin-owned hot water plant, or to report leaking
or damaged hot water meters.
CONTENTS
AP P E N D I X 9
E N E R G E X P E AK S M AR T I N F O R M AT I O N
CONTENTS
What you need

to know about
PeakSmart
air-conditioning
For more information about PeakSmart visit

energex.com.au
CONTENTS
Congratulations
You have PeakSmart air-conditioning
installed in your new home
PeakSmart is the most advanced technology in air-conditioning that
will help manage peak electricity demand. You can learn more about the
program at energex.com.au
What is PeakSmart air-conditioning?
PeakSmart air-conditioning has been designed by major air-conditioning manufacturers
and adheres to industry standards.
A signal receiver installed in your air-conditioner caps the energy consumption for short
periods on a few days of the year. The technology is designed to be set and forget, similar
to the air-conditioner being in economy mode.
Will I notice a difference in the way my air-conditioner operates when the signal
receiver is activated?
No. Your air-conditioner will operate similar to economy mode. You wont have to do
anything and you wont notice a difference to your comfort.
How do I know if my air-conditioner is in demand response mode?
Please check your air-conditioning manual as each model may differ.
How often will Energex send a signal to the signal receiver?
Energex will only signal on peak electricity demand days (generally a handful of days
per year). For further information on PeakSmart air-conditioning visit energex.com.au.
Will the installation of a signal receiver affect my air-conditioners warranty?
The signal receiver will not affect your existing manufacturer warranty.
CONTENTS
AP P E N D I X 1 0
MYPORT WIRELESS INTERNET

I N F O R M AT I O N
CONTENTS
HIGH SPEED INTERNET

Now available at Light + Co.
NO CONTRACT
TERM
NO SET-UP
FEE OR $300
NBN NEW
DEVELOPMENT
CHARGE
FREE
INSTALLATION
No hardware required
Wi-Fi configured in your apartment
No peak/off peak quotas
FIRST MONTH
FREE!!
FOR ALL NEW
RESIDENTS!
See a member of the Light + Co.

Rent Central Team to sign up today!
CONTENTS
high speed internet plans

PLANS
QUOTA
PRICE
Light User
50 GB
Anytime
$39.95/month
Medium User
100GB
Anytime
$59.95/month
Unlimited User
Unlimited
$79.95/month
All plans include a Wi-Fi router pre-installed and configured in your apartment
free of charge. One month free promotion is available to new residents who sign
up to a Myport fibre plan when moving into an eligible residential building.
at myport we believe internet should be hassle-free.

thats why all of our plans come with:
No lock-in contract
No set-up fees or $300 NBN new development charge
No peak/off peak (use your data anytime)
Local support and technicians
Wi-Fi Router pre-installed and configured
internet speeds and download limits:
If you do run over your monthly allowance well simply shape your speed for the rest
of the month so you can avoid bill-shock. Alternatively give our support team a call and
theyll help you easily jump up to the next plan.
The Maximum fibre speeds may exceed capabilities of some hardware or software and
in some situations fibre speeds may be similar to ADSL2+ speeds. This can be due to a
number of factors such as number of users or connections, the end-users hardware and
software and the source and type of content downloaded.
contact the Light + Co. rent central team to sign up today + mention free offer
CONTENTS
AP P E N D I X 11
B U I L D I N G M AN AG E M E N T S TAT E M E N T
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
AP P E N D I X 1 2
E N V I R O N M E N TAL M AN AG E M E N T
REGISTER

CONTENTS
Department of Environment and Heritage Protection (EHP)

ABN 46 640 294 485
400 George St Brisbane, Queensland 4000
GPO Box 2454 Brisbane QLD 4001 AUSTRALIA
www.ehp.qld.gov.au
SEARCH RESPONSE
ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT REGISTER (EMR)
CONTAMINATED LAND REGISTER (CLR)
Transaction ID:
49406332
EMR Site Id: 552
This response relates to a search request received for the site:
Lot: 2
Plan: RP141824
25 November 2013
EMR RESULT
The above site IS included on the Environmental Management Register.
Lot: 2
Plan: RP141824
Address:
321 MONTAGUE ROAD
WEST END QLD
4101
The site has been subject to the following Notifiable Activity pursuant to section 374 of the
Environmental Protection Act 1994.
COAL GAS WORKS - operating a coal gas works.
PETROLEUM PRODUCT OR OIL STORAGE - storing petroleum products or oil (a) in underground tanks with more than 200L capacity; or
(b) in above ground tanks with (i) for petroleum products or oil in class 3 in packaging groups 1 and 2 of the dangerous goods code - more than 2,
500L capacity; or
(ii) for petroleum products or oil in class 3 in packaging groups 3 of the dangerous goods code - more than 5, 000L
capacity; or
(iii) for petroleum products that are combustible liquids in class C1 or C2 in Australian Standard AS1940, 'The
storage and handling of flammable and combustible liquids' published by Standards Australia - more than 25, 000L capacity.
A site management plan has been prepared for this site and is included with this search response as
Annexure 1. It has been determined that this site is suitable for the following uses, providing the site is
used and managed according to the site management plan:
Land is suitable for medium to high density residential, commercial and industrial uses.
Following the date of effect of the site management plan, subsequent uses of the site for notifiable
activities or for situations where a hazardous contaminant is released into the soil may result in the need
to review suitable uses or amend the attached site management plan.
CLR RESULT
The above site is NOT included on the Contaminated Land Register.
ADDITIONAL ADVICE
From the 18th October 2013, the price of an EMR/CLR search will increase to $43.00 per lot for
internet based searches and $50.55 per lot for EMR/CLR searches done by means other than the
Page 1 of 6
CONTENTS
internet.
If you have any queries in relation to this search please phone 13QGOV (13 74 68)
Registrar
Administering Authority
Department of Environment and Heritage Protection (EHP)

ABN 46 640 294 485
400 George St Brisbane, Queensland 4000
GPO Box 2454 Brisbane QLD 4001 AUSTRALIA
www.ehp.qld.gov.au
ANNEXURE 1 - SITE MANAGEMENT PLAN

LOT : 2
PLAN : RP141824
FILE REF : BNE2555PRINTED: 25/11/2013
DATE OF EFFECT : 19/06/2009

1.0
SUMMARY OF CONTAMINATION
The site refers to Lot 2 on RP141824 located at 321 Montague Road, Beesley Street, West End,
Queensland (QLD), 4101, with a plan showing the site location provided in Figure 1.
The site is situated on land that was part of a former coal carbonising gasworks that operated from 1886
until the late 1960s. The gasworks operation caused the site to be contaminated mainly with petroleum
hydrocarbons (TPH), monocyclic hydrocarbons (BTEX), polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons (PAH) and
cresols. The site has been remediated with the bulk of this contamination removed to below building
construction levels.
The management of the remediated site incorporates two temporary phases in this Site Management Plan
(SMP) until the site is redeveloped. These are:
APPENDIX A Redevelopment Maintenance, which details site management requirements for the site
prior to construction works; and
APPENDIX B Site Redevelopment, which details site management requirements for construction
work and building work associated with the redevelopment of the site.
Appendices A and B progressively become redundant as site redevelopment proceeds.
The site was remediated in between May 2006 and June 2007. The work involved the removal of
contaminated fill material and soil, together with most underground structures. In the western portion of
the site the excavations extended deep into the natural clayey soils to a depth of 8m bgl, which
corresponds to an elevation of approximately -1.0mAHD. A contour plan of the remediated site
topography is provided in Figure 2.
Most of the site was remediated and validated to the national Health-based Investigation Level (HIL)
setting D or lower levels of contamination, which is appropriate for medium to high-density residential
use with minimal access to soil. Most of the soils remaining at the site also meet the national interim
Ecological Investigation Levels (EILs), which is appropriate for protecting flora. Residual contamination
above background levels but below the HIL D and EIL settings remain in soils across much of the site.
Page 2 of 6
CONTENTS
Some of these low impacted soils may also have a faint hydrocarbon odour and may be stained. Traces of
tarry material may also remain in isolated defects present within the deep natural clay soils remaining in
the western portion of the site and also in rock fractures in the south-eastern area of the site.
Three areas of the site (referred to as Areas 1 to 3) also have fill containing ash contaminated above the
HIL D setting (Figure 2). These areas were not removed as part of the remedial works since they are
required to support land on adjacent properties or active infrastructure and can best be dealt with during
future redevelopment works at the site. The three areas are considered low risk and must be managed
according to the SMP requirements.
Area 1 is located along the northern property boundary, where a 1:2 (V:H) batter remains which has a
layer of fill containing ash underlain by sandy gravel fill then natural clay soil. The layer of fill
containing ash is approximately 0.3m to 0.7m thick, while the underlying sandy gravel fill extends to a
depth of approximately 1.3m bgl. Contamination exceeding the HIL D setting has been found in the fill
containing ash. Some of the sandy gravel fill and localised areas of the natural clay soils underlying the
fill containing ash in Area 1 may also be impacted.
Area 2 is located at the Natural Gas Regulator Station that remains in the north-eastern corner of the site,
where a layer of fill containing ash is estimated to extend to a depth of approximately 0.2m bgl.
Contamination exceeding the HIL D setting has been found in the fill containing ash.
Area 3 consists of fill containing ash located within the batters against the eastern and southern
boundaries of the site along parts of Montague Road and Beesley Street. The layer of fill containing ash
is located throughout the batters at depths ranging from the surface to approximately 2.5m bgl.
Contamination exceeding the HIL D setting has been found in the fill containing ash. Some tarry material
also remains along the southern batter, with known locations shown on Figures 2 and 3, which must be
safely managed according to the SMP requirements.
Off-site contamination in shallow fill occurs adjacent to the site at the northern end of Pidgeon Close and
Beesley Street in an area referred to as Lot 1 on RP Road 108. Management controls for this area have
been specified in a separate SMP. Some tarry material also remains in Beesley Street. To prevent the
migration of off-site contamination back onto the site, compacted clay was placed along a section of the
Beesley Street boundary. The construction and maintenance of a water and vapour proof barrier along the
southern boundary of Beesley Street will protect the site from recontamination and is a requirement of
this SMP (refer to Section 3.6.2 and Appendix B, Section 11.3). Cross sections through these off-site
areas are presented in Figure 3.
2.0
OBJECTIVES OF THE SMP
The objectives of this SMP is to manage contamination remaining on the site in a manner that protects
human health and the environment for medium to high-density residential and other less sensitive land
uses.
3.0
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1
Responsibility
The owner of the land (as defined in the Environmental Protection Act 1994) is to ensure that this SMP
and any variations approved or required by the Administrating Authority are complied with. The
obligations and conditions set out in this SMP bind the owner, from time to time, of the land.
3.2
Site Use
The site is suitable and only to be used for medium to high-density residential, industrial and commercial
Page 3 of 6
CONTENTS
uses.
3.3
Groundwater
The extraction of groundwater from the site is prohibited with the exception of groundwater samples
collected from sampling or groundwater collected in excavations approved by the administering
authority.
3.4
Provision of SMP to Appropriate Persons
The owner must provide all persons involved in building design and planning and all contractors and
lessees conducting building and/or approved excavation works with a copy of the SMP prior to
commencement of site works and such persons must comply with the requirements of the SMP.
3.5
Redevelopment Maintenance and Site Redevelopment
Redevelopment maintenance requirements that must be complied with are detailed in Appendix A. Site
redevelopment and construction requirements that must be complied with are detailed in Appendix B.
3.6
Site Capping
Site capping is the primary protective measure to provide a barrier between any residual contamination
and users of the site. Capping must be installed and certified prior to use of the site for approved
purposes in accordance with Appendix B.
3.6.1 Concrete Capping Under Buildings

Concrete capping under buildings must consist of a concrete slab across the lowest floor of any building,
the top level of which must not extend below an elevation of +1.9mAHD. A water and vapour proof
barrier must be placed under the slab at a level less than our equal to 0.5m below the top of the concrete
slab. The barrier must be waterproof and provide protection from vapours generated from underlying soil
and ground water contaminated with PAH and BTEX compounds to prevent vapour ingress to the
basement in excess of the concentrations specified for indoor air exposure in the National Environment
Protection (Air Toxics) Measure, April 2004. Details of the barrier must be approved by the Third Party
Reviewer (TPR) prior to the commencement of construction works.
3.6.2 The Southern Boundary
To prevent ingress to the basement of water and vapour generated by contamination located outside the
property boundary, the water and vapour proof barrier must be installed behind the southern boundary
basement wall to the ground surface. This barrier must have the same specification as the barrier beneath
concrete capping under the buildings.
The wall and floor barriers must be constructed in such a manner that the connection between them must
be continuous and not allow ingress of water and vapour at the point of connection.
Installation of the barrier must be certified by a suitably qualified person and must be forwarded to the
Administering Authority/TPR.
3.6.3 Other Boundaries
To prevent ingress to the basement of water and vapour associated with contaminated groundwater, the
water and vapour proof barrier must also be installed behind basement walls on the northern, eastern and
western boundaries. The extent of the barrier installation is to be approved by the TPR but as a minimum
must extend above the highest predicted groundwater level.
3.7
Excavation Restrictions
Excavations must not occur into capped areas without the written approval of the Administering
Page 4 of 6
CONTENTS
Authority. Applications for approval must be prepared by a person whose qualifications and experience
complies with Section 381 of the Environmental Protection Act 1994 (EP Act). Following approved
excavations, the capped areas and buffer zone must be reinstalled according to the requirements of
Section 3.6.
Contaminated soil must not be removed from the site without a disposal permit in accordance with
Section 424 of the EP Act. A Workplace Health and Safety (WHS) Plan which conforms to the
requirements of the Workplace Health and Safety Act 1995 and which address the specific contaminants
of concern associated with the site must be developed for any approved site excavation.
3.8
Unexpected contamination and Noxious Odours
If during any site earthworks or excavation, offensive or noxious odours and/or evidence of gross
contamination not previously detected is observed, site works are to cease in that area and action taken to
immediately abate any potential environmental or human health impact. The Administering Authority is
to be notified in writing within two business days of detection and advised of appropriate remedial action.
Any remedial action is to be developed by an appropriately qualified and experienced person in
accordance with Section 381 of the EP Act and approved by the Administrating Authority.
Administering Authority approval is required before site works can re-commence in the area.
3.9
Basements
The top surface of basement slabs must not extend below an elevation of +1.9mAHD. Basements are to
be tanked to exclude water ingress and must be vapour proofed in accordance with Section 3.6. Basement
ventilation must be in accordance with ventilation requirements for basements and the ventilation system
must be maintained in sound operating condition in accordance with design standards for basements at all
times.
3.10 Third Party Reviewer
A TPR approved by the DERM and operating in accordance with the DERMs Terms of Reference for
TPR (August 2003) must be appointed for the duration of site redevelopment activities.
4.0
POST-BUILDING MONITORING AND REPORTING
Following the completion of building works, validation report must be prepared by a person qualified in
accordance with S.5.3, and submitted to the TPR and the administering authority within 45 days of the
completion of site capping works. The report must be prepared and submitted in accordance with the
Draft Guidelines for the Assessment and Management of Contaminated Land in Queensland May 1998,
the NEPM and the Environmental Protection Act 1994. annual site inspections must be undertaken for as
long as the site remains on the Environmental Management Register (EMR) to ensure that the site
capping remains in a sound condition at all times in accordance with the requirements of this SMP.
Basements must be inspected to identify any notable water ingress or odours. This monitoring is to be
ongoing or as otherwise determined by the Administering Authority. The ingress of water or odours into
the basement must be rectified so that the requirements of Sections 3.6.1, 3.6.2, 3.6.3 and 3.9 are
satisfied.
Written records must be kept of all inspections, any soil excavation, below-ground maintenance work and
SMP compliance for review by the Administering Authority from time to time. These records must be
kept and be provided to the Administrating Authority upon request.
This SMP has been developed to manage site contamination risks present at the issue date. Subsequent
uses of the site may result in the need to review the plan.
Page 5 of 6
CONTENTS
This SMP makes reference to plan attachments that are available from the Administering Authority if
required.
Further information, regarding Appendix A (Redevelopment Maintenance) & Appendix B (Site
Redevelopment) is available on request. Please contact the Contaminated Land Unit for a copy.
Page 6 of 6
CONTENTS

Light + Co - Illuminate & Radiance Owners Handover Manual 2016 PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Light + Co - Illuminate & Radiance Owners Handover Manual 2016 PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

ILLUMINATE & RADIANCE

Version 1 dated October 2016

Owners Handover Manual

Version 1 dated October 2016

Owners Handover Manual

Heating or Air Conditioning ......................................................................................... 62

Version 1 dated October 2016

Owners Handover Manual

Version 1 dated October 2016

Owners Handover Manual

Version 1 dated October 2016

Owners Handover Manual

General Project Information

Development Application Number

The latest Development Application approved by Council for this development is DA

Version 1 dated October 2016 CONTENTS

Owners Handover Manual

Apartment Entry Door Key

0411 100 692

1300 308 609

4/41 Paringa Road

Glazed Door or Window Keys (if applicable)

Security Fobs (x1) and Security Remotes (x1)

Access to Residents Community Facilities for all Stages (excludes MPR

Relevant ground floor lobby entry (Illuminate or Radiance)

Basement/car parking entry/exit (via remote press on Beesley Street entry);

Level access via lifts; and

External landscape common space from offsite.

(VII) Units with 3 x bedrooms will receive an additional security fob.

Version 1 dated October 2016 CONTENTS

Owners Handover Manual

Letterbox Keys (x2)

Access Panel (x1) (if applicable)

Visitor Car Parks

Owner Car Parks

We suggest you familiarise yourself with the particular CMS bylaws

Car parks allocated to apartments are situated in the basement. Access to

Version 1 dated October 2016 CONTENTS

Owners Handover Manual

There is a security roller shutter at the entrance to the basement carpark.

Egress from the building is by induction loop and is activated by approaching

(iii) Security Remotes & Fobs

(iv) Proximity Readers

For convenience, 1 x security fob is fitted with a remote radio frequency

Version 1 dated October 2016

Owners Handover Manual

Each Apartment in Illuminate & Radiance is fitted with an audio intercom.

Operation of the Intercom System

Press the bell button;

The associated audio unit in the relevant apartment will ring;

Gardens uses a numerical numbering system.

The numbering within the

Level 1: Lots 10101 - 10118

The numbering within the Radiance Building is as follows:

Version 1 dated October 2016

Owners Handover Manual

The mailing address for the Gardens apartments will be:-

Unit No . / 321 Montague Road, West End QLD 4101

Unit No . / 11 Beesley Street, West End QLD 4101

The Body Corporate Managers are: Ernst Body Corporate Management

Version 1 dated October 2016 CONTENTS

Owners Handover Manual

Body Corporate Structure